10 points of weaknesses for gap company
PLEASE SEE THE ATTACHMENTS
I HAVE ATTACHED THE CASE STUDY AND THE RUBRIC
GLOBAL
EDITION
STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
A Competitive Advantage Approach
Concepts and Cases
17 th Edition
Fred R. David, Forest R. David,
and Meredith E. David
1
STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT Concepts and Cases
A COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE APPROACH
This page is intentionally left blank
Fred R. David Francis Marion University
Florence, South Carolina
Forest R. David Strategic Planning Consultant
Ocean Isle Beach, North Carolina
Meredith E. David Baylor University
Waco, Texas
STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT Concepts and Cases
A COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE APPROACH
SEVENTEENTH
EDITION
GLOBAL
EDITION
Please contact https://support.pearson.com/getsupport/s/contactsupport with any queries on this content. Cover Image: artacet/Shutterstock
Acknowledgments of third-party content appear on the appropriate page within the text.
Pearson Education Limited KAO Two KAO Park Hockham Way Harlow Essex CM17 9SR United Kingdom
and Associated Companies throughout the world
Visit us on the World Wide Web at: www.pearsonglobaleditions.com
© Pearson Education Limited 2023. All Rights Reserved.
The rights of Fred R. David, Forest R. David, and Meredith E. David to be identified as the authors of this work have been asserted by them in accordance with the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988.
Authorized adaptation from the United States edition, entitled Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases, 17th Edition, ISBN 978-0-135-17394-7 by Fred R. David, Forest R. David, and Meredith E. David, published by Pearson Education © 2020.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without either the prior written permission of the publisher or a license permitting restricted copying in the United Kingdom issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency Ltd, Saffron House, 6–10 Kirby Street, London EC1N 8TS. For information regarding permissions, request forms, and the appropriate contacts within the Pearson Education Global Rights and Permissions department, please visit www.pearsoned.com/permissions/.
All trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners. The use of any trademark in this text does not vest in the author or publisher any trademark ownership rights in such trademarks, nor does the use of such trademarks imply any affiliation with or endorsement of this book by such owners.
This eBook is a standalone product and may or may not include all assets that were part of the print version. It also does not provide access to other Pearson digital products like Revel. The publisher reserves the right to remove any material in this eBook at any time.
British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library
ISBN 10: 1292441402 ISBN 13: 9781292441405 eBook ISBN 13: 9781292441351
Typeset in by B2R Technologies Pvt. Ltd.
5
Preface 15
Acknowledgments 25
About the Authors 27
PART 1 Overview of Strategic Management 30 Chapter 1 The Nature of Strategic Management 31
THE COHESION CASE: COCA-COLA COMPANY, 2018 56
PART 2 Strategy Formulation 70 Chapter 2 Business Vision and Mission 71 Chapter 3 The External Assessment 93 Chapter 4 The Internal Assessment 123 Chapter 5 Strategies in Action 155 Chapter 6 Strategy Analysis and Choice 191
PART 3 Strategy Implementation 228 Chapter 7 Implementing Strategies: Management and Marketing Issues 229 Chapter 8 Implementing Strategies: Finance and Accounting Issues 269
PART 4 Strategy Evaluation and Governance 298 Chapter 9 Strategy Evaluation and Governance 299
PART 5 Key Strategic-Management Topics 326 Chapter 10 Business Ethics, Environmental Sustainability, and Corporate Social Responsibility 327 Chapter 11 Global and International Issues 351
PART 6 Strategic-Management Case Analysis 376 How to Prepare and Present a Case Analysis 377
Glossary 659
Name Index 667
Subject Index 673
Brief Contents
This page is intentionally left blank
7
Preface 15
Acknowledgments 25
About the Authors 27
PART 1 Overview of Strategic Management 30
Chapter 1 The Nature of Strategic Management 31
What Is Strategic Management? 32
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED: COACH VINCE LOMBARDI 32
Strategic Planning 33 • The Strategic-Management Model 34
ETHICS CAPSULE 1: WHAT ETHICS VARIABLE IS MOST IMPORTANT IN DOING BUSINESS? 35
Stages of Strategic Management 35
Integrating Analysis and Intuition 36
Adapting to Change 37
GLOBAL CAPSULE 1: MOBIKE: GLOBAL BIKE RENTING TAKES OFF LIKE A JET PLANE 38
Key Terms in Strategic Management 38
Competitive Advantage 38 • Strategists 38 • Vision and Mission Statements 39 • External Opportunities and Threats 40 • Internal Strengths and Weaknesses 40 • Long-Term Objectives 41 • Strategies 41 • SWOT Analysis 42 • Annual Objectives 42 • Policies 44
Benefits of Engaging in Strategic Management 44
Financial Benefits 45 • Nonfinancial Benefits 45
Why Some Firms Do No Strategic Planning 46
Pitfalls in Strategic Planning 46
Comparing Business and Military Strategies 46
Developing Employability Skills 48
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS 49
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS 50
Chapter Summary 51
Key Terms and Concepts 51
Issues for Review and Discussion 52
MINI-CASE ON TESLA, INC. (TSLA): WHAT AMERICAN COMPANY DOES THE BEST JOB OF STRATEGIC PLANNING, AND HOW IS IT DONE? 53
Web Resources 54 Current Readings 54
Endnotes 55
THE COHESION CASE: COCA-COLA COMPANY, 2018 56
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES 65
Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola 65
Exercise 1A: Gather Strategy Information for Coca-Cola Company 65
Exercise 1B: Enter Coca-Cola Vitals into the Strategic Planning Template 66
Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University 66
Exercise 1C: Perform SWOT Analysis for My University 66
Set 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability 67
Exercise 1D: Perform SWOT Analysis on Myself 67
Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning 67
Exercise 1E: How Detrimental Are Various Pitfalls in Strategic
Planning? 67
PART 2 Strategy Formulation 70
Chapter 2 Business Vision and Mission 71 Core Values Statements: What Is Our Foundation? 72
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED: FREDERICK W. SMITH, FOUNDER AND CEO OF FEDEX CORPORATION 72
GLOBAL CAPSULE 2: LINKEDIN: CLEAR CORE VALUES, VISION, AND MISSION LEAD TO GLOBAL PROMINENCE 73
Vision Statements: What Do We Want to Become? 73
Characteristics of a Vision Statement 74
Vision Statement Analysis 75
Mission Statements: What Is Our Business? 75
Characteristics of a Mission Statement 76
Components of a Mission Statement 77
ETHICS CAPSULE 2: FACEBOOK: CHANGING OUR MISSION TO ENHANCE OUR ETHICS AND INTEGRITY 79
The Importance (Benefits) of Vision and Mission Statements 79
The Process of Developing Vision and Mission Statements 81
Evaluating and Writing Mission Statements 81
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS 83
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS 84
Chapter Summary 84
Key Terms and Concepts 85
Issues for Review and Discussion 85
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES 86
Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola 86
Exercise 2A: Develop an Improved Coca-Cola Vision Statement 86
Exercise 2B: Develop an Improved Coca-Cola Mission Statement 86
Exercise 2C: Compare Coca-Cola’s Mission Statement to a Rival Firm’s 87
Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University 87
Exercise 2D: Compare Your University’s Vision and Mission Statements to Those of a Rival Institution 87
Set 3: Strategic Planning for Myself 87
Exercise 2E: Develop a Vision and Mission Statement for Yourself 87
Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning 88
Exercise 2F: What Is the Relative Importance of Each of the Nine Components of a Mission Statement? 88
Contents
8 CONTENTS
MINI-CASE ON FORD MOTOR COMPANY (F): EVALUATE FORD’S VISION FOR THE FUTURE AND MISSION FOR THE PRESENT 89 Web Resources 90 Current Readings 90 Endnotes 91
Chapter 3 The External Assessment 93 EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED: BEN SILBERMANN, CEO AND COFOUNDER OF PINTEREST 94
The External Assessment Phase of Strategy Formulation 95
Key External Forces 95 • The Actionable-Quantitative- Comparative-Divisional (AQCD) Test 95
10 External Forces that Impact Organizations 96
Economic Forces 96 • Social, Cultural, Demographic, and Environment (SCDE) Forces 97 • Political, Governmental, and Legal Forces 97
ETHICS CAPSULE 3: PRESERVE ALASKA WILDLIFE OR BOOST ALASKA ECONOMY? 98
Technological Forces 99 • Competitive Forces 100
GLOBAL CAPSULE 3: WHAT COMPANY IS GROWING FASTEST GLOBALLY? 101
Porter’s Five-Forces Model 101
Rivalry among Competing Firms 102 • Potential Entry of New Competitors 103 • Potential Development of Substitute Products 103 • Bargaining Power of Suppliers 103 • Bargaining Power of Consumers 104
Key Sources of Information for an External Audit 105
Forecasting and Making Assumptions 105
Making Assumptions 106
The External Factor Evaluation Matrix 107
Steps to Develop an EFE Matrix 107 • Step 1: Develop a Full and Narrow List of Key External Factors 107 • Step 2: Assign Weights to Key External Factors 108 • Step 3: Assign Ratings to Key External Factors 108 • Step 4: Obtain Weighted Scores 108 • Step 5: Obtain Total Weighted Score 108 • An Example EFE Matrix 109
The Competitive Profile Matrix 110
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS 112
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS 113
Chapter Summary 114
Key Terms and Concepts 114
Issues for Review and Discussion 114
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES 115
Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola 115
Exercise 3A: Develop an EFE Matrix for Coca-Cola 115
Exercise 3B: Develop a Competitive Profile Matrix for Coca-Cola 116
Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University 116
Exercise 3C: Develop an EFE Matrix for Your College or University 116
Exercise 3D: Develop a Competitive Profile Matrix for Your College or University 116
Set 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability 117
Exercise 3E: How Competitive Is Your State among All States for Finding a Job? 117
Exercise 3F: Compare and Contrast CareerBuilder, Glassdoor, Monster Jobs, and ZipRecruiter 117
Exercise 3G: A Template Competency Test 117
Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning 118
Exercise 3H: What External Forces Are Most Important in Strategic Planning? 118
MINI-CASE ON SAM’S CLUB: SAM’S CLUB IS BOOMING IN CHINA 119 Web Resources 120 Current Readings 120 Endnotes 121
Chapter 4 The Internal Assessment 123 The Internal Assessment Phase of Strategy Formulation 124
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED: ELON MUSK, CEO AND COFOUNDER OF TESLA, INC. AND SPACE EXPLORATION TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION (SPACEX) 124
Resource-Based View 125 • Key Internal Forces 125
ETHICS CAPSULE 4: THE SAGEBRUSH LIZARD VERSUS THE BIG OIL MAN 126
Management 126
Planning 127 • Organizing 127 • Motivating 127 • Controlling 128 • Integrating Strategy and Culture 129 • Management Audit Checklist of Questions 130
Marketing 131
Marketing Research and Target Market Analysis 131 • Product Planning 132 • Pricing 133 • Promotion 133
GLOBAL CAPSULE 4: BITCOIN: THE NEW GLOBAL CURRENCY 134
Channels of Distribution 134 • Marketing Audit Checklist of Questions 135
Finance and Accounting 135
Finance and Accounting 135 • Financial Ratios 136 • Finance and Accounting Audit Checklist 138
Management Information Systems 140
Business Analytics 140
The Internal Factor Evaluation (IFE) Matrix 141
The Actionable-Quantitative-Comparative-Divisional (AQCD) Test 141 • Steps in Developing an IFE Matrix 142 • Step 1: Develop a Full and Narrow List of Key Internal Factors 142 • Step 2: Assign Weights to Key Internal Factors 142 • Step 3: Assign Ratings to Key Internal Factors 142 • Step 4: Obtain Weighted Scores 143 • Step 5: Obtain Total Weighted Score 143 • An Example IFE Matrix 144
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS 145
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS 146
Chapter Summary 146
Key Terms and Concepts 147
Issues for Review and Discussion 147
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES 149
Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola 149
Exercise 4A: Perform a Financial Ratio Analysis for Coca-Cola 149
Exercise 4B: Construct an IFE Matrix for Coca-Cola 149
Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University 149
Exercise 4C: Construct an IFE Matrix for Your College or University 149
Set 3: Strategic Planning for Myself 150
Exercise 4D: Construct an IFE Matrix for Yourself 150
Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning 150
Exercise 4E: What Internal Functional Areas Are Most Important to Examine in Strategic Planning? 150
CONTENTS 9
MINI-CASE ON PROCTER & GAMBLE (P&G) COMPANY: WHAT COMPANY IS BEST MANAGED IN THE UNITED STATES? 151 Web Resources 152 Current Readings 152 Endnotes 153
Chapter 5 Strategies in Action 155 Long-Term Objectives 156
Characteristics and Benefits of Objectives 156
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED: TIM COOK, CEO OF APPLE, INC. 156
Financial versus Strategic Objectives 157 • Avoid Managing by Crisis, Hope, Extrapolation, and Mystery (CHEM) 158
Types of Strategies 158
Levels of Strategies 159
Integration Strategies 160
Forward Integration 160 • Backward Integration 161 • Horizontal Integration 162
Intensive Strategies 163
Market Penetration 163 • Market Development 163
GLOBAL CAPSULE 5: HOW CAN A FIRM DETERMINE WHERE TO INITIATE NEW BUSINESS? USE GROSS DOMESTIC PRODUCT (GDP) AS A GUIDE. 164
Product Development 164
Diversification Strategies 165
Related Diversification 166 • Unrelated Diversification 166
Defensive Strategies 166
Retrenchment 166 • Divestiture 167 • Liquidation 168
Value Chain Analysis and Benchmarking 169
Benchmarking 171
Michael Porter’s Two Generic Strategies 172
Cost Leadership 172 • Differentiation 173
Means for Achieving Strategies 174
BUILD from Within to Grow 174 • BORROW from Others to Grow 174 • BUY Others to Grow 176
ETHICS CAPSULE 5: ARE CEOS LESS ETHICAL TODAY THAN IN THE PAST? 176
First-Mover Advantages 177
Strategic Management in Nonprofit and Small Firms 178
Educational Institutions 178 • Governmental Agencies and Departments 179 • Small Firms 179
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS 180
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS 181
Chapter Summary 181
Key Terms and Concepts 182 Issues for Review and Discussion 182
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES 183
Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola 183
Exercise 5A: Develop Hypothetical Coca-Cola Company Strategies 183
Exercise 5B: Should Coca-Cola Build, Borrow, or Buy in 2020–2021? 184
Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University 184
Exercise 5C: Develop Alternative Strategies for Your University 184
Set 3: Strategic Planning for Myself 185
Exercise 5D: The Key to Personal Strategic Planning: Simultaneously Build and Borrow 185
Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning 185
Exercise 5E: What Is the Best Mix of Strategies for Coca-Cola Company? 185
MINI-CASE ON FACEBOOK (FB): SHOULD FACEBOOK ACQUIRE, COOPERATE, OR JUST STAY FIERCE RIVALS WITH LINKEDIN? 187 Web Resources 187 Current Readings 188 Endnotes 188
Chapter 6 Strategy Analysis and Choice 191 Strategy Analysis and Choice 192
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED: DAVID GREEN, CEO OF HOBBY LOBBY 192
The Process of Generating and Selecting Strategies 193
The Strategy-Formulation Analytical Framework 193
Stage 1: The Input Stage 194 • Stage 2: The Matching Stage 194 • Stage 3: The Decision Stage 194
The SWOT Matrix 195
ETHICS CAPSULE 6: AS WE STRATEGIZE WE MUST NOT JEOPARDIZE ANIMAL WELFARE 196
The Strategic Position and Action Evaluation (SPACE) Matrix 197
Steps in Performing SPACE Analysis 198 • SPACE Matrix Quadrants 199 • SPACE Matrix 202
The Boston Consulting Group (BCG) Matrix 202
The Internal-External (IE) Matrix 206
The Grand Strategy Matrix 208
The Decision Stage: The QSPM 210
Positive Features and Limitations of the QSPM 214
How to Estimate Costs Associated with Recommendations 214
GLOBAL CAPSULE 6: INDIA’S ECONOMY IS BOOMING 214
Cultural Aspects of Strategy Analysis and Choice 216
The Politics of Strategy Analysis and Choice 216
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS 217
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS 218
Chapter Summary 218
Key Terms and Concepts 219
Issues for Review and Discussion 219
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES 221
Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola 221
Exercise 6A: Perform a SWOT Analysis for Coca-Cola 221
Exercise 6B: Develop a SPACE Matrix for Coca-Cola 221
Exercise 6C: Develop a BCG Matrix for Coca-Cola 222
Exercise 6D: Develop a QSPM for Coca-Cola 222
Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University 222
Exercise 6E: Develop a BCG Matrix for My University 222
Set 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability 223
Exercise 6F: Perform QSPM Analysis on Myself 223
Exercise 6G: A Template Competency Test 223
Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning 224
10 CONTENTS
Exercise 6H: How Severe Are Various Subjective Threats in Strategic Planning? 224
MINI-CASE ON THE BOSTON CONSULTING GROUP: WHAT AMERICAN FIRM HELPS THE MOST COMPANIES DO STRATEGIC PLANNING? 225 Web Resources 226 Current Readings 226 Endnotes 227
PART 3 Strategy Implementation 228
Chapter 7 Implementing Strategies: Manage- ment and Marketing Issues 229
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED: INDRA NOOYI, FORMER CEO OF PEPSICO 230
Transitioning from Formulating to Implementing Strategies 231
The Need for Clear Annual Objectives 231
Establish Policies 233
ETHICS CAPSULE 7: DO FIRMS NEED A POLICY AGAINST WORKPLACE PHUBBING? 235
Allocate Resources and Manage Conflict 235
Allocate Resources 235 • Manage Conflict 236
Match Structure with Strategy 236
Types of Organizational Structure 237
The Functional Structure 237 • The Divisional Structure 238 • The Strategic Business Unit Structure 240 • The Matrix Structure 240
Do’s and Don’ts in Developing Organizational Charts 242
How to Depict an Organizational Chart 243
Strategic Production/Operations Issues 245
Restructuring and Reengineering 246 • Manage Resistance to Change 246 • Decide Where and How to Produce Goods 247
Strategic Human Resource Issues 247
Link Performance and Pay to Strategy 248 • Balance Work Life and Home Life 248 • Promote Diversity 249 • Use Caution in Hiring a Rival’s Employees 250 • Create a Strategy-Supportive Culture 250 • Use Caution in Monitoring Employees’ Social Media 251 • Develop a Corporate Well-Being Program 252
Strategic Marketing Issues 252
Segment and Target Markets Effectively 252 • Product Positioning 253 • Perceptual Mapping 254
GLOBAL CAPSULE 7: FOUR GUIDELINES TO FOLLOW IN GLOBAL MARKETING 254
Engage Customers in Social Media 256
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS 257
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS 258
Chapter Summary 259
Key Terms and Concepts 259
Issues for Review and Discussion 259
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES 261
Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola 261
Exercise 7A: Compare and Contrast Coca-Cola’s Marketing Expenses versus Rival Firms 261
Exercise 7B: Diagram an Existing and Proposed Organizational Chart for Coca-Cola 261
Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University 262
Exercise 7C: Develop a Perceptual Map for My University 262
Set 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability 262
Exercise 7D: Marketing Yourself to Best Achieve Your Career Objectives 262
Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning 263
Exercise 7E: What Are the Most Important Benefits of Having a Diverse Workforce? 263
MINI-CASE 7 ON DE BEERS GROUP OF COMPANIES: DE BEERS SHIFTS ITS MARKET SEGMENTATION STRATEGY 264
Web Resources 265 Current Readings 266 Endnotes 267
Chapter 8 Implementing Strategies: Finance and Accounting Issues 269
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED: JAMIE DIMON, CEO JPMORGAN CHASE 270
Capital Structure 271
EPS/EBIT Analysis: Steps to Complete 272 • EPS/EBIT Analysis: An Example 273 • EPS/EBIT Analysis: Limitations 275
Projected Financial Statements 275
The Free Excel Strategic Planning Template at www.strategyclub.com 276
ETHICS CAPSULE 8: PROJECTED FINANCIAL STATEMENT MANIPULATION 277
GLOBAL CAPSULE 8: THE LEAST (AND MOST) CORRUPT COUNTRIES IN THE WORLD FOR DOING BUSINESS 277
Steps to Develop Projected Financial Statements 278 • Nonprofit Organizations 279 • P&G’s Actual Financial Statements 279 • P&G’s Projected Financial Statements 281 • P&G’s Retained Earnings Data Table 283
Corporate Valuation 284
Corporate Valuation Methods 284
Manage Financial Ratios, IPOs, and Bonds 286
Financial Ratio Analyses 286 • Go Public with an IPO? 287 • Issue Bonds to Raise Capital? 288
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS 288
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS 289
Chapter Summary 290
Key Terms and Concepts 290
Issues for Review and Discussion 290
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES 291
Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola 291
Exercise 8A: Perform an EPS/EBIT Analysis for Coca-Cola 291
Exercise 8B: Prepare Projected Financial Statements for Coca-Cola 292
Exercise 8C: Determine the Cash Value of Coca-Cola 292
Exercise 8D: Prepare Projected Financial Ratios for Coca-Cola 292
Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University 293
Exercise 8E: Determine the Cash Value of My University 293
Set 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability 293
Exercise 8F: Developing Personal Financial Statements 293
Exercise 8G: A Template Competency Test 293
Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning 294
Exercise 8H: How Severe Are the Seven Limitations to EPS/EBIT Analysis? 294
MINI-CASE ON HASBRO, INC.: NERF WANTS TO TAKE OVER BARBIE DOLL: THE CASE OF HASBRO, INC. 296
Web Resources 296
Current Readings 296
CONTENTS 11
PART 4 Strategy Evaluation and Governance 298
Chapter 9 Strategy Evaluation and Governance 299
The Strategy-Evaluation Process 300
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED: ANTHONY WOOD, FOUNDER AND CEO OF ROKU, INC. 300
GLOBAL CAPSULE 9: WHAT COUNTRY’S NEW STRATEGY IS CALLED “VISION 2030”? 302
Three Strategy-Evaluation Activities 302
Reviewing Bases of Strategy 303 • Measuring Organizational Performance 304 • Taking Corrective Actions 306
The Balanced Scorecard 307
Boards of Directors: Governance Issues 308
Challenges in Strategic Management 310
The Art or Science Issue 311 • The Visible or Hidden Issue 311
ETHICS CAPSULE 9: ACHIEVING EXEMPLARY BUSINESS ETHICS THROUGH EXEMPLARY TRANSPARENCY 312
Promote Workplace Democracy 312 • Contingency Planning 313
• Auditing 314
Guidelines for Effective Strategic Management 314
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS 317
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS 317
Chapter Summary 318
Key Terms and Concepts 318
Issues for Review and Discussion 318
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES 319
Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola 319
Exercise 9A: Develop a Balanced Scorecard for Coca-Cola 319
Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University 320
Exercise 9B: Prepare a Strategy Evaluation Report for My University 320
Set 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability 320
Exercise 9C: A Balanced Scorecard to Evaluate My Professional versus Personal Objectives 320
Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning 321
Exercise 9D: How Important Are Various Guidelines for Effective Strategic Management? 321
MINI-CASE ON TJX COMPANIES, INC. (TJX): SECRET STRATEGIC PLANNING WORKS GREAT FOR TJX 323
Web Resources 324 Current Readings 324 Endnotes 325
PART 5 Key Strategic-Management Topics 326
Chapter 10 Business Ethics, Environmental Sustainability, and Corporate Social Responsibility 327
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED: BILL GATES, FORMER CEO AND CHAIRMAN OF MICROSOFT CORPORATION 328
Why “Good Ethics Is Good Business” 329
Does It Pay to Be Ethical? 329 • How to Establish an Ethics Culture 330
Whistle-Blowing, Bribery, and Workplace Romance 331
Whistle-Blowing 331 • Avoid Bribery 332 • Workplace Romance 332
Environmental Sustainability 334
GLOBAL CAPSULE 10: INDIA IS TURNING GARBAGE INTO CASH 334
Sustainability Reports and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 335 • International Standardization Organization (ISO) Certification 336
Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) 338
ETHICS CAPSULE 10: TOMS SHOES, INC.: SHOES ARE MAGIC, PUT SHOES ON EVERY CHILD ON THE PLANET 339
Food Suppliers and Livestock Welfare 339 • Wildlife Welfare 340 • What Firms Are the Best CSR Stewards? 340
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS 342
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS 342
Chapter Summary 343
Key Terms and Concepts 343
Issues for Review and Discussion 343
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES 344
Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola 344
Exercise 10A: Does Coca-Cola or PepsiCo Win on Sustainability? 344
Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University 344
Exercise 10B: How Does My University Compare to Others on the Use of Green Power? 344
Set 3: Strategic Planning for Myself 345
Exercise 10C: What Is My Business Ethics Quotient? 345
Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning 346
Exercise 10D: How Potentially Severe Are the Various Reasons Why Workplace Romance Should Be Discouraged? 346
MINI-CASE ON CHICK-FIL-A: WHAT COMPANY HAS THE MOST ETHICAL BUSINESS CULTURE? 347 Web Resources 348 Current Readings 348 Endnotes 349
Chapter 11 Global and International Issues 351 The Nature of Doing Business Globally 352
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST: ANDRE CALANTZOPOULOS, CEO OF PHILIP MORRIS INTERNATIONAL 352
Multinational Firms 353 • Labor Unions 354 • Tax Rates 354
Advantages and Disadvantages of Doing Business Globally 355
The Global Challenge 356
Outsourcing and Reshoring 357
U.S. versus Foreign Business Culture 358
Communication Differences across Countries 360
Business Culture across Countries 361
Mexico 361
ETHICS CAPSULE 11: WHICH TWO U.S.-BASED AIRLINES ARE WORST ON CUSTOMER SERVICE? 361
Japan 362 • China 362 • India 363
Business Climate across Countries 363
The African Continent 364 • China 365 • Indonesia 365 • India 365
GLOBAL CAPSULE 11: CHINA AIMS FOR SUPERIORITY IN QUANTUM COMPUTING 366
Mexico 366
12 CONTENTS
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS 367
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS 367
Chapter Summary 368
Key Terms and Concepts 368
Issues for Review and Discussion 368
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES 369
Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola 369
Exercise 11A: Business Culture Variation across Countries: A Report for Coca-Cola Company 369
Exercise 11B: Coca-Cola Wants to Further Penetrate Africa. Can You Help Them? 370
Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University 370
Exercise 11C: Does My University Recruit in Foreign Countries? 370
Set 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability 370
Exercise 11D: How Well-Traveled Are You Compared to Your Colleagues? 370
Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning 371
Exercise 11E: How Important Are Various Potential Advantages to Initiating, Continuing, or Expanding a Firm’s International Operations? 371
MINI-CASE ON LYNK & COMPANY: YOU MAY DRIVE A LYNK SOON 373
Web Resources 374 Current Readings 374 Endnotes 375
PART 6 Strategic-Management Case Analysis 376
How to Prepare and Present a Case Analysis 377 Guidelines for Preparing to Discuss a Case in Class 378
Be Practical 378 • Be Thorough 379 • Be Realistic 379 • Be Specific 379 • Be Original 379
Listen and Contribute 379
Developing and Delivering a Written Case Analysis 380
Making an Oral Presentation 381
Controlling Your Voice 381 • Managing Body Language 381 • Speaking from Slides 382 • Answering Questions 382 • Presenting a Case Analysis Orally 382
Tips for Success in Case Analysis 382
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISE 383
Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability: How Important Are Various Reasons to Use the Free Excel Strategic Planning Template at www.strategyclub.com? 383
Glossary 659
Name Index 667
Subject Index 673
13
1. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. (HMC) 385 2. The Gap Inc. (GPS) 395 3. Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. (005930) 404 4. Lenovo Group Limited (992) 415 5. Dick’s Sporting Goods (DKS) 424 6. 11 Bit Studios S.A. (11B) 433 7. JPMorgan & Chase Co. (JPM) 442 8. PPB Group Berhad (4065) 450 9. Nestlé S.A. (NESN) 460
10. Domino’s Pizza, Inc. (DPZ) 471 11. PetMed Express, Inc. (PETS) 481 12. AstraZeneca plc (AZN) 488 13. Shell plc (SHEL) 497 14. The Walt Disney Company (DIS) 506 15. Adidas AG (ADS) 516 16. Shoprite Holdings Ltd. (SHP) 525 17. Woolworths Group (WOW) 534 18. Microsoft Corporation (MSFT) 543 19. Amazon.com (AMZN) 550 20. Nike, Inc. (NKE) 561 21. Under Armour, Inc. (UA) 570 22. Polaris Industries, Inc. (PII) 580 23. PT Matahari Putra Prima Tbk. (MPPA) 587 24. Emirates Group 596 25. General Electric, Inc. (GE) 604 26. Barwa Group (BRES) 615 27. Starbucks Corporation (SBUX) 623 28. PepsiCo, Inc. (PEP) 631 29. National Audubon Society (www.audubon.org) 642 30. MTN Group Limited (MTN) 651
Cases
This page is intentionally left blank
New to This Edition With this edition we have updated 40 percent of the chapter material, 11 end-of-chapter mini-
cases, and virtually all new examples in the chapters. Specifically, new material includes the
following items outlined in this section.
Chapter 1 Cohesion Case on Coca-Cola Company (2018) Students apply strategy concepts to Coca-Cola
through 25 new, innovative Assurance-of-Learning
Exercises provided at the end of chapters. Coca-Cola
is one of the most successful, well-known, and best-
managed global companies in the world.
Mini-Cases 11 new mini-cases, one at the end of each chapter.
Complete with questions designed to apply
chapter concepts, the new mini-cases focus on the
following companies:
• Chapter 1: Tesla, Inc.
• Chapter 2: Ford Motor Company
• Chapter 3: Sam’s Club
• Chapter 4: Procter & Gamble (P&G)
• Chapter 5: Facebook, Inc.
• Chapter 6: Boston Consulting Group
• Chapter 7: De Beers Group
• Chapter 8: Hasbro, Inc.
• Chapter 9: TJX Companies, Inc.
• Chapter 10: Chick-fil-A
• Chapter 11: Lynk & Company
Chapter Capsules—All NEW Within each chapter, a new EXEMPLARY
STRATEGIST, GLOBAL CAPSULE, and
ETHICS CAPSULE are provided.
Strategist Capsules—one at the beginning
of each chapter to showcase an individual that
is employing strategic management exception-
ally well.
Global Capsules—provided to showcase
the strategic relevance of material to global op-
erations, issues, and conditions.
Ethics Capsules—developed to accent the
fact that “good ethics is good business” across
all aspects of the strategic-management process.
Preface
THE COHESION CASE
Coca-Cola Company, 2018 BY FRED R. DAVID
www.coca-cola.com, KO
Headquartered in Atlanta, Georgia, Coca-Cola Company (Coke) is the world’s largest producer
and distributor of beverages, marketing over 500 nonalcoholic brands in more than 200 countries.
Coke has 21 billion-dollar brands, 19 of which are available in lower- and no-sugar options. Four
of the top five beverages sold globally are Coke products: 1) Coca-Cola, 2) Diet Coke, 3) Fanta,
and 4) Sprite. Other Coke products include Dasani waters, Fanta, Gold Peak teas and coffees,
Honest Tea, Powerade sports drinks, Simply juices, Glaceau Smartwater, Sprite, and Zico coconut
water. However, company’s revenues for 2017 declined 15 percent, so rumblings are spreading
within the firm.
MINI-CASE ON THE BOSTON CONSULTING GROUP
WHAT AMERICAN FIRM HELPS THE MOST COMPANIES DO STRATEGIC PLANNING? The answer to the question posed above might be the Boston Consulting Group (BCG) headquartered
in Boston, Massachusetts. A worldwide management-consulting firm founded in 1963, BCG had rev-
enues of $6.3 billion in 2017 and more than 16,000 employees. BCG’s President and CEO is Rich
Lesser. BCG was ranked third among Fortune’s “100 Best Companies to Work For” in 2017 and was
ranked first among Consulting Magazine’s 2016 “Best Firms to Work For.”
In formulating strategies, some firms use BCG’s Advantage Matrix to portray on the x-axis the
“size of a firm’s competitive advantage (Low versus High)” and on the y-axis “the number of ap-
proaches a firm can use to achieve competitive advantage (Low versus High).” Based on these two
axes, strategic implications for firms located in one of four quadrants can be labeled, according to
BCG, as: Fragmented, Specialization, Volume, and Stalemate, as illustrated below:
P re
ss m
as te
r/ S
h u tt
er st
o ck
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED
Anthony Wood, Founder and CEO of Roku, Inc.
A n d ri
y P
o p o v /1
2 3 R
F
ETHICS CAPSULE 10
TOMS Shoes, Inc.: Shoes Are Magic, Put Shoes on Every Child on the Planet
Headquartered in Santa Monica, California, TOMS Shoes exhibits
high social responsibility, excellent business ethics, and a daily com-
mitment to fair-labor practices and environmentally sustainable
design and manufacturing. Founded by Blake Mycoskie, TOMS
emphasizes philanthropy as an integral part of its business model—
as evidenced with its “One for One” program through which the
company donates a pair of shoes or provides vision care with every
respective shoe or pair of sunglasses purchased. Another key te-
net of TOMS’ business model is its nonprofit foundation, Friends
of TOMS, which organizes and leads several meaningful service
activities, including the One Day Without Shoes initiative aimed at
raising global awareness of health risks associated with not wear-
ing shoes. Supporters of TOMS have the opportunity to volunteer
for service trips to countries where the company’s donations will be
distributed to local communities in need. On their website, www
.tomscampusprograms.com, TOMS provides students with infor-
mation related to how they too can become involved with the
company’s philanthropic efforts. TOMS Shoes showcases how good
ethics, sustainability, and social responsibility is good business; the
company not only has excellent financial performance but is doing
noticeably well in all three areas of the triple-bottom line perfor –
mance (profits, people, and planet).
Source: Based on http://www.toms.com/about-toms#companyInfo and
https://www.privco.com/private-company/toms-shoes#.
Y o
n g
ju K
w o
n /S
h u
tt er
st o
ck
GLOBAL CAPSULE 6
India’s Economy Is Booming –
H y
w ar
d s/
S h
u tt
er st
o ck
15
16 PREFACE
Chapter Exemplary Strategist Capsules focus on the following people:
Global Capsules focus on the following topics:
Ethics Capsules address the following issues:
1 Legendary Coach of the Green Bay
Packers—Vince Lombardi
Mobike: Global Bike Renting Takes off
Like a Jet Plane
What Ethics Variable Is Most Important
in Doing Business?
2 CEO and Founder of FedEx
Corporation—Frederick Smith
LinkedIn: Clear Core Values,
Vision, and Mission Lead to Global
Prominence
Facebook: Changing Our Mission to
Enhance Our Ethics and Integrity
3 CEO and Cofounder of Pinterest—
Ben Silbermann
What Company Is Growing Fastest
Globally?
Preserve Alaska Wildlife or Boost Alaska
Economy?
4 CEO and Cofounder of Tesla and
SpaceX—Elon Musk
Bitcoin: The New Global Currency The Sagebrush Lizard versus the Big Oil
Man
5 CEO of Apple, Inc.—Tim Cook How Can a Firm Determine Where to
Initiate New Business? Use GDP as a
Guide
Are CEOs Less Ethical Today Than in
the Past?
6 CEO of Hobby Lobby—David Green India’s Economy Is Booming As We Strategize We Must Not
Jeopardize Animal Welfare
7 Former CEO of PepsiCo—Indra
Nooyi
Four Guidelines to Follow in Global
Marketing
Do Firms Need a Policy against
Workplace Phubbing?
8 CEO of JPMorgan Chase, Jamie
Dimon
The Least (and Most) Corrupt
Countries in the World for Doing
Business
Projected Financial Statement
Manipulation
9 CEO and Founder of Roku Inc.—
Anthony Wood
What Country’s New Strategy Is
Called “Vision 2030”?
Achieving Exemplary Business Ethics
through Exemplary Transparency
10 CEO (former) and Chairman of
Microsoft—Bill Gates
India Is Turning Garbage into Cash TOMS Shoes, Inc.: Shoes Are Magic, Put
Shoes on Every Child on the Planet
11 CEO of Philip Morris International—
Andre Calantzopoulos
China Aims for Superiority in
Quantum Computing
Which Two U.S.-Based Airlines Are
Worst on Customer Service?
Assurance-of-Learning Exercises —nearly all new and, for the first time ever, organized into
four sets as follows that apply chapter concepts, tools, and techniques:
Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola—25 exercises apply chapter material to the Coca-
Cola Cohesion Case to prepare students for doing case analysis on for-profit companies.
Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University—12 exercises apply chapter material to your
college or university to prepare students for doing case analysis on nonprofit organizations.
Set 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability—14 exercises apply chapter
material to individuals instead of companies to prepare students for making career choices.
Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning—11 exercises apply chapter material
by comparing the effectiveness of individual versus group decisions; these are fun, in-class
group exercises that yield “a winning individual and winning group” for each activity.
Detailed Chapter-by-Chapter Changes Chapter 1: THE NATURE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT—SWOT analysis is intro-
duced; the integrative comprehensive strategic-management model is repositioned to the
opening page of each chapter; the model is enhanced to accent the process of strategic
planning being fluid rather than merely a sequence of silo activities.
Chapter 2: BUSINESS VISION AND MISSION—new material is provided on core value state-
ments; new examples abound throughout.
Chapter 3: THE EXTERNAL ASSESSMENT—new material is provided on Porter’s Five-Forces
Model; more guidance is provided regarding how to assign weights and ratings in matrices;
new examples abound throughout; the ratings for a Competitive Profile Matrix now match
the EFE Matrix in form and meaning.
PREFACE 17
Chapter 4: THE INTERNAL ASSESSMENT—this chapter has been revamped and shortened;
the marketing material is enhanced; new examples abound throughout; the ratings for an IFE
Matrix now match the EFE Matrix ratings in form and meaning.
Chapter 5: STRATEGIES IN ACTION—new material includes Blue Ocean Strategy, Value
Chain Analysis, Porter’s Two Generic Strategies, and the need for firms to “BUILD, BOR-
ROW, or BUY.”
Chapter 6: STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE—the presentation of this chapter that in-
cludes SWOT, BCG, IE, SPACE, GRAND, and QSPM analyses is enhanced and shortened;
two new pages reveal how to estimate costs of recommendations.
Chapter 7: IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSUES—
the title of this chapter changed to reflect new marketing material; our new coauthor is a
marketing professor at Baylor University; this chapter is fully updated and enhanced, espe-
cially with new target marketing, segmentation, and positioning analyses.
Chapter 8: IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: FINANCE AND ACCOUNTING ISSUES—the
title of this chapter changed since marketing material moved; there is enhanced presentation
of financial and accounting tools, such as EPS/EBIT analysis, Corporate Valuation, and Pro-
jected Financial Statements; a new running example for P&G is provided; numerous author
comments are given regarding the strategic planning template at www.strategyclub.com.
Chapter 9: STRATEGY EVALUATION AND GOVERNANCE—the title of this chapter changed
due to excellent new material on corporate governance being presented.
Chapter 10: BUSINESS ETHICS, ENVIRONMENTAL SUSTAINABILITY, AND CORPORATE
SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY—this chapter provides updated and new coverage of ethics, work-
place romance, hiring away rival firms’ employees, wildlife welfare, and sustainability. This text
reveals why “good ethics is good business” and why this is a strategic issue. The sustainability
discussion is improved to promote and encourage firms to conduct operations with respect for
the environment, an important concern for consumers, companies, society, and AACSB.
Chapter 11: GLOBAL AND INTERNATIONAL ISSUES—this chapter is enhanced and short-
ened but provides new coverage of cultural and conceptual strategic-management differ-
ences across countries. Doing business globally has become a necessity in most industries.
Part 6: STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS—this section that follows all chapters
has been totally rewritten to be more concise and revealing for students performing case analysis.
22 Author-Created Video Assignments in the MyLab We have added 11 videos introducing the content of each chapter and 11 videos discussing a
variety of important topics such as mission statement delivery, BCG matrix, corporate evaluation,
etc. created by the author. Each video is associated with multiple-choice questions to help students
assess their learning.
Solving Teaching and Learning Challenges The primary challenge facing strategy professors is to keep students engaged while making sure
business skills are learned. This text leads all others in being practical, skills- oriented, and unfolding
in the same manner as the process of actually doing strategic planning unfolds. Students and pro-
fessors alike appreciate this practical approach presented in a concise, conversational, and exciting
manner— beginning with the integrative model of the strategic-management process that unifies all
chapters. All of the 11 end-of- chapter Mini- Cases, 471 Review Questions, and 62 Assurance-of-
Learning Exercises are designed specifically to apply chapter concepts.
The Case Rationale Case analysis remains the primary learning vehicle used in most strategic-management classes,
for five important reasons:
1. Analyzing cases gives students the opportunity to work in teams to evaluate the internal operations
and external issues facing various organizations and to craft strategies that can lead these firms to
18 PREFACE
success. Working in teams gives students practical
experience in solving problems as part of a group.
In the business world, important decisions are gen-
erally made within groups; strategic-management
students learn to deal with overly aggressive group
members as well as timid, noncontributing group
members. This experience is valuable because
strategic-management students are near graduation
and will soon enter the working world full-time.
2. Analyzing cases enables students to improve
their oral and written communication skills as
well as their analytical and interpersonal skills
by proposing and defending particular courses
of action for the case companies.
3. Analyzing cases allows students to view a com-
pany, its competitors, and its industry concur-
rently, thus simulating the complex business
world. Through case analysis, students learn
how to apply concepts, evaluate situations, for-
mulate strategies, and resolve implementation
problems.
4. Analyzing cases allows students to apply con-
cepts learned in many business courses. Students
gain experience dealing with a wide range of or-
ganizational problems that impact all the business
functions.
5. Analyzing cases gives students practice in applying concepts, evaluating situations, formu-
lating a “game plan,” and resolving implementation problems in a variety of business and
industry settings.
The New Concepts-by-Cases Matrix All 30 cases facilitate coverage of all strategy concepts, but as revealed by shaded cells, some
cases especially exemplify particular key strategy concepts. The shaded cells reveal which con-
cepts are tested with multiple-choice questions in the MyLab. The Concepts-by-Cases matrix
enables professors to effectively utilize different cases to assure student learning of various chap-
ter concepts. Note from the shaded boxes that two, three, or four cases are used to test each
strategic-management concept. This new, innovative ancillary promises to elevate the case learn-
ing method to new heights in teaching strategic management.
The Case MyLab Testing Feature The Concepts-by-Cases matrix facilitates student learning of 30 key strategic-management con-
cepts applied to 30 cases. The Case MyLab Testing feature assures that the students can test
their understanding of cases and the key strategic-management concepts, thus serving as a great
mechanism for professors to achieve AACSB Assurance-of-Learning Objectives. This new test-
ing feature simplifies grading for professors in both traditional and online class settings.
This MyLab assessment includes 25 multiple-choice questions for each case, comprising
10 Basic questions that simply test whether the student read the case before class, and 15 Applied
questions that test the student’s ability to apply various strategic-management concepts. The 15
Applied questions are presented in three sets of five that pertain to key concepts of particular
importance for the respective case. This testing feature enables professors to determine, before
class if desired, whether students (1) read the case in Basic terms, and/or (2) are able to Apply
strategy concepts to resolve issues in the case. For example, the MyLab case Basic question may
be: In what country is Domino’s Pizza headquartered? Whereas a MyLab case Applied question
may be: What are three aspects of the organizational chart given in the Domino’s Pizza case that
violate strategic-management guidelines?
Source: Fred R. David, “How Companies Define Their Mission,” Long Range Planning 22, no. 1 (February 1989): 91. See also Anik Ratnaningsih, Nadjadji Anwar, Patdono Suwignjo, and Putu Artama Wiguna, “Balance Scorecard of David’s Strategic Modeling at Industrial Business for National Construction Contractor of Indonesia,” Journal of Mathematics and Technology, no. 4 (October 2010): 20.
PREFACE 19
The Chapter Warm-up assessment helps you hold your students
accountable for READING and demonstrating their knowledge on key
concepts in each chapter before coming to class.
Chapter Quizzes Every chapter has quizzes written by the textbook authors so you can as-
sess your students’ understanding of chapter learning objectives.
The David Approach Is Unique
This textbook is globally considered to be the most practical, skills-oriented strategic manage-
ment textbook on the market. All chapters unfold from a widely used integrative model of strate-
gic planning, so students learn the “process of doing strategic planning,” rather than focusing on
seminal theories in strategy. The David approach is “learning by doing”—students develop skills
that can enhance their own employability through numerous features, such as 62 new Assurance-
of-Learning end-of-chapter exercises in this edition.
20 CONCEPTS-BY-CASES MATRIX
K ey
S tr
at eg
ic
M an
ag em
en t
C o
n ce
p ts
St ra
te g
y M
o d
el /P
ro ce
ss
V is
io n
/M is
si o
n
St at
em en
ts
C o
m p
et it
iv e
Pr o
fi le
M
at ri
x
Po rt
er ’s
F iv
e Fo
rc es
EF E
M at
ri x
B en
ch m
ar ki
n g
V al
u e
C h
ai n
A n
al ys
is
IF E
M at
ri x
St ra
te g
y Ty
p es
Po rt
er ’s
T w
o G
en er
ic
St ra
te g
ie s
3 3 5 4 5 4 3 5 4 3
Case 1 Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
Case 2 The Gap Inc.
Case 3 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Case 4 Lenovo Group Limited
Case 5 Dick’s Sporting Goods
Case 6 11 Bit Studios S.A.
Case 7 JPMorgan & Chase Co.
Case 8 PPB Group Berhad
Case 9 Nestlé S.A.
Case 10 Domino’s Pizza, Inc.
Case 11 PetMed Express, Inc.
Case 12 AstraZeneca plc
Case 13 Shell plc
Case 14 The Walt Disney Company
Case 15 Adidas AG
Case 16 Shoprite Holdings Ltd.
Case 17 Woolworths Group
Case 18 Microsoft Corporation
Case 19 Amazon.com
Case 20 Nike, Inc.
Case 21 Under Armour, Inc.
Case 22 Polaris Industries, Inc.
Case 23 PT Matahari Putra Prima Tbk.
Case 24 Emirates Group
Case 25 General Electric, Inc.
Case 26 Barwa Group
Case 27 Starbucks Corporation
Case 28 PepsiCo, Inc.
Case 29 National Audubon Society
Case 30 MTN Group Limited
CONCEPTS-BY-CASES MATRIX 21
Fi rs
t M
o ve
r A
d va
n ta
g es
SW O
T M
at ri
x
SP A
C E
M at
ri x
B C
G &
IE M
at ri
ce s
G ra
n d
S tr
at eg
y &
Q SP
M
O rg
an iz
at io
n al
S tr
u ct
u re
O rg
an iz
at io
n al
C u
lt u
re
M ar
ke t
Se g
m en
ta ti
o n
&
Pr o
d u
ct P
o si
ti o
n
EP S-
EB IT
A n
al ys
is
Pr o
je ct
ed F
in an
ci al
St
at em
en ts
C o
m p
an y
V al
u at
io n
B al
an ce
d S
co re
ca rd
G o
ve rn
an ce
B u
si n
es s
Et h
ic s
En vi
ro n
m en
ta l
Su st
ai n
ab ili
ty
2 4 4 5 3 4 2 3 5 6 5 3 1 2 2
22 PREFACE
In addition, we offer more coverage on important topics, such as business ethics, social re-
sponsibility, and sustainability, than any other strategic-management textbook, including topics
such as bribery, workplace romance, devising codes of ethics, taking a position (or not) on so-
cial issues, and preserving wildlife—topics that
other textbooks do not mention, even though
companies continually face strategic decisions
in these areas.
We also offer more overage of global/interna-
tional issues than any other strategic- management
textbook, including topics such as how business
culture, taxes, tariffs, political stability, and eco-
nomic conditions vary across countries—all
framed from a strategic-planning perspective.
Lastly, this textbook is trusted across five
continents to provide students (and managers) the latest skills and concepts needed to effectively
formulate and efficiently implement a strategic plan—a game plan, if you will—that can lead to
sustainable competitive advantages for any type of business. This text meets all AACSB Inter-
national guidelines for the strategic-management course at both the graduate and undergraduate
levels, and previous editions have been used at more than 500 colleges and universities globally.
Developing Employability Skills
Using this text, students learn how to actually do strategic planning—this is a huge employability
skill because employers recognize the benefits of employees having an understanding of what a
firm is trying to achieve and why. Nearly all students using this text also use the free strategic-
planning template at the www.strategyclub.com author website; many students include this skill
on their resume to showcase their experience using this Excel software commonly used by busi-
nesses for doing actual strategic planning.
Instructor Teaching Resources
The following supplements are available with this text:
The Association to Advance Collegiate Schools of Business (AACSB) Interna- tional increasingly advocates a more skills-oriented, practical approach in business books, which this text provides, rather than a theory-based approach.
Supplements available to instructors at www. pearsonglobaleditions.com Features of the Supplement
Chapter Instructor’s Resource
Manual
authored by Forest David
• Chapter-by-chapter summaries
• Chapter Outlines with teaching tips
• Answers to end-of-chapter Review Questions
• Answers to the end-of-chapter Assurance-of-Learning Exercises
• Answers to the end-of-chapter two Mini-Case Questions
• Examples and activities not in the main book
Case Instructor’s Manual
authored by Forest David
• Case abstract followed by a complete strategic plan for the firm
• Vision and mission statements
• External and internal assessments with ratio analyses
• Analyses that include SWOT, BCG, IE, SPACE, GRAND, QSPM
• Recommendations and projected financial statements
Test Bank
authored by Ramachandran
Subramanian from Stetson
University
Over 1,500 multiple-choice and true/false questions with these annotations:
• Difficulty level (1 for straight recall, 2 for some analysis, 3 for complex analysis)
• Type (multiple-choice, true/false, and essay questions)
• Learning Objective (the concept the question supports)
• AACSB learning standard (Written and Oral Communication; Ethical Understanding and Reasoning;
Analytical Thinking; Information Technology; Interpersonal Relations and Teamwork; Diverse and
Multicultural Work; Reflective Thinking; Application of Knowledge)
PREFACE 23
Supplements available to instructors at www. pearsonglobaleditions.com Features of the Supplement
Computerized TestGen TestGen allows instructors to:
• Customize, save, and generate classroom tests
• Edit, add, or delete questions from the Test Item files
• Analyze test results
• Organize a database of tests and student results.
PowerPoint Presentation
authored by Ramachandran
Subramanian from Stetson
University
PowerPoints meet accessibility standards for students with disabilities. Features include, but are not
limited to:
• Keyboard and Screen Reader access
• Alternative text for images
• High color contrast between background and foreground colors
• Image Library includes graphs, tables, and equations.
This page is intentionally left blank
Acknowledgments
The strength of this text is largely attributed to the collective wisdom, work, and experiences of
strategic-management professors, researchers, students, and practitioners. Names of individuals
whose published research is referenced in this edition are listed alphabetically in the Name Index.
To all individuals involved in making this text so popular and successful, we are indebted and
thankful. Thank you also Dr. Yajiang Wang at Hebei University for your emails to us regarding
the weights versus ratings in an IFE Matrix.
Many special persons and reviewers contributed valuable material and suggestions for this
edition. We would like to thank our colleagues and friends at Baylor University, Auburn Uni-
versity, Mississippi State University, East Carolina University, the University of South Carolina,
Campbell University, the University of North Carolina at Pembroke, and Francis Marion Univer-
sity. We have taught strategic management or marketing courses at all these universities. Scores
of students and professors at these schools helped shape the development of this text.
We thank you, the reader, for investing the time and effort to read and study this text. It will
help you formulate, implement, and evaluate strategies for any organization with which you be-
come associated. We hope you come to share our enthusiasm for the rich subject area of strategic
management and for the systematic learning approach taken in this text. We want to welcome
and invite your suggestions, ideas, thoughts, comments, and questions regarding any part of this
text or the ancillary materials.
Please contact Dr. Fred R. David at [email protected], or write him at the School of
Business, Francis Marion University, Florence, SC 29501. We sincerely appreciate and need your
input to continually improve this text in future editions. Your willingness to draw our attention to
specific errors or deficiencies in coverage or exposition will especially be appreciated.
Thank you for using this text.
—Fred R. David
—Forest R. David
—Meredith E. David
25
Global Edition Acknowledgments
Pearson would like to thank the following reviewers for their work on the Global Edition.
Global Edition Reviewers Gouri Appasamy, Universiti Teknologi MARA
Yusof Ismail, International Islamic University Malaysia
Noorain Mohd Nordin, Universiti Teknologi MARA
Karan Vishwanath, University of London
Fred, Forest, and Meredith would like to especially thank the family matriarch, Joy
David, who has been married to Fred for 45 years, is Forest and Meredith’s mom,
and has supported the family book-writing activities for decades.
About the Authors
Fred R. David, Forest R. David, and Meredith E. David are a father–son-daughter team that have
published more than 50 articles in journals such as Academy of Management Review, Academy of
Management Executive, Journal of Applied Psychology, Long Range Planning, International Jour-
nal of Management, Journal of Business Strategy, and Advanced Management Journal. Six recent
journal articles by the authors, listed below, are changing the way strategic-management courses are
taught.
David, Meredith E. and Fred R. David, “Strategic Planning for Individuals: A Proposed
Framework and Method,” SAM Advanced Management Journal, (Winter 2018).
David, Fred R., Meredith E. David, and Forest R. David, “The Integration of Marketing
Concepts in Strategic Management Courses: An Empirical Analysis,” SAM Advanced
Management Journal, (Winter 2017).
David, Fred R., Meredith E. David, and Forest R. David, “How Important Is Finance Coverage
in Strategic Management? A Content Analysis of Textbooks,” International Journal of
Business, Marketing, and Decision Sciences (IJBMDS), 4, no. 1, (Winter 2016), pp. 64–78.
David, Fred R., Forest R. David, and Meredith E. David, “Benefits, Characteristics, Components,
and Examples of Customer-Oriented Mission Statements,” International Journal of
Business, Marketing, and Decision Sciences (IJBMDS), 9, no. 1, (Fall 2016), pp. 1–14.
David, Meredith E., Fred R. David, and Forest R. David, “The Quantitative Strategic Planning
Matrix: A New Marketing Tool,” Journal of Strategic Marketing, 3, (April 2016), pp. 1–11.
David, Meredith E. and Fred R. David, “Are Key Marketing Topics Adequately Covered in
Strategic Management?” Journal of Strategic Marketing, 24, (March 2016), pp. 1–13.
Fred has been lead author of this textbook for three decades. This text is a
global leader in the field of strategic management providing an applications,
practitioner-approach to the discipline. About 500 colleges and universities cur-
rently use this textbook across about 20 countries. With a Ph.D. in Management
from the University of South Carolina, Dr. David is currently the TranSouth
Professor of Strategic Planning at Francis Marion University in Florence, South
Carolina. He has published more than 100 academic journal articles and cases.
Fred R. David
Forest R. David
27
Forest has been sole author of the Case Instructor’s Manual for seven editions
of this textbook. This Manual provides extensive teachers’ notes (solutions)
for all the cases. Forest has also been sole author of the Chapter Instructor’s
Manual, Case MyLab, and Chapter MyLab ancillaries, as well as the free
Excel Student Template found on the author website (www.strategyclub.
com). Forest has published more than 80 strategic management cases, ar-
ticles, and papers. He has taught strategic-management courses at Mississippi
State University and Francis Marion University, and management courses at
Campbell University.
28 ABOUT THE AUTHORS
Meredith holds a Ph.D. in Business Administration from the University of South
Carolina and an MBA Degree from Wake Forest University. She is currently an
Assistant Professor of Marketing at Baylor University in Waco, Texas. She has
published more than 30 articles, cases, and papers on marketing and strategic
management in such journals as Journal of Consumer Behavior, Journal of
Advertising, Journal of Strategic Marketing, European Journal of Marketing,
and Journal of Business Research. Meredith has traveled the world over as a pro-
fessor and student. Meredith recently received the prestigious Young Researcher
Award in the Hankamer School of Business at Baylor University, and taught
strategic management at Jiao Tong University in Shanghai, China.
Meredith E. David
STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT Concepts and Cases
A COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE APPROACH
30
1 PART 1
OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
Strategy Formulation
Feedback Loop
Strategy Implementation
Strategy Evaluation
Chapter 10: Business Ethics, Environmental Sustainability, and Social Responsibility
Chapter 11: Global and International Issues
Strategy Evaluation
and Governance Chapter 9
Implementing Strategies:
Finance and Accounting
Issues Chapter 8
Implementing Strategies:
Management and Marketing
Issues Chapter 7
Business Vision and
Mission Chapter 2
Strategies in Action Chapter 5
Strategy Analysis and
Choice Chapter 6
The Internal
Assessment Chapter 4
The External Assessment Chapter 3
FIGURE 1- 1
The Comprehensive, Integrative Strategic-Management Model
Source: Fred R. David, “How Companies Define Their Mission,” Long Range Planning 22, no. 1 (February 1989): 91. See also Anik Ratnaningsih, Nadjadji Anwar, Patdono Suwignjo, and Putu Artama Wiguna, “Balance Scorecard of David’s Strategic Modeling at Industrial Business for National Construction Contractor of Indonesia,” Journal of Mathematics and Technology , no. 4 (October 2010): 20.
31
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following:
1- 1. Describe the strategic-management process.
1- 2. Discuss the three stages of activities for strategy formulation, implementation, and evaluation activities.
1- 3. Explain the need for integrating analysis and intuition in strategic management.
1- 4. Define and give examples of key terms in strategic management.
1- 5. Describe the benefits of engaging in strategic management.
1- 6. Explain why some firms do not engage in strategic planning.
1- 7. Describe the pitfalls in doing strategic planning.
1- 8. Discuss the connection between business and military strategies.
1- 9. Explain how this course can enhance a student’s employability.
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
The following exercises are found at the end of this chapter:
SET 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 1A: Gather Strategy Information for Coca-Cola Company
EXERCISE 1B: Enter Coca-Cola Vitals into the Strategic Planning Template
SET 2: Strategic Planning for My University
EXERCISE 1C: Perform SWOT Analysis for My University
SET 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability
EXERCISE 1D: Perform SWOT Analysis on Myself
SET 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
EXERCISE 1E: How Detrimental Are Various Pitfalls in Strategic Planning?
The Nature of Strategic Management
MyLab Management
Improve Your Grade!
If your instructor is using MyLab Management, visit www.pearson.com/mylab/management
for videos, simulations, and writing exercises.
32 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
C hapter 1 provides an overview of strategic management, introduces a practical, integra-
tive model of the strategic-management process (illustrated in Figure 1-1), and defines
basic activities and terms in strategic management. The primary focus of this textbook
is on “learning by doing.” From this text, students learn “how to do strategic planning.” The
integrative model reveals the “layout of this text” and the “process of strategic planning” so
students can follow the journey in a meaningful way.
An exciting new feature of this edition at the beginning of each chapter is an exemplary strate-
gist capsule to showcase a famous strategist for doing an exemplary job applying strategic-planning
concepts, tools, and techniques. The first person featured for excellent strategic-management prac-
tices is Vince Lombardi, former head coach and General Manager of the Green Bay Packers pro-
fessional football team. At the end of each chapter, a new, one-page, mini-case on a company is
provided with respective questions that apply various concepts, tools, and techniques presented.
What Is Strategic Management? Strategic management is the art and science of formulating, implementing, and evaluating
cross-functional decisions that enable an organization to achieve its objectives. As this definition
implies, strategic management focuses on integrating management, marketing, finance, account-
ing, production, and information systems to achieve organizational success. Strategic manage-
ment can also be defined as the executive-level activity of distributing resources across products
and regions to gain a sustainable competitive advantage over rivals.
Firms have liberty to compete many different ways in a variety of geographic areas, so deci-
sions must be made regarding what markets to enter, what markets to avoid, which competitor’s
space to invade, and which to avoid. A firm’s survival can hinge on these decisions being right;
this textbook unveils the process needed for making effective strategic decisions. For example,
Westinghouse Electric’s recent strategy to build a new generation of nuclear power plants was
ill formulated and thus resulted in bankruptcy and eventual acquisition (in 2018) by Canada’s
Brookfield Business Partners LP.
LO 1.1
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED
Coach Vince Lombardi The legendary football coach of the Green Bay Packers, Vince Lombardi
(1913–1970) changed a losing culture into a winning culture. Founded
in 1919 and headquartered in the small, frigid Wisconsin town of Green
Bay, the Packers are the only nonprofit, community-owned major league
professional sports team in the United States. The third-oldest franchise
in the National Football League (NFL), the Packers were perennial losers
until Vince Lombardi took over in 1959 as head coach and general man-
ager. The very existence of the Packer franchise was in jeopardy when
Lombardi arrived in Green Bay. Coming off a 1–10–1 season and 11
straight losing seasons, Lombardi led the Packers to 3 NFL champion-
ships in his first 7 seasons. The Pro Football Hall of Fame says: “Lombardi
is arguably the greatest football coach of all time and is on the short
list of history’s greatest coach, regardless of sport.” Because of his suc-
cess as both a manager and strategist, Lombardi became a national sym-
bol of single-minded determination to win. The following quotes from
Vince Lombardi reveal his basic strategy for winning, which was based
on building character, commitment, and setting an exemplary example:
1. Winning is not everything, but making the effort to win is.
2. The objective is to win—fairly, squarely, decently, by the rules,
but to win.
3. The difference between a successful person and others is not a lack
of strength and not a lack of knowledge, but rather a lack of will.
4. Winning is a habit. Watch your thoughts, they become your
beliefs. Watch your beliefs, they become your words. Watch your
words, they become your actions. Watch your actions, they be-
come your habits. Watch your habits, they become your character.
Source: Based on Michael Mink, “Coach Vince Lombardi Set A Superb
Standard,” Investors Business Daily, (February 5, 2016): A3.
C S
U A
rc h iv
es /E
v er
et t
C o
ll ec
ti o n I
n c/
A la
m y
S to
ck P
h o to
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 33
Formulating strategies such as deciding what to produce and where, when, and how to
compete is what leads to a sustainable competitive advantage. Even the best strategies must
be implemented well through operational- or tactical-level activities like hiring and motivating
employees, cutting costs, benchmarking, outsourcing, securing financing, and keeping facilities
warm (or cool). Implementation activities are vitally important and must be monitored by strate-
gists, but effectively formulated strategies, more so than operational tactics, is generally what
leads to sustained competitive advantages.
To gain a sustainable competitive advantage, firms need to provide unique products and
services. Uniqueness matters. For example, Apple’s computers, iPads, and iPhones all run on
Apple’s unique operating system; the only way to have an iPhone is to also be a user of Apple’s
operating system. To assure “effective uniqueness,” firms must accept concessions in the strategy
process to gain a sustainable competitive as exemplified in the Apple example. Another example
is Rolex, and the company not offering cheaper lines of watches. Rolex has resisted increasing
market share by offering new cheaper product lines to attract new customers. Instead, Rolex has
maintained its unique reputation and market share as the top luxury watch brand in the world.
Rolex, and all successful firms, thus make tradeoffs and tough decisions throughout the process
of developing, producing, and selling products.
Chapter 2 discusses core values, vision, and mission—items that represent the starting point
for developing and nurturing a firm’s uniqueness. Everything in strategy flows from a particular
firm’s core values, vision, and mission, and all successful firms are different (unique) from rival
firms in some key ways.
The term strategic management is used at many colleges and universities as the title for the
capstone course in business administration. This course integrates material from all business
courses, and in addition, introduces new strategic-management concepts and techniques being
widely used by firms. Two special features of this text are a Cohesion Case (on Coca-Cola) and
end-of-chapter assurance-of-learning exercises, as described in Table 1-1.
Strategic Planning
The term strategic management in this text is used synonymously with the term strategic plan-
ning. The latter term is more often used in the business world, whereas the former is often used
in academia. Sometimes the term strategic management is used to refer to strategy formulation,
TABLE 1-1 A Cohesion Case and Assurance-of-Learning Exercises
A distinguishing, popular feature of this text is the Cohesion Case, named so because a written case on
a company (Coca-Cola) appears at the end of this chapter, and then all other subsequent chapters feature
end-of-chapter assurance-of-learning exercises to apply strategic-planning concepts, tools, and techniques
to the Cohesion Case company. Coca-Cola is a well-known, well-managed global firm undergoing stra-
tegic change. By working through the Coca-Cola–related exercises, students become well prepared to
develop an effective strategic plan for any company (case) assigned to them. Case analysis is a core part
of almost every strategic-management course globally.
We are thrilled to provide new sets of end-of chapter assurance-of-learning exercises. All exercises
have been carefully designed to “assure learning” by applying chapter concepts, tools, and techniques
in a fun and meaningful way to best assure that competence is gained in particular employability skills
discussed near the end of this chapter. The four sets of assurance-of-learning exercises that appear at the
end of each chapter are as follows:
Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola—Exercises that apply chapter material to the Coca-Cola Cohesion
Case Company; these exercises ready students for doing case analysis as “knowledge application and
analysis” and “information technology” skills are honed.
Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University—Exercises that apply chapter material to your college or
university; these exercises ready students for doing case analysis in nonprofit organizations as “business
ethics and social responsibility” and “data literacy” skills are honed.
Set 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability—Exercises that apply chapter material to in-
dividuals instead of companies; these exercises prepare students for making career choices and enable
students to apply strategy tools, techniques, and concepts to enhance their own career.
Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning—Exercises that apply chapter material by comparing the
effectiveness of individual versus group decisions; these are fun in-class group activities that yield “a winning
individual and a winning group” for each exercise as critical-thinking and collaboration skills are honed.
34 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
implementation, and evaluation, with strategic planning referring only to strategy formulation.
The purpose of strategic planning is to exploit and create new and different opportunities for
tomorrow; long-range planning, in contrast, tries to optimize for tomorrow the trends of today.
The term strategic planning originated in the 1950s and was popular between the mid-1960s
and the mid-1970s. During these years, strategic planning was widely believed to be the answer
for all problems. At the time, much of corporate America was “obsessed” with strategic plan-
ning. Following that boom, however, strategic planning was cast aside during the 1980s as vari-
ous planning models did not yield higher returns. The 1990s, however, brought the revival of
strategic planning, and the process is widely practiced today in the business world.
A strategic plan is, in essence, a company’s game plan. Just as an athletic team needs a good
game plan to have a chance for success, a company must have a good strategic plan to compete
successfully. Profit margins among firms in most industries are so slim that there is little room
for error in the overall strategic plan. A strategic plan results from tough managerial choices
among numerous good alternatives, and it signals commitment to specific markets, policies, pro-
cedures, and operations in lieu of other, “less desirable” courses of action.
The Strategic-Management Model
The strategic-management model shown in Figure 1-1 is a widely accepted, comprehensive
depiction of the strategic-management process.1 The process conveyed does not guarantee suc-
cess, but it does represent a clear and practical approach for formulating, implementing, and
evaluating strategies. Relationships among major components of the strategic-management pro-
cess are shown in the model, which appears on the opening page of all subsequent chapters with
appropriate area of the model shaded to show the particular focus of the chapter. This text is
organized around the model because it reveals how organizations actually do strategic planning.
There are three important questions to answer in preparing a strategic plan:
Where are we now?
Where do we want to go?
How are we going to get there?
Identifying an organization’s existing vision, mission, objectives, and strategies is the logi-
cal starting point for strategic management because a firm’s present situation and condition may
preclude certain strategies and may even dictate a particular course of action. Every organiza-
tion has a vision, mission, objectives, and strategy, even if these elements are not consciously
designed, written, or communicated. The answer to where an organization is going can be deter-
mined largely by where the organization has been!
The strategic-management process is dynamic and continuous. A change in any one of the
major components in the model can necessitate a change in any or all of the other components.
For instance, various third-world countries coming online could represent a major opportunity
and require a change in long-term objectives and strategies; a failure to accomplish annual objec-
tives might require a change in policy; or a major competitor’s change in strategy might require
a change in the firm’s mission. The activities represented in Figure 1-1 are not independent silos;
they represent an interrelated process. Thus, activities for strategy formulation, implementation,
and evaluation should be performed on a continual basis, not just at the end of the year or semi-
annually. The strategic-management process never really ends.
In Figure 1-1, perhaps the most important “activity” is the feedback loop because strategy
must be thought of as a “verb rather than a noun.” The stages of strategic management (formula-
tion, implementation, and evaluation) are so fluid as to be virtually indistinguishable when one
starts and the other ends. Continuous feedback enables firms to readily adapt to changing condi-
tions; when anyone is preparing an external or internal assessment or even implementing strategies,
they should be mindful of the firm’s vision and mission. The feedback loop reveals that a change
in any strategic-planning activity can impact any or all other activities. For example, changes in
a firm’s mission can impact all other activities; everything a firm does should be mission driven.
Note in Figure 1-1 that business ethics, social responsibility, environmental sustainability,
and international issues impact all activities in the model, as discussed in Chapters 10 and 11,
respectively. Regarding business ethics, recent research revealed in the Ethics Capsule 1 con-
cludes that “trustworthiness” is the most important variable in doing business.
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 35
The strategic-management process is not as cleanly divided and neatly performed in practice
as the strategic-management model suggests. Strategists do not go through the process in lock-
step fashion. Generally, there is give-and-take among hierarchical levels of an organization. To
develop a strategic plan, many organizations conduct formal meetings semiannually to discuss
and update the firm’s vision, mission, opportunities, threats, strengths, weaknesses, strategies,
objectives, policies, and performance. These meetings are commonly held off premises and are
called retreats. The rationale for periodically conducting strategic-management meetings away
from the work site is to encourage more creativity and candor from participants. Good communi-
cation and feedback are needed throughout the strategic-management process.
Application of the strategic-management process is typically more formal in larger and well-
established organizations. Formality refers to the extent that participants, responsibilities, author-
ity, duties, and “basic approach” are objective and clear rather than subjective and vague. Smaller
businesses tend to be less formal. Firms that compete in complex, rapidly changing environ-
ments, such as technology companies, tend to be more formal in strategic planning. Firms that
have many divisions, products, markets, and technologies also tend to be more formal in apply-
ing strategic-management concepts. Greater formality in applying the strategic-management
process is usually positively associated with organizational success.2
Stages of Strategic Management The strategic-management process consists of three stages: strategy formulation, strategy
implementation, and strategy evaluation. Strategy formulation includes developing a vision and
mission, identifying an organization’s external opportunities and threats, determining internal
strengths and weaknesses, establishing long-term objectives, generating alternative strategies,
and choosing particular strategies to pursue. Strategy-formulation issues include deciding what
new businesses to enter, what businesses to abandon, whether to expand operations or diversify,
whether to enter international markets, whether to merge or form a joint venture, and how to
avoid a hostile takeover.
LO 1.2
ETHICS CAPSULE 1
What Ethics Variable Is Most Important in Doing Business?
Three professors from Harvard Business School, Amy Cuddy, Susan
Fiske, and Peter Glick, recently revealed in a new book, Presence,
that the most important variable in doing business with someone
you do not know is trustworthiness. The authors say that within
seconds of meeting someone, people determine first and foremost
the extent that the person is trustworthy. They say that variable is
far more important than competence, intelligence, looks, strength,
height, and numerous other variables.
Professor Cuddy explains, “From an evolutionary perspective, it
was more crucial to our survival that we know quickly whether a
person(s) deserves our trust.” In other words, for nearly a million
years of man’s evolution, when people first met other people, they
assessed within seconds whether the new person(s) was trustwor-
thy, meaning is this person going to steal from us or try to kill us.
Trustworthiness, these authors report, was always assessed before
competence (i.e., can this person start a fire or catch a fish). Cuddy
says competence is evaluated today only after trust is established
because physically and psychologically, man today is the result of
various traits being promoted and others extinguished over the
millennia, and trustworthiness is number one according to these
researchers.
Curry, Fiske, and Glick go on to say that focusing too much
today on displaying your strengths or that you are smart, whether
in a job interview or in seeking to do business with someone, can
backfire. Cuddy says, “A warm, trustworthy person who is also
strong elicits admiration, but only after you’ve established trust does
your strength become a gift, rather than a threat.”
Based on Jenna Goudreau, A Harvard psychologist says people judge
you based on 2 criteria when they first meet you, http://www.aol.com/
article/2016/01/16/a-harvard-psychologist-says-people-judge-you-
based-on-2-criteria/21298315/?cps=gravity_4816_5749740174701162847
Who Is This Approaching?
M A
U R
IC IO
A N
T O
N /S
ci en
ce P
h o to
L ib
ra ry
/G et
ty I
m ag
es
36 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
Because no organization has unlimited resources, strategists must decide which alterna-
tive strategies will benefit the firm most. Strategy-formulation decisions commit an organiza-
tion to specific products, markets, resources, and technologies over an extended period of time.
Strategies determine long-term competitive advantages. For better or worse, strategic decisions
have major multifunctional consequences and enduring effects on an organization. Top managers
have the best perspective to understand fully the ramifications of strategy-formulation decisions;
they have the authority to commit the resources necessary for implementation.
Strategy implementation requires a firm to establish annual objectives, devise policies,
motivate employees, and allocate resources so that formulated strategies can be executed effi-
ciently. Strategy implementation includes developing a strategy-supportive culture, creating an
organizational structure, redirecting marketing efforts, preparing budgets, developing and using
information systems, devising tactics, and linking employee compensation to organizational
performance.
Strategy implementation often is called the “action stage” of strategic management.
Implementing strategy means mobilizing employees and managers to put formulated strategies
into action. Often considered to be the most difficult stage in strategic management, strategy
implementation requires personal discipline, commitment, and sacrifice. Successful strategy
implementation hinges on managers’ ability to motivate employees, which is more an art than a
science. Strategies formulated but not implemented serve no useful purpose.
Interpersonal skills are especially critical for successful strategy implementation. Strategy-
implementation activities affect all employees and managers in an organization. Every division
and department must decide on answers to questions such as “What must we do to implement
our part of the organization’s strategy?” and “How best can we get the job done?” The challenge
of implementation is to stimulate managers and employees throughout an organization to work
with pride and enthusiasm toward achieving stated objectives.
Strategy evaluation is the final stage in strategic management. Managers desperately need
to know when particular strategies are not working well; strategy evaluation is the primary means
for obtaining this information. All strategies are subject to future modification because external
and internal factors constantly change. Three fundamental strategy-evaluation activities are (1)
reviewing external and internal factors that are the bases for current strategies, (2) measuring
performance, and (3) taking corrective actions. Strategy evaluation is needed because success
today is no guarantee of success tomorrow! Success always creates new and different problems;
complacent organizations experience demise.
Formulation, implementation, and evaluation of strategy activities occur at three hierarchi-
cal levels in a large organization: corporate, divisional or strategic business unit, and functional.
By fostering communication and interaction among managers and employees across hierarchical
levels, strategic management helps a firm function as a competitive team. Most small businesses
and some large businesses do not have divisions or strategic business units; they have only the
corporate and functional levels. Nevertheless, managers and employees at these two levels should
be actively involved in strategic-management activities.
Peter Drucker says the prime task of strategic management is thinking through the overall
mission of a business—
that is, of asking the question, “What is our business?” This leads to the setting of objec-
tives, the development of strategies, and the making of today’s decisions for tomorrow’s
results. This clearly must be done by a part of the organization that can see the entire busi-
ness; that can balance objectives and the needs of today against the needs of tomorrow; and
that can allocate resources of men and money to key results.3
Integrating Analysis and Intuition Edward Deming once said, “In God we trust. All others bring data.” The strategic-management
process can be described as an objective, logical, systematic approach for making major
decisions in an organization. It attempts to organize qualitative and quantitative informa-
tion in a way that allows effective decisions to be made under conditions of uncertainty. Yet
strategic management is not a pure science that lends itself to a nice, neat, one-two-three
approach.
LO 1.3
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 37
Based on past experiences, judgment, and feelings, most people recognize that intuition
is essential to making good strategic decisions. Some managers and owners of businesses pro-
fess to have extraordinary abilities for using intuition alone in devising brilliant strategies. For
example, Will Durant, who organized General Motors (GM), was described by Alfred Sloan as
“a man who would proceed on a course of action guided solely, as far as I could tell, by some
intuitive flash of brilliance. He never felt obliged to make an engineering hunt for the facts. Yet at
times, he was astoundingly correct in his judgment.”4 Albert Einstein acknowledged the impor-
tance of intuition when he said, “I believe in intuition and inspiration. At times I feel certain that
I am right while not knowing the reason. Imagination is more important than knowledge because
knowledge is limited, whereas imagination embraces the entire world.”5
Although some organizations today may survive and prosper because they have intuitive
geniuses managing them, most are not so fortunate. Most organizations can benefit from inte-
grating intuition and analysis in decision making. Choosing an intuitive or analytic approach to
decision making is not an either–or proposition. Managers at all levels in an organization inject
their intuition and judgment into strategic-management analyses. Analytical thinking and intui-
tive thinking complement each other.
Operating from the I’ve-already-made-up-my-mind-don’t-bother-me-with-the-facts mode is
not management by intuition; it is management by ignorance.6 Drucker says, “I believe in intu-
ition only if you discipline it. ‘Hunch’ artists, who make a diagnosis but don’t check it out with
the facts, are the ones in medicine who kill people, and in management kill businesses.”7 In a
sense, the strategic-management process is an attempt to duplicate what goes on in the mind of a
brilliant, intuitive person who knows the business and assimilates and integrates that knowledge
through analysis in formulating strategies.
As Henderson notes:
The accelerating rate of change today is producing a business world in which custom-
ary managerial habits in organizations are increasingly inadequate. Experience alone was
an adequate guide when changes could be made in small increments. But intuitive and
experience-based management philosophies are grossly inadequate when decisions are
strategic and have major, irreversible consequences.8
Adapting to Change
The strategic-management process is based on the belief that organizations should continually
monitor internal and external events and trends so that timely changes can be made as needed.
The rate and magnitude of changes that affect organizations are increasing dramatically, as evi-
denced by how the drop in oil prices caught so many firms by surprise. Firms, like organisms,
must be “adept at adapting” or they will not survive.
To survive, all organizations must astutely identify and adapt to change, as the Chinese Mobike
Company does as revealed in the Global Capsule 1 on page 38. The strategic-management process
is aimed at allowing organizations to adapt effectively to change over the long run. Waterman noted:
In today’s business environment, more than in any preceding era, the only constant is
change. Successful organizations effectively manage change, continuously adapting their
bureaucracies, strategies, systems, products, and cultures to survive the shocks and prosper
from the forces that decimate the competition.9
The need to adapt to change leads organizations to key strategic-management questions,
such as “What kind of business should we become?” “Are we in the right field(s)?” “Should
we reshape our business?” “What new competitors are entering our industry?” “What strate-
gies should we pursue?” “How are our customers changing?”; and “Are new technologies being
developed that could put us out of business?”
Online commerce is forcing hundreds of brick-and-mortar retailers to change or liquidate.
The fashion retailer Bebe Stores recently announced it is closing all its 168 stores and going
online only. Yarden Research reports that 29.1 percent of retail sales of general merchandise,
apparel and accessories, and furniture in America is now purchased online. Companies such
as Macy’s and Target are converting more and more of their retail store space to warehouse/
distribution area rather than being open for customer shopping.
38 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
Key Terms in Strategic Management Before we further discuss strategic management, we should define ten key terms: competitive
advantage, strategists, vision and mission statements, external opportunities and threats, inter-
nal strengths and weaknesses, long-term objectives, strategies, annual objectives, and policies.
Competitive Advantage
Strategic management is all about gaining and maintaining competitive advantage. This term
can be defined as any activity a firm does especially well compared with activities done by
rival firms, or any resource a firm possesses that rival firms desire. For example, having fewer
fixed assets than rival firms can provide major competitive advantages. Apple Inc. has virtually
no manufacturing facilities of its own, whereas rival Sony owns 57 electronics factories. Apple
relies almost entirely on contract manufacturers for production of its products.
Normally, a firm can sustain a competitive advantage for only a certain period because of rival
firms imitating and undermining that advantage. Thus, it is not adequate simply to obtain competitive
advantage. A firm must strive to achieve sustained competitive advantage by doing the following:
1. Continually adapting to changes in external trends and events and internal capabilities,
competencies, and resources.
2. Effectively formulating, implementing, and evaluating strategies that capitalize on those factors.
3. Offering products that are unique and not easily duplicated by rivals.
4. Accepting tradeoffs by deciding what not to do; no firm can be everything to everybody.
Strategists
Strategists are the individuals most responsible for the success or failure of an organization. They
have various job titles, such as chief executive officer, chief strategy officer, president, owner,
chair of the board, executive director, chancellor, dean, and entrepreneur. Jay Conger, professor
of organizational behavior at the London Business School and author of Building Leaders, says,
“All strategists have to be chief learning officers. We are in an extended period of change. If our
LO 1.4
GLOBAL CAPSULE 1
Mobike: Global Bike Renting Takes off Like a Jet Plane On a political map, the boundaries between
countries may be clear, but on a competi-
tive map showing the real flow of financial
and industrial activity, as well as idea shar-
ing, the boundaries have largely disap-
peared. The speedy flow of information has
eaten away at national boundaries so that
people worldwide readily see for themselves
how other people live and work. We have
become a borderless world with global citi-
zens, global competitors, global customers,
global suppliers, global distributors, and
global entrepreneurs.
There are millions of start-up businesses rolling out services
globally. For example, Mobike in Beijing, China, is a bicycle-sharing
business with more than 100 million users who use the com-
pany’s 6 million “connected” bikes. Members pay a fee for the
privilege and retrieve a bike from one docking station and return
it to another, but recently Mobike members simply download the
company app, find a bike near them, scan a code to unlock it,
and then drop the bike off wherever they
like. GPS and wireless technology built
into the bike enable Mobike to track the
bike’s whereabouts. No docking stations
are needed. This type of small business
likely would be viable in many cities all
over the globe.
In the United States, the largest bike-
share fleet resides in Dallas, Texas where
18,000 bikes flood Dallas streets and users
are not required to use racks; racks are
required in New York City. The rackless
business model is the norm in China, but
there, and in Dallas, bikes end up in trees, creeks, yards, and block
sidewalks.
Source: Based on Clifton Leaf, “Ideas Know No Borders,” Fortune, August 1,
2017, p. 10. Also, Ken Smith, “A Bike-Share Invasion From China,”
Bloomberg Businessweek, November 13, 2017, p. 22. Also, Eliot Brown, “It’s
the Wild West for Bike Sharing,” March 27, 2018, p. B4.
Follow Me Biking
N at
as h a-
A le
k sa
n d ra
/S h u tt
er st
o ck
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 39
leaders aren’t highly adaptive and great models during this period, then our companies won’t
adapt either, because ultimately leadership is about being a role model.”
Strategists help an organization gather, analyze, and organize information. They track indus-
try and competitive trends, develop forecasting models and scenario analyses, evaluate corporate
and divisional performance, spot emerging market opportunities, identify business threats, and
develop creative action plans. Strategic planners usually serve in a support or staff role. Usually
found in higher levels of management, they typically have considerable authority for decision
making in the firm. The CEO is the most visible and critical strategic manager. Any manager
who has responsibility for a unit or division, responsibility for profit and loss outcomes, or direct
authority over a major piece of the business is a strategic manager (strategist).
The chief strategy officer (CSO) position has become common in many organizations. Hundreds
of companies have appointed a new chief strategy officer in the last couple of years, including Talon
International, TeleTech, Fleet Complete, Ringler Associates, LRES, Amber Engine, Beaver-Visitec
International, Momentum Worldwide, PGi, TIA, World Surf League, Bank of Hawaii, Snapdeal,
Oramed, Saatva, Centrillion, Geisinger Health System, and Amplifi Commerce.
Strategists differ as much as organizations do, and these differences must be considered
in the formulation, implementation, and evaluation of strategies. Strategists differ in their atti-
tudes, values, ethics, willingness to take risks, concern for social responsibility, concern for
profitability, concern for short-run versus long-run aims, and management style; some will not
even consider various types of strategies because of their personal philosophies. The founder of
Hershey, Milton Hershey, built the company so that he could afford to manage an orphanage.
From corporate profits, Hershey today cares for about 850 boys and 950 girls in its boarding
school for pre-K through grade 12.
Athletic coaches are also strategists. Football, basketball, baseball, soccer, and in fact many ath-
letic contests are often won or lost based on a team’s game plan. For example, a basketball coach may
plan to fast break and play up-tempo, rather than play more half-court, if the players are smaller and
faster, or if the team has more depth than the opposing team. Some inspirational, strategic-planning-
related quotes from legendary National Football League (NFL) coaches are provided in Table 1-2.
Vision and Mission Statements
Many organizations today develop a vision statement that answers the question “What do we
want to become?” Developing a vision statement is often considered the first step in strategic
planning, preceding even development of a mission statement. Many vision statements are a
single sentence as revealed through numerous examples in Chapter 2.
TABLE 1-2 Eight Famous, Strategic-Planning–Relevant Quotes from NFL Coaches
1. “Perfection is not attainable. But if we chase perfection, we can catch excellence.”—Vince
Lombardi, Head Coach Green Bay Packers (1959–1967)
2. “Leadership is a matter of having people look at you and gain confidence . . . If you’re in control,
they’re in control.”—Tom Landry, Head Coach Dallas Cowboys (1960–1988)
3. “If you want to win, do the ordinary things better than anyone else does them, day in and day
out.”—Chuck Noll, Head Coach Pittsburgh Steelers (1969–1991)
4. “Leaders are made, they are not born. They are made by hard effort, which is the price which all
of us must pay to achieve any goal that is worthwhile.”—Vince Lombardi, Head Coach Green
Bay Packers (1959–1967)
5. “You fail all the time, but you aren’t a failure until you start blaming someone else.”—Bum
Phillips, Head Coach Houston Oilers (1975–1980), New Orleans Saints (1981–1985)
6. “Success demands singleness of purpose.”—Vince Lombardi, Head Coach Green Bay Packers
(1959–1967)
7. “Stay focused. Your start does not determine how you’re going to finish.”—Herm Edwards, Head
Football Coach of the New York Jets (2001–2005), Kansas City Chiefs (2006–2008), and Arizona
State University (2018 to present).
8. “Nobody who ever gave his best regretted it.”—George S. Halas, Head Coach Chicago Bears
(1933–1942, 1946–1955, 1958–1967)
Source: A variety of sources.
40 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
A mission statement is an “enduring statement of purpose that distinguishes one busi-
ness from other similar firms. A mission statement identifies the scope of a firm’s opera-
tions in product and market terms.”10 It addresses the basic question that faces all strategists:
“What is our business?” A clear mission statement describes the values and priorities of an
organization. Developing a mission statement compels strategists to think about the nature
and scope of present operations and to assess the potential attractiveness of future markets
and activities. A mission statement broadly charts the future direction of an organization and
serves as a constant reminder to its employees of why the organization exists and what the
founders envisioned when they put their fame and fortune (and names) at risk to breathe life
into their dreams.
External Opportunities and Threats
External opportunities and external threats refer to economic, social, cultural, demographic,
environmental, political, legal, governmental, technological, and competitive trends and events
that could significantly benefit or harm an organization in the future. Opportunities and threats
are largely beyond the control of a single organization, thus, the word external. Some general
categories of opportunities and threats are listed in Table 1-3. Dollars, numbers, percentages,
ratios, and quantification are essential so strategists can assess the magnitude of opportunities and
threats and take appropriate actions. For example, in Table 1-3, rather than saying “Marketing is
moving rapidly to the Internet,” strategists need to conduct research and find, for example, that
“spending on online advertisements globally is rising 18 percent annually and represents about
44 percent of total advertising spending in the USA.” Strategies must be formulated and imple-
mented based on specific factual information to the extent possible because so much is at stake
in having a good game plan.
External trends and events are creating a different type of consumer and consequently a
need for different types of products, services, and strategies. A competitor’s strength could be a
threat, or a rival firm’s weakness could be an opportunity. A basic tenet of strategic management
is that firms need to formulate strategies to take advantage of external opportunities and avoid
or reduce the impact of external threats. For this reason, identifying, monitoring, and evaluating
external opportunities and threats are essential for success. This process of conducting research
and gathering and assimilating external information is sometimes called environmental scanning
or industry analysis. Lobbying is one activity that some organizations use to influence external
opportunities and threats.
Internal Strengths and Weaknesses
Internal strengths and internal weaknesses are an organization’s controllable activities that
are performed especially well or poorly. They arise in the activities of management, market-
ing, finance/accounting, production, and information systems of a business. Identifying and
TABLE 1-3 Some General Categories of Opportunities and Threats
• Consumers’s expectation for green operations and products is rising 8 percent annually in Western
Europe.
• Internet marketing is growing 11 percent annually in the United States.
• Commodity food prices rose 6 percent the prior year.
• Oil and gas prices declined 18 percent in the last twelve months.
• Computer hacker problems are increasing 14 percent annually.
• Interest rates are 4 percent but rising in the United States.
• State and local governments’s finances worsened 12 percent last year.
• The number of births declined 5 percent annually in many countries over the last three years.
• The gross domestic product (GDP) of Brazil fell from 6 percent to 5 percent in the last year.
• Competitor XYZ just introduced product ABC at a 10 percent lower price than our product.
• Social-media networking is growing 9 percent annually in China.
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 41
evaluating organizational strengths and weaknesses in the functional areas of a business is an
essential strategic-management activity. Organizations strive to pursue strategies that capitalize
on internal strengths and improve internal weaknesses.
Strengths and weaknesses are determined relative to competitors. Relative deficiency or supe-
riority is important information. Also, strengths and weaknesses can be determined by elements of
being rather than performance. For example, a strength may involve ownership of natural resources
or a historic reputation for quality. Strengths and weaknesses may be determined relative to a firm’s
own objectives. For instance, high levels of inventory turnover may not be a strength for a firm that
seeks never to stock-out.
In performing a strategic-management case analysis, it is important to be as divisional
as possible when determining and stating internal strengths and weaknesses. In other words,
for a company such as Walmart, saying, “Sam Club’s revenues grew 11 percent in the recent
quarter,” is far better than saying “Walmart’s revenues grew 6 percent in the recent quarter.”
Being divisional enables strategies to be more effectively formulated and targeted. This is
important because all firms must allocate resources across divisions (segments) of the firm
(that is, by product, region, customer, or whatever the various units of the firm are), such as
Walmart’s Sam’s Club compared with Walmart Supercenters, Walmart Mexico, or Walmart
Europe.
Both internal and external factors should be stated as specifically as possible, using numbers,
percentages, dollars, and ratios, as well as comparisons over time to rival firms. Quantification is
important because strategies will be formulated and resources allocated based on this informa-
tion. The more specific the underlying external and internal factors, the more effectively strategies
can be formulated and resources allocated. Determining the numbers takes more time, but survival
of the firm often is at stake, so doing some research and incorporating numbers associated with
key factors is essential.
Internal factors can be determined in a number of ways, including computing ratios, measur-
ing performance, and comparing to past periods and industry averages. Various types of surveys
also can be developed and administered to examine internal factors, such as employee morale,
production efficiency, advertising effectiveness, and customer loyalty.
Long-Term Objectives
Objectives can be defined as specific results that an organization seeks to achieve in pursuing
its mission. Long term means more than one year. Objectives are essential for organizational
success because they provide direction; aid in evaluation; foster synergy; reveal priorities;
focus coordination; and provide a basis for effective planning, organizing, motivating, and
controlling activities. Objectives should be challenging, measurable, consistent, reasonable,
and clear. In a multidimensional firm, objectives are needed both for the overall company and
each division.
Headquartered in New York City, Foot Locker, Inc. recently posted the following long-term
objectives on its corporate website (paraphrased):
1. Annual revenues: $7.5 billion
2. Annual revenues per square foot: $500
3. EBIT margin: 11 percent
4. Profit margin: 7 percent
5. Return on invested capital: 14 percent
6. Inventory turnover: 3+ times
In contrast, Macy’s, Inc.’s Annual Report lists as objectives to “to grow sales profitably” and
“to maximize total shareholder return.” Avoid vagueness like this throughout a strategic-planning
project!
Strategies
Strategies are the means by which long-term objectives will be achieved. Business strategies
may include geographic expansion, diversification, acquisition, product development, market
penetration, retrenchment, divestiture, liquidation, and joint venture. Strategies are potential
actions that require top-management decisions and significant amounts of the firm’s resources.
42 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
They affect an organization’s long-term prosperity, typically for at least five years, and thus
are future oriented. Strategies also have multifunctional and multidivisional consequences and
require consideration of both the external and internal factors facing the firm.
Strategies currently being pursued by Amazon are described in Table 1-4.
TABLE 1-4 Amazon’s Strategies
The world’s largest bookseller, Amazon, is surprisingly embracing the brick-and-mortar bookstore retail
format it’s been killing for 20 years. Amazon’s physical bookstore front fits with the company’s increas-
ing reliance on storefronts including AmazonBooks, Amazon Go, and AmazonFresh Pickup to build
sales and meet customers where they are. AmazonBooks now has more than 10 physical stores. Another
reason for Amazon’s new strategy is that physical bookstores are experiencing something of a comeback.
From 2010 to 2017, the number of independent bookstores increased by nearly 30 percent. These stores
are capitalizing on a loyal customer base that appreciates the value of a real bookstore that hosts read-
ings and events, offers conversation and discussion areas, and enables in-store browsing and discovery.
Amazon also recently acquired the brick-and-mortar grocery store chain Whole Foods Market. Entire
industries are being rocked or crushed by Amazon’s competitive size, scale, diversity, automation, and
prowess.
Source: Based on Jeremy Bowman, “3 Reasons Amazon Is Opening a Brick-and-Mortar Bookstore Chain,” https://www.aol.com/article/finance/2017/06/07/3-reasons-amazon-is-opening-a-brick-and-mortar-bookstore- chain/22130842/
TABLE 1-5 Matching Key External and Internal Factors to Formulate Strategies
Key Internal Factor Key External Factor Resultant Strategy
S1: Demand for Dunkin Donuts
up 6 percent annually (internal
strength)
+ O1: Desire for healthy products
up 8 percent annually (external
opportunity)
= SO1: Dunkin Donuts elimi-
nated all artificial dyes and colors
in its donuts in 2018
W1: Insufficient production
capacity by 1 million units
annually (internal weakness)
+ O2: Exit of two major foreign
competitors from the area
(external opportunity)
= WO1: Purchase competitors’
production facilities
S2: R&D has developed four
new products in twelve months
(internal strength)
+ T1: Sugary drink consumption
is declining 5 percent annually
(external threat)
= ST1: Spend $1 million to
promote healthiness of four new
products
W2: Poor employee morale
(internal weakness) + T2: Healthcare costs rose 7
percent last year (external threat)
= WT1: Implement a new
corporate wellness program
SWOT Analysis
Strengths-Weaknesses-Opportunities-Threats (SWOT) Analysis is an important matching
tool that helps managers develop four types of strategies: SO (strengths-opportunities) strate-
gies, WO (weaknesses-opportunities) strategies, ST (strengths-threats) strategies, and WT
(weaknesses-threats) strategies.11 Matching key external and internal factors is a critically impor-
tant activity in strategic planning. Note in Table 1-5 that the resultant strategies 1, 2, 3, and 4 are
SO, WO, ST, and WT strategies, respectively. SWOT analysis is explained further in Chapter 6,
but the matching of external with internal factors to generate strategies results in a SWOT Matrix
as illustrated in Figure 1-2.
Annual Objectives
Annual objectives are short-term milestones that organizations must achieve to reach long-
term objectives. Like long-term objectives, annual objectives should be measurable, quan-
titative, challenging, realistic, consistent, and prioritized. They must also be established at
the corporate, divisional, and functional levels in a large organization. Annual objectives
should be stated in terms of management, marketing, finance/accounting, and production
accomplishments. A set of annual objectives is needed for each long-term objective. These
S W
O
T
STRENGTHS (S) WEAKNESSES (W)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
OPPORTUNITIES (O) SO STRATEGIES
ST STRATEGIES
WO STRATEGIES
WT STRATEGIES
1.
2.
ETC.
1.
2.
ETC.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
THREATS (T)
1.
2.
ETC.
1.
2.
ETC.
FIGURE 1-2
The Basic SWOT Matrix Format
43
44 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
objectives are especially important in strategy implementation, whereas long-term objectives
are particularly important in strategy formulation. Annual objectives provide the basis for
allocating resources.
Policies
Policies are the means by which annual objectives will be achieved. Policies include guide-
lines, rules, and procedures established to support efforts to achieve stated objectives. Policies
are guides to decision making and address repetitive or recurring situations. Usually, policies
are stated in terms of management, marketing, finance/accounting, production/operations, R&D,
and MIS activities. They may be established at the corporate level and apply to an entire orga-
nization, at the divisional level and apply to a single division, or they may be established at the
functional level and apply to particular operational activities or departments.
Like annual objectives, policies are especially important in strategy implementation because
they outline an organization’s expectations of its employees and managers. Policies allow con-
sistency and coordination within and between organizational departments. For example, IBM
recently instituted a new policy requiring employees to work from an IBM office rather than work-
ing remotely, reversing a 30-year policy. IBM had previously for decades boasted that more than
40 percent of its employees worked remotely, but the company’s new policy is aimed at improving
employee collaboration and accelerating the pace of work. The policy is also aimed at reversing
IBM’s two consecutive quarters of declining revenue. Several large companies are following the
IBM lead, recalling at-home employees, including Yahoo, Bank of America, and Aetna Inc.
Benefits of Engaging in Strategic Management Strategic management allows an organization to be more proactive than reactive in shaping its
own future; it allows an organization to initiate and influence (rather than just respond to) activi-
ties, and thus, to exert control over its own destiny. Small business owners, chief executive offi-
cers, presidents, and managers of many for-profit and nonprofit organizations have recognized
and realized the benefits of strategic management.
Historically, the principal benefit of strategic management has been to help organiza-
tions formulate better strategies through the use of a more systematic, logical, and rational
approach for decision making. In addition, the process, rather than the decision or document,
is also a major benefit of engaging in strategic management. Through involvement in the
process (i.e., dialogue and participation), managers and employees become committed to sup-
porting the organization. A key to successful strategic management is communication, and
it may be the most important word in all of management. Figure 1-3 illustrates this intrinsic
benefit of a firm engaging in strategic planning; note that all firms need all employees “on a
mission” to help the firm succeed.
Dale McConkey said, “Plans are less important than planning.” The manner in which strate-
gic management is carried out is therefore exceptionally important. A major aim of the process
LO 1.5
a. Dialogue b. Participation
Enhanced Communication
Deeper/Improved Understanding
a. Of others’ views b. Of what the firm is doing/planning and why
THE RESULT
All Managers and Employees on a Mission to Help the Firm Succeed
Greater Commitment
a. To achieve objectives b. To implement strategies c. To work hard
FIGURE 1-3
Benefits to a Firm that Does Strategic Planning
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 45
is to achieve understanding and commitment from all managers and employees. Understanding
may be the most important benefit of strategic management, followed by commitment. When
managers and employees understand what the organization is doing and why, they often feel
a part of the firm and become committed to assisting it. This is especially true when employ-
ees also understand links between their own compensation and organizational performance.
Managers and employees become surprisingly creative and innovative when they understand and
support the firm’s mission, objectives, and strategies. A great benefit of strategic management,
then, is the opportunity that the process provides to empower individuals. Empowerment is the
act of strengthening employees’ sense of effectiveness by encouraging them to participate in
decision making and to exercise initiative and imagination and rewarding them for doing so. You
want your people to run the business as it if were their own.
Strategic planning is a learning, helping, educating, and supporting process, not merely a
paper-shuffling activity among top executives. Strategic-management dialogue is more impor-
tant than a nicely bound strategic-management document. A strategist must avoid developing
a strategic plan alone and then present the plan to operating managers to execute. Through
involvement in the process, line managers must become “owners” of the strategy. Ownership
of a strategic plan by the people who have to execute the plan is a key to success in any
organization.
Although making good strategic decisions is the major responsibility of an organization’s
owner or chief executive officer, both managers and employees must also be involved in strategy
formulation, implementation, and evaluation activities. Participation is a key to gaining com-
mitment for needed changes. An increasing number of corporations and institutions are using
strategic management to make effective decisions. But strategic management is not a guarantee
for success; it can be dysfunctional if conducted haphazardly.
Financial Benefits
Organizations that use strategic-management concepts are generally more successful, showing
significant improvement in sales, profitability, and productivity, compared to firms without sys-
tematic planning activities. High-performing firms tend to do systematic planning to prepare for
future fluctuations in their external and internal environments. Firms with management systems
that use strategic-planning concepts, tools, and techniques generally exhibit superior long-term
financial performance relative to their industry.
High-performing firms seem to make more informed decisions with good anticipation of
both short- and long-term consequences. In contrast, firms that perform poorly often engage in
activities that are shortsighted and do not reflect good forecasting of future conditions. Strategists
of low-performing organizations are often preoccupied with solving internal problems and meet-
ing paperwork deadlines. They typically underestimate their competitors’ strengths and overesti-
mate their own firm’s strengths. They often attribute weak performance to uncontrollable factors
such as a poor economy, technological change, or foreign competition.
More than 100,000 businesses in the United States fail annually. Business failures include
bankruptcies, foreclosures, liquidations, and court-mandated receiverships. Although many
factors besides a lack of effective strategic management can lead to business failure, the plan-
ning concepts and tools described in this text can yield substantial financial benefits for any
organization.
Nonfinancial Benefits
Besides helping firms avoid financial demise, strategic management offers other tangible
benefits, such as enhanced awareness of external threats, improved understanding of com-
petitors’ strategies, increased employee productivity, reduced resistance to change, and a
clearer understanding of performance–reward relationships. Strategic management enhances
the problem-prevention capabilities of organizations because it promotes interaction among
managers at all divisional and functional levels. Firms that have nurtured their managers and
employees, shared organizational objectives with them, empowered them to help improve the
product or service, and recognized their contributions can turn to them for help in a pinch
because of this interaction.
46 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
In addition to empowering managers and employees, strategic management often brings
order and discipline to an otherwise floundering firm. It can be the beginning of an efficient and
effective managerial system. Strategic management may renew confidence in the current busi-
ness strategy or point to the need for corrective actions. The strategic-management process pro-
vides a basis for identifying and rationalizing the need for change to all managers and employees
of a firm; it helps them view change as an opportunity rather than as a threat. Some nonfinancial
benefits of a firm using strategic management are increased discipline, improved coordination,
enhanced communication, increased forward thinking, improved decision making, increased
synergy, and more effective allocation of time and resources.
Why Some Firms Do No Strategic Planning Some firms do not engage in formal strategic planning, and some firms do engage in strategic
planning but receive little support from managers and employees. Ten reasons (excuses) often
given for minimal or no strategic planning in a firm are as follows:
1. No formal training in strategic management
2. No understanding of or appreciation for the benefits of planning
3. No monetary rewards for doing planning
4. No punishment for not planning
5. Too busy “firefighting” (resolving internal crises) to plan ahead
6. View planning as a waste of time because no product/service is made
7. Laziness; effective planning takes time and effort; time is money
8. Content with current success; failure to realize that success today is no guarantee for suc-
cess tomorrow;
9. Overconfidence
10. Prior bad experience with strategic planning done sometime, somewhere
Pitfalls in Strategic Planning Strategic planning is an involved, intricate, and complex process that takes an organization into
uncharted territory. It does not provide a ready-to-use prescription for success; instead, it takes the
organization through a journey and offers a framework for addressing questions and solving prob-
lems. Being aware of potential pitfalls and being prepared to address them is essential to success.
There are some pitfalls in doing strategic planning; avoid the following:
• Using strategic planning to gain control over decisions and resources • Doing strategic planning only to satisfy accreditation or regulatory requirements • Too hastily moving from mission development to strategy formulation • Not communicating the plan to employees, who continue working in the dark • Top managers making many intuitive decisions that conflict with the formal plan • Top managers not actively supporting the strategic-planning process • Not using plans as a standard for measuring performance • Delegating planning to a “planner” rather than involving all managers • Not involving key employees in all phases of planning • Not creating a collaborative climate supportive of change • Viewing planning as unnecessary or unimportant • Viewing planning activities as silos comprised of independent parts • Becoming so engrossed in current problems that insufficient or no planning is done • Being so formal in planning that flexibility and creativity are stifled12
Comparing Business and Military Strategies A strong military heritage underlies the study of strategic management. Terms such as objec-
tives, mission, strengths, and weaknesses were first formulated to address problems on the
battlefield. According to Webster’s New World Dictionary, strategy is “the science of planning
LO 1.6
LO 1.7
LO 1.8
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 47
and directing large-scale military operations, of maneuvering forces into the most advanta-
geous position prior to actual engagement with the enemy.”13 The word strategy comes from
the Greek strategos, which refers to a military general and combines stratos (the army) and
agos (to lead). The history of strategic planning began in the military. A key aim of both busi-
ness and military strategy is “to gain competitive advantage.” In many respects, business strat-
egy is like military strategy, and military strategists have learned much over the centuries that
can benefit business strategists today.
Both business and military organizations try to use their own strengths to exploit com-
petitors’ weaknesses. If an organization’s overall strategy is wrong (ineffective), then all the
efficiency in the world may not be enough to allow success. Business or military success
is generally not the happy result of accidental strategies. Rather, success is the product of
both continuous attention to changing external and internal conditions and the formulation
and implementation of insightful adaptations to those conditions. The element of surprise
provides great competitive advantages in both military and business strategy; information
systems that provide data on opponents’ or competitors’ strategies and resources are also
vitally important.
A fundamental difference between military and business strategy is that business strategy
is formulated, implemented, and evaluated with an assumption of competition, whereas mili-
tary strategy is based on an assumption of conflict. In a military setting there is generally one
winner, but in business there are usually multiple winners. For example, several firms can win
in the hamburger business; you do not have to confront McDonald’s head on, instead offer a
different mix of burgers, restaurant design, and customer service and still be successful. This
example explains competition and avoiding conflict with a larger player such as McDonald’s. In
military situations, it is often impossible to avoid conflict with the larger army. Business strate-
gists have access to valuable insights that military thinkers have refined over time. Superior
strategy formulation and implementation can overcome an opponent’s superiority in numbers
and resources.
Born in Pella in 356 bce, Alexander the Great was king of Macedon, a state in northern
ancient Greece. Tutored by Aristotle until the age of 16, Alexander had created one of the largest
empires of the ancient world by the age of thirty, stretching from the Ionian Sea to the Himalayas.
Alexander was undefeated in battle and is considered one of history’s most successful command-
ers. He became the measure against which military leaders even today compare themselves, and
military academies throughout the world still teach his strategies and tactics. Alexander the Great
once said, “Greater is an army of sheep led by a lion, than an army of lions led by a sheep.” This
quote reveals the overwhelming importance of an excellent strategic plan for any organization
to succeed.
Both business and military organizations must adapt to change and constantly improve
to be successful. Too often, firms do not change their strategies when their environment and
competitive conditions dictate the need to change. Gluck offered a classic military example
of this:
When Napoleon won, it was because his opponents were committed to the strategy, tac-
tics, and organization of earlier wars. When he lost—against Wellington, the Russians,
and the Spaniards—it was because he, in turn, used tried-and-true strategies against en-
emies who thought afresh, who were developing the strategies not of the last war but of
the next.14
Sun Tzu’s The Art of War has been applied to many fields well outside of the military.
Much of the text is about how to fight wars without actually having to do battle: It gives tips on
how to outsmart one’s opponent so that physical battle is not necessary. As such, the book has
found application as a training guide for many competitive endeavors that do not involve actual
combat, such as in devising courtroom trial strategy or acquiring a rival company. Similarities
can be construed from Sun Tzu’s writings to the practice of formulating and implementing
strategies among businesses today. Table 1-6, on page 48, provides narrative excerpts from
The Art of War; which of the principles listed do you believe are most applicable or analogous
to companies as compared to armies?
48 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
TABLE 1-6 Excerpts from Sun Tzu’s The Art of War Writings
• Strategic planning is a matter of vital importance to the state: a matter of life or death, the road either
to survival or ruin. Hence, it is imperative that it be studied thoroughly.
• Strategic planning is based on deception. When near the enemy, make it seem that you are far away;
when far away, make it seem that you are near. Hold out baits to lure the enemy. Strike the enemy
when he is in disorder. Avoid the enemy when he is stronger. Attack the enemy where he is unpre-
pared. Appear where you are not expected.
• A speedy victory is the main object in strategic planning. If this is long in coming, weapons are
blunted and morale depressed. When the army engages in protracted campaigns, the resources of the
state will fall short. Thus, while we have heard of stupid haste in war, we have not yet seen a clever
operation that was prolonged.
• Generally, in strategic planning the best policy is to take a state intact; to ruin it is inferior to this. To
capture the enemy’s entire army is better than to destroy it; to take intact a regiment, a company, or
a squad is better than to destroy it. For to win one hundred victories in one hundred battles is not the
epitome of skill. To subdue the enemy without fighting is the supreme excellence. Those skilled in
war subdue the enemy’s army without battle.
• The art of using troops is this: When ten to the enemy’s one, surround him. When five times his
strength, attack him. If double his strength, divide him. If equally matched, you may engage him with
some good plan. If weaker, be capable of withdrawing. And if in all respects unequal, be capable of
eluding him.
• Know your enemy and know yourself, and in a hundred battles you will never be defeated. When you
are ignorant of the enemy but know yourself, your chances of winning or losing are equal. If ignorant
both of your enemy and of yourself, you are sure to be defeated in every battle.
• He who occupies the field of battle first and awaits his enemy is at ease, and he who comes later to
the scene and rushes into the fight is weary; those skilled in war bring the enemy to the field of battle
rather than being brought there by him.
• Analyze the enemy’s plans so that you will know his deficiencies as well as his strengths. Agitate him
to ascertain the pattern of his movement. Lure him out to reveal his dispositions and position. Launch
probing attacks to decipher strengths and weaknesses.
• Avoid strength. Strike weakness. Anyone able to win the victory by modifying his tactics in accor-
dance with the enemy situation may be said to be divine.
• If you decide to go into battle, do not announce your intentions or plans. Project “business as usual.”
• Unskilled leaders work out their conflicts on battlefields. Brilliant strategists rarely go to battle; they
achieve their objectives through tactical positioning well in advance of confrontation.
• When you do decide to challenge another company (or army), much calculating, estimating, analyz-
ing, and positioning bring triumph. Little computation brings defeat.
• Skillful leaders do not let a strategy inhibit creative counter-movement. Thus, commands from a
distance should not interfere with spontaneous maneuvering at the point of attack.
• When a decisive advantage is gained over a rival, skillful leaders do not press on. They hold their
position and give their rivals the opportunity to surrender or merge. Never allow your forces to be
damaged by those who have nothing to lose.
Note: The word strategic planning is substituted for war or warfare.
Source: Based on Sun Tzu’s The Art of War Writings, 1910, Lionel Giles.
Developing Employability Skills The how-to, skills-oriented, practical approach of this textbook’s content and layout enables
students to gain numerous career-enhancing (employability) skills that experts say are vital
for success in the twenty-first-century workplace. “Employability” skills include actual
tools, techniques, and concepts being used by businesses and learned by students using this
text; the skills can be grouped into 6 broad categories and 14 specific categories, as shown in
Table 1-7.
LO 1.9
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 49
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS
Figure 1-4 reveals that to gain and sustain competitive advantages,
a firm must create and nurture a clear vision and mission, and
then systematically formulate, implement, and evaluate strategies.
Consistent business success rarely happens by chance; it most often
results from careful planning followed by diligent, intelligent, hard
work. If the process were easy, every business would be success-
ful. Consistent success requires that strategists gather and assimilate
relevant data, make tough trade-off decisions among various op-
tions that would benefit the firm, energize and reward employees,
and continually adapt to change. To survive and prosper, a business
must gain and sustain at least several major competitive advantages
over rival firms. In the process, many attractive options will be dis-
carded in favor of a few; strategic planning in a sense can be de-
fined as “choosing what not to do.”
TABLE 1-7 Employability Skills to Be Gained by Students Using This Text
Broad Skills to Be Developed 1. Critical thinking: to define and solve problems and make decisions or form judgments about a
particular situation or set of circumstances.
2. Collaboration: to work with colleagues on reports, presentations, and projects.
3. Knowledge application and analysis: to learn a concept and then apply that knowledge to other
challenges.
4. Business ethics and social responsibility: to know in your heart that good ethics is good business.
5. Information technology: to enhance one’s word-processing, spreadsheets, database, presentation,
and software skills.
6. Data literacy: to access, assess, interpret, manipulate, summarize, and communicate data.
Specific Skills to Be Gained; Learn How to: 1. Develop a three-year strategic plan for any for-profit or nonprofit company or organization.
2. Write and evaluate vision and mission statements.
3. Conduct an external and internal strategic planning assessment.
4. Formulate strategies using SWOT analysis.
5. Develop and use a BCG and IE portfolio matrix analysis.
6. Develop and use a QSPM analysis.
7. Determine an appropriate set of recommendations with associated costs for any firm.
8. Develop and use perceptual maps to better position firms versus rival companies.
9. Determine the value of any firm using various corporate valuation methods.
10. Perform EPS-EBIT analysis to determine the extent that debt versus stock should be used to
raise needed capital for the firm.
11. Develop and use value chain analysis, balance scorecards, and financial ratio analysis.
12. Evaluate corporate structures and develop effective organizational charts.
13. Develop and use projected financial statements to support any proposed strategic plan.
14. Use a popular corporate strategic planning Excel template.
Means Used to Develop Skills This text has:
11 concise chapters organized around a practical, integrative strategic-planning model
61 end-of-chapter assurance-of-learning exercises organized in four effective, fun categories
355 end-of-chapter review questions
30 brand-new, student-friendly cases on companies in the news undergoing change
11 mini-cases with chapter relevant questions
1 Cohesion Case on Coca-Cola at the end of this chapter and many associated end-of-chapter exercises
1 popular Excel-based, Strategic Planning Template widely used by both companies and students doing
strategic planning (see the author website at www.strategyclub.com)
750 chapter MyLab questions written by the authors
750 case MyLab questions written by the authors
50 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
The strategic-management process represents a systematic means
for creating, maintaining, and strengthening a firm’s competitive ad-
vantages. This text provides step-by-step guidance throughout the
process to help strategists gain and sustain a firm’s competitive advan-
tages. As the eleven chapters unfold, more than one hundred key ele-
ments of the process, ranging from developing portfolio matrices to
managing workplace romance, are examined to help strategists lead
the firm in delivering prosperity to shareholders, customers, and em-
ployees. The 11 chapters provide a clear, planned, journey through the
strategic-management process, with numerous highlights accented
along the way, so strategists can perform essential analyses and an-
ticipate and resolve potential problems in leading their firm to success.
Use the free Excel template at www.strategyclub.com to keep your
firm’s strategic-planning process track.
Establish A Clear Vision & Mission
Evaluate & Monitor Results:
Take Corrective Actions; Adapt
To Change
Gain & Sustain Competitive Advantages
Formulate Strategies: Collect, Analyze, &
Prioritize Data Using Matrices; Establish A Clear Strategic Plan
Implement Strategies: Establish Structure; Allocate Resources; Motivate & Reward; Attract Customers; Manage Finances
FIGURE 1-4
How to Gain and Sustain Competitive Advantages
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS
In performing strategic-management case analysis, emphasize
throughout your project, beginning with the first page or slide,
where your firm has competitive advantages and disadvantages.
More importantly, emphasize throughout how you recommend the
firm sustain and grow its competitive advantages and how you rec-
ommend the firm overcome its competitive disadvantages. Pave the
way early and often in your presentation for what you ultimately
recommend your firm should do over the next three years. The no-
tion of competitive advantage should be integral to the discussion
of every page or PowerPoint slide. Therefore, avoid being merely
descriptive in your written or oral analysis; rather, be prescriptive,
insightful, and forward-looking throughout your project.
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 51
TABLE 1-8 Twelve Reasons Students (and Companies) Use the Strategic Planning Template at www.strategyclub.com
1. To save time in preparing a strategic-management case analysis; enables user to focus on the
“thinking rather than the mechanics” of developing matrices and performing analyses.
2. To follow the correct process in formulating and implementing strategies.
3. To avoid mistakes in math calculations, plotting points, and drawing graphs.
4. To develop professional-looking charts, graphs, and matrices.
5. To develop existing and projected financial ratios.
6. To correctly place firms in BCG and IE portfolio matrices.
7. To examine many different scenarios for using debt versus stock to raise needed capital, using
EPS-EBIT analysis.
8. To vary weights and ratings in matrices and to see the resultant impact on total weighted scores.
9. To more easily share information with team members and colleagues.
10. To more easily develop projected financial statements to reveal the expected impact of various
strategies.
11. To develop skills with perceptual mapping or product positioning.
12. To gain experience using actual corporate strategic planning software; many business jobs require
proficiency in Excel, which students gain in using the template.
Chapter Summary All firms have a strategy, even if it is informal, unstructured, and sporadic. All organizations are
heading somewhere, but unfortunately some organizations do not know where they are going.
The old saying “If you do not know where you are going, then any road will lead you there!”
accents the need for organizations to use strategic-management concepts and techniques. The
strategic-management process is becoming more widely used by small firms, large companies,
nonprofit institutions, governmental organizations, and multinational conglomerates alike. The
process of empowering managers and employees has almost limitless benefits.
Organizations should take a proactive rather than a reactive approach in their industry, and
they should strive to influence, anticipate, and initiate rather than just respond to events. The
strategic-management process embodies this approach to decision making. It represents a logical,
systematic, and objective approach for determining an enterprise’s future direction. The stakes
are generally too high for strategists to use intuition alone in choosing among alternative courses
of action. Successful strategists take the time to think about their businesses, where they are with
their businesses, and what they want to be as organizations; and then they implement programs
and policies to get from where they are to where they want to be in a reasonable period of time.
It is a known and accepted fact that people and organizations that plan ahead are much more
likely to become what they want to become than those that do not plan at all. A good strategist
plans and controls his or her plans, whereas a bad strategist never plans and then tries to control
people! This text is devoted to providing you with the tools necessary to be a good strategist.
Key Terms and Concepts annual objectives (p. 42)
competitive advantage (p. 38)
employability (p. 48)
empowerment (p. 45)
environmental scanning (p. 40)
external opportunities (p. 40)
For all the reasons given in Table 1-8, use the free Excel strategic planning template at
www.strategyclub.com to develop your three-year strategic plan for any assigned case company.
external threats (p. 40)
internal strengths (p. 40)
internal weaknesses (p. 40)
intuition (p. 37)
long-range planning (p. 34)
long-term objectives (p. 41)
mission statement (p. 40)
policies (p. 44)
retreats (p. 35)
strategic management (p. 32)
strategic-management model (p. 34)
strategic-management process (p. 35)
strategic planning (p. 33)
strategies (p. 41)
strategists (p. 38)
strategy evaluation (p. 36)
strategy formulation (p. 35)
strategy implementation (p. 36)
sustained competitive
advantage (p. 38)
SWOT analysis (p. 42)
vision statement (p. 39)
Issues for Review and Discussion
1-1. Why do you believe SWOT analysis is so commonly
used by businesses in doing strategic planning?
1-2. What variable does recent research reveal to be most
important of all in doing business? Explain why this
variable is so important.
1-3. For your college or university, identify a strategy that
would exemplify the matching concept evidenced in
SWOT analysis.
1-4. Diagram the comprehensive strategic-management
model.
1-5. Develop a diagram to reveal the benefits to a firm for
doing strategic planning. Include “improved understand-
ing,” “enhanced communication,” “all managers and
employees on a mission,” and “greater commitment”—
in the correct order.
1-6. How important do you believe “having an excellent
game plan” is to winning a basketball or football game
against your university’s major rival? Discuss.
1-7. Are strategic management and strategic planning
synonymous terms? Explain.
1-8. Why do many firms move too hastily from vision
and mission development to devising alternative
strategies?
1-9. Why are strategic-planning retreats often conducted
away from the worksite? How often should firms have a
retreat, and who should participate in them?
1-10. Distinguish between long-range planning and strategic
planning.
1-11. How important do you think “being adept at adapting”
is for business firms? Explain.
1-12. As cited in the chapter, famous businessman Edward
Deming once said, “In God we trust. All others bring
data.” What did Deming mean in terms of developing a
strategic plan?
1-13. What strategies do you believe can save newspaper
companies from extinction?
1-14. Distinguish between the concepts of vision and mission.
1-15. Your university has fierce competitors. List three ex-
ternal opportunities and three external threats that face
your university.
1-16. List three internal strengths and three internal weak-
nesses that characterize your university.
1-17. List reasons why objectives are essential for organiza-
tional success.
1-18. Why are policies especially important in strategy
implementation?
1-19. What is a “retreat,” and why do firms take the time and
spend the money to have these?
1-20. Discuss the notion of strategic planning being more
formal versus informal in an organization. On a 1- to
10-scale from formal to informal, what number best
represents your view of the most effective approach?
Why?
1-21. List what you believe are the five most important les-
sons for business that can be garnered from The Art of
War.
1-22. What is the fundamental difference between business
strategy and military strategies in terms of basic as-
sumptions?
1-23. Explain why the strategic-management class is often
called a “capstone course.”
1-24. What aspect of strategy formulation do you think
requires the most time? Why?
1-25. Why is strategy implementation often considered
the most difficult stage in the strategic-management
process?
1-26. Why is it so important to integrate intuition and analysis
in strategic management?
1-27. Explain the importance of a vision and a mission state-
ment.
1-28. Discuss relationships among objectives, strategies, and
policies.
1-29. Why do you think some chief executive officers fail to use
a strategic-management approach to decision making?
52 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
1- 30. Discuss the importance of feedback in the strategic-
management model.
1- 31. How can strategists best ensure that strategies will be
effectively implemented?
1- 32. Give an example of a recent political development that
changed the overall strategy of an organization.
1- 33. Who are the major competitors of your college or uni-
versity? What are their strengths and weaknesses? What
are their strategies? How successful are these institu-
tions compared to your college?
1- 34. In your opinion, what is the single major benefit of
using a strategic-management approach to decision
making? Justify your answer.
1- 35. Most students will never become a chief executive
officer or even a top manager in a large company. So
why is it important for all business majors to study
strategic management?
1- 36. Describe the content available at the Strategy Club
website at www.strategyclub.com .
1- 37. List four financial and four nonfinancial benefits of a
firm engaging in strategic planning.
1- 38. Why is it that a firm can normally sustain a competitive
advantage for only a limited period of time?
1- 39. Why it is not adequate simply to obtain competitive
advantage?
1- 40. How can a firm best achieve sustained competitive
advantage?
1- 41. In sequential order in the strategic-planning process,
arrange the following appropriately: policies,
objectives, vision, strategies, mission, strengths.
1- 42. Label the following as an opportunity, a strategy, or
a strength.
a. XYZ Inc. is hiring fifty more salespersons.
b. XYZ Inc. has fifty salespersons.
c. XYZ Inc.’s rival firm has only fifty salespersons.
1- 43. Explain why internal strengths and weaknesses should
be stated in divisional terms to the extent possible.
1- 44. Explain why both internal and external factors should
be stated in specific terms (that is, using numbers, per-
centages, money ratios, and comparisons over time) to
the extent possible.
1- 45. Identify the three activities that comprise strategy evaluation.
1- 46. List six characteristics of annual objectives.
1- 47. Would strategic-management concepts and techniques
benefit foreign businesses as much as domestic firms?
Justify your answer.
1- 48. What do you believe are some potential pitfalls or risks in us-
ing a strategic-management approach to decision making?
1- 49. What does recent research reveal to be the most important
component or activity in the strategic-management process?
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 53
MINI-CASE ON TESLA, INC. (TSLA)
WHICH AMERICAN COMPANY DOES THE BEST JOB OF STRATEGIC PLANNING, AND HOW IS IT DONE? The answer to the first part of the question posed may be Tesla Inc., the U.S. electric automobile
manufacturer founded in 2003 and headquartered in Palo Alto, California. The answer to the second
part of the question may be “by matching internal strengths/weaknesses with external opportunity/
threats” using SWOT analysis. For the first time ever, in 2017, Tesla joined the Fortune 500 largest
companies in the United States; the company’s annual revenues exceed $7 billion.
An integral part of Tesla’s excellent strategic plan is to capitalize on the 6.5 percent annual gross
domestic product (GDP) growth in China, compared to the GDP growth of about 2 percent in the United
States. Tesla’s sales in China skyrocketed in recent years as CEO Elon Musk of Tesla capitalizes heavily
on the firm’s technological prowess (internal strength) matched with China’s booming GDP (external
opportunity) and China’s strong preference for electric vehicles (external opportunity). In 2016, sales
of electric and plug-in hybrid automobiles in China rose 50 percent to 507,000, more than triple the
comparable figure in the United States. Electric vehicles are viewed in China as a way to help clear
smoggy skies (an external opportunity), and that is a primary reason why China’s government has ex-
empted electric cars from rigid license plate restrictions in six large cities: Shanghai, Beijing, Shenzhen,
Hangzhou, Guangzhou, and Tianjin; these six cities report the highest Tesla sales.
Tesla’s strategic plan includes manufacturing cars in China by the end of 2018, because shipping
cars from California to China is costly. Tariffs and taxes incurred to export cars to China increases
the price of Tesla sedans and SUVs by 50 percent (external threat). The number of electric vehi-
cle charging stations in China exceeds one thousand (external opportunity). Tesla mass produces its
A New Tesla Anybody?
Ji m
W es
t/A la
m y
S to
ck P
h o to
54 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
Model X SUV because China’s obsession with SUVs is a decade old and growing rapidly. Sales of
SUVs in China now comprise nearly 40 percent of all passenger-vehicle sales in that country.
Turning to Australia, Tesla recently supplied the largest battery in the world to Jamestown, Aus-
tralia. The battery is storing electricity from a new wind farm that supplies thirty thousand homes with
power. The battery has a 100-megawatt capacity. Tesla’s strategic plan is for the whole world to use its
batteries in cars, trucks, homes, and businesses.
Questions
1. Identify several external opportunities and threats that face Tesla.
2. Identify several internal strengths and weaknesses that face Tesla.
3. Match several of your external and internal factors to formulate several strategies that Tesla is (or
could) use going forward.
4. What is Tesla’s competitive advantage in the automobile industry?
Source: Based on Scott Cendrowski, “Tesla Makes a U-Turn in China,” Fortune, p. 128–136. June 15, 2017.
Web Resources 1. The Author Website The website for this textbook is
widely used by both companies and students for actually doing strategic planning. The downloadable template at the website receives more than thirty thousand hits per year. www.strategyclub.com
2. SWOT Analysis Narrative and Worksheet This website explains SWOT analysis and provides a downloadable worksheet. https://www.mindtools.com/pages/article/newTMC_05.htm
3. SWOT Analysis Images This website provides more than one hundred jpeg images of SWOT matrices that can be used in a case project or strategic planning report. https://www.google.com/search?q=swot+analysis&tbm=is ch&tbo=u&source=univ&sa=X&ved=0ahUKEwjokNTano nWAhUIPiYKHdfeAOQQsAQIeQ&biw=1295&bih=743
4. Strategic-Management Models This website provides more than one hundred jpeg images of strategic-planning
models that can be used to guide a strategic planning un- dertaking https://www.google.com/search?q=strategic+ma nagement+models&client=safari&rls=en&tbm=isch&tbo= u&source=univ&sa=X&ved=0ahUKEwjh7ZfjoYnWAhV G7CYKHcNgBQcQsAQIgwE&biw=1295&bih=743
5. Strategic-Management Organizations Some popular strategy websites are as follows: Strategic Management Society (SMS)— https://strategicmanagement.net/—publishes the Strategic Management Journal and holds annual strategic management conferences Association for Strategic Planning—www .strategyassociation.org/—provides a Strategic Management Professional (SMP) certification program McKinsey & Company—www.mckinsey.com—perhaps the largest management-consulting firm in the world; the company does extensive strategic planning consulting
Current Readings Arend, Richard J., Y. Lisa Zhao, Michael Song, and Im Subin.
“Strategic Planning as a Complex and Enabling Mana-
gerial Tool.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 8
(August 2017): 1741–1752. Chen, Tianxu, Lihong Olan, and Vadake Narayanan. “Battle on
the Wrong Field? Entrant Type, Dominant Designs, and Technology Exit.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 13 (December 2017): 2553–2743.
Cheng, Gao, Tiona Zuzul, Geoffrey Jones, and Tarun Khann. “Overcoming Institutional Voids: A Reputation- Based View of Long-Run Survival.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 11 (November 2017): 2147–2167.
Crilly, Donal. “Time and Space in Strategy Discourse: Implications for Intertemporal Choice.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 12 (December 2017): 2370–2389.
Detien, Jodi, and Sheila S. Webber. “Strategic Shifts that Build Executive Leadership,” Business Horizons 60, Issue 3 (May 2017): 335–343.
Dorobantu, Sinziana, Aseem Kaul, and Bennet Zelner. “Nonmarket Strategy Research Through the Lens of New Institutional Economics: An Integrative Review and Future Directions.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 1 (January 2017): 114–140.
Durand, Rodolphe, Robert M. Grant, and Tammy L. Madsen. “The Expanding Domain of Strategic Management Research and the Quest for Integration.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 1 (January 2017): 4–16.
Flammer, Caroline, and Pratima Bansal. “Does a Long-Term Orientation Create Value? Evidence from a Regression Discontinuity.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 9 (September 2017): 1827–1847.
Gans, Joshua, and Michael D. Ryall. “Value Capture Theory: A Strategic Management Review.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 1 (January 2017): 17–41.
Han, T. J. Smit, and Lenos Trigeorgis. “Strategic NPV: Real Options and Strategic Games Under Different Information Structures.” Strategic Management Journal 39, Issue 1 (January 2018): 242–266.
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 55
Mankins, Michael, Karen Harris, and David Harding. “Strategy in the Age of Superabundant Capital.” Harvard Business Review 95, Issue 2 (March/April 2017): 66–75.
McIntyre, David P., and Arati Srinivasan. “Networks, Platforms, and Strategy: Emerging Views and Next Steps.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 1 (January 2017): 141–160.
Menon, Anoop. “Bringing Cognition into Strategic Interactions: Strategic Mental Models and Open Questions.” Strategic Management Journal 39, Issue 1 (January 2018): 168–192.
Miles, Sandra Jeanquart, and Mark Van Clieaf, “Strategic Fit: Key to Growing Enterprise Value Through Organizational Capital. Business Horizons 60, Issue 1 (January 2017): 55–65.
Ramirez, Rafael, Steve Churchhouse, Alejandra Palermo, and Jonas Hoffmann. “Using Scenario Planning to Reshape
Strategy.” MIT Sloan Management Review 58, Issue 4 (Summer 2017): 31–37.
Ross, Jeanne W., Ina M. Sebastian, and Cynthia M. Beath, “How to Develop a Great Digital Strategy.” Sloan Management Review 58, Issue 2 (Winter 2017): 7–9.
Trigeorgis, Lenos and Jeffrey J. Reuer. “Real Options Theory in Strategic Management.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 1 (January 2017): 42–63.
Wolf, Carolina, and Steven W. Floyd. “Strategic Planning Research: Toward a Theory-Driven Agenda.” Journal of Management 43, Issue 6 (July 2017): 1754–1788.
Zhao, Eric Yanfei, Greg Fisher, Michael Lounsbury, and Danny Miller. “Optimal Distinctiveness: Broadening the Interface Between Institutional Theory and Strategic Management.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 1 (January 2017): 93–113.
Endnotes 1. Fred R. David, “How Companies Define Their Mission,”
Long Range Planning 22, no. 1 (February 1989): 91. See
also Anik Ratnaningsih, Nadjadji Anwar, Patdono Su-
wignjo, and Putu Artama Wiguna, “Balance Scorecard
of David’s Strategic Modeling at Industrial Business for
National Construction Contractor of Indonesia,” Journal of
Mathematics and Technology, no. 4 (October 2010): 20.
2. G. L. Schwenk and K. Schrader, “Effects of Formal Stra-
tegic Planning in Financial Performance in Small Firms: A
Meta-Analysis,” Entrepreneurship and Practice 3, no. 17
(1993): 53–64.
3. Peter Drucker, Management: Tasks, Responsibilities, and
Practices (New York: Harper & Row, 1974), 611.
4. Alfred Sloan, Jr., Adventures of the White Collar Man
(New York: Doubleday, 1941), 104.
5. Quoted in Eugene Raudsepp, “Can You Trust Your
Hunches?” Management Review 49, no. 4 (April 1960): 7.
6. Stephen Harper, “Intuition: What Separates Executives
from Managers,” Business Horizons 31, no. 5 (September–
October 1988): 16.
7. Ron Nelson, “How to Be a Manager,” Success (July–August
1985): 69.
8. Bruce Henderson, Henderson on Corporate Strategy (Boston:
Abt Books, 1979), 6.
9. Robert Waterman, Jr., The Renewal Factor: How the Best Get
and Keep the Competitive Edge (New York: Bantam, 1987).
See also BusinessWeek, September 14, 1987, 100; and Acad-
emy of Management Executive 3, no. 2 (May 1989): 115.
10. John Pearce, II, and Fred David, “The Bottom Line on
Corporate Mission Statements,” Academy of Management
Executive 1, no. 2 (May 1987): 109.
11. Heinz Weihrich, “The TOWS Matrix: A Tool for Situational
Analysis,” Long Range Planning 15, no. 2 (April 1982): 61.
Note: Although Dr. Weihrich first modified SWOT analysis
to form the TOWS matrix, the acronym SWOT is much
more widely used than TOWS in practice. See also Marilyn
Helms and Judy Nixon, “Exploring SWOT Analysis—
Where Are We Now?” Journal of Strategy and Manage-
ment 3, no. 3 (2010): 215–251.
12. Based on www.des.calstate.edu/limitations.html and
www.entarga.com/stratplan/purposes.html
13. Victoria Neufeldt, ed. Webster’s New World Dictionary,
4th ed. (Hoboken, NJ: Pearson, 1998). Pearson purchased
this dictionary from Simon & Schuster in 1998, but sold it
to IDG Books in 1999.
14. Frederick Gluck, “Taking the Mystique Out of Planning,”
Across the Board (July–August 1985), 59.
56 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
THE COHESION CASE
Coca-Cola Company, 2018 BY FRED R. DAVID
www.coca-cola.com , KO
Headquartered in Atlanta, Georgia, Coca-Cola Company (Coke) is the world’s largest producer
and distributor of beverages, marketing over 500 nonalcoholic brands in more than 200 countries.
Coke has 21 billion-dollar brands, 19 of which are available in lower- and no-sugar options. Four
of the top five beverages sold globally are Coke products: 1) Coca-Cola, 2) Diet Coke, 3) Fanta,
and 4) Sprite. Other Coke products include Dasani waters, Fanta, Gold Peak teas and coffees,
Honest Tea, Powerade sports drinks, Simply juices, Glaceau Smartwater, Sprite, and Zico coconut
water. However, company’s revenues for 2017 declined 15 percent, so rumblings are spreading
within the firm.
Coke brands sold mostly outside the United States include Ayataka green tea in Japan, I LOHAS
water in Japan, Ice Dew water in China, FUZE TEA outside the United States, Minute Maid Pulpy in
Asia Pacific, Georgia coffee in Japan, and Del Valle in Latin America. Five large independent bottling
companies supply Coke with 39 percent of their bottling needs, led by Coca-Cola FEMSA that sup-
plies central Mexico and countries in Latin and South America.
Coke revenues have declined every year for nearly a decade, usually accompanied by net income
declines. Since 2005, sales of diet soda in general have dropped every year, a combined 34 percent.
Although Diet Coke is the weakest link in the company’s whole soda lineup, the brand is still the third
best-selling carbonated drink in the United States.
Environmentalists are complaining, saying Coke produces 110 million plastic bottles annually
that end up in landfills and oceans. To combat this complaint, the company launched in 2018 its
“World Without Waste” initiative. Coke needs a good strategic plan because its customer base is erod-
ing and its shareholders want sustained 5 percent annual growth in revenues and profits—and not
declines—every year.
Copyright by Fred David Books LLC.
History Founded in 1886, Coke’s flagship product Coca-Cola was invented in 1886 by pharmacist John Pemberton
in Columbus, Georgia. Coke has operated a franchised distribution system since 1889, whereby the com-
pany only produces syrup concentrate, which is then sold to various bottlers throughout the world, who
hold exclusive territories.
Interestingly, the big, jolly man in the red suit with a white beard (Santa Claus), did not always
look that way. In 1931, Coke paid illustrator Haddon Sundblom to create advertising images depicting
a jolly, plump, red (like Coke cans) dressed, warm, friendly Santa Claus delivering toys to children.
To create the new Santa ads, Sundblom used Clement Clark Moore’s 1822 poem “A Visit from
St. Nicholas” (commonly called “’Twas the Night Before Christmas”).
Coke’s new Santa advertisements debuted in 1931 in magazines such as The Saturday Evening
Post, National Geographic, The New Yorker , and others. Before 1931, Santa was depicted as every-
thing from a tall gaunt man to a spooky-looking elf. He was often shown wearing a bishop’s robe
and a Norse huntsman’s animal skin. From 1931 to 1934, Coke ads featuring the new Santa Claus
changed the whole world’s view of Santa; these original images of Santa are valuable works of art
even today.
In 2010, Coke became the first brand to exceed 1 billion euros in annual United Kingdom
grocery sales. In January 2018, in the United States, Coke introduced its slimmer 12-ounce Diet
Coke can, updating the logo and offering the 35-year-old drink four new flavors: mango, cherry,
blood orange, and ginger lime. Diet Coke sales have declined as more people switch to other
low-calorie drinks, such as flavored fizzy water. The company said the new flavors and look—
with a different color vertical stripe for each flavor and red for plain—are aimed at appealing to
millennials (people ages 18 to 34). Coke tested more than 30 flavors before settling on the four
new ones.
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 57
Core Values, Vision, and Mission Provided on the corporate website, Coke’s core values center on seven words: leadership, collaboration,
integrity, accountability, passion, diversity, and quality. Coke’s vision statement has not changed in more
than a decade; provided on the corporate website, it reads (paraphrased):
People: To be a workplace where people are inspired to be the best they can be.
Portfolio: To offer quality beverage brands that anticipate/satisfy consumer desires/needs.
Partners: To nurture customers and suppliers working together to provide value.
Planet: To be a responsible citizen helping build and support sustainable communities.
Profit: To maximize long-term return to shareowners given our overall responsibilities.
Productivity: To be an effective, lean, and fast-moving company.
Coke’s mission statement too has not changed in more than a decade and is given on the corporate
website; it reads (paraphrased): “To refresh the planet; to create moments of optimism and happiness;
to provide value and make a difference.”
Business Ethics and Diversity
The Coke website says the company “directs zero advertising targeted to children under age 12.” Also,
in regards to business ethics, the company places substantial nutrition information, including calories,
on the front of most of their cans and packages. A wide range of packaging sizes are provided and
over 100 reduced, low, or no-calorie beverages.
Coke annually publishes an elaborate Sustainability Report that details the company’s water stew-
ardship, women’s economic empowerment, and philanthropic giving. In addition, the company’s year
2020 sustainability goals include the firm giving back 1 percent of the company’s operating income
annually, and recovering 75 percent of the recyclable bottles and cans introduced into developed mar-
kets. The report is available on the corporate website.
Financial Position Coke’s fiscal year ends on December 31. As indicated in Exhibit 1, Coke posted revenues of $35.4 billion
in 2017, compared to $41.8 billion in 2016, a 15 percent decline. Net income was $1.28 billion compared
to $6.66 billion in 2016, an 81 percent decline. Declines in both of these numbers are alarming. Note all the
negative numbers in Exhibit 1, even though for most companies 2017 was a very properous year.
Coke’s balance sheets are provided in Exhibit 2. Note that Coke purchased $3.7 billion of its
own stock in 2017. In 2017, Coke paid $5 billion out to shareholders in dividends even though the
company’s net income was only $1.28 billion. Thus, basically the company borrowed money to pay
dividends; this event resulted in a negative retained earnings for the year 2017 and a large drop in re-
tained earnings on the 2017 balance sheet, as shown in Exhibit 2. Note in Exhibit 2 that Coke’s paid-
in-capital increased a whopping 89 percent in 2017 revealing high use of equity as a source of capital.
EXHIBIT 1 Coke’s Income Statements (in millions of dollars)
Income Statement 12/31/16 12/31/17 Percent Change
Revenues $41,863 $35,410 -15.41%
Cost of Goods Sold 16,465 13,256 -19.49%
Gross Profit 25,398 22,154 -12.77%
Operating Expenses 16,772 14,653 -12.63%
EBIT 8,626 7,501 -13.04%
Interest Expense 490 759 54.90%
EBT 8,136 6,742 -17.13%
Tax 1,586 5,560 250.57%
Non-Recurring Events (23) 66 NA
Net Income 6,527 1,248 -80.88%
Source: Based on information at www.coca-colacompany.com
58 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
EXHIBIT 2 Coke’s Balance Sheets (in millions of dollars)
Balance Sheet 12/31/16 12/31/17 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short Term Investments $18,150 $15,358 -15%
Accounts Receivable 3,856 3,667 -5%
Inventory 2,675 2,655 -1%
Other Current Assets 9,329 14,865 59%
Total Current Assets 34,010 36,545 7%
Property Plant & Equipment 10,635 8,203 -23%
Goodwill 10,629 9,401 -12%
Intangibles 726 368 -49%
Other Long-Term Assets 31,270 33.379 7%
Total Assets 87,270 87,896 1%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 9,490 8,748 -8%
Other Current Liabilities 17,042 18,446 8%
Total Current Liabilities 26,532 27,194 2%
Long-Term Debt 29,684 31,182 5%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 7,834 10,543 35%
Total Liabilities 64,050 68,919 8%
Equity
Common Stock 1,760 1,760 0%
Retained Earnings 65,502 60,430 -8%
Treasury Stock (47,988) (50,677) 6%
Paid in Capital & Other 3,946 7,464 89%
Total Equity 23,220 18,977 -18%
Total Liabilities and Equity 87,270 87,896 1%
Source: Based on information at www.coca-colacompany.com
Exhibit 3 reveals that Coke spends about $4 billion annually to advertise its beverages. Note also
in Exhibit 3 that the company is intent on increasing its dividends paid every year even if it has to bor-
row money to make this payment. The company’s long-term debt is creeping up every year.
Operating Segments Regarding 2017 cases of beverages sold, the USA accounted for 19 percent of the company total; case
volume outside the USA accounted for 81 percent of sales. Of the 19 percent of cases sold in the USA, 62
percent were sparkling soft drinks.
The four countries outside the United States that Coke sells most to are Mexico, China, Brazil,
and Japan. These four countries accounted for 31 percent of Coke’s outside-USA sales in 2017, and
71 percent of these sales were of sparkling soft drinks. Coke’s revenues derived from the United
States compared to the rest of the world through 2016 are given in Exhibit 4; the company did not
provide this breakdown in 2017, perhaps because of significant declines. Note the decreases in 2016
on all three rows.
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 59
Coke has five main operating segments: (1) Europe, Middle East, and Africa, (2) Latin America,
(3) North America, (4) Asia Pacific, and (5) Bottling Investments. Revenues and operating profits by
segment are provided in Exhibit 5 and Exhibit 6, respectively. Note that North America generates 29.9
percent of coke revenues and 34.4 percent of operating income. Note that only one segment, Latin
America, showed an increase in operating income in 2017.
Source: Based on information at www.coca-colacompany.com
EXHIBIT 5 Coke’s Revenues by Segment (in millions of dollars)
2017 2016
1. Europe, Middle East, and Africa $7,374 $7,278
2. Latin America $4,029 $3,819
3. North America $10,637 $10,210
4. Asia Pacific $5,176 $5,294
5. Bottling Investments $10,605 $19,885
6. Corporate $138 $132
7. Eliminations ($2,549) ($4,755)
Total $35,410 $41,863
EXHIBIT 3 Coke Financial Data Across Key Variables (in millions of dollars)
2017 2016 2015
Advertising expenditures $3,958 $4,004 $3,976
Selling and distribution expenses $3,257 $5,177 $6,025
Treasury stock purchased $3,682 $3,681 $3,564
Number of shares repurchased 82 86 86
Average price per share of stock 44.09 $43.62 $41.33
Dividends paid 6,320 $6,043 $5,741
Long-term debt $31,182 $29,684 $28,311
Source: Based on information at www.coca-colacompany.com
EXHIBIT 4 Coke’s Revenues from the United States Compared to Outside the United States (in millions of dollars)
2016 2015
United States $19,899 $20,360
Outside United States $21,964 $23,934
Total $41,863 $44,294
Source: Based on information at www.coca-colacompany.com
EXHIBIT 6 Coke’s Total Operating Income by Segment (in millions of dollars)
2017 2016
1. Europe, Middle East, and Africa $3,646 $3,676
2. Latin America $2,214 $1,951
3. North America $2,578 $2,582
4. Asia Pacific $2,163 $2,224
5. Bottling Investments ($1,117) ($137)
6. Corporate ($1,983) ($1,670)
Total $7,501 $8,626
Source: Based on information at www.coca-colacompany.com
60 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
EXHIBIT 7 Coke’s Number of Cases Sold in 2017 Compared with 2016
Product Category Percentage Change in 2017 from 2016
1. Sparkling soft drinks –1
2. Juice, dairy, and plant-based beverages 00
3. Water, enhanced water, and sports drinks +1
4. Tea and coffee +2
Source: Based on company information.
rather than its beverages. Danone competes to a lesser degree with Coke. The number-three soft-drink
producer, Dr Pepper Snapple, produces and markets nonalcoholic beverages in the United States, Canada,
Mexico, and the Caribbean. Exhibit 9 reveals the top 10 beverages sold in the United States. Note that
Coke, inclusive of Coke Zero, Diet Coke, and other brands, lead among the top 10, but PepsiCo has four
brands in the top 10. In the percentage-change column in Exhibit 9, notice that bottled water has the
largest growth.
Source: Based on information at www.coca-colacompany.com
1. Muhtar Kent, CEO and Chairman of the Board of Directors
2. Marcos de Quinto, EVP and Chief Marketing Officer
3. Ceree Eberly, SVP and Chief People Officer
4. Bernhard Goepelt, SVP and General Counsel
5. Julie Hamilton, SVP and Chief Customer and Commercial Leadership Officer
6. James Quincey, President and COO
7. Brent Hastie, SVP, Strategy and Planning
8. Ed Hayes, SVP and Chief Technical Officer
9. Barry Simpson, SVP and CIO
1
2
12
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
13 14 15 16
10. Clyde C. Tuggle, SVP and Chief Public Affairs and Communications Officer
11. Kathy Waller, EVP and CFO
12. John Murphy, President of the Asia Pacific Group
13. Irial Finan, EVP and President, Bottling Investments Group
14. J. Alexander M. Douglas, Jr., EVP and President of Coca-Cola North America
15. Alfredo Rivera, President of the Latin America Group
16. Brian Smith, President of the Europe, Middle East, and Africa Group
EXHIBIT 8 Coke’s Top Executive Officers and Organizational Chart
Regarding number of cases of various product lines sold in 2017, Exhibit 7 reveals that only two
of four categories increased: (1) Water, enhanced water, and sports drinks, up 1 percent, and (2) Tea
and coffee, up 2 percent.
Organizational Structure Coke’s top executives and organizational structure are given in Exhibit 8. Note the segment top persons
(#12, 13, 14, 15, 16) report to the COO (# 6).
Competitors PepsiCo, Inc. and Dr Pepper Snapple are Coke’s two primary competitors, but other rival firms include
Nestlé SA, Groupe Danone, Suntory Beverage & Food Limited (“Suntory”), and Monster Beverage
Corporation. Unlike Coke, PepsiCo derives most of its revenues and growth from its snack food business
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 61
EXHIBIT 10 A Comparison of Coke to Two Big Rivals
COKE DR PEPPER PEPSICO
Market Capitalization $ 197B $ 17B $ 167B
# of Employees 100,300 20,000 264,000
Revenue $ 41.8B $ 6.6B $ 63.5B
Profit Margin 10.68% 11.73% 10.97%
EBITDA $ 10.9B $ 1.6B $ 12.6B
Operating Margin 24.14% 20.73% 16.4%
Net Income $ 6.5B $ 770M 47.0B
ROA 6.23% 9.09% 8.56%
EPS $ 0.95 $ 4.17 $ 4.84
As indicated in Exhibit 10, Coke is 11 times larger than Dr Pepper Snapple and is 18 percent
larger than PepsiCo based on market capitalization (stock price times number of shares outstanding).
However, PepsiCo is much larger than Coke on numerous other variables as given.
EXHIBIT 9 Coke and Rival Firms on Top Beverage Brands Sold (2016 and 2015)
Brand Firms Millions of Gallons 2015
Millions of Gallons 2016
Percentage Change
Share in Total 2015
Share in Total 2016
1. Coke (all types) Coca-Cola 3,994 3,933 (1.5) 12.6 12.0
2. Pepsi (all types) PepsiCo 1,946 1,859 (4.5) 6.1 5.6
3. Mountain Dew PepsiCo 1,343 1,333 (0.7) 4.2 4.1
4. Dr Pepper (all types) Dr Pepper
Snapple
1,160 1,168 0.7 3.6 3.5
5. Nestlé Pure Life Nestlé
NAmerica
1,075 1,085 1.0 3.4 3.3
6. Gatorade PepsiCo 1,042 1,082 3.8 3.3 3.3
7. Sprite Coca-Cola 866 897 3.6 2.7 2.7
8. Poland Spring Nestlé
NAmerica
758 836 10.3 2.4 2.5
9. Dasani Coca-Cola 707 743 5.0 2.2 2.3
10. Aquafina PepsiCo 546 605 10.9 1.7 1.8
TOP 10 13,437 13,541 0.8 42.2 41.2
Others 18,387 19,364 5.3 57.8 58.8
Total 31,824 32,904 3.4 100.0 100.0
Source: Based on information developed by Beverage Marketing Corporation.
PepsiCo, Inc. (PEP)
Headquartered in Purchase, New York, PepsiCo’s beverage products include Pepsi, Gatorade,
Mountain Dew, Diet Pepsi, Aquafina, Diet Mountain Dew, Tropicana Pure Premium, Mist Twist, and
Mug brands; and ready-to-drink tea and coffee, and juices. PepsiCo’s Frito-Lay segment offers Lays
and Ruffles potato chips; Doritos, Tostitos, and Santitas tortilla chips; and Cheetos cheese-flavored
snacks, branded dips, and Fritos corn chips. PepsiCo’s Quaker Foods segment provides Quaker oat-
meal, grits, rice cakes, granola, and oat squares; and Aunt Jemima mixes and syrups, Quaker Chewy
granola bars, Captain Crunch cereal, Life cereal, and Rice-A-Roni side dishes.
PepsiCo obtains about 60 percent of its revenues from food and snacks, not beverages. PepsiCo
and Coca-Cola are both investing in craft soda brands trying to reverse decreasing soda volume sales.
After acquiring two craft soda brands from Monster Beverages, Coca-Cola recently relaunched Blue
Sky and Hansen’s. A few days later, PepsiCo launched the 1893 Original Cola and Ginger Cola lines,
which are made with sparkling water, kola nut extract, and Fair Trade–certified sugar.
62 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
PepsiCo is having trouble with its Gatorade energy drink brand whose sales in the United States
declined 0.5 percent to $5.9 billion in 2017. This was the brand’s first decline in annual sales since
2012. Gatorade accounts for about 20 percent of PepsiCo’s North American drink volume. The com-
pany released Gatorade Organic in August 2016 and made $20 million on that product through the
end of 2017. The sports-drink market is becoming highly competitive; even up-start BodyArmour, a
distant third in market share, is gaining rapidly on PepsiCo in sports drinks, such as Gatorade.
Dr Pepper Snapple Group, Inc. (DPS)
Headquartered in Plano, Texas, DPS manufactures nonalcoholic beverages in the United States,
Canada, Mexico, and the Caribbean. It also markets ready-to-drink teas, juices, juice drinks, water, and
mixers. The company offers brands such as: 7UP, A&W, Bai, Crush, Canada Dry, Schweppes, Sunkist
soda, Squirt, Hawaiian Punch, and RC Cola. DPS manufactures and sells Mott’s apple sauces. DPS’s
revenues increased slightly from $6.2 billion in 2014 to $6.3 billion in 2015, to $6.4 billion in 2016,
to $6.7 in 2017. DPS’s net income also has increased slightly every year, from $703 million in 2014
to $770 million in 2017. DPS recently acquired Bai Brands for about $1.7 billion. DPS currently has
about 8.5 percent of the U.S. nonalcoholic beverage market, according to Euromonitor International.
DPS owns seven of the top 10 noncola soft drinks on the market. Third-quarter (Q3) 2017 results
showed DPS’s carbonated soft drinks decreasing 1 percent, whereas its noncarbonated beverages in-
creased 6 percent. Q3 showed flat sales in the United States and Canada, but sales in Mexico and the
Caribbean increased 2 percent. Also for Q3, the DPS brand named Clamato grew 7 percent and Mott’s
sauce sales grew 5 percent, but Snapple sales declined 5 percent.
The big news in the beverage industry is that Keurig Green Mountain, the maker of Keurig K-Cup
coffee machines, acquired Dr Pepper Snapple in 2018. Keurig is privately owned by JAB Holdings,
one of Europe’s largest investment firms; JAB also owns Peeet’s Coffee, Panera Bread, and Krispy
Kreme doughnuts. JAB is a privately held fund that manages the money of the Reimann family, one
of Germany’s wealthiest families. This acquisition is aimed directly at both Coca-Cola and Starbucks
Corp. This acquisition puts Keurig in the global soda business and strengthens its coffee business.
Euromonitor reports that sales of ready-to-drink coffees increased more than 17 percent in 2017.
JAB’s partner in Keurig is Mondelez International that holds roughly 24 percent of the stock JAB, but
that percentage dropped to about 14 percent when the Dr Pepper acquisition was finalized. Keurig’s
revenue for 2017 was about $4.1 billion and its market share in the coffee-pod industry has declined
from 40 percent in 2013 to about 23 percent in 2017.
Groupe Danone
Headquartered in Paris, France, Groupe Danone is the number-one producer of yogurt in the world, the
number-two bottled water and baby nutrition manufacturer, number-one in manufacturing fresh dairy
products, and the European leader in medical nutrition. Danone’s primary brand in bottled water is Evian.
Danone sells flavored waters and focuses on health-conscious consumers. One brand is Levite, a big suc-
cess in Mexico. Danone continues to add new drinks in different markets, such as Taillefine Fiz in France,
which is a zero-calorie soda that has achieved a number-two ranking in the French low-calorie segment.
Danone is present in more than 130 markets and generated sales of €21.9 billion in 2016, with more than
half of that revenue coming from emerging countries. Fresh dairy products represent about 50 percent
of Danone’s total sales, early life nutrition 22 percent, water 21 percent, and medical nutrition 7 percent.
Monster Beverage Company (MNST)
Headquartered in Corona, California, Monster Beverage develops, markets, sells, and distributes
energy-drink beverages, sodas, or concentrates for energy-drink beverages, under brand names such as
Monster Energy, Monster Rehab, Monster Energy Extra Strength Nitrous Technology, Java Monster,
Muscle Monster, Mega Monster Energy, Punch Monster, Juice Monster, Ubermonster, BU, Mutant
Super Soda, Nalu, NOS, Burn, Mother, Ultra, Play and Power Play, Gladiator, Relentless, Samurai,
BPM, and Full Throttle.
Coca-Cola owns 16.7 percent of the Monster Beverage, which it purchased in 2015 for approx-
imately $2.15 billion. In addition to the equity stake, both companies’ strategic partnerships related
to business transfers and expanded global distribution. In October 2017, Coca-Cola transferred
ownership of all of its worldwide energy businesses including NOS, Full Throttle, and nine smaller
brands to Monster Beverage Company. At the same time, Monster transferred all of its nonenergy
drink businesses to Coca-Cola, including Hansen’s natural sodas, Peace Tea, Hubert’s Lemonade,
and Hansen’s juice products. As shown in Exhibit 10, energy drinks comprise 4.8 percent of all
nonalcoholic beverages sold.
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 63
Monster Beverage’s sales for Q3 2017 that ended September 30, 2017, increased 11.5 percent to
$2.6 billion from $2.3 billion versus the prior year. Net income for Q3 was $619.4 million, compared
with $539.7 million the prior year. Net sales for Monster’s Strategic Brands segment, which includes
the various energy drink brands acquired from Coke, increased 6.2 percent to $76.6 million for that
Q3, up from $72.1 million the prior year. Monster’s sales to customers outside the United States in-
creased 36.3 percent to $260.1 million in that Q3, up from $190.8 million in the prior year period. Net
income for Q3 increased 14.1 percent to $218.7 million from $191.6 million in the prior year period.
The Nonalcoholic Beverage Industry Exhibit 11 reveals the annual growth (or decline) in various categories of beverages. Notice declines in sales
of carbonated soft drinks and fruit drinks but rapid growth in sales of flavored and enhanced water and
ready-to-drink coffee.
Bottled Water
In 2016, bottled water surpassed carbonated soft drinks as the largest beverage category in the United
States by volume. Per-capita consumption of bottled water reached more than 39 gallons annually,
compared with around 38.5 gallons for carbonated soft drinks. Within the next decade, bottled water
consumption per capita is expected to surpass 50 gallons. The U.S. bottled water market showed
strong growth in terms of volume and revenues in the past 3 years. Bottled water sales are booming,
up 7.3, 7.9, and 8.6 percent in 2014, 2015, and 2016, respectively. By comparison, carbonated soft
drink volumes declined 2.1, 2.4, and 0.8 percent during those same years. According to BMC, in
2017, bottled water sales are projected to grow 8 to 9 percent, remaining the top nonalcoholic bever-
age for years to come, further confirmation of the shift in consumer preference toward healthier and
lower-calorie options.
Sparkling Water
Sparkling water is projected to outpace even bottled water in the next decade as consumers search
for tastier but healthier options. In fact, sparkling water sales surged more than 20 percent in 2017.
Flavored sparkling water sales grew by more than 15 percent in 2017 to $2.4 billion. To better reach
this flavored sparking water market, early in 2018 PepsiCo released its seltzer water brand called
Bubly. Other beverages also growing in sales are flavored and enhanced water, ready-to-drink
coffee, and energy drinks. Specifically, sales of flavored and enhanced water in the United States
increased 12.3 percent in 2016, followed by ready-to-drink coffee up 11 percent, and energy drinks
up 4.8 percent.
Given these positive trends, carbonated soft drinks still account for 83.5 percent of the bever-
ages industry’s market capitalization as of September 2017. In 2016, soda consumption in the United
States fell 0.8 percent, continuing the downward trend. Consequently, in Q2 2017, Coke reported
a 16 percent drop in net revenues to $9.7 billion. In that Q2, Coke reported increased volume for
juice, dairy, and plant-based beverages (with 3% growth), tea and coffee (2%), as well as water, en-
hanced water, and sports drinks (1%). Coke is shifting its portfolio toward smaller-sized packages and
healthier beverages. In August 2017, Coke replaced its Coke Zero products with the zero-sugar and
EXHIBIT 11 Annual Percentage Growth or Decline in Sales of Various Beverage Categories 2016 and 2015 in the United States
Flavored & Enhanced Water +12.3
Ready-to-Drink Coffee +11.0
Bottled Water +8.6
Energy Drinks +4.8
Sports Drinks +3.9
Ready-to-Drink Tea +3.1
Carbonated Soft Drinks -0.8
Fruit Drinks -1.4
Total + 3.4
Source: Based on information developed by Beverage Marketing Corporation (BMC).
64 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
zero-calorie brand Coke Zero Sugar. For PepsiCo, food and snacks volume increased 2 percent in the
first half of 2017, whereas beverages declined 1 percent.
R&D
To reverse revenue declines, beverage firms boosted R&D spending at an average annual rate of nearly
20 percent over the past 5 years. R&D spending is likely to remain high in 2017 and 2018 as beverage
companies strive to rejuvenate revenue growth. Developing flavored sparkling waters is an example.
Outside the United States
In 2016, international operations represented 62 percent of total nonbottling revenues at Coke and
42 percent at PepsiCo. Coke does business in countries using currencies other than the U.S. dollar,
including the euro, the Japanese yen, the Brazilian real, and the Mexican peso. Coke uses 72 curren-
cies in addition to the U.S. dollar. Unfavorable foreign currency exchange rates can have a significant
effect on reported revenue growth for global beverage manufacturers, especially because the U.S. dol-
lar’s value relative to foreign currencies is on average at a 3-year low.
There are uncertainties going forward in our major international markets, including the United
Kingdom’s impending withdrawal from the European Union, commonly referred to as “Brexit,” which
is due to be finalized as of December 2020 and unstable political conditions, including civil unrest
and governmental changes, in certain other international markets could undermine global consumer
confidence and reduce consumers’ purchasing power, thereby reducing demand for our products.
City, County, State, and Federal Taxes
Public health advocates are actively lobbying for tax referendums and legislation in more U.S. cities
to tax soda. Companies such as Coke and PepsiCo Soda spent nearly $70 million from 2009 to 2016
lobbying against soda taxes and warning label measures in U.S. cities and states, as well as an average
of about $15 million annually on federal lobbying, according to the consumer advocacy group Center
for Science in the Public Interest (CSPI). For example, beverage companies spent about $9.4 million
between January 2016 and June 2016 to oppose the Philadelphia City Council’s soda tax proposal, ac-
cording to CSPI’s estimates. Philadelphia eventually imposed a soda tax in June 2016, the first major
U.S. city (and the second city after Berkeley, California) to do so. In November 2016, three cities in
California (San Francisco, Albany, and Oakland) passed their own soda tax laws, as did Cook County,
Illinois (which includes Chicago) and Boulder, Colorado. In June 2017, Seattle implemented a tax of
1.75 cents per ounce on sugary drinks and soda. Chicago’s soda tax began in the Fall 2017.
Taxes on sugary beverages came into effect in Mexico on January 1, 2014, in an effort to combat obe-
sity in the country; higher product costs are likely to dampen demand, and tax revenue could help to fund
costs related to preventive actions and medical treatment. Mexico is the country with the biggest obesity
problem in the world, according to the Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations. This
will be a game changer for beverage companies exporting to Mexico (such as Coke). In 2015, soda sales
in Mexico plummeted 12 percent. Price-sensitive consumers are turning away from buying soda products.
Beverage Caloric Intake in the United States
The American Beverage Association reported in December 2017 that the average American drank
201.2 calories a day in 2016, up slightly from 2015. More than offsetting the decline in sales of
soda and juice in cans or bottles, sales of soda from fountains in restaurants are increasing. And
Americans are drinking more and more sweet tea at restaurants. In terms of liquid intake, the average
beverage calories consumed in the United States per capita per day in 2016 was sodas (126.7), juice
(42.5), teas (11.2), sports (10.6), and other (10.2) according to the Beverage Marketing Corporation.
Consumption of diet and low-calorie soda continues to fall, but consumption of sports and energy
drinks continues to rise at a faster rate.
Impulse Buying
PepsiCo is reinvesting some of the millions of dollars it is saving under the new tax laws in e-commerce,
which today accounts for roughly $1 billion in the company’s annual retail sales. PepsiCo is also in-
vesting savings in training for workers, cash returns for shareholders, and $100 million in employee
bonuses. The rise of online shopping is bad news for Coca-Cola and PepsiCo because impulse buy-
ing makes up roughly 30 percent of overall beverage sales. Without customers grabbing a Diet Pepsi
while checking out at Walmart or a two-liter bottle of Coke Zero at the grocery store, the beverage
companies would be in big trouble. Sales of soft drinks by volume have dropped for 12 consecutive
years in the United States, so companies like Coca-Cola and PepsiCo need impulse buying, which is
being eroded by more online shopping. Coca-Cola is currently investigating click-and-collect grocery
sales, bundled deals (such as meal kits), and new impulse “triggers” online.
The Future Coke swung from net income of $550 million in Q4 2016 to a net loss of $2.75 billion in Q4 2017. This
decline was mostly due to a one-time charge of $3.6 billion blamed on the new federal tax law, which forced
Coke to pay taxes on certain past offshore earnings. However, Coke supports the tax changes because its
effective tax rate is expected to decline to 21 percent in 2018.
The steady decline in consumption of carbonated beverages necessitates Coke formulating and
implementing new strategies going forward. The company needs a full-blown, comprehensive stra-
tegic plan to determine specific actions needed under the following general categories of strategies:
1. Further global expansion to tap markets not yet saturated
2. Continued product development to introduce new healthy drinks
3. Acquisition of small rival firms to gain growth in revenues
4. Continued market penetration with extensive advertising and promotion to shift consumer
perception away from unhealthiness to treating yourself with a soda
5. Continued shift to smaller cans and package sizes
6. Perhaps diversification into snacks and foods as PepsiCo has successfully done
7. Push aggressively into bottled water to capitalize on rapid growth in that sector
8. Develop natural sweeteners to replace artificial sweeteners
9. Increase lobbying to curtail city, county, and state sugar taxes
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 65
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
SET 1: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR COCA-COLA
EXERCISE 1A
Gather Strategy Information for Coca-Cola Company
Purpose
The primary purpose of this exercise is to show students how to obtain vital information for doing case
analysis or preparing a strategic plan for any publicly held firm. The secondary purpose is to familiarize
you with (1) strategy terms introduced in this chapter and (2) key sources of information for doing strategic
planning. Generally in a strategic-management course, teams of students prepare a strategic plan (case anal-
ysis) for some assigned company, so this exercise can assist in learning how to get started in such a project.
Instructions
Step 1 Read the Coca-Cola Cohesion Case and list what you consider to be the firm’s strengths,
weaknesses, opportunities, and threats. Then, go to the corporate website at www.coca-
colacompany.com, scroll down to the bottom of the website, and click on Investors. Click
Annual Reports and then click 2017 Annual Report or Form 10K. Download this pdf file to
your desktop; peruse the information and add to your list of Coca-Cola’s strengths, weak-
nesses, opportunities, and threats.
Step 2 Go to your college library website and download to your desktop Standard & Poor’s Industry
Surveys PDF file for the beverage industry. Use this information to add to your list of Coca-
Cola’s strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats.
Step 3 Go to the www.finance.yahoo.com website. Enter the stock symbol KO. Note the wealth
of information on Coca-Cola that may be obtained by clicking any item along the row
below the company name. Use this data to refine your lists of key external and internal
factors. Each factor listed for this exercise should include a percentage, number, dollar, or
ratio to reveal some quantified fact or trend. These factors provide the underlying basis for
a strategic plan because a firm strives to take advantage of strengths, improve weaknesses,
avoid threats, and capitalize on opportunities. Avoid vagueness in strategic planning.
B o b P
ar d u e/
A la
m y
S to
ck P
h o to
66 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
Step 4 Through class discussion, compare your lists of external and internal factors to those devel-
oped by other students and modify your lists as needed. Save this information for use in later
exercises in the book.
Step 5 Whatever case company you work on this semester, update the information on your com-
pany by following the steps listed above.
EXERCISE 1B
Enter Coca-Cola Vitals into the Strategic Planning Template
Purpose
The purpose of this exercise is to give you practice using resources at the author website (www.strategyclub
.com), especially the Excel strategic planning template. Thousands of students annually find the author website
resources to be immensely useful in preparing and delivering a strategic management case analysis.
Instructions
Step 1 Go to the www.strategyclub.com website. Review the following resources:
• Excel student template
• Example sample case analysis PowerPoint
• Live author videos
• Live case analysis presentation on Barnes and Noble
• Chapter and case updates
• Guidelines for presenting a strategic plan or case analysis
Step 2 Download the free Excel strategic-planning template. Read carefully instructions given with
the template.
Step 3 Using your Exercise 1A results, enter Coca-Cola’s strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and
threats into the Excel template.
Step 4 Save this file for use in later exercises.
SET 2: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR MY UNIVERSITY
EXERCISE 1C
Perform SWOT Analysis for My University
Purpose
The purpose of this exercise is to apply SWOT analysis to a nonprofit organization—namely your
college or university. SWOT analysis is the most widely used of all strategic planning tools and
techniques because it is conceptually simple and lends itself readily to discussion among manag-
ers. SWOT analysis formulates strategies by matching an organization’s internal strengths and
weaknesses with external opportunities and threats to generate feasible strategies to be considered.
For a university, external factors could include declining numbers of high school graduates;
population shifts; community relations; increased competitiveness among colleges and universi-
ties; rising numbers of adults returning to college; decreased support from local, state, and federal
agencies; increasing numbers of foreign students attending U.S. colleges; and a rising number of
Internet courses.
Internal factors of a college or university could be related to faculty, students, staff, alumni,
athletic programs, physical plant, grounds and maintenance, student housing, administration, fund-
raising, academic programs, food services, parking, placement, clubs, fraternities, sororities, and
public relations.
Instructions
Step 1 For your university, identify four External Opportunities, four External Threats, four Internal
Strengths, and four Internal Weaknesses.
Step 2 Match your external with internal factors to develop or generate two SO Strategies, two WO
Strategies, two ST Strategies, and two WT Strategies. For example, an SO Strategy to “Double
the number of online course offerings in three years” could be developed or generated based
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 67
on a strength “world renown faculty” coupled with an opportunity “rising interest in online
courses.”
Step 3 Discuss your key factors and strategies as a class.
Step 4 What new things did you learn about your university from the class discussion? How could this
type of discussion benefit an organization? Save your answers and work for use in late exercises.
SET 3: STRATEGIC PLANNING TO ENHANCE MY EMPLOYABILITY
EXERCISE 1D
Perform SWOT Analysis on Myself
Purpose
This exercise can help you decide on the best career path for yourself. Individuals and organizations
are alike in many ways. Each has competitors and each should plan for the future. Every individual
(and organization) faces some external opportunities and threats, some internal strengths and weak-
nesses, and reaches pivotal forks in the road. These and other similarities make it possible for in-
dividuals to use many corporate strategic-management concepts and tools such as SWOT analysis.
Instructions
Introduced in this chapter, SWOT analysis a popular strategic planning tool that can help individuals
in career planning. Individuals can perform SWOT analysis by completing the following six steps:
1. Identify four external opportunities you face.
2. Identify four external threats you face.
3. Identify four of your personal strengths.
4. Identify four personal weaknesses.
5. Develop SO (strength-opportunity), WO (weakness-opportunity), ST (strength-threat), WT
(weakness-threat) strategies—two strategies of each type, thus eight strategies total.
6. Select three strategies to implement.
An external opportunity could be, for example, that your university offers a graduate program that
interests you, whereas an external threat could be that interest rates are rising precluding getting a
loan. A weakness could be a low grade-point average, whereas a personal strength may be three years
of work experience. Strategy is sometimes defined as “the match” a person (or firm) makes between
its internal resources and skills and the opportunities and risks created by its external factors. When a
person has major weaknesses, he or she should strive to overcome them and perhaps convert them into
strengths. When a person faces major threats, they should seek to avoid or mitigate the effects of them
to focus on opportunities. Even though SWOT analysis is explained considerably more in Chapter 6,
give it a try here to help in planning your next career move.
SET 4: INDIVIDUAL VERSUS GROUP STRATEGIC PLANNING
EXERCISE 1E
How Detrimental Are Various Pitfalls in Strategic Planning?
Purpose
Whenever a firm engages in strategic planning, there are certain potholes or pitfalls that need to be
avoided. Being aware of potential pitfalls and being prepared to address them is essential to suc-
cess. A list of thirteen pitfalls that commonly plague firms and undermine strategic-planning efforts
follows. These can be ranked in terms of how potentially detrimental or severe they are in doing
strategic planning. This exercise reveals the authors’ ranking of the thirteen pitfalls in terms of how
potentially detrimental or severe they are in doing strategic planning.
68 PART 1 • OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
Pitfalls
1. Using strategic planning to gain control over decisions and resources
2. Doing strategic planning only to satisfy accreditation or regulatory requirements
3. Too hastily moving from mission development to strategy formulation
4. Failing to communicate the plan to employees, who continue working in the dark
5. Top managers making many intuitive decisions that conflict with the formal plan
6. Top managers not actively supporting the strategic-planning process
7. Failing to use plans as a standard for measuring performance
8. Delegating planning to a “planner” rather than involving all managers
9. Failing to involve key employees in all phases of planning
10. Failing to create a collaborative climate supportive of change
11. Viewing planning as unnecessary or unimportant
12. Becoming so engrossed in current problems that insufficient or no planning is done
13. Being so formal in planning that flexibility and creativity are stifled
The purpose of this exercise is to examine and discuss how potentially detrimental or severe the
various pitfalls are in doing strategic planning. In addition, the purpose of this exercise is to examine
whether individual decision making is better than group decision making. Academic research sug-
gests that groups make better decisions than individuals about 80 percent of the time.
Steps
1. Fill in Column 1 in Table 1-9 to reveal your individual ranking of how potentially detrimental
to strategic planning the pitfalls are, where 1 = most detrimental to 13 = least detrimental. For
example, if you feel Pitfall 1 is the fifth most detrimental, then enter a 5 in Table 1 in Column 1
beside Pitfall 1.
2. Fill in Column 2 in Table 1-9 to reveal your group’s ranking of the thirteen pitfalls.
3. Fill in Column 3 in Table 1-9 to reveal the expert’s ranking of the thirteen pitfalls. (To be provided by
your professor, the expert rankings are based on the authors’ experience and the end of the chapter.)
4. Fill in Column 4 in Table 1-9 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 1 and Column 3
to reveal how well you performed as an individual in this exercise. (Note: For absolute difference,
disregard negative numbers.)
TABLE 1-9 Pitfalls in Doing Strategic Planning: Comparing Individual versus Group Decision Making
Pitfalls to Avoid In Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5
Doing Strategic Planning
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
SUM
CHAPTER 1 • THE NATuRE OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 69
5. Fill in Column 5 in Table 1-9 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 2 and Column 3
to reveal how well your group performed in this exercise.
6. Sum Column 4. Sum Column 5.
7. Compare the Column 4 sum with the Column 5 sum. If your Column 4 sum is less than your
Column 5 sum, then you performed better as an individual than as a group. Normally, group
decision making is superior to individual decision making, so if you did better than your group,
you did excellent.
8. The Individual Winner(s): The individual(s) with the lowest Column 4 sum is the WINNER.
9. The Group Winners(s): The group(s) with the lowest Column 5 score is the WINNER.
70
2 PART 2
STRATEGY FORMULATION
Strategy Formulation
Feedback Loop
Strategy Implementation
Strategy Evaluation
Chapter 10: Business Ethics, Environmental Sustainability, and Social Responsibility
Chapter 11: Global and International Issues
Strategy Evaluation
and Governance Chapter 9
Implementing Strategies:
Finance and Accounting
Issues Chapter 8
Implementing Strategies:
Management and Marketing
Issues Chapter 7
Strategies in Action Chapter 5
Strategy Analysis and
Choice Chapter 6
The Internal
Assessment Chapter 4
The External Assessment Chapter 3
Business Vision and
Mission Chapter 2
FIGURE 2- 1
The Comprehensive, Integrative Strategic-Management Model
Source: Fred R. David, “How Companies Define Their Mission,” Long Range Planning 22, no. 1 (February 1989): 91. See also Anik Ratnaningsih, Nadjadji Anwar, Patdono Suwignjo, and Putu Artama Wiguna, “Balance Scorecard of David’s Strategic Modeling at Industrial Business for National Construction Contractor of Indonesia,” Journal of Mathematics and Technology , no. 4 (October 2010): 20.
71
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following:
2- 1. Explain the need for core values statements in strategic management.
2- 2. Describe the nature and role of vision statements in strategic management.
2- 3. Identify the characteristics of a vision statement.
2- 4. Describe the nature and role of mission statements in strategic management.
2- 5. Identify and discuss the characteristics of an effective mission statement.
2- 6. Identify and discuss the components of mission statements.
2- 7. Discuss the benefits for a firm of having clear vision and mission statements.
2- 8. Evaluate and write mission statements for different organizations.
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
The following exercises are found at the end of this chapter:
SET 1 : Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 2A : Develop an Improved Coca-Cola Vision Statement
EXERCISE 2B : Develop an Improved Coca-Cola Mission Statement
EXERCISE 2C : Compare Coca-Cola’s Mission Statement to a Rival Firm’s
SET 2 : Strategic Planning for My University
EXERCISE 2D : Compare Your University’s Vision and Mission Statement to Those of a Rival Institution
SET 3 : Strategic Planning for Myself
EXERCISE 2E : Develop a Vision and Mission Statement for Yourself
SET 4 : Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
EXERCISE 2F : What Is the Relative Importance of Each of the Nine Components of a Mission Statement?
Business Vision and Mission
MyLab Management
Improve Your Grade!
If your instructor is using MyLab Management, visit www.pearson.com/mylab/management
for videos, simulations, and writing exercises.
72 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
C hapter 2 focuses on the concepts and tools needed to evaluate and write core values,
vision, and mission statements. As illustrated with shading in Figure 2-1, carefully
prepared statements of vision and mission are widely recognized by both practitioners and
academicians as the first step in strategic management. Actual vision and mission statements from
large and small organizations and for-profit and nonprofit enterprises are presented and critiqued.
The exemplary strategist showcased is Frederick Smith, whose entrepreneurial vision four de-
cades ago led to the creation of FedEx, a firm on a mission today to lead the package-delivery industry.
We can perhaps best understand core values, vision, and mission by focusing on a business
when it is first started. In the beginning, a new business is simply a collection of ideas. Starting a new
business rests on a set of beliefs that the organization can offer some product or service to some cus-
tomers in some geographic area using some type of technology at a profitable price. A new business
owner typically believes his or her philosophy of the new enterprise will result in a favorable pub-
lic image, and the business concept can be effectively communicated to and adopted by important
constituencies. When the ideas and beliefs about a business at its inception are put into writing, the
resulting documents mirror the same basic ideas that underlie core values, vision, and mission state-
ments. As a business grows, owners or managers may revise the founding set of beliefs, but those
original ideas usually are still reflected in core values, vision, and mission statements.
Core values, vision, and mission statements often can be found in the front of annual reports
and commonly displayed throughout a firm’s premises and distributed with company informa-
tion sent to constituencies. These statements are part of numerous internal reports, such as loan
requests, supplier agreements, labor relations contracts, business plans, and customer service
agreements. However, too many companies and organizations today have no core values, vision,
or mission statement, thus missing out on an incredible opportunity to motivate and energize
customers, employees, and shareholders, and also jeopardizing their strategic-planning efforts.
Core Values Statements: What Is Our Foundation? Core values provide the needed ethical foundation for creating an excellent vision and mission. A
core values statement specifies a firm’s commitment to integrity, fairness, discipline, equal employ-
ment opportunity, teamwork, accountability, continuous improvement, or other such exemplary attri-
butes. For example, LinkedIn’s core values (paraphrased) are (1) customers first, (2) relationships
matter, (3) be open and honest, (4) require excellence, (5) take intelligent risks, and (6) act like an
LO 2.1
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED
Frederick W. Smith, Founder and CEO of FedEx Corporation Headquartered in Memphis, Tennessee, and founded in 1973 by
Frederick W. Smith, FedEx is one of the few Fortune 500 companies
still led today by its founder. Forty-five years and counting as CEO of
any company is quite exemplary, and his company’s vision and mission
have changed little in 45 years. Smith’s vision to more quickly deliver
time-sensitive mail enabled his company to bypass the U.S. Postal
Service and thereby revolutionize the transportation industry. Back in
1973 and in the years that followed, Smith turned his vision of quick
delivery into a reality and motivated thousands of workers to adopt
the FedEx mission. FedEx was the first U.S. company ever to earn $1
billion in revenues within its first 10 years of business without merging
or acquiring other firms. FedEx has grown into a $60 billion global
transportation, business services, and logistics iconic U.S. firm.
Led by Smith, FedEx today includes FedEx Services, FedEx
Ground, FedEx Freight, and FedEx Express, the latter of which has
the world’s largest all-cargo air fleet. Smith says the key to his
success has been “having an effective strategy and everyone under-
standing what the strategy is.” With a mission to offer flexible and
innovative solutions for everyone from entrepreneurs to large corpo-
rations, FedEx’s strategy is based on innovation and a clear purpose.
Many postal services that we take for granted today, such as track-
ing mail and packages, were pioneered by an exemplary strategist,
Frederick W. Smith.
Source: Based on the FedEx corporate website and a variety of other sources.
S u n d ry
P h o to
g ra
p h y /S
h u
tt er
st o ck
Our Mission Is Fast Delivery
CHAPTER 2 • BuSINESS VISION AND MISSION 73
Vision Statements: What Do We Want to Become? It is especially important for managers and executives in any firm to agree on the basic vision
the organization strives to achieve in the long term. A vision statement should answer the basic
question, “What do we want to become?” A clear vision provides the foundation for developing a
comprehensive mission statement. Many organizations have both a vision and mission statement,
but the vision statement should be established first. Examples of vision statements are provided
in Table 2-1. The vision statement should be short, preferably one sentence, and as many manag-
ers as possible should have input into developing the statement. In the book of Proverbs in the
Bible, Chapter 29, Verse 18, says, “Where there is no vision, the people perish.”
LO 2.2
GLOBAL CAPSULE 2
LinkedIn: Clear Core Values, Vision, and Mission Lead to Global Prominence The social-networking site, LinkedIn, has a
network of more than 500 million registered
users in two hundred countries. LinkedIn has
grown globally as fast as almost any other
firm. How? The answer is having a clear
vision. LinkedIn’s CEO Jeff Weiner is the key.
Weiner has been voted the best CEO in the
United States. Weiner’s outstanding leader-
ship style has earned him the trust and admi-
ration of all LinkedIn employees. Weiner says
“a manager is someone who tells others what
to do, whereas a leader inspires others to do
great things.” When Weiner spoke at the Wisdom 2.0 conference in
San Francisco, he identified and explained the three most important
ingredients for being a great leader. Weiner says the most impor-
tant ingredient for a great leader is for that person to be clear
about the organization’s vision. Fred Kofman is LinkedIn’s VP of
leadership and organizational development; Kofman says:
Most CEOs sit at the front of a boat and tell their employ-
ees where they need to row; Weiner grabs a surfboard and
catches a huge wave, inspiring everyone behind him to do
the same. The surfers are all riding the same wave, sharing
the same vision, but are putting much more of their heart and
personality into their work than the grunts in the rowboat.
According to Weiner, the second-most important ingre-
dient for a leader is to be brave. Weiner says (paraphrased):
If you have true vision and
you want to try something
that has not been done
before, there will be a lot of
doubters, skeptics, people
who feel threatened, and
people who get in your way.
Thus, you have to exude
confidence to be able to
overcome those challenges
and for people to want to
follow you. You have to
be authentic and have true conviction or no one will get
behind you.
According to Weiner, the third-most important ingre-
dient necessary to be a great leader is to be an effective
communicator.
He explains that whenever a leader has these three ingredi-
ents, led by core values, vision, and mission, the job at hand
becomes “a matter of what objective you’re trying to achieve
and then surrounding yourself with the best talent you can.”
Source: Based on http://jobs.aol.com/articles/2015/07/06/linkedin-ceo-jeff-
weiner-leadership-qualities/?SiteID=cbaolcompromotion_july_14.Also,
https://www.cnbc.com/2017/06/28/linkedin-ceo-jeff-weiner-heres-what-
separates-leaders-from-managers.html and https://www. consciousculturegroup
.com/linkedin-vision-values-insights/
Should You Join Our Network?
A si
f Is
la m
/S h u tt
er st
o ck
owner. Great firms possess core values that remain fixed and almost never change. The core values
of any firm should transcend technological changes, fads, product life cycles, and globalization.
Because vision and mission statements do change over time, it is vital to know who you are
before you can discuss what you want to become, what business are you in, or how will you get there.
Generally, if core values are open for change in the future, they are not core values. Disney for exam-
ple has a core value “to make people happy;” a technology firm may have a core value “to connect the
world.” Tyson Foods’ core values statement that guides the firm’s operations follows (paraphrased):
We are engaged in the production of food, seeking to pursue truth and integrity, while creating
value for our shareholders, customers, employees, and communities. We strive to be an honor-
able, faith-friendly company composed of diverse people. We feed the world with trusted food
products while being excellent stewards of the animals, land, and environment entrusted to us.
The Global Capsule 2 reveals how LinkedIn’s core values led to a vision and mission that
catapulted the company to global prominence.
74 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
For many corporations, profit rather than vision or mission is the primary motivator, but
profit alone is not enough to motivate people. It is not uncommon that profit is perceived nega-
tively by many stakeholders of a firm. For example, employees could see profit as something
that they earn and management then uses and even gives away to shareholders. Although this
perception is undesired and disturbing to management, it clearly indicates that both profit and
vision are needed to motivate a workforce effectively. Reuben Mark, former CEO of Colgate,
maintains that a clear vision increasingly must make sense internationally. Mark’s thoughts on
vision follows:
When it comes to rallying everyone to the corporate banner, it’s essential to push one vision
globally rather than trying to drive home different messages in different cultures. The trick is to
keep the vision simple but elevated: “We make the world’s fastest computers” or “Telephone
service for everyone.” You’re never going to get anyone to charge the machine guns only
for financial objectives. It’s got to be something that makes people feel better, feel a part of
something.1
When employees and managers together shape or fashion a vision statement of a firm, the
resultant document can reflect the personal visions that managers and employees have in their
hearts and minds about their own futures. Shared vision creates a commonality of interests that
can lift workers out of the monotony of daily work and put them into a new world of opportu-
nity, challenge, and belongingness. The motivation, dedication, and commitment associated with
shared vision is an immense potential benefit for any firm or organization.
Characteristics of a Vision Statement A vision statement should reveal the type of business the firm conducts. For example, a vision
that says, “to become the best retail firm in the United States,” is too broad because that firm
could be selling anything from apples (A) to zebras (Z). Although typically a single sentence,
vision statements need to do more than identify the product or service a firm offers; vision
statements should be written from a customer perspective. Ideally every organization wants
its employees and customers to align their actions with the firm’s vision. To fulfill this need,
an excellent vision statement describes a desired future state. Being futuristic enables vision
statements to be used to facilitate organizational change. The statement needs to be doable but
challenging.
In summary, effective vision statements exhibit the following five characteristics; these five
attributes can be used as guidelines for writing or evaluating vision statements. Any vision state-
ment that scores a 5 out of 5 on these characteristics is exemplary. Let’s call this vision assess-
ment technique “The 5-out-of-5 Test.”
1. Clear: reveals type of industry and what firm strives to become
2. Futuristic: reveals what the firm strives to become or accomplish within five years
3. Concise: one sentence in length
4. Unique: reveals the firm’s competitive advantage
5. Inspiring: motivates the readers to support the firm
LO 2.3
TABLE 2-1 Six Exemplary Vision Statements (paraphrased)
• Dr Pepper Snapple: to be the best beverage business globally; our brands are synonymous with
refreshment, fun, and flavor today and tomorrow.
• IBM: to be the world’s most successful information technology company focused on helping custom-
ers apply technology to solve their problems now and in the future.
• Hilton Worldwide: to fill the Earth with the light and warmth of hospitality by delivering exceptional
experiences—every hotel and guest for all time.
• Starbucks: to be the premier purveyor of the finest coffee in the world while maintaining uncompro-
mising principles as we steadily grow.
• Kellogg: to enrich and delight the world through foods and brands that matter today and tomorrow.
• Harley-Davidson: to fulfill dreams through the experiences of motorcycling for all time.
CHAPTER 2 • BuSINESS VISION AND MISSION 75
Vision Statement Analysis
There is no one best vision statement for a particular company in a given industry, but the 5-out-
of-5 test can be used to both develop and evaluate vision statements. Six exemplary vision
statements that meet the 5-out-of-5 test are provided in Table 2-1. Notice the Harley-Davidson
statement meets the 5 criteria in just 11 words.
Four vision statements that do not meet the 5-out-of-5 test are given in Table 2-2.
TABLE 2-2 Four Nonexemplary Vision Statements (paraphrased)
1. Avon Products, Inc.: to be the firm that best understands and satisfies the product and service
needs of women globally. Author Comment: Lacks Characteristics 1, 2, and 4.
2. Charles Schwab Corporation: to help investors help themselves. Author Comment: Lacks Char-
acteristics 2, 4, and 5.
3. Instagram: to capture and share the world’s moments. Author Comment: Lacks Characteristics
1, 2, 4, and 5.
4. Zappos.com: to deliver happiness to customers, employees, and vendors. Author Comment:
Lacks Characteristics 1, 2, 4, and 5.
Key: Vision Statement Characteristics
1. Clear: reveals type of industry and what firm strives to become
2. Futuristic: reveals what the firm strives to become or accomplish in five years
3. Concise: one sentence in length
4. Unique: reveals the firm’s competitive advantage
5. Inspiring: motivates the reader to support the firm
Mission Statements: What Is Our Business? Current thought on mission statements is based largely on guidelines set forth in the mid-1970s
by Peter Drucker, who is often called “the father of modern management” for his pioneering
studies at General Motors and for his 22 books and hundreds of articles. Drucker believes that
asking the question “What is our business?” is synonymous with asking “What is our mission?”
An enduring statement of purpose that distinguishes one organization from other similar enter-
prises, the mission statement, is a declaration of an organization’s “reason for being.” It answers
the pivotal question “What is our business?” A clear mission statement is essential for effectively
establishing objectives and formulating strategies.
Sometimes called a creed statement, a statement of purpose, a statement of philosophy, a
statement of beliefs, a statement of business principles, or a statement “defining our business,” a
mission statement reveals what an organization wants to be and who it wants to serve. All orga-
nizations have a reason for being, even if strategists have not consciously transformed this reason
into writing. Drucker has the following to say about mission statements (paraphrased):
A mission statement is the foundation for priorities, strategies, plans, and work assign-
ments. It is the starting point for the design of jobs and organizational structures. Nothing
may seem simpler or more obvious than to know what a company’s business is. A lumber
mill makes lumber, an airline carries passengers and freight, and a bank lends money. But
“What is our business?” is almost always a difficult question and the right answer is usually
anything but obvious. The answer to this question is the first responsibility of strategists.2
Some strategists spend almost every moment of every day on administrative and tactical concerns;
those who rush quickly to establish objectives and implement strategies often overlook the development
of a vision and mission statement. This problem is so widespread that many corporations, organizations,
and small businesses in the United States have not yet developed a formal vision or mission statement.
Some companies develop mission statements simply because owners or top management
believe it is fashionable, rather than out of any real commitment. However, firms that develop
and systematically revisit their vision and mission statements, treat them as living documents,
and consider them to be an integral part of the firm’s culture realize great benefits. For example,
LO 2.4
76 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
managers at Johnson & Johnson (J&J) meet regularly with employees to review, reword, and
reaffirm the firm’s mission. The entire J&J workforce recognizes the value that top management
places on this exercise, and these employees respond accordingly.
Characteristics of a Mission Statement A mission statement is a declaration of attitude and outlook. It usually is broad in scope for at least
two major reasons. First, a quality mission statement allows for the generation and consideration of
a range of feasible alternative objectives and strategies without unduly stifling management creativ-
ity. Excess specificity would limit the potential of creative growth for the organization. However,
an overly general statement that does not exclude any strategy alternatives could be dysfunctional.
Apple’s mission statement, for example, should not open the possibility for diversification into
pesticides—or Ford Motor Company’s into food processing.
Second, a mission statement needs to be broad to reconcile differences among and appeal
to an organization’s diverse stakeholders, the individuals and groups of individuals who have
a special stake or claim on the company. Thus, a mission statement should be reconciliatory.
Stakeholders include employees, managers, stockholders, boards of directors, customers, suppli-
ers, distributors, creditors, governments (local, state, federal, and foreign), unions, competitors,
environmental groups, and the general public. Stakeholders affect and are affected by an organi-
zation’s strategies, yet the claims and concerns of diverse constituencies vary and often conflict.
For example, the general public is especially interested in social responsibility, whereas stock-
holders are more interested in profitability. Stakeholder expectations leveled on any business
literally may number in the thousands, and they often include clean air, jobs, taxes, investment
opportunities, career opportunities, equal employment opportunities, employee benefits, salaries,
wages, clean water, and community services. All stakeholders’ expectations on an organization
cannot be pursued with equal emphasis. A quality mission statement reveals that the organization
will strive to meet the varied expectations of stakeholders.
The statement of mission should be sufficiently broad to allow judgments about the most
promising growth directions and those considered less promising. Numbers should not be
included in a mission statement. George Steiner offers the following insight on the need for a
mission statement to be broad in scope:
Mission statements are not designed to express concrete ends, but rather to provide
motivation, general direction, an image, a tone, and a philosophy to guide the enterprise.
An excess of detail could prove counterproductive since concrete specification could be
the base for rallying opposition; all in the firm need to be onboard with the firm’s mission.3
An effective mission statement should not be too lengthy; the recommended length is less
than one hundred words. An effective mission statement should arouse positive feelings and emo-
tions about an organization; it should be inspiring in the sense that it motivates readers to action.
A mission statement should be enduring, but never cast in stone, meaning that a statement may need
to be changed at any time depending on changes anywhere in the integrative model of strategic
management. This dynamic nature of both vision and mission statements is conveyed in Figure 2-1
through the feedback loop. An effective mission statement generates the impression that a firm is
successful, has direction, and is worthy of time, support, and investment from all stakeholders.
A business mission reflects judgments about future growth directions and strategies that are
based on forward-looking external and internal analyses. The statement should provide useful
criteria for selecting among alternative strategies. A clear mission statement provides a basis
for generating and screening strategic options. A mission statement should (1) define what the
organization is, (2) be limited enough to exclude some ventures and broad enough to allow for
creative growth, (3) distinguish a given organization from all others, (4) serve as a framework
for evaluating both current and prospective activities, and (5) be stated in terms sufficiently clear
to be widely understood throughout the organization.4 The mission statement should reflect the
anticipations of customers. Rather than developing a product and then trying to find a market, the
operating philosophy of organizations should be to identify customers’ needs and then provide a
product or service to fulfill those needs.
Table 2-3 summarizes 10 desired characteristics of an effective mission statement:
LO 2.5
CHAPTER 2 • BuSINESS VISION AND MISSION 77
Quality mission statements identify the utility (value) of a firm’s products to its customers.
This is why Verizon’s mission statement focuses on communication rather than on telephones; it
is why ExxonMobil’s mission statement focuses on energy rather than on oil and gas; it is why
Union Pacific’s mission statement focuses on transportation rather than on railroads; it is why
Universal Studios’ mission statement focuses on entertainment rather than on movies. A major
reason for developing a mission statement is to attract customers; all companies and organiza-
tions must continually attract customers.
The following utility statements are relevant in developing a mission statement:
Do not offer me things.
Do not offer me clothes. Offer me attractive looks.
Do not offer me shoes. Offer me comfort for my feet and the pleasure of walking.
Do not offer me a house. Offer me security, comfort, and a place that is clean and happy.
Do not offer me books. Offer me hours of pleasure and the benefit of knowledge.
Do not offer me CDs. Offer me leisure and the sound of music.
Do not offer me tools. Offer me the benefits and the pleasure that come from making
beautiful things.
Do not offer me furniture. Offer me comfort and the quietness of a cozy place.
Do not offer me things. Offer me ideas, emotions, ambience, feelings, and benefits.
Please, do not offer me things.
Managers often perceive customer satisfaction as a valuable intangible asset to a firm; re-
search suggests that customer satisfaction has a strong positive relationship with organizational
performance.5 When written from a customer perspective, mission statements can spur employ-
ees, salespersons, and managers to provide exemplary customer service, which arguably would
enhance customer loyalty and translate into customers being “on a mission” to seek out, use,
and promote the firm’s products and services.
Components of a Mission Statement Most practitioners and academicians of strategic management agree there are nine mission state-
ment components to be included in an exemplary statement. Because a mission statement is often
the most visible and public part of the strategic-management process, it is important that it includes
both the ten characteristics summarized previously, and the following nine components:
1. Customers—Who are the firm’s present and potential customers?
2. Products or services—What are the firm’s major products or services?
3. Markets—Geographically, where does the firm compete?
LO 2.6
TABLE 2-3 Characteristics of a Mission Statement
1. Broad in scope; does not include monetary amounts, numbers, percentages, ratios, or objectives
2. Concise; fewer than one hundred words in length
3. Inspiring
4. Identifies the utility of a firm’s products
5. Reveals that the firm is socially responsible
6. Reveals that the firm is environmentally responsible
7. Includes nine components: customers, products or services, markets, technology, concern for
survival/growth/profits, philosophy, distinctive competence, concern for public image, concern
for employees
8. Reconciliatory; resolves divergent views among stakeholders
9. Enduring but never cast in stone
10. Attracts customers; is written from a customer perspective
78 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
4. Technology—Is the firm technologically current?
5. Concern for survival, growth, and profitability—Is the firm committed to growth and fi-
nancial soundness?
6. Philosophy—What are the basic beliefs, values, aspirations, and ethical priorities of the
firm?
7. Distinctive competence—What is the firm’s major competitive advantage?
8. Concern for public image—Is the firm responsive to social, community, and environmen-
tal concerns?
9. Concern for employees—Are employees a valuable asset of the firm?6
To exemplify how mission statements should be written to include all nine components, a
component-by-component example for a charter boat fishing company is provided in Table 2-
4. Note the charter company’s customers are “outdoor enthusiasts.” “Customers” is an impor-
tant component to include in a mission statement, so merely including the word customer is
not sufficient or adequate because that word alone will not “attract customers.” The statement
needs to identify more precisely the target groups of customers. In fact, all nine components
should be written from a customer perspective, as given in the Table 2-4 example. For example,
regarding the “product/service” component, the charter fishing company provides “memories
for a lifetime”—thus revealing the “utility” of the service offered and appealing to people who
may not like to “just fish.” Regarding the “distinctive competence” component, whereby the
firm reveals the major competitive advantage its products/services provide, the statement says:
“for customer enjoyment and safety, we provide the most experienced staff in the industry.” A
concise, inspiring, exemplary mission statement that could be derived from the component-by-
component example shown in Table 2-4 follows.
Our fleet of fast, clean deep sea fishing boats (products) offers outdoor enthusiasts
(customers) an exciting fishing adventure off the coast of North Carolina (markets). Using
the latest safety and fishing finding equipment (technology), as well as emission-friendly
engines (public image), our friendly captain and first mate are the most experienced in
the industry (distinctive competence). Ensuring that customers “catch rather than just
fish,” our staff of experienced captains and first mates (employees) follows the Golden
Rule (philosophy) and creates lifelong memories for customers, all while charging the
lowest possible prices and fostering repeat customers (survival, growth, profitability).
(85 words)
TABLE 2-4 Mission Statement Components Written from a Customer Perspective
1. Customers: Our customers are outdoor enthusiasts seeking fishing excitement and adventure.
2. Products or services: We provide fast, clean boats, all the bait and tackle needed, and friendly
first mates to create memories for a lifetime.
3. Markets: Our fleet of fast, clean vessels operate all along the North Carolina Coast.
4. Technology: Our vessels are equipped with the very latest safety and fish finding equipment to
ensure that customers comfortably are “catching rather than just fishing.”
5. Survival, growth, and profitability: Our prices are as low as possible to garner repeat customers
and a reasonable return for our owners.
6. Philosophy: We assure customers the utmost courtesy and care as our motto on every vessel is
to follow the Golden Rule.
7. Distinctive competence: For customer enjoyment and safety, we provide the most experienced
staff in the industry.
8. Public image: Our vessels use emission-friendly engines; we strive to bring repeat tourists to all
communities where we operate.
9. Employees: Our captains and first mates are “on a mission” to help customers have a great time.
Source: Based on Meredith E. David, Forest R. David, & Fred R. David, “Mission Statement Theory and Practice: A Content Analysis and New Direction,” International Journal of Business, Marketing, and Decision Sciences 7, no. 1 (Summer 2014): 95–109.
CHAPTER 2 • BuSINESS VISION AND MISSION 79
Regarding the “survival, growth, and profitability” component, for publicly held firms, share-
holders often expect at least a 4 percent annual growth in revenues because otherwise individuals
could redirect their money to achieve this rate of growth (usually) in the stock market. Regarding
the “philosophy” component, CEO Mark Zuckerberg of Facebook recently condensed his com-
pany’s mission statement to focus only on the “philosophy” component, as revealed in Ethics
Capsule 2. Note: The authors feel that component 7 (distinctive competence) is the most impor-
tant among the nine, followed by “customers” and then “philosophy,” but all nine components
are important and need including.
ETHICS CAPSULE 2
Facebook: Changing Our Mission to Enhance Our Ethics and Integrity
Facebook(ing) With Friends
It is 2018 and Facebook CEO Mark Zuckerberg is on a mission “to
fix Facebook’s ethical problems.” Zuckerberg says his company “has
made too many errors preventing misuse of our tools,” and “my
personal challenge for 2018 is to focus on fixing Facebook’s ethical
issues.” More than 2 million people now log onto Facebook every
month. The company allegedly allows objectionable content and
fake news and increasingly is also criticized as being an invasion of
personal privacy.
In June 2017, Facebook officially changed its mission from
“making the world more open and connected,” to “give people
the power to build community and bring the world closer to-
gether.” In announcing the new company mission, Zuckerberg,
the fifth-richest person on the planet, said “giving people a voice
and helping them connect is not sufficient to make the world a
better place.” With this change in mission, Facebook is taking
down thousands of “revenge porn” photos and inappropriate vid-
eos and other content. The company is tripling its expenditures on
security to screen bad people, even as more than 60 million new
active users monthly join the site; Facebook is on course to have
more than 3 billion users by the end of 2018. The world’s larg-
est social network site, Facebook is facing growing criticism from
lawmakers for not monitoring shady content, bad users, misinfor-
mation, propaganda, and violent videos. The company’s change in
mission has led the firm to double the number of its employees
and contractors who handle safety and security issues from ten to
twenty thousand by the end of 2018. As part of the firm’s new
mission, Zuckerberg has publicly pledged to give a way 99 percent
of his personal wealth. Zuckerberg stated at the 2017 Facebook
Communities Summit: “we have to build a world where we care
about a person in India, China, Nigeria, or Mexico as much as a
person in America.” Facebook’s new mission focuses on building
a global social network where friends take care of friends.
Source: Deepa Seetharaman, “Zuckerberg Vows to Work on Fixing
Facebook,” Wall Street Journal, (January 5, 2018): B1 & B2. Also, Deepa
Seetharaman, “Facebook Vows to Sacrifice Growth for Secure Operations,”
Wall Street Journal, (November 2, 2017): B3. Also, Valentina Zarya,
“Facebook’s Secret Weapon,” Fortune, (August 1, 2017): 26–28.
L u ck
y B
u si
n es
s/
S h u tt
er st
o ck
The Importance (Benefits) of Vision and Mission Statements A meta-analysis of 20 years of empirical research on mission statements concluded there is a
positive relationship between mission statements and measures of financial performance.7 In
actual practice, wide variations exist in the nature, composition, and use of both vision and mis-
sion statements. King and Cleland recommend that organizations carefully develop a written
mission statement to reap the following benefits:
1. To make sure all employees/managers understand the firm’s purpose or reason for being.
2. To provide a basis for prioritization of key internal and external factors utilized to formu-
late feasible strategies.
3. To provide a basis for the allocation of resources.
4. To provide a basis for organizing work, departments, activities, and segments around a
common purpose.8
Another benefit of developing a comprehensive mission statement is that divergent views
among managers can be uncovered and resolved through the process. The question “What is
our business?” can create controversy. Raising the question often reveals differences among
LO 2.7
80 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
strategists in the organization. Individuals who have worked together for a long time and who
think they know each other suddenly may realize that they are in fundamental disagreement.
For example, in a college or university, divergent views among faculty regarding the relative
importance of teaching, research, and service often are expressed during the development of
the mission statement. Negotiation, compromise, and eventual agreement on important issues
are needed before people in any organization or company can focus on more specific strategy-
formulation activities.
Considerable disagreement among an organization’s strategists over vision and mission
statements can cause trouble if not resolved. For example, unresolved disagreement over the
business mission was one of the reasons for W. T. Grant’s bankruptcy and eventual liquidation.
Top executives of the firm, including Ed Staley and Lou Lustenberger, were firmly entrenched
in opposing positions that W. T. Grant should be like Kmart or J. C. Penney, respectively. W. T.
Grant decided to adopt attributes of both Kmart and J. C. Penney; this compromise was a huge
strategic mistake. In other words, top executives of W. T. Grant never resolved their vision or
mission issue, which ultimately led to the firm’s disappearance.9
Too often, strategists develop vision and mission statements only when the organization is in
trouble. Of course, the documents are needed then. Developing and communicating these state-
ments during troubled times indeed may have spectacular results and may even reverse decline.
However, to wait until an organization is in trouble to develop a vision and mission statement is
a gamble that characterizes irresponsible management. According to Drucker, as indicated, the
most important time to ask seriously, “What do we want to become?” and “What is our busi-
ness?” is when a company has been successful:
Success always obsoletes the very behavior that achieved it, always creates new realities,
and always creates new and different problems. Only the fairy tale story ends, “They lived
happily ever after.” It is never popular to argue with success or to rock the boat. It will not
be long before success will turn into failure. Sooner or later, even the most successful an-
swer to the question “What is our business?” becomes obsolete.10
In multidivisional organizations, strategists should ensure that divisional units perform
strategic-management tasks (sometimes referred to as business-level strategy), including the
development of a statement of vision and mission for their unique division. Each division should
involve its own managers and employees in developing vision and mission statements that are
consistent with and supportive of the corporate mission. The benefits of having a clear vision and
mission are summarized in Table 2-5.
An organization that fails to develop an effective vision and mission statement loses the
opportunity to present itself favorably to existing and potential stakeholders. All organizations
need customers, employees, and managers, and most firms need creditors, suppliers, and dis-
tributors. Vision and mission statements are effective vehicles for communicating with important
TABLE 2-5 10 Benefits of Having a Clear Vision and Mission
1. Achieve clarity of purpose among all managers and employees.
2. Provide a basis for all other strategic planning activities, including internal and external
assessment, establishing objectives, developing strategies, choosing among alternative strategies,
devising policies, establishing organizational structure, allocating resources, and evaluating
performance.
3. Provide direction.
4. Provide a focal point for all stakeholders of the firm.
5. Resolve divergent views among managers.
6. Promote a sense of shared expectations among all managers and employees.
7. Project a sense of worth and intent to all stakeholders.
8. Project an organized, motivated organization worthy of support.
9. Achieve higher organizational performance.
10. Achieve synergy among all managers and employees.
CHAPTER 2 • BuSINESS VISION AND MISSION 81
internal and external stakeholders. The principal benefit of these statements as tools of strategic
management is derived from their specification of the ultimate aims of a firm. Vision and mission
statements reveal the firm’s shared expectations internally among all employees and managers,
and for external constituencies, reveal the firm’s long-term commitment to responsible, ethical
action in providing a needed product or service to customers.
The Process of Developing Vision and Mission Statements
As many managers as possible should be involved in the process of developing these statements
because, through involvement, people become committed to an organization. A widely used
approach to developing vision and mission statements is first to select several articles (such as
those listed as Current Readings at the end of this chapter) and ask all managers to read them as
background information. Then, managers are asked to individually prepare vision and mission
statements for the organization. A facilitator or committee of top managers should then merge
these statements into a single document and distribute the draft statements to all managers.
A request for modifications, additions, and deletions is needed next, along with a meeting to
revise the document. To the extent that all managers have input into and support the final docu-
ments, organizations can more easily obtain managers’ support for other strategy formulation,
implementation, and evaluation activities. Thus, the process of developing vision and mission
statements represents a great opportunity for strategists to obtain needed support from all manag-
ers in the firm.
Some organizations use discussion groups of managers to develop and modify existing
statements. Other organizations hire an outside consultant or facilitator to manage the process
and help draft the language. At times an outside person with expertise in developing such state-
ments, who has unbiased views, can manage the process more effectively than an internal group
or committee of managers.
When an effective process is followed, developing a mission statement can create an “emo-
tional bond” and “sense of mission” among employees and customers. Commitment to a com-
pany’s strategy and intellectual agreement on the strategies to be pursued do not necessarily
translate into an emotional bond; hence, strategies that have been formulated may not be imple-
mented. An emotional bond comes when an individual personally identifies with the underlying
values and behavior of a firm, thus turning intellectual agreement and commitment to strategy
into a sense of mission. Involving marketers and sales representatives in the development of the
mission statement and writing statements from a customer perspective could enable firms to cre-
ate an emotional bond with customers and enhance the likelihood that salespersons would be “on
a mission” to provide excellent customer service.
Evaluating and Writing Mission Statements A mission statement should provide more than mere inclusion of a single word such as products
or employees regarding a respective component. Why? Because the statement should motivate
stakeholders to action, as well as be customer-oriented, informative, inspiring, and enduring.
Perhaps the best way to develop a skill for writing and evaluating mission statements is to
study actual company missions. Thus, Table 2-6 provides a component-by-component critique
of an actual mission statement from Hershey. The Hershey statement is too brief, being only
14 words total, is too vague, and is missing six of the nine components.
As additional guidance for practitioners (and students), mission statements are written from
a customer perspective and proposed for four companies as presented in Table 2-7. The state-
ments include the 10 characteristics and 9 components presented previously. The statements are
written to enhance customer satisfaction, especially if communicated to customers by market-
ers, and backed by company commitment to and implementation of the mission message. The
proposed statement for the footwear company Crocs, Inc., for example, talks about “dependable
and lasting comfort all day,” whereas the UPS proposed statement talks about “the most timely,
dependable, and accurate delivery times in the world.”
LO 2.8
82 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
TABLE 2-6 Two Mission Statements Critiqued
Hershey’s Actual Mission Statement (paraphrased) (12 words)
We bring sweet moments (2) of Hershey happiness (6) to the world (3) every day.
(Author Comment: Statement lacks six components: Customers (1), Technology (4), Survival/Growth/
Profits (5), Distinctive Competence (7), Public Image (8), and Employees (9).
A Proposed Mission Statement for Hershey (73 words)
We aim to serve consumers of all ages and lifestyles (1) by providing high-quality chocolate, candy, and
snack products (2) globally (3). We intend to grow and expand our product offerings (5) using robotics
and business analytics (4). We are dedicated to supporting all communities where we operate (8), espe-
cially to the boys and girls in the Milton Hershey School (6). Through our friendly and well-trained em-
ployees (9), we provide consumers the best chocolate anywhere and wrapped in Hershey Happiness (7).
Key: Mission Statement Components
1. Customers
2. Products or services
3. Markets
4. Technology
5. Concern for survival, growth, and profitability
6. Philosophy
7. Distinctive competence
8. Concern for public image
9. Concern for employees
Source: Based on information at the various corporate websites.
TABLE 2-7 Four Mission Statements Revised
The numbers in parentheses correspond to the nine mission statement components.
Rite Aid
We are on a mission to offer the best possible drugstore experience for people of all ages (1) around
the United States (3). We have a state-of-the-art information system (4) that provides our pharmacists
(9) with warnings of any possible drug interactions to help better ensure customer safety (8). We are
determined to improve our customers’ overall health through our wellness programs (5). We offer an ex-
tensive line of other beauty, food, drink, cosmetic, and vitamin products through our alliance with GNC
(2). We believe in treating our customers like family (6) and strive to maintain our reputation as the most
personable drugstore (7). (88 words total)
Best Buy
We are committed to providing individuals and businesses (1) the latest high-tech products (2) at the
lowest prices of any retail store (7). Serving North America, China, and other markets (3), all Best Buy
employees (9) are exceptionally knowledgeable about the products we offer. We believe good ethics is
good business (6) and use business analytics (4) to better understand customer trends. We strive to make
a profit for our shareholders (5) and be a good community citizen everywhere we operate (8). (72 words)
United Parcel Service (UPS)
We strive to be the most timely and dependable parcel and freight forwarding delivery service (2) in the
world (3). By implementing the latest tracking technology (4), we are able to profitably grow (5) by offer-
ing individuals and businesses (1) dependable and accurate delivery times (7). We promote from within to
improve morale among all employees (9). Our philosophy (6) is to responsibly balance the needs of our
customers, employees, shareholders, and communities (8) in an exemplary manner. (68 words)
Crocs, Inc.
Crocs is committed to providing profound comfort, fun and innovation in all the shoe models (2) we produce.
Through our Croslite technology (4) (7), we are able to provide men, women, and children (1) dependable and
lasting comfort all day. We strive to expand our brand throughout the world (3) and are able to save on costs
(5), while protecting the environment (8) with our package-less shoes. We adhere to the belief that good ethics
is good business (6) in all that we do as we strive to take care of our employees and shareholders. (85 words)
Source: Reprinted with permission from Fred. R. David, “Mission Statement Theory and Practice: A Content Analysis and New Direction,” International Journal of Business, Marketing, and Decision Sciences 7, no. 1 (Summer 2014): 95–109.
CHAPTER 2 • BuSINESS VISION AND MISSION 83
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS
Figure 2-2 reveals that establishing and nurturing an effective vision
and mission is a vital first step in gaining and maintaining competitive
advantages. Businesses succeed by attracting and keeping customers,
and they do this by providing value for customers through unique
experiences, products, and/or services. Firms nurture their unique-
ness as evidenced in the “distinctive competence” component in
mission statements. Marketers continually assess customers’ chang-
ing needs and wants and make appropriate adjustments in the
design and delivery of products and services to sustain competitive
advantage. Developing and communicating a clear business vision
and mission is essential because without effective vision and mission
statements, a firm’s short-term actions may be counterproductive to
long-term interests. A clear vision and mission provides direction for
all subsequent activities that endeavor to see customers, employ-
ees, and shareholders concurrently “on a mission” to see the firm
succeed.
Vision and mission statements are not just words that look nice
when framed or engraved; they provide a basis for strategy and ac-
tion; they reveal the reason a business opens its doors every day, the
reason salespersons sell, the reason customers buy, and the reason
employees work. The statements ideally are the passion behind the
company, the foundation for employee morale, and the basis for
customer loyalty. Written from a customer perspective and included
in both oral and written communication with customers, the state-
ments could be used to attract and keep customers. Vision and mis-
sion statements do matter. Marketers pursue projects and managers
make daily decisions mindful of the firm’s basic vision, mission, and
resources. Managers work hard every day to motivate employees.
Executives are on a mission to present the firm favorably to many
stakeholders. A clear vision and mission enables strategists to lead
the way as a firm strives to gain, sustain, and grow its customer base
and competitive advantages.
Establish A Clear Vision & Mission
Evaluate & Monitor Results:
Take Corrective Actions; Adapt
To Change
Gain & Sustain Competitive Advantages
Formulate Strategies: Collect, Analyze, &
Prioritize Data Using Matrices; Establish A Clear Strategic Plan
Implement Strategies: Establish Structure; Allocate Resources; Motivate & Reward; Attract Customers; Manage Finances
FIGURE 2-2
How to Gain and Sustain Competitive Advantages
84 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Chapter Summary Every organization has a unique purpose and reason for being. This uniqueness should be re-
flected in vision and mission statements. The nature of a business’ core values, vision, and mis-
sion can represent either a competitive advantage or disadvantage for the firm. An organization
achieves a heightened sense of purpose when strategists, managers, and employees develop and
communicate clear core values, vision, and mission. Drucker says that developing a clear busi-
ness vision and mission is the “first responsibility of strategists.”
A quality mission statement reveals an organization’s customers; products or services; mar-
kets; technology; concern for survival, growth, and profitability; philosophy; distinctive com-
petence; concern for public image; and concern for employees. These nine basic components
serve as a practical framework for evaluating and writing mission statements. As the first step
in strategic management, the vision and mission statements provide direction for all planning
activities. As indicated next in the mini-case, even Under Armour’s vision and mission state-
ments can be improved.
Well-designed vision and mission statements are essential for formulating, implementing,
and evaluating strategy. Developing and communicating a clear business vision and mission
are the most commonly overlooked tasks in strategic management. Without clear statements
of vision and mission, a firm’s short-term actions can be counterproductive to long-term in-
terests. Vision and mission statements always should be subject to revision, but, if carefully
prepared, they will require infrequent major changes. Vision and mission statements should
serve as guidance and be reviewed often when divergent views arise among managers on vari-
ous strategies to implement. Organizations usually reexamine their vision and mission state-
ments annually. Effective vision and mission statements stand the test of time.
Core values, vision, and mission statements are essential tools for strategists—a fact illus-
trated in a short story told by Porsche’s former CEO Peter Schultz (paraphrased):
Three guys were at work building a large church. All were doing the same job, but when
each was asked what his job was, the answers varied: “Pouring cement,” the first re-
plied; “Earning a paycheck,” responded the second; “Helping to build a cathedral,” said
the third. Few of us can build cathedrals. But to the extent we can see the cathedral in
whatever cause we are following, the job seems more worthwhile. Good strategists and
a clear mission help us find those cathedrals in what otherwise could be dismal issues
and empty causes.11
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS
Because gaining and sustaining competitive advantage is the es-
sence of strategic management, when presenting your vision and
mission statements as part of a case analysis, be sure to address
the “distinctive competence” component. Compare your rec-
ommended vision and mission statements with the firm’s exist-
ing statements and with rival firms’ statements to clearly reveal
how your recommendations or strategic plan enables the firm to
gain and sustain competitive advantage. Your proposed mission
statement should certainly include the 10 characteristics and 9
components, but in your discussion about the vision or mission,
focus on competitive advantage. In other words, be prescriptive,
forward-looking, and insightful—couching your vision or mission
overview in terms of how you believe the firm can best gain and
sustain competitive advantage. Do not be content with merely
showing a 9-component comparison of your proposed statement
with rival firms’ statements, although that would be nice to in-
clude in your analysis.
CHAPTER 2 • BuSINESS VISION AND MISSION 85
Key Terms and Concepts concern for employees (p. 78)
concern for public image (p. 78)
concern for survival, growth,
and profitability (p. 78)
core values statement (p. 72)
creed statement (p. 75)
customers (p. 77)
distinctive competence (p. 78)
markets (p. 77)
mission statement (p. 75)
mission statement
components (p. 77)
philosophy (p. 78)
products or services (p. 77)
reconciliatory (p. 76)
stakeholders (p. 76)
technology (p. 78)
vision statement (p. 73)
Issues for Review and Discussion
2-1. This chapter’s exemplary strategist is CEO and founder
of FedEx, Frederick W. Smith. How closely aligned do
you think Smith’s personal vision statement would be
or should be with his corporate vision statement?
2-2. This chapter’s ethics capsule is about Facebook chang-
ing its mission to become more ethical. How closely
aligned do you think Facebook Chairman Mark Zuck-
erberg’s personal mission statement would be or should
be with his corporate mission statement?
2-3. Regarding the “survival, growth, and profitability com-
ponent, for publicly held firms, shareholders oftentimes
expect at least a 4 percent annual growth in revenues.”
Explain why is this statement true.
2-4. Explain the 5-out-of-5 test associated with vision statements.
2-5. At the website http://www.themarketingblender.com/
vision-mission-statements/ it defines vision as “the
dreaming piece” and defines mission as “the doing
piece.” How effective is this distinction?
2-6. Discuss the relative importance of vision and mission
documents for managers compared with employees,
customers, and shareholders.
2-7. Define reconciliatory, and give an example of how this
“characteristic” can be met in a mission statement.
2-8. Which mission statement component most closely reveals
the firm’s competitive advantage? Give an example.
2-9. Critique the following vision statement by Stokes Eye
Clinic: “Our vision is to take care of your vision.”
2-10. For a university, students are the customer. Write a
single sentence that could be included in your universi-
ty’s mission statement to reveal the institution’s market
components written from a customer perspective.
2-11. Some excellent nine-component mission statements
consist of just two sentences. Write a two-sentence mis-
sion statement for a company of your choice.
2-12. How do you think an organization can best align com-
pany mission with employee mission?
2-13. What are some different names for “mission statement,”
and where will you likely find a firm’s mission statement?
2-14. If your company does not have a vision or mission
statement, describe a good process for developing these
documents.
2-15. Explain how developing a mission statement can help
resolve divergent views among managers in a firm.
2-16. Drucker says the most important time to seriously
reexamine the firm’s vision or mission is when the firm
is successful. Why is this?
2-17. Explain why a mission statement should not include
monetary amounts, numbers, percentages, ratios, goals,
or objectives.
2-18. Discuss the meaning of the following statement: “Good
mission statements identify the utility of a firm’s prod-
ucts to its customers.”
2-19. Distinguish between the “distinctive competence” and
the “philosophy” components in a mission statement.
Give an example of each for your university.
2-20. When someone or some company is “on a mission” to
achieve something, many times the person or company
cannot be stopped. List three things in prioritized order
that you are on a mission to achieve in life.
2-21. Compare and contrast vision statements with mission
statements in terms of composition and importance.
2-22. Do local service stations need to have written vision
and mission statements? Why or why not?
2-23. Why do you think organizations that have a comprehen-
sive mission tend to be high performers? Does having a
comprehensive mission cause high performance?
2-24. What is your college or university’s distinctive compe-
tence? How would you state that in a mission statement?
2-25. Explain the principal value of a vision and a mission
statement.
2-26. Why is it important for a mission statement to be recon-
ciliatory?
86 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
2-27. In your opinion, what are the three most important com-
ponents that should be included when writing a mission
statement? Why?
2-28. How would the mission statements of a for-profit and a
nonprofit organization differ?
2-29. Write a vision and mission statement for an organiza-
tion of your choice.
2-30. Who are the major stakeholders of the bank that you
do business with locally? What are the major claims of
those stakeholders?
2-31. List eight benefits of having a clear mission statement.
2-32. How often do you think a firm’s vision and mission
statement should be changed?
2-33. What four characteristics can be used to evaluate the
quality of a vision statement?
2-34. Explain the importance of core values in establishing
vision and mission statements.
2-35. According to the authors, what are the three most
important mission statement components in rank
order?
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
SET 1: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR COCA-COLA
EXERCISE 2A
Develop an Improved Coca-Cola Vision Statement
Purpose
Coca-Cola’s vision statement is given on the Coca-Cola website at http://www.coca-colacompany.com/our-
company/mission-vision-values. The purpose of this exercise is to evaluate Coca-Cola’s vision statement
and to develop a new and improved statement for the company.
Instructions
Step 1 Refer to the Cohesion Case (p. 57 on vision/mission). Go to the Coca-Cola website. Click on
Our Company. Then click on Mission, Vision, and Values. Then find the company’s vision
statement and copy and paste this document to a word-processing file on your desktop.
Step 2 Write a new and improved vision statement for Coca-Cola following the guidelines
presented in this chapter.
Step 3 Explain in a paragraph how or why your proposed vision statement is better than the existing
document.
Step 4 E-mail your work to your professor for evaluation.
EXERCISE 2B
Develop an Improved Coca-Cola Mission Statement
Purpose
Coca-Cola’s mission statement is given on the corporate website at http://www.coca-colacompany.com/
our-company/mission-vision-values. The purpose of this exercise is to evaluate Coca-Cola’s mission state-
ment and to develop a new and improved statement for the company.
Instructions
Step 1 Refer to the Cohesion Case (p. 57 on vision/mission). Go to the Coca-Cola website. Click
on Our Company. Then click on Mission, Vision, and Values. Find the company’s mission
statement and copy and paste this document to a word-processing file on your desktop.
Step 2 Write a new and improved vision statement for Coca-Cola following the guidelines
presented in this chapter.
Step 3 Explain in a paragraph how or why your proposed vision statement is better than the existing
document.
Step 4 E-mail your work to your professor for evaluation.
CHAPTER 2 • BuSINESS VISION AND MISSION 87
EXERCISE 2C
Compare Coca-Cola’s Mission Statement to a Rival Firm’s
Purpose
A mission statement is an integral part of strategic management because it provides direction for formu-
lating, implementing, and evaluating strategies. This exercise will give you practice evaluating mission
statements—a prerequisite skill for writing a good mission statement. Coca-Cola’s mission statement is
given on the Coca-Cola website at http://www.coca-colacompany.com/our-company/mission-vision-values.
Instructions
Step 1 In a word-processing document, prepare a 9 * 2 matrix. Place the nine mission statement
components down the left column. Across the top of the file have two columns, one being
Coca-Cola and the other being PepsiCo or Dr Pepper Snapple.
Step 2 Write Included or Not Included in each cell of your matrix to indicate whether you feel each
particular mission statement includes the respective mission statement component written
from a customer perspective. Justify your opinion.
Step 3 E-mail your work to your professor for assessment.
SET 2: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR MY UNIVERSITY
EXERCISE 2D
Compare Your University’s Vision and Mission Statements to Those of a Rival Institution
Purpose
Most colleges and universities have vision and mission statements. The purpose of this exercise is to give
you practice comparing the effectiveness of vision and mission statements. For your university (or school of
business), compare your college or school with a rival institution.
Instructions
Step 1 Determine whether your institution has a vision or mission statement. Look online or in the
front of your college handbook. Analyze your college’s vision and mission statements in
light of the concepts presented in this chapter.
Step 2 Compare the vision statement and the mission statement of your college or university to
those of a leading rival institution.
Step 3 Write a one-page summary of your analysis of the statements as per the needed 10 character-
istics and 9 components presented in this chapter.
SET 3: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR MYSELF
EXERCISE 2E
Develop a Vision and Mission Statement for Yourself
Purpose
A personal vision and mission statement can be helpful to an individual in job-related decisions and career
paths. This exercise will give you practice developing and writing vision and mission statements from a per-
sonal perspective. For most college students nearing graduation, it is nearly inevitable to be faced with em-
ployability decisions. Developing vision and mission statements compels an individual to think about the
nature and scope of their skills and abilities and to assess the potential attractiveness of future job opportunities
and activities. These statements broadly chart the future direction of a person’s life and serve as a motivating
force and constant reminder of why the individual continuously gets up in the morning and works hard.
88 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Instructions
Step 1 Develop a professional vision statement for yourself. Your statement should answer
the question “What and where do I want to be professionally and personally in 3 to 5
years?”
Step 2 Develop a professional mission statement for yourself. Your statement should answer the
question “What do I want to accomplish professionally and personally in the next 1 to 3
years?”
SET 4: INDIVIDUAL VERSUS GROUP STRATEGIC PLANNING
EXERCISE 2F
What Is the Relative Importance of Each of the Nine Components of a Mission Statement?
Purpose
Research reveals that a mission statement should include all nine components to be most effective. For
some companies or organizations, some components may be more important to include than others. Based
on their experience, this exercise reveals the authors’ ranking of the relative importance of nine mission
recommended components for inclusion in an exemplary statement.
The purpose of this exercise is to examine how well students understand the components of a
mission statement. In addition, the purpose of this exercise is to examine whether individual decision
making is better than group decision making. Academic research suggests that groups make better
decisions than individuals about 80 percent of the time.
Instructions
Rank the nine mission statement components as to their relative importance (1 = most important, 9 = least
important). First, rank the components as an individual. Then, rank the components as part of a group of
three. Thus, determine what person(s) and what group(s) here today can come closest to the expert ranking.
This exercise enables examination of the relative effectiveness of individual versus group decision making
in strategic planning.
Steps
1. Fill in Column 1 in Table 2-8 to reveal your individual ranking of the relative importance of the nine
components (1 = most important, to 9 = least important, etc.). For example, if you feel the Customer
component is the fifth-most important, then enter a 5 in Table 1 in Column 1 beside Customers.
2. Fill in Column 2 in Table 2-8 to reveal your group’s ranking of the relative importance of the
nine components (1 = most important, to 9 = least important, etc.).
3. Fill in Column 3 in Table 2-8 to reveal the expert’s ranking of the nine components.
TABLE 2-8 Mission Statement Analysis: Comparing Individual versus Group Decision Making
Components Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5
1. Customers
2. Products
3. Markets
4. Technology
5. Survival/Growth
6. Philosophy
7. Distinctive
Competence
8. Public Image
9. Employee
Sums
CHAPTER 2 • BuSINESS VISION AND MISSION 89
MINI-CASE ON FORD MOTOR COMPANY (F)
EVALUATE FORD’S VISION FOR THE FUTURE AND MISSION FOR THE PRESENT Headquartered in Dearborn, Michigan, Ford is the second-largest U.S. automobile maker, behind
General Motors, and the fifth-largest automobile maker globally. Ford is considering changing its
vision and mission because of electric vehicles gaining such rapid prominence worldwide. The
company foresees a day soon across the United States where you pull up at any gas station and
either gas up or plug in to get charged up. Ford is behind nearly all automakers in electric product
offerings and is losing ground. This gas up or plug in scenario already exists in some parts of the
world. Ford’s survival going forward may hinge on an assessment of the company’s vision and
mission statements.
Current Vision Statement People working together as a lean, global enterprise to make lives better through automotive and mo-
bility leadership.
Proposed Vision Statement To be the global automotive industry leader through innovations in automotive transportation and
service to customers, employees, and the environment.
Key: Vision Statement Characteristics
1. Clear: reveals type of industry
2. Futuristic: reveals what the firm strives to become
3. Concise: one sentence in length
4. Unique: reveals the firm’s competitive advantage
5. Inspiring: motivates the readers to support the firm
Proposed Mission Statement Ford Motor Company strives to become the global automotive industry (3) leader delivering quality
innovations to transportation (2) that meet the needs of our customers (1). We are dedicated to adapt-
ing the latest technology (4, 7), including electric batteries, to facilitate change and social connectivity
through transportation (6). Our highly-trained professionals (9) support our efforts for continued growth
and profitability (5) while keeping our promise of environmental responsibility and sustainability in our
communities (6, 8).
4. Fill in Column 4 in Table 2- 8 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 1 and Column
3 to reveal how well you performed as an individual in this exercise. (Note: Absolute difference
disregards negative numbers.)
5. Fill in Column 5 in Table 2- 8 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 2 and Column 3
to reveal how well your group performed in this exercise.
6. Sum Column 4. Sum Column 5.
7. Compare the Column 4 sum with the Column 5 sum. If your Column 4 sum is less than your
Column 5 sum, then you performed better as an individual than as a group. Normally, group
decision making is superior to individual decision making, so if you did better than your group,
you did excellent.
8. The Individual Winner(s): The individual(s) with the lowest Column 4 sum is the WINNER.
9. The Group Winners(s): The group(s) with the lowest Column 5 score is the WINNER.
P ro
b st
/A la
m y
S to
ck P
h o to
90 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Web Resources 1. Example vision statements
This website provides more than 50 example vision statements. http://www.themarketingblender.com/ vision-mission-statements/
2. Example vision statements This website provides about one hundred example vision statements. https://www.executestrategy.net/wp-content/ uploads/2016/06/100-of-the-worlds-best-vision- statements.pdf
3. Example mission statements This website provides more than one hundred example mission statements from Fortune 500 companies. https://www.missionstatements.com/fortune_500_ mission_statements.html
4. Example mission statements This website provides 51 example mission statements from some of the world’s leading companies. http://www.alessiobresciani.com/foresight-strategy/51-mission -statement-examples-from-the-worlds-best-companies/
Current Readings Daspit, Joshua J., James J. Chrisman, Pramodita Sharma,
Allison W. Pearson, and Rebecca G. Long. “A Strategic
Management Perspective of the Family Firm: Past Trends,
New Insights, and Future Directions.” Journal of Manage-
rial Issues 29, no. 1 (Spring 2017): 6–29. David, Fred R., Forest R. David, and Meredith E. David.
“Benefits, Characteristics, Components, and Examples of Customer-Oriented Mission Statements.” International Journal of Business, Marketing, and Decision Sciences (IJBMDS) 9, no. 1 (Fall 2016): 1–14.
David, Meredith E., Forest R. David, and Fred R. David. “Mission Statement Theory and Practice: A Content Analysis and New Direction.” International Journal of Business, Marketing, and Decision Sciences (IJBMDS) 7, no. 1 (Summer 2014): 95–109.
Eshima, Yoshihiro, and Brian S. Anderson. “Firm Growth, Adaptive Capability, and Entrepreneurial Orientation.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 3 (March 2017): 770–779.
Levine, Sheen, Mark Bernard, and Rosemarie Nagel. “Strategic Intelligence: The Cognitive Capability to Anticipate Competitor Behavior.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 12 (December 2017): 2390–2423.
Rodríguez, Omar, and Sundar Bharadwaj. “Competing on Social Purpose: Brands That Win By Tying Mission to Growth.” Harvard Business Review 95, no. 5 (September– October 2017): 94–101.
Saarikko, Ted, Ulrika H. Westergren, and Tomas Blomquist. “The Internet of Things: Are You Ready for What’s Coming?” Business Horizons 60, no. 5 (September 2017): 667–676.
Key: Mission Statement Components
Questions
1. In what three ways is Ford’s proposed vision statement better than the firm’s actual vision
statement? Does the current or proposed statement meet the 5-out-of-5 test? If not, prepare a new
statement.
2. Evaluate the extent that the proposed mission statement for Ford meets the 10 characteristics
and includes the 9 components presented in the chapter.
Source: Based on information at http://corporate.ford.com/company.html?gnav=footer-aboutford, coupled with a
variety of other sources.
1. Customers
2. Product or services
3. Markets
4. Technology
5. Survival, growth, and profitability
6. Philosophy
7. Distinctive Competence
8. Public image
9. Employees
CHAPTER 2 • BuSINESS VISION AND MISSION 91
Endnotes 1. Brian Dumaine, “What the Leaders of Tomorrow See,”
Fortune (July 3, 1989): 50.
2. Peter Drucker, Management: Tasks, Responsibilities, and
Practices (New York: Harper & Row, 1974), 61.
3. John Pearce II, “The Company Mission as a Strategic Tool,”
Sloan Management Review 23, no. 3 (Spring 1982): 74.
4. George Steiner, Strategic Planning: What Every Manager
Must Know (New York: The Free Press, 1979): 160.
5. Raj Devasagayam, Nicholas R. Stark, and Laura Spitz Val-
estin, “Examining the Linearity of Customer Satisfaction:
Return on Satisfaction as an Alternative,” Business Perspec-
tives and Research 1, no. 2 (January 2013): 1. Xueming
Luo, Jan Wieseke, and Christian Homburg, “Incentivizing
CEOs to Build Customer- and Employee-Firm Relations
for Higher Customer Satisfaction and Firm Value,” Journal
of the Academy of Marketing Science 40, no. 6 (2012): 745.
6. Meredith E. David, Forest R. David, and Fred R. David,
“Mission Statement Theory and Practice: A Content
Analysis and New Direction,” International Journal of
Business, Marketing, and Decision Sciences 7, no. 1 (Sum-
mer 2014): 95–109.
7. Sebastian Desmidt, Anita Prinzie, and Adelien Decramer,
A. “Looking for the Value of Mission Statements: A Meta-
Analysis of 20 Years of Research,” Management Decision
49, no. 3 (2011): 468.
8. W. R. King and D. I. Cleland, Strategic Planning and
Policy (New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1979): 124.
9. “How W. T. Grant Lost $175 Million Last Year,” Busi-
ness Week (February 25, 1975): 75. Drucker, Manage-
ment, 88.
10. Drucker, Management: Tasks, Responsibilities, and
Practices, 88.
11. http://ezinearticles.com/?Elements-of-a-Mission-
Statement&id=3846671
92 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
92
Strategy Formulation
Feedback Loop
Strategy Implementation
Strategy Evaluation
Chapter 10: Business Ethics, Environmental Sustainability, and Social Responsibility
Chapter 11: Global and International Issues
Strategy Evaluation
and Governance Chapter 9
Implementing Strategies:
Finance and Accounting
Issues Chapter 8
Implementing Strategies:
Management and Marketing
Issues Chapter 7
Business Vision and
Mission Chapter 2
Strategies in Action Chapter 5
Strategy Analysis and
Choice Chapter 6
The Internal
Assessment Chapter 4
The External Assessment Chapter 3
FIGURE 3- 1
The Comprehensive, Integrative Strategic-Management Model
Source: Fred R. David, “How Companies Define Their Mission,” Long Range Planning 22, no. 1 (February 1989): 91. See also Anik Ratnaningsih, Nadjadji Anwar, Patdono Suwignjo, and Putu Artama Wiguna, “Balance Scorecard of David’s Strategic Modeling at Industrial Business for National Construction Contractor of Indonesia,” Journal of Mathematics and Technology , no. 4 (October 2010): 20.
PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
3
93
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following:
3- 1. Describe the nature and purpose of an external assessment in formulating strategies.
3- 2. Identify and discuss 10 external forces that impact organizations.
3- 3. Explain Porter’s Five-Forces Model and its relevance in formulating strategies.
3- 4. Describe key sources of information for identifying opportunities and threats.
3- 5. Discuss forecasting tools and techniques.
3- 6. Explain how to develop and use an External Factor Evaluation (EFE) Matrix.
3- 7. Explain how to develop and use a Competitive Profile Matrix (CPM).
The External Assessment
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
The following exercises are found at the end of this chapter:
SET 1 : Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 3A : Develop an EFE Matrix for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 3B : Develop a Competitive Profile Matrix for Coca-Cola
SET 2 : Strategic Planning for My University
EXERCISE 3C : Develop an EFE Matrix for Your College or University
EXERCISE 3D : Develop a Competitive Profile Matrix for Your College or University
SET 3 : Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability
EXERCISE 3E : How Competitive Is Your State among All States for Finding a Job?
EXERCISE 3F : Compare and Contrast CareerBuilder, Glassdoor, Monster Jobs, and ZipRecruiter
EXERCISE 3G : A Template Competency Test
SET 4 : Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
EXERCISE 3H : What External Forces Are Most Important in Strategic Planning?
MyLab Management
Improve Your Grade!
If your instructor is using MyLab Management, visit www.pearson.com/mylab/management
for videos, simulations, and writing exercises.
94 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
C ompanies and organizations continually deal with external uncertainties and must
quickly adapt to change to survive, as indicated in the following story:
Once there were two company presidents who competed in the same industry.
These two presidents decided to go on a camping trip to discuss a possible
merger. They hiked deep into the woods. Suddenly, they came upon a grizzly
bear that rose up on its hind legs and snarled. Instantly, the first president took off
his knapsack and got out a pair of jogging shoes. The second president said, “Hey,
you can’t outrun that bear.” The first president responded, “Maybe I can’t outrun
that bear, but I surely can outrun you!”
As illustrated in Figure 3-1, this chapter focuses on the concepts and tools needed to manage
external uncertainties by conducting an external audit (sometimes called industry analysis).
An external audit focuses on identifying and evaluating trends and events beyond the control
of a single firm, such as increased foreign competition, population shifts to coastal areas,
an aging society, and a social-media revolution. An external audit reveals key opportunities
and threats confronting an organization; an external audit guides managers in formulating
strategies that take advantage of the opportunities and avoid or reduce the impact of threats.
This chapter presents a practical framework for gathering, assimilating, analyzing,
and prioritizing external information that provides a foundation for formulating strate-
gies effectively. Specifically, the first two-thirds of this chapter address external oppor-
tunity/threat areas in terms of what, where, how, and why to obtain this information;
the latter one-third of this chapter explains how to develop and use an External Factor
Evaluation (EFE) Matrix and Competitive Profile Matrix (CPM) to assimilate all the op-
portunity/threat factors/information.
The exemplary strategist showcased in this chapter is Ben Silbermann, CEO and co-
founder of Pinterest, the popular social-media company. Silbermann is outstanding at rec-
ognizing external opportunities and threats and formulating effective strategies accordingly.
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED
Ben Silbermann, CEO and Cofounder of Pinterest It is 2018 and Pinterest has grown to a valuation of more than $13
billion and a customer base of about 200 million users who have
“pinned” more than 110 billion ideas on Pinterest boards. Led by
CEO and strategist Ben Silbermann, Pinterest is one of the fastest-
growing companies in the world. The Pinterest website (www. pinterest
.com) is free to use and available in nearly 30 foreign languages.
Headquartered in San Francisco, Pinterest has about 900 employees.
Hundreds of companies advertise on Pinterest with display ads and
“pin” their products and services on boards. The Pinterest website is a
visual discovery, collection, and storage tool used by customers in the
United States (60 percent) and abroad (40 percent). Thousands of busi-
nesses and marketers use Pinterest to access data collected on Pinterest
customers, who interestingly are about 80 percent women, typically age
35 to 44. Silbermann has turned Pinterest into a global gold mine of
data for advertisers and retailers. He says Pinterest is “only beginning to
understand” how social media impacts consumers’ lives, and he is blaz-
ing a new trail with an innovative, entrepreneurial company. Pinterest
takes no commission or cut on transactions it processes and has no
plans to go public to raise capital. A key advantage of staying private is
to keep the ins and outs of business including the finance and market-
ing operations of the company, secret from rival companies, who may
want to imitate and replicate Pinterest strategies and offerings.
Source: Erin Griffith, “Ben Silbermann,” Fortune, (September 1–17, 2017): 69.
Also, http://fortune.com/2015/07/13/pinterest-ceo-ben-silbermann/
P ix
el lo
v er
R M
2 /A
la m
y S
to ck
P h o to
CHAPTER 3 • THE ExTERNAL ASSESSMENT 95
The External Assessment Phase of Strategy Formulation The purpose of an external audit is to develop a finite list of both opportunities that could benefit a
firm and threats that should be avoided or mitigated. As the term finite suggests, the external audit
is not aimed at developing an exhaustive list of every possible factor that could influence the busi-
ness; rather, it is aimed at identifying key variables that offer actionable responses. Firms should
be able to respond either offensively or defensively to the factors by formulating strategies that
capitalize on external opportunities or that minimize the impact of potential threats. Figure 3-1
illustrates with white shading how the external audit fits into the strategic-management process.
Key External Forces
There are 10 external forces that can be divided into 5 broad categories: (1) economic forces;
(2) social, cultural, demographic, and environment (SCDE) forces; (3) political, governmen-
tal, and legal forces; (4) technological forces; and (5) competitive forces. Relationships among
these forces and an organization are depicted in Figure 3-2. External trends and events, such
as increasing security concerns surrounding big data, changing consumer demand surrounding
authenticity and personalization, and people in developing countries learning about online ser-
vices, significantly affect products, services, markets, and organizations worldwide.
The Actionable-Quantitative-Comparative-Divisional (AQCD) Test
When identifying and prioritizing key external factors in strategic planning, make sure the fac-
tors selected meet the following four criteria to the extent possible:
1. Actionable (i.e., meaningful and helpful in ultimately deciding what actions or strategies a
firm should consider pursuing);
2. Quantitative (i.e., include percentages, ratios, dollars, and numbers to the extent possible);
3. Comparative (i.e., reveals changes over time), and
4. Divisional (relates to the firm’s products and/or regions (rather than consolidated) so infer-
ences can be drawn regarding what products and regions are doing well or not).
Factors that meet the four criteria described above pass what can be called the “Actionable-
Quantitative-Comparative-Divisional (AQCD) Test,” which is a measure of the quality of an external
factor. In addition to passing the AQCD Test, make sure that external factors are indeed external (not
internal), and make sure that external factors, particularly opportunities, are stated as external trends,
events, or facts, rather than being stated as strategies the firm could pursue. Also, make sure the external
LO 3.1
Competitors Suppliers
Distributors Creditors Customers Employees
Communities Managers
Stockholders Labor unions Governments
Trade associations Special interest groups
Products Services Markets
Natural environment
AN ORGANIZATION’S OPPORTUNITIES AND
THREATS
Economic forces
Social, cultural, demographic, and natural environment forces
Political, legal, and governmental forces
Technological forces
Competitive forces
FIGURE 3-2
Relationships Between Key External Forces and an Organization
96 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
factors relate closely to the firm achieving its mission (opportunities) or hindering its mission (threats).
Factors selected for inclusion in an external assessment should be mission-driven.
Regarding the AQCD criteria, strive to include all high quality factors in an external assess-
ment for a firm. A high quality factor will meet three or four of the AQCD criteria; a low quality
factor will meet two or fewer of the AQCD criteria. When performing an external assessment,
engage in an engineering hunt for facts to make sure as many factors as possible pass the AQCD
Test. It is important to state external factors to the extent possible in actionable, quantitative,
comparative, and divisional terms.
High quality and low quality external factors for Walmart are given below to further exem-
plify this important concept:
ASK YOuRSELF IS THE FACTOR
Actionable Quantitative Comparative Divisional
A High Quality External Factor
Online retail grocery shopping grew from 12% to 16% in 2018.
yes yes yes yes
A Low Quality External Factor
Consumers’ average disposable income increased greatly in 2018.
no no no no
Changes in external forces translate into changes in demand for both industrial and con-
sumer goods and services. External forces affect the types of products developed, the nature of
market segmentation and positioning strategies, the range of services offered, and the choice of
businesses to acquire or sell. External forces have a direct impact on both suppliers and distribu-
tors. Identifying and evaluating external opportunities and threats enables organizations to revise
their vision and mission if needed, to design strategies to achieve long-term objectives, and to
develop policies to achieve annual objectives.
10 External Forces that Impact Organizations Economic Forces
Economic factors have a direct impact on the potential attractiveness of various strategies. An
example of an economic variable is “value of the dollar,” which can have a significant effect on
financial results of companies with global operations. Domestic firms with significant overseas
sales, such as McDonald’s, are hurt by a strong dollar. If the dollar appreciates 10 percent relative
to the local currency of a particular country in which a U.S. company has $100 million in revenues,
that company’s revenues would decrease by $10 million as they are translated into U.S. dollars. For
foreign firms with relatively large U.S. sales, however, a strong dollar provides a boost. A strong
dollar enables U.S. firms to purchase raw materials more cheaply from other countries. However, in
early 2018, the value of the dollar was near a 3-year low versus foreign currencies.
Favorable economic conditions recently bode well for many firms because economic growth
typically reduces unemployment, boosts consumer confidence, and increases disposable income.
The World Economic Outlook report, published by the International Monetary Fund, predicts a
broad-based global acceleration in the world economy; small, but wide-spanning growth (around
3.6 percent) is expected among most major economies in 2018–2021.1
A few categories of economic variables that often yield AQCD opportunities and threats for
organizations are provided in Table 3-1. In doing strategic planning or case analysis, economic
factors must be stated in AQCD terms to the extent possible to be useful in strategic planning.
LO 3.2
CHAPTER 3 • THE ExTERNAL ASSESSMENT 97
Social, Cultural, Demographic, and Environment (SCDE) Forces
SCDE forces impact strategic decisions on virtually all products, services, markets, and custom-
ers. Small, large, for-profit, and nonprofit organizations in all industries are being staggered
and challenged by the opportunities and threats arising from changes in SCDE variables. These
forces are shaping the way people live, work, produce, and consume. New trends are creating a
shift in consumer demands and, consequently, a need for different products, new services, and
updated strategies. For example, consumers in the United States now desire automobiles with
greater space and utility, in lieu of sedans. In response to this external trend, Ford Motor recently
invested $7 billion in higher-margin trucks and SUVs and announced plans to reintroduce the
Ranger Trust and the Bronco SUV in North America.2
In the U.S. food industry, demand for processed packaged foods is declining because con-
sumers are showing increased preferences for freshly prepared food options. Packaged food
companies such as Kellogg are trying to quickly adapt to mitigate this external threat; Kellogg
recently hired a new CEO, Steven Cahillane, who comes with extensive experience leading the
health and wellness company, Nature’s Bounty.
Consumer tastes and trends constantly change; people wander through stores less, opt-
ing increasingly to use their mobile phones and computers to research prices and cherry-pick
promotions. Brick-and-mortar retail department stores consequently are struggling as consum-
ers increasingly turn to online retailers and smaller specialty stores. These external trends have
prompted many retail chains to slow or cease store openings.3
The United States (and the world) is also becoming older. Individuals age 65 and older in the
United States, as a percentage of the population, will rise to 19 percent by 2030. The trend toward
an older society is good news for restaurants, hotels, airlines, cruise lines, tours, travel services,
pharmaceutical firms, automakers, and funeral homes. Older people are especially interested in
health care, financial services, travel, crime prevention, and leisure. The aging population affects
the strategic orientation of nearly all organizations.
Example categories of SCDE variables that often yield AQCD opportunities and threats for
organizations are given in Table 3-2. In performing strategic planning and case analysis, rele-
vant SCDE factors must be stated in AQCD terms to the extent possible to be useful in strategic
planning.
Political, Governmental, and Legal Forces
Politics, governments, and legislators can and often do impact strategic decisions. Federal, state,
local, and foreign governments are major regulators, deregulators, subsidizers, employers, and
customers of organizations. Political, governmental, and legal factors, therefore, can represent
major opportunities or threats for both small and large organizations. For industries and firms
that depend heavily on government contracts or subsidies, political forecasts can be the most
important part of an external audit. State and local income taxes and property taxes, for example,
TABLE 3-1 Example Economic Categories To Be Monitored
Shift to a service economy Demand shifts for different goods and services
Availability of credit Income differences by region and consumer groups
Level of disposable income Price fluctuations
Propensity of people to spend Foreign countries’ economic conditions
Interest rates Monetary and fiscal policies
Inflation rates Stock market trends
Gross domestic product (GDP) trends Tax rate variation by country and state
Consumption patterns European Economic Community (EEC) policies
Unemployment trends
Value of the dollar in world markets
Import/export factors
Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries
(OPEC) policies
98 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
impact where companies locate facilities and where people desire to live. Nine U.S. states, for
example, have zero state income tax: Alaska, Florida, Nevada, South Dakota, Texas, Washington,
Wyoming, New Hampshire, and Tennessee.
Governmental legislation can significantly impact where businesses sell their products. For
example, rapidly developing shifts in legislation surrounding the legality of marijuana are open-
ing new markets for investors. Nearly a decade ago, Colorado passed the world’s first legislation
that would treat marijuana like alcohol, taxing and regulating its sales. U.S. consumers spent
$6.7 billion on legal marijuana in 2016; this number is expected to reach $208 billion in 2021.
Example categories of political, governmental, and legal variables that often yield AQCD
opportunities and threats to organizations are provided in Table 3-3. Political, governmental,
and legal factors must be stated in AQCD terms to the extent possible to be useful in strate-
gic planning. Local, state, and federal laws, as well as regulatory agencies and special-interest
groups, can have a major impact on the strategies of small, large, for-profit, and nonprofit orga-
nizations. Many companies have altered or abandoned strategies in the past because of politi-
cal or governmental actions. As indicated in Ethics Capsule 3, new pending federal legislation
regarding Alaska oil drilling could create business opportunities and threats and present ethical
dilemma issues.
TABLE 3-2 Key SCDE Variables
Population changes by race, age, and geographic area Attitudes toward retirement
Regional changes in tastes and preferences Energy conservation
Number of marriages Attitudes toward product quality
Number of divorces Attitudes toward customer service
Number of births Pollution control
Number of deaths Attitudes toward foreign peoples
Immigration and emigration rates Energy conservation
Social Security programs Social programs
Life expectancy rates Number of places of worship
Per-capita income Number of religious members
Social-media pervasiveness Social responsibility issues
ETHICS CAPSULE 3
Preserve Alaska Wildlife or Boost Alaska Economy?
Alaska is home to the largest wildlife refuge in the United States,
the Arctic National Wildlife Refuge, which spans more than 19
million acres. The refuge serves an important role in the migra-
tion of wildlife including birds, caribou, and polar bears, and it is
also believed to hold significant oil reserves. In December 2017,
Congress voted to authorize drilling in Alaska’s Arctic National
Wildlife Refuge to boost the nation’s energy independence and
help the Alaskan economy. However, from an ethical perspective,
the arctic program director for the Wilderness Society, Lois Epstein,
states that, “Opening the Arctic refuge coastal plain to oil leas-
ing, exploration, and production unacceptably threatens the Arctic
refuge’s globally significant wilderness and wildlife values.” In per-
forming an external strategic-management analysis, tradeoffs such
as this abound and judgments must be made; decisions regarding
tradeoffs are evidenced in the choice of factors, weights, and rat-
ings assigned in an EFE Matrix presented in this chapter. Do you
think the benefits from the potential drilling in the Refuge would
offset the potential harm to Arctic wildlife? Government and envi-
ronmental officials are weighing in on the issue as Congress dis-
cusses proposed legislation. What assurances would have to be
made, if any, for you to approve of your company drilling in the
Refuge?
Source: Based on Jim Carlton, “Interior Official Urges Arctic Drilling,” Wall
Street Journal, (November 3, 2017): A3.
Where Are We Going Mom?
T o n y C
am p b el
l/ S
h u tt
er st
o ck
CHAPTER 3 • THE ExTERNAL ASSESSMENT 99
Technological Forces
A variety of new technologies such as the Internet of Things, three-dimensional (3D) printing,
predictive analytics, quantum computing, robotics, and artificial intelligence are fueling innova-
tion in many industries and impacting strategic-planning decisions. Businesses are using mobile
technologies and applications to better determine customer trends and are employing advanced
analytics to make enhanced strategy decisions. The vast increase in the amount of data coming
from mobile devices and social-media sites is astonishing. A primary reason that Cisco Systems
recently entered the data analytics business is that sales of hardware, software, and services con-
nected to the Internet of Things is expected to increase to $7.1 billion by 2020 from approximately
$2.0 billion in 2015. A recent report by Cognizant Technology Solutions Corp., an IT services and
consulting firm, predicts that more than 20 new job categories are soon to emerge from techno-
logical advances.
Online retail is crushing traditional retail. Credit Suisse reports that more U.S. brick-and-
mortar retail stores closed in 2017 than in the 2008 economic recession. U.S. online retail sales
increased a whopping 24 percent in 2017, as consumers prefer having boxes delivered to their door.
This technological trend is so pervasive that Walmart Stores, Inc. in 2018 changed their name to
Walmart, Inc.—removing the word stores. In fact, in terms of online selling of groceries, Walmart
is the leader in China, even though there are more than four hundred Walmart stores in China.
Advances in technology impact the manufacturing labor market. Ben Pring, Director of
Cogniant’s Center for the Future of Work estimates that nearly 19 million jobs in the United
States will become obsolete or be replaced by automation in the next 15 years.4 In a dramatic
shift from employing people with low wages outside of the United States, Adidas is shifting
to produce footwear in developed countries using fully robotic plants called “speed-factories.”
Adidas’s speed- factories are now located across the world, including in Germany, the United
States, France, China, and Japan. This shift from cheap manpower to complete automation is a
technological revolution occurring in the footwear industry. Before new speed-factories, Adidas
owned no factories, instead using more than one thousand suppliers that employ millions of
people to assemble shoes at low-wage facilities globally. Adidas’ new strategy aims to eventually
surpass its major rival Nike.
No company or industry today is insulated against emerging technological developments. In high-
tech industries, identification and evaluation of key technological opportunities and threats can be the
most important part of the external strategic-management audit. In performing an external assessment,
technology-related factors must be stated in AQCD terms to the extent possible to be useful in strategic
planning. Technological advancements impact firms in countless ways, such as the following:
1. They can dramatically affect organizations’ products, services, markets, suppliers, distribu-
tors, competitors, customers, manufacturing processes, marketing practices, and competi-
tive position.
2. They can create new markets, result in a proliferation of new and improved products,
change the relative competitive cost positions in an industry, and render existing products
and services obsolete.
3. They can reduce or eliminate cost barriers between businesses, create shorter production
runs, create shortages in technical skills, and result in changing values and expectations of
employees, managers, and customers.
4. They can create new competitive advantages that are more powerful than existing
advantages.
TABLE 3-3 Example Political, Governmental, and Legal Categories To Be Monitored
Natural environmental regulations United States versus other country relationships
Protectionist actions by countries Political conditions in countries
Changes in patent laws Global price of oil changes
Equal employment opportunity laws Local, state, and federal laws
Level of defense expenditures Import–export regulations
Unionization trends Tariffs, particularly on steel and aluminum
Antitrust legislation Local, state, and national elections
100 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
A chief information officer (CIO) and chief technology officer (CTO) are common
positions in firms today, reflecting the growing importance of information technology (IT)
in strategic management. A CIO and CTO work together to ensure that information needed to
formulate, implement, and evaluate strategies is available on demand. The CIO is primarily a
manager, managing the firm’s relationship with stakeholders; the CTO is primarily a technician,
focusing on technical issues such as data acquisition, data processing, decision-support systems,
and software and hardware acquisition.
Monitoring online reviews for businesses, large or small, has become a burdensome but
essential task, especially given social-media channels, such as Twitter, that empowers opinionated
customers. Benign neglect of a company’s online reputation can quickly hurt sales, especially
given the new normal behavior of customers consulting their smartphones for even the smallest
of purchases.
Competitive Forces
Arguably the most important part of an external audit is identifying rival firms and deter-
mining their strengths, weaknesses, capabilities, objectives, and strategies. George Salk
stated, “If you’re not faster than your competitor, you’re in a tenuous position, and if you’re
only half as fast, you’re terminal.” As indicated in Global Capsule 3, Netflix is faster than
its rival firms but staying ahead requires constant monitoring of what those firms are doing
and why. Go to www.owler.com for information about competitors.
Competition in virtually all industries is intense—and sometimes cutthroat. Within the
smartphone and personal tech industry, for example, GoPro Inc. is struggling to maintain market
share. To differentiate its offerings from the latest smartphone camera technologies offered by
Apple and Samsung, GoPro developed a new product called Fusion that features a 360-degree
spherical camera with a unique Over-Capture capability, enabling users to capture pictures from
every angle simultaneously.
Addressing questions about competitors, such as those presented in Table 3-4, is essential in
performing an external audit. Competitive intelligence (CI), as formally defined by the Society
of Competitive Intelligence Professionals (SCIP), is a systematic and ethical process for gather-
ing and analyzing information about the competition’s activities and general business trends to
further a business’s own goals (SCIP website). Quality competitive intelligence in business, as in
the military, is one of the keys to success. Major competitors’ weaknesses can represent external
opportunities; major competitors’ strengths may represent key threats.
Various legal and ethical ways to obtain competitive intelligence include the following:
• Reverse-engineer rival firms’ products. • Use surveys and interviews of customers, suppliers, and distributors of rival firms. • Analyze rival firm’s Form 10-K. • Conduct fly-over and drive-by visits to rival firm operations. • Search online databases and websites such as www.owler.com. • Contact government agencies for public information about rival firms.
TABLE 3-4 Key Questions about Competitors
1. What are the strengths and weaknesses of our major competitors?
2. What products and services do we offer that are unique in the industry?
3. What are the objectives and strategies of our major competitors?
4. How will our major competitors most likely respond to current economic, SCDE, political, govern-
mental, legal, technological, and competitive trends affecting our industry?
5. How vulnerable are our major competitors to our new strategies, products, and services?
6. How vulnerable is our firm to successful counterattack by our major competitors?
7. How does our firm compare to rivals in mastering the social-media conversation in this industry?
8. To what extent are new firms entering and old firms leaving this industry?
9. What key factors have resulted in our present competitive position in this industry?
10. How are supplier and distributor relationships changing in this industry?
CHAPTER 3 • THE ExTERNAL ASSESSMENT 101
GLOBAL CAPSULE 3
What Company Is Growing Fastest Globally? The answer to the question posed may be Netflix,
a firm that pursues global expansion with a ven-
geance. Netflix added 4.45 million new inter-
national subscribers in the third quarter (Q3) of
2017 alone, with Q3 revenue increasing 30 per-
cent. Netflix is taking advantage of the opportu-
nity associated with the population of the world
approaching 7.5 billion; the United States has
slightly more than 320 million people. That leaves
billions of people outside the United States who
may be interested in the products and services
produced through domestic firms. Remaining
solely domestic is an increasingly risky strategy,
especially as the world population continues to
grow to an estimated 8.6 billion in 2030, 9.8 bil-
lion in 2050, and 11.2 billion in 2100. Netflix is also mitigating an external threat in that some content
owners such as Walt Disney Company are planning to offer their own
movie- and video-streaming services instead of
working with Netflix. Apple also expects to spend
more than $1 billion in 2018 to produce its own
original content. To combat this threat, Netflix is
spending over $8 billion on content annually, sub-
stantially more than its rivals Hulu, Amazon.com,
and HBO. Netflix is focused on signing creative tal-
ent and acquiring its own production and intellec-
tual property. For example, the company recently
made it first acquisition, taking onboard the comic-
book publisher Millarworld. In addition to contin-
ued global expansion, Netflix’s long-term strategy
is to continue international expansion, rely less on
licensing programs from content suppliers, and
focus increasingly on acquiring original content.
Source: Based on Austen Hufford, “Netflix Subscriber Growth Surges,” Wall Street
Journal, (October 17, 2017): B2.
Enjoying a Netflix Movie
W av
eb re
ak M
ed ia
L td
/1 2 3 R
F
• Monitor relevant trade publications, magazines, and newspapers. • Purchase social-media data about customers of all firms in the industry. • Hire top executives from rival firms.
Information gathering from employees, managers, suppliers, distributors, customers, creditors,
and consultants can make the difference between having superior or just average intelligence and
overall competitiveness. All members of an organization—from the CEO to custodians—are valuable
intelligence agents for the firm. Special characteristics of a successful CI program include flexibility,
usefulness, timeliness, and cross-functional cooperation. CI is not corporate espionage. Unethical tac-
tics such as bribery, wiretapping, and computer hacking should never be used to obtain information.
Due to cybersecurity threats, CI must assure however that persons in a firm cannot access data and
information unrelated to their job description because hackers exploit this avenue in firms.
In performing an external assessment, competitor-related factors must be stated in AQCD
terms to the extent possible to be useful in strategic planning.
Porter’s Five-Forces Model Harvard Business School Professor, Michael Porter, suggests that firms should strive to compete
in attractive industries, avoid weak or faltering industries, and gain a full understanding of key
external factors within that attractive industry. Given that competitive positioning within an indus-
try is a key determinant of competitive advantage, Porter established the Five-Forces Model.
One of the major contributions of Porter’s work is he shifted focus away from viewing com-
petition directed toward a few rival firms to a broader analysis that includes forces from current
competitors, new competitors, substitute products, suppliers, and buyers. Competitive advantage
can be created in each area of the five forces by offering value to the consumer that exceeds cost.
Rather than focusing solely on a top competitor, it is important that firms examine how suppliers
and others listed in the five forces are trying to siphon off as much value as possible in all busi-
ness transactions.
Porter’s Model is also used to determine which industries to enter because generally the
stronger the five forces are, the less profitable the industry. Porter is an advocate of external vari-
ables rather than internal ones being a larger driver of competitive advantage, similar to a rising
or falling tide; it is difficult to overcome a rising tide no matter your internal capabilities. Porter’s
Model also prompts managers to focus on the medium- and longer-term factors that determine
LO 3.3
102 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
competitiveness, rather than short-term factors such as stock market movements, who won the
election, or even something as trivial as inclement weather, which is often an excuse proposed by
pundits on TV to explain slow Christmas sales. It is not that short-term factors are not important
or have no impact, but they simply do not affect competition to the degree that long-term factors
do, as revealed in the Five-Forces Model.
As illustrated in Figure 3-3, the Porter’s Five-Forces Model offers guidance to strategists in
formulating strategies to keep rival firms at bay. According to Porter, the nature of competitive-
ness in a given industry can be viewed as a composite of five forces:
1. Rivalry among competing firms
2. Potential entry of new competitors
3. Potential development of substitute products
4. Bargaining power of suppliers
5. Bargaining power of consumers
Rivalry among Competing Firms
Rivalry among competing firms is usually the most powerful of the five competitive forces
and the most traditional factor analyzed by managers. It is also the only factor most affected
by changes in the other four factors. Strategies pursued by one firm can be successful only
to the extent that they provide competitive advantage over the strategies pursued by rival
firms. Intense rivalry among competitors in an industry can decrease overall industry profits
because firms often lower prices or spend extra on advertising to maintain market share, often
transferring profits directly to consumers and other players in the Five-Forces Model. Rivalry
among competing firms increases for numerous reasons as given in Table 3-5, including an
increase in the number of competitors and a shift towards competitors becoming more equal
in size and capability.
As rivalry among competing firms intensifies, industry profits decline, in some cases to
the point where an industry becomes inherently unattractive. Changes in strategy by one firm
may be met with retaliatory countermoves, such as lowering prices, enhancing quality, adding
features, providing services, extending warranties, and increasing advertising—especially
when a firm senses weakness from another. Although avoiding high-rivalry industries would
be ideal, that is often easier said than done. At times it may be best to look for an industry
with more favorable five forces and reduced rivalry, but firms can also compete within a
similar or sub-industry by offering products targeting different customer groups with dif-
ferentiated products. Offering differentiation helps all firms in the industry by moving away
from competing on cost, where unique customers can be better served while maintaining
profits for firms.
Potential development of substitute products
Bargaining power of consumersBargaining power of suppliers
Potential entry of new competitors
Rivalry among competing firms
FIGURE 3-3
The Five-Forces Model of Competition
CHAPTER 3 • THE ExTERNAL ASSESSMENT 103
Potential Entry of New Competitors
Whenever new firms can easily enter a particular industry, existing firms are likely to face threats
of reduced market share. In such industries, a firm’s strategies should deter new firms from enter-
ing the market to avoid further saturation of the market. Example barriers to entry can include
economies of scale, specialized know-how, strong brand reputation, established customer loyalty,
high capital requirements, absolute cost advantages, highly efficient supply chains, specialized
distribution channels, access to key raw materials, and possession of patents. The automotive
oil-change industry, for example, has relatively low barriers to entry; whereas the smartphone
industry has much higher barriers to entry.
Despite numerous barriers to entry, new firms sometimes enter industries with higher-quality
products, lower prices, and substantial marketing resources. When the threat of new firms enter-
ing the market is strong, incumbent firms generally fortify their positions and take swift actions
to deter new entrants, such as lowering prices, extending warranties, adding features, or offer-
ing financing specials. Even the threat of new entrants can increase rivalry and thus reduce
profitability.
Potential Development of Substitute Products
In many industries, firms are in close competition with producers of substitute products in other
industries. Examples are beer, wine, and liquor; public transportation and car, bike, and taxi/
Uber; natural gas, electricity, and solar power; glass bottles, paperboard containers, and alumi-
num cans. A high threat of substitutes exists when consumer needs can easily be filled by one
or more substitute products outside of the firm’s industry. Competitive pressures arising from
substitute products increase as the relative price of substitute products decline and as consumers’
costs of switching decrease.
The presence of substitute products puts a ceiling on the price that can be charged before
consumers will switch to the substitute product. Price ceilings equate to profit ceilings and more
intense competition among rivals. Producers of eyeglasses and contact lenses, for example, face
increasing competitive pressures from laser eye surgery. Producers of sugar face similar pres-
sures from artificial sweeteners. Newspapers and magazines face substitute-product competitive
pressures from the Internet and 24-hour cable television. Substitute products can also come from
places not normally expected. For example, a diamond producer may not consider a honeymoon
package as a substitute for a less expensive ring. The bottom line with this “force” is that strate-
gists must manage the potential threat of substitute products.
Bargaining Power of Suppliers
The bargaining power of suppliers refers to the ability of suppliers to raise the price of any inputs
into the industry. This “force” affects the intensity of competitiveness in an industry, especially
when there are few substitutes available for the product offered by suppliers, when the cost of
switching to an alternative product offered by a different supplier is high, when the industry is
not a key source of the supplier’s revenues, or when there are few suppliers.
TABLE 3-5 Conditions that Cause High Rivalry among Competing Firms
1. When the number of competing firms is high
2. When competing firms are of similar size
3. When competing firms have similar capabilities
4. When demand for the industry’s products is changing rapidly
5. When price cuts are common in the industry
6. When consumers can switch brands easily
7. When barriers to leaving the market are high
8. When barriers to entering the market are low
9. When fixed costs are high among competing firms
10. When products are perishable or have short product life cycles
104 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
In some cases, firms pursue a backward-integration strategy to compete with suppliers. This
strategy is especially effective when suppliers are unreliable, too costly, not capable of meeting
a firm’s needs on a consistent basis, or simply have too much bargaining power and are able to
charge absorbent prices. Boeing and Airbus, the two largest jetliner manufacturers, are beginning
to make a portion of the parts that go into planes because both firms determined too high of a
proportion industry profitability was going to suppliers. A key lesson for suppliers is that if your
customer has the means to backward-integrate, it may be best to renegotiate prices.
Overall, firms are in a better position when numerous suppliers exist. It is often in the best
interest of both suppliers and producers to assist each other with reasonable prices, improved
quality, development of new services, just-in-time deliveries, and reduced inventory costs, thus
enhancing long-term profitability for all concerned. In more and more industries, sellers are forg-
ing strategic partnerships with select suppliers in an effort to (1) reduce inventory and logistics
costs, (2) accelerate the availability of next-generation components, (3) reduce defect rates, and
(4) squeeze out important cost savings for both themselves and their suppliers.5
Bargaining Power of Consumers
Bargaining power of buyers refers to the ability of buyers to drive down prices for products
offered by companies in a given industry. This force is strong when firms operate in industries
that contain a limited number of buyers or that are made up of buyers that have multiple choices
of where to buy from; this force is also strong when buyers purchase in volume or have low
switching costs. Consumers (buyers) gain bargaining power under the following circumstances:
1. If they can inexpensively switch to competing brands or substitutes
2. If they are particularly important to the seller
3. If sellers are struggling in the face of falling consumer demand
4. If they are informed about sellers’ products, prices, and costs
5. If they have discretion in whether and when they purchase the product6
The impact of this “force” on industry competitiveness is higher when the products being
purchased are standard or undifferentiated, enabling consumers to negotiate selling price, war-
ranty coverage, and accessory packages to a greater extent. Rival firms may offer extended war-
ranties or special services to gain customer loyalty whenever the bargaining power of consumers
is substantial. New car buyers, for example, often compare prices of their desired car across
several dealerships, often negotiating lower prices and additional services from dealerships in
exchange for their business.
As a result of Porter’s Five Forces, the intensity of competition among firms varies
widely across industries. Table 3-6 reveals the average operating profit for firms in different
industries. Note substantial variation among industries, with the lowest being for bookstores.
The collective impact of competitive forces is so brutal in some industries that the market is
TABLE 3-6 Competitiveness Across a Few Industries (2018 data)
Industry Operating Profit (%)
Banking 30.8
Hotels 18.4
Pharmaceutical 8.7
Oil and Gas Extraction 7.5
Fragrances/Cosmetics 7.1
Telecommunications 6.1
Food Manufacturing 5.4
Machinery/Construction 4.9
Paper Manufacturing 4.9
Bookstores 2.9
CHAPTER 3 • THE ExTERNAL ASSESSMENT 105
clearly “unattractive” from a profit-making standpoint. Strategists must continually monitor
the five forces to identify new opportunities and threats facing the firm, and alter strategies
accordingly.
Eliminating competition is a possibility and common strategy employed by firms in an indus-
try with high rivalry. Firms use mergers and acquisitions and purchase suppliers or buyers (dis-
tributors) all as a means to eliminate rivalry, but there are problems associated with this level of
thinking. Acquiring the competition often is associated with paying a premium and dealing with
different organizational cultures; although there may be no competitors currently, new competitors
may enter with different products and ultimately better serve many current customers. Purchasing
suppliers or distributors takes a firm away from the business they do best, possibly allowing com-
petitors to better develop and improve their products without being bogged down with supply chain
issues they know little about.
Several pitfalls firms should avoid when using the Five Forces Analysis, include (1) placing
equal weight on all five forces instead of identifying the most pressing forces for their industry,
(2) defining the industry too broad or too narrow, and (3) using the five forces to pin labels such as
attractive or unattractive on an industry rather than using the model to more efficiently formulate
strategies. When using Porter’s Five Forces Model as an external assessment tool in doing strategic
planning, strive to identify AQCD opportunities and threats most important for success in a given
industry, and most relevant to the firm’s vision and mission.
Key Sources of Information for an External Audit A wealth of strategic information is available to organizations from both published and unpub-
lished sources. Unpublished sources include customer surveys, market research, speeches at pro-
fessional and shareholders’ meetings, television programs, interviews, and conversations with
stakeholders. Published sources of strategic information include periodicals, journals, reports,
government documents, abstracts, books, directories, newspapers, and manuals. A company
website is usually an excellent place to start to find information about a firm, particularly on the
Investor Relations web pages.
There are many excellent websites for gathering strategic information, but six outstanding
ones that the authors use routinely in performing an external audit are:
1. http://finance.yahoo.com
2. www.hoovers.com
3. www.morningstar.com
4. www,mergentonline.com
5. http://globaledge.msu.edu/industries/
6. Corporate website of companies
The fifth website listed is operated by Michigan State University and provides industry pro-
files that are an excellent source for information, news, events, and statistical data for any industry.
Most college libraries subscribe to excellent online business databases that can then be used free
by students to gather information to perform a strategic-management case analysis. Simply ask
your reference librarian. Some outstanding library database sources of external audit information
are described in Table 3-7; the authors use all of these sources, especially S&P Net Advantage’s
Industry Surveys and IBISWorld, to obtain AQCD external factors for inclusion in an external
assessment. Note also in Table 3-7 the PrivCo source is helpful for obtaining information about
privately held firms; use www.owler.com for information about rival firms.
Forecasting and Making Assumptions Forecasts are educated assumptions about future trends and events. Forecasting is a complex
activity because of factors such as technological innovation, cultural changes, new products,
improved services, stronger competitors, shifts in government priorities, changing social values,
unstable economic conditions, and unforeseen events. Managers often must rely on published
forecasts to effectively identify key external opportunities and threats.
LO 3.4
LO 3.5
106 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
A sense of the future permeates all action and underlies every decision a person makes.
People eat expecting to be satisfied and nourished in the future. People sleep assuming that
in the future they will feel rested. They invest energy, money, and time because they believe
their efforts will be rewarded in the future. They build highways assuming that automobiles
and trucks will need them in the future. Parents educate children on the basis of forecasts
that they will need certain skills, attitudes, and knowledge when they grow up. The truth
is we all make implicit forecasts throughout our daily lives. The question, therefore, is not
whether we should forecast but rather how we can best forecast to enable us to move beyond
our ordinarily unarticulated assumptions about the future. Can we obtain information and
use it to make educated assumptions (forecasts) that better guide our current decisions and
foster a more desirable future state of affairs? Assumptions must be made based on facts,
figures, trends, and research. Strive for the firm’s assumptions to be more accurate than rival
firms’ assumptions.
No forecast is perfect; some are even wildly inaccurate. This fact accents the need for strate-
gists to devote sufficient time and effort to study the underlying bases for published forecasts and
to develop internal forecasts of their own. Key external opportunities and threats can be effec-
tively identified only through good forecasts.
Making Assumptions
Planning would be impossible without assumptions. McConkey defines assumptions as the
“best present estimates of the impact of major external factors, over which managers have
little if any control, but which may exert a significant impact on performance or the ability to
achieve desired results.”7 Strategists are faced with countless variables and imponderables that
TABLE 3-7 Excellent Online Sources to Obtain EFE Matrix Factor Information
• IBISWorld—Provides online USA Industry Reports (NAICS), U.S. Industry iExpert Summaries,
and U.S. Business Environment Profiles. A global version of IBIS is also available.
• Lexis-Nexis Academic—Provides online access to newspaper articles (including New York Times and
Washington Post) and business information (including SEC filings).
• Lexis-Nexis Company Dossier—Provides online access to extensive, current data on 13 million
companies. It collects and compiles information into excellent documents.
• Mergent Online—Provides online access to Mergent’s Manuals, which include trend, descriptive,
and statistical information on hundreds of public companies and industries. Unconsolidated company
income statements and balance sheets are provided.
• PrivCo—Provides information on privately held companies, including private financials and rev-
enues; private M&A deals and deal multiples, private firm valuations, VC funding, private equity deal
history. (Go to www.owler.com for information about competitors.)
• Regional Business News—Provides comprehensive full-text coverage for regional business publica-
tions; incorporates coverage of more than 80 regional business publications covering all metropolitan
and rural areas within the United States.
• Standard & Poor’s NetAdvantage—Provides online access to Standard & Poor’s (S&P) Industry
Surveys, stock reports, corporation records, The Outlook, mutual fund reports, and more. Locate the
“Company” tab at the top of the page or the “Simple Search” option located on the right side of the
page. Use the “Company Profile” option.
• Value Line Investment Survey—Provides excellent online information and advice on approximately
1,700 stocks, more than 90 industries, the stock market, and the economy. Company income state-
ments and balance sheets are provided.
• U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission—Provides the Form 10K for publicly held companies in
the United States. Use the search box at the top of the page or look under the “Filings” tab along the
top of the page.
• Company Annual Reports On-Line (CAROL)—Provides direct links to publicly held companies’
financial statements in both Europe and the United States.
Source: Based on information at www.fmarion.edu/library.
CHAPTER 3 • THE ExTERNAL ASSESSMENT 107
can be neither controlled nor predicted with 100 percent accuracy. Wild guesses should never
be made in formulating strategies, but reasonable assumptions based on available information
must always be made.
By identifying future occurrences that could have a major effect on the firm and by making
reasonable assumptions about those factors, strategists can carry the strategic-management process
forward. Assumptions are needed only for future trends and events that are most likely to have a
significant effect on the company’s business. Based on the best information at the time, assumptions
serve as checkpoints on the validity of strategies. If future occurrences deviate significantly from
assumptions, strategists know that corrective actions may be needed. Firms that compile the best
information generally make the most accurate assumptions, which can lead to major competitive
advantages.
The External Factor Evaluation Matrix An External Factor Evaluation (EFE) Matrix allows strategists to summarize and evaluate
economic, social, cultural, demographic, environmental, political, governmental, legal, techno-
logical, and competitive information. The EFE Matrix provides an empirical assessment of how
well a firm is handling external factors overall, including the firm’s effectiveness at capitalizing
on opportunities and minimizing threats.
Steps to Develop an EFE Matrix
An EFE Matrix can be developed in five steps:
Step 1: Develop a Full and Narrow List of Key External Factors
Conduct research about the focal company using the resources listed in Table 3.7. Compile and
organize information into two data sets, opportunities and threats, developing a full list of per-
haps 50 to 100 opportunity and threat factors relevant to the 10 external areas described previ-
ously. Include factors most important to your firm’s industry, vision, mission, and strategies,
considering the five forces just discussed. Then, narrow your data sets down to 20 key external
factors that include specifically 10 opportunities and 10 threats. (Note: We use 10 and 10 because
organizations commonly use this breakdown and the template at www.strategyclub.com uses 10
and 10). List opportunities first and then threats. Also, do not include strategies as opportunities,
so for example, “to build two new manufacturing plants in Europe” is a strategy, not an oppor-
tunity; there may be an underlying opportunity that could make that strategy reasonable, such as
“eight European countries have repealed restrictions on the sale of generic drugs.”
Firms determine the most important 20 factors among a full list usually by rating the factors
according to importance (1 = least important to 10 = most important) and consolidating the rat-
ing data or by ranking the factors (1 = most important to 50 = least important) and consolidating
the ranking data. Both methods will yield the 20 most important factors to include. The impor-
tant point here is that companies (and students) never should include just the first 20 factors that
come to mind. For example, someone recently included as a threat in his EFE Matrix that “a
hurricane can come.” Ninety-nine percent of the time that factor should not be included in the
matrix; instead, conduct research to identify external factors that relate to the firm’s vision, mis-
sion, strategies, and competitive advantages.
When determining particular factors to include in an EFE Matrix, and when assigning
weights and ratings (Step 2) focus on a narrow industry perspective. For example, for Spirit
Airlines, the industry is discount airlines, rather than all airlines, and for Lamborghini, the
industry is high-end sports cars, not simply automobiles. This narrow industry perspective is
important to facilitate external factors being stated in terms that meet the AQCD Test discussed
earlier.
In developing a list of key external factors, be mindful of the AQCD Test because vagueness
in stating factors must be avoided; vagueness gives analysts no guidance in assigning weights
or ratings in developing an EFE Matrix. Recall that Edward Deming said, “In God we trust.
Everyone else bring data.” Include “actionable” factors as defined previously in this chapter.
LO 3.6
108 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Step 2: Assign Weights to Key External Factors
In developing an EFE Matrix, assign a weight that ranges from 0.01 (not important) to 1.0 (all-
important) for each factor. The weight assigned to a given factor indicates the relative importance
of the factor for being successful in the firm’s industry relative to other factors included in the
EFE. For example, a factor receiving a weight of 0.06 is 200 percent more important than a factor
receiving a weight of 0.02 for success in the industry. Regardless of whether a key factor for a
particular firm is an opportunity or threat, factors considered to have the greatest affect on orga-
nizational performance of all firms in a specific industry should be assigned the highest weights.
The sum of all weights must equal 1.0. Do not try to even weights out to total 0.50 for opportuni-
ties and 0.50 for threats. In fact, if rivalry is high in a given industry, as discussed in the Porter’s
Five Forces section, then the sum of weights assigned to threats could be higher than the sum for
opportunities. Weights are industry-based, not company-based. List opportunities from highest
weight to lowest weight; do the same for threats.
Step 3: Assign Ratings to Key External Factors
In developing an EFE Matrix, assign a rating between 1 and 4 to each key external factor to
indicate how effectively (or ineffectively) the firm’s strategies are responding to the opportunity
or threat, where 4 = the response is superior, 3 = the response is above average, 2 = the response
is average, and 1 = the response is poor. Both opportunities and threats can receive a rating of 1,
2, 3, or 4 at any time. Ratings are based on the effectiveness of a firm’s strategies in capitalizing
on opportunities or avoiding/mitigating threats. Ratings are company-based, not industry-based.
Assignment of numerical values down the rating column in an EFE Matrix should be with
consideration that companies carve out niches in industries that enable them to gain and sus-
tain competitive advantages through effective strategies. These niches are most often based on
capitalizing on some opportunities more effectively than rivals. This is not to say that threats
are not important, they are; some threats can wipe a firm out. However, if a firm faces many
opportunities, this is likely the result of effective strategies positioning the firm well, so higher
ratings are often warranted for opportunities; higher ratings increase the total weighted score in
an EFE Matrix.
As an example, the luxury car maker Ferrari could receive a high rating on a price com-
petitiveness external factor, even though their sports cars are expensive because price competi-
tiveness is not a deciding factor (low weight) for customers in the luxury sports car industry.
Thus, in assigning ratings, as with weights, consider a subset of the industry in make effective
judgments.
Step 4: Obtain Weighted Scores
Along each row in an EFE Matrix, multiply the factor’s weight by its rating to determine a
weighted score for each factor.
Step 5: Obtain Total Weighted Score
Sum the weighted scores to determine the total weighted score for the organization. Regardless
of how many factors are included in an EFE Matrix, the total weighted score can range from a
low of 1.0 to a high of 4.0, with the average score being 2.5. Total weighted scores well below
2.5 characterize organizations that are weak at responding to external factors, implying that new
strategies are likely needed and perhaps a new direction, new vision or mission. Total weighted
scores well above 2.5 indicate a strong external position, whereby a continuation of current strat-
egies may be prudent, being ever mindful that there is always room for improvement. A total
weighted score of 3.5 for example indicates that an organization is responding in an outstand-
ing way to existing opportunities and threats in its industry. In other words, the firm’s strat-
egies effectively take advantage of existing opportunities and minimize the potential adverse
effects of external threats. A total weighted score of 1.5 indicates that the firm’s strategies are not
capitalizing on opportunities or avoiding external threats. Making “small” decisions regarding
weights and ratings in matrices is essential for making effective big strategy decisions later in the
strategic-planning process; for example, a billion dollars may be at stake in choosing a particular
strategy over another to implement, and the EFE Matrix with its factors, weights, and ratings is
helpful in making that type of choice.
CHAPTER 3 • THE ExTERNAL ASSESSMENT 109
TABLE 3-8 EFE Matrix for a Local 10-Theater Cinema Complex
Key External Factors Weight Rating Weighted Score
Opportunities
1. Two new neighborhoods developing within 3 miles 0.09 1 0.09
2. TDB University is expanding 6% annually 0.08 4 0.32
3. Major competitor across town recently closed 0.08 3 0.24
4. Demand for going to cinemas growing 10% 0.07 2 0.14
5. Disposable income among citizens up 5% in prior year 0.06 3 0.18
6. Rowan County is growing 8% annually in population 0.05 3 0.15
7. Unemployment rate in county declined to 3.1% 0.03 2 0.06
Threats
1. Trend toward healthy eating eroding concession sales 0.12 4 0.48
2. County and city property taxes increasing 25% 0.08 2 0.16
3. Movies rented at local Redboxes up 12% 0.08 2 0.16
4. Demand for online movies growing 10% 0.06 2 0.12
5. Commercial property adjacent to cinemas for sale 0.06 3 0.18
6. Movies rented last quarter from Time Warner up 15% 0.06 1 0.06
7. Local religious groups object to R-rated movies 0.04 3 0.12
8. TDB University installing an on-campus movie theater 0.04 3 0.12
Total 1.00 2.58
An Example EFE Matrix
An example EFE Matrix is provided in Table 3-8 for a local 10-theater cinema complex. Observe
in the table that the most important factor to being successful in this industry is “Trend toward
healthy eating eroding concession sales,” as indicated by the 0.12 weight. Also note that the local
cinema is doing excellent (received a rating of 4) in regard to its handling of two external factors,
“TDB University is expanding 6 percent annually” and “Trend toward healthy eating eroding
concession sales.” Perhaps the cinema is placing flyers on campus and also adding yogurt and
healthy drinks to its concession menu.
Overall, the total weighted score of 2.58 is above the average (midpoint) of 2.5, so this cin-
ema business is doing slightly above average taking advantage of the external opportunities and
minimizing external threats facing the firm. There is definitely room for improvement, though,
because the highest total weighted score would be 4.0. As indicated by ratings of 1, the business
needs to capitalize more on the “Two new neighborhoods developing within 3 miles” opportu-
nity and work to avoid the “movies rented from . . . Time Warner” threat.
An actual EFE Matrix for one of the largest U.S. grocery retailers, Kroger, is given in
Table 3-9 on page 110. As shown, the most important external factor facing Kroger, as indicated
by a weight of 0.10, deals with Amazon acquiring Whole Foods Market. Kroger’s key factors
are listed in order from the most important (highest weight) to the least important. Notice how
the factors largely meet the AQCD test. Recall that mathematically, 0.04 is 33 percent more
important than 0.03, and a rating of 3 is 50 percent higher than a rating of 2. Small judgments
regarding assignment of weights and ratings in matrices are vital for making effective larger
decisions related to deployment of resources and money across regions and products.
Overall, the total weighted score of 3.03 is above the average (midpoint) of 2.5, indicat-
ing that Kroger is doing pretty well at taking advantage of the external opportunities and
minimizing the threats facing the firm. There is definitely room for improvement, though,
because the highest total weighted score would be 4.0. The rating of 1 for “The National
Retail Federation estimates an 8–12% U.S. e-commerce growth in the next year,” for exam-
ple, suggests that Kroger should better capitalize on this opportunity, perhaps by expanding
its online offerings.
110 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
The Competitive Profile Matrix The Competitive Profile Matrix (CPM) reveals how a focal firm compares to major competitors
across a range of key factors. This comparative analysis provides important strategic information
regarding a firm’s competitive advantages or disadvantages in a given industry. In determining
what factors to include in a CPM, tailor the factors to the particular industry. For example, in the
airline industry, such factors as on-time arrival, leg room in planes, and routes served are far better
factors to include than merely including “quality of service” or “financial condition” as factors.
Similar to an EFE, a CPM uses weights and total weighted scores, which quantify the
importance of a given factor to the industry, as well as total weighted scores, which quantify
how well a given firm is doing relative to the other two firms evaluated in the CPM. The key
difference between a CPM and EFE is that a CPM compares firms and an EFE Matrix analyzes
how a firm internally is responding to key external issues. Critical success factors include points
LO 3.7
TABLE 3-9 An Actual EFE Matrix for Kroger Co.
Opportunities Weight Rating Weighted
Score
1. Organic & natural food sales in the United States totaled $47 billion, an increase of
nearly $3.7 billion from the previous year.
0.09 4 0.36
2. Online grocery spending is forecasted to grow from 4.3% of the total U.S. food and
beverage sales to 20% by 2025.
0.07 3 0.21
3. Sales growth in the grocery industry is 3.8% annually. 0.07 4 0.28
4. Organic food sales increased 8.8% to $55 billion. 0.05 2 0.1
5. Convenience store lunch and dinner services contribute 21.7% of in-store sales. 0.05 2 0.1
6. The National Retail Federation estimates an 8% to 12% U.S. e-commerce growth in
2019.
0.05 1 0.05
7. Global food retail sales are about $4 trillion annually, led by supermarkets/
hypermarkets.
0.04 2 0.08
8. GDP of United States increased from 2.2% to 3.1%. 0.04 2 0.08
9. The Private Label Manufacturer’s Association notes that private label products are 25%
to 50% cheaper than national brands, appealing to customers who value affordability.
0.03 1 0.03
10. Studies show that 51.2% of Internet users make online purchases using mobile apps. 0.01 3 0.03
Threats Weight Rating Weighted
Score
1. Amazon spent $13.7 billion to acquire 460 brick-and-mortar Whole Foods Market
stores.
0.10 2 0.2
2. Target is investing $7 billion to update and downsize its stores and develop new exclu-
sive brands between 2018 and 2020.
0.08 1 0.08
3. Walmart’s fiscal 2017 revenue was $485.8 billion, up $9.4 billion, or 0.78%. Kroger’s
total revenue is $115.3 billion.
0.07 3 0.21
4. Fast-food revenue exceeds $600 billion annually; it is rising 15% annually. 0.05 2 0.1
5. E-commerce sales as percentage of total retail sales is nearly 10%, and rising 3%
annually.
0.05 1 0.05
6. Walmart groceries cost about 4% less than Kroger’s. 0.04 2 0.8
7. Walmart.com now offers more than 67 million products, a 30% increase this year. 0.03 1 0.03
8. Walmart created its own “designer” cantaloupe that “tastes as sweet in winter as it does
in summer,” and a more flavorful tomato is in the works.
0.03 2 0.06
9. Publix Supermarket is growing 12% a year. 0.03 4 0.12
10. Aldi’s U.S. grocery market is growing 15% a year. 0.02 3 0.06
Total 1.00 3.03
CHAPTER 3 • THE ExTERNAL ASSESSMENT 111
TABLE 3-10 An Example Competitive Profile Matrix
Company 1 Company 2 Company 3
Critical Success Factors Weight Rating Score Rating Score Rating Score
Advertising 0.20 1 0.20 4 0.80 3 0.60
Global Expansion 0.20 4 0.80 1 0.20 2 0.40
Financial Position 0.15 4 0.60 2 0.30 3 0.45
Management 0.10 4 0.40 3 0.20 1 0.10
Product Quality 0.10 4 0.40 3 0.30 2 0.20
Customer Loyalty 0.10 4 0.40 3 0.30 2 0.20
Price Competitiveness 0.10 3 0.30 2 0.20 1 0.10
Market Share 0.05 1 0.05 4 0.20 3 0.15
Total 1.00 3.15 2.50 2.20
Note: The ratings values are as follows: 1 = response is poor, 2 = response is average, 3 = response is above average, 4 = response is superior. As indicated by the total weighted score of 2.20, Company 3 is performing worst. Only 8 critical success factors are included for simplicity; in actuality, however, this is too few. The template asks that 12 factors be included and to tailor factors to a given industry.
of competitive advantage within an industry, as well as other factors that are crucial for a firm
to succeed within a given industry; critical success factors in a CPM can include both internal
and external issues. List critical success factors from highest weight to lowest weight in a CPM.
Weights in a CPM are industry-based and sum to 1.0. Ratings in a CPM are assigned to
quantify how well a firm and its key competitors are performing on each critical success factor;
ratings reveal the degree of effectiveness of the firm’s strategies. Assign a rating between 1 and
4 to each key factor to indicate how effectively the firm’s current strategies respond to the fac-
tor, where 4 = the response is superior, 3 = the response is above average, 2 = the response is
average, and 1 = the response is poor. Ratings are company-based; weights are industry-based.
A sample CPM is provided in Table 3-10. In this example, the two most important factors
to being successful in the industry are “advertising” and “global expansion,” as indicated by
weights of 0.20. If there were no weight column in this analysis, note that each factor then would
be equally important. Thus, including a weight column yields a more robust analysis because it
enables the analyst to capture perceived or actual levels of importance. Note in Table 3-10 that
Company 1’s strategies are responding in a superior fashion to “product quality,” as indicated
by a rating of 4, whereas Company 2’s strategies are superior regarding “advertising.” Overall,
Company 1’s strategies are responding best, as indicated by the total weighted score of 3.15 and
Company 3 is responding worst. Never duplicate ratings in a row in a CPM; go ahead and make
judgments or decisions as to appropriate ratings based on your research and knowledge of the
focal firm and rival companies. (Note: The point of this example is to illustrate the mechanics of
developing a CPM rather than having industry-specific factors.)
Other than the critical success factors listed in the sample CPM, factors often included in
this analysis include breadth of product line, effectiveness of sales distribution, proprietary or
patent advantages, location of facilities, production capacity and efficiency, experience, union
relations, technological advantages, and e-commerce expertise. In generating the list of critical
success factors, strive to include factors that differentiate firms within the industry (i.e., factors
that determine competitive advantages).
Just because one firm receives a 3.20 overall total weighted score and another receives a 2.80
in a CPM, it does not necessarily follow that the first firm is precisely 14.3 percent better than
the second, but it does suggest that the first firm is performing better on the variables included in
the CPM. Regarding weights in a CPM or EFE Matrix, be mindful that 0.08 is mathematically
33 percent higher than 0.06, so even small differences can reveal important perceptions regarding
the relative importance of various factors. The aim with numbers is to assimilate and evaluate
information in a meaningful way that aids in decision making.
112 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
TABLE 3-11 An Actual CPM for Kroger Company
Kroger Company Walmart Inc. Amazom.com Inc.
Critical Success Factors Weight Rating Score Rating Score Rating Score
Price Competitiveness 0.17 3 0.51 4 0.68 2 0.34
Product Quality 0.13 2 0.26 3 0.39 1 0.13
Multiple Formats 0.10 4 0.40 3 0.30 1 0.10
Market Penetration 0.09 4 0.36 3 0.27 2 0.18
Customer Loyalty 0.08 2 0.16 4 0.32 3 0.24
Name Recognition 0.08 1 0.08 4 0.32 3 0.24
Store Locations 0.07 2 0.14 4 0.28 1 0.07
Customer Service 0.07 2 0.14 3 0.21 4 0.28
Market Share 0.06 2 0.12 4 0.24 1 0.06
Financial Profit 0.05 2 0.10 4 0.20 3 0.15
Distribution System 0.05 2 0.10 3 0.15 4 0.20
Advertising 0.05 1 0.05 4 0.20 2 0.10
Total 1.00 2.42 3.56 2.09
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS
Figure 3-4 reveals that to gain and sustain competitive advantages,
strategists must collect, analyze, and prioritize information regard-
ing the firm’s competitors, as well as identify and consider relevant
social, demographic, economic, and technology trends and events
impacting the firm and its industry. It is not uncommon for there
to be substantial discussing, perhaps even some cussing, in delib-
erating what external factors should be included in an EFE Matrix,
because factors included ultimately impact the firm’s strategies and
direction. An engineering hunt for external facts is essential because
resultant strategies can be expensive and sometimes irreversible.
Survival of the firm can hinge on an effective, thorough external as-
sessment being performed.
This chapter reveals that actionable, quantitative, comparative,
divisional (AQCD) information is a key ingredient for making strategic
decisions. The EFE Matrix and Competitive Profile Matrix presented in
this chapter are excellent strategic-planning tools for assimilating and
prioritizing information to enhance decision-making.
The Process of Performing an External Audit
In performing an external audit, involve as many managers and em-
ployees as possible because involvement leads to understanding and
commitment; individuals appreciate having the opportunity to con-
tribute ideas and to gain a better understanding of their firm’s indus-
try, competitors, markets, and strategies. An effective way to gather
competitive intelligence and information across the 10 forces dis-
cussed in this chapter is to ask various managers to monitor particu-
lar sources of information, such as key magazines, trade journals,
newspapers, and online sources. These persons can submit periodic
scanning reports to the person(s) who coordinate the external audit.
This approach provides a continuous stream of timely strategic infor-
mation and involves many individuals in the external-audit process.
Suppliers, distributors, salespersons, customers, and competitors
represent other sources of vital information.
After external-audit information is gathered, it should be assimi-
lated into an EFE Matrix and CPM as described herein. To accomplish
this task, some firms conduct a meeting or series of meetings to
collectively determine the most important opportunities and threats
facing the firm. A prioritized list of these factors can be obtained
by requesting all managers to individually rank the factors identi-
fied, from 1 (for the most important opportunity/threat) to 20 (for
the least important opportunity/threat). Then, by summing the rank-
ings, a prioritized list of factors is revealed. Prioritization is absolutely
essential in strategic planning because no organization can do ev-
erything that would benefit the firm; tough choices among good
options have to be made; in both an EFE Matrix and CPM factors
are listed from most important (highest weight) to least important.
Even a full list of more than 50 factors can be distilled to the 20 most
important in the manner described.
An actual CPM is provided in Table 3-11, again for Kroger Company. Note that the two rival
firms, Walmart and Amazon, receive higher ratings than Kroger on several critical success fac-
tors, including distribution system, advertising, and customer service, for example. Also note the
factors are listed beginning with the most important (highest weight). Note there is no duplica-
tion of ratings across a row and that Kroger is responding worse than Walmart and Amazon on
“name recognition” and “advertising.”
CHAPTER 3 • THE ExTERNAL ASSESSMENT 113
Establish A Clear Vision & Mission
Evaluate & Monitor Results:
Take Corrective Actions; Adapt
To Change
Gain & Sustain Competitive Advantages
Formulate Strategies: Collect, Analyze, &
Prioritize Data Using Matrices; Establish A Clear Strategic Plan
Implement Strategies: Establish Structure; Allocate Resources; Motivate & Reward; Attract Customers; Manage Finances
FIGURE 3-4
How to Gain and Sustain Competitive Advantages
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS
In developing and presenting the external assessment for your firm,
be mindful that gaining and sustaining competitive advantage is the
overriding purpose of developing the EFE Matrix and CPM. During
this “external” section of your written or oral project, emphasize
how and why particular factors can yield competitive advantage for
the firm. In other words, instead of robotically going through the
weights and ratings (which, by the way, are critically important),
highlight various factors in light of where you are leading the firm.
Make it abundantly clear in your discussion how your firm, with
your recommendations, can subdue rival firms or at least profitably
compete with them. Showcase during this part of your project the
key underlying reasons how and why your firm can prosper among
rivals. Remember to be prescriptive, rather than descriptive, in the
manner that you present your entire project. If presenting your proj-
ect orally, be self-confident and passionate rather than timid and
uninterested. Definitely “bring the data” throughout your project
because “vagueness” is the most common downfall of students in
doing case analysis. To obtain the most recent information about
your case company, read the firm’s most recent quarterly report; the
narrative that accompanies quarterly reports is excellent.
It is necessary for students in developing an EFE Matrix to in-
clude specific (AQCD) factors related to direct competitors, trends
in the economy, legal or tax issues, consumer attitudes, consumer
demographics, and other similar facts, trends, and events. In ad-
dition, there are factors associated with Porter’s Five Forces that
may need including. For example, you may want to include factors
such as the following:
1. China recently established four free-trade zones allowing for-
eign companies to establish operations in the country without
having a Chinese partner; this may be an external threat because
rival firms can enter the market more easily, such as in the au-
tomobile industry.
2. Potential substitute products may be a threat. For example, con-
sumption of bottled water rising 8 percent annually is a threat
for Dr Pepper Snapple.
3. Suppliers in any industry can potentially siphon away profits as
easily as a direct competitor; suppliers raising prices by 10 percent
may be an external threat.
114 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Chapter Summary Increasing turbulence in markets and industries around the world means the external audit has
become an explicit and vital part of the strategic-management process. This chapter provided a
framework for collecting and evaluating economic, social, cultural, demographic, environmen-
tal, political, governmental, legal, technological, and competitive information. The AQCD Test
was explained to assure that opportunities and threast as stated in an EFE Matrix are actionable,
qualitative, comparative, and divisional to the extent possible.
Firms that do not mobilize and empower their managers and employees to identify, moni-
tor, forecast, and evaluate key external forces may fail to anticipate emerging opportunities and
threats and, consequently, may pursue ineffective strategies, miss opportunities, and invite orga-
nizational demise. Firms not taking advantage of e-commerce and social-media networks are
technologically falling behind.
A major responsibility of strategists is to ensure development of an effective external-audit
system. This includes using information technology to devise a competitive intelligence system
that works. The EFE Matrix, CPM, and Porter’s Five-Forces Model can help strategists evalu-
ate their market and industry, but these tools must be accompanied by good intuitive judgment.
Multinational firms especially need a systematic and effective external-audit system because
external forces among foreign countries vary so greatly.
Key Terms and Concepts
actionable responses (p. 95)
chief information officer (CIO) (p. 100)
chief technology officer (CTO) (p. 100)
competitive intelligence (CI) (p. 100)
Competitive Profile Matrix (CPM) (p. 110)
external audit (p. 94)
External Factor Evaluation (EFE) Matrix (p. 107)
external forces (p. 95)
industry analysis (p. 94)
information technology (IT) (p. 100)
just-in-time (p. 104)
Porter’s Five-Forces Model (p. 102)
Issues for Review and Discussion 3-1. Explain why it is important to develop both a full and
narrow list of key external factors in developing an EFE
Matrix.
3-2. Explain the significance of an EFE Matrix total
weighted score of 3.67 versus a 1.59.
3-3. What does a CPM total weighted score of 1.88 imply
for a company?
3-4. In an EFE Matrix, should the weights for opportunities
be designed to roughly equal the weights for threats?
Why?
3-5. List the 10 external forces discussed in this chapter. When and
why would some forces be more important than others?
3-6. How have external factors resulted in a major overhaul
to the traditional retail industry as we once knew it?
3-7. Provide a synopsis of IBISWorld, Mergent Online, and
PrivCo.
3-8. Compare and contrast the EFE Matrix with a CPM in
terms of value provided for a strategist in performing an
external assessment.
3-9. Mathematically, how much more important is a rating
of 4 compared to a rating of 3? Why is this concept
important in developing strategic-planning matrices?
3-10. Describe how political elections can be an important ex-
ternal factor for companies to consider. Select an industry
and reveal some key political factors impacting firms.
3-11. List some legal or ethical ways to gather competitive
intelligence. List some illegal or unethical ways.
3-12. As the value of the dollar rises, U.S. firms doing busi-
ness abroad see their profits fall, so some firms raise
prices of their products to offset the decrease in profits.
What are some risks of raising prices?
3-13. Does McDonald’s Corp. benefit from a low or high
value of the dollar? Explain why.
3-14. Explain how Facebook, Twitter, and Instagram can
represent a major threat or opportunity for a company.
3-15. If your CPM has three firms and they all end up with
the same total weighted score, would the analysis still
be useful? Why?
3-16. What external factors impact the ability of state to attract
business? Visit the website: https://www.cnbc.com/2017/06/12/
heres-how-your-state-can-become-a-cnbc-top-state-for-
business.html and summarize how the selection criteria used
to determine the best states for business compares to the
information presented in this chapter.
CHAPTER 3 • THE ExTERNAL ASSESSMENT 115
3-17. Governments sometimes use “protectionism” to cope
with economic problems, imposing tariffs and subsi-
dies on foreign goods as well as placing restrictions
and incentives on their own firms to keep jobs at home.
What are the strategic implications of protectionism for
international commerce?
3-18. Rank order the relative importance of Porter’s five forces
in the business of operating a college or university.
3-19. Let’s say you work for McDonald’s and you applied
Porter’s Five-Forces Model to study the fast-food
industry. Rank the five forces as to relative importance
for strategic planning at McDonald’s.
3-20. Explain why it is appropriate for ratings in an EFE
Matrix to be 1, 2, 3, or 4 for any opportunity or threat.
3-21. Why is inclusion of about 20 factors recommended in
the EFE Matrix rather than about 10 factors or about 40
factors?
3-22. In developing an EFE Matrix, explain why is it advan-
tageous to arrange your opportunities according to the
highest weight, and your threats likewise?
3-23. In developing an EFE Matrix, would it be best to have
10 opportunities and 10 threats or would 17 opportuni-
ties (or threats) be fine with 3 of the other to achieve a
total of 20 factors as desired?
3-24. Could or should critical success factors in a CPM in-
clude external factors? Explain.
3-25. Explain how to conduct an external strategic-
management audit in a business versus as a student
performing case analysis.
3-26. Identify a recent economic, social, political, or
technological trend that significantly affects the local
Pizza Hut.
3-27. Discuss the following statement: Major opportunities
and threats usually result from an interaction among key
environmental trends rather than from a single external
event or factor.
3-28. Use Porter’s Five-Forces Model to evaluate competi-
tiveness within the U.S. banking industry.
3-29. How does the external audit affect other components of
the strategic-management process?
3-30. Construct an EFE Matrix for an organization of your choice.
3-31. Let’s say your boss develops an EFE Matrix that in-
cludes 62 factors. How would you suggest reducing the
number of factors to 20?
3-32. Discuss the ethics of gathering competitive intelligence.
3-33. Discuss the ethics of cooperating with rival firms.
3-34. Do you agree with Porter’s view that competitive
positioning within an industry is a key determinant of
competitive advantage(s)?
3-35. Define, compare, and contrast the weights versus rat-
ings in an EFE Matrix.
3-36. What is the different between factors listed in an EFE
Matrix versus critical success factors listed in a CPM?
In which matrix is it particularly important to include
specific, actionable factors? Why?
3-37. List the 10 external forces that give rise to opportunities
and threats.
3-38. Why do annual reports often state external risk informa-
tion in really vague terms; why should strategists avoid
including such vagueness in developing an EFE Matrix?
3-39. Explain the AQCD Test for determining the quality
of an external factor. Why should the AQCD Test be
met to the extent possible in performing an external
assessment?
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
SET 1: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR COCA-COLA
EXERCISE 3A
Develop an EFE Matrix for Coca-Cola
Purpose
This exercise will give you practice in developing an EFE Matrix. An EFE Matrix summarizes the
results of an external audit. This is an important strategic-planning tool widely used by strategists.
Instructions
Step 1 Join with two other students in class, and jointly prepare an EFE Matrix for Coca-Cola.
Refer to the Cohesion Case (p. 56) and to Exercise 1A (p. 65), if necessary, to identify exter-
nal opportunities and threats. Make sure the factors you include are actionable, quantitative,
comparative, and specific. Use the online sources listed in Table 3-7. Be sure not to include
strategies as opportunities; but do include as many monetary amounts, percentages, num-
bers, and ratios as possible.
Step 2 All three-person teams participating in this exercise should record their EFE total weighted
scores on the board. Put your initials after your score to identify it as your team’s score.
Step 3 Compare the total weighted scores. Which team’s score came closest to the instructor’s an-
swer? Discuss reasons for variation in the scores reported on the board.
116 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
EXERCISE 3B
Develop a Competitive Profile Matrix for Coca-Cola
Purpose
Monitoring competitors’ performance and strategies is a key aspect of an external audit. This exercise
is designed to give you practice in evaluating the competitive position of organizations in a given in-
dustry and assimilating that information in a CPM.
Instructions
Step 1 Turn back to the Cohesion Case and review the section on competitors (p. 56). Also view
online resources that compare Coca-Cola with Pepsi. Use the sources listed in Table 3-7.
Step 2 Prepare a CPM that includes Coca-Cola, Pepsi, and Dr Pepper.
Step 3 Turn in your CPM for a classwork grade.
SET 2: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR MY UNIVERSITY
EXERCISE 3C
Develop an EFE Matrix for Your College or University
Purpose
Most colleges and universities do strategic planning. Institutions are consciously and systematically
identifying and evaluating external opportunities and threats facing higher education in your state, the
nation, and the world.
Instructions
Step 1 Join with two other individuals in class and jointly prepare an EFE Matrix for your
institution.
Step 2 Go to the board and record your total weighted score in a column that includes the scores of
all three-person teams participating. Put your initials after your score to identify it as your
team’s score.
Step 3 Which team viewed your college’s strategies most positively? Which team viewed your col-
lege’s strategies most negatively? Discuss the nature of the differences.
EXERCISE 3D
Develop a Competitive Profile Matrix for Your College or University
Purpose
Your college or university competes with all other educational institutions in the world, especially
those in your own state. State funds, students, faculty, staff, endowments, gifts, and federal funds are
areas of competitiveness. Other areas include athletic programs, dorm life, academic reputation, loca-
tion, and career services. The purpose of this exercise is to give you practice in thinking competitively
about the business of education in your state.
Instructions
Step 1 Identify two colleges or universities in your state that compete directly with your institu-
tion for students. Interview several persons, perhaps classmates, who are aware of particular
strengths and weaknesses of those universities. Record information about the two competing
universities.
Step 2 Prepare a CPM that includes your institution and the two competing institutions. Include the
following 10 factors in your analysis:
1. Tuition costs
2. Quality of faculty
3. Academic reputation
4. Average class size
5. Campus landscaping
CHAPTER 3 • THE ExTERNAL ASSESSMENT 117
6. Athletic programs
7. Quality of students
8. Graduate programs
9. Location of campus
10. Campus culture
Step 3 Submit your CPM to your instructor for evaluation.
SET 3: STRATEGIC PLANNING TO ENHANCE MY EMPLOYABILITY
EXERCISE 3E
How Competitive Is Your State among All States for Finding a Job?
Purpose
Just like companies, states compete against each other across numerous variables. For more than a
decade, CNBC has been conducting annual research to determine where each U.S. state ranks (out
of the 50 states) in terms of their quality of life, job prospects, business attractiveness, and education,
among many other things. Each year, data is collected on more than 60 measures of competitiveness
and all 50 states are scored on each measure, ranging from economic policies and taxes, to the cost of
food, to the quality of their workforces.
The purpose of this exercise is to determine how your state ranks in terms of its job outlook and
prospects. This information can enhance your job search as you near completion of a business admin-
istration degree.
Instructions
Step 1 Go to the following website https://www.cnbc.com/2017/07/11/top-states-to-find-a-job-in-
america-in-2017.html and take a while to explore the types of reports offered, as well as the
source of data collected and used to create such reports.
Step 2 Review where your state ranks on the list of top states for business, top states to get an
education, and top states to find a job. Determine the three best competitive aspects of your
state.
Step 3 Are there similarities between your state’s ranking on each of these three reports? Do you
think job outlooks, education, and business attractiveness are inherently related? Develop a
report explaining your answer. Use information from the reports to support your arguments.
What actions could your state take to improve its competitiveness overall?
EXERCISE 3F
Compare and Contrast CareerBuilder, Glassdoor, Monster Jobs, and ZipRecruiter
Purpose
Job hunting websites compete against each other for your business. Both job seekers and companies
with job openings use job hunting websites, especially CareerBuider, Glassdoor, Monster Jobs, and
ZipRecruiter. The purpose of this exercise is to familiarize you with the operation, strengths, and
weaknesses of these four websites.
Instructions
Step 1 Review the four named websites taking note of what you especially like and dislike.
Step 2 Prepare a CPM for CareerBuilder. Include the three rival websites in your analysis.
EXERCISE 3G
A Template Competency Test
Purpose
The free Excel strategic planning template at www.strategyclub.com is widely used for strategic
planning by students and small businesses; this exercise aims to enhance your familiarity with the
118 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
template. Developing competence with the template will enable you to place this skill appropriately
on your resume, in addition to facilitating your development of a comprehensive strategic plan for an
assigned case company.
Instructions
Answer the following six questions about the template. Discuss your answers with classmates to de-
termine any issues or concerns.
Questions
1. How many factors does the template include in an EFE Matrix; in a CPM?
2. What happens using the template if you enter an inappropriate rating or weight such as a weak-
ness rating of 4 or a weight of 1.2?
3. In using the template, why are changes to a matrix done on Part I or Part II rather than on a
matrix itself?
4. Why is it best to transform a firm’s income statement and balance sheet into the template finan-
cial statement format early in developing a strategic plan for a case company?
5. What are key differences between Part I and Part II in the template?
6. Does the template address vision and/or mission statements?
SET 4: INDIVIDUAL VERSUS GROUP STRATEGIC PLANNING
EXERCISE 3H
What External Forces Are Most Important in Strategic Planning?
Purpose
A prioritized list of external factors is needed for effective strategic planning. Oftentimes the process
entails all managers individually ranking the factors identified, from 1 (most important) to 20 (least
important). Prioritization is absolutely essential in strategic planning because no organization can do
everything that would benefit the firm; tough choices among good choices have to be made.
External forces can be divided into five broad categories: (1) economic forces; (2) social, cultural,
demographic, and natural environment forces; (3) political, governmental, and legal forces; (4) tech-
nological forces; and (5) competitive forces. For some companies or organizations at various times,
some forces may be more important to include than others. This exercise reveals the authors’ ranking
of the relative importance of five external forces for inclusion in an external assessment.
The purpose of this exercise is to examine more closely the external areas of a business. In ad-
dition, the purpose of this exercise is to examine whether individual decision-making is better than
group decision-making. Academic research suggests that groups make better decisions than individu-
als about eighty percent of the time.
Instructions
Rank the five external forces as to their relative importance (1 = most important, 5 = least important).
First, rank the forces as an individual. Then, rank the forces as part a group of three. Thus, determine
what person(s) and what group(s) here today can come closest to the expert ranking. This exercise
enables examination of the relative effectiveness of individual versus group decision-making in stra-
tegic planning.
Steps
1. Fill in Column 1 in Table 3-12 to reveal your individual ranking of the relative importance of
the five forces (1 = most important, 2 = next most important, etc.). For example, if you feel
Economic factors are the 4th most important external force, then enter a 4 in Table 3-12 in
Column 1 beside Economic.
2. Fill in Column 2 in Table 3-12 to reveal your group’s ranking of the relative importance of the
five forces (1 = most important, 2 = next most important, etc.).
3. Fill in Column 3 in Table 3-12 to reveal the expert’s ranking of the five forces.
CHAPTER 3 • THE ExTERNAL ASSESSMENT 119
4. Fill in Column 4 in Table 3- 12 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 1 and Column
3 to reveal how well you performed as an individual in this exercise. (Note: Absolute difference
disregard negative numbers)
5. Fill in Column 5 in Table 3- 12 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 2 and Column
3 to reveal how well your group performed in this exercise.
6. Sum Column 4. Sum Column 5.
7. Compare the Column 4 sum with the Column 5 sum. If your Column 4 sum is less than your
Column 5 sum, then you performed better as an individual than as a group. Normally, group
decision-making is superior to individual decision-making, so if you did better than your group,
you did excellent.
8. The Individual Winner(s): The individual(s) with the lowest Column 4 sum is the WINNER.
9. The Group Winners(s): The group(s) with the lowest Column 5 score is the WINNER.
TABLE 3- 12 External Force Analysis: Comparing Individual versus Group
Decision-Making
External Forces Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5
1. Economic
2. Social/Cultural/
Demographic/
Environment
3. Political/
Governmental/Legal
4. Technological
5. Competitive
Sums
MINI-CASE ON SAM’S CLUB
SAM’S CLUB IS BOOMING IN CHINA Sam’s Club in the United States has struggled to attract affluent shoppers. However, in China, Sam’s
Club targets high-income consumers, and specifically affluent mothers with young children. Sam’s
Club does a great job at positioning itself for the wealthy Chinese target market. Advertised as a
trusted place with imported goods and high-quality foods, Sam’s Club stores are located in China’s
most affluent cities. Its success thus far in China can be attributed largely to its effective market seg-
mentation, targeting, and positioning.
Many large firms have trouble doing business in China despite the country’s high GDP, rising
levels of disposable income, shift to becoming a high-tech nation, and growing middle class. But
Walmart’s Sam’s Clubs are booming in China. Three of the top five Sam’s Clubs by sales are located
in China. Rather than positioning itself as a place for bulk items and closeouts, Sam’s Clubs in China
are positioned as a place for high-quality products and foods. For example, eggs are guaranteed to be
less than 12 days old and all have a serial number that customers can enter into their smartphone and
see the production date and origin.
Sam’s in China benefits from not having to “do battle” with Costco Wholesale; Costco does no
business in China. Sam’s has roughly 2 million members in China, many whom are affluent moms age
35 to 40, a primary target group. The number of Sam’s stores in China is expected to increase from 20
at the start of 2018 to 40 by 2020. Sam’s in China recently provided “two-kid seat” carts in all stores
to take advantage of China recently relaxing its “one-child policy.”
Another feature of Sam’s stores in China is extra large parking lots; nearly all customers drive to
Sam’s and ample parking is greatly appreciated in a country where crowded and expensive parking is the
norm otherwise. Sam’s strategies in China are an excellent example of how a firm must adapt it policies,
K ev
in F
o y /S
h u tt
er st
o ck
120 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Opportunity 1
Threat 1
Opportunity 3
Threat 3
RATINGS
High
High
Low
Low
W E
IG H
T S
Middle
Opportunity 2
Threat 2
Opportunity 4
Threat 4
FIGURE 3- 5
A Weights-by-Ratings Matrix to Exemplify EFE Matrix Logic
1. http://finance.yahoo.com
2. www.hoovers.com
3. www.morningstar.com
4. www,mergentonline.com
5. http://globaledge.msu.edu/industries/
6. See Table 3-7 for Excellent Library Databases
Web Resources
Current Readings Aggarwal, Vikas A., Hart E. Posen, and Maciej Workiewicz.
“Adaptive Capacity to Technological Change: A Microfoundational Approach.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 6 (June 2017): 1212–1231.
Cattani, Gino, Joseph F. Porac, and Howard Thomas. “Categories and Competition.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 1 (January 2017): 64–92.
Chin, M. K. and Matthew Semadeni. “CEO Political Ideologies and Pay Egalitarianism within Top Management Teams.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 8 (August 2017): 1608–1625.
Dowell, Glen W. S. and Suresh Muthulingam. “Will Firms Go Green if It Pays? The Impact of Disruption, Cost, and External Factors on the Adoption of Environmental
procedures, features, and actions when it enters a foreign land to capitalize on external opportunities and
threats in that country. What works in one country quite likely needs changing in another; pushing the
same business model globally has spelled doom for many firms that enter China, and then soon withdraw.
Questions
1. Consider the following two-dimensional matrix with weights on the y -axis and ratings on the
x -axis, as given in Figure 3- 5 . What are example opportunities and threats that could possi-
bly characterize Sam’s Club in China in the four corners of the matrix? Develop a hypotheti-
cal opportunity and threat for Sams’s that could be positioned in each of the four corners of
the matrix. Give a supporting rationale for each factor. Which corner of the matrix do you
think characterizes factors most commonly in an EFE Matrix? Why? Which corner of the
matrix do you think characterizes factors least commonly in an EFE Matrix? Why? What
could you say about the middle of the matrix in terms of factors commonly included in an
EFE Matrix?
Note: A purpose of this mini-case is to give students practice thinking about when, in developing an EFE
Matrix, could a particular factor receive the following weights and ratings:
1. a low weight and high rating
2. a high weight and high rating
3. a low weight and low rating
4. a high weight and low rating
Source; Based on Wayne Ma, “In China, Sam’s Goes Up Market and Scores,” Wall Street Journal , (December
8, 2017): B1.
CHAPTER 3 • THE ExTERNAL ASSESSMENT 121
Initiatives.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 6 (June 2017): 1287–1304.
Guo, Yidi, Quy Nguyen Huy, and Zhixing Xiao. “How Middle Managers Manage the Political Environment to Achieve Market Goals: Insights from China’s State-Owned Enterprises.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 3 (March 2017): 676–696.
Jia, Nan and Kyle J. Mayer. “Political Hazards and Firms’ Geographic Concentration.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 2 (February 2017): 203–231.
Li, Jing, Jun Xia, and Edward Zajac. “On the Duality of Political and Economic Stakeholder Influence on Firm Innovation Performance: Theory and Evidence from Chinese Firms.” Strategic Management Journal 39, no. 1, (January 2018): 193–216.
Madsen, Tammy L. and Gordon Walker. “Competitive Heterogeneity, Cohorts, and Persistent Advantage.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no 2 (February 2017): 184–202.
Ocasio, William, Tomi Laamanen, and Eero Vaara. “Communication and Attention Dynamics: An Attention- Based View of Strategic Change.” Strategic Management Journal 39, no. 1 (January 2018): 155–167.
Oehmichen, Jana, Sebastian Schrapp, and Michael Wolff. “Who Needs Experts Most? Board Industry Expertise and
Strategic Change—A Contingency Perspective.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 3 (March 2017): 645–656.
Shepherd, Dean A., Jeffery S. McMullen, and William Ocasio. “Is That an Opportunity? An Attention Model of Top Managers’ Opportunity Beliefs for Strategic Action.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 3 (March 2017): 626–644.
Souder, David, Akbar Zaheer, Harry Sapienza, and Rebecca Ranucci. “How Family Influence, Socioemotional Wealth, and Competitive Conditions Shape New Technology Adoption.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 9 (September 2017): 1774–1790.
Tan, David and Christopher I. Rider. “Let Them Go? How Losing Employees to Competitors Can Enhance Firm Status.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 9 (September 2017): 1848–1874.
Verhaal, J. Cameron, Jake Hoskins, and Leif Lundmark. “Little Fish in a Big Pond: Legitimacy Transfer, Authenticity, and Factors of Peripheral Firm Entry and Growth in the Market Center.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 12 (December 2017): 2532–2552.
Wei, Shi, Yan Zhang, and Robert E. Hoskisson. “Ripple Effects of CEO Awards: Investigating the Acquisition Activities of Superstar CEOs’ Competitors.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 10 (October 2017): 2080–2102.
Endnotes
1. Josh Zumbrun, “Global Economic Expansion Exceeds
Forecasts, IMF Says,” Wall Street Journal, (October 11,
2017): A8.
2. Mike Colias, “Ford Set to Shirt $7 Billion Toward Trucks
and SUVs,” Wall Street Journal, (October 4, 2017): B3.
3. Shelly Banjo and Paul Ziobro, “Shoppers Flee Physical
Stores,” Wall Street Journal, (August 6, 2014): B1.
4. Based on Vanessa Fuhrmans, “A Future Without Jobs? Think
Again,” Wall Street Journal, (November 16, 2017): B5.
5. Arthur Thompson, Jr., A. J. Strickland III, and John
Gamble, Crafting and Executing Strategy: Text and Read-
ings (New York: McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2005): 63.
6. Michael E. Porter, Competitive Strategy: Techniques for
Analyzing Industries and Competitors (New York: Free
Press, 1980): 24–27.
7. Dale McConkey, “Planning in a Changing Environment,”
Business Horizons 31, no. 5 (September–October
1988): 67.
122 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
4
Strategy Formulation
Feedback Loop
Strategy Implementation
Strategy Evaluation
Chapter 10: Business Ethics, Environmental Sustainability, and Social Responsibility
Chapter 11: Global and International Issues
Strategy Evaluation
and Governance Chapter 9
Implementing Strategies:
Finance and Accounting
Issues Chapter 8
Implementing Strategies:
Management and Marketing
Issues Chapter 7
Business Vision and
Mission Chapter 2
Strategies in Action Chapter 5
Strategy Analysis and
Choice Chapter 6
The Internal
Assessment Chapter 4
The External Assessment Chapter 3
FIGURE 4- 1
The Comprehensive, Integrative Strategic-Management Model
Source: Fred R. David, “How Companies Define Their Mission,” Long Range Planning 22, no. 1 (February 1989): 91. See also Anik Ratnaningsih, Nadjadji Anwar, Patdono Suwignjo, and Putu Artama Wiguna, “Balance Scorecard of David’s Strategic Modeling at Industrial Business for National Construction Contractor of Indonesia,” Journal of Mathematics and Technology , no. 4 (October 2010): 20.
123
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
The following exercises are found at the end of this chapter:
SET 1 : Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 4A : Perform a Financial Ratio Analysis for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 4B : Develop an IFE Matrix for Coca-Cola
SET 2 : Strategic Planning for My University
EXERCISE 4C : Construct an IFE Matrix for Your College or University
SET 3 : Strategic Planning for Myself
EXERCISE 4D : Construct an IFE Matrix for Yourself
SET 4 : Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
EXERCISE 4E : What Internal Functional Areas Are Most Important to Examine in Strategic Planning?
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following:
4- 1. Describe the nature and role of an internal assessment in formulating strategies.
4- 2. Discuss the nature and role of management in formulating strategies.
4- 3. Discuss the nature and role of marketing in formulating strategies.
4- 4. Discuss the nature and role of finance and accounting in formulating strategies.
4- 5. Discuss management information systems (MIS) in terms of formulating strategies.
4- 6. Explain how to develop and use an Internal Factor Evaluation (IFE) Matrix.
The Internal Assessment
MyLab Management
Improve Your Grade!
If your instructor is using MyLab Management, visit www.pearson.com/mylab/ management
for videos, simulations, and writing exercises.
124 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
T his chapter focuses on identifying and evaluating a firm’s strengths and weaknesses in
the functional areas of business, including management, marketing, finance, accounting,
and management information systems (MIS). Careful evaluation of a business’ functional
areas is necessary to determine the firm’s core competencies and understand whether the firm’s
current strategy is effectively working to provide a sustainable competitive advantage. One ex-
cellent way to evaluate the effectiveness of a firm’s strategy is to study the firm’s financial per-
formance relative to competitors and industry averages. Financial information alone, however,
cannot provide a complete assessment of the effectiveness of a firm’s strategy, and strategists as
well as students of strategy must dig deep into management, marketing, finance, accounting, and
MIS issues simultaneously to fully understand why a firm’s strategy is effective or not.
The first two-thirds of this chapter address potential strengths and weaknesses in the func-
tional areas cited in terms of what, where, how, and why to obtain this information; the latter
one-third of this chapter explains how to assimilate and use this information through develop-
ment and evaluation of an Internal Factor Evaluation (IFE) Matrix.
Showcased as an exemplary strategist, Elon Musk does an excellent job using his company’s
internal strengths to capitalize on external opportunities. Elon Musk has founded four different
billion-dollar companies, PayPal, SolarX, Solar City, and Tesla. Once called a “technologist,”
Musk is revolutionizing the power and transportation industries and changing the world as we
know it today.
The Internal Assessment Phase of Strategy Formulation All organizations have strengths and weaknesses in the functional areas of business. No enter-
prise is equally strong or weak in all areas. Objectives and strategies are established with the
intention of capitalizing on internal strengths and overcoming weaknesses. The internal-audit
part of the strategic-management process is illustrated in Figure 4-1 with white shading.
LO 4.1
Musk told his more than 17 million Twitter followers in late 2017 that
Tesla in 2020 would manufacture an F-150–type pickup truck except
all electric, following the company’s 2019 release of an all-electric com-
mercial semitrailer truck.
Source: Based on Brian Deagon, “The New Space Race,” Investor’s Business
Daily, September 11, 2017, B1 & B6. Also based on: http://www.rollingstone
.com/culture/features/elon-musk-inventors-plans-for-outer-space-cars-finding-
love-w511747 and https://www.cnbc.com/2017/11/21/how-tesla-and-elon-
musk-became-household-names.html
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED
Elon Musk, CEO and Cofounder of Tesla, Inc. and Space Exploration Technologies Corporation (SpaceX) For more than a decade, Elon Musk has been a U.S. exemplary
strategist on a mission to develop his rocket-ship company SpaceX
and send humans on a 7-month, 34-million-mile journey to Mars.
Headquartered in Los Angeles County, Musk’s SpaceX already fer-
ries supplies to and from the International Space Station. While pio-
neering private space exploration and preparing to colonize planets,
Musk has also catapulted Tesla to be the world’s leader in batteries
that supply energy for cars, trucks, homes, businesses, and rockets.
SpaceX and Tesla aren’t the only companies started by Musk; he also
started two other billion-dollar companies, PayPal and Solar City. Named
the “Architect of the Future,” Musk was recently featured as a Rolling
Stones Magazine cover story, highlighting his “world-changing plans to
inhabit outer space, revolutionize high-speed transportation, and rein-
vent cars.” As explained in Musk’s own words, his ambition stems in part
by his unfettered optimism for the future of human existence:
Fundamentally, the future is vastly more exciting and interesting if we are
a space-faring civilization and multi-planetary species than if we are not.
N A
S A
On the way to Mars?
CHAPTER 4 • THE INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 125
Some researchers emphasize the importance of the internal-audit part of the strategic-
management process by comparing it to the external audit in importance. Robert Grant, for
example, concluded that the internal audit is more important, saying:
In a world where customer preferences are volatile, the identity of customers is chang-
ing, and the technologies for serving customer requirements are continually evolving, an
externally focused orientation does not provide a secure foundation for formulating long-
term strategy. When the external environment is in a state of flux, the firm’s own resources
and capabilities may be a much more stable basis on which to define its identity. Hence,
a definition of a business in terms of what it is capable of doing may offer a more durable
basis for strategy.1
Resource-Based View
The resource-based view (RBV) approach to competitive advantage contends that internal
resources are more important for a firm than external factors in achieving and sustaining compet-
itive advantage. Proponents of RBV theory contend that a firm’s performance is primarily deter-
mined by internal resources that enable the firm to exploit opportunities and neutralize threats. A
firm’s resources can be tangible, such as labor, capital, land, plant, and equipment, or intangible,
such as culture, knowledge, brand equity, reputation, and intellectual property. Because tangible
resources can more easily be bought and sold, intangible resources are often more important for
gaining and sustaining competitive advantages.
A resource can be considered valuable to the extent that it is (1) rare, (2) hard to imitate,
or (3) not easily substitutable. Often called empirical indicators, these three characteristics of
resources enable a firm to implement strategies that improve its efficiency and effectiveness and
lead to a sustainable competitive advantage. The more a resource(s) is rare (not held by many
firms in the industry), hard to imitate (hard to copy or achieve), and not easily substitutable
(invulnerable to threat of substitution from different products), the stronger a firm’s competitive
advantage will be and the longer the advantage will last. Valuable resources comprise strengths
that a firm can capitalize on to prosper in a given industry.
The basic premise of RBV theory is that the mix, type, amount, and nature of a firm’s
internal resources should be considered first and foremost in devising strategies that can lead to
sustainable competitive advantage. Managing strategically according to the RBV involves devel-
oping and exploiting a firm’s unique resources and capabilities, and continually maintaining and
strengthening those resources.
As indicated in the Ethics Capsule 4, exploiting a firm’s unique resources and capabilities
can present ethical dilemmas.
Key Internal Forces
An internal strategic-management assessment includes analysis of how strong or weak a firm
is in each functional area of business, including management, marketing, finance, accounting,
and MIS. Uniqueness or distinctive competences a firm has or lacks in each area provides
the foundation for identifying strength and weakness factors. Strengths that cannot be easily
matched or imitated by competitors are called distinctive competencies. It is of paramount
importance in strategic planning to capitalize on and nurture strengths because competitive
advantages generally arise more from strengths, uniqueness, and distinctive competencies than
from weaknesses. Improving on weaknesses, however, is a vital task for all organizations and
generally helps to improve efficiencies, weaknesses are unlikely to develop into sustainable
competitive advantages, thus stressing the importance of nurturing strengths.
It is impossible in a strategic-management text to review in depth all the material pre-
sented in prior business courses; there are many subareas within these functions, such as
customer service, warranties, advertising, packaging, and pricing under marketing. However,
strategic planning must include a detailed assessment of how the firm is doing in all internal
areas. Thus, an overview of each of the functional business areas from a strategy perspective
is provided here. Regardless of the type or size of firm, effective strategic planning hinges
on identification and prioritization of internal strengths and weaknesses because a firm must
126 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
continually capitalize on its strengths and improve on its weaknesses to gain and sustain com-
petitive advantage.
Management There are four basic activities that comprise management: planning, organizing, motivating,
and controlling. An overview of these activities is provided in Table 4-1 because an organization
should continually capitalize on its strengths and improve on its weaknesses in these four areas.
LO 4.2
ETHICS CAPSULE 4
The Sagebrush Lizard versus the Big Oil Man
The state of Texas leads the United States in crude oil production.
West Texas, in particular, is home to the largest oil deposit ever dis-
covered in the continental United States. With an estimated 20 bil-
lion barrels of oil, valued at more than $900 billion, West Texas has
become a mecca for oil and gas companies. Warm weather, a so-
phisticated labor and equipment industry, and favorable geological
formations all contribute to efficient drilling productions in West
Texas. Numerous reservoirs can be drilled simultaneously through a
process called fracking, in which a high-pressure mixture of water,
sand, and chemicals is forcefully injected into the rock, causing
gas to be released. Texas oil drilling helps oil and gas companies,
boosts the Texas and U.S. economies, adds jobs, increases exports,
reduces imports, and lowers gas prices for everybody. These touted
benefits make the oil drilling seem like a good, ethical practice, but
there is a dark side.
What many don’t know is that the unique sand used in fracking
in West Texas is also home to the dunes sagebrush lizard, a 3-inch
long, tan-colored animal that lives only in a small portion of a few
counties in West Texas and Southeastern New Mexico. The pretty,
picky little lizard may soon be added to the federal endangered spe-
cies list; more than half of the lizard’s habitat has been taken over by
miners and drillers, such as big Ben Brigham. Brigham has made hun-
dreds of millions of dollars as a Texas oilman and claims to be working
with biologists to recreate the sagebrush lizard’s habitat and relocate
the lizards to a new area that resembles the lizard’s home ecosystem.
From an internal analysis perspective, do you think Brigham’s estab-
lished oil-drilling operations and current production procedures that
yield the benefits described offset the possibility of the sagebrush liz-
ard becoming extinct? Investors, environmentalists, and policy makers
are meeting in hopes of finding an appropriate solution.
Source: Based on Christopher M. Matthews, “It’s Lizard vs. Oil Magnate In
the Latest Fracking Fight,” Wall Street Journal, (October 14, 2017): A1, A10.
I need help from people.
TABLE 4-1 The Basic Functions of Management
Function Description Stage of Strategic-Management Process When Most Important
Planning Planning consists of all managerial activities related to preparing for the future,
such as establishing objectives, devising strategies, and developing policies.
Strategy Formulation
Organizing Organizing includes all managerial activities that result in a structure of task
and authority relationships, such as organizational design, job specialization, job
descriptions, span of control, job design, and job analysis.
Strategy Implementation
Motivating Motivating involves efforts directed toward shaping human behavior, such as
leadership, communication, teamwork, job enrichment, and human resource
management (HRM).
Strategy Implementation
Controlling Controlling refers to all managerial activities that compare actual results with
planned results, such as quality control, financial control, inventory control,
expense control, analysis of variances, rewards, and sanctions.
Strategy Evaluation
P et
r P
o d ro
u ze
k /1
2 3 R
F
CHAPTER 4 • THE INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 127
Planning
Planning is the essential bridge between the present and the future; planning increases the likeli-
hood of achieving desired results. Even though planning is considered the foundation of manage-
ment, it is the task that managers most commonly neglect. Planning enables a firm to:
1. Take into account relevant factors and focus on the critical ones
2. Ensure that the firm is prepared for all reasonable eventualities and can make timely
changes and adapt as needed
3. Gather the resources needed and carry out tasks in the most efficient way possible
4. Conserve its own resources and avoid wasting natural resources
5. Assess whether the effort, costs, and implications associated with achieving desired objec-
tives are warranted
6. Be proactive, anticipate, and influence the future
Planning is more than simply projecting past and present trends into the future (long-range plan-
ning). Planning also includes revising a firm’s vision and mission, forecasting future events and trends,
establishing objectives, and choosing strategies to pursue. Successful organizations strive to guide their
own futures rather than merely react to external forces and events as they occur. Historically, organisms
and organizations that adapt well to changing conditions survive and prosper; others become extinct.
An organization can develop synergy through planning. Synergy exists when everyone pulls
together as a team that knows what it wants to achieve; synergy is the 2 + 2 = 5 effect. By
establishing and communicating clear objectives, employees and managers can work together
toward desired results. Synergy can result in powerful competitive advantages. The strategic-
management process itself is aimed at creating synergy in an organization.
Strengths and weaknesses with respect to planning could relate to: (1) quality of a firm’s vision
or mission and how well the firm’s strategies support the vision or mission, (2) divisions’ relative
contribution to the firm’s performance, and (3) resource allocation across regions and products.
Organizing
The purpose of organizing is to achieve coordinated effort by defining task and authority relation-
ships. Organizing means determining who does what and who reports to whom. There are count-
less examples in history of well-organized enterprises successfully competing against—and in
some cases defeating—much stronger but less-organized firms. A well-organized firm generally
has motivated managers and employees who are committed to seeing the organization succeed.
Resources are allocated more effectively and used more efficiently in a well-organized firm.
The organizing function of management can be viewed as consisting of three sequential
activities: breaking down tasks into jobs, combining jobs to form departments, and delegating
authority. In The Wealth of Nations, published in 1776, Adam Smith cited the advantages of work
specialization in the manufacture of pins:
One man draws the wire, another straightens it, a third cuts it, a fourth points it, a fifth
grinds it at the top for receiving the head. Ten men working in this manner can produce
48,000 pins in a single day, but if they had all wrought separately and independently, each
might at best produce twenty pins in a day.2
Organizing includes developing an appropriate structure, span of control, and chain of command.
Structure dictates how resources are allocated and how objectives are established in a firm. Changes
in strategy often require changes in structure because positions may be created, deleted, or merged.
The most common types of structure are discussed in Chapter 7. Strengths and weaknesses with
respect to organizing could relate to (1) how well the firm’s current structure matches the various
divisions and strategy of the firm, (2) the degree to which a clear chain of command is displayed
through executive titles, and (3) the extent of overlap among related jobs and job descriptions.
Motivating
Motivating is the process of influencing people to accomplish specific objectives. Motivation
helps explain why some people work hard and others do not. Strategies have little chance of
succeeding if employees are not motivated to implement them once they are formulated. The
128 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
motivating function of management includes such activities as developing leaders, managing
groups, communicating effectively, and managing organizational change.
When managers and employees of a firm strive to achieve high levels of productivity,
this indicates that the firm’s strategists are excellent leaders—persons that establish rap-
port with subordinates, empathize with their needs and concerns, set a good example, and
are trustworthy and fair. An excellent leader communicates a vision of the firm’s future
and inspires people to work hard to achieve that vision. Stressing the importance of leader-
ship, Sun Tzu stated, “Weak leadership can wreck the soundest strategy.” According to Peter
Drucker:
Leadership is not a magnetic personality. That can just as well be demagoguery. It is not
“making friends and influencing people.” That is flattery. Leadership is the lifting of a
person’s vision to higher sights, the raising of a person’s performance to a higher standard,
the building of a person’s personality beyond its normal limitations.3
An organization’s system of communication determines whether strategies can be imple-
mented successfully. Good two-way communication is vital for gaining support for departmen-
tal and divisional objectives and policies. Top-down communication can encourage bottom-up
communication. The strategic-management process becomes a lot easier when subordinates are
encouraged to discuss their concerns, reveal their problems, provide recommendations, and give
suggestions. A primary reason for instituting strategic management is to build and support effec-
tive communication networks throughout the firm.
Human resource management (HRM) includes activities such as recruiting, interviewing,
testing, selecting, orienting, training, developing, caring for, evaluating, rewarding, disciplining,
promoting, transferring, demoting, and dismissing employees, as well as managing union rela-
tions. The complexity and importance of HRM has increased to such a degree that all but the
smallest organizations generally have a full-time human resource manager. As employees and
managers come and go, HRM must manage this process effectively to maintain employee morale
and minimize workplace stress. Table 4-2 reveals several of many ways that effective HRM can
help create and maintain a competitive advantage for organizations. The type of HRM informa-
tion listed in Table 4-2 could be the source of a firm’s strengths or weaknesses with respect to the
overall motivation of managers and employees.
Controlling
All managers in an organization have controlling responsibilities, such as conducting performance
evaluations and taking necessary action to minimize inefficiencies. The controlling function of
management is particularly important for effective strategy evaluation (the focal topic of Chapter
9). Controlling consists of four basic steps:
1. Establishing performance standards
2. Measuring individual and organizational performance
3. Comparing actual performance to planned performance standards
4. Taking corrective actions
TABLE 4-2 Six Ways Human Resource Management Can Provide a Competitive Advantage
1. Analyze turnover rates to determine where problems may lie.
2. Measure and monitor employee engagement and morale scores.
3. Track employee data to identify high and low performers.
4. Determine going market rates for talent and align compensation with company goals.
5. Design employee development and training pathways that take into account the strategic and
long-term needs of the organization.
6. Provide guidance on legal issues related to all personnel matters.
Source: Based on information from http://hrdailyadvisor.blr.com/2017/08/21/using-hr-competitive-advantage/
CHAPTER 4 • THE INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 129
The production/operations portion of a business consists of all those activities that trans-
form inputs (raw materials, labor, capital, machines, and facilities) into finished goods and ser-
vices. The extent to which a manufacturing plant’s output reaches its full potential output is
called capacity utilization, a key strategic variable. The higher the capacity utilization, the bet-
ter; otherwise, equipment may sit idle. For example, if a manufacturing firm’s plants are averag-
ing 60 percent capacity utilization, that would represent a severe weakness of the firm.
As indicated in Table 4-3, Roger Schroeder suggests that production/operations comprises
five decision areas: process, capacity, inventory, workforce, and quality. Production/operations
activities often represent the largest part of an organization’s human and capital assets. In many
industries, the major costs of producing a product are incurred within operations, so production/
operations can have great value as a competitive weapon in a company’s overall strategy. Strengths
and weaknesses in the five areas of production can mean the success or failure of an enterprise.
Increasingly in production settings, a new breed of robots called collaborative machines
are working alongside people. Priced as low as $20,000 and becoming widely used even in
small businesses, robots do not take lunch breaks or sick days or require health insurance, and
they can work nonstop all night tirelessly if needed. Collaborative machines are more flexi-
ble, often doing one task one day and a different task the next day. At Panek Precision Inc., a
Northbrook, Illinois-based machine shop, Mr. Panek states, “Having robots has allowed us to
move our existing workers into more useful tasks, such as monitoring more-advanced machines
that require human tending.” Workers are generally quite receptive to collaborative machines,
even giving them names, such as “Fred” at Stuller Inc., a jewelry factory in Lafayette, Louisiana,
and “Baxter” at K’NEX Brands, a toy maker in Hatfield, Pennsylvania.4 Strengths and weak-
nesses with respect to controlling could relate to (1) inventory turnover levels versus competitors,
(2) how well or poorly the firm’s operations are performing across various geographical regions,
and (3) how cost efficient the firm is in acquiring needed supplies.
Integrating Strategy and Culture
The functions of management can be performed best when a firm’s strategy and culture are inte-
grated. Every business entity has a unique organizational culture that impacts strategic-planning
activities. Organizational culture is “a pattern of behavior that has been developed by an orga-
nization as it learns to cope with its problem of external adaptation and internal integration, and
that has worked well enough to be considered valid and to be taught to new members as the cor-
rect way to perceive, think, and feel.”5 This definition emphasizes the importance of matching
external with internal factors in making strategic decisions. Organizational culture captures the
subtle, elusive, and largely unconscious forces that shape a workplace. Remarkably resistant to
change, culture can represent a major strength or weakness for any firm.
The strategic-management process takes place largely within a particular organization’s cul-
ture. A culture ideally supports the collective commitment of its people to a common purpose.
It must foster competence and enthusiasm among managers and employees. If strategies can
capitalize on cultural strengths, such as a strong work ethic or highly ethical beliefs, then man-
agement often can swiftly and easily implement changes. However, if the firm’s culture is not
TABLE 4-3 The Basic Decisions Areas Within Production/Operations
Decision Areas Example Decisions
1. Process Robotics, facility layout, process flow analysis, line balancing, process control,
and transportation analysis.
2. Capacity Forecasting, facilities planning, aggregate planning, scheduling, capacity plan-
ning, queuing analysis, and capacity utilization.
3. Inventory Level of raw materials, work-in-process, finished goods, what to order, when to
order, how much to order, and materials handling.
4. Workforce Managing the skilled, unskilled, clerical, and managerial employees by caring
for job design, work measurement, job enrichment, work standards, and moti-
vation techniques.
5. Quality Quality control, sampling, testing, quality assurance, and cost control.
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
130 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
supportive, strategic changes may be ineffective or even counterproductive. A firm’s culture can
become antagonistic to new strategies, with the result being confusion and disorientation.
To achieve and maintain competitive advantage, firms must continually learn, adapt, and
evolve. Adapting to change can be difficult, particularly when change includes forging new
alliances, partnerships, or mergers between different companies, each of which likely has its
own unique culture and unique identity. Table 4-4 provides some example (possible) aspects of
an organization’s culture and possible considerations for identifying strengths and weaknesses
within the firm.
When one firm acquires another firm, integrating the two cultures effectively can be vital
for success. For example, in Table 4-4, one firm may score mostly 1s (low) and the other firm
may score mostly 5s (high), which would present a challenging strategic problem. Regardless
of a firm’s industry, geography, or company history, it is imperative that firms effectively inte-
grate corporate strategy and culture, even as they continuously adapt and evolve overtime.
An organization’s culture should infuse individuals with enthusiasm for implementing
strategies. Internal strengths and weaknesses associated with a firm’s culture sometimes are
overlooked because of the interfunctional nature of this phenomenon. This is a key reason why
strategists need to view and understand their firm as a sociocultural system. Success is often
determined by links between a firm’s culture and strategies. The challenge of strategic manage-
ment today is to bring about the changes in organizational culture and individual mind-sets that
are needed to support the formulation, implementation, and evaluation of strategies.
Management Audit Checklist of Questions
The following checklist of questions can help determine specific strengths and weaknesses in
the management functional area of business. An answer of no to any question could indicate a
potential weakness, although the strategic significance and implications of negative answers, of
course, will vary by organization, industry, and severity of the weakness. Positive or yes answers
to the checklist questions suggest potential areas of strength.
1. Does the firm use strategic-management concepts?
2. Are company objectives and goals measurable and well communicated?
3. Do managers at all hierarchical levels plan effectively?
4. Do managers delegate authority well?
5. Is the organization’s structure appropriate?
6. Are job descriptions and job specifications clear?
7. Is employee morale high?
TABLE 4-4 15 Aspects of an Organization’s Culture
Dimension Low Degree High
1. Strong work ethic; arrive early and leave late 1 2 3 4 5
2. High ethical beliefs; clear code of business ethics followed 1 2 3 4 5
3. Formal dress; shirt and tie expected 1 2 3 4 5
4. Informal dress; many casual dress days 1 2 3 4 5
5. Socialize together outside of work 1 2 3 4 5
6. Do not question supervisor’s decision 1 2 3 4 5
7. Encourage whistle-blowing 1 2 3 4 5
8. Be health conscious; have a wellness program 1 2 3 4 5
9. Allow substantial “working from home” 1 2 3 4 5
10. Encourage creativity, innovation, and open-mindedness 1 2 3 4 5
11. Support women and minorities; no glass ceiling 1 2 3 4 5
12. Be highly socially responsible; be philanthropic 1 2 3 4 5
13. Have numerous meetings 1 2 3 4 5
14. Have a participative management style 1 2 3 4 5
15. Preserve the natural environment; have a sustainability program 1 2 3 4 5
CHAPTER 4 • THE INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 131
8. Are employee turnover and absenteeism low?
9. Are organizational reward and control mechanisms effective?
Marketing Marketing can be described as the process of defining, anticipating, and fulfilling consum-
ers’ needs and wants. Marketing is about satisfying current and potential customers’ needs.
Excellent marketing can provide firms with a competitive advantage. Table 4-5 lists compa-
nies that lead their respective industries in customer satisfaction according to the American
Customer Satisfaction Index (ACSI) that surveys around 180,000 U.S. customers each year.
Marketing consists of five basic activities: (1) marketing research and target market analy-
sis, (2) product planning, (3) pricing products, (4) promoting products, and (5) placing or distrib-
uting products. Understanding these activities helps strategists identify and evaluate marketing
strengths and weaknesses—a vital strategy-formulation activity.
Marketing Research and Target Market Analysis
Marketing research is the systematic gathering, recording, and analyzing of data to identify and
define opportunities and problems related to the marketing of goods and services. Marketing
research is often used to help firms evaluate and formulate strategies. Marketing researchers
employ numerous scales, instruments, procedures, concepts, and techniques to gather infor-
mation; their research can uncover critical strengths and weaknesses. Organizations that pos-
sess excellent marketing research skills have a competitive advantage. According to the former
president of PepsiCo:
Looking at the competition is the company’s best form of market research. The majority
of our strategic successes are ideas that we borrow from the marketplace, usually from a
small regional or local competitor. In each case, we spot a promising new idea, improve on
it, and then out-execute our competitor.6
An important use of marketing research involves target market analysis—the examina-
tion and evaluation of consumer needs and wants. Marketing research involves methods such as
administering customer surveys, analyzing consumer information, evaluating market positioning
strategies, developing customer profiles, and determining optimal market segmentation strate-
gies, all of which contribute to effective customer analysis.
LO 4.3
TABLE 4-5 Companies that Lead Their Industries in Customer Satisfaction According to the 2017 American Customer Satisfaction Index
Company Industry
JetBlue Airline
Lexus (Toyota) Automobiles
Dillard’s Department Stores
Cracker Barrel Full-Service Restaurants
LG Household Appliances
Vanguard Internet Investment Services
Amazon Internet Retail
Google Internet Search Engines and Information
Chick-fil-A Limited-Service Restaurants
Clorox Cleaning Products
Apple Personal Computers
AAA Property and Casualty Insurance
Trader Joe’s Supermarkets
Source: Based on information from http://www.theacsi.org/acsi-benchmarks/benchmarks-by-industry
132 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Successful organizations continually monitor present and potential customers’ buying pat-
terns and engage in extensive marketing research to understand the needs and wants of differ-
ent segments of customers. Firms tailor their product offerings to fit the needs of their target
market(s). Many companies have recently shifted their target markets to focus on younger con-
sumers, and particularly millennials because these individuals now make up the largest group
of U.S. consumers. For example, Home Depot, P&G, Williams-Sonoma Inc., Sherwin-Williams
Co., and Scotts Miracle-Gro Company are now targeting millennials by offering online lessons
aimed at teaching basic skills such as how to mow a lawn, use a tape measure, hammer a nail,
and care for plants.
With a clearly defined target market, marketers can best use their strategic toolbox to ensure
that their firm’s offering delivers value to target customers. A clear understanding of a firm’s
target market(s) serves as the foundation on which the marketing mix is designed. Commonly
referred to as the “four Ps of marketing,” the marketing mix includes product, price, promotion,
and place, as indicated in Table 4-6. Marketers design a marketing mix to fit the unique needs of
each target market. Table 4-6 reveals key areas to consider when searching for and identifying
possible strengths and weaknesses related to the marketing functional area of a firm.
Product Planning
Products can be physical goods, services, ideas, or anything a company offers to satisfy individual
or business customer needs through the exchange process. Product planning includes devising
warranties; packaging; determining product options, features, brand style, and quality; deleting
old products; and providing customer service. Product planning is particularly important when
a company is pursuing product development or diversification. In such cases, companies often
must decide whether to extend an existing product line or create an entirely new product line. In
implementing a product development strategy, the Campbell Soup Company, for example, may
consider extending its line of soups by developing a new soup, or entering a new category of
products by perhaps offering a marinade.
One important part of product planning involves test marketing, which allows an organiza-
tion to examine alternative marketing plans, learn about potential problems with the product,
uncover ways to better market the product, or forecast future sales of new products. In conduct-
ing a test-market project, an organization must decide how many cities to include, which cities
to include, how long to run the test, what information to collect during the test, and what action
to take after the test has been completed. Test marketing is used more frequently by consumer
goods companies than industrial goods companies. The technique can enable an organization to
avoid substantial losses by revealing weak products and ineffective marketing approaches before
large-scale production begins.
Another important part of product planning is research and development (R&D). Many
firms today conduct no R&D, and yet many other companies depend on successful R&D activ-
ities for survival. Firms pursuing a product-development strategy especially need to have a
strong R&D orientation. High-tech firms, such as Microsoft, spend a much larger proportion
of their revenues on R&D. A key decision for many firms is whether to be a “first mover” or a
“fast follower” (i.e., spend heavily on R&D to be the first to develop radically new products,
or spend less on R&D by imitating, duplicating, or improving on products after rival firms
develop them).
TABLE 4-6 The Marketing Mix Component Variables
Product Place Promotion Price
Quality
Features and options
Style and brands
Packaging
Product line
Warranty and services
Distribution channels
Distribution coverage
Outlet location
Sales territories
Inventory levels
Transportation carriers
Advertising
Personal selling
Sales promotion
Publicity
Level
Discounts
Allowances
Payment terms
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
CHAPTER 4 • THE INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 133
Most firms have no choice but to continually develop new and improved products because
of changing consumer needs and tastes, new technologies, shortened product life cycles, and
increased domestic and foreign competition. A shortage of ideas for new products, increased
global competition, increased market segmentation, strong special-interest groups, and
increased government regulations are several factors making the successful development of
new products more and more difficult, costly, and risky. In the pharmaceutical industry, for
example, only one of every few thousand drugs created in the laboratory ends up on pharma-
cists’ shelves.
Strengths and weaknesses with respect to products could relate to (1) the value of a firm’s
brands relative to competitors’ brands, (2) the firm’s product assortment or cannibalism among
the firm’s existing products, or (3) features of the firm’s products relative to those of similar
products found in the marketplace.
Pricing
Pricing refers to deciding the amount an individual must exchange to receive a firm’s product
offering. Pricing objectives often include setting prices at levels which maximize profit, sales,
or market share or setting prices to weaken the competition’s marketing efforts, to enhance cus-
tomer satisfaction, or to enhance the image and prestige of a product. Pricing strategies are often
based on costs, demand, the competition, or on customers’ needs. Sometimes “free is a good
price,” as evidenced by what Google and Facebook charge basic customers.
Widespread Internet use and advances in technology have enabled firms to quickly adjust
prices to meet changes in the marketplace. In dynamic pricing strategies, the same product
may be sold to different customers for different prices, or even to the same customer for dif-
ferent prices. Intense price competition, coupled with Internet price-comparative shopping,
has reduced profit margins to bare minimum levels for many companies. Target and Best Buy
are among the many companies that now offer to match online prices of rival retailers. Both
companies are seeking to combat “showrooming” by shoppers who check out products in their
stores but buy them on rivals’ websites. Issues related to pricing can represent key strengths or
weaknesses for firms.
Firms must be aware of government constraints on pricing, including regulations regard-
ing price fixing, price discrimination, predatory pricing, unit pricing, price advertising, and
price controls. For example, the Robinson-Patman Act prohibits manufacturers and wholesal-
ers from discriminating in price among channel member purchasers (retailers and wholesal-
ers) if competition is lessened. Pricing products in digital currencies, as discussed in Global
Capsule 4, is increasingly a necessary consideration. Strengths and weaknesses with respect to
pricing could relate to whether the focal firm price matches or not and why, or how the firm’s
prices (including currencies in which the products can be paid) compare to similar products
sold by competitors.
Promotion
Successful strategy implementation generally rests on the ability of an organization to sell some
good or service. Promotion includes many marketing activities, such as advertising, sales pro-
motion, public relations, personal selling, and direct marketing. Common promotional tools
designed to inform consumers about products include TV advertising, magazine ads, billboards,
websites, and public relations, among others. Discounts, coupons, and samples are often used to
encourage purchase. Promotional tools such as personal selling, buzz building, and social media
are often used to build relationships with customers. The effectiveness of various promotional
tools for consumer and industrial products varies. Personal selling is especially important for
industrial goods companies, whereas advertising and social-media marketing are more impor-
tant for consumer goods companies. Determining organizational strengths and weaknesses in
the promotional function of marketing is an important part of performing an internal strategic-
management audit.
Promotion in general and advertising in particular can be expensive, a primary reason
marketing is a major business function to be studied carefully. Without marketing, even the
best products have little chance of being successful. Worldwide advertising expenditures are
increasing around 5 percent annually and are expected to reach $700 billion in 2021. Digital
134 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
advertising, especially on mobile devices, is fueling the increased ad spending because global
Internet advertising recently surpassed television advertising and is expected to reach nearly
$280 billion in 2020.7 Many successful brands are now using digital platforms and social media
to build relationships and establish emotional bonds with consumers. As social networks, virtual
worlds, product review sites, and location-based social apps become increasingly popular among
consumers, marketers spend heavily on social-media marketing. In performing a strategic-
planning analysis, in addition to comparing rival firms’ websites, it is important to compare rival
firms’ handling of social-media issues.
Strengths and weaknesses with respect to promotion could relate to a firm’s (1) website and
social media engagement (or lack thereof), (2) association with key celebrities or spokespersons,
or (3) advertising and brand slogans or images.
Channels of Distribution
Channels of distribution is a term that refers to the various intermediaries that take a product
from a producer to an end customer. These intermediaries bear a variety of names such as whole-
salers, retailers, brokers, facilitators, agents, vendors—or simply distributors. In this regard mar-
keters often make decisions related to warehousing, distribution channels, distribution coverage,
retail site locations, sales territories, inventory location, transportation carriers, wholesaling, and
retailing.
Marketers must determine how widely available their product should be for consumers to
find and purchase. Some firms offer their products through as many wholesalers and retailers
that will sell them while other firms offer products only through several select outlets or autho-
rized outlets.
Some of the most complex and challenging decisions facing a firm concern product distri-
bution. Successful organizations identify and evaluate alternative ways to reach their ultimate
market. Many companies today are increasingly making their products available for purchase
online, directly through their website, but this practice can upset retailers. Efficient supply chain
and distribution systems are essential for any firm to gain and sustain a competitive advantage.
Strengths and weaknesses with respect to promotion could relate to the effectiveness of
brick-and-mortar versus online sales or the average return on investment (ROI) of various pur-
chase locations.
GLOBAL CAPSULE 4
Bitcoin: The New Global Currency Using cryptography, a new worldwide
digital payment system has emerged in
which money can be exchanged without
the involvement of a central authority or
bank. Cryptocurrencies, also referred to as
digital currencies or altcoins, are becoming
popular among investors, businesses, and
consumers around the world. Much like
cash for the Internet, but with no physical
backing, digital currencies are increasingly
prevalent as a means of value exchange
between individuals and businesses.
With a total market value of more
than $600 billion, the digital currency market is made up of several
players including Bitcoin, Ethereum, Ripple, and Litecoin. Bitcoin is the
most well-known and widely used digital currency, making up over
half of the cryptocurrency market value. Simply put, Bitcoin is a mobile
app that provides individuals with a personal Bitcoin wallet that can
be used to exchange Bitcoin with other users. Bitcoin is increasingly
being used; Bloomberg, Dish, Fidelity, Expedia, Overstock.com, Reddit,
Reeds Jeweler, United Way, and USAA
are among a growing number of busi-
nesses accepting Bitcoin. Key advantages
of Bitcoin include a simple payment pro-
cess that can easily and quickly be done
24 hours a day and across international
borders, all while protecting one’s iden-
tity, protecting against fraud, and avoiding
typical transaction fees imposed by banks
or other intermediaries.
Companies are increasingly being
faced with difficult decisions regard-
ing Bitcoin. Should firms accept Bitcoin
as a method of payment? Should products be priced in Bitcoin? If so,
should firms price their products in both the local currency and Bitcoin?
Executives are currently addressing these and other such questions.
Source: Based on https://bitcoin.org/en/how-it-works and Paul Vigna, “Rival
Digital Currencies Nip at Bitcoin,” Wall Street Journal, (December 20,
2017): B16.
Is this money?
T ra
v is
W o lf
e/ 1 2 3 R
F
CHAPTER 4 • THE INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 135
Marketing Audit Checklist of Questions
The following types of questions about marketing must be examined in performing an internal
assessment
1. Are markets segmented effectively?
2. Is the organization positioned well among competitors?
3. Are present channels of distribution reliable and cost effective?
4. Is the firm conducting and using market research effectively?
5. Are product quality and customer service good?
6. Are the firm’s products and services priced appropriately?
7. Does the firm have an effective promotional strategy?
8. Is the firm’s Internet presence excellent as compared to rivals?
Finance and Accounting Financial condition is often considered the single-best measure of a firm’s competitive
position and overall attractiveness to investors. Table 4-7 lists top companies for financial
strength according to the Drucker Institute, which assesses financial performance based on
return on assets, return on equity, return on invested capital, market share and profits, as well
as investors’ return on their shares. Note that Accenture PLC heads the list. Determining
an organization’s financial strengths and weaknesses is essential in formulating strategies.
A firm’s liquidity, leverage, working capital, profitability, asset utilization, cash flow, and
equity can eliminate some strategies as being feasible alternatives. Financial factors often
impact existing strategies and influence strategy-implementation plans.
Finance and Accounting
According to James Van Horne, finance and accounting activities can be categorized into
three decision areas: the investment decision, the financing decision, and the dividend
decision.8 The investment decision, also called capital budgeting, is the allocation and real-
location of capital and resources to projects, products, assets, and divisions of an organization.
After strategies are formulated, capital budgeting decisions are required to successfully imple-
ment strategies. The financing decision determines the best capital structure for the firm and
includes examining various methods by which the firm can raise capital (for example, by issuing
stock, increasing debt, selling assets, or using a combination of these approaches). The financing
decision must consider both short-term and long-term needs for working capital. Two key finan-
cial ratios that indicate whether a firm’s financing decisions have been effective are the debt-to-
equity ratio and the debt-to-total-assets ratio.
LO 4.4
TABLE 4-7 A Sampling of Top Companies for Financial Strength
Company Number of Employees 2017 Revenues (in billions)
Accenture PLC 425,000 $34.8
Altria Group, Inc. 8,300 $25.7
Apple Inc. 123,000 $215.6
Berkshire Hathaway, Inc. 45,500 $223.6
Home Depot, Inc. 406,000 $94.5
Mastercard, Inc. 11,900 $10.7
P&G Company 95,000 $65.0
Starbucks Corporation 254,000 $21.3
United Parcel Service, Inc. 434,000 $60.9
Verizon Communications, Inc. 160,900 $125.9
Walmart, Inc. 2,300,000 $482.1
Source: Based on Ezequiel Minaya, “Consumer-Goods Firms Shine in Financial Category,” Wall Street Journal, (December 6, 2017): R2.
136 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Dividend decisions concern issues such as the dollar amount per share to pay quarterly to stock-
holders, the stability of dividends paid over time, and the repurchase or issuance of stock. Dividend
decisions determine the amount of funds that are retained in a firm compared to the amount paid out
to stockholders. Three financial ratios that are helpful in evaluating a firm’s dividend decisions are
the earnings-per-share ratio, the dividends-per-share ratio, and the price-earnings ratio. The benefits
of paying dividends to investors must be balanced against the benefits of internally retaining funds,
and there is no set formula on how to balance this trade-off. Sometimes to appease shareholders,
dividends are paid out (1) even when the firm has incurred a negative annual net income, (2) even
when the firm has to obtain outside sources of capital to pay for the dividends, and (3) even when the
funds were needed as reinvestment in the business. Reasons for this practice are as follows:
1. Paying cash dividends is customary for some firms. Failure to do so could be thought of as
a stigma. A dividend change is a signal about the future.
2. Dividends represent a sales point for investment bankers. Some institutional investors can
buy only dividend-paying stocks.
3. Shareholders often demand dividends, even in companies with great opportunities for rein-
vesting all available funds.
4. A myth exists that paying dividends will result in a higher stock price.
Financial Ratios
Financial ratio analysis is the most widely used method for determining an organization’s streng-
ths and weaknesses in the investment, financing, and dividend areas. Because the functional areas of
business are so closely related, financial ratios can actually signal strengths or weaknesses anywhere
up and down a firm’s value chain from suppliers through production to distribution.
Financial ratios are computed from an organization’s income statement and balance sheet.
Computing financial ratios is like taking a photograph: The results reflect a situation at just one point
in time. Comparing ratios over time and to industry averages is more likely to result in meaningful
statistics that can be used to identify and evaluate strengths and weaknesses. Financial ratio trend
analysis, illustrated in Figure 4-2, is a useful technique that incorporates both the time and industry
average dimensions of financial ratios. Note that the dotted lines reveal projected ratios.
Financial ratios are equally applicable in for-profit and nonprofit organizations, but the ratios
vary considerably across types of industries. Even though nonprofit organizations would not have
return-on-investment or earnings-per-share ratios, they would routinely monitor many other spe-
cial ratios. For example, a religious organization would monitor the ratio of dollar contributions
to the number of members, whereas a zoo would monitor dollar food sales to number of visitors.
A university would monitor number of students divided by number of professors. Nonprofit
organizations because strive to be financially sound just as for-profit firms do. Nonprofit organi-
zations need strategic planning just as much as for-profit firms.
Financial ratio analysis should be conducted on three separate fronts:
1. How has each ratio changed over time? This information provides a means of evaluating
historical trends. Examine whether each ratio has been historically increasing, decreasing,
or nearly constant. Analysts often calculate the percentage change in a ratio from one year
to the next to assess historical financial performance on that dimension. Large percentage
changes can be especially relevant, but be mindful that if base numbers are small then large
percentage changes can ensue more easily.
2. How does each ratio compare to industry norms? A firm’s inventory turnover ratio may
appear impressive at first glance but may pale when compared to industry standards or
norms. Industries can differ dramatically on certain ratios. For example, grocery companies
have a high inventory turnover, whereas automobile dealerships have a lower turnover.
Therefore, comparison of a firm’s ratios within its particular industry can be essential in
determining strengths and weaknesses.
3. How does each ratio compare with key competitors? Often competition is more intense
between several competitors in a given industry or location than across all rival firms in
the industry. When this is true, financial ratio analysis should include comparison to those
key competitors. For example, if a firm’s profitability ratio is trending up over time and
compares favorably to the industry average, but it is trending down relative to its leading
competitor, there may be reason for concern.
CHAPTER 4 • THE INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 137
Excellent free online and subscription (fee-based) resources for obtaining financial information
about firms and industries are provided in Table 4-8. Some sources listed provide financial ratios.
The free Excel template at www.strategyclub.com calculates ratios once students enter in rel-
evant data.
Financial ratio analysis is not without some limitations. For example, financial ratios are
based on accounting data, and firms differ in their treatment of such items as depreciation, inven-
tory valuation, R&D expenditures, pension plan costs, mergers, and taxes. Also, seasonal factors
can influence comparative ratios. Therefore, conformity to industry composite ratios does not
establish with certainty that a firm is performing normally or that it is well managed. Likewise,
departures from industry averages do not always indicate that a firm is doing especially well or
badly. For example, a high inventory turnover ratio could indicate efficient inventory manage-
ment and a strong working capital position, but it also could indicate a serious inventory shortage
and a weak working capital position.
Another limitation of financial ratios in terms of including them as key internal factors in
the upcoming IFE Matrix is that financial ratios are not very “actionable” in terms of reveal-
ing potential strategies needed (i.e., because they generally are based on performance of the
overall firm). For example, to include as a key internal factor that the firm’s “current ratio
increased from 1.8 to 2.1” is not as actionable because the factor does not specify which cur-
rent assets or current liabilities were most significant in contributing to the change. In contrast,
a factor such as “the firm’s fragrance division revenues increased 18 percent in Africa in 2018”
would be considerably more actionable because more insight is provided as to actions needed
to address the issue. Recall from the prior chapter the importance of factors being stated in
actionable terms. The AQCD (actionable-quantitative-comparative-divisional) Test discussed
in the prior chapter for performing an external assessment is equally important in performing
an internal assessment.
Table 4-9 provides a summary of key financial ratios showing how each ratio is calculated
and what each ratio measures. However, all the ratios are not significant for all industries and
companies. For example, accounts receivable turnover and average collection period are not
5.0 4.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 0.0
2017
Current ratio
2017
Profit margin
10% 9% 8% 7% 6% 5% 4% 3% 2% 1% 0
2018 2019 2020 2021
2018 2019 2020 2021
Industry average
Company
Company
Industry average
FIGURE 4-2
Financial Ratio Trend Analysis
138 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
meaningful to a company that takes only cash receipts. As indicated in Table 4-9, key financial
ratios can be classified into the following five types: liquidity (how is the firm’s cash position),
leverage (how is the firm’s debt position), activity (how efficient is the firm’s operations), profit-
ability (how is the firm performing), and growth (is the firm meeting shareholders’ expectations).
Finance and Accounting Audit Checklist
Strengths and weaknesses in finance and accounting commonly arise from answering the follow-
ing types of questions:
1. Where is the firm financially strong and weak as indicated by financial ratio analysis?
2. Can the firm raise needed short-term capital?
3. Should the firm raise needed long-term capital through debt or equity?
4. Does the firm have sufficient working capital?
5. Are capital budgeting procedures effective?
6. Are dividend payout policies reasonable?
7. Does the firm have excellent relations with its investors and stockholders?
8. Are the firm’s financial managers experienced and well trained?
9. Is the firm’s debt situation excellent?
TABLE 4-8 Excellent Websites to Obtain Strategic Information (Including Financial Ratios) on Companies and Industries
1. Online Free Resources.
a. Form 10K or Annual Report
b. http://finance.yahoo.com
c. www.hoovers.com
d. http://globaledge.msu.edu/industries/
e. www.morningstar.com
2. Online Subscription Resources (Likely Subscribed to by Your University Library)
a. Mergent Online: www.mergentonline.com
At this website, financial statements seem to be more complete than at other sites. You can also
search for companies with the same SIC or NAICS code and then create a comparison financial
ratio report. A number of different ratios can be used as comparison criteria to create a tailored
report that can then be exported into a Microsoft Excel format. Alternatively, use the Competi-
tors Tab in Mergent to build a list of companies and compare their ratios. Your college library
likely subscribes to this service.
b. Factiva: http://new.dowjones.com/products/factiva/
At this website, first use the Companies & Markets tab to search for a company. Next, click
“Reports” and choose the “Ratio Comparison Report” to get a company’s ratios compared to
industry averages. Your college library likely subscribes to this service.
c. S&P NetAdvantage: http://www.standardandpoors.com/products-services/industry_surveys/en/us
This website provides company and industry ratios and information in two sections of the da-
tabase: (1) the Compustat Excel Analytics section of a particular company’s information page
and (2) the S&P Industry Surveys.
d. Onesource: www.avention.com/OneSource
This is a widely used source for financial ratio information. Search for a particular company
and then click on the link for “Ratio Comparisons” on the left side of the company information
page. The data in Onesource will compare your company against the industry, against the sec-
tor, and against the stock market as a whole.
e. Yahoo Industry Center: http://biz.yahoo.com/ic/
This is an excellent free resource that allows a user to browse industries by performance rank-
ings, including return on equity, price-earnings ratio, market cap, price change, profit margin,
price-to-book value, long-term debt, and more.
3. Hardcopy Reference Books for Financial Ratios in Most Libraries
a. Robert Morris Associate’s Annual Statement Studies: An excellent source of financial ratio
information.
b. Dun & Bradstreet’s Industry Norms & Key Business Ratios: An excellent source of financial
ratio information.
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
CHAPTER 4 • THE INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 139
TABLE 4-9 A Summary of Key Financial Ratios
Ratio How Calculated What It Measures
I. Liquidity Ratios
Current Ratio Current assets
Current liabilities
The extent to which a firm can meet its short-term
obligations
Quick Ratio Current assets minus inventory
Current liabilities
The extent to which a firm can meet its short-
term obligations without relying on the sale of its
inventories
II. Leverage Ratios
Debt-to-Total-Assets Ratio Total debt
Total Assets
The percentage of total funds provided by creditors
Debt-to-Equity Ratio Total debt
Total stockholders’ equity
The percentage of total funds provided by creditors
versus by owners
Long-Term Debt-to-Equity Ratio Long-term debt
Total stockholders’ equity
The balance between debt and equity in a firm’s
long-term capital structure
Times-Interest-Earned Ratio Profits before interest and taxes
Total interest charges
The extent to which earnings can decline without
the firm becoming unable to meet its annual interest
costs
III. Activity Ratios
Inventory Turnover COGS/Inventory Whether a firm holds excessive stocks of inventories
and whether a firm is slowly selling its inventories
compared to the industry average
Fixed Assets Turnover Sales
Fixed assets
Sales productivity and plant and equipment
utilization
Total Assets Turnover Sales
Total assets
Whether a firm is generating a sufficient volume
of business for the size of its asset investment
Accounts Receivable Turnover Sales/Accounts Receivable The average length of time it takes a firm to collect
credit sales (in percentage terms)
Average Collection Period Accounts receivable
Total credit sales/365 days
The average length of time it takes a firm to collect
on credit sales (in days)
IV. Profitability Ratios
Gross Profit Margin Gross Profit/Sales The total margin available to cover operating
expenses and yield a profit
Operating Profit Margin Earning before interest and taxes EBIT
Sales
Profitability without concern for taxes and
interest
Net Profit Margin Net income
Sales
After-tax profits per dollar of sales
Return on Total Assets (ROA) Net income
Total assets
After-tax profits per dollar of assets; this ratio
is also called return on investment (ROI)
Return on Stockholders’ Equity
(ROE)
Net Income
Total stockholders’ equity
After-tax profits per dollar of stockholders’
investment in the firm
Earnings Per Share (EPS) Net income
Number of shares of common stock outstanding
Earnings available to the owners of common
stock
Price-Earnings Ratio Market price per share
Earnings per share
Attractiveness of firm on equity markets
V. Growth Ratios
Sales Annual percentage growth in total sales Firm’s growth rate in sales
Net Income Annual percentage growth in profits Firm’s growth rate in profits
Earnings Per Share Annual percentage growth in EPS Firm’s growth rate in EPS
Dividends Per Share Annual percentage growth in dividends per share Firm’s growth rate in dividends per share
140 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Financial analysis provides an excellent tool for identifying many strengths and weaknesses of
the firm but the numbers themselves generally do not reveal the source of issues, which could
stem for example from marketing and promotional effectiveness, HRM and employee produc-
tivity, accounting errors, and so on. Therefore, carefully study your firm’s Form 10K or Annual
Report and other company documents including quarterly reports to uncover strengths and weak-
nesses associated within the functional areas. Finance and accounting strengths and weaknesses
could relate to issues such as the firm’s use of debt versus equity to raise capital, the firms divi-
dend policy, or the firm’s acquisition versus organic growth practices.
Management Information Systems Information ties all business functions together and provides the basis for all managerial
decisions. Information can represent a major source of competitive advantage or disadvan-
tage and a major source of a firm’s internal strength and weakness factors. A management
information system (MIS) collects, codes, stores, synthesizes, and presents information in
such a manner that it aids in operational and strategic decision making. The heart of an infor-
mation system is a database containing the kinds of records and data important to managers.
If a business fails to manage information well, this is an internal weakness that needs fixing.
Business Analytics
Business analytics is a business technique that involves using software to mine huge volumes
of data to help executives make decisions. Sometimes called predictive analytics, machine
learning, or data mining, this software enables a researcher to assess and use the aggregate
experience of an organization, which is a priceless strategic asset for a firm. The history of a
firm’s interaction with its customers, suppliers, distributors, employees, rival firms, and more
can all be tapped with data mining to generate predictive models. Business analytics is similar
to the actuarial methods used by insurance companies to rate customers by the chance of posi-
tive or negative outcomes. Every business is basically a risk management endeavor! Therefore,
like insurance companies, all businesses can benefit from measuring, tracking, and computing
the risk associated with hundreds of strategic and tactical decisions made every day.
Strategists use business analytics to provide a firm with proprietary business intelligence
regarding, for example, which segment(s) of customers choose your firm versus those who defer,
delay, or defect to a competitor and why. In addition to understanding consumer behavior better,
which yields more effective and efficient marketing, business analytics also is being used to slash
expenses by, for example, withholding retention offers from customers who are going to stay
with the firm anyway, or managing fraudulent transactions involving invoices, credit-card pur-
chases, tax returns, insurance claims, mobile phone calls, online ad clicks, and more. Business
analytics can also reveal where competitors are weak so that marketing activities can be directly
targeted to take advantage of resultant opportunities.
Business analytics enables a firm to learn from experience and to make current and future
decisions based on prior information. Deriving robust predictive models from data mining to
support hundreds of commonly occurring business decisions is the essence of learning from
experience. The mathematical models and analysis of thousands, millions, or even billions of
prior data points can reveal patterns of behavior for optimizing the deployment of resources and
can dramatically enhance decision making at all organizational levels and all stages of strategic
management. Business analytics can identify and analyze patterns, but perhaps more impor-
tantly, they can reveal the likelihood of an event, and that information can be worth millions of
dollars to companies, organizations, and governments.
In 2018, global data analytics software is expected to reach $21.7 billion, a 64 percent
increase from 2012.9 Leading firms providing the software include IBM, SAP, Oracle, Microsoft,
Qlik Technologies, Tibco Software, and Tableau Software. CEOs are increasingly worried about
cybersecurity issues. The number of U.S. data breaches reached a record of 791 in the first
6 months of 2017, up 29 percent from the same period the prior year.10 Fearing potential data
breaches, CEOs are emphasizing to individuals throughout the company the importance of data
security and are prioritizing cybersecurity efforts.
In terms of cyberthreats, a recent Wall Street Journal article revealed what companies should
be most concerned about and what they can do to mitigate the threat.11 The biggest threat currently
LO 4.5
CHAPTER 4 • THE INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 141
facing firms is that too many people in too many organizations have too much access to too much
information not needed to do their particular job, whether it is access to sales data, patent informa-
tion, or even material about the next new product being developed. Technical controls must be put in
place in organizations to prevent employees from having broad access to company information and
data because hackers from various countries and companies and lone wolves are increasingly gain-
ing access to corporate files through employees and managers who unknowingly allow the access to
seemingly honest “constituencies.” Cyberthreats are more a people threat than a technology threat.
The Internal Factor Evaluation (IFE) Matrix The internal topics discussed so far in this chapter provide a foundation for identifying
strengths and weaknesses of a firm as they relate to a firm’s current strategies, paying careful
attention to strengths and weaknesses that are unique and lead to or hinder sustaining a com-
petitive advantage. An internal assessment reveals key strengths and weaknesses confronting an
organization; this is vital information for managers in formulating strategies that capitalize on
strengths and mitigate/overcome/improve upon weaknesses.
The Actionable-Quantitative-Comparative-Divisional (AQCD) Test
When identifying and prioritizing key internal factors in strategic planning, make sure the factors
selected meet the following four criteria to the extent possible:
1. Actionable (i.e., meaningful and helpful in ultimately deciding what actions or strategies a
firm should consider pursuing);
2. Quantitative (i.e., include percentages, ratios, dollars, and numbers to the extent possible);
3. Comparative (i.e., reveals changes over time), and
4. Divisional (relates to the firm’s products and/or regions (rather than consolidated) so infer-
ences can be drawn regarding what products and regions are doing well or not).
As mentioned in the prior chapter, factors that meet the four criteria pass what can be called
the “Actionable-Quantitative-Comparative-Divisional (AQCD) Test,” that is a measure of the
quality of an internal factor. In addition to passing the AQCD Test, make sure that internal fac-
tors are indeed internal (not external). Also, make sure the internal factors relate closely to the
firm achieving its mission (strengths) or hindering its mission (weaknesses). Factors selected for
inclusion in an internal assessment should be mission-driven.
Regarding the AQCD criteria, strive to include all high quality factors in an internal assess-
ment for a firm. A high quality factor will meet three or four of the AQCD criteria; a low quality
factor will meet two or fewer of the AQCD criteria. Engage in an engineering hunt for facts to
make sure as many factors as possible pass the AQCD Test. It is important to state internal factors
to the extent possible in actionable, quantitative, comparative, and divisional terms. Vagueness in
stating factors must be avoided because vagueness gives little guidance in assigning weights or
ratings in developing an IFE Matrix.
High quality and low quality internal factors (hypothetical) for Exxon Mobil Corporation
are given below to further exemplify this important concept:
ASK YOuRSELF IS THE FACTOR
Actionable Quantitative Comparative Divisional
A High Quality
Internal Factor
Exxon’s natural gas
segment sales grew
14% in 2018.
yes yes yes yes
A Low Quality
Internal Factor
Exxon’s price earn-
ings ratio in 2018
was 14.4.
no yes no no
LO 4.6
142 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Steps in Developing an IFE Matrix
An internal strategic-management audit includes development of an Internal Factor Evaluation
(IFE) Matrix. This strategy-formulation tool weights and rates major strengths and weaknesses
in the functional areas of a business, providing a total weighted score indicating the overall
strength of a firm’s internal position. The IFE Matrix is an evaluation of the effectiveness of the
firm’s current strategies, not taking into account opportunities and threats. The purpose of the
IFE Matrix and the internal assessment as a whole is to determine how effective the firm’s cur-
rent strategies are based on the firm’s strengths and weaknesses.
Strategists analyze the firm’s response to key strengths and weaknesses (the ratings in step 3)
in relation to the importance of these factors within the industry it operates (the weights in step 2).
The resulting total weighted score (step 5) indicates the internal effectiveness of the current
strategy. The IFE Matrix total weighted score is suggestive of whether a continuation of strategy
is needed (scores above 2.5) or a change in strategy is warranted (scores below 2.5). Used in
conjunction with the EFE Matrix and CPM discussed in Chapter 3, the IFE Matrix provides the
input needed to perform strategy-matching analyses described in Chapter 6.
An IFE Matrix can be developed in five steps:
Step 1: Develop a Full and Narrow List of Key Internal Factors
Conduct research about the focal company using the resources listed in Table 4.8. Compile
and organize information into two data sets, strengths and weaknesses, developing a full list of
perhaps 50 to 100 strength and weakness factors. Be sure to include factors from management,
marketing, finance, accounting, and MIS that are of strategic importance. Then, narrow your
data sets down to 20 key internal factors that include specifically 10 strengths and 10 weak-
nesses. (Note: We use 10 and 10 because organizations commonly use this breakdown and the
template at www.strategyclub.com uses 10 and 10). List strengths first and then weaknesses.
Firms determine the most important 20 factors among a full list usually by rating the factors
according to importance (1 = least important to 10 = most important) and consolidating the rat-
ing data or by ranking the factors (1 = most important to 50 = least important) and consolidating
the ranking data. Both methods will yield the 20 most important factors to include. The impor-
tant point here is that companies (and students) never should include just the first 20 factors
that come to mind. For example, a student recently included as a weakness in her IFE Matrix
for a college that “there are feral cats on campus”; 99 percent of the time that factor should not
be included in the matrix. Instead, conduct research to identify internal factors that relate to the
university’s vision, mission, strategies, and competitive advantages.
When determining particular factors to include in an IFE Matrix and when assigning weights
and ratings, focus on a narrow industry perspective. Within the narrow industry, consider the
vision and mission of the firm, and the firm’s current strategies (i.e., when selecting factors and
assigning weights and ratings). For example, for McDonald’s, the industry is fast-food restau-
rants, rather than restaurants in general, and for Porsche, the industry is luxury sports cars, not
simply automobiles. This narrow industry perspective is important, as indicated in Table 4-10.
Step 2: Assign Weights to Key Internal Factors
In developing an IFE Matrix, assign a weight that ranges from 0.01 (not important) to 1.0 (all-
important) for each factor. The weight assigned to a given factor indicates the relative impor-
tance of the factor for being successful in the firm’s industry relative to other factors included
in the IFE. For example, a factor receiving a weight of 0.04 is 100 percent more important than
a factor receiving a weight of 0.02 for success in the industry. Regardless of whether a key fac-
tor for a particular firm is a strength or weakness, factors considered to have the greatest effect
on organizational performance of all firms in a specific industry should be assigned the highest
weights. The sum of all weights must equal 1.0. Do not try to even weights out to total 0.50
for strengths and 0.50 for weaknesses. Weights are industry-based, not company-based. List
strengths from highest weight to lowest weight; do the same for weaknesses.
Step 3: Assign Ratings to Key Internal Factors
In developing an IFE Matrix, assign a rating between 1 and 4 to each key internal factor to
indicate how effectively (or ineffectively) the firm’s strategies are responding to the strength
CHAPTER 4 • THE INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 143
or weakness, where 4 = the response is superior, 3 = the response is above average, 2 = the
response is average, and 1 = the response is poor. Even though both strengths and weaknesses
can receive a rating of 1, 2, 3, or 4 at any time, generally there should be a compelling reason
to assign a rating of 3 or 4 to a weakness; it is more common for a firm to be responding in a
superior fashion to strengths because competitive advantages are built on strengths; strategies
that result in strengths are generally excellent. Responding well to a weakness may not lead to
competitive advantage, whereas turning a strength into a distinctive competency could yield a
competitive advantage. Ratings are based on the effectiveness of a firm’s strategies in capital-
izing on strengths or improving weaknesses. Ratings are company-based, not industry-based.
Assignment of numerical values down the rating column in an IFE Matrix should be with
consideration that companies carve out niches in industries that enable them to gain and sus-
tain competitive advantages through effective strategies. These niches are most often based on
some unique strength(s) that yield prosperity amid rivals that are so strong in various areas the
focal firm will rarely, if ever, want to attack those areas. This is not to say weaknesses are not
important because they are, and firms need to continually strive to improve weaknesses, but
strengths versus rivals are of paramount importance. If a firm possesses many highly-weighted
strengths, this is likely the result of effective strategies, so higher ratings in general are warranted
for strengths; higher ratings increase the total weighted score in an IFE Matrix.
Step 4: Obtain Weighted Scores
Along each row in an IFE Matrix, multiply the factor’s weight by its rating to determine a
weighted score for each factor.
Step 5: Obtain Total Weighted Score
Sum the weighted scores to determine the total weighted score for the organization. Regardless
of how many factors are included in an IFE Matrix, the total weighted score can range from a
low of 1.0 to a high of 4.0, with the average score being 2.5. Total weighted scores well below
2.5 characterize organizations that are weak internally, implying that new strategies are likely
needed and perhaps a new direction, new vision, or mission. Total weighted scores well above
2.5 indicate a strong internal position, whereby a continuation of current strategies may be pru-
dent. (Note: The IE Matrix presented in Chapter 6 focuses on matching of EFE and IFE total
weighted scores in formulating strategies.)
TABLE 4-10 Guidelines for Developing an IFE Matrix
1. Use the Narrow (Not Broad) Industry the Firm Competes In
Example: Burger King competes in the fast-food industry (as opposed to the more general restaurant
industry). Therefore, for Burger King, if including a weakness regarding the lack of healthy options
on their menu, this factor should likely receive a low weight because healthy menu options are not as
vital to the fast-food industry, whose customer base mostly desire quick service, good taste, and filling
food. Similarly, Burger King’s weakness related to low-quality meats should not receive a high weight
either because quality meats are not that important in the fast-food industry; customers simply are not
willing to pay for them. Similarly, Burger King’s strength of providing low-priced coffee would re-
ceive a high weight if the analyst views coffee as being especially important in the fast-food industry
for success. If however the analysts views coffee not to be especially important in the fast-food indus-
try for success, then this strength of Burger King should receive a relatively low weight.
2. State Factors So They Pass the Actionable-Quantitative-Comparative-Divisional (AQCD) Test
Example: A firm’s revenues may have decreased 15 percent from one year to the next, but stated in this
manner, this “weakness” is not actionable because it does not reveal the reason, or reasons, why rev-
enues declined; the reason(s) could range from competition driving down prices to raw materials being
unavailable for one product or division of the firm. Nonactionable factors could lead managers astray
if they make false assumptions regarding what to do about the factor. Therefore, state the “revenue
decline factor” perhaps as follows: Revenues in the chocolate segment of the firm declined 21 percent
in the most recent quarter because of factory recall problems. Now the factor passes the AQCD Test in
providing insightful, relevant, useful, information for formulating strategies.
144 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
An Example IFE Matrix
An example IFE Matrix is provided in Table 4-11 for a retail computer store. The table reveals that
the two most important factors to be successful in the retail computer store business (as indicated
by the highest weighted factors) are Strength #1: “Revenues from repair/service in the store,”
and Weakness #1: Location of store negatively impacted by new Highway 34. Note that among
the strengths, the store’s strategies are not responding well (rating is 2) to two factors: “Average
customer purchase increased from $97 to $128” and “Debt-to-total assets ratio declines to 34%,”
as indicated by the assigned 2 ratings. Regarding the store’s weaknesses, note that the owner’s
strategies are responding “superior” to two factors: (1) “Location of store negatively impacted by
new Highway 34,” as indicated by the rating of 4 (because plans are underway to perhaps relocate
the store), and (2) “Bathroom needs refurbishing,” as indicated by the rating of 4 (because the
bathroom is in the process of being remodeled). Note that the store’s IFE Matrix overall contains
numerous dollars, numbers, percentages, and ratios, rather than vague statements; this is excel-
lent. This store receives a 2.73 total weighted score, which on a 1- to 4-scale, indicates some suc-
cess but there is room for improvement in store operations, strategies, policies, and procedures.
Coupled with the EFE Matrix, the IFE Matrix provides important information for strategy
formulation. For example, this retail computer store might want to hire another checkout person
and repair its carpet and paint. Also, the store may want to increase advertising for its repair/ser-
vices, because that is a really important (weight 0.15) factor to being successful in this business.
In multidivisional firms, each autonomous division or strategic business unit should con-
struct their own IFE Matrix (and their own EFE Matrix). Divisional matrices then can be inte-
grated to develop an overall corporate IFE Matrix. Be as divisional as possible when developing
a corporate IFE Matrix. Also, in developing an IFE Matrix, do not allow more than 30 percent
of the key factors to be financial ratios. Financial ratios are generally the result of many fac-
tors, so it is difficult to know what particular strategies should be considered based on financial
ratios. For example, a firm would have no insight on whether to sell in Brazil or South Africa to
take advantage of a high corporate ROI ratio.
TABLE 4-11 Sample Internal Factor Evaluation Matrix for a Retail Computer Store
Key Internal Factors Weight Rating Weighted Score
Strengths
1. Revenues from repair/service in the store up 16%. 0.15 3 0.45
2. Employee morale is excellent. 0.10 3 0.30
3. Average customer purchase increased from $97 to $128. 0.07 2 0.14
4. In-store promotions resulted in 20% increase in sales. 0.05 3 0.15
5. In-store technical support personnel have MIS college
degrees.
0.05 4 0.20
6. Inventory turnover increased from 5.8 to 6.7. 0.05 3 0.15
7. Debt-to-total assets ratio declines to 34%. 0.03 2 0.06
8. Newspaper advertising expenditures increased 10%. 0.02 3 0.06
9. Revenues per employee up 19%. 0.02 3 0.06
Weaknesses
1. Location of store negatively impacted by new Highway 34. 0.15 4 0.60
2. Revenues from software segment of store down 12%. 0.10 2 0.20
3. Often customers wait 15 minutes to check out. 0.05 1 0.05
4. Store has no website. 0.05 2 0.10
5. Revenues from service segment down 8%. 0.04 1 0.04
6. Supplier on-time delivery increased to 2.4 days. 0.03 1 0.03
7. Carpet and paint in store somewhat in disrepair. 0.02 3 0.06
8. Bathroom in store needs refurbishing. 0.02 4 0.08
Total 1.00 2.73
CHAPTER 4 • THE INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 145
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS
Figure 4-3 illustrates that to gain and sustain competitive advantages, a
firm must formulate strategies that capitalize on internal strengths and
continually improve on its internal weaknesses. Firms must nurture and
build on competitive advantages embedded largely within the list of
strengths included in an IFE Matrix. Coupled with the vision or mission
and external audit, the internal audit must be performed methodically
and carefully because survival of the firm could hinge on the strategic
plan that ensues from these assessments. Do not let assignment of
weights and ratings become based on mere guessing, emotion, and
opinion; use the sources of information mentioned in this chapter and
others to extract actionable, quantitative, comparative, divisional, fac-
tors for inclusion in matrices. Use the AQCD Test as a guide for devel-
oping effective, useful strength and weakness factors.
The Process of Performing an Internal Audit
The process of performing an internal audit closely parallels the
process of performing an external audit. Representative managers
and employees throughout the firm need to be involved in deter-
mining a firm’s strengths and weaknesses. The internal audit requires
gathering, assimilating, and prioritizing information about the firm’s
management, marketing, finance, accounting, production, and MIS
operations to reveal the firm’s most important strengths and most
severe weaknesses.
Compared to the external audit, the process of performing an
internal audit provides more opportunity for participants to under-
stand how their jobs, departments, and divisions fit into the whole
organization. This is a great benefit because managers and employ-
ees perform better when they understand how their work affects
other areas and activities of the firm. For example, when marketing
and manufacturing managers jointly discuss issues related to inter-
nal strengths and weaknesses, they gain a better appreciation of the
issues, problems, concerns, and needs of all the functional areas.
Thus, performing an internal audit is an excellent vehicle or forum
for improving the process of communication in an organization.
Establish A Clear Vision & Mission
Evaluate & Monitor Results:
Take Corrective Actions; Adapt
To Change
Gain & Sustain Competitive Advantages
Formulate Strategies: Collect, Analyze, &
Prioritize Data Using Matrices; Establish A Clear Strategic Plan
Implement Strategies: Establish Structure; Allocate Resources; Motivate & Reward; Attract Customers; Manage Finances
FIGURE 4-3
How to Gain and Sustain Competitive Advantages
146 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS
To obtain the most recent management, marketing, and financial
information about your case company, read the firm’s most recent
quarterly report; the narrative that accompanies quarterly reports is
excellent for revealing what a company is doing and the most recent
financial results. Use these reports to obtain comparative informa-
tion for developing an IFE Matrix.
Gaining and sustaining competitive advantage is the essence or
purpose of strategic planning. In the internal portion of your case
analysis, emphasize how and why your internal strengths and weak-
nesses can both be leveraged to gain competitive advantage and
overcome competitive disadvantage, in light of the direction you
are taking the firm. Maintain your project’s upbeat, insightful, and
forward-thinking demeanor during the internal assessment, rather
than being mundane, descriptive, and vague. Focus on how your
firm’s resources, capabilities, structure, and strategies, with your rec-
ommended improvements, can lead the firm to prosperity.
Although the numbers must provide the basis for your analysis and
must be accurate and reasonable, do not bore a live audience or class
with overreliance on numbers. In contrast, throughout your presenta-
tion or written analysis, refer to your recommendations, explaining how
your plan of action will improve the firm’s weaknesses and capitalize on
strengths in light of anticipated competitor countermoves. Keep your
audience’s attention, interest, and suspense, rather than “reading” to
them or “defining” ratios for them.
William King believes a task force of managers from different
units of the organization, supported by staff, should be charged with
determining the 20 most important strengths and weaknesses that
should influence the future of the firm. According to King,
The development of conclusions on the 20 most important
organizational strengths and weaknesses can be, as any ex-
perienced manager knows, a difficult task, when it involves
managers representing various organizational interests and
points of view. Developing a 20-page list of strengths and
weaknesses could be accomplished relatively easily, but a list
of the 20 most important ones involves significant analysis
and negotiation. This is true because of the judgments that
are required and the impact that such a list will inevitably
have as it is used in the formulation, implementation, and
evaluation of strategies.12
Strategic planning is most successful when managers and em-
ployees from all functional areas work together to provide ideas
and information. Financial managers, for example, may need to
restrict the number of feasible options available to operations
managers, or R&D managers may develop products for which mar-
keting managers need to set higher objectives.
A key to organizational success is effective coordination and
understanding among managers from all functional business
areas. Through involvement in performing an internal strategic-
management audit, managers from different departments and
divisions of the firm come to understand the nature and effect of
decisions in other functional business areas in their firm. Knowledge
of these relationships is critical for effectively establishing objectives
and strategies. Financial ratio analysis, for example, exemplifies the
complexity of relationships among the functional areas of business.
A declining return on investment or profit margin ratio could, for
example, be the result of ineffective marketing, poor management
policies, R&D errors, or a weak MIS.
Strategists should follow the guidelines presented in this chap-
ter and throughout this book to help assure that their firm is head-
ing in the right direction for the right reasons, and rewarding the
right people for doing the right things, in the right places.
Chapter Summary Management, marketing, finance and accounting, and MIS represent the core operations of
most businesses and the sources of competitive advantages. A strategic-management audit
of a firm’s internal operations is vital to organizational health. Many companies still prefer
to be judged solely on their bottom-line performance. However, it is essential that strategists
identify and evaluate internal strengths and weaknesses to effectively formulate and choose
among alternative strategies. The IFE Matrix, coupled with the CPM, the EFE Matrix, and
clear statements of vision and mission provide the basic information needed to successfully
formulate competitive strategies. The process of performing an internal audit represents an
opportunity for managers and employees throughout the organization to participate in deter-
mining the future of the firm. Involvement in the process can energize and mobilize manag-
ers and employees.
Understanding both external and internal factors and relationships among them (see
SWOT analysis in Chapter 6) is the key to effective strategy formulation. Because both
external and internal factors continually change, strategists seek to identify and take ad-
vantage of positive changes and buffer against negative changes in a continuing effort
to gain and sustain a firm’s competitive advantage. This is the essence and challenge of
CHAPTER 4 • THE INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 147
Key Terms and Concepts activity ratios (p. 139)
business analytics (p. 140)
capacity utilization (p. 129)
capital budgeting (p. 135)
channel of distribution (p. 134)
collaborative machines (p. 129)
controlling (p. 128)
Customer Analysis (p. 131)
data mining (p. 140)
distinctive competencies (p. 125)
Distribution (p. 134)
dividend decisions (p. 136)
empirical indicators (p. 125)
financial ratio analysis (p. 136)
financing decision (p. 135)
growth ratios (p. 139)
human resource management (HRM) (p. 128)
internal audit (p. 145)
Internal Factor Evaluation (IFE) Matrix (p. 142)
investment decision (p. 135)
leverage ratios (p. 139)
liquidity ratios (p. 139)
management (p. 126)
management information system (MIS) (p. 140)
marketing (p. 131)
marketing research (p. 131)
motivating (p. 127)
organizational culture (p. 129)
organizing (p. 127)
planning (p. 127)
production/operations (p. 129)
profitability ratios (p. 139)
promotion (p. 133)
research and development (p. 132)
resource-based view (RBV) (p. 125)
synergy (p. 127)
target market analysis (p. 131)
test marketing (p. 132)
Issues for Review and Discussion
4-1. Explain why strengths are more important than
weaknesses in strategic planning.
4-2. What is bitcoin? Explain how to use bitcoin.
4-3. Do strengths always receive higher weights than
weaknesses? Explain why.
4-4. Do strengths always receive higher ratings than
weaknesses? Explain why.
4-5. Should assignment of weights down an IFE Matrix
weight column be contingent on “intensity of indus-
try rivalry”? Discuss.
4-6. Explain why it is so important to focus on a firm’s
narrow industry rather than its broader industry in
developing an IFE Matrix?
4-7. Explain the concept of factors being “actionable.”
4-8. Explain why companies develop a list of 50 to 100
internal factors before distilling the list to 20 to in-
clude in an IFE Matrix?
4-9. Describe two ways how a firm can determine from a
list of 50 to 100 internal factors the 20 most impor-
tant factors to include in an IFE Matrix.
4-10. Discuss strategic implications of a firm receiving a
total weighted IFE Matrix score of 1.5 versus 3.5.
4-11. If IFE Matrix strength factor 4 receives a rating of 4
what does that signify for the analyst? If weakness
factor 4 receives a rating of 4 what does that signify?
4-12. The primary means for gaining and sustaining com-
petitive advantages for most companies are shifting
downstream. Explain and discuss this statement.
4-13. In analyzing big data, there is a shift from focusing
largely on aggregates or averages to also focusing
on outliers because outliers oftentimes reveal (pre-
dict) critical innovations, trends, disruptions, and
revolutions on the horizon. Explain and discuss this
statement.
4-14. What are some limitations of financial ratio analysis?
4-15. Does RBV theory determine diversification targets?
Explain and discuss.
4-16. True or False: Personal selling is typically more use-
ful for industrial-goods companies, whereas advertis-
ing is typically more effective for consumer-goods
companies. Explain.
4-17. What are “collaborative machines”?
4-18. Identify some excellent online resources for finding
financial ratio information.
strategic management, and oftentimes survival of the firm hinges on this work. Adherence
to the AQCD Test regarding internal (and external) factors statements will enable excellent
“matching matrices” to be constructed (in Chapter 6).
148 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
4-19. How might elements of the marketing mix, particu-
larly “price” and “place” vary for common household
goods versus luxury products?
4-20. Is a capacity utilization rate of 50 percent good?
Why?
4-21. Explain why communication may be the most impor-
tant word in management. What do you think is the
most important word in marketing? In finance? In
accounting?
4-22. Discuss how the nature of marketing has changed in
the last few years.
4-23. Explain why it is best not to have more than 30
percent of the factors in an IFE Matrix be financial
ratios.
4-24. List three firms you are familiar with and give a dis-
tinctive competence for each firm.
4-25. Give some key reasons why it is essential to priori-
tize strengths and weaknesses.
4-26. Why may it be easier in performing an internal as-
sessment to develop a list of 80 strengths and weak-
nesses than to decide on the top 20 to use in formu-
lating strategies?
4-27. Think of an organization with which you are familiar.
List three resources of that entity that are empirical
indicators.
4-28. Think of an organization with which you are familiar.
Rate that entity’s organizational culture on the 15
example dimensions listed in Table 4-4.
4-29. If you and a partner were going to visit a foreign
country where you have never been before, how
much planning would you do ahead of time?
What benefit would you expect that planning to
provide?
4-30. Even though planning is considered the foundation
of management, why do you think it is commonly the
task that managers neglect most?
4-31. Are you more organized than the person sitting
beside you in class? If not, what problems could that
present in terms of your performance and rank in
the class? How analogous is this situation to rival
companies?
4-32. List the three ways that financial ratios should be
compared or used. Which of the three comparisons
do you feel is most important? Why?
4-33. In an IFE Matrix, would it be advantageous to list
your strengths, and then your weaknesses, in order of
decreasing “weight”? Why?
4-34. In an IFE Matrix, a critic may say there is no signifi-
cant difference between a “weight” of 0.08 and 0.06.
How would you respond? What is the mathematical
difference?
4-35. Why do many firms consistently pay out dividends?
4-36. What is marketing promotion? Name several example
forms of promotion commonly used by marketers.
4-37. Explain why prioritizing the relative importance of
strengths and weaknesses in an IFE Matrix is an
important strategic-management activity.
4-38. How can delegation of authority contribute to effec-
tive strategic management?
4-39. Explain how you would motivate managers and em-
ployees to implement a major new strategy.
4-40. Why do you think production and operations manag-
ers often are not directly involved in strategy-formu-
lation activities? Why can this be a major organiza-
tional weakness?
4-41. Give two examples of human resource management
(HRM) strengths and two examples of HRM
weaknesses of an organization with which you are
familiar.
4-42. Define, compare, and contrast weights versus ratings
in an EFE Matrix versus an IFE Matrix.
4-43. If a firm has zero debt in its capital structure, is that
always an organizational strength? Why or why not?
4-44. After conducting an internal audit, a firm discovers
a total of 100 strengths and 100 weaknesses. What
procedures then could be used to determine the most
important of these? Why is it important to reduce the
total number of key factors?
4-45. Why is it important for companies to conduct mar-
keting research? What type of information might they
discover from marketing research?
4-46. What are 10 activities that comprise human resource
management?
4-47. Explain the difference between data and information
in terms of each being useful to strategists.
4-48. What are the most important characteristics of an ef-
fective management information system?
4-49. Do you agree or disagree with the resource-based
view theorists that internal resources are more impor-
tant for a firm than external factors in achieving and
sustaining competitive advantage? Explain your and
their position.
4-50. What makes a resource valuable to a company?
4-51. List five financial ratios that may be used by your
university to monitor operations.
4-52. What is the most severe cyberthreat facing compa-
nies today, and how can firms best mitigate against
this threat?
CHAPTER 4 • THE INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 149
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
SET 1: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR COCA-COLA
EXERCISE 4A
Perform a Financial Ratio Analysis for Coca-Cola
Purpose
Financial ratio analysis is one of the best techniques for identifying and evaluating internal strengths
and weaknesses. Potential investors and current shareholders look closely at firms’ financial ratios,
making detailed comparisons to industry averages and to previous periods of time. Financial ratio
analyses provide vital input information for developing an IFE Matrix.
Instructions
Step 1 Using the resources listed in Table 4-8, find as many Coca-Cola financial ratios as possible.
Record your sources. Report your research to your classmates and your professor.
EXERCISE 4B
Construct an IFE Matrix for Coca-Cola
Purpose
This exercise will give you experience in developing an IFE Matrix. Identifying and prioritizing
factors to include in an IFE Matrix fosters communication among functional and divisional man-
agers. Preparing an IFE Matrix allows managers to articulate their concerns and thoughts regard-
ing the business condition of the firm. This results in an improved collective understanding of the
business.
Instructions
Step 1 Join with two other individuals to form a three-person team. Develop a team IFE Matrix for
Coca-Cola. Use information from Exercise 1B on page 66.
Step 2 Compare your team’s IFE Matrix to other teams’ IFE matrices. Discuss any major
differences.
Step 3 What strategies do you think would allow Coca-Cola to capitalize on its major strengths?
What strategies would allow Coca-Cola to improve on its major weaknesses?
SET 2: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR MY UNIVERSITY
EXERCISE 4C
Construct an IFE Matrix for Your College or University
Purpose
This exercise gives you the opportunity to evaluate your university’s major strengths and weaknesses.
As will become clearer in the next chapter, an organization’s strategies are largely based on striving to
take advantage of strengths and improving on weaknesses.
Instructions
Step 1 Join with two other individuals to form a three-person team. Develop a team IFE Matrix for
your university.
Step 2 What was your team’s total weighted score?
Step 3 Compare your team’s IFE Matrix to other teams’ IFE matrices. Discuss any major
differences.
Step 4 What strategies do you think would allow your university to capitalize on its major strengths?
What strategies would allow your university to improve on its major weaknesses?
150 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
SET 3: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR MYSELF
EXERCISE 4D
Construct an IFE Matrix for Yourself
Purpose
This exercise gives you the opportunity to evaluate your own personal strengths and weaknesses.
As will become clearer in the next chapter, an organization’s strategies are largely based on striving
to take advantage of strengths and improving on weaknesses. Similarly, in planning for your career,
you should formulate and implement personal strategies based on capitalizing on your strengths and
improving on your weaknesses.
Instructions
Step 1 Develop an IFE Matrix for yourself. As you assign weights, consider the relative importance
of each factor for success in your desired career.
Step 2 What was your team’s total weighted score? Compare your total weighted score to the aver-
age score of 2.5.
Step 3 What strategies might enable you to capitalize on your major strengths? What strategies
might help you improve on your major weaknesses?
SET 4: INDIVIDUAL VERSUS GROUP STRATEGIC PLANNING
EXERCISE 4E
What Internal Functional Areas Are Most Important to Examine in Strategic Planning?
Purpose
A prioritized list of internal factors is needed for effective strategic planning. Often, the process en-
tails all managers individually ranking the factors identified, from 1 (most important) to 20 (least
important). Prioritization is absolutely essential in strategic planning because no organization can do
everything that would benefit the firm; tough choices among good choices have to be made.
Internal functional areas that yield strengths/weaknesses can be divided into five broad categories
or areas: (1) management, (2) marketing, (3) finance, (4) accounting, and (5) MIS. For some compa-
nies or organizations at various times, some areas are more important than others. This exercise re-
veals the authors’ ranking of the relative importance of six functional areas for inclusion in a strategic
planning internal assessment.
The purpose of this exercise is to examine more closely the functional areas of business. In ad-
dition, the purpose of this exercise is to examine whether individual decision making is better than
group decision making. Academic research suggests that groups make better decisions than individu-
als about 80 percent of the time.
Instructions
Rank five internal areas as to their relative importance (1 = most important, 5 = least important) in
doing strategic planning. First, rank the areas as an individual. Then, rank the areas as a group of
three. Thus, determine what person(s) and what group(s) here today can come closest to the expert
ranking. This exercise enables examination of the relative effectiveness of individual versus group
decision making in strategic planning.
Steps
1. Fill in Column 1 in Table 4-12 to reveal your individual ranking of the relative importance of
the six areas (1 = most important, 2 = next most important, etc.). For example, if you feel man-
agement is the third-most important functional area in doing strategic planning, then enter a 3 in
Table 4-12 in Column 1 beside Management.
2. Fill in Column 2 in Table 4-12 to reveal your group’s ranking of the relative importance of the
five areas (1 = most important, 2 = next most important, etc.).
3. Fill in Column 3 in Table 4-12 to reveal the expert’s ranking of the relative importance of the
five functional areas.
CHAPTER 4 • THE INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 151
4. Fill in Column 4 in Table 4- 12 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 1 and Column
3 to reveal how well you performed as an individual in this exercise. (Note: Absolute difference
disregards negative numbers.)
5. Fill in Column 5 in Table 4- 12 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 2 and Column
3 to reveal how well your group performed in this exercise.
6. Sum Column 4. Sum Column 5.
7. Compare the Column 4 sum with the Column 5 sum. If your Column 4 sum is less than your
Column 5 sum, then you performed better as an individual than as a group. Normally, group
decision making is superior to individual decision making, so if you did better than your group,
you did excellent.
8. The Individual Winner(s): The individual(s) with the lowest Column 4 sum is the WINNER.
9. The Group Winners(s): The group(s) with the lowest Column 5 score is the WINNER.
TABLE 4- 12 Internal Functional Area Analysis: Comparing Individual versus Group Decision Making
Internal Functional Areas Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5
1. Management
2. Marketing
3. Finance
4. Accounting
5. MIS
Sums
MINI-CASE ON PROCTER & GAMBLE (P&G) COMPANY
WHAT COMPANY IS BEST MANAGED IN THE UNITED STATES? The answer could be P&G. Ratings by the Drucker Institute on overall corporate effectiveness show
that P&G is certainly among the most effectively managed firms in the United States. P&G CEO,
David Taylor, explains that, “Every day P&G people work to serve consumers with superior brands
and reward shareholders with balanced, sustainable long-term growth and value creation. This rec-
ognition is further validation that we are on the right track.”
The Drucker Institute analyzes performance of companies across the functional areas of busi-
ness, including more than 35 metrics, such as market-share data, patents, and employee ratings.
Information is collected and analyzed to determine how well companies are doing according to
Drucker’s core principles: customer satisfaction, financial strength, employee development, inno-
vation, and corporate social responsibility. P&G received exceptionally high scores on innovation,
social responsibility, and financial strength.
P&G competes in the consumer-products industry. The company’s finance chief, Jon Moeller,
explains that P&G wants to focus on product categories that are used daily, such as toothpaste and
soap, so of late has narrowed its product mix, disposing of underperforming brands and cutting
back from more than 100 brands to around 65. Simultaneously, P&G has cut over 20,000 jobs and
trimmed nearly $10 billion in costs. P&G puts its cash to good use and is considered a “dividend
king” by some experts. P&G Chief Information Officer, Javier Polit, explained that “What was pre-
viously cost-prohibitive is now cost-effective with the use of the cloud. We’re about to forecast now
in ways we couldn’t before. We’ve seen improvements in regard to the quantity of raw materials we
buy, and the costs associated with ship and restock.”
M id
o se
m se
m /1
2 3 R
F
152 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
As stated by CEO David Taylor, “it is a combination of a few key capabilities that determine
whether any company will be successful, especially “superior products that delight customers,” “ex-
emplary technology,” and what underpins it all is “acquiring the best people.”
Questions
1. Consider the following two-dimensional matrix with weights on the y -axis and ratings on the
x -axis as given in Figure 4- 4 . What are example strengths and weaknesses that could possibly
characterize P&G in the four corners of the matrix? Develop a hypothetical strength and weak-
ness for P&G that could be positioned in each of the four corners of the matrix. Give a support-
ing rationale for each factor. Which corner of the matrix do you think characterizes factors most
commonly in an IFE Matrix? Why? Which corner of the matrix do you think characterizes fac-
tors least commonly in an IFE Matrix? Why? What could you say about the middle of the matrix
in terms of factors commonly included in an IFE Matrix?
Strength 1
Weakness 1
Strength 2
Weakness 2
Strength 3
Weakness 3
RATINGS
High
High
Low
Low
W E
IG H
T S
Middle
Strength 4
Weakness 4
FIGURE 4- 4
A Weights-by-Ratings Matrix to Exemplify IFE Matrix Logic
Note: A purpose of this mini-case is to give students practice thinking about when, in developing an IFE Matrix, could
a particular factor receive the following weights and ratings:
1. a low weight and high rating
2. a high weight and high rating
3. a low weight and low rating
4. a high weight and low rating
Source: Company documents and a variety of sources including Sara Castellanos, “Tech Innovation Isn’t Just for Tech
Firms,” Wall Street Journal, (December 6, 2017): R6, and Vanessa Fuhrmans and Yoree Koh, “The Most Effectively
Managed U.S. Companies and How They Got That Way,” Wall Street Journal , (December 6, 2017): R1–R2.
Web Resources 1. See Table 4- 8 on page 138.
Current Readings Arora, Ashish, Sharon Belenzon, and Andrea Patacconi. “The
Decline of Science in Corporate R&D.” Strategic Manage-
ment Journal 39, Issue 1 (January 2018): 3–32. Bridoux, Flore, Régis Coeurderoy, and Rodolphe Durand.
“Heterogeneous Social Motives and Interactions: The Three Predictable Paths of Capability Development.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 9 (September 2017): 1755–1773.
Chatain, Oliver and Denisa Mindruta. “Estimating Value Creation from Revealed Preferences: Application to Value- based Strategies.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 10 (October 2017): 1964–1985.
David, Fred R., Meredith E. David, and Forest R. David. “The Integration of Marketing Concepts in Strategic Management Courses: An Empirical Analysis.” SAM Advanced Management Journal 82, no. 1 (Winter 2017): 26–47.
David, Fred R., Meredith E. David, and Forest R. David. “How Important Is Finance Coverage in Strategic Management? A Content Analysis of Textbooks.” International Journal of Business, Marketing, and Decision Sciences (IJBMDS) 4, no. 1 (Winter 2016): 64–78.
David, Meredith E. and Fred R. David. “Are Key Marketing Topics Adequately Covered in Strategic Management?” Journal of Strategic Marketing 24, (March 2016): 1–13.
Fleit, Caren. “The Evolution of the CMO.” Harvard Business Review 95, no. 4 (July–August 2017): 60.
Furr, Nathan and Rahul Kapoor. “Capabilities, Technologies, and Firm Exit During Industry Shakeout: Evidence from the Global Solar Photovoltaic Industry.” Strategic Management Journal 39, no. 1 (January 2018): 33–61.
Grigoriou, Konstantinos and Frank T. Rothaermel. “Organizing for Knowledge Generation: Internal Knowledge Networks and the Contingent Effect of External Knowledge Sourcing.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 2 (February 2017): 395–414.
Hoisl, Karin, Marc Gruber, and Annamaria Conti. “R&D Team Diversity and Performance in Hypercompetitive Environments.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 7 (July 2017): 1455–1477.
Lee, Joon Mahn, Byoung-Hyoun Hwang, and Hailiang Chen. “Are Founder CEOs More Overconfident than Professional CEOs? Evidence from S&P 1500 Companies.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 3 (March 2017): 751–769.
Menon, Anoop R. and Dennis A. Yao. “Elevating Repositioning Costs: Strategy Dynamics and Competitive Interactions.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 10 (October 2017): 1953–1963.
Morris, Shad S., Sharon A. Alvarez, Jay B. Barney, and Janice C. Mollo. “Firm-Specific Human Capital Investments as a Signal of General Value: Revisiting Assumptions about Human Capital and How It Is Managed.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no, 4 (April 2017): 912–919.
Quigley, Timothy J., Craig Crossland, and Robert J. Campbell. “Shareholder Perceptions of the Changing Impact of CEOs: Market Reactions to Unexpected CEO Deaths, 1950–2009.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 4 (April 2017): 939–949.
Selladurai, Raj and Carraher, Shawn. Servant Leadership: Research and Practice, 1st edition, Business Science Reference, 2014, 406 pages.
Theeke, Matt and Hun Lee. “Multimarket Contact and Rivalry over Knowledge-Based Resources.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 12, (December 2017): 2508–2531.
Vanacker, Tom, Veroniek Collewaert, and Shaker A. Zahra. “Slack Resources, Firm Performance, and the Institutional Context: Evidence from Privately Held European Firms.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 6 (June 2017): 1305–1326.
Endnotes 1. Robert Grant, “The Resource-Based Theory of Competi-
tive Advantage: Implications for Strategy Formulation,”
California Management Review (Spring 1991): 116.
2. Adam Smith, The Wealth of Nations (New York: Modern
Library, 1937), 3–4.
3. Peter Drucker, Management Tasks, Responsibilities, and
Practice (New York: Harper & Row, 1973), 463.
4. Timothy Aeppel, “Robots Work Their Way into Small
Factories,” Wall Street Journal (September 18, 2004): B1.
5. Edgar Schein, Organizational Culture and Leadership
(San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, 1985), 9.
6. Quoted in Robert Waterman, Jr., “The Renewal Factor,”
BusinessWeek (September 14, 1987): 108.
7. ____http://www.nasdaq.com/article/the-current-and-
future-trends-of-digital-advertising-cm669129
8. J. Van Horne, Financial Management and Policy (Upper
Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1974): 10.
9. G. George, M. Haas, and A. Pentland, “Big Data and
Management,” Academy of Management Journal 52, no. 2
(April 2014): 321–326. See also P. Barlas, “Data Analytics
Gets in the Sports Game,” Investor’s Business Daily (July
11, 2014): A1
10. Vanessa Fuhrmans, “CEOs Make Protecting Data a Top
Goal,” Wall Street Journal (October 13, 2017): B4.
11. Stephen Schmidt and Scott Smith, “Where the Cyberthreats
Are,” Wall Street Journal (December 19, 2017): R1.
12. Reprinted by permission of the publisher from “Integrating
Strength–Weakness Analysis into Strategic Planning,” by
William King, Journal of Business Research 2, no. 4: 481.
Copyright 1983 by Elsevier Science Publishing Co., Inc.
CHAPTER 4 • THE INTERNAL ASSESSMENT 153
154
5
Strategy Formulation
Feedback Loop
Strategy Implementation
Strategy Evaluation
Chapter 10: Business Ethics, Environmental Sustainability, and Social Responsibility
Chapter 11: Global and International Issues
Strategy Evaluation
and Governance Chapter 9
Implementing Strategies:
Finance and Accounting
Issues Chapter 8
Implementing Strategies:
Management and Marketing
Issues Chapter 7
Business Vision and
Mission Chapter 2
Strategies in Action Chapter 5
Strategy Analysis and
Choice Chapter 6
The Internal
Assessment Chapter 4
The External Assessment Chapter 3
FIGURE 5- 1
The Comprehensive, Integrative Strategic-Management Model
Source: Fred R. David, “How Companies Define Their Mission,” Long Range Planning 22, no. 1 (February 1989): 91. See also Anik Ratnaningsih, Nadjadji Anwar, Patdono Suwignjo, and Putu Artama Wiguna, “Balance Scorecard of David’s Strategic Modeling at Industrial Business for National Construction Contractor of Indonesia,” Journal of Mathematics and Technology , no. 4 (October 2010): 20.
155
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following:
5- 1. Identify and discuss 5 characteristics and 10 benefits of clear objectives.
5- 2. Define and give an example of 11 types of strategies.
5- 3. Identify and discuss the three types of “Integration Strategies.”
5- 4. Give specific guidelines when market penetration, market development, and product development are especially effective strategies.
5- 5. Explain when diversification is an effective business strategy.
5- 6. List guidelines for when retrenchment, divestiture, and liquidation are especially effec- tive strategies.
5- 7. Explain value chain analysis and benchmarking in strategic management.
5- 8. Identify and discuss Porter’s two generic strategies: cost leadership and differentiation.
5- 9. Compare and contrast when companies should “build, borrow, or buy” as key means for achieving strategies.
5- 10. Discuss first-mover advantages and disadvantages.
5- 11. Explain how strategic planning differs in for-profit, not-for-profit, and small firms.
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
The following exercises are found at the end of this chapter:
SET 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 5A: Develop Hypothetical Coca-Cola Company Strategies
EXERCISE 5B: Should Coca-Cola Build, Borrow, or Buy in 2020–2021?
SET 2: Strategic Planning for My University
EXERCISE 5C: Develop Alternative Strategies for Your University
SET 3: Strategic Planning for Myself
EXERCISE 5D: The Key to Personal Strategic Planning: Simultaneously Build and Borrow
SET 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
EXERCISE 5E: What Is the Best Mix of Strategies for Coca-Cola Company?
Strategies in Action
MyLab Management
Improve Your Grade!
If your instructor is using MyLab Management, visit www.pearson.com/mylab/management
for videos, simulations, and writing exercises.
156 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
H undreds of companies today have embraced strategic planning in their quest for higher
revenues and profits. Kent Nelson, former chair and CEO of UPS, explains why his com-
pany created a new strategic-planning department: “Because we’re making bigger bets
on investments in technology, we can’t afford to spend a whole lot of money in one direction and
then find out five years later it was the wrong direction.”1 As illustrated in Figure 5-1, long-term
objectives are needed before strategies can be generated, evaluated, and selected.
This chapter brings strategic management to life with many contemporary examples.
Different types of strategies are defined and exemplified, including Michael Porter’s generic
strategies: cost leadership and differentiation. Guidelines are presented for determining when
each strategy is most appropriate to pursue. The integral importance of value chain analysis and
benchmarking in strategic planning is revealed. An overview of strategic management in non-
profit organizations, governmental agencies, and small firms is provided. As showcased next,
Tim Cook is arguably the best strategist on the planet; he has led Apple to be the most admired
company in the world. Read to see why Cook and Apple are “insanely great.”
Long-Term Objectives Long-term objectives represent the results expected from pursuing certain strategies. Strategies
represent the actions to be taken to accomplish long-term objectives. The time frame for objec-
tives and strategies should be consistent, usually from 2 to 5 years. Without long-term objectives,
an organization would drift aimlessly toward some unknown end or become too focused on
short-term fads and stray away from the firm’s mission.
It is hard to imagine an organization or an individual being successful without clear objec-
tives. You probably have worked hard the last few years striving to achieve an objective to gradu-
ate with a business degree. Success rarely occurs by accident; rather, it is the result of hard work
directed toward achieving certain objectives.
Characteristics and Benefits of Objectives
Objectives should be quantitative, understandable, challenging, compatible (consistent vertically
and horizontally in a chain of command), and obtainable. Each objective should also be associ-
ated with a timeline. Objectives are commonly stated in terms such as growth in assets, growth
LO 5.1
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED
Tim Cook, CEO of Apple, Inc. The editor of Businessweek, Megan Murphy, recently asked the CEO of
Apple, Tim Cook, what he thought his legacy at Apple would be. Tim re-
sponded: “To be honest I don’t think about it; I think about doing stuff.”
Cook went on to explain how and why Apple’s founder, Steve Jobs,
rather than himself, should be the person revered forever as Apple’s
supreme strategist extraordinaire. Cook told Megan that Apple in the
past, present, and future is all about its founder Jobs. Tim explained that
Job’s “DNA” or “ethos” is and always will be Apple’s “Constitution” or
guiding set of principles. According to Cook, Jobs’s ethos ingrained into
Apple forever include the following items (paraphrased):
1. Pay acute attention to detail.
2. Keep it simple and genuinely care.
3. Focus on the user and user experience.
4. Focus on building the best.
5. Follow the motto “good isn’t good enough”; every product and
process must be, as Jobs’s often said, “insanely great.”
6. Apple should own the proprietary technology it uses to control
its own quality of product and user experience.
7. Walk away and be honest with yourself when you do something
wrong.
8. Never get married to your position or pride.
9. Invest for the long-term rather than striving to be the first to
market with a product.
Source: Based on Megan Murphy, “Tim Cook,” Bloomberg Businessweek, June
19, 2017, pp. 52–56.
Il d o g es
to /S
h u tt
er st
o ck
CHAPTER 5 • STRATEGIES IN ACTION 157
in sales, profitability, market share, degree and nature of diversification, degree and nature of
vertical integration, earnings per share, and social responsibility. (Note: Do not emulate many
Annual Reports that print really vague objectives for the firm, such as Macy’s Annual Report that
states as objectives “to grow sales profitably” and “to improve return on invested capital.” Such
statements are useless in strategic planning.
Clearly established objectives offer many benefits. They provide direction, allow synergy, assist
in evaluation, establish priorities, reduce uncertainty, minimize conflicts, stimulate exertion, and aid
in both the allocation of resources and the design of jobs. Objectives provide a basis for consistent
decision making by managers whose values and attitudes differ. Objectives serve as standards by
which individuals, groups, departments, divisions, and entire organizations can be evaluated.
Table 5-1 and Table 5-2 summarize the desired characteristics and benefits, respectively, of
having clear objectives.
TABLE 5-1 Five Characteristics of Objectives
1. Quantitative: measurable
2. Understandable: clear
3. Challenging: achievable
4. Compatible: consistent vertically and horizontally in a chain of command
5. Obtainable: realistic
TABLE 5-2 10 Benefits of Having Clear Objectives
1. Provide direction by revealing expectations.
2. Allow synergy.
3. Assist in evaluation by serving as standards.
4. Establish priorities.
5. Reduce uncertainty.
6. Minimize conflicts.
7. Stimulate exertion.
8. Aid in allocation of resources.
9. Aid in design of jobs.
10. Provide basis for consistent decision making.
Financial versus Strategic Objectives
Two types of objectives are especially common in organizations: financial and strategic objec-
tives. Financial objectives include those associated with growth in revenues, growth in earn-
ings, higher dividends, larger profit margins, greater return on investment, higher earnings per
share, a rising stock price, improved cash flow, and all other objectives relating to the financial
position of the firm, whereas strategic objectives focus on goals for obtaining a competitive
advantage, including factors such as a larger market share, quicker on-time delivery than rivals,
lower costs than rivals, higher product quality than rivals, wider geographic coverage than rivals,
achieving technological leadership, and consistently getting new or improved products to mar-
ket ahead of rivals.
Often there is a trade-off between financial and strategic objectives such that crucial deci-
sions have to be made. For example, a firm can do certain activities to maximize short-term
financial objectives that would harm long-term strategic objectives. To improve financial posi-
tion in the short run through higher prices may, for example, jeopardize long-term market share.
The dangers associated with trading off long-term strategic objectives with near-term bottom-
line performance are especially severe if competitors relentlessly pursue increased market share
at the expense of short-term profitability. Amazon, for example, operated for decades without
concern for profits, instead concentrating on gaining market share. There are other trade-offs
between financial and strategic objectives, related to riskiness of actions, concern for business
ethics, the need to preserve the natural environment, and social responsibility issues. Both fi-
nancial and strategic objectives should include annual and long-term performance targets.
158 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Ultimately, the best way to sustain competitive advantage is to relentlessly pursue strategic ob-
jectives that strengthen a firm’s business position over rivals.
Avoid Managing by Crisis, Hope, Extrapolation, and Mystery (CHEM)
Derek Bok, former President of Harvard University, once said, “If you think education is expen-
sive, try ignorance.” The idea behind this saying also applies to establishing objectives because
strategists should avoid managing by CHEM.
• Managing By Crisis—Based on the belief that the true measure of a really good strate-
gist is the ability to solve problems. Because there are plenty of crises and problems to go
around for every person and organization, strategists ought to bring their time and creative
energy to bear on solving the most pressing problems of the day. Managing by crisis is
actually a form of reacting, letting events dictate the what and when of management
decisions. • Managing By Hope—Based on the fact that the future is laden with great uncertainty and
that if we try and do not succeed, then we hope our second (or third) attempt will suc-
ceed. Decisions are predicated on the hope that they will work and that good times are just
around the corner, especially if luck and good fortune are on our side. • Managing By Extrapolation—Adheres to the principle “If it ain’t broke, don’t fix it.” The
idea is to keep on doing the same things in the same ways because things are going well. • Managing By Mystery—Built on the idea that there is no general plan for which way to go and
what to do; just do the best you can to accomplish what you think should be done. In short, “Do
your own thing, the best way you know how” (sometimes referred to as the mystery approach
to decision making because subordinates are left to figure out what is happening and why).2
Types of Strategies Defined and exemplified in Table 5-3, alternative strategies that an enterprise could pursue can
be categorized into 11 actions: forward integration, backward integration, horizontal integration,
market penetration, market development, product development, related diversification, unrelated
diversification, retrenchment, divestiture, and liquidation. Each alternative strategy has countless
variations. For example, market penetration can include adding salespersons, increasing adver-
tising expenditures, couponing, and using similar actions to increase market share in a given
geographic area. Note for a particular company the strategy is very specific; be specific to the
extent possible in all aspects of strategic planning.
Most organizations simultaneously pursue a combination of two or more strategies, but a
combination strategy can be exceptionally risky if carried too far. No organization can afford to
pursue all the strategies that might benefit the firm; priorities must be established. Difficult deci-
sions must be made. Organizations, like individuals, have limited resources. Both organizations
and individuals must choose among alternative strategies and avoid excessive indebtedness.
LO 5.2
TABLE 5-3 Alternative Strategies Defined and Recent Examples Given
Strategy Definition Example
Forward Integration Gaining ownership or increased con-
trol over distributors or retailers
Nike opening 100 outlet stores and sell-
ing 30% more products on its website
Backward Integration Seeking ownership or increased con-
trol over suppliers
Boeing building 80% of its wing flap
motors in-house
Horizontal Integration Seeking ownership or increased con-
trol over competitors Nestlé purchasing Sweet Earth Foods
Market Penetration Seeking increased market share for
present products in present markets
through greater marketing
Cristiano Ronaldo and LeBron James
sign lifetime endorsement deal with
Nike
Market Development Introducing present products into
new geographic area
Publix building 20 new supermarkets
in North and South Carolina
Product Development Seeking increased sales by improv-
ing present products or developing
new ones
Ford shifting one-third of its sched-
uled R&D budget on gas/diesel en-
gines to electric engines
CHAPTER 5 • STRATEGIES IN ACTION 159
Strategic planning thus involves “choices that risk resources, and trade-offs that sacrifice
opportunity.” In other words, if you have a strategy to go north, then you must buy snowshoes
and warm jackets (spend resources) and forgo the opportunity of “faster population growth in
southern states.” You cannot have a strategy to go north and then take a step east, south, or west
“just to be on the safe side.” Strategy is all about “what to do” and “what not to do.”
Firms spend resources and focus on a finite number of opportunities in pursuing strategies
to achieve an uncertain outcome in the future. Strategic planning is much more than a roll of the
dice; it is an educated wager based on predictions and hypotheses that are continually tested and
refined by knowledge, research, experience, and learning. Survival of the firm often hinges on an
excellent strategic plan.3
Organizations cannot excel in multiple different strategic pursuits because resources and
talents get spread thin and competitors gain advantage. In large, diversified companies, a com-
bination strategy is commonly employed when different divisions pursue different strategies.
Organizations struggling to survive may simultaneously employ a combination of several defen-
sive strategies, such as divestiture and retrenchment.
Levels of Strategies
Strategy making is not just a task for top executives. Middle- and lower-level managers also must be
involved in the strategic-planning process to the extent possible. In large firms, there are actually four
levels of strategies: corporate, divisional, functional, and operational—as illustrated in Figure 5-2.
However, in small firms, there are three levels of strategies: company, functional, and operational.
Related Diversification Adding new but related products Walmart acquired Jet.com for
$3.3 billion
Unrelated Diversification Adding new, unrelated products CVS pharmacy acquiring Aetna
insurance
Retrenchment Regrouping through cost and asset
reduction to reverse declining sales
and profit
Eli Lilly laying off 3,500 employees
Divestiture Selling a division or part of an
organization
Toshiba aims to sell its memory-chip
unit to Bain Capital
Liquidation Selling all of a company’s assets, in
parts, for their tangible worth
Ringling Bros. and Barnum & Bailey
Circus liquidated (last performance
was on May 21, 2017)
Corporate Level—chief
executive officer
Divisional Level—division president or executive
vice president
Functional Level—finance, marketing, R&D, manufacturing, information systems,
and human resource managers
Operational Level—plant managers, sales managers, production and department managers
Large Company
Company Level—owner or president
Functional Level— finance, marketing, R&D,
manufacturing, information systems, and human resource managers
Operational Level—plant managers, sales managers, production and department managers
Small Company
FIGURE 5-2
Levels of Strategies with Persons Most Responsible
160 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
The persons primarily responsible for having effective strategies at the various levels
include the CEO at the corporate level; the president of segments at the divisional level;
the chief finance officer (CFO), chief information officer (CIO), human resource manager
(HRM), chief marketing officer (CMO), other executives at the functional level, and the
plant manager, regional sales manager, and so on at the operational level. It is important that
all managers at all levels participate and understand the firm’s strategic plan to help ensure
coordination, facilitation, and commitment, while avoiding inconsistency, inefficiency, and
miscommunication.
Long-term objectives are needed at the corporate, divisional, functional, and opera-
tional levels of an organization. They are an important measure of managerial performance.
Bonuses or merit pay for managers today should be based to a greater extent on long-term
objectives and strategies. An example framework for relating objectives to performance
evaluation is provided in Table 5-4. A particular organization could tailor these guidelines
to meet their own needs, but incentives should be attached to both long-term and annual
objectives.
Integration Strategies Forward integration and backward integration are sometimes collectively referred to as verti-
cal integration. Vertical integration strategies allow a firm to gain control over distributors
and suppliers, whereas horizontal integration refers to gaining ownership or control over
competitors. Vertical and horizontal actions by firms are broadly referred to as integration
strategies.
Historically, vertical integration strategies have been difficult to implement because of
the firm operating in businesses out of its core competency, and because large fixed costs are
generally associated with such strategies. For example, if Coke wished to vertically integrate,
it could acquire sugar farms to gain control over its suppliers and open its own brick-and-
mortar stores to gain control of distributors. Both would be excessively costly and divert
Coke from what it does best: producing beverage products. Although the risk of depending
on suppliers and distributors may be high, owning these businesses is often associated with
even greater risks. Viable options to vertical integration are joint ventures and strategic alli-
ances discussed later in the chapter. Opportunity costs associated with the resources used for
vertical integration usually could be more effectively deployed to other endeavors.
Forward Integration
Forward integration involves gaining ownership or increased control over distributors or retail-
ers as a means of moving closer to the end customer and cutting out the middleman. Increasing
numbers of manufacturers (suppliers) are pursuing forward integration to market the products
they produce. For example, Nike sells millions of shoes and shirts in a variety of retail stores rang-
ing from Foot Locker to J. C. Penney, but the company is rapidly boosting its direct- to-consumer
business, bypassing, and in some cases infuriating, retail stores. Nike’s forward- integration
LO 5.3
TABLE 5-4 Varying Performance Measures By Organizational Level
Organizational-Level Basis for Annual Bonus or Merit Pay
Corporate: overall firm 75% based on long-term objectives
25% based on annual objectives
Divisional such as by product or region 50% based on long-term objectives
50% based on annual objectives
Functional such as marketing and finance 25% based on long-term objectives
75% based on annual objectives
Operational such as manufacturing plants or stores 25% based on long-term objectives
75% based on annual objectives
CHAPTER 5 • STRATEGIES IN ACTION 161
strategy has hundreds of retail stores upset; sales on the Nike.com website recently rose 50 per-
cent. By 2020, Nike projects that its direct sales to consumers will exceed $16 billion annually
and account for one-third of the company’s revenue. At the three largest publicly traded U.S.
athletic retailers, Finish Line, Foot Locker, and Dick’s Sporting Goods, the percentage of their
merchandise that comes from Nike is 73, 73, and 19 percent, respectively, so these firms must
adapt or face disaster.
Forward integration is an increasingly popular strategy among U.S.-based restaurants.
Scores of mainstream restaurant chains now use or are developing online-ordering apps that often
entail delivery of food to customers. For example, Panera Bread has installed online- ordering
and delivery in about 50 percent of its restaurants. Panera employs more than 10,000 of its own
delivery drivers. Similarly, Dunkin’ Brands is now delivering doughnuts and coffee in Dallas,
Atlanta, Chicago, Los Angeles, and numerous other cities. Chipotle Mexican Grill has instituted
a second food assembly line in its restaurants to accommodate delivery and online orders. Taco
Bell now takes online orders and delivers in more than 50 markets through nearly 1,000 Taco
Bell restaurants. Online ordering and delivery of restaurant food in general is expected to soon
surpass pizzas.
An effective means of implementing forward integration is franchising. Approximately
2,000 companies in about 50 different industries in the United States use franchising to distrib-
ute their products or services. Businesses can expand rapidly by franchising because costs and
opportunities are spread among many individuals. Total sales by franchises in the United States
exceed $1 trillion annually. There are about 800,000 franchise businesses in the U.S. Subway
is today in turmoil as the 100 percent franchised firm has mostly franchisees that disagree with
top executives on the overall vision and mission of the firm. Year 2017 was the fourth consecu-
tive year of declining sales at Subway. Top executives want to continue adding stores to the over
25,000 in the U.S., but franchisees cannot take further cannibalization caused by new Subways
opening nearby. Instead, franchisees want more control over their supplier choices, more ad-
vertising from corporate, more flexibility on what promotions to participate in, more R&D to
enhance a menu that has not changed much in a decade, and permission to add drive-through
services.
The following six guidelines indicate when forward integration may be an especially effec-
tive strategy:4
1. An organization’s present distributors are especially expensive, unreliable, or incapable of
meeting the firm’s distribution needs.
2. The availability of quality distributors is so limited a rival could potentially sign an exclu-
sive contract, thus locking down a competitive advantage.
3. An organization competes in an industry that is growing and is expected to continue to
grow markedly; this is a factor because forward integration reduces an organization’s abil-
ity to diversify if its basic industry falters.
4. An organization has both the capital and human resources needed to manage the new busi-
ness of distributing its own products.
5. The advantages of stable production are particularly high; this is a consideration because
an organization can increase the predictability of the demand for its output through forward
integration.
6. Present distributors or retailers have high-profit margins; this situation suggests that a
company could profitably distribute its own products and price them more competitively
by integrating forward.
Backward Integration
Backward integration is a strategy of seeking ownership or increased control of a firm’s sup-
pliers. This strategy can be especially appropriate when a firm’s current suppliers are unreliable,
too costly, or cannot meet the firm’s needs. Starbucks recently purchased its first coffee farm—a
600-acre property in Costa Rica. This backward integration strategy was used primarily to de-
velop new coffee varieties and to test methods to combat a fungal disease known as coffee rust
that plagues the industry. Manufacturers, as well as retailers, purchase needed materials from
suppliers.
162 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Consolidation in the aircraft parts industry has resulted in increased prices of these parts,
which has prompted Boeing and Airbus to begin producing many aircraft parts internally. Boeing
is constructing a plant in England that will produce motors that aid in the movement of wing
flaps. Airbus CEO Fabrice Bregier commented on how the firm continually reviews “make-or-
buy” decisions on most of its components used in aircraft construction.
Some industries, such as automotive and aluminum producers, are reducing their histori-
cal pursuit of backward integration; this practice is called de-integration. Instead of owning
their suppliers, companies negotiate with outside suppliers. Ford and Chrysler buy more than
half of their component parts from outside suppliers such as TRW, Eaton, General Electric
(GE), and Johnson Controls. This makes sense in industries that have global sources of sup-
ply. Companies today shop around, play one seller against another, and go with the best deal.
Global competition is also spurring firms to reduce their number of suppliers and to demand
higher levels of service and quality from those they keep. Although traditionally relying on
many suppliers to ensure uninterrupted supplies and low prices, many U.S. firms now are
following the lead of Japanese firms, which have far fewer suppliers and closer, long-term
relationships with those few. “Keeping track of so many suppliers is onerous,” said Mark
Shimelonis, formerly of Xerox.
Four major U.S. hospital systems recently launched a nonprofit company to produce ge-
neric drugs in order to offset skyrocketing prices of drugs. The four firms are Intermountain
Healthcare, Ascension, SSM Health, and Trinity Health; these four organizations own hundreds
of hospitals.
Seven guidelines when backward integration may be an especially effective strategy are:5
1. An organization’s present suppliers are especially expensive, unreliable, or incapable of
meeting the firm’s needs for parts, components, assemblies, or raw materials.
2. The number of suppliers is small and the number of competitors is large.
3. An organization competes in an industry that is growing rapidly; this is a factor because
integrative-type strategies (forward, backward, and horizontal) reduce an organization’s
ability to diversify in a declining industry.
4. An organization has both capital and human resources to manage the new business of sup-
plying its own raw materials.
5. The advantages of stable prices of raw materials are of upmost importance.
6. Present suppliers have high-profit margins, which suggest that the business of supplying
products or services in a given industry is a worthwhile venture.
7. Whenever various resources may be needed quickly.
Horizontal Integration
Horizontal integration is a strategy aimed at gaining control over a firm’s competitors; this is
arguably the most common growth strategy. Thousands of mergers, acquisitions, and takeovers
among competitors are consummated annually and most aim for increased economies of scale,
enhanced transfer of resources and competencies, reduced competition, and fewer price wars.
Kenneth Davidson makes the following observation about horizontal integration:
The trend towards horizontal integration seems to reflect strategists’ misgivings about their
ability to operate many unrelated businesses. Mergers between direct competitors are more
likely to create efficiencies than mergers between unrelated businesses, both because there
is a greater potential for eliminating duplicate facilities and because the management of the
acquiring firm is more likely to understand the business of the target.6
Walgreens Boot Alliance recently purchased two thousand Rite Aid stores; the remaining
two thousand Rite Aid stores are being acquired by Albertsons Companies LLC. Horizontal inte-
gration is often met with legal antitrust challenges as the one displayed with Walgreens and Rite
Aid, which took the Federal Trade Commission 18 months before giving final approval of the
deal.
The largest merger of homebuilders in 10 years occurred in 2018 when Lennar Corp. ac-
quired CalAtlantic Group to create a combined company with revenues more than $17 billion
annually. The next largest homebuilders in the United States in rank order are D. R. Horton,
PulteGroup, NVR, Toll Brothers, and KB Home.
CHAPTER 5 • STRATEGIES IN ACTION 163
Britain’s Cineworld Group PLC in 2018 acquired its U.S. counterpart Regal Entertainment
Group for $3.6 billion, creating the world’s second-largest movie cinema operator. The com-
bined company now has more than 9,000 movie screens. The largest firm in the industry is AMC
Entertainment Holdings that is part of China’s Dalian Wanda Group. Cinemark Holdings is the
third-largest cinema chain in the United States.
The following six guidelines indicate when horizontal integration may be an especially ef-
fective strategy:7
1. An organization can gain monopolistic characteristics in a particular area or region with-
out being challenged by the federal government for “tending substantially” to reduce
competition.
2. An organization competes in a growing industry.
3. Increased economies of scale provide major competitive advantages.
4. An organization has both the capital and human talent needed to successfully manage an
expanded organization.
5. When competitors are faltering and can be acquired at a discount.
6. When a firm desires to enter a new geographic market quickly.
Intensive Strategies Market penetration, market development, and product development are sometimes referred to as
intensive strategies because they require intensive efforts if a firm’s competitive position with
existing products is to improve. Intensive strategies are normally good options because they
involve a firm sticking to what it does best with the only variation being (1) redoubling your
effort (market penetration), (2) taking what it does best on the “road” (market development), or
(3) improving on what it does best (product development). In contrast, forward and backward
integration and diversification strategies take firms away from their core products, services, or
competencies.
Market Penetration
A market penetration strategy seeks to increase market share for present products or ser-
vices in present markets through greater marketing efforts. This strategy is widely used alone
and in combination with other strategies. Market penetration includes increasing the number
of salespersons, increasing advertising expenditures, offering extensive sales promotions, or
increasing publicity efforts. For example, Verizon is spending millions of dollars on a new
advertising theme named “Humanability” that tells stories about how Verizon’s technology
products are easing traffic flow, keeping fish fresh in transit, and supporting advancements in
virtual surgery and health care; this new theme replaces Verizon’s “Can You Hear Me Now?”
theme.
The following five guidelines indicate when market penetration may be an especially effec-
tive strategy:8
1. Current markets are not saturated with a particular product or service.
2. The usage rate of present customers could be increased significantly.
3. The market shares of major competitors have been declining, whereas total industry sales
have been increasing.
4. The correlation between dollar sales and dollar marketing expenditures historically has
been high.
5. Increased economies of scale provide major competitive advantages.
Market Development
Market development involves introducing present products or services into new geographic
areas. Tesla will soon manufacture (and sell) cars in China based on the Chinese government’s
plans to relax restrictions on automakers needing a local partner. For thousands of firms, market
development means adding facilities and operations globally. The Global Capsule 5 reveals a key
variable used to determine where we should concentrate new business.
LO 5.4
164 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Millions of small businesses annually add a second, third, or fourth store, office, or restau-
rant in new locations; that is market development. Dollar General is adding 1,000 new stores
every 12 months across the United States, primarily in poor, rural communities. There are pres-
ently more than 14,000 one-story plain yellow-and-black Dollar Generals in the United States,
more than Starbucks’ two-tailed green mermaid stores.
These following seven guidelines indicate when market development may be an especially
effective strategy:9
1. New channels of distribution are available that are reliable, inexpensive, and of good quality.
2. An organization is successful at what it does.
3. New untapped or unsaturated markets exist.
4. An organization has the needed capital and human resources to manage expanded
operations.
5. An organization has excess production capacity.
6. An organization’s basic industry is rapidly becoming global in scope.
7. Consumption habits of the firm’s products are similar in other geographic areas.
Product Development
Product development is a strategy that seeks increased sales by improving or modifying
present products or services. Product development usually entails large research-and-devel-
opment (R&D) expenditures. For example, Ford recently announced that up to one-third of its
R&D budget scheduled for research on combustible engines would be shifted to battery and
electric car research. Ford also shifted $7 billion in investment away from smaller cars into
trucks and SUVs.
Kellogg recently purchased RXBAR in a move to shift its product mix away from traditional
sugary breakfast foods such as Frosted Flakes and Pop-Tarts, which have experienced declining
sales in recent years as customers turn to more healthy options. RXBARs get their sweeteners
solely from dates rather than added sugar. In a similar product development move, Campbell
Soup recently acquired Pacific Foods, a firm that specializes in organic soups.
GLOBAL CAPSULE 5
How Can a Firm Determine Where to Initiate New Business? Use Gross Domestic Product (GDP) as a Guide.
Country GDP Percent
2017 2018
United States 2.1 2.5
United Kingdom 1.5 1.4
Mexico 2.3 2.3
Japan 1.5 0.9
Germany 2.1 1.6
Canada 3.0 1.9
China 6.8 6.4
India 7.1 7.0
Thousands of companies and organizations
desire to grow globally, but they are not sure
where among the two-hundred-plus countries
in the world. A key barometer for examining
how to determine where to begin or expand
company operations is gross domestic product
(GDP) of various countries. GDP is a quanti-
tative measure of a nation’s total economic
output, growth, or activity over a specified
period of time. According to a recent issue of
Bloomberg Businessweek, the 2018 GDP will
be a bit less than 2017 for most countries, and the magical 4 per-
cent number is expected only in India and China for the sample
countries.
Caveat: GPD is important, but consumption habits are more im-
portant. Does the foreign market value your product? If not, who
cares about GDP? Market development allows for good risk/reward
compared to other strategy types if consumption habits are similar
in the targeted markets because the firm continues to focus on its
core competency rather than entering businesses it knows less about.
Also, brand recognition can likely transfer to a new market more eas-
ily when consumption habits are similar.
Source: Based on Peter Coy, “The World Economy Should Grow Nicely
Again in 2018. (Unless Someone Does Something Dumb.)” Bloomberg
Businessweek (November 6, 2017 to January 8, 2018):17.
M ad
ru g ad
a V
er d e/
S h u tt
er st
o ck
CHAPTER 5 • STRATEGIES IN ACTION 165
Automobile companies use product development extensively. Some old truck brands are
making a comeback as Americans buy more pickups and SUVs. For example, the follow-
ing brands are being reintroduced in the respective years given: Jeep Scrambler (2019), Jeep
Wagoneer (2019), Chevy Blazer (2019), Ford Bronco (2020), Ford Ranger (2019), and Land
Rover Defender (2019). The bulk of profits earned at Ford, GM, and Fiat Chrysler today come
from pickups and SUVs.
Product development overall is an excellent option because a firm does not stray far from
what it does best. The following five guidelines indicate when product development may be an
especially effective strategy to pursue:10
1. An organization has successful products that are in the maturity stage of the product life
cycle; the idea here is to attract satisfied customers to try new (improved) products as a re-
sult of their positive experience with the organization’s present products or services.
2. An organization competes in an industry that is characterized by rapid technological
developments.
3. Major competitors offer better-quality products at comparable prices.
4. An organization competes in a high-growth industry.
5. An organization has especially strong research and development capabilities.
Diversification Strategies The two general types of diversification strategies are related diversification and unrelated
diversification. Businesses are said to be related when their value chains possess competitively
valuable cross-business strategic fits; businesses are said to be unrelated when their value chains
are so dissimilar that few competitively valuable cross-business relationships exist.11 Most com-
panies favor related diversification strategies to capitalize on synergies such as follows:
• Transferring competitively valuable expertise, technological know-how, or other capabili-
ties from one business to another • Combining related activities of separate businesses into a single operation to achieve lower costs • Exploiting common use of a well-known brand name • Cross-business collaboration to create competitively valuable resource strengths and
capabilities12
Diversification strategies are becoming less popular because organizations are finding it more
difficult to manage diverse business activities. In the 1960s and 1970s, the trend was to diversify
to avoid being dependent on any single industry, but the 1980s saw a general reversal of that
thinking. Diversification is still on the retreat. Michael Porter, of the Harvard Business School,
commented, “Management found it couldn’t manage the beast.” Businesses are still selling, clos-
ing, or spinning off less profitable or “different” divisions to focus on their core businesses. For
example, ITT recently divided itself into three separate, specialized companies. At one time, ITT
owned everything from Sheraton Hotels and Hartford Insurance to the maker of Wonder Bread
and Hostess Twinkies. About the ITT breakup, analyst Barry Knap said, “Companies generally
are not very efficient diversifiers; investors usually can do a better job of that by purchasing stock
in a variety of companies.” Rapidly appearing new technologies, new products, and fast-shifting
buyer preferences make diversification difficult. Another highly diversified company, General
Electric, is selling off many of its diversified parts.
Diversification must do more than simply spread business risks across different industries;
after all, shareholders could accomplish this by simply purchasing equity in different firms across
different industries or by investing in mutual funds. Diversification makes sense only to the ex-
tent that the strategy adds more to shareholder value than what shareholders could accomplish
acting individually. Any industry chosen for diversification must be attractive enough to yield
consistently high returns on investment and offer potential synergies across the operating divi-
sions that are greater than those entities could achieve alone. Many strategists contend that firms
should “stick to the knitting” and not stray too far from the firms’ basic areas of competence.
A few companies today, however, pride themselves on being conglomerates, from small
firms such as Pentair Inc. and Blount International to huge companies such as Textron, Berkshire
Hathaway, Allied Signal, Emerson Electric, GE, Viacom, Amazon, Google, Disney, and Samsung.
LO 5.5
166 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Conglomerates prove that focus and diversity are not always mutually exclusive. In an unattractive
industry, diversification makes sense, such as for Philip Morris, because cigarette consumption is
declining, product liability suits are a risk, and some investors reject tobacco stocks on principle.
Related Diversification
In a related diversification move, Walt Disney recently acquired 21st Century Fox’s film and TV stu-
dios in a deal worth over $52 million. The deal included Fox-owned cable networks, including FX
and National Geographic, and Fox’s stakes in international networks like Star TV, Sky, and Hulu.
Five guidelines reveal when related diversification may be an effective strategy to follow:13
1. An organization competes in a no-growth or a slow-growth industry.
2. Adding new, but related, products would significantly enhance the sale of current products.
3. New, but related, products could be offered at highly competitive prices.
4. New, but related, products have seasonal sales levels that counterbalance an organization’s
existing peaks and valleys.
5. An organization has a strong management team.
Unrelated Diversification
An unrelated diversification strategy favors capitalizing on a portfolio of businesses that are capa-
ble of delivering excellent financial performance in their respective industries, rather than striving
to capitalize on strategic fit among the businesses. Firms that employ unrelated diversification
continually search across different industries for companies that can be acquired for a deal and yet
have potential to provide a high return on investment. Pursuing unrelated diversification entails
being on the hunt to acquire companies whose assets are undervalued, companies that are finan-
cially distressed, or companies that have high-growth prospects but are short on investment capital.
In an unrelated diversification move, Amazon.com is planning to enter the $412 billion phar-
macy business. Today, 9 out of 10 patients pick up their prescriptions at a retail pharmacy, but
Amazon is betting that home delivery of pharmaceuticals are soon to be the rule rather than the
exception. Partly because of this external threat, CVS recently acquired the huge insurance firm,
Aetna, Inc., in an unrelated diversification move targeted to offset their reliance on the drugstore
industry, which as a whole has been experiencing faltering revenues and profits.
Five guidelines reveal when unrelated diversification may be an especially effective strategy
follow:14
1. Existing markets for an organization’s present products are saturated.
2. An organization competes in a highly competitive or a no-growth industry, as indicated by
low industry profit margins and returns.
3. An organization’s present channels of distribution can be used to market new products to
current customers.
4. New products have countercyclical sales patterns compared to an organization’s present
products.
5. An organization has the capital and managerial talent needed to compete successfully in a
new industry.
Defensive Strategies In addition to integrative, intensive, and diversification strategies, organizations also could pur-
sue defensive strategies such as retrenchment, divestiture, or liquidation. Retrenchment is a broad
term that can include divestiture and liquidation.
Retrenchment Retrenchment occurs when an organization regroups through cost and asset reduction to re-
verse declining sales and profits. Sometimes called a turnaround strategy, retrenchment is de-
signed to fortify an organization’s basic distinctive competence. During retrenchment, strategists
LO 5.6
CHAPTER 5 • STRATEGIES IN ACTION 167
work with limited resources and face pressure from shareholders, employees, and the media.
Retrenchment can involve selling off land and buildings to raise needed cash, pruning product
lines, closing marginal businesses, closing obsolete factories, automating processes, reducing the
number of employees, and instituting expense control systems.
Eli Lilly is cutting 8 percent of its global workforce mostly centered on the production and mar-
keting of existing drugs that are nearing patent expiration because competition from lower-priced
generics is forecasted to be fierce. Eli Lilly is deploying much of the salary savings into R&D of new
drugs.
The world’s largest seller of generic drugs, Teva Pharmaceutical Industries is laying off
25 percent of its workforce, or about 14,000 employees around the world, and closing facto-
ries and research centers, and suspending its dividend to cut costs. Headquartered in Tel Aviv,
Israel, Teva expects its retrenchment strategy to save $3 billion in costs in 2018–2019.
The action-camera company, GoPro Inc. in 2018 laid off one-fifth of its workforce and ex-
ited the drone market as part of the firm’s retrenchment strategy. As smartphone cameras and
videos have improved, GoPro’s camera business has suffered.
In some cases, declaring bankruptcy can be an effective retrenchment strategy. Bankruptcy
can allow a firm to avoid major debt obligations and to void union contracts. Chapter 7
bankruptcy is a liquidation procedure used only when a corporation sees no hope of being
able to operate successfully or to obtain the necessary creditor agreement. All the organization’s
assets are sold in parts for their tangible worth. Several hundred thousand companies declare
Chapter 7 bankruptcy annually with most of the firms being small.
Chapter 11 bankruptcy allows organizations to retrench, reorganize, and come back after
filing a petition for protection. About 40 large U.S. retail companies declared bankruptcy in both
2017 and 2018, up from 18 in 2016. Firms declaring bankruptcy in 2017 included RadioShack,
Payless Shoes, The Limited, HHGregg, Rue 21, Gander Mountain, and Toys R Us. Other retail com-
panies closing stores rapidly and possibly heading for bankruptcy include Gymboree, Bebe, Crocs,
Gamestop, Sears/Kmart, J. C. Penney, Michael Kors, Staples, Macy’s, and Chico’s. A key problem
for retail firms is shoppers’ discount addiction spurred by Amazon’s prowess and also smartphone-
shopping tools and apps prompting never-ending price-cutting, price matching, and price wars. The
dramatic shift to online purchasing has also severely curtailed the need for brick-and-mortar stores
of all kinds.
Three guidelines reveal when retrenchment may be an especially effective strategy to pursue
follow:15
1. An organization is plagued by inefficiency, low profitability, poor employee morale, and
pressure from stockholders to improve performance.
2. An organization has failed to capitalize on external opportunities, minimize external
threats, take advantage of internal strengths, and overcome internal weaknesses over time;
that is, when the organization’s strategic managers have failed (and possibly will be re-
placed by more competent individuals).
3. An organization has grown so large so quickly that major internal reorganization is
needed.
Divestiture
Selling a division or part of an organization is called divestiture. It is often used to raise
capital for further strategic acquisitions or investments. Divestiture can be part of an overall
retrenchment strategy to rid an organization of businesses that are unprofitable, that require
too much capital, or that do not fit well with the firm’s other activities. Divestiture has also
become a popular strategy for firms to refocus on their core businesses and become less
diversified.
Volkswagen AG recently divested upward of 20 percent of the company’s assets that are
not part of the firm’s core business including the potential sale of Ducati, the motorcycle brand.
Commonwealth Bank of Australia recently divested all of its life insurance businesses in Australia
and New Zealand totaling more than $3 billion, partly in response to pressure from regulators in
168 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
the countries. Nestlé SA recently divested its U.S. chocolate segment to the Italian firm Ferrero
International SA for $2.8 billion, making the family-owned Ferrero company the third-largest
chocolate seller in the United States.
A form of divestiture occurs when a corporation splits into two or more parts. Most
often, divested segments become separate, publicly traded companies. Many large conglom-
erate firms are employing this strategy. Sometimes this strategy is a prelude to the firm
selling the separated part(s) to a rival firm. Corporations annually split off about $2 trillion
worth of subsidiaries. Part of the reason for splitting diversified firms is that the homogenous
parts are generally much more attractive to potential buyers. Most times, the acquiring firms
desire to promote homogeneity to complement their own operations, rather than heteroge-
neity, and are willing to pay for homogeneity. For example, Nacco Industries is divesting
its Hamilton Beach Brands appliances and a kitchen-accessory store chain in an effort to
refocus on its core coal and mining businesses. Nacco’s revenues are about $900 million
annually with Hamilton Beach bringing in about $605 million and Kitchen Collection about
$144 million. Similarly, Britain’s GKN PLC in 2018 split into two companies, separating its
aerospace and automotive businesses. Based in Redditch, England, GKN is one of Britain’s
oldest companies (250 years) and today has about 58,000 employees.
Another example is the German company Daimler AG in 2018 consolidating its five busi-
ness divisions into three separately registered, wholly-owned subsidiary companies. Analysts
expect the Daimler restructuring is a prelude for Daimler divesting (spinning off) the three seg-
ments into separate publicly listed companies: (1) Mercedes-Benz cars and vans, (2) Daimler
trucks and buses, and (3) Daimler Financial Services. Pfizer Inc. and Honeywell International
Inc. recently divested several of their major business units, spinning them off into separate pub-
licly listed companies.
Here are some guidelines for when divestiture may be an especially effective strategy to pursue:16
1. An organization has pursued a retrenchment strategy and failed to accomplish needed
improvements.
2. A division is responsible for an organization’s overall poor performance.
3. A division is a misfit with the rest of an organization; this can result from radically differ-
ent markets, customers, managers, employees, values, or needs.
4. A large amount of cash is needed quickly and cannot be obtained reasonably from other
sources.
5. Government antitrust action threatens an organization.
Liquidation
Selling all of a company’s assets, in parts, for their tangible worth is called liquidation.
Liquidation is a recognition of defeat and consequently can be an emotionally difficult strat-
egy. However, it may be better to cease operating than to continue losing large sums of money
Chapter 7 bankruptcy is a liquidation procedure used only when a corporation sees no hope of
being able to operate successfully or to obtain the necessary creditor agreement. All the organi-
zation’s assets are sold in parts for their tangible worth. Several hundred thousand companies
declare Chapter 7 bankruptcy annually with most of the firms being small.
The legendary, world famous, Ringling Bros. and Barnum & Bailey circus liquidated in
2017 after 146 years in business because of “declining tickets sales and high operating costs.”
The final circus performances were in Providence, Rhode Island, on May 7 and Uniondale,
New York, on May 21, 2017. In May 2016, the circus had previously retired its elephant act,
years after a suit by activists. The animal rights group PETA says “we herald the end of what
has been the saddest show on earth for wild animals, and ask all other animal circuses to follow
suit, as this is a sign of changing times.” PETA President Ingrid Newkirk says “our protests
have awoken the world to the plight of animals in captivity.” The Ringling Bros. and Barnum &
Bailey circus went by the slogan: “The greatest show on earth,” a catchphrase so famous it was
employed for the title of the 1952 Cecil B. DeMille best picture Oscar-winning film starring
Charlton Heston and Betty Hutton. For more than 100 years, schools would close in towns and
cities when Ringling Bros. and Barnum & Bailey came to town; those days are long gone.
CHAPTER 5 • STRATEGIES IN ACTION 169
The American iconic toy store chain Toys “R” Us Inc. in 2018 liquidated, selling or clos-
ing all its 885 U.S. stores deleting about 33,000 jobs. The company is likely to liquidate also in
France, Spain, Poland, and Australia. The company hopes to sell its operation in Canada, Central
Europe, and Asia.
Two guidelines reveal when liquidation may be an especially effective strategy to pursue:17
1. An organization has pursued both a retrenchment strategy and a divestiture strategy, and
neither has been successful.
2. The stockholders of a firm can minimize their losses by selling the organization’s assets.
Value Chain Analysis and Benchmarking Whenever a customer buys a product it is because that consumer feels the “value” to be derived
from that product in terms of price paid versus benefits received is worthwhile. However, the
ultimate price paid by a consumer for a product is determined from scores of activities that went
into producing that product, from raw materials to suppliers, to production processes, to distribu-
tors, etc. This collection of activities that leads to the ultimate price of a product is commonly
referred to as a firm’s value chain.18 Firm’s seek competitive advantages anywhere they can up
and down their value chain, to ultimately provide some product at some price and some level of
quality that consumers will perceive to be of sufficient value to warrant the purchase. The value
chain concept, as illustrated in Figure 5-3, is important in strategic management.
Value chain analysis (VCA) can be defined as the process whereby a firm determines the
value (price minus cost) of each and all activities that went into producing and marketing a prod-
uct, from purchasing raw materials to manufacturing, distributing, and marketing those products.
VCA is an excellent way to identify both external opportunities/threats and internal strengths/
weaknesses of a firm. Companies strive to gain competitive advantages wherever possible up and
down their value chain, because such “value activities” are not easily duplicated or imitable by
rival firms. In contrast, just lowering the price of an end product or hiring a celebrity to promote
an end product is easily imitable; such actions do not represent a sustainable competitive advan-
tage. In other words, at every step along a firm’s value chain, the firm strives to create value (price
LO 5.7
VALUE CHAIN
Company
Supplier
Distribution
Customer
FIGURE 5-3
A Value Chain Illustrated
170 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
minus cost) that can ultimately be transferred to the end user (customers), so customers
will buy the product at some price to obtain the perceived value.
Substantial judgment may be required in performing a VCA because different items
along the value chain may impact other items positively or negatively, at times creat-
ing complex interrelationships. For example, exceptional customer service may be es-
pecially expensive yet may reduce the costs of returns and increase revenues. Cost and
price differences among rival firms can have their origins in activities performed by sup-
pliers, distributors, creditors, or even shareholders.
The initial step in implementing VCA is to divide a firm’s operations into specific
activities or business processes. Then the analyst attempts to attach a cost of each discrete
activity versus the price to be paid; the costs could be in terms of both time and money.
Finally, the analyst converts the “value data” into information by looking for competitive
oppotunities/threats and/or strengths/weaknesses that may yield competitive advantage
or disadvantage. Conducting a VCA is supportive of the research-based view’s examina-
tion of a firm’s assets and capabilities as sources of distinctive competence.
When a major competitor or new market entrant offers products or services at low
prices, this may be because that firm has substantially lower value chain costs or perhaps
the rival firm is just waging a desperate attempt to gain sales or market share. VCA en-
ables a firm to examine and monitor the extent that its prices and costs are competitive
throughout the value chain; those value segments lead cumulatively to the customers’
perceived value received by paying some price for some end product.
A value chain is illustrated in Figure 5-4. There can be more than a hundred particu-
lar value-creating activities associated with the business of producing and marketing a
product or service, and each one of the activities can represent a sustainable competitive
advantage or disadvantage for the firm. The combined costs of all the various activities
in a company’s value chain define the firm’s cost of doing business. Firms should deter-
mine where cost advantages and disadvantages in their value chain occur relative to the
value chain of rival firms.
Value chains differ immensely across industries and firms. Whereas a paper prod-
ucts company, such as Stone Container, would include on its value chain timber farm-
ing, logging, pulp mills, and papermaking, a company such as Hewlett-Packard would
include programming, peripherals, mining of metals, licensing, software, hardware, and
laptops. A motel would include food, housekeeping, check-in and check-out operations,
website, reservations system where they order supplies and so on.
All firms should use VCA to develop and nurture a core competence and convert
this competence into a distinctive competence. A core competence is any element of a
firm's value chain that performs especially well (yields high value). When a core compe-
tence evolves into a major competitive advantage, then it is called a distinctive compe-
tence. Figure 5-5 illustrates this process.
More and more companies are using VCA to gain and sustain competitive advantage
by becoming especially efficient and effective along various parts of the value chain. For
example, Walmart has built powerful value advantages by focusing on exceptionally tight
inventory control and volume purchasing of products. In contrast, computer companies
compete aggressively along the distribution end of the value chain. Price competitive-
ness is a key component of competitiveness for both mass retailers and computer firms.
To gain and sustain competitive advantage, a firm must create value for a product or
service that exceeds the value offered by rivals.19 This is commonly done in one of two
ways: (1) operating at the lowest cost, or (2) commanding a premium price. A few firms
try to do both simultaneously. The bottom line, however, is that a business needs to be
better than rivals on many points along its value chain because these points likely cannot
be easily copied, thus they are sustainable. Rival firms ask, “How do they do it?” The
answer for many successful firms is “through effective value chain analysis.”
VCA focuses on the quality differences in activities among rival firms. Not all firms
in a given industry will place equal weights on various value chain items. For exam-
ple, Rolex and Timex both produce watches, yet each value chain will differ substan-
tially on key areas. Rolex creates value for the customer through prestige and elegance,
whereas Timex creates value through price and utility. Each firm creates value so long
Supplier Costs
Production Costs
Distribution Costs
Sales and Marketing Costs
Customer Service Costs
Management Costs
Raw materials
Fuel
Energy
Transportation
Truck drivers
Truck maintenance
Component parts
Inspection
Storing
Warehouse
Inventory system
Receiving
Plant layout
Maintenance
Plant location
Computer
R&D
Cost accounting
Loading
Shipping
Budgeting
Personnel
Internet
Trucking
Railroads
Fuel
Maintenance
Salespersons
Website
Internet
Publicity
Promotion
Advertising
Transportation
Food and lodging
Postage
Phone
Internet
Warranty
Human resources
Administration
Employee benefits
Labor relations
Managers
Employees
Finance and legal
FIGURE 5-4
An Example Value Chain for a Typical Manufacturing Company
CHAPTER 5 • STRATEGIES IN ACTION 171
as consumers feel they are getting value for the price paid for the product or service and each
firm can have its own competitive advantage in the watch industry. Even though the weights on
various value chain items can differ within the same industry, firms should strive to understand
not only their own value chain operations, but also those of the industry, competitors, suppliers,
and distributors.
VCA is a tool used to examine each step along the path of creating value from upstream
operations such as suppliers all the way to downstream operations of delivering the product to
customers. One of the main benefits of VCA is that each activity from start to finish has a value
element that can be improved upon. Pay careful attention to areas along the value chain that are
likely to lead to higher quality or lower cost. Also, be mindful it is generally more advantageous
to choose a path of being different than a rival on select value chain activities than simply trying
to compete with them on every item. The jewelry firms Tiffany and Blue Nile are great examples
of firms that have chosen to be different in the way they create value for customers.
Benchmarking
Benchmarking is another analytical tool used to determine whether a firm’s value chain is
competitive compared to those of rivals and thus conducive to winning in the marketplace.
Benchmarking entails examination of value chain activities across an industry to determine
“best practices” among competing firms; firms engage in benchmarking for the purpose of du-
plicating or improving on those best practices. Similar to VCA, benchmarking is an analyti-
cal tool used to identify key external opportunities/threats and internal strengths/weaknesses.
Benchmarking enables a firm to take action to improve its competitiveness by identifying (and
improving on) value chain activities where rival firms have comparative advantages in cost, ser-
vice, reputation, or operation.
A challenging part of benchmarking can be gaining access to other firms’ VCAs with asso-
ciated costs. Typical sources of benchmarking information, however, include published reports,
trade publications, suppliers, distributors, customers, partners, creditors, shareholders, lobbyists,
and willing rival firms. Some rival firms share benchmarking data. However, the International
Benchmarking Clearinghouse provides guidelines to help ensure that restraint of trade, price fixing,
bid rigging, bribery, and other improper business conduct do not arise between participating firms.
Although benchmarking is useful, strategists should be mindful of their firm’s unique po-
sition and how their firm differs from rivals when selecting which factors along a value chain
to benchmark. Never benchmark variable after variable without discretion. For example, Five
Guys who specialize in burgers made to order with quality ingredients should not benchmark
McDonald’s “service time” component, just as McDonald’s should not benchmark Five Guys
“quality” component. Five Guys benchmarking and attempting to compete with McDonald’s
on service time would be dysfunctional to Five Guys unique strategy and position of offering
higher quality burgers; erroneous benchmarking could lead a firm away from what made the firm
successful. This is not to say “improving on service time” is not important; it is just that Five
Guys should not sacrifice “made to order burgers” for “premade burgers” simply to benchmark
McDonald’s service-time component. Recall that uniqueness is important in strategic manage-
ment, so use benchmarking wisely.
Core Competencies Arise in Some
Activities
Some Distinctive Competencies Yield
Sustained Competitive Advantages
Some Core Competencies Evolve into Distinctive
Competencies
Value Chain Activities Are Identified and
Assessed
FIGURE 5-5
Transforming Value Chain Activities into Sustained Competitive Advantages
172 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Michael Porter’s Two Generic Strategies According to Michael Porter, strategies allow organizations to gain competitive advantage
from two different bases: cost leadership and differentiation. Porter calls these bases generic
strategies because generally firms should be mindful it is often best to develop product lines
that compete on cost or compete on unique value; it is difficult to compete on both simulta-
neously. Cost leadership emphasizes producing standardized products or services at a low
per-unit cost for consumers who are price sensitive. Differentiation is a strategy aimed at
producing products and services considered unique to the industry and directed at consumers
who are relatively price insensitive. Unlike with cost leadership where a firm examines how to
reduce costs all along its value chain, with differentiation the firm looks to maximize value all
along its value chain.
Cost Leadership
As indicated in Table 5-5, there are two types of cost leadership strategies. Type 1 is a broad low-
cost strategy that offers products or services to a wide range of customers at one of the lowest
prices available on the market. Type 2 is a narrow or focused low-cost strategy that offers prod-
ucts or services to a small range of customers at one of the lowest prices on the market. A cost
leadership strategy aims to offer customers a range of products or services at the lowest price
available compared to a rival’s products with similar attributes.
Walmart could serve as an example firm pursuing a Type 1 cost leadership strategy because the
company serves a broad range of market segments with varied socioeconomic backgrounds. Dollar
General would serve as an example of Type 2 focusing mostly on rural areas, limited product lines,
less décor devoted to the stores, and less service. Both Type 1 and Type 2 strategies target a large
market. This is an important distinction of any cost leadership market; in order to achieve economies
of scale, there must be large market potential. Both Walmart and Dollar General met the large mar-
ket potential criteria, even though Dollar General has a significantly more focused target customer
base. Amazon is potentially another example of Type 1 cost leadership; Jiffy Lube, Little Caesars
Pizza, and Spirit Airlines are all examples of successful Type 2 cost-leadership strategies, as well
as examples of firms “saying no and accepting trade-offs” as a part of their cost leadership strategy.
Striving to be the low-cost producer in an industry can be especially effective when the
market is composed of many price-sensitive buyers, when there are few ways to achieve prod-
uct differentiation, when buyers do not care much about differences from brand to brand, or
when there are a large number of buyers with significant bargaining power. The basic idea
is to underprice competitors and thereby gain market share and sales, entirely driving some
competitors out of the market. Companies employing a cost-leadership strategy must achieve
their competitive advantage in ways that are difficult for competitors to copy or match. If ri-
vals find it relatively easy or inexpensive to imitate the leader’s cost-leadership methods, the
leaders’ advantage will not last long enough to yield a valuable edge in the marketplace. In
other words, firms try to gain competitive advantages all along their value chain, so the firm
can ultimately provide some product at some price low enough to yield compelling value to
customers.
For a resource to be valuable, it must be either rare, hard to imitate, or not easily substitutable.
To employ a cost-leadership strategy successfully, a firm must ensure that its total costs across
its overall value chain are lower than competitors’ total costs. A key way to first ensure the firm
is maintaining its cost-leadership competitive advantage is to routinely examine every level of its
value chain relative to rival firms for areas of possible cost savings. A successful cost-leadership
LO 5.8
TABLE 5-5 The Four Types of Generic Strategies
Generic Strategies
Cost Leadership Differentiation
Market Segments
Broad Type 1 Type 3
Narrow Type 2 Type 4
CHAPTER 5 • STRATEGIES IN ACTION 173
strategy usually permeates the entire firm, as evidenced by high efficiency, low overhead, limited
perks, intolerance of waste, intensive screening of budget requests, wide spans of control, rewards
linked to cost containment, and broad employee participation in cost control efforts.
Some risks of pursuing cost leadership are that competitors may imitate the strategy, thus driv-
ing overall industry profits down; technological breakthroughs in the industry may make the strategy
ineffective; or buyer interest may swing to other differentiating features besides price; simply cutting
retail prices will not yield a cost leadership position since such actions are easily copied and will
erode margins.
Differentiation
There are two levels of a successful differentiation strategy, Type 3 having a wide target market
and Type 4 having a narrow target market, as revealed in Table 5-5. Under differentiation strat-
egies, firms are not as reliant on economies of scale, so targeting a small group of customers
can be advantageous if they are willing to pay a premium for the products or services offered.
A differentiation strategy should be pursued only after a careful study of buyers’ needs and
preferences has determined the feasibility of incorporating one or more differentiating features
into a unique product that showcases the desired attributes. A successful differentiation strategy
allows a firm to charge a higher price for its product and to gain customer loyalty because con-
sumers may become strongly attached to the differentiating features, such as superior service,
spare parts availability, engineering design, product performance, useful life, gas mileage, or
ease of use.
Examples of firms employing Type 3-wide differentiation strategies would include Monster
Beverage, Apple, and BMW; these firms employ a strategy that adds perceived value over Coca-
Cola, an LG smartphone, or a Ford Escort at significantly higher prices than their counterparts.
All three also target a wider audience than brands like Louis Vuitton, Rolex, or Maserati which
operate under a Type 4 strategy. A firm does not have to offer extremely expensive products to
use a Type 4 strategy, but generally this is the case because creating value at every step of the
value chain is expensive and with limited buyers reducing economies of scale prices tend to be
expensive.
Generally, environments favorable to differentiation are those where buyers have many dif-
ferent tastes or application needs. For example, the quality and type of food desired by consum-
ers varies greatly, leading to many different types of restaurants. When technology is changing
rapidly, firms can release new products and often have customers “trained” to purchase the lat-
est and greatest. Apple enjoys being differentiated through its own IOS software. All the other
leading phone manufacturers use Android, Windows, or some other operating system created by
different firms. Whenever customers view products as commodities, there is a need for differen-
tiation; even “commodities” such as milk or eggs can often be differentiated through marketing,
attractive packaging, and other tactics leading to prices often twice as high as competitors.
Differentiation does not guarantee competitive advantage, especially if standard products
sufficiently meet customer needs or if rapid imitation by competitors is possible. Products pro-
tected by barriers which prevent quick copying by competitors are best. Successful differentia-
tion can mean greater product flexibility, greater compatibility, lower costs, improved service,
less maintenance, greater convenience, or more features. Product development is an example of
a strategy that offers the advantages of differentiation.
A risk of pursuing a differentiation strategy is that the unique product may not be valued
highly enough by customers to justify the higher price. When this happens, a cost-leadership strat-
egy will easily defeat a differentiation strategy. Another risk of pursuing a differentiation strategy
is that competitors may quickly develop ways to copy the differentiating features. Thus, firms must
find durable sources of uniqueness that cannot be imitated quickly or inexpensively by rival firms.
Common organizational requirements for a successful differentiation strategy include strong
coordination among the R&D and marketing functions and substantial amenities to attract sci-
entists and creative people. Firms can pursue a differentiation strategy based on many different
competitive aspects. Differentiation opportunities exist or can potentially be developed anywhere
along the firm’s value chain, including supply chain activities, product R&D activities, produc-
tion and technological activities, manufacturing activities, human resource management activi-
ties, distribution activities, or marketing activities.
174 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
The most effective differentiation bases are those that are difficult or expensive for rivals to
duplicate. Competitors are continually trying to imitate, duplicate, and outperform rivals along
any differentiation variable that yields competitive advantage. Firms must be careful when em-
ploying a differentiation strategy because buyers will not pay a higher price unless their per-
ceived value of the differentiated offering exceeds its price.20
Means for Achieving Strategies Companies are under continual pressure from stockholders to maintain top line (revenues) and
bottom line (net income) growth (usually 4+ percent) and pay higher dividends. To accomplish
this end, firms are often faced with a BUILD, BORROW, or BUY decision. Building is growing
internally (organically), borrowing is growing externally using means such as partnerships, joint
ventures, and alliances; finally, buying includes mergers and acquisitions. Let’s look at build,
borrow, or buy options a bit closer.
BUILD from Within to Grow
When firms build from within, sometimes called organic growth, as a means for achieving strat-
egies, strategists must consider how well current internal resources match the capabilities needed
to grow (4+ percent). Building from within can include new training programs, hiring new em-
ployees, building (instead of buying rival’s) stores, or developing a “blue ocean strategy.” A blue
ocean strategy aims to target a new market where competition is not yet present, thus creating
a “blue ocean” as opposed to a red ocean where many firms are competing often on price, and
the gains of one firm are often at the expense of another. Blue ocean strategy is similar to being
a first mover seeking market space not yet occupied by rivals.
Kim and Mauborgne’s research on blue oceans revealed that existing line extensions ac-
count for 86 percent of new products created; only 14 percent of new ventures are targeted at
new markets or industries.21 Blue ocean thinking in developing news markets and products
can provide benefits far greater than competing in traditional markets. Apple’s development
of the PC and smartphone were blue ocean examples where customers did not even know
they desired the products before they were brought to market by Apple. However, the blue
ocean environment did not last long for Apple on either product because competitors en-
tered quickly, forcing Apple to operate under what Porter would classify as a differentiation
strategy.
Netflix, Southwest, eBay, and Amazon, like Apple, were all derived partly from blue
ocean thinking. These examples are of blue oceans where there was no defined industry or
market for the products previously, but according to Kim and Mauborgne, blue oceans can
arise from already established industries as well. It is likely blue oceans within current indus-
tries will not be as sustainable and may even erode a firm’s mission, moving it away from its
core competencies. Extra care should be taken when considering blue ocean thinking while
operating within an already established industry. However, a firm does not have to have a blue
ocean to build.
BORROW from Others to Grow
Firms tend to “borrow” capabilities through joint ventures or strategic alliances when the (1)
firm does not believe it can develop the necessary resources internally, or (2) the costs and risks
of merging are too high. Joint venture occurs when two or more companies form a temporary
partnership or consortium for the purpose of capitalizing on some opportunity and have shared
equity ownership in the new entity. Joint ventures are being used increasingly because they allow
companies to improve communications and networking, to globalize operations, and to minimize
risk. They are formed when a given opportunity is too complex, uneconomical, or risky for a
single firm to pursue alone, or when an endeavor requires a broader range of competencies and
know-how than any one firm possesses. Joint ventures are less common than alliances but more
common than mergers or acquisitions.
Qualcomm formed a joint venture with China’s Guizhou province to produce server
chips in China. The new company is owned 55 percent by the Chinese province and 45 per-
cent by Qualcomm. Coca-Cola and Nestlé recently agreed to dissolve their tea joint venture
LO 5.9
CHAPTER 5 • STRATEGIES IN ACTION 175
named Beverage Partners Worldwide. Kathryn Rudie Harrigan summarizes the trend toward
increased joint venturing: “In today’s global business environment of scarce resources, rapid
rates of technological change, and rising capital requirements, the important question is no
longer ‘Shall we form a joint venture?’ Now the question is ‘Which joint ventures and co-
operative arrangements are most appropriate for our needs and expectations?’ followed by
‘How do we manage these ventures most effectively?’ ”22 Four common reasons joint ventures
struggle are:
1. Managers who must collaborate daily in operating the venture are not involved in forming
or shaping the venture.
2. The venture may benefit the partnering companies but may not benefit customers, who
then complain about poorer service or criticize the companies in other ways.
3. The venture may not be supported equally by both partners. If supported unequally, prob-
lems arise.
4. The venture may begin to compete more with one of the partners than the other.23
Six guidelines for when a joint venture may be an especially effective means for pursuing
strategies are:24
1. A privately owned firm forms a joint venture with a publicly owned organization. The
advantages to being privately held, such as closed ownership, and the advantages of being
publicly held, such as access to stock issuances as a source of capital, can sometimes be
synergistically combined in a joint venture.
2. A domestic firm forms a joint venture with a foreign company. A joint venture can provide
a domestic firm with the opportunity for obtaining local management in a foreign country,
thereby reducing risks such as expropriation and harassment by host country officials.
3. The distinct competencies of two or more firms complement each other especially well.
4. A particular project is potentially profitable but requires overwhelming resources and risks.
5. Two or more smaller firms have trouble competing with a large firm.
6. There is a need to quickly introduce a new technology.
Cooperation among competitors is a popular borrow strategy. Microsoft and business-
software vendor SAP SE recently formed an alliance to challenge Amazon.com’s dominance
in the $23 billion annual market for web-based, on-demand computing resources. As part of the
deal, SAP is now using Microsoft’s Azure cloud-computing services. The Microsoft-SAP deal
follows a similar deal whereby Microsoft and Adobe Systems agreed to cross promote each
other’s products.
Cooperation among competitors is becoming more common. For collaboration to suc-
ceed, both firms must contribute something distinctive, such as technology, distribution, basic
research, or manufacturing capacity. But a major risk is that unintended transfers of important
skills or technology may occur at organizational levels below where the deal was signed.25
Information not covered in the formal agreement often gets traded in the day-to-day interactions
and dealings of engineers, marketers, and product developers. Firms often give away too much
information to rival firms when operating under cooperative agreements! Tighter formal agree-
ments are needed.
Perhaps the best example of rival firms in an industry forming alliances to compete
against each other is the airline industry. Today, there are three major alliances: Star,
SkyTeam, and Oneworld. Joint ventures and cooperative arrangements among competitors
demand a certain amount of trust if companies are to combat paranoia about whether one
firm will injure the other. Increasing numbers of domestic firms are joining forces with
competitive foreign firms to reap mutual benefits. Kathryn Harrigan at Columbia University
contends, “Within a decade, most companies will be members of teams that compete against
each other.”
Often, U.S. companies enter alliances primarily to reduce costs and risks of entering new
businesses or markets. In contrast, learning from the partner is a major reason why Asian
and European firms enter into cooperative agreements. U.S. firms, too, should place learn-
ing high on the list of reasons to be cooperative with competitors. Companies in the United
States often form alliances with firms in Asia to gain an understanding of their manufacturing
176 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
excellence, but manufacturing competence is not easily transferable. Manufacturing excel-
lence is a complex system that includes employee training and involvement, integration with
suppliers, statistical process controls, value engineering, and design. In contrast, U.S. know-
how in technology and related areas can be imitated more easily. Therefore, U.S. firms need
to be careful not to give away more intelligence than they receive in cooperative agreements
with rival Asian firms.
BUY Others to Grow
Merger and acquisition refers to firms buying others to grow. A merger occurs when two orga-
nizations of about equal size unite to form one enterprise. An acquisition occurs when a large
organization purchases (acquires) a smaller firm or vice versa. If a merger or acquisition is not
desired by both parties, it is called a hostile takeover, as opposed to a friendly merger. Most
mergers are friendly, but the number of hostile takeovers is on the rise. A hostile takeover is
not unethical as long as it is conducted in a civil and legal manner. Sometimes shareholders are
skeptical, though, given that current research reveals CEOs to be less ethical today, as indicated
in Ethics Capsule 5.
Not all mergers are effective and successful. For example, soon after Halliburton acquired
Baker Hughes, Halliburton’s stock price declined 11 percent. So, a merger between two firms
can yield great benefits, but the price and reasoning must be right. More than 10,000 mergers
transpire annually in the United States, with same-industry combinations predominating. A gen-
eral market consolidation is occurring in most industries.
Six reasons why many mergers and acquisitions fail are provided in Table 5-6. Table 5-7
presents the potential benefits of merging with or acquiring another firm.
A leveraged buyout (LBO) occurs when a firm’s shareholders are bought (hence buyout)
by the company’s management and other private investors using borrowed funds (hence lever-
age). Besides trying to avoid a hostile takeover, other reasons for initiating an LBO include
instances when a particular division(s) lacks fit with an overall corporate strategy, as well as
when selling a division could raise needed cash. An LBO converts a public firm into a private
company.
Another popular way for firms to grow occurs whenever a private-equity (PE) firm acquires
and takes private some target firm. For example, Ruby Tuesday was taken private in late 2017
when the private-equity firm NRD Capital Management bought the casual-dining restaurant
ETHICS CAPSULE 5
Are CEOs Less Ethical Today Than in the Past?
A recent article suggests that the answer to the question posed is
YES. CEO dismissals for ethical misconduct rose in North America
and Western Europe from 4.6 percent in 2007–2011 to 7.8 per-
cent in 2012–2016, a 68 percent increase. According to the 2017
Edelman Trust Barometer, only 37 percent of people consider CEOs
credible/ethical today, an all-time low for the survey, and down from
59 percent the prior year. Confidence and trust in large corporations,
and CEOs in particular, has declined for decades. Ethical miscon-
duct was a key reason for passage of the Dodd-Frank Act of 2010
that imposed new regulations and standards on top executives and
board members, including further measures to detect, discourage,
and punish corporate wrongdoing. Also to combat wrongdoing, ac-
cording to the Spencer Stuart Board Index, 85 percent of all board
members of S&P 500 companies are independent (not employees
of the firm), and 27 percent of these boards have an independent
chairperson, up from 9 percent in 2005. Thus, the days of an all-
powerful CEO presiding over a board composed of friends and in-
siders are essentially gone. The share of incoming CEOs who also
serve as chair of the board has steadily declined at the world’s 2,500
largest companies from 48 percent in 2002 to less than 10 percent
today.
Source: Based on Per-Ola Karlsson, DeAnne Aguirre, and Kristin Rivera,
“Are CEOs Less Ethical Than in the Past?” Strategy & Leadership (Summer
2017): 57–65.
W av
eb re
ak m
ed ia
/
S h u tt
er st
o ck
The New Policy Is Legal, But Is It Ethical?
CHAPTER 5 • STRATEGIES IN ACTION 177
TABLE 5-7 Twelve Potential Benefits of Merging With or Acquiring Another Firm
1. To provide improved capacity utilization
2. To make better use of the existing sales force
3. To reduce managerial staff
4. To gain economies of scale
5. To smooth out seasonal trends in sales
6. To gain access to new suppliers, distributors, customers, products, and creditors
7. To gain new technology
8. To gain market share
9. To enter global markets
10. To gain pricing power
11. To reduce tax obligations
12. To eliminate competitors
TABLE 5-6 Six Reasons Why Many Mergers and Acquisitions Fail
1. Integration difficulties up and down the two value chains
2. Taking on too much new debt the target firm owes or to buy the target
3. Inability to achieve synergy
4. Too much diversification
5. Difficult to integrate different organizational cultures
6. Reduced employee morale due to layoffs and relocations
chain for a 21 percent premium amount of about $146 million. At the time, there were 599 Ruby
Tuesday restaurants in 41 states and 14 foreign countries.
The intent of virtually all PE acquisitions is to buy firms at a low price and sell them later at
a high price, which is arguably just good business. Buffalo Wild Wings (BWW) recently received
a $2.3-billion takeover bid from the PE firm Roark Capital Group. Roark’s offer of $151 per
share was a premium of at least 28 percent over BWW’s stock price at the time. Roark eventually
bought BWW for $157 per share, representing a premium of 7.2 percent (low because BWW
stock price had increased).
PE firms are rapidly acquiring opioid-addiction clinics and treatment centers, such as
Kohlberg & Co.’s recent $180 million acquisition of the Meadows in Wickenburg, Arizona. U.S.
drug- and alcohol-addiction clinics generate over $10 billion in revenue annually through more
than 3,000 facilities that are quickly growing.
First-Mover Advantages First-mover advantages refer to the benefits a firm may achieve by entering a new market
or developing a new product or service prior to rival firms. As indicated in Table 5-8, some
advantages of being a first mover include securing access to rare resources, gaining new
knowledge of key factors and issues, and carving out market share and a position that is easy
to defend and costly for rival firms to overtake. First-mover advantages are analogous to
taking the high ground first, which puts one in an excellent strategic position to launch ag-
gressive campaigns and to defend territory. Being the first mover can be an excellent strategy
when such actions (1) build a firm’s image and reputation with buyers; (2) produce cost ad-
vantages over rivals in terms of new technologies, new components, new distribution chan-
nels; (3) create strongly loyal customers; and (4) make imitation or duplication by a rival
difficult or unlikely.
LO 5.10
178 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
One of the keys in deciding to be a first mover is how quickly will a new technology, prod-
uct, or service catch-on with a target market. Quicker adoption by the bulk of the customer base
enhances the incentive to be a first mover. Quick adoption may especially be likely in industries
such as pharmaceuticals where patent protection can virtually lock out anyone other than the first
mover.
To sustain the competitive advantage gained by being the first mover, a firm needs to be a
fast learner. There are, however, risks associated with being the first mover, such as unantici-
pated problems and costs that occur from being the first firm doing business in the new market.
Therefore, being a slow mover (also called fast follower or late mover) can be effective when a
firm can easily copy or imitate the lead firm’s products or services, especially when initial costs
are high. If technology is advancing rapidly, slow movers can often leapfrog a first-mover’s prod-
ucts with improved second-generation products, so being a late mover has potential advantages.
In some industries, being a fast follower may be the better strategy, such as in the elec-
tric car business where most customers have not quickly adopted the new technology, due to
high switching costs, lack of infrastructure of charging stations, and uneasiness. Apple was a
first mover in the PC market, but initially struggled as the market was not ready to adopt PCs
widespread. However, in iPods and iPhones, Apple was a first mover and continues to enjoy
many benefits of entering the market first and profiting from high-switching costs that customers
would incur by switching from Apple’s unique operating system.
Strategic Management in Nonprofit and Small Firms Nonprofit organizations are similar to for-profit companies in virtually evey respect except for two
major differences: (1) Nonprofits do not pay taxes, and (2) nonprofits do not have shareholders to
provide capital. Nonprofits have employees, customers, creditors, suppliers, and distributors as well
as financial budgets, income statements, balance sheets, cash flow statements, and so on. Nonprofit
organizations embrace strategic planning as much as for-profit firms, and perhaps even more. Both
nonprofit and for-profit organizations have competitors that want to put them out of business.
The strategic-management process is being used effectively by countless nonprofit and govern-
mental organizations, such as the Girl Scouts, Boy Scouts, the Red Cross, chambers of commerce,
educational institutions, medical institutions, public utilities, libraries, government agencies, zoos,
cities, and churches. Many nonprofit and governmental organizations outperform private firms
and corporations on innovativeness, motivation, productivity, and strategic management.
Compared to for-profit firms, nonprofit and governmental organizations may be totally
dependent on outside financing. Especially for these organizations, strategic management pro-
vides an excellent vehicle for developing and justifying requests for needed financial support.
Nonprofits and governmental organizations owe it to their constituencies to garner and use mon-
ies wisely; that requires excellent strategy formulation, implementation, and evaluation.
Educational Institutions
Accrediting bodies that audit colleges and universities (such as SACS and AACSB) require con-
tinuous strategic planning. The Institute of International Education reported in late 2017 that
the number of international new students attending U.S. universities declined by 7 percent in
the fall of 2017, the largest drop in a few years. Some MBA programs across the United States
are closing because of falling enrollments, including at the University of Iowa, Wake Forest
University, Virginia Tech, Simmons College, and possibly even at the University of Wisconsin.
LO 5.11
TABLE 5-8 Six Benefits of a Firm Being the First Mover
1. Secure access and commitments to rare resources.
2. Gain new knowledge of critical success factors and issues.
3. Gain market share and position in the best locations.
4. Establish and secure long-term relationships with customers, suppliers, distributors, and
investors.
5. Gain customer loyalty and commitments.
6. Gain patent protection early.
CHAPTER 5 • STRATEGIES IN ACTION 179
College enrollments in general are declining. State and federal support/monies given to institu-
tions of higher learning in the United States is dropping more than 5 percent annually. All these
factors make strategic planning essential for institutions of higher learning.
Population shifts nationally from the Northeast and Midwest to the Southeast and West are an-
other threat. To cope with severe external threats, educational institutions are more frequently using
strategic-management concepts, tools, and techniques. Richard Cyert, former president of Carnegie
Mellon University, said, “I believe we do a far better job of strategic management than any company
I know.” Because MBA programs are struggling, universities are selling MBA courses piecemeal and
offering various types of business certifications comprised of one to three online courses. For exam-
ple, Wharton offers a professional certificate in digital marketing comprised of several $600 courses,
as compared to their 900 MBA students who pay about $250,000 for their degrees.26 Harvard
Business School charges up to $1,500 for online 8-week classes like “Becoming a Better Manager.”
Ivy League schools in the Northeast are recruiting more heavily in the Southeast and West.
This trend represents a significant change in the competitive climate for attracting the best high
school graduates each year. Online degrees are a threat to traditional colleges and universities. “You
can put the kids to bed and go to law school,” says Andrew Rosen, chief operating officer of Kaplan
Education Centers, a subsidiary of the Washington Post Company. Reduced state and federal fund-
ing for higher education has resulted in more aggressive fundraising by colleges and universities.
Governmental Agencies and Departments
Federal, state, county, and municipal agencies and departments, such as police departments, cham-
bers of commerce, forestry associations, and health departments, are responsible for formulating,
implementing, and evaluating strategies that use taxpayers’ dollars in the most cost-effective way
to provide services and programs. Strategic-management concepts are generally required and thus
widely used to enable governmental organizations to be more effective and efficient.
Strategists in governmental organizations operate with less strategic autonomy than their
counterparts in private firms. Public enterprises generally cannot diversify into unrelated busi-
nesses or merge with other firms. Governmental strategists usually enjoy little freedom in alter-
ing the organization’s mission or redirecting objectives. Legislators and politicians often have
direct or indirect control over major decisions and resources. Strategic issues get discussed and
debated in the media and legislatures. Issues become politicized, resulting in fewer strategic
choice alternatives. However, government agencies and departments are finding that their em-
ployees get excited about the opportunity to participate in the strategic-management process and
thereby have an effect on the organization’s core value, vision, mission, objectives, strategies,
and policies. In addition, government agencies are using a strategic-management approach to
develop and substantiate formal requests for additional funding.
Small Firms
“Becoming your own boss” is a dream for millions of people and a reality for millions more.
Almost everyone wants to own a business—from teens and college students, who are signing
up for entrepreneurial courses in record numbers, to those older than age 65, who are forming
more companies every year. However, the percentage of people younger than age 30 who own
private businesses has reached a 24-year low in the United States, to about 3.6 percent, down
from 10.6 percent in 1989. The stereotype that 20-somethings are entrepreneurial risk-takers
is simply false, as millions of young adults struggle in underpaid jobs to maintain their own
household, rather than living with their parents. Reasons for the decline vary, but reduced bank
lending for small business startups, more indebtedness among young people, and increasing
numbers of competitors because of the Internet, all contribute to a more risk-averse, younger-
than-30 age group.
The strategic-management process is just as vital for small companies as it is for large firms.
From their inception, all organizations have a strategy, even if the strategy just evolves from day-
to-day operations. Even if conducted informally or by a single owner or entrepreneur, the strategic-
management process can significantly enhance small firms’ growth and prosperity. However, a lack
of strategic-management knowledge is a serious obstacle for many small business owners, as is a lack
of sufficient capital to exploit external opportunities and a day-to-day cognitive frame of reference.
Research indicates that strategic management in small firms is more informal than in large firms, but
small firms that engage in strategic management generally outperform those that do not.
180 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS
Figure 5-6 reveals that to gain and sustain competitive advantages,
firms must collect, analyze, and prioritize large amounts of informa-
tion to make excellent decisions. A “strategic plan” is very much
akin to an athletic team’s “game plan” in the sense that both a
strategic plan and a game plan are developed after carefully study-
ing rival firms (teams); success of the firm (or team) depends greatly
on that plan being a better plan than the rival’s plan. Any strategist,
much like any coach, puts his or her firm in great jeopardy of failure
if the opposing strategist (coach) has a better strategic plan.
Value chain analysis and benchmarking are required to create,
identify, nurture, and exploit sustained competitive advantages that
can lead to success. Parity (and commoditization) is becoming com-
monplace in both business and athletics; as parity increases, the
intrinsic value of the overarching strategic plan, or game plan, in-
creases exponentially. For example, in college football, great parity
Establish A Clear Vision & Mission
Evaluate & Monitor Results:
Take Corrective Actions; Adapt
To Change
Gain & Sustain Competitive Advantages
Formulate Strategies: Collect, Analyze, &
Prioritize Data Using Matrices; Establish A Clear Strategic Plan
Implement Strategies: Establish Structure; Allocate Resources; Motivate & Reward; Attract Customers; Manage Finances
FIGURE 5-6
How to Gain and Sustain Competitive Advantages
exists among teams such as Auburn, Alabama, Ohio State, Florida
State, Kansas State, Oregon, Arizona State, Michigan State, and
Michigan, so the game plan can make the difference between win-
ning and losing.
Most of the strategies described in this chapter would separately
yield substantial benefits for firms, but no firm has sufficient re-
sources to pursue more than a few basic strategies. Thus, strategists
must select from a number of excellent alternatives, eliminate other
excellent options, and consider risks, tradeoffs, costs, and other key
factors. Any strategist, or coach, that gets “outstrategized” by his
or her opposing strategist (or coach) puts his or her firm (or team) at
a major disadvantage. Being outcoached can doom even a superior
team (or firm). Therefore, in Chapter 6 we examine six additional
analytical tools being widely used by strategists to help develop a
winning strategic plan.
CHAPTER 5 • STRATEGIES IN ACTION 181
Chapter Summary The main appeal of any managerial approach is the expectation that it will enhance organiza-
tional performance. This is especially true of strategic management. Through involvement in
strategic-management activities, managers and employees achieve a better understanding of an
organization’s priorities and operations. Strategic management allows organizations to be effi-
cient, but more importantly, it allows them to be effective. Although strategic management does
not guarantee organizational success, the process allows proactive rather than reactive decision
making. Strategic management may represent a radical change in philosophy for some organi-
zations, so strategists must be trained to anticipate and constructively respond to questions and
issues as they arise. The strategies discussed in this chapter can represent a new beginning for
many firms, especially if managers and employees in the organization understand and support
the plan for action.
This chapter reveals that firms can “grow” internally (organically) or by acquiring or coop-
erating with other firms. Guidelines are given in this chapter for when firms have been most suc-
cessful historically pursuing which strategies by what means. Companies and industries change,
but the material presented in this chapter should be relevant and useful for decades to come as
companies strive to gain and sustain competitive advantage. In a nutshell, this chapter empha-
sizes that companies need to continuously manage and improve their value chain activities rang-
ing from raw material securement to end product marketing to be successful.
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS
Numerous alternative strategies and means to achieve those strat-
egies, as described in this chapter, could benefit any firm, but your
strategic-management case analysis should result in specific rec-
ommendations whereby you decide what actions will best pro-
vide the firm with competitive advantages. Ultimately you will be
transforming some of the general strategies and actions defined in
this chapter into specific recommendations with projected costs.
Because your recommendations with costs comprise the most im-
portant pages or slides in your case project, Chapter 6 will go into
further detail on this topic. However, in giving an oral written pre-
sentation or paper, introduce bits of your recommendations early
to “pave the way” for costs shown later on your recommendations
page. Your recommendations page(s) itself should, therefore, be
a summary of suggestions mentioned throughout your paper or
presentation, rather than being a surprise shock to your reader
or audience. You may even want to include with your recommen-
dations insight as to why certain other strategies and means to
achieve those actions were not chosen for implementation. That
information, too, should be anchored in the notion of competitive
advantage and disadvantage with respect to perceived costs and
benefits. You may ask: “What is the difference between recom-
mendations and strategies?” The answer is: “Recommendations
are strategies generated and selected for implementation.”
Key Terms and Concepts acquisition (p. 176)
backward integration (p. 161)
bankruptcy (p. 167)
benchmarking (p. 171)
blue ocean strategy (p. 174)
combination strategy (p. 158)
core competence (p. 170)
cost leadership (p. 172)
de-integration (p. 162)
differentiation (p. 172)
diversification strategies (p. 165)
divestiture (p. 167)
financial objectives (p. 157)
first-mover advantages (p. 177)
forward integration (p. 160)
franchising (p. 161)
friendly merger (p. 176)
generic strategies (p. 172)
horizontal integration (p. 160)
hostile takeover (p. 176)
integration strategies (p. 160)
intensive strategies (p. 163)
joint venture (p. 174)
leveraged buyout (LBO) (p. 176)
liquidation (p. 168)
long-term objectives (p. 156)
market development (p. 163)
market penetration (p. 163)
merger (p. 176)
organic growth (p. 174)
product development (p. 164)
related diversification (p. 165)
retrenchment (p. 166)
strategic objectives (p. 157)
turnaround strategy (p. 166)
unrelated diversification (p. 165)
value chain (p. 169)
value chain analysis (VCA) (p. 169)
vertical integration (p. 160)
Issues for Review and Discussion 5-1. Define and discuss vertical integration.
5-2. Identify the advantages and disadvantages of vertical
integration.
5-3. Define and give an example of a “blue ocean strategy.”
5-4. Identify and discuss three common ways to build capa-
bilities internally.
5-5. What are the advantages of being a first mover in a par-
ticular industry?
5-6. What are the two key differences between for-profit and
not-for-profit organizations, besides one type seeks to
make a profit and the other does not.
5-7. Define and discuss whether it is best for a small firm to
BUILD, BORROW, or BUY to grow.
5-8. Give reasons why so many companies are divesting
(spinning off) key segments or divisions of the firm.
5-9. When is a leveraged buyout an appropriate strategy to
pursue?
5-10. Give actual examples of how Amazon is forward inte-
grating and diversifying at the same time.
5-11. Explain the following statement: Unlike with cost lead-
ership where a firm examines how to reduce costs along
its value chain, with differentiation one looks to maxi-
mize value along each level of the value chain.
5-12. Define and explain benchmarking.
5-13. The number and dollar value of hostile takeovers are on
the rise. Give two reasons for this trend.
5-14. How are for-profit firms different from nonprofit firms
in terms of business? What are the implications for stra-
tegic planning?
5-15. If the CEO of a beverage company such as Dr Pepper
Snapple asked you whether backward or forward in-
tegration would be better for the firm, how would you
respond?
5-16. In order of importance, list the characteristics of objectives.
5-17. In order of importance, list the benefits of objectives.
5-18. Called de-integration, there appears to be a growing
trend for firms to become less forward integrated.
Discuss why.
5-19. Called de-integration, there appears to be a growing
trend for firms to become less backward integrated.
Discuss why.
5-20. What conditions, externally and internally, would be
desired or necessary for a firm to diversify?
5-21. There is a growing trend of increased collaboration
among competitors. List the benefits and drawbacks of
this practice.
5-22. List major benefits of forming a joint venture to achieve
desired objectives.
182 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
CHAPTER 5 • STRATEGIES IN ACTION 183
5-23. List major benefits of acquiring another firm to achieve
desired objectives.
5-24. List reasons why many mergers or acquisitions histori-
cally have failed.
5-25. Can you think of any reasons why not-for-profit firms
would benefit less from doing strategic planning than
for-profit companies?
5-26. Discuss how important it is for a college football or bas-
ketball team to have a good game plan for the big rival
game this coming weekend. How much time and effort
do you feel the coaching staff puts into developing that
game plan? Why is such time and effort essential?
5-27. How does strategy formulation differ for a small versus
a large organization? How does it differ for a for-profit
versus a nonprofit organization?
5-28. Give hypothetical examples of market penetration, mar-
ket development, and product development.
5-29. Give hypothetical examples of forward integration,
backward integration, and horizontal integration.
5-30. Give hypothetical examples of related and unrelated
diversification.
5-31. Give hypothetical examples of joint venture, retrench-
ment, divestiture, and liquidation.
5-32. Are hostile takeovers unethical? Why or why not?
5-33. What are the major advantages and disadvantages of
diversification?
5-34. What are the major advantages and disadvantages of an
integrative strategy?
5-35. How does strategic management differ in for-profit and
nonprofit organizations?
5-36. Why is it not advisable to pursue too many strategies at once?
5-37. Compare and contrast financial objectives with strategic
objectives. Which type is more important in your opin-
ion? Why?
5-38. How do the levels of strategy differ in a large firm ver-
sus a small firm?
5-39. List 11 types of strategies. Give a hypothetical example
of each strategy listed.
5-40. Define and explain first-mover advantages.
5-41. Give some advantages and disadvantages of cooperative
versus competitive strategies.
5-42. What are the two major differences between for-profit
and not-for-profit organizations?
5-43. Give some guidelines when forward integration is an
excellent strategy to pursue.
5-44. Give some guidelines when backward integration is an
excellent strategy to pursue.
5-45. Give some guidelines when horizontal integration is an
excellent strategy to pursue.
5-46. Give some guidelines when market penetration is an
excellent strategy to pursue.
5-47. Give some guidelines when market development is an
excellent strategy to pursue.
5-48. Give some guidelines when product development is an
excellent strategy to pursue.
5-49. Give some guidelines when divestiture is an excellent
strategy to pursue.
5-50. Give some guidelines when retrenchment is an excellent
strategy to pursue.
5-51. Give some guidelines when liquidation is an excellent
strategy to pursue.
5-52. Give some guidelines when unrelated diversification is
an excellent strategy to pursue.
5-53. Give some guidelines when related diversification is an
excellent strategy to pursue.
5-54. What is the difference between recommendations and
strategies?
5-55. Why do Annual Reports often state objectives in re-
ally vague terms, such as to “hire good people” or to
“stay ahead of trends”; why should strategists avoid
including such vagueness in preparing a strategic
plan?
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
SET 1: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR COCA-COLA
EXERCISE 5A
Develop Hypothetical Coca-Cola Company Strategies
Purpose
Chapter 5 identifies, defines, and exemplifies 11 key types of strategies available to firms. This exer-
cise will give you practice formulating possible strategies within each broad category.
Instructions
Step 1 Review the Cohesion Case and your answers to the prior end-of-chapter assurance-of-learn-
ing exercises.
Step 2 For the 11 strategies given in Table 5-3, identify a feasible alternative strategy that could
reasonably benefit the Coca-Cola Company.
EXERCISE 5B
Should Coca-Cola Build, Borrow, or Buy in 2020–2021?
Purpose
Comparing what is planned versus what you recommend is an important part of case analysis. Do not
recommend what the firm actually plans, unless in-depth analysis of the situation reveals those strate-
gies to be best among all feasible alternatives. This exercise gives you experience conducting research
to determine what a firm is doing in 2018–2019 and should do in 2020–2021.
Instructions
Step 1 Go to the Coca-Cola corporate website and click on Press Center. Read through the most
recent ten press releases.
Step 2 Determine two strategies that Coca-Cola is actually pursuing. Give some pros and cons of
those two strategies in light of the guidelines presented in this chapter.
Step 3 Determine two strategies that Coca-Cola is not pursuing. Give some pros and cons of those
two strategies in light of the guidelines presented in this chapter.
SET 2: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR MY UNIVERSITY
EXERCISE 5C
Develop Alternative Strategies for Your University
Purpose
It is important for representatives from all areas of a college or university to identify and discuss al-
ternative strategies that could benefit faculty, students, alumni, staff, and other constituencies. As you
complete this exercise, notice the learning and understanding that occurs as people express differences
of opinion. Recall that the process of planning is more important than the document.
Instructions
Step 1 Recall or locate the external opportunity and threat and internal strength and weakness fac-
tors that you identified as part of Exercise 1A (p. 65). If you did not do that exercise, discuss
now as a class important external and internal factors facing your college or university.
Step 2 Identify and put on the screen 10 alternative strategies that you feel could benefit your col-
lege or university. Your proposed actions should allow the institution to capitalize on par-
ticular strengths, improve on certain weaknesses, avoid external threats, or take advantage
of particular external opportunities. Number the strategies as they are written on the screen
from 1 to 10. State each strategy in specific terms, such as “Build two new dormitories,”
rather than in vague terms, such as “Do market penetration.”
Step 3 On a separate sheet of paper, number from 1 to 10. Everyone in class individually should
rate the strategies identified, using a 1 to 3 scale, where 1 = I do not support implementation,
2 = I am neutral about implementation, and 3 = I strongly support implementation. In rating
the strategies, recognize that no institution has sufficient funds to do everything desired or
potentially beneficial.
Step 4 Your professor will now pick up the rating sheets and have a student add up the scores for each
strategy. That is, sum the ratings for each strategy, so that a prioritized list of recommended
strategies is obtained. The higher the sum, the more attractive the strategy. This prioritized list
reflects the collective wisdom of your class. Strategies with the highest score are deemed best.
Step 5 Discuss how this process could enable organizations to achieve understanding and commit-
ment from individuals.
184 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
CHAPTER 5 • STRATEGIES IN ACTION 185
SET 3: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR MYSELF
EXERCISE 5D
The Key to Personal Strategic Planning: Simultaneously Build and Borrow Purpose
As a means to achieve various strategies, companies usually choose between “build, borrow, and buy”
to grow. However, individuals must build and borrow. This exercise gives you insight on how to build
and borrow to launch a successful career.
Instructions
Step 1 List four ways you can BUILD (i.e., grow internally) to advance your career opportunities.
Step 2 List four ways you can BORROW (i.e., grow using others) to advance your career
opportunities.
Step 3 Compare and contrast your lists with those of other students. Collectively decide on the four
best BUILD and four best BORROW means to achieve your objectives.
SET 4: INDIVIDUAL VERSUS GROUP STRATEGIC PLANNING
EXERCISE 5E
What Is the Best Mix of Strategies for Coca-Cola Company? Purpose
Strategic-management classes are usually composed of team of students who perform case analysis.
The purpose of this exercise is to examine whether individual decision making is better than group de-
cision making. Academic research suggests that groups make better decisions than individuals about
80 percent of the time. No company has sufficient resources to implement all strategies that would
benefit the firm. Thus, tough choices have to be made. Ranking strategies as to their relative attrac-
tiveness (1 = most attractive, 2 = next most attractive, etc.) is a commonly used procedure to help
determine which actions to actually fund. Often, a group of managers will jointly rank strategies and
compare their ranking to other groups. This ranking process may be used to determine the relative at-
tractiveness of feasible alternative strategies.
The purpose of this exercise is to examine how well students understand the advantages and dis-
advantages of a firm pursuing the strategic options described in Chapter 5. This is a fun exercise that
also gives you experience selecting among feasible alternative strategies for a company.
Situation
Coca-Cola is doing really well, but wants to do better. Coca-Cola is trying to decide what strategies
would be best for the company going forward. Seven strategies discussed in Chapter 5 are being seri-
ously considered, as listed.
Strategies
Production operations
1. Forward integration: Build 100 Coca-Cola stores.
2. Backward integration: Purchase a 10,000-acre sugarcane farm to gain better control over sup-
plies needed for Coca-Cola retail stores globally.
3. Horizontal integration: Acquire four beverage brands from Dr Pepper Snapple.
4. Market development: Build a manufacturing plant in Africa to better serve that continent.
5. Market penetration: Launch an advertising, promotion, and publicity campaign globally to shift
public perception of Coca-Cola from unhealthy to healthy.
6. Product development: Develop, produce, and launch a full line of organic juices.
7. Unrelated diversification: Acquire a construction company to handle building new stores and
manufacturing plants and distribution centers globally.
Task
Rank the seven strategies listed in terms of their relative attractiveness for Coca-Cola, where 1 = the most
attractive strategy to pursue, 2 = the next most attractive strategy, etc. to 7 = the least attractive strategy
to pursue. Rank the strategies first as an individual, and then as part a group. Then, listen to the EXPERT
ranking and rationale. In this manner, this exercise enables you to determine what individual(s) and what
group(s) in class make the best strategic decisions (i.e., that come closest to the expert ranking).
Steps
1. Fill in Column 1 in Table 5-9 to reveal your individual ranking of the relative attractiveness of
the proposed strategies. For example, if you feel backward integration is the seventh-best op-
tion, then in Table 5-9, enter a 7 in Column 1 beside Backward Integration.
2. Fill in Column 2 in Table 5-9 to reveal your group’s ranking of the relative attractiveness of the
proposed strategies. For example, if your group feels backward integration is the third-best op-
tion, then enter 3 into Column 2 beside backward integration.
3. Fill in Column 3 in Table 5-9 to reveal the expert’s ranking of the relative attractiveness of the
proposed strategies.
4. Fill in Column 4 in Table 5-9 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 1 and Column
3 to reveal how well you performed as an individual in this exercise. (Note: Absolute difference
disregards negative numbers.)
5. Fill in Column 5 in Table 5-9 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 2 and Column 3
to reveal how well your group performed in this exercise.
6. Sum Column 4. Sum Column 5.
7. Compare the Column 4 sum with the Column 5 sum. If your Column 4 sum is less than your
Column 5 sum, then you performed better as an individual than as a group. If you did better
than your group, you did excellent.
8. The Individual Winner(s): The individual(s) with the lowest Column 4 sum is the WINNER.
9. The Group Winners(s): The group(s) with the lowest Column 5 score is the WINNER.
TABLE 5-9 Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola: Individual versus Group Decision Making
Column Number
The Strategies (1) My
Rank (2) Group
Rank (3) ExPERT
Rank (4) Absolute
Value 1-3 (5) Absolute
Value 2-3
1. Backward integration
Purchase sugarcane farm
2. Forward integration
Build 100 stores
3. Horizontal integration
Acquire four Dr Pepper brands
4. Market development
Build manufacturing plant
in Africa
5. Market penetration
Launch marketing campaign
6. Product development
Launch a full line of organic
candy juices
7. Unrelated diversification
Acquire a construction company
186 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
CHAPTER 5 • STRATEGIES IN ACTION 187
MINI-CASE ON FACEBOOK (FB)
Web Resources 1. The author website provides continuous updates to this chap-
ter from both an academic journal and newspaper/magazine
perspective. www.strategyclub.com
SHOULD FACEBOOK ACQUIRE, COOPERATE, OR JUST STAY FIERCE RIVALS WITH LINKEDIN? This chapter discussed rival firms merging, cooperating, or staying rivals. Headquartered in Menlo
Park, California, Facebook is by far the largest online social-networking company in the world.
Headquartered in Mountain View, California, LinkedIn is the largest online professional network de-
signed to help members find jobs, connect with other professionals, and locate business opportunities.
The two companies are becoming more and more rivals as their business model becomes more and
more similar. Both websites are free for members to join and both earn money through advertis-
ing spots. LinkedIn also earns revenue through its job-listing service. Companies post job openings
on LinkedIn and search for candidates on LinkedIn—particularly advantageous for students nearing
graduation. Facebook wants some of this action. Members of LinkedIn tend to be white collar and
highly educated; 45 percent of LinkedIn visitors earn more than $75,000 per year. Facebook has
nearly 3 billion members across the whole economic spectrum of income.
As evidence of the two firms gravitating toward each other in products and services, LinkedIn re-
cently rolled out its video uploading feature, trying to become more like Facebook. Facebook is testing
new professional (rather than social) features trying to take market share from LinkedIn. Both com-
panies’ primary strategy is product development. Both Facebook and LinkedIn continually develop
new and improved, visible and invisible, business analytics models to gather and assimilate data, and
then sell the data. LinkedIn has developed a big-data framework dubbed Gobblin that helps the social
network collect tons of data from a variety of sources so that it can be analyzed in its Hadoop-based
data warehouses. The company also houses a variety of internal data (information pertaining to mem-
ber profiles, user actions such as comments and clicking, and so on) in databases such as Espresso
and event-logging systems such as Kafka. Also, LinkedIn takes in data from outside sources—for
instance, Salesforce and Twitter. Facebook is testing a mentorship feature to help Facebook members
identify and spend time with professionals based on common interests. Facebook is also testing a
LinkedIn-like resume feature. Many people prefer to keep their social activities (Facebook) separate
from their professional activities (LinkedIn), but as these two firms become more and more similar,
separation becomes cloudier.
Questions
1. Should Facebook develop features to allow people to efficiently hunt for jobs on their website,
including posting their professional vita?
2. Should Facebook develop features to allow businesses to hunt for employees on their website,
including posting job descriptions and job vacancies?
3. Should LinkedIn develop features to allow people to post personal pictures and videos on their
website?
4. Should LinkedIn and Facebook merge? What are the pros and cons of merger for the two firms?
5. Should LinkedIn and Facebook cooperate rather than merge? Identify and describe three ways
the two rival firms could cooperate in mutually beneficial ways.
Source: Company documents and a variety of sources.
Current Readings Arkadiy, V. Sakhartov. “Economies of Scope, Resource
Relatedness, and the Dynamics of Corporate
Diversification.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 11
(November 2017): 2168–2188. Greve, Henrich R., and Cyndi Man Zhang. “Institutional
Logics and Power Sources: Merger and Acquisition Decisions.” Academy of Management Journal 60, no. 2 (April 2017): 671–694.
Huang, Zhi, Hong (Susan) Zhu, and Daniel J. Brass. “Cross- Border Acquisitions and the Asymmetric Effect of Power Distance Value Difference on Long-Term Post-Acquisition Performance.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 4 (April 2017): 972–991.
Jap, Sandy, A. Noel Gould, and Annie H. Liu. “Managing Mergers: Why People First Can Improve Brand and IT Consolidations.” Business Horizons 60, no. 1 (January 2017): 123–134.
Jiang, Han, Jun Xia, Albert Cannella, and Ting Xiao. “Do Ongoing Networks Block Out New Friends? Reconciling the Embeddedness Constraint Dilemma on New Alliance Partner Addition.” Strategic Management Journal 39, Issue 1 (January 2018): 217–241.
Kistruck, Geoffrey M., Robert B. Lount Jr., Brett R Smith, Brian J. Bergman Jr., and Todd W. Moss. “Cooperation vs. Competition: Alternative Goal Structures for Motivating Groups in a Resource Scarce Environment.” Academy of Management Journal 59, no. 4 (August 2016): 1174–1198.
Kuusela, Pasi, Thomas Keil, and Markku Maula. “Driven by Aspirations, But in What Direction? Performance Shortfalls, Slack Resources, and Resource-Consuming vs. Resource-Freeing Organizational Change.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 5 (May 2017): 1101–1120.
Li, Jing, Jun Xia, and Zhouyu Lin. “Cross-Border Acquisitions by State-Owned Firms: How do Legitimacy Concerns Affect the Completion and Duration of Their Acquisitions?” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 9 (September 2017): 1915–1934.
Lieberman, Marvine B., Roberto Garcia-Castro, and Natarajan Balasubramanian. “Measuring Value Creation and Appropriation in Firms: The VCA Model.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 6 (June 2017): 1193–1211.
Lyons, Elizabeth, and Laurina Zhang. “Who Does (Not) Benefit from Entrepreneurship Programs?” Strategic Management Journal 39, no. 1 (January 2018): 85–112.
Mackey, Tyson B., Jay B. Barney, and Jeffrey P. Dotson. “Corporate Diversification and the Value of Individual Firms: A Bayesian Approach.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 2 (February 2017): 322–341.
Marks, Mitchell Lee, Philip Mirvis, and Ron Ashkenas. “Surviving M&A.” Harvard Business Review 95, Issue 2 (March–April 2017): 145–149.
McCann, Brian T., and Mona Bahl. “The Influence of Competition from Informal Firms on New Product Development.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 7 (July 2017): 1518–1535.
Mellewigt, Thomas, Adeline Thomas, Ingo Weller, and Edward Zajac. “Alliance or Acquisition? A Mechanisms-Based, Policy-Capturing Analysis.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 12 (December 2017): 235–2369.
Moeen, Mahka. “Entry into Nascent Industries: Disentangling a Firm’s Capability Portfolio at the Time of Investment Versus Market Entry.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 10 (October 2017): 1986–2004.
Panico, Claudio. “Strategic Interaction in Alliances.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 8 (August 2017): 1646–1667.
Rabier, Maryiane. “Acquisition Motives and the Distribution of Acquisition Performance.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 13 (December 2017): 2666–2681.
Vidal, Elena, and Will Mitchell. “Virtuous or Vicious Cycles? The Role of Divestitures as a Complementary Penrose Effect within Resource-Based Theory.” Strategic Management Journal 39, no. 1 (January 2018): 131–154.
Wassmer, Ulrich, Sali Li, and Anoop Madhok. “Resource Ambidexterity Through Alliance Portfolios and Firm Performance.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 2 (February 2017): 384–394.
Zhou, Yue M., and Xiang Wan. “Product Variety, Sourcing Complexity, and the Bottleneck of Coordination.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 8 (August 2017): 1569–1587.
Zhou, Yue Maggie, and Xiang Wan. “Product Variety and Vertical Integration.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 5 (May 2017): 1134–1150.
Endnotes 1. John Byrne, “Strategic Planning—It’s Back,”
BusinessWeek (August 26, 1996): 46.
2. Steven C. Brandt, Strategic Planning in Emerging
Companies (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1981).
Reprinted with permission of the publisher.
3. F. Hansen and M. Smith, “Crisis in Corporate America:
The Role of Strategy,” Business Horizons (January–
February 2003): 9.
4. Based on F. R. David, “How Do We Choose among
Alternative Growth Strategies?” Managerial Planning 33,
no. 4 (January–February 1985): 14–17, 22.
5. Ibid.
6. Kenneth Davidson, “Do Megamergers Make Sense?”
Journal of Business Strategy 7, no. 3 (Winter 1987): 45.
7. David, “How Do We Choose.”
8. Ibid.
9. Ibid.
10. Ibid.
11. Arthur Thompson Jr., A. J. Strickland III, and John
Gamble, Crafting and Executing Strategy: Text and
Readings (New York: McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2005), 241.
12. Michael E. Porter, Competitive Strategy: Techniques for
Analyzing Industries and Competitors (New York: Free
Press, 1980), 53–57, 318–319.
188 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
CHAPTER 5 • STRATEGIES IN ACTION 189
13. David, “How Do We Choose.”
14. Ibid.
15. Ibid.
16. Ibid.
17. Ibid
18. Porter, Competitive Advantage, 34-44.
19. Porter, Competitive Advantage, 160–162.
20. Porter, Competitive Advantage, 160–162.
21. https://www.audible.com/pd/Business/
Summary-of-Blue-Ocean-Strategy-by-W-Chan-
Kim-and-Renee-A-Mauborgne-Audiobook/
B01L06M29Y?gclid=Cj0KCQiA_5_QBRC9ARI
sADVww15mWwiWvtZ5ci2wnBjmZlXczGUkKktkDj
WHt9wQ7pzwDYIi_R3UxSkaAt7QEALw_wcB&
pcrid=158258695641&cvo_pid=5075902449
&mkwid=DSATitle_dc&pmt=b&cvosrc=ppc+dynamic+
search.google.97175169&cvo_crid=158258695641&
pkw=&source_code=GO1GB907OSH060513
22. Kathryn Rudie Harrigan, “Joint Ventures: Linking for a
Leap Forward,” Planning Review 14, no. 4 (July–August
1986): 10.
23. Matthew Schifrin, “Partner or Perish,” Forbes (May 21,
2001): 32.
24. David, “How Do We Choose.”
25. Gary Hamel, Yves Doz, and C. K. Prahalad, “Collaborate
with Your Competitors—and Win,” Harvard Business
Review 67, no. 1 (January–February 1989): 133.
26. Kelsey Gee, “Do Free Business Courses Pay Off?” Wall
Street Journal, September 7, 2017, B6.
190
6
Strategy Formulation
Feedback Loop
Strategy Implementation
Strategy Evaluation
Chapter 10: Business Ethics, Environmental Sustainability, and Social Responsibility
Chapter 11: Global and International Issues
Strategy Evaluation
and Governance Chapter 9
Implementing Strategies:
Finance and Accounting
Issues Chapter 8
Implementing Strategies:
Management and Marketing
Issues Chapter 7
Business Vision and
Mission Chapter 2
Strategies in Action Chapter 5
Strategy Analysis and
Choice Chapter 6
The Internal
Assessment Chapter 4
The External Assessment Chapter 3
FIGURE 6- 1
The Comprehensive, Integrative Strategic-Management Model
Source: Fred R. David, “How Companies Define Their Mission,” Long Range Planning 22, no. 1 (February 1989): 91. See also Anik Ratnaningsih, Nadjadji Anwar, Patdono Suwignjo, and Putu Artama Wiguna, “Balance Scorecard of David’s Strategic Modeling at Industrial Business for National Construction Contractor of Indonesia,” Journal of Mathematics and Technology , no. 4, (October 2010): 20.
191
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following:
6- 1. Describe the strategy analysis and choice process.
6- 2. Diagram and explain the three-stage strategy-formulation analytical framework.
6- 3. Construct and apply the Strengths-Weaknesses-Opportunities-Threats (SWOT) Matrix.
6- 4. Construct and apply the Strategic Position and Action Evaluation (SPACE) Matrix.
6- 5. Construct and apply the Boston Consulting Group (BCG) Matrix.
6- 6. Construct and apply the Internal-External (IE) Matrix.
6- 7. Construct and apply the Grand Strategy Matrix.
6- 8. Construct and apply the Quantitative Strategic Planning Matrix (QSPM).
6- 9. Explain how to estimate costs associated with recommendations.
6- 10. Discuss the role of organizational culture in strategic analysis and choice.
6- 11. Identify and discuss important political considerations in strategy analysis and choice.
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
The following exercises are found at the end of this chapter:
SET 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 6A: Perform a SWOT Analysis for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 6B: Develop a SPACE Matrix for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 6C: Develop a BCG Matrix for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 6D: Develop a QSPM for Coca-Cola
SET 2: Strategic Planning for My University
EXERCISE 6E: Develop a BCG Matrix for My University
SET 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability
EXERCISE 6F: Perform QSPM Analysis on Myself
EXERCISE 6G: A Template Competency Test
SET 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
EXERCISE 6H: How Severe Are Various Subjective Threats in Strategic Planning?
Strategy Analysis and Choice
MyLab Management
Improve Your Grade!
If your instructor is using MyLab Management, visit www.pearson.com/mylab/management
for videos, simulations, and writing exercises.
192 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
S trategy analysis and choice largely involve making subjective decisions based on objective
information. Prior chapters in this text focused on obtaining the objective information
needed in this chapter to formulate strategies and decide upon particular strategies to
implement. This chapter introduces important concepts that enable strategists to generate fea-
sible alternatives, evaluate those alternatives, and choose a specific course of action. Behavioral
aspects of strategy formulation are also covered in this chapter, including politics, culture,
ethics, and social responsibility considerations. Modern tools for formulating strategies are
described. Material in this chapter, as well as in prior chapters, largely follows the flow of the
Excel strategic-planning template at www.strategyclub.com that is available for students to
use freely, if desired.
The CEO of Hobby Lobby, David Green, is an exemplary strategist performing strategic
planning “right by the book.”
Strategy Analysis and Choice As indicated by Figure 6-1 with white shading, this chapter focuses on generating and evaluat-
ing alternative strategies, as well as selecting strategies to pursue. Strategy analysis and choice
seek to determine alternative courses of action that could best enable the firm to achieve its mis-
sion and objectives. The firm’s present strategies, objectives, vision, and mission, coupled with
the external and internal audit information, provide a basis for generating and evaluating feasible
alternative strategies. This systematic approach is an effective way to avoid an organizational
crisis. Rudin’s Law states, “When a crisis forces choosing among alternatives, most people
choose the worst possible one.”
Unless underlying EFE, CPM, and IFE matrices produced really low total weighted scores,
alternative strategies will likely represent incremental steps that move the firm from its present
position to a desired future position. Alternative strategies should not come out of the wild blue
yonder; they are derived from the firm’s vision, mission, objectives, external audit, and internal
audit; they are consistent with, or build on, past strategies that have worked well.
LO 6.1
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED
David Green, CEO of Hobby Lobby The largest arts-and-crafts home décor company in the world, Hobby
Lobby is a privately held, U.S. firm with $4.3 billion in annual sales
from 750 stores. CEO David Green heads up Hobby Lobby and says
“the secret to being a great manager is to manage by the book.” The
book Mr. Green refers to is the Bible, as evidenced by his company
being closed on Sundays to allow employees to be with their families
and attend a house of worship. All Hobby Lobby employees earn
more than twice the federal minimum wage; the company offers
generous employee benefits; and all stores close at 8 pm. Mr. Green
says “The Bible has everything one needs to know about good lead-
ership.” Hobby Lobby employees are trained to always be positive;
there is very little employee turnover, even though turnover among
other retail company’s hourly employees is about 65 percent. Hobby
Lobby has zero long-term debt since Mr. Green says: “The Bible
warns against becoming a slave to debt.” About one-half of Hobby
Lobby’s pretax earnings are donated to charities as Mr. Green reveals
in his new book “Giving It All Away … And Getting It Back Again.”
Mr. Green’s leadership guides include to: “always put integrity at the
core of your business; never compromise principles to make more
money; and make sure you never stop thinking about the customer’s
perspective.” CEO Green is an American icon and an “exemplary
strategist.”
Source: Based on Scott Smith, “Why Retail’s David Green Manages By ‘The
Book,’ Investor’s Business Daily (May 22, 2017): A4.
A rc
h iV
IZ /S
h u tt
er st
o ck
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 193
The Process of Generating and Selecting Strategies
Strategists never consider all feasible strategies that could benefit the firm because there is an
infinite number of possible actions and an infinite number of ways to implement those actions.
Therefore, a manageable set of the most attractive alternative strategies must be developed, ex-
amined, prioritized, and selected. The advantages, disadvantages, trade-offs, costs, and benefits
of these strategies should be determined.
Identifying and evaluating strategies should involve many of the managers and employees
who previously assembled the organizational vision and mission statements, performed the
external audit, and conducted the internal audit. Representatives from each department and
division of the firm should be included in this process, as was the case in previous strategy-
formulation activities. Involvement provides the best opportunity for managers and employees
to gain an understanding of what the firm is doing and why and to become committed to helping
the firm accomplish its objectives.
All participants in the strategy analysis and choice activity should have the firm’s external
and internal audit information available. This information, coupled with the firm’s vision and
mission statements, will help participants crystallize in their own minds particular strategies
that they believe could benefit the firm most. Creativity should be encouraged in this thought
process. At a bare minimum, SWOT analysis should be performed by participants as described
in this chapter. Additionally, BCG, IE, SPACE, GRAND, and QSPM analyses are always im-
mensely helpful in strategic planning.
The Strategy-Formulation Analytical Framework Important strategy-formulation techniques can be integrated into a three-stage decision-making
framework, as shown in Figure 6-2. The tools presented in this framework are applicable to all
sizes and types of organizations and can help strategists identify, evaluate, and select strategies.
The tools enable firms to break down complex data and ultimately establish an effective strategic
plan. The tools shown anchor the analytical strategic-planning process advocated by the authors
and this text.
All nine techniques included in the strategy-formulation analytical framework require
the integration of intuition and analysis. Autonomous divisions in an organization commonly use
strategy-formulation techniques to develop strategies and objectives. Divisional analyses provide
a basis for identifying, evaluating, and selecting among alternative corporate-level strategies.
Strategists themselves, not analytical tools, are always responsible and accountable for
strategic decisions. Lenz emphasized that the shift from a words-oriented to a numbers-
oriented planning process can give rise to a false sense of certainty; it can reduce dialogue,
LO 6.2
STAGE 1: THE INPUT STAGE
Competitive Profile
Matrix (CPM)
External Factor Evaluation (EFE)
Matrix
Internal Factor Evaluation (IFE)
Matrix
STAGE 2: THE MATCHING STAGE
Strategic Position and Action Evaluation (SPACE) Matrix
Boston Consulting Group (BCG)
Matrix
Internal-External (IE) Matrix
Strengths-Weaknesses- Opportunities-Threats
(SWOT) Matrix
Grand Strategy Matrix
STAGE 3: THE DECISION STAGE
Quantitative Strategic Planning Matrix (QSPM)
FIGURE 6-2
The Strategy-Formulation Analytical Framework
194 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
discussion, and argument as a means for exploring understandings, testing assumptions, and
fostering organizational learning.1 Strategists, therefore, must be wary of this possibility and use
analytical tools wisely to facilitate, rather than to diminish, communication. Without objective
information and analysis, however, personal biases, politics, prejudices, emotions, personalities,
and halo error (the tendency to put too much weight on a single factor) often play too dominant
of a role in the strategy-formulation process, undermining effectiveness. Thus, an analytical ap-
proach is essential for achieving maximum effectiveness in strategic planning.
Stage 1: The Input Stage
Stage 1 of the strategy-formulation analytical framework consists of the External Factor
Evaluation (EFE) Matrix, the Internal Factor Evaluation (IFE) Matrix, and the Competitive
Profile Matrix (CPM). Called the input stage, Stage 1 summarizes the basic input information
needed to formulate strategies. Procedures for developing an EFE, CPM, and IFE Matrix were
presented in Chapters 3 and 4, respectively. Information derived from those analytical tools
provides basic input information for the matching and decision stage matrices described in this
chapter. The input tools require strategists to quantify subjectivity during early stages of the
strategy-formulation process. Making small decisions in the input matrices regarding the relative
importance of external and internal factors allows strategists to more effectively generate, priori-
tize, evaluate, and select among alternative strategies. Good intuitive judgment is always needed
in determining appropriate weights and ratings, but keep in mind that a rating of 3, for example,
is mathematically 50 percent larger than a rating of 2, so small differences matter.
Stage 2: The Matching Stage
Stage 2, called the matching stage, focuses on generating feasible alternative strategies by align-
ing key external and internal factors. Stage 2 techniques include the Strengths-Weaknesses-
Opportunities-Threats (SWOT) Matrix, the Strategic Position and Action Evaluation (SPACE)
Matrix, the Boston Consulting Group (BCG) Matrix, the Internal-External (IE) Matrix, and the
Grand Strategy Matrix.
Strategy is sometimes defined as the match an organization makes between its internal
resources and skills and the external opportunities and risks facing the firm.2 The matching
stage of the strategy-formulation framework consists of five techniques that can be used in
any sequence: the SWOT Matrix, the SPACE Matrix, the BCG Matrix, the IE Matrix, and the
Grand Strategy Matrix. These tools rely on information derived from the input stage to match
external opportunities and threats with internal strengths and weaknesses. Matching external
and internal key factors is essential for effectively generating feasible alternative strategies. In
most situations, external and internal relationships are complex, and matching requires multiple
alignments for each strategy generated. Successful matching of key external and internal factors
depends on those underlying key factors being actionable, quantitative, comparative, and divi-
sional (AQCD) to the extent possible. (Recall that the basic concept of matching was introduced
in Chapter 1).
Stage 3: The Decision Stage
Stage 3, called the decision stage, involves a single technique, the Quantitative Strategic
Planning Matrix (QSPM). A QSPM uses input information from Stage 1 to objectively evaluate
feasible alternative strategies identified in Stage 2. It reveals the relative attractiveness of alterna-
tive strategies and thus provides an objective basis for selecting specific strategies. The QSPM is
a more robust way to determine the relative attractiveness of strategies than the summed ranking
method described previously.
Alternative strategies proposed by SWOT, BCG, IE, SPACE, and GRAND analyses should
be considered and discussed in a meeting or series of meetings. Proposed strategies should be
listed in writing. When all feasible strategies identified by participants are stated in specific
terms and understood, the strategies should be individually rated in order of attractiveness by
each participant, with 1 = should not be implemented, 2 = possibly should be implemented,
3 = probably should be implemented, and 4 = definitely should be implemented. Then, collect
the participants’ rating sheets and sum the ratings given for each strategy to end up with a useful
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 195
ranking of the strategies. Strategies with the highest sums are deemed the most attractive, so this
process results in a prioritized list of best strategies that reflects the collective wisdom of the
group. Rather than, or in conjunction with, this ranking method, the QSPM, described later in
this chapter, offers a more robust procedure to determine the relative attractiveness of alternative
strategies.
The SWOT Matrix Recall that SWOT analysis was introduced in Chapter 1 (p. 42). There are four sets of strate-
gies developed in SWOT analysis: SO, WO, ST, and WT. SO strategies use a firm’s internal
strengths to take advantage of external opportunities. All managers would like their organization
to be in a position in which internal strengths can be used to take advantage of external trends
and events. Organizations generally will pursue WO, ST, or WT strategies to more effectively
position themselves into situations in which they can apply SO strategies.
WO strategies aim at improving internal weaknesses by taking advantage of external op-
portunities. Sometimes key external opportunities exist, but a firm has internal weaknesses that
prevent it from exploiting those opportunities. For example, for an auto parts manufacturer, the
rising demand for electric cars (external opportunity), coupled with the firm having limited bat-
teries to offer (internal weakness), suggests that the firm should consider developing and pro-
ducing a new line of batteries.
ST strategies use a firm’s strengths to avoid or reduce the impact of external threats. An
example ST strategy could be when a firm uses its excellent legal department (a strength) to col-
lect millions of dollars in damages from rival firms that infringe on its patents. Rival firms that
copy ideas, innovations, and patented products are a threat to many industries. When an organi-
zation faces major threats, it will seek to avoid them while concentrating on opportunities. For
example, when an organization has both the capital and human resources needed to distribute its
own products (internal strengths) and distributors are unreliable, costly, or incapable of meeting
the firm’s needs (external threats), forward integration (gaining control of distributors) can be an
attractive ST strategy.
WT strategies are defensive tactics directed at reducing internal weakness and avoiding
external threats. An organization faced with numerous external threats and internal weaknesses
may indeed be in a precarious position. In fact, such a firm may have to fight for its survival,
merge, retrench, declare bankruptcy, or choose to liquidate. For example, some restaurant chains
do business with suppliers that treat livestock inhumanely (internal weakness) and face grow-
ing customer awareness of the need to preserve wildlife and treat animals with respect (external
threat)—resulting in a WT strategy to cease using certain suppliers. As another example, when
a firm has excess production capacity (internal weakness) and its basic industry is experiencing
declining annual sales and profits (external threat), related diversification can be an effective WT
strategy.
Whatever strategies are ultimately chosen for implementation, ethics issues are a consider-
ation. For example, as indicated in Ethics Capsule 6 on the next page, consumers are more sensi-
tive to how animals are treated than ever before.
An example SWOT Matrix is illustrated in Figure 6-3, on the next page. As shown, there
are nine cells: four key factor cells, four strategy cells, and one cell that is always left blank
(the upper-left cell). The four strategy cells, labeled SO, WO, ST, and WT, are developed after
completing four key factor cells, labeled S, W, O, and T. (Author comment: The strategic-planning
template at www.strategyclub.com simply leaves a space to type in SO, WO, ST, and WT strategies.
The process of constructing a SWOT Matrix can be summarized in eight steps, as follows:
1. List the firm’s key internal strengths.
2. List the firm’s key internal weaknesses.
3. List the firm’s key external opportunities.
4. List the firm’s key external threats.
5. Match internal strengths with external opportunities to develop specific SO strategies.
6. Match internal weaknesses with external opportunities to develop specific WO strategies.
7. Match internal strengths with external threats to develop specific ST strategies.
8. Match internal weaknesses with external threats to develop specific WT strategies.
LO 6.3
196 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
ETHICS CAPSULE 6
As We Strategize We Must Not Jeopardize Animal Welfare
Consumers are increasingly resentful of companies that harm wild-
life or treat animals inhumanely. According to the World Wildlife
Fund’s Living Planet Report, the world’s animal species are dying,
and humans are a big reason why. The Report reveals that global
populations of wild mammals, fish, birds, amphibians, and reptiles
declined 58 percent on average in the last 45 years. Specifically, land
animals declined by 38 percent, marine species incurred a 36 percent
drop, and the number of freshwater species decreased by 81 percent.
Using 1970 as a baseline, an estimated 66 percent of the world’s wild
animal population will be extinct by 2020. This fact has prompted
experts to call this time in history “the Anthropocene,” because these
declining numbers for species are uncharted territory. Species like
eastern and western gorillas are nearly extinct and poaching has deci-
mated both elephant and northern white rhino populations. Even
vulture populations are headed towards extinction as are certain spe-
cies of bees. Other causes of the mass extinction of wildlife include
urban development, over-hunting, pollution, disease, and climate
change—all of which are tied to humans. In many respects, the earth
is becoming inhospitable to animals and humans. SWOT factors and
strategies oftentimes address this business ethics issue.
Source: http://www.aol.com/article/news/2016/10/27/were-on-track-to-lose-
a-huge-chunk-of-the-worlds-animal-popula/21593252/
Are We Safe Here Mom?
Strengths Weaknesses
1. Inventory turnover up 5.8 to 6.7
2. Average customer purchase up $97 to $128
3. Employee morale is excellent
4. In-store promotions = 20 percent increase
in sales
5. Newspaper advertising expenditures down
10 percent
6. Revenues from repair and service in store
up 16 percent
7. In-store technical support persons have
MIS degrees
8. Store’s debt-to-total-assets ratio down
34 percent
1. Software revenues in store down
12 percent
2. Location of store hurt by new Hwy 34
3. Carpet and paint in store in disrepair
4. Bathroom in store needs refurbishing
5. Total store revenues down 8 percent
6. Store has no website
7. Supplier on-time-delivery up to
2.4 days
8. Customer checkout process too slow
9. Revenues per employee up 19 percent
Opportunities SO Strategies WO Strategies
1. Population of city growing 10 percent
2. Rival computer store opening 1 mile away
3. Vehicle traffic passing store up 12 percent
4. Vendors average 6 new products a year
5. Older adults’ use of computers up 8 percent
6. Small business growth in area up 10 percent
7. Desire for websites up 18 percent by realtors
8. Desire for websites up 12 percent by small firms
1. Add 4 new in-store promotions
monthly (S4, O3)
2. Add 2 new repair and service persons (S6,
O5)
3. Send flyer to all seniors over age
55 (S5, O5)
1. Purchase land to build new store
(W2, O2)
2. Install new carpet, paint, and bath
(W3, W4, O1)
3. Up website services by 50 percent
(W6, O7, O8)
4. Launch mailout to all realtors in city
(W5, O7)
Threats ST Strategies WT Strategies
1. Best Buy opening new store in 1 year nearby
2. Local university offers computer repair
3. New bypass Hwy 34 in 1 year will divert traffic
4. New mall being built nearby
5. Gas prices up 14 percent
6. Vendors raising prices 8 percent
1. Hire 2 more repair persons and market
these new services (S6, S7, T1)
2. Purchase land to build new store (S8, T3)
3. Raise out-of-store service calls from
$60 to $80 (S6, T5)
1. Hire 2 new cashiers (W8, T1, T4)
2. Install new carpet, paint, and bath
(W3, W4, T1)
FIGURE 6-3
A SWOT Matrix for a Retail Computer Store
T ra
v el
S to
ck /S
h u tt
er st
o ck
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 197
Some important aspects of a SWOT Matrix are evidenced in Figure 6-3. For example, note
that both the internal and external factors and the SO, ST, WO, and WT strategies are stated in
specific terms. This is important! For example, regarding the second SO strategy (SO2), if the
analyst simply said, “Add new repair and service persons,” the reader may conclude that 20 new
repair and service persons are needed, when only 2 are needed. So, in stating strategies, be as
quantitative and divisional as possible. Furthermore, remember to consult the vision and mission
statements of the firm; and keep in mind what the firm considers its competitive advantages or
core competencies based on its value chain analysis. Take care to develop SO, WO, ST, and WT
strategies based on these considerations as well as the factors receiving the highest weights from
your EFE and IFE Matrices.
Regarding specificity, for each SWOT strategy included in the matrix, ask yourself this
question: “Is the strategy stated specifically enough to estimate the cost (or savings) if it is se-
lected for implementation?” If the answer is NO, then the strategy is too vague as stated. Thus,
whenever words such as “expand, increase, decrease, more, or reduce” are used in a SWOT
Matrix, clarify with a percent or number exactly what you are proposing. There is no need to
give estimated costs in a SWOT Matrix, but the information must be specific enough to generate
these numbers if the particular strategy is selected for implementation. Vagueness is disastrous
in strategic planning, especially in a SWOT Matrix.
As shown in Figure 6-3, it is important to include the “S1, O2” notation after each strategy
in a SWOT Matrix. This notation reveals the rationale for each alternative strategy in terms of
the internal and external factors that were “matched” to formulate desirable strategies. For ex-
ample, note that this retail computer store business may need to “purchase land to build a new
store” because a new Highway 34 will make the current location less desirable. The “S4, T5”
type of notation, given after each strategy in a SWOT Matrix, accents that “strategies do not
come out of the blue yonder.”
The purpose of SWOT analysis and each Stage 2 matching tool is to generate a list of
feasible, specific alternative strategies, not to select or determine which strategies are best.
Not all of the strategies developed in the SWOT Matrix will be selected for implementa-
tion. No firm has sufficient capital or resources to implement every strategy formulated.
As a rule of thumb, include at least four strategies in each SO, ST, WO and WT quadrant to
encompass all aspects of the business; usually a SWOT matrix, thus, will include 16 strate-
gies total.
Although the SWOT Matrix is widely used in strategic planning, the analysis does include
limitations.3 First, SWOT analysis does not reveal how to achieve a competitive advantage, so
it must not be an end in itself. The analysis should be the starting point for a discussion on
how proposed strategies could be implemented as well as cost-benefit, uniqueness, and trad-
eoff considerations that ultimately could lead to competitive advantage. Second, SWOT is a
static assessment (or snapshot) in time. As circumstances, capabilities, threats, and strategies
change, the dynamics of a competitive environment may not be revealed in a single matrix.
Third, there are interrelationships among the key internal and external factors that SWOT does
not reveal, but that may be important in devising strategies. Fourth, there are no weights or
ratings in a SWOT analysis. Finally, the relative attractiveness of alternative strategies is not
provided.
The Strategic Position and Action Evaluation (SPACE) Matrix The Strategic Position and Action Evaluation (SPACE) Matrix is another Stage 2 matching
tool that uses two axes and four quadrants to reveal whether aggressive, conservative, defensive,
or competitive strategies are most appropriate for a given organization. Axes of the SPACE
Matrix represent two internal dimensions (financial position [FP] and competitive position
[CP]) and two external dimensions (stability position [SP] and industry position [IP]). To
perform SPACE analysis, simply rate a company on each of the four dimensions (axes) named
above and revealed in Figure 6-4.4
Depending on the type of organization, numerous variables could make up each of the di-
mensions represented on the axes of the SPACE Matrix. Factors that were included in the firm’s
EFE and IFE Matrices should be considered in developing a SPACE Matrix. Other variables
LO 6.4
198 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
commonly included in a SPACE analysis are given in Table 6-1. For example, return on invest-
ment, leverage, liquidity, working capital, and cash flow are commonly considered to be deter-
mining factors of an organization’s financial position (FP).
Steps in Performing SPACE Analysis
The process of developing a SPACE Matrix can be summarized in six steps.
Step 1 Select a set of variables to define financial position (FP), competitive position (CP),
stability position (SP), and industry position (IP).
1. Let’s first elaborate on the difference between the SP and IP axes. The term SP
refers to the volatility of profits and revenues for firms in a given industry based
on the factors considered in the SPACE. Thus, SP volatility (stability) is based
on the expected impact of changes in profits by volatility in core external factors
such as technology, economy, demographic, seasonality, and so on. The higher
the frequency and magnitude of profitability changes in a given industry, the more
unstable the SP becomes. An industry can be stable or unstable on SP, yet high or
low on IP. The robotics industry, for instance, would be unstable (-7) on the SP
axis due to constant developments and upgrades, yet high growth on the IP axis
(+7), whereas the canned food industry would be stable (-1) on the SP axis, yet low
growth on the IP axis (+1).
SP
FP
Conservative
Market penetration Market development Product development Related diversification
Defensive
Retrenchment Divestiture Liquidation
Backward, forward, horizontal integration Market penetration Market development Product development Diversification (related or unrelated)
Backward, forward, horizontal integration Market penetration Market development Product development
Aggressive
Competitive
CP
+6
+5
+4
+3
+2
+1
0
0
–1
–2
–3
–4
–5
–6
–7
IP
–6 –5–7 –4 –3 –2 –1 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7
+7
FIGURE 6-4
The SPACE Matrix
Source: Based on H. Rowe, R. Mason, and K. Dickel, Strategic Management and Business Policy: A Methodological Approach (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley Publishing Co. Inc., © 1982), 155.
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 199
Regarding the FP axis, simply rate the firm on numerous financial variables where +7
is really strong and +1 is really weak. Similarly, on the CP axis, simply rate the firm
as per its relative position on numerous variables versus rival firms, where -7 is really
weak and -1 is really strong.
Step 2 Assign a numerical value ranging from +1 (worst) to +7 (best) to each of the variables
that make up the FP and IP dimensions. Assign a numerical value ranging from -1
(best) to -7 (worst) to each of the variables that make up the SP and CP dimensions.
On the FP and CP axes, make comparisons to competitors. For example, a +7 on any
FP or IP factor is outstanding, whereas a +1 is terrible. On the IP and SP axes, make
comparisons to other industries. On the SP axis, know that a -7 on any factor denotes
a highly unstable industry condition (unattractive), whereas -1 denotes a highly stable
industry condition (attractive).
Step 3 Compute an average score for FP, CP, IP, and SP by summing the values given to the
variables of each dimension and then by dividing by the number of variables included
in the respective dimension.
Step 4 Plot the average scores for FP, IP, SP, and CP on the appropriate axes in the SPACE Matrix.
Step 5 Add the two scores on the x-axis and plot the resultant point on X. Add the two scores on
the y-axis and plot the resultant point on Y. Plot the intersection of the new (x, y) coordinate.
Step 6 Draw a directional vector from the origin of the SPACE Matrix (0,0) through the new
(x, y) coordinate. That vector, being located in a particular quadrant, reveals particular
strategies the firm should consider. Author comment: The template plots the new (x, y)
coordinate, rather than drawing a vector; the template also lets you estimate (x, y)
coordinates for rival firms without averaging SP, CP, IP, and FP values.
SPACE Matrix Quadrants
Some example strategy profiles that can emerge from SPACE analysis are shown in Figure 6-5.
The directional vector associated with each profile suggests the type of strategies to pursue: ag-
gressive, conservative, defensive, or competitive. Specifically, when a firm’s directional vector
TABLE 6-1 Example Factors That Make Up the SPACE Matrix Axes
Internal Strategic Position External Strategic Position
Financial Position (FP) Stability Position (SP)
Return on investment Technological changes
Leverage Rate of inflation
Liquidity Demand variability
Working capital Price range of competing products
Cash flow Barriers to entry into market
Inventory turnover Competitive pressure
Earnings per share Ease of exit from market
Price earnings ratio Risk involved in business
Competitive Position (CP) Industry Position (IP)
Market share Growth potential
Product quality Profit potential
Product life cycle Financial stability
Customer loyalty Extent leveraged
Capacity utilization Resource utilization
Technological know-how Ease of entry into market
Control over suppliers and distributors Productivity, capacity utilization
Source: Based on H. Rowe, R. Mason, & K. Dickel, Strategic Management and Business Policy: A Methodological Approach (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley Publishing Co. Inc., 1982); 155-156.
200 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Defensive Profiles
A financially strong firm that has achieved major competitive advantages in a growing and stable industry
Aggressive Profiles
Conservative Profiles
FP
SP
CP IP
(+4,+4)
A firm that has achieved financial strength in a stable industry that is not growing; the firm has few competitive advantages
FP
SP
CP IP
(–2,+4)
Competitive Profiles
A firm that has a very weak competitive position in a negative growth, stable industry
IP
A firm with major competitive advantages in a high-growth industry
FP
SP
CP
(+5,–1)
A firm whose financial strength is a dominating factor in the industry
A firm that suffers from major competitive disadvantages in an industry that is technologically stable but declining in sales
An organization that is competing fairly well in an unstable industry
A financially troubled firm in a very unstable industry
IP
FP
SP
CP
(+1,–4)
FP
SP
CP IP
(+1,+5)
FP
SP
CP IP
(–5,+2)
IP
FP
SP
CP
(–5,–1)
IP
FP
SP
CP
(–1,–5)
FIGURE 6-5
Example Strategy Profiles
Source: Based on H. Rowe, R. Mason, and K. Dickel, Strategic Management and Business Policy: A Methodological Approach (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley Publishing Co. Inc., © 1982), 155.
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 201
is located in the Aggressive Quadrant (upper right) of the SPACE Matrix, an organization is
in an excellent position to use its internal strengths to (1) take advantage of external opportuni-
ties, (2) overcome internal weaknesses, and (3) avoid external threats. Therefore, as indicated in
Figure 6-4, market penetration, market development, product development, backward integra-
tion, forward integration, horizontal integration, or diversification, can be feasible, depending on
the specific circumstances that face the firm.
When performing SPACE analysis for a particular firm, be specific in terms of recom-
mended strategies. For example, instead of saying market penetration is a recommended strat-
egy when a vector is located in the Aggressive Quadrant, say “adding 34 new stores in India
is the proposed strategy.” This is an important point for students doing case analyses because
whenever a particular company is known, then the terms learned in Chapter 5 on page 182,
such as market development, must be quantified to enable specific recommendations to be
proposed. The term “market development” could refer to adding a manufacturing plant in
Thailand or Mexico or Kenya. Thus, be specific to the extent possible regarding implications
of all the matrices presented in this chapter. Vagueness is disastrous in strategic management.
Avoid terms such as expand, increase, decrease, and grow, unless accompanying numbers are
provided.
The SPACE directional vector may appear in the Conservative Quadrant (upper left),
which implies staying close to the firm’s basic competencies and not taking excessive risks.
As indicated in Figure 6-4, conservative strategies most often include market penetra-
tion, market development, product development, and related diversification. The SPACE
directional vector may be located in the Defensive Quadrant (lower left), which suggests
the firm should focus on improving internal weaknesses and avoiding external threats.
Defensive strategies include retrenchment, divestiture, liquidation, and related diversifica-
tion. Finally, the SPACE directional vector may be located in the Competitive Quadrant
(lower right), indicating competitive strategies. Competitive strategies include backward,
forward, and horizontal integration; market penetration; market development; and product
development—as indicated in Figure 6-4.
Like the SWOT Matrix, the SPACE Matrix should be tailored to the particular organization
being studied and based on factual information to the extent possible. Include specific factors;
for example, Delta Airlines may include “volatility of oil prices” as a factor under SP with a rat-
ing of -6. To the degree factors are unique to a particular firm and industry, the more effective
the SPACE results will be in suggesting possible generic strategies to implement.
SPACE analysis is an excellent tool for transferring complex information into a manageable
list of strategies to consider for implementation. SPACE analysis can be helpful in deciding how
aggressive or defensive a firm should be—so it’s important to always include SPACE analysis in
doing strategic planning.
A SPACE Matrix analysis has some limitations as follows:
1. It is a snapshot in time.
2. There are more than four dimensions that firms could/should be rated on.
3. The directional vector could fall directly on an axis, or could even go nowhere if the
coordinate is (0,0). Whenever this happens, analysts usually add a few more evaluative
criteria that comprise the FP (and any other) axis to make the vector shift into a particular
quadrant.
4. Implications of the exact angle of the vector within a quadrant are unclear.
5. The relative attractiveness of alternative strategies generated is unclear.
The SPACE Matrix has been used to help identify Facebook’s overall strategic position as pro-
vided in Figure 6-6. As noted in Figure 6-6, Facebook falls in the Aggressive Quadrant. Note
the factors used to construct the SPACE Matrix are specific to Facebook and the social media
industry. An implication of the Facebook SPACE analysis is that the company should more ag-
gressively add professional networking services, similar to rival firm LinkedIn, or perhaps even
acquire LinkedIn.
202 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
SPACE Matrix
Conservative Aggressive
Defensive Competitive
SP
CP
FP
7
6
5
3
3
2
2
1
1 21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
X = 0.8 Y = 3.6
4
4 5 6 7 IP
Debt Ratio
Liquidity
Current Ratio
EPS
ROA
Cash Flow
Social Networking Market Share
Product Variety
Use of Technology
Professional Networking Market Share
Financial Position (FP) Average
Price Comparison
Product Demand
Number of Inactive Accounts
Stability Position (SP) Average
Diversity of Social Media Interest Served
Competitive Pressure
Growth Potential
Cyber Security Concerns
Ease of Entry into Market
Profit Potential
Alternative Products
7
6
2
2
5
5
4.0
24
22
22
23
23
22.8
22
21
26
25
22
23.2
7
7
7
4
6.4
Financial Position (FP)
Competitive Position (CP)
Competitive Position (CP) Average
Stability Position (SP)
Industry Position (IP)
Industry Position (IP) Average
Internal Analysis:
Internal Analysis:
External Analysis:
External Analysis:
FIGURE 6-6
A SPACE Matrix for Facebook
The Boston Consulting Group (BCG) Matrix BCG is a private management consulting firm that specializes in strategic planning. Based in
Boston, Massachusetts and employing 6,200 consultants worldwide, BCG has approximately
90 offices in 45 countries, and annually ranks in the top five of Fortune’s list of the “100 Best
Companies to Work For.”
Autonomous divisions (also called segments or profit centers) of an organization make up
what is called a business portfolio. When a firm’s divisions compete in different industries,
LO 6.5
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 203
a separate strategy must often be developed for each business. The BCG Matrix is designed
specifically to enhance a multidivisional firm’s efforts to formulate strategies. Allocating re-
sources across divisions is arguably the most important strategic decision facing multidivisional
firms. Multidivisional firms range in size from small, three-restaurant, mom-and-pop firms, to
huge conglomerates such as Walt Disney Company, to universities that have various schools or
colleges—and they all need to use portfolio analysis—a tool that compares divisions of a firm
to determine how best to allocate resources among those divisions.
In a Form 10K or Annual Report, and sometimes in quarterly reports, most companies
disclose revenues and sometimes operating profits by segment. BCG portfolio analysis can
be performed based on whatever information is provided, such as the location of all the firm’s
stores or branches. In the BCG matrices in this chapter, the size of circles correspond to seg-
ment revenues (or number of stores), and pie slices within circles correspond to segment operat-
ing profits. Let regions be the basis for BCG circles if needed. Reasons to disclose by-segment
financial information in a Form 10K more than offset the reasons not to disclose, as indicated in
Table 6-2.
TABLE 6-2 Reasons to (or Not to) Disclose Financial Information by Segment (by Division)
Reasons to Disclose Reasons Not to Disclose
1. Stakeholders will better understand the firm,
which leads to greater support.
2. Managers and employees will better un-
derstand the firm, which leads to greater
commitment.
3. Disclosure enhances communication process
both within the firm and with outsiders.
1. To avoid rival firms obtaining free competitive
information.
2. To avoid performance failures being exposed.
3. To avoid rivalry among segments becoming too
intense.
4. To avoid lucrative markets being revealed to
rival firms.
Source: Based on Brian Blackstone and Annie Gasparro, “Nestle to Sell U.S. Candy Business,” Wall Street Journal (June 16, 2017): A1 and A4.
TABLE 6-3 Market Share Data for the U.S. Candy Industry
Company Market Share (percent) BCG: Relative Market Share
Position
Hershey 25.9 25.9/25.9 = 1.000
Mars 25.2 25.2/25.9 = 0.973
Ferrara 05.8 05.8/25.9 = 0.232
Mondelez 05.6 05.6/25.9 = 0.216
Nestlé 02.9 02.9/25.9 = 0.039
Lindt & Sprungli 02.0 02.0/25.9 = 0.077
Perfetti Van Melle 02.0 02.0/25.9 = 0.077
Russell Stover 01.6 01.6/25.9 = 0.062
The BCG Matrix graphically portrays differences among divisions based on two dimen-
sions: (1) relative market share position on the x-axis, and (2) industry growth rate on the y-axis.
The BCG Matrix allows a multidivisional organization to manage its portfolio of businesses by
examining these two dimensions for each division relative to other divisions in the organization.
Relative market share position (RMSP) is defined as the ratio of a division’s own market share
(or revenues or number of stores) in a particular industry to the market share (or revenues or
number of stores) held by the largest rival firm (leader) in that industry. In the U.S. candy indus-
try, for example, Russell Stover’s relative market share position is Russell Stover’s market share
divided by Hershey’s market share, or 1.6/25.9 = 0.062; similarly, Mars’ relative market share
position is 25.2/25.9 = 0.973, as indicated in Table 6-3.
204 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Relative market share position is given on the x-axis of the BCG Matrix. The midpoint
on the x-axis usually is set at 0.50, corresponding to a division that has half the market share
of the leading firm in the industry. The y-axis represents the industry growth rate (IGR) in
sales, measured in percentage terms—that is, the average annual increase in revenue for all
firms in an industry. The growth rate percentages on the y-axis could range from −20 to +20
(or -10 to +10) percent, with 0.0 being the midpoint. The average annual increase in revenues
for several leading firms in the industry would be a good estimate for the IGR value. Also,
various sources, such as the S&P Industry Surveys and www.finance.yahoo.com would pro-
vide this value.
Based on each division’s respective (x, y) coordinate, each segment can be properly po-
sitioned in a BCG Matrix. Divisions located in Quadrant I (upper right) of the BCG Matrix
are called “Question Marks,” those located in Quadrant II (upper left) are called “Stars,”
those located in Quadrant III (lower left) are called “Cash Cows,” and those divisions lo-
cated in Quadrant IV (lower right) are called “Dogs.” The four BCG quadrants are described
below:
• Question Marks—Divisions in Quadrant I (upper right) have a low relative market share
position, yet they compete in a high-growth industry. Generally, these firms’ cash needs are
high and their cash generation is low. These businesses are called question marks because
the organization must decide whether to strengthen them by pursuing an intensive strategy
(market penetration, market development, or product development) or to sell them. An ex-
ample question mark could be Snap’s portfolio of virtual reality technology devices; virtual
reality is a high-growth industry, but Snap has a low relative market share. • Stars—Divisions in Quadrant II (upper left) represent the organizations’ best long-run op-
portunities for growth and profitability, and are therefore called stars. Divisions with a high
relative market share and a high industry growth rate should receive substantial investment
to maintain or strengthen their dominant positions. Forward, backward, and horizontal inte-
gration; market penetration; market development; and product development are appropriate
strategies for these divisions to consider, as indicated in Figure 6-7. A star example could
be Facebook’s portfolio of virtual reality devices; Facebook is one of the leaders in the in-
dustry in revenues in these devices. • Cash Cows—Divisions in Quadrant III (lower left) have a high relative market share posi-
tion but compete in a low-growth industry; they are called cash cows. Because they gener-
ate cash in excess of their needs, they are often milked. Many of today’s cash cows were
yesterday’s stars. Cash cow divisions should be managed to maintain their strong position
for as long as possible. Product development, or diversification, may be an attractive strat-
egy for strong cash cows. However, as a cash cow division becomes weak, retrenchment
or divestiture can become more appropriate. A cash cow example is Hewlett-Packard (HP)
with its desktop computers; HP is a market leader in terms of revenues, but desktop com-
puters are a low-growth industry. • Dogs—Divisions in Quadrant IV (lower right) have a low relative market share position
and compete in a slow- or no-market-growth industry; they are dogs in the firm’s portfolio.
Because of their weak internal and external position, these businesses are often liquidated,
divested, or trimmed down through retrenchment. When a division first becomes a dog, re-
trenchment can be the best strategy to pursue because many dogs have bounced back after
strenuous asset and cost reduction to become viable, profitable divisions.
The basic BCG Matrix appears in Figure 6-7. Each circle represents a separate division. The
size of the circle corresponds to the proportion of corporate revenue generated by that business
unit, and the pie slice indicates the proportion of corporate profits generated by that division.
The major benefit of the BCG Matrix is that it draws attention to the cash flow, investment
characteristics, and needs of an organization’s various divisions. The divisions of many firms
evolve over time: dogs become question marks, question marks become stars, stars become cash
cows, and cash cows become dogs in an ongoing counterclockwise motion. Less frequently,
stars become question marks, question marks become dogs, dogs become cash cows, and cash
cows become stars (in a clockwise motion). In some organizations, no cyclical motion is appar-
ent. Over time, organizations should strive to achieve a portfolio of divisions that are stars.
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 205
An example of a BCG Matrix is provided in Figure 6-8, which illustrates an organization
composed of five divisions with annual sales ranging from $5,000 to $60,000. Division 1 has
the greatest sales volume, so the circle representing that division is the largest one in the matrix.
The circle corresponding to Division 5 is the smallest because its sales volume ($5,000) is least
among all the divisions. The pie slices within the circles reveal the percent of corporate profits
contributed by each division. As shown, Division 1 contributes the highest profit percentage,
39 percent, as indicated by 39 percent of the area within circle 1 being shaded. Notice in the
diagram that Division 1 is considered a star, Division 2 is a question mark, Division 3 is also a
question mark, Division 4 is a cash cow, and Division 5 is a dog.
RELATIVE MARKET SHARE POSITION
High Medium Low
1.0 .50 0.0
High
Medium
Low
+20
0
–20
IN D
U S
T R
Y S
A L
E S
G R
O W
T H
R A
T E
(P er
ce n ta
g e)
Stars
II
Question Marks
I
Dogs
IV
Cash Cows
III
Backward, Forward, or Horizontal Integration
Market Penetration
Market Development
Product Development
Market Penetration
Market Development
Product Development
Divestiture
Product Development
Diversification
Retrenchment
Divestiture
Retrenchment
Divestiture
Liquidation
FIGURE 6-7
The BCG Matrix
Source: Based on the BCG Portfolio Matrix from the Product Portfolio Matrix, © 1970, The Boston Consulting Group.
High 1.0
High
Division
1 2 3 4 5
Total
Revenues
$60,000 40,000 40,000 20,000 5,000
$165,000
Percent Revenues
37 24 24 12 3
100
Profits
$10,000 5,000 2,000 8,000 –500 $24,500
Percent Profits
40 20 8 32 0
100
Relative Market Share
.80
.40
.10
.60 .05 —
Industry Growth Rate (%)
+15 +10 +1 –20 –10 —
Medium
Low
Medium .50
Low 0.0
+20
0
–20
40%1
4 32%
RELATIVE MARKET SHARE POSITION IN THE INDUSTRY
INDUSTRY SALES GROWTH RATE (Percentage)
2
3
5
20%
8%
0%
FIGURE 6-8
An Example BCG Matrix
206 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
The Internal-External (IE) Matrix The Internal-External (IE) Matrix positions an organization’s various divisions (segments)
in a nine-cell display, as illustrated in Figure 6-10. The IE Matrix is similar to the BCG Matrix
in that both tools involve plotting a firm’s divisions in a schematic diagram; this is why both
tools are forms of portfolio analysis. In both the BCG and IE Matrices, the size of each circle
represents the percentage of revenues or number of stores each division contributes, and pie
slices reveal the percentage of operating profits contributed by each division. But there are
four important differences between the BCG Matrix and the IE Matrix, as follows:
1. The x- and y-axes are different.
2. The IE Matrix requires more information about the divisions than does the BCG Matrix.
3. The strategic implications of each matrix are different.
4. The IE Matrix has nine quadrants versus four in a BCG Matrix.
For the above reasons, strategists in multidivisional firms often develop both the BCG
Matrix and the IE Matrix in formulating alternative strategies. A common practice is to develop
LO 6.6
High 1.0
$ Sales (millions) % Profits IG Rate %% SalesDivision
1 2 3 4 5
Total
$ Profits (millions) RMSP
Medium .50
Low 0.0
+20
0
–20
78%
RELATIVE MARKET SHARE POSITION (RMSP)
INDUSTRY SALES GROWTH RATE %
5
39.0% 1.2%
18.3% 4 0.1%
2 3
1
400 12 4
–188 $1,027
0.8 0.4 0.2 0.5 0.02
10 05 00
–05 –10
78.0 39.0 1.2 0.1
(18.3) 100.0
51.5 25.6 17.5 4.9 0.5
100.0
$5,139 2,556 1,749
493 42
$9,979
$799
High
Medium
Low
FIGURE 6-9
An Example BCG Matrix
The BCG Matrix, like all analytical techniques, has some limitations. For example, viewing
every business as a star, cash cow, dog, or question mark is an oversimplification; many busi-
nesses fall right in the middle of the BCG Matrix and thus are not easily classified. Furthermore,
the BCG Matrix does not reflect if various divisions or their industries are growing over time;
that is, the matrix has no temporal qualities, but rather it is a snapshot of an organization at a
given point in time. Finally, other variables besides relative market share position and industry
growth rate in sales, such as the size of the market and competitive advantages, are important in
making strategic decisions about various divisions.
Another example BCG Matrix is provided in Figure 6-9. As you can see, Division 5 had an
operating loss of $188 million as indicated by its red shading. The remaining pie slices add up to
over 100 percent profits to account for negative net income associated with Division 5 (This is a
different way to portray divisional losses in a BCG matrix analysis).
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 207
a BCG Matrix and an IE Matrix for the present, and then develop projected matrices to reflect
expectations of the future. This before-and-after analysis can be quite effective in an oral pre-
sentation, enabling students (or strategists) to pave the way for (justify or give some rationale
for) their recommendations across divisions of the firm. Also, commonly a BCG Matrix will be
developed by region and an IE Matrix by product, or vice versa.
The IE Matrix is based on two key dimensions: (1) the IFE total weighted scores on the
x-axis and (2) the EFE total weighted scores on the y-axis. Recall that each division of an or-
ganization should construct an IFE Matrix and an EFE Matrix for its part of the organization,
but usually in performing case analysis, strategic-management students simply estimate divi-
sional IFE and EFE scores, rather than prepare those underlying matrices for every division.
Regardless, it is the total weighted scores derived from the divisions that allow construction of
the corporate-level IE Matrix. On the x-axis of the IE Matrix, an IFE total weighted score of 1.0
to 1.99 represents a weak internal position; a score of 2.0 to 2.99 is considered average; and a
score of 3.0 to 4.0 is strong. Similarly, on the y-axis, an EFE total weighted score of 1.0 to 1.99
is considered weak; a score of 2.0 to 2.99 is average; and a score of 3.0 to 4.0 is strong. Circles,
representing divisions, are positioned in an IE Matrix based on their (x, y) coordinate.
Despite having nine cells (or quadrants), the IE Matrix has three major regions that have dif-
ferent strategy implications, as follows:
• Region 1—The prescription for divisions that fall into cells I, II, or IV can be described as
grow and build. Intensive (market penetration, market development, and product develop-
ment) or integrative (backward integration, forward integration, and horizontal integration)
strategies can be most appropriate for these divisions. This is the best region for divisions,
given their high IFE and EFE scores. Successful organizations are able to achieve a portfo-
lio of businesses positioned in Region 1. • Region 2—The prescription for divisions that fall into cells III, V, or VII can be described
as hold and maintain strategies; market penetration and product development are two com-
monly employed strategies for these types of divisions. • Region 3—The prescription for divisions that fall into cells VI, VIII, or IX can be described
as harvest or divest.
Strong 3.0 to 4.0
High 3.0 to 4.0
Medium 2.0 to 2.99
Low 1.0 to 1.99
Average 2.0 to 2.99
Weak 1.0 to 1.99
3.0 4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
Hold and Maintain
Grow and Build
Harvest or Divest
2.0 1.0
THE IFE TOTAL WEIGHTED SCORES
THE EFE TOTAL WEIGHTED SCORES
I II III
VIV
VII VIII IX
VI
Backward, Forward, or Horizontal Integration Market Penetration Market Development Product Development
Market Penetration Product Development
Retrenchment Divestiture
FIGURE 6-10
The Internal-External (IE) Matrix
Source: Based on: The IE Matrix was developed from the General Electric (GE) Business Screen Matrix. For a description of the GE Matrix, see Michael Allen, “Diagramming GE’s Planning for What’s WATT,” in R. Allio and M. Pennington, eds., Corporate Planning: Techniques and Applications l par; New York: AMACOM, 1979.
208 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
An example four-division IE Matrix is given in Figure 6-11. As indicated by the position-
ing of the four circles, grow and build strategies are appropriate for Divisions 1, 2, and 3. But
Division 4 is a candidate for harvest or divest. Division 2 contributes the greatest percentage of
company sales and thus is represented by the largest circle. Division 1 contributes the greatest
proportion of total profits; it has the largest-percentage pie slice.
An example five-division IE Matrix is given in Figure 6-12. Note that Division 1 has the
largest revenues (as indicated by the largest circle) and the largest profits (as indicated by the
largest pie slice) in the matrix. It is common for organizations to develop both geographic and
product-based IE Matrices to more effectively formulate strategies and allocate resources among
divisions. This latter idea minimizes the limitation of these matrices being a “snapshot in time.”
Important Note: Whenever a particular company is known, such as in doing case analysis or
in the real world, be more specific with proposed strategies rather than using generic terms in re-
gards to resultant IE Matrix strategies. Couch your strategies in quantitative and divisional terms
to the extent possible. (This is true also with strategies derived from the BCG, SPACE, GRAND,
and even SWOT analyses; specificity is golden—avoid vagueness)
The Grand Strategy Matrix In addition to the SWOT Matrix, SPACE Matrix, BCG Matrix, and IE Matrix, the Grand
Strategy Matrix is a popular tool for formulating alternative strategies. All organizations can
be positioned in one of the Grand Strategy Matrix’s four strategy quadrants. A firm’s divisions
likewise could be positioned. As illustrated in Figure 6-13, the Grand Strategy Matrix is based
on two evaluative dimensions: (1) competitive position on the x-axis and (2) market (industry)
growth on the y-axis. Any industry whose annual growth in sales exceeds 5 percent could be
considered to have rapid growth. Appropriate strategies for an organization to consider are listed
in sequential order of attractiveness in each quadrant of the Grand Strategy Matrix.
LO 6.7
Strong 3.0 to 4.0
High 3.0 to 4.0
Division
1 2 3 4
Total
Sales
$100 200 50 50
$400
Percent Sales Profits
$10 5 4 1
$20
Percent Profits
50 25 20 5
100
IFE Scores
3.6 2.1 3.1 1.8
EFE Scores
3.2 3.5 2.1 2.5
Medium 2.0 to 2.99
Low 1.0 to 1.99
Average 2.0 to 2.99
Weak 1.0 to 1.99
1 2
4
3.0 4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
2.0 1.0
50%
25%
5%3 20%
THE IFE TOTAL WEIGHTED SCORES
THE EFE TOTAL WEIGHTED SCORES
25.0 50.0 12.5 12.5
100.0
FIGURE 6-11
An Example IE Matrix
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 209
Strong 3.0 to 4.0
High 3.0 to 4.0
Grow and Build
Division
1 2 3 4 5
Total
Percent
Revenue$ Revenue
Percent
ProfitsProfits IFE ScoresEFE Scores
Medium 2.0 to 2.99
Low 1.0 to 1.99
Average 2.0 to 2.99
Weak 1.0 to 1.99
I II
V
III
VII VIII IX
IV VI
5
4
21
3
4.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
16%
59%
4%
19%
2%
THE IFE TOTAL WEIGHTED SCORES
THE EFE TOTAL WEIGHTED SCORES
2.0 1.0
71.5 11.3 14.3 0.8 2.1
100
$7,868 1,241 1,578
90 223
$11,000
59 19 16 2 4
100
$3,000 1,000
800 100 200
$5,100
3 2 3
2.5 2
—
2.5 2 3
2.5 3
—
FIGURE 6-12
The IE Matrix
RAPID MARKET GROWTH
SLOW MARKET GROWTH
STRONG COMPETITIVE
POSITION
WEAK COMPETITIVE
POSITION
Quadrant II
1. Market development 2. Market penetration 3. Product development 4. Horizontal integration 5. Divestiture 6. Liquidation
Quadrant I
1. Market development 2. Market penetration 3. Product development 4. Forward integration 5. Backward integration 6. Horizontal integration 7. Related diversification
Quadrant III
1. Retrenchment 2. Related diversification 3. Unrelated diversification 4. Divestiture 5. Liquidation
Quadrant IV
1. Related diversification 2. Unrelated diversification 3. Joint ventures
FIGURE 6-13
The Grand Strategy Matrix
Source: Based on Roland Christensen, Norman Berg, and Malcolm Salter, Policy Formulation and Administration (Homewood, IL: Richard D. Irwin, 1976), 16-18.
210 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Firms located in Quadrant I of the Grand Strategy Matrix are in an excellent strategic posi-
tion. For these companies, continued concentration on current markets (market penetration and
market development) and products (product development) is an appropriate strategy. It is unwise
for a Quadrant I firm to shift notably from its established competitive advantages, yet all firms
seek continual improvement. Thus, when a Quadrant I organization has excessive resources,
then backward, forward, or horizontal integration may be considered. When a Quadrant I firm
is too heavily committed to a single product, then related diversification may reduce the risks
associated with a narrow product line. Quadrant I firms can afford to take advantage of external
opportunities in several areas. They can take risks aggressively when necessary.
Firms positioned in Quadrant II need to evaluate their present approach to the marketplace
seriously. Although their industry is growing, they are unable to compete effectively; they need
to determine why the firm’s current approach is ineffective and how the company can best
change to improve its competitiveness. Because Quadrant II organizations are in a rapid market
growth industry, an intensive strategy (as opposed to integrative or diversification) is usually the
first option that should be considered. However, if the firm is lacking a distinctive competence
or competitive advantage, then horizontal integration is often a desirable alternative. As a last
resort, divestiture or liquidation should be considered. Divestiture can provide funds needed to
acquire other businesses or buy back shares of stock.
Quadrant III organizations compete in slow-growth industries and have weak competitive
positions. These firms must make drastic changes quickly to avoid further decline and possible
liquidation. Extensive cost and asset reduction (retrenchment) should be pursued first. An alter-
native strategy is to shift resources away from the current business into different areas (diversify).
If all else fails, the final options for Quadrant III businesses are divestiture or liquidation.
Finally, Quadrant IV businesses have a strong competitive position but are in a slow-growth
industry. These firms have the strength to launch diversified programs into more promising
growth areas: Quadrant IV businesses have characteristically high cash-flow levels and limited
internal growth needs and often can pursue related or unrelated diversification successfully.
Quadrant IV firms also may pursue joint ventures.
Even with the Grand Strategy Matrix, be certain that you always, whenever possible, state
your alternative strategies in specific terms to the extent possible. For example, avoid using
terms such as divestiture. Rather, specify the exact division to be sold. Also, be sure to use the
free Excel student template at www.strategyclub.com that facilitates construction of all strategic
planning matrices.
If using the strategic planning template at www.strategyclub.com to perform GRAND analy-
sis, you may use the 1 to 9 scale offered on the template, where 1 = the weakest competitive posi-
tion and also the slowest industry growth rate, and 9 = the strongest competitive position and the
fastest industry growth rate. Also, the template enables up to six points (coordinates) to be plotted
in a Grand Strategy Matrix, analogous to various divisions of a firm, or rival firms, or even years
to depict expected results of proposed recommendations. You may be creative in this regard.
The Decision Stage: The QSPM Other than ranking strategies to achieve the prioritized list, as mentioned on page 194 near the
start of this chapter, there is only one analytical technique in the literature designed to determine
the relative attractiveness of feasible alternative plans or actions. The Quantitative Strategic
Planning Matrix (QSPM), which comprises Stage 3 of the strategy-formulation analytical
framework, objectively indicates which alternative strategies are best.5 The QSPM uses input
from Stage 1 analyses and matching results from Stage 2 analyses to decide objectively among
alternative strategies. That is, the EFE Matrix, IFE Matrix, and CPM that comprise Stage 1,
coupled with the SWOT Matrix, SPACE Matrix, BCG Matrix, IE Matrix, and Grand Strategy
Matrix that comprise Stage 2, provide the needed information for setting up the QSPM (Stage 3).
The QSPM is a tool that allows strategists to evaluate alternative strategies objectively, based on
previously identified external and internal key success factors. Like other strategy-formulation
analytical tools, the QSPM requires the assignment of ratings (called attractiveness scores), but
making “small” rating decisions enables strategists to make effective “big” decisions, such as
which country to spend a billion dollars in to sell a product.
LO 6.8
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 211
The basic format of the QSPM is illustrated in Table 6-4. Note that the left column of a
QSPM consists of key external and internal factors (from Stage 1), and the top row consists of
feasible alternative strategies (from Stage 2). Specifically, the left column of a QSPM consists
of information obtained directly from the EFE Matrix and IFE Matrix. In a column adjacent to
the key success factors, the respective weights received by each factor in the EFE Matrix and the
IFE Matrix are recorded.
The top row of a QSPM consists of alternative strategies derived from the SWOT Matrix,
SPACE Matrix, BCG Matrix, IE Matrix, and Grand Strategy Matrix. These matching tools
usually generate similar feasible alternatives. However, not every strategy suggested by the
matching techniques has to be evaluated in a QSPM. Strategists should compare several viable
alternative strategies in a QSPM, perhaps including two or more SWOT strategies, so you could
designate your QSPM strategies using SWOT notation such as SO4 versus WT3. Make sure
your strategies are stated in specific terms, such as “Open 275 new stores in Indonesia” rather
than “Expand globally” or “Open new stores in Africa.” Specificity is vital because ultimately
a dollar value must be established for each recommended strategy; it would be impossible to
establish a dollar value for “expand globally.” If you cannot reasonably assign a dollar value to
a QSPM (or SWOT) strategy, then the strategy is too vague. Vagueness is disastrous in strategic
planning because no one knows what you really are suggesting/saying, and a $1 billion invest-
ment may be on the line.
Conceptually, the QSPM determines the relative attractiveness of various strategies based
on the extent that key external and internal factors are capitalized on or improved. The relative
attractiveness of each strategy is computed by determining the cumulative impact of each exter-
nal and internal factor. Any number of strategies can be included in the QSPM.
A QSPM for a retail computer store is provided in Table 6-5. This example illustrates all the
components of the QSPM: strategic alternatives, key factors, weights, attractiveness scores (AS),
total attractiveness scores (TAS), and the sum total attractiveness score. The three new terms
just introduced—(1) attractiveness score, (2) total attractiveness score, and (3) the sum total at-
tractiveness score—are defined and explained as the six steps required to develop a QSPM are
discussed:
Step 1 Make a list of the firm’s key external opportunities and threats and internal
strengths and weaknesses in the left column of the QSPM. This information
should be taken directly from the EFE Matrix and IFE Matrix. (The Excel template at
www.strategyclub.com can facilitate this process.)
TABLE 6-4 The Quantitative Strategic Planning Matrix (QSPM)
Strategic Alternatives
Key Factors Weight Strategy 1 Strategy 2 Strategy 3
Key External Factors
Economy
Political/Legal/Governmental
Social/Cultural/Demographic/
Environmental
Technological
Competitive
Key Internal Factors
Management
Marketing
Finance/Accounting
Production/Operations
Research and Development
Management Information Systems
212 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
TABLE 6-5 A QSPM for a Retail Computer Store
STRATEGIC ALTERNATIVES
1 2 Buy New Land and Build New,
Larger Store Fully Renovate Existing Store
Key Factors Weight AS TAS AS TAS
Opportunities
1. Population of a city growing 10% 0.10 4 0.40 2 0.20
2. Rival computer store opening one mile away 0.10 2 0.20 4 0.40
3. Vehicle traffic passing store up 12% 0.08 1 0.08 4 0.32
4. Vendors average six new products/year 0.05 — —
5. Senior citizen use of computers up 8% 0.05 — —
6. Small business growth in an area up 10% 0.05 — —
7. Desire for websites up 18% by realtors 0.04 — —
8. Desire for websites up 12% by small firms 0.03 — —
Threats
1. Best Buy opening new store nearby in one year 0.15 4 0.60 3 0.45
2. New bypass for Highway 34 in one year will divert traffic 0.12 4 0.48 1 0.12
3. Local university offers computer repair 0.08 — —
4. New mall being built nearby 0.08 2 0.16 4 0.32
5. Gas prices up 14% 0.04 — —
6. Vendors raising prices 8% 0.03 — —
Total 1.00
Strengths
1. Revenues from repair/service segment of a store up 16% 0.15 4 0.60 3 0.45
2. Employee morale is excellent 0.10 — —
3. Average customer purchase increased from $97 to $128 0.07 2 0.14 4 0.28
4. Inventory turnover increased from 5.8 to 6.7 0.05 — —
5. In-store promotions resulted in 20% increase in sales 0.05 — —
6. In-store technical support personnel have MIS college
degrees
0.05 — —
7. Store’s debt-to-total-assets ratio declined to 34% 0.03 4 0.12 2 0.06
8. Newspaper advertising expenditures increased 10% 0.02 — —
9. Revenues per employee up 19% 0.02 — —
Weaknesses
1. Location of store negatively impacted by new Highway 34 0.15 4 0.60 1 0.15
2. Revenues from software segment of a store down 12% 0.10 — —
3. Often customers have to wait to check out 0.05 2 0.10 4 0.20
4. Store has no website 0.05 — —
5. Revenues from businesses down 8% 0.04 3 0.12 4 0.16
6. Supplier on-time delivery increased to 2.4 days 0.03 — —
7. Carpet and paint in store somewhat in disrepair 0.02 1 0.02 4 0.08
8. Bathroom in store needs refurbishing 0.02 1 0.02 4 0.08
Total 1.00 3.64 3.27
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 213
Step 2 Assign weights to each key external and internal factor. These weights are identi-
cal to those in the EFE Matrix and IFE Matrix. The weights are presented in a straight
column just to the right of the external and internal factors.
Step 3 Examine the Stage 2 (matching) matrices, and identify alternative strategies that the
organization should consider implementing. Record these strategies in the top row of
the QSPM, perhaps selecting two or more of your SO, WO, ST, and/or WT strategies.
Step 4 Determine the Attractiveness Scores (AS), defined as numerical values that indicate
the relative attractiveness of each strategy considering a single external or internal
factor. Attractiveness Scores (AS) are determined by examining each key external
or internal factor, one at a time, and asking the question, “Does this factor affect the
choice of strategies being made?” If the answer to this question is yes, then the strate-
gies should be compared relative to that key factor. Specifically, AS should be assigned
to each strategy to indicate the relative attractiveness of one strategy over others,
considering the particular factor. The range for AS is 1 = not attractive, 2 = somewhat
attractive, 3 = reasonably attractive, and 4 = highly attractive. By “attractive,” we
mean the extent that one strategy, compared to others, enables the firm to either capi-
talize on the strength, improve on the weakness, exploit the opportunity, or avoid the
threat. Work row by row in developing a QSPM. If the answer to the previous question
is no, indicating the respective key factor has no effect on the specific choice being
made, then do not assign AS to the strategies in that set. Use a dash (or 0 if using the
template) to indicate that the key factor does not affect the choice being made. Note:
If you assign an AS score to one strategy, then assign an AS score(s) to the other—in
other words, if one strategy receives a dash (or 0)—then all others must receive a dash
(or 0) in a given row.
Step 5 Compute the Total Attractiveness Scores. Total Attractiveness Scores (TAS) are
defined as the product of multiplying the weights (Step 2) by the AS (Step 4) in each
row. The TAS indicate the relative attractiveness of each alternative strategy, consid-
ering only the impact of the adjacent external or internal critical success factor. The
higher the TAS, the more attractive the strategic alternative (considering only the
adjacent critical success factor).
Step 6 Compute the Sum Total Attractiveness Score. Add TAS in each strategy column
of the QSPM. The Sum Total Attractiveness Scores (STAS) reveal which strategy
is most attractive in each set of alternatives. Higher scores indicate more attractive
strategies, considering all the relevant external and internal factors that could affect the
strategic decisions. The magnitude of the difference between the STAS in a given set
of strategic alternatives indicates the relative desirability of one strategy over another.
In Table 6-5, two alternative strategies—(1) buy new land and build new larger store and
(2) fully renovate existing store—are being considered by a computer retail store. Note by the
STAS’s of 3.64 versus 3.27 that the analysis indicates the business should buy new land and
build a new larger store. Note the use of dashes to indicate which factors do not affect the strat-
egy choice being considered. If a particular factor affects one strategy, but not the other, it affects
the choice being made, so AS scores should be recorded for both strategies. Never rate one strat-
egy and not the other. Note also in Table 6-5 that there are no consecutive 1s, 2s, 3s, or 4s across
any row in a QSPM; never assign the same AS score across a row. Always prepare a QSPM
working row by row. Also, if you have more than four strategies in the QSPM, then let the AS
scores range from 1 to “the number of strategies being evaluated.” This will enable you to have a
different AS score for each strategy. These are all important guidelines to follow in developing a
QSPM. In actual practice, the store did purchase the new land and build a new store; the business
also did some minor refurbishing until the new store was operational.
There should be a rationale for each AS score assigned. Note in the first row of Table 6-5 that
the “Population of city growing 10 percent” opportunity could be capitalized on best by Strategy
1, “Buy New Land and Build New, Larger Store,” so an AS score of 4 was assigned to Strategy
1. Attractiveness Scores, therefore, are not mere guesses; they should be rational, defensible, and
reasonable. Mathematically, the AS score of 4 in row 1 suggests Strategy 1 is 100 percent more at-
tractive than Strategy 2, whose AS score was 2 (since 4 – 2 = 2 and 2 divided by 2 = 100 percent).
214 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Positive Features and Limitations of the QSPM
A positive feature of the QSPM is that sets of strategies can be examined sequentially or simul-
taneously. For example, corporate-level strategies could be evaluated first, followed by division-
level strategies, and then function-level strategies. There is no limit to the number of strategies that
can be evaluated or the number of sets of strategies that can be examined at once using the QSPM.
Another positive feature of the QSPM is that it requires strategists to integrate pertinent ex-
ternal and internal factors into the decision process. Developing a QSPM makes it less likely that
key factors will be overlooked or weighted inappropriately. It draws attention to important re-
lationships that affect strategic decisions. Although developing a QSPM requires Attractiveness
Scores (AS) decisions, those small decisions enhance the probability that the final strategic deci-
sions will be best for the organization. A QSPM can be used by small and large, for-profit and
nonprofit organizations, and even can be used by individuals in making career choices.6
The QSPM has two limitations. First, it always requires informed judgments regarding AS
scores, but quantification is helpful throughout the strategic-planning process to minimize halo
error and various biases. Attractiveness Scores are not mere guesses. Be reminded that a 4 is
33 percent more important than a 3; making informed small decisions is important for mak-
ing effective big decisions, such as deciding among various strategies to implement. Second, a
limitation of the QSPM is that its factors and strategy choices are based on underlying input and
matching matrices/analysis.
How to Estimate Costs Associated with Recommendations The SWOT, BCG, IE, SPACE, and GRAND matrices are used in strategic planning to generate
feasible alternative strategies that could benefit the firm. The term recommendation is used to re-
fer to “any alternative strategy that is selected for implementation.” Due to monetary and/or non-
monetary constraints, no firm can implement all alternative strategies proposed in the matching
matrices, so firms utilize the QSPM and expert judgment to select particular strategies. Perhaps the
LO 6.9
GLOBAL CAPSULE 6
India’s Economy Is Booming For fiscal 2017-2018, India’s gross
domestic product (GDP) grew to 7.2
percent, one of the highest national
growth rates on the planet. India
has recently implemented many
business-friendly reforms such as
the Goods and Services Tax (GST) on
July 1, 2017, that merged nearly all
existing taxes into a single system of
taxation. India’s population of 1.324
billion (versus 295.5 million in the
United States) is mostly a middle
class willing to spend money in the
most populated democratic country
in the world. India’s economy is
flourishing, unemployment is at
4.02 percent (August 2017), and more than 51 million small and
medium size businesses are doing well—almost twice the number
of small companies in the United States. Scores of companies are
building manufacturing plants in India. FedEx has more than 6,000
employees, 1,000 vehicles, and 22 daily incoming flights in India.
Some women in India experience significant challenges to achiev-
ing financial security. India is making progress to achieve gender
equality and protect women from sexual violence such as the India
Supreme Court ruling on October
18, 2017, that “sexual intercourse
with a girl below 18 years of age
is rape regardless of whether she is
married or not.” This legal change
is intended to prevent thousands of
older men marrying 13- to 16-year-
old girls that heretofore had com-
monly occurred in India. The num-
ber of female employees in Indian
companies increased by 5 percent
in 2017, compared to the previous
year, moving the overall percentage
representation of women in Indian
companies to 30.55 percent.
Source: Based on Philip Cheng, “Opportunities Abound in India’s
Booming Economy,” Fortune (October 1, 2017): 30. Also, https://www.
nytimes.com/2017/10/11/world/asita/india-child-marriage-rape.html?
rref=collection%2Ftimestopic%2FIndia&action=click&contentCollection=
world®ion=stream&module=stream_unit&version=latest&content
Placement=4&pgtype=collection Also, http://www.hindustantimes.com/
business-news/ women-representation-in-india-inc-up-5-this-year-study/story-
6hx60yoKBAfCNorGWKzuiI.html
Should Your Firm Be Doing Business in India?
H y
w ar
d s/
S h
u tt
er st
o ck
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 215
most important page in a student’s strategic planning case project is his/her Recommendations
Page—a page where recommendations are listed along with an estimated dollar amount for the
expected cost (or savings) of each recommendation over the next three years. The dollar amounts
should all be added to reveal a total amount of new capital needed over the three years.
As indicated in Global Capsule 6, India is a country where many companies are building a
new manufacturing plant due to that country’s flourishing economy. So, how much does it cost
to build a manufacturing plant? Guidance is given in Table 6.6 for determining the estimated
cost (or savings) of various recommendations. Table 6.6 gives six example actions that could be
recommendations for a firm, along with a rationale and author comment for how dollar values
can be estimated on a recommendations page. As indicated, a cost per square foot approach may
be used to estimate the total cost of building manufacturing plants, retail stores, distribution cen-
ters, or warehouses. Another way to estimate various costs is to find costs incurred for similar
expenditures by other firms. Also, look in the firm’s Form 10K because costs are often given for
previous expenditures, and these dollar values can give guidance for estimating costs associated
with new recommendations. Avoid wild cost guesses; ask “experts” in the field if needed.
TABLE 6-6 Recommendations and Associated Costs with Rationale
Recommendation with Total Cost Rationale
1. Build one new manufacturing plant. $40M = $400 per sq. ft. : 100K sq. ft. = $40M
Author Comment – Depending on the size of the plant, cost of the land, and complex-
ity of the plant, the dollar amount could be higher or lower. Oftentimes a Form 10K will
reveal the actual cost of a similar plant recently built. Another way to estimate this cost
is to divide the firm’s total property, plant, and equipment on their balance sheet by the
number of manufacturing plants to get an average for one and use this as a basis for the
cost of building a new plant. A good rule of thumb is to spread the cost of building a new
manufacturing plant over two years.
2. Open 200 new retail stores. $300M = 200 stores : 10K sq. ft. per store : $150 per sq.
ft = $300M.
Author Comment – Depending on the average store size and cost of land, the dollar
amount could be higher or lower. Another way to estimate this cost is to divide the firm’s
total property, plant, and equipment on their balance sheet by the number of existing
stores to get an average for one store and use this as a basis for opening 200 new stores.
Be mindful that many firms use a franchise instead of a company-owned business model,
whereby most costs are borne by the franchisee; also, many firms lease instead of own
retail space. If the 200 new stores are to come online over 3 years, spread the total cost
over 3 years.
3. Hire 100 new salespersons. $7.5M = 100 : $75K annual pay = $7.5M
Author Comment – The cost could be higher or lower depending on the average salary
plus commission and amenities to be paid to salespersons in a given industry.
4. Divest our fragrance division. $59.4M fragrance segment comprises 27% of firm’s rev-
enues; total corporate value of firm is $640M. So 27% : $640M = $59.4M (revenue).
Author Comment – Besides going into debt, issuing stock, or using net income, a way to
raise needed funds is to divest of a segment. Divestiture may be needed if the segment is
performing poorly, or if the firm desires to become less diversified, or if the firm needs
to realign its portfolio of businesses with its new or existing mission statement.
5. Increase R&D expenditures. $66.2M current R&D annual expenditures10% annually.
($200M) : 10% increase annually = $20M + $22M + $24.2M = $66.2M
Author Comment – As a percent of revenue, R&D expenditures can range from zero for
low-tech firms to upwards of 20% of revenue for hi-tech firms.
6. Acquire the jewelry segment. $225M jewelry segment comprises 15% of XYZ com-
pany. Rival firm’s revenues; total value of rival firm is $1.5B. So 15% of $1.5B =
$225M estimate.
Author Comment – Firms need to show 5+ percent annual growth in revenues to keep
shareholders pleased. An acquisition is widely used to achieve this need, especially if
internal (organic) growth is not sufficient.
216 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Cultural Aspects of Strategy Analysis and Choice As defined in Chapter 4, organizational culture includes the set of shared values, beliefs, at-
titudes, customs, norms, rites, rituals, personalities, heroes, and heroines that describe a firm.
Culture is the unique way an organization does business. It is the human dimension that creates
solidarity and meaning, and it inspires commitment and productivity in an organization when
strategy changes are made. All human beings have a basic need to make sense of the world, to
feel in control, and to make meaning. When events threaten meaning, individuals react defen-
sively. Managers and employees may even sabotage new strategies in an effort to recapture the
status quo. For these reasons, it is beneficial to view strategy analysis and choice from a cultural
perspective, because success often rests on the degree of support that strategies receive from a
firm’s culture. If a firm’s strategies are supported by an organization’s culture, then managers
often can implement changes swiftly and easily. However, if a supportive culture does not exist
and is not cultivated, then strategy changes may be difficult to implement.
Strategies that require fewer cultural changes may be more attractive because extensive
changes can take considerable time and effort. Whenever two firms merge, it becomes especially
important to evaluate and consider culture-strategy linkages. Organizational culture can be the
primary reason for difficulties a firm encounters when it attempts to shift its strategic direction,
as the following statement explains:
Not only has the “right” corporate culture become the essence and foundation of corporate
excellence, but success or failure of needed corporate reforms hinges on management’s
sagacity and ability to change the firm’s driving culture in time and in tune with required
changes in strategies.7
The Politics of Strategy Analysis and Choice All organizations are political. Unless managed, political maneuvering consumes valuable
time, subverts organizational objectives, diverts human energy, and results in the loss of some
valuable employees. Sometimes political biases and personal preferences get unduly embedded
in strategy choice decisions. Internal politics affect the choice of strategies in all organizations.
The hierarchy of command in an organization, combined with the career aspirations of different
people and the need to allocate scarce resources, guarantees the formation of coalitions of indi-
viduals who strive to take care of themselves first and the organization second, third, or fourth.
Coalitions of individuals often form around key strategic issues that face an enterprise. A major
responsibility of strategists is to guide the development of coalitions, to nurture an overall team
concept, and to gain the support of key individuals and groups of individuals.
In the absence of objective analyses, strategy decisions too often are based on the politics
of the moment. With the development of improved strategy-formation analytical tools, political
factors become less important in making strategic decisions. In the absence of objectivity, politi-
cal factors sometimes dictate strategies, and this is unfortunate. Managing political relationships
is an integral part of building enthusiasm and esprit de corps in an organization.
A classic study of strategic management in nine large corporations examined the political
tactics of successful strategists and found that these persons let weakly supported ideas and
proposals die through inaction and to establish additional hurdles or tests for strongly supported
ideas considered unacceptable, but not openly opposed.8 Successful strategists keep a low politi-
cal profile on unacceptable proposals and strive to let most negative decisions come from subor-
dinates or a group consensus, thereby reserving their personal vetoes for big issues and crucial
moments. Successful strategists do a lot of chatting and informal questioning to stay abreast of
how things were progressing and to know when to intervene. Successful strategists lead strategy
but do not dictate it. They give few orders, announce few decisions, depend heavily on informal
questioning, and seek to probe and clarify until a consensus emerged.
Successful strategists generously and visibly reward key thrusts that succeeded. They assign
responsibility for major new thrusts to champions, the individuals most strongly identified with
the idea or product and whose futures were linked to its success. They stay alert to the symbolic
impact of their own actions and statements so as not to send false signals that could stimulate
movements in unwanted directions.
LO 6.10
LO 6.11
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 217
Because strategies must be effective in the marketplace and capable of gaining internal
commitment, the following tactics used by politicians for centuries can aid strategists:
1. Achieving desired results is more important than imposing a particular method; therefore,
consider various methods and choose, whenever possible, the one(s) that will afford the
greatest commitment from employees/managers.
2. Achieving satisfactory results with a popular strategy is generally better than trying to
achieve optimal results with an unpopular strategy.
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS
This chapter has revealed six new matrices widely used by strate-
gists to gain and sustain a firm’s competitive advantages, the
core purpose of strategic planning, as illustrated in Figure 6-14.
Five of the six are matching tools, SWOT, SPACE, BCG, IE, and
GRAND, coupled with the single decision-making tool, QSPM.
Whereas some consulting firms and some textbooks advocate us-
ing only one or two matrices in strategic planning, our experience
is that all six tools introduced in this chapter are uniquely valu-
able. Coupled with the EFE Matrix, the CPM, and the IFE Matrix
from earlier chapters, the nine tools together give strategists the
appropriate means for leading a firm down the narrow path to
success. Rarely is the path to success wide or easy, due to par-
ity, commoditization, imitation, duplication, substitute products,
global competitors, and the willingness and ability of consumers
to switch allegiances and loyalties. Employees expect strategists to
formulate a superior “game plan,” so their hard work implement-
ing the strategic plan will yield job security, good compensation,
and ultimately happiness for employees.
Establish A Clear Vision & Mission
Evaluate & Monitor Results:
Take Corrective Actions; Adapt
To Change
Gain & Sustain Competitive Advantages
Formulate Strategies: Collect, Analyze, &
Prioritize Data Using Matrices; Establish A Clear Strategic Plan
Implement Strategies: Establish Structure; Allocate Resources; Motivate & Reward; Attract Customers; Manage Finances
FIGURE 6-14
How to Gain and Sustain Competitive Advantages
218 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS
In preparing the strategy-formulation matrices, avoid “wild
guesses,” but become comfortable with “excellent estimates,”
as needed, based on research, to move forward with appropriate
matrices. Sometimes students are so accustomed (due to their ac-
counting and finance classes especially) to being counted wrong if
their answer is off at the third decimal place, it takes a while in a
strategic-management class to realize that businesses make “excel-
lent estimates based on research” all the time, because no business
is sure what tomorrow will bring. So, if you can make reasonable
estimates, move forward with particular matrices. For example,
with the BCG Matrix, if segment information is not provided, en-
ter only a single circle in the matrix to represent the overall firm,
rather than two or more circles for the divisions. But be mindful that multiple circles could be included based on the number of stores, or the number of customers, rather than traditional dollar
revenue information; so do not rush to the conclusion that portfolio
information is not available. Also, prepare all matrices based on the
point in time of your analysis rather than a desired future point in
time—but seriously consider performing a before and after analysis
whereby you show for example the existing BCG placement of seg-
ments versus your expected future placement.
To generate and decide on alternative strategies that will best
gain and sustain competitive advantages, your SWOT, SPACE, BCG,
IE, Grand, and QSPM need to be developed accurately. However, in
covering those matrices in an oral presentation, focus more on the
implications of those analyses than the nuts-and-bolts calculations.
In other words, as you go through those matrices in a presentation,
your goal is not to prove to the class that you did the calculations
correctly. They expect accuracy and clarity, and certainly you should
have that covered. It is the implications of each matrix that your au-
dience will be most interested in, so use these matrices to pave the
way for your recommendations with costs, which generally come
just a page or two deeper into the project. A good rule of thumb is
to spend at least an equal amount of time on the implications as the
actual calculations of each matrix when presented. This approach
will improve the delivery aspect of your presentation or paper by
maintaining the high-interest level of your audience. Focusing on
implications rather than calculations will also encourage questions
from the audience when you finish. Silence from an audience is not
good because silence means your audience either fell asleep or was
disinterested, unconvinced, or unimpressed. Use the free Excel stu-
dent template at www.strategyclub.com as needed.
3. Often, an effective way to gain commitment and achieve desired results is to shift from
short-term to long-term issues and concerns.
4. Middle-level managers must be genuinely involved in and supportive of strategic decisions,
because successful implementation will hinge on their support.9
Chapter Summary The essence of strategy formulation is an assessment of whether an organization is doing the
right things and how it can be more effective in what it does. Every organization should be wary
of becoming a prisoner of its own strategy, for even the best strategies become obsolete sooner
or later. Regular reappraisal of strategy helps management avoid complacency. Objectives and
strategies should be consciously developed and coordinated and should not merely evolve out of
day-to-day operating decisions.
An organization with no sense of direction and no coherent strategy precipitates its own
demise. When an organization does not know where it wants to go, it usually ends up someplace
it does not want to be. Every organization needs to consciously establish and communicate clear
objectives and strategies. Any organization, whether military, product-oriented, service-oriented,
governmental, or even athletic, must develop and execute effective strategies to win. An excel-
lent offense without an excellent defense, or vice versa, usually leads to defeat. Developing
strategies that use strengths to capitalize on opportunities could be considered offensive, whereas
strategies designed to improve on weaknesses while avoiding threats could be termed defensive.
Every organization has numerous external opportunities and threats and internal strengths and
weaknesses that can be aligned to formulate feasible alternative strategies.
Modern strategy-formulation tools and concepts described in this chapter are integrated
into a practical three-stage framework. Tools such as the SWOT Matrix, SPACE Matrix, BCG
Matrix, IE Matrix, and QSPM can significantly enhance the quality of strategic decisions, but
they should never be used to dictate the choice of strategies. Behavioral, cultural, and politi-
cal aspects of strategy generation and selection are always important to consider and manage.
Because of increased legal pressure from outside groups, boards of directors are assuming a
more active role in strategy analysis and choice. This is a positive trend for organizations.
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 219
Key Terms and Concepts Aggressive Quadrant (p. 201)
Attractiveness Scores (AS) (p. 213)
Boston Consulting Group (BCG) Matrix (p. 203)
business portfolio (p. 202)
cash cows (p. 204)
champions (p. 216)
competitive position (CP) (p. 197)
Competitive Quadrant (p. 201)
Conservative Quadrant (p. 201)
decision stage (p. 194)
Defensive Quadrant (p. 201)
directional vector (p. 199)
dogs (p. 204)
financial position (FP) (p. 197)
Grand Strategy Matrix (p. 208)
halo error (p. 224)
industry growth rate (p. 204)
industry position (IP) (p. 197)
input stage (p. 194)
Internal-External (IE) Matrix (p. 206)
matching (p. 194)
matching stage (p. 194)
portfolio analysis (p. 203)
Quantitative Strategic Planning Matrix (QSPM) (p. 210)
question marks (p. 204)
recommendation (p. 214)
Recommendations Page (p. 215)
relative market share position (RMSP) (p. 203)
SO strategies (p. 195)
stability position (SP) (p. 197)
stars (p. 204)
Strategic Position and Action Evaluation (SPACE) Matrix (p. 197)
strategy-formulation analytical framework (p. 193)
Strengths-Weaknesses-Opportunities-Threats (SWOT)
Matrix (p. 194)
ST strategies (p. 195)
Sum Total Attractiveness Scores (STAS) (p. 213)
Total Attractiveness Scores (TAS) (p. 213)
WO strategies (p. 195)
WT strategies (p. 195)
Issues for Review and Discussion 6-1. Explain the difference between strategies and
recommendations.
6-2. Explain how to estimate costs associated with
recommendations.
6-3. Why is it essential for a SWOT strategy to be
stated specifically enough to estimate the cost (or
savings)?
6-4. Why is it important to treat all animals, even cattle,
pigs, and chickens, with care and respect?
6-5. A Wall Street Journal article (July 12, 2014, p. B3)
said Apple’s smartphone market share in China is 6.0
percent, behind the two leaders Samsung (17.8%) and
Lenovo (11.4%). With regard to a BCG Matrix, what
are the three firms’ relative market share position?
6-6. List five limitations of a SPACE Matrix.
6-7. List the pros and cons of a firm disclosing by-segment
corporate information in a Form 10K.
6-8. What are some key differences between the BCG and
the IE portfolio matrices?
6-9. In developing a QSPM, if 10 strategies are being com-
pared simultaneously, what would be a good scale for
the AS scores? Why?
6-10. In developing a BCG Matrix or an IE Matrix, what
would be a good surrogate for revenues for Target
Corp., Burger King, Bank of America, and Spirit
Airlines?
6-11. In developing a SPACE Matrix, what would you
expect the SP average to be for Apple, Heinz, Verizon,
Amazon, and Kroger? Diagram and explain.
6-12. Rather than developing a QSPM, what is an alternative
procedure for prioritizing the relative attractiveness of
alternative strategies?
6-13. Overlay a BCG Matrix with a Grand Strategy Matrix
and discuss similarities in terms of format and implica-
tions. Diagram and explain.
6-14. Define halo error. How can halo error inhibit selecting
the best strategies to pursue?
6-15. List six drawbacks of using only subjective information
in formulating strategies.
6-16. For a firm that you know well, give an example of SO
strategy showing how an internal strength can be matched
with an external opportunity to formulate a strategy.
6-17. For a firm that you know well, give an example WT
strategy, showing how an internal weakness can be
matched with an external threat to formulate a strategy.
6-18. List three limitations of the SWOT Matrix and analysis.
6-19. For the following three firms using the given factors,
calculate a reasonable stability position (SP) coordinate
to go on their SPACE Matrix axis, given what you know
about the nature of those industries.
Factors Winnebago Apple u.S. Postal Service
Barriers to entry into
market
Seasonal nature of
business
Technological
changes SP Score
220 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
6-20. Would the angle or degrees of the vector in a SPACE
Matrix be important in generating alternative strate-
gies? Diagram and explain.
6-21. On the competitive position (CP) axis of a SPACE
Matrix, what level of capacity utilization would
be necessary for you to give the firm a negative 1?
Negative 7? Why? Diagram and explain.
6-22. If a firm has weak financial position and competes
in an unstable industry, in which quadrant will the
SPACE vector lie? Diagram and explain.
6-23. Describe a situation where the SPACE analysis would
have no vector. In other words, describe a situation
where the SPACE analysis coordinate would be (0,0).
What should an analyst do in this situation?
6-24. Develop a BCG Matrix for your university. Because
your college does not generate profits, what would be
a good surrogate for the pie slice values? How many
circles do you have and how large are they? Explain.
6-25. In a BCG Matrix, would the question mark quadrant
or the cash cow quadrant be more desirable? Diagram
and explain.
6-26. Would a BCG Matrix and analysis be worth performing
if you do not know the profits of each segment? Why?
6-27. What major limitations of the BCG Matrix does the IE
Matrix overcome? Diagram and explain.
6-28. In an IE Matrix, do you believe it is more advanta-
geous for a division to be located in quadrant II or IV?
Why? Diagram and explain.
6-29. Develop a 2 • 2 • 2 • 2 • 2 QSPM for an organization of
your choice (i.e., two strengths, two weaknesses, two
opportunities, two threats, and two strategies). Follow
all the QSPM guidelines presented in the chapter.
6-30. How would application of the strategy-formulation
analytical framework differ from a small to a large
organization?
6-31. What types of strategies would you recommend for
an organization that achieves total weighted scores
of 3.6 on the IFE Matrix and 1.2 on the EFE Matrix?
Diagram and explain.
6-32. Given the following information, develop a SPACE
Matrix for the XYZ Corporation: FP = +2; SP = − 6;
CP = −2; IP = +4. Diagram and explain.
6-33. Given the information in the following table, develop
a BCG Matrix and an IE Matrix:
Divisions 1 2 3
Profits $10 $15 $25
Sales $100 $50 $100
Relative Market Share 0.2 0.5 0.8
Industry Growth Rate +.20 +.10 −.10
IFE Total Weighted
Scores
1.6 3.1 2.2
EFE Total Weighted
Scores
2.5 1.8 3.3
6-34. How would you develop a portfolio matrix for your
school of business?
6-35. Explain how to estimate the cost of building one new
manufacturing plant for a company.
6-36. Discuss the limitations of various strategy-formulation
analytical techniques.
6-37. Explain why cultural factors should be an important
consideration in analyzing and choosing among alter-
native strategies.
6-38. How would for-profit and nonprofit organizations dif-
fer in their applications of the strategy-formulation
analytical framework?
6-39. Develop a SPACE Matrix for a company that is finan-
cially weak and is a weak competitor. The industry
for this company is pretty stable, but the industry’s
projected growth in revenues and profits is not good.
Label all axes and quadrants.
6-40. List four limitations of a BCG Matrix. Diagram and
explain.
6-41. Make up an example to show clearly and completely
that you can develop an IE Matrix for a three-division
company, where each division has $10, $20, and $40
in revenues and $2, $4, and $1 in profits. State other
assumptions needed. Label axes and quadrants.
6-42. What procedures could be necessary if the SPACE
vector falls right on the axis between the competitive
and defensive quadrants? Diagram and explain.
6-43. In a BCG Matrix or the Grand Strategy Matrix, what
would you consider to be a rapid market (or industry)
growth rate?
6-44. Why is it important to work row by row instead of
column by column in preparing a QSPM?
6-45. Why should one avoid putting double 4s in a row in
preparing a QSPM?
6-46. Envision a QSPM with no weight column. Would that
still be a useful analysis? Why or why not? What do
you lose by deleting the weight column?
6-47. Prepare a BCG Matrix for a two-division firm with
sales of $5 and $8 versus profits of $3 and $1, respec-
tively. State assumptions for the RMSP and IGR axes
to enable you to construct the diagram.
6-48. Consider developing a before and after BCG or IE
Matrix to reveal the expected results of your proposed
strategies. What limitation of the analysis would this
procedure overcome somewhat?
6-49. If a firm has the leading market share in its indus-
try, where on the BCG Matrix would the circle lie?
Diagram and explain.
6-50. If a firm competes in an unstable industry, such as
telecommunications, where on the SP axis of the
SPACE Matrix would you plot the appropriate point?
Diagram and explain.
6-51. Why do you think the SWOT Matrix is the most
widely used of all strategy matrices?
6-52. What are two limitations of the QSPM discussed in
the chapter?
6-53. The number of people in millions that visited
various finance-focused information websites in
September 2017 are as follows: Yahoo! Finance
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 221
(59.7), Business Insider (53.4), CNBC (49.2),
Forbes Digital (48.6), Bloomberg (36.6), CNN
Money (36.2), Dow Jones (34.7), Reuters sites
(24.7), and Fortune.com sites (19.2). What would
the RMSP values be for the nine firms if you were
going to develop a BCG Matrix?
6-54. AT&T and Time Warner are perhaps merging. The fol-
lowing data table gives the 9-month 2017 revenue and
operating income by segment for both AT&T and its
rival Time Warner. This type of information for firms
can enable construction of circles (based on revenues)
and pie slices (based on profits) in portfolio matrices.
Develop a BCG Matrix based on the information
given.
Company Revenue in billions
Operating income in billions
AT&T Segments
1. Business Solutions $51.0 $13.3
2. Entertainment 38.0 4.6
3. Consumer Mobility 23.2 7.1
4. International 6.1 -0.3
Time Warner Segments
1. Turner 9.0 3.5
2. HBO 4.7 1.7
3. Warner Bros. 9.8 1.3
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
SET 1: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR COCA-COLA
EXERCISE 6A
Perform a SWOT Analysis for Coca-Cola
Purpose
The SWOT Matrix is the most widely used of all strategic planning tools and techniques because
it is conceptually simple and lends itself readily to discussion among executives and managers.
The SWOT Matrix is effective in formulating strategies because it clearly matches a firm’s internal
strengths and weaknesses with the firm’s external opportunities and threats to generate feasible strate-
gies that should be considered. This exercise gives you practice in performing SWOT analysis for a
large corporation.
Instructions
Step 1 Join with two other students in class. Together, develop a SWOT Matrix for Coca-Cola.
Follow guidelines provided in the chapter, including notation (for example, S4, T3) at the
end of each strategy. Include two strategies in each of the four (SO, ST, WT, WO) quadrants.
Be specific regarding your strategies, avoiding generic terms such as forward integration.
Use the Cohesion Case, your answers to Assurance-of-Learning Exercise 1B on page 66,
and the company’s most recent quarterly report as given at the corporate website.
Step 2 Turn in your team-developed SWOT Matrix to your professor for a classwork grade. Note:
Feel free to list factors and strategies vertically on a page rather than necessarily fitting ev-
erything into a nine-cell array.
EXERCISE 6B
Develop a SPACE Matrix for Coca-Cola
Purpose
The SPACE Matrix is one of five matching strategic management tools widely used to formulate
feasible strategies. Used in conjunction with the SWOT, BCG, IE, and GRAND, the SPACE can be
helpful in devising a strategic plan because hard choices normally must be made between attractive
strategic options. This exercise gives you practice in developing a SPACE Matrix.
Instructions
Step 1 Review Coca-Cola’s business as described in the Cohesion Case as well as the company’s
most recent Form 10K and quarterly report.
Step 2 Review industry and competitive information pertaining to Coca-Cola.
Step 3 Develop a SPACE Matrix for Coca-Cola. What strategies do you recommend for Coca-Cola
given your SPACE analysis? Avoid generic, vague terms such as market development.
222 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
EXERCISE 6C
Develop a BCG Matrix for Coca-Cola
Purpose
Portfolio matrices are widely used by multidivisional organizations to help identify and select strate-
gies to pursue. A BCG analysis identifies particular divisions that should receive fewer resources than
others. It may identify some divisions that need to be divested. This exercise can give you practice in
developing a BCG Matrix.
Instructions
Step 1 Place the following five column headings at the top of a separate sheet of paper: Divisions,
Revenues, Profits, Relative Market Share Position, Industry Growth Rate. Down the far
left of your page, list Coca-Cola’s divisions/segments as given on pages 58–59. Now turn
back to the Cohesion Case and find information to fill in all the cells in your data table from
page 59.
Step 2 Based on Coca-Cola’s year-end 2017 segment data given in the Cohesion Case, complete a
BCG Matrix for the company.
Step 3 Compare your BCG Matrix to other students’ matrices. Discuss any major differences.
EXERCISE 6D
Develop a QSPM for Coca-Cola
Purpose
This exercise can give you practice in developing a QSPM to determine the relative attractiveness of
various strategic alternatives.
Instructions
Step 1 Join with two other students in class to develop a joint QSPM for Coca-Cola.
Step 2 Compare your team’s QSPM to those of other teams.
Step 3 Discuss any major differences.
SET 2: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR MY UNIVERSITY
EXERCISE 6E
Develop a BCG Matrix for My University
Purpose
Developing a BCG Matrix for many nonprofit organizations, including colleges and universities,
is a useful exercise. Of course, there are no profits for each division or department—and in some
cases no revenues. However, be creative in performing a BCG Matrix. For example, the pie slice
in the circles can represent the number of majors receiving jobs on graduation, or the number
of faculty teaching in that area, or some other variable that you believe is important to consider.
The size of the circles can represent the number of students majoring in particular departments or
areas.
Instructions
Step 1 Develop a BCG Matrix for your university. Include all academic schools, departments, or
colleges.
Step 2 Diagram your BCG Matrix on paper.
Step 3 Discuss differences among the BCG Matrices developed in class.
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 223
SET 3: STRATEGIC PLANNING TO ENHANCE MY EMPLOYABILITY
EXERCISE 6F
Perform QSPM Analysis on Myself
Purpose
QSPM analysis is designed to determine the relative attractiveness of feasible alternative actions.
Although primarily used in a business setting, QSPM analysis can enable individuals to objectively
determine which alternative strategies are best to pursue. The purpose of this exercise is to showcase
how individuals can use QSPM analysis to make career choices.
Instructions
Step 1 Follow the steps provided in Chapter 6 for developing a QSPM analysis, but do so for your-
self rather than a company. Use the external and internal factor information about yourself
that you earlier developed in Exercise 1D (p. 67) to get started.
Step 2 Across the top row of your QSPM, consider two strategies as follows:
1) Go to graduate school or 2) Go to work full-time.
Step 3 To keep this example simple, do not include a weight column, as some firms also prefer;
simply add the AS scores to obtain your recommended best strategy, rather than multiplying
across rows and summing TAS scores.
Step 4 Share with the class what strategy, More School or More Work, yields the highest TAS score
in your personal analysis.
EXERCISE 6G
A Template Competency Test
Purpose
The free Excel strategic planning template at www.strategyclub.com is widely used for strategic
planning by students and small businesses; this exercise aims to enhance your familiarity with the
template. Developing competence with the template will enable you to place this skill appropriately
on your resume, in addition to facilitating your development of a comprehensive strategic plan for an
assigned case company.
Instructions
Answer the following Chapter 6 related questions about the template. Discuss your answers with
classmates to determine any issues or concerns.
1. In performing SPACE analysis, does the template allow you to show your firm and rival firms?
If yes, would a legend be nice to create to organize information? Why?
2. In performing BCG analysis, how does the template address firms competing in markets with
over or under 20% IGR?
3. Using the template, what is a good way to show a before and after (your recommendations)
BCG?
4. In performing IE portfolio analysis using the template, are your EFE and IFE Matrix total
weighted scores automatically plotted after you finish those matrices? For divisions, does the
template call for all “divisional” EFE and IFE matrices?
5. Why is it best to label divisions 1, 2, 3 etc. on BCG and IE matrices and thereby create a legend,
rather than let division names plot in the matrix?
6. In performing GRAND analysis, how many firms/divisions/scenarios does the template allow
to be considered/placed in the matrix? Why is this a nice feature? What are some scenarios you
could examine?
7. Why is there no need to reenter weights when performing QSPM analysis using the template?
224 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
SET 4: INDIVIDUAL VERSUS GROUP STRATEGIC PLANNING
EXERCISE 6H
How Severe Are Various Subjective Threats in Strategic Planning?
Purpose
As discussed in Chapter 6, without objective information and analysis, six subjective threats (per-
sonal biases, politics, prejudices, emotions, personalities, and halo error) oftentimes play a dominant
role in the strategy-formulation process, undermining effectiveness. Halo error is the tendency to put
too much weight on a single factor.
The purpose of this exercise is to examine more closely various threats of relying too heavily on
subjectivity in formulating strategies. A secondary purpose of this exercise is to examine whether
individual decision making is better than group decision making. Academic research suggests that
groups make better decisions than individuals about 80 percent of the time.
Instructions
Rank the six subjective threats as to their relative severity (1 = most severe, 9 = least important). First,
rank the threats as an individual. Next, rank the threats as part of a group of three. Thus, determine what
person(s) and what group(s) here today can come closest to the expert ranking. This exercise enables
examination of the relative effectiveness of individual versus group decision making in strategic planning.
The Steps
1. Fill in Column 1 in Table 6-7 to reveal your individual ranking of the relative severity of the six
subjective threats (1= most severe to 6 = least severe). For example, if you think Personal Biases
is the third-most severe threat, then enter a 3 in Table 6-7 in Column 1 beside Personal Biases.
2. Fill in Column 2 in Table 6-7 to reveal your group’s ranking of the relative severity of the six
threats (1 = most severe to 6 = least severe).
3. Fill in Column 3 in Table 6-7 to reveal the expert’s ranking of the six threats. To be provided by
your professor, the expert rankings are based on the authors’ experience, rather than on findings
from empirical research.
4. Fill in Column 4 in Table 6-7 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 1 and Column 3
to reveal how well you performed as an individual in this exercise. (Note: Absolute difference
disregards negative numbers.)
5. Fill in Column 5 in Table 6-7 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 2 and Column 3
to reveal how well your group performed in this exercise.
6. Sum Column 4. Sum Column 5.
7. Compare the Column 4 sum with the Column 5 sum. If your Column 4 sum is less than your
Column 5 sum, then you performed better as an individual than as a group. Normally, group
decision making is superior to individual decision making, so if you did better than your group,
you did excellent.
8. The Individual Winner(s): The individual(s) with the lowest Column 4 sum is the WINNER.
9. The Group Winners(s): The group(s) with the lowest Column 5 score is the WINNER.
TABLE 6-7 Assessing Severity of Being Too Subjective in Making Strategic Decisions: Comparing Individual versus Group Decision Making
Threats of Being Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5
Too Subjective
1. Personal Biases
2. Politics
3. Prejudices
4. Emotions
5. Personalities
6. Halo error
Sums
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 225
MINI-CASE ON THE BOSTON CONSULTING GROUP
WHAT AMERICAN FIRM HELPS THE MOST COMPANIES DO STRATEGIC PLANNING? The answer to the question posed above might be the Boston Consulting Group (BCG) headquartered
in Boston, Massachusetts. A worldwide management-consulting firm founded in 1963, BCG had rev-
enues of $6.3 billion in 2017 and more than 16,000 employees. BCG’s President and CEO is Rich
Lesser. BCG was ranked third among Fortune ’s “100 Best Companies to Work For” in 2017 and was
ranked first among Consulting Magazine’s 2016 “Best Firms to Work For.”
In formulating strategies, some firms use BCG’s Advantage Matrix to portray on the x-axis the
“size of a firm’s competitive advantage (Low versus High)” and on the y-axis “the number of ap-
proaches a firm can use to achieve competitive advantage (Low versus High).” Based on these two
axes, strategic implications for firms located in one of four quadrants can be labeled, according to
BCG, as: Fragmented, Specialization, Volume, and Stalemate, as illustrated below:
Fragmented
High
Low
Stalemate
Size of a Firm’s Competitive Advantage
N u
m b
er o
f A
p p
ro a ch
es A
F ir
m C
a n
U se
t o A
ch ie
v e
C o m
p et
it iv
e A
d v a n
ta g e
Volume
Specialization
High Low
Do some online research to answer the following questions about BCG’s Advantage Matrix.
Questions
1. In a sentence or two for each quadrant, how would you describe implications for a firm based on
their position in the Advantage Matrix? Do you like the four words proposed for “quadrant im-
plications?” Can you think of a better word or words?
2. What do you think are the primary benefits of using the Advantage Matrix?
3. What are the primary limitations of using the Advantage Matrix in your view?
4. How could the Advantage Matrix be improved?
Source: Based on information at http://www.differentiateyourbusiness.co.uk/competitive-advantage-matrix
What Are Your Thoughts on This Idea?
P re
ss m
as te
r/ S
h u tt
er st
o ck
Current Readings Asgari, Navid, Kulwant Singh, and Will Mitchell. “Alliance
Portfolio Reconfiguration Following a Technological
Discontinuity.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 5
(May 2017): 1062-1081. Aversa, Paolo, Stefan Haefliger, and Danielle Giuliana Reza.
“Building a Winning Business Model Portfolio.” MIT Sloan Management Review 58, no. 4 (Summer 2017): 49-54.
Blake, Daniel J. and Caterina Moschieri. “Policy Risk, Strategic Decisions and Contagion Effects: Firm-Specific Considerations.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 3 (March 2017): 732-750.
Chatterjee, Joydeep. “Strategy, Human Capital Investments, Business-Domain Capabilities, and Performance: a Study in the Global Software Services Industry.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 3 (March 2017): 588-608.
David, Meredith E., Fred R. David, and Forest R. David. “The Quantitative Strategic Planning Matrix: A New Marketing Tool.” Journal of Strategic Marketing, no. 3, (April 2016): 1-11.
Kim, Ji Youn (Rose) and H. Kevin Steensma. “Employee Mobility, Spin-Outs, and Knowledge Spill-In: How Incumbent Firms Can Learn From New Ventures.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 8 (August 2017): 1626-1645.
Ozmel, Umit, Jeffrey Reuer, and Cheng-Wei Wu. “Interorganizational Imitation and Acquisitions of High- tech Ventures.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 13, (December 2017): 2647-2665.
Ross, Jeanne W., Ina M. Sebastian, and Cynthia M. Beath. “How to Develop a Great Digital Strategy.” MIT Sloan Management Review 58, no. 2 (Winter 2017): 7-9.
226 PART 2 • STRATEGY FORMuLATION
Web Resources
1. BCG Matrix Images This website provides more than
100 jpeg images of BCG matrices that can be used in a
case project or strategic planning report. https://www.google.com/search?source=hp&q=bcg+matr ix+images&oq=bcg+matrix+im&gs_l=psy-ab.1.0.0l2j0i2 2i30k1l2.94589.100985.0.103449.15.13.0.0.0.0.109.1230. 9j4.13.0.foo%2Ccfro%3D1%2Cnso-ehuqi%3D1%2Cnso- ehuui%3D1%2Cewh%3D0%2 Cnso-mplt%3D2%2Cnso-enksa%3D0%2Cnso- enfk%3D1%2Cnso-usnt%3D1%2Cnso-qnt-npqp%3 D0-1633%2Cnso-qnt-npdq%3D0-5608%2Cnso-qnt- npt%3D0-1229%2Cnso-qnt-ndc%3D2051%2Ccspa-dspm- nm-mnp%3D0-06145%2Ccspa-dspm-nm-mxp%3D0- 153625%2Cnso-unt-npqp%3D0-1506%2Cnso-unt- npdq%3D0-4694%2Cnso-unt-npt%3D0-061%2Cnso- unt-ndc%3D300%2Ccspa-uipm-nm-mnp%3D0-
007625%2Ccspa-uipm-nm-mxp%3D0-053375…0…1.1.64. psy-ab..2.13.1229.0..35i39k1j0i131k1j0i20k1.pk-zD4sqIjQ
2. The QSPM Matrix This website provides numerous
PDF files that discuss and exemplify the QSPM Matrix in
further detail. https://scholar.google.com/scholar?q=quantitative+strate gic+planning+matrix&hl=en&as_sdt=0&as_vis=1&oi=s cholart&sa=X&ved=0ahUKEwihptaiwonWAhWK5yYK HYYMBZ4QgQMINDAA
3. Strategic Planning Template This website offers the
best strategic planning template available for developing
a three-year strategic plan, and it is free. All six new ma-
trices introduced in Chapter 6 (SWOT, SPACE, BCG, IE,
GRAND, QSPM) are included in the template.
CHAPTER 6 • STRATEGY ANALYSIS AND CHOICE 227
Endnotes 1. R. T. Lenz, “Managing the Evolution of the Strategic
Planning Process,” Business Horizons 30, no. 1 (January-
February 1987): 37.
2. Robert Grant, “The Resource-Based Theory of
Competitive Advantage: Implications for Strategy
Formulation,” California Management Review (Spring
1991): 114.
3. Greg Dess, G. T. Lumpkin, and Alan Eisner, Strategic
Management: Text and Cases (New York: McGraw-Hill/
Irwin, 2006), 72.
4. Adapted from H. Rowe, R. Mason, and K. Dickel,
Strategic Management and Business Policy: A
Methodological Approach (Reading, MA: Addison-
Wesley, 1982), 155-156.
5. Fred David, “The Strategic Planning Matrix—A
Quantitative Approach,” Long Range Planning 19, no. 5
(October 1986): 102; Andre Gib and Robert Margulies,
“Making Competitive Intelligence Relevant to the User,”
Planning Review 19, no. 3 (May-June1991): 21.
6. Meredith E. David, Forest R. David, and Fred R. David,
“The QSPM: A New Marketing Tool,” Presented at
the International Academy of Business and Public
Administration Disciplines (IABPAD) Meeting in Dallas,
Texas, April 2015. Also, Meredith E. David, & Fred R.
David. “Strategic Planning for Individuals: A Proposed
Framework and Method?” 2017 Academy of Business
Research (ABR) Conference in Atlantic City, New Jersey,
September 20, 2017.
7. Y. Allarie and M. Firsirotu, “How to Implement Radical
Strategies in Large Organizations,” Sloan Management
Review 26, no. 3 (Spring 1985): 19. Another excellent
article is P. Shrivastava, “Integrating Strategy Formulation
with Organizational Culture,” Journal of Business Strategy
5, no. 3 (Winter 1985): 103-111.
8. James Brian Quinn, Strategies for Changes: Logical
Incrementalism (Homewood, IL: Irwin, 1980), 128-145.
These political tactics are listed in A. Thompson and
A. Strickland, Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases
(Plano, TX: Business Publications, 1984), 261.
9. William Guth and Ian Macmillan, “Strategy
Implementation versus Middle Management Self-Interest,”
Strategic Management Journal 7, no. 4 (July-August
1986): 321.
228
PART 3
STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
7
Strategy Formulation
Feedback Loop
Strategy Implementation
Strategy Evaluation
Chapter 10: Business Ethics, Environmental Sustainability, and Social Responsibility
Chapter 11: Global and International Issues
Strategy Evaluation
and Governance Chapter 9
Implementing Strategies:
Finance and Accounting
Issues Chapter 8
Implementing Strategies:
Management and Marketing
Issues Chapter 7
Business Vision and
Mission Chapter 2
Strategies in Action Chapter 5
Strategy Analysis and
Choice Chapter 6
The Internal
Assessment Chapter 4
The External Assessment Chapter 3
FIGURE 7- 1
The Comprehensive, Integrative Strategic-Management Model
Source: Fred R. David, “How Companies Define Their Mission,” Long Range Planning 22, no. 1 (February 1989): 91. See also Anik Ratnaningsih, Nadjadji Anwar, Patdono Suwignjo, and Putu Artama Wiguna, “Balance Scorecard of David’s Strategic Modeling at Industrial Business for National Construction Contractor of Indonesia,” Journal of Mathematics and Technology , no. 4 (October 2010): 20.
229
Implementing Strategies: Management and Marketing Issues
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
The following exercises are found at the end of this chapter:
SET 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 7A: Compare and Contrast Coca-Cola’s Marketing Expenses versus Rival Firms
EXERCISE 7B: Diagram an Existing and Proposed Organizational Chart for Coca-Cola
SET 2: Strategic Planning for My University
EXERCISE 7C: Develop a Perceptual Map for My University
SET 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability
EXERCISE 7D: Marketing Yourself to Best Achieve Your Career Objectives
SET 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
EXERCISE 7E: What Are the Most Important Benefits of Having a Diverse Workforce?
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following:
7- 1. Describe the transition from formulating to implementing strategies.
7- 2. Discuss reasons why annual objectives are essential for effective strategy implementation.
7- 3. Identify and discuss the nature and role of policies in strategy implementation.
7- 4. Explain the roles of resource allocation and managing conflict in strategy implementation.
7- 5. Discuss the need to match a firm’s structure with its strategy.
7- 6. Identify, diagram, and discuss different types of organizational structure.
7- 7. Identify and discuss 15 do’s and don’ts in constructing organizational charts.
7- 8. Discuss four strategic production/operations issues vital for strategy implementation.
7- 9. Discuss seven strategic human resource issues vital for strategy implementation.
7- 10. Describe key strategic marketing issues vital for implementing strategies.
MyLab Management
Improve Your Grade!
If your instructor is using MyLab Management, visit www.pearson.com/mylab/management
for videos, simulations, and writing exercises.
230 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
T he strategic-management process does not end with deciding what strategy or strategies
to pursue. There must be a translation of strategic thought into action. This translation is
significantly easier when managers and employees of the firm understand the business,
feel a part of the company, and through involvement in strategy-formulation activities have be-
come committed to helping the organization succeed. Without understanding and commitment,
strategy-implementation efforts face major problems. Vince Lombardi commented, “The best
game plan in the world never blocked or tackled anybody.”
Even the most technically perfect strategic plan will serve little purpose if it is not
implemented. Many organizations tend to spend an inordinate amount of time, money,
and effort on developing the strategic plan, all the while treating the means and circum-
stances under which it will be implemented as afterthoughts! Change comes through
implementation and evaluation, not through the plan. A technically imperfect plan that
is implemented well will achieve more than a perfect plan that never gets off the paper
it is written.1
Implementing strategy affects an organization from top to bottom, including all the func-
tional and divisional areas of a business. This chapter focuses on management and marketing
issues most critical for successful strategy-implementation, whereas Chapter 8 focuses on
analogous finance and accounting issues. Showcased as an exemplary strategist, former CEO of
PepsiCo, Indra Nooyi, is one of the most successful persons ever to lead the management and
marketing strategy-implementation efforts of a major corporation.
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED
Indra Nooyi, Former CEO of PepsiCo The former CEO of PepsiCo, Indra Nooyi, was voted Fortune’s second-
most powerful woman in business in the U.S. in 2017. Former CEO
Nooyi has appeared 18 out of the last 20 years on Fortune’s list of the
50 most-admired businesswomen in the U.S. Nooyi has catapulted
PepsiCo to currently have 22 brands that each bring in more than $1
billion in annual sales; three new PepsiCo brands (Naked Juice, $923M;
Pure Leaf, $873M; and Sabra, $618M) are poised to soon join the com-
pany’s over $1 billion brand list. In a recent interview, Nooyi answered a
few strategy implementation questions (condensed and paraphrased):
1. Question: You supported Hillary Clinton for President of the
United States, but when Donald Trump was elected, you joined
Trump’s Business Advisory Council and became a Trump sup-
porter. What do you think about political issues in terms of
strategy implementation?
Answer: Before a presidential election, you can support any
candidate you like, but the day after the election, support
whoever is elected. Mr. Trump is my president and our presi-
dent and his CEO Business Advisory Council was a great idea.
2. Question: What advice would you give women (and men) enter-
ing the workforce today?
Answer: Strive to get increasingly better at multitasking.
Be very well organized and manage your time efficiently.
Every day write down (make a list of) 50 items you need to
accomplish; check the items off as you complete them; carry
forward to the next day’s list any item that still needs work;
continually develop your business skills by prioritizing tasks
that need to be done. I personally do all these things daily
in leading PepsiCo’s management and marketing efforts to
implement strategies successfully.
Source: Based on Beth Kowitt, “The Queen of Pop,” Fortune, October 1, 2017,
70–74.
N en
o v B
ro th
er s
Im ag
es /S
h u tt
er st
o ck
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 231
Transitioning from Formulating to Implementing Strategies The strategy-implementation stage of the strategic-management process is illus-
trated with white shading in Figure 7-1 on the first page of this chapter. Successful
strategy formulation does not guarantee successful strategy implementation. It is
always more difficult to do something (strategy implementation) than to say you are
going to do it (strategy formulation)! Although inextricably linked, strategy imple-
mentation is fundamentally different from strategy formulation.
In all but the smallest organizations, the transition from strategy formulation
to strategy implementation requires a shift in responsibility from strategists to divi-
sional and functional managers. Implementation problems can arise because of this
shift in responsibility, especially if strategy-formulation decisions come as a surprise
to middle- and lower-level managers. Managers and employees are motivated more
by perceived self-interests than by organizational interests, unless the two coincide.
This is a primary reason why divisional and functional managers should be involved
as much as possible in both strategy-formulation and strategy-implementation activi-
ties. Strategy formulation and implementation can be contrasted in the ways illus-
trated in Figure 7-2.
Strategy-formulation concepts and tools do not differ greatly for small, large,
for-profit, or nonprofit organizations. However, in contrast, strategy implementation
varies substantially among different types and sizes of organizations. Implementing
strategies requires such actions as altering sales territories, adding new departments,
closing facilities, hiring new employees, changing an organization’s pricing strategy,
developing financial budgets, developing new employee benefits, establishing cost-
control procedures, changing advertising strategies, building new facilities, training
new employees, transferring managers among divisions, and building a better man-
agement information system. These types of activities obviously differ greatly across
manufacturing, service, and governmental organizations.
The Need for Clear Annual Objectives Annual objectives are desired milestones an organization should achieve to ensure
successful strategy implementation. Annual objectives are essential for strategy
implementation for five primary reasons:
1. They represent the basis for allocating resources.
2. They are a primary mechanism for evaluating managers.
3. They enable effective monitoring of progress toward achieving long-term
objectives.
4. They establish organizational, divisional, and departmental priorities.
5. They are essential for keeping a strategic plan on track.
Considerable time and effort should be devoted to ensuring that annual objec-
tives are well conceived, consistent with long-term objectives, and supportive of
strategies to be implemented. Active participation in establishing annual objectives
is needed for the preceding reasons listed. Approving, revising, or rejecting annual
objectives is much more than a rubber-stamp activity. The purpose of annual objec-
tives can be summarized as follows:
Annual objectives serve as guidelines for action, directing, and channeling efforts and ac-
tivities of organization members. They provide a source of legitimacy in an enterprise by
justifying activities to stakeholders. They serve as standards of performance. They serve
as an important source of employee motivation and identification. They give incentives for
managers and employees to perform. They provide a basis for organizational design.2
Clearly stated and communicated objectives are critical to success in all types and sizes
of firms. Annual objectives are often stated in terms of profitability, growth, and market share
LO 7.1
LO 7.2
Position forces
before the action
Manage forces
during the action
Focus is on
effectiveness
Focus is on
efficiency
Primarily an
intellectual process
Primarily an
operational process
Requires good
intuitive and
analytical skills
Requires special
motivation and
leadership skills
Requires
coordination
among a few
individuals
Requires
coordination among
many individuals
A science with
tools and
techniques
An art to energize
people
Difficult to
do well
Process-oriented People-oriented
Primary
responsibility
of top managers
Primary
responsibility of
mid and lower-level
managers
Considerably
more difficult to
do well
STRATEGY
FORMULATION
STRATEGY
IMPLEMENTATION
FIGURE 7-2
Contrasting Strategy Formulation with Strategy Implementation
232 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
R&D annual objective
Develop two new products this year that are succesfully marketed.
Production annual objective
Increase production efficiency by 30% this year.
Marketing annual objective
Increase the number of salespeople by 40 this year.
Finance annual objective
Obtain long-term financing of $400,000 in the next six months.
Personnel annual objective
Reduce employee absenteeism from 10% to 5% this year.
LONG-TERM COMPANY OBJECTIVE
Double company revenues in two years through market development and market penetration. (Current revenues are $2 million.)
DIVISION I ANNUAL OBJECTIVE
Increase divisional revenues by 40% this year and 40% next year. (Current revenues are $1 million.)
DIVISION II ANNUAL OBJECTIVE
Increase divisional revenues by 40% this year and 40% next year. (Current revenues are $0.5 million.)
DIVISION III ANNUAL OBJECTIVE
Increase divisional revenues by 50% this year and 50% next year. (Current revenues are $0.5 million.)
FIGURE 7-3
The Stamus Company’s Hierarchy of Aims
by business segment, geographic area, customer group, and product. Figure 7-3 illustrates how
the Stamus Company could establish annual objectives based on long-term objectives. Table 7-1
reveals associated revenue figures that correspond to the objectives outlined in Figure 7-3. Note
that, according to plan, the Stamus Company will slightly exceed its long-term objective of
doubling company revenues between 2020 and 2022. Figure 7-3 also reflects how a hierarchy of
annual objectives can be established based on an organization’s structure.
TABLE 7-1 The Stamus Company’s Revenue Expectations (in millions, $)
2020 2021 2022
Division I Revenues 1.00 1.40 1.96
Division II Revenues 0.50 0.70 0.98
Division III Revenues 0.50 0.75 1.12
Total Company Revenues 2.00 2.85 4.06
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 233
Objectives should be consistent across both horizontal (functional/departmental/staff) and
vertical (top to lower managers) levels in a chain of command. Horizontal consistency of
objectives, such as pertaining to a CFO, CMO, CIO, CSO, or HRM laterally across a chart, is as
important as vertical consistency of objectives, such as pertaining to a Chairperson, CEO, divi-
sion president, or plant manager downward in a chart.
Annual objectives should be measurable, consistent, reasonable, challenging, clear, com-
municated throughout the organization, characterized by an appropriate time dimension, and
accompanied by commensurate rewards and sanctions. These elements are often called the
characteristics of objectives. Too often, objectives are stated in generalities, with little opera-
tional usefulness. Annual objectives, such as “to improve communication” or “to improve per-
formance,” are not clear, specific, or measurable. Objectives should state quantity, quality, cost,
and time—and also be verifiable. Terms and phrases such as maximize, minimize, as soon as
possible, and adequate should be avoided. For example, an annual objective could be “increase
sales of brand ABC to 1,000 units yielding $20,000 in revenue annually.”
Annual objectives should be supported by clearly stated policies. It is important to tie
rewards and sanctions to annual objectives so that employees and managers understand that
achieving objectives is critical to successful strategy implementation. Clear annual objectives
do not guarantee successful strategy implementation, but they do increase the likelihood that
personal and organizational aims can be accomplished. Overemphasis on achieving objectives
can result in undesirable conduct, such as faking the numbers, distorting the records, and letting
objectives become ends in themselves. Wells Fargo had a probem with this a few years ago in
regards to employees opening new customer accounts.
Based on management activities such as establishing clear annual objectives, Fortune an-
nually ranks companies as the most admired in the world; its recent ranking is revealed in Table
7-2. Note that the top 10 firms are U.S. companies, but three outside-U.S.-headquartered compa-
nies made the top 35: BMW (#14), Singapore Airlines (#33), and Toyota Motor (#34).
TABLE 7-2 The Most Admired Companies in the World
Rank Company Author Comment
1 Apple The most valuable brand on the planet
2 Amazon.com Delivers 80% of the e-books read globally
3 Starbucks Offers tea, beer, wine, lunch, and dinner
4 Berkshire Hathaway Very highly diversified; owns many companies
5 Walt Disney Produces great movies; owns ESPN and ABC Sports
6 Alphabet Owns Google, the best search engine anywhere
7 General Electric Highly diversified; competes in many industries
8 Southwest Airlines Has reported 40 straight years of profitability
9 Facebook The most popular social-media website globally
9 Microsoft (A TIE at #9) The most popular computing software firm
10 FedEx Delivers the goods as people shop and ship more
Source: Based on information at http://fortune.com/worlds-most-admired-companies/list/
Establish Policies Policies refer to specific guidelines, methods, procedures, rules, forms, and administrative prac-
tices established to support and encourage work toward stated goals. Changes in a firm’s stra-
tegic direction do not occur automatically. On a day-to-day basis, policies are needed to make
a strategy work. Policies facilitate solving recurring problems and guide the implementation of
strategy. Policies are essential instruments for strategy implementation, for at least six reasons:
1. Policies set boundaries, constraints, and limits on the kinds of administrative actions that
can be taken to reward and sanction behavior.
2. Policies let both employees and managers know what is expected of them, thereby increas-
ing the likelihood that strategies will be implemented successfully.
LO 7.3
234 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
3. Policies provide a basis for management control and allow coordination across organiza-
tional units.
4. Policies reduce the amount of time managers spend making decisions. Policies also clarify
what work is to be done and by whom.
5. Policies promote delegation of decision making to appropriate managerial levels where
various problems usually arise.
6. Policies clarify what can and cannot be done in pursuit of an organization’s objectives.
As an example policy, more and more companies, including IBM, Aetna, Bank of America,
Best Buy, and Reddit, are abandoning the idea of allowing employees to work from home.
Businesses are finding there is need for more collaboration at the work site, closer contact with
customers, and more control of the workday. Research reveals that the percentage of U.S. work-
ers who performed all or some of their work at home fell to less than 20 percent in 2017, down
from 24 percent the prior year.3 Commuting to work, teamwork, and working in cubicles at
company-owned office spaces is on the rise, while staying at a home office to work remotely is
becoming less common.
Many organizations have a policy manual that serves to guide and direct behavior.
Policies can apply to all divisions and departments, such as: “We are an equal opportunity
employer,” or to a single department, such as: “Employees in this department must take
at least one training and development course each year.” Whatever their scope and form,
policies serve as a mechanism for implementing strategies and obtaining objectives. Policies
should be stated in writing whenever possible. They represent the means for carrying out
strategic decisions.
Examples of policies that support a company strategy, a divisional objective, and a depart-
mental objective are given in Table 7-3. Some example issues that may require a management
policy are provided in Table 7-4. As discussed in Ethics Capsule 7, there is an increasing need
for firms to establish policies regarding employees’ use of personal smartphones at work, as dis-
tractions caused by such behavior can undermine employee morale.
TABLE 7-3 A Hierarchy of Policies
Company Strategy Acquire a chain of retail stores to meet our sales growth and profitability objectives.
Supporting Policies
1. “All stores will be open from 8 a.m. to 8 p.m. Monday through Saturday.”
2. “All stores must support company advertising by contributing 5 percent of their total monthly
revenues for this purpose.”
Divisional Objective
Increase the division’s revenues from $10 million in 2020 to $15 million in 2021.
Supporting Policies
1. “Beginning in January 2021, each one of this division’s salespersons must file a weekly activity
report that includes the number of calls made, the number of miles traveled, the number of units
sold, the dollar volume sold, and the number of new accounts opened.”
2. “Beginning in January 2021, this division will return to its employees 5 percent of its gross
revenues in the form of a Christmas bonus.”
Production Department Objective
Increase production from 20,000 units in 2020 to 30,000 units in 2021.
Supporting Policies
1. “Beginning in January 2021, employees will have the option of working up to 20 hours of over-
time per week.”
2. “Beginning in January 2021, perfect attendance awards in the amount of $100 will be given to
all employees who do not miss a workday in a given year.”
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 235
TABLE 7-4 Some Issues That May Require a Management Policy
• To offer extensive or limited management development workshops and seminars
• To recruit through employment agencies, college campuses, or newspapers
• To promote from within or to hire from the outside
• To promote on the basis of merit or on the basis of seniority
• To tie executive compensation to long-term or annual objectives
• To allow heavy, light, or no overtime work
• To establish a high- or low-safety stock of inventory
ETHICS CAPSULE 7
Do Firms Need a Policy against Workplace Phubbing?
Recent research examined the impact of boss “phubbing” (short
for phone snubbing) and found that boss phubbing negatively
impacts employee job performance. Specifically, cell phone use by
supervisors, while in the presence of their subordinates, impacts the
extent to which their subordinates trust them, which in turn lowers
the subordinates’ job satisfaction and performance. With nearly
7 billion mobile connections worldwide, it is imperative that manag-
ers recognize the extent to which they and their employees use their
cell phones in ways that may unintentionally snub other employees
or even customers.
Companies should consider setting formal “cell-phone poli-
cies,” which outline clear rules for cell phone use and access, as
well as consequences for violating those rules. Setting specific
boundaries and guidelines for cell phone use at work will ensure
that managers and employees have a consistent understanding
of when and where cell phones are permitted in the workplace.
But, what should those policies look like and how restrictive
should they be? Phubbing is a harmful behavior, and regardless
of whether the phubbing occurs when eating with others or in a
meeting with others, it undermines any corporate culture based on
respect for others.
Source: James A. Roberts and Meredith E. David (2017), “Put Down Your
Phone and Listen to Me: How Boss Phubbing Undermines the Psychological
Conditions Necessary for Employee Engagement,” Computers in Human
Behavior, 75 (October), 206–217.
Why Did That Guy Even Come to Our Meeting?
Allocate Resources and Manage Conflict Allocate Resources
All organizations have at least four types of resources (or assets) that can be used to achieve
desired objectives: (1) financial resources, (2) physical resources, (3) human resources, and (4)
technological resources. Resource allocation can be defined as distributing an organization’s
“assets” across products, regions, and segments according to priorities established by annual ob-
jectives. Allocating resources is a vital strategy-implementation activity. Strategic management
itself is sometimes referred to as a resource-allocation process. In fact, allocating resources
across business segments (divisions) is arguably the most important strategic decision facing
large companies annually.
In organizations that do no strategic planning, resource allocation is often based on political or
personal factors and bias, rather than on clear analysis and thought. Strategists should be wary of a
number of factors that commonly prohibit effective resource allocation, including overprotection of
resources, too great an emphasis on short-run financial criteria, organizational politics, vague strat-
egy targets, a reluctance to take risks, and a lack of sufficient knowledge. Below the corporate level,
there often exists an absence of systematic thinking about resources allocated and strategies of the
firm. Effective resource allocation does not guarantee successful strategy implementation because
programs, personnel, controls, and commitment must breathe life into the resources provided.
LO 7.4
E d h ar
Y u ra
la it
s/ 1 2 3 R
F
236 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
Manage Conflict
Honest differences of opinion, turf protection, and competition for limited resources can
inevitably lead to conflict. Conflict can be defined as a disagreement between two or more
parties on one or more issues. Establishing annual objectives can lead to conflict because
individuals have different expectations, perceptions, schedules, pressures, obligations, and
personalities. Misunderstandings between line managers (such as production supervisors)
and staff managers (such as human resource specialists) can occur. For example, a collection
manager’s objective of reducing bad debts by 50 percent in a given year may conflict with a
divisional objective to increase sales by 20 percent. Conflict must be managed for strategy
implementation to be successful. Managing conflict is a strategic issue in most, if not all,
organizations.
Establishing objectives can lead to conflict because managers and strategists must make
tradeoffs, such as whether to emphasize short-term profits or long-term growth, profit margin
or market share, market penetration or market development, growth or stability, high risk or low
risk, and social responsiveness or profit maximization. Tradeoffs are necessary because no firm
has sufficient resources to pursue all strategies that would benefit the firm. Table 7-5 reveals
some important management trade-off decisions required in strategy implementation. Strategic
planning necessitates making effective trade-off decisions.
Conflict is not always bad. An absence of conflict can signal indifference and apathy. Conflict
can serve to energize opposing groups into action and may help managers identify problems.
General George Patton once said, “If everyone is thinking alike, then somebody isn’t thinking.”
Various approaches for managing and resolving conflict range from ignoring the problem in
hopes that the conflict will resolve itself or physically separating the conflicting individuals, to
compromising, to exchanging members of conflicting parties so that each can gain an apprecia-
tion of the other’s point of view, or even holding a meeting at which conflicting parties present
their views and work through their differences.
Match Structure with Strategy Disney restructured in 2018 to add a direct-to-consumer segment and an international division.
With the restructuring, Disney combined its consumer products and theme parks divisions.
Alfred Chandler promoted the notion that “changes in strategy lead to changes in organizational
structure.” Structure should be designed to facilitate the strategic pursuit of a firm and, therefore,
follow strategy. Without a strategy or reasons for being (mission), companies find it difficult to
design an effective structure.
Changes in strategy often require changes in structure for two major reasons. First, structure
largely dictates how objectives and policies will be established. For example, objectives and pol-
icies established under a geographic organizational structure are couched in geographic terms.
Objectives and policies are stated largely in terms of products in an organization whose structure
LO 7.5
TABLE 7-5 Some Management Trade-Off Decisions Required in Strategy Implementation
1. To emphasize short-term profits or long-term growth
2. To emphasize profit margin or market share
3. To emphasize market development or market penetration
4. To lay off or furlough
5. To seek growth or stability
6. To be more socially responsible or more profitable
7. To outsource jobs or pay more to keep jobs at home
8. To acquire externally or to build internally
9. To use leverage or equity to raise funds
10. To use part-time or full-time employees
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 237
is based on product groups. The structural format for developing objectives and policies can sig-
nificantly impact all other strategy-implementation activities.
The second major reason why changes in strategy often require changes in structure is that
structure dictates how resources will be allocated. If an organization’s structure is based on cus-
tomer groups, then resources are allocated in that manner. Similarly, if an organization’s struc-
ture is set up along functional business lines, then resources are allocated by functional areas.
Unless new or revised strategies place emphasis in the same areas as old strategies, structural
reorientation commonly becomes a part of strategy implementation.
When a firm changes its strategy, the existing organizational structure may become ineffec-
tive. As indicated in Table 7-6, symptoms of an ineffective organizational structure include too
many levels of management, too many meetings attended by too many people, too much atten-
tion being directed toward solving interdepartmental conflicts, too large a span of control, and
too many unachieved objectives. Changes in structure can facilitate strategy-implementation ef-
forts, but changes in structure should not be expected to make a bad strategy good, to make bad
managers good, or to make bad products sell.
TABLE 7-6 Symptoms of an Ineffective Organizational Structure
1. Too many levels of management
2. Too many meetings attended by too many people
3. Too much attention being directed toward solving interdepartmental conflicts
4. Too large a span of control
5. Too many unachieved objectives
6. Declining corporate or business performance
7. Losing ground to rival firms
8. Revenue or earnings divided by number of employees or number of managers is low compared to
rival firms
Structure undeniably can and does influence strategy. Strategies formulated must be work-
able, so if a certain new strategy requires massive structural changes, it may not be an attractive
choice. In this way, structure can shape the choice of strategies. But a more important concern
is determining what types of structural changes are needed to implement new strategies and
how these changes can best be accomplished. There is no one optimal organizational design or
structure for a given strategy or type of organization. What is appropriate for one organization
may not be appropriate for a similar firm, although successful firms in a given industry do tend
to organize themselves in a similar way. For example, consumer goods companies tend to emu-
late the divisional structure-by-product form of organization. Small firms tend to be functionally
structured (centralized). Medium-sized firms tend to be divisionally structured (decentralized).
Large firms tend to use a strategic business unit (SBU) structure or matrix structure. These types
of structure are discussed in the next section.
Types of Organizational Structure Structure matters! There are seven basic types of organizational structure: (1) functional, (2)
divisional-by-region, (3) divisional-by-product, (4) divisional-by-customer, (5) divisional-
by-process, (6) strategic business unit (SBU), and (7) matrix. Companies, like people and
armies, strive to be better organized or structured than rivals because better organization can
yield tremendous competitive advantages. There are countless examples throughout history
of incidents, battles, and companies where superior organization overcame massive odds
against the entity.
The Functional Structure
The most widely used structure is the functional or centralized type because this structure is
the simplest and least expensive of the seven alternatives. A functional structure groups tasks
LO 7.6
238 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
and activities by business function, such as marketing or finance. For example, a university may
structure its activities by major functions that include academic affairs, student services, alumni
relations, athletics, maintenance, and accounting.
Under a functional structure, divisions or segments of the firm are not delegated author-
ity, responsibility, and accountability for revenues or profits; rather, key decisions are made
centrally. For example, a small business composed of three restaurants in three adjacent
towns is functionally structured if all hiring, firing, promotion, and advertising decisions are
made centrally, but this same small business is divisionally structured if those decisions are
delegated to each restaurant manager. Besides being simple and inexpensive, a functional
structure also promotes specialization of labor, encourages efficient use of managerial and
technical talent, minimizes the need for an elaborate control system, and allows rapid deci-
sion making.
Some disadvantages of a functional structure are that it forces accountability to the top,
minimizes career development opportunities, and is sometimes characterized by low employee
morale, line or staff conflicts, poor delegation of authority, and inadequate planning for products
and markets. For these reasons, most large companies have abandoned the functional structure in
favor of decentralization and improved accountability. Table 7-7 summarizes the advantages and
disadvantages of a functional organizational structure.
TABLE 7-7 Advantages and Disadvantages of a Functional Organizational Structure
Advantages Disadvantages
1. Simple and inexpensive
2. Capitalizes on specialization of business activi-
ties such as marketing and finance
3. Minimizes need for elaborate control system
4. Allows for rapid decision making
1. Accountability forced to the top
2. Delegation of authority and responsibility not
encouraged
3. Minimizes career development
4. Low employee and manager morale
5. Inadequate planning for products and markets
6. Leads to short-term, narrow thinking
7. Leads to communication problems
A functional structure often leads to short-term and narrow thinking that may undermine
what is best for the firm as a whole. For example, the research-and-development department
may strive to overdesign products and components to achieve technical elegance, whereas
manufacturing may argue for low-frills products that can be mass-produced more easily. Thus,
communication is often not as good in a functional structure. Schein gives an example of a com-
munication problem in a functional structure:
The word “marketing” will mean product development to the engineer, studying custom-
ers through market research to the product manager, merchandising to the salesperson, and
constant change in design to the manufacturing manager. Then when these managers try
to work together, they often attribute disagreements to personalities and fail to notice the
deeper, shared assumptions that vary and dictate how each function thinks.4
The Divisional Structure
The divisional (decentralized) structure is the second-most common type. Divisions are
sometimes referred to as segments, profit centers, or business units. As a small organization
grows, it has more difficulty managing different products in different markets. Some form of
divisional structure generally becomes necessary to motivate employees, control operations,
and compete successfully in diverse locations. The divisional structure can be organized in
one of four ways: (1) by geographic area, (2) by product, (3) by customer, or (4) by process.
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 239
With a divisional structure, functional activities are performed both centrally and in each
separate division.
Kodak recently reduced its number of business units from seven by-customer divisions to
five by-product divisions. As consumption patterns become increasingly similar worldwide, a
by-product structure becomes more effective than a by-customer or by-geographic type of divi-
sional structure. In restructuring, Kodak eliminated its global operations division and distributed
those responsibilities across the new by-product divisions.
A divisional structure has some clear advantages. First and perhaps foremost, accountability
is clear. That is, divisional managers can be held responsible for sales and profit levels. Because
a divisional structure is based on extensive delegation of authority, managers and employees
can easily see the results of their good or bad performances. As a result, employee morale is
generally higher in a divisional structure than in a centralized structure. Other advantages of the
divisional design are that it creates career development opportunities for managers, allows local
control of situations, leads to a competitive climate within an organization, and allows new busi-
nesses and products to be added easily.
The divisional design is not without some limitations, however. Perhaps the most important
limitation is that a divisional structure is costly, for a number of reasons. First, each division
requires functional specialists who must be paid. Second, there exists some duplication of staff
services, facilities, and personnel; for instance, functional specialists are also needed centrally (at
headquarters) to coordinate divisional activities. Third, managers must be well qualified because
the divisional design forces delegation of authority; better-qualified individuals require higher
salaries. A divisional structure can also be costly because it requires an elaborate, headquarters-
driven control system. Fourth, competition between divisions may become so intense that it is
dysfunctional and leads to limited sharing of ideas and resources for the common good of the
firm. Table 7-8 gives the advantages and disadvantages of a divisional organizational structure.
TABLE 7-8 Advantages and Disadvantages of a Divisional Organizational Structure
Advantages Disadvantages
1. Clear accountability
2. Allows local control of local situations
3. Creates career development chances
4. Promotes delegation of authority
5. Leads to competitive climate internally
6. Allows easy adding of new products or regions
7. Allows strict control and attention to products,
customers, or regions
1. Can be costly
2. Duplication of functional activities
3. Requires a skilled management force
4. Requires an elaborate control system
5. Competition among divisions can become so
intense as to be dysfunctional
6. Can lead to limited sharing of ideas and
resources
7. Some regions, products, or customers may
receive special treatment
A divisional-by-region type of structure is appropriate for organizations whose strategies
need to be tailored to fit the particular needs and characteristics of customers in different geo-
graphic areas. This type of structure can be most appropriate for organizations that have similar
branch facilities located in widely dispersed areas. A divisional structure by geographic area al-
lows local participation in decision making and improved coordination within a region.
The divisional-by-product (or service) type of structure is most effective for implementing
strategies when specific products need special emphasis. Also, this type of structure is widely
used when an organization offers only a few products or when an organization’s products or
services differ substantially. The divisional-by-product structure allows strict control over and
attention to product lines, but it may also require a more skilled management force and reduced
top management control.
A divisional-by-customer type of structure can be the most effective way to implement
strategies when a few major customers are of paramount importance and many different services
are provided to these customers. This structure allows an organization to cater effectively to the
240 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
requirements of clearly defined customer groups. For example, book-publishing companies often
organize their activities around customer groups, such as colleges, secondary schools, and private
commercial schools. Some airline companies have two major customer divisions: (1) passengers
and (2) freight or cargo services. Utility companies often use (1) commercial, (2) residential, and
(3) industrial as their divisions by customer.
A divisional-by-process type of structure is similar to a functional structure because activi-
ties are organized according to the way work is actually performed. However, a key difference
between these two designs is that functional departments are not accountable for profits or reve-
nues, whereas divisional process departments are evaluated on these criteria. An example of a di-
visional structure by process is a manufacturing business organized into six divisions: electrical
work, glass cutting, welding, grinding, painting, and foundry work. In this case, all operations
related to these specific processes would be grouped under the separate divisions. Each process
(division) would be responsible for generating revenues and profits. The divisional structure by
process can be particularly effective in achieving objectives when distinct production processes
represent the thrust of competitiveness in an industry.
The Strategic Business Unit Structure
As the number, size, and diversity of divisions in an organization increase, controlling and evalu-
ating divisional operations become increasingly difficult for strategists. Increases in sales often
are not accompanied by similar increases in profitability. The span of control becomes too large
at top levels of the firm. For example, in a large conglomerate organization composed of 90 divi-
sions, such as ConAgra, the CEO could have difficulty even remembering the first names of divi-
sional presidents. In multidivisional organizations, a strategic business unit (SBU) structure can
greatly facilitate strategy-implementation efforts.
An SBU structure simply groups similar divisions together into “units” and delegates author-
ity and responsibility for each unit to a senior executive who reports directly to the CEO. This
change in structure can facilitate strategy implementation by improving coordination between
similar divisions and channeling accountability to distinct business units. In a 100-division con-
glomerate, the divisions could perhaps be regrouped into 10 SBUs according to certain common
characteristics, such as competing in the same industry, being located in the same area, or having
the same customers.
A disadvantage of an SBU structure is that it requires an additional layer of management,
which increases salary expenses. However, this limitations does not outweigh the advantages of
improved coordination and accountability. Another advantage of the SBU structure is that it makes
the tasks of planning and control by the corporate office more manageable. Halliburton oper-
ates from an SBU structure with the divisions based on process, as described at www.halliburton
.com (click on About Us, then click Corporate Profile, then scroll down to see the SBUs listed).
Microsoft recently changed its organizational structure to become three by-product strategic
business units: (1) Windows and Devices Group (WDG), (2) Cloud and Enterprise (C+E), and
(3) Applications and Services Group (ASG).
The Matrix Structure
A matrix structure is an organizational design in which vertical and horizontal flows of author-
ity and communication (hence the term matrix) are created whereby functions are horizontally
arrayed and divisions, products, or projects are vertically arrayed. In contrast, functional and
divisional structures depend primarily on a vertical chain of command and authority. A matrix
structure can result in higher overhead because it creates more management positions. Other
disadvantages of a matrix structure that contribute to overall complexity include dual lines of
budget authority (a violation of the unity-of-command principle), dual sources of reward and
punishment, shared authority, dual reporting channels, and a need for an extensive and effective
communication system.
The matrix structure is often used in the construction and health care industries. For example,
in the construction industry, a matrix structure would work well for Bechtel Corporation and Fluor
Corporation, since every construction project has a head project person, and if the project is large,
such as when Fluor worked on the 800-mile Trans-Alaska Pipeline System, each project also has
a head HR person, who reports both to the head project person and the corporate head HR person.
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 241
CEO
HRMCIOCSOCFOCOO
Project 1 Manager
A B C D E F G H I J
Project 2 Manager
K L M ON P Q R S T
Project 3 Manager
U V W X Y Z Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4
Note: Titles spelled out as follows.
Chief Executive Officer (CEO) Chief Operating Officer (COO) Chief Finance Officer (CFO) Chief Strategy Officer (CSO) Chief Information Officer (CIO) Human Resources Manager (HRM) Competitive Intelligence Officer (CIO) Chief Legal Officer (CLO) Research & Development Officer (R&D) Chief Marketing Officer (CMO) Chief Technology Officer (CTO) Maintenance Officer (MO)
CTO MOCMOR&DCLOCIO
FIGURE 7-4
A Typical Matrix Structure with Typical Executive Titles in a Large Firm
TABLE 7-9 Advantages and Disadvantages of a Matrix Structure
Advantages Disadvantages
1. Clear project objectives
2. Employees clearly see results of their work
3. Easy to shut down a project
4. Facilitates uses of special equipment, personnel,
and facilities
5. Shared functional resources instead
of duplicated resources, as in a divisional
structure
1. Requires excellent vertical and horizontal
flows of communication
2. Costly because creates more manager
positions
3. Violates unity of command principle
4. Creates dual lines of budget authority
5. Creates dual sources of reward and
punishment
6. Creates shared authority and reporting
7. Requires mutual trust and understanding
As indicated in Table 7-9, some advantages of a matrix structure are that project objectives
are clear, there are many channels of communication, workers can see the visible results of their
work, shutting down a project can be accomplished relatively easily, and it facilitates the use
of specialized personnel, equipment, and facilities. Functional resources are shared in a matrix
structure, rather than duplicated as in a divisional structure. Individuals with a high degree of
242 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
expertise can divide their time as needed among projects, and they in turn develop their own
skills and competencies more than in other structures.
A typical matrix structure, inclusive of typical executive titles, is illustrated in Figure 7-4.
Note that the letters (A through Z4) refer to managers. For example, if you were manager A,
you would be responsible for financial aspects of Project 1, and you would have two bosses: the
Project 1 Manager on site and the CFO off site.
Do’s and Don’ts in Developing Organizational Charts Students analyzing strategic-management cases (and actual corporate executives) often revise
and improve a firm’s organizational structure. This section provides basic guidelines and several
dos and don’ts in regards to developing organizational charts, especially for midsize to large
firms. First of all, reserve the title CEO for the top executive of the firm. Do not use the title
president for the top person; use it for the division top managers if there are divisions within the
firm. Also, do not use the title president for functional business executives. They should have
the title chief, vice-president, manager, or officer, such as “Chief Information Officer,” or “VP
of Human Resources.” Furthermore, do not recommend a dual title (such as CEO and president)
for just one executive.
Do not let a single individual be both chairman of the board and CEO of a company.
Of note, chairperson or chair is much better than chairman for the top board person’s title.
Corporate America is splitting the chair of the board and the CEO positions in publicly held
companies. This movement includes asking the New York Stock Exchange and Nasdaq to adopt
listing rules that would require separate positions. About 50 percent of companies in the S&P
500 stock index have separate positions, up from 22 percent in 2002. Many more European and
Asian companies split the two positions. For example, 80 percent of British companies split the
positions, and virtually all German and Dutch companies split the positions. For the first time
ever, the South Korean firm Samsung Electronics separated the role and title of its Chair of the
Board from its CEO in 2018.
Directly below the CEO, it is best to have a chief operating officer (COO) with any division
presidents reporting directly to the COO. On the same level as the COO and also reporting to the
CEO are functional business executives, such as a chief financial officer (CFO), VP of human
resources, a chief strategy officer (CSO), a chief information officer (CIO), a chief marketing
officer (CMO), a VP of R&D, a VP of legal affairs, an investment relations officer, maintenance
officer, and so on. Note in Figure 7-6 that these positions are labeled and placed appropriately
in a matrix structure, which, as shown, generally include project managers rather than division
presidents reporting to a COO.
The COO position is increasingly being deleted in U.S. companies. Twitter recently divided
the duties of its COO among all managers. McDonald’s, Tiffany & Co., and Yahoo recently deleted
their COO position. In fact, the percentage of large companies in the United States with COOs
has declined almost every year for a decade, to about 35 percent today. Healthcare and industrial
companies are least likely to have a COO today. An accounting firm, PricewaterhouseCoopers,
suggests there are four reasons why companies are phasing out the COO position to: (1) flatten
their structure, (2) eliminate a layer of management, (3) reduce costs, and (4) expand the CEO’s
authority and responsibility. Digital communications and even social media today enable a CEO
often to perform COO duties. Many companies now delegate the traditional duties of a COO to
the CEO or to other positions, such as the CFO or chief brand officer. Deleting the COO position
does increase the span of control of the CEO, spreading the latter thinly, which is not a good idea
for many companies.
In developing an organizational chart, avoid having a particular person reporting to more
than one person in the chain of command (except in a matrix structure). This would violate the
unity-of-command principle of management that “every employee should have just one boss.”
Also, do not have any functional positions such as CFO, CIO, CSO, and human resource officer
report to the COO. All these positions report directly to the CEO.
In contrast to the COO position, the number of chief accounting officers (CAO) among U.S.
companies is increasing. CAOs now do much more than just manage the company’s books and
prepare financial statements. They stand up and debate strategic issues related to how best to
LO 7.7
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 243
balance the balance sheet, when and how to recognize revenue, and know how to report results
using both U.S. and foreign standards (GAAP vs. IFRS). CAOs are more commonly signing the
company’s financial filings, making them personally liable for any mistakes or improprieties—
along with the CFO and CEO.
Garu Kabureck, former CAO at Xerox Corp. says: “I think what happened over the last 15
years in the USA is that the accounting function started to separate from the controller function.”
In a firm, a controller is typically more focused on budgeting and planning, whereas the CAO is
responsible for the ins and outs of global bookkeeping. The CAO also interacts closely with the
board’s audit committee, as well as with outside firms auditing the company.
A relatively new, but increasingly popular, top management position, is the Chief Design
Officer (CDO). Johnson & Johnson (J&J), for example, hired a CDO, Ernesto Quinteros, to be
a liaison between the CMO and R&D officer. The CDO position has equal status with the CMO
position at J&J, PepsiCo, and Phillips Electronics NV because “a product that is wonderfully
designed sells itself, and has a huge benefit on the marketing side,” said J&J’s Sandi Peterson,
who created the CDO position at J&J.
One never knows for sure if a proposed or actual structure is indeed most effective for
a particular firm. Declining financial performance signals a need for altering the structure.
Important guidelines to follow in devising organizational charts for companies are provided in
Table 7-10.
TABLE 7-10 15 Guidelines for Developing an Organizational Chart
1. Instead of chairman of the board, make it chairperson of the board.
2. Make sure the board of directors reveals diversity in race, ethnicity, gender, and age.
3. Make sure the chair of the board is not also the CEO or president of the company.
4. Make sure the CEO of the firm does not also carry the title president.
5. Reserve the title president for the division heads of the firm.
6. Include a COO if divisions are large or geographically dispersed.
7. Make sure only presidents of divisions report to the COO.
8. Make sure functional executives such as CFO, CIO, CMO, CSO, R&D, CLO, CTO, and HRM
report to the CEO, not the COO.
9. Make sure every executive has one boss, so lines in the chart should be drawn accordingly, assur-
ing unity of command.
10. Make sure span of control is reasonable, probably no more than 10 persons reporting to any
other person.
11. Make sure diversity in race, ethnicity, gender, and age is well represented among corporate
executives.
12. Avoid a functional type structure for all but the smallest firms.
13. Decentralize, using some form of divisional structure, whenever possible.
14. Use a SBU type structure for large firms with more than 10 divisions.
15. Make sure executive titles match product names as best possible in division-by-product and
SBU-designated firms.
How to Depict an Organizational Chart
For whatever reason, companies rarely provide a diagram of their organizational chart, neither
in their Form 10K or on their corporate website. Therefore, students often wrestle with actually
drawing an existing chart and devising a new and improved organizational chart. Nearly all com-
panies provide, however, a list of their top executives and associated titles. This “title” informa-
tion can be used to develop existing and proposed charts. Follow three simple steps to develop
organizational charts:
Step 1. List executive positions by title and number. Numbering positions enables num-
bers, rather than boxes or circles, to be used in a structure diagram to reveal report-
ing relationships; it is just easier to use numbers.
244 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
Step 2. Using numbers to denote positions, devise your chart to show reporting relation-
ships, consistent with guidelines presented in this chapter.
Step 3. Draw lines connecting numbers to reveal reporting relationships. Be mindful that
a line connecting one number to another means that person reports to the other; so
do not connect, for example, a CFO to a CMO.
Figure 7-5 and Figure 7-6 give an existing and improved organizational chart for ABC
Company, respectively. ABC Company’s example charts demonstrate how to apply the three
steps given. In devising any organizational chart, do not be concerned with the names of
executives because people come and go in a firm; positions stay relatively constant. Also,
do not be overly concerned with the existing chart reporting relationships because those are
usually unknown to all but corporate insiders; your new and improved chart is of paramount
importance. Also, do not include the 20 or so lower and mid-level managers in a chart;
similarly, do not include the board of director members in a chart. It’s not that lower and
mid-level managers and board members are not important because they are. It is just that re-
porting relationships among the top executives in a firm reveals the (1) type of structure and
(2) chain of command. The firm must get those two aspects correct to effectively implement
any strategy.
1. Chairperson of the Board
2. CEO
3. Chief HRM Officer
4. CFO
5. CTO
6. CMO
7. Chief Design Officer
8. President of USA
9. President of Europe
10. President of Asia
11. COO
3
1
2
4 11 5 6 7
8 9 10
EXECUTIVES’ TITLES THE PROPOSED CHART
FIGURE 7-6
ABC Company’s Improved (Excellent) Organizational Chart
1. Chairman of the Board
2. CEO and President
3. VP of HRM
4. VP of Finance
5. VP of Technology
6. VP of Marketing
7. VP of Design and R&D
8. Manager of USA
9. Manager of Europe
10. Manager of Asia
1
3
2
4 5 6 7 8
9 10
EXECUTIVES’ TITLES THE “EXISTING” CHART
FIGURE 7-5
ABC Company’s Existing (Not Good) Organizational Chart
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 245
1. Michael Happe, President and CEO
2. Ashis Bhattacharya, VP, Strategic Planning and Development
3. Donald Clark, President, Grand Design RV; VP, Winnebago Industries
4. Jeff Kubacki, VP, Information Technology, Chief Information Officer
5. Chris West, VP of Operations
6. Bret Woodson, VP, Administration
7. Bryan Hughes, VP, CFO
8. Scott Folkers, VP, General Counsel and Secretary
9. Scott Degnan, VP, General Manager, Towables Business
10. Brian Hazelton, VP, General Manager, Motor Home Business
2
1
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FIGURE 7-7
Winnebago’s Actual (Not Good) Organizational Chart
1. Michael Happe, CEO
2. Ashis Bhattacharya, VP, Strategic Planning and Development
3. Donald Clark, COO
4. Jeff Kubacki, VP, Information Technology, Chief Information Officer
5. Chris West, VP of Operations
6. Bret Woodson, VP, Administration
7. Bryan Hughes, VP, CFO
8. Scott Folkers, VP, General Counsel and Secretary
9. Scott Degnan, President of Towables
10. Brian Hazelton, President of Motor Homes
11. Jane Doe, President of Ancillary Products
2
1
3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11
FIGURE 7-8
Winnebago’s Improved (Excellent) Organizational Chart
Figure 7-7 and Figure 7-8 give Winnebago Industries, Inc.’s actual and improved organi-
zational chart respectively, further illustrating how to apply the three steps. Headquartered in
Forest City, Iowa, Winnebago manufactures and sells recreation vehicles (RVs), including mo-
tor homes, travel trailers, and fifth wheel trailers under the Winnebago brand name; component
parts for other manufacturers; motorhome shells for law enforcement command centers, mobile
medical clinics, and mobile office space; and commercial vehicles as bare shells to third par-
ties. Winnebago sells products primarily through independent dealers in the United States and
Canada.
Strategic Production/Operations Issues Production/operations capabilities, limitations, and policies can significantly enhance or inhibit
the attainment of objectives. Production processes typically constitute more than 70 percent of
a firm’s total assets. Thus, a major part of the strategy-implementation process takes place at the
production site. Strategic production-related decisions on plant size, plant location, product de-
sign, choice of equipment, kind of tooling, size of inventory, inventory control, quality control,
cost control, use of standards, job specialization, employee training, equipment and resource
utilization, shipping and packaging, and technological innovation can determine the success or
failure of strategy-implementation efforts.
Three production/operations issues, (1) restructuring/reengineering, (2) managing resis-
tance to change, and (3) deciding where/how to produce goods, are especially important for suc-
cessful strategy implementation and are therefore discussed next.
LO 7.8
246 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
Restructuring and Reengineering
Restructuring and reengineering are forms of retrenchment discussed in Chapter 5.
Restructuring, sometimes called downsizing, involves reducing the size of the firm in terms
of number of employees, number of divisions or units, and number of hierarchical levels in the
firm’s organizational structure. This reduction in size is intended to improve both efficiency and
effectiveness. Restructuring is concerned primarily with shareholder well-being rather than em-
ployee well-being.
The primary benefit sought from restructuring is cost reduction. For some highly bureau-
cratic firms, restructuring can actually rescue the firm from global competition and demise. But
the downside of restructuring can be reduced employee commitment, creativity, and innovation
associated with pending and actual employee layoffs. In 2018, General Electric restructured,
reducing its six commercial business units down to three.
Job security in European companies is slowly moving toward a U.S. business model, in
which firms lay off almost at will. From banks in Milan to factories in Mannheim, European
employers are starting to show people the door in an effort to streamline operations, in-
crease efficiency, and compete against already slim-and-trim U.S. firms. European firms
still prefer to downsize by attrition and retirement, rather than by blanket layoffs because of
culture, laws, and unions.
In contrast to restructuring, reengineering is concerned more with employee and customer
well-being than shareholder well-being. Reengineering involves reconfiguring or redesign-
ing work, jobs, and processes for the purpose of improving cost, quality, service, and speed.
Reengineering does not usually affect the organizational structure or chart, nor does it imply job
loss or employee layoffs. Whereas restructuring is concerned with eliminating or establishing,
shrinking or enlarging, and moving organizational departments and divisions, the focus of reen-
gineering is changing the way work is actually carried out. Reengineering is characterized by
many tactical (short-term, business-function-specific) decisions, whereas restructuring is charac-
terized by strategic (long-term, affecting all business functions) decisions.
Manage Resistance to Change
No organization or individual can escape change. But the thought of change raises anxieties
because people fear economic loss, inconvenience, uncertainty, and a break in normal social
patterns. Almost any change in structure, technology, people, or strategies has the potential to
disrupt comfortable interaction patterns. For this reason, people resist change. The strategic-
management process can impose major changes on individuals and processes. Reorienting an
organization to get people to think and act strategically is not an easy task. Strategy implementa-
tion can pose a threat to many managers and employees. New power and status relationships are
anticipated and realized. New formal and informal groups’ values, beliefs, and priorities may be
largely unknown. Managers and employees may become engaged in resistance behavior as their
roles, prerogatives, and power in the firm change. Disruption of social and political structures
that accompany strategy execution must be anticipated and considered during strategy formula-
tion and managed during strategy implementation.
Resistance to change may be the single-greatest threat to successful strategy implementa-
tion. Resistance regularly occurs in organizations in the form of sabotaging production machines,
absenteeism, filing unfounded grievances, and an unwillingness to cooperate. People often resist
strategy implementation because they do not understand what is happening or why changes are
taking place. In that case, employees may simply need accurate information. Successful strategy
implementation hinges on managers’ ability to develop an organizational climate conducive to
change. Change must be viewed by managers and employees as an opportunity for the firm to
compete more effectively, rather than being seen as a threat to everyone’s livelihood.
Strategists can take a number of positive actions to minimize managers’ and employees’ resis-
tance to change. For example, individuals who will be affected by a change should be involved in
the decision to make the change and in decisions about how to implement the change. Strategists
should anticipate changes and develop and offer training and development workshops so that man-
agers and employees can adapt to those changes. They also need to effectively communicate the
need for changes. Strategy implementation is basically a process of managing change.
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 247
Decide Where and How to Produce Goods
In China, about 700,000 assembly workers at manufacturing contractors such as Foxconn put
together Apple products. It would be virtually impossible to bring those jobs to the United States
for at least three reasons. First, Foxconn—China’s largest private employer and the manufac-
turer of an estimated 40 percent of the world’s consumer electronic devices—pays its assembly
workers far less than U.S. labor laws would allow. A typical salary is about $18 a day. Second,
Foxconn and other Chinese manufacturing operations house employees in dormitories and can
send hundreds of thousands of workers to the assembly lines at a moment’s notice. On the lines,
workers are subjected to what most Americans would consider unbearably long hours and tough
working conditions. That system gives tech companies the efficiency needed to race products
out the door, so speed is a bigger factor than pay. Finally, most of the component suppliers for
Apple and other technology giants are also in China or other Asian countries. That geographic
clustering gives companies the flexibility to change a product design at the last minute and still
ship on time.
Examples of adjustments in production systems that could be required to implement vari-
ous strategies are provided in Table 7-11 for both for-profit and nonprofit organizations. The
largest bicycle company in the United States, Huffy, recently ended its own production of
bikes and now contracts out those services to Asian and Mexican manufacturers. Huffy focuses
instead on the design, marketing, and distribution of bikes, but it no longer produces bikes
themselves. The Dayton, Ohio, company closed its plants in Ohio, Missouri, and Mississippi.
TABLE 7-11 Production Management and Strategy Implementation
Type of Organization Strategy Being Implemented Production System Adjustments
Hospital Adding a cancer center (Product
Development)
Purchase specialized equipment
and add specialized people.
Bank Adding 10 new branches (Market
Development)
Perform site location analysis.
Beer brewery Purchasing a barley farm operation
(Backward Integration)
Revise the inventory control
system.
Steel manufacturer Acquiring a fast-food chain (Unrelated
Diversification)
Improve the quality control
system.
Computer company Purchasing a retail distribution chain
(Forward Integration)
Alter the shipping, packaging,
and transportation systems.
Factors that should be studied before locating production facilities include the availability
of major resources, the prevailing wage rates in the area, transportation costs related to ship-
ping and receiving, the location of major markets, political risks in the area or country, currency
and tax considerations, language and legal issues, and the availability of trainable employees.
Some of these factors explain why many manufacturing operations in China are moving back to
Mexico, to Vietnam, or even back to the United States. President Donald Trump has pledged to
create such a pro-business environment that companies will reshore (relocate) their manufactur-
ing facilities to the Untied States.
Strategic Human Resource Issues Any organization is only as good as its people! Thus, human resource issues can make or break
successful strategy implementation. Thus, seven human resource issues are discussed further in
this section, as follows: (1) linking performance and pay to strategy, (2) balancing work life with
home life, (3) developing a diverse workforce, (4) using caution in hiring a rival’s employees,
(5) creating a strategy-supportive culture, (6) using caution in monitoring employees’ social me-
dia, and (7) developing a corporate well-being program.
LO 7.9
248 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
Link Performance and Pay to Strategy
An organization’s compensation system needs to be aligned with strategic outcomes. Decisions
on salary increases, promotions, merit pay, and bonuses need to support the long-term and an-
nual objectives of the firm. A dual bonus system based on both annual and long-term objectives
can be helpful in linking performance and pay to strategies. The percentage of a manager’s an-
nual bonus attributable to short-term versus long-term results should vary by hierarchical level
in the organization. It is important that bonuses not be based solely on short-term results because
such a system ignores long-term company strategies and objectives.
Bank of America’s 2018 compensation plan includes a bonus system that allows brokers
in its wealth-management team to earn up to an additional 2 percent in pay if certain growth
targets are achieved. Merrill Lynch brokers receive a similar bonus but, if Merrill brokers fail to
meet minimum growth targets, their pay is reduced 2 percent. Bank of America has no such pay
penalty provision.
Criteria such as sales, profit, production efficiency, quality, and safety could also serve as
bases for an effective bonus system. If an organization meets certain understood, agreed-on
profit objectives, every member of the enterprise should share in the harvest. A bonus system can
be an effective tool for motivating individuals to support strategy-implementation efforts. Bank
of America, for example, recently overhauled its incentive system to link pay to sales of the
bank’s most profitable products and services. Branch managers receive a base salary plus a bo-
nus based both on the number of new customers and on sales of bank products. Every employee
in each branch is also eligible for a bonus if the branch exceeds its goals. Thomas Peterson, a top
Bank of America executive, says, “We want to make people responsible for meeting their goals,
so we pay incentives on sales, not on controlling costs or on being sure the parking lot is swept.”
A combination of reward strategy incentives, such as salary raises, stock options, employees
benefits, promotions, praise, recognition, criticism, fear, increased job autonomy, and awards,
can be used to encourage managers and employees to push hard for successful strategic imple-
mentation. The range of options for getting people, departments, and divisions to actively sup-
port strategy-implementation activities in a particular organization is almost limitless. A firm,
for example, could give its employees a 10-year option to buy up to 1000 shares of company
stock at a set price lower than the current market price.
For the first time ever in 2018, U.S. publicly-held companies were required to divulge their
median employee pay in addition to CEO pay, as well as the ratio between the two figures. For
example, Whirlpool Corporation revealed that its median worker earns $19,906 a year, while
the CEO made $7.08 million, or 356 times as much. At another firm, Intuitive Surgical, the
median employee was paid just over $157,000, while the CEO got $5.1 million, or 32 times the
employee amount. Marathon Petroleum’s median worker made $21,034 versus its CEO making
$19.7 million, or 935 times the employee amount.
Balance Work Life and Home Life
Work and family strategies now represent a competitive advantage for those firms that offer
such benefits as elder-care assistance, flexible scheduling, job sharing, adoption benefits, on-site
summer camp, employee help lines, pet care, and even lawn service referrals. New corporate
titles such as Work and Life Coordinator and Director of Diversity are becoming common.
Globally, it is widely acknowledged that the best countries for working women are Iceland,
Norway, Sweden, Finland, and Denmark, all of which rate above the United States. According
to the World Economic Forum’s Global Gender Gap Index Report, the United States, in fact,
ranked forty-fifth overall.
Working Mother magazine annually publishes its listing of “The 100 Best Companies for
Working Mothers” (www.workingmother.com). Three especially important variables used in
the ranking are availability of flextime, advancement opportunities, and equitable distribution of
benefits. Other important criteria are compressed weeks, telecommuting, job sharing, childcare
facilities, maternity leave for both parents, mentoring, career development, and promotion for
women. Working Mother’s top 10 best companies for working women in 2017 are provided in
Table 7-12. Working Mother also conducts extensive research to determine the best U.S. firms
for women of color.
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 249
A good home life contributes immensely to a good work life. The work and family issue
is no longer just a women’s issue. Some specific measures that firms are taking to address this
issue are providing spouse relocation assistance as an employee benefit; supplying company
resources for family recreational and educational use; establishing employee country clubs, such
as those at IBM and Bethlehem Steel; and creating family and work interaction opportunities. A
study by Joseph Pleck of Wheaton College found that in companies that do not offer paternity or
paid family leave for fathers as a benefit, most men still take short, informal leaves and do so by
combining vacation time and sick days.
Some organizations have developed family days, when family members are invited into
the workplace, taken on plant or office tours, dined by management, and given a chance to
see exactly what other family members do each day. Family days are inexpensive and in-
crease the employee’s pride in working for the organization. Flexible working hours during
the week are another human-resource response to the need for individuals to balance work
life and home life.
Promote Diversity
The term glass ceiling refers to the invisible barrier in many firms that bars women and people
of color from top-level management positions. Michele Buck became Hershey Company’s CEO
in 2017, becoming the twenty-eighth female to head a Fortune 500 business, up from 21 in 2013.
Thus, progress in this regard is slow, even in the United States.
An organization can perhaps be most effective when its workforce mirrors the diversity of
its customers. Six benefits of having a diverse workforce are as follows:
1. Women and minorities have different insights, opinions, and perspectives that should be
considered.
2. A diverse workforce portrays a firm committed to nondiscrimination.
3. A workforce that mirrors a customer base can help attract customers, build customer loy-
alty, and design or offer products and services that meet customer needs and wants.
4. A diverse workforce helps protect the firm against discrimination lawsuits.
5. Women and minorities represent a huge additional pool of qualified applicants.
6. A diverse workforce strengthens a firm’s social responsibility and ethical position.
A January 2018 article in Fortune (p. 44) revealed several companies that have a really
high percentage of people of color on its payroll: Hyatt Hotels (65%), Marriott International
(65%), Publix Super Markets (42%), Capital One Financial (49%), and Kimpton Hotels and
Restaurants (60%).
TABLE 7-12 Top 10 Companies for Working Women
Source: Based on information at the Working Mother website, January 1, 2018.
Company # Employees % Women Headquarters
1. Bank of America 175,400 55 Charlotte, North Carolina
2. Deloitte 53,500 43 New York, New York
3. McKinsey & Company 7,110 44 New York, New York
4. Ernst & Young LLP 41,600 45 New York, New York
5. Unilever 10,150 44 London, England
6. IBM 380,000 31 Armonk, New York
7. Prudential Financial 20,314 49 Newark, New Jersey
8. PwC 36,500 45 New York, New York
9. Johnson & Johnson 39,370 45 New Brunswick, New Jersey
10. Zoetis 3,960 41 Florham Park, New Jersey
250 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
Use Caution in Hiring a Rival’s Employees
An article titled “Dos and Don’ts of Poaching Workers” in Investor’s Business Daily gives
guidelines to consider before hiring a rival firm’s employees.5 The practice of hiring employees
from rival firms has a long tradition, but increasingly in our lawsuit-happy environment, firms
must consider whether that person(s) had access to the “secret sauce formula, customer list,
programming algorithm, or any proprietary or confidential information” of the rival firm. If the
person has that information and joins your firm, lawsuits could follow that hiring, especially if
the person was under contract at the rival firm or had signed a “noncompete agreement.” The
article says that to help safeguard the firm from this potential problem, a “well-written employee
handbook” addressing the issue is necessary. The article talks about Hewlett-Packard (HP) re-
cently hiring an IBM general manager, and IBM suing HP over the hiring; IBM lost in that case,
but this type of legal action is becoming more commonplace.
According to Wayne Perrett, human resource manager for ComAp in Roscoe, Illinois, “A
company does not want to become known as one that ‘steals’ employees from competitors; that
is bad for ethics and bad for business.” It is not illegal to interview and hire employees from rival
firms, and it has been done for centuries, but increasingly this is becoming a strategic issue to be
managed, to avoid litigation.
Create a Strategy-Supportive Culture
All organizations have a unique culture. For example, at Facebook, Inc., employees are given
unusual freedom to choose and change assignments. Even low-level employees are encouraged
to question and criticize managers. Facebook employees are rated on a normal distribution curve
(Bell curve), which creates a hectic, intense work environment where past accomplishments
mean little compared to what you have done lately for the firm. Managers are not revered at
Facebook as bosses; rather, they are regarded as helpers.
Strategists should strive to preserve, emphasize, and build on aspects of an existing cul-
ture that support proposed new strategies. Aspects of an existing culture that are antagonistic
to a proposed strategy should be identified and changed. Changing a firm’s culture to fit a new
strategy is usually more effective than changing a strategy to fit an existing culture. As indicated
in Table 7-13, numerous techniques are available to alter an organization’s culture, including
recruitment, training, transfer, promotion, restructure of an organization’s design, role modeling,
positive reinforcement, and mentoring.
In the personal and religious side of life, the impact of loss and change is easy to see.6
Memories of loss and change often haunt individuals and organizations for years. Ibsen wrote,
“Rob the average man of his life illusion and you rob him of his happiness at the same stroke.”7
When attachments to a culture are severed in an organization’s attempt to change direction,
employees and managers often experience deep feelings of grief. This phenomenon commonly
occurs when external conditions dictate the need for a new strategy. Managers and employees
often struggle to find meaning in a situation that changed years ago. Some people find comfort
TABLE 7-13 Ways and Means for Altering an Organization’s Culture
1. Recruitment
2. Training
3. Transfer
4. Promotion
5. Restructuring
6. Reengineering
7. Role modeling
8. Positive reinforcement
9. Mentoring
10. Revising vision or mission
11. Redesigning physical spaces or facades
12. Altering reward system
13. Altering organizational policies, procedures, and practices
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 251
in memories; others find solace in the present. Weak linkages between strategic management and
organizational culture can jeopardize performance and success. Deal and Kennedy emphasized
that making strategic changes in an organization always threatens a culture:
People form strong attachments to heroes, legends, the rituals of daily life, the hoopla of
extravaganza and ceremonies, and all the symbols of the workplace. Change strips rela-
tionships and leaves employees confused, insecure, and often angry. Unless something
can be done to provide support for transitions from old to new, the force of a culture can
neutralize and emasculate strategy changes.8
Wells Fargo recently reinforced a business culture to sell more and more products to ex-
isting bank customers, termed cross-selling—a market penetration strategy. This business cul-
ture spiraled out of control; federal investigators found that Wells Fargo had opened as many
as two million deposit and credit-card accounts without customers requesting or knowing of
the actions. The cross-selling problem was systemic across all the company’s 6,000 branches
and all its products. A spokeswoman at Wells Fargo responded to the fiasco saying: “We are
committed to fixing this issue, to strengthening our culture throughout the company and tak-
ing the necessary actions to begin restoring our customer’s trust.” Steven Schrodt worked
at Wells Fargo and reported that employees at his branch had a daily goal to open two new
checking accounts and make eight other product sales; Steven left the company because the
sales pressure was too stressful. The Wells Fargo culture problem cost the firm billions in lost
revenue, lawsuits, and penalties.
Use Caution in Monitoring Employees’ Social Media
Many companies monitor employees’ and prospective employees’ social-media activities, and
have the legal right to do so, but there are many pros and cons of this activity. Proponents of com-
panies monitoring employees’ social-media activities emphasize that (1) a company’s reputation
in the marketplace can easily be damaged by disgruntled employees venting on social-media sites
and (2) social-media records can be subpoenaed, like e-mail, and used as evidence against the
company. Proponents say companies have a responsibility to know the nature of employees’ com-
munication through social media as related to clients, patients, suppliers, distributors, coworkers,
managers, technology, patents, procedures, policies, and much more. To ignore social-media
communication by employees, proponents say, is irresponsible and too risky for the firm. Some
companies use social media to research and screen job candidates, sometimes finding provocative
or inappropriate photos and information related to potential employees’ bias, stereotypes, preju-
dices, drinking, and drug use. Companies however should never use social media to discriminate
based on age, race, ethnic background, religion, sexuality, or disability.
Arguments against the practice of companies monitoring employees’ social-media activities
say it is an invasion of privacy and too often becomes “a fishing expedition” sifting through tons
of personal information irrelevant to a company or its business. Positions on political issues, gun
rights, or immigration are example topics where company researchers may “not like” individuals
with different belief systems than their own. In a recent study, 77 percent of employers said they
conduct Internet searches of prospective employees, and 35 percent have rejected job applicants
because of information they found.9 Rejecting potential employees because of private behavior
unrelated to work is unfair. In addition, whenever a company discovers through social media that
an employee or potential employee is of a certain background or has a particular disability, and
then denies a promotion or hires someone else; that “social media discovery information” could
be the basis of a discrimination suit against the firm. For some jobs, such as law enforcement,
due diligence may require firms to monitor social-media activities to help assure their entire
workforce is not involved in drugs, child pornography, gangs, and so on.
On balance, companies should monitor employee and potential employee’s social-media
activities whenever they have a reason to believe the person is engaged in illegal or unethical
conduct, but to systematically investigate every employee and job candidate’s social-media
activities is arguably counterproductive. The bottom line is that companies have the legal right
to monitor employees’ conduct, but have the legal duty to do so only if there is sufficient reason
for concern.
252 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
Develop a Corporate Well-Being Program
Corporate wellness has become a major strategic issue in companies. If you owned a company
and paid the health insurance of employees, would you desire to have a healthy workforce? Your
likely answer is yes because health insurance premiums are more costly for an unhealthy work-
force. Healthy employees are more productive and less absent from work.
The notion of corporate wellness is rapidly shifting from health assessment, weight loss, and
biometric screenings to also include financial well-being, social networks, work-life balance, and
overall well-being. The focus now is thus on lifestyle management rather than just cholesterol
management; this shift includes such things as sit-stand desks in the workspace and access to the
outdoors while at work. The term corporate wellness has largely been replaced with corporate
well-being, and these newly designed programs are being used in recruitment and retention; the
programs are being intertwined with company goals and objectives. LuAnn Heinen says “the hap-
piness of your customers is a direct reflection of how happy and engaged your employees are.”
Michael Sokol says “your corporate wellbeing program should be multi-year, with clear expecta-
tions and should include the entire healthcare continuum”; a recent study concludes that wellness
programs pay off because healthy employees are more productive employees.10
Strategic Marketing Issues Countless marketing considerations affect the success or failure of strategy implementation ef-
forts, such as the following:
1. How to make advertisements more interactive to be more effective
2. How to take advantage of social-media conversations about the company and industry
3. To use exclusive dealerships or multiple channels of distribution
4. To use heavy, light, or no TV advertising versus online advertising
5. To limit (or not) the share of business done with a single supplier or business customer
6. To be a price leader or a price follower
7. To offer a complete or limited warranty
8. To extend an existing product line or create a new line of products
Market segmentation, target marketing, and product positioning are marketing’s most im-
portant contributions to strategic management. Strategies such as market development, product
development, market penetration, and diversification require increased sales through new mar-
kets or products. To implement strategies successfully, effective segmentation, targeting, and
positioning are required and discussed next.
Segment and Target Markets Effectively
As illustrated in Figure 7-9, companies engage in market segmentation first, then target mar-
keting, and then position products among industry offerings. Because consumers vary in their
needs and wants, blanket marketing is rarely an effective strategy, partly due to the high cost of
reaching everybody. Thus, firms engage in market segmentation, dividing a market into dis-
tinct subsets of customers that differ from one another in product needs and buying habits. The
segments are created based on unique demographic, geographic, psychographic, or behavioral
characteristics of consumers. Successful strategy implementation requires effective (and effi-
cient) marketing.
Market segmentation requires strategists to determine the characteristics and needs of
consumers, to analyze consumer similarities and differences, and to develop consumer group
profiles. After segmenting markets, companies select particular segment(s) to target. Individual
market segments differ in consumer needs and buying habits so firms carefully select segment(s)
to target. Firms such as Marriott, InterContinental, and Wyndham have multiple brand hotels so
they can market varied offerings tailored to particular target segments.
As indicated in the mini-case at the end of this chapter, the world-renowned diamond en-
gagement ring company De Beers recently repositioned itself to target younger consumers. This
segmentation, targeting, and positioning was essential to the implementation of a new strategy
LO 7.10
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 253
aimed at attracting the market segment of millennials (people ages 18 to 34), which recently
surpassed the number of baby boomers in the United States. Market segmentation and target-
ing decisions directly affect the marketing mix variables: product, place, promotion, and price
(discussed in Chapter 4, p. 132).
Product Positioning
After markets have been segmented and one or more segments have been selected as the target
market(s), firms engage in positioning. Positioning entails designing a marketing mix that offers
unique value to target customers. The product offering, its price, the way it is promoted or ad-
vertised, and the channels through which it is sold all complement one another and are designed
to attract a particular target market. As illustrated in Figure 7-10, product, price, promotion, and
place aspects of any offering collectively yield value to a target market, resulting in consumer
demand being high (or low) versus rival offerings.
Through marketing, Procter & Gamble (P&G) has effectively implemented product-development
and market-penetration strategies. Consider the following P&G laundry detergent brands, for ex-
ample: Era “effectively removes stains”; Cheer provides “exceptional color-protection”; and Ivory
“safely cleans baby clothing.” These detergents target unique segments and are positioned as such.
Market
Segmentation
Target
Marketing Positioning
FIGURE 7-9
Segment, Target, and Position: The Key to Marketing Strategy
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
Product Place
Price Promotion
Target Market
FIGURE 7-10
Positioning Products to Meet Target Market Needs
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
254 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
Changing brand names is a tactic marketers use to reposition a company’s offerings.
Walmart recently implemented strategies aimed at growing its online market and increas-
ing online sales, so the company changed its official name from Wal-Mart Stores Inc. to
Walmart, Inc.
Because 95 percent of the world’s population (potential customers) lives outside the U.S.,
it is becoming increasingly common for companies to offer their goods and services abroad.
Marketers often are charged with leading the way on global expansion, but there are many
guidelines to follow in global marketing, such as tailoring a firm’s website and social-media
platforms to fit the specific target markets. Global Capsule 7 reveals four important guidelines
for global marketing.
Perceptual Mapping
Firms continuously monitor the image of their brands as perceived by consumers. A
product-positioning tool widely used in marketing is perceptual mapping, or developing
schematic representations to reflect how a firm’s goods or services compare to competitors’
in the mind of consumers. Perceptual mapping is widely used for deciding how to better
meet the needs and wants of particular consumer groups. The technique can be summarized
in five steps:
1. Select key criteria that effectively differentiate products in the industry. Specifically, con-
sider the key characteristics of your brand offerings that provide unique value to your target
customers.
2. Diagram a two-dimensional product-positioning map with specified criteria on each axis.
3. Plot major competitors’ brands in the resultant four-quadrant matrix.
4. Assess whether your brand’s location in the matrix is ideal, especially relative to com-
petitors. That is, consider whether your brand’s position, as perceived by consumers, offers
unique value.
5. Reposition your brand’s offering as needed to shift consumers’ perceptions of the brand to
a location that provides a competitive advantage over rival brands.
GLOBAL CAPSULE 7
Four Guidelines to Follow in Global Marketing
There Are Potential Customers Almost Everywhere
2. In countries such as Japan where relation-
ships have a high cultural value, use local
resellers or channel partners, rather than
direct sales models.
3. Carefully study pricing issues. Alter prices
as needed. Make certain that purchases
can be easily made and payments re-
ceived; some countries are predominantly
cash based and some do not accept Pay-
Pal, etc.
4. Make certain the company website and
associated software for webinars, chat
Four key guidelines to follow in rolling out
any product or service abroad are:
1. Use a country-by-country rather than
a continent or regional approach;
countries vary greatly across many
variables such as culture, technology,
currency, economy, and laws. Cus-
tomers are unique at the country and
local level. Therefore, conduct market
research, develop perceptual maps,
and establish objectives at the coun-
try level based on local norms, rival
firms, and challenges customers face. Gather your own primary
data because third-party data sources do not know your firm,
brand, or customer. Draw extensively on input from your local
teams (salespersons, suppliers, and distributors).
sessions, and so on are 100 percent compatible with each country’s
language, norms, and technology.
Source: Based on https://hbr.org/2015/09/the-most-common-mistakes-
companies-make-with-global-marketing.
In d ia
n S
u m
m er
/S h u tt
er st
o ck
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 255
An effective product-positioning strategy uniquely distinguishes a company from the com-
petition. Companies commonly develop several perceptual maps to better understand competi-
tive advantages and disadvantages versus rival companies, rival products, or in-house products.
Figure 7-11 shows a perceptual map of major U.S. auto insurance companies. Consider for
example that Allstate is implementing a market-penetration strategy with objectives aimed at
increasing revenue; the perceptual map in Figure 7-11 may help guide Allstate managers by
suggesting that the firm needs to either focus on improving customer service or lowering prices.
For incumbent firms planning to enter the auto-insurance business as part of a diversification or
product-development strategy, the perceptual map in Figure 7-11 could foster the implementa-
tion of such strategies.
Figure 7-11 indicates that several firms already offer average range prices and customer
service, but a firm could perhaps differentiate itself by offering enhanced customer service
for moderately or slightly higher prices (while remaining below State Farm). Perceptual maps
also reveal unclaimed space that may contain a target market. Marketers draw a line of best fit
through the plots and look for places along the line that are uncontested. Also, items well above
or well below the line may be over- or underserving customers and costing the firm money.
Allstate for example may look decent at first glance, but they would have to significantly lower
price or raise customer service to remain competitive. GEICO is possibly overserving customers
on customer service; sure customers will accept this, but they probably would accept less and
not run away based on still being above the “line of best fit.”
A perceptual map for Marriott is shown in Figure 7-12, illustrating how several of the firm’s
hotel brands compare to or are differentiated from one another in terms of price and customer
satisfaction. When implementing strategies, Marriott may use a perceptual map such as the one
shown in Figure 7-12 to understand which of its individual brands are doing best, to identify
potential problems with underperforming brands, or to visualize potential markets that could
best serve as a focus for a new brand of Marriott hotels. For example, the addition of another
mid-range hotel brand may cannibalize sales of existing Marriott brands, but the addition of an
economy-brand of hotels may be fruitful for Marriott to consider as a means of implementing a
growth strategy.
GEICO
State Farm
Progressive
Allstate
Esurance
The General
Excellent Customer Service
Low Price High Price
Poor Customer Service
FIGURE 7-11
A Perceptual Map for Auto-Insurance Providers
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
256 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
Engage Customers in Social Media
Social-media marketing has become an important strategic issue and an effective way to
understand consumers’ perceptions of brands. Marketing has evolved to be more about build-
ing a two-way relationship with consumers than just informing consumers about a product
or service. Marketers increasingly strive to get customers involved in the company website
and social-media pages and solicit suggestions in terms of product development, customer
service, and ideas. Companies want customers to interact with the firm on such social-media
networks as Facebook, Google Plus, Twitter, LinkedIn, Instagram, Pinterest, and Foursquare.
To manage this process, many larger companies have hired social-media managers to be the
face or voice of the company on social and digital media sites. These managers respond to
comments and problems, track negative or misleading statements, manage the online dis-
cussion about a firm, and gather valuable information about opinions and desires—all of
which can be vital for monitoring strategy implementation progress and making appropriate
changes.
The online community of customers increasingly mirrors the offline community; online
engagement can be a much quicker, cheaper, and effective source for gathering market research
data than traditional focus groups and surveys. Successful strategy implementation requires a
firm to know what people are saying about it and its products. Social-media posts, blog discus-
sions, tweets, e-mails, and conversations with family and friends represent valuable content for
brand management. The best firms today embrace consumers’ opinions, desires, and feelings,
and learn from, and leverage consumer-generated content to improve the effectiveness of their
marketing mix.
Firms benefit immensely by providing incentives to customers to share their thoughts,
opinions, and experiences on the company website. Firms should encourage customers to
network among themselves on topics of their choosing on the company website. The company
website must not be just about the company; it must be all about the customer, too. Offering
points, discounts, or coupons on the website for customers who provide ideas, suggestions, or
feedback can be helpful. Driving traffic to the company website and then keeping customers
JW Marriott
Aloft
Courtyard by Marriott Westin
Sheraton
Fairfield Inn & Suites
Residence Inn
Marriott Hotels
AC Hotels
High Customer Satisfaction
Low Price (Economy)
High Price (Luxury)
Low Customer Satisfaction
FIGURE 7-12
A Perceptual Map for Marriott’s Brands of Hotels
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 257
at the website for as long as possible with daily new material, updates, excitement, and offers
is effective marketing.
Customers trust other customers’ opinions more than a company’s marketing pitch, and
the more they talk freely, the more the firm can learn how to improve its overall market-
ing mix. Marketers should monitor blogs daily to determine, evaluate, and influence opin-
ions being formed by customers. Customers must not feel like they are a captive audience
for advertising at a firm’s website. Table 7-14 provides some key principles of marketing
communications.
TABLE 7-14 Key Principles of Marketing Communications
Source: Based on Salvatore Parise, Patricia Guinan, and Bruce Weinberg, “The Secrets of Marketing in a Web 2.0 World,” Wall Street Journal, December 15, 2008, R1.
1. Do not just talk at consumers; work with them throughout the marketing process.
2. Give consumers a reason to participate.
3. Listen to—and join—the conversation outside your company’s website.
4. Resist the temptation to sell, sell, sell. Instead attract, attract, attract.
5. Do not control online conversation; let it flow freely.
6. Find a “marketing technologist,” a person who has three excellent skill sets
(marketing, technology, and social interaction).
7. Embrace instant messaging and chatting.
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS
Figure 7-13 reveals that to gain and sustain competitive ad-
vantages, firms must be exceptionally well organized and must
allocate resources appropriately across products, services, and
regions. Employees must know clearly what rewards and benefits
they will receive if the firm does well; this knowledge will help
motivate the workforce to work hard. As indicated in this chapter,
other management policies and procedures also are needed to
facilitate superior strategic implementation, including creating
an inclusive organization, linking compensation to firm perfor-
mance, encouraging corporate well-being, and nurturing an
organizational culture that treats all people with respect. If strate-
gists do an exceptional job with the management and marketing
issues related to strategy implementation, the firm is well on its
way to success.
Perceptual mapping and market segmentation especially are
vitally important tools for strategists to make sure that monies
devoted to advertising, promotion, publicity, and selling are wisely
used. Marketing expenditures can be unnecessarily exorbitant
if not based on clear product positioning analyses and target
marketing.
Millennials spend more time weekly on the Internet than watching television, listening
to the radio, and watching movies combined. Thus, social-media ads are often a better means
of reaching younger customers than traditional yellow pages, television, magazine, radio, or
newspaper ads. However, about 35 percent of all traffic on the Internet is reportedly fake, being
the result of bogus computers programmed to visit websites to take advantage of marketers who
typically pay for ads whenever a user visits a webpage, regardless if the user is an actual person.
Criminals can erect websites and deliver phony traffic and collect payments from advertisers
through middlemen, often in third-world countries. Although the exponential increase in social-
media engagement has created huge opportunities for marketers, it also has produced severe
threats; any kind of negative publicity travels fast online. Seemingly minor ethical and question-
able actions can catapult into huge public relations problems for companies as a result of the
monumental online social and business communications.
258 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS
An integral part of managing a firm is continually and systematically
seeking to gain and sustain competitive advantage through effec-
tive planning, organizing, motivating, and controlling. Rival firms
engage in these same activities, so emphasize in your strategic-
management case analysis how your firm can best implement your
recommendations. Remember to be prescriptive rather than descrip-
tive on every page or slide in your project, meaning to be insightful,
forward-looking, and analytical, rather than just describing opera-
tions. It is easy to describe a company, but it is difficult to analyze
a company. Strategic-management case analysis is about analyzing
a company and its industry, uncovering ways and means for the
firm to best gain and sustain competitive advantage. So, commu-
nicate throughout your project how your firm, and especially your
recommendations, will lead to improved growth and profitability
versus rival firms. Avoid vagueness and generalities throughout your
project, as your audience or reader seeks great ideas backed up by
great analyses. Be analytical and prescriptive rather than vague and
descriptive in highlighting every slide you show an audience.
A key consideration in devising an organizational structure con-
cerns the divisions. Note whether the divisions (if any) of a firm pres-
ently are established based on geography, customer, product, or
process. If the firm’s organizational chart is not available, you often
can devise a chart based on the titles of executives. An important
case analysis activity is for you to decide how the divisions of a firm
should be organized for maximum effectiveness. Even if the com-
pany presently has no divisions, determine whether it would oper-
ate better with divisions. In other words, which type of divisional
breakdown do you (or your group or team) feel would be best for
the firm in allocating resources, establishing objectives, and devising
compensation incentives? This important strategic decision faces
many midsize and large firms (and teams of students analyzing a
strategic-management case).
Be mindful that all firms have functional staff below their top
executive and often readily provide this information, so be wary
of concluding prematurely that a particular firm uses a functional
structure. If you see the word president in the titles of executives,
coupled with financial-reporting segments, such as by product or
geographic region, then the firm is currently divisionally structured.
Capitalize on your expertise in marketing in regards to proposing
how best to segment, target, and position your firm’s products to facili-
tate effective strategy implementation. Use the template at the author
website to develop several perceptual maps to lay the foundation for
spending resources to best position a firm’s products to gain and sustain
competitive advantages. To develop your perceptual maps, find data
tables using a Google search that compare your firm and its products to
rival firms, and give the reference(s) as a source, not to each map.
Establish A Clear Vision & Mission
Evaluate & Monitor Results:
Take Corrective Actions; Adapt
To Change
Gain & Sustain Competitive Advantages
Formulate Strategies: Collect, Analyze, &
Prioritize Data Using Matrices; Establish A Clear Strategic Plan
Implement Strategies: Establish Structure; Allocate Resources; Motivate & Reward; Attract Customers; Manage Finances
FIGURE 7-13
How to Gain and Sustain Competitive Advantages
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 259
Chapter Summary Successful strategy formulation does not at all guarantee successful strategy implementation.
Although inextricably interdependent, strategy formulation and strategy implementation are
characteristically different. In a single word, strategy implementation means change. It is widely
agreed that the real work begins after strategies are formulated. Successful strategy implementa-
tion requires the support of, as well as discipline and hard work from, motivated managers and
employees. It is sometimes frightening to think that a single individual can irreparably sabotage
strategy-implementation efforts.
Formulating the right strategies is not enough because managers and employees must be
motivated to implement those strategies. Management issues considered central to strategy
implementation include matching organizational structure with strategy, linking performance
and pay to strategies, creating an organizational climate conducive to change, managing political
relationships, creating a strategy-supportive culture, adapting production and operations pro-
cesses, and managing human resources. Establishing annual objectives, devising policies, and
allocating resources are central strategy-implementation activities common to all organizations.
Depending on the size and type of the organization, other management issues could be equally
important to successful strategy implementation. Similarly, depending on the size and type of
firm, marketing issues, practices, and policies may vary, but effective segmentation, target mar-
keting, and then positioning is required for organizational success.
Key Terms and Concepts accounting functions (p. 243)
annual objectives (p. 231)
Bonus system (p. 248)
conflict (p. 236)
culture (p. 250)
divisional (decentralized) structure (p. 238)
functional structure (p. 237)
glass ceiling (p. 249)
horizontal consistency of objectives (p. 233)
market segmentation (p. 252)
marketing mix variables (p. 253)
matrix structure (p. 240)
perceptual mapping (p. 254)
policies (p. 233)
positioning (p. 253)
product positioning (p. 254)
reengineering (p. 246)
resistance to change (p. 246)
resource allocation (p. 235)
restructuring (p. 246)
strategic business unit (SBU) structure (p. 240)
vertical consistency of objectives (p. 233)
Issues for Review and Discussion 7-1. What are the benefits and drawbacks of many firms’
new policy of prohibiting employees to work from
home? On balance, do you believe the benefits offset
the drawbacks?
7-2. In terms of organizational culture, explain why Wells
Fargo’s cross-selling practice led to massive losses for
the firm.
7-3. From a human-resource-management perspective, ex-
plain the difference between corporate wellness and
corporate well-being?
7-4. As indicated in the chapter, workplace well-being
is gaining steam. Explain the term and give three
examples.
7-5. Array correctly in sequential order market positioning,
segmenting, and targeting.
7-6. Identify and discuss three reasons why market segmen-
tation is so important in strategy implementation.
7-7. What is the “marketing mix,” and why is it so important
in strategy implementation?
7-8. Advertisements are getting more and more lengthy,
annoying, and intrusive on both television and social-
media platforms. On television, for example, some-
times eight ads will play on a commercial break.
How lengthy of a commercial break will you tolerate
before switching the channel to some other program,
1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes? Despite
260 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
the rising cost of placing an ad, could the annoyance
factor offset the potential benefits of an ad? How can
firms best counter this growing problem in strategy
implementation?
7-9. What policy do you recommend for companies re-
garding employees spending time on their personal
Facebook and other social-media accounts? Could your
policy be enforced? How? Why?
7-10. List five important benefits of a company or organiza-
tion having a diverse workforce.
7-11. Have you noticed differences in gender representation
among the leadership in your institution? How would
you account for this? Discuss.
7-12. Discuss the “Do’s and Don’ts of Poaching Workers”
from rival firms.
7-13. Discuss recent trends and facts regarding corporate
well-being programs in the United States.
7-14. Should companies monitor employees’ social media?
Why or why not? If yes, how?
7-15. List four reasons why companies are phasing out the
COO position.
7-16. Discuss three ways for linking performance and pay to
strategies.
7-17. List the different types of organizational structure.
Diagram what you think is the most complex of these
structures and label your chart clearly.
7-18. List the advantages and disadvantages of a functional
versus a divisional organizational structure.
7-19. Why is perceptual mapping an important marketing tool
in strategy implementation?
7-20. In the beverage soda industry, what two variables
would be helpful to include in a perceptual map?
Why?
7-21. List seven guidelines to follow in developing an organi-
zational chart.
7-22. Women comprise less than 20 percent of boards of
directors. Why is this a problem globally for many com-
panies and countries?
7-23. Some head football coaches get paid millions, presum-
ably because there is so much money involved in col-
lege football, the need to win is paramount. However,
head coaches are often fired when a season goes badly,
with huge payouts to the coach by contract. How could
a head coach’s compensation package be better struc-
tured to encourage winning, and at the same time not be
so potentially costly to a university?
7-24. Businessweek says firms should “base executive com-
pensation on actual company performance, rather than
on the company’s stock price.” For example, Target
Corp. bases executive pay on same-store sales growth
rather than stock price. Discuss.
7-25. Explain why firms need a policy against workplace
phubbing.
7-26. The chapter says strategy formulation focuses on
effectiveness, whereas strategy implementation focuses
on efficiency. Which is more important, effectiveness or
efficiency? Give an example of each concept.
7-27. In stating objectives, why should terms such as in-
crease, minimize, maximize, as soon as possible, ad-
equate, and decrease be avoided?
7-28. Among the three marketing activities (product position-
ing, target marketing, market segmentation), which
activity comes first, second, and third?
7-29. Explain why Alfred Chandler’s strategy–structure rela-
tionship commonly exists among firms.
7-30. If you owned and opened three restaurants after you
graduated, would you operate from a functional or divi-
sional structure? Why?
7-31. Explain how to choose between a divisional-by-
product and a divisional-by-region organizational
structure.
7-32. Think of a company that would operate best, in your
opinion, by a division-by-services organizational struc-
ture. Explain your reasoning.
7-33. Identify and discuss pros and cons of keeping the COO
position in a corporate design.
7-34. In order of importance, in your opinion, list six advan-
tages of a matrix organizational structure.
7-35. Why should division head persons have the title presi-
dent rather than vice president?
7-36. In order of importance, in your opinion, list six tech-
niques or activities widely used to alter an organiza-
tion’s culture.
7-37. Allocating resources can be a political and an ad hoc
activity in firms that do not use strategic management.
Why is this true? Does adopting strategic management
ensure easy resource allocation? Why?
7-38. Describe the relationship between annual objectives and
policies.
7-39. Identify and discuss three policies that apply to your
present strategic-management class.
7-40. Explain the following statement: Horizontal consistency
of goals is as important as vertical consistency.
7-41. To conflict problems, how would you resolve a dis-
agreement between a human resource manager and a
sales manager over the firing of a particular salesper-
son? Why?
7-42. Describe the organizational culture of your college or
university.
7-43. Explain why organizational structure is so important in
strategy implementation.
7-44. In your opinion, how many separate divisions could an
organization reasonably have without using an SBU-
type organizational structure? Why?
7-45. Do you believe expenditures for child care or fitness
facilities are warranted from a cost/benefit perspective?
Why or why not?
7-46. Explain why successful strategy implementation often
hinges on whether the strategy-formulation process em-
powers managers and employees.
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 261
7-47. Identify and discuss four primary reasons why an-
nual objectives are so essential for effective strategy
implementation.
7-48. Identify and discuss eight characteristics of
objectives.
7-49. Why is it essential for organizations to segment markets
and target particular groups of consumers?
7-50. Why did Walmart, Inc. change their corporate name in
2018?
7-51. Develop a perceptual map for five colleges and univer-
sities in your state. Explain the potential value of your
map for the president of your institution.
7-52. Under the marketing mix factor of price, what are four
considerations or decisions many firms face?
7-53. Under the marketing mix factor of promotion, list four
subsets or decision areas.
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
SET 1: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR COCA-COLA
EXERCISE 7A
Compare and Contrast Coca-Cola’s Marketing Expenses versus Rival Firms
Purpose
Marketing is expensive. For example, a 30-second ad spot during the annual NFL Super Bowl costs
about $5 million. Yet, firms must do marketing otherwise even the best products in the world can
go unnoticed. But firms can go broke doing marketing. These are reasons why marketing is a key
business function and an important issue in strategy implementation. This exercise can give you
experience comparing and contrasting Coca-Cola’s marketing expenditures versus two major rivals:
PepsiCo and Dr Pepper Snapple. Analysis in this regard can provide guidance on whether to increase
or decrease Coca-Cola’s marketing expenditures.
Instructions
Step 1 Go online to Coca-Cola, PepsiCo, and Dr Pepper Snapple websites at the respective Investor
Relations page and download the three Form 10Ks for the respective firms.
Step 2 Look in the Table of Contents to each Form 10K to find the pages that reveal the three firms’
marketing or advertising expenditures.
Step 3 Prepare a comparative data table to consolidate this information.
Step 4 Prepare a report to suggest implications for Coca-Cola in terms of marketing or advertising
expenditures going forward as needed to implement strategies.
EXERCISE 7B
Diagram an Existing and Proposed Organizational Chart for Coca-Cola
Purpose
Organizational structure matters because being well organized is vital for success in all aspects of
business (and personal) endeavors. This exercise gives you experience developing an existing organi-
zational chart for a company, and based on the chapter guidelines, proposing a new and improved de-
sign for a firm. Rarely do companies publicly provide an organizational chart, but nearly all publicly
held firms provide a list of their top executives in the annual Form 10K, as does Coca-Cola. Based on
that document, Coca-Cola’s top management team is as follows:
1. Muhtar Kent, Chairman of the Board of Directors and Chief Executive Officer
2. Alexander M. Douglas, Jr., EVP and President of Coca-Cola North America
3. Irial Finan, EVP and President, Bottling Investments Group
4. John Murphy, President of the Asia Pacific Group
5. James Quincey, President and Chief Operating Officer
262 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
6. Alfredo Rivera, President of the Latin America Group
7. Brian Smith, President of the Europe, Middle East and Africa Group
8. Clyde C. Tuggle, SVP and Chief Public Affairs and Communications Officer
9. Kathy N. Waller, EVP and Chief Financial Officer
10. Marcos de Quinto, EVP and Chief Marketing Officer
11. Ceree Eberly, SVP and Chief People Officer
12. Bernhard Goepelt, SVP, General Counsel and Chief Legal Counsel
13. Julie Hamilton, SVP and Chief Customer and Commercial Leadership Officer
14. Brent Hastie, SVP, Strategy and Planning
15. Ed Hays, PhD, SVP and Chief Technical Officer
16. Barry Simpson, SVP and Chief Information Officer of the Company
Instructions
Step 1 Develop an existing organizational chart for Coca-Cola. As described in the chapter, use
numbers in your chart rather than drawing boxes or circles. Always number executive posi-
tions as shown, so you can then use just numbers in your actual chart rather than drawing
boxes or circles to reveal reporting relationships.
Step 2 Develop a new and improved organizational chart for Coca-Cola. You may want to change
up the list given, adding and deleting positions as you deem necessary as well as changing
certain titles to assure adherence to the chapter guidelines and dos and don’ts in devising
organizational charts.
SET 2: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR MY UNIVERSITY
EXERCISE 7C
Develop a Perceptual Map for My University
Purpose
The purpose of this exercise is to give you practice developing product-positioning maps. Nonprofit
organizations, such as universities, increasingly use product-positioning maps to determine effective
ways to implement strategies.
Instructions
Step 1 Join with two other people in class to form a group of three.
Step 2 Jointly prepare a product-positioning map that includes your institution and four other col-
leges or universities in your state.
Step 3 Compare your map to other teams’ maps. Discuss differences.
Step 4 How can your college or university best take advantage of the information revealed in the
diagrams developed?
SET 3: STRATEGIC PLANNING TO ENHANCE MY EMPLOYABILITY
EXERCISE 7D
Marketing Yourself to Best Achieve Your Career Objectives
Purpose
As indicated in this chapter, establishing annual objectives and marketing products or services is
vital for successful strategy implementation in companies, but these two activities are equally im-
portant for an individual in career planning. This exercise offers guidelines for you to better market
yourself to meet your career objectives. In particular, 10 guidelines are provided for enhancing your
resume.
1. Meticulously make certain there are no typos, not even a comma missing.
2. Include no personal pronouns, such as my or I, and no abbreviations, such as Rd. or St, any-
where in your resume.
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 263
3. Looks matter, so use 12-point font throughout; manage white space margins well; double space
after headings; use bullets to showcase points; never repeat wording in bullets
4. Include your highest GPA four ways: (1) in your major, (2) in the business school, (3) overall at
the university, or (4) your last 60 hours, if that highest score is 2.75 or higher.
5. Begin with an Objective saying something like “To gain an entry level position in
accounting with a large manufacturing firm.” Tailor this wording to the prospective firm of
interest.
6. List Education before Work Experience unless you have substantial work experience.
7. Make sure you list your degree, your major, and when you expect your degree.
8. Do not list courses completed but do list skills gained in courses, such as when using this text-
book say: “Learned how to use a popular, Excel-based strategic planning template” or “Gained
experience developing strategic plans for a wide variety of firms.”
9. Make sure you use business terms in describing your work experience, saying something like
“Learned the value of hard work, dependability, and reliability,” or “Gained experience with
customer service, pricing, and inventory control,” focusing on skills learned rather than duties
performed.
10. Unless constrained otherwise, include three reference persons with their titles and contact infor-
mation; reveal their professional association with you; place horizontal or vertical depending on
spacing; do not have only references on second page.
Instructions
Step 1 Use the guidelines listed to polish up your resume.
Step 2 E-mail your resume to your professor and ask for his or her feedback.
SET 4: INDIVIDUAL VERSUS GROUP STRATEGIC PLANNING
EXERCISE 7E
What Are the Most Important Benefits of Having a Diverse Workforce? Purpose
Sometimes students, and even managers and executives, do not realize or appreciate why it is impor-
tant to have a diverse workforce and management team. As discussed in this chapter, there are six
major benefits of having a diverse workforce, as follows:
1. Women and minorities have different insights, opinions, and perspectives that should be
considered.
2. A diverse workforce portrays a firm committed to nondiscrimination.
3. A workforce that mirrors a customer base can help attract customers, build customer loyalty,
and design or offer products and services that meet customer needs and wants.
4. A diverse workforce helps protect the firm against discrimination lawsuits.
5. Women and minorities represent a huge additional pool of qualified applicants.
6. A diverse workforce strengthens a firm’s social responsibility and ethical position.
The purpose of this exercise is to examine more closely the benefits of having a diverse workforce and
management team. In addition, the purpose of this exercise is to examine whether individual decision
making is better than group decision making. Academic research suggests that groups make better
decisions than individuals about 80 percent of the time.
Instructions
Rank the six benefits of having a diverse workforce and management team as to their relative impor-
tance (1 = most important, 9 = least important). First, rank the six benefits as an individual. Then, rank
the six benefits as part a group of three. Thus, determine what person(s) and what group(s) here today
can come closest to the expert ranking. This exercise enables examination of the relative effectiveness
of individual versus group decision making in strategic planning.
264 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
The Steps
1. Fill in Column 1 in Table 7- 15 to reveal your individual ranking of the relative importance of
the six benefits (1 = most important to 6 = least important). For example, if you think Benefit #1
(Women and minorities have different insights, opinions, and perspectives) is the second-most
important benefit, then enter a 2 in Table 7- 15 in Column 1 beside Benefit 1.
2. Fill in Column 2 in Table 7- 15 to reveal your group’s ranking of the relative importance of the
six benefits (1 = most important to 6 = least important).
3. Fill in Column 3 in Table 7- 15 to reveal the expert’s ranking of the six benefits.
4. Fill in Column 4 in Table 7- 15 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 1 and Column
3 to reveal how well you performed as an individual in this exercise. (Note: Absolute difference
disregards negative numbers.)
5. Fill in Column 5 in Table 7- 15 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 2 and Column
3 to reveal how well your group performed in this exercise.
6. Sum Column 4. Sum Column 5.
7. Compare the Column 4 sum with the Column 5 sum. If your Column 4 sum is less than your Column
5 sum, then you performed better as an individual than as a group. Normally, group decision making
is superior to individual decision making, so if you did better than your group, you did excellent.
8. The Individual Winner(s): The individual(s) with the lowest Column 4 sum is the WINNER.
9. The Group Winners(s): The group(s) with the lowest Column 5 score is the WINNER
TABLE 7- 15 Assessing the Benefits of a Diverse Workforce: Comparing Individual versus Group Decision Making
Individual versus Group Decision-Making
Benefits of Diversity Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5
1. Women and minorities have different insights, opinions, and perspectives
that should be considered.
2. A diverse workforce portrays a firm committed to nondiscrimination.
3. A workforce that mirrors a customer base can help attract customers,
build customer loyalty, and design or offer products and services that
meet customer needs and wants.
4. A diverse workforce helps protect the firm against discrimination lawsuits.
5. Women and minorities represent a huge additional pool of qualified
applicants.
6. A diverse workforce strengthens a firm’s social responsibility and ethical
position.
Sums
Which Diamond Do You Like Best?
MINI-CASE 7 ON DE BEERS GROUP OF COMPANIES
DE BEERS SHIFTS ITS MARKET SEGMENTATION STRATEGY Headquartered in Johannesburg, South Africa, De Beers Group is the 130-year-old company that
specializes in diamond exploration, mining, retail, and trading. De Beers is partly if not mostly re-
sponsible for diamond rings being globally associated with engagement to marry. The company’s
motto is “A Diamond is Forever.” De Beers is shifting its market segmentation strategy to focus on
millennial consumers in response to generational shifts. Recognizing that millennials (76 million,
ages 18–34) now outnumber baby boomers (75 million, ages 51–69) in the United States, De Beers
wants to make sure diamonds appeal to this younger consumer segment. In the interview summarized
here (condensed and paraphrased), De Beers’ CFO Nimesh Patel, explains that marketing diamonds
to millennials will be critical to the future of De Beers. (Marketers refer to consumers ages 35 to 50 as
Generation X; they will outnumber Boomers by the year 2028).
E d R
o o n ey
/A la
m y S
to ck
P h o to
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 265
Q: What is your focus as CFO of De Beers since the firm has excellent finances?
A: Mining contributes 75 percent of our business, but it is the rest of the business that helps us drive
consumer demand and maintain the value of the mining business. It is helpful for consumers to
understand diamonds in order to maintain their affinity with the product.
Q: Why have you increased marketing spending and stepped up diamond advertising?
A: Our marketing spurs consumer demand through our downstream (retail store) business, For-
evermark and De Beers Diamonds Jewelers, and through our sale of rough diamonds to the
mid-stream industry. “Desirability” is what drives sales of luxury goods, and with increased
competition from other luxury-good categories (such as designer handbags and shoes), we use
advertising to drive desirability for diamonds. De Beers has 30 retail stores across Asia, the U.S.,
Europe, and the Middle East.
Q: How are you communicating the heritage of the De Beers brand to millennials?
A: We know that millennials have fewer real connections with people (despite more online/vir-
tual connections), and these connections are more difficult to sustain. A diamond symbolizes
a lasting, valuable relationship between two people; similarly, a diamond is rare, timeless, and
valuable.
Q: Millennials value experiences and goods with an interesting and authentic story; how are you
addressing this?
A: We know that buying diamonds is an experience. We talk to customers about where diamonds
are from, how they are formed, and all the good that diamond mining has done to boost local
economies in Namibia and Botswana, educating young girls, investing in clean water, and even
helping preserve the white rhino.
Q: What trends are you seeing in regards to women purchasing diamond jewelry for themselves?
A: De Beers Diamond Jeweler has tailored its offerings to the strong, independent, often career
woman; this is a growing consumer segment. Aside from diamond engagement rings, other
diamond jewelry including rings, necklaces, and bracelets are actually often self-purchased.
Many self-purchases come from unmarried women that comprise 43 percent of all women in
the U.S.
Q: How are you approaching e-commerce?
A: Digital platforms are a useful way to educate consumers on diamonds. With the significant value
tied to diamond jewelry, the experience of buying is important. People remember how, when,
where, and why they purchased a diamond, so we try hard to make the process great.
Questions
1. How do you think De Beers could most effectively and efficiently advertise to millennials?
2. How do you think De Beers could most effectively and efficiently advertise to baby boomers?
3. How do you think De Beers could most effectively and efficiently advertise to unmarried
women? How would this market segmentation strategy differ for targeting unmarried men?
Source: Based on Tatyana Shumsky, “The Tricky Task of Selling Diamonds to Millennials,” Wall Street Journal
(October 30, 2017): B7. Note: In 1947, De Beers introduced its iconic slogan “A Diamond is Forever” that conveys the
eternal promise of a diamond. See http://www.debeers.com/the-world-of-de-beers/about-de-beers/story
Web Resources 1. Organizational Chart Images This website provides
more than 100 free organizational chart images used by various organizations. https://www.google.com/search?q=organizational+chart+t emplate&tbm=isch&tbo=u&source=univ&sa=X&ved=0ah UKEwjG1rfNoaHYAhXjc98KHWX7AKoQsAQIeA&biw =1295&bih=720
2. Positioning Map Images This website provides more than 100 free perceptual maps used by various organizations. https://www.google.com/search?q=positioning+map+imag es&tbm=isch&tbo=u&source=univ&sa=X&ved=0ahUKE wiQvveooqHYAhWwlOAKHdDJAl8QsAQIKA&biw=12 95&bih=743
266 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
Current Readings Bennett, Victor M., and Daniel A. Levinthal. “Firm Lifecycles:
Linking Employee Incentives and Firm Growth
Dynamics.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 10
(October 2017): 2005–2018. Bos, Brenda, Dries Faems, and Florian Noseleit. “Alliance
Concentration in Multinational Companies: Examining Alliance Portfolios, Firm Structure, and Firm Performance.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 11 (November 2017): 2298–2309.
Bowers, Melissa R., Reggie J. Hall, and Mandyam M. Srinivasan. “Organizational Culture and Leadership Style: The Missing Combination for Selecting the Right Leader for Effective Crisis Management.” Business Horizons 60, Issue 4 (July 2017): 551–563.
Bromiley, Philip, Devaki Rau, and Yu Zhang. “Is R&D Risky?” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 4 (April 2017): 876–891.
Carnahan, Seth. “Blocked But Not Tackled: Who Founds New Firms When Rivals Dissolve?” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 11 (November 2017): 2189–2212.
Detjen, Jodi, and Sheila Simsarian Webber. “Strategic Shifts That Build Executive Leadership.” Business Horizons 60, no. 3 (May 2017): 335–343.
Girod, Stéphane J. G., and Richard Whittington. “Reconfiguration, Restructuring and Firm Performance: Dynamic Capabilities and Environmental Dynamism.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 5 (May 2017): 1121–1133.
Girod, Stéphane J. G., and Samina Karim. “Restructure or Reconfigure?” Harvard Business Review 95, no. 2 (March–April 2017): 128–132.
Han Jiang, Albert A. Cannella Jr., Jun Xia, and Matthew Semadeni. “Choose to Fight or Choose to Flee? A Network Embeddedness Perspective of Executive Ship Jumping in Declining Firms.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 10 (October 2017): 2061–2079.
Hill, Aaron D., Federico Aime, and Jason W. Ridge.”The Performance Implications of Resource and Pay Dispersion: The Case of Major League Baseball.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 9 (September 2017): 1935–1947.
Julian, Scott D., and Joseph C. Ofori-Dankwa. “Context Matters: Diversity’s Short- and Long-Term Effects in Fortune’s “Best Companies to Work For.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 7 (July 2017): 1557–1565.
Key, Thomas Martin, and Andrew J. Czaplewski. “Upstream Social Marketing Strategy: An Integrated Marketing Communications Approach.” Business Horizons 60, no. 3 (May 2017): 325–333.
Kim, Eun-Hee, and Yoo No Youm. “How Do Social Media Affect Analyst Stock Recommendations? Evidence from S&P 500 Electric Power Companies’ Twitter Accounts.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 13 (December 2017): 2599–2622.
Lee, Sunkee, and Phanish Puranam. “Incentive Redesign and Collaboration in Organizations: Evidence from a Natural Experiment.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 12 (December 2017): 2333–2552.
Lieberman, Marvin B., Gwendolyn K. Lee, and Timothy B. Folta. “Entry, Exit, and the Potential for Resource Redeployment.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 3 (March 2017): 526–544.
Lindsey-Mullikin, Joan, and Norm Borin, “Why Strategy Is Key for Successful Social Media Sales.” Business Horizons 60, no. 4 (July 2017): 473–448.
Lyngsie, Jacob, and Nicolai J. Foss. “The More, the Merrier? Women in Top-Management Teams and Entrepreneurship in Established Firms.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 3 (March 2017): 487–505.
Michelman, Paul. “The End of Corporate Culture As We Know It.” MIT Sloan Management Review 58, no. 4 (Summer 2017): 1.
Posner, Bruce. “Don’t Give Up on Corporate Culture.” MIT Sloan Management Review 58, no. 4 (Summer 2017): 96.
Seung-Hwan, Jeong, and David A. Harrison. “Glass Breaking, Strategy Making, and Value Creating: Meta-Analytic Outcomes of Women as CEOs and TMT Members.” Academy of Management Journal 60, no. 4 (August 2017): 1219–1252.
Shan, Liwei, Shihe Fu, and Lu Zheng. “Corporate Sexual Equality and Firm Performance.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 9 (September 2017): 1812–1826.
Stan, Mihaela, and Phanish Puranam. “Organizational Adaptation to Interdependence Shifts: The Role of Integrator Structures.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 5 (May 2017): 1041–1061.
Steinbach, Adam L., Tim R. Holcomb, R. Michael Holmes Jr., Cynthia E. Devers, and Albert A. Cannella Jr. “Top Management Team Incentive Heterogeneity, Strategic Investment Behavior, and Performance: A Contingency Theory of Incentive Alignment.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 8 (August 2017): 1701–1720.
Wang, Heli, Shan Zhao, and Guoli Chen. “Firm-Specific Knowledge Assets and Employment Arrangements: Evidence from CEO Compensation Design and CEO Dismissal.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 9 (September 2017): 1875–1894.
Werner, Timothy. “Investor Reaction to Covert Corporate Political Activity” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 12 (December 2017): 2424–2443.
Whitler, Kimberly A., Eric D. Boyd, and Neil A. Morgan. “The Criticality of CMO-CIO Alignment.” Business Horizons 60, no. 3 (May 2017): 313–324.
Wiedner, Rene, Michael Barrett, and Eivor Oborn. “The Emergence of Change in Unexpected Places: Resourcing Across Organizational Practices in Strategic Change.” Academy of Management Journal 60, no. 3 (June 2017): 823–854.
Endnotes 1. Dale McConkey, “Planning in a Changing Environment,”
Business Horizons (September–October 1988): 66.
2. A. G. Bedeian and W. F. Glueck, Management, 3rd ed.
(Chicago: Dryden, 1983), 212. Boris Yavitz and William
Newman, Strategy in Action: The Execution, Politics, and
Payoff of Business Planning (New York: The Free Press,
1982), 195.
3. Based on John Simons, “Employers Pull Plug on Remote
Work,” Wall Street Journal, July 26, 2017, B1.
4. E. H. Schein, “Three Cultures of Management: The Key to
Organizational Learning,” Sloan Management Review 38,
1 (1996): 9–20. Joann Lublin, “Chairman-CEO Split Gains
Allies,” Wall Street Journal, March 30, 2009, B4.
5. Sheila Riley, “The Dos and Don’ts of Poaching Workers,”
Investor’s Business Daily, March 31, 2014, A10.
6. T. Deal and A. Kennedy, “Culture: A New Look Through
Old Lenses,” Journal of Applied Behavioral Science 19,
no. 4 (1983): 498–504.
7. H. Ibsen, “The Wild Duck,” in O. G. Brochett and L.
Brochett (Eds.), Plays for the Theater (New York: Holt,
Rinehart and Winston, 1967); R. Pascale, “The Paradox
of ‘Corporate Culture’: Reconciling Ourselves to
Socialization,” California Management Review 28, no. 2
(1985): 26, 37–40.
8. T. Deal and A. Kennedy, Corporate Cultures: The Rites
and Rituals of Corporate Life (Reading, MA: Addison-
Wesley, 1982), 256.
9. Nancy Flynn and Lewis Maltby, “Should Companies
Monitor Their Employees’ Social Media?” Wall Street
Journal, May 12, 2014, R1.
10. Michael Sokol, ‘‘Worksite Wellness 2.0—Beyond Blood
Pressure and Cholesterol: A New Definition of Wellness,”
Fortune, January 1, 2017, 69. Also, based on Lauren
Weber, “Wellness Programs Pay Off, Study Says,” Wall
Street Journal, August 9, 2017, p. B5.
CHAPTER 7 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING ISSuES 267
268
8
Strategy Formulation
Feedback Loop
Strategy Implementation
Strategy Evaluation
Chapter 10: Business Ethics, Environmental Sustainability, and Social Responsibility
Chapter 11: Global and International Issues
Strategy Evaluation
and Governance Chapter 9
Implementing Strategies:
Finance and Accounting
Issues Chapter 8
Implementing Strategies:
Management and Marketing
Issues Chapter 7
Business Vision and
Mission Chapter 2
Strategies in Action Chapter 5
Strategy Analysis and
Choice Chapter 6
The Internal
Assessment Chapter 4
The External Assessment Chapter 3
FIGURE 8- 1
The Comprehensive, Integrative Strategic-Management Model
Source: Fred R. David, “How Companies Define Their Mission,” Long Range Planning 22, no. 1 (February 1989): 91. See also Anik Ratnaningsih, Nadjadji Anwar, Patdono Suwignjo, and Putu Artama Wiguna, “Balance Scorecard of David’s Strategic Modeling at Industrial Business for National Construction Contractor of Indonesia,” Journal of Mathematics and Technology , no. 4 (October 2010): 20.
269
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following:
8- 1. Determine an appropriate capital structure for the firm by performing EPS/EBIT analy- sis to compare the relative attractiveness of debt versus stock as a source of capital to implement strategies.
8- 2. Develop projected financial statements to reveal the impact of recommendations with associated costs.
8- 3. Determine the cash value of the firm, or a division of the firm, using four corporate evaluation methods.
8- 4. Discuss financial ratios, initial public offerings (IPOs), and issuing bonds as strategic decisions.
Implementing Strategies: Finance and Accounting Issues
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
The following exercises are found at the end of this chapter:
SET 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 8A: Perform an EPS/EBIT Analysis for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 8B: Prepare Projected Financial Statements for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 8C: Determine the Cash Value of Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 8D: Prepare Projected Financial Ratios for Coca-Cola
SET 2: Strategic Planning for My University
EXERCISE 8E: Determine the Cash Value of My University
SET 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability
EXERCISE 8F: Developing Personal Financial Statements
EXERCISE 8G: A Template Competency Test
SET 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
EXERCISE 8H: How Severe Are the Seven Limitations to EPS/EBIT Analysis?
MyLab Management
Improve Your Grade!
If your instructor is using MyLab Management, visit www.pearson.com/mylab/management
for videos, simulations, and writing exercises.
270 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
S trategies can be implemented successfully only when an organization manages its finances
effectively, as illustrated in Figure 8-1. This chapter examines important finance and ac-
counting topics associated with implementing strategies. An actual working example for
Procter & Gamble (P&G) is provided to illustrate and explain key finance and accounting topics.
A proposed set of P&G recommendations with associated costs is presented, followed by an
EPS/EBIT analysis to determine the most appropriate means for raising capital, projected finan-
cial statements to show the expected impact of those recommendations, and projected financial
ratios. Corporate valuation is discussed, too, because firms sometimes acquire other firms or
may be the target of an acquisition.
Strategy implementation generally impacts the lives of everyone in an organization; thus,
all employees need to buy in and support the firm’s efforts to succeed in the face of numerous
rival firms counterattacking. When employees understand the thinking that goes into strategy
formulation and understand their roles, they will be more inclined to accept the work required
for strategy implementation.
A football quarterback can call the best play possible in the huddle, but that does not
translate into the play going for a touchdown. The team may even lose yardage, illustrating the
importance of everyone working together to ensure the play is properly executed (implemented)
well. Headquartered in New York City, JPMorgan Chase is implementing strategies especially
well, led by its exemplary strategist, Jamie Dimon. Dimon is an advocate of involving multiple
people in the decision-making process.
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED
Jamie Dimon, CEO JPMorgan Chase Jamie Dimon is widely considered one of the world’s preeminent
CEOs. His company, JPMorgan Chase, reported record profits in 6 of
the last 7 years dating from 2010 to 2016 despite operating during a
period of heightened regulatory and legally challenging environments.
Previously CEO of Bank One, Dimon is routinely heard discussing issues
facing the financial industry, but two key strategic issues he consis-
tently mentions are applicable to firms in all industries: (1) the impor-
tance of involving others in decision making and (2) the importance of
economies of scale.
On the importance of people learning to work together, Dimon
claims that successful strategic planning has more to do with heart than
mind. This means recognize people, admit you do not have all the an-
swers, value others’ expertise and experiences, provide people a platform
to contribute, applaud people for their contributions, and basically let
people know you care. Dimon says to avoid finger-pointing and scape-
goating and focus on improved relations and collaboration. He contends
that most business decisions lead to better outcomes after detailed
analyses are performed and multiple people from various departments
(finance, management information system (MIS), accounting, marketing,
and others) are involved in the decision-making process.
Dimon is also an advocate for economies of scale, arguing that
growth for the sake of growth is a misguided strategy. He suggests
firms should be careful not to venture into areas outside their corporate
strategy and instead deploy resources into areas that will build econo-
mies of scale because this is often more advantageous to customers,
shareholders, and ultimately for the entire economy. Dimon even has
joked before that without economies of scale, we might still be living in
tents and hunting for our own food—revealing just how important he
considers striving for economies of scale for all business across various
industries.
JPMorgan Chase is one of Fortune’s most admired companies, led
by Dimon, and one of this book’s most admired strategists, especially in
the finance and accounting world of business.
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
Dimon Manages Dollars Really Well.
C re
at e
jo b s
5 1 /S
h u tt
er st
o ck
CHAPTER 8 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: FINANCE AND ACCOuNTING ISSuES 271
A sampling of issues that may require finance and accounting policies, decisions, analyses,
and actions in implementing strategies include the following:
1. To raise capital with short- or long-term debt, a bond issuance, divestiture, or a preferred or
common stock issuance
2. To lease or buy fixed assets
3. To determine an appropriate dividend payout ratio
4. To use last-in-first-out (LIFO), first-in-first-out (FIFO), or a market-value accounting
approach
5. To extend the time of accounts receivable or not
6. To establish a certain percentage discount on accounts within a specified period of time
7. To determine the amount of cash to be kept on hand
8. To purchase additional treasury stock or not
9. To determine whether to accept a merger offer
10. To determine how much to ask (or pay) for a division of the firm to be divested
Five especially important finance and accounting activities central to strategy implementa-
tion are listed and discussed sequentially in this chapter:
1. Determine capital structure: acquire needed capital to implement strategies; perform EPS/
EBIT analysis.
2. Develop projected financial statements: show expected impact of recommendations.
3. Perform corporate valuation: in the event an offer is received or a rival firm is to be
acquired.
4. Analyze financial ratios.
5. Manage initial public offerings (IPOs), cash levels, and corporate bonds
Capital Structure After developing a set of recommendations with associated costs (as explained in the prior chap-
ter), a firm must determine the most profitable means for raising needed capital. Occasionally
cash on hand can finance small projects, but much of the cash on a firm’s balance sheet may
not be readily accessible without incurring taxes depending on what country the cash resides.
Another way to raise the capital for new projects is to divest existing businesses. Jack Welsh,
the former CEO of General Electric, was famous for divesting any business that was not first or
second in its industry. P&G recently divested more than one hundred underperforming brands to
cut costs, raise capital, and shift focus from underperforming brands into the firm’s core compe-
tencies. Annual net income is also available for implementing strategies, but usually all debt, all
stock, or some combination of debt and stock is necessary to implement a set of recommenda-
tions. The proportion of debt to equity on a balance sheet is often referred to as a firm’s capital
structure; performing an EPS/EBIT analysis is a common way to determine the appropriate
capital structure needed.
Before explaining EPS/EBIT analysis, let’s be clear on some accounting terms as follows:
1. EPS is earnings per share, which is net income divided by number of shares outstanding.
2. EBIT is earnings before interest and taxes, or as it is sometimes called, operating income.
3. Shares outstanding is similar to shares issued except shares issued also includes shares of
stock that a firm has repurchased (treasury stock). The denominator of EPS is shares out-
standing; this number is reduced when a firm repurchases a portion of its own stock, thus
increasing the overall EPS value. Most large firms have treasury stock, but some do not,
such as Starbucks Corporation.
4. Shares authorized are the number of shares a firm has approval to issue in total, normally
considerably more than the number of shares outstanding.
5. EBT is earnings before tax; EAT is earnings after tax. Another term for earnings is profits
or net income.
LO 8.1
272 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
Successful strategy implementation often requires additional capital beyond net income from
operations or the sale of assets. Two primary sources of capital are debt and equity. Determining an
appropriate mix of debt and equity in a firm’s capital structure is an important strategy-implementation
decision. EPS/EBIT analysis is a widely used technique for determining whether debt, stock,
or a combination of the two is the best alternative for raising capital to implement strategies.
This technique involves an examination of the impact that debt versus stock financing has on EPS
under various expectations for EBIT, given specific recommendations (strategies to be implemented).
Theoretically, an enterprise should carry enough debt in its capital structure to boost its return
on investment in projects earning more than the cost of the debt. In low-earning periods, excessive
debt in the capital structure of an organization can endanger stockholders’ returns and jeopardize
company survival. Fixed debt obligations must be met, regardless of circumstances, to avoid default.
Avoiding debt obligations however does not automatically make financing through equity a more at-
tractive means for raising capital. When the cost of capital (interest rates) is low, debt may be better
than stock to obtain capital, but the analysis still must be performed because high stock prices usually
accompany low interest rates, making stock issuances attractive for obtaining capital. Some special
concerns with stock issuances include dilution of ownership, increased takeover risk, effect on stock
price, the need to pay dividends on the additional shares if the firm pays dividends, and lower EPS.
EPS is perhaps the best measure of success of a company, so it is widely used in making the
capital acquisition decision. EPS reflects the common “maximizing shareholders’ wealth” over-
arching corporate objective, in contrast to maximizing profits in the short run. If profit maximi-
zation is the primary objective of the firm, then in performing an EPS/EBIT analysis, you may
focus more on the EAT rather than EPS.
EPS/EBIT Analysis: Steps to Complete
There are four steps to complete in performing EPS/EBIT analysis:
Step 1: Gather the Input Data Needed; Determine the Following Numbers:
a. The dollar amount in capital the firm needs to raise = the total associated costs
of recommendations
b. Number of shares outstanding; usually given on a firm’s balance sheet
c. Interest rate (%) that funds can be borrowed (use 3 to 5 percent)
d. Tax rate (%) the firm is paying (calculated from a firm’s income statement; i.e.,
taxes or provision for taxes divided by EBT. (Note: in 2018 the US corporate
tax rate changed to 21 percent).
e. The dollar amount of EBIT range; use the most recent year EBIT number plus
or minus the impact of recommendations to determine a range; select a low,
medium, and high dollar amount of EBIT to simulate pessimistic, realistic, and
optimistic values for the year ahead.
Step 2: Set Up a Computation Table as Follows
All Stock Financing All-Debt Financing 50-50 Stock-Debt Financing
Pessimistic Realistic Optimistic Pessimistic Realistic Optimistic Pessimistic Realistic Optimistic
$ EBIT
$ Interest
$ EBT
$ Taxes
$ EAT
# Shares Issued
$ EPS
Step 3: Insert Numbers in the Table Following These Row-by-Row Steps/Guidelines
a. For the $ EBIT row, select a pessimistic (low), realistic (medium), and optimistic
(high) $ amount for EBIT based on the previous year EBIT plus what you
CHAPTER 8 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: FINANCE AND ACCOuNTING ISSuES 273
expect your recommendations to yield; use large ranges to get variation; place
these three $ EBIT numbers across the EBIT row under each capital structure
scenario; thus place the three numbers three times across that first row.
b. For the $ Interest row, in the three All-Stock columns, place zeros because
no new interest will be paid if the firm elects to use the All-Stock approach.
In the interest row for the All-Debt columns, multiply the $ capital needed
times the interest rate and place the resultant amount in the three All-Debt
columns. Similarly, in the 50-50 Combo columns, multiply the $ capital
needed (50% of total) times the interest rate and place the resultant amount
in the 50-50 Combo columns. (Note: Change the percentage if using a differ-
ent combination such as 70-30 stock-debt).
c. For the $ EBT row, subtract row 2 from row 1, in each respective column.
d. For the $ Taxes row, multiply row 3 by the tax percentage, in each respective
column.
e. For the $ EAT row, subtract row 4 from row 3, in each respective column.
f. For the # Shares Issued row, in the three All-Stock columns, divide the $ capital
needed by the stock price and add that number to the existing number of shares
outstanding and place the resultant number in the All-Stock columns. In the
three All-Debt columns, simply place the existing number of shares outstanding
number because no new shares are being added. In the three 50-50 Combo
columns, multiply the $ capital needed by 50 percent; then divide this number
by the stock price and add the resultant number to the existing number of
shares outstanding to determine the number in the 50-50 Combo columns.
(Note: Change the percentage if using a different mix of stock versus debt.)
g. For the $ EPS row, divide row 5 by row 6, in each respective column. Take
notice of which EPS values are highest along the row for each capital structure
scenario. The highest EPS values reveal the best financing decision. If the EPS
values are the same or nearly the same across the bottom row for the same level
of EBIT, then the amount of funds raised may be too low to reveal significant
differences based on the current interest rates or stock price, or the EBIT range
may be too narrow. If you are recommending strategies that require high capital
requirements, there should be differences in EPS values between All-Debt and
All-Stock for the same level of EBIT.
Step 4: Graph Your EPS/EBIT Analysis
Simply place the top row ($ EBIT) on the x-axis and place the bottom row ($ EPS)
on the y-axis. Then, plot three resultant lines for All-Stock, All-Debt, and 50-50
Stock-Debt Combo, respectively. The highest line in the graph reveals the highest
EPS that maximizes shareholder value; select this highest EPS financing option
unless you have a compelling reason(s) to overturn this decision as per limitations
of this analysis discussed in Table 8-3.
EPS/EBIT Analysis: An Example
Perhaps the best way to explain EPS/EBIT analysis is by working through an example for P&G,
examining the All-Stock, All-Debt, and 60-40 Stock-Debt Combo financing alternatives. Following
Steps 1 to 3, the needed input data and computations are given in Tables 8-1 and 8-2, respectively.
TABLE 8-1 P&G Input Data Needed for EPS/EBIT Analysis
P&G Input Data The Number
$ Amount of Capital Needed $5,000 million
EBIT Range $10,000 to $18,000 million
Interest Rate 5%
Tax Rate 23%
Stock Price $94.17
# Shares Outstanding 2,550 million
274 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
E P S
($ ) CSF
CF
CSF = Common Stock Financing DF = Debt Financing CF = Combo Financing
DF5.36
5.34
5.32
2.96
2.95
2.94
$10,000 $15,000 $18,000
EBIT (in millions)
FIGURE 8-2
P&G’s EPS/EBIT Chart
TABLE 8-2 P&G Computations in Performing EPS/EBIT Analysis (in millions, except the EPS row)
Common Stock Financing Debt Financing
Pessimistic Realistic Optimistic Pessimistic Realistic Optimistic
EBIT $10,000 $15,000 $18,000 $10,000 $15,000 $18,000
Interest 0 0 0 250 250 250
EBT 10,000 15,000 18,000 9,750 14,750 17,750
Taxes 2,300 3,450 4,140 2,243 3,393 4,083
EAT 7,700 11,550 13,860 7,508 11,358 13,668
#Shares 2,603 2,603 2,603 2,550 2,550 2,550
EPS $2.96 $4.44 $5.32 $2.94 $4.45 $5.36
Stock 60% Debt 40%
Pessimistic Realistic Optimistic
EBIT $10,000 $15,000 $18,000
Interest 100 100 100
EBT 9,900 14,900 17,900
Taxes 2,277 3,427 4,117
EAT 7,623 11,473 13,783
#Shares 2,582 2,582 2,582
EPS $2.95 $4.44 $5.34
Note when EBIT is forecasted as pessimistic, then equity financing is more attractive than
debt financing, as indicated by the EPS value of $2.96 compared to the debt financing EPS
value of $2.94. However, as the economy or projected EBIT improves, All-Debt financing will
maximize P&G’s EPS, as revealed by a $5.36 EPS for All Debt versus a $5.32 EPS for All-Stock
financing. Our conclusion is that P&G should use stock to raise capital under the pessimistic
forecast, but if the economy is forecasted to be realistic or optimistic, then debt is the most at-
tractive financing alternative.
Following Step 4, a graph of the P&G EPS/EBIT analysis is given in Figure 8-2. The in-
tersection points near the $15,000 level of EBIT are break-even points where one method of
financing becomes more attractive than another. Note at the $10,000 level of EBIT, All-Stock
yields the highest EPS, and at the $18,000 level, All-Debt financing yields the highest EPS. So,
the analyst is faced with a decision regarding what to recommend based on his or her confidence
levels for the EBIT ranges and the limitations discussed in Table 8-3.
CHAPTER 8 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: FINANCE AND ACCOuNTING ISSuES 275
Be mindful that large companies may have millions of shares outstanding, so even small
differences in EPS across different financing options, such as in this example, can equate to
large sums of money gained by using that highest EPS value alternative. For example, P&G
has 2,550 million shares outstanding, so the $0.04 difference you see in EPS at the $18,000
level translates into 2,550 × 0.04 = $102 million in potential monies that P&G would have if
the firm uses debt financing (DF) over common stock financing (CSF) at the $18,000 level
of EBIT.
Any number of combination stock/debt (S/D) scenarios, such as 70/30 S/D or 30/70 S/D,
may be examined in an EPS/EBIT analysis to determine expected EPS values. The free Excel
template at www.strategyclub.com enables easy calculation of various financing options.
EPS/EBIT Analysis: Limitations
All analytical tools have limitations, including EPS/EBIT analysis. But unless you have a com-
pelling reason to overturn the highest last row EPS values dictating the best financing option,
then indeed those highest values along the bottom row should dictate the financing decision
because EPS is an excellent measure of organizational performance, and thus is an excellent
variable to examine in deciding which financing option to use. EPS/EBIT analysis itself does not
alert the analyst of potential limitations discussed in Table 8-3.
Projected Financial Statements Projected financial statements are income statements and balance sheets developed for
future years to forecast the potential impacts of various recommendations proposed for imple-
mentation. Recall from Chapter 6 that all recommendations carry with them an estimated cost
value. Most financial institutions require 3 years of projected financial statements whenever
a business seeks capital. On financial statements, different companies use different terms for
various items. For example, revenues or sales can refer to the same item; net income, earn-
ings, or profits can refer to the same item; capital surplus or paid-in-capital can refer to the
same item. A term sometimes used for retained earnings is accumulated equity or (if losses)
accumulated deficit.
LO 8.2
TABLE 8-3 Limitations/Considerations Associated with EPS/EBIT Analysis
1. Flexibility. As a firm’s capital structure changes, so does its flexibility for considering
future capital needs. Using all debt or all stock to raise capital today may impose fixed
obligations, restrictive covenants, or other constraints tomorrow that could reduce or
enhance a firm’s ability to raise additional capital.
2. Dilution of Ownership. When additional stock is issued to finance strategy imple-
mentation, ownership and control of the enterprise are diluted. This can be a serious
concern in today’s business environment of hostile takeovers, mergers, and acquisitions.
If dilution of ownership is a concern, then debt could be more attractive than stock, even
if EPS values are higher with stock.
3. Timing. If interest rates are expected to rise, then debt may be more attractive than
stock (assuming a fixed rate is locked in), even if EPS values are higher with stock. In
times of high stock prices, stock may more attractive than debt.
4. Leveraged Situation. If the firm is currently too highly leveraged versus industry av-
erage ratios, then financing through stock may be more attractive than debt, even if EPS
values are higher for debt.
5. Continuity. The analysis assumes stock price, tax rate, and interest rates stay constant
across pessimistic, realistic, and optimistic conditions.
6. EBIT Ranges. The EBIT values are estimated based on the prior year, plus the impact
of strategies to be implemented.
7. Dividends. If EPS values are highest for all stock, and if the firm pays dividends, then
more funds will leave the firm as per dividends if all-stock financing is selected.
276 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
The Free Excel Strategic Planning Template at www.strategyclub.com
Many practitioners and students of strategic planning use the template to develop existing and
projected financial statements to reveal the expected impact of proposed recommendations for
the firm. Do not expect the template to do the thinking for you in terms of projecting each row
on both the income statements and balance sheets. The template does the calculating for you but
you must supply the thinking regarding the amount to alter each row given the expected impact
of your recommendations. For anyone using the template to develop actual and projected finan-
cial statements, Table 8-4 provides author comments.
TABLE 8-4 Template Considerations in Developing Financial Statements
Almost every row of the template’s projected financial statements is to be forecasted by the user to reveal the expected impact of his or her rec-
ommendations for the firm. However, a few rows in the template’s projected statements are automatically calculated (rather than forecasted) as
discussed below.
1. Make Conversion. Convert (enter) your firm’s most recent Form 10K actual income statements and balance sheets into the template-
formatted statements. Doing this will greatly facilitate development of projected financial statements and ratios. In making this conver-
sion, use the nonrecurring events row to house extraneous items on the income statements; on the balance sheets, use the other current
or long-term assets, the other current or long-term liabilities rows.
2. Income Statements. Use the nonrecurring events row to adjust for divesting a division or any other extraneous events in order for your
firm’s Form 10K revenues, cost of goods sold, operating expenses, and net income to match perfectly with the template statement. If
having an issue with EBIT perfectly matching the Form 10K, simply subtract EBIT from Gross Profit on the Form 10K and enter this
number for Operating Expenses. This procedure will ensure your template EBIT matches the EBIT from your firm’s Form 10K because
sometimes the Operating Expenses line is difficult to transfer over perfectly; it is okay if your template Operating Expenses do not per-
fectly match the Form 10K as long as EBIT does. Net income is automatically calculated from your other income statement forecasts, so
the net income row is not forecasted.
3. Retained Earnings (RE) Row. The RE row on the template projected balance sheets is automatically calculated because the RE row is
determined by carrying over the net income less dividends annually from the income statement to the RE row near the bottom of the
balance sheet.
4. Balance Sheets. Work row-by-row from the bottom to the top making changes as needed to reflect the impact of your recommendations
on each row. Leave forecasted items and rows the same as the prior year if you expect no change in that row given your recommenda-
tions. The template has a note to the right of each row to aid in how to enter the numbers. Get the total liabilities plus stockholders’
equity number, then transfer that number to the total assets row, and then move further upward towards the cash row forecasting each
item/row given your recommendations.
5. Cash. The template uses the balance sheet cash row as a plug figure to make the projected balance sheet balance, so this row is auto-
matically calculated. Often the cash figure will be abnormally high after forecasting all other rows; in this situation make appropriate
adjustments in the liability or equity sections, usually using the long-term-debt or paid-in-capital rows, to offset the amount you increase
or decrease the cash row to keep liquidity in line with industry averages. Making adjustments, even to other items on the balance sheet,
is good practice and routinely done by all accountants, so do not feel you are cheating the system until you get the numbers reasonable.
Projected statements are a good-faith estimate, and a high cash figure only indicates other estimates need to be reconsidered. Also,
check for typos or miscalculations on both the projected income statement and balance sheet. For example, it is possible you are over- or
underestimating the 1) revenue impacts of your recommendations or 2) the amount of capital you need to implement your recommenda-
tions. Also, experiment with adjusting the historical percentages on both asset and liability items such as accounts payable or accounts
receivable; it is possible the historical number needs to be increased on asset line items or decreased on liability items if the firm is oper-
ating more efficiently, and the result will bring cash down. Also, double check plant property and equipment because a high cash figure
may indicate you are underestimating how much these assets will cost. Once you make one change, revaluate the cash figure on the new
projected balance sheet and continue until you find the cash number reasonable. Accountants do this all the time, striving for excellent,
reasonable, truthful projected statements. Ethics Capsule 8 and Global Capsule 8 address the truthfulness or reasonableness aspect of
projected financial statements.
6. Financial Ratios. The template will automatically calculate actual and forecasted financial ratios once income statement and balance
sheet data are entered. When compared to prior years and industry averages, financial ratios provide valuable insights for implementing
strategies. (Financial ratios were discussed in Chapter 4.)
CHAPTER 8 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: FINANCE AND ACCOuNTING ISSuES 277
ETHICS CAPSULE 8
Projected Financial Statement Manipulation Investors, sharehold-
ers, and others need
to know that top
executives can legally
manipulate financial
statements to inflate or
deflate expected results,
and they often do. Firms
may inflate or present
an overly rosy picture
of projected financial
statements to garner support from a wide range of constituencies for a
variety of reasons. But you may wonder why would executives present
a deflated or unfavorable picture of the future? Reasons to deflate
include (1) to discourage potential acquirers or (2) to load bad financial
information into a particular accounting period so that periods beyond
will look better. In the famous book Financial Shenanigans (2002) by
Dr. Howard Schilit, five ways are discussed in which top executives ma-
nipulate financial statements, as follows:
1. Record revenue prematurely.
2. Record fictitious revenue.
3. Increase net income with one-time gains.
4. Shift current expenses to an earlier or later period.
5. Failure to record certain liabilities.
The Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) has taken steps
to curtail projected financial statement manipulation, but this re-
mains an ethical issue in corporate America (and globally).
Source: https://www.investopedia.com/articles/fundamental-analysis/ financial-
statement-manipulation.asp, Also, http://www.understand- accounting
.net/TheReliabilityandAccuracyoffinancialstatements.html
How Realistic Are These Numbers?
GLOBAL CAPSULE 8
The Least (and Most) Corrupt Countries in the World for Doing Business
As a part of its Global Coalition Against Corruption, Transparency
International publishes annual corruption-perception indices that
rank countries according to their relative corruption levels. The 2016
corruption-perception scores averaged 43, and more than two-thirds
of the 176 included countries fell below the midpoint of 50 (0 = very
corrupt; unethical; 100 = very clean; ethical). Highly ranked coun-
tries avoid the most obvious forms of corruption that negatively im-
pact the daily lives of its citizens; whereas, lower-ranked countries
are plagued by corruption because laws are frequently ignored and
citizens often face bribery, extortion, or other corrupt experiences.
Table 8-5 shows the rankings of the top 20 (least corrupt) countries,
as well as the bottom 10 (most corrupt) countries.
New Zealand Is a Winner
TABLE 8-5 Corruption-Perception Indices (2016)
2016 Rank Country 2016 Score
1 Denmark 90 1 New Zealand 90 3 Finland 89 4 Sweden 88 5 Switzerland 86 6 Norway 85 7 Singapore 84 8 Netherlands 83 9 Canada 82
10 Germany 81 10 Luxembourg 81 10 United Kingdom 81 13 Australia 79 14 Iceland 78 15 Belgium 77 15 Hong Kong 77 17 Austria 75 18 United States 74 19 Ireland 73 20 Japan 72
166 Venezuela 17 168 Guinea-Bissau 16 169 Afghanistan 15 170 Libya 14 170 Sudan 14 170 Yemen 14 173 Syria 13 174 Korea (North) 12 175 South Sudan 11 176 Somalia 10
Source: Based on information at https://www.transparency.org/ news/feature/corruption_perceptions_index_2016
C as
p er
1 7 7 4 S
tu d io
/
S h u tt
er st
o ck
R u sl
an O
li n ch
u k /1
2 3 R
F
278 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
Steps to Develop Projected Financial Statements Whether you use the free, Excel strategic-planning template, projected financial statement
analysis can be explained in seven steps:
Step 1. Prepare the projected income statement before the balance sheet. Start by
forecasting sales (revenues) as accurately as possible to reveal the expected
impact of recommendations being implemented. In forecasting revenues, do
not blindly push historical revenue growth percentages into the future without
considering ventures the firm undertook in prior years to achieve those results.
What a firm did previously to achieve those past sales increases may or may
not be appropriate for the future, depending on whether your recommendations
take similar or analogous actions (e.g., such as opening a similar number of
stores). If dealing with a manufacturing firm, also be mindful that if the firm is
operating at 100 percent capacity running three 8-hour shifts per day, then prob-
ably new manufacturing facilities (land, plant, and equipment) will be needed
to increase sales further.
Step 2. Use the percentage-of-sales method to project cost of goods sold (COGS) and the
Operating Expenses in the income statement. For example, if COGS is 50 percent
of sales in the prior year (as it is in Table 8-5), then use a similar percentage to
calculate COGS in the future year—unless there is a reason to use a different per-
centage. Items such as interest, dividends, and taxes must be treated independently
and cannot be forecasted using the percentage-of-sales method.
Step 3. Calculate the projected net income (NI).
Step 4. Subtract from the NI any dividends to be paid. The remaining NI is retained earn-
ings (RE). Bring the RE amount over to the balance sheet by adding it to the prior
year’s RE amount on the balance sheet. In other words, every year, a firm adds its
RE (which is NI – Dividends for that particular year) to its historical RE total on
the balance sheet. Therefore, the RE amount on the balance sheet is a cumulative
number rather than money available for strategy implementation. Note that RE is
the first projected balance sheet item to be entered. As a result of this accounting
procedure in developing projected financial statements, the RE amount on the
balance sheet is usually a large number; it is a cumulative number of dollars rein-
vested into the company over many years; it is not cash in the bank; it can be a low
or even negative number if the firm has been incurring losses or paying dividends
that exceed NI. In fact, the most common ways for RE to decrease from one year
to the next on the balance sheet is (1) if the firm incurred an earnings loss that year
or (2) the firm had positive NI for the year but paid out dividends in excess of the
net income. Be mindful that RE is the key link between a projected income state-
ment and projected balance sheet, so be careful to make this calculation correctly.
Step 5. Project the balance sheet items working from the bottom to the top; begin with the
RE row; if using the template, the RE number is calculated automatically based on
the amount of dividends paid; then forecast the remaining equity items, followed
by forecasting the long-term liabilities, current liabilities, long-term assets, and
current assets (in that order), working from the bottom to the top.
Step 6. Use cash as the plug figure—that is, project every line item on the projected
balance except cash (and RE); use the cash account to make the assets equal to
the sum of the liabilities and shareholders’ equity. Then make appropriate adjust-
ments. For example, if the cash needed to balance the statements is too small
(or too large), considering making appropriate changes to borrow more (or less)
money than planned and reevaluate line items such as inventory, accounts receiv-
able, plant property and equipment and/or other asset lines. For example, if cash
is too high, (1) consider paying off some long-term debt; (2) reevaluate the pro-
jected percentage increase of various liabilities because it is possible the firm may
be operating more efficiently or have greater economies of scale, or (3) increase
your treasury stock. Rarely is the cash account number perfect on the first pass-
through, so adjustments are needed and made.
CHAPTER 8 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: FINANCE AND ACCOuNTING ISSuES 279
Step 7. List commentary or notes below the projected statements to clarify for the reader
why significant changes were made on particular items or rows in one year versus
the next. Notes are essential for a reader to understand the changes made on certain
rows. The template does not prepare notes because notes reflect your thinking re-
garding the impact of your recommendations and your associated costs.
Nonprofit Organizations
The steps outlined for preparing projected financial statements apply equally to nonprofit or-
ganizations; prepare the projected income statements first then the projected balance sheets.
Since nonprofits never pay dividends, simply add the nonprofit’s net income (usually called Net
Assets) to their balance sheet retained earnings row (usually called Net Assets). If the cash ac-
count is too high or too low, just make adjustments as needed to the nonprofit’s assets or liabili-
ties sections of the balance sheets, since there is no equity section (except for Net Assets). So,
the projected financial statement steps/process (and template steps/process) is equally applicable
for both for-profit firms and nonprofit organizations. Of course, taxes paid by nonprofits is zero,
and there is zero paid-in-capital, treasury stock, and common stock.
P&G’s Actual Financial Statements
To further explain projected financial statement analysis, let’s work through an actual example for
P&G. P&G’s actual income statement and balance sheets for 2016 and 2017 are given in Table 8- 6
and Table 8-7, respectively. Notice that P&G’s actual Form 10K statements are converted or
condensed into the “template format.” (Note: About 95% percent of all strategic-management
students using this textbook, as well as thousands of corporate practitioners, use this template for
doing strategic planning and developing projected financial statements; if you use it put on your
resume that you “gained experience using strategic-planning software.”)
Notice in Tables 8-6 and 8-7 that P&G’s actual Form 10K revenues declined in 2017 and
their current ratio (current assets divided by current liabilities) was less than 1.0. Thus, let’s pro-
pose that P&G go forward with the following four recommendations with associated costs and
comments; then we follow the impact of the costs on the firm’s projected financial statements:
1. Five new plants will be built in each of the three forecasted years (2018, 2019, 2020) at
$250 million each ($1,250 million per year attributed to plant, property, and equipment)
with adjustments to long-term debt and paid in capital, as described in # 4 below.
2. Raise an additional $1,250 million to finance research and development (R&D) and new
advertising. The total amount of capital being raised is $5 billion.
TABLE 8-6 P&G’s Actual Income Statements for 2016–2017 (in millions)
Income Statement 6/30/16 6/30/17 Percent Change
Revenues $65,299 $65,058 -0.37%
Cost of Goods Sold 32,909 32,535 -1.14%
Gross Profit 32,390 32,523 0.41%
Operating Expenses 18,442 18,801 1.95%
EBIT 13,948 13,722 -1.62%
Interest Expense 579 465 -19.69%
EBT 13,369 13,257 -0.84%
Tax 3,342 3,063 -8.35%
Non-Recurring Events 481 5,132 966.94%
Net Income 10,508 15,326 45.85%
280 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
3. Increase dividends by 1 percent in each of the 3 forecasted years (these funds are derived
from net income so no need to raise additional capital for them).
4. Forty percent of the capital needed will be financed through debt ($2,000 million) in pro-
jected year 2018 and 60 percent ($3,000) through equity in projected year 2019. Note
$2,000 + $3,000 = $5,000, which is the total cost of recommendations not considering
dividends.
Note on P&G’s actual income statements in Table 8-6 the large increase in nonrecurring
events in 2017; this change was because of the company divesting various businesses to stream-
line the firm and better align its activities with its mission. Divestitures explain much of the large
increase in P&G net income for fiscal 2017 and the large increase in retained earnings on the
balance sheet. Without further similar divestitures moving forward, net income will decline the
following year, whereas revenues actually increase. This example illustrates the importance of
studying the Annual Report to determine what likely caused the changes in the current financial
statements; then carefully consider how your recommendations will impact the projected state-
ments. Simply pushing forward historical numbers on every line item is a common mistake in
projected financial statement development.
Note on P&G’s actual balance sheets in Table 8-7 the $11.5 billion increase in trea-
sury stock from 2016 to 2017, indicating substantial stock buybacks by P&G. Lately, many
TABLE 8-7 P&G’s Actual Balance Sheets for Fiscal 2016 and 2017 (in millions)
Balance Sheet 6/30/16 6/30/17 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Equivalents $7,102 $5,569 -22%
Accounts Receivable 5,880 4,594 -22%
lnventory 4,716 4,624 -2%
Other Current Assets 16,084 11,707 -27%
Total Current Assets 33,782 26,494 -22%
Property Plant & Equipment 19,385 19,893 3%
Goodwill 44,350 44,699 1%
Intangibles 24,527 24,187 -1%
Other Long-Term Assets 5,092 5,133 1%
Total Assets 127,136 120,406 -5%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 16,774 16,656 -1%
Other Current Liabilities 13,996 13,554 -3%
Total Current Liabilities 30,770 30,210 -2%
Long-Term Debt 18,945 18,038 -5%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 19,438 16,380 -16%
Total Liabilities 69,153 64,628 -7%
Equity
Common Stock 4,009 4,009 0%
Retained Earnings 87,953 96,124 9%
Treasury Stock (82,176) (93,715) 14%
Paid in Capital & Other 48,197 49,360 2%
Total Equity 57,983 55,778 -4%
Total Liabilities and Equity $127,136 $120,406 -5%
CHAPTER 8 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: FINANCE AND ACCOuNTING ISSuES 281
companies have been aggressively buying their own stock, reflecting optimism about their
future. However, some analysts argue that stock buybacks eat cash that a firm could better use
to grow the firm. Stock buybacks do however reduce a firm’s number of shares outstanding,
thus increasing EPS; so firms reap this “intangible benefit” with stock buybacks. Sometimes
firms will even increase their Treasury Stock near the end of the quarter, or near the end of the
year, to “artificially” inflate their EPS to meet/beat EPS projections to perhaps avoid a stock
price decline. This may be why Home Depot, in 2017–2018, bought back $15 billion of its
stock, Honeywell bought $8 billion of its shares, Bank of America bought back $17 billion
in stock, Mastercard repurchased $4 billion of its common shares, and T-Mobile began a $1.5
billion buyback.
Note on P&G’s actual balance sheets in Table 8-7 that more than 50 percent of total assets
are in the form of goodwill and intangibles; some financial experts suggest these items to be
simply “smoke” because they are not physical assets that can easily be transferred into cash.
P&G’s history of acquiring firms for over book value (market capitalization value) is the reason
for the firm’s large goodwill values.
P&G’s Projected Financial Statements
Table 8-8 and Table 8-9 reveal P&G’s projected income statements and balance sheets, re-
spectively, given the four recommendations with associated costs listed previously and the
annual retained earnings carried forward to the projected balance sheet. Note, on the projected
income statement in Table 8-8 both projected revenues and net income are increasing, but
projected net income is down significantly from the prior year, largely because (as mentioned)
there are no major divestitures (recorded as nonrecurring events on the income statement) in
any projected years.
TABLE 8-8 P&G’s Projected Income Statements for 2018, 2019, and 2020 (in millions)
Projected Income Statement 6/30/18 6/30/19 6/30/20
Revenues $66,359 $68,350 $72,451
Cost of Goods Sold 33,180 34,175 36,225
Gross Profit 33,180 34,175 36,225
Operating Expenses 20,571 21,188 22,460
EBIT 12,608 12,986 13,766
Interest Expense 565 562 559
EBT 12,043 12,424 13,207
Tax 2,770 2,858 3,302
Non-Recurring Events 0 0 0
Net Income $9,273 $9,567 $9,905
TABLE 8-9 P&G’s Projected Balanced Sheets for 2018, 2019, and 2020 (in millions)
Projected Balance Sheet 12/31/15 12/31/17 12/31/18
Assets
Cash and Equivalents $3,015 $7,409 $9,552
Accounts Receivable 4,645 4,784 5,072
lnventory 4,645 4,784 5,072
Other Current Assets 11,945 12,303 13,041
Total Current Assets 24,250 29,281 32,736
(continued)
282 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
Note on the projected balance sheets in Table 8-9, the increase in long-term debt from
fiscal 2017 to fiscal projected 2018 indicating the proportion (40 percent) of debt financ-
ing based on the recommendations along with the increase in paid-in-capital from fiscal
projected 2018 to fiscal projected 2019 representing the proportion (60 percent) of common
stock financing per our recommendations. Table 8-10 provides author comments regarding
the projected income statement and balance sheet changes to reveal rationales for various
changes in the statements.
TABLE 8-10 Author Comments Regarding P&G’s Financial Statements (in millions of USD)
Projected Income Statement Comments Fiscal 2018 Fiscal 2019 Fiscal 2020
Revenues Revenues were flat from fiscal 2016 to
fiscal 2017 partly due to significant dives-
titures and other nonrecurring events total-
ing more than $5 billion offsetting gains in
revenues.
2% increase based
on current op-
erations and new
revenues generated
from increased
advertising.
3% increase based
on current op-
erations and new
revenues generated
from increased
advertising.
6% increase based
on current op-
erations and new
revenues generated
from increased
advertising and
from new plants
providing new
products to sell.
Cost of Goods Sold Historically 50% of revenues 50% 50% 50%
Operating Expenses Historically 29% of revenues adjusted to
31% to account for increased R&D expendi-
tures and increased advertising
31% 31% 31%
Interest Expense Financing $2,000 million by debt in fiscal
2018 at 5%. Slight interest deduction in
fiscal 2019 and 2020 as debts are paid, but
interest expense is much higher than in 2017
when P&G did not service this new debt.
$2,000 : 0.05 =
$100
-$3 -$3
Projected Balance Sheet 12/31/15 12/31/17 12/31/18
Property Plant & Equipment 21,143 22,393 23,643
Goodwill 44,699 44,699 44,699
Intangibles 24,187 24,187 24,187
Other Long-Term Assets 5,309 5,468 5,796
Total Assets 119,588 126,028 131,061
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 15,926 16,404 17,388
Other Current Liabilities 11,281 11,619 12,317
Total Current Liabilities 27,207 28,023 29,705
Long-Term Debt 20,038 20,038 20,038
Other Long-Term Liabilities 14,599 15,037 15,939
Total Liabilities 61,844 63,098 65,682
Equity
Common Stock 4,009 4,009 4,009
Retained Earnings 98,089 100,275 102,725
Treasury Stock (93,715) (93,715) (93,715)
Paid in Capital & Other 49,360 52,360 52,360
Total Equity 57,743 62,929 65,379
Total Liabilities and Equity 119,588 126,028 131,061
TABLE 8-9 (Continued)
CHAPTER 8 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: FINANCE AND ACCOuNTING ISSuES 283
Projected Income Statement Comments Fiscal 2018 Fiscal 2019 Fiscal 2020
Tax Tax rate remains constant at 23% until fiscal
2020 when increased revenues eventually
move PG into higher tax brackets in some
markets; some countries have higher tax
rates than the 21% U.S. corporate rate.
23% 23% 25%
Nonrecurring Events No selling of properties or any other major
one year changes such as divestures
0 0 0
Projected Balance Sheet Comments Fiscal 2018 Fiscal 2019 Fiscal 2020
Cash Cash is the plug figure used to balance the
projected balance sheets and is calculated
automatically with the template. No entry
or estimations for cash are required whether
using the template or performing by hand.
Simply enter the number for Cash that
creates balance where Total Assets = Total
Liabilities + Owners Equity.
Accounts Receivable Historically 7% of revenue 7% 7% 7%
Inventory Historically 7% of revenue 7% 7% 7%
Other Current Assets Historically 18% of revenue 18% 18% 18%
Property Plant & Equipment Adding five new plants per year at
$250 million each. Note P&G will not see
substantial revenue from the new plants un-
til the plants are completed in fiscal 2020.
$1,250 $1,250 $1,250
Goodwill No new acquisitions 0 0 0
Intangibles No new patents 0 0 0
Other Long-Term Assets Historically 8% of revenue 8% 8% 8%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable Historically 26% of revenue; forecasting
firm operates more efficiently after
restructuring over fiscal 2016 and 2017.
24% 24% 24%
Other Current Liabilities Historically 21% of revenue; expecting
firm to operate more efficiently after
restructuring over fiscal 2016 and 2017.
17% 17% 17%
Long-Term Debt Adjust fiscal 2018 to account for debt
financing. No debt financing in either fiscal
2019 or 2020.
$2,000 0 0
Other Long-Term Liabilities Historically 25% of revenue; expecting firm
to operate more efficiently after restructur-
ing over fiscal 2016 and 2017.
22% 22% 22%
Equity
Common Stock Function of par value when the stock was
issued : shares outstanding. Keep at 0.
0 0 0
Treasury Stock No stock buybacks recommended by firm. 0 0 0
Paid in Capital and Other Financed $3,000 million through equity in
fiscal year 2019
0 $3,000 0
Additional Retained Earnings Net Income Current Year (or latest projected
year) – current dividends to be paid 5 new
additional retained earnings
$1,965 $2,186 $2,450
Total Dividends to Pay Increase dividends by 1% each year $7,308 $7,381 $7,455
P&G’s Retained Earnings Data Table
As indicated in the prior pages, the key link between a projected income statement and balance
sheet is the annual transfer of a firm’s net income less dividends = retained earnings (RE) to the
firm’s balance sheet. In light of the importance of this transaction, a P&G RE data table given
in Table 8-11 on page 284 shows specifically how this annual transfer of money is made.
284 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
Corporate Valuation Evaluating the worth of a business is central to strategy implementation because firms acquire
other firms, divisions of other firms, or even divest part of their own firm. Thus, thousands of
transactions occur each year in which businesses are bought or sold for some dollar amount in
the United States and around the world. In fact, about $1.5 trillion in mergers are consummated
in the United States annually. For example, CVS Healthcare is trying to buy Aetna Inc. and Walt
Disney is trying to buy a segment of 21st Century Fox. In all such cases, it is necessary to estab-
lish the financial worth or cash value of a business to successfully implement strategies.
Corporate valuation is not an exact science; value is sometimes in the eye of the beholder.
Companies desire to sell high and buy low, and negotiation normally takes place in both situa-
tions. The valuation of a firm’s worth is based on financial facts, but common sense and good
judgment enter into the process because it is difficult to assign a monetary value to some
factors—such as a loyal customer base, a history of growth, legal suits pending, dedicated
employees, a favorable lease, a bad credit rating, or valuable patents—that may not be fully
reflected in a firm’s financial statements. Also, different valuation methods will yield different
totals for a firm’s worth. Evaluating the worth of a business truly requires both qualitative and
quantitative skills.
With the recent merger and acquisition boom, S&P 500 firms experienced a 70 percent in-
crease in goodwill from $1.7 trillion in 2007 to more than $3 trillion in 2017. For example, with
the acquisition of SAB Miller, Anheuser-Busch InBev recently increased its goodwill to $141
billion, up from $65 billion just 18 months prior, currently accounting for over 50 percent of
total assets. Sometimes it is OK to pay more for a company than its book value (market capital-
ization = number of shares outstanding : stock price) if the firm has technology or patents you
need or economies of scale you desire, possibly to gain a better hold on distribution or even to
reduce competitive pricing pressure, as in the Anheuser example. However, buying a company
is like buying a house in that paying a “premium” (defined as the amount of money paid for an
acquisition over the market capitalization amount) is usually not financially prudent.
In addition to preparing to buy or sell a business, corporate valuation analysis is often
performed when dealing with the following finance and accounting issues: bank loans, tax
calculations, retirement packages, death of a principal, partnership agreements, and IRS audits.
Practically, it is just good business to know what your firm is worth. This knowledge protects the
interests of all parties involved. To estimate the value of a division or segment of a firm, some
analysts calculate the total corporate value and multiply that number by the percentage of rev-
enues the division contributes to the firm.
Corporate Valuation Methods
There are numerous methods to determine the worth of a company, but four methods are most
often used, as described:
METHOD 1 The Net Worth Method = Shareholders’ Equity (SE) – (Goodwill + Intangibles)
Other terms for SE are Owners’ Equity, Total Equity, or Net Worth, but this line item near
the bottom of a balance sheet represents the sum of common stock, additional paid-in capital,
retained earnings, treasury stock, and other equity items. After calculating total SE, subtract
goodwill and intangibles if these items appear as assets on the firm’s balance sheet. Whereas
intangibles include copyrights, patents, and trademarks, goodwill arises when a firm acquires
LO 8.3
TABLE 8-11 P&G’s Retained Earnings Data Table (in millions)
Dividend Information Balance Sheet Information
1 2 3 4 5
Net Income – Dividends
Paid
= RE + Prior Year
BSheet RE
= Current Year
BSheet RE
2018 $ 9,273 $ 7,308 $ 1,965 $ 96,124 $ 98,089
2019 $ 9,567 $ 7,381 $ 2,186 $ 98,089 $ 100,275
2020 $ 9,905 $ 7,455 $ 2,450 $ 100,275 $ 102,725
CHAPTER 8 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: FINANCE AND ACCOuNTING ISSuES 285
another firm and pays more than the book value for that firm. Note in Table 8-12 that P&G’s
goodwill + intangibles exceeds the firm’s SE, resulting in a negative valuation. As a result,
Method 1 is not likely a good indicator of P&G’s market value; however it should raise concern
for shareholders, managers, and potential firms looking to acquire P&G that most of the firm’s
assets are intangible in nature.
METHOD 2 The Net Income Method 5 Net Income : Five
The second approach for measuring the monetary value of a company grows out of the belief that
the worth of any business should be based largely on the future benefits its owners may derive
through net profits. A conservative rule of thumb is to establish a business’s worth as five times
the firm’s current annual profit. A 5-year average profit level could also be used. When using this
approach, remember that firms may suppress earnings in their financial statements to minimize
taxes. Note in Table 8-12 that Method 2 results in a low corporate valuation. If you were acquir-
ing a business, this might be a good first offer, but likely Method 2 does not produce a value you
would want to begin with if you are selling your business. If a firm’s net income is negative,
theoretically Method 2 would imply that the firm would pay you to acquire them. Of course,
when you acquire another firm, you obtain all of the firm’s debt and liabilities, so theoretically
this would be possible. In general, this method is more feasible for small business evaluation.
METHOD 3 Price-Earnings Ratio Method 5 (Stock Price , EPS) : NI
To use the price-earnings ratio method, divide the market price of the firm’s common stock by
the annual EPS and multiply this number by the firm’s average net income for the past 5 years.
Notice in Table 8-12 this method yields an answer the same as Method 4. Algebraically, this
method is identical to Method 4, if earnings and number of shares figures are taken at the same
point in time. In Table 8-12, P&G’s actual fiscal year-end 2017 net income was used as opposed
to a 5-year average.
METHOD 4 Outstanding Shares Method 5 Number of Shares Outstanding : Stock Price
To use the outstanding shares method, simply multiply the number of shares outstanding
by the market price per share. If the purchase price is higher than this amount, the additional
dollars are called a premium. The outstanding shares method may also be called the market
value or market capitalization or book value of the firm. The premium is a per-share dollar
amount that a person or firm is willing to pay beyond the book value of the firm to control
(acquire) the other company. If you pay less for a firm than the market cap number, the differ-
ence is called a discount.
The owner of Better Home & Gardens, Meredith Corp., recently paid a 46 percent premium
dollar amount of $1.85 billion to acquire Time Inc. Meredith is based in Des Moines, Iowa. Time
Inc. owns Fortune, People, and Sports Illustrated.
TABLE 8-12 Company Worth Analysis for P&G (in millions)
The Input Data
Shareholders’ Equity $55,778
Net Income $15,326
Stock Price $94.17
EPS $6.01019
Number of Shares Outstanding 2,550
Goodwill $44,699
Intangibles $24,187
The Four Valuation Methods
Stockholders’ Equity – (Goodwill + Intangibles) ($13,108)
Net Income * 5 $76,630
(Share Price/EPS) * Net Income $240,134
Number of Shares Outstanding * Share Price $240,134
Method Average $135,947
286 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
A corporate valuation analysis by researcher Ryan Brewer was recently reported by several
media outlets to reveal the monetary value of the top 20 college football programs. A summary
of the resultant numbers is provided in Table 8-13; the numbers may have been derived by dis-
counting future revenue streams back to the present to obtain a present value; this is another cor-
porate valuation method sometimes used. Note in Table 8-13 that the Southeastern Conference
(SEC) leads all conferences with 9 of the top 20 most valuable teams.
Manage Financial Ratios, IPOs, and Bonds Financial Ratio Analyses
Introduced in Chapter 4, financial ratios are an important tool used to access a firm’s financial
situation at one point in time. Financial ratios are examined based on (1) how they change over
time, (2) how they compare to industry norms, and (3) how they compare with key competitors.
Financial ratios based on actual financial statements reveal strengths and weaknesses of the firm;
ratios based on projected financial statements reveal potential problems and successes likely
to occur if a particular set of recommendations is implemented. For example, if a current ratio
skyrockets or plummets versus industry averages, then cash (and other short-term assets) must
be managed.
Continuing with our P&G example, Tables 8-14 and 8-15, respectively, reveal the company’s
actual (historical) and projected financial ratios, both calculated using the template. Comparing the
actual to the projected leverage and activity ratios do not indicate any serious abnormalities or
changes, suggesting the four recommendations to be implemented indeed are feasible and doable.
Note a significant drop in P&G’s return on equity (ROE) and return on assets (ROA) ratios from
2017 in the projected years because P&G’s divestitures ceased in 2017–2020. It is important to
note, the projected ratios for P&G in Table 8-15 were not derived on the first attempt at creating
LO 8.4
TABLE 8-13 The Top 20 College Football Programs in Terms of Monetary Value (in millions of $)
Rank university Value ($)
1 Ohio State 1,511
2 Texas 1,243
3 Oklahoma 1,002
4 Alabama, SEC 930
5 LSU, SEC 911
6 Michigan 893
7 Notre Dame 857
8 Georgia, SEC 822
9 Tennessee, SEC 756
10 Auburn, SEC 724
11 Florida, SEC 682
12 Penn State 550
13 Texas A&M, SEC 523
14 Nebraska 508
15 South Carolina, SEC 484
16 Iowa 484
17 Arkansas, SEC 456
18 Wisconsin 439
19 Washington 434
20 Florida State 385
Source: Based on information from the Wall Street Journal, September 23, 2017, and www.sportingnews.com, and other sources.
CHAPTER 8 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: FINANCE AND ACCOuNTING ISSuES 287
TABLE 8-14 P&G’s Actual Financial Ratios
Historical Ratios
6/30/16 6/30/17
Current Ratio 1.10 0.88
Quick Ratio 0.94 0.72
Total Debt-to-Total-Assets Ratio 0.54 0.54
Total Debt-to-Equity Ratio 1.19 1.16
Times-Interest-Earned Ratio 24 30
Inventor/Turnover 6.98 7.04
Fixed Assets Turnover 3.37 3.27
Total Assets Turnover 0.51 0.54
Accounts Receivable Turnover 11 14
Average Collection Period 32.87 25.77
Gross Profit Margin % 50% 50%
Operating Profit Margin % 21% 21%
ROA % 8% 13%
ROE % 18% 27%
Note: These are actual P&G financial ratios computed by the template based on actual P&G financial statements
TABLE 8-15 P&G’s Projected Financial Ratios
Projected Ratios
6/30/18 6/30/19 6/30/20
Current Ratio 0.89 1.04 1.10
Quick Ratio 0.71 0.86 0.91
Debt-to-Total-Assets Ratio 0.52 0.50 0.50
Debt-to-Equity Ratio 1.07 1.00 1.00
Times-Interest-Earned Ratio 22 23 25
Inventory Turnover 6.71 6.46 6.40
Fixed Assets Turnover 3.14 3.05 3.06
Total Assets Turnover 0.55 0.54 0.55
Accounts Receivable Turnover 14 14 14
Average Collection Period 25.55 25.55 25.55
Gross Profit Margin % 50% 50% 50%
Operating Profit Margin % 19% 19% 19%
ROA % 8% 8% 8%
ROE % 16% 15% 15%
Note: These are projected P&G financial ratios computed by the template based on P&G projected financial statements
projected income statements and projected balance sheets. They are the result of several different
interactions and adjustments to the projected statements before the projected ratios were reason-
able. Take care to make adjustments as needed to your respective projected statements as well to
produce both feasible projected statements and the resulting projecting ratios.
Go Public with an IPO?
Hundreds of companies annually hold initial public offerings (IPOs) to move from being
private to being public. “Going public” means selling off a percentage of a company to oth-
ers to raise capital; this action dilutes the owners’ control of the firm. Going public is not
288 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
recommended for companies with less than $10 million in sales because the initial costs can be
too high for the firm to generate sufficient cash flow to make going public worthwhile. One dol-
lar in four is the average total cost paid to lawyers, accountants, and underwriters when an initial
stock issuance is less than $1 million; $1 in $20 will go to cover these costs for issuances more
than $20 million. In addition to initial costs involved with a stock offering, there are costs and
obligations associated with reporting and management in a publicly held firm. The new equity
capital derived from going public can enable firms to develop new products, build plants, re-
model stores, enter foreign countries, and market products and services more aggressively. Blue
Apron, a meal-kit home-delivery firm, recently cut its IPO price from $17 to $10 after Amazon
acquired Whole Foods Market.
The year 2017 witnessed about 1,600 IPOs globally, more than any year in a decade, ac-
cording to Dealogic data. There were 950 IPOs the prior year.
Issue Bonds to Raise Capital?
Another popular way for a company to raise capital is to issue corporate bonds, which is analo-
gous to going to the bank and borrowing money, except that with bonds, the company obtains
the funds from investors rather than banks. On a balance sheet, bonds are included in the long-
term debt row. Especially when a company’s balance sheet is strong and its credit rating excel-
lent, issuing bonds can be an effective way to raise needed capital. Corporate bond prices are
less sensitive to daily or quarterly firm operations compared to stock prices. For example, an ex-
pected equity price forecasted to finance potential recommended strategies may be significantly
higher or lower than forecasted, but bond prices and rates will be more in line with the forecast
based on unforeseen events such as CEO succession, new competitor emerging, bad earnings
surprise, and other factors. Smaller firms or firms with negative earnings will also likely have
higher rates associated with their bonds, possibly resulting in issuing bonds (debt) to be a more
expensive alternative than equity. Bonds are also used because sometimes banks do not want to
lend money for long periods of time to fund business operations.
The year 2017 was the seventh straight year that a record dollar value of bonds was sold
in the United States, totaling more than $1.5 trillion. A large recent transaction was Anheuser-
Busch InBev’s $46 billion bond issuance to purchase SAB Miller. Firms issue bonds to (1)
finance acquisitions, (2) buy back their own stock (called treasury stock), (3) refinance old debt,
and (4) raise cash to finance strategic initiatives. With the Federal Reserve in the United States
slowly raising rates, bond issuances may level off.
The practice of firms issuing bonds to buy back their own stock and to pay cash dividends
to shareholders has become a concern in terms of being financially prudent. A strategic decision
facing corporations therefore, is whether to issue bonds to raise capital to pacify shareholders
with cash dividends and purchase company stock, or to issue bonds to finance strategies care-
fully formulated to yield greater revenues and profits.
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS
Figure 8-3 reveals that to gain and sustain competitive advantages,
firms must manage their finances more efficiently than rival firms,
by using tools like EPS/EBIT analysis, projected financial statement
analysis, and corporate valuation analysis, as described herein. As
you know, it is difficult to make a dollar of profit; every dollar saved
is like a dollar earned. Dollars matter and successful strategy imple-
mentation is dependent on superior “dollar management.” The
concepts, tools, and techniques presented in this chapter can make
the difference between success and failure in implementing strate-
gies in many companies and organizations.
Many firms are giving employees bonuses, such as Erie
Insurance Group, as a result of the new 2018 corporate tax of
21 percent. Companies are paying more in dividends too. From
January 1 to March 1 2018, not a single S&P 500 company cut
their dividend payout amounts, the first time this has happened
since 2011. And the average increase in dividends over that
time period was 14 percent, the largest increase since 2014.
Companies are basically sharing their huge corporate tax cuts
with shareholders, some sharing more than others. Cisco Systems
in 2018 repatriated (brought back to the U.S.) $67 billion in cash
held overseas. Cisco plans to use $44 billion of that cash to pay
shareholder dividends and repurchase shares of its own stock.
Apple reports that it is bringing most of its $252.3 billion in for-
eign cash back to the U.S. and adding 20,000 new jobs in the U.S.
In contrast, Microsoft, Alphabet Inc., and Amazon.com plan to
keep their overseas cash overseas.
CHAPTER 8 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: FINANCE AND ACCOuNTING ISSuES 289
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS
A personal note from the authors to students; we are exceptionally
proud of you for mastering this chapter. At student international
case competitions, we have witnessed numerous teams of students
win case competitions largely because they are able to demonstrate
that their recommendations are financially feasible and reasonable
and will lead to excellent financial returns for the firm. We know
this chapter is a bit tough but hopefully you find it to be concise,
accurate, and easy to follow. Mastering the skills conveyed in this
chapter will provide you a competitive advantage over other stu-
dents and provide you a financial knowledge base to use in your
business career and personal lives.
Whenever the opportunity arises in your oral or written project,
reveal how your firm can gain and sustain competitive advantage
using the finance and accounting concepts and analyses presented
in this chapter. Continuously compare your firm to rivals and draw
insights and conclusions so that your recommendations come across
as well conceived. Never shy away from the EPS/EBIT analysis, pro-
jected financial statement analysis, or corporate valuation analyses
because your audience must be convinced that what you recom-
mend is financially feasible and worth the dollars to be spent. Spend
sufficient time on the nuts-and-bolts of those analyses as needed,
so fellow students (and your professor) will be assured the analyses
are correct and reasonable. Too often, when students rush at the
end of an oral presentation, it means their financial statements
are nonexistent or incorrectly developed—so avoid that issue. Use
the free Excel strategic planning template at www.strategyclub
.com and consider putting on your resume that you have “Gained
experience using strategic-planning software.”
Establish A Clear Vision & Mission
Evaluate & Monitor Results:
Take Corrective Actions; Adapt
To Change
Gain & Sustain Competitive Advantages
Formulate Strategies: Collect, Analyze, &
Prioritize Data Using Matrices; Establish A Clear Strategic Plan
Implement Strategies: Establish Structure; Allocate Resources; Motivate & Reward; Attract Customers; Manage Finances
FIGURE 8-3
How to Gain and Sustain Competitive Advantages
290 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
Chapter Summary Finance and accounting managers must devise effective strategy-implementation approaches at
low cost and minimum risk to the firm. The nature and role of finance and accounting activities,
coupled with the management and marketing activities described in the prior chapter, largely
determine organizational success. An excellent capital structure can be a competitive advantage;
EPS/EBIT analysis is needed to make capital structure decisions. Projected financial state-
ments are vital for anticipating the impact of various recommendations. Corporate valuation
methods are used all the time to acquire, merge, divest, and manage a firm’s finances. Together
these finance concepts, tools, and techniques can help assure effective and efficient strategy
implementation.
Key Terms and Concepts book value (p. 285)
capital structure (p. 271)
discount (p. 285)
EPS/EBIT analysis (p. 272)
goodwill (p. 281)
initial public offering (IPO) (p. 287)
market capitalization (p. 285)
market value (p. 285)
outstanding shares method (p. 285)
premium (p. 285)
price-earnings ratio method (p. 285)
projected financial statement (p. 275)
treasury stock (p. 271)
Issues for Review and Discussion
8-1. True or False? Acquisition premiums the last few years
have averaged 25 to 40 percent, but sometimes exceed
100 percent; prior research suggests that high premiums
generally have negative impacts on acquisition perfor-
mance. Explain.
8-2. Explain why increasing treasury stock will increase
EPS in any corporation.
8-3. Some analysts say that huge New York Stock Exchange
IPOs from companies such as Alibaba, headquartered
in China, should be illegal in the United States because
under communist governments there are not sufficient
safeguards in place for financial transactions. Do you
agree or disagree? Why?
8-4. True or False? In the United States, no federal laws
prevent businesses from using GPS devices to monitor
employees, nor does federal law require businesses to
disclose to employees whether they are using such tech-
niques. What are the implications for employees and
companies?
8-5. To raise capital, what are the pros and cons of selling
bonds compared to issuing stock or borrowing money
from a bank?
8-6. Many companies are aggressively buying their own
stock. What are situations when this practice is recom-
mended or especially beneficial? What are the pros and
cons of increasing treasury stock on the balance sheet?
8-7. Hewlett-Packard has more goodwill ($) than the book
value ($) of the firm. Explain what this means, how it
could occur, and what can be done about this situation.
8-8. Give a hypothetical example where Company A buys
Company B for a 15 percent premium.
8-9. Give a hypothetical example where Company A buys
Company B for a 15 percent discount.
8-10. What is treasury stock? When should a company pur-
chase treasury stock?
8-11. What is an IPO? When is an IPO good for a company?
Why did Dropbox in 2018 use an IPO? Was that a wise
strategic move? Why?
8-12. Generally speaking, how large should a firm be to jus-
tify having an IPO? Explain the IPO process.
8-13. How could or would dividends affect an EPS/EBIT
analysis? Would it be correct to refer to “earnings after
taxes, interest, and dividends” as retained earnings for a
given year?
8-14. In performing an EPS/EBIT analysis, where do the
first-row (EBIT) numbers come from?
8-15. In performing an EPS/EBIT analysis, where does the
tax rate percentage come from?
8-16. Show algebraically that the price-earnings ratio formula
is identical to the number of shares outstanding mul-
tiplied by the stock price formula. Why are the values
obtained from these two methods sometimes different?
CHAPTER 8 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: FINANCE AND ACCOuNTING ISSuES 291
8-17. In accounting terms, distinguish between intangibles
and goodwill on a balance sheet. Why do these two
items generally stay the same on projected financial
statements?
8-18. Explain four methods often used to calculate the total
worth of a business.
8-19. Explain how and why top executives can and do, on
occasion, legally manipulate financial statements to in-
flate or deflate expected results.
8-20. Explain why EPS/EBIT analysis is a central strategy-
implementation technique.
8-21. Identify and discuss the limitations of EPS/EBIT
analysis.
8-22. True or False? Retained earnings on the balance sheet
are not monies available to finance strategy implemen-
tation. Explain.
8-23. Explain why projected financial statement analysis is
considered both a strategy-formulation and a strategy-
implementation tool.
8-24. Complete the following EPS/EBIT analysis for a
company whose stock price is $20, interest rate on
funds is 5 percent, tax rate is 20 percent, number of
shares outstanding is 500 million, and EBIT range is
$100 million to $300 million. The firm needs to raise
$200 million in capital. Use the following table to
complete the work.
100% Common Stock
100% Debt Financing
20% Debt– 80% Stock Financing
EBIT
Interest
EBT
Taxes
EAT
#Shares
EPS
8-25. Under what conditions would retained earnings on the
balance sheet decrease from one year to the next?
8-26. In your own words, list all the steps in developing pro-
jected financial statements.
8-27. Based on the financial statements provided for Coca-
Cola (p. 292), how much dividends in dollars did Coca-
Cola pay in 2016? In 2017?
8-28. Why should you be careful not to use historical per-
centages blindly in developing projected financial
statements?
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
SET 1: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR COCA-COLA
EXERCISE 8A
Perform an EPS/EBIT Analysis for Coca-Cola
Purpose
An EPS/EBIT analysis is one of the most widely used techniques for determining the extent that
debt or stock should be used to finance strategies to be implemented. This exercise can give you
practice performing EPS/EBIT analysis.
Instructions
Amount Coca-Cola needs: $5,000 million to build four new manufacturing plants outside the
United States
Interest rate: 5%
Tax rate: 21%
Stock price: $45.54 as of January 2, 2018
Number of shares outstanding: 4,255 million
EBIT: Pessimistic: $7,000 million, Realistic: $9,000 million, Optimistic: $11,000 million
Steps
1. Prepare an EPS/EBIT analysis for Coca-Cola. Determine whether the company should use all
debt, all stock, or a 50-50 combination of debt and stock to finance this market-development
strategy.
2. Develop an EPS/EBIT chart after completing the EPS/EBIT table.
3. Next, give a three-sentence recommendation for Coca-Cola’s CFO.
292 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
EXERCISE 8B
Prepare Projected Financial Statements for Coca-Cola
Purpose
This exercise is designed to give you experience preparing projected financial statements. This analy-
sis is a strategic finance and accounting issue because it allows managers to anticipate and evaluate
the expected results of various strategy-implementation approaches.
Instructions
Step 1 Work with a classmate. Develop a projected income statement and balance sheet for Coca-
Cola. Use the template if possible. Assume that Coca-Cola needs to raise $1 billion to in-
crease its market share, and plans to obtain 50 percent financing from a bank and 50 percent
financing from a stock issuance. Make other assumptions as needed, and state them clearly
in written form.
Step 2 Bring your projected statements to class and discuss any problems or questions you
encountered.
Step 3 Compare your projected statements to the statements of other students. What major differ-
ences exist between your analysis and the work of other students?
EXERCISE 8C
Determine the Cash Value of Coca-Cola
Purpose
It is simply good business to continually know the cash value (corporate valuation) of your
company. This exercise gives you practice in determining the total worth of a company using
several methods. To perform this analysis, use Coca-Cola’s financial statements as given in the
Cohesion Case.
Instructions
Step 1 Calculate the financial worth of Coca-Cola based on four approaches: (1) the net worth
method, (2) the net income method, (3) the price-earnings ratio method, and (4) the out-
standing shares method.
Step 2 Get an average of the four methods. In a dollar amount, how much is Coca-Cola worth?
Step 3 Compare your analyses and conclusions with those of other students.
EXERCISE 8D
Prepare Projected Financial Ratios for Coca-Cola
Purpose
Financial ratios are vastly more than just an exercise for students to perform. If any firm’s financial
ratios get out of line with industry average or decline over time, investors can withdraw support liter-
ally overnight. Projected financial ratios are an excellent means for anticipating financial results so as
to avoid overnight calamities. The template will generate projected financial ratios after you convert
your firm’s financial statements to the template format and then develop projected financial state-
ments based on recommended strategies. Step 1 Review the results of your EXERCISE 8B
Step 2 Compute Coca-Cola’s projected current ratio, debt-to-equity ratio, and return-on-investment
ratio. How do your projected ratios compare to prior year ratios? Why is it important to
make this comparison?
CHAPTER 8 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: FINANCE AND ACCOuNTING ISSuES 293
SET 2: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR MY UNIVERSITY
EXERCISE 8E
Determine the Cash Value of My University
Purpose
It is simply good business to continually know the cash value (corporate valuation) of any organiza-
tion, including colleges and universities. The four largest private universities in the United States
by on-campus number of undergraduate students (in parentheses) are as follows: Brigham Young
University (30,500), New York University (28,500), University of Southern California (19,000), and
Northeastern University (17,500). This exercise gives you practice in determining the total worth of
an organization using two methods.
Instructions
Step 1 Locate your university’s most recent income statement and balance sheet.
Step 2 Calculate the financial worth of your university based on two approaches: (1) the net worth
method and (2) the net income method.
Step 3 Get an average of the two methods. In a dollar amount, how much is your university worth?
Step 4 Compare your analyses and conclusions with those of other students.
SET 3: STRATEGIC PLANNING TO ENHANCE MY EMPLOYABILITY
EXERCISE 8F
Developing Personal Financial Statements
Purpose
Banks require individuals to develop personal financial statements whenever a mortgage or loan is requested.
Managing your personal finances is important before and after you begin working full-time. This exercise
gives you a heads up on the process of developing an income statement and balance sheet for yourself.
Instructions
Step 1 Develop an income statement and balance sheet for yourself using the free Excel template at
www.strategyclub.com. Follow the steps outlined in this chapter.
Step 2 Determine your net worth = your total assets minus your total liabilities.
Step 3 Explain why managing personal finances is important to enhance your employability.
EXERCISE 8G
A Template Competency Test
Purpose
The free Excel strategic planning template at www.strategyclub.com is widely used for strategic
planning by students and small businesses; this exercise aims to enhance your familiarity with the
template. Developing competence with the template will enable you to place this skill appropriately
on your resume, in addition to facilitating your development of a comprehensive strategic plan for an
assigned case company.
Instructions
Answer the following questions about the template. Discuss your answers with classmates to deter-
mine any issues or concerns.
1. Why is it important to take the time to enter your financial statements into the template format
rather than simply copying and pasting financial statements off line with respect to the template?
2. Does this chapter focus on Part I or Part II of the template?
3. If the EPS ranges for equity and debt for a given level of EBIT are identical, what change in the
analysis would likely provide the most variance: (1) Adjusting the amount of capital needed by
25%, (2) increasing the interest rate by 1% (100 basis points), or (3) increasing the tax rate by
5% (500 basis points)? Why?
294 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
4. Which of the following methods will never maximize EPS? (1) 100% equity financing, (2)
100% debt financing, or (3) combination financing? Why?
5. Explain how analyzing projected financial ratios generated by the template can be helpful in
making adjustments to your projected financial statement estimates?
6. Do you physically have to calculate any number on the projected statements when using the
template?
7. The template assures your projected balance sheets are in balance every time by using what line
item to achieve the balancing?
8. If you notice your current ratio went from a historical 1.0 to a projected 5.0, what are some
steps you should consider taking?
9. When entering treasury stock on the template, why do you enter a negative number?
10. If you desire to quit paying dividends in projected years, what entry is needed for the template
to make this calculation?
11. If current plant property and equipment were $500 million and you wish to increase plant prop-
erty and equipment by $50 million in the first fiscal year, what number would you enter into
Part II of the template by plant property equipment under the first projected fiscal year?
12. If you sold $100 million of common stock, what line item on the projected balance sheet on Part
II of the template would you make this entry?
13. Just to the right of each line item on PART II of the projected income statement and projected
balance sheet, the template provides what type of hint?
14. Why should a student enter into the template their existing and projected financial data, from
oldest year to most recent year, even though the template will allow students to enter in dates
in any sequence desired and even though many published statements may enter the data in re-
verse order?
SET 4: INDIVIDUAL VERSUS GROUP STRATEGIC PLANNING
EXERCISE 8H
How Severe Are the Seven Limitations to EPS/EBIT Analysis?
Purpose
As discussed in this chapter, EPS/EBIT analysis is the most widely used financial tool used to
determine whether debt or equity is better to raise needed capital. However, all analytical tools
have some limitations. Chapter 8 identifies and discusses seven limitations of EPS/EBIT analy-
sis, as follows:
1. Flexibility
2. Control
3. Timing
4. Extent leveraged
5. Continuity
6. EBIT ranges
7. Dividends
The purpose of this exercise is to examine more closely the limitations of EPS/EBIT analysis in
terms of their relative severity. In addition, the purpose is to examine whether individual decision
CHAPTER 8 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: FINANCE AND ACCOuNTING ISSuES 295
making is better than group decision making. Academic research suggests that groups make better
decisions than individuals about 80 percent of the time.
Instructions
Rank the seven limitations of EPS/EBIT analysis as to their severity, where 1 = most severe to 7 =
least severe. Use Table 8-16. First, rank the limitations as an individual. Then, rank the limitations as
part of a group of three. Thus, determine what person(s) and what group(s) here today can come clos-
est to the expert ranking. This exercise enables examination of the relative effectiveness of individual
versus group decision making in strategic planning.
Steps
1. Fill in Column 1 in Table 8-16 to reveal your individual ranking of the severity of the seven limita-
tions (1 = most severe to 7 = least severe). For example, if you think Limitation #1 (Flexibility) is
the fourth-most severe limitation, then enter a 4 in Table 8-15 in Column 1 beside Flexibility.
2. Fill in Column 2 in Table 8-16 to reveal your group’s ranking of the severity of the seven limita-
tions (1 = most severe to 7 = least severe).
3. Fill in Column 3 in Table 8-16 to reveal the expert’s ranking of the seven limitations.
4. Fill in Column 4 in Table 8-16 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 1 and Column
3 to reveal how well you performed as an individual in this exercise. (Note: Absolute difference
disregards negative numbers.)
5. Fill in Column 5 in Table 8-16 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 2 and Column
3 to reveal how well your group performed in this exercise.
6. Sum Column 4. Sum Column 5.
7. Compare the Column 4 sum with the Column 5 sum. If your Column 4 sum is less than your
Column 5 sum, then you performed better as an individual than as a group. Normally, group
decision making is superior to individual decision making, so if you did better than your group,
you did excellent.
8. The Individual Winner(s): The individual(s) with the lowest Column 4 sum is the WINNER.
9. The Group Winners(s): The group(s) with the lowest Column 5 score is the WINNER.
TABLE 8-16 Assessing EPS/EBIT Limitations: Comparing Individual versus Group Decision Making
Limitations Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5
1. Flexibility
2. Control
3. Timing
4. Extent leveraged
5. Continuity
6. EBIT ranges
7. Dividends
Sums
296 PART 3 • STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
MINI-CASE ON HASBRO, INC.
NERF WANTS TO TAKE OVER BARBIE DOLL: THE CASE OF HASBRO, INC. Based in Pawtucket, Rhode Island, the largest U.S. toymaker, Hasbro Inc., is engaged in a hostile
takeover attempt of the second largest toymaker, Mattel Inc., based in El Segundo, California. Mattel
is the maker of Barbie dolls, American Girl dolls, and Fisher-Price and Hot Wheels toys. But Mattel
has been losing money and its market value has dropped to less than $5 billion, whereas Hasbro is
valued at about $11 billion. Hasbro has brands such as Nerf, Transformers, and My Little Pony.
Hasbro’s stock has gained 18 percent on the year to $92, whereas Mattel’s stock has declined 47
percent on the year to $14. Hasbro owns no toy factories, but Mattel does own its factories. Hasbro
has forged close ties to Hollywood by producing movies and creating toys tied to movies, even hav-
ing toys now tied to Disney’s Star Wars and Princess characters. A problem for toy makers is that
Toys “R” Us has closed all stores and Lego AS just cut 8 percent of its global staff. A few years ago
Mattel was trying to buy Hasbro but the firm’s fortunes have changed place.
Even if Hasbro and Mattel merge, the combined company would control about 35 percent of the
U.S. market and 22 percent of global toy sales. In some categories however, such as model vehicles,
which includes Mattel’s Hot Wheels, the combined firm would control 62 percent of the U.S. market.
Mattel recently suspended its dividend payments to shareholders to stay financially solvent; credit
rating firms are downgrading Mattel even as the firm tries to secure more debt financing.
Questions
1. How much is Hasbro worth today compared to the $11 billion figure in late 2017?
2. How much is Mattel worth today compared to the $5 billion figure in late 2017?
3. What would be the advantages and disadvantages of these two firms combining?
4. Assess the extent that antitrust regulators would approve a combination of the industry’s two
biggest players.
Source: Based on Dana Mattioli, “Hasbro Sets Its Sights on Mattel,” Wall Street Journal , November 11–12, 2017,
p. A1–A2. Also, Paul Ziobro, “For Toy Makers, a New Game,” Wall Street Journal , November 15, 2017, B7.
Web Resources 1. Accounting Tools1 gives excellent narrative about re-
tained earnings and other accounting tools and techniques https://www.accountingtools.com/articles/what-is-the- retained-earnings-formula.html
2. Accounting Tools2 gives excellent narrative about pro- jected financial statements and other accounting tools and techniques
http://www.understand-accounting.net/TheReliability
andAccuracyoffinancialstatements.html
Current Readings Arts, Sam, Bruno Cassiman, and Juan Gomez. “Text Matching
to Measure Patent Similarity.” Strategic Management
Journal 39, no. 1 (January 2018): 62–84. Caner, Turanay, Susan K. Cohen, and Frits Pil. “Firm
Heterogeneity in Complex Problem Solving: A Knowledge- Based Look at Invention.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 9 (September 2017): 1791–1811.
Castellaneta, Francesco, Raffaele Conti, and Aleksandra Kacperczyk. “Money Secrets: How Does Trade Secret Legal Protection Affect Firm Market Value? Evidence from
the Uniform Trade Secret Act.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 4 (April 2017): 834–853.
Cuypers, Ilya R. P., Youtha Cuypers, and Xavier Martin. “When the Target May Know Better: Effects of Experience and Information Asymmetries on Value From Mergers and Acquisitions.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 3 (March 2017): 609–625.
Dallemule, Leandro, and Thomas H. Davenport. “What’s Your Data Strategy?” Harvard Business Review 95, no. 3 (May– June 2017): 112–121.
Let’s Build a House
CHAPTER 8 • IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES: FINANCE AND ACCOuNTING ISSuES 297
Deb, Palash, Parthiban David, and Jonathan O’Brien.“When Is Cash Good or Bad for Firm Performance?” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 2 (February 2017): 436–454.
Dorobantu, Sinziana, and Kate Odziemkowska. “Valuing Stakeholder Governance: Property Rights, Community Mobilization, and Firm Value.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 13 (December 2017): 2682–2703.
Elfenbein, Daniel W., Anne Marie Knott, and Rachel Croson. “Equity Stakes and Exit: An Experimental Approach to Decomposing Exit Delay.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 2 (February 2017): 278–299.
Fitza, Markus, and Laszio Tihanyi. “How Much Does Ownership Form Matter?” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 13 (December 2017): 2726–2743.
Greer, Charles R., Robert F. Lusch, and Michael A. Hitt. “A Service Perspective for Human Capital Resources: A Critical Base for Strategy Implementation.” Academy of Management Perspectives 31, no. 2 (May 2017): 137–158.
Kiss, Andreea N., and Pamela S. Barr. “New Product Development Strategy Implementation Duration and New Venture Performance: A Contingency-Based Perspective.” Journal of Management 43, no. 4 (April 2017): 1185–1210.
Mankins, Michael, Karen Harris, and David Harding. “Strategy in the Age of Superabundant Capital.” Harvard Business Review 95, no. 2 (March–April 2017): 66–75.
Martin, Roger L., and Tony Golsby-Smith. “Management Is Much More than A Science: The Limits of Data-Driven Decision Making.” Harvard Business Review 95, no. 5 (September–October 2017): 128–135.
Miles, Sandra Jeanquart, and Mark Van Clieaf. “Strategic Fit: Key to Growing Enterprise Value Through Organizational Capital.” Business Horizons 60, no. 1 (January 2017): 55–65.
Ragozzino, Roberto, Jeffrey J. Reuer, and Lenos Trigeorgis. “Real Options in Strategy and Finance: Current Gaps and Future Linkages.” Academy of Management Perspectives 30, no. 2 (November 2016): 428–440.
Riley, Shawn M., Steven C. Michael, and Joseph T. Mahoney. “Human Capital Matters: Market Valuation of Firm Investments in Training and the Role of Complementary Assets.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 9 (September 2017): 1895–1914.
Sadun, Raffaella, Nicholas Bloom, and John Van Reenen. “Why Do We Undervalue Competent Management? Neither Great Leadership Nor Brilliant Strategy Matters Without Operational Excellence.” Harvard Business Review 95, no. 5 (September–October 2017): 120–127.
Wei, Jiuchang, Zhe Ouyang, and Haipeng (Allan) Chen. “Well Known or Well Liked? The Effects of Corporate Reputation on Firm Value at the Onset of a Corporate Crisis.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 10 (October 2017): 2103–2120.
298
9 PART 4
STRATEGY EVALUATION AND
GOVERNANCE
Strategy Formulation
Feedback Loop
Strategy Implementation
Strategy Evaluation
Chapter 10: Business Ethics, Environmental Sustainability, and Social Responsibility
Chapter 11: Global and International Issues
Strategy Evaluation
and Governance Chapter 9
Implementing Strategies:
Finance and Accounting
Issues Chapter 8
Implementing Strategies:
Management and Marketing
Issues Chapter 7
Business Vision and
Mission Chapter 2
Strategies in Action Chapter 5
Strategy Analysis and
Choice Chapter 6
The Internal
Assessment Chapter 4
The External Assessment Chapter 3
FIGURE 9- 1
The Comprehensive, Integrative Strategic-Management Model
Source: Fred R. David, “How Companies Define Their Mission,” Long Range Planning 22, no. 1 (February 1989): 91. See also Anik Ratnaningsih, Nadjadji Anwar, Patdono Suwignjo, and Putu Artama Wiguna, “Balance Scorecard of David’s Strategic Modeling at Industrial Business for National Construction Contractor of Indonesia,” Journal of Mathematics and Technology , no. 4 (October 2010): 20.
299
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following:
9- 1. Discuss the strategy-evaluation process.
9- 2. Discuss three activities that comprise strategy evaluation.
9- 3. Describe and develop a Balanced Scorecard.
9- 4. Discuss the role of a board of directors (governance) in strategic planning.
9- 5. Identify and discuss four challenges in strategic management.
9- 6. Identify and describe 17 guidelines for effective strategic management.
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
The following exercises are found at the end of this chapter:
SET 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 9A: Develop a Balanced Scorecard for Coca-Cola
SET 2: Strategic Planning for My University
EXERCISE 9B: Prepare a Strategy Evaluation Report for My University
SET 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability
EXERCISE 9C: A Balanced Scorecard to Evaluate My Professional versus Personal Objectives
SET 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
EXERCISE 9D: How Important Are Various Guidelines for Effective Strategic Management?
Strategy Evaluation and Governance
MyLab Management
Improve Your Grade!
If your instructor is using MyLab Management, visit www.pearson.com/mylab/management
for videos, simulations, and writing exercises.
300 PART 4 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE
T he best formulated and implemented strategies become obsolete as a firm’s external and
internal environments change. It is essential, therefore, that strategists systematically
evaluate the execution of strategies, as illustrated and highlighted in Figure 9-1. This
chapter presents a framework that can guide managers’ efforts to evaluate strategies, to make
sure they are working, and to make timely changes.
Boards of directors evaluate strategies as part of their job description, so governance issues
are discussed in this chapter. Guidelines are presented in this chapter for actually doing strategic
planning because board members are more and more involved in the process with top manage-
ment. Special challenges impacting strategic-planning activities also are discussed.
The exemplary strategist showcased in this chapter is Anthony Wood, founder and CEO of
Roku, the fast-growing video streaming and television manufacturing and marketing company.
The Strategy-Evaluation Process The strategic-management process results in decisions that can have significant, long-lasting conse-
quences. Erroneous strategic decisions can inflict severe penalties and can be exceedingly difficult, if
not impossible, to reverse. Therefore, most strategists agree that strategy evaluation is vital to an or-
ganization’s well-being; timely evaluations can alert management to problems or potential problems
before a situation becomes critical. The strategy-evaluation process includes three basic activities:
1. Examine the underlying bases of a firm’s strategy.
2. Compare expected results with actual results.
3. Take corrective actions to ensure that performance conforms to plans.
Adequate and timely feedback is the cornerstone of effective strategy evaluation. Strategy
evaluation can be no better than the information on which it is based. Too much pressure
from top managers may result in lower-level managers contriving numbers they think will be
LO 9.1
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED
Anthony Wood, Founder and CEO of Roku, Inc. Anthony Wood, who started Roku in 2002, might be the next Steve Jobs
or Mark Zuckerberg, seriously. Roku is the television streaming company
that provides media players, televisions, and accessories. Headquartered
in Los Gatos, California, Roku manufactures and sells televisions with its
own special operating system. About 20 percent of all televisions sold in
the United States are powered by the Roku operating system, but Roku’s
market share is growing nearly 30+ percent annually. Unlike many of its
biggest rivals, Roku relies solely on deals with outside content produc-
ers; Roku does not make its own original programming, in contrast with
Amazon’s Fire TV, Google’s YouTube and Chromecast, and Apple TV. This
competitive advantage means Roku can stay neutral when it comes to
carrying streaming apps and the content it markets to users. Roku devices
are the cheapest, at Walmart for as low as $29.95, and arguably the best.
The name Roku comes from the Japanese word meaning “six”
because Roku was the sixth company that Wood started. Prior to Roku,
Wood invented the digital video recorder (DVR) and founded ReplayTV,
where he served as President and CEO before the company’s acqui-
sition, and subsequent sale to DirecTV. Before ReplayTV, Wood was
founder and CEO of iband, Inc., an Internet software company. Even
earlier in his career, Wood was founder and CEO of SunRize Industries,
a leading supplier of hardware and software tools for nonlinear audio
recording and editing. Wood completed his bachelor’s degree in elec-
trical engineering at Texas A&M University, where he started his first
company his junior year in college.
Wood’s primary aim during his early years was to make money,
and lots of it. Wood says he did not grow up rich, and his dad grew
up pretty poor. Wood says he saw various guys start businesses and
get rich, so he was determined to do the same. Wood says money was
his motivation, but he goes on to say: “Money is not an honorable
motivation, but it does work.” Wood is an exemplary strategist, and an
entrepreneur extraordinaire.
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
A n d ri
y P
o p o v /1
2 3 R
F
CHAPTER 9 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE 301
satisfactory. Strategy evaluation can be a complex and sensitive undertaking. Too much em-
phasis on evaluating strategies may be expensive and counterproductive. No one likes to be
evaluated too closely! Yet too little or no evaluation can create even worse problems. Strategy
evaluation is essential to ensure that stated objectives are being achieved. Strategists need to cre-
ate an organizational culture where strategy evaluation is viewed as an opportunity to make the
firm better, so the firm can compete better, and so everyone in the firm can share in the firm’s
increased profitability. This chapter reveals how to evaluate strategies.
In many organizations, strategy evaluation is simply an appraisal of how well an organiza-
tion has performed. Have the firm’s assets increased? Has there been an increase in profitabil-
ity? Have sales increased? Have productivity levels increased? Have profit margin, return on
investment, and earnings-per-share ratios increased? Some firms argue that their strategy must
have been correct if the answers to these types of questions are affirmative. Well, the strategy or
strategies may have been correct, but this type of reasoning can be misleading because strategy
evaluation must have both a long-run and short-run focus. Bad strategies may not affect short-
term operating results until it is too late to make needed changes, and excellent strategies may
take several years instead of months to produce great results.
Strategy evaluation is important because firms face dynamic environments in which key
external and internal factors often change quickly and dramatically. Success today is no guaran-
tee of success tomorrow! Joseph Stalin was a ruthless leader (from 1928 on) and premier (from
1941 on) of the Soviet Union until his death in 1953. A famous quote from Stalin was: “History
shows that there are no invincible armies.” This quote reveals that even the mightiest, most suc-
cessful firms must continually evaluate their strategies and be wary of rival organizations. A firm
should never be lulled into complacency with success. Countless firms have thrived 1 year only
to struggle for survival the following year. According to Peter Drucker, “Unless strategy evalu-
ation is performed seriously and systematically, and unless strategists are willing to act on the
results, energy will be used up defending yesterday.”
It is impossible to demonstrate conclusively that a particular strategy is optimal or even to
guarantee that it will work. But any strategy must provide for the creation or maintenance of a
competitive advantage in a selected area of activity. Competitive advantages normally are the re-
sult of superiority in one of three areas: (1) resources, (2) skills, or (3) position. The idea that the
positioning of one’s resources can enhance their combined effectiveness is familiar to military
theorists, chess players, and diplomats. Position can also play a crucial role in an organization’s
strategy. Once gained, a good position is defensible—meaning that it is so costly to capture
that rivals are deterred from full-scale attacks. Positional advantage tends to be self-sustaining
so long as the key external and internal factors that underlie it remain stable. This is why en-
trenched firms can be difficult to unseat, even if their raw skill levels are only average.1
Strategy evaluation is becoming increasingly difficult because domestic and world economies
are today more interrelated, product life cycles are shorter, technological advancements are faster,
change occurs rapidly, competitors abound globally, planning cycles are shorter, and social media
and smartphones have changed everything. A fundamental problem facing managers today is how
to effectively manage a workforce that increasingly demands fairness, openness, transparency,
flexibility, and involvement. Managers need empowered employees acting responsibly. Otherwise
the costs to companies in terms of damaged reputations, fines, missed opportunities, and diversion
of management’s attention can be enormous; bad news can spread like wildfire over social media.
Too much pressure to achieve specific goals can lead to dysfunctional behavior, as Wells Fargo
found out a few years ago putting so much pressure on their bankers opening new accounts.
Evaluating strategies on a continuous rather than on a periodic basis allows benchmarks of
progress to be established and more effectively monitored. Some strategies take years to imple-
ment; consequently, associated results may not become apparent for years. Successful strategies
combine patience with a willingness to promptly take corrective actions when necessary. There
always comes a time when corrective actions are needed in an organization! Monitoring and
managing change is vital. Centuries ago, a writer (perhaps Solomon) made the following obser-
vations about change:
There is a time for everything,
A time to be born and a time to die,
A time to plant and a time to uproot,
302 PART 4 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE
Three Strategy-Evaluation Activities Table 9-1 summarizes three strategy-evaluation activities in terms of key questions that should
be addressed, alternative answers to those questions, and appropriate actions for an organization
to take. Notice that corrective actions are almost always needed except when (1) external and in-
ternal factors have not significantly changed and (2) the firm is progressing satisfactorily toward
achieving stated objectives.
LO 9.2
GLOBAL CAPSULE 9
What Country’s New Strategy Is Called “Vision 2030”? The answer to the question is Saudi Arabia. After
reviewing the nation’s standing in the world and
measuring its performance across many variables,
Saudi Arabia is taking corrective actions under its
new strategy called “Vision 2030.” Led by Crown
Prince Mohammed bin Salman, Saudi Arabia is
engaged in massive progressive reforms, anchored
by change to anti-corruption actions. A review of
the country’s finances in late 2017 revealed that
$100+ billion had been misappropriated through
systematic corruption and embezzlement over several decades; so
208+ individuals in the country, including 17 princes, were recently
arrested and their personal bank accounts closed.
Saudi Arabia is moving to diversify its economy beyond oil by
relaxing restrictions against women and spurring tourism and trade.
Women can now drive cars and attend sporting events. Automobile
companies are eyeing about 150,000 new Saudi women driving each
year and many of them wanting their own vehicle. For example, Ford
recently hosted driving lessons in Saudi Arabia to show women how
to drive. The country is creating a transparent business environment
for investors, a thriving economy, a vibrant society, and a responsible
nation. Saudi Arabia has launched a $500 billion independent eco-
nomic zone that includes itself, Jordan, and Egypt. The Crown Prince
wants Aramco, the oil company owned by the
Saudi government, to be listed on the New
York Stock Exchange. The Crown Price is mov-
ing Saudi Arabia toward being “open to the
world and all religions.” However, women in
Saudi Arabia are still legally required to have
a male guardian’s permission to travel abroad
or marry. In stadiums and most public places,
Saudi women and men cannot comingle in
public; women are restricted to “family sec-
tions” and separate stadium entrances from men. (In Iran, women are
still banned from attending sporting events).
Saudi Arabia in 2018 began allowing movie theaters to be
constructed, lifting a decades-old ban on Hollywood-style entertain-
ment. Content within movies is censored, and it is not clear whether
men and women can comingle at the new theaters; gender seg-
regation is widely practiced everywhere in the country, but this is
changing under Vision 2030. But still many restaurants and cafes in
Saudi Arabia are open only to men, and all women must wear floor-
length gowns known as abayas outside their home.
Source: Based on Majid Al Qasabi, “Riyadh Is Delivering on Vision 2030.”
Wall Street Journal, November 13, 2017, A17.
K d o n m
u an
g /S
h u tt
er st
o ck
A time to kill and a time to heal,
A time to tear down and a time to build,
A time to weep and a time to laugh,
A time to mourn and a time to dance,
A time to scatter stones and a time to gather them,
A time to embrace and a time to refrain,
A time to search and a time to give up,
A time to keep and a time to throw away,
A time to tear and a time to mend,
A time to be silent and a time to speak,
A time to love and a time to hate,
A time for war and a time for peace.2
Managers and employees of a firm should be kept up to date regarding progress being
made toward achieving a firm’s objectives. If assumptions, expectations, or results deviate
significantly from forecasts, then strategy evaluation is needed. Evaluating strategies is like
formulating and implementing strategies in the sense that people make the difference. Through
involvement in the process of evaluating strategies, managers and employees become committed
to keeping the firm moving steadily toward achieving objectives.
As indicated in the Global Capsule 9, even countries engage in the three strategy-evaluation
activities revealed and discussed in this chapter.
CHAPTER 9 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE 303
Reviewing Bases of Strategy
Relationships among strategy-evaluation activities are illustrated in Figure 9-2. As shown,
reviewing the underlying bases of an organization’s strategy could be approached by devel-
oping a revised EFE Matrix and IFE Matrix. A revised IFE Matrix should focus on changes in
the organization’s management, marketing, finance, accounting, production, and information
systems (MIS) strengths and weaknesses. A revised EFE Matrix should indicate how effective
a firm’s strategies have been in response to key opportunities and threats. This analysis could
also address such questions as the following:
1. How have competitors reacted to our strategies?
2. How have competitors’ strategies changed?
3. Have major competitors’ strengths and weaknesses changed?
4. Why are competitors making certain strategic changes?
5. Why are some competitors’ strategies more successful than others?
6. How satisfied are our competitors with their present market positions and profitability?
7. How far can our major competitors be pushed before retaliating?
8. How could we more effectively cooperate with our competitors?
Numerous external and internal factors can prevent firms from achieving long-term and an-
nual objectives. Externally, actions by competitors, changes in demand, changes in technology,
economic changes, demographic shifts, and governmental actions may prevent objectives from
being accomplished. Internally, ineffective strategies may have been chosen or implementation
activities may have been poor. Objectives may have been too optimistic. Thus, failure to achieve
objectives may not be the result of unsatisfactory work by managers and employees. All organi-
zational members need to know this to encourage their support for strategy-evaluation activities.
Organizations desperately need to know as soon as possible when their strategies are not effec-
tive. Sometimes managers and employees on the front lines discover this well before strategists.
It is not a question of whether underlying key external and internal factors will change, but
rather when they will change and in what ways. Here are some key questions to address in evalu-
ating strategies:
1. Are our internal strengths still strengths?
2. Have we added other internal strengths? If so, what are they?
3. Are our internal weaknesses still weaknesses?
4. Do we now have other internal weaknesses? If so, what are they?
5. Are our external opportunities still opportunities?
6. Are there now other external opportunities? If so, what are they?
7. Are our external threats still threats?
8. Are there now other external threats? If so, what are they?
9. Are we vulnerable to a hostile takeover?
TABLE 9-1 A Strategy-Evaluation Assessment Matrix
Have Major Changes Occurred in the Firm’s Internal Strategic Position?
Have Major Changes Occurred in the Firm’s External Strategic Position?
Has the Firm Progressed Satisfactorily toward Achieving Its Stated Objectives? Result
No No No Take corrective actions
Yes Yes Yes Take corrective actions
Yes Yes No Take corrective actions
Yes No Yes Take corrective actions
Yes No No Take corrective actions
No Yes Yes Take corrective actions
No Yes No Take corrective actions
No No Yes Continue present strate-
gic course
304 PART 4 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE
ACTIVITY THREE: TAKE CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Continue present course
ACTIVITY TWO: MEASURE ORGANIZATIONAL PERFORMANCE
Compare planned to actual progress toward meeting stated objectives
NO
YES Do significant differences occur?
NO
YES Do significant differences occur?
Prepare revised Internal Factor Evaluation (IFE) Matrix
Compare revised to existing Internal Factor Evaluation (IFE) Matrix
Prepare revised External Factor Evaluation (EFE) Matrix
Compare revised to existing External Factor Evaluation (EFE) Matrix
ACTIVITY ONE: REVIEW UNDERLYING BASES OF STRATEGY
FIGURE 9-2
A Strategy-Evaluation Framework
Measuring Organizational Performance
Another important strategy-evaluation activity is measuring organizational performance.
This activity includes comparing expected results to actual results, investigating deviations from
plans, evaluating individual performance, and examining progress being made toward meeting
stated objectives. Both long-term and annual objectives are commonly used in this process.
Criteria for evaluating strategies should be measurable and easily verifiable. Criteria that predict
results may be more important than those that reveal what already has happened. For example,
CHAPTER 9 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE 305
rather than simply being informed that sales in the last quarter were 20 percent under what was
expected, strategists need to know that sales in the next quarter may be 20 percent below stan-
dard unless some action is taken to counter the trend. Really effective control requires accurate
forecasting.
Failure to make satisfactory progress toward accomplishing long-term or annual objectives
signals a need for corrective actions. Many factors, such as unreasonable policies, unexpected
turns in the economy, unreliable suppliers or distributors, or ineffective strategies, can result in
unsatisfactory progress toward meeting objectives. Problems can result from ineffectiveness (not
doing the right things) or inefficiency (poorly doing the right things).
Determining which objectives are most important in the evaluation of strategies can be dif-
ficult. Strategy evaluation is based on both quantitative and qualitative criteria. Selecting the
exact set of criteria for evaluating strategies depends on a particular organization’s size, industry,
strategies, and management philosophy. An organization pursuing a retrenchment strategy, for
example, could have a different set of evaluative criteria from an organization pursuing a market-
development strategy. Quantitative criteria commonly used to evaluate strategies are financial
ratios, often monitored for each segment of the firm. Strategists use financial ratios to make
three critical comparisons:
1. Compare the firm’s performance over different time periods.
2. Compare the firm’s performance to competitors.
3. Compare the firm’s performance to industry averages.
Many variables can and should be included in measuring organizational performance.
As indicated in Table 9-2, typically a favorable or unfavorable variance is recorded monthly,
quarterly, and annually, and resultant actions needed are then determined.
Potential problems are associated with using only quantitative criteria for evaluating
strategies. First, most quantitative criteria are geared to annual objectives rather than long-term
objectives. Also, different accounting methods can provide different results on many quantitative
criteria. Third, intuitive judgments are almost always involved in deriving quantitative criteria.
Thus, qualitative criteria are also important in evaluating strategies. Human factors such as high
absenteeism and turnover rates, poor production quality and quantity rates, or low employee
satisfaction can be underlying causes of declining performance. Marketing, finance, accounting,
or MIS factors can also cause financial problems. The need for a “balanced” quantitative/
qualitative approach in evaluating strategies gives rise in a moment to discussion of the balanced
scorecard.
TABLE 9-2 A Sample Framework for Assessing Organizational Performance
Factor Actual Result Expected Result Variance Action Needed
Corporate Revenues
Corporate Profits
Corporate ROI
Region 1 Revenues
Region 1 Profits
Region 1 ROI
Region 2 Revenues
Region 2 Profits
Region 2 ROI
Product 1 Revenues
Product 1 Profits
Product 1 ROI
Product 2 Revenues
Product 2 Profits
Product 2 ROI
306 PART 4 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE
Several additional key questions that reveal the need for qualitative judgments in strategy
evaluation are as follows:
1. How good is the firm’s balance of investments between high-risk and low-risk projects?
2. How good is the firm’s balance of investments between long-term and short-term projects?
3. How good is the firm’s balance of investments between slow-growing markets and
fast-growing markets?
4. How good is the firm’s balance of investments among different divisions?
5. To what extent are the firm’s alternative strategies socially responsible?
6. What are the relationships among the firm’s key internal and external strategic factors?
7. How are major competitors likely to respond to particular strategies?
Taking Corrective Actions
The final strategy-evaluation activity, taking corrective actions, requires making changes to
competitively reposition a firm for the future. As indicated in Table 9-3, examples of changes
that may be needed are altering an organization’s structure, replacing one or more key individu-
als, selling a division, or revising a business mission. Other changes could include establishing
or revising objectives, devising new policies, issuing stock to raise capital, adding additional
salespersons, allocating resources differently, or developing new performance incentives. Taking
corrective actions does not necessarily mean that existing strategies will be abandoned or even
that new strategies must be formulated.
If either the actions or results of employees, departments, or divisions do not comply with
preconceived or planned achievements, then corrective actions are needed. For example, the
U.S. iconic company General Electric (GE) is taking massive corrective actions (all 12 items
listed in Table 9-3) in 2018 to reverse severe declines in both revenues and profits over the last
few years. GE is cutting $1 billion annually in expenses through the end of 2018.
No organization can survive as an island; no organization can escape change. Taking cor-
rective actions is necessary to keep an organization on track toward achieving stated objectives.
In his thought-provoking books Future Shock and The Third Wave, Alvin Toffler argued that
business environments are becoming so dynamic and complex that they threaten people and
organizations with future shock, which occurs when the nature, types, and speed of changes
overpower an individual’s or organization’s ability and capacity to adapt. Strategy evaluation
enhances an organization’s ability to adapt successfully to changing circumstances.
Taking corrective actions raises employees’ and managers’ anxieties. Research suggests
that participation in strategy-evaluation activities is one of the best ways to overcome individu-
als’ resistance to change. According to Erez and Kanfer, individuals accept change best when
they have a cognitive understanding of the changes, a sense of control over the situation, and
an awareness that necessary actions are going to be taken to implement the changes.3 The most
TABLE 9-3 Corrective Actions Possibly Needed to Correct Unfavorable Variances
1. Alter the firm’s structure.
2. Replace one or more key individuals.
3. Divest a division.
4. Alter the firm’s vision or mission.
5. Revise objectives.
6. Alter strategies.
7. Devise new policies.
8. Install new performance incentives.
9. Raise capital with stock or debt.
10. Add or terminate salespersons, employees, or managers.
11. Allocate resources differently.
12. Outsource (or reshore) business functions.
CHAPTER 9 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE 307
successful organizations today continuously adapt to changes in the competitive environment.
It is not sufficient today to simply react to change. Managers must anticipate change and be the
creator of change.
Strategy evaluation can lead to strategy-formulation or strategy-implementation changes, or
no changes at all. Strategists cannot escape having to revise strategies and implementation ap-
proaches sooner or later. Hussey and Langham offered the following insight on taking corrective
actions:
Resistance to change is often emotionally based and not easily overcome by rational ar-
gument. Resistance may be based on such feelings as loss of status, implied criticism of
present competence, fear of failure in the new situation, annoyance at not being consulted,
lack of understanding of the need for change, or insecurity in changing from well-known
and fixed methods. It is necessary, therefore, to overcome such resistance by creating situ-
ations of participation and full explanation when changes are envisaged.4
Corrective actions should place an organization in a better position to capitalize on internal
strengths; to take advantage of key external opportunities; to avoid, reduce, or mitigate exter-
nal threats; and to improve internal weaknesses. Corrective actions should have a proper time
horizon and an appropriate amount of risk. They should be internally consistent and socially
responsible. Perhaps most important, corrective actions strengthen an organization’s competitive
position in its basic industry. Continuous strategy evaluation keeps strategists close to the pulse
of an organization and provides information needed for an effective strategic-management sys-
tem. Carter Bayles described the benefits of strategy evaluation as follows:
Evaluation activities may renew confidence in the current business strategy or point to
the need for actions to correct some weaknesses, such as erosion of product superiority
or technological edge. In many cases, the benefits of strategy evaluation are much more
far-reaching, for the outcome of the process may be a fundamentally new strategy that
will lead, even in a business that is already turning a respectable profit, to substantially
increased earnings. It is this possibility that justifies strategy evaluation, for the payoff can
be very large.5
The Balanced Scorecard Do a Google search using the keywords balanced scorecard images and you will see more than
a hundred currently used balanced scorecards. Note the wide variation in format evidenced
through the images. Developed in the early 1990s by Harvard Business School professors Robert
Kaplan and David Norton, and refined continually through today, the balanced scorecard is a
strategy evaluation and control technique. The technique is based on the need of firms to “bal-
ance” financial measures that are often used exclusively in strategy evaluation with nonfinancial
measures such as product quality, business ethics, environmental sustainability, employee mo-
rale, pollution abatement, community involvement, and customer service. The rationale behind
balanced scorecard is that financial measures report what has already happened, whereas non-
financial metrics have a tendency to better predict what will happen in the future. An effective
balanced scorecard contains a carefully chosen combination of strategic and financial objectives
tailored to the company’s business.
As a tool to manage and evaluate strategy, the balanced scorecard is currently in use at
United Parcel Service, 3M Corporation, Heinz, and hundreds of other firms. For example,
3M Corporation has a financial objective to achieve annual growth in earnings per share of 10
percent or better, as well as a strategic objective to have at least 30 percent of sales come from
products introduced in the past 4 years. The overall aim of a balanced scorecard is to “balance”
shareholder objectives with customer and operational objectives. These sets of objectives inter-
relate and many even conflict. For example, customers want low price and high service, which
may conflict with shareholders’ desire for a high return on their investment.
A sample balanced scorecard is provided in Table 9-4. Notice that the firm examines six
key issues in evaluating its strategies: (1) Customers, (2) Managers/Employees, (3) Operations/
Processes, (4) Community/Social Responsibility, (5) Business Ethics/Natural Environment, and
LO 9.3
308 PART 4 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE
(6) Financial. The balanced scorecard approach to strategy evaluation aims to balance long-
term with short-term concerns, to balance financial with nonfinancial concerns, and to balance
internal with external concerns. The balanced scorecard could be constructed differently—that
is, adapted to particular firms in various industries with the underlying theme or thrust being the
same, which is to evaluate the firm’s strategies based on both key quantitative and qualitative
measures. Companies strive to achieve both quantitative and qualitative objectives all along their
value chain, from end-users to raw materials, as discussed in Chapter 5.
Boards of Directors: Governance Issues A board of directors is a group of individuals at the top of an organization with oversight and
guidance over management and who look out for shareholders’ interests. The act of oversight
and direction is referred to as governance. The National Association of Corporate Directors de-
fines governance as “the characteristic of ensuring that long-term strategic objectives and plans
are established and that the proper management structure is in place to achieve those objectives,
while at the same time making sure that the structure functions to maintain the corporation’s
integrity, reputation, and responsibility to its various constituencies.” Boards are held account-
able for the entire performance of an organization. Boards of directors are increasingly sued by
shareholders for mismanaging their interests. New accounting rules in the United States and
LO 9.4
TABLE 9-4 An Example Balanced Scorecard
Area of Objectives Measure or Target Time Expectation Primary Responsibility
Customers
1.
2.
3.
4.
Managers/Employees
1.
2.
3.
4.
Operations/Processes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Community/Social Responsibility
1.
2.
3.
4.
Business Ethics/Natural Environment
1.
2.
3.
4.
Financial
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHAPTER 9 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE 309
Europe now enhance corporate-governance codes and require much more extensive financial
disclosure among publicly held firms. The roles and duties of a board of directors can be divided
into four broad categories, as indicated in Table 9-5.
Shareholders are increasingly wary of boards of directors. Most directors globally have
ended their image as rubber-stamping friends of CEOs. Boards are more autonomous than ever
and continually mindful of and responsive to legal and institutional-investor scrutiny. Boards
are more cognizant of auditing and compliance issues and more reluctant to approve excessive
compensation and perks. Boards stay much more abreast today of public scandals that attract
shareholder and media attention. Increasingly, boards of directors monitor and review executive
performance carefully without favoritism to executives, representing shareholders rather than
the CEO. Boards are more proactive today, whereas in years past they were often merely reac-
tive. These are all reasons why the chair of the board of directors should not also serve as the
firm’s CEO. In North America, the number of new incoming CEOs that also serve as Chair of
the Board has declined to about 10 percent today from about 50 percent 15 years ago.
Until recently, individuals serving on boards of directors did most of their work sitting around
polished mahogany tables. However, Hewlett-Packard’s directors, among many others, now log
on to their own special board website twice a week and conduct business based on extensive con-
fidential briefing information posted there by the firm’s top management team. Then the board
members meet face to face fully informed every 2 months to discuss the biggest issues facing the
firm. New board involvement policies are aimed at curtailing lawsuits against board members.
TABLE 9-5 Board of Director Duties and Responsibilities
1. CONTROL AND OVERSIGHT OVER MANAGEMENT
a. Select the Chief Executive Officer (CEO).
b. Sanction the CEO’s team.
c. Provide the CEO with a forum.
d. Ensure managerial competency.
e. Evaluate management’s performance.
f. Set management’s salary levels, including fringe benefits.
g. Guarantee managerial integrity through continuous auditing.
h. Evaluate corporate strategies.
i. Devise and revise policies to be implemented by management.
2. ADHERENCE TO LEGAL PRESCRIPTIONS
a. Keep abreast of new laws.
b. Ensure the entire organization fulfills legal prescriptions.
c. Pass bylaws and related resolutions.
d. Select new directors.
e. Approve capital budgets.
f. Authorize borrowing, new stock issues, bonds, and so on.
3. CONSIDERATION OF STAKEHOLDERS’ INTERESTS
a. Monitor product quality.
b. Facilitate upward progression in employee quality of work life.
c. Review labor policies and practices.
d. Improve the customer climate.
e. Keep community relations at the highest level.
f. Use influence to better governmental, professional association, and educational contacts.
g. Maintain good public image.
4. ADVANCEMENT OF STOCKHOLDERS’ RIGHTS
a. Preserve stockholders’ equity.
b. Stimulate corporate growth so that the firm will survive and flourish.
c. Guard against equity dilution.
d. Ensure equitable stockholder representation.
e. Inform stockholders through letters, reports, and meetings.
f. Declare proper dividends.
g. Guarantee corporate survival.
h. Guarantee the firm’s financial statements are feasible and accurate.
310 PART 4 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE
Research reveals that companies with fewer board members outperform larger boards,
largely because having fewer directors facilitates deeper debates, more nimble decision making,
and greater accountability.6 Also, among companies with a market capitalization of at least $10
billion, smaller boards produced substantially higher shareholder returns. Specifically, 9-person
boards perform much better, for example, than 14- to 15-member boards. Thus, many companies
are reducing their number of board members. As part of a major restructuring, GE recently re-
duced the size of its board from 18 to 12. This change brings GE more in line with the national
average of 10.9 board members per U.S. firm with a market capitalization of at least $10 billion.
Another benefit of fewer board members is that CEOs are more often reprimanded (or dis-
missed) if needed. Dr. David Yermack, a finance professor at New York University’s business
school, reports that smaller boards are generally more decisive, more cohesive, more hands-on,
and have more informal meetings and fewer committees. Netflix is another example of a com-
pany with a small board, only 7 members, who debate extensively before approving important
management moves. Netflix is doing great. In contrast, Eli Lilly & Co. has 14 board members
who find it “too big to encourage the kinds of discussions you want, because drilling down on
different issues simply takes too long; members feel constrained even asking a second or third
question.” Bank of America has 15 directors—too many to be efficient. In addition, the chair
of the board should rarely, if ever, be the same person as the CEO, as discussed. In summary,
companies should seek to reduce their board of directors to fewer than 10 persons, whenever
possible—and strategy students should examine this issue in their assigned case companies.
Today, boards of directors are composed mostly of outsiders who are becoming more in-
volved in organizations’ strategic management. The trend in the United States is toward much
greater board member accountability with smaller boards, now averaging 11 members rather
than 18 as they did a few years ago. An executive recruitment firm, Spencer Stuart, reported in
late 2017 that women and minorities account for half of the 397 newest independent board of
directors’ members at S&P 500 companies—the first time this has ever occurred; women made
up 36 percent of new directors appointed. Spencer Stuart also reports that more than half of S&P
companies now have split the roles of chairman and CEO.
BusinessWeek provides the following “principles of good governance”:
1. Never have more than two of the firm’s executives (current or past) on the board.
2. Never allow a firm’s executives to serve on the board’s audit, compensation, or nominating
committee.
3. Require all board members to own a large amount of the firm’s equity.
4. Require all board members to attend at least 75 percent of all meetings.
5. Require the board to meet annually to evaluate its own performance, without the CEO,
COO, or top management in attendance.
6. Never allow the CEO to be chairperson of the board.
7. Never allow interlocking directorships (where a director or CEO sits on another director’s
board).7
Jeff Sonnerfeld, associate dean of the Yale School of Management, comments, “Boards of
directors are now rolling up their sleeves and becoming much more closely involved with man-
agement decision making.” Company CEOs and boards are required to personally certify finan-
cial statements; company loans to company executives and directors are illegal; and there is faster
reporting of insider stock transactions. Just as directors place more emphasis on staying informed
about an organization’s health and operations, they are also taking a more active role in ensuring
that publicly issued documents are accurate representations of a firm’s status. Failure to accept
responsibility for auditing or evaluating a firm’s strategy is considered a serious breach of a di-
rector’s duties. Legal suits are becoming more common against directors for fraud, omissions,
inaccurate disclosures, lack of due diligence, and culpable ignorance about a firm’s operations.
Challenges in Strategic Management Four particular challenges that face all strategists today are (1) deciding whether the process
should be more an art or a science, (2) deciding whether strategies should be visible or hidden
from stakeholders, (3) contingency planning, and (4) auditing.
LO 9.5
CHAPTER 9 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE 311
The Art or Science Issue
This book is consistent with most of the strategy literature in advocating that strategic manage-
ment be viewed more as a science than an art. This perspective contends that firms need to
systematically assess their external and internal environments, conduct research, carefully evalu-
ate the pros and cons of various alternatives, perform analyses, and then decide on a particular
course of action. In contrast, Mintzberg’s notion of “crafting” strategies embodies the artistic
model, which suggests that strategic decision making be based primarily on holistic thinking,
intuition, creativity, and imagination.8 Mintzberg and his followers reject strategies that result
from objective analysis, preferring instead subjective imagination. In contrast, “strategy sci-
entists” reject strategies that emerge from emotion, hunch, creativity, and politics. Proponents
of the artistic view often consider strategic planning exercises to be time poorly spent. The
Mintzberg philosophy insists on informality, whereas strategy scientists (including this text’s au-
thors) insist on more formality. Mintzberg refers to strategic planning as an “emergent” process,
whereas strategy scientists use the term deliberate process.9
The answer to the art-versus-science question is one that strategists must decide for
themselves, and certainly the two approaches are not mutually exclusive. The CEO of Williams-
Sonoma, Laura Alber, recently stated, “I’ve found that the very best solutions arise from a
willingness to blend art with science, ideas with data, and instinct with analysis.” In deciding
which approach is more effective, however, consider that the business world today has become
increasingly complex and more intensely competitive. There is less room for error in strategic
planning. Recall that Chapter 1 discussed the importance of intuition, experience, and subjec-
tivity in strategic planning, and even the weights and ratings discussed in Chapters 3, 4, and
6 certainly require good judgment. But the idea of deciding on strategies for any firm without
thorough research and analysis, at least in the mind of these authors, is unwise. Certainly, in
smaller firms there can be more informality in the process compared to larger firms, but even for
smaller firms, a wealth of competitive information is available on the Internet and elsewhere and
should be collected, assimilated, and evaluated before deciding on a course of action on which
survival of the firm may hinge. The livelihood of countless employees and shareholders may
hinge on the effectiveness of strategies selected. Too much is at stake to be less than thorough in
formulating strategies. It is not wise for a strategist to rely too heavily on gut feeling and opinion
instead of research data, competitive intelligence, and analysis in formulating strategies.
The Visible or Hidden Issue
An interesting aspect of any competitive analysis discussion is whether strategies themselves
should be secret or open within firms. The mini-case near the end of this chapter examines this
issue for TJX Companies, a secretive company. The Chinese warrior Sun Tzu and military lead-
ers today strive to keep strategies secret, because war is based on deception. But for business
organizations, secrecy may not be best. Keeping strategies secret from employees and stakehold-
ers at large could severely inhibit employee and stakeholder communication, understanding, and
commitment, as well as forgo valuable input that these persons could have regarding formulation
or implementation of those strategies. As indicated in the Ethics Capsule 9, CEO Bipul Sinha
considers transparency to be the key to his company’s success.
Strategists must decide for themselves whether the risk of rival firms easily knowing and
exploiting a firm’s strategies is worth the benefit of improved employee and stakeholder motiva-
tion and input. Most executives agree that some strategic information should remain confidential
to top managers and that steps should be taken to ensure that such information is not dissemi-
nated beyond the inner circle. For a firm that you may own or manage, would you advocate more
openness or secrecy in regard to strategies being formulated and implemented?
There are excellent reasons to keep the strategy process and strategies themselves visible
and open rather than hidden and secret. There are also excellent reasons to keep strategies hid-
den from all but top-level executives. Strategists must decide for themselves what is best for
their firms. This text comes down largely on the side of being visible and open, but certainly this
may not be best for all strategists and all firms. As pointed out in Chapter 1, Sun Tzu argued that
all war is based on deception and that the best maneuvers are those not easily predicted by rivals.
Business and war are analogous in many respects.
312 PART 4 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE
ETHICS CAPSULE 9
Achieving Exemplary Business Ethics through Exemplary Transparency
Based in Palo Alto, California, Rubrik is a data management com-
pany whose CEO, Bipul Sinha, has established a culture of complete
openness as a means of achieving superior business ethics. Sinha
believes extreme honesty helps create a strong corporate culture
that spurs entrepreneurism, innovativeness, motivation, commit-
ment, and integrity. Even the company’s board of director meetings
are completely open to all 600 of the company’s employees, and
most employees either attend in person or teleconference to listen,
view, and ask questions. The only aspect of company operations off
limits or secret within the firm is confidential client information. In
contrast to Rubrik’s transparency, GE’s board of directors did not
know until Wall Street Journal reported it in 2017 that their former
CEO Jeff Immelt had an extra jet follow his corporate jet on many of
his overseas trips during his 16-year tenure as CEO. Immelt resigned
days after the disclosure.
An increasing number of companies and organizations are in
fact providing employees with regular updates on how the firm is
doing financially and what, where, when, and why. Even among
private (not public) companies, 43 percent of all private firms today
share financial information with all employees, up from 24 percent
in 2012. That is nearly a 100 percent increase. Greater communica-
tion yields greater understanding that leads to greater commitment
that results in higher performance.
Source: Based on: John Simons, “A Startup Where Board Meetings Are
Open to All,” Wall Street Journal, October 30, 2017, R11. Also, Thomas
Gryta, Joann Lublin, and Mark Maremont, “GE Board in Dark on CEO’s
Use of Extra Jet,” Wall Street Journal, October 30, 2017, B1.
We Are All in This Together
Four reasons to be primarily open with the strategy process and resultant decisions are
these:
1. Managers, employees, and other stakeholders can readily contribute to the process. They
often have excellent ideas. Secrecy would forgo many excellent ideas.
2. Investors, creditors, and other stakeholders have greater basis for supporting a firm when
they know what the firm is doing and where the firm is going.
3. Visibility promotes democracy, whereas secrecy promotes autocracy. Domestic firms and
most foreign firms prefer democracy over autocracy as a management style.
4. Participation and openness enhance understanding, commitment, and communication
within the firm.
Four reasons why some firms prefer to conduct strategic planning in secret and keep strate-
gies hidden from all but the highest-level executives are as follows:
1. Free dissemination of a firm’s strategies may easily translate into competitive intelligence
for rival firms who could exploit the firm given that information.
2. Secrecy limits criticism, second-guessing, and hindsight.
3. Participants in a visible strategy process become more attractive to rival firms who may
lure them away.
4. Secrecy limits rival firms from imitating or duplicating the firm’s strategies and undermin-
ing the firm.
The obvious benefits of the visible versus hidden extremes suggest that a working balance
must be sought between the apparent contradictions. Parnell says that in a perfect world all key
individuals both inside and outside the firm should be involved in strategic planning, but in prac-
tice, particularly sensitive and confidential information should always remain strictly confiden-
tial to top managers.10 This balancing act is difficult but essential for survival of the firm.
Promote Workplace Democracy
Employees at more and more companies are voting on more and more issues. For example,
employees at InContext Solutions recently voted on whether to play music in office common
areas. Employees at Whole Foods Market and at MediaMath Inc. vote quite often on issues.
P re
ss m
as te
r/ S
h u tt
er st
o ck
CHAPTER 9 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE 313
Research suggests that giving employees a voice or vote on even small issues such as holiday
parties helps to spark loyalty to the company. InContext employees recently voted on whether to
have cubicles or open tables and even on which brews to keep in the company keg. MediaMath
employees recently voted on which new headquarters location they prefer to relocate.
Whole Foods employees vote on whether to keep new employees beyond a trial period of up
to 90 days. Menlo Innovations employees vote on job applicants after observing how candidates
work during a trial period. 1Sale.com employees recently voted to do away with free lunches
in favor of lower health-insurance premiums. Social Tables Inc. employees recently voted on
the company’s core values, as well as the company’s conference-room themes and the company
theme song played at corporate events. The strategic decision at hand for many companies
increasingly is the extent to allow or encourage employee voting on numerous large and small
issues that affect workplace productivity and morale.
A 2017 Wall Street Journal article titled “Pay is Less Secretive in Millennial Workforce”
reveals that in this day and age of sharing social contacts, pictures, and videos, millennials are
issuing in a new corporate culture of democracy and openness (rather than secrecy), even with
compensation systems. Research reveals that roughly one-third of U.S. workers ages 18 to 36
say they are comfortable discussing pay with their coworkers, unlike baby boomers, ages 53 to
71, who are four times more likely to want to keep pay secret. More than half of all millennials
talk about pay with their friends whether pay is secret or not.
Contingency Planning
A basic premise of excellent strategic management is that firms strive to be proactive, planning
ways to deal with unfavorable and favorable events before they occur. Too many organizations
prepare contingency plans just for unfavorable events; this is a mistake because both minimizing
threats and capitalizing on opportunities can improve a firm’s competitive position.
Regardless of how carefully strategies are formulated, implemented, and evaluated,
unforeseen events, such as strikes, boycotts, natural disasters, arrival of foreign competitors, and
government actions, can make a strategy obsolete. To minimize the impact of potential threats,
organizations should develop contingency plans as part of their strategy-evaluation process.
Contingency plans can be defined as alternative plans that can be put into effect if certain key
events do not occur as expected. Only high-priority areas require the insurance of contingency
plans. Strategists cannot and should not try to cover all bases by planning for all possible contin-
gencies. But in any case, contingency plans should be as simple as possible.
Some contingency plans commonly established by firms include the following:
1. If a major competitor withdraws from particular markets as intelligence reports indicate,
what actions should our firm take?
2. If our sales objectives are not reached, what actions should our firm take to avoid profit losses?
3. If demand for our new product exceeds plans, what actions should our firm take to meet the
higher demand?
4. If certain disasters occur—such as loss of computer capabilities; a hostile takeover attempt;
loss of patent protection; or destruction of manufacturing facilities because of earthquakes,
tornadoes, or hurricanes—what actions should our firm take?
5. If a new technological advancement makes our new product obsolete sooner than expected,
what actions should our firm take?
Too many organizations discard alternative strategies not selected for implementation
although the work devoted to analyzing these options would render valuable information.
Alternative strategies not selected for implementation can serve as contingency plans in case
the strategy or strategies selected do not work. When strategy-evaluation activities reveal the
need for a major change quickly, an appropriate contingency plan can be executed in a timely
way. Contingency plans can promote a strategist’s ability to respond quickly to key changes in
the internal and external bases of an organization’s current strategy. For example, if underly-
ing assumptions about the economy turn out to be wrong and contingency plans are ready,
then managers can make appropriate changes promptly. Sometimes, external or internal con-
ditions present unexpected opportunities. When such opportunities occur, contingency plans
could allow an organization to quickly capitalize on them. Linneman and Chandran report that
314 PART 4 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE
contingency planning gives users, such as DuPont, Dow Chemical, Consolidated Foods, and
Emerson Electric, three major benefits, as follows:
1. It enables quick responses to change.
2. It prevents panic in crisis situations.
3. It makes managers more adaptable by encouraging them to appreciate just how variable the
future can be.
In addition, Linneman and Chandran suggest that effective contingency planning involves a
five-step process, as follows:
1. Identify both good and bad events that could jeopardize strategies.
2. Determine when the good and bad events are likely to occur.
3. Determine the expected pros and cons of each contingency event.
4. Develop contingency plans for key contingency events.
5. Determine early warning trigger points for key contingency events.11
Auditing
A frequently used tool in strategy evaluation is the audit. Auditing is defined by the American
Accounting Association (AAA) as “a systematic process of objectively obtaining and evaluating
evidence regarding assertions about economic actions and events to ascertain the degree of cor-
respondence between these assertions and established criteria, and communicating the results to
interested users.”12
Auditors examine the financial statements of firms to determine whether they have been
prepared according to generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) and whether they
fairly represent the activities of the firm. Independent auditors use a set of standards called gen-
erally accepted auditing standards (GAAS). Public accounting firms often have a consulting
arm that provides strategy-evaluation services.
The new era of international financial reporting standards (IFRS) is approaching in the
United States, and businesses need to go ahead and get ready to use IFRS. Many U.S. companies
now report their finances using both the old GAAP and the new IFRS. “If companies don’t prepare,
if they don’t start three years in advance,” warns business professor Donna Street at the University
of Dayton, “they’re going to be in big trouble.” The GAAP standards are comprised of 25,000
pages, whereas the IFRS comprises only 5,000 pages, so in that sense IFRS is less cumbersome.
Most large accounting firms and multinational firms favor the switch to IFRS, saying it
will simplify accounting, make it easier for investors to compare firms across countries, and
make it easier to raise capital globally. But many smaller firms oppose the upcoming change,
believing it will be too costly; some firms are uneasy about the idea of giving an international
body the authority to write accounting rules for the United States. Some firms also would pay
higher taxes because last in, first out (LIFO) inventory methods are not allowed under IFRS.
The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) has publicly expressed “regret” over the
slowness in the United States of adopting IFRS.
The U.S. Chamber of Commerce supports a change, saying it will lead to much more cross-
border commerce and will help the United States compete in the world economy. Already the
European Union and 113 nations have adopted or soon plan to use international rules, including
Australia, China, India, Mexico, and Canada. So, the United States is likely to adopt IFRS rules,
but this switch could unleash a legal and regulatory nightmare. A few U.S. multinational firms
already use IFRS for their foreign subsidiaries, such as United Technologies (UT), which derives
more than 60 percent of its revenues from abroad and is already training its entire staff to use IFRS.
Guidelines for Effective Strategic Management Failing to follow certain guidelines in conducting strategic management can foster criticisms of
the process and create problems for the organization. Issues such as “Is strategic management
in our firm a people process or a paper process?” should be addressed. Some organizations
spend an inordinate amount of time developing a strategic plan, but then fail to follow through
with effective implementation. Change and results in a firm come through implementation,
not through formulation, although effective formulation is critically important for successful
LO 9.6
CHAPTER 9 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE 315
implementation. Continual evaluation of strategies is also essential because the world changes
so rapidly that existing strategies can need modifying often.
Strategic management must not become a self-perpetuating bureaucratic mechanism.
Rather, it must be a self-reflective learning process that familiarizes managers and employees
in the organization with key strategic issues and feasible alternatives for resolving those issues.
Strategic management must not become ritualistic, stilted, orchestrated, or too formal, predict-
able, and rigid. Words supported by numbers, rather than numbers supported by words, should
represent the medium for explaining strategic issues and organizational responses. A key role of
strategists is to facilitate continuous organizational learning and change.
R. T. Lenz offers six guidelines for effective strategic management:
1. Keep the process simple and easily understandable.
2. Eliminate vague planning jargon.
3. Keep the process nonroutine; vary assignments, team membership, meeting formats, set-
tings, and even the planning calendar.
4. Welcome bad news and encourage devil’s advocate thinking.
5. Do not allow technicians to monopolize the planning process.
6. To the extent possible, involve managers from all areas of the firm.13
An important guideline for effective strategic management is open-mindedness. A willingness
and eagerness to consider new information, new viewpoints, new ideas, and new possibilities is
essential; all organizational members must share a spirit of inquiry and learning. Strategists such
as chief executive officers, presidents, owners of small businesses, and heads of government agen-
cies must commit themselves to listen to and understand managers’ positions well enough to be
able to restate those positions to the managers’ satisfaction. In addition, managers and employees
throughout the firm should be able to describe the firm’s strategies to the satisfaction of the strate-
gists. This degree of discipline will promote understanding and learning.
Strategy-evaluation activities must be economical; too much information can be just as
bad as too little information, and too many controls can do more harm than good. Strategy-
evaluation activities also should be meaningful; they should specifically relate to a firm’s objec-
tives. They should provide managers with useful information about tasks over which they have
control and influence. Strategy-evaluation activities should provide timely information; on occa-
sion and in some areas, managers may need information on a daily or even continuous basis. For
example, when a firm has diversified by acquiring another firm, evaluative information may be
needed frequently. In contrast, in a research-and-development (R&D) department, daily or even
weekly evaluative information could be unnecessary. Approximate information that is timely is
generally more desirable as a basis for strategy evaluation than accurate information that does
not depict the present. Frequent measurement and rapid reporting may frustrate control rather
than give better control. The time dimension of control must coincide with the time span of the
event being measured.
Strategy-evaluation processes should be designed to provide a true picture of what is
happening. For example, in a severe economic downturn, productivity and profitability ratios
may drop alarmingly, although employees and managers are actually working harder. Strategy
evaluations should fairly portray this type of situation. Information derived from the strategy-
evaluation process should facilitate action and should be directed to those individuals in the
organization who need to take action based on it. Managers commonly ignore evaluative reports
that are provided only for informational purposes; not all managers need to receive all reports.
Controls need to be action-oriented rather than information-oriented. The strategy-evaluation
process should not dominate decisions; it should foster mutual understanding, trust, and com-
mon sense. No department should fail to cooperate with another in evaluating strategies.
Strategy evaluations should be simple, not too cumbersome, and not too restrictive. Complex
strategy-evaluation systems often confuse people and accomplish little. The test of an effective
evaluation system is its usefulness, not its complexity.
Large organizations require a more elaborate and detailed strategy-evaluation system be-
cause it is more difficult to coordinate efforts among different divisions and functional areas.
Managers in small companies often communicate daily with each other and their employees and
do not need extensive evaluative reporting systems. Familiarity with local environments usually
makes gathering and evaluating information much easier for small organizations than for large
businesses. But the key to an effective strategy-evaluation system may be the ability to convince
316 PART 4 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE
participants that failure to accomplish certain objectives within a prescribed time is not necessar-
ily a reflection of their performance.
There is no one ideal strategy-evaluation system. The unique aspects of an organiza-
tion, including its size, management style, purpose, problems, and strengths, can determine a
strategy-evaluation and control system’s final design. Robert Waterman offered the following
observation about successful organizations’ strategy-evaluation and control systems:
Successful companies treat facts as friends and controls as liberating. Morgan Guaranty
and Wells Fargo not only survive but thrive in the troubled waters of bank deregulation,
because their strategy evaluation and control systems are sound, their risk is contained, and
they know themselves and the competitive situation so well. Successful companies have
a voracious hunger for facts. They see information where others see only data. Successful
companies maintain tight, accurate financial controls. Their people don’t regard controls
as an imposition of autocracy but as the benign checks and balances that allow them to be
creative and free.14
No organization has unlimited resources. No firm can take on an unlimited amount of debt
or issue an unlimited amount of stock to raise capital. Therefore, no organization can pursue all
the strategies that potentially could benefit the firm. Strategic decisions, then, always have to be
made to eliminate some courses of action and to allocate organizational resources among oth-
ers. Most organizations can afford to pursue only a few corporate-level strategies at any given
time. It is a critical mistake for managers to pursue too many strategies at the same time, thereby
spreading the firm’s resources so thin that all strategies are jeopardized.
Strategic decisions require tradeoffs such as long-range versus short-range considerations or
maximizing profits versus increasing shareholders’ wealth. There are ethics issues, too. Strategy
tradeoffs require subjective judgments and preferences. In many cases, a lack of objectivity in
formulating strategy results in a loss of competitive posture and profitability. Most organiza-
tions today recognize that strategic-management concepts and techniques can enhance the
effectiveness of decisions. Subjective factors such as attitudes toward risk, concern for social
responsibility, and organizational culture will always affect strategy-formulation decisions, but
organizations need to be as objective as possible in considering qualitative factors. Table 9-6
summarizes important guidelines for the strategic-planning process to be effective.
TABLE 9-6 17 Guidelines for the Strategic-Planning Process to Be Effective
1. It should be a people process more than a paper process.
2. It should be a learning process for all managers and employees.
3. It should be words supported by numbers rather than numbers supported by words.
4. It should be simple, non-routine, economical, and provide timely information.
5. It should vary assignments, team memberships, meeting formats, and even the planning
calendar.
6. It should challenge the assumptions underlying the current corporate strategy.
7. It should welcome bad news and provide a true picture of what is happening.
8. It should welcome open-mindedness and a spirit of inquiry and learning.
9. It should not be a bureaucratic mechanism.
10. It should not become ritualistic, stilted, or orchestrated.
11. It should not be too formal, predictable, or rigid.
12. It should not contain jargon or arcane planning language.
13. It should not be a formal system for control and should not dominate decisions.
14. It should not disregard qualitative information.
15. It should not be controlled by “technicians.”
16. Do not pursue too many strategies at once.
17. Continually strengthen the “good ethics is good business” policy.
CHAPTER 9 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE 317
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS
Figure 9-3 reveals on the far left that strategists must systematically,
continuously, and carefully evaluate and monitor results by product,
region, territory, segment, store, department, and even by indi-
vidual, so that timely corrective actions can be taken to keep the
firm on track. Quarterly, weekly, and even daily, companies have to
adapt to changes that occur externally and internally, because even
the best strategic plan needs periodic adjusting as rival firms adjust
and launch new initiatives and products in new areas. As described
in this chapter, the balanced scorecard is widely used by strategists
to help manage the strategy-evaluation process.
Establish A Clear Vision & Mission
Evaluate & Monitor Results:
Take Corrective Actions; Adapt
To Change
Gain & Sustain Competitive Advantages
Formulate Strategies: Collect, Analyze, &
Prioritize Data Using Matrices; Establish A Clear Strategic Plan
Implement Strategies: Establish Structure; Allocate Resources; Motivate & Reward; Attract Customers; Manage Finances
FIGURE 9-3
How to Gain and Sustain Competitive Advantages
In performing your case analysis, develop and present a balanced
scorecard that you recommend to help your firm monitor and
evaluate progress toward stated objectives. Effective, timely evalu-
ation of strategies can enable a firm to adapt quickly to changing
conditions, and a balanced scorecard can assist in this endeavor.
Couch your discussion of the balanced scorecard in terms of com-
petitive advantages versus rival firms.
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS
318 PART 4 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE
Chapter Summary Effective strategy evaluation allows an organization to capitalize on internal strengths as they de-
velop, to exploit external opportunities as they emerge, to recognize and defend against threats,
and to mitigate or improve weaknesses before they become detrimental.
Strategists in successful organizations take the time to formulate, implement, and then eval-
uate strategies deliberately and systematically. Good strategists move their organization forward
with purpose and direction, continually evaluating and improving the firm’s external and internal
strategic positions. Strategy evaluation allows an organization to shape its own future rather than
allowing it to be constantly shaped by remote forces that have little or no vested interest in the
well-being of the enterprise.
Although not a guarantee for success, strategic management allows organizations to make
effective long-term decisions, to execute those decisions efficiently, and to take corrective
actions as needed to ensure success. Computer networks and the Internet help to coordinate
strategic-management activities and to ensure that decisions are based on good information. A
key to effective strategy evaluation and to successful strategic management is an integration of
intuition and analysis.
A potentially fatal problem is the tendency for analytical and intuitive issues to polarize.
This polarization leads to strategy evaluation that is dominated by either analysis or intuition,
or to strategy evaluation that is discontinuous, with a lack of coordination among analytical and
intuitive issues. Strategists in successful organizations realize that strategic management is first
and foremost a people process. It is an excellent vehicle for fostering organizational communica-
tion. People are what make the difference in organizations.
The real key to effective strategic management is to accept the premise that the planning
process is more important than the written plan, that the manager is continuously planning and
does not stop planning when the written plan is finished. The written plan is only a snapshot as
of the moment it is approved. If the manager is not planning on a continuous basis—planning,
measuring, and revising—the written plan can become obsolete the day it is finished.
Key Terms and Concepts auditing (p. 314)
balanced scorecard (p. 307)
board of directors (p. 308)
contingency plans (p. 313)
future shock (p. 306)
generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) (p. 314)
generally accepted auditing standards (GAAS) (p. 314)
governance (p. 308)
international financial reporting standards (IFRS) (p. 314)
measuring organizational performance (p. 304)
reviewing the underlying bases of an organization’s
strategy (p. 303)
revised EFE Matrix (p. 303)
revised IFE Matrix (p. 303)
taking corrective actions (p. 306)
9-1. Do a Google search using the terms balanced scorecard
images. Review the many different formats of the bal-
anced scorecard currently being used by organizations.
Decide on three formats that you believe are particu-
larly effective.
9-2. Do a Google search using the terms balanced score-
card adopters. Review the many different organizations
currently using the balanced scorecard as part of their
strategic planning. Select three different companies or
organizations. Compare and contrast their use of the
balanced scorecard technique.
Issues for Review and Discussion
CHAPTER 9 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE 319
9-3. Give several hypothetical situations whereby a company
should establish contingency plans.
9-4. Explain why companies continually evaluate their
strategies, rather than waiting for the end of the
quarter or fiscal year to engage in the three core
strategy evaluation activities discussed in this
chapter.
9-5. Which of the three core strategy-evaluation activities
do you think is most critical to be performed well?
Why?
9-6. If a firm has two regions and two products, develop
a sample framework for measuring organizational
performance.
9-7. Compare strategy formulation with strategy implemen-
tation in terms of each being an art or a science.
9-8. What is Saudi Arabia doing after evaluating strategies
for that country?
9-9. How does an organization know if it is pursuing “opti-
mal” strategies?
9-10. Discuss the nature and implications of the upcoming
accounting switch from GAAP to IFRS in the United
States.
9-11. Ask an accounting professor at your college or univer-
sity the following question and report back to the class:
“To what extent would my learning the IFRS standards
on my own give me competitive advantage in the job
market?”
9-12. Evaluating strategies on a continuous rather than a pe-
riodic basis is desired. Discuss the pros and cons of this
statement.
9-13. Why has strategy evaluation become so important in
business today?
9-14. What types of quantitative and qualitative criteria
should be used to evaluate a company’s strategy?
9-15. As owner of a local, independent barbecue restau-
rant, explain how you would evaluate the firm’s
strategy.
9-16. Under what conditions are corrective actions not re-
quired in the strategy-evaluation process?
9-17. Identify types of organizations that may need to evalu-
ate strategy more frequently than others. Justify your
choices.
9-18. As executive director of the local Chamber of
Commerce, in what way and how frequently would you
evaluate the organization’s strategies?
9-19. Identify some key financial ratios that would be impor-
tant in evaluating a bank’s strategy.
9-20. Strategy evaluation allows an organization to take a pro-
active stance toward shaping its own future. Discuss the
meaning of this statement.
9-21. Diagram and discuss the balanced scorecard.
9-22. Develop a balanced scorecard for a local movie cinema
complex.
9-23. Do you believe strategic management is more an art or
a science? Explain.
9-24. Regarding the strategic-planning process, give four
“should be” guidelines and four “should not be”
guidelines.
9-25. Researchers say contingency planning is a five-step pro-
cess. Identify and discuss the five steps.
9-26. Identify and discuss five characteristics of effective
strategy evaluation.
9-27. Identify and discuss four reasons to be open (visible)
in regard to the strategic-planning process and
outcomes.
9-28. Identify and discuss four reasons to be closed (secret) in
regard to the strategic-planning process and outcomes.
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
SET 1: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR COCA-COLA
EXERCISE 9A
Develop a Balanced Scorecard for Coca-Cola
Purpose
Balanced scorecards are widely used by companies to “balance” their financial with nonfinancial
objectives. Do a Google search using the phrase “Coca-Cola balanced scorecard” or “balanced score-
card images” or “balanced scorecard examples” to see examples.
Instructions
Step 1 Prepare a new and improved balanced scorecard for Coca-Cola.
Step 2 Explain why your recommended balanced scorecard is best for Coca-Cola.
320 PART 4 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE
SET 2: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR MY UNIVERSITY
EXERCISE 9B
Prepare a Strategy Evaluation Report for My University
Purpose
Virtually all institutions of higher learning monitor financial and other operating ratios such as those
listed here, and take appropriate correction actions as needed to address unfavorable variances. Be
mindful that all companies and organizations, even colleges, develop unique sets of ratios to measure
performance.
Ratios Monitored by Colleges and Universities Actual Value Expected Value Variance
1. Tuition monies ($) received per student (#)
2. Number of students (#) per faculty (#)
3. Number of faculty (#) per grant monies ($) received
4. Contributions ($) per contributor (#)
5. Number of male students (#) per total of students (#)
6. Number of female students (#) per total of students (#)
7. Number of minority students (#) per total of students (#)
8. Number of international students (#) per total of students (#)
9. Increase/decrease (%) in number of students (#)
10. Increase/decrease (%) in number of out-of-state students (#)
11. Increase/decrease (%) in number of international students (#)
12. Increase/decrease (%) in number of minority students (%)
13. Long-term debt ($) to total assets ($)
14. Current assets ($) to current liabilities ($)
15. Number of business students (#) per total students (#)
16. Number of out-of-state students (#) per total students (#)
17. Growth/decline (%) in number of MBA students (#)
18. Growth/decline (%) in number of BBA students (#)
19. Number of accounting majors (#) per number of BBA students (#)
20. Number of management majors (#) per number of BBA students (#)
21. Number of finance majors (#) per number of BBA students (#)
22. Number of marketing majors (#) per number of BBA students (#)
23. Instructions
Step 1 Review your college’s website and annual report to obtain as much comparative information
as possible to fill in the table. Review your college’s most recent Southern Association of
Colleges and Schools (SACS) Accreditation Report.
Step 2 Speak with the School of Business Dean’s Office personnel to gather additional information
to complete the above table.
Step 3 Based on the information gathered, prepare a strategy evaluation report for your college or
university.
SET 3: STRATEGIC PLANNING TO ENHANCE MY EMPLOYABILITY
EXERCISE 9C
A Balanced Scorecard to Evaluate My Professional versus Personal Objectives
Purpose
A balanced scorecard can be used by individuals to help balance their professional and personal ob-
jectives and lives. Some variables commonly included are given in Table 9-7:
CHAPTER 9 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE 321
Instructions
Step 1 In Table 9-7, reveal your professional and personal objectives, and your progress to date on
achieving those objectives.
Step 2 In Table 9-7, in the variance column, indicate Very Favorable (VF), Favorable (F),
Unfavorable (U), Very Unfavorable (VU) to reveal your status on each item measured.
Step 3 In Table 9-7, reveal corrective actions that you plan going forward on each item
measured.
SET 4: INDIVIDUAL VERSUS GROUP STRATEGIC PLANNING
EXERCISE 9D
How Important Are Various Guidelines for Effective Strategic Management?
Purpose
This chapter discusses numerous guidelines that should be followed in formulating, implement-
ing, and evaluating strategies. Ten guidelines associated with the strategic-planning process are as
follows:
1. It should be a people process more than a paper process.
2. It should be a learning process for all managers and employees.
3. It should be words supported by numbers rather than numbers supported by words.
4. It should vary assignments, team memberships, meeting formats, and even the planning
calendar.
5. It should challenge the assumptions underlying the current corporate strategy and welcome bad
news.
6. It should welcome open-mindedness and a spirit of inquiry and learning.
7. It should not become ritualistic, stilted, orchestrated, or rigid.
8. It should not be a formal system for control.
TABLE 9-7 A Balanced Scorecard for Individual Assessment
Area of Objectives Expected Target Actual Target Variance Action Needed
Professional
A. Current Employer
1. Pay
2. Benefits
3. Potential for Growth
B. Potential Future Employer
1. Pay
2. Benefits
3. Potential for Growth
Personal
A. Social
1. Marital status
2. Friend status
3. Online activity
4. Offline activity
B. Health
1. Body weight
2. Nutrition intake
3. Exercise quotient
4. Stress level
322 PART 4 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE
9. It should not be controlled by “technicians.”
10. Do not pursue too many strategies at once.
The purpose of this exercise is to examine more closely guidelines for the strategic-planning pro-
cess to be most effective. In addition, the purpose of this exercise is to examine whether individual
decision making is better than group decision making. Academic research suggests that groups make
better decisions than individuals about 80 percent of the time.
Instructions
Rank the 10 guidelines as to their relative importance for the strategic-planning process to be effec-
tive, where 1 = most important to 10 = least important. First, rank the guidelines as an individual.
Then, rank the guidelines as part a group of three. Thus, determine what person(s) and what group(s)
here today can come closest to the expert ranking. This exercise enables examination of the relative
effectiveness of individual versus group decision making in strategic planning.
Steps
1. Fill in Column 1 in Table 9-8 to reveal your individual ranking of the relative importance of the
10 guidelines (1 = most important, 2 = next most important, to 10 = least important). For ex-
ample, if you think Guideline #1 (People Process) is the eighth-most important guideline, then
enter an 8 in Table 9-8 in Column 1 beside Guideline 1.
2. Fill in Column 2 in Table 9-8 to reveal your group’s ranking of the relative importance of the
10 guidelines (1 = most important, 2 = next most important, to 10 = least important).
3. Fill in Column 3 in Table 9-8 to reveal the expert’s ranking of the 10 guidelines.
4. Fill in Column 4 in Table 9-8 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 1 and Column
3 to reveal how well you performed as an individual in this exercise. (Note: Absolute difference
disregards negative numbers.)
5. Fill in Column 5 in Table 9-8 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 2 and Column 3
to reveal how well your group performed in this exercise.
6. Sum Column 4. Sum Column 5.
7. Compare the Column 4 sum with the Column 5 sum. If your Column 4 sum is less than your
Column 5 sum, then you performed better as an individual than as a group. Normally, group
decision making is superior to individual decision making, so if you did better than your group,
you did excellent.
8. The Individual Winner(s): The individual(s) with the lowest Column 4 sum is the WINNER.
9. The Group Winners(s): The group(s) with the lowest Column 5 score is the WINNER.
TABLE 9-8 Strategic-Planning Guidelines Analysis: Comparing Individual versus Group Decision Making
Strategic-Planning
Guidelines Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Sums
CHAPTER 9 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE 323
MINI-CASE ON TJX COMPANIES, INC. (TJX)
SECRET STRATEGIC PLANNING WORKS GREAT FOR TJX Headquartered in Framingham, Massachusetts, TJX Companies is a discount apparel and home
fashions retailer in the United States and abroad. The company owns T.J. Maxx, Marmaxx,
Home Goods, TJX Canada, TJX Europe, and Sierra Trading Post—operating in total more than
4,000 stores in 9 countries: United States, Canada, United Kingdom, Ireland, Germany, Poland,
Austria, the Netherlands, and Australia. TJX’s annual sales and profits are increasing nicely.
Operations today include 1,219 TJ Maxx, 1,057 Marshalls, 660 HomeGoods, 26 Sierra Trading
Post, and 3 HomeSense stores, as well as tjmaxx.com and sierratradingpost.com in the United States;
265 Winners, 117 HomeSense, and 72 Marshalls stores in Canada; 540 TJ Maxx and 55 HomeSense
stores, as well as tjmaxx.com, in Europe; and 38 TJ Maxx stores in Australia.
In January 2018, TJX received an unsolicited offer from TRC Capital Corp. to purchase up to
2,000,000 shares of TJX’s common stock at a price of $70.95 per share in cash. The offering price is
4.34 percent below the $74.17 per share closing price of TJX’s common stock on December 15, 2017.
TJX’s top management asked all TJX shareholders to reject the offer.
Regarding its corporate strategic planning and evaluating process, TJX is one of the most secre-
tive of all publicly held retailers. As discussed in this chapter, there are numerous advantages and
disadvantages of being secretive rather than open in revealing corporate strategy. TJX’s CEO, Carol
Meyrowitz, as well as her top executives, rarely give interviews and never discuss corporate strategy.
TJX does not talk about its corporate strategy in part because rival firms are eager to learn this in-
formation to duplicate, imitate, undermine, and replicate. However, Fortune reports that “excellent
inventory control” is a secret to the strategic success of TJX, including the following practices:
1. Turn inventory over quickly. According to Morningstar, TJX turns over inventory every 55 days,
versus 85 days for its peer group. TJX is structured to buy quickly and sell merchandise. Often,
merchandise is sold before TJX has paid its vendors. Quick inventory turnover keeps new mer-
chandise on the floor so customers rarely see the same items on repeat visits. TJX trains employ-
ees to “buy when you see it; otherwise it will be gone.”
2. Provide “value, trendy merchandise,” not “cheap, leftover merchandise.”
3. Promote the “treasure hunt” experience rather than catering to lower-income customers. Even
high-income customers love the treasure hunt experience in TJX stores.
4. Train buyers extensively and then give buyers autonomy to negotiate millions of dollars of pur-
chases from suppliers. Purchase inventory year-round, continuously rather than seasonally, and
purchase as close to the time of need as possible to negotiate a better price and be assured of the
latest fashion trend. Negotiate low prices for purchases even if it means often purchasing “all
available items in a category.”
Questions
1. What are the advantages and disadvantages of keeping the strategic-planning process secret ver-
sus placing the firm’s strategic plan on the corporate website and discussing strategies and plan-
ning publicly?
2. What are three types of industries where secrecy is warranted and three industries where secrecy
is not warranted, or does type of industry even matter?
3. Many colleges and universities have their strategic plan posted on their website. What are the
advantages and disadvantages of this practice?
4. Rank order the four “secret” practices listed in terms of how important you think the items are to
TJX’s overall success. Rank the four items from 1 = most important to 4 = least important.
Source: Based on a variety of sources and on information at http://fortune.com/2014/07/24/t-j-maxx-the-best-retail-
store/?icid=maing-grid7%7Chtmlws-main-bb%7Cdl30%7Csec1_lnk3%26pLid%3D508272
I Save Money by Shopping TJ Maxx
G o rd
o n B
el l/
S h u tt
er st
o ck
324 PART 4 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE
Web Resources 1. Balanced scorecard images 100 balanced scorecard im-
ages are provided at this website https://www.google.com/
search?source=hp&ei=A8wJWty6LIbqjwSXlocI&q=bala
nced+scorecard+images&oq=balanced+scorecard+images
&gs_l=psyab.1.0.0j0i22i30k1.1719.9368.0.11358.29.25.1.
0.0.0.355.3755.0j18j3j1.22.0….0…1.1.64.psy-ab..6.23.376
2.0..35i39k1j0i131k1j0i20i264k1.0.Iip5WN7tEk4
2. Balanced scorecard examples 17 balanced scorecard ex-
amples and templates are provided at this website https://
bscdesigner.com/real-bsc-examples.htm
Current Readings Almandoz, Juan, and András Tilcsik. “When Experts Become
Liabilities: Domain Experts on Boards and Organizational
Failure.” Academy of Management Journal 59, Issue 4
(August 2016): 1124–1149. Brahm, Francisco, Jorge Tarzijan, and Marcos Singe. “The
Impact of Frictions in Routine Execution on Economies of Scope.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 10 (October 2017): 2121–2142.
Christensen, Lisa Jones, Enno Siemsen, Oana Branzei, and Madhu Viswanathan. “Response Pattern Analysis: Assuring Data Integrity in Extreme Research Settings.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 2 (February 2017): 471–482.
Cliffe, Sarah. “The Board View: Directors Must Balance All Interests.” Harvard Business Review 95, Issue 3 (May– June 2017): 64–66.
Connelly, Brain L., Laszlo Tihanyi, David J. Ketchen Jr, Christina Matz Carnes, and Walter J. Ferrier. “Competitive Repertoire Complexity: Governance Antecedents and Performance Outcomes.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 5 (May 2017): 1151–1173.
Crittenden, Victoria L., William F. Crittenden, Joseph M. Giglio, and Andrew B. Crittenden. “Making the Cut: Surgery on the Board.” Business Horizons 60, Issue 1 (January 2017): 67–75.
Cuypers, Ilya R. P., Gokhan Ertug, Jeffrey J. Reuer, and Ben Bensaou. “Board Representation in International Joint Ventures.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 4 (April 2017): 920–938.
Faleye, Olubunmi. “The Downside to Full Board Independence.” MIT Sloan Management Review 58, Issue 2 (Winter 2017): 87–88.
Feldman, Emilie R. “Dual Directors and the Governance of Corporate Spinoffs.” Academy of Management Journal 59, Issue 5 (October 2016): 1754–1776.
Goranova, Maria, Rahi Abouk, Paul C. Nystrom, and Ehsan S. Soofi. “Corporate Governance Antecedents to Shareholder Activism: A Zero-Inflated Process.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 2 (February 2017): 415–435.
Goranova, Maria, Richard Priem, Hermann Ndofor, and Cheryl Trahms. “Is There a Dark Side to Monitoring? Board and Shareholder Monitoring Effects on M&A Performance Extremeness.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 11 (November 2017): 2285–2297.
Guo, Guangrui. “Demystifying Variance in Performance: A Longitudinal Multilevel Perspective.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 6 (June 2017): 1327–1342.
Heyden, Mariano L. M., Nikolaos Kavadis, and Qiomy Neuman “External Corporate Governance and Strategic
Investment Behaviors of Target CEOs.” Journal of Management 43, Issue 7 (September 2017): 2065–2089.
Krause, Ryan. “Being the CEO’s Boss: An Examination of Board Chair Orientations.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 3 (March 2017): 697–713.
Marcel, Jeremy J., Amanda P. Cowen, and Gary A. Ballinger. “Are Disruptive CEO Successions Viewed as a Governance Lapse? Evidence from Board Turnover.” Journal of Management 43, Issue 5 (May 2017): 1313–1334.
Oliver, Abbie, Ryan Krause, John Busenbark, and Matias Kalm. “BS in the Boardroom: Benevolent Sexism and Board Chair Orientations.” Strategic Management Journal 39, Issue 1 (January 2018): 113–130.
Puay, Khoon Toh, and Cameron D. Miller. “Pawn to Save a Chariot, or Drawbridge Into the Fort? Firms’ Disclosure During Standard Setting and Complementary Technologies Within Ecosystems.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 11 (November 2017): 2213–2236.
Ramírez, Rafael, Steve Churchhouse, Alejandra Palermo, and Jonas Hoffmann. “Using Scenario Planning to Reshape Strategy.” MIT Sloan Management Review 58, Issue 4 (Summer 2017): 31–37.
Shi, Wei, Brian L. Connelly, and Robert E. Hoskisson. “External Corporate Governance and Financial Fraud: Cognitive Evaluation Theory Insights on Agency Theory Prescriptions.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 6 (June 2017): 1268–1286.
Shi, Wei, Robert E. Hoskisson, and Yan Anthea Zhang. “Independent Director Death and CEO Acquisitiveness: Build an Empire or Pursue a Quiet Life?” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 3 (March 2017): 780–792.
Vaara, Eero, and Juha-Antti Lamberg. “Taking Historical Embeddedness Seriously: Three Historical Approaches to Advance Strategy Process and Practice Research.” Academy of Management Review 41, Issue 4 (October 2016): 633–657.
Withers, Michael C., and Markus A. Fitza. “Do Board Chairs Matter? The Influence of Board Chairs on Firm Performance.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 6 (June 2017): 1343–1355.
Wolf, Carola, and Steven W. Floyd. “Strategic Planning Research: Toward a Theory-Driven Agenda.” Journal of Management 43, Issue 6 (July 2017): 1754–1788.
Zorn, Michellle, Christine Shropshire, John Martin, James Combs, and David Ketchen Jr. “Home Alone: The Effects of Lone-Insider Boards on CEO Pay, Financial Misconduct, and Firm Performance.” Strategic Management Journal 38, Issue 13 (December 2017): 2623–2646.
CHAPTER 9 • STRATEGY EVALuATION AND GOVERNANCE 325
Endnotes 1. Richard Rumelt, “The Evaluation of Business Strategy,”
in W. F. Glueck (ed.), Business Policy and Strategic
Management (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1980), 359–367.
2. Ecclesiastes. 3:1–8.
3. M. Erez and F. Kanfer, “The Role of Goal Acceptance
in Goal Setting and Task Performance,” Academy of
Management Review 8, no. 3 (July 1983): 457.
4. D. Hussey and M. Langham, Corporate Planning: The
Human Factor (Oxford, England: Pergamon, 1979), 138.
5. Carter Bayles, “Strategic Control: The President’s
Paradox,” Business Horizons 20, no. 4 (August 1977): 18.
6. Joann Lublin, “Are Smaller Boards Better for Investors?”
Wall Street Journal, August 27, 2014. Also based on Den
Favaro, Per-Ola Karlsson, and Gary Neilson, “The $112
Billion CEO Succession Problem,” Strategy + Business,
PwC Strategy (May 4, 2015).
7. Louis Lavelle, “The Best and Worst Boards,”
BusinessWeek, October 7, 2002, 104–110.
8. Henry Mintzberg, “Crafting Strategy,” Harvard Business
Review (July–August 1987): 66–75.
9. Henry Mintzberg and J. Waters, “Of Strategies, Deliberate
and Emergent,” Strategic Management Journal 6, no. 2
(1985): 257–272.
10. John Parnell, “Five Critical Challenges in Strategy
Making,” SAM Advanced Management Journal 68, no. 2
(Spring 2003): 15–22.
11. Robert Linneman and Rajan Chandran, “Contingency
Planning: A Key to Swift Managerial Action in the
Uncertain Tomorrow,” Managerial Planning 29, no. 4
(January–February 1981): 23–27.
12. American Accounting Association, Report of Committee
on Basic Auditing Concepts, 1971, 15–74.
13. R. T. Lenz, “Managing the Evolution of the Strategic
Planning Process,” Business Horizons 30, no. 1 (January–
February 1987): 39.
14. Robert Waterman, Jr., “How the Best Get Better,”
BusinessWeek, September 14, 1987, 105.
326
PART 5
KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
10
FIGURE 10- 1
The Comprehensive, Integrative Strategic-Management Model
Source: Fred R. David, “How Companies Define Their Mission,” Long Range Planning 22, no. 1 (February 1989): 91. See also Anik Ratnaningsih, Nadjadji Anwar, Patdono Suwignjo, and Putu Artama Wiguna, “Balance Scorecard of David’s Strategic Modeling at Industrial Business for National Construction Contractor of Indonesia,” Journal of Mathematics and Technology , no. 4, (October 2010): 20.
Strategy Formulation
Feedback Loop
Strategy Implementation
Strategy Evaluation
Chapter 11: Global and International Issues
Strategy Evaluation
and Governance Chapter 9
Implementing Strategies:
Finance and Accounting
Issues Chapter 8
Implementing Strategies:
Management and Marketing
Issues Chapter 7
Business Vision and
Mission Chapter 2
Strategies in Action Chapter 5
Strategy Analysis and
Choice Chapter 6
The Internal
Assessment Chapter 4
The External Assessment Chapter 3
Chapter 10: Business Ethics, Environmental Sustainability, and Social Responsibility
Chapter 11: Global and International Issues
Implementing Strategies:
Finance and Accounting
Issues Chapter 8
Strategy Evaluation
and Governance Chapter 9
Implementing Strategies:
Finance and Accounting
Issues Chapter 8
Implementing Strategies:
Management and Marketing
Issues Chapter 7
Business Vision and
Mission Chapter 2
Strategies in Action Chapter 5
Strategy Analysis and
Choice Chapter 6
The Internal
Assessment Chapter 4
The External Assessment Chapter 3
Chapter 10: Business Ethics, Environmental Sustainability, and Social Responsibility
327
Business Ethics, Environmental Sustainability, and Corporate Social Responsibility LEARNING OBJECTIVES
After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following:
10- 1. Explain why good ethics is good business in strategic management.
10- 2. Explain why whistle-blowing, bribery, and workplace romance are strategic issues.
10- 3. Discuss why environmental sustainability is a key issue in strategic planning.
10- 4. Discuss why corporate social responsibility (CSR) is a key issue in strategic planning.
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
The following exercises are found at the end of this chapter:
SET 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 10A: Does Coca-Cola or PepsiCo Win on Sustainability?
SET 2: Strategic Planning for My University
EXERCISE 10B: How Does My University Compare to Others on the Use of Green Power?
SET 3: Strategic Planning for Myself
EXERCISE 10C: What Is My Business Ethics Quotient?
SET 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
EXERCISE 10D: How Potentially Severe Are the Various Reasons Why Workplace Romance Should Be Discouraged?
MyLab Management
Improve Your Grade!
If your instructor is using MyLab Management, visit www.pearson.com/mylab/management
for videos, simulations, and writing exercises.
328 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
O rganizational performance entails more than simply profits. “People” and “planet,”
collectively with “profits,” are commonly referred to as the three “Ps” that largely
explain organizational performance. Increasingly, companies are following a triple-
bottom-line approach, in which success depends on (1) the financial bottom line, (2) the social
bottom line, and (3) the natural environment bottom line. Following a triple-bottom-line phi-
losophy, organizations make conscious and strategic efforts to provide both financial profits to
shareholders and contributions to communities in which the firm operates, all while minimizing
damage to the environment.
Business ethics are “principles of conduct within organizations that guide decision mak-
ing and behavior.” Good business ethics is a prerequisite for good strategic management; good
ethics is good business! Ethics is about integrity, honesty, and fairness. Social responsibility
refers to actions an organization takes beyond what is legally required to protect or enhance
the well-being of all living things, including employees. Socially responsible actions would
include providing daycare for employees’ children or paying for college tuition for employees.
Sustainability refers to the extent that an organization’s operations and actions protect, mend,
and preserve rather than harm or destroy the environment. Switching your firm’s primary energy
source to solar power is an example.
Business ethics, social responsibility, and environmental sustainability issues are interre-
lated and impact all areas of the strategic-management process, as illustrated in Figure 10-1. The
cofounder and former CEO of Microsoft Corporation, Bill Gates, is the businessperson show-
cased below as an exemplary strategist. Mr. and Mrs. Gates have donated more money to charity
(called philanthropy) than perhaps any couple ever to live.
All strategy formulation, implementation, and evaluation decisions have ethical ramifica-
tions. Strategists such as CEOs and business owners are the persons primarily responsible for
ensuring that high ethical principles are espoused and practiced within an organization. Literally
hundreds of business actions are unethical, including:
1. Misleading advertising or labeling
2. Causing environmental harm
3. Producing unsafe products or services
4. Padding expense accounts
5. Insider trading
6. Dumping banned or flawed products in foreign markets
7. Discriminating against women and minorities
8. Overpricing or price gouging
9. Sexual harassment, bullying, and favortism
10. Using company resources for personal gain
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST SHOWCASED
Bill Gates, Former CEO and Chairman of Microsoft Corporation As one of the world’s richest and most successful businessmen, Bill
Gates is also one of the world’s most ethical and philanthropic busi-
nesspersons. In 2000, Mr. Gates stepped down as CEO of Microsoft
and shifted much of his attention to establishing and operating the
Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation. Bill and his wife, Melinda, started
the foundation with an initial contribution of $28 billion and have
since grown the foundation into the world’s largest private charitable
foundation. The foundation works to support education, assist low-
income communities, and improve global health. With a net worth of
nearly $90 billion, Gates has topped Forbes’ list of the world’s billion-
aires for 18 of the past 23 years. For more than a decade, Mr. Gates
has shifted billions of dollars of his personal money to those most in
need throughout the world. As stated by Bill Gates: “Money has no
utility to me beyond a certain point. Its utility is entirely in building
an organization and getting the resources out to the poorest in the
world.” Working with Rotary International, the Bill and Melinda Gates
Foundation strive to eradicate polio globally. Bill Gates was recently
named by Time Magazine as one of the most influential people of the
twentieth century.
Source: Based on https://www.forbes.com/profile/bill-gates/https://www
.biography.com/people/bill-gates-9307520
CHAPTER 10 • BuSINESS ETHICS, ENVIRONMENTAL SuSTAINABILITY, AND CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY 329
11. Laundering money or engaging in bribery
12. Treating animals inhumanely
13. Overusing personal smartphone while at work
14. Polluting with inappropriate waste disposal
15. Engaging in a conflict of interest
16. Failing to protect employee and customer privacy
17. Giving inappropriate gifts
18. Failing to properly secure company records
19. Engaging in Internet fraud or theft
20. Hacking into company computers
21. Phubbing (phone snubbing, such as being on your phone
when meeting with others)
Why “Good Ethics Is Good Business” A rising tide of consciousness regarding the importance of business ethics is sweeping the
United States and the rest of the world. Moral breaches of ethical conduct by both public and
private organizations are reported hourly on Internet websites, newspapers, magazines, social
media, news media, emails, and texts—quickly spreading fact and rumor pertaining to the inside
dealings of firms. For example, in late 2017, the rate of self-reported foodborne illnesses was
reported to be at least nine times higher for Chipotle than all other restaurant chains, according
to Patrick Quade, the founder of IWasPoisoned.com.
Increasingly, executives’ and managers’ personal and professional decisions are placing
them in the crosshairs of angry shareholders, disgruntled employees, and even their own board
of directors—making the once imperious CEO far more vulnerable to personal, public, and
corporate missteps. One reason CEO salaries are high is that they must take the moral risks of
the firm. Strategists are responsible for developing, communicating, and enforcing a code of
business ethics for their organizations. An integral part of the responsibility of all managers is to
provide ethical leadership by constant example and demonstration. Managers hold positions that
enable them to influence and educate many people; managers are responsible for developing
and implementing ethical decision making. Gellerman offers some good advice for managers:
All managers risk giving too much because of what their companies demand from them.
But the same superiors who keep pressing you to do more, or to do it better, or faster,
or less expensively, will turn on you should you cross that fuzzy line between right and
wrong. They will blame you for exceeding instructions or for ignoring their warnings. The
smartest managers already know that the best answer to the question “How far is too far?”
is “Don’t try to find out.”1
Does It Pay to Be Ethical?
The Institute of Business Ethics (IBE) recently conducted a study titled “Does Business
Ethics Pay?” and concluded that companies displaying a “clear commitment to ethical
conduct” consistently outperform companies that do not display ethical conduct. Philippa
Foster Black of the IBE stated, “Not only is ethical behavior in business the right thing to
do in principle, it pays off in financial returns.” Table 10-1, on the following page, provides
some results of the IBE study.
Research at DePaul University by Frigo and Litman suggests that it pays to be ethical.
These researchers studied the financial performance of more than 15,000 public companies
using 30 years of financial data and found that high-performing companies generally exhibit
high business ethics.2 Similarly, results of a 7-year study by Fred Kiel, author of “Return on
Character,” which followed 8,000 employees and 84 top executives of Fortune 500 companies,
indicated that character-driven leaders deliver 5 times greater profitability results and 26 percent
higher workforce engagement than self-focused leaders. Being unethical is a recipe for head-
aches, inefficiency, and waste.
LO 10.1
330 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
Bad ethics can derail even the best strategic plans. Drucker explained the following in terms
of ethical leadership:
A man (or woman) might know too little, perform poorly, lack judgment and ability,
and yet not do too much damage as a manager. But if that person lacks character and
integrity—no matter how knowledgeable, how brilliant, how successful—he destroys. He
destroys people, the most valuable resource of the enterprise. He destroys spirit. And he
destroys performance. This is particularly true of the people at the head of an enterprise
because the spirit of an organization is created from the top. If an organization is great
in spirit, it is because the spirit of its top people is great. If it decays, it does so because
the top rots. As the proverb states, “Trees die from the top.” No one should ever become
a strategist unless he or she is willing to have his or her character serve as the model for
subordinates.3
Reverend Billy Graham once said, “When wealth is lost, nothing is lost; when health is lost,
something is lost; when character is lost, all is lost.” An ethics “culture” needs to permeate orga-
nizations. No society anywhere in the world can compete long-term or successfully with people
stealing from one another or not trusting one another, with every bit of information requiring
notarized confirmation, with every disagreement ending up in litigation, or with government
having to regulate businesses to keep them honest. Recent examples of bad corporate cultures
are Uber Technologies and Wells Fargo & Company where lawsuits specifically zeroed in on the
firms’ culture.
How to Establish an Ethics Culture
A key ingredient for establishing an ethics culture is to develop a clear code of business ethics,
however, simply having a code of ethics is not sufficient to ensure ethical business behavior.
Managers must take care in considering the specific details of the content of the code, how it will
be implemented, and how adherence to it will be monitored. Otherwise, a code of ethics may
not even be read, understood, or believed by employees, and the code itself may well be viewed
as a public relations gimmick, a set of platitudes, or window dressing. Once implemented, the
code of ethics should be reinforced by showing employees examples of punishment for violating
the code. The website www.ethicsweb.ca/codes provides guidelines on how to write an effective
code of ethics.
Companies should take active steps to ensure that the code is read, understood, believed,
and remembered. Firms should consider implementing the following four practices recom-
mended by Donald Palmer to minimize and deter ethical wrongdoings.4
1. Punish wrongdoing swiftly and severely when detected.
2. Hire employees who possess high ethical standards.
3. Develop socialization programs to reinforce desired cultural values.
4. Encourage subordinates to challenge questionable orders from superiors.
TABLE 10-1 Seven Principles of Admirable Business Ethics
Source: Based on http://sbinformation.about.com/od/bestpractices/a/businessethics.htm
1. Be trustworthy; no individual or business wants to engage in business with an organization it does
not trust.
2. Be open-minded, continually asking for “ethics-related feedback” from all internal and external
stakeholders.
3. Honor all commitments and obligations.
4. Avoid misrepresenting, exaggerating, or misleading with print materials, actions, or words.
5. Visibly be a responsible community citizen.
6. Use your accounting practices to identify and eliminate questionable activities.
7. Follow the Golden Rule: “Do unto others as you would have them do unto you.”
CHAPTER 10 • BuSINESS ETHICS, ENVIRONMENTAL SuSTAINABILITY, AND CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY 331
Companies are increasingly formalizing cultural oversight within the organization. For ex-
ample, board members at Whirlpool closely monitor the firm’s culture through annual employee
surveys, executive performance evaluations, and analysis of whistleblower activities. Citigroup
and CACI International as well as many other firms have established formal committees de-
signed to monitor corporate culture. To help create an ethics culture, Citicorp developed an in-
teractive business ethics board game that is played by thousands of employees worldwide called
“The Word Ethic.” This game asks players business ethics questions, such as “How do you deal
with a customer who offers you football tickets in exchange for a new, backdated IRA?”
History has proven that the greater the trust and confidence of people in the ethics of an
institution or society, the greater its economic strength. Business relationships are built mostly
on mutual trust and reputation. Short-term decisions based on greed and questionable ethics will
preclude the necessary self-respect to gain the trust of others. More and more firms believe that
ethics training and an ethical culture can create strategic advantage. According to Max Killan,
“If business is not based on ethical grounds, it is of no benefit to society, and will, like all other
unethical combinations, pass into oblivion.” Several key ethical issues are discussed in greater
detail in this chapter.
Being unethical is not abnormal or rare. Donald Palmer reports that misconduct is a nor-
mal phenomenon, that wrongdoing is as prevalent as “rightdoing,” and that misconduct is most
often done by people who are primarily good, ethical, and socially responsible.5 Palmer reports
that individuals engage in unethical activities because of a plethora of structure, processes, and
mechanisms inherent in the functioning of organizations—and, importantly, all of us are can-
didates to be unethical in the right circumstances in any organization. Implications of this new
research abound for managers.
Whistle-Blowing, Bribery, and Workplace Romance As social media and technology have become commonplace globally, three business ethics
topics—whistle-blowing, bribery, and workplace romance—have become important strategic
issues facing companies. Missteps in any of these three areas can severely harm an organization.
Whistle-Blowing
Whistle-blowing refers to employees reporting any unethical violations they discover or see in
the firm. Employees should practice whistle-blowing, and organizations should have policies
that encourage whistle-blowing. Three individuals once received $170 million for helping inves-
tigators obtain a record $16.65 billion penalty against Bank of America for inflating the value
of mortgage properties and selling defective loans to investors. The whistle-blower payouts are
among the highest ever in financial institution cases. Thousands of firms warn managers and
employees that failing to report an ethical violation by others could bring discharge.
The Securities and Exchange Commission’s (SEC) whistle-blowing policies virtu-
ally mandate that anyone seeing unethical activity must report such behavior. The website
www.whistleblower.org describes dozens of recent whistleblower cases and rewards to indi-
viduals. Whistleblowers in the United States are protected under both the Sarbanes–Oxley and
Dodd–Frank legislation.
Whistle-blowers in the corporate world receive up to 25 percent of the proceeds of legal
proceedings against firms for wrongdoing. Such payouts are becoming more and more common.
The SEC recently paid $30 million to a non-U.S. citizen whistle-blower who reported an ongo-
ing fraud matter. Sean McKessy, the SEC’s whistle-blower top executive, commented about the
case, “Whistleblowers from all over the world should feel similarly incentivized to come forward
with credible information about potential violations of the U.S. securities laws.” Worldwide,
local public opinion surveys indicate that Taiwan, Indonesia, Myanmar, and Portugal are the
countries in which residents feel that it is the most socially acceptable to report witnessed cor-
ruption; unfortunately, however, it still remains socially unacceptable in some countries, such as
Armenia, Lithuania, Hungary, and Croatia, to report corruption that one witnesses.6
An accountant who recently tipped off the IRS that his employer was skimping on taxes
received $4.5 million in the first IRS whistle-blower award. The accountant’s tip netted the IRS
$20 million in taxes and interest from the errant financial services firm. The award represented
LO 10.2
332 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
a 22 percent cut of the taxes recovered. The IRS program, designed to encourage tips in large-
scale cases, mandates awards of 15 to 30 percent of the amount recouped. “It’s a win–win
for both the government and taxpayers. These are dollars that are being returned to the U.S.
Treasury that otherwise wouldn’t be,” said lawyer Eric Young.
Ethics training programs should include messages from the CEO or owner of the business
emphasizing ethical business practices, discussing the codes of ethics, and detailing procedures
for reporting unethical behavior. Firms can align ethical and strategic decision making by incor-
porating ethical considerations into strategic planning, integrating ethical decision making into
the performance-appraisal process, encouraging whistle-blowing, and monitoring departmental
and corporate performance regarding ethical issues.
Avoid Bribery
Bribery is defined by Black’s Law Dictionary as the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of
any item of value to influence the actions of an official or other person in discharge of a pub-
lic or legal duty. A bribe is a gift bestowed to influence a recipient’s conduct. The gift may be
money, goods, actions, property, preferment, privilege, object of value, advantage, or merely a
promise or undertaking to induce the action, vote, or influence of a person in an official or pub-
lic capacity.
Bribery is a crime in most countries, including the United States. Even in sports, bribery
is unlawful. Late in 2017, six basketball coaches at Division I universities and a top Adidas
executive were among 10 people charged with crimes including bribery and fraud as part of
a wide-ranging federal investigation into corruption in college basketball. Coaches at Auburn,
Oklahoma State, Arizona, Louisville, Miami, and Southern California were accused of accepting
bribes in exchange for offering to steer players to preferred financial advisers, business manag-
ers, and agents. In this case, three Adidas executives were accused of arranging illicit payments
for high school stars and their families to secure athlete commitments to Adidas-sponsored
schools. These coaches were implicated in brokering deals between the Adidas executive and top
basketball recruits.
Countries with the lowest bribery rates include Japan, Hong Kong, South Korea,
Mauritius, Botswana, and Cyprus; countries with the highest bribery rates include India,
Liberia, and Vietnam.7 Anti-bribery and extortion initiatives are advocated by many global or-
ganizations, including the World Bank, the International Monetary Fund, the European Union
(EU), the Council of Europe, the Organization of American States, the Pacific Basin Economic
Council, the Global Coalition for Africa, and the United Nations. Tipping is even now consid-
ered bribery in some countries. Taking business associates to lavish dinners and giving them
expensive holiday gifts and even outright cash may have been expected in some countries,
such as South Korea and China, but there is now increased enforcement of bribery laws virtu-
ally everywhere.
Countries with the lowest corruption rates include Denmark, New Zealand, Finland,
Sweden, Switzerland, Norway, Singapore, Netherlands, Canada, Germany, and the U.K. In con-
trast, the most corrupt country is Somalia. Information such as this impacts company strategic
decisions regarding where in the world to do business.
Workplace Romance
Workplace romance is an intimate relationship between two consenting employees, as opposed
to sexual harassment, which the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC) defines
broadly as unwelcome sexual advances, requests for sexual favors, and other verbal or physi-
cal conduct of a sexual nature. Sexual harassment (and discrimination) is illegal, unethical, and
detrimental to any organization and can result in expensive lawsuits, lower morale, and reduced
productivity. The former head of Amazon Studios, Roy Price, recently resigned after a year-long
old accusation of sexual harassment of a coworker became public.
The entertainment and media industries were recently rocked by sexual harassment al-
legations against public figures Harvey Weinstein, Kevin Spacey, Louis C. K., Mark Halperin,
Charlie Rose, Matt Lauer, and Garrison Keillor. These and other revelations prompted the Wall
Street Journal to publish a full two-page article titled “Is Office Romance Still Allowed?” The
article reveals the following statistics about Americans at work:
CHAPTER 10 • BuSINESS ETHICS, ENVIRONMENTAL SuSTAINABILITY, AND CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY 333
• 33 percent of millennials view their workplace as a dating pool;
• 20 percent met their spouse or partner at work;
• 48 percent of women have personally experienced sexual harassment;
• 79 percent of women and 63 percent of men disagree that harassment reports are
exagerrated.
Workplace romance between two consenting employees simply happens, so the question
is generally not whether to allow the practice, or even how to prevent it, but rather how best to
manage it. A recent survey by CareerBuilder found that nearly 40 percent of workers have dated
a coworker, and approximately 30 percent of those relationships resulted in marriage.8 An orga-
nization should not strictly forbid workplace romance because such a policy could be construed
as an invasion of privacy, overbearing, or unnecessary. Some romances actually improve work
performance, adding a dynamism and energy that translates into enhanced morale, communica-
tion, creativity, and productivity.9
However, workplace romance could be detrimental to workplace morale and productivity
for a number of reasons that include:
1. Favoritism complaints can arise.
2. Confidentiality of records can be breached.
3. Reduced quality and quantity of work can become a problem.
4. Personal arguments can lead to work arguments.
5. Whispering secrets can lead to tensions and hostilities among coworkers.
6. Sexual harassment (or discrimination) charges may ensue.
7. Conflicts of interest can arise, especially when the well-being of the partner trumps the
well-being of the company.
In some states, such as California, managers can be held personally liable for damages that
arise from workplace romance. Organizations should establish guidelines and policies that ad-
dress workplace romance, for at least six reasons:
1. Guidelines can enable the firm to better defend against and avoid sexual harassment or dis-
crimination charges.
2. Guidelines can specify reasons (such as the seven listed previously) why workplace ro-
mance may not be a good idea.
3. Guidelines can specify resultant penalties for romancing partners if problems arise.
4. Guidelines can promote a professional and fair work atmosphere.
5. Guidelines can help assure compliance with federal, state, and local laws, as well as recent
court cases.
6. Lack of any guidelines sends a lackadaisical message throughout the firm.
A Wall Street Journal article recaps U.S. standards regarding supervisor and subordinate
romantic rlationships at work.10 The report reveals that only 5 percent of all firms sampled have
no restrictions on such relationships; 80 percent of firms have policies that prohibit relationships
between a supervisor and a subordinate; 4 percent of firms strictly prohibit all such relation-
ships; 39 percent have policies that require individuals to inform their supervisors whenever a
romantic relationship begins with a coworker; and 24 percent of firms require the two persons to
be in different departments.
In Europe, romantic relationships at work are largely viewed as private matters and most
firms have no policies on the practice. However, European firms are increasingly adopting ex-
plicit, U.S.-style sexual harassment and workplace romance laws. The U.S. military strictly bans
officers from dating or having sexual relationships with enlistees. At the World Bank, sexual
relations between a supervisor and an employee are considered “a de facto conflict of interest
which must be resolved to avoid favoritism.” Former World Bank president Paul Wolfowitz was
forced to resign as a result of a relationship he had with a bank staff member.
In general, company guidelines or policies in general should discourage workplace romance
because “the downside risks generally exceed the upside benefits” for the firm. Workplace ro-
mance guidelines should specify certain situations in which affairs are especially discouraged,
such as between a supervisor and subordinate, and should also detail the types of relationships
allowed, such as between peer-level employees in different departments who also have different
334 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
career paths. Importantly, the workplace romance policy guidelines should apply to all employ-
ees at all levels of the firm and should clearly state the actions management will take if employ-
ees violate any terms of the policy.
As a result of increasing sexual misconduct allegations across companies and organizations,
more and more firms are requiring their employees to complete sexual harassment training. The
large advertising firm Interpublic Group of Companies is having all of its 20,000 U.S. employ-
ees complete sexual harassment training even though the firm has had no legal problems. Dell,
Rockwell Automation, 21st Century Fox, ESPN, and Facebook are other firms initiating sexual
harassment training for employees. Most universities require all faculty to complete training re-
garding how to handle situations where a student mentions experiencing some forms of sexual ha-
rassment by another student, faculty, or staff member. U.S. laws require that faculty report any in-
stance, claim, or even suggestion of sexual harassment from a student to university administrators.
Environmental Sustainability The ecological challenge facing all organizations requires managers to formulate strategies
that preserve and conserve natural resources and control pollution. Special natural environ-
ment issues include global warming, depletion of rain forests, destruction of animal habitats,
protecting endangered species, and waste management. Firms are increasingly developing
green product lines that are biodegradable or made from recycled products. Managing the
health of the planet requires an understanding of how international trade, competitiveness,
and global resources are connected. Managing environmental affairs, for example, can no lon-
ger be simply a technical function performed by specialists in a firm; more emphasis must be
placed on developing an environmental perspective among all employees and managers of the
firm. Many firms in India have a problem with this issue, as mentioned in Global Capsule 10.
Businesses must not exploit and decimate the natural environment. Mark Starik at George
Washington University believes, “Halting and reversing worldwide ecological destruction and
deterioration is a strategic issue that needs immediate and substantive attention by all businesses
and managers.” According to the International Standards Organization, the word environment
is defined as surroundings in which an organization operates, including air, water, land, natural
resources, flora, fauna, humans, and their interrelation. Many firms are gaining competitive ad-
vantage by being good stewards of the natural environment. Green products sell well.
Employees, consumers, governments, and societies are often resentful of firms that harm
rather than protect the natural environment. Conversely, people today are especially appreciative
of firms that conduct operations in a way that mends, conserves, and preserves the natural envi-
ronment. Consumer interest in businesses preserving nature’s ecological balance and fostering a
clean, healthy environment is at an all-time high.
LO 10.3
GLOBAL CAPSULE 10
India Is Turning Garbage into Cash
The Indian city of Mysuru (formerly Mysore) is leading the way for all
of India to turn its garbage into compost and energy. India generates
about 62 million tons of solid waster every year and that amount is
expected to increase fivefold by 2051, so the country is revamping how
it handles garbage. Currently only about 28 percent of India’s garbage
is treated and processed out of the 82 percent that is actually collected.
The other 18 percent that is not collected at all ends up in drains, wa-
terways, landfills, and/or is consumed by animals. But in Mysuru, 50
percent of garbage is turned into compost and another 25 percent is
recycled. India’s Modi administration currently has 56 waste-to-energy
power plants under construction and has installed incentives and re-
quirements for all municipalities in India to handle their garbage more
effectively and efficiently. Other cities in India leading the way on turn-
ing garbage into cash are Suryapet, Warangal, Kolar, and Vengurla. Source: Based on Bibhudatta Pradhan, “Can India Turn Garbage Into Cash?”
Bloomberg Businessweek, January 15, 2018, p. 33.
M u an
s im
te /1
2 3 R
F
CHAPTER 10 • BuSINESS ETHICS, ENVIRONMENTAL SuSTAINABILITY, AND CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY 335
Sustainability Reports and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
A sustainability report reveals how a firm’s operations impact the natural environment. This
document discloses to shareholders information about the firm’s labor practices, product
sourcing, energy efficiency, environmental impact, and business ethics practices. For example,
Coca-Cola’s annual sustainability reports are provided online at http://www.coca-colacompany
.com/stories/sustainability-reports.
No business wants the reputation of being a polluter. For the first time ever in the United
States, cars, trucks, planes, and trains have displaced power plants as the biggest polluters. This
trend is accelerating, as the nation’s electrical grid gets cleaner faster than the transportation means.
A bad sustainability record will hurt any firm in any market, jeopardize its stand-
ing in the community, and invite scrutiny by regulators, investors, and environmentalists.
Governments increasingly require businesses to behave responsibly and require, for example,
that businesses publicly report the pollutants and wastes their facilities produce. It is simply
good business for any organization to provide a sustainability report annually to the public.
The Global Reporting Initiative provides a set of detailed reporting guidelines specifying what
information should go into sustainability reports (https://www.globalreporting.org/information/
sustainability-reporting/Pages/default.aspx).
The proxy advisory firm Institutional Shareholder Services reports that an increasing num-
ber of shareholder groups are pushing firms to provide sustainability information annually. With
60,000 suppliers and more than $350 billion in annual sales, Walmart works with its suppliers
to make sure they provide such reports. Many firms use the Walmart sustainability report as a
benchmark or model to follow in preparing their own report.
Around the world, political and corporate leaders now realize that the “green business”
topic is not going away and in fact is gaining ground rapidly. A few years ago, firms could get
away with placing “green” terminology on their products and labels, using such terms as or-
ganic, green, safe, earth-friendly, nontoxic, or natural because there were no legal or formally
accepted definitions. Today, however, these terms carry much more specific connotations and
expectations. Uniform standards defining environmentally responsible company actions are rap-
idly being incorporated into the legal landscape. Strategically, companies more than ever must
demonstrate to their customers and stakeholders that their green efforts are substantive and set
the firm apart from competitors. A firm’s social performance (facts and figures) must back up its
rhetoric and be consistent with sustainability standards.
Many companies are moving the corporate environmental group to report directly to the
CEO. Firms that manage environmental affairs will enhance relations with consumers, regula-
tors, vendors, and other industry players, substantially improving their prospects of success.
Environmental strategies could include the following:
1. Developing or acquiring green businesses
2. Divesting or altering environment-damaging businesses
3. Becoming a low-cost producer through waste minimization and energy conservation
4. Pursuing a differentiation strategy through green product features
5. Including an environmental or sustainability representative on their board of directors
6. Conducting regular environmental audits
7. Implementing bonuses for favorable environmental or conservation-related results
8. Becoming involved in environmental issues and programs
9. Incorporating environmental values in mission statements
10. Establishing environmentally oriented objectives
11. Acquiring “green” skills
12. Providing environmental training programs for company employees and managers.
Through its Green Power Partnership, the EPA works with organizations to increase the use
of green power as a percentage of total electricity use. Table 10-2 and Table 10-3, on the follow-
ing pages, reveal the top 15 “green” retailers and universities, respectively, based on kilowatts
(KWh) of green power used annually. (Note: Green power is renewable, such as wind, solar, and
water, as opposed to fossil fuels, such as oil, gas, and coal that are not renewable). Note below
that Kohl’s and the University of Tennessee at Knoxville are the total KWh green-power usage
leaders for retail companies and higher education institutions, respectively. Many commercial
and residential builders now offer solar panels as standard equipment on homes and offices.
336 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
Solar panels have become quite cost effective and they “exhume good ethics rather than bad
fumes.” Kohl’s has converted nearly all of its 80 California stores to solar power.
International Standardization Organization (ISO) Certification
Based in Geneva, Switzerland, the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is a
network of national standards institutes of 162 countries, with one member per country. The
ISO is the world’s largest developer of sustainability standards. ISO has published nearly 22,000
international standards covering almost every industry, from healthcare to agriculture to food
safety to technology. ISO standards reveal “required” specifications for products, services, and
systems to ensure quality, safety, and efficiency; ISO standards facilitate international trade and
commerce.
Widely accepted all over the world, ISO standards are voluntary because the organization
itself does not regulate or legislate. Governmental agencies in various countries, such as the U.S.
EPA, have adopted ISO standards as part of their regulatory framework, and the standards are
the basis of much legislation. Adoptions are sovereign decisions by the regulatory authorities,
governments, or companies concerned. Businesses and municipalities should consider becoming
ISO certified to help attract business.
ISO 14000 refers to a series of voluntary standards in the environmental field. The ISO
14000 family of standards concerns the extent to which a firm minimizes harmful effects on the
environment caused by its activities and continually monitors and improves its own environmen-
tal performance. These standards have been adopted by thousands of firms and municipalities
worldwide to certify to their constituencies that they are conducting business in an environmen-
tally friendly manner; these standards offer a universal technical benchmark for environmental
compliance that more and more firms are requiring not only of themselves but also of their sup-
pliers and distributors. Included in the ISO 14000 series are the ISO 14001 standards in fields
TABLE 10-2 The Top 15 Green Power-Use Retailers (2017)
Source: Based on information at https://www.epa.gov/greenpower/green-power-partnership-top-30-retail
Retail Partner Name Annual Green-Power usage (KWh)
Green Power of Total Electricity use (%)
Green-Power Resources
1. Kohl’s Department
Stores
1,429,423,791 115 Solar, Wind
2. Starbucks (company-
owned cafe retail
stores)
975,575,000 105 Wind
3. IKEA 776,143,808 310 Biogas, Solar, Wind
4. Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. 747,587,534 4 Solar, Wind
5. Ahold USA 358,867,165 19 Solar
6. Best Buy 282,103,000 31 Various
7. H&M 276,291,000 100 Various
8. REI 87,146,830 117 Solar, Wind
9. H-E-B Grocery
Company
85,104,333 5 Solar, Wind
10. The Estee Lauder
Companies Inc./
Operations and
Selected Retail Brands
60,685,392 88 Solar, Wind
11. Sundance Square 30,334,826 46 Wind
12. The North Face 21,778,186 115 Solar, Wind
13. Giant Eagle, Inc. 20,000,000 3 Wind
14. Panera Bread/
Maryland Locations
15,212,943 100 Wind
15. Staples 15,064,852 3 Biogas, Solar, Wind
CHAPTER 10 • BuSINESS ETHICS, ENVIRONMENTAL SuSTAINABILITY, AND CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY 337
such as environmental auditing, environmental performance evaluation, pollution prevention,
environmental labeling, and life-cycle assessment. According to the ISO 14001 standard, a
community or organization is required to put in place and implement a series of practices and
procedures that, when taken together, result in an environmental management system (EMS).
Not being certified with ISO 14001 can be a strategic disadvantage for towns, counties, and
companies because people today expect organizations to minimize or, even better, to eliminate
environmental harm they cause.
Preserving the environment should be a permanent part of doing business, for the following
reasons:
1. Consumer demand for environmentally safe products and packages is high.
2. Public opinion demanding that firms conduct business in ways that preserve the natural
environment is strong.
3. Environmental advocacy groups now have more than 20 million Americans as members.
4. Federal and state environmental regulations are changing rapidly and becoming more
complex.
TABLE 10-3 The Top 15 Green-Power Use Colleges and Universities (2017)
Source: Based on information at https://www.epa.gov/greenpower/green-power-partnership-top-30-college- university
Partner Name Annual Green Power usage (KWh)
Green Power of Total Electricity use (%)
Green-Power Resources
Athletic Conference
1. University of
Tennessee,
Knoxville
250,070,000 94 Solar, Wind Southeastern
Conference
2. University at
Buffalo, the
State University
of New York
211,977,208 97 Solar, Wind Mid-American
Conference
3. University of
Pennsylvania
200,000,000 52 Wind Ivy League
4. Georgetown
University
159,640,000 129 Wind Big East
Conference
5. Stanford
University
154,190,253 53 Solar Pac-12
Conference
6. University of
Oklahoma
128,895,000 69 Wind Big 12 Conference
7. Carnegie Mellon
University
128,593,388 100 Solar, Wind University Athletic
Association
8. University of
California
128,084,650 11 Biogas, Biomass,
Solar, Wind
Numerous
9. Northwestern
University
122,014,800 50 Solar, Wind Big Ten
Conference
10. The Ohio State
University
107,499,814 17 Wind Big Ten
Conference
11. University of
North Texas
107,250,000 100 Solar, Wind Conference USA
12. Oklahoma State
University
101,559,806 71 Wind Big 12 Conference
13. University of
Missouri
97,892,973 37 Biomass, Solar,
Wind
Southeastern
Conference
14. University of
Maryland
96,927,825 34 Biogas, Small-
hydro, Solar, Wind
Big Ten
Conference
15. Drexel
University
96,509,000 100 Solar, Wind Colonial Athletic
Association
338 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) Social responsibility refers to a firm’s obligation to care for its employees, customers, com-
munities, and society in which it operates. For example, the food seasoning firm McCormick &
Company states that its corporate social responsibility (CSR) goals for 2025 include working to
“improve the health and well-being of all people, building resilience in communities around the
world and positively impacting the environment.” Some strategists agree with Ralph Nader, who
proclaims that organizations have tremendous social obligations. Nader points out, for example,
that ExxonMobil has more assets than most countries, and because of this, such firms have an
obligation to help society cure its many ills. Other people, however, agree with the economist
Milton Friedman, who asserts that organizations have no obligation to do any more for society
than is legally required. Friedman may contend that it is irresponsible for a firm to give monies
to charity.
Do you agree more with Nader or Friedman? Surely we can all agree that the first social re-
sponsibility of any business must be to make enough profit to cover the firm’s costs of the future,
because if this is not achieved, no other social responsibility can be met. Indeed, no social need
can be met if the firm fails. Many economists suggest that firms should not engage much, if any,
in philanthropy because simply making a profit is difficult, and shareholders expect a high return
on their investment. However, substantial research reveals a u-shaped relationship between CSR
LO 10.4
TABLE 10-4 Songbirds and Coral Reefs Need Help
Songbirds
Being a good steward of the natural environment can help save our songbirds. Bluebirds are one of 76
songbird species in the United States that have dramatically declined in numbers in the last two decades.
Not all birds are considered songbirds, and why birds sing is not clear. Some scientists say they sing
when calling for mates or warning of danger; other scientists contend that birds sing for sheer pleasure.
Songbirds include chickadees, orioles, swallows, mockingbirds, warblers, sparrows, vireos, and the wood
thrush. “These birds are telling us there’s a problem, something’s out of balance in our environment,” says
Jeff Wells, bird conservation director for the National Audubon Society. Songbirds may be telling us that
their air or water is too dirty or that we are destroying too much of their habitat. People collect Picasso
paintings and save historic buildings. “Songbirds are part of our natural heritage. Why should we be willing
to watch songbirds be destroyed any more than allowing a great work of art to be destroyed?” asks Wells.
Whatever message songbirds are singing to us today about their natural environment, the message is be-
coming less and less heard nationwide. Listen when you go outside today. Each of us as individuals, com-
panies, states, and countries should do what we reasonably can to help improve the natural environment for
songbirds.11 Many companies now make it a point to keep/maintain “green” areas on their properties.
Coral Reefs
Being a good steward of the natural environment can help save our coral reefs. Oceans cover more than
71 percent of the Earth. Although coral reefs occupy only 1 percent of the world’s marine system, they
are home to more than a quarter of marine species, including unique fish, turtles and algae, all of which
depend on the reef for survival. The destructive effect of commercial fishing on ocean habitats coupled
with increasing pollution runoff into oceans, as well as global warming, have decimated fisheries, ma-
rine life, and coral reefs around the world. The unfortunate consequence of fishing over the last century
has been overfishing, with the principal reasons being politics and greed. Trawl fishing with nets de-
stroys coral reefs and has been compared to catching squirrels by cutting down forests because bottom
nets scour and destroy vast areas of the ocean. Warming of the ocean as a result of carbon dioxide emis-
sions also kills thousands of acres of coral reefs annually. The total area of fully protected marine habi-
tats in the United States is only about 50 square miles, compared to some 93 million acres of national
wildlife refuges and national parks on the nation’s land.12
5. More lenders are examining the environmental liabilities of businesses seeking loans.
6. Many consumers, suppliers, distributors, and investors shun doing business with environ-
mentally weak firms.
7. Liability suits and fines against firms having environmental problems are on the rise.
Table 10-4 reveals the impact that bad environmental policies have on songbirds and coral
reefs, two of nature’s many ecosystems.
CHAPTER 10 • BuSINESS ETHICS, ENVIRONMENTAL SuSTAINABILITY, AND CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY 339
Food Suppliers and Livestock Welfare
CSR extends to the 9-plus billion land animals raised in the United States annually for food;
many of these animals live their short lives in inhumane factory-like structures. Animal wel-
fare concerns are on the rise among consumers; retailers are beginning to respond to such
concerns by increasingly demanding that food suppliers provide humane treatment of ani-
mals. A recent study by market research firm Packaged Facts revealed that more than half of
U.S. consumers are significantly more concerned with livestock welfare than they have been
in past years. The report explained how animal welfare and the humane treatment of ani-
mals raised for food will soon become a new standard shaped by next-generation consumer
expectations.
A large-scale survey by the American Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals
(ASPCA) found that U.S. consumers (67 percent to be exact) are demanding meat, eggs, and
dairy products that have higher welfare standards, even if it means paying more for the prod-
ucts. ASPCA believes that “animals are entitled to kind and respectful treatment at the hands
of humans and must be protected under the law.” Recent video footage at Florida-based Larson
Dairy showed workers kicking cows and striking them with metal rods; the Okeechobee County
Sheriff’s Office launched an investigation and Publix Supermarkets stopped taking milk deliver-
ies from Larson.
Policies aimed at improving livestock welfare are increasingly being developed and
approved by lawmakers around the world. In addition to newly emerging, more stringent
ETHICS CAPSULE 10
TOMS Shoes, Inc.: Shoes Are Magic, Put Shoes on Every Child on the Planet
Headquartered in Santa Monica, California, TOMS Shoes exhibits
high social responsibility, excellent business ethics, and a daily com-
mitment to fair-labor practices and environmentally sustainable
design and manufacturing. Founded by Blake Mycoskie, TOMS
emphasizes philanthropy as an integral part of its business model—
as evidenced with its “One for One” program through which the
company donates a pair of shoes or provides vision care with every
respective shoe or pair of sunglasses purchased. Another key te-
net of TOMS’ business model is its nonprofit foundation, Friends
of TOMS, which organizes and leads several meaningful service
activities, including the One Day Without Shoes initiative aimed at
raising global awareness of health risks associated with not wear-
ing shoes. Supporters of TOMS have the opportunity to volunteer
for service trips to countries where the company’s donations will be
distributed to local communities in need. On their website, www
.tomscampusprograms.com, TOMS provides students with infor-
mation related to how they too can become involved with the
company’s philanthropic efforts. TOMS Shoes showcases how good
ethics, sustainability, and social responsibility is good business; the
company not only has excellent financial performance but is doing
noticeably well in all three areas of the triple-bottom line perfor-
mance (profits, people, and planet).
Source: Based on http://www.toms.com/about-toms#companyInfo and
https://www.privco.com/private-company/toms-shoes#.
Y o n g ju
K w
o n /S
h u tt
er st
o ck
and corporate financial performance, whereby firms with the greatest CSR are generally also
the firms with the highest financial performance; firms with the lowest CSR tend to have higher
performance than those with moderate social responsibility.
Strategists should examine social problems in terms of potential costs and benefits to the
firm and focus on social issues that could benefit the firm most. For example, if a firm avoids
cutting jobs to protect employees’ livelihood, and that decision forces the firm to liquidate, then
all the employees lose their jobs. Walmart selectively engages in social responsibility efforts
that directly complement its business initiatives. For example, between 2017 and 2021, Walmart
will reportedly contribute more than $20 million to disaster relief and prevention efforts. As
evidenced in the Ethics Capsule 10, an exemplary company regarding social responsibility is
TOMS Shoes; the example reveals there are hundreds of different ways a company can be so-
cially responsible.
340 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
regulations surrounding livestock welfare, substantive scientific research studies are beginning
to reveal significant financial benefits of enhanced animal welfare guidelines. For example, heat
stress and rough handling often lower the quality, safety, and value of livestock by bruising the
meat, reducing growth, and even inhibiting reproduction. As a result, large food companies such
as Whole Foods, Bon Appetit, Sodexo, and Aramark have implemented more animal-friendly
policies.
Pete Stanton and Gerry LaFlamme, founder of the largest free-range egg producer in the
United States, Pete & Gerry’s Organic Eggs, offered suggestions for companies seeking to grow
sustainable humane practices:
Build your brands and company on a mission that you fully believe in, your employees
believe in, and most importantly, your customers can believe in. The mission of the busi-
ness may not be the reason people buy your product, but it should be the reason they can
believe in who you are and in your brand. For your employees, a strong mission is critical;
anyone can work at a job, but not everyone is fortunate enough to work on something that
is meaningful, that offers them a sense of pride and accomplishment. The mission of your
business should be the engine and the fuel that keeps you moving ahead, even during dif-
ficult times.13
Wildlife Welfare
CSR also extends to wildlife. Consumers globally are becoming increasingly intolerant of any
business or nation that directly or indirectly destroys wildlife, especially endangered wildlife,
such as tigers, elephants, whales, songbirds, and coral reefs. Affected businesses range from
retailers that sell ivory chess pieces to restaurants that sell whale meat. Many New Zealanders,
supported by Australians, are outraged about Japan’s large-scale whaling operations in the
Antarctic. In a recent annual Antarctic hunt, Japanese whaling fleets caught and killed nearly
500 whales as part of a “research project on the ecological system in the Antarctic Sea and
Northwest Pacific.” Ironically, Japan is a member of the International Whaling Commission
that has banned commercial whaling in a 50-million-square-mile-area around Antarctica
known as the Southern Ocean Whale Sanctuary. Only a few countries—such as Norway,
Iceland, and Japan—favor and engage in commercial whaling. Norway has been criticized
globally in recent years for continuously launching whale-hunting expeditions and killing
more than 700 minke whales each year, many of them pregnant females. Countries, municipal-
ities, and companies run the risk of being boycotted and exposed for direct or indirect wildlife
endangering practices.
Nearly 100 million sharks are killed each year solely to cut off (and sell) their fins.14
Although “shark-finning” was outlawed in U.S. waters in 2000, the law does not ban fin im-
ports or serving the fins in food, resulting in about 65 metric tons of fins being imported in the
United States annually. Only eight U.S. states have laws banning the sale of shark fins in food:
Hawaii, Oregon, Washington, Illinois, California, Maryland, New York, and Delaware. The prob-
lem is much worse in some countries, especially China, which is the world’s largest consumer
of shark fins. Most of the shark fins are used to make the delicacy, shark fin soup, which can
sell for nearly $100 per bowl. A pair of shark fins can sell for as much as $700 per kilogram in
Asia. More than 30 percent of the world’s shark species now face extinction, according to the
International Union for Conservation of Nature because sharks are being killed almost 30 per-
cent faster than they can reproduce.
A spokesperson for the Foundation for National Parks and Wildlife in Australia says
koala populations are down from 100,000 a few years ago to just 40,000 now. Forest fires,
stress-induced diseases, and business development have crushed koala bear populations. When
the marsupial bears leave their trees to relocate, they are often killed by predators and vehicles.
Experts say the bears will be extinct by 2040 unless something is done now.
What Firms Are the Best CSR Stewards?
Corporate Responsibility Magazine annually conducts and publishes research on the 100 Best
Corporate Citizens. Companies are ranked in seven categories, including (1) environment, (2)
climate change, (3) employee relations, (4) human rights, (5) corporate governance, (6) financial
CHAPTER 10 • BuSINESS ETHICS, ENVIRONMENTAL SuSTAINABILITY, AND CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY 341
performance, and (7) philanthropy and community support. The top 10 Best Corporate Citizens
for 2017 were as follows:
1. Hasbro
2. Intel
3. Microsoft
4. Altria Group
5. Campbell’s Soup Company
6. Cisco Systems
7. Accenture
8. Hormel Foods
9. Lockheed Martin
10. Ecolab
Source: Based on information at https://www.forbes.com/sites/karstenstrauss/2017/05/11/americas-100-best-corporate-
citizens-in-2017/#1c309d752b68
Firms should strive to engage in social activities that have economic benefits. Merck & Co.
once developed the drug ivermectin for treating river blindness, a disease caused by a fly-borne
parasitic worm endemic in poor tropical areas of Africa, the Middle East, and Latin America.
In an unprecedented gesture that reflected its corporate commitment to social responsibility,
Merck then made ivermectin available at no cost to medical personnel throughout the world.
Merck’s action highlights the dilemma of orphan drugs, which offer pharmaceutical companies
no economic incentive for profitable development and distribution. Merck did, however, garner
substantial favor among its stakeholders for its actions. Firms are becoming more proactive by
doing more than the bare minimum to develop and implement strategies that preserve the envi-
ronment and help local communities.
Forbes’ list of best global companies in regard to consumers’ perceptions of social re-
sponsibility are listed in Table 10-5. With a top-to-bottom approach to CSR, the number one
ranked firm, Danish toy company The Lego Group, embraces socially-responsible opportunities
through its Build the Change and Sustainable Materials Center initiatives, as well as through its
partnership with the World Wildlife Fund.
TABLE 10-5 10 Companies with the Best CSR Reputation as Rated by Consumers
Source: Based on information at https://www.forbes.com/sites/karstenstrauss/2017/09/13/the-10-companies- with-the-best-csr-reputations-in-2017/#3bf7894b546b
1. The Lego Group
2. Microsoft
3. Google
4. Walt Disney Company
5. BMW Group
6. Intel
7. Robert Bosch
8. Cisco Systems
9. Rolls-Royce Aerospace
10. Colgate-Palmolive
342 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS
Figure 10-2 reveals that the entire strategic-management process is
designed to gain and sustain competitive advantages, but all can be
lost with ethical violations, ranging from bribery to sexual harassment
to selling whale meat. Consider this: Trees die from the top; strate-
gists are at the top of the firm, meaning that ethical problems at the
top of a firm spell dire consequences for lower levels. Strategists must
set an exemplary example personally and professionally to establish
and continually reinforce an organizational culture for “doing the
right thing.” Social responsibility and environmental sustainability
policies, practices, and procedures must reinforce a “triple-bottom-
line” approach that emphasizes “good ethics is good business” and
“good ethics is the foundation for everything we do and say.”
Establish A Clear Vision & Mission
Evaluate & Monitor Results:
Take Corrective Actions; Adapt
To Change
Gain & Sustain Competitive Advantages
Formulate Strategies: Collect, Analyze, &
Prioritize Data Using Matrices; Establish A Clear Strategic Plan
Implement Strategies: Establish Structure; Allocate Resources; Motivate & Reward; Attract Customers; Manage Finances
FIGURE 10-2
How to Gain and Sustain Competitive Advantages
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS
No company or individual wants to do business with someone who
is unethical or insensitive to natural environment concerns. To sur-
vive, companies must be environmentally proactive; it is expected,
and in many respects, is the law. On a daily basis, firms are being
compared to rival firms on sustainability and ethics behavior, and
constantly using social media. Issues presented in this chapter,
therefore, comprise a competitive advantage or disadvantage for
all organizations. Thus, you should include in your case analysis
recommendations for your firm to exceed stakeholder expectations
on ethics, sustainability, and social responsibility. Make comparisons
to rival firms to show how your firm can gain or sustain competitive
advantage on these issues. Reveal financially-sound suggestions for
the firm to be a good corporate citizen and promote that for com-
petitive advantage. Although the first responsibility of any business
is to stay in business, so the triple-bottom-line approach can be an
effective means for framing your entire project.
CHAPTER 10 • BuSINESS ETHICS, ENVIRONMENTAL SuSTAINABILITY, AND CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY 343
Chapter Summary In a final analysis, ethical standards come out of history and heritage. Our predecessors left us
with an ethical foundation on which to build. Even the legendary football coach Vince Lombardi
knew that some things were worth more than winning, and he required his players to have
three kinds of loyalty: to God, to their families, and to the Green Bay Packers, “in that order.”
Employees, customers, and shareholders have become less and less tolerant of ethical violations
in firms, and more and more appreciative of model ethical firms. Information sharing across the
Internet increasingly reveals such model firms versus irresponsible firms.
Consumers across the country and around the world appreciate firms that do more than is
legally required to be socially responsible. But staying in business, while adhering to all laws
and regulations, must be a primary objective of any business. One of the best ways to be socially
responsible is for the firm to proactively conserve and preserve the natural environment. For
example, developing a corporate sustainability report annually is not legally required, but such a
report, based on concrete actions, goes a long way toward assuring stakeholders that the firm is
worthy of their support. Business ethics, social responsibility, and environmental sustainability
are interrelated and key strategic issues facing all organizations.
Key Terms and Concepts bribe (p. 332)
bribery (p. 332)
business ethics (p. 328)
code of business ethics (p. 330)
environment (p. 334)
environmental management system (EMS) (p. 337)
ISO 14000 (p. 336)
ISO 14001 (p. 336)
sexual harassment (p. 332)
social responsibility (p. 328)
sustainability (p. 328)
sustainability report (p. 335)
triple-bottom-line (p. 328)
whistle-blowing (p. 331)
workplace romance (p. 332)
Issues for Review and Discussion 10-1. Explain the triple-bottom-line approach to managing
any business or organization.
10-2. How does TOMS Shoes uniquely meet its social re-
sponsibility obligations?
10-3. As a part of its Global Coalition Against Corruption,
Transparency International publishes annual corruption
perception indices that rank countries according to their
relative corruption levels. Name 3 countries in the top
20 (least corrupt). Name three countries in the bottom
20 (most corrupt).
10-4. What do whales, sharks, songbirds, and coral reefs have
in common? What are the implications for companies?
10-5. Does it pay to be socially responsible? In general,
economists say no and philanthropists say yes. What
do you say? Why? What are the implications for
companies?
10-6. Summarize Donald Palmer’s research regarding “Who
Is Prone to Be Unethical in a Business?” What are the
implications for companies?
10-7. Chick-fil-A is closed on Sundays. Is that wise manage-
ment or irresponsible activism? Discuss.
10-8. List five reasons why workplace romance can be detri-
mental to workplace morale and productivity.
10-9. List five benefits of having workplace romance guide-
lines in a workplace.
10-10. Discuss the ethics of workplace romance.
10-11. Explain why concern for wildlife is a strategic issue for
firms.
10-12. Explain why whistle-blower payouts by the federal
government to informants are becoming more and more
common.
10-13. AOL has 100 lobbyists on its payroll and spends about
$20 million on lobbying in Washington, DC, annually.
Is this ethical?
10-14. If you owned a small business, would you develop a code
of business conduct? If yes, what variables would you in-
clude? If no, how would you ensure that ethical business
standards were being followed by your employees?
344 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
10-15. What do you feel is the relationship between personal
ethics and business ethics? Are they or should they be
the same?
10-16. How can firms best ensure that their code of business
ethics is read, understood, believed, remembered, and
acted on, rather than ignored?
10-17. Why is it important not to view the concept of whistle-
blowing as “tattle-telling” or “ratting” on another
employee?
10-18. List six desired results of “ethics training programs”
in terms of recommended business ethics policies and
procedures in the firm.
10-19. Discuss bribery. Would actions such as politicians
adding earmarks in legislation or pharmaceutical
salespersons giving away drugs to physicians con-
stitute bribery? Identify three business activities
that would constitute bribery and three actions that
would not.
10-20. How could a strategist’s attitude toward social respon-
sibility affect a firm’s strategy? On a 1-to 10-scale
ranging from Nader’s view to Friedman’s view, what
is your attitude toward social responsibility?
10-21. What is the International Standardization Organization
(ISO)? What is the purpose of the ISO 14001 stan-
dards, and what types of entities can receive these
certifications?
10-22. How are policies and procedures changing regarding
growing animals for slaughter for supermarkets?
10-23. Is it a conflict of interest for companies to encour-
age employee whistle-blowing because the firm
could be fined heavily or incur worse penalties?
Explain.
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
SET 1: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR COCA-COLA
EXERCISE 10A
Does Coca-Cola or PepsiCo Win on Sustainability?
Purpose
Sustainability reports are increasingly becoming expected or even required by business organizations.
This exercise will give you practice in comparing and evaluating sustainability reports.
Instructions
Step 1 Go to the Coca-Cola corporate website and click on Sustainability and review the com-
pany’s most recent Sustainability Report. Determine the six best aspects of the Coca-Cola
report.
Step 2 Go to the PepsiCo corporate website and click on Sustainability and review the com-
pany’s most recent Sustainability Report. Determine the six best aspects of the PepsiCo
report.
Step 3 Develop a report comparing and contrasting the two companies’ Sustainability Report with
regard to business ethics, social responsibility, and environmental sustainability. In your
opinion, does Coca-Cola receive a grade of A on their business ethics, social responsibility,
and sustainability efforts? Grade each company on the three dimensions, and give each an
overall grade. Justify your grades.
SET 2: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR MY UNIVERSITY
EXERCISE 10B
How Does My University Compare to Others on the Use of Green Power?
Purpose
Green energy sources include wind, geothermal, hydro, and solar energy. Wind and hydro sources
generate energy through the movement of air and water, whereas geothermal and solar sources
CHAPTER 10 • BuSINESS ETHICS, ENVIRONMENTAL SuSTAINABILITY, AND CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY 345
generate energy through heat. All, however, provide renewable, reliable energy and protect the envi-
ronment. In contrast, fossil-fuel energy sources, such as oil, gas, and coal, are not renewable and pol-
lute the environment. The purpose of this exercise is to determine where your university would rank
among all universities on its reliance of green energy.
Instructions
Step 1 The following website reveals colleges and universities rated according to the extent that
they use green energy sources to operate.
https://www.epa.gov/greenpower/green-power-partnership-top-30-college-university
Even if your university is not listed in the current report by the EPA, conduct research to
determine where your institution would rank.
Step 2 Develop an action plan to move your university towards greater reliance on green energy.
SET 3: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR MYSELF
EXERCISE 10C
What Is My Business Ethics Quotient?
Purpose
This chapter reveals that being unethical is not abnormal or rare. Misconduct is a normal phe-
nomenon and wrongdoing is as prevalent as “rightdoing,” Misconduct is most often done by
people who are primarily good, ethical, and socially responsible. Palmer reports that individuals
engage in unethical activities because of a plethora of structure, processes, and mechanisms in-
herent in the functioning of organizations, and, importantly, all of us are candidates to be unethi-
cal under the right circumstances in any organization. Implications of this new research abound
for managers.
The purpose of this exercise is to determine your business ethics quotient. We can use the word
quotient to refer to the extent that your behavior and attitude are good or bad compared to your fellow
business students. In this exercise, your business ethics quotient can range from very bad (total score
of 16) to very good (total score of 80). (Donald Palmer, “The New Perspective on Organizational
Wrongdoing,” California Managment Review, 56, no. 1 (2013): 5–23).
Instructions
Step 1 Rate your personal behavior and attitude on the following dimensions on a 1- to 5-scale
where 1 is really bad, 2 is bad, 3 is OK, 4 is good, and 5 is really good. Beside each word
given, rate yourself compared to your fellow business students.
1. Trustworthy
2. Reliable
3. Dependable
4. Caring
5. Humble
6. Considerate
7. Compassionate
8. Forgiving
9. Loving
10. Courteous
11. Respectful
12. Reverent
13. Supportive
14. Encouraging
15. Helpful
16. Giving
Step 2 Sum your ratings to determine your total business ethics quotient score. Are you pleased
with your score? Do you need to improve your score? How can you improve your score?
Would a business thinking of hiring you be pleased with your score?
346 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
SET 4: INDIVIDUAL VERSUS GROUP STRATEGIC PLANNING
EXERCISE 10D
How Potentially Severe Are the Various Reasons Why Workplace Romance Should Be Discouraged?
Purpose
This chapter discusses workplace romance as being potentially detrimental to workplace morale and
productivity, for a number of reasons that include:
1. Favoritism complaints can arise.
2. Confidentiality of records can be breached.
3. Reduced quality and quantity of work can become a problem.
4. Personal arguments can lead to work arguments.
5. Whispering secrets can lead to tensions and hostilities among coworkers.
6. Sexual harassment (or discrimination) charges may ensue, either by the involved person or a
third party.
7. Conflicts of interest can arise, especially when wellbeing of the partner trumps wellbeing of the
firm.
The purpose of this exercise is to examine more closely the reasons why workplace romance can
cause problems. In addition, the purpose of this exercise is to examine whether individual decision
making is better than group decision making. Academic research suggests that groups make better
decisions than individuals about 80 percent of the time.
Instructions
Rank the seven reasons why workplace romance can cause problems as to their relative importance
(potential severity), where 1 = most important, to 7 = least important). Use Table 10-6. First, rank the
reasons as an individual. Then, rank the seven reasons as part of a group of three. Thus, determine
what person(s) and what group(s) here today can come closest to the expert ranking. This exercise
enables examination of the relative effectiveness of individual versus group decision making in stra-
tegic planning.
Steps
1. Fill in Column 1 in Table 10-6 to reveal your individual ranking of the relative importance of
the seven reasons (1= most important, 2 = next most important, etc.) in terms of how potentially
damaging each reason can be. For example, if you think Reason #1 (Favoritism) is the eighth-
most important (potentially severe) reason, then enter an 8 in Table 1 in Column 1 beside
Favoritism.
2. Fill in Column 2 in Table 10-6 to reveal your group’s ranking of the relative importance of the
seven reasons (1= most important, 2 = next most important, etc.) in terms of how potentially
damaging each reason can be.
3. Fill in Column 3 in Table 10-6 to reveal the expert’s ranking of the seven reasons in terms of
how potentially damaging each reason can be.
4. Fill in Column 4 in Table 10-6 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 1 and Column
3 to reveal how well you performed as an individual in this exercise. (Note: Absolute difference
disregards negative numbers.)
5. Fill in Column 5 in Table 10-6 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 2 and Column
3 to reveal how well your group performed in this exercise.
6. Sum Column 4. Sum Column 5.
7. Compare the Column 4 sum with the Column 5 sum. If your Column 4 sum is less than your Column
5 sum, then you performed better as an individual than as a group. Normally, group decision making
is superior to individual decision making, so if you did better than your group, you did excellent.
8. The Individual Winner(s): The individual(s) with the lowest Column 4 sum is the WINNER.
9. The Group Winners(s): The group(s) with the lowest Column 5 score is the WINNER.
CHAPTER 10 • BuSINESS ETHICS, ENVIRONMENTAL SuSTAINABILITY, AND CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY 347
MINI-CASE ON CHICK-FIL-A
WHAT COMPANY HAS THE MOST ETHICAL BUSINESS CULTURE? The answer: Chick-fil-A. Headquartered in Atlanta, Georgia, Chick-fil-A is a privately-held com-
pany that prides itself on demonstrating high business ethics, anchored by being closed once a
week to spend time with family and friends. Despite being closed one-seventh of the time, Chick-
fil-A has surpassed Kentucky Fried Chicken (KFC) as the largest chicken quick-service restau-
rant (QSR) in the United States by revenue. This is shocking because there are only about 2,200
Chick-fil-A’s in the nation, compared to KFC’s 4,500. Total annual revenues for Chick-fil-A are
about $5 billion.
Each Chick-fil-A restaurant averages more than $4.4 million in annual sales, more than three
times KFC’s average at $1 million. In fact, Chick-fil-A’s average sales per restaurant is highest of all
restaurants in the United States, with the number two chain being Whataburger, which generates $2.7
million per restaurant, a mere 61 percent of Chick-Fil-A. In terms of direct chicken restaurant rival
firms, Chick-fil-A dominates in annual per-restaurant sales, toppling direct competitors Zaxby’s ($2.3
million), El Pollo Loco ($1.9 million), Bojangles’ ($1.8 million), Popeyes ($1.4 million), Boston
Market ($1.4 million), and Wingstop ($1.1 million).
About 65 percent of Check-fil-A’s business is through its drive-thru where employees stand
outside the restaurant taking orders on tablets. Research shows that Chick-fil-A employees say
“thank you” 97 percent of the time; customers report that employees have a pleasant demeanor
and smile in 9 out of 10 visits. The company’s employee retention rate is exceptionally high.
Chick-fil-A has the second-highest rate of accuracy at the drive-thru of all restaurants, getting
orders right 95 percent of the time, second only to Carl’s Jr.’s accuracy rate of 97 percent, in a
recent study.
The only aspect of business where Chick-fil-A does not rank highly is in speed of service. The
average wait time at Chick-fil-A’s drive thru is 4 minutes and 16 seconds, which is about 31 seconds
longer than the average drive-thru wait time. But all in all, Chick-fil-A is an exemplary triple-bottom-
line company.
Ju rg
en fr
/S h u tt
er st
o ck
TABLE 10- 6 Workplace Romance Analysis: Comparing Individual versus Group Decision Making
Reasons Why Workplace Romance Is Not Recommended Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5
1. Favoritism complaints can arise.
2. Confidentiality of records can be
breached.
3. Reduced quality and quantity of
work can become a problem.
4. Personal arguments can lead to work
arguments.
5. Whispering secrets can lead to tensions
and hostilities among coworkers.
6. Sexual harassment (or discrimination)
charges may ensue, either by
the involved male or a third party.
7. Conflicts of interest can arise, especially
when wellbeing of the partner
trumps wellbeing of the firm.
Sums
348 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
Questions
1. Describe the business culture at Chick-fil-A.
2. To what extent does Chick-fil-A’s culture account for Chick-fil-A’s performance?
3. How would you grade Chick-fil-A’s triple-bottom-line? Why?
4. Should Chick-fil-A change its policy and be open on Sundays since all its major rivals are open
on Sunday? Why or why not?
Source: Based on http://dailycaller.com/2017/08/02/chick-fil-a-generates-most-revenue-per-restaurant-in-us/Also,
http://www.businessinsider.com/why-chick-fil-a-is-so-successful-2016-10
Web Resources
Current Readings Ansiti, Marco and Karim R. Lakhani. “Managing Our Hub
Economy: Strategy, Ethics, and Network Competition
in the Age of Digital Superpowers.” Harvard Business
Review 95, no. 5 (September–October 2017): 84–92. Berchicci, Luca, Glen Dowell, and Andrew King.
“Environmental Performance and the Market for Corporate Assets.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 12, (December 2017): 2444–2464.
Bhattacharya, C. B. and Paul Polman. “Sustainability Lessons From the Front Lines.” MIT Sloan Management Review 58, no. 2 (Winter 2017): 71–78.
Flammer, Caroline and Jiao Luo. “Corporate Social Responsibility as an Employee Governance Tool: Evidence from a Quasi-Experiment.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 2 (February 2017): 163–183.
Gupta, Abhinay, Forrest Briscoe, and Donald C. Hambrick. “Red, Blue, and Purple Firms: Organizational Political Ideology and Corporate Social Responsibility.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 5 (May 2017): 1018–1040.
Huang, Lei and Ted A. Paterson. “Group Ethical Voice Influence of Ethical Leadership and Impact on Ethical Performance.” Journal of Management 43, no. 4 (April 2017): 1157–1184.
Kilduff, Gavin J., Adam D. Galinsky, Edoardo Gallo, and J. James Reade. “Whatever It Takes to Win: Rivalry Increases Unethical Behavior.” Academy of Management Journal 59, no. 5 (October 2016): 1508–1534.
Kiron, David, Gregory Unruh, Nina Kruschwitz, Martin Reeves, Holger Rubel, Alexander Meyer, and Zum Felde.
“Corporate Sustainability at a Crossroads: Progress Toward Our Common Future in Uncertain Times.” MIT Sloan Management Review 58, no. 4 (Summer 2017): 86–96.
Li, Xiaoyang, and Yue M. Zhou. “Offshoring Pollution while Offshoring Production?” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 11 (November 2017): 2310–2329.
Love, Geoffrey E., Jaegoo Lim, and Michael K. Bednar. “The Face of the Firm: The Influence of CEOs on Corporate Reputation.” Academy of Management Journal 60, no. 4 (August 2017): 1462–1481.
Schrempf-Stirling, Judith, Guido Palazzo, and Robert A. Phillips. “Historic Corporate Social Responsibility.” Academy of Management Review 41, no. 4 (October 2016): 700–719.
Shiu, Yung-Ming and Shou-Lin Yang. “Does Engagement in Corporate Social Responsibility Provide Strategic Insurance-Like Effects?” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 2 (February 2017): 455–470.
Waldman, David A., Danni Wang, Sean T. Hannah, and Pierre A. Balthazard. “A Neurological and Ideological Perspective of Ethical Leadership.” Academy of Management Journal 60, no. 4 (August 2017): 1285–1306.
Wassmer, Ulrich, Guillaume Pain, and Raymond L. Paquin, “Taking Environmental Partnerships Seriously.” Business Horizons 60, Issue 1 (January 2017): 135–142.
Yao, Fiona K. and Song Chang. “Do Individual Employees’ Learning Goal Orientation and Civic Virtue Matter? A Micro-Foundations Perspective on Firm Absorptive Capacity.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 10 (October 2017): 2041–2060.
1. Forbes reveals the top-rated companies for corporate so-
cial responsibility.
https://www.forbes.com/sites/
karstenstrauss/2017/09/13/the-10-companies-with-the-
best-csr-reputations-in-2017/#3bf7894b546b
2. EPA reveals the top-rated universities that operate using
green power such as solar and wind.
https://www.epa.gov/greenpower/green-power-partnership-
top-30-college-university
3. EPA reveals the top-rated retail companies that operate
using green power such as solar and wind.
https://www.epa.gov/
greenpower/green-power-partnership-top-30-retail
4. Transparency International Reveals the least corrupt and
most corrupt countries on the plant.
https://www.transparency.org/news/
feature/corruption_perceptions_index_2016
5. Global Reporting Initiative gives guidelines for what to
include in a Sustainability Report.
https://www.globalreporting.org/information/
sustainability-reporting/Pages/default.aspx
6. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service’s Endangered Species
Program provides excellent tips on how you can help
save wildlife and plants in your everyday life.
https://www.fws.gov/endangered/esa-library/pdf/
what_you_can.pdf
CHAPTER 10 • BuSINESS ETHICS, ENVIRONMENTAL SuSTAINABILITY, AND CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY 349
Endnotes
1. Saul Gellerman, “Why ‘Good’ Managers Make Bad
Ethical Choices,” Harvard Business Review 64, no. 4
(July–August 1986): 88.
2. Based on Mark L. Frigo and Joel Litman, DRIVEN:
Business Strategy, Human Actions and the Creation of
Wealth, Strategy and Execution (Chicago: Strategy &
Execution LLC, 2008).
3. Peter Drucker, Management: Tasks, Responsibilities, and
Practices (New York: Harper & Row, 1974): 462, 463.
4. Donald Palmer, “The New Perspective on Organizational
Wrongdoing,” California Management Review, 56, no. 1
(2013): 5–23.
5. Ibid, 5–23.
6. https://www.transparency.org/news/feature/global_
corruption_barometer_citizens_voices_from_around_
the_world
7. https://www.transparency.org/news/feature/global_
corruption_barometer_citizens_voices_from_around_
the_world
8. http://www.usatoday.com/money/companies/
management/story/2012-05-14/ceo-firings/54964476/1
9. http://www.businessknowhow.com/manage/romance.htm
10. Phred Dvorak, Bob Davis, and Louise Radnofsky, “Firms
Confront Boss-Subordinate Love Affairs,” Wall Street
Journal, October 27, 2008, B5.
11. Tom Brook, “Declining Numbers Mute Many Birds’
Songs,” USA Today, September 11, 2001, 4A.
12. John Ogden, “Maintaining Diversity in the Oceans,”
Environment, April 2001, 29–36.
13. http://www.organicauthority.com/foodie-buzz/jesse-
laflamme-advocate-farms-farmers-organic-eggs.html
14. http://www.wildaid.org/sharks
350
11
Strategy Formulation
Feedback Loop
Strategy Implementation
Strategy Evaluation
Chapter 10: Business Ethics, Environmental Sustainability, and Social Responsibility
Chapter 11: Global and International Issues
Strategy Evaluation
and Governance Chapter 9
Implementing Strategies:
Finance and Accounting
Issues Chapter 8
Implementing Strategies:
Management and Marketing
Issues Chapter 7
Business Vision and
Mission Chapter 2
Strategies in Action Chapter 5
Strategy Analysis and
Choice Chapter 6
The Internal
Assessment Chapter 4
The External Assessment Chapter 3
FIGURE 11- 1
The Comprehensive, Integrative Strategic-Management Model
Source: Fred R. David, “How Companies Define Their Mission,” Long Range Planning 22, no. 1 (February 1989): 91. See also Anik Ratnaningsih, Nadjadji Anwar, Patdono Suwignjo, and Putu Artama Wiguna, “Balance Scorecard of David’s Strategic Modeling at Industrial Business for National Construction Contractor of Indonesia,” Journal of Mathematics and Technology, no. 4, (October 2010): 20.
351
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
The following exercises are found at the end of this chapter:
SET 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
EXERCISE 11A: Business Culture Variation across Countries: A Report for Coca-Cola Company
EXERCISE 11B: Coca-Cola Wants to Further Penetrate Africa. Can You Help Them?
SET 2: Strategic Planning for My University
EXERCISE 11C: Does My University Recruit in Foreign Countries?
SET 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability
EXERCISE 11D: How Well-Traveled Are You Compared to Your Colleagues?
SET 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
EXERCISE 11E: How Important Are Various Potential Advantages to Initiating, Continuing,
or Expanding a Firm’s International Operations?
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following:
11- 1. Discuss the nature of doing business globally, including labor union issues and tax rates.
11- 2. Explain the advantages and disadvantages of doing business globally.
11- 3. Discuss the global challenge facing firms, including outsourcing and reshoring.
11- 4. Compare and contrast American business culture versus foreign business cultures; explain why this is a strategic issue.
11- 5. Discuss business culture, with emphasis on Mexico, Japan, China, and India.
11- 6. Discuss business climate, with emphasis on Africa, China, Indonesia, India, and Mexico.
Global and International Issues
MyLab Management
Improve Your Grade!
If your instructor is using MyLab Management, visit www.pearson.com/mylab/management
for videos, simulations, and writing exercises.
352 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
G lobal considerations impact virtually all strategic decisions, as illustrated with white
shading in Figure 11-1. The boundaries of countries can no longer define the limits of
our imaginations. To see and appreciate the world from the perspective of others has be-
come a matter of survival for many businesses. To survive and grow, more and more companies
are monitoring and capitalizing on changes in competitors, markets, prices, suppliers, distribu-
tors, governments, creditors, shareholders, and customers worldwide.
The price and quality of a firm’s products must be competitive on a worldwide basis, not
just on a local basis. Shareholders expect substantial revenue growth; doing business globally is
an excellent way to achieve this end. More and more countries are developing the capacity and
will to compete aggressively in world markets. Foreign businesses and countries are willing to
learn, adapt, innovate, and invent to compete successfully on a global scale. As indicated in the
exemplary strategist capsule, CEO Andre Calantzopoulos is leading his company to succeed
globally.
The Nature of Doing Business Globally Exports of goods and services from the United States account for only 13 percent of U.S. gross
domestic product (GDP), so the nation is still largely a domestic, continental economy. In con-
trast, as a percentage of GDP, exports comprise 46 percent of the German economy, 20 percent
of the Chinese economy, and 172 percent of the Singapore economy. Singapore’s number is so
high because it imports oil and other products and then reexports them globally. A point here is
that, with exports making up just 13 percent of the country’s GDP, the United States has substan-
tial room for improvement in doing business.
A world market has emerged from what previously was a multitude of distinct national mar-
kets, and the climate for international business today is more favorable than in years past. Mass
communication and high technology have created similar patterns of consumption across diverse
cultures worldwide. Consequently, companies may find it difficult to survive by relying solely
on domestic markets.
Globalization is a process of doing business worldwide, such that strategic decisions are
made based on global profitability of the firm rather than just domestic considerations. A global
strategy seeks to meet the needs of customers worldwide, with the highest value at the lowest
LO 11.1
EXEMPLARY STRATEGIST
Andre Calantzopoulos, CEO of Philip Morris International Andre Calantzopoulos, CEO of Philip Morris, is actively shifting con-
sumers worldwide to a smokeless tobacco product, that heats but
does not burn tobacco. The product is much less harmful than regular
cigarettes and electric (e) cigarettes. Calantzopoulos has pledged $1
billion to create a foundation to encourage every smoker to switch to
the company’s smoke-free alternative. Calantzopoulos’s new smoke-
less strategic plan at Philip Morris is based on the premise that most
smokers have two unmet needs: (1) they want something not per-
sonally harmful, and (2) they want something that does not bother
others. The company plans to spend billions on R&D to develop new
smokeless cigarette-like products and market those products glob-
ally. A smokeless tobacco starter kit costs a bit more than $100, but
is selling really well. Philip Morris’ revenues and profits are growing nicely with Calantzopoulos leading the way, even as rival traditional
tobacco companies falter. Some analysts say Calantzopoulos could
save millions of lives and trillions of dollars (in health-care costs) if his
strategic plan continues to be successful. Let’s all wish this exemplary
strategist the best of luck.
Source: Based on Saabira Chaudhuri, “Behind Philip Morris International’s
Smokeless Bet,” Wall Street Journal (October 30, 2017): R3 and R10.
There Is an Alternative!
S to
ck fo
to cz
/1 2 3 R
F
CHAPTER 11 • GLOBAL AND INTERNATIONAL ISSuES 353
Multinational Firms
Organizations that conduct business operations across national borders are called international
(or multinational) firms. The strategic-management process is conceptually the same for multi-
national firms as for purely domestic firms; however, the process is more complex as a result of
more variables and relationships. The external opportunities and threats that face multinational
firms are almost limitless, and the number and complexity of these factors increase dramatically
with the number of products produced and the number of geographic areas served. Millions of
small businesses do business everyday outside their home country by interacting with customers
though websites, smartphones, and social media.
More time and effort are required to identify and evaluate external trends and events in
multinational firms. Geographic distance, cultural and national differences, and variations in
business practices often make communication between domestic headquarters and overseas
operations difficult. Strategy implementation can be more difficult because different cultures
have different norms, values, and work ethics. Multinational firms face unique and diverse risks,
such as expropriation of assets, currency losses through exchange rate fluctuations, unfavorable
TABLE 11-1 The Five Largest Companies in Nine Countries (2018)
United Kingdom India Japan
1. HSBC Holdings 1. Reliance Industries 1. Toyota Motor
2. Prudential 2. State Bank of India 2. Mitsubishi UFJ Financial
3. Lloyds Banking Group 3. Oil and Natural Gas 3. Nippon TeleG & TeleP
4. Barclays 4. HDFC Bank 4. Softbank
5. Rio Tinto 5. Indian Oil 5. Japan Post Holdings
Australia Mexico China
1. Commonwealth Bank 1. America Movil 1. Ind. & Com. Bank of China
2. Westpac Banking 2. FEMSA 2. China Construction Bank
3. ANZ 3. GFNorte 3. Agricultural Bank of China
4. National Australia Bank 4. Grupo Mexico 4. Bank of China
5. BHP Billiton 5. Cemex 5. Ping An Insurance Group
USA Canada Indonesia
1. Berkshire Hathaway 1. Royal Bank of Canada 1. Bank Rakyat Indonesia
2. JPMorgan Chase 2. TD Bank Group 2. Bank Mandiri
3. Wells Fargo 3. Bank of Nova Scotia 3. Bank Central Asia
4. Bank of America 4. Bank of Montreal 4. Telkom Indonesia
5. Apple 5. Manulife 5. Bank Negara Indonesia
Source: Based on information at forbes.com/global2000/list/
cost. This may mean locating production in countries with lower labor costs or abundant natural
resources, locating research and complex engineering centers where skilled scientists and engi-
neers can be found, and locating marketing activities close to the markets to be served.
A global strategy includes designing, producing, and marketing products with global needs
in mind rather than considering just a home country. A global strategy integrates actions against
competitors into a worldwide plan. Today, many global buyers and sellers have mastered capa-
bilities for instant transmission of money and information across continents.
In any industry that is global, it can be a risky posture to remain a domestic competitor,
because more aggressive rival firms may use global growth to capture economies of scale and
learning. The domestic firm could then face an attack on domestic markets using different
(and possibly superior) technology, product design, manufacturing, marketing approaches, and
economies of scale. As a point of global reference, the five largest companies in nine different
countries are listed in Table 11-1, (as determined from “equally weighted measures of revenue,
profits, assets, and market value”).
354 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
foreign court interpretations of contracts and agreements, social/political disturbances, import/
export restrictions, tariffs, and trade barriers. Strategists in global firms are often confronted
with the need to be globally competitive and nationally responsive at the same time. With the
rise in world commerce, government and regulatory bodies are more closely monitoring foreign
business practices. The U.S. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act, for example, monitors business
practices in many areas.
Before entering international markets, firms should scan relevant journals and patent re-
ports, seek the advice of academic and research organizations, participate in international trade
fairs, form partnerships, and conduct extensive research to broaden their contacts and diminish
the risk of doing business in new markets. Firms can also offset some risks of doing business
internationally by obtaining insurance from the U.S. government’s Overseas Private Investment
Corporation (OPIC).
The decision to expand operations into foreign markets—that is, to globalize—is one of
the most important strategic decisions made by companies. Variables that influence how, when,
where, and why to internationalize have attracted much attention in scholarly journals. Recent
research reveals that countries are attractive not only because of their own institutions but also
as a function of their serving as a platform for entry into other regions.1 Therefore, multinational
firms make globalization decisions with special consideration in mind for how a particular re-
gion or country will facilitate the firm’s further globalization into other regions and countries.
Also important is the need to align any strategy with a firm’s vision and mission and an assess-
ment of the potential to gain and sustain competitive advantages.
U.S.-based multinational firms have historically kept cash earned offshore in foreign sub-
sidiaries and banks to avoid high U.S. corporate taxes. However, this changed in 2018 with the
new federal corporate tax overhaul. The new U.S. federal tax law that went into effect in 2018
imposed a one-time 15.5 percent tax on foreign earnings held offshore in cash accounts, whether
the firm brings the cash back to the United States or not. The law is designed to encourage com-
panies to bring cash back to the United States. Numerous companies, such as Apple Inc., have
billions of dollars in cash offshore, and many, perhaps most, of those firms are indeed bringing
that cash back into the United States. So, what are those firms doing with the cash? About 70
percent of the cash repatriated by companies is going towards stock buybacks and paying divi-
dends, with the remaining amount going to investments in company infrastructure and employ-
ees. For example, Apple in recent years bought back 5 percent of its stock, but in the beginning
of 2018, that percentage rose to 7 percent annually. The huge transfer of cash from outside com-
pany coffers to inside U.S. investments from 2018 to 2022 is expected to spur the U.S. economy,
boost the stock market, and lead to increased employee wages and benefits.
Labor Unions
The existence or prevalence of labor unions can be an important factor in many strategic deci-
sions, such as where to locate stores or factories because companies often like to avoid unions.
The presence of unions raises wage rates for companies. Union membership varies widely
across Europe, ranging from 74 percent of employees in Finland, 70 percent in Sweden, 67
percent in Denmark, and 8 percent in Lithuania and France. In general, the popularity of unions
across Europe is declining and has been for a decade. The major exception to this trend is Italy
where union membership is slowly growing.
The average level of union membership across the whole of the European Union (EU),
weighted by the numbers employed in the different member states is 23 percent, compared to
about 11 percent in the United States. The European average is held down by relatively low
levels of membership in some of the larger EU states: Germany with 18 percent, France with 8
percent, Spain with 19 percent, and Poland with 12 percent.
Tax Rates
Tax rates in countries can represent an important strategic consideration regarding where to build
manufacturing facilities or retail stores or even where to acquire other firms. High corporate tax
rates deter investment in new factories and also provide strong incentives for corporations to
avoid and evade taxes. Corporate tax rates vary considerably across countries and companies.
CHAPTER 11 • GLOBAL AND INTERNATIONAL ISSuES 355
Advantages and Disadvantages of Doing Business Globally Firms have numerous reasons for formulating and implementing strategies that initiate, con-
tinue, or expand involvement in business operations across national borders. Perhaps the greatest
advantage is that firms can gain new customers for their products and services, thus increasing
revenues. Growth in revenues and profits is a common organizational objective and often an ex-
pectation of shareholders because it is a measure of organizational success. Potential advantages
to initiating, continuing, or expanding international operations are as follows:
1. Firms can gain new customers for their products.
2. Foreign operations can absorb excess capacity, reduce unit costs, and spread economic
risks over a wider number of markets.
LO 11.2
TABLE 11-2 Corporate Tax Rates for Various Countries in 2018 (from High to Low)
Country Corporate Tax Rate
United Arab Emirates 55
Argentina 35
France 33.33
India 34
Germany 30
Mexico 30
Canada 26.5
Italy 24
China 25
USA 21
Finland 20
Turkey 20
Poland 19
Singapore 17
Romania 16
Ireland 12
Bulgaria 10
Bermuda 00
Caymen Islands 00
Anguilla 00
Turks and Caicos Islands 00
Source: Based on https://taxfoundation.org/corporate-income-tax-rates-around-the-world-2017/. Also https://home.kpmg.com/xx/en/home/services/tax/tax-tools-and-resources/tax-rates-online/corporate-tax- rates-table.html
Across 190 countries on the planet, the average corporate income tax rate is about 22 percent.
The average corporate tax rate across Europe is 18 percent. The average corporate rate globally
has been falling annually since 1980 when the average was 38 percent. Hungary reduced their
corporate tax rate from 19 to 9 percent in 2017. The United States cut its top statutory corporate
tax in 2018 to 21 percent, the lowest rate among the Group of Seven (G7) nations, which include
Canada, France, Germany, Italy, Japan, the United Kingdom and the United States.
As indicated in Table 11-2, the top national statutory corporate tax rates in 2018 among
sample countries ranged from 0 percent in Bermuda to 55 percent in the United Arab Emirates
(UAE). Signet Jewelers Ltd., owner of Kay’s Jewelers, Zale Corporation, and Jared the Galleria
of Jewelry, is headquartered in Bermuda for one key strategic reason: zero corporate taxes.
356 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
3. Foreign operations can allow firms to establish low-cost production facilities in locations
close to raw materials or cheap labor.
4. Competitors in foreign markets may not exist, or competition may be less intense than in
domestic markets.
5. Foreign operations may result in reduced tariffs, lower taxes, and favorable political
treatment.
6. Multinational joint ventures can enable firms to learn the technology, culture, and business
practices of other people and to make contacts with potential customers, suppliers, credi-
tors, and distributors in foreign countries.
7. Economies of scale can be better achieved from operation in global rather than solely do-
mestic markets. Larger-scale production and better efficiencies allow higher sales volumes
and lower-price offerings.
8. A firm’s power and prestige in domestic markets may be significantly enhanced if the
firm competes globally. Enhanced prestige can translate into improved negotiating power
among creditors, suppliers, distributors, and other important groups.
The availability, depth, and reliability of economic and marketing information in different
countries vary extensively, as do industrial structures, business practices, and the number and
nature of regional organizations. There are also numerous potential disadvantages of initiating,
continuing, or expanding business across national borders, such as the following:
1. Foreign operations could be seized by nationalistic factions.
2. Firms confront different and often little-understood social, cultural, demographic, envi-
ronmental, political, governmental, legal, technological, economic, and competitive forces
when doing business internationally.
3. Weaknesses of competitors in foreign lands are often overestimated, and strengths are often
underestimated. Keeping informed about the number and nature of competitors is more dif-
ficult when doing business internationally.
4. Language, culture, and value systems differ among countries, which can create barriers to
communication and problems managing people.
5. Gaining an understanding of regional organizations such as the European Economic
Community, the Latin American Free Trade Area, the International Bank for
Reconstruction and Development, and the International Finance Corporation is difficult,
but is often required in doing business internationally.
6. Dealing with two or more monetary systems can complicate international business
operations.
The Global Challenge Few companies can afford to ignore the presence of international competition. Firms that seem
insulated and comfortable today may be vulnerable tomorrow; for example, foreign banks do
not yet compete or operate in most of the United States, but this is quickly changing. Thomson
Reuters annually compiles a list of the world’s most innovative companies, using metrics that
include patent activity, R&D investment, success rate, globalization, and influence. In terms
of total annual expenditures on R&D in 2017, Amazon, Alphabet, and Intel in the United
States led the world with $16.1, $13.9, and $12.7 billion spent, respectively, but Samsung in
South Korea ($12.7B), Volkswagen in Germany ($12.1B), Roche Holding AG in Switzerland
($11.4B), Novartis AG in Switzerland ($9.6B), and Toyota Motor in Japan ($9.3B) were other
firms in the top 11. Other outside U.S. firms that spend more than $5 billion annually in R&D
include Daimler AG (Germany), Honda Motor (Japan), AstraZeneca PLC (Britain), Siemens
(Germany), and Sanofi (France).
The U.S. economy is becoming much less American and more global. A globalzed world
economy and monetary system are emerging. Corporations in every corner of the globe are
taking advantage of the opportunity to obtain customers globally. Markets are shifting rapidly
and, in many cases, converging in tastes, trends, and prices. Innovative transport systems are
accelerating the transfer of technology. Shifts in the nature and location of production systems,
LO 11.3
CHAPTER 11 • GLOBAL AND INTERNATIONAL ISSuES 357
especially to China and India, are reducing the response time associated with changing market
conditions. China has more than one billion residents, including a dramatically growing middle
class that is eager to buy goods and services.
Many countries are quite protectionist, and this position can impact companies’ strategic
plans. Protectionism refers to countries imposing tariffs, taxes, and regulations on firms
outside the country to favor their own companies and people. The U.S. and China in early
2018 are imposing various tariffs on each other’s products imported. Most economists argue
that protectionism harms the world economy because it inhibits trade among countries and
invites retaliation.
Advancements in telecommunications are drawing countries, cultures, and organizations
worldwide closer together. Foreign revenue as a percentage of total company revenues already
exceeds 50 percent in hundreds of U.S. firms, including ExxonMobil, Gillette, Dow Chemical,
Citicorp, Colgate-Palmolive, and Texaco. A primary reason why most domestic firms do busi-
ness globally is that growth in demand for goods outside the U.S. is considerably higher than in-
side. For example, the domestic food industry is growing just 3 percent per year, so Kraft Foods,
the second-largest food company in the world behind Nestlé, is focusing on foreign acquisitions.
Shareholders and investors of virtually all companies expect sustained (more than 5 percent)
growth in revenues from firms; that level of growth for many firms can only be achieved by capi-
talizing on demand outside the United States. Joint ventures and partnerships between domestic
and foreign firms are becoming the rule rather than the exception!
Fully 95 percent of the world’s population lives outside the United States, and this group
is growing 70 percent faster than the U.S. population. The lineup of competitors in virtually
all industries is global. General Motors and Ford compete with Toyota and Hyundai. General
Electric and Westinghouse Electric battle Siemens and Mitsubishi. Caterpillar and John
Deere compete with Komatsu. Goodyear battles Michelin, Bridgestone/Firestone, and Pirelli.
Boeing competes with Airbus. Only a few U.S. industries—such as furniture, printing, retail-
ing, consumer-packaged goods, and retail banking—are not yet greatly challenged by foreign
competitors. But many products and components in these industries too are now manufactured
in foreign countries. International operations can be as simple as exporting a product to a single
foreign country or as complex as operating manufacturing, distribution, and marketing facilities
in many countries.
Different industries become global for different reasons. The need to amortize massive
R&D investments over many markets is a major reason why the aircraft manufacturing industry
became global. Monitoring globalization in one’s industry is an important strategic-management
activity. Knowing how to use that information for one’s competitive advantage is even more
important. For example, firms may look around the world for the best technology and select one
that has the most promise for the largest number of markets. When firms design a product, they
design it to be marketable in as many countries as possible. When firms manufacture a product,
they select the lowest-cost source, which may be Japan for semiconductors, Sri Lanka for tex-
tiles, Malaysia for simple electronics, and Europe for precision machinery.
Outsourcing and Reshoring
Outsourcing involves companies hiring other companies to take over various parts of their func-
tional operations, such as human resources, information systems, payroll, accounting, customer
service, and even marketing. The outsourcing business is booming. According to an analysis
by S&P Global Market Intelligence, 5 of the top 20 global employers in 2017 were outsourc-
ing firms that essentially lease workers to clients, led by Compass Group PLC and Accenture
PLC; the annual value on outsourcing contracts grew to more than $40 billion in 2017 from
$12.5 billion in 2000, according to research and advisory firm Information Services Group Inc.
Outsourcing made up 46 percent of Accenture’s revenues in 2017.
For more than a decade, U.S. and European companies have been outsourcing their manu-
facturing, tech support, and back-office work, but most insisted on keeping R&D activities in-
house. However, an ever-growing number of firms today are outsourcing their product design to
Asian developers. China and India have become important suppliers of intellectual property. The
details of what work to outsource, to whom, where, and for how much can challenge even the
358 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
biggest, most sophisticated companies. India is a booming place for outsourcing. China requires
many firms to share their technological knowledge as a condition of doing business in that coun-
try; this is a growing problem for U.S. firms and America in general.
Table 11-3 reveals potential benefits that firms strive to achieve through outsourcing. Notice
from the first benefit that outsourcing is often used to access lower wages in foreign countries.
Reshoring refers to U.S. companies moving a portion of their manufacturing back to the
United States. The Donald Trump administration is spurring and rewarding reshoring. Many
U.S. companies plan to reshore in 2018–2020 to take advantage of new U.S. tax laws, to get
products to market faster and respond rapidly to customer orders, to save from reduced transpor-
tation and warehousing, and to improve quality and protection of intellectual property. “Made in
the USA” is making a comeback. For example, the Italian firm Fiat Chrysler Automobiles N.V.
in 2018 moved production of its large Ram Heavy Duty trucks from Saltillo, Mexico to Warren,
Michigan. The move created 2,500 new jobs in Warren.
The strength of the dollar, however, has led some U.S. firms to look outside the United
States to produce goods. The high value of the dollar makes U.S. goods more expensive overseas
and makes imports to the United States cheaper. Overall however, benefits of reshoring are as
follows:
1. U.S. laws protect female and minority employees
2. Reliable energy at low cost
3. Excellent security to protect designs from overseas copycats
4. Enable closer tabs on quality control and supply chains
5. Excellent economy with consumers purchasing more
6. Less shipment costs with consumers nearby
7. Excellent human rights, education, legal, and political systems that promote freedom and
opportunity for citizens
8. Capitalize on the new 21 percent corporate tax rate
U.S. versus Foreign Business Culture To be successful in world markets, U.S. managers must obtain a better knowledge of historical, cul-
tural, and religious forces that motivate and drive people in other countries. For multinational firms,
knowledge of business culture variation across countries can be essential for gaining and sustaining
competitive advantage. An excellent website to visit on this topic is www.worldbusinessculture.com,
LO 11.4
TABLE 11-3 Potential Benefits of Outsourcing
1. Cost savings: Access lower wages in foreign countries.
2. Focus on core business: Focus resources on developing the core business rather than being dis-
tracted by other functions.
3. Cost restructuring: Outsourcing changes the balance of fixed costs to variable costs by moving the
firm more to variable costs.
4. Improve quality: Improve quality by contracting out various business functions to specialists.
5. Knowledge: Gain access to intellectual property and wider experience and knowledge.
6. Contract: Gain access to services within a legally binding contract with financial penalties and
legal redress. This is not the case with services performed internally.
7. Access to talent: Gain access to a larger talent pool and a sustainable source of skills, especially
science and engineering.
8. Catalyst for change: Use an outsourcing agreement as a catalyst for major change that cannot be
achieved alone.
9. Reduce time to market: Accelerate development or production of a product through additional
capability brought by the supplier.
10. Risk management: Manage risk by partnering with an outside firm.
11. Tax benefit: Capitalize on tax incentives to locate manufacturing plants to avoid high taxes in vari-
ous countries.
CHAPTER 11 • GLOBAL AND INTERNATIONAL ISSuES 359
Managers from the United States place greater emphasis on short-term results than do for-
eign managers. In marketing, for example, Japanese managers strive to achieve “everlasting cus-
tomers,” whereas many Americans strive to make a one-time sale. Marketing managers in Japan
see making a sale as the beginning, not the end, of the selling process. This is an important dis-
tinction. Japanese managers often criticize U.S. managers for worrying more about sharehold-
ers, whom they do not know, than employees, whom they do know. Americans refer to “hourly
employees,” whereas many Japanese companies still refer to “lifetime employees.”
Rose Knotts summarized some important cultural differences between U.S. and foreign
managers.2 Awareness and consideration of these differences can enable a manager to be more
effective, regardless of his or her own nationality.
1. Americans place an exceptionally high priority on time, viewing time as an asset and
punctuality as vital. Many foreigners place more worth on family and relationships. This dif-
ference results in foreign managers often viewing U.S. managers as “more interested in busi-
ness than people.”
2. Personal touching and distance norms differ around the world. Americans generally stand
about 3 feet from each other when carrying on business conversations, but Arabs and
TABLE 11-4 Cultural Pitfalls That May Help You Be a Better Manager
• Waving is a serious insult in Greece and Nigeria, particularly if the hand is near someone’s face.
• Making a “good-bye” wave in Europe can mean “No,” but it means “Come here” in Peru.
• In China, last names are written first.
• A man named Carlos Lopez-Garcia should be addressed as Mr. Lopez in Latin America but as
Mr. Garcia in Brazil.
• Breakfast meetings are considered uncivilized in most foreign countries.
• Latin Americans are, on average, 20 minutes late to business appointments.
• Direct eye contact is impolite in Japan.
• Do not cross your legs in any Arab or many Asian countries because it is rude to show the sole of
your shoe.
• In Brazil, touching your thumb and first finger—an American “Okay” sign—is the equivalent of rais-
ing your middle finger.
• Nodding or tossing your head back in southern Italy, Malta, Greece, and Tunisia means “No.” In
India, this body motion means “Yes.”
• Snapping your fingers is vulgar in France and Belgium.
• Folding your arms across your chest is a sign of annoyance in Finland.
• In China, leave some food on your plate to show that your host was so generous that you could not
finish.
• Do not eat with your left hand when dining with clients from Malaysia or India.
• One form of communication works the same worldwide. It is the smile; so take that along wherever
you go.
where you may select any country in the world and check out how business culture varies in that
country versus other lands. In Japan, for example, business relations operate within the context of
Wa, which stresses group harmony and social cohesion. In China, business behavior revolves around
guanxi, or personal relations. In South Korea, activities involve concern for inhwa, or harmony-based
on respect of hierarchical relationships, including obedience to authority.
A weakness of some U.S. firms in competing with Pacific Rim firms is a lack of un-
derstanding of Asian cultures, including how Asians think and behave. Spoken Chinese, for
example, has more in common with spoken English than with spoken Japanese or Korean.
U.S. managers consistently put more weight on being friendly and liked, whereas Asian and
European managers often exercise authority without this concern. Americans tend to use first
names instantly in business dealings with foreigners, but foreigners find this presumptuous.
In Japan, for example, first names are used only among family members and intimate friends;
even longtime business associates and coworkers shy away from the use of first names.
Table 11-4 lists other cultural differences or pitfalls that U.S. managers may benefit from
considering.
360 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
Africans stand about 1 foot apart. Touching another person with the left hand in business
dealings is taboo in some countries.
3. Family roles and relationships vary in different countries. For example, males are valued
more than females in some cultures, and peer pressure, work situations, and business inter-
actions reinforce this phenomenon.
4. Business and daily life in some societies are governed by religious factors. Prayer times,
holidays, daily events, and dietary restrictions, for example, need to be respected by man-
agers regardless of their own nationality and cultural norms.
5. Many cultures around the world value modesty, team spirit, collectivity, and patience much
more than competitiveness and individualism, which are so important in the United States.
6. Eating habits also differ dramatically across cultures. For example, belching is acceptable
in some countries as evidence of satisfaction with the food that has been prepared. Chinese
culture considers it good manners to sample a portion of each food served.
7. To prevent social blunders when meeting with managers from other lands, one must learn
and respect the rules of etiquette of others. Sitting on a toilet seat is viewed as unsanitary in
some countries, but not in the United States. Leaving food or drink after dining is consid-
ered impolite in some countries, but not in China. Bowing instead of shaking hands is cus-
tomary in many countries. Some cultures view Americans as unsanitary for locating toilet
and bathing facilities in the same area, whereas Americans view people of some cultures as
unsanitary for not taking a bath or shower every day.
8. Americans often do business with individuals they do not know, unlike businesspersons in
many other cultures. In Mexico and Japan, for example, an amicable relationship is often
mandatory before conducting business.
In many countries, effective managers are those who are best at negotiating with govern-
ment bureaucrats, rather than those who inspire workers. The United States provides legal pro-
tection against sexual harassment and discrimination based on race, sexual orientation, religion,
and so on, but not all countries offer the same legal protections. U.S. managers in China have to
be careful about how they arrange office furniture because Chinese workers believe in feng shui,
the practice of harnessing natural forces. Also, U.S. managers in Japan have to be careful about
nemaswashio, whereby Japanese workers expect supervisors to alert them privately of changes
rather than informing them in a meeting. Japanese managers have little appreciation for versatil-
ity, expecting all managers to be the same. In Japan, “If a nail sticks out, you hit it into the wall,”
says Brad Lashbrook, an international consultant for Wilson Learning.
Probably the biggest obstacle to managers from any country working in another is the
fact that it is almost impossible to change the attitude of an international workforce. “The sys-
tem drives you; you cannot fight the system or culture,” says Bill Parker, president of Phillips
Petroleum in Norway. For example, in the Middle East, be careful of alcohol and pork, because
many Muslims do not eat pork or drink alcohol. In India, cows are revered, so no leather gifts.
Communication Differences across Countries
Communication may be the most important word in strategic management. Americans increas-
ingly interact with managers in other countries, so it is important to understand communication
differences across countries. Americans sometimes come across as intrusive, manipulative, and
garrulous; this impression may reduce their effectiveness in communication. Asian managers
view extended periods of silence as important for organizing and evaluating one’s thoughts,
whereas U.S. managers have a low tolerance for silence. Sitting through a conference without
talking is unproductive in the United States, but may be viewed as positive in Japan as one’s si-
lence helps preserve unity. Managers from the United States are much more action-oriented than
their counterparts around the world; they rush to appointments, conferences, and meetings—and
then feel the day has been productive. But for many foreign managers, resting, listening, medi-
tating, and thinking is considered productive.
Most Japanese managers are reserved, quiet, distant, introspective, and others-oriented,
whereas most U.S. managers are talkative, insensitive, impulsive, direct, and individual-oriented.
Unlike Japanese managers, U.S. managers often use blunt criticism, ask prying questions,
and make quick decisions. These kinds of communication differences have disrupted many
CHAPTER 11 • GLOBAL AND INTERNATIONAL ISSuES 361
potentially productive Japanese–U.S. business endeavors. Viewing the Japanese communication
style as a prototype for all Asian cultures is a stereotype that must be avoided.
Like many Asian and African cultures, the Japanese are nonconfrontational. They have a
difficult time saying “no,” so you must be vigilant at observing their nonverbal communica-
tion. Rarely refuse a request, no matter how difficult or nonprofitable it may appear at the time.
In communicating with Japanese, phrase questions so that they can answer yes—for example,
“Do you disagree with this?” Group decision-making and consensus are vitally important. The
Japanese often remain silent in meetings for long periods of time and may even close their eyes
when they want to listen intently.
Business Culture across Countries3
Managers, marketers, salespersons, and virtually all businesspersons can be more effective in
doing business with persons and companies in other countries if they have an understanding and
appreciation of business culture variation across countries. One aspect of business culture com-
mon across countries is appreciation for excellent customer service. Airlines fly people from na-
tion to nation all over the world. Ethics Capsule 11 examines customer service ratings of airlines
and asks the question “does bad customer service equate to bad business ethics?”
For a flavor of how cultures vary across continents, let’s examine four countries: Mexico,
Japan, China, and India.
Mexico
Mexico is an authoritarian society in terms of schools, churches, businesses, and families. In
general, employers seek workers who are agreeable, respectful, and obedient, rather than innova-
tive, creative, and independent. When visitors walk into a Mexican business, they are met with a
cordial, friendly atmosphere. This is almost always true because Mexicans desire harmony rather
than conflict; desire for harmony is part of the social fabric in worker–manager relations. There
is a much lower tolerance for adversarial relations or friction at work in Mexico than in the U.S.
Mexican employers are more likely to provide weekly food baskets, free meals, free bus
service, and free day care. The ideal working condition for a Mexican worker is the family
model, with people all working together, doing their share, according to their designated roles.
Mexican workers do not expect or desire a work environment in which self-expression and
initiative are encouraged. U.S. business embodies individualism, achievement, competition,
LO 11.5
ETHICS CAPSULE 11
Which Two U.S.-Based Airlines Are Worst on Customer Service? A recent Wall Street Journal article ranked eight airlines from best
to worst for providing customer service. The best is Delta, followed
by Alaska, Southwest, United, Frontier, American, Spirit, and finally
JetBlue providing the worst customer service. The rankings are
based on seven customer-service variables: (1) on-time arrivals, (2)
canceled flights, (3) extreme delays, (4) 2-hour-tarmac delays, (5)
mishandled baggage, (6) involuntary bumping, and (7) complaints.
JetBlue (and Spirit) ranked seventh or eighth in 5 out of 7 variables.
In contrast, Delta ranked first or second in 5 out of 7 variables. Spirit
had more customer complaints than any of the eight carriers exam-
ined. Does bad customer service equate to bad business ethics? This
is a debatable question, but bad customer service is bad business
and usually leads to bad profitability.
Source: Based on Scott McCartney, “Which Airlines Soared in 2017?” Wall
Street Journal (January 11, 2018): A9.
On the Way to Another Country
B es
t im
ag es
/S h u tt
er st
o ck
362 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
curiosity, pragmatism, informality, spontaneity, and doing more than expected on the job,
whereas Mexican businesses stress collectivism, continuity, cooperation, belongingness, for-
mality, and doing exactly what is told. Meeting times for appointments are not rigid. Tardiness
is common everywhere. Effectively doing business in Mexico requires knowledge of the
Mexican way of life, culture, beliefs, and customs. Do not get irritated at the lack of punctuality
in Mexico.
Japan
Japan’s workforce population ages 15 to 64 is declining about 500,000 each year, so the country
is facing its tightest labor market in 40 years. This shift toward an older population has forced
Japan to increasingly open its doors to immigrant workers, which has increased demand for
housing and international goods. The world’s third-largest economy, Japan is undergoing an eco-
nomic turnaround where business confidence is approaching its highest point in decades.
Because of its dwindling workforce and aging population, Japan is increasingly promoting
women into managerial positions. Prime Minister Shinzo Abe of Japan has proclaimed a goal
to fill 30 percent of leadership positions in Japan with women by 2020. Abe recently filled five
open positions in his own cabinet with women. A key reason that Japanese women have histori-
cally not advanced to managerial positions is the business culture of notorious long work hours.
The Japanese people place great importance on group loyalty and consensus—a concept
called Wa. Corporate activities in Japan encourage Wa among managers and employees. Wa
requires that all members of a group agree and cooperate; this results in constant discussion and
compromise. Japanese managers evaluate the potential attractiveness of alternative business de-
cisions in terms of the long-term effect on the group’s Wa. This is why silence, used for ponder-
ing alternatives, can be a plus in a formal Japanese meeting. Discussions potentially disruptive
to Wa are generally conducted in informal settings, such as at a bar, so as to minimize harm to
the group’s Wa. Entertaining is an important business activity in Japan because it strengthens
Wa. Formal meetings are often conducted in informal settings. When confronted with disturb-
ing questions or opinions, Japanese managers tend to remain silent, whereas Americans tend to
respond directly, defending themselves through explanation and argument.
In Japan, a person’s age and status are of paramount importance, whether in the family unit,
the extended family, or a social or business situation. Schoolchildren learn early that the oldest
person in the group is to be honored. Older folks are served first and their drinks are poured for
them. Greetings in Japan are formal and ritualized, so wait to be introduced because it may be
viewed as impolite to introduce yourself, even in a large gathering. Foreigners may shake hands,
but the traditional form of greeting in Japan is to bow. The deeper you bow, the more respect you
show, but at least bow the head slightly in greetings.
In Japan, build and maintain relationships by sending greeting, thank-you, birthday, and
seasonal cards. You need to be a good “correspondent” to effectively do business with the
Japanese. Punctuality is important, so arrive on time for meetings and be mindful that it may
take several meetings to establish a good relationship. The Japanese are looking for a long-term
relationship. Always give a small gift as a token of your appreciation, and present it to the most
senior person at the end of any meeting.
Business cards are exchanged in Japan constantly and with excitement. Invest in quality
business cards and keep them in pristine condition. Do not write on them. Have one side of your
card translated in Japanese and give it to the person with the Japanese side facing the recipient.
Business cards are generally given and received with two hands and a slight bow. Examine any
business card you receive carefully.
China
In China, greetings are formal and the oldest person is always greeted first. Like in the United
States, handshakes are the most common form of greeting. Many Chinese will look toward the
ground when greeting someone. The Chinese have an excellent sense of humor, often laughing
at themselves if they have a comfortable relationship with the other person. Never give clocks,
handkerchiefs, flowers, or straw sandals because they are associated with funerals. Do not wrap
gifts in white, blue, or black paper. In China, the number 4 is unlucky, so do not give four of any-
thing. Eight is the luckiest number, so giving eight of something is a great idea.
CHAPTER 11 • GLOBAL AND INTERNATIONAL ISSuES 363
The Chinese rarely do business with companies or people they do not know. Your position
on an organizational chart is extremely important in business relationships. Gender bias is gener-
ally not an issue. Meals and social events are not the place for business discussions. There is a
demarcation between business and socializing in China, so try to be careful not to intertwine the
two. Like in the U. S. and Germany, punctuality is important in China. Arriving late to a meeting
is an insult and could negatively affect your relationship. Meetings require patience because mo-
bile phones ring frequently and conversations may be boisterous. Never ask the Chinese to turn
off their mobile phones because this causes you both to lose face.
India
India’s rate of female participation in the labor force is about 35 percent, which is quite low,
especially considering that women make up about 42 percent of college graduates in India.
Even Indian women with a college degree are expected to let their careers take a back seat to
caring for their husband, children, and elderly parents. “The measures of daughterly guilt are
much higher in Indian women than in other countries,” says Sylvia Ann Hewlett, president of
the Center for Work-Life Policy, a Manhattan think tank, who headed a recent study on the chal-
lenges Indian women face in the workplace.4 Hewlett adds, “Since taking care of elderly parents
usually becomes a reality later in a woman’s career, it takes them out of the workplace just when
they should be entering top management roles.” That is why gender disparities at Indian compa-
nies unfortunately grow more pronounced at higher levels of management.
Like in many Asian cultures, people in India do not like to say no, verbally or nonverbally.
Rather than disappoint you, they often will say something is not available, will offer you the
response that they think you want to hear, or will be vague with you. This behavior should not
be considered dishonest. Shaking hands is common in India, especially in the large cities among
the more educated who are accustomed to dealing with westerners. Men may shake hands with
other men and women may shake hands with other women; however, there are seldom hand-
shakes between men and women because of religious beliefs.
Be mindful that neither Hindus nor Sikhs eat beef, and many are vegetarians. Lamb,
chicken, and fish are the most commonly served main courses. Table manners are somewhat
formal, but much Indian food is eaten with the fingers. Like most places in the world, wait to be
told where and when to sit at dinner. Women in India typically serve the men and eat later. You
may be asked to wash your hands before and after sitting down to a meal. Always use your right
hand to eat, whether using utensils or your fingers. Leave a small amount of food on your plate
to indicate that you are satisfied. Finishing all your food means that you are still hungry, which
is true in Egypt, China, Mexico, and many countries.
Indians prefer to do business with those with whom they have established a relationship
built on mutual trust and respect. Punctuality is important. Indians generally do not trust the le-
gal system, and someone’s word is often sufficient to reach an agreement. Do not disagree pub-
licly with anyone in India. Titles such as professor, doctor, or engineer are important in India, as
is a person’s age, university degree, caste, and profession. Use the right hand to give and receive
business cards. Business cards need not be translated into Hindi but always present your busi-
ness card so the recipient may read the card as it is handed to him or her. This is a nice, expected
gesture in most countries around the world.
Business Climate across Countries Among 20,000 companies listed on stock exchanges around the world, FactSet reported in
December 2017 that companies’ EPS on average was $9.69 for 2017—up 19 percent over the
prior year and the highest level ever recorded—evidence of a booming economy globally.5
Similarly, the Citigroup Global Economic Surprise Index that measures the extent that com-
panies are beating or missing analysts’ expectations, reports more “beating” than in a decade
prior—for both emerging and developing markets. The International Monetary Fund reported
that international trade growth grew 4 percent in 2017, up from 2.4 percent in the prior year. EPS
for China’s Tencent Holdings Ltd. grew 55 percent in 2017; South Korea’s Samsung Electronics’
EPS grew 95 percent. Analysts project continued corporate prosperity in 2018–2020 barring any
global conflicts or extraneous occurrences.
LO 11.6
364 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
In 2018, the U.S. economy is the strongest that it has been in more than a decade.
Unemployment is at record lows (below 4 percent), inflation is low, gas prices are low, inter-
est rates are rising, the stock market is booming, and optimism is exceptionally high. The
19 countries in Europe that use the euro reported late in 2017 that their economy is improving
more than it has in 17 years. The European Commission’s economic sentiment indicator rose to
114.0 in October 2017, its highest level in 8 years. For a flavor of how business climate varies
globally, let’s examine several regions, because more and more companies are locating employ-
ees and facilities globally.
The African Continent
About 30 African countries are considered democracies. Currencies in Africa are stabilizing and
many countries are fundraising to build modern highways, ports, and power grids. Many non-
African companies are launching operations in Africa because of the rapidly growing middle
class and an average GDP growth of 5 percent for the continent through 2020. Morocco has the
highest Internet penetration among all countries in Africa, with more than 50 percent. On aver-
age however, fewer than 20 percent of Africans have access to the Internet. McKinsey predicts
that by 2025, 50 percent of Africans will be online, so the continent is rapidly joining the world
business community.
TABLE 11-5 The Top 10 Nations That Are Easiest to Do Business with Across Continents
Overall Best East Asia Pacific
East Europe/ Central Asia
Latin America/ Caribbean
Middle East /North Africa
Sub- Saharan Africa South Asia
1. New
Zealand
Singapore Macedonia Mexico United Arab
Emirates
Mauritius Bhutan
2. Singapore Hong Kong Latvia Columbia Bahrain Rwanda Nepal
3. Denmark Taiwan Georgia Peru Oman Botswana Sri Lanka
4. Hong
Kong
Malaysia Lithuania Puerto Rico Morocco South Africa India
5. South
Korea
Thailand Kazakhstan Costa Rica Malta Kenya Maldives
6. Norway Mongolia Romania Jamaica Tunisia Seychelles Pakistan
7. United
Kingdom
Brunei
Darussal
Belarus St. Lucia Qatar Zambia Bangladesh
8. United
States
China Armenia Guatemala Saudi Arabia Lesotho Afghanistan
9. Sweden Vietnam Bulgaria Uruguay Kuwait Nambia —
10. Macedonia Vanuatu Russia El Salvador Jordan Ghana —
Source: Based on information at http://www.doingbusiness.org/rankings, retrieved on January 1, 2018.
The World Bank and the International Finance Corporation annually rank 189 coun-
tries in terms of their respective ease of doing business (http://www.doingbusiness.org/
rankings). The index ranks nations from 1 (best) to 189 (worst). For each nation, the ranking
is calculated as the simple average of the percentile rankings on how easy is it to (1) start a
business, (2) deal with construction permits, (3) register property, (4) get credit, (5) protect
investors, (6) pay taxes, (7) trade across borders, (8) enforce contracts, (9) resolve insol-
vency, and (10) get electricity.
Table 11-5 reveals the 2018 “Ease of Doing Business” rankings for the top 10 nations in
six regions of the world. Note, for example, that Norway is rated the sixth-best country on the
planet for doing business and the United States is ranked eighth. This information can be help-
ful for strategists (and students) deciding where to locate new operations and where to focus
new efforts.
CHAPTER 11 • GLOBAL AND INTERNATIONAL ISSuES 365
Many multinational firms are now gaining first-mover advantages by engaging Africa at all levels.
Today, more than 40 percent of Africans live in the cities—a proportion close to China and India. The
general global image of Africa is rapidly changing to that of millions of smartphone-carrying consum-
ers in cities purchasing products. Africa has the world’s largest deposits of platinum, chrome, and
diamonds, and many Chinese companies in particular are investing there.
China
As the world’s most populous country, China’s economic output annually exceeds the United
States. Hundreds of companies are scurrying to set up business in China. All 31 Chinese prov-
inces and regions recently boosted their minimum wage for the third consecutive year. Demand
for workers in China now outstrips supply, and this is contributing to rapidly rising wage rates
and worldwide inflation. Commercial and industrial development in China’s west has turned
interior cities such as Chongqing into production centers that compete for labor with coastal
factories. China ranks about 90th out of 190 countries in terms of doing business. That ranking is
relatively low for a variety of reasons, ranging from human-rights issues to substantial disregard
for copyright, patent, and trademark rules of law.
China’s new cybersecurity law requires that foreign technology firms store their data inside
China and allow the government to keep tabs on how firms use the technology. Chinese law also
requires foreign companies that want to enter various industries such as energy and telecom to
do so through joint ventures. Often these ventures lead to China gaining the technology of the
United States and other countries. China is encouraging companies from all over the world to
set up R&D operations there; Apple, Amazon, Microsoft, and Google have done so, including
Google’s new Artificial Intelligence Center. As indicated in the Global Capsule 11, China is on a
mission to gain technological superiority among all nations in the next decade, through quantum
computing, artificial intelligence, robotics, and cybersecurity.
China accounts for nearly one-third of the global market for cars, so the country is in a good
position to lead the market of electric cars. China accounted for nearly half of the world’s sales
of electric cars in 2016, with sales reaching over 351,000. Ford recently set a goal, that by 2025,
70 percent of its Chinese cars will be electric.
Indonesia
A democratic Pacific archipelago comprised of thousands of islands, Indonesia’s currency is the
rupiah and its economy is one of the fastest growing in Asia, behind China and the Philippines.
Indonesia’s GDP growth is 5 percent in 2017 and growing. Exports are surging in Indonesia.
Indonesia has a large population and densely populated regions; Indonesia also has the world’s
second-highest level of biodiversity, with vast areas of wilderness and abundant natural resources.
In 2018–2019, Indonesia has made remarkable progress across a broad range of economic and
social dimensions. Health, education, standards of living, and other social outcomes have never been
better in Indonesia. The government of Indonesia is closer than ever to the people. As a member
of the G20, Indonesia is actively engaged in world affairs, and economic integration with regional
Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) partners is moving ahead. The economic forecast
for Indonesia is very bright—its population is young, the domestic market is large, it has a rich en-
dowment of natural resources, public debt is low, and its political system is broad based and stable.
India
The World Bank’s annual report “Doing Business 2017: Equal Opportunity for All” reported
that India moved up only one spot to 130 from 131 the prior year in terms of its ranking among
all countries as per ease of doing business. Among the BRICS nations, Brazil (123), Russia (40),
India (130), China (78), and South Africa (74), India was ranked lowest; however, has made sub-
stantial progress in some areas such as electricity connections but has slipped in other areas such
as payment of taxes and enforcing contracts.
Online activity has accelerated in India partly because of the exceptionally low $5 per month
unlimited access to high-speed Internet on a smartphone. In 2017, India replaced the United States
as the country that downloaded more apps from Google’s Play Store than any other on the planet.
Google has a booming business in India, yet the company is not allowed to do any business in China.
366 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
Mexico
South Korea’s Kia Motors just built a $1 billion assembly near Monterrey, Mexico, joining Mazda
Motors, Honda Motors, Audi AG, BMW AG, Renault SA, Nissan Motors, and Daimler AG that
have automobile assembly operations to Mexico. Mexico is the fourth-largest exporter and seventh-
largest producer of automobiles in the world. Mexico’s auto industry now employs one of every
six Mexican factory workers and comprises one-third of all exports from Mexico. Mexico is also
the world’s largest exporter of flat screen televisions. Mexico’s exports and production of vehicles
were up 12 and 9.4 percent, respectively for the first 11 months of 2017 compared to the prior year.
In 2020, Ford’s new electric vehicle manufacturing plant in Cuautitlan, Mexico, will be completed.
Foreign direct investment (FDI) in Mexico has surged to exceed $30 billion annually, led by
automobile manufacturers such as Volkswagen AG building new factories, and auto-parts suppli-
ers such as Delphi Automotive PLC following. Home Depot has more than 150 stores in Mexico.
Mexico is especially attractive for manufacturing products that are bulky or costly to transport,
such as automobiles. However, a key variable hurting Mexico is drug-related violence. Mexico’s ho-
micide rate exceeds 15 people per 100,000, compared with a per-capita rate of about 5.0 in the United
States and 1.1 in China. If Mexico can improve its security situation as it intends, then hundreds of ad-
ditional firms may consider returning to Mexico from China (and India).
Income remains highly concentrated in Mexico because many families live in poverty, in-
security is high, childcare facilities are weak, and discrimination is a problem for disabled and
disadvantaged. As a percentage of GDP, Mexico’s oil-related activities have declined from 13 to
7 from 2007 to 2017, so the country is far less dependent today on oil and gas.
GLOBAL CAPSULE 11
China Aims for Superiority in Quantum Computing Quantum computing, or quantum
mechanics, is a concept in phys-
ics whereby atoms can exist in two
states at once, called superposi-
tion; because everything is made
of atoms, entire objects can exist in
multiple dimensions, allowing for
the possibility of parallel universes.
Nearly all current computers and
technology today operate using
bits that have a value of 1 or 0, but
quantum bits, or qubits, can be 1
and 0 at the same time. Qubits are
infinitely more powerful than bits,
so quantum computers can tackle unthinkably complex problems.
Google, IBM, Intel, D-Wave Systems, and Microsoft are example
companies spending millions on quantum computing. Google al-
ready has a 22-qubit chip and is developing a 49-qubit chip. The
National Security Agency (NSA) has issued an order that all U.S.
national-security employees and vendors must begin overhauling
their encryption to guard against the threat posed by quantum com-
puters. Code-breaking quantum computers could hack into every
computer system on the planet, gaining control of any company’s
files and any country’s national security. The reason this is doable is
because all encryptions today that protect all computer systems rely
on complex math problems that a conventional computer cannot
solve, but a quantum computer can solve with ease. The U.S. gov-
ernment spends only $200 million a year on quantum research of all
kinds, spread over a variety of agencies such as NSA and Department
of Energy, and this is woefully inadequate.
China’s strategic plan is to develop
and use quantum computers to gain
world dominance and superiority in
information technology, financial sys-
tems, power grids, and military weap-
ons. China is spending billions on this
effort and is building the world’s larg-
est quantum research facility aimed at
developing a computer that can po-
tentially hack into, extract information
from, and otherwise disable any and
all computers anywhere. Called their
National Laboratory for Quantum In-
formation Science, China’s newest
quantum facility is located in Hefei, Anhui province. Pan Jianwei leads
China’s quantum efforts aimed primarily at military applications. Pan
says: “Our plan is that by 2020, we will achieve quantum suprem-
acy with calculation power one million times all existing computers
around the world combined.” China’s new quantum computer facility
should be completed in 2020 at a cost of $91.6 billion. China re-
cently launched a quantum satellite and conducted advanced experi-
ments such as quantum entanglement and teleportation in space. All
companies and countries globally must recognize and prepare for the
quantum leap coming soon in information technology.
Source: Based on Hartmut Neven, “The Future of Everything – Quantum
Leap,” Wall Street Journal (November/December 2017): 62–67. Also, http://
www.scmp.com/news/china/society/article/2110563/china-building-worlds-
biggest-quantum-research-facility. Also, Arthur Herman, “The Computer
That Could Rule the World,” Wall Street Journal (October 28–29, 2017): A13.
What Costs $91.6 Billion?
S ch
an k z/
S h u tt
er st
o ck
CHAPTER 11 • GLOBAL AND INTERNATIONAL ISSuES 367
IMPLICATIONS FOR STRATEGISTS
Figure 11-2 reveals that doing business globally is increasingly a
prerequisite for success even for the smallest of firms. About 95
percent of consumers globally live outside the United States; firms
can grow and gain economies of scale by serving these consumers.
Whatever product a company has to offer, it would likely be well
received in many nations. It may be strategically best for your firm to
outsource operations, procure resources, and use a labor force away
from home to gain and sustain competitive advantages at home.
More and more countries around the world are welcoming for-
eign investment and capital. As a result, labor markets have steadily
become more international. The drive to improve the efficiency of
global business operations is leading to greater functional special-
ization. This is not limited to a search for the familiar low-cost labor
in Latin America or Asia. Other considerations include the cost of
energy, availability of resources, inflation rates, tax rates, and the
nature of trade regulations.
IMPLICATIONS FOR STUDENTS
Even the smallest businesses today regularly serve customers glob-
ally and gain competitive advantages and economies of scale by
doing so. Many iconic U.S. businesses, such as Tupperware, obtain
more than 80 percent of their revenue from outside the United
States. Therefore, in performing a strategic-management case anal-
ysis, you must evaluate the scope, magnitude, and nature of what
your company is doing globally compared to rival firms. Then,
determine what your company should be doing to garner global
business. Continuously throughout your presentation or written
report, compare your firm to rivals in terms of global business and
make recommendations based on careful analysis. Be “prescriptive
and insightful” rather than “descriptive and mundane” with every
slide presented to pave the way for your specific recommendations
with costs regarding global reach of your firm. Continually compare
and contrast what you are recommending compared with what the
company is actually doing or planning to do.
Establish A Clear Vision & Mission
Evaluate & Monitor Results:
Take Corrective Actions; Adapt
To Change
Gain & Sustain Competitive Advantages
Formulate Strategies: Collect, Analyze, &
Prioritize Data Using Matrices; Establish A Clear Strategic Plan
Implement Strategies: Establish Structure; Allocate Resources; Motivate & Reward; Attract Customers; Manage Finances
FIGURE 11-2
How to Gain and Sustain Competitive Advantages
368 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
Chapter Summary The population of the world has surpassed 7 billion. Businesses more than ever before are now
searching for new opportunities beyond their national boundaries. There has never been a more
internationalized and economically competitive society than today’s. Some U.S. industries, such
as textiles, steel, and consumer electronics, are in disarray as a result of the international chal-
lenges of globalization.
Success in business increasingly depends on offering products and services that are com-
petitive on a world basis, not just on a local basis. If the price and quality of a firm’s products
and services are not competitive with those available elsewhere in the world, the firm may soon
face extinction. Global markets have become a reality in all but the most remote areas of the
world. Certainly throughout the United States, even in small towns, firms feel the pressure of
world competitors.
This chapter has provided some basic global information that can be essential to consider in
developing a strategic plan for any organization. Business culture and climate across countries
are particularly important topics in strategic planning. The advantages of engaging in interna-
tional business may well offset the drawbacks for most firms. It is important in strategic plan-
ning to be effective, and the nature of global operations may be the key component in a plan’s
overall effectiveness.
Key Terms and Concepts feng shui (p. 360)
global strategy (p. 353)
globalization (p. 352)
guanxi (p. 359)
international firms (p. 353)
inhwa (p. 359)
multinational firms (p. 353)
nemaswashio (p. 360)
outsourcing (p. 357)
protectionism (p. 357)
reshoring (p. 358)
Wa (p. 359)
Issues for Review and Discussion 11-1. Why are companies such as Apple Inc. bringing cash
back to the United States that prior to 2018 was kept in
offshore banks? What impact is that having on the U.S.
economy?
11-2. Discuss the climate for doing business in India. What
are the implications for companies?
11-3. How would you describe the business climate glob-
ally in 2017–2018? What are the implications for
companies?
11-4. In what manner are firms investing or using “offshore
cash” being brought back into the United States?
11-5. List four benefits and four drawbacks of reshoring.
11-6. Describe the economic outlook for Indonesia.
11-7. What country in Africa has the highest Internet penetra-
tion among all countries?
11-8. What areas of business does China seek superiority in
within a decade?
11-9. What does the concept “daughterly guilt” mean with
regard to the business culture in India?
11-10. Give specifics regarding the nature and role of “Union
Membership across Europe.” What are the strategic im-
plications of these facts and figures?
11-11. Give specifics regarding income tax rates and practices
across countries and associated strategic implications.
11-12. Exports from the United States comprise about 13
percent of GDP, compared to about 45 percent of
Germany’s GDP. What are the implications of this for
U.S. firms doing business globally?
11-13. A company is planning to begin operations in
Switzerland. That company’s EFE Matrix includes 20
factors. How much weight (1.0 to 0.01) would you
place on the corporate tax rate factor? Discuss.
11-14. Explain how awareness of business culture across coun-
tries can enhance strategy implementation.
CHAPTER 11 • GLOBAL AND INTERNATIONAL ISSuES 369
11-15. Describe the business culture in China.
11-16. Describe the business culture in India.
11-17. Describe the business culture in Mexico.
11-18. Describe the business culture in Japan.
11-19. Do some research on New Zealand to determine
whether you agree that the country merits its number
1 or 2 ranking globally in attractiveness for doing
business.
11-20. About 53 percent of people in Belgium are members of
a labor union. Compare the labor union situation across
European countries and comment on the positive or
negative impact this factor has on attracting business
investment into those countries.
11-21. Explain why consumption patterns are becoming simi-
lar worldwide. What are the strategic implications of
this trend?
11-22. What are the major differences between domestic
and multinational operations that affect strategic
management?
11-23. Why is globalization of industries a common factor
today?
11-24. Compare the United States with foreign cultures in
terms of doing business.
11-25. List six reasons that strategic management is more com-
plex in a multinational firm.
11-26. Do you feel that protectionism is good or bad for the
world economy? Why?
11-27. Why are some industries more “global” than others?
Discuss.
11-28. Wa, guanxi, and inhwa are important management
terms in Japan, China, and South Korea, respectively.
What would be analogous terms to describe U.S. man-
agement practices?
11-29. Why do many Europeans find the notion of “team
spirit” in a work environment difficult to grasp?
11-30. In China, feng shui is important in business, whereas in
Japan, nemaswashio is important. What are analogous
U.S. terms and practices?
11-31. Compare tax rates in the United States with other
countries. What impact could these differences have on
“keeping jobs at home”?
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISES
SET 1: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR COCA-COLA
EXERCISE 11A
Business Culture Variation across Countries: A Report for Coca-Cola Company
Purpose
Various websites give excellent detail that compare business culture across countries. One excellent
website is http://www.kwintessential.co.uk/resources/country-profiles.html, where you can click on
more than 100 countries and obtain a synopsis of a country’s business culture. After clicking on a coun-
try at that website, you may scroll down to reach the section titled “Business Etiquette and Protocol.”
This exercise will expand your knowledge about how business culture varies across countries.
Being knowledgeable of various countries’ business culture can make you a more effective manager
and communicator with people and organizations globally. This knowledge is especially helpful for
firms that desire to grow globally. There are about 190 different countries with different business cul-
tures, creating many options. Business culture is an important variable in global expansion decisions.
Instructions
Step 1 Go to http://www.kwintessential.co.uk/resources/country-profiles.html. Click on three
countries located on different continents. Scroll down to the “Business Etiquette and
Protocol” section of each country.
Step 2 Come to class prepared to give an oral presentation that compares the business culture in
the three countries you selected. Frame your presentation as if you are giving advice to top
managers at Coca-Cola regarding expansion into those three countries.
370 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
EXERCISE 11B
Coca-Cola Wants to Further Penetrate Africa. Can You Help Them?
Purpose
More and more companies every day decide to launch operations in Africa. Coca-Cola sees millions
of potential customers in Africa. Research is necessary to determine the best strategy for being the
first mover in many African countries.
Instructions
Step 1 View a map of Africa.
Step 2 Compare demographic data across eight African countries.
Step 3 Gather competitive information regarding the presence of PepsiCo in Africa.
Step 4 Develop a prioritized list of eight African countries in which you would recommend Coca-
Cola build distribution warehouses. Country 1 is your best, and country 2 is your next best.
List in prioritized order two cities in each of your eight African countries where you believe
Coca-Cola should focus distribution and retail efforts. Justify your choices.
SET 2: STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR MY UNIVERSITY
EXERCISE 11C
Does My University Recruit in Foreign Countries?
Purpose
A competitive climate exists among colleges and universities around the world. Colleges and univer-
sities in Europe and Japan are increasingly recruiting U.S. students to offset declining enrollments.
Foreign students already make up more than a third of the student body at many U.S. universities.
The purpose of this exercise is to identify particular colleges and universities in foreign countries that
recruit U.S. students.
Instructions
Step 1 Select a foreign country. Conduct research to determine the number and nature of colleges
and universities in that country. What programs are institutions in those countries recog-
nized for offering? What percentage of undergraduate and graduate students attending those
institutions are U.S. citizens? Do these institutions actively recruit U.S. students? Are any of
the schools of business at the various universities AACSB International accredited?
Step 2 Prepare a report that summarizes your research findings. Present your report to the class.
SET 3: STRATEGIC PLANNING TO ENHANCE MY EMPLOYABILITY
EXERCISE 11D
How Well-Traveled Are You Compared to Your Colleagues?
Purpose
How well-traveled are students, including yourself, at your university? To what extent do students
consider their travels to be helpful in becoming an effective businessperson? Generally speaking,
the more one has traveled, especially outside one’s country, the more tolerant, understanding, and
appreciative one is for diversity. Many students even state on their résumé the extent to which they
have traveled.
CHAPTER 11 • GLOBAL AND INTERNATIONAL ISSuES 371
Instructions
Step 1 Administer the following survey to at least 30 business students, including your classmates
in the strategic-management course.
Step 2 Administer the following survey to yourself.
Step 3 Analyze the results with special emphasis comparing yourself to your colleagues. Give a
15-minute presentation to your class regarding your findings and implications.
The Survey
1. How many states in the United States have you visited?
2. How many states in the United States have you lived in for at least 3 months?
3. How many countries outside the United States have you visited?
4. List the countries outside the United States that you have visited.
5. How many countries outside the United States have you lived in for at least 3 months?
6. List the countries outside the United States that you have lived in for at least 3 months.
7. To what extent do you feel that traveling across the United States can make a person a more ef-
fective businessperson? Use a 1- to 10-scale, where 1 is “Does Not Make a Difference” and 10
is “Makes a Tremendous Difference.”
8. To what extent do you feel that visiting countries outside the United States can make a person a
more effective businessperson? Use a 1- to- 10-scale, where 1 is “Does Not Make a Difference”
and 10 is “Makes a Tremendous Difference.”
9. To what extent do you feel that living in another country can make a person a more effec-
tive businessperson? Use a 1-to-10 scale, where 1 is “Does Not Make a Difference” and 10 is
“Makes a Tremendous Difference.”
10. What three important ways do you feel that traveling or living outside the United States would
be helpful to a person in being a more effective businessperson?
SET 4: INDIVIDUAL VERSUS GROUP STRATEGIC PLANNING
EXERCISE 11E
How Important Are Various Potential Advantages to Initiating, Continuing, or Expanding a Firm’s International Operations?
Purpose
Chapter 11 discusses potential advantages (and disadvantages) to initiating, continuing, or expanding
international operations. Some important advantages are as follows:
1. Firms can gain new customers for their products.
2. Foreign operations can absorb excess capacity, reduce unit costs, and spread economic risks
over a wider number of markets.
3. Foreign operations can allow firms to establish low-cost production facilities in locations close
to raw materials or cheap labor.
372 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
4. Competitors in foreign markets may not exist, or competition may be less intense than in do-
mestic markets.
5. Foreign operations may result in reduced tariffs, lower taxes, and favorable political
treatment.
6. Joint ventures can enable firms to learn the technology, culture, and business practices of other
people and to make contacts with potential customers, suppliers, creditors, and distributors in
foreign countries.
7. Economies of scale can be achieved from global operations rather than solely domestic markets.
Larger-scale production and better efficiencies allow higher-sales volumes and lower-price
offerings.
8. A firm’s power and prestige in domestic markets may be significantly enhanced if the firm com-
petes globally. Enhanced prestige can translate into improved negotiating power among credi-
tors, suppliers, distributors, and other important groups.
The purpose of this exercise is to examine more closely eight potential advantages for a
firm to initiate, continue, or expand international operations. In addition, the purpose of this
exercise is to examine whether individual decision making is better than group decision making.
Academic research suggests that groups make better decisions than individuals about 80 percent
of the time.
Instructions
Rank the eight potential advantages for a firm to initiate, continue, or expand international opera-
tions, as to their relative importance, where 1 = most important, to 8 = least important. First, rank the
advantages as an individual. Then, rank the advantages as part of a group of three. Thus, determine
what person(s) and what group(s) here today can come closest to the expert ranking. This exercise
enables examination of the relative effectiveness of individual versus group decision making in stra-
tegic planning.
Steps
1. Fill in Column 1 in Table 11-6 to reveal your individual ranking of the relative importance of
the eight advantages (1 = most important, 2 = next most important, etc.). For example, if you
think Advantage 1 (New Customers) is the second-most important advantage, then place a 2 in
Table 1 in Column 1 by the first advantage listed (new customers).
2. Fill in Column 2 in Table 11-6 to reveal your group’s ranking of the relative importance of the
eight advantages (1 = most important, 2 = next most important, etc.).
3. Fill in Column 3 in Table 11-6 to reveal the expert’s ranking of the eight advantages for a firm
to initiate, continue, or expand international operations.
4. Fill in Column 4 in Table 11-6 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 1 and Column
3 to reveal how well you performed as an individual in this exercise. (Note: Absolute difference
disregards negative numbers.)
5. Fill in Column 5 in Table 11-6 to reveal the absolute difference between Column 2 and Column
3 to reveal how well your group performed in this exercise.
6. Sum Column 4. Sum Column 5.
7. Compare the Column 4 sum with the Column 5 sum. If your Column 4 sum is less than your
Column 5 sum, then you performed better as an individual than as a group. Normally, group
decision making is superior to individual decision making, so if you did better than your group,
you did excellent.
8. The Individual Winner(s): The individual(s) with the lowest Column 4 sum is the
WINNER.
9. The Group Winners(s): The group(s) with the lowest Column 5 score is the WINNER.
CHAPTER 11 • GLOBAL AND INTERNATIONAL ISSuES 373
TABLE 11- 6 How Important Are Various Potential Advantages to Initiating, Continuing, or Expanding a Firm’s International Operations? Comparing Individual versus Group Decision Making
Advantages of Doing Business Globally Col. 1 Col. 2 Col. 3 Col. 4 Col. 5
1. Firms can gain new customers for their products.
2. Foreign operations can absorb excess capacity, reduce unit costs, and
spread economic risks over a wider number of markets.
3. Foreign operations can allow firms to establish low-cost production
facilities in locations close to raw materials or cheap labor.
4. Competitors in foreign markets may not exist, or competition may be
less intense than in domestic markets.
5. Foreign operations may result in reduced tariffs, lower taxes, and
favorable political treatment.
6. Joint ventures can enable firms to learn the technology, culture, and
business practices of other people and to make contacts with potential
customers, suppliers, creditors, and distributors in foreign countries.
7. Economies of scale can be achieved from operation in global rather
than solely domestic markets. Larger-scale production and better
efficiencies allow higher sales volumes and lower-price offerings.
8. A firm’s power and prestige in domestic markets may be
significantly enhanced if the firm competes globally. Enhanced
prestige can translate into improved negotiating power among
creditors, suppliers, distributors, and other important groups.
Sums
MINI-CASE ON LYNK & COMPANY
YOU MAY DRIVE A LYNK SOON In November 2017, a new Chinese firm, Lynk & Company, offered cars for the first time, 3,000 ve-
hicles were sold online in 2 minutes. Lynk’s parent is Zhejiang Geely Holding Group headquartered
in Hangzhou, China. The Lynk 01 is a gasoline-powered SUV that offers free wireless connectivity,
voice-operated music streaming, and car-sharing services. After China, Lynk plans to market their ve-
hicles across Europe and the United States. An all-electric version of the Lynk is coming soon. Geely
automobile sales in China rose 63 percent in 2017 as “made in China” vehicles start to dominate the
countryside there. Another large China automaker is SAIC Motor who sells the popular Roewe RX5.
China’s top-selling SUV is a brand named Wey, manufactured by Great Wall Motors Company in
China. Another Chinese firm, Zotye Auto, is building and selling electric cars in their country.
With U.S., German, and Korean firms doubling down on trying to manufacture and sell auto-
mobiles in China, coupled with the national firms mentioned above tripling down on building home
market share, China has become the most-contested region in the world for marketing vehicles. In
China, Volvo just launched its Polestar premium electric car while Tesla is both producing and sell-
ing electric cars there already. Although car sales in China grew only 1.4 percent in 2017, the slowest
pace in 15 years, sales of electric cars in China in 2017 grew 72 percent to 578,000.
The automobile market in China is analogous in many respects to any region that offers a fast
growth rate for certain products in any industry, in that numerous rival firms join the fray trying to be
a first mover to the extent possible, rather than a late follower. All firms cannot win and a big shake-
out is inevitable in China, but Lynk plans to gain economies of scale soon by rolling out its brand
across the planet.
Questions
1. How important are economies of scale in the automobile industry for being successful in a coun-
try such as China?
2. What are the competitive advantages and disadvantages of entering a market or country where
rivalry among firms (as Porter describes in Chapter 3 ) is so intense compared to targeting areas
that offer less growth and less rivalry?
M ak
si m
T o o m
e/ 1 2 3 R
F
374 PART 5 • KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
3. If you put on the x-axis rivalry of firms (low, medium, high) and on the y-axis potential growth in revenues (low, medium, high),
draw a line for China and another line for the United States to reveal your thinking regarding the automobile industry tradeoffs that
firms make in deciding where and why to focus money and resources. What do your lines represent or mean strategically?
Source: Based on Trefor Moss, “Chinese Cars Close In on Rivals,” Wall Street Journal (November 29, 2017): B5, also company documents and a variety of
sources.
Web Resources 1. The World Bank’s Annual “Doing Business” Report
An excellent annual report that compares the ease of doing business across 11 areas such as dealing with construction permits, getting electricity, and discussing credit. http://www.doingbusiness.org/reports/global-reports/ doing-business-2017
2. Forbes’ Annual “Global 2000” Ranking of the World’s Largest Public Companies An excellent annual report that reveals the largest companies by country and associated demographic information. The 2017 report included 565 U.S. companies followed by China and Hong Kong where 263 of the global 2000 list were headquartered. The 2017 list included companies from 58 countries, down from 62
countries the prior year, with Cyprus, Kazakhstan Romania, and Malta companies exiting the list. https://www.forbes.com/forbes/welcome/?toURL=https:// www.forbes.com/sites/corinnejurney/2017/05/24/the-worlds- largest-public-companies-2017/&refURL=https://www .google.com/&referrer=https://www.google.com/
3. The Tax Foundation’s Annual “Corporate Income Tax Rates Around the World” An excellent annual report that reveals changes in corporate tax rates among countries around the world https://taxfoundation.org/ corporate-income-tax-rates-around-the-world-2017/
Current Readings Armanios, Daniel Erian, Charles E. Eesley, Jizhen Li, and
Kathleen M. Eisenhardt. “How Entrepreneurs Leverage
Institutional Intermediaries in Emerging Economies to
Acquire Public Resources.” Strategic Management Journal
38, no. 7 (July 2017): 1373–1390. Dai, Li, Lorraine Eden, and Paul W. Beamish. “Caught in
the Crossfire: Dimensions of Vulnerability and Foreign Multinationals’ Exit From War-Afflicted Countries.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 7 (July 2017): 1478–1498.
Hu, Songcui, Zi-Lin He, Daniela P. Blettner, and Richard A. Bettis. “Conflict Inside and Outside: Social Comparisons and Attention Shifts in Multidivisional Firms.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 7 (July 2017): 1435–1454.
Humphery-Jenner, Mark, Zacharias Sautner, and Jo-Ann Suchard. “Cross-Border Mergers and Acquisitions: The Role of Private Equity Firms.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 8 (August 2017): 1688–1700.
Ignatius, Adi. “The Truth About Globalization.” Harvard Business Review 95, no. 4 (July–August 2017): 10.
Kulchina, Elena. “Do Foreign Entrepreneurs Benefit Their Firms as Managers?” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 8 (August 2017): 1588–1607.
Li, Chengguang, Felix C. Brodbeck, Oded Shenkar, Leonard J. Ponzi, and Jan Hendrik Fisch. “Embracing the Foreign: Cultural Attractiveness and International Strategy.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 4 (April 2017): 950–971.
Li, Haiyang, Xiwei Yi, and Geng Cui. “Emerging Market Firms’ Internationalization: How Do Firms’ Inward Activities Affect Their Outward Activities?” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 13, (December 2017): 2704–2725.
Monteiro, Felipe and Julian Birkinshaw. “The External Knowledge Sourcing Process in Multinational Corporations.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 2 (February 2017): 342–362.
Oh, Chang Hoon, and Jennifer Oetzel. “Once Bitten Twice Shy? Experience Managing Violent Conflict Risk and MNC Subsidiary-Level Investment and Expansion.” Strategic Management Journal 38, no. 3 (March 2017): 714–731.
CHAPTER 11 • GLOBAL AND INTERNATIONAL ISSuES 375
Endnotes
1. Based on Jean-Luc Arregle, Tuyah Miller, Michael Hitt,
and Paul Beamish, “Do Regions Matter?” An Integrated
Institutional and Semi-Globalization Perspective on the
Internationalization of MNEs,” Strategic Management
Journal 34 (2013): 910–934.
2. Rose Knotts, “Cross-Cultural Management:
Transformations and Adaptations,” Business Horizons
(January–February 1989): 29–33.
3. Some of the narrative in this section is based on infor-
mation at http://kwintessential.co.uk/resources/ country-
profiles.html and http://www.kwintessential.co.uk/
resources/global-etiquette/
4. Mehul Srivastava, “Keeping Women on the Job in India,”
Bloomberg Businessweek, March 7–13, 2011, 11–12.
5. Mike Bird, “Record Earnings Mark Global Recovery,”
Wall Street Journal,” December 6, 2017, B16.
376
PART 6
STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
377
How to Prepare and Present a Case Analysis LEARNING OBJECTIVES
After studying Part 6, you should be able to do the following:
1. Discuss guidelines for preparing to discuss a case in class.
2. Discuss guidelines for developing a written comprehensive case analysis.
3. Discuss guidelines for giving an effective oral case analysis presentation.
4. Discuss special tips for doing a case analysis.
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISE
Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability: How Important Are Various Reasons to Use the Free Excel Strategic Planning Template at www.strategyclub.com?
378 PART 6 • STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
T he purpose of this section is to help you analyze strategic-management cases. Numerous
guidelines and suggestions are presented as are steps to follow. Be sure to use the author
website (www.strategyclub.com), which provides sample case analyses, sample presenta-
tions, author videos, case and chapter updates, and especially the free Excel strategic planning
template.
A strategic-management case describes an organization’s external and internal conditions
and raises issues concerning the firm’s vision, mission, strategies, objectives, and policies.
Most of the information in a case is established fact, but some information may be opinions,
judgments, and beliefs. Strategic-management cases are more comprehensive than those you
may have studied in other courses. For example, a marketing case would focus on how some
company does marketing. But a strategic-management case focuses on how a firm can generate
a sustainable competitive advantage so it considers all the functional areas of business as well as
external contingencies.
A case puts you at the scene of the action by describing a firm’s situation at some point in
time and asking you to recommend an effective path or plan forward. Strategic-management
cases are written to give you practice applying strategic-management concepts. The case method
for studying strategic management is learning by doing, meaning you will usually be asked to
prepare a three-year strategic plan for a firm, just as if you were among top management of the
firm or a consultant tasked with this work.
Guidelines for Preparing to Discuss a Case in Class The case method of teaching can involve a classroom situation where your professor facilitates
discussion by asking questions and encouraging student interaction regarding ideas, analyses,
and recommendations. Be prepared for a discussion along the lines of “What would you do, why
would you do it, when would you do it, and how would you do it?” Prepare answers to the fol-
lowing types of questions:
• What are the firm’s most important external opportunities and threats? • What are the organization’s major strengths and weaknesses? • How would you describe the organization’s financial condition? • What are the firm’s existing strategies and objectives? • Who are the firm’s competitors, and what are their strategies? • What objectives and strategies do you recommend for this organization? Explain your rea-
soning. How does what you recommend compare to what the company plans? • How could the organization best implement what you recommend? What implementation
problems do you envision? How could the firm avoid or solve those problems? • How is your firm unique to the competition? What products and services are different?
Where along the value chain does your firm have uniqueness and a competitive advantage—
and how will your proposed recommendations enhance the firm’s competitiveness? • Are revised vision and mission statements needed given your strategic plan for the firm?
Your professor may ask the whole class to prepare a case for class discussion. Preparing
a case for class discussion means that you need to read the case before class, make notes
regarding the organization’s external opportunities and threats as well as internal strengths
and weaknesses, perform appropriate analyses, and come to class prepared to offer and defend
some specific recommendations. Be excited about strategic management because in practice,
the firm’s survival, and thus many people’s jobs, may depend on your decisions. Guidelines for
participating in a case analysis class discussion are as follows:
Be Practical
There is no such thing as a complete case, and no case ever provides all the information needed
for conducting analyses and making recommendations. Likewise, in the business world, strate-
gists never have all the information they need to make decisions: Information may be unavail-
able or too costly to obtain, or it may take too much time to obtain. So, in analyzing cases,
do what strategists do every day, make reasonable assumptions about unknowns, perform
HOW TO PREPARE AND PRESENT A CASE ANALYSIS 379
appropriate analyses, and make decisions. Be practical. For example, in performing a projected
financial analysis, make reasonable assumptions and proceed to show what impact your recom-
mendations are expected to have on the organization’s financial position. Avoid saying, “I don’t
have enough information.” Always supplement the information provided in a case with Internet
and library research.
Be Thorough
There is no single best solution or one right answer to a strategic-management case, so it is im-
portant to give ample justification for your recommendations. In the business world, strategists
often do not know if their decisions are right until resources have been allocated and consumed.
Then it is often too late to reverse a decision. Therefore, in your project, be thorough in justify-
ing your thought process and recommendations, from the beginning to the end of your written or
oral presentation.
Be Realistic
Avoid recommending a course of action beyond an organization’s means. Be realistic. No orga-
nization can possibly pursue all the strategies that could potentially benefit the firm. Estimate
how much capital will be required to implement your recommendation. Determine whether debt,
stock, or a combination of debt and stock could be used to obtain the capital. Make sure your
suggestions are feasible. Do not prepare a case analysis that omits all arguments and information
not supportive of your recommendations. Rather, present the major advantages and disadvan-
tages of several feasible alternatives. Try not to exaggerate, stereotype, prejudge, or overdrama-
tize. Strive to demonstrate that your interpretation of the evidence is reasonable and objective.
Be Specific
Do not make broad generalizations such as, “The company should pursue a market penetration
strategy.” Be specific by telling what, why, when, how, where, and who. Failure to use specifics is
the single major shortcoming of most oral and written case analyses. Vagueness in stating factors
and performing analyses is disastrous in strategic-management case analysis. For example, in an
internal audit, say, “The firm’s current ratio fell from 2.2 in 2018 to 1.3 in 2019, and this is consid-
ered to be a major weakness,” instead of “The firm’s financial condition is bad.” Recall that external
and internal factors need to be “actionable, quantitative, comparative, and divisional (AQCD)” to
the extent possible. Rather than concluding from a SPACE Matrix that a firm should be defensive,
be more specific, saying, “The firm should consider closing three plants, laying off 280 employees,
and divesting itself of its chemical division, for a net savings of $20.2 million in 2020.” Use ratios,
percentages, numbers, and dollar estimates. Businesspeople dislike generalities and hate vagueness.
Be Original
Do not necessarily recommend the course of action that the firm plans to undertake. The aim
of case analysis is for you to consider all the facts and information relevant to the organization
at the time, to generate feasible alternative strategies, to choose among those alternatives, and
to defend your recommendations. Support your position with charts, graphs, ratios, analyses,
and the like. Be original. Compare and contrast what you recommend versus what the company
plans to do or is doing.
Listen and Contribute Strategy decisions are commonly made by a group of individuals rather than by a single person.
Your professor will likely divide the class into three- or four-person teams and ask you to pre-
pare written or oral case analyses. Members of a team, in class or in the business world, differ on
their aversion to risk, their concern for short-run versus long-run benefits, their attitudes toward
social responsibility, and their views concerning globalization. Be open-minded to others’ views.
380 PART 6 • STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Developing and Delivering a Written Case Analysis Rather than have students analyze multiple cases during a semester, you may be asked to prepare
a comprehensive written case analysis similar to the sample case analysis project provided at the
author website at www.strategyclub.com. Or your professor could ask you or your team to focus
the written case analysis on a particular aspect of the strategic-management process, such as (1)
to identify and evaluate the organization’s existing vision, mission, objectives, and strategies; (2)
to propose and defend specific recommendations for the company; or (3) to develop an industry
analysis by describing the competitors, products, selling techniques, and market conditions in a
given industry.
In preparing a comprehensive case analysis, you could follow the table of contents
(TOC) given in Table 1; sequence your analyses according to the TOC given. The TOC
sequence matches the strategic-management process, stages, and chapters in this text. In
your written project (strategic plan) file, provide a narrative after each analysis or matrix
to reveal specific implications of that particular tool or technique for the focal firm. Avoid
vagueness anywhere in project file. See the author comments in Table 1 for additional in-
formation regarding how to effectively develop and deliver a written comprehensive case
analysis on a company.
TABLE 1 A Sample Table of Contents (with author comments)
1. Introduction: Give a one-page overview of the firm.
2. Vision Statement: Present the firm’s vision statement versus your proposed statement.
3. Mission Statement: Present the firm’s mission statement versus your proposed statement.
4. EFE Matrix: Include 10 external opportunities and ten external threats.
5. CPM: Include the firm and two rival firms compared across 10 to 20 key variables (the template
allows inclusion of 12 factors).
6. Most Recent Income Statement and Balance Sheets: Provide here to enable ratio analysis to come
next (Note: Convert actual Form10K statements to the template-formatted statements to enable
financial ratio analyses and development of projected financial statements later in project).
7. Financial Ratio Analysis: Show template-calculated and/or Internet-derived ratios and comment on
key ones; do not give definitions of the ratios and do not highlight all the ratios.
8. IFE Matrix: Include 10 strengths and 10 weaknesses.
9. SWOT Analysis: Include four SO, WO, ST, WT strategies (16 total) and make sure the strategies
are specific so you can reasonably estimate a cost (dollar value) for any strategy that makes it to
recommendations page.
10. BCG: Prepare two BCG matrices, one by geographic area and the other by product, if possible;
focus more on the implications than the numbers or mechanics of the matrix; strategies must be
specific; avoid vague terms such as market penetration.
11. IE Matrix: Prepare two IE matrices, one by geographic area and the other by product, if possible;
focus more on the implications than the numbers. For example, state how a division located in
the hold and maintain quadrant will move to the grow and build quadrant after your strategies are
implemented. This approach is more effective than simply stating the division is located in the row
and build quadrant. Slowly introduce your recommendations during your written project or oral
presentation – to facilitate the audience following your thought process throughout. If you attempt
to “save” your recommendations to the end as a surprise, you risk losing the audience.
12. SPACE Matrix: Prepare a detailed analysis for the focal firm; also show plots for two rival firms;
focus more on the implications than the numbers. For example, describe how your firm will move
within the SPACE graph/matrix after your recommendations are implemented. Comment specifi-
cally on a few axis variables and how your actions will improve them and thus the position of
the firm in the SPACE. As with any matrix, do not teach the mechanics of the matrix during your
presentation.
13. Grand Strategy Matrix: Include the focal firm and two rival firms in your matrix.
14. QSPM: Select the two most attractive SWOT strategies to include along the top row of your
QSPM.
HOW TO PREPARE AND PRESENT A CASE ANALYSIS 381
15. Perceptual Maps: Include two maps, be creative as per the dimensions; frame your discussion in
terms of competitive advantage of focal firm versus rivals as per your proposed strategic plan.
Discuss market space that is not yet used by rivals and the benefits or drawbacks of serving this
market space. Comment on how rival firms are repositioning versus how you plan the focal firm to
reposition given your recommendations.
16. Organizational Structure: Include (1) the existing chart developed based on executive titles, and
(2) your proposed chart based on the guidelines provided in Chapter 7.
17. Corporate Valuations: Include (1) focal firm, (2) rival firm, and (3) potential firm to be
acquired.
18. Recommendations: Include at least 10 with costs for each given and summed; divide your
strategies (1) existing strategies to be continued and (2) new strategies to be started.
19. EPS/EBIT Analysis: Include (1) all stock, (2) all debt, and (3) some combination of stock and
debt.
20. Projected Financial Statements: Provide 3 years to show expected impact of your
recommendations.
21. Projected Financial Ratios: Show template-calculated ratios and comment on key ones.
22. Retained Earnings Table: Make sure far right column of table matches the retained earnings row
on your projected balance sheets (see Chapter 8).
23. Executive Summary: Give a one-page overview of your strategic plan for the firm.
Making an Oral Presentation Your professor may ask you to present your analysis to the class. Oral presentations are usually
graded on two parts: content and delivery. Content refers to the quality, quantity, correctness,
and appropriateness of analyses presented, including such dimensions as logical flow through
the presentation, coverage of major issues, use of specifics, avoidance of generalities, absence
of mistakes, and feasibility of recommendations. Delivery includes such dimensions as audi-
ence attentiveness, clarity of visual aids, appropriate dress, persuasiveness of arguments, tone
of voice, eye contact, and posture. Great ideas are of no value unless others can be convinced of
their merit through clear communication.
The guidelines presented here can help you make an effective oral presentation. Present a
united front when presenting as a team. Always say “we did” and “we recommend,” rather than,
“I did the financial ratios” or “I recommend boosting advertising by 30 percent.” A light or hu-
morous introduction can be effective at the beginning of a presentation.
Controlling Your Voice
An effective rate of speaking ranges from 100 to 125 words per minute. Practice your presenta-
tion aloud to determine if you are talking too fast. Individuals commonly speak too fast when
they are nervous. Breathe deeply before and during the presentation to help yourself slow down.
Have a cup of water available; pausing to take a drink will wet your throat, take your time to
collect your thoughts, control your nervousness, slow you down, and signal to the audience a
change in topic.
Avoid a monotone voice by placing emphasis on different words or sentences. Speak loudly
and clearly, but do not shout. Silence can be used effectively to break a monotone voice. Stop at
the end of each sentence, rather than running sentences together with and or uh.
Managing Body Language
Be sure not to fold your arms, lean on the podium, put your hands in your pockets, or put your
hands behind you. Maintain a straight posture, with one foot slightly in front of the other. Above
all, do not turn your back to the audience; doing so is not only rude but it also prevents your
voice from projecting well. Avoid using too many hand gestures, too. On occasion, leave the
podium or table and walk toward your audience, but do not walk around too much. Never block
the audience’s view of your visual aids.
382 PART 6 • STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Maintain good eye contact throughout the presentation. This is the best way to persuade
your audience. There is nothing more reassuring to a speaker than to see members of the audi-
ence nod in agreement or smile. Try to look everyone in the eye at least once during your presen-
tation, but focus more on individuals who look interested than on those who seem bored. To stay
in touch with your audience, use humor and smiles as appropriate throughout your presentation.
No presentation should ever be dull!
Speaking from Slides
Be sure not to read to your audience; reading puts people to sleep, and to be quite honest, read-
ing to an audience is demeaning. Know your project well enough to present your project from a
dozen or so PowerPoint slides. Generally, there should be no more than four to six lines of text
on each slide. Use clear headings and subheadings. Do not use many handouts or your audience
may concentrate on them instead of you during the presentation. Do not read from notecards.
Answering Questions
It is best to field questions at the end of your presentation, rather than during the presentation
itself. Do not abruptly exit the stage or delete your last PowerPoint slide when you finish speak-
ing; genuinely seek to answer questions. Encourage questions, and take your time to respond
to each one. Answering questions can be persuasive because it involves you with the audience.
During the question-and-answer period, be polite, confident, and courteous. Avoid verbose re-
sponses. Do not get defensive with your answers, even if a hostile or confrontational question
is asked. Staying calm during potentially disruptive situations such as a calculation mistake, re-
flects self-confidence, maturity, poise, and command of the particular company and its industry.
Presenting a Case Analysis Orally
Your professor may allow between 10 and 30 minutes for your case presentation. Be sure in an
oral presentation to manage time, knowing that your recommendations and associated costs are
the most important part. Your project file should be a .docx, but if giving a presentation also,
develop a dozen or more PowerPoint slides to anchor your presentation.
On the strategyclub.com website, a breakdown is given for a 10- and a 15-minute oral case
presentation. Once at the www.strategyclub.com website, simply click on Student Resources and
then download the files needed. Whatever amount of time is allowed, use time effectively, so
practice before actual delivery.
Tips for Success in Case Analysis Strategic-management students who have used this text over 16 editions offer you the following
22 tips for success in doing case analysis. The tips are provided in Table 2.
TABLE 2 Tips for Being Successful in Developing and Presenting a Strategic- Management Case Analysis
1. Use the www.strategyclub.com website resources. The free Excel student template is especially
useful as are the sample PowerPoint case analyses.
2. In preparing your external assessment, use the online databases subscribed to by your college
library as identified in Chapters 3 and 4.
3. View your case analysis and presentation as a product that must have some competitive factor to
favorably differentiate it from the case analyses of other students, such as wear clothes of the fo-
cal firm or show a compelling 30-second video.
4. Seek the help of professors in other specialty areas when necessary, and mention them by name
in your presentation.
5. A goal of case analysis is to improve your ability to think clearly in uncertain situations; do not
get frustrated that there is no single best answer.
HOW TO PREPARE AND PRESENT A CASE ANALYSIS 383
6. Develop confidence in using quantitative tools for analysis. Being a business major, never shy
away from quantitative analyses. Exude self-confidence when speaking.
7. Strive for excellence in writing. Avoid typos and sloppiness. Neatness is important.
8. Pay attention to detail. Be meticulous. Employers want careful, meticulous employees.
9. Do not merely recite ratios or present figures. Rather, develop ideas and conclusions concerning
the possible trends. Use figures to support what your team is recommending.
10. Emphasize the Recommendations and Strategy Implementation sections. A common mistake is
to spend too much time on the external or internal analysis parts of your paper or presentation.
The recommendations and implementation sections are the most important parts.
11. Throughout your case analysis, emphasize how your proposed strategic plan will enable the firm
to gain and sustain competitive advantage.
12. When working as a team, do most of the work individually. Use team meetings mostly to assimi-
late work. This approach is most efficient.
13. During the presentation, keep good posture, eye contact, and voice tone, and project confidence.
Do not get defensive under any conditions or with any questions. Ask the audience to point out
any mistakes seen or any work that is unclear.
14. Capitalize on the strengths of each member of the group; volunteer your services in your areas of
strength.
15. Think of your case analysis as if it were really doing this for a company. For example, do not
invest much time describing what the firm has been doing; spend considerable time describing
what needs to be done. After all, this is what the firm would have paid you to do, they likely al-
ready know what they are doing.
16. Develop a case-presentation style that is direct, assertive, enthusiastic, and convincing; be con-
cise, precise, fluent, and accurate.
17. Enjoy strategic management and your project while you can; it may be several years before you
are playing CEO again.
18. Let someone else read and critique your project file and your presentation several times a few
days before you deliver a written project or present a project orally.
19. Include this project on your resume and include that you “gained experience using business stra-
tegic planning software.”
20. Apply for a full-time job at the case company for which you prepared a comprehensive strategic
plan.
21. For every slide you show in an oral presentation, point out how the information supports your
recommendations for the firm.
22. Make certain that your key external and internal factors are actionable, quantitative, comparative,
and divisional (AQCD) to the extent possible.
ASSURANCE-OF-LEARNING EXERCISE
STRATEGIC PLANNING TO ENHANCE MY EMPLOYABILITY: HOW IMPORTANT ARE VARIOUS REASONS TO USE THE FREE EXCEL STRATEGIC PLANNING TEMPLATE AT WWW.STRATEGYCLUB.COM?
Purpose
There are numerous reasons how the free Excel strategic-planning template is used globally in doing stra-
tegic planning. This exercise aims to enhance your familiarity with the template, so you ultimately will be
comfortable using and referring to this skill in your career progression in business.
384 PART 6 • STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Instructions
Rank order the following 12 reasons according to why students (and companies) like using the template at
www.strategyclub.com. Let 1 = the most important reason, 2 = next most important reason, all the way to
12 = the least important reason. Compare your answers to fellow students and to your professor’s expected/
expert answer.
____ 1. To save time in preparing a strategic-management case analysis; to focus on the “thinking rather
than the mechanics” of developing matrices and performing analyses.
____ 2. To follow the correct process in formulating and implementing strategies.
____ 3. To avoid mistakes in math calculations, plotting points, and drawing graphs.
____ 4. To develop professional-looking charts, graphs, and matrices.
____ 5. To develop existing and projected financial ratios.
____ 6. To correctly place firms in BCG and IE portfolio matrices.
____ 7. To examine different scenarios for using debt versus stock to raise needed capital, using EPS/
EBIT analysis.
____ 8. To vary weights and ratings in matrices and to see the resultant impact on total weighted scores.
____ 9. To more easily share information with team members, colleagues, or a professor.
____ 10. To more easily develop projected financial statements to reveal the expected impact of various
strategies.
____ 11. To develop skills with perceptual mapping or product positioning.
____ 12. To gain experience using corporate strategic-planning software; many business jobs require pro-
ficiency in Excel, which students obtain using the template. After obtaining proficiency, you may
include two competencies on your resume: (1) Excel and (2) using strategic planning software.
CASE 1 • HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.—2022 385
Honda Motor Co., Ltd.—2022
global.honda
Headquartered in Tokyo, Japan, Honda Motor Co., Ltd. is a multinational manufacturer of au-
tomobiles, motorcycles, marine engines, personal watercraft, lawn mowers, generators, power
tools, and even aircraft engines. Honda is organized into four major divisions: Motorcycle
Business, Automotive Business, Financial Services Business, and Life Creations and Other
Businesses. Within the Life Creation and Other Businesses division lies Engine Manufacturing
and Powersports Manufacturing. Honda currently employs over 200,000 associates worldwide
and is a respected top competitor globally. Major rival companies include Toyota, Suzuki, Ford
Motor Company, General Motors, Volkswagen, BMW, Harley-Davidson, and Polaris Industries.
Honda has assembly plants globally, including in Argentina, Belgium, Brazil, Canada,
China, India, Indonesia, Japan, Pakistan, Malaysia, Mexico, New Zealand, Peru, Philippines,
Taiwan, Thailand, Turkey, the United Kingdom, the United States, and Vietnam. Honda
Canada is headquartered in Markham, Ontario, and in Alliston, Ontario. In India, Honda
has the joint ventures Honda Siel Cars and Hero Honda Motorcycles. In China, Honda owns
Guangzhou Honda and Dongfeng Honda. In Malaysia and Pakistan, Honda owns Boon Siew
Honda and Honda Atlas, respectively. The American Honda Motor Company is based in
Torrance, California.
Honda receives the majority of its annual sales from automobiles, a market the firm entered
in 1963, but the firm is also the world leader in producing motorcycles. Well-known Honda ve-
hicles include its lightweight, fuel-efficient passenger cars such as the popular Civic and Accord
models and its luxury car, Acura. Honda is a major Japanese exporter to the United States and to
other parts of the world. In total, Honda serves 25 million customers the world over.
In 2021, Honda recommitted to producing clean vehicles and machines and stated that de-
carbonization is an important “mission” of the company and that they aimed to achieve carbon
neutrality by 2050. Honda says that its new electric vehicle, introduced into Europe and Japan in
2020, is only the first step of this process, and the company has worked for years to use renew-
able energy and recycle as often as possible.
In addition to environmental friendliness, Honda is also striving for zero traffic fatalities
with Honda products by 2050. The firm is counting on their Honda SENSING technology and
features, which qualify as Level 3 automated-driving equipment.
Though focused on transportation and power tools, Honda can be said to have a related diver-
sification strategy. However, sales have decreased in all business categories, based on figures at
the end of Honda’s fiscal year, which at the time of writing is March 21, 2021. The firm needs a
strong strategic plan moving forward, especially centered around what products to continue sell-
ing and which geographic and demographic markets to focus resources on.
History
Honda Motor Company’s founder, Honda Soichiro, worked in the 1930s as a mechanic at the Art
Shokai garage, fine-tuning cars that he would later enter in race competitions. He later founded
Tōkai Seiki (Eastern Sea Precision Machine Company) to make piston rings for Toyota in sup-
port of the war effort. After attending engineering school (but not graduating), he visited facto-
ries around Japan to better understand Toyota’s quality control processes, known as “Five Ways.”
To address the demand for efficient small internal combustion engines, he founded the
Honda Technical Research Institute in 1946, which was incorporated as Honda Motor Company
only two years later. It started producing motorcycles in 1949, and by 1953, the C-100, a small-
engine motorcycle, was available for purchase. It quickly gained popularity and made Honda the
world’s largest motorcycle company by 1959. In another innovation, Honda introduced its dual-
clutch transmission in motorcycles in 2010.
In 1959, Honda established the American Honda Motor Company, a U.S. subsidiary, which
began producing motorcycles in the United States in 1979 and automobiles in 1982.
386 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Honda has remained the world’s largest motorcycle manufacturer since 1959, and today it
has a production level of over 400 million units annually. Honda is also the world’s largest manu-
facturer of internal combustion engines measured by volume, producing more than 14 million
units each year. Honda is the second-largest Japanese automobile manufacturer, behind Toyota,
and was the first Japanese automobile manufacturer to release a dedicated luxury brand, Acura,
in 1986. In 1987, it became America’s best-selling import luxury vehicle with its Integra and
Legend product lines.
Vision/Mission
Honda has two fundamental beliefs: “Respect for the Individual,” and “The Three Joys,” which
are the joy of buying, the joy of selling, and the joy of creating. “Respect for the Individual” repre-
sents a philosophy of nurturing and promoting admirable characteristics throughout the company
by respecting individual differences and trusting one an other as equal partners. “The Three Joys”
are based on “Respect for the Individual” as the company strives to “create joy together” at all
Honda worksites, with the ultimate goal of creating joy among its customers as the driving force.
Honda’s vision for 2030 is to help its customers worldwide to grow their “life’s potential.”
By doing so, Honda fulfills its mission statement, which affirms its commitment to customer
satisfaction through high-quality products at reasonable prices, all through a global perspec-
tive. The mission statement can be viewed in the “Philosophy” section of the company website:
honda-rd.asia.
Honda is known globally for excellent quality products at a competitive price point. The
company’s commitment to affordable quality is the distinct competitive advantage it uses to
remain among the top competitors in the industry.
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure Honda has 81 Japanese subsidiaries and 267 overseas subsidiaries. Pages 33 and 34 in the com-
pany’s 2021 Annual Report lay out each of Honda’s principal subsidiaries, the country of incor-
poration, function and percentage ownership, and voting interest held by Honda.
Given in Exhibit 1 is the current organizational chart for Honda Motor Company. Note that
Honda’s current CEO is also President of the company. The current organizational chart does not
exhibit presidents of either regions or product categories, so the actual type of structure is unclear.
EXHIBIT 1 Honda’s Organizational Chart
Source: Based on information in Honda’s fiscal 2021 Annual Report.
President and
CEO
Vice President
Purchase
PPC Engine Mfg.Frame Mfg.EngineeringEngine Quality Assembly
Press Shop Paint ShopWeld Shop
Sales and
Marketing Manufacturing
Finance and
Accounting
Admin & General
Affairs
CASE 1 • HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.—2022 387
Production/Operations With several hundred factories around the world, Honda produces many of the major compo-
nents of its products to ensure quality control. These components include engines, frames, and
transmissions. Smaller components such as shock absorbers, electrical equipment, and tires are
outsourced. Other raw materials including paint, steel plates, steel tubes, plastic, and zinc are
also purchased from outside suppliers. Among these raw materials, the most important is steel
plates, accounting for approximately 36 percent of Honda’s total purchases of raw materials.
Financial Data and Statements Honda’s revenue for the fiscal year ending March 31, 2021, decreased by ¥1.76 trillion, or 12
percent, to ¥13.17 trillion from the prior fiscal year. The company’s operating profit increased
by ¥26.5 billion, or 4.2 percent, to ¥660.2 billion from the previous fiscal year. However, the
company’s profit before income taxes rose by ¥124.1 billion, or 15.7 percent, to ¥914.0 billion
compared to the previous fiscal year. Profit for the year increased from the previous fiscal year
by ¥185.5 billion, or 36 percent, to ¥695.4 billion.
Exhibits 2 and 3 provide Honda’s most recent income statements and balance sheets.
EXHIBIT 2 Honda Income Statements (in millions of JPY)
Source: Based on information in Honda’s fiscal 2021 Annual Report.
Income Statement 3/31/20 3/31/21 Percent Change
Revenues 14,931,009 13,170,519 –12%
Cost of Goods Sold 11,851,659 10,439,689 –12%
Gross Profit 3,079,350 2,730,830 –11%
Operating Expenses 2,445,713 2,070,622 –15%
EBIT 633,637 660,208 4%
Interest Expense (156,281) (253,845) 62%
EBT 789,918 914,053 16%
Tax 279,986 218,609 –22%
Non-Recurring Events — — NA NA
Net Income 509,932 695,444 36%
EXHIBIT 3 Honda Balance Sheets (in millions of JPY)
Balance Sheet 3/31/20 3/31/21 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments 2,672,353 2,758,020 3%
Accounts Receivable 2,512,267 2,596,468 3%
Inventory 1,560,568 1,545,600 –1%
Other Current Assets 555,822 679,003 22%
Total Current Assets 7,301,010 7,579,091 4%
Property Plant & Equipment 3,051,704 3,021,514 –1%
Goodwill — — NA NA
Intangibles 760,434 818,763 8%
Other Long-Term Assets 9,348,317 10,501,662 12%
Total Assets 20,461,465 21,921,030 7%
(continued)
388 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Source: Based on information in Honda’s fiscal 2021 Annual Report.
Balance Sheet 3/31/20 3/31/21 Percent Change
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 958,469 1,088,061 14%
Other Current Liabilities 4,831,619 4,627,396 –4%
Total Current Liabilities 5,790,088 5,715,457 –1%
Long-Term Debt 4,221,229 4,715,361 12%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 2,164,125 2,117,373 –2%
Total Liabilities 12,175,442 12,548,191 3%
Equity
Common Stock 86,067 86,067 0%
Retained Earnings 7,973,637 8,142,948 2%
Treasury Stock (177,827) (273,940) 54%
Paid in Capital & Other 404,146 1,417,764 251%
Total Equity 8,286,023 9,372,839 13%
Total Liabilities and Equity 20,461,465 21,921,030 7%
By-Product Segment Information
The Motorcycle Division Honda’s unit sales of motorcycles, all-terrain vehicles (ATVs), and side-by-sides (SxS) in fiscal
2021 totaled 10.264 million units, down 17.4 percent from the previous fiscal year. About 88
percent of Honda’s motorcycle units on a group basis were sold in Asia. Honda produces a wide
range of motorcycles, with engine displacements ranging from the 50cc class to the 1800cc class
in 1-, 2-, 4-, or 6-cylinder configurations. Honda also has electric vehicles in its lineup as well as
motorcycle racing, sports, business, and commuter models.
Honda’s motorcycle revenues decreased from the previous fiscal year by ¥272.0 billion in
fiscal 2021, or 13.2 percent, to ¥1.787 trillion. Most other major lines on the income statement
for motorcycles also decreased in fiscal 2021, including research and development (R&D) ex-
penses, which decreased 16.5 percent, and operating profit, which decreased 21.4 percent from
the previous fiscal year.
From a by-region perspective, Honda’s motorcycle sales in Japan for fiscal 2021 was
370,000 units, an increase of 4 percent from the previous fiscal year. However, Honda’s unit
sales in North America only increased 0.6 percent in fiscal 2021 from the previous fiscal year
to 332,000 units. Honda’s unit motorcycle sales in Europe decreased 2.1 percent in fiscal 2021
from the previous fiscal year to 234,000 units, mainly due to decreases in sales units of the
CB500 model series. Honda’s motorcycle sales decreased by over 18 percent in fiscal 2021,
attributed predominantly to a decrease in sales in India of the Activa model and the Air Blade
model in Vietnam. These numbers do not include sales by P.T. Astra Honda Motor in Indonesia,
which reported that unit sales for fiscal 2021 decreased a whopping 45 percent from the pre-
vious fiscal year to 2.69 million units, mainly due to decreases in sales units of the BeAT
and Vario model series. In Honda’s Other Regions (including South America, the Middle East,
Africa, Oceania, and other markets), unit sales in fiscal 2021 decreased 20.9 percent from the
previous fiscal year to 1.03 million units, due mainly to decreases in sales units of the CG160
and Biz model series in Brazil.
In 2010, Honda engineers introduced the dual-clutch transmission, which gives riders
the sensation of a manual drive along with the convenience of an automatic drive without the
clutch. More recently, Honda engineers have integrated smartphone apps in new motorcycles.
Riders can now enjoy navigation, text, music, and even phone calls in a safe, hands-free journey
CASE 1 • HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.—2022 389
that does not take the focus off the road. Honda considers this technology especially important
for the Indian and Thai markets, where people use motorcycles more than in other regions and
also, at least according to Honda, talk to their family more on the phone than people living in
other countries do.
Honda engineers also are increasingly designing braking systems based on the type of riding
the motorcycle is designed for. Traditionally, bikes came with single-type antilock brakes (ABS),
which had a tendency to cause falls off the bike. Now bikes are designed with dual-type ABS,
super sport-type ABS (used for breaking while cornering in circuit riding), and even off-road
ABS systems.
The Automobile Division Honda began automobile operations in 1963 and quickly grew into a dominant player in the
world automobile market. In 1982, Honda became the first Japanese automaker to produce ve-
hicles in the United States with the popular Honda Accord, leading to the establishment of the
Acura Brand in 1986.
Honda’s unit sales of automobiles in fiscal 2021 totaled 2.6 million units, down 21.1 percent
from the previous fiscal year and down in all regions. About 49 percent of Honda’s automobile
units (including sales under the Acura brand) were sold in Asia, followed by 33 percent in North
America and 13 percent in Japan. Honda’s vehicles use gasoline engines of 3-, 4-, or 6-cylinder
configurations; diesel engines; gasoline-electric hybrid systems; and gasoline-electric plug-in
hybrid systems, as well as alternative fuel-powered vehicles such as battery electric vehicles,
fuel cell vehicles, and flexible fuel vehicles. Honda’s principal automobile products include the
Accord, City, Civic, Crider, Fit/Jazz, Breeze, CR-V, Freed, Odyssey, Pilot, Vezel/HR-V, XR-V,
and N-Box.
Honda’s automobile division sales revenue for fiscal 2021 decreased by ¥1.39 trillion, or 14
percent, to ¥8.56 trillion from the previous fiscal year. Selling, general and administrative ex-
penses, and research and development expenses also decreased in this division. The company’s
automobile operating profit decreased from the previous fiscal year by ¥63 billion, or 41.1 per-
cent, during fiscal 2021 to ¥90.2 billion. In Japan and the United States, which are the two main
sales markets for Honda automobiles, the contribution margin of light truck unit sales was about
25 percent higher than Honda’s passenger cars category.
Honda experienced sharp declines in many popular automobile sales in fiscal 2021 across
many of its most profitable regions. In Japan, for example, unit automobile sales decreased nearly
12 percent, attributed mostly to reduced sales of the N-box model series. In North America,
sales were down 19 percent due to sharp declines in sales of both the Accord and Civic. Many
of the sales reductions were from manufacturing fewer automobiles. In Europe, Honda’s auto-
mobile sales were down 24 percent over the same period, Asia sales were down 31 percent, and
China sales were down 34 percent.
Honda management talks often about their strategy to become near-zero emissions by
2050 and to reduce traffic deaths to zero by 2050. To help move the firm toward the former
commitment, Honda has increased its R&D of hydrogen stations instead of relying on outside
firms to develop this technology. Honda hopes its R&D in this area will soon produce vehicles
that will run on hydrogen, often called fuel cell vehicles (FCVs). To fulfill their commitment
to safer roads, Honda’s global safety concept of “Safety for Everyone” is designed to make the
roads safer not just for operators of vehicles and motorcycles but also for pedestrians. When
fully developed, the technology can detect pedestrians, reduce blind spots, aid drivers in stay-
ing in the lane, notify drivers if they are not focusing on the road, and support drivers in many
other ways.
The Financial Services Segment Financial services provided by Honda include retail lending, leasing to customers, and wholesale
financing to dealers. Honda offers a variety of financial services to customers and dealers in
many countries to provide sales support for products.
Honda’s sales revenue from its Financial Services division decreased by ¥92.6 billion, or 3.6
percent, to ¥2.49 trillion in fiscal 2021, due mainly to lower revenues from leased vehicles. This
decline enabled operating profits to increase in fiscal 2021 by ¥137.2 billion, or 62.5 percent, to
¥356.9 billion.
390 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
The Life Creation and Other Division In 2019, Honda changed the name of its Power Product segment to Life Creation and Other in
order to signify the company’s intent for this segment to create new value for “mobility” and
“daily lives,” which includes improving existing power products and starting new businesses
for the future, including energy products. In this division, Honda manufactures power products
such as general-purpose engines, generators, water pumps, lawn mowers, riding mowers, robotic
mowers, brush cutters, tillers, snow blowers, outboard marine engines, walking assist devices,
and portable battery inverter power sources. Energy products are to consist of portable and swap-
pable batteries rechargeable with renewable energy, but this also includes energy management
services for electric vehicle owners to charge their car with renewables.
Regarding the “Other” businesses, Honda began deliveries of the HondaJet aircraft in
December 2015. For fiscal 2021, about 47 percent of Honda’s power products units were sold
in North America, followed by 25 percent in Asia, and 17 percent in Europe. Sales in power
products were down 1.4 percent in 2021, mostly from decreased sales in North America; sales in
Europe and Asia, on the other hand, increased slightly.
Exhibit 4 provides a breakdown of Honda’s revenues by product category. Note the signifi-
cant decreases across all segment categories.
EXHIBIT 4 Honda Revenues by Product (in billions of JPY; for fiscal years ended March 31, 2021)
2019 2020 2021
Motorcycle 2,100.1 2,059.3 1,787.2
Automobile 11,072.1 9,959.0 8,567.2
Financial Services 2,365.3 2,586.9 2,494.2
Life Creation and Other 350.9 325.6 321.7
Total 15,888.6 14,931.0 13,170.5
Source: Based on Honda’s 2021 Annual Report, p. 9.
By-Region Segment Information
Japan Honda’s unit sales of all products in Japan in 2021 increased 7.7 percent from the previous fiscal
year to about 336,000 units, mainly due to the increases in sales of generators and original equip-
ment manufacturer (OEM) engines, which are engines installed on products sold under a third
party. In Japan, Honda’s sales revenue from domestic and export sales decreased in 2021 by ¥555
billion, or 12.6 percent, from the previous fiscal year to ¥3.86 trillion, due mainly to decreased
sales revenue in the Automobile business.
North America Honda’s unit sales of all products in North America, where the United States is the principal mar-
ket, were down 8.1 percent in 2021 from the previous fiscal year to 2.6 million units, mainly due
to the decrease in sales of OEM engines, which offset the increase, mainly in the sales of genera-
tors. In North America, Honda’s sales revenue in 2021 decreased from the previous fiscal year
by ¥1,075.9 billion, or 12.6 percent, to ¥7,480.8 billion, due mainly to decreased sales revenue
in the Automobile business. Operating profit increased from the previous fiscal year by ¥150.5
billion, or 49.3 percent, to ¥455.8 billion.
Europe Honda’s unit sales of all products in Europe increased 9.9 percent in 2021 from the previous
fiscal year to about 929,000 units, mainly due to increased sales of lawnmowers and OEM en-
gines, which offset the decrease in sales of generators. In Europe, Honda’s sales revenue in 2021
decreased from the previous fiscal year by ¥90.7 billion, or 11.7 percent, to ¥681.8 billion, due
mainly to decreased sales revenue in the Automobile business. Operating profit increased by
¥12.4 billion, or 83.1 percent, to ¥27.4 billion from the previous fiscal year.
CASE 1 • HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.—2022 391
Asia Honda’s unit sales of all products in Asia increased 2.2 percent in fiscal 2021 from the previous
year to 1.4 million units. This was also mainly due to the increased sales of OEM engines, which
offset the decrease in sales of generators. In Asia, Honda’s sales revenue decreased by ¥400.9
billion in fiscal 2021, or 10.4 percent, to ¥3,458.7 billion, while operating profit decreased by
¥67.6 billion, or 21.2 percent, to ¥251.8 billion.
Other Regions Honda’s unit sales in their Other Regions segment (including South America, the Middle East,
Africa, Oceania, and other markets) increased 4.7 percent in 2021 from the previous year to
about 336,000 units, mainly due to increases in sales of OEM engines. In the Other Regions busi-
ness, revenues decreased by ¥259.1 billion, or 37.4 percent, to ¥434.4 billion in 2021. Exhibit 5
provides a breakdown of Honda’s by-region revenues. Note the decreases across all regions in
all years, indicating a need for the company to develop a clear strategic plan moving forward.
EXHIBIT 5 Honda Revenues by Region (in billions of JPY; for Fiscal Years Ended March 31, 2021)
Source: Based on Honda’s 2021 Annual Report, p. 9.
2019 2020 2021
Japan 2,042.8 1,985.9 1,849.2
North America 8,519.0 8,164.3 7,080.8
Europe 660.9 568.7 511.7
Asia 3,793.7 3,449.8 3,250.1
Other Regions 872.0 762.0 478.4
Total 15,888.6 14,931.0 13,170.5
EXHIBIT 6 Honda’s Segment Revenue as a % of Total Revenue
Source: Based on information in Honda’s fiscal 2021 Annual Report.
2019 2020 2021
Automobile 70 67 65
Motorcycle 13 14 14
Financial Services 15 17 19
Life Creation and Other 2 2 2
Exhibit 6 provides a breakdown of Honda’s segment revenue as a percent of the company’s
total revenue. Note increases in the Financial Services segment and decreases in the Automobiles
segment.
Competitor Information
Companies globally that manufacture motorcycles, mopeds, and motor scooters include Jiangmen
Dachangjiang Group, Lifan Industry (Group), Loncin Motor, and Zongshen Industrial Group
(all based in China); BMW (Germany); Hero MotoCorp (India); Honda, Kawasaki, Suzuki, and
Yamaha (Japan); and Harley-Davidson and Polaris (USA). In the motorcycle industry, personal
income and interest rates drive demand. The profitability of firms largely depends on the vol-
umes and sales of high-margin accessories and add-ons. Large firms enjoy economies of scale
in purchasing and in maintaining dealer networks. Small producers compete by offering highly
customized products.
Companies globally that manufacture automobiles include Volkswagen (Germany), Toyota
(Japan), Renault (France), Mitsubishi (Japan), General Motors (USA), Hyundai-Kia (South Korea),
392 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
FCA (Italy), Ford Motors (USA), Groups PSA (France), Daimier AG (Germany), Changan
(China), Geely (China), BAIC (China) BMW (Germany), SAIC (China), Nissan (Japan),
and Mazda (Japan). The largest automobile manufacturers in the world in 2020 were Toyota,
Volkswagen, General Motors, Hyundai-Kia, Honda, Ford, Nissan, FCA, Renault, and PSA, with
a market share ranging from 15 percent to 4 percent as shown in Exhibit 7.
EXHIBIT 7 Global Percentage of 2020 Vehicles Sold by Units
Source: Based on information from a variety of sources.
Hyundai-Kia
10%
Honda
8%
Ford
7%
Nissan
7%
FCA
6%
PSA
4%
Renault
5%
Toyota
15%
Volkswagen
15%
GM
11%
Others
12%
Toyota Motor Corporation Headquartered in Toyota City, Japan, and employing about 370,000, Toyota is the largest auto-
mobile manufacturing company in the world, recently surpassing Volkswagen. In April 2021,
Toyota purchased Lyft’s self-driving technology for $550 million and merged that operation with
its own newly created Woven Planet automation division. Toyota designs and manufactures a
diverse product line-up that ranges from subcompacts to luxury and sports vehicles to SUVs,
trucks, minivans, and buses. Popular models include the Prius, Camry, Corolla, Land Cruiser,
and Lexus lines, as well as the Tundra truck. Toyota’s subsidiaries also manufacture vehicles; for
example, Daihatsu Motor produces mini-vehicles and Hino Motors produces trucks and buses.
Toyota’s domestic sales account for about 45 percent of the company’s revenue.
Volkswagen AG Headquartered in Wolfsburg, Niedersachsen, Germany, Volkswagen (VW) produces nearly 11
million vehicles each year, alternating with Toyota for the position of the world’s largest auto
manufacturer. VW produces cars, motorbikes, and commercial vehicles of all sizes under more
than 10 popular brand names including VW, Audi, SKODA, SEAT, Porsche, Lamborghini, and
Scania. VW has over 120 factories in more than 30 countries (two-thirds of these are European)
and has customers in virtually all world markets. VW offers leasing, financing, and fleet solu-
tions for customers and is aggressively positioning for the growth in demand for electric vehicles.
Ford Motor Company Headquartered in Dearborn, Michigan, Ford manufactures cars, trucks, and SUVs under the Ford
and Lincoln brands. About 65 percent of Ford’s total sales comes from the United States. Ford
is making significant investments in vehicle technology and mobility services. The company’s
F-150 is the bestselling truck in the world.
Harley-Davidson Headquartered in Milwaukee, Wisconsin, Harley-Davidson (HD) is the largest U.S. motorcycle
manufacturer and sells its bikes globally through a network of about 1,380 dealers. HD offers
all kinds of bikes, including cruiser and touring models, standard and sport bikes, and dual mod-
els that can be used on- and off-road. HD trademarks include Softail, H-D Street, Sportster,
and Livewire. HD sells “attitude” with its clothing brand-name products, which include a line
of riding gear and apparel (MotorClothes). Harley-Davidson Financial Services (HDFS) offers
CASE 1 • HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.—2022 393
financing to dealers and consumers in the United States and Canada. About 70 percent of HD’s
revenue are derived from the United States.
General Motors Corporation Headquartered in Detroit, Michigan, General Motors Corporation (GM) makes and sells cars
and trucks worldwide under well-known brands such as Buick, Cadillac, Chevrolet, and GMC.
General Motors Financial Co. provides financing services. GM is developing electric vehicles
and autonomous vehicles and has established a ride-sharing service dubbed Maven. The United
States accounts for about 80 percent of GM’s sales.
External Factors
Automakers globally face a rapidly changing external environment due, variously, to digitali-
zation, connectivity, evolving powertrain technologies, tougher regulations, and shifts in con-
sumer attitudes. These challenges are threats but also present opportunities. In pursuit of sales
growth, global automakers are investing heavily in emerging markets by setting up local sub-
sidiaries or joint ventures. Domestic manufacturers in emerging markets commonly reap tax
benefits or other policies that give them an advantage over foreign competitors. Manufacturers
in emerging markets are increasingly exporting their products to world markets. The global
auto market declined nearly 14 percent in 2020 but is expected to rebound 13 percent in 2021.
In 2020, 4 percent of new global auto sales were electric vehicles (EVs), but only 2 percent of
new sales in the United States were electric vehicles. However, EVs are certainly the future, as
demonstrated by Tesla’s sales of 500,000 EVs in 2020 and forecasts of 20 million EV units to
be sold by 2030.
Honda continues to face difficulties globally due to the spread of COVID-19 and the impact
of a semiconductor supply shortage. In the United States, the government’s economic stimulus
measures were minimally effective. In Europe, economic activity remains restrained, while in
Asia the economies have slowed in India, Thailand, Japan, and Indonesia. China, however, has
experienced a moderate economic recovery mainly due to government stimulus measures.
A multitude of economic factors have affected Honda. In addition to COVID-19 concerns
and economic distress, populations are aging, urbanization is accelerating, climate change is
worsening, and industry structures are changing due to progress in technologies such as the use
of electric-powered motors, autonomous driving, and IoT, all on a global scale.
Within the motorcycle business, competition with emerging manufacturers is intensifying.
Data suggests that highway motorcycles account for 54 percent of the U.S. motorcycle market
share, followed by off-highway motorcycles at 19 percent share. Dual motorcycles accounted for
9 percent of revenue in 2020, with scooters at 4 percent. Bicycles and parts filled the balance of
Honda’s 2020 revenue.
Honda has set a CO2 reduction target rate that far exceeds the governmental targets for
emerging markets. The company aims to become an environmental leader in motorcycles, not
only through the use of electric-powered motors, but also through improved fuel efficiency and
the use of biofuels.
With regard to electrification in the Automobile business, Honda plans to achieve carbon
neutrality in accordance with the needs of each country it operates in. The company is striving to
effectively respond to electrification, driver-assistive technologies, connected technologies, and
other technological innovations. Honda needs to develop products and services equipped with
such next-generation technologies across all its product-based and region-based segments. For
example, Honda likely needs to further expand its lineup of EVs and FCVs based on electric-
powered motor technology. Honda is currently developing its own all-solid-state batteries.
Vehicle sales across all regions have been flat since 2015. Global sales of vehicles were
90 million in 2015, increasing only to 95 million by 2018 before falling back to 90 million in
2019 and falling again to 78 million in Covid-impacted 2020. The United States and Europe
each account for about 22 percent of the global market share; China, 32 percent; Japan, 6 per-
cent; and South America, 4 percent; with other regions making up the balance. Annual growth
in the United States is forecasted to be 1 percent from 2021 through 2024, with a 2 percent
growth forecasted in the United States on SUV and light trucks. Trucks in the United States
tend to sell for a premium and hold their value, making new trucks an attractive product for auto
manufacturers.
394 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Conclusion
With the automotive industry spiraling rapidly toward new innovations and electric vehicles,
Honda should perhaps accelerate its electric automotive product development efforts. Due to the
increases in minimum wage expected soon around the world, Honda may need to invest more
in automotive assembly automation. This is important because the Automotive Division gener-
ates the most profits for Honda, and profits will be severely decreased by the mandatory wage
increases. Automation also creates the potential for more production output due to less downtime
required for automated processes.
Honda’s Life and Creation Division is experiencing higher demand than Honda’s current
production capabilities, so capacity needs to increase. The powersports industry has become
highly competitive, so additional expenditures in R&D are also likely needed for this division.
The second largest income-producing division for Honda is the Motorcycle Division. As
most of the revenue for this division is generated in the Asia-Pacific region, Honda should per-
haps increase motorcycle exports over the next 5 years to benefit from rising global demand for
motorcycles. More exports would necessitate increased motorcycle production capabilities.
Honda needs additional marketing to get the message out globally to inform potential cus-
tomers of its upcoming hi-tech electronic products. A comprehensive strategic plan is needed at
Honda to guide its decision making in the future.
CASE 2 • THE GAP INC.—2018 395
The Gap Inc.—2018
www.gapinc.com , GPS
The Gap Inc. (Gap) is a popular retailer providing clothing, accessories, and personal-care
products for men, women, children, and babies under Gap, Old Navy, Banana Republic, Intermix,
Weddington Way, Piperlime, and Athleta brands. Stores are located in the United States, Canada,
China, the U.K., France, Ireland, Italy, Taiwan, Mexico, and Japan. Franchise agreements expand
operations into Asia, Australia, Europe, Latin America, Africa, and the Middle East. Gap employs
about 135,000 full and part-time people at 3,200 company-owned store locations that are almost
all under a lease agreement. Customers can shop online at gap.com, oldnavy.com, bananarepublic
.com, and athleta.com. Other Gap-owned retail outlets include GapBody, GapKids, and BabyGap.
Weddington Way does not have a material impact on Gap’s financial statements.
Gap provides a wide range of family clothing products, including denim, khakis, T-shirts,
fashion apparel, shoes, accessories, intimate apparel, and personal care products. All Gap cloth-
ing is private-label merchandise made specifically for the company. From the design board to
store displays, Gap controls all aspects of its trademark casual look.
As indicated in the following numbers, the company needs a clear strategic plan going for-
ward. Fiscal year 2017 company’s sales were up 3 percent compared with a decline of 2 percent
the prior year. Sales by brand for fiscal year 2017 were as follows:
• Old Navy Global: up 6 percent versus down 1 percent the prior year
• Gap Global: down 1 percent versus down 3 percent the prior year
• Banana Republic Global: down 2 percent versus down 7 percent the prior year
Copyright by Fred David Books LLC; written by Forest R. David.
History
In 1969, Doris and Don Fisher entered the clothing retail business with the vision of creating a
unique shopping experience that offered a wide selection of styles. The idea behind the first Gap
store, founded in San Francisco, was to provide fresh, casual, American style clothes. By 1970,
sales reached $2 million and the company opened its second store in San Jose, California. Six
years later, in 1976, the company underwent major changes and initiated its first public offering
of 1.2 million shares of stock on the New York and Pacific Stock Exchange.
The 1980s was a period of major growth and expansion. In 1980, Gap dropped Levis and
other brands and began focusing on its own private label. In 1983, Gap expanded horizontally by
acquiring Banana Republic, as well as expanding its product line and introducing GapKids with
the opening of its first store in San Mateo, California. A year later, Gap burst into the interna-
tional market and established its presence in London, England, and Vancouver, British Colombia.
The same year, Gap entered the European market and Gap’s annual sales reached $1 billion.
In 2005, Gap revamped its online stores by offering more convenience and interactive shop-
ping. The following year, Gap added PiperLime to its online brands. In 2008, the company acquired
Athleta Inc., a women’s sports and active apparel company based in Petaluma, California, for $148
million. Gap opened its first stores in Serbia and Ukraine in 2011, broadening the clothing chain’s
reach into Eastern Europe. Gap stores opened early 2018 in Belgrade and Kiev. Stephen Sunnucks,
Gap’s international president, said in a statement that Ukraine is the fastest-growing retail market in
Eastern Europe, while Serbia has many young customers who enjoy shopping.
Vision/Mission
Gap provides extensive literature and discussion on their corporate website regarding its efforts
to enhance sustainability and take care of employees. Gap does not, however, report a written vi-
sion or mission statement. However, from reviewing current and past Annual Reports, a possible
mission could look something like the following:
396 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 1 Gap Inc.’s Top Executives and Organizational Chart
Source: Based on company documents.
1. Art Peck, President and CEO
2. Brent Hyder, EVP, Global Talent and Sustainability
3. Julie Gruber, EVP, Global General Counsel, Corporate
Secretary and Chief Compliance Officer
4. Paul Chapman, EVP and Chief Information Officer
5. Sebastian Digrande, EVP Strategy and Chief Customer Officer
6. Michael Yee, EVP Global Supply Chain: Sourcing and Production
7. Shawn Curran, EVP Global Supply Chain and Operations
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
8. Christophe Roussel, EVP Global Sourcing and Product Operations
9. Teri List-Stoll, EVP and Chief Financial Officer
10. Jeff Kirwan, President and CEO Gap
11. Sonia Syngal, President and CEO Old Navy
12. Nancy Green, President and CEO Athleta
13. Mark Breitbrad, President and CEO Banana Republic
14. Abinta Malik, EVP and General Manager, Greater China
15. Jyothi Rao, President and General Manager, Intermix
Gap strives to be a leader in the specialty family clothing industry offering excellent value
to consumers by providing quality products at a fair price throughout North America,
Asia, and Europe. Gap strives to minimize its environmental impact on raw materials
with special consideration for both Gap employees and persons employed all along its
supply chain. Gap is committed to producing lasting and positive relationships in all com-
munities it impacts.
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure Gap’s organizational structure is provided in Exhibit 1. Of the 15 people listed, 6 are women. It
appears the firm operates under a divisional-by-product structure, but there are duplicate titles of
President and CEO for numerous positions, and there is no COO. Apparently every top execu-
tive reports to Art Peck.
Sustainability Gap’s sustainability strategy is aligned with the United Nations Global Sustainable Development
Agenda that focuses on human rights, and the Paris Agreement that focuses on climate, and other
sustainability programs. Gap is committed to ensuring its 135,000 employees and millions of peo-
ple within its supply chain are paid fairly and work in safe conditions, as outlined in the company’s
five focus areas on core sustainability. Also included among the five key areas are water steward-
ship, product sustainability, and operational eco-efficiency. All areas are geared toward taking care
of employees, and ensuring a small environmental footprint on all Gap products produced.
Segment Data Gap primarily operates under Gap, Old Navy, Banana Republic, Athleta, and Intermix brands
focusing primarily on clothing in all business segments. The company controls store layouts,
marketing, brand development, and virtually all other vital factors for its full line of stores.
Gap specializes in offering trendy but casual American style clothing focusing on denim,
T-shirts, button-downs, khakis, and other casual styles of clothing and focusing on providing
an affordable product though moderate price points. GapKids, GapBody, GapFit, babyGap,
GapMaternity are common marketing names utilized by Gap. Customers can shop Gap at retail
stores, outlet and factory stores, and on Gap’s website. Gap stores account for 41 percent of all
The Gap Inc. stores.
The company provides revenues by both geographic region and by store brand on their
Annual Report. Exhibit 2 reveals the number of store locations by geographic region and store
brand. Note there are nearly 25 percent more Old Navy stores in North America than Gap stores,
but only 2 percent of international stores are Old Navy with 88 percent of international stores
being Gap. Also, around 12.5 percent of all company stores are franchised owned, primarily all
CASE 2 • THE GAP INC.—2018 397
EXHIBIT 3 The Gap Inc.’s Total Stores by Region in 2017
2663 3,000
2,500
2,000
1,500
1,000
500
0 North America Asia Europe
372 165
Gap. Inc Total Stores by Region
Source: Based on company website information.
outside of North America. Exhibit 3 reveals that over 83 percent of all Gap stores are located in
North America. Exhibit 4 reveals that Gap, Old Navy, and Banana Republic account for 94 percent
of all Gap Inc. stores worldwide.
Gap plans to open additional Old Navy stores in Mexico and China in the coming years, but
closed all 53 Old Navy Stores in Japan in 2016. The company kept its presence in Japan with
its 200 Gap and Banana Republic stores in that market. In total, the company closed 67 stores
worldwide in 2016, revealing how important branding is among different nations; a one-size-
fits-all approach does not apply; for example all but 13 of the 1,056 Old Navy stores are located
in North America.
Athleta focuses on premium fitness and performance apparel focused on women and girls.
The business focus is on yoga, sports, and everyday activities. The Gap Inc. acquired Intermix
in 2012.
Exhibit 5 and Exhibit 6 reveal the company’s revenues and number of locations across re-
gions and store type, respectively. Fiscal 2017 ended February 3, 2018. The U.S. region includes
Puerto Rico and Guam. Fiscal 2017 results showed a substantial drop in company revenues in
the United States, Canada, Europe, and Asia and across all brands, except slight increases in rev-
enues from “Other Regions” and “Other Brands.”
EXHIBIT 2 Gap Inc. Store Demographics (2017 data)
Store Region Number of Locations
Gap North America 844
Old Navy North America 1,043
Banana Republic North America 601
Athleta North America 132
Intermix North America 43
Total North America Stores 2,663
Gap Asia 311
Old Navy Asia 13
Banana Republic Asia 48
Total Asia Stores 372
Gap Europe 164
Banana Republic Europe 1
Total Europe Stores 165
Total Company Stores Worldwide 3,200
Total Franchise Stores Worldwide 459
Total Stores Overall 3,659
Source: Based on company website information.
398 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 4 The Gap Inc. Worldwide Stores Percent Data for 2017
Gap
41%
Old Navy
33%
Banana Republic
20%
Intermix
2%
Athleta
4%
Worldwide Stores By Percent of Total Stores
Source: Based on company website information.
Current Strategies Cost cutting and efficiencies along the value chain are planned to improve the company’s short-
term bottom line, but these initiatives going forward cannot assure a sustainable competitive
advantage. The company must be diligent in deciding where to sell what. A strategic issue facing
EXHIBIT 5 Gap Inc.’s Revenues by Store Type and Region in Fiscal 2017 (in millions $)
Year End February 3, 2018 Gap Old Navy Banana Republic Other Total
U.S. & Canada $3,463 $7,117 $2,242 $919 $13,741
Asia 1,117 50 96 0 1,263
Europe 626 0 15 0 641
Other Regions 112 71 27 0 210
Total $5,318 $7,238 $2,380 $919 $15,855
Source: Based on company documents.
EXHIBIT 6 Gap Inc.’s Number of Store Locations on 11-1-17 versus 2-1-18
Division # of Stores on 11-1-17 # of Stores on 2-1-18
Gap North America 835 810
Gap Asia 309 313
Gap Europe 157 155
Old Navy North America 1,057 1,066
Old Navy Asia 13 14
Banana Republic North America 596 576
Banana Republic Asia 48 45
Athleta North America 140 148
Intermix North America 38 38
Company-operated stores total 3,193 3,165
Franchised stores total 446 429
Grand total 3,636 3,594
Source: Based on company documents.
CASE 2 • THE GAP INC.—2018 399
the company moving forward is whether the company should continue to add store locations in
the United States, and if so, under which brand names? Historically, the family clothing business
is bimodal in nature, with bargain stores such as TJX Companies and Ross Stores doing well
during recessions and normal economic cycles and higher-end stores performing better during
more prosperous economic times. How well is the company’s strategy aligned to take advantage
of this bimodal situation? From the market bottom in 2002 to early 2018, the company’s stock
price rose about 220 percent compared to 760 and 2,100 percent for TJX and Ross, respectively.
Should Gap consider divesting possibly Banana Republic and adding a store similar to Ross or
TJX as a product-development strategy?
Production and Seasonality Gap purchases its products from approximately 800 venders in over 40 countries, with the largest
two venders both providing around 5 percent of purchases annually. The majority of purchases
are from factories outside the United States with around 50 percent of purchases coming equally
from Vietnam and China. The company’s sales peak around the Christmas holiday period.
Finance The company’s sales decreased about 2 percent in fiscal 2016 (year ending January 2017). The
bulk of the decline was from reduced net sales at Gap and Banana Republic, with exchange rate
losses only accounting for $20 million. However, more alarmingly, net income was down over
26 percent over the same time period due mostly to a substantial increase in operating expenses.
In fiscal 2015, total net sales declined $638 million. The company pays a $0.92 dividend and
plans to re-initiate its $1 billion share repurchase plan in fiscal 2017 (year ending January 2018).
Interesting use of the term “re-initiate” by The Gap Inc. as the firm listed $0 for treasury stock
on its balance sheets, but did record treasury stock in fiscal 2014. The firm has $1.25 billion in
long-term debt at a surprisingly high fixed rate of 5.95 percent through April 2021. From pur-
chasing Athleta and Intermix in recent years, Gap Inc. reports a nominal amount of goodwill on
the balance sheet.
The Gap’s income statements and balance sheets are provided in Exhibit 7 and Exhibit 8,
respectively, for fiscal 2016 and 2017. For fiscal 2017 that ended February 3, 2018, The Gap
Inc.’s revenues were $15.9 billion, up slightly from the prior year. The company ended fiscal
2017 with 3,594 store locations; among these were 3,165 company-operated as opposed to
being franchised.
EXHIBIT 7 Gap Inc.’s Income Statements (in millions $)
Income Statement 1/28/17 2/3/18 Percent Change
Revenues $15,516 $15,855 2.18%
Cost of Goods Sold 9,876 9,789 -0.88%
Gross Profit 5,640 6,066 7.55%
Operating Expenses 4,441 4,568 2.86%
EBIT 1,199 1,498 24.94%
Interest Expense 75 74 -1.33%
EBT 1,124 1,424 26.69%
Tax 448 576 28.57%
Non-Recurring Events 0 0 NA NA
Net Income 676 848 25.44%
Source: Based on company documents.
400 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Competitors
The family clothing business in the United States is highly fragmented, with over 20,000 busi-
nesses, ranging in size from a mom-and-pop to TJX, the largest based on total revenues. Profit
margins are slim, valued at $100 billion in annual sales, with profits slightly above $3 billion and
a growth rate of less than 2.5 percent. Top competitors in the industry include TJX Companies,
Ross Stores, L Brands, Gap, Cato, Stein Mart, and many more, including Walmart, Target,
Belk, Kenneth Cole, Abercrombie & Fitch, and J. C. Penney. Notable newcomers to the U.S.
market include H&M, based in Sweden and popular throughout Europe specializing in inexpen-
sive but quality clothing. Also, Zara, a fashionable clothing store with inexpensive prices based
in Spain, now has stores in the United States.
Exhibit 9 provides a financial comparison of some leading competitors in the family cloth-
ing industry. Exhibit 10 reveals the U.S. market share of family clothing stores—TJX, Ross, and
The Gap Inc., account for the largest revenues.
EXHIBIT 8 Gap Inc.’s Balance Sheets (in millions of $)
Balance Sheet 1/28/17 2/3/18 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Equivalents $1,783 $1,783 0%
Accounts Receivable 0 0 NA NA
Inventory 1,830 1,997 9%
Other Current Assets 702 788 12%
Total Current Assets 4,315 4,568 6%
Property Plant & Equipment 2,616 2,805 7%
Goodwill 0 0 NA NA
Intangibles 0 0 NA NA
Other Long-Term Assets 679 616 -9%
Total Assets 7,610 7,989 5%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 2,388 2,461 3%
Other Current Liabilities 65 0 -100%
Total Current Liabilities 2,453 2,461 0%
Long-Term Debt 1,248 1,249 0%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 1,005 1,135 13%
Total Liabilities 4,706 4,845 3%
Equity
Common Stock 20 19 -5%
Retained Earnings 2,749 3,081 12%
Treasury Stock 0 0 NA NA
Paid in Capital & Other 135 44 -67%
Total Equity 2,904 3,144 8%
Total Liabilities and Equity 7,610 7,989 5%
Source: Based on company documents.
CASE 2 • THE GAP INC.—2018 401
The TJX Companies (TJX) A treasure hunt in a department store? This is the experience that CEO Carol Meyrowitz of TJX
wants customers to have when they come into any of the company’s more than 3,200 stores
in United States, Canada, and Europe. TJX is a huge retail conglomerate of off-price brands,
including T.J. Maxx, Marshalls, and HomeGoods—with stores in all 50 states in the United
States, 10 provinces of Canada, United Kingdom, Ireland, Germany, Poland, and in Europe.
Approximately 75 percent of revenues are derived from the United States and approximately 25
percent of sales are derived from home goods. Headquartered in Framingham, Massachusetts,
TJX’s revenue increased to $33 billion in fiscal 2016 that ended January 28, 2017 up from $31
billion, while the company’s net income remained at $2.3 billion. Interestingly, net income
for TJX has been stable with no real growth in the last 4 years. In 3,812 stores, TJX has about
235,000 employees who often work “just a few doors down” from rival companies such as Ross
Stores, Stein Mart, Gap, and Cato. TJX’s largest customer group are women; the firm has a fe-
male CEO, the same as rival Gap Inc.
Ross Stores (ROST) Based in Dublin, California, Ross Stores is a discount clothing and home fashions store offering
products at prices generally 20 to 60 percent off typical retail department store prices. The firm’s
main slogan is Ross, Dress for Less. The company operates under two segments, 1) Ross, Dress
for Less and 2) dd’s Discounts, employs over 78,000, and reported revenues over $12.8 billion
in fiscal year end January 2017. In total, Ross operates over 1,412 stores in 37 states with prod-
uct offerings similar to TJX that include women’s clothing, lingerie, maternity clothing, shoes,
accessories, handbags, watches, jewelry, luggage, and more. Ross operates under a no-frills
EXHIBIT 9 A Financial Comparison of Gap Inc. with TJX and Ross (July 1, 2017 data)
The Gap Inc. TJx Ross
$ Market Cap. 13.4B 48.3B 30.6B
# Employees 135K 235K 79K
$ Revenue 15.5B 33.2B 12.8B
% Gross Margin 36.3% 30.0% 28.7%
$ Net Income 676M 2,247M 1,118M
EPS Ratio 2.17 3.70 3.13
P/E Ratio 15.88 20.60 25.60
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
EXHIBIT 10 U.S. Market Share Information for Family Clothing Companies
Gap Inc.
10%
Ross Stores
13%
TJX Companies
16%
Other
61%
U.S. Market Share
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
402 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
policy that extends to having no window displays, no mannequins or other fancy marketing and
advertising displays. The primary age groups for the store are 25 to 54 year olds. The company
increased its store count by 87 stores in the most recent fiscal year, amounting to a 6 percent
increase, which is in line with the increases in the last several years.
Online Consumers are increasingly shopping online for clothing through auctions and online-only
stores. Traditional retailers have virtually all responded with their own online websites, yet often
at the same high prices found in their stores. Brick and mortar stores still hold the distinct advan-
tage of customers being able to hold, feel, and try on items before purchasing, as well as talk to
knowledgeable salespeople at higher quality stores.
Twenty of the most popular online clothing stores that compete with Gap Inc. by offering
inexpensive clothing, mainly for women, are listed as follows:
1. Boohoo—a UK-based company; dresses start at $6; free shipping on orders over $60
2. Cotton On—an Australian retailer; dresses start at $10; free shipping on orders over $55
3. One Loved Babe—an online boutique for women; dresses start at $20; free shipping
4. Yes Style—a Hong Kong-based store; dresses start at $3.95, free shipping on orders over
$35
5. Amazon.com—Prime members get free shipping and returns
6. Missguided—a UK-based firm; dresses start at $6; shipping free is $5 on all orders
7. ASOS—very fast and reliable; dresses start at $12.50; free shipping on orders over $40
8. Adore Me—specializes in lingerie in straight and plus sizes; free shipping
9. Saved by the Dress—Miami-based; dresses start at $25; free shipping on orders over $60
10. Dog Dog—dresses start at $17.95; free shipping on all orders
11. Lulu’s—dresses start at $14; free shipping on orders over $50
12. Dress Up—boutiques; dresses start at $16; free shipping on orders over $50
13. Thred Up—a resale store carrying all brands like new; free shipping on orders over $79
14. Blame Betty—offers vintage or retro clothing; dresses start at $27.60; shipping costs vary
15. 6pm—carries many brands such as Columbia, Under Armour, Prana; for men and women
16. Nordstrom Rack—dresses start at $6.08; free shipping on orders over $90
17. Charming Charlie—dresses start at $19; free shipping on orders over $50
18. Old Navy—dresses start at $12; free shipping on orders over $50
19. Hollister—mainly for teens; dresses start at $20; free shipping on orders over $50
20. TJ Maxx—dresses start at $7.99; free shipping on orders over $89
External Issues
The family clothing business is very competitive as consumers increasingly have many options
and many mediums to buy products. Many customers have been trained to wait for sales result-
ing in lower inventory turnover times and reduced profit margins for retailers. Unlike many
industries such as automobiles, electronics, or restaurants, the retail clothing business is highly
seasonal in nature as styles, colors, and temperatures drastically affect stocking, allocating, and
marketing various merchandise. Customer tastes can change quickly as well, with one year’s
hot color or style of cut being less desired the next year. In the United States alone, family
clothing stores account for over $100 billion in revenue, but yield profits less than $5 billion
and a stagnate growth rate of around 1 percent. It is simply a tough business. Women’s clothing
accounts for 52 percent of industry revenues; men and children account for 28 and 20 percent,
respectively.
Reshoring Over the last 50 years, production of apparel (textile industry) moved from the northern United
States to the southern states, then to Mexico, and from there to places in Asia, such as China and
Vietnam. However, there is a growing trend, according to the Boston Consulting Group, to pro-
duce products domestically. Increasing transportation cost, government incentives, being closer
to the end consumer, increasing labor cost abroad, recent changes to tax laws, and just simply
being able to have “Made in the USA” on your product, is driving some firms to start production
CASE 2 • THE GAP INC.—2018 403
again in the United States. Several apparel firms who are now producing some of their brands in
the U.S. include Abercrombie & Fitch, J. Crew, and Ralph Lauren’s Club Monaco brand. Even
Nike, plagued by its operations in sweatshops in the past, is seriously considering reshoring
select products.
Expenses The family clothing store industry’s profit margin is less than 5 percent with purchases account-
ing for 60 percent of all expenses, putting further pressure on finding cheap sources of clothing
manufacturing. In 2017, over 80 percent of clothes sold in family clothing stores in the United
States were imported from overseas. Also, contributing to the higher purchasing percentage is
the price of cotton, which can vary wildly from year to year. Wages paid to store employees ac-
count for just over 10 percent of industry revenues and there are constant pressures to increase
wages. Rent and utilities account for 6 percent and advertising and marketing only account for 2
percent of revenues.
Clothing Materials Sustainability Many different materials are used to construct clothing. Cotton and linen are derived from
plants, whereas wool, leather, and cashmere are derived from animals; today there are a slew of
synthetic fibers such as polyester and spandex along with rayon, modal, and many others from
wood. Cotton cultivation can leave a substantial economic footprint as pest and weed control
measures, along with providing adequate water, are necessary to ensure growth. Two advantages
to cotton are old clothing can be recycled and used again; Additionally, cotton is a renewable
resource, or in other words, is able to be planted annually. Synthetic materials typically are
nonrenewable—being derived from petroleum by products and have much longer biodegrad-
able times than cotton. Cellulosic fibers from wood such as rayon and modal are often difficult
to trace where the wood products were derived from, and at times, wood pulp is derived from
endangered forests.
Future
In fiscal year 2018, The Gap Inc. plans to open about 25 additional company-operated stores,
net of closures and repositions, with particular emphasis on opening new Athleta and Old Navy
stores, with closing poorly performing Gap and Banana Republic stores. The company needs a
clear strategic plan to best manage its thousands of brick-and-mortar stores in the face of rapidly
increasing online preferences. The company hopes to maintain, or increase, its fiscal 2017 oper-
ating margin of 9.3 percent—compared with 7.7 percent the prior year. The company’s products
are available for purchase in more than 90 countries through company-owned, franchisee-
owned, and e-commerce sites. Prepare an effective three year strategic plan for The Gap Inc.
404 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.—2022
www.samsung.com
Headquartered in Seoul, South Korea, Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. (Samsung) was incorpo-
rated in 1969 and listed on the Korea Stock Exchange in 1975. Samsung is the largest South
Korean multinational conglomerate corporation and among the top 10 largest companies in the
world. Samsung and its subsidiaries are organized into four distinct business segments, groups,
or divisions, as follows:
1. Consumer Electronics (CE) includes digital TVs, monitors, air conditioners, refrigerators,
and medical equipment.
2. Information Technology & Mobile Communications (IM ) produces mobile phones,
communication systems, computers, network systems, smart computers, tablets, and
wearables.
3. Device Solutions (DS) has two divisions: 1) Semiconductor (SC), which produces DRAM,
NAND flash, and mobile applications, and 2) Display Panel (DP), which produces OLED
panels for smartphones, LCD panels for TVs, semiconductor products (“Semiconductor”)
such as memory, foundry, and system LSI, and display products (“DP”) such as LCD and
OLED panels.
4. Harman includes connected car systems and speakers, audio and visual products, and
enterprise automation solutions and services.
History
When it was founded in 1938 by Lee Byung-Chui in Ingyo-dong, Samsung was a trading com-
pany with 40 employees, but in the decades since then, the company diversified into food pro-
cessing, textiles, insurance, securities, and retail. However, the company’s big move was when
Samsung entered the electronics business in the late 1960s by forming Samsung Electronics
Devices, Samsung Electro-Mechanics, Samsung Corning, and Samsung Semiconductor &
Telecommunications. Some of Samsung recent product launches include the following:
2019—5G smartphone, Galaxy S10 5G
2019—Exynos 980, 5G mobile processor
2020—AI-technology-based Grande AI washer/dryer
2020—World’s first ultra-high-speed DRAM for AI and next-generation super computers
2020—Galaxy Z Flip, a foldable model with a new form factor
2020—Operation of Pyeongtaek Line 2, the world’s largest semiconductor line
Vision/Mission
Vision Statement In 2019, Samsung announced its “Semiconductor Vision 2030,” a vision to invest KRW 133
trillion up to 2030 in their system semiconductor business and to employ 15,000 persons. No
other vision statement could be located for Samsung either on their corporate website or in the
company’s Annual Report.
CASE 3 • SAMSuNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD.—2022 405
Mission Statement Samsung’s mission (adapted from content at the global corporate website) is to remain commit-
ted to following a global code of conduct by adhering to local laws and regulations and expecting
the best from employees. Samsung values ethics and strives to build trust and to aid in respond-
ing to a dynamic environment. Samsung knows that trust helps build relationships with custom-
ers, employees, business partners, and communities. The company is committed to improving
both its talent and products to make the world a better place to live.
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure Samsung has its corporate headquarters and 29 consolidated subsidiaries in South Korea.
Important Samsung locations include Suwon, Gumi, Gwangju, Giheung-gu, Hwaseong, and
Pyeongtaek. Samsung has 212 overseas subsidiaries for product manufacturing, sales, and re-
search and development (R&D), with locations in the United States, Europe/CIS, Middle East/
Africa and Asia. Among these operations, Samsung has 55 subsidiaries in North America, in-
cluding SEA (New Jersey, responsible for the sales of set products including TVs and HHPs),
SII (California, manufacturing TVs), SAS (Texas, manufacturing semiconductor products), and
Harman (Connecticut, automotive components).
In Europe and the Far East, Samsung has 75 subsidiaries, including SEUK (United
Kingdom), SEG (Germany), SEF (France), and SEI (Italy) for sales of set products; SEH
(Hungary) and SESK (Slovakia) for manufacturing TVs; and SEPM (Poland) for manufactur-
ing home appliances such as refrigerators. The company has 19 subsidiaries in the Middle East
and Africa for product manufacturing and sales. Additionally, the company has 30 subsidiar-
ies in Asia-Pacific (excluding China), including SAPL (Singapore), SEAU (Australia), SEPCO
(Philippines), and SME (Malaysia), which are responsible for regional sales. Samsung also op-
erates numerous production sites including SIEL (India) for HHPs and other products, SEV and
SEVT (Vietnam) for HHPs, SEHC (Vietnam) for TVs, and SDV (Vietnam) for DPs. Samsung
operates 33 subsidiaries in China, including SCIC (Beijing) and SEHK (Hong Kong) for the
sales of set products in those regions, and SSS (Shanghai) and SSCX (Xian) for semiconduc-
tors and DP sales. Production sites include SSEC (Suzhou) for set products and SCS (Xian) for
semiconductor production.
Samsung is organized utilizing a strategic business unit (SBU) design, the SBUs being the
four divisions of the company. Under each division, there are many affiliates and subsidiaries. As
indicated on pages 213–216 in Samsung’s 2020 Annual Report, the top 5 executives of Samsung
are as follows:
1. Ki-nam Kim CEO of DS Division
2. Hyun-suk Kim CEO of CE Division
3. Dong-jin Koh CEO of IM Division
4. Jong-hee Han Head of Visual Display (DP) Business
5. Jae-wan Bahk Chairman of the Board
Financial Data and Statements Samsung’s revenues increased 3 percent in 2020, with a net income increase of 21 percent,
making the firm one of the best performers in the world during that year. The global work-
from-home corporate environment created a need for digital products, and people had time
for home improvements as well. Industrywide, demand for many of these products declined
in early 2020, but a massive demand for work-from-home products such as PCs and tablets
emerged by the latter half of 2020. Exhibits 1 and 2 provide the latest income and balance
sheets for Samsung.
406 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 1 Samsung Income Statements (in millions of KRW)
Income Statement 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Revenues 230,400,881 236,806,988 3%
Cost of Goods Sold 147,239,549 144,488,296 –2%
Gross Profit 83,161,332 92,318,692 11%
Operating Expenses 55,392,823 56,324,816 2%
EBIT 27,768,509 35,993,876 30%
Interest Expense (2,663,680) (351,241) NA NA
EBT 30,432,189 36,345,117 19%
Tax 8,693,324 9,937,285 14%
Non-Recurring Events 0 0 NA NA
Net Income 21,738,865 26,407,832 21%
Source: Based on information in the 2020 Samsung Annual Report, p. 70.
Balance Sheet 12/31/19 12/31/19 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments 108,779,703 124,652,843 15%
Accounts Receivable 39,310,463 34,965,058 –11%
Inventory 26,766,464 32,043,145 20%
Other Current Assets 6,528,630 6,554,533 0%
Total Current Assets 181,385,260 198,215,579 9%
Property Plant & Equipment 119,825,474 128,952,892 8%
Goodwill 0 0 NA NA
Intangibles 20,703,504 18,468,502 –11%
Other Long-Term Assets 30,650,259 32,598,745 –6%
Total Assets 352,564,497 378,235,718 7%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 35,114,203 38,191,673 9%
Other Current Liabilities 28,668,561 37,412,678 31%
Total Current Liabilities 63,782,764 75,604,351 19%
Long-Term Debt 5,356,728 4,630,763 –14%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 20,544,584 22,052,588 7%
Total Liabilities 89,684,076 102,287,702 14%
Equity
Common Stock 778,047 778,047 0%
Retained Earnings 254,582,894 271,068,211 6%
Treasury Stock (4,968,829) (8,687,155) NA NA
Paid in Capital & Other 12,488,309 12,788,913 2%
Total Equity 262,880,421 275,948,016 5%
Total Liabilities and Equity 352,564,497 378,235,718 7%
EXHIBIT 2 Samsung Balance Sheets (in millions of KRW)
Source: Based on information in the 2020 Samsung Annual Report, p. 67.
CASE 3 • SAMSuNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD.—2022 407
R&D Information Samsung’s R&D expenditures are large and growing; specifically, in millions of Korean won,
these were KRW 18,662,029 in 2018, KRW 20,207,612 in 2019, and KRW 21,229,200 in
2020. As a percentage of total sales, these R&D expenditures were 7.7, 8.8, and 9.0 in 2018,
2019, and 2020, respectively. In 2020, Samsung invested KRW 21.2 trillion in R&D and reg-
istered 6,648 domestic patents and 8,520 U.S. patents. In its home country of South Korea,
Samsung operates three levels of R&D organizations: 1) a business unit development team
under each division that focuses on short-term product enhancements, 2) a research institute
under each business unit that develops mid- to long-term technology with a 3- to 5-year out-
look, and 3) the Samsung Advanced Institute of Technology, which develops core long-term
technology. (Pages 54–63 in Samsung’s 2020 Annual Report provide detailed information
about current R&D projects by segment of the company.)
Outside South Korea, Samsung operates R&D organizations in the United States (SRA),
China (SRC-Beijing, SRC-Nanjing, SRC-Guangzhou, SRC- Shenzhen, and SSCR), India (SRI-
Bangalore and SRI-Delhi), Bangladesh (SRBD), Israel (SRIL and SIRC), Russia (SRR), and
Japan (SRJ) to carry out research activities for product development and basic technological re-
search. Additionally, Samsung has established AI centers in Cambridge (UK), Moscow (Russia),
Toronto (Canada), Montreal (Canada), and New York (USA).
Human Resources Exhibit 3 provides the gender distribution for Samsung’s global workforce. Note that there are
nearly three times more men than women working for Samsung, and that the DS segment has
twice the employees as the CE segment with relatively the same revenue.
By-Segment Information As defined and described earlier, Samsung has four divisions: CE, IM, DS, and Harman. In 2020,
the CE Division’s output of image devices was 48.2 million units produced at sites in Mexico,
Vietnam, Brazil, and Hungary. The IM Division’s calendar 2020 output of HHPs was 249.2 mil-
lion units, with major production sites in Korea (Gumi), Vietnam, India, and Brazil. In 2020, the
DS Division’s memory output was 1.2 million units, produced at factories in Korea (Hwaseong
and Pyeongtaek) and China. The DP Division’s output of display panels in 2020 was 5.9 million
units, produced in Korea (Cheonan and Asan) and China. Lastly, the Harman Division’s digital
cockpit output was 6.11 million units.
In 2020, Samsung’s CE and IM capacity utilization rates were calculated as actual output rel-
ative to production capacity. The utilization rates were 93.6 percent for Image devices and 77.5
percent for HHPs. The DS Division operates memory and display panel production 24 hours a
day, in 3 shifts. Cumulative operating days, including holidays, were 366 days in 2020. The DS
capacity utilization rate was calculated as actual hours (operating days × number of production
lines × 24 hours) relative to production capacity. In 2020, Harman’s utilization rate was 65.3
percent, calculated as actual output relative to production capacity. Be mindful that companies
desire and strive for capacity utilization rates of 90 percent or above. This is analogous to com-
mercial airplanes and tractor trailer trucks; you want those items working and in motion, not idle
on runways or in parking lots.
EXHIBIT 3 A Breakdown of Samsung’s Workforce by Gender
Source: Based on information in Samsung’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 215.
Segment Gender
Male Female
CE 10,262 2,165
IM 19,762 7,144
DS 42,391 16,726
Others 8,159 2,271
Gender Total 80,575 28,306
408 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
CE Segment The CE division has nine regional headquarters and has been the global market leader in the
production of televisions for more than 15 years. Samsung continually produces new and
improved TVs in, for example, their 8K QLED and ultra-large product range. Samsung’s
global market share in the TV business has slowly increased from 29 percent in 2018, to
30.9 percent in 2019, to 31.9 percent in 2020. In 2020, Samsung introduced their 4K and
8K QLED TVs and new Lifestyle TVs such as The Premier and The Sero. In 2021, Samsung
plans to enhance their product lineup by launching 80″–110″ Neo QLED TVs featuring
significantly enhanced contrast and picture quality as well as MicroLED TVs for homes.
Samsung first received global market share in this segment in 2026. The firm continues to
strive for rapid growth through the strategy of offering differentiated design and focusing on
the premium market.
CE continues to grow demand for new and improved products, such as its ultra-large
QLED TVs featuring premium technology, Bespoke refrigerators tailored to experience-
oriented lifestyles, extra-large dryers, module-type air purifiers, and garment care appliances.
In the TV business, Samsung is developing innovative products such as 8K ultra-large TVs
and Neo QLEDs, which are full of new technologies such as Lifestyle TVs—The Premier in
120″–130″, The Frame, The Serif, and The Sero—which as the name suggests are designed for
different lifestyles. It also develops soundbars, outdoor signage, and gaming monitors.
In 2021, for QLED, Samsung planned to offer new models of enhanced Neo QLED TVs
and to launch MICRO LED TVs with top features in the 80″–110″ range. In addition, Samsung
plans to enhance its eco-friendly activities, including the use of eco packaging and solar-powered
remote controls.
Another major revenue generator in the CE division is Samsung’s digital appliance op-
erations. One of the market leaders in intelligent appliances, Samsung appliances can even
change colors to fit your mood and your style with Bespoke technology. Not only can appli-
ances be controlled remotely with sophisticated AI technology, but Samsung appliances can
also learn about users’ washing styles and suggest customized recommendations for efficiency
and effectiveness.
Samsung competes heavily in the healthcare segment, producing radiography, ultrasounds,
and even mobile CT equipment for medical providers worldwide. Focusing on mobility in equip-
ment, it seeks to enable virtually any suitable room in a hospital to be transformed into a suite ca-
pable of providing advanced images to healthcare professionals. An aging population in Europe
and the United States bodes well for medical products as both these regions have quality health-
care and patients that have the means to afford such care. The CE segment lags significantly
behind both the IM and DS segments in revenues, operating profits, and assets. The segment is
also not as efficient in the “operating profits/sales” measure.
IM Segment Samsung’s global market share in their IM Division’s key products has slowly decreased from
17.4 percent in 2018, to 17.5 percent in 2019, to 16.2 percent in 2020. However, the company
plans to spur growth of the smartphone market and deliver exceptional user experiences soon
by 1) offering innovative hardware features such as OLED technology, high-definition cam-
eras, biometric sensors, and battery charger technologies; 2) improving the software capabili-
ties of mobile payment service Samsung Pay and AI platform Bixby; and 3) investing in the
cloud, IoT, healthcare, AR, and VR. At the same time, Samsung plans to lead in the global
market shift to 5G.
In 2020, the smartphone portion of total phones sold was 76 percent, and the feature phone
portion of the total was 24 percent, driven by demand in developing nations. As the smartphone
market matures, the importance of applications such as UX, mobile payments, AI, and AR is
rising alongside that of competitive hardware, which includes high-performance AMOLED dis-
plays, foldable form factors, multiple cameras, sensors, waterproof and dustproof designs, and
biometric recognition.
In 2020, Samsung led the mobile technology trend by introducing the Galaxy Z Flip, which
folds from the top, and the Galaxy Z Fold 2. In addition, Samsung now offers the A Series and
offers new and innovative user experiences by leading the convergence of technologies such as
5G, AI, and IoT. Samsung plans to provide a more colorful and easy-to-use mobile experience
CASE 3 • SAMSuNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD.—2022 409
for smartphone users through services such as Samsung Pay, Samsung Health, and SmartThings
and via connections with premium tablets including the Galaxy Tab S, wearable devices such as
smartwatches, Wi-Fi Bluetooth earphones, and other accessories.
The Samsung IM segment is likely what many consumers think of first when they hear
the brand’s name. As of 2021, Samsung has annual sales of over 400 million mobile phones
across the globe. Notable products include the Galaxy, Knox, and Bixby, in addition to
tablets and PCs and wearables. PCs are making a comeback as remote work is becoming
more accepted and common around the world. Samsung also produces simpler smartphones
and non-smart phones to better serve a global marketplace as mentioned previously. In
fact, industrywide, non-smart phones are projected to continue to outpace smartphone sales
through 2025.
To support both mobile devices and other smart devices, within the DS segment Samsung
is aggressively producing chips and devices, including modems and other equipment that
work with all products, but particularly well with Samsung products. While these products
are not mainstream yet, Samsung is heavily investing in R&D to introduce these products in
the United States, South Korea, and Japan. In 2019, Samsung secured a major 5G contract
in the United States.
DS Segment As stated earlier, Samsung’s DS Division includes the company’s Semiconductor (SC) and
Display Panel (DP) businesses. Samsung’s global market share in the SC business has slowly
declined from 43.9 percent in 2018, to 43.7 percent in 2019, to 43.1 percent in 2020. Its global
market share of smartphone panels within its DP business has declined overall, from 47.6 percent
in 2018, to 43.6 percent in 2019, to 43.8 percent in 2020.
Samsung’s SC business is divided into Memory (storage) and System LSI (logical process-
ing). Samsung’s memory SC business is further divided into RAM products and ROM products.
RAM is called volatile memory, as the information is deleted when the power is turned off. It is
used for temporary loading and storage of application programs. ROM is nonvolatile and holds
memory even when power is removed; it is used in input/output systems, IC cards, and other
components. For System LSI products, there are many categories for various applications, with
central processing units (CPUs) for PCs, mobile devices, and servers forming the largest market.
System LSI products have a wide range of applications, such as household electronics, networks,
and games. Samsung manufactures image sensors as well as mobile APs for smartphones and
tablets. As part of the company’s SC operations, the Foundry Business makes customized semi-
conductors for other companies based on customer designs. In other words, companies consign
the manufacturing of their products to fabrication plants, also called foundries or fabs. The num-
ber of fabless semiconductor companies is growing.
Samsung’s mobile DP panel business’s differentiated technology is a main factor behind the
increased adoption of OLED panels, supported by its release of new products such as foldable
devices, rollable devices, and automotive components. Samsung today is focusing on the large
panel business and premium products such as high-definition, ultra-large QD TVs and is enhanc-
ing its competitiveness through continuous improvements in technology and productivity.
As the first to secure core technology in next-generation DRAM development and to achieve
a breakthrough in advanced node processes, Samsung is the only player in the industry to mass-
produce products based on extreme ultraviolet (EUV) lithography. Samsung is conducting full-
fledged migration to 6th-generation V-NAND while actively addressing mobile and laptop SSD
demand. Foundry demand is expected to remain strong in 2021–2023 due to competition be-
tween fabless customers and growing demand for data centers and PCs.
In 2021, amid accelerating penetration of 5G smartphones, Samsung plans to improve the
basic features of OLED panels as smartphone makers increasingly favor power efficiency and
ultra-thin design. Samsung plans to offer increased accessibility of foldable products.
Harman Segment Acquired in 2017, Samsung’s Harman division is a global leader in the market for connected car
systems, audio and visual products, professional solutions, and connected services. Samsung’s
global market share of digital cockpits has increased from 18.8 percent in 2018, to 24.8 percent
in 2019, to 27.5 percent in 2020.
410 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 4 Samsung’s Financials by Product (in 100 million KRW)
Source: Based on Samsung’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 36.
2018 2019 2020
Segment
Sales 426,498 453,228 481,733
CE Operating Profits 19,073 25,090 35,615
Total Assets 492,302 680,244 602,487
IM Sales 1,006,777 1,072,662 995,875
Operating Profits 101,720 92,725 114,727
Total Assets 1,243,340 1,432,804 1,682,692
DS
SC Sales 862,910 649,391 728,578
Operating Profits 445,739 140,163 188,050
Total Assets 1,515,782 1,791,177 1,863,977
DP Sales 324,650 310,539 305,857
Operating Profits 26,198 15,813 22,369
Total Assets 641,543 642,264 661,929
Total DS Sales 1,185,658 955,180 1,030,361
Operating Profits DS 465,164 155,817 211,202
Total DS Assets 2,425,593 2,451,438 2,741,270
Harman Sales 88,437 100,771 91,837
Operating Profits 1,617 3,223 555
Total Assets 150,599 156,091 147,020
The Harman division’s revenue and operating profit in 2020 declined year-over-year as
COVID-19 weakened demand from automotive companies and consumers. Revenue decreased
by KRW 893.3 billion (8.9 percent) to KRW 9.2 trillion and profitability decreased by KRW
266.8 billion (82.8 percent) to KRW 55.5 billion. The Harman segment is working hard to en-
hance its mobile, IT, display, and AI as well as the variety of its brands and product groups.
Samsung is spearheading technology innovations such as the world’s first 5G telematics control
unit (TCU). In the consumer audio market, Harman’s portable Bluetooth speakers and earphones
have achieved the highest market share for several years based on brand reputation, leading the
consumer audio market.
Exhibit 4 provides a summary of Samsung’s financial data by segment. Note decreas-
ing sales in the IM, DS, and DP segments, implying need for a clear strategic plan going
forward.
Samsung’s sales, operating profit, and total assets by segment are provided in Exhibit 4.
Note the increases in total assets in every category for 2020 except Harman. In 2020, CE re-
ported net sales of KRW 48.1 trillion (20.3 percent of total net sales) and IM reported net sales
of KRW 99.58 trillion (42.1 percent). DS contributed about 43.5 percent of net sales: KRW
72.85 trillion (30.8 percent) by the semiconductor sub-division and KRW 30.58 trillion (12.9
percent) by the DP Business Unit. The Harman Division reported net sales of KRW 9.18 tril-
lion (3.9 percent); this segment is the least efficient of all when dividing operating sales by
revenues.
CASE 3 • SAMSuNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD.—2022 411
Competitors and External Issues As a conglomerate, Samsung must contend with rivals that specialize in the various industries
that Samsung competes in. For example, in smartphones, Samsung competes with Apple, which
focuses almost entirely on PCs, phones, tablets, and wearables. In semiconductors, Samsung
competes with the best, such as Intel, which specializes only in semiconductors. Is being diversi-
fied a good strategic strategy for Samsung?
Phones, PCs, Tablets, and Wearables Samsung competes with many players in this industry, including household names such as
Apple, Lenovo, and Dell. Exhibit 6 reveals trends from 2020 to 2025 and expected sales in
units sold worldwide. Note the strong demand for mobile phones that are not classified as
smartphones; this demand is expected to continue up to 2025, but some estimates suggest
the profit margin is higher on smartphones than traditional phones. While many people own
wearables, wearables are not included in Exhibit 6 because sales volume is significantly
lower than the other four categories. PC sales are expected to increase due to more work at
home and remote working arrangements as well as the release of new video-conferencing
solutions.
EXHIBIT 5 Samsung’s Sales by Region (in 100 million KRW)
1 6 8 ,2
1 3
4 6 4 ,1
2 4
1 9 2 ,7
8 3
3 3 0 ,9
0 3
5 4 7 ,7
9 6
4 3 7 ,4
3 4
1 9 1 ,9
7 0
3 2 9 ,7
0 5
3 8 5 ,6
1 1
4 7 6 ,7
6 8
2 3 5 ,0
1 2 3
1 5 ,5
9 8
4 3 7 ,4
0 3
0
100,000
200,000
300,000
400,000
500,000
600,000
South Korea Americas Europe Asia and
Africa
China
2 0 3 ,0
0 9
1 9 8 ,3
3 1
2018 2019 2020
Source: Based on Samsung’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 44.
Exhibit 5 provides a summary of Samsung’s sales by region. Note the reduction in sales from
2018 in China and in the Asia and Africa region. It is important to observe and consider just how
strong a grip Samsung has on its home market of South Korea based on total sales and on the
potential for expansion in the United States and Europe in particular. South Korea had a popula-
tion in 2020 of about 51 million, compared to 330 million for the United States and 770 million
for Europe. Despite Europe having 15 times the population as South Korea, sales in this region
were only 19 percent greater in 2020 than Samsung’s home country sales.
412 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Medical Equipment A 4 percent annual growth in medical equipment is expected up to 2026, but prices are only
expected to rise marginally in developed economies, yielding a similarly marginal increase
in industry-wide profits. In addition, the pressure to maintain increased sales has resulted
in downward pressure on per-unit cost, also cutting into profit margins. Cardiovascular, ir-
radiation, recovery, and neuromodulation devices are the most common, accounting for 23,
21, and 10 percent of all devices in use. The industry is fragmented in the U.S. market, with
Medtronic accounting for 28 percent of the market share and Abbot Laboratories and GE ac-
counting for 10 percent each. The other estimated 1,000 businesses compete for the remain-
ing 50 percent of the market share. Similar fragmentation is present in the global market.
Appliances The appliance market has a profit margin of over 7 percent and over 150 businesses com-
peting globally. Large firms in the industry are Whirlpool, Haier, and Electrolux, with over
60 percent of the market share in the U.S. market. However, annual growth worldwide is
expected to be less than 3 percent up to 2026. Cooking appliances account for 28 percent of
sales, refrigerators and freezers account for 25 percent, and laundry equipment accounts for
about 21 percent. A successful marketing campaign on the benefits of owning a dryer could
possibly increase laundry equipment’s market share. All other appliances account for the
remaining market share. Many firms have yet to catch up with the trend of home appliances
having smart applications. Products that have smart capabilities also have higher profit mar-
gins, and industry players are hoping that they can convince customers to make the switch.
The trend of energy-efficient appliances has come at the expense of quality, with many new
customers frustrated at products that in many cases do not work well, which increases op-
portunities for R&D and firms to produce smart, energy-efficient appliances that do work as
well as older models.
Audio Equipment Samsung’s Harman division has two segments: consumer audio and professional audio.
Consumer audio (smart audio, headphones, connected audio solutions, etc.) has just a few major
competitors, such as Amazon, Apple, Beats, Bose, and Ultimate Ears. Smartphone manufactur-
ers dominate market share in Bluetooth headsets, and the market is expected to grow rapidly
for the next decade. The professional audio industry (commercial audio, audio for large venues,
lighting, and video and control solutions) is led by QSC and Yamaha. In the connected systems
business within the automotive industry, competition is fierce among rival firms, which include
Alpine, Aptiv, Continental, Mitsubishi, Panasonic, and Visteon. There are several major competi-
tors in car audio systems, including Bose, Pioneer, and Panasonic.
EXHIBIT 6 Global Sales of Smart Devices (in millions of units sold)
Mobile Phones
2,000
1,500
1,000
500
0
2,500
Smart Phones Personal
Computers
2015 2020 2025
Tablets
Source: Based on information from S&P NetAdvantage and www.statista.com/statistics/671053/ smart-devices-unit-sales-worldwide/.
CASE 3 • SAMSuNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD.—2022 413
Intel
$70
$60
$50
$40
$30
$20
$10
$0
$80
Samsung TSMC SK Hynix Micron
EXHIBIT 7 Largest Semiconductor Firms in 2020 (Annual Sales in billions of USD)
Source: Based on information from S&P NetAdvantage and www.zippia.com/advice/ largest-semiconductor-companies-world.
Semiconductors The semiconductor business is expected to report sales worth over $500 billion annually in 2022
and beyond, with 35 percent of sales in China and over $140 billion in sales to support mobile
phones. Expected sales of cars with embedded systems are expected to grow over 20 percent
in 2022. Semiconductor sales grew 14 percent alone during 2020. The largest semiconductor
competitors as of early 2021 by market capitulation were Intel, Samsung, TSMC, SK Hynix, and
Micron. SK Hynix is a large competitor for Samsung based in its home market of South Korea.
Six of the top 10 semiconductor firms based on market cap are in the United States, with only
one firm in the top 10, Infineon, located in Europe. Exhibit 7 reveals the top 5 semiconductor
firms based on market capitalization.
In 2020, the price of wafers for semiconductor disks declined about 2 percent, while prices
of tempered glass windows increased about 1 percent. As per the Semiconductor (SC) part of
DS, the demand for DRAM grew about 22 percent in 2020, led by server application products. In
2021, the market is expected to expand by another 15 percent thanks to the acceleration of digital
transformation, mainly from contactless businesses. Smartphone and datacenter server demand
is also expected to increase as the economy recovers. The SC business’s 2020 revenue increased
by KRW 7.9 trillion (12.2 percent) from the previous year to KRW 72.85 trillion due to strong
server and mobile demand. Operating profit increased by KRW 4.78 trillion (34.2 percent) to
KRW 18.80 trillion year-over-year.
Samsung is the only firm in the memory semiconductor industry using the EUV lithography
process in the mass production of memory semiconductors, as mentioned above. In the foundry
business, demand continues to be strong as smartphone manufacturers look to benefit from U.S.
sanctions against Huawei.
Active-matrix technology is most commonly used in displays (that is, screens in electronic
devices), including organic light-emitting diode (OLED) panels and thin film transistor liquid
crystal display (TFT-LCD). OLED panels use organic materials, which offer sharp contrast and
color, high color gamut, and fast response rates. A TFT-LCD panel is a liquid crystal-based
display that features a thinner and lighter profile while offering high resolution. The market for
smartphone OLED panels in 2021 is expected to be around 600 million units and is forecast to
continue expanding with the growth of 5G smartphone demand.
Conclusion Strategy Considerations With Samsung producing many different products in its segments, it is important to consider
when developing a strategic plan how the firm should allocate both its monetary and human
capital resources across product lines and regions. Factors to consider should include expansion
414 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
as well as divesture of certain segments to free up resources for more profitable segments. Can
Samsung continue to compete with homogeneous firms that only focus on medical equipment
or appliances? Even if Samsung could compete here, would the firm be more profitable if it ex-
panded its smartphones and TV production and reduced R&D on appliances? Should Samsung
continue to cater to both the high-end market and the lower-end markets on phones? Does
producing lower-end phones lower the perceived brand quality of higher-end phones? Should
Samsung continue to cater to both a commercial and a retail market?
A careful analysis of the competitors and available opportunities within segments is needed
along with that of Samsung’s strengths and weaknesses to plot a strategy for the company.
Remember, your job is not to describe what Samsung is currently doing or what Samsung plans
to do based on reading press releases or the company’s Annual Report, but instead is to imagine
that you have been hired by Samsung to develop and provide a 3-year strategic plan. Samsung’s
upper management, and in this case your classmates and professor, are looking for you (or pay-
ing you a high fee if actually hired by Samsung) to recommend what you feel is the best direction
for the firm based on your strategic management research, knowledge, and expertise.
Consumers globally are becoming increasingly price-sensitive but also demanding perfec-
tion in the devices they buy. People are also willing to pay a premium for quality and brand
awareness. These trends, coupled with increased competition from rival firms in many industries,
call for a comprehensive Samsung strategic plan to be developed. Recall from the case that
Samsung is a conglomerate doing business in multiple industries against firms that often spe-
cialize in the industry they compete in. Conglomerates were very popular in the 1960s but have
increasingly become rare with a few exceptions, such as Samsung, Walt Disney, and 3M. Does
Samsung need to “stick with the knitting” to be successful today, or in other words, should it be
doing one thing really well, offering the best value to consumers, rather than striving to be an
expert in everything?
Prepare a clear 3-year strategic plan for Samsung indicating the direction you think will be
most advantageous for management. Consider a new mission statement if needed as well as new
strategies that provide guidance regarding which divisions should be strengthened and which
divisions, if any, should possibly be divested. Deciding how to allocate resources across seg-
ments is a difficult but major challenge—and the job of a strategist. Prepare projected financial
statements, if at all possible, to show your expectations regarding the financial impact of your
proposed strategies.
References
1. Deloitte, Samsung 2020 Annual Reports, https://www.samsung.com/global/ir/financial-information/
audited-financial-statements.
2. Flynn, Jack, “10 Largest Semiconductor Companies in the World,” Zippia, October 17, 2021,
https://www.zippia.com/advice/largest-semiconductor-companies-world/.
3. “Smart Devices Unit Sales Worldwide 2013–2020,” Statista, https://www.statista.com/
statistics/671053/smart-devices-unit-sales-worldwide/.
CASE 4 • LENOVO GROuP LIMITED—2022 415
Lenovo Group Limited—2022
www.lenovo.com
Lenovo Group Limited (Lenovo) (HKSE: 992) (ADR: LNVGY) is a Chinese multinational tech-
nology firm that has global headquarters in Beijing, China, operational headquarters in Morrisville,
North Carolina, in the United States, and an operational center in Singapore. Lenovo is the world’s
largest personal computer (PC) manufacturer and is a major producer of laptops, tablet computers,
smartphones, workstations, peripherals, printers, scanners, servers, supercomputers, IT manage-
ment software, storage devices, modems, routers, wearables, and smart televisions.
Lenovo’s brand name products include the Legion, ThinkPad, ThinkBook, IdeaPad, Yoga,
IdeaCentre, ThinkCentre, ThinkStation, ThinkVision displays, ThinkServer, ThinkSystem, and
numerous other items such as Motorola Razr smartphones. With operations in over 60 countries
and revenue derived from about 180, Lenovo has research centers in Beijing, Chengdu, Yamato
(Kanagawa Prefecture, Japan), Shanghai, Shenzhen, and Morrisville (North Carolina, USA).
Lenovo has the leading market share (about 27 percent) of all PCs sold in the world. Lenovo’s
fiscal year (2021) at the time of writing ended March 31, 2021.
History
Lenovo was founded by Liu Chuanzhi along with a group of engineers in Beijing in 1984.
Computers were not the company’s original business; under the name Legend, it originally spe-
cialized in televisions. The business was incorporated in Hong Kong in 1988, but it gained the in-
ternational spotlight when it acquired IBM’s PC business in 2005 and then its Intel-based server
business in 2014. Lenovo entered the smartphone market in 2012, and by 2014 it was the largest
supplier of smartphones in mainland China. Lenovo acquired Motorola Mobility from Google in
2014 and in 2017 acquired Fujitsu’s personal computer business.
For calendar 2020, Lenovo reported revenue of $60.7 billion, up 19.8 percent year-over-year,
and net income of $1.2 billion, up 77 percent. The company’s services, software, and solutions
accounted for 8 percent of the total revenue and was growing twice as fast as the company’s
overall sales of hardware and software products.
Vision/Mission
A $60-billion-revenue Fortune Global 500 company, Lenovo’s vision describes its goal as helping
to create a diverse, honest, sustainable “digital society” through innovative, leading technology for
customers globally, “powering” them through devices and infrastructure and “empowering” them
through solutions, services, and software.
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure A few acronyms to be aware of as you read this case are as follows:
IDG (Intelligent Devices Group)
ISG (Infrastructure Solutions Group)
SSG (Solutions and Services Group)
PCSD (Personal Computer and Smart Device)
DCG (Data Center Group)
MBG (Mobile Business Group)
HPC (High Performance Computing)
AI (Artificial Intelligence)
416 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
SDI (Software-Defined Infrastructure)
CSP (Cloud Service Provider)
LA (Latin America)
NA (North America).
For the 2021 fiscal year, MBG achieved its highest market shares ever in LA and NA, while
DCG maintained is leading position globally in HPC and AI. In April 2021, Lenovo reorganized
itself into three strategic business units (SBUs) to better deliver on the company’s 3S Strategy
(Smart IoT, Smart Infrastructure, Smart Solutions). Previously, there were only 2 groups (IDG
and ISG). Specifically, the three SBU groups today are
1. IDG (Intelligent Devices Group), which produces various smart devices and IoT, and includes
PCSD and MBG. The products include the ThinkPad X1 Laptop, ThinkPad P17 Workstation,
ThinkStation 340, the Motorola Razr and Edge smartphones, modems, routers, and wearables.
2. ISG (Infrastructure Solutions Group, renamed from DCG, Data Center Group), which produces
Smart Infrastructure.
3. SSG (Solutions and Services Group), which produces Smart Verticals & Services, designed to spur
business across verticals, attached services, and managed services, including DaaS and Truscale.
Lenovo’s top executives are listed and arrayed in Exhibit 1.
Financial Data On May 27, 2021, soon after reporting a fantastic full fiscal year and Q4 financial results,
Lenovo’s board of directors declared a dividend of 3.09 U.S. cents or 24 HK cents per share for
the fiscal year ended March 31, 2021. Some of the fiscal 2021 full company results reported in
May 2021 are as follows:
• Overall company revenue spiked to $60 billion, up more than $10 billion, or 20 percent
from the prior year.
EXHIBIT 1 Lenovo’s Top Management Team
2 3
6 10 11
4 5 7 8 9 12 13
The Executive Executives’ Titles
1
1. Yang Yuanqing
3. Gao Lan
4. He Zhiqiana
Chairman and CEO
COO
Senior Vice President for HR
Senior Vice President and President of Lenovo Capital & Incubator
5. Yong Rui
6. Kirk Skaugen
7. Liu Jun
8. Qiao Jian
Senior Vice President and Chief Technology Officer
Executive Vice President and President of the Infrastructure Solutions Group
Executive Vice President and President of the China Geography
Senior Vice President, Chief Strategy Officer, Chief Marketing Officer
9. Laura Quatela
10. Luca Rossi
11. Ken Wong
12. Wong Wai Ming
Senior Vice President and Chief Legal Officer
Senior Vice President and President of the Intelligent Devices Group
Senior Vice President and President of the Solutions & Services Group
Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
13. Matthew Zielinski Senior Vice President and President of the International Sales
2. Gianfranco Landci
Source: Based on Lenovo’s 2021 Annual Report, pp. 12–13 and pp. 147–148.
CASE 4 • LENOVO GROuP LIMITED—2022 417
• The company’s IDG (PCSD and MBG) and DCG achieved revenue growth of 20 percent
and 15 percent, respectively. • The company’s transformation to services is accelerating. Software and services revenue
grew twice as fast as the company’s total revenue, up almost 40 percent year-over-year to a
record $4.9 billion; services now comprise 8 percent of Lenovo’s total revenue.
For Lenovo’s Q4 that ended March 31, 2021, the financial results included the following:
• It was the best Q4 ever for Lenovo’s PC and Smart Devices (PCSD), which reported
$12.4 billion in revenue, up 46 percent, and profitability at an all-time high at 6.7 percent. • All regions reported over 15 percent growth in PCSD revenue; PC volume outgrew the
market, further strengthening the company’s global no. 1 ranking in PCs. • Lenovo tablets shipments grew 157 percent, three times as fast as the market. • Lenovo’s Gaming, Thin & Light, Chromebooks, and Visuals revenues continue to outgrow
the market and report double- and triple-digit growth rates. • Revenues from the MBG jumped 86 percent year-over-year to $1.54 billion—with pre-tax
income of $21 million—a record high since the Motorola acquisition. • Smartphone volumes grew by over 100 percent in North America, Europe, and Asia Pacific. • Smartphone market share in Latin America reached a record of nearly 21 percent. • Revenues from the firm’s DCG grew 32 percent to $1.6 billion. • The firm’s cloud service provider business grew 73 percent year-on-year. • The firm’s Server, Storage, Software Defined Infrastructure, Software, and HPC/AI
reported record high Q4 revenue; traditional storage revenues increased a whopping
73 percent year-over-year. • The firm’s services and software revenue increased 44 percent year-on-year. • The firm’s Managed Services revenue (DaaS, TruScale) nearly doubled, and Solutions
revenue grew 65 percent year-over-year.
Fiscal 2021 ended with Lenovo’s cash and cash equivalents totaling $3.12 billion, broken
down as follows: U.S. dollar (34.9 percent), Renminbi (25.7 percent), Japanese yen (11.3 percent),
euro (5.5 percent), British pound (1.4 percent), and other currencies (21.2 percent). Lenovo has all
of its cash held in bank deposits; it conservatively does not invest in liquid money market funds.
Lenovo’s recent income statements and balance sheets are provided in Exhibit 2 and
Exhibit 3 respectively. Note dramatic increases across the board, including long-term debt that
increased $1.7 billion.
By-Segment Data For fiscal 2021, Lenovo’s IDG Group reported a 20 percent increase in revenue to $54 billion and
a 35 percent increase in IDG profits to $3.1 billion. Within IDG, PCSD remained the largest PC
supplier globally, and MBG set new records for sales in LA and NA. PCSD revenue increased
EXHIBIT 2 Lenovo’s Income Statements (in thousands of USD)
Source: Based on information in the 2021 Lenovo Annual Report, p. 174.
Income Statement 3/31/20 3/31/21 Percent Change
Revenues $50,716,349 $60,742,312 20%
Cost of Goods Sold 42,359,045 50,974,425 20%
Gross Profit 8,357,304 9,767,887 17%
Operating Expenses 6,918,708 7,587,481 10%
EBIT 1,438,596 2,180,406 52%
Interest Expense 420,889 406,209 –3%
EBT 1,017,707 1,774,197 74%
Tax 213,204 461,198 116%
Non-Recurring Events 0 0 NA NA
Net Income 804,503 1,312,999 63%
418 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 3 Lenovo’s Balance Sheets (in thousands of USD)
Source: Based on information in the 2021 Lenovo Annual Report, pp. 176–177.
Balance Sheet 3/31/20 3/31/21 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments $3,617,470 $3,127,770 –14%
Accounts Receivable 9,833,780 13,454,265 37%
Inventory 4,946,914 6,380,576 29%
Other Current Assets 335,277 372,741 11%
Total Current Assets 18,733,441 23,335,352 25%
Property Plant & Equipment 1,398,440 1,573,875 13%
Goodwill 0 0 NA NA
Intangibles 7,984,582 8,405,005 5%
Other Long-Term Assets 4,011,704 4,676,399 17%
Total Assets 32,128,167 37,990,631 18%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 18,712,783 25,195,302 35%
Other Current Liabilities 4,545,338 2,176,335 –52%
Total Current Liabilities 23,258,121 27,371,637 18%
Long-Term Debt 1,564,619 3,299,582 111%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 3,246,132 3,708,879 14%
Total Liabilities 28,068,872 34,380,098 22%
Equity
Common Stock 0 0 NA NA
Retained Earnings 3,197,542 3,559,036 11%
Treasury Stock 993,670 0 –100%
Paid in Capital & Other (131,917) 51,497 –139%
Total Equity 4,059,295 3,610,533 –11%
Total Liabilities and Equity 32,128,167 37,990,631 18%
22 percent to $48 billion. Given a booming e-learning industry in 2020–2021, partly due to COVID-19,
the IDG Group reported a 219 percent increase in its Chromebook revenue. The company’s Smart IoT
revenues grew 43 percent in fiscal 2020–2021, led by Smart Verticals such as Smart Health Care in
North America, Smart Education, and Smart City in China.
For fiscal 2021, Lenovo’s DCG Group (now called ISG) reported its highest-ever revenue
of $6.3 billion, up 15 percent from the prior year and comprising 10 percent of total company
revenues. Especially strong contributors to the DCG results were its CSP, ESMB, SDI, and HPC/
AI businesses. Specifically within DCG, HPC/AI maintained its no. 1 position in the global Top
500 Supercomputer list.
At the end of fiscal 2021, SSG was formed to focus on Attached Services, Managed Services
such as as-a-service offerings, and Project and Vertical Solutions. These products are tailored
to financial services companies, large food retailers and distributors, sporting events, and other
technology companies.
Exhibit 4 provides Lenovo’s revenue percentage by SBU group. Note the increases in IDG-
PCSD and IDG-OTHERS alongside decreases in IDG-MBG and DCG.
CASE 4 • LENOVO GROuP LIMITED—2022 419
EXHIBIT 6 Lenovo’s Revenues by Group (in thousands of USD)
Source: Based on Lenovo’s 2021 Annual Report, p. 51.
Group 2020 2021
IDG 45,216,190 54,411,212
DCG 5,500,159 6,331,100
Total 50,716,349 60,742,312
EXHIBIT 5 Lenovo’s Revenue % Contribution by Region, 2021 vs. 2020 (Revenues in millions of USD)
Source: Based on Lenovo’s 2021 Annual Report, p. 5.
Group 2020 2021
TOTAL REVENUES 50,716 60,742
China 21 24
Asia/Pacific 22 19
EMEA 25 26
AG 32 31
EXHIBIT 4 Lenovo’s Revenue % Contribution by SBU Group, 2021 vs. 2020 (Revenues in millions of USD)
Source: Based on Lenovo’s 2021 Annual Report, p. 5.
Group 2020 2021
TOTAL REVENUES 50,716 60,742
IDG-PCSD 79 80
IDG-MBG 10 09
IDG-OTHERS 00 01
DCG 11 10
Exhibit 5 provides data regarding Lenovo’s percent revenue contribution by region. For fis-
cal 2021, Lenovo reported a 31 percent revenue increase from China and double-digit growth in
North America across all three business groups.
Exhibit 6 provides actual dollar amounts of revenues by segment for the company. Note in
Exhibit 4 that for 2021, IDG reported a revenue increase of 20 percent from the prior year to
$54 billion, while profit grew 35 percent to $3.1 billion.
External Issues
In Q1 of 2021, sales of PCs and tablets skyrocketed. Global shipments of traditional PCs, in-
cluding desktops, notebooks, and workstations, grew 55.9 percent compared to Q1 2020, with
84.3 million units shipped. Tablets especially were in high demand, with a 55.4 percent growth
and shipments totaling 39.9 million units; Chromebook shipments totaled 13.2 million units in
Q1 of 2021. High demand was accompanied, however, by increases in average selling prices due
to fast growth in videogaming and advanced touchscreens within the education segment. Some
analysts predicted an increase in demand for tablets of 12 percent in 2021 after the 13.6 percent
increase the prior year.
420 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
All three major segments in the PC market (consumer, education, and commercial) are low
on inventory, especially the consumer segment. Thousands of customers are settling for desktops
due to the unavailability of notebooks, including governments and corporate customers. It should
be noted here that the rising popularity of Chromebooks is quickly eroding demand for tablets in
markets such as the United States, Western Europe, and more recently, Japan. As lockdowns due
to COVID-19 wane, however, it is expected that consumers will travel more and demand for all
PC variants will level off instead of continuing their robust rise.
People are spending more time using devices, buying more devices, and upgrading their
devices. There is pent-up demand following the pandemic. Even 6-year-old children today wear
smart watches and use them to interact constantly with their parents and the world around them.
There are numerous key technologies driving the device innovation agenda: people want to
look better in video calls with computational photography technology, they want to hear better
through microphones with AI-based active noise cancellation, and they want to see better with
low blue light flicker-free screens to reduce eye strain. To meet these changing consumer desires,
Lenovo is enhancing its ThinkBook Plus Gen 2, ThinkReality A3 smart glasses, Yoga AIO 7, and
many other related products.
One of today’s consumer trends is faster infrastructure upgrades and purchases of devices
that offer not just hardware but also solutions anchored by AI. Hundreds of smart devices are
being developed and purchased, ranging from smart medical devices and machine tools to smart
home, car, and work systems. Data increasingly needs to be stored, organized, and analyzed for
machine learning, and this requires more computing power, which requires high-speed networks
like 5G and 6G and fiber-optic advancements to avoid “traffic jams” when too much data gets
transmitted between client and cloud.
In the Lenovo 2021 Annual Report on pages 24–35, the company details numerous external risk
factors that include issues related to COVID-19, cyberattacks, new competitors, existing competitors,
economic factors, political and regulatory uncertainty, privacy concerns, employee diversity and wel-
fare concerns, intellectual property risks, supply chain concerns, climate change, corruption issues,
and pollution problems. Lenovo has received numerous awards for being a great place to work, as
detailed on page 43–45 in their 2020–2021 Annual Report. The company has been recognized by
Corporate Knights as one of the 100 most sustainable corporations in the world.
The demand for 5G advancements and for wearables is expected to increase 6 percent in
2021 and 5 percent in 2022. Upgrades to expect are a new 5G modem chip from Qualcomm,
better battery life, and a faster A15 processor from Taiwan Semiconductor. The iPhone 13 is
expected soon, and iPhone units sold are estimated to increase 25 percent in fiscal year 2021
over the prior year, followed by a 4 percent increase in 2022. Among all phones, smartphones
now comprise about 82 percent, up from 80 percent in 2020. Some analysts project an 18- to
20- percent increase in PC shipments in 2021 as companies allow employees to work from home
more and schools transition to more and more online courses.
Exhibit 7 provides a forecast of the global smartphone market share across countries. Note
that China + Asia is over 50 percent. Restrictions imposed by the U.S. government on the Chinese
firm Huawei have benefited Lenovo, Apple, and Samsung.
EXHIBIT 7 2024 Projected Global Smart Phone Market Share across Countries
Asia-Pacific
EMEA
China
North America &
Latin America
25%
20%
27%
28%
Source: Based on information in S&P Industry Surveys, Technology Hardware, Storage, & Peripherals, April 2021.
CASE 4 • LENOVO GROuP LIMITED—2022 421
Tablets Tablet shipments globally increased 19.6 percent in Q4 of 2020 compared with the prior-year
quarter and recorded double-digit unit growth for the whole year. Worldwide tablet shipments
grew 13.6 percent, and this momentum is persisting, with growth of 12 percent in mid-2021.
Demand for detachable tablets was especially strong, growing 33.6 percent in Q4 2020, com-
pared to the prior-year quarter, for total shipments of 24.1 million units. By producer from high-
est to lowest, Apple, Samsung, Microsoft, Lenovo, and Huawei comprised the top 5 detachable
tablet suppliers, with close to 96 percent market share.
Per region, the largest market for detachable tablets during Q4 2020 was the United States,
followed by Asia Pacific (including Japan) and then Western Europe. In terms of segment
growth, the consumer detachable market across the globe saw 17.4 million units being shipped
for a growth rate of 30.3 percent compared with the prior-year quarter. On the other hand, com-
mercial detachable shipments touched 6.7 million units, growing 43.1 compared with the prior-
year quarter. In contrast, in Q4 2020, the slate tablet market grew 9.7 percent compared with
the prior-year quarter, reaching 28.1 million units. Android slate tablets comprised 96 percent
of total slate volume shipped, with the leading suppliers being Samsung, Lenovo, Amazon,
Huawei, and TCL.
Competitors
Over 100 companies compete against Lenovo. A few of these rivals are listed and described
below.
Apple, Inc. Headquartered in Cupertino, California, Apple designs and produces a wide variety of con-
sumer electronic devices, including smartphones (iPhones), tablets (iPads), PCs (Macs), and
smartwatches (Apple Watches). The iPhone makes up the majority of Apple’s total revenue,
but the MacBookPro laptop competes directly with Lenovo’s PCs. While Lenovo is trying to
shift more to a services company, Apple already offers its customers a variety of services such
as Apple Music, iCloud, Apple Care, Apple TV+, Apple Arcade, Apple Card, and Apple Pay.
Unlike Lenovo products, Apple’s products are distributed online as well as through company-
owned stores and third-party retailers. Apple generates roughly 40 percent of its revenue from
the Americas, with the remainder earned internationally.
Dell Technologies, Inc. Headquartered in Round Rock, Texas, and competing with Lenovo, Dell Technologies is a lead-
ing global provider of servers and storage products as well as PCs, peripherals, and virtualization
software. Dell operates under 2 divisions: 1) Dell Client Solutions Group (about 50 percent of
Exhibit 8 provides a breakdown of the 2020 company leaders in the global PC market share.
Note that Lenovo is the leader, followed by Hewlett-Packard.
EXHIBIT 8 The PC Global Market Share among Leading Firms in 2020
Lenovo
HP
Dell
Apple
Acer
Others17%
22%
7%
8%
24% 22%
Source: Based on information in S&P Industry Surveys, “Technology Hardware, Storage, & Peripherals,” April 2021.
422 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
revenues), which produces desktop PCs, notebooks, tablets, and peripherals such as monitors,
printers, and projectors under the Dell brand name, and 2) Dell EMC Infrastructure Solutions
Group (about 42 percent revenues), which produces servers, storage, and networking products.
Other Competitors Headquartered in Palo Alto, California, Hewlett-Packard designs, produces, and distributes
a wide variety of computer hardware, software, peripherals, printers, and more for global
markets.
Headquartered in New Taipei City, Taiwan, Acer ranks among the world’s top 5 branded
PC suppliers. This multinational computer technology and electronics corporation manufactures
desktop and laptop PCs, personal digital assistants (PDAs), servers, storage devices, displays,
smartphones, peripherals, and hardware.
Headquartered in Tokyo, Japan, Toshiba is a Japanese multinational company that manu-
factures and supplies all kinds of electrical products, including laptops, notebooks, computer
desktops, and other computer-related products and services.
Headquartered in Tokyo, Japan, Fujitsu is a Japanese multinational computer hardware and
IT services company. Fujitsu is a leading provider of IT products and services including hard-
ware, software, networking, and business solutions.
Headquartered in Tokyo, Japan, NEC Corporation is a Japanese multinational IT company
that provides information technology (IT) and network solutions. NEC is one of the world’s
leading providers of Internet, broadband network, and enterprise business solutions.
Conclusion
In July 2021, Lenovo introduced the next generation of its entry-level desktop worksta-
tions, the ThinkStation P350 Tower, Small Form Factor (SFF), and Tiny. These products are
equipped with cutting-edge storage technologies and enhanced professional graphics support.
They are Lenovo’s most powerful entry-level offerings, delivering a complete package of size
options.
In June 2021, Lenovo introduced a series of smarter devices including the Lenovo Yoga Tab
13, the new Lenovo Yoga Tab 11, the powerful Lenovo Tab P11 Plus Android™ tablet, and the
Lenovo Smart Clock 2. Lenovo realizes that consumers are increasingly using their tablets for
streaming, gaming, learning, and more screen time, as the lines separating our relaxation time
from hours spent working or learning start to blur.
Lenovo is also acutely interested in the rapidly growing hearables (smart headphones) and
wearables (smartwatch) market. There is a growing shift in the wearables industry from a
focus on fitness to offering broader healthcare solutions, such as the new Apple Watch Series
6, which provides a sensor to measure one’s blood oxygen level. It should be noted here that
China is well ahead of the United States in terms of 5G broadband availability and is a fa-
vorable competitive landscape for Lenovo given that Huawei has been penalized by the U.S.
government.
Lenovo definitely needs to maintain and likely grow its leadership position in the worldwide
PC industry. Demand across the globe remains strong and in some cases was at record levels in
2020. PC demand is accelerating globally as students need reliable systems to be productive and
corporate upgrades abound. Lenovo’s 72.7 million PC shipments in 2020 led all rival firms with
a 24 percent market share, followed by HP in second place with 67.6 million PC shipments for
a market share of 22.4 percent (23.5 percent in 2019). Dell sold 50.3 million devices in 2020 for
third place with a 16.6 percent market share, while Apple followed in fourth, shipping 23.1 mil-
lion PCs for a 7.6 percent share, and finally, Acer had a 6.9 percent market share, having shipped
about 21 million devices.
Lenovo expects to capitalize on the fact that smart home technology increasingly enables
nearly everything in our homes—from our alarm systems, to air-conditioners, to thermostats,
to lights, to garage doors—to be connected to the Internet and be remotely controlled with our
phones or smart speakers. The largest impetus to smart homes will be greater access to high-
speed Internet, with the roll-out of 5G as well as the emergence of smarter assistants like Amazon
Alexa and Google Assistant.
CASE 4 • LENOVO GROuP LIMITED—2022 423
Lenovo strives to stay ahead of competitors on all fronts, even as rival firms introduce ad-
vanced products and services that compete with all Lenovo offerings on a daily basis. A com-
prehensive strategic plan is needed for Lenovo to maintain its dominance in some areas and its
desired dominance in other product and service industries.
References
1. “Annual Interim Reports,” Lenovo, https://investor.lenovo.com/en/publications/reports.php.
2. S&P, Industry Surveys, Technology Hardware, Storage, & Peripherals, April 2021.
424 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Dick’s Sporting Goods—2018
www.dickssportinggoods.com (DKS)
Headquartered in Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, Dick’s Sporting Goods (Dick’s) is a large chain of
brick-and-mortar retail stores that offers a wide selection of sporting equipment, footwear, ap-
parel, and accessories such as tennis rackets, weights, outdoor cooking equipment, bicycles,
sports clothing and much more. By some accounts, Dick’s is the largest sporting goods store in
the United States based on 2017 revenues, larger than Bass Pro Shops, Academy Sports, and Big
5 Sporting Goods. Dick’s also operates Golf Galaxy, Field & Stream, and Dick’s Team Sports
HQ. Dick’s Team Sports HQ is targeted at youth sports and provides league management ser-
vices free of charge including scorekeeping, scheduling, and custom uniform designs.
Competition is intense in the retail business, especially in the brick-and-mortar sporting
goods retail business. In 2017, for example, Gander Mountain filed for bankruptcy and closed
most of their stores. Dick’s is counting on its 1) updated website, 2) store-in-a-store concept, 3)
talented sales people, 4) in-store demonstrations, and 5) a wide range of products at different
price points. However, brick-and-mortar retailers are struggling so Dick’s faces a precarious
future and needs a clear strategic plan.
In May 2018, Dick’s Sporting Goods hired three lobbyists to push Congress for gun control
measures, irritating many of its gun enthusiasts customers. Specifically, Dick’s hired two
Democrats and one Republican from the Washington-based public affairs firm Glover Park
Group, with the only specific lobbying issue listed for their work is “lobbying related to gun
control.”
Copyright by Fred David Books, LLC; written by Sharynn M. Tomlin and Raj Kamalapur.
History
In 1948, an 18-year-old named Richard “Dick” Stack was working for an army surplus store
in Binghamton, New York, and was assigned to research and develop several tactics for adding
fishing and camping product lines to the business. Upon presenting his research and suggestions,
the owner rudely called Dick a “dumb kid,” rejecting his work and ideas.
Distraught, but convinced he was right about the fishing market in Binghamton, Dick consulted
with his grandmother. She asked: “Dick, how much would it would cost you to build the store
yourself.” Dick responded, “It will cost me $300.” His grandmother then went to the cookie jar
where she kept her life savings and gave Dick $300 and told him “Do it yourself.” Dick used that
money to rent a storefront and purchase inventory for a new bait-and-tackle shop in Binghamton.
Dick was determined to succeed despite the first few years of mediocre sales. By the 1960s
however, Dick had two stores and formally named the company Dick’s Sporting Goods. Dick
Stack served as CEO of his company until his retirement in 1984, passing the torch to his son
Edward (Ed) who is currently the Chairman and CEO of Dick’s Sporting Goods. However, when
Ed took the reigns from his father, there were still only two Dick’s stores in operation. Young
and energetic and having worked his way up the chain since 1977, Ed quickly put the business
on an expansion route, opening multiple stores in the early 1990s, and ultimately moving the
headquarters to Pittsburgh in 1994.
Dick’s Sporting Goods went public on the New York Stock Exchange on October 15,
2002 under the ticker symbol DKS. As of February 3, 2018, the company operates 716 Dick’s
Sporting Goods stores in the United States.
Vision/Mission Dick’s has the following mission statement on the corporate website (paraphrased):
We strive to be the #1 sports and fitness specialty omnichannel retailer that serves and inspires
athletes and outdoor enthusiasts to achieve their personal best. Basically Dick’s is on a mission
to exceed the expectations of athletes and outdoorsmen around the world by providing quality
CASE 5 • DICK’S SPORTING GOODS—2018 425
name brand products, an excellent selection, fair prices, and a knowledgeable and helpful staff of
employees.
Dick’s does not have a formal vision statement, but the company strives to serve customers
in a manner that they will recognize Dick’s as the number-one sports and fitness retailer that
serves a wide array of athletes and outdoor enthusiasts.
Code of Business Ethics Dick’s Sporting Goods provides separate codes of conduct for associates, vendors, and direc-
tors. As CEO Ed Stack mentions in a letter to teammates, he is on a mission to ensure Dick’s
plays the game fairly while continuing to offer shareholders value, rewarding loyal customers,
and treating associates fairly. Mr. Stack suggests all associates, vendors, and directors read their
respective codes and the codes of the others as an athlete would read a playbook or game plan
for an athletic event. All team members are expected to prevent unfair play and report any oc-
currences to their HR representative or anonymously on Dick’s Ethics Hotline. Dick’s ensures
protection for whistle blowers promising there will be no retaliation on your employment.
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure Dick Stack’s (founder) son, Ed Stack has served as chairman and CEO of Dick’s Sporting Goods
since 1984, having started with the company full-time in 1977. Based on the executive titles
illustrated in Exhibit 1, it appears that Dick’s operates from a divisional-by-product type struc-
ture composed of three segments: softlines, hardlines, and team sports. Hardlines are basically
anything except footwear and apparel. However, since an official organizational chart is not
made public, likely only insiders know exactly who reports to who in the company.
Current Strategies Dick’s operates in a highly competitive market where customers can purchase from traditional
retailers or simply purchase from online merchants including Amazon and eBay where virtually
anybody can be a merchant and barriers to entry are slim. However, Dick’s has done well with net
income up over 12 percent in the year ending February 2018. The company offers a wide selec-
tion of brands ranging in prices (according to Dick’s) from good to excellent, providing custom-
ers of all income levels and athletic skill levels attractive products. Dick’s is committed to hiring
expert personal in the various departments of the store. For example, if someone is in the market
for a bicycle, Dick’s has bicycle mechanics on staff who often have the same level of knowledge
one would find in a bicycle specialty shop.
If someone wants to hit golf balls, they can go to Dick’s golf hitting bay and work with
coaches to help select the right clubs. If they want instead to shoot a bow or test out new running
shoes, they can simply shoot a few arrows in the archery lane or hop on a treadmill in the store,
all supported by knowledgeable employees. This level of service is one way Dick’s competes with
online merchants as customers are not as likely to “showroom” (browse the store then go buy on-
line for a cheaper source) if they received such personal and dedicated attention. It is also a great
way to build customer loyalty and attract people into the store.
In 2017, Dick’s transitioned from outsourcing its e-commerce platforms to performing these
tasks in-house in what Dicks hopes will provide increased control and allow the firm to target
and interact with customers more effectively. Dick’s is aggressively adding Field & Stream
stores inside existing Dick’s Sporting Goods stores in hopes of cross selling fishing gear with
other sporting goods products. In addition, Dick’s offers Golf Galaxy stores inside select Dick’s
stores. Dick’s markets itself as offering multiple specialty shops inside each store; footwear,
team sports, outdoor lodge, fitness and others are all considered specialty stores by some mea-
sures. Adding similar store-in-a-store concepts is a viable strategy many firms are starting to
employ in hopes of increasing foot traffic.
Dick’s offers many popular brands including Asics, Adidas, Nike, Columbia, Callaway Golf,
TaylorMade, Under Armour, and Yeti. Offering famous brands aids in attracting customers into
Dick’s stores. Dick’s also offers several private label brands which tend to have higher profit mar-
gins than brand names. Several private label brands include: Field & Stream, Fitness Gear, Lady
Hagen, CALIA of women’s athletic apparel, Top-Flite, Quest, and others. Private label brands
426 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
S o u rc
e: B
as ed
o n t
h e
co m
p an
y ’s
2 0 1 7 A
n n u a l
R ep
o rt
, o
th er
c o m
p an
y d
o cu
m en
ts , an
d a
v ar
ie ty
o f
o th
er s
o u rc
es .
E X
H IB
IT 1
D
ic k
’s T
o p
E x
e cu
ti v
e s
a n
d O
rg a
n iz
a ti
o n
a l
C h
a rt
1
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 .
E d S
ta ck
, C
E O
, C
h ai
rm an
o f
th e
B o
ar d
2 .
L au
re n
H o b
ar t,
P re
si d
en t
D ic
k ’s
S p
o rt
in g G
o o d s
3 .
L ee
B el
it sk
y , E
V P
— C
F O
4 .
P au
l G
af fn
ey , E
V P
— C
h ie
f T
ec h
n o
lo g y O
ff ic
er
5 .
H o ll
y T
y so
n , S
V P
— C
h ie
f H
u m
an R
es o u rc
es O
ff ic
er
6 .
N in
a B
ar je
st eh
, S
V P
— P
ro d
u ct
D ev
el o p m
en t
7 .
D av
e B
ar n es
, S
V P
— R
ea l
E st
at e
8 .
D o n al
d G
er m
an o
, S
V P
— O
p er
at io
n s
9 .
G eo
rg e
G ia
co b
b le
, S
V P
— S
u p
p ly
C h
ai n
1 0 .
N av
d ee
p G
u p
ta , S
V P
— F
in an
ce a
n d
C h ie
f A
cc o u n ti
n g O
ff ic
er
1 1 .
Jo h n H
ay es
I II
, S
V P
— G
en er
al C
o u n
se l
an d
S ec
re ta
ry
1 2 .
S co
tt H
u d le
r, S
V P
— C
h ie
f M
ar k
et in
g O
ff ic
er
1 3 .
Jo se
p h O
li v er
, S
V P
— O
rg an
iz at
io n al
P ro
d u
ct iv
it y
1 4 .
D an
ie l
O st
ro w
sk i,
S V
P —
S to
re E
n v ir
o n
m en
t
1 5 .
K u rt
S ch
n ie
d er
s, S
V P
— IT
a n
d C
IO
1 6 .
W il
l S
w is
h er
, S
V P
— M
er ch
an d
is e
P la
n n
in g
a n
d A
ll o
ca ti
o n
1 7 .
L iz
H ae
sl er
, S
V P
— G
M M
– S
o ft
li n es
1 8 .
W en
d y F
ri tz
, S
V P
— G
M M
– H
ar d
li n
es
1 9 .
E d P
lu m
m er
, S
V P
— D
ic k ’s
T ea
m S
p o
rt s
H Q
1 7
1 8
1 9
CASE 5 • DICK’S SPORTING GOODS—2018 427
account for about 10 percent of company wide sales, but Dick’s is planning to aggressively ex-
pand private brands, in particular its CALIA line. Dick’s also has agreements from several brand
name firms to be an excusive provider, including Slazenger, Umbro, Reebok, and others.
Dick’s is somewhat dependent on Nike and Under Armour for its products as the two ac-
count for 20 and 12 percent, respectively, of Dick’s sales. No other firm accounts for more than
10 percent out of the remaining 1,400 vendors.
Finance The income statements in Exhibit 2 reveal that Dick’s had a successful year ending in February
3, 2018, with sales up over 8 percent and net income up 12.5 percent. Unlike many firms, Dick’s
does not appear to have received a substantial tax break in the latest calendar year stemming
from the new corporate tax laws in the United States. Being 100 percent U.S.-based, the new tax
laws should benefit Dick’s significantly as all their revenue is from the United States. The balance sheets in Exhibit 3 reveal that Dick’s remains in the mist of a stock buy back
program that is expected to last until at least 2020. The firm’s stock price declined over 50 percent
from late 2016 to late 2017 so purchasing stock at low prices and betting on yourself may be a posi-
tive move for Dick’s if the firm is able to regain its equity price footing. Signs are positive based on
the company’s revenue and net income increases, but most brick-and-mortar retailers are having
difficulty competing with Amazon and other online competitors.
EXHIBIT 2 Dick’s Income Statements (in thousands USD)
Income Statement 12/28/17 2/3/18 Percent Change
Revenues $7,921,981 $8,590,472 8.44%
Cost of Goods Sold 5,556,198 6,101,412 9.81%
Gross Profit 2,365,783 2,489,060 5.21%
Operating Expenses 1,915,929 2,011,486 4.99%
EBIT 449,854 477,574 6.16%
Interest Expense (8,568) (23,763) -177.35%
EBT 458,422 501,337 9.36%
Tax 171,026 177,892 4.01%
Non-Recurring Events 0 0 NA NA
Net Income 287,396 323,445 12.54%
Source: Based on Dick’s Q4 2017 Report and other documents.
Segment Data Exhibit 4 reveals Dick’s revenues by product type. Hardlines comprise 45 percent of revenues.
Hardlines include fishing rods, basketballs, cookware, bicycles, and any other products that is
not considered apparel or footwear. Despite hardlines accounting for a larger portion of revenue,
softlines (footwear and apparel) account for a combined 55 percent of revenue. This comes as
little surprise if you recall that Nike and Under Armour account for 32 percent of Dick’s sales
and both predominantly supply Dick’s with softgoods.
Locations Map Exhibit 5 reveals Dick’s store locations by region. Both Dick’s Sporting Goods and Specialty
Concept Stores are included in Exhibit 5. Specialty Concept Stores account for 15 percent
of stores and include Golf Galaxy and Field & Stream with some free-standing and some
combined with Dick’s Sporting Goods stores. Dick’s added a net of 55 stores in fiscal 2016.
Dick’s home market of the Northeast trails the Southeast in total number of stores by a wide
margin.
428 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Balance Sheet 12/28/17 2/3/18 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short Term Investments $164,777 $101,253 -39%
Accounts Receivable 75,199 60,107 -20%
Inventory 1,638,632 1,711,103 4%
Other Current Assets 117,070 133,622 14%
Total Current Assets 1,995,678 2,006,085 1%
Property Plant & Equipment 1,552,574 1,677,340 10%
Goodwill 245,059 250,476 2%
Intangibles 140,835 136,587 -3%
Other Long-Term Assets 154,150 133,451 -13%
Total Assets 4,058,296 4,203,939 4%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 755,537 845,075 12%
Other Current Liabilities 641,878 581,939 -9%
Total Current Liabilities 1,397,415 1,425,014 2%
Long-Term Debt 4,679 60,084 1184%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 726,713 777,340 7%
Total Liabilities 2,128,807 2,262,438 6%
Equity
Common Stock 1,003 1,131 13%
Retained Earnings 1,956,066 2,205,651 13%
Treasury Stock (1,158,378) (1,442,880) 25%
Paid in Capital & Other 1,130,798 1,177,599 4%
Total Equity 1,929,489 1,941,501 1%
Total Liabilities and Equity 4,058,296 4,203,939 4%
EXHIBIT 3 Dick’s Balance Sheets (in thousands USD)
Source: Based on Dick’s Q4 2017 Report and other documents.
Hardlines
45%
Apparel
35%
Footwear
20%
Dick's Revenues By Product Type
EXHIBIT 4 Product Segments
Source: Based on Dick’s Q4 2017 Report and other documents.
CASE 5 • DICK’S SPORTING GOODS—2018 429
Dick’s Big 5 Hibbett Sports
$ Market Cap. 3,653M 145M 436M
# Employees 27,500 9,000 4,000
$ Revenue 8,590M 1.01B 968M
% Gross Margin 29% 32% NA
$ Operating Income 2.4B 323M 338M
$ EPS Ratio 3.01 0.05 1.7
$ P/E Ratio 3.07 3.5 -1.6
EXHIBIT 6 Dick’s Versus Two Rivals on Seven Variables
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
Competitors
In the world of sports retailing, Dick’s Sporting Goods, Academy Sports + Outdoors, Bass Pro
Shops, Big 5 Sporting Goods, and Hibbett Sports, are five of the more recognizable names.
Dick’s is leader of the group in terms of market capitalization $3.6 billion and sales about $8.6
billion annually, while Academy Sports + Outdoors, Bass Pro Shops, Big 5 Sporting Group,
and Hibbett rank second, third, fourth, and fifth respectively in sales. Bass Pro Shops and
Academy Sports are privately held firms. Exhibit 6 provides information on Dick’s vs two
competitors. Exhibit 7 reveals that Dick’s is the largest specialty sporting goods company in the U.S.
with an impressive market share of 17 percent in 2017. Dick’s market share includes sales from
Golf Galaxy and Field & Stream. Academy Sports + Outdoors is similar to Dick’s but includes
significantly more fishing and hunting aspects. Bass Pro Shops is also mostly fishing and hunting
in nature.
Academy Sports + Outdoors Headquartered in Katy, Texas, Academy Sports + Outdoors is a privately held company owned
by KKR & Company. Founded in 1938, Academy is a sports, outdoor, and lifestyle retailer with
a broad assortment of high-quality hunting, fishing, and camping equipment and gear along with
sports and leisure products, footwear, apparel, and much more. Academy operates more than
200 stores throughout Alabama, Arkansas, Florida, Georgia, Louisiana, Mississippi, Missouri,
Oklahoma, South Carolina, Tennessee, and Texas. Academy revenues have been flat for the last
3 years but are up 60 percent from 2012 to 2017.
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
Northeast Southeast Midwest West
191
300
186
120
Dick’s Store Locations
EXHIBIT 5 Dicks Store Locations by Region
Source: Based on Dick’s Q4 2017 Report and other documents.
430 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Bass Pro Shops (BPS Direct, LLC) Headquartered in Springfield, Missouri, BPS Direct, LLC is a privately held brick-and-mortar
retailer of hunting, fishing, camping, and related outdoor merchandise. BPS Direct owns
Cabela’s, White River Marine Group, and Tracker Marine Group. Founded in 1972, Bass Pro
Shops recently opened up its new Angler’s Inn in Springfield, Missouri. BPS Direct is similar to
Dick’s except BPS offers a full line of boats and boat motors.
Big 5 Sporting Goods (BGFV) Headquartered in El Segundo, California, and founded in 1955, Big 5 Sporting Goods operates
about 425 stores in the western United States only. The company has an e-commerce platform at
the www.big5sportinggoods.com website. Big 5’s product mix is almost exactly like Dick’s, in-
cluding athletic shoes, apparel and accessories, a range of outdoor and athletic equipment for team
sports, fitness, camping, hunting, tennis, golf, winter and summer recreation, and roller sports.
Like Dick’s, Big 5 stores carry products from brand name manufacturers, such as Adidas,
Coleman, Columbia, Everlast, New Balance, Nike, Rawlings, Skechers, Spalding, Under
Armour, and Wilson. Additionally, Big 5 offers private label items including shoes, apparel,
camping equipment, fishing supplies, and winter sports equipment. Big 5 sells private label mer-
chandise under its own trademarks (Golden Bear, Harsh, Pacifica, and Rugged Exposure) and
offers licensed trademarks brands (Beach Feet, Bearpaw, Body Glove, Morrow, and The Realm).
Hibbett Sports, Inc. (HIBB) Headquarterd in Birmingham, Alabama, Hibbett Sports is engaged in operating athletic specialty
stores in small- and mid-sized markets primarily in the South, Southwest, Mid-Atlantic, and the
Midwest U.S. Founded in 1945 and very similar to Dick’s except considerably smaller, Hibbett
provides sportswear apparel, footwear, equipment, and accessories. Hibbett’s Sports Additions
stores provides fashion-based merchandise assortment of athletic footwear, caps, and apparel.
The Hibbett Team Sales, Inc. is a supplier of customized athletic apparel, equipment, and foot-
wear primarily to school athletic programs. As of Fall 2018, Hibbett operates about 1,000 stores
consisting of about 990 Hibbett Sports stores and 10 smaller-format Sports Additions athletic
shoe stores in 35 states.
Industry Analysis
Sporting goods stores have out performed many other retail stores in recent years as there is a
growing number of health conscious people. Participation in sports and exercise activities has
slowly risen over the last 5 years and is expected to rise about 2 percent annually through 2023.
A key group for the industry is children and young adults under 21 years of age. This group has
experienced robust demand, likely creating a strong market of customers well into the future.
Dick’s 17%
Sporting Goods Stores’ Market Share
Academy Sports
& Outdoors
10%
Bass Pro Shops
9%
Others
64%
EXHIBIT 7 Dick’s Estimated Market Share
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
CASE 5 • DICK’S SPORTING GOODS—2018 431
In fact, about 50 percent of the market is customers 45 and under in age. However, even older
people are significantly more active than their predecessors in years past.
Consolidation through acquisitions or bankruptcies within the industry has helped firms, like
Dick’s, by eliminating competition. A reduction in the number of wholesalers who used to sup-
ply firms like Dick’s with many of their products are fewer in number, now allowing all firms in
the industry to cut out this middleman and do business directly with the manufacturers. Overall,
the industry is valued at over $50 billion annually.
The United States has a whopping 40,000 sporting goods businesses, including Dick’s and
Bass Pro Shops, but also thousands of mom-and-pop bait and tackle stores located on small
creeks, rivers, lakes, and coastal areas across the United States. The Internet is also a major
player now, as many people purchase sporting goods and fishing equipment directly from China
on eBay and other websites, often at bottom line prices.
The main drivers of revenue in the industry are not footwear or athletic apparel but rather
sporting equipment such as exercise stuff, golf, team sport items such as football and baseball
gear, hunting, fishing, and camping gear. In total, about 64 percent of industry revenues are de-
rived from sporting equipment, while 17 percent is derived from athletic apparel. and 12 percent
from athletic footwear. The remaining revenues are derived from various items including furni-
ture and other items not directly used in sports or physical activity.
Omnichannel Strategy Dick’s mission statement mentions its omnichannel strategy discussed. The term is simply a
fancy way of stating the company sells its products through its website and through brick-and-
mortar stores and has exposure to social media. Omnichannel strategies require that firms ensure
they have excellent inventory tracking systems in place, ensure products are well described on-
line rather than simply having a picture, use advanced data analytics to predict customer habits
and desires, and finally ensure an efficient supply chain.
Online sporting goods sales are increasing rapidly, up 15 percent in 2017 by some accounts
to over $400 billion in the U.S. alone. A recent study reported that 33 percent of men and
25 percent of women indicated they are considering purchasing their sporting goods and apparel
exclusively online. In total, online purchases of sporting related goods is expected to increase
7 percent per year through 2021. Customers are increasingly using the internet to research prod-
ucts as well, not always purchasing online.
Dick’s partly relies on customers researching products on their website then coming into
their stores to talk to sales staff and hopefully purchase the item. Firms like Amazon, who are
still predominantly online, have the distinct advantage over firms with brick-and-mortar loca-
tions in being able to operate at higher margins and charge lower prices. Retail stores such as
Dick’s, though, have the buffer in that many of their products customers want to try on before
they buy including shoes, apparel, baseball gloves, bats, golf clubs, and even test out exercise
equipment and bicycles, so maintaining an omnichannel strategy is vital for such retailers.
Shift to Markets Outside the United States Although Dick’s is located 100 percent within the United States, many retailers are pushing their
products and markets overseas as a growing middle class is developing in many emerging mar-
kets. Amazon for example earns over one-third of its revenues from outside the United States,
and even legacy firms such as Staples, earn about 20 percent of its revenues from outside the U.S.
However, despite robust sales from overseas markets, profit margins are generally significantly
higher in the United States, and many firms struggle to turn a profit in their overseas operations.
Inventory Management Strategies As discussed, is the need to operate under an omnichannel strategy, inventory management
is a key element to being successful in retail. Why do people enter a Dick’s Sporting Goods
store, a Bass Pro Shops, or an antique shop? Why not simply buy online? The answer is rather
simple—people simply enjoy seeing, holding, sitting in, and playing with the inventory. Some
analysts even consider displaying the appropriate inventory at the right time is the Holy Grail for
any retail business—more important than buildings, equipment, and even location. Being able to
lure customers into the store to see new, exciting inventory first-hand is becoming increasingly
432 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
important to compete with the Amazons and eBays of the world, where customers simply pur-
chase with the click of a button or a tap on their smart phone screen.
To ensure the proper inventory is available, many firms are adopting so called quick response
(QR) systems that order a replacement item as soon as one is purchased. Stores like Dick’s must
be cognizant, however, of the risk of simply becoming a showroom for inventory with customers
leaving to purchase the very products they played with online at a cheaper price. Having the cor-
rect inventory may be the most important factor for attracting customers into your store, but how
do you increase the odds for a sale? See the next section.
Store-in-a-Store and Employees’ Strategies A way to increase the odds of customers actually making a purchase while in the store is through
having a highly trained staff. Staffing the store with knowledgeable personnel is a key element to
closing a sale. Dick’s, for example, has extremely knowledgeable employees working through-
out the store. Similarly, ULTA, formally known as ULTA Beauty, also has knowledgeable per-
sonnel selling its products and even has a beauty parlor store-in-a-store concept which forces
customers coming to have their hair done to walk through the store. Bass Pro Shops employees,
in fishing, hunting, or hiking sections, for example, can talk educationally about the products. In
essence, some retail stores are not even selling inventory, rather selling information—as opposed
to Walmart who simply competes on bottom of the line price. There are not many Walmarts
in the country where you can receive detailed fishing tips and information from the personnel
working sporting goods or what type wax is best for your vehicle from the people working in the
automobile section. Walmart is not in the information business; they compete on cost.
Customer Loyalty Strategies Much of the above discussion is around building customer loyalty, but a few additional consid-
erations are included in this section. Unlike a giant department store that sells everything under
the sun, specialty retailers have a narrower range of customers. In many ways, they operate
under what Porter would call a focused strategy. As a result, specialty retailers must keep their
core customers happy and returning because this core group is predominantly the only custom-
ers the firm has, as opposed to Walmart, who has many customers buying anything from food
to socks—the penalty on faltering on one product category is not as severe. Tactics used to
foster customer loyalty include increased marketing, reward cards, private label credit cards,
and creating your own private label brands, which often are sold at higher margins for the firm
and cheaper prices for the customer. Another advantage of private label brands is customers
are not able to compare prices as easily because the store is the only source for that particular
product. Dick’s peer and foe, Bass Pro Shops, has done a phenomenal job with its Johnny Morris
(the firm’s founder) brand of fishing rods and reels and other items using Morris’ namesake.
The only place to purchase is at Bass Pro shops, not Amazon, not ebay, only Bass Pro. To the
degree a firm can market effectively and hire the proper personnel to endorse store branded
items combined with possibly offering double rewards when purchasing store branded items,
significant brand loyalty can be built.
Future
The United States has an extremely high rate of diabetes and hypertension, and by some
estimates, the highest rate of obesity among developed countries—34 percent of men and
37 percent of women classified as obese. The U.S. government has introduced several programs
aimed at increasing physical activity of its citizens and even promoted them through key figures,
including former first lady Michelle Obama. Nike, and other firms, are also encouraging and
marketing in a manner to get people more active.
With a growing health-minded segment of the population, increased pressure is being placed
on others to conform, which should bode well for Dick’s Sporting Goods. However, smartphones
and laptop video games and the like have overall curtailed the prevalence of outdoor activities.
Too many young people are hooked on online games and social media communications—to the
detriment of firms like Dick’s that want to get you out in the field, in the woods, on the court, or
on the water.
Dick’s needs a clear strategic plan going forward to obtain and nurture a loyal customer base.
CASE 6 • 11 BIT STuDIOS S.A.—2022 433
11 Bit Studios S.A.—2022
www.11bitstudios.com
Headquartered in Warsaw, Poland, 11 Bit Studios (11 Bit) is a large video game development
and publishing company with sales derived globally. Founded in 2010, 11 Bit has made a name
for itself developing such games as Anomaly: Warzone Earth (2011), This War of Mine (2014),
Moonlighter (2018), and Frostpunk (2018). The company has also released Children of Morta
(2019). 11 Bit’s Chinese partner, NetEase, is working on the mobile version of Frostpunk , while
its board game version is being produced by Glass Cannon Unplugged. 11 Bit is a successful,
growing company with space for more than 300 employees at its headquarters in Warsaw; as of
year-end 2021, the company has about 200 employees.
For 2020, 11 Bit reported revenue of PLN 87.1 million, up 22.3 percent from the prior year,
while the company’s operating profit was PLN 40.79 million, up 57.6 percent from 2019. The
firm’s net profit for 2020 was PLN 37.36 million, up 57.5 percent from the prior year. The com-
pany’s available cash at year-end 2020 was PLN 96.13 million, up 16.9 percent and the high-
est level ever. Thus, this company is doing really well financially. However, the pandemic has
impacted the gaming industry in interesting ways. Lockdowns have increased game sales, but
development has taken a major hit: studios were forced to adapt to varied seating arrangements,
and many new releases had to be delayed, inflating production costs on both counts. Thus, a
revenue spike in 2020 doesn’t necessarily mean stellar performance.
History
Founded in December 2009, 11 Bit’s stock was listed on the Warsaw Stock Exchange in December
2015. This company handles every stage of the video game creation process, from idea concep-
tion and software creation to production and marketing globally. Gaming titles are usually sold
through a third-party platform like Steam or Epic Games Store on the PC and through official
stores on the consoles.
In 2010, 11 Bit released Anomaly , which quickly became one of the world’s most popular
“tower offense” games. The company’s This War of Mine ( TWoM ) was released in 2014 (PC ver-
sion) and within weeks occupied top positions on the bestseller lists of Steam and other digital
distribution platforms. TWoM was soon adapted to new hardware platforms and new language
versions, and it remained a key contributor to 11 Bit’s financial performance in 2014–2017.
TWoM was replaced as 11 Bit’s main revenue source by Frostpunk , which debuted (PC ver-
sion) in April 2018. Within 3 days of its release, customers purchased over 250,000 copies of
Frostpunk , which more than covered its production costs.
In 2017, 11 Bit’s publishing division released two games: Beat Cop and Tower 57;
Moonlighter followed in 2018. These 3 products increased the percentage of revenues contrib-
uted by the publishing division from 12 percent to 18 percent. In 2019, this percentage increased
to 40 percent following release of another third-party developed title, Children of Morta , whose
PC and console versions were released in Fall 2019. In 2020, the percentage of 11 Bit’s total
revenue derived from the sale of third-party developed games (the publishing segment) was 29
percent.
For Q1 of 2021, 11 Bit again reported excellent financial results, including more than PLN
14.83 million in revenue, PLN 6.38 million in EBITDA, PLN 3.56 million in net profit, and nearly
PLN 107.8 million in liquid assets. These numbers exceeded even the company’s expectations.
Vision/Mission
Note that 11 Bit isn’t even the most prominent publisher in Poland (that honor probably goes
to CD Projekt). Companies such as Valve, Ubisoft, etc. are much larger players in this industry
globally. This should be kept in mind when thinking about the vision and mission statements.
434 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
11 Bit does not have a formal vision statement on its website or in its Annual Report, but the
company’s mission statement is stated to be two words: “Meaningful Entertainment.”
A possible vision statement for 11 Bit could read something like this: to become the most
renowned video game producer and marketer in Europe.
By-Segment Information 11 Bit operates under two segments or divisions: 1) Game Development, which entails de-
veloping, producing, marketing, distributing, and enhancing video games internally, and 2)
Publishing, which entails acquiring, marketing, and distributing video games developed by third-
party companies.
Game Development 11 Bit has established three internal development teams consisting of about 70 persons each.
The company’s internal operations include all aspects of the creative process (concept, design,
art, programming, quality assurance, cross-platform development, and customer support). Video
games included in 11 Bit’s Game Development segment include This War of Mine (TWoM),
Frostpunk, and Project 8. From its debut in Fall 2014 to the end of 2020, This War of Mine game
generated total revenue of more than PLN 110 million for 11 Bit.
Frostpunk is a video game that tells the story of the struggle for survival of a commu-
nity stranded in a freezing world. Revenue from Frostpunk in 2020 totaled more than PLN
130 million. In 2021, Frostpunk was made available for mobile devices running iOS and Android
and had a F2P (free-2-play) model. For 11 Bit to build Frostpunk into a cross-platform global
brand was a big step. Frostpunk for mobile devices was developed by China-based NetEase, a
gaming industry giant with a very strong position in the mobile games sector.
At the time of writing, Project 8 is the code name for 11 Bit’s newest, still secret video
game. A team of more than fifty 11 Bit employees are working on Project 8, compared to the
team of 65 persons that produced Frostpunk. Analysts expect that Project 8 will be released si-
multaneously for the PC and for consoles. 11 Bit recently changed Project 8’s game engine from
the proprietary (internal) solution on which the company’s earlier games had run to the Unreal
Engine.
Publishing 11 Bit’s revenue from sales of video games in its Publishing segment in 2020 accounted for 29
percent of total revenue, down from 40 percent the prior year. Prominent video games included
in 11 Bit’s Game Development segment include Beat Cop, Tower 57, Moonlighter, Children of
Morta, Vitriol, Foxhole, Botin, and Ava.
Developed by Spanish studio Digital Sun but published by 11 Bit, Moonlighter was released
in mid-2018 for the PC, Xbox One, Nintendo Switch, and PS4. Through 2020, 11 Bit derived
revenue of over PLN 44 million from Moonlighter with the Nintendo Switch as the primary
sales platform. This game is available from the world’s leading digital gaming platforms, in-
cluding Steam. A version for Apple smartphones was launched in November 2020. Preparations
are under way to release Moonlighter for Android devices. By the end of December 2020, 11
Bit’s revenue from Moonlighter and its add-ons for all hardware platforms was more than PLN
44 million.
Produced by the American studio Dead Mage, Children of Morta was released in Fall 2019
for the PC, Xbox One, PS4, and Nintendo Switch. Children of Morta is an action-RPG and
ranked among top ten of the Steam’s bestsellers. In August 2020, 11 Bit released downloadable
content (DLC) named Children of Morta: Paws and Claws, which introduced animal charac-
ters in the game. All proceeds from the sale of the DLC are being donated by 11 Bit to The
Humane Society International Foundation. As of year-end 2020, 11 Bit derived total revenue
from Children of Morta of PLN 24 million.
At year-end 2020, 11 Bit has four titles being developed under its Publishing division. The first
is codenamed Vitriol and under development by Fool’s Theory Studio, based in Bielsko-Biała. The
second and third are codenamed Foxhole and Botin and are being produced by Digital Sun. The
fourth is a game codenamed Ava, under development by Spanish development studio Chibig. 11
Bit’s total investment in these four games as of year-end 2020 is about PLN 20 million, compared
to a total investment in Moonlighter and Children of Morta of about PLN 5 million.
CASE 6 • 11 BIT STuDIOS S.A.—2022 435
By-Region Segments Like most game publishers, 11 Bit competes globally, not just in its home country of Poland.
In 2020, foreign sales (outside Poland) accounted for 97.6 percent of the 11 Bit’s total revenue,
down slightly from 97.9 percent the prior year. 11 Bit does business in six geographical areas, as
indicated in Exhibit 1. Note that the lion’s share of the company’s revenues are generated from
the United States, followed by Japan, and then the European Union. Note the decreasing 11 Bit
revenues in 2020 from the European Union, China, and the “Other” category.
EXHIBIT 1 11 Bit’s Revenues by Region (in millions of PLN)
Source: Based on information on p. 40 in the 11 Bit 2020 Annual Report.
2019 2020
Poland 1.49 2.06
EU 6.39 5.12
USA 51.27 66.98
Japan 10.31 12.08
China 00.83 00.22
Other (Canada, Korea, Brazil, & Australia) 00.93 00.63
Total 71.22 87.09
Internal Issues
Objectives
11 Bit’s objectives, dispersed across the company’s 2020 Annual Report, include the following:
1. Employ about 200 employees by the end of 2021
2. Increase production budgets on its own IP and third-party IP titles
3. Release one premiere game per year for its own IP titles
4. Publish 3–4 third-party IP titles each year
5. Release increasingly complex and higher-priced games. (Note: The development and production
costs of a single video game may exceed PLN 5.5 million.)
6. Grow much faster than the entire video games market and steadily increase its market share.
Marketing For marketing, 11 Bit relies almost exclusively on third-party companies to sell its products.
This is standard for most independent game companies; it’s a select few firms that can sell by
themselves.
The firm’s revenue from sales of video games was PLN 87 million in 2020, with PLN
86 million coming from sales of the company’s products through Valve Corporation’s Steam,
Nintendo Co. Ltd, Microsoft Corporation, Google, Apple, Sony, and Humble Bundle—the
world’s leading electronic distribution platforms. In 2020, the company’s largest distributors
were Value Corporation, Humble Bundle., Nintendo Co Ltd., Google LLC, GOG Sp. z.o.o, and
Sony Interactive Entertainment America LLC. Receivables from those firms ranged from 3.66
million PLN from Valve to 0.577 million PLN from Sony.
Organizational Structure Przemysław Marszał is currently the CEO of 11 Bit and Grzegorz Miechowski is the COO of
the company. However, beyond these two persons, the company’s website and its 2020 Annual
Report offer no information about who reports to who or who is responsible for what. Some ana-
lysts would suggest that 11 Bit is sufficiently large to function with a divisional-by-region type
of structure, with divisional head persons carrying the title President. In other words, this firm
likely needs to be less centralized in its overall design and chain-of-command.
436 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
The board of directors consists of Przemyslaw Marszaf, President of the Management Board;
Grzegorz Miechowski, Member of the Management Board; and Michaf Drozdowski, Member of
the Management Board.
Supervisory Board
• Wojciech Ozimek, Chairman of the Supervisory Board • Jacek Czykiel, Deputy Chairman of the Supervisory Board • Radosław Marter, Member of the Supervisory Board
• Marcin Kuciapski, Member of the Supervisory Board
• Piotr Wierzbicki, Member of the Supervisory Board
Financial Data For fiscal 2020, 11 Bit reported sales of PLN 87.1 million for 2020, up 22.3 percent over
the prior year. The company’s 2020 operating profit reached PLN 40.79 million, up 57.6
percent from the prior year, with net profit at PLN 37.36 million, up 57.5 percent. 11 Bit’s
2019 and 2020 income statements and balance sheets are provided in Exhibit 2 and Exhibit 3,
respectively.
EXHIBIT 2 11 Bit Studios’ Income Statements (in PLN)
Source: Based on information in the 2020 11 Bit Annual Report, p. 16.
12/31/19 12/31/20
Revenue 71,221,248 87,101,774
Cost of Goods Sold 438,947 353,338
Gross Profit 70,782,301 86,748,436
Operating Expenses 38,470,037 35,710,455
EBIT 32,312,264 51,037,981
Interest Expense 5,265,487
EBT 27,046,777 40,651,821
Tax 247,777 304,981
Non-Recurring Events 3,072,086 2,983,709
Net Income 23,726,914 37,363,131
EXHIBIT 3 11 Bit Studios’ Balance Sheets (in PLN)
12/31/19 12/31/20
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments 14,882,519 24,134,648
Accounts Receivable 17,750,932 11,601,506
Inventory 0 11,830
Other Current Assets 73,219,811 90,193,641
Total Current Assets 105,853,262 115,941,625
Property Plant & Equipment 20,380,205 26,889,502
Goodwill 0 0
Intangibles 24,870,505 37,859,517
Other Long-Term Assets 5,564,416 5,648,578
Total Assets 156,668,388 186,339,222
CASE 6 • 11 BIT STuDIOS S.A.—2022 437
External Issues
Consumers globally are spending more and more time in front of their computers, smartphones,
consoles, PCs, laptops, and tablets. Thus, the outlook for the video game industry in the coming
years is outstanding, with the mobile games segment growing fastest of all.
Regional Information For more than a decade, video games have been the fastest-growing segment of the entertainment
industry. In fact, the value of the video gaming market already exceeds that of the film and music
markets combined. Newzoo, a Dutch provider of games analytics, reports that the global video
games market in 2019 was valued at $152.1 billion, an increase of 9.6 percent compared with the
prior year. Newzoo’s 2020 growth forecasts were for the gaming market to increase by another
9.3 percent to $159.3 billion (an all-time record).
Exhibit 4 provides information related to regional growth in the global video games market.
Note that the Middle East & Africa market grew 30.2 percent in 2020 to $6.2 billion.
12/31/19 12/31/20
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 11,429,892 9,791,955
Other Current Liabilities 13,236,010 1,429,741
Total Current Liabilities 24,665,902 11,221,696
Long-Term Debt 10,429,732 9,499,650
Other Long-Term Liabilities 833,455 969,752
Total Liabilities 35,928,089 21,691,098
Equity
Common Stock 228,720 236,055
Retained Earnings 17,454,092 33,106,943
Treasury Stock 4,870,274 12,407.633
Paid in Capital & Other 97,187,213 118,897,493
Total Equity 119,740,299 164,648,124
Total Liabilities and Equity 155,668,388 186,339,222
Source: Based on information in 11 Bit’s 2020 Annual Report, pp. 17–18.
EXHIBIT 4 Growth in the Global Games Revenue by Region
Source: Based on information in 11 Bit’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 86.
Region Global Revenue (in $ billions) Global Growth (% in 2020)
Middle East & Africa 06.2 30.2
Europe 32.9 19.9
Latin America 6.8 25.2
North America 44.7 21.4
Asia-Pacific 84.3 17.5
Total 174.9 19.6
Newzoo revised its projections upwards for growth in the video games industry, saying in
2020 that the value of the global gaming market would rise by 19.6 percent compared to the
prior year, to $174.9 billion. The firm also reports that in geographical terms, Asia, especially
China, is the world’s largest gaming market. Newzoo reports that in 2020 customers in Asia spent
438 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
$84.3 billion on computer games, a 17 percent increase over 2019. However, in 2020, the Asian
market accounted for about 48 percent of the global gaming market, down 1 percent from the
prior year.
Some analysts report that rates of growth in the European and American gaming markets in
2020 were markedly higher than in Asia. Newzoo too reported that Americans spent $44.7 billion
on video games in 2020, up 21.4 percent from the prior year and comprising 26 percent of global
spending on this type of entertainment. Moreover, according to Newzoo, European spending on
video games reached $32.9 billion in 2020, up 19.9 percent, and comprising a 19 percent share
of the global gaming market.
Latin America loves video games even more than Asia, as spending there increased 25.2
percent in 2020 to $6.8 billion, comprising 4 percent of the global market. Based on spending,
in 2020, Africa and the Middle East comprised 3 percent of the global gaming market, or $6.2
billion, up 30 percent year-over-year.
Although the market for video games in 11 Bit’s home country of Poland represents an al-
most negligible share of the global gaming market at about 0.4 percent, a report titled “Condition
of the Polish Gaming Industry 2020” states that in 2020 the value of the Polish gaming market
was PLN 2.43 billion, compared with PLN 2.23 billion the prior year. This report estimates that
the video games market in Poland will be worth PLN 2.54 billion in 2021 and grow to PLN 2.69
billion in 2022, and then to PLN 3 billion by 2024.
Device Information Video games can be played on different kinds of devices, and producers of video games spend
considerable resources tailoring products to play on multiple devices. Exhibit 5 provides infor-
mation related to growth in the global games market by type of device. Note that smartphone
games generated both the largest revenue and the fastest percentage growth.
EXHIBIT 5 Growth in the Global Games Revenue by Region
Source: Based on information in the company’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 88.
Region Global Revenue (in $ billions) Global Growth (% in 2020)
Mobile Devices (Total) 86.3 25.6
Tablet Games 11.4 07.3
Smartphone Games 74.9 29.0
PCs 37.4 06.2
Browser PC Games 03.2 –8.7
Boxed/Downloaded PC Games 34.2 07.9
Console Games 51.2 21.0
Newzoo reported that in 2020 smartphone owners spent $86.3 billion on video games, up a
whopping 25.6 percent from the prior year, comprising 49 percent of the device-playing video
game market. Video games dedicated for play on smartphones are often sold at low prices or
even offered in the F2P (free-to-play) model.
Behind smartphones in revenue are video games for consoles, at $51.2 billion in 2020, up 21
percent from the prior year, and comprising 29 percent of the global gaming market. However,
Newzoo reports that projections for video game spending on PCs in 2020 grew only 6.2 percent
and comprised just $37.4 billion. The PC share in the global video gaming market in 2020 de-
clined 22 percent, partly due to a further decline in the share of web browser games (titles avail-
able via social media, for example). The PC segment of the video game market now comprises
only 2 percent of the global gaming market.
Video games for handheld devices will play an increasing role in the future due to a rapid rise
in the number of such devices globally. This growth will come at the expense of the PC and web
browser games segments. Console games are set to retain their market position, although sales of
the new generation Sony and Microsoft consoles are picking up rather slowly. The market share
of games dedicated to tablet computers is expected to remain unchanged from its current level
of a few percent.
CASE 6 • 11 BIT STuDIOS S.A.—2022 439
Major Industry Players
The industry includes both big-budget developers and publishers of so-called AAA games and
smaller firms that specialize in low-budget “indie” games. The former includes studios like
Rockstar Games, Bioware, Blizzard, and Bethesda; the latter includes Chucklefish, Digital
Devolver, and Annapurna Interactive. 11 Bit Studios arguably sits closer to the indie end of the
spectrum, but this section will discuss the most prominent names in the video game industry to
present a broad view of the gaming landscape.
Headquartered in Kyoto, Japan, Nintendo was arguably the first video game development
company—its first product was introduced in 1979. Nintendo is the world’s largest video game
company by revenue, with a net value of over $150 billion. Some of Nintendo’s notable video
franchises are Mario, Pokémon, and The Legend of Zelda.
Headquartered in Bellevue, Washington, and with a key subsidiary in Luxembourg, Value
Corporation has total equity of over $5 billion, though most of this is from Steam, its online
games marketplace. Some of the company’s most popular games include the Portal, Team
Fortress, and Half-Life series.
Headquartered in New York City and owned by Take-Two Interactive, Rockstar Games was
founded in 1998 by Sam House, Dan Houser, Terry Donovan, Jamie King, and Gary Foreman.
Its many popular video games series include Grand Theft Auto and Red Dead Redemption.
Headquartered in Redwood City, California, Electronic Arts (EA) is a video game develop-
ment and publishing company with annual revenue over $8 billion. Some of its popular video
games are the Battlefield and FIFA series as well as several games in the Star Wars franchise.
Headquartered in Santa Monica, California, Activision Blizzard is a NASDAQ-listed holding
company that owns and operates subsidiaries that have developed bestselling videogames such as
the Call of Duty series, World of Warcraft, Overwatch, and the Tony Hawks series.
Headquartered in Minato, Tokyo, Japan, Sony Computer Entertainment is a wholly owned
subsidiary of the Sony Corporation. Sony produces the PlayStation series of gaming consoles,
one of the biggest gaming platforms around the world. This video game company has several
subsidiaries in Asia, Europe, and North America.
Headquartered in Montreuil, France, Ubisoft is a video game developer and publisher that
has subsidiaries in 26 countries throughout the world and trades on Euronex as UBI. Some of its
popular video games include the Assassin’s Creed, Far Cry, and Tom Clancy series.
Sega Games Co. Ltd. is headquartered in Tokyo, Japan, and is a wholly owned subsidiary of
the larger Sega Holdings. Sega Games has several offices around the world. Some of the best-
selling games from this company are the Sonic the Hedgehog, Yakuza, Persona, and Total War
series.
Headquartered in Edmonton, Canada, BioWare is wholly owned by Electronic Arts. BioWare
has developed popular video games including the Mass Effect series, the Dragon Age series, and
Star Wars: The Old Republic.
Headquartered in Santa Monica, California, Naughty Dog Inc. is a wholly owned subsidiary
of Sony Computer Entertainment. Some popular Naughty Dog games include Crash Bandicoot,
Jak and Daxter, The Last of Us, and Uncharted.
Headquartered in Shinjuku, Toyo, Japan, Square Enix Holdings Co. Ltd. is listed on the Tokyo
stock market and produces such popular video games as Final Fantasy, Tomb Raider, Chrono
Trigger, and Kingdom Hearts.
Headquartered in Chuo-Ku Osaka, Japan, Capcom Company Ltd. is a public listed company
that develops and publishes video games such as Monster Hunter, Resident Evil, Street Fighter,
and Mega Man.
Headquartered in Bellevue, Washington, Bungie Inc. has developed such popular video
games such as Marathon, Destiny, and the Halo series. Bungie was acquired by Microsoft in
2000, but it has since split from it, with the software giant retaining the Halo franchise.
Headquartered in Redmond, Washington, Microsoft’s presence in the gaming world is driven
by its Xbox game consoles and gaming service. The company has acquired numerous video
game developers and is now a major force to reckon with in the industry.
Headquartered in Shinagawa, Tokyo, Bandai Namco Entertainment is a wholly owned sub-
sidiary of Bandai Namco Holdings, with operations all over the world. Some of the company’s
popular video games are Little Nightmares, Soulcalibur, Ace Combat, and Dark Souls.
440 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Headquartered in Stockholm, Sweden, Mojang was founded in 2009 by game programmer
Markus Persson. The company, primarily known for breakout hit Minecraft, was acquired by
Microsoft in 2014.
Headquartered in Cary, North Carolina, Epic Games is a private company that has subsidiar-
ies in China, South Korea, the United Kingdom, and Japan. The company is best known as the
developer of the Unreal, Gears of War, and Fortnite franchises and of the widely used Unreal
game engine.
Headquartered in Tokyo, Japan, Game Freak is a privately owned company that is famed for
developing the Pokémon series.
Headquartered in Burbank, California, Insomniac Games Inc. has been named the best place
to work in America by Society for Human Resource Management and one of the best video
developers by IGN. Popular games from this company include Spyro the Dragon, Ratchet and
Crank, and Resistance.
Headquartered in Woodland Hills, Los Angeles, Infinity Ward is a subsidiary of Activision.
Popular video games by Infinity include the Call of Duty series.
Headquartered in both New York City, USA, and Windsor, UK, Take-Two Interactive
Software is a holding company with development studios in Toronto, Canada, and in North
America. Games published by its brands include Grand Theft Auto, Civilization, NBA 2K, and
Red Dead Redemption.
Headquartered in Paris, France, Gameloft is a video game development company that spe-
cializes in the mobile games market. Its products include Hero of Sparta, Castle of Magic, and
mobile versions of several Assassin’s Creed games.
Headquartered in Rockville, Maryland, ZeniMax Media Inc. publishes popular video
games such as the Doom, The Elder Scrolls, Fallout, and Dishonored series. It is now owned by
Microsoft.
Headquartered in Seoul, South Korea, NCSOFT has subsidiaries in several parts of the world
and has developed massively multiplayer online role-playing games such as Lineage and Guild
Wars.
Headquartered in Irvine, California, Blizzard Entertainment has been a subsidiary of
Activision Blizzard since 2008. The company has popular video games such as Diablo, Starcraft,
World of Warcraft, and Overwatch.
EXHIBIT 6 A Sampling of Companies that Produce Video Games
Company Home Country Popular Games
Zynga USA Farm Ville, Zynga Poker, ChefVille
Nexon Co. Ltd Japan Nexus: Kingdom of the Winds, Shattered Galaxy, MapleStory
Konami Holdings Japan Scramble, Super Cobra, Frogger, Dance Dance Revolution
Bethesda Game Studios USA Oblivion, Skyrim, Fallout 3, Fallout 4, Fallout 76
Double Fine Productions USA Broken Age, Psychonauts, Brutal Legend
IC Company Russia Cliffs of Dover, Theatre of War, Hard Truck 2
Intelligent Systems Japan Fire Emblem, Paper Mario
Conclusion
11 Bit’s forthcoming Project 8 game is based on the Unreal Engine, not a self-developed one.
In fact, on February 23, 2021, 11 Bit announced that the company is discontinuing further work
on its own engine, which means that new productions of 11 Bit games will be based solely on
third-party solutions.
In addition to Project 8, 11 Bit is engaged in prototype work on a game with the code name
Dolly Project (formerly Project 9) and a game code-named Eleanor Project (formerly Project 10).
The company’s strategy for the next few years is to have three in-house development teams that
are comparable in size (about 60–70 people each). Given an average production cycle of about 3–4
years for each game, with three teams, 11 Bit desires to release one proprietary title a year.
CASE 6 • 11 BIT STuDIOS S.A.—2022 441
11 Bit is regularly updating and improving its existing games and developing DLCs to spur
revenues. In June 2020, 11 Bit announced Chinese NetEase would create a new version of
Frostpunk for mobile devices, so the game will soon be offered with the F2P model.
11 Bit anticipates that its publishing division will become an increasingly important con-
tributor to company revenues and profits. In 2021 and beyond, revenue delivered by the publish-
ing division from third-party developed titles will mainly include revenue from Moonlighter and
Children of Morta, as DLCs and new platform versions are under development, such as for iOS
and Android mobile devices.
11 Bit’s previous strategy for the publishing segment had assumed that a single project would
not consume more than PLN 2 million, but that cap has since increased to PLN 5 million. Now,
11 Bit wants to launch third-party developed games every quarter. At year-end 2020, 11 Bit had
four publishing agreements with third-party development teams.
11 Bit needs a clear strategic plan to guide its top management decisions in the coming
months and years. Recall from the case that the company desires to strengthen its affiliations
with third-party video game developers. If your strategic analysis supports this strategy, where
and how should the company do this? Note also that the company’s organizational structure is
not clear, despite the fast pace with which the firm continues to grow. Would a divisional struc-
ture by product, region, customer, or device be effective, and why? Develop projected financial
statements for 11 Bit to reveal the expected impact of your recommendations on the company’s
finances.
Reference
1. 11 Bit Studio, Annual Report of 11 Bit Studios S.A. for 2020, ir.11bitstudios.com/wp-
content/uploads/2021/05/Annual-Report-of-11-bit-studios-for-2020.pdf.
442 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
JPMorgan & Chase Co.—2018
www.jpmorgan.com , JPM
Headquartered in New York City, JPMorgan Chase (JPM) is one of the oldest financial institu- tions in the world. JPM is the world’s sixth largest bank by total assets of over $2.6 trillion, and the second most valuable bank based in market capitalization. JPM offers services in investment banking, financial services for consumers and small businesses, commercial banking, financial transaction processing, and asset management. JPM has over 240,000 employees, with op- erations in 60 countries worldwide. Based on total assets, JPM ranks first in banking industry market share with about 14 percent, and second in total domestic deposits of about $1.8 billion.
JPM’s revenues have increased every year to almost $100 billion in 2017. JPM’s stock is one of
the 30 components of the Dow Jones Industrial Average. The hedge fund unit of JPM is one of
the largest hedge funds in the United States.
JPM operates under two principle brands, 1) JPMorgan and 2) Chase. The JPMorgan brand focuses
on large multinational corporations, governments, wealthy individuals, and institutional investors. The
Chase brand is further divided into two distinct segments: 1) consumer business and 2) commercial
banking business. The Chase consumer business includes such businesses as traditional bank branches,
ATMs, credit cards, home finance, retirement, investing, and merchant services, among others. The
Chase commercial banking business includes such areas as business credit, corporate client banking,
commercial term lending, and community development. The two JPM brands overlap so much in
terms of regions and products that the company does not report revenues/income by the two brands.
Copyright by Fred David Books LLC; written by Forest R. David.
History
Dating back to 1799, JPM is one of the oldest financial institutions in the world. The heritage of
the House of Morgan traces its roots to the partnership of Drexel, Morgan & Co., which in 1895
was renamed JPMorgan & Co. Arguably the most influential financial institution of its era, JPM
financed the formation of the United States Steel Corporation, which took over the business of
Andrew Carnegie and others and was the world’s first billion-dollar corporation. In 1895, JPM
supplied the United States government with $62 million in gold to float a bond issue and restore
the treasury surplus of $100 million. In 1892, the company began to finance the New York, New
Haven, and Hartford Railroad and led it through a series of acquisitions that made it the domi-
nant railroad transporter in New England.
In 2004, JPM merged with Chicago-based Bank One Corp., bringing on board current chair-
man and CEO Jamie Dimon as president and COO, and designating him as former CEO William
Harrison, Jr.’s successor. Dimon’s pay was pegged at 90 percent of Harrison’s. Dimon quickly
made his influence felt by embarking on a cost-cutting strategy, and replaced former JPM execu-
tives in key positions with Bank One executives—many of whom were with Dimon at Citigroup.
Dimon became CEO and Chairman of JPM in 2006.
JPM has acquired over 1,200 financial institutions over its life. The acquisition responsible
for the current name of the company was in 2000 when J.P. Morgan & Co. merged with The
Chase Manhattan Corp. In 2010, JPM acquired Cazenove, an advisory and underwriting joint
venture established in 2004 in the United Kingdom. Since 2010, JPM has refrained from making
acquisitions that had historically been its trademark.
Vision/Mission JPM’s actual vision statement (paraphrased) is as follows: “We strive to be the best financial
services company on the planet.”
JPM’s actual mission statement (paraphrased) is as follows: “We strive to be the worldwide
leader in financial services offering a complete platform of products. Our clients include individu-
als, companies, institutional investors, hedge funds, governments, and municipalities in more than
100 countries.”
CASE 7 • JPMORGAN & CHASE CO.—2018 443
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure In January 2018, JPM appointed Daniel Pinto, CEO of its Corporate & Investment Bank, and
Gordon Smith, CEO of Consumer & Community Banking, co-presidents and co-chief operat-
ing officers of the company, continuing to report to Jamie Dimon, Chairman and CEO. Perhaps
those appointments are part of a broader shift within JPM to a strategic business unit (SBU type
organizational structure whereby numerous by-product or by-region executives report to Pinto
and Smith).
1. Jamie Dimon, Chairman of the Board and CEO
2. Mary Callahan, Erdoes Asset and Wealth Management CEO
3. Douglas Petno, Commercial Banking CEO
4. Daniel Pinto, Corporate and Investment Bank CEO
5. Gordon Smith, Consumer and Community Banking CEO
6. Ashley Bacon, Chief Risk Officer
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
7. Lori Beer, Chief Information Officer
8. Stacey Friedman, General Counsel
9. Marianne Lake, CFO
10. Robin Leopold, Head of Human Resources
11. Peter Scher, Head of Corporate Responsibility
EXHIBIT 1 JPM’s Top Executives and Organizational Chart
Source: Based on company documents.
Current Strategies JPM is utilizing a growth strategy and aggressively buying back stock. In 2017, JPM repurchased
about $14 billion in treasury stock. JPM is heavily investing in technology, spending nearly $10
billion on technology in 2016 with $3 billion dedicated solely toward new initiatives, such as
opening new accounts from a mobile phone, mobile investment advice, and improved ability to
buy and sell stocks online. JPM invested about $20 billion from the new tax law passed in 2017,
using much of this money to open 400 new branches across the United States. In February 2018,
JPM increased wages for retail banking employees (tellers and similar jobs) from an average of
$14.25 to $16.50 per hour—a 16 percent increase. The company also expanded home lending to
low- to moderate-income customers from $7.7 billion to $50 billion. JPM plans to increase its
philanthropic donations by 40 percent to $1.75 billion through 2022.
Finance JPM’s recent income statements and balance sheets are provided in Exhibit 2 and Exhibit 3
respectively. Note the 4.14 percent increase in revenues in 2017, but the slight decline in net
income. Also notice in Exhibit 3 that JPM did not sell additional shares of stock in 2017 to raise
capital, nor did the company increase its long-term debt—so all financing basically came from
internally generated net income.
Segment Data JPM operates under four main business segments: Consumer & Community Banking, Corporate
& Investment Banking, Commercial Banking, and Asset & Wealth Management. According to
Exhibit 4, Consumer & Community Banking reports the largest revenues based on year-end
2017 data with Corporate & Investment Banking generating the largest profits. Commercial
Banking has the largest profit margin at 40 percent.
Consumer & Community Banking As the largest division of JPM, Consumer & Community Banking revenues grew from $45 billion
in 2016 to just over $46 billion in 2017, but net income dropped $300 million to $9.4 billion. The
division has relationships with almost half the households in the United States, with 70 percent
444 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Income Statement 12/31/16 12/31/17 Percent Change
Revenues $95,668 $99,624 4.14%
Cost of Goods Sold 0 0 NA NA
Gross Profit 95,668 99,624 4.14%
Operating Expenses 61,132 63,724 4.24%
Interest Expense 0 0 NA NA
EBIT 34,536 35,900 3.95%
EBT 34,536 35,900 3.95%
Tax 9,803 11,459 16.89%
Non-Recurring Events 0 0 NA NA
Net Income 24,733 24,441 0.01%
EXHIBIT 2 JPM’s Income Statements (in millions USD)
Source: Based on company documents.
Balance Sheet 12/31/16 12/31/17 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments $880,989 $917,093 4%
Accounts Receivable 52,330 67,729 29%
Inventory 0 0 NA NA
Other Current Assets 0 0 NA NA
Total Current Assets 933,319 984,822 6%
Property Plant & Equipment 14,131 14,159 0%
Goodwill 47,288 47,288 0%
Intangibles 6,958 7,164 3%
Other Long-Term Assets 1,489,276 1,480,167 -1%
Total Assets 2,490,972 2,533,600 2%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 190,543 189,383 -1%
Other Current Liabilities 1,575,288 1,654,720 5%
Total Current Liabilities 1,765,831 1,844,103 4%
Long-Term Debt 295,245 284,080 -4%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 175,706 149,724 -15%
Total Liabilities 2,236,782 2,277,907 2%
Equity
Common Stock 4,105 4,105 0%
Retained Earnings 162,440 177,676 9%
Treasury Stock (28,854) (42,595) 48%
Paid in Capital & Other 116,499 116,507 0%
Total Equity 254,190 255,693 1%
Total Liabilities and Equity 2,490,972 2,533,600 2%
EXHIBIT 3 JPM’s Balance Sheets (in millions USD)
Source: Based on company documents.
CASE 7 • JPMORGAN & CHASE CO.—2018 445
of these households using the bank as their primary bank. About 80 percent of Chase households
with a mortgage initiated the mortgage from another bank, although this number may reduce in the
future as rates are now rising; there is less of a need for buying out existing mortgages with likely
lower rates. The division has claims to have the top-rated mobile banking app, ATM network, and
most visited banking portal in the United States. The division had 26 million active mobile custom-
ers in 2016, with these customers spending 90 percent more than customers who do not engage in
digital banking; mobile customers increased 16 percent in 2016 as the firm looks to attract more to
mobile options. The division also plans to significantly expand its over 5,000 branches by nearly
10 percent in the coming years. Services provided by the division include: traditional banking,
business banking, mortgages, credit cards, auto loans, and merchant processing services for busi-
nesses accepting credit cards. The credit card business at Chase increased new accounts by 20 per-
cent in 2016, but sales volume only increased 10 percent. This was possibly due to the new Chase
Freedom Unlimited card and the Amazon Prime card. Chase’s new Sapphire Reserve credit card
exceeded the annual target of customers in only 2 weeks, but the average customer has a FICO
score above 785 with deposit including stock investments in excess of $800,000. Auto loans and
mortgages were up 16 and 14 percent, respectively, in 2016, with foreclosures down 36 percent.
Corporate & Investment Bank The Corporate & Investment Bank is the second largest division at JPM with 2017 revenues in
excess of $34 billion. The division reported record profits of $10.8 billion in 2016, up 34 percent
from 2015. They did not increase profits in 2017, but maintained profits at $10.8 billion and saw
revenue drop $700 million. The relatively flat increases in revenues and profits for the division
is partly explained by the flat year of mergers and acquisitions in 2016, which JPM suggests
was even lower than 2015. The bank still completed more merger and acquistion (M&A) deals
in 2016 than any other U.S. bank and was number-two in global deals created. The division
predicts emerging markets will account for over 70 percent of worldwide GDP growth up from
40 percent currently. In addition to specializing in M&As, the division is also the leader of debt
capital for U.S. nonprofits, governments, states, universities, and municipalities—extending $90
billion to these clients in 2016. The division led over 340 equity underwriting deals for IPOs in
2016, making it the only global bank to gain market share during this difficult time period.
Commercial Banking Commercial Banking enjoyed record revenue in 2017 of $8.6 billion, up from $7.5 billion in
2016, accompanied by a record net income of $3.5 billion, up 29 percent from 2016. The divi-
sion invested more than ever before in 2016 in technology, data, and other key capabilities with
plans to devote increased capital to wholesale payment platforms, data, and technology moving
$0
$5,000
$10,000
$15,000
$20,000
$25,000
$30,000
$35,000
$40,000
$45,000
$50,000
Consumer &
Community
Banking
Corporate &
Investment
Banking
Commercial
Banking
Asset &
Wealth
Management
Revenues Profits
$46,485
$9,395
$34,493
$10,813 $8,605
$3,539
$12,918
$2,337
2017 Divisional Financial Data
EXHIBIT 4 JPM’s Segment Data (in millions USD)
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Q4 Report and other data.
446 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
forward. The Commercial Banking division has a partnership with the Corporate & Investment
Bank division at JPM, working on various issues together. In 2016, the firms worked to launch
new digital platforms designed to aid small- to medium-sized companies. The division plans to
focus on market penetration by opening offices in eight new markets. The division focuses on
business banking for small- to medium-sized firms, and offers many of the same services as the
Consumer & Community Banking division, rather targeted at businesses.
Asset & Wealth Management This division enjoyed $900 million in revenue growth in 2017 accounting for a 7.5 percent gain
and profits of $2.3 billion. With direct relationships with 60 percent of the largest pension funds,
wealth funds, and central banks in the world and 50 percent of the wealthiest individuals, the
division is well positioned to serve large customers. However, the Asset & Wealth Management
division also provides advice to over 1 million U.S. families through Chase Wealth Management,
balancing out the division with a wide range of customers in various economic positions. The
division grew its office spending by 14 percent and retained over 95 percent of its top talent.
Competitors
JPM has over 5,000 competitors, ranging from hundreds of small local banks to multinational
peers such as Bank of America and Wells Fargo, that are compared to JPM in Exhibit 5. There is
a notable difference in net incomes and the resulting EPS ratios. JPM has a higher market cap,
more revenue, net income, and a significantly larger EPS than both its top rivals.
Bank of America Corporation (BAC) Bank of America serves individuals, businesses, institutional investors and large corporations
and governments worldwide on a variety of financial needs. The company traces its roots back
to 1904 and is headquartered in Charlotte, North Carolina. With over 209 thousand employees,
Bank of America reported 2017 revenues in excess of $87 billion. The company operates in over
35 countries and all 50 U.S. states with a footprint that includes 80 percent of the U.S. popula-
tion. Bank of America has over 16,000 ATMs and 34 million accounts with 25 million mobile
users and 5,500 branches.
The company serves over 3 million small business owners and is considered the global leader
in investment banking and trading. By some metrics, Bank of America is the second largest bank
in the United States. The organization is made up of Bank of America, Merrill Lynch, US Trust,
and Bank of America Merrill Lynch and offers eight lines of businesses. These include retail,
preferred and small business, Merrill Lynch Wealth Management, and US Trust for individual
consumers. For companies, they offer businesses in business banking, global commercial bank-
ing, and global corporate and investment banking. For institutional investors, global markets are
provided. Investment management, brokerage, banking, trust, and retirement products are many
of the services that are provided to their customers.
Wells Fargo & Company (WFC) Founded in 1852, Wells Fargo today has assets that total over $1.9 trillion. The company offers
banking, insurance, investments, mortgage, and consumer and commercial financial services.
They provide their 70 million customers with over 8,400 locations, 13,000 ATMs, online and
mobile support. Wells Fargo has 286,000 employees in 42 countries around the world. They rank
third in total deposits, third in total assets, fifth as the biggest public company in the world, and
JPM Bank of America Wells Fargo
$ Market Cap. 398B 331B 322B
# Employees 253K 209K 263K
$ Revenue 99.6B 87.4B 94.1B
$ Net Income 24.4B 18.2B 21.9B
$ EPS Ratio 6.31 1.56 4.10
$ P/E Ratio 18.39 20.63 16.08
EXHIBIT 5 Comparing JPM with Two Rival Companies
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
CASE 7 • JPMORGAN & CHASE CO.—2018 447
twenth-fifth as the biggest company by revenue in the United States. They have numerous inno-
vated rewards and have been selected as number-one in overall mobile performance, functional-
ity, ease of use, quality and availability, and best app and mobile web experience. Wells Fargo
has been the number-one largest workplace employee giving campaign in the United States for 8
consecutive years. They are also considered the number-one retail mortgage lender.
One of the largest acquisitions in banking history in 2008 was the Wells Fargo acquisition of
Wachovia, giving this California-based bank an increased presence on the east coast, much like
Bank of America’s acquisition of NationsBank.
External Issues
Industry Overview The banking industry in the last decade has experienced a decline in the number of branch lo-
cations that each banking organization owns. As indicated in Exhibit 6, the number of commer-
cial banks with branches in the United States was over 14,000 from 1975 to 1985. This number
fell to less than 6,000 in 2014 and has since fallen to just over 5,000 in 2017. Single office
banks declined from 10,000 down to less than 2,000 from 1966 to 2014. The decline has been
brought upon because of rapid technological advancements. The ease of doing mobile deposits
and transfers without having to go to a branch has persuaded customers to demand more online
banking offerings. Many banks now offer more convenient hours to service their customers.
The increase in mobile and online banking has brought upon other issues such as cybercrime.
Cyber criminals today can more easily steal one’s identity and money from a financial institution. This
has created bigger challenges for banks to come up with better ways of protecting the customers’ money.
Banking Industry Services Breakdown The banking industry is categorized into several distinct areas which mirror the four divisions
JPM operates under. Top industries within the U.S. banking industry include: Commercial
Banking, Credit Card Issuing, Investment Banking, Securities Brokering, and Financial
Planning. The commercial banking industry includes over 5,000 competitors in the U.S alone.
Annual revenues total over $575 billion with profits of over $120 billion. Growth has been slow
at around 1 percent but with the widening of the yield curve, growth is expected to increase to
over 2 percent through 2023. The industry offers real estate loans, deposit services, commercial
EXHIBIT 6 Number of Commercial Banks in the U.S.
16,000 Number of Commercial Banks in the U.S.
14,000
12,000
10,000
8,000
6,000
4,000
2,000
1990 1996 2002 2008 2014
Single-Office Banks Banks with Branches
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
448 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
loans, credit card loans, and other products. Of the $575 billion in industry revenues, deposits
account for approximately $200 billion and real estate loans account for just over $100 billion of
revenues. Deposits include traditional bank accounts and retirement accounts.
Banks make money on various fees and lending money to others at higher rates than they
are paying the depositor. Income from customer deposits and fees on “everything” are the life-
blood of the overall banking industry. This industry most closely aligns with JPM’s Consumer &
Community Banking Division.
JPM is active in the credit card business, issuing new cards in 2016 including the Chase
Sapphire Reserve and Chase Freedom cards. The credit card business has grown around 1.5 per-
cent recently with annual growth nearing 3 percent through 2013, as forecasted. Only 7 percent
of profits in this industry are derived from fees charged to the cardholder including: annual fees,
late payment fees, non-usage fees, and other fees. With increased competition, charging annual
fees may become a revenue stream of the past moving forward. Far and away the largest seg-
ment of income for credit card firms is interest income, accounting for around 60 percent of all
income. The remaining balance of 33 percent is mostly derived from fees charged to merchants
when customers use their card. There is increased competition among credit card issuers to at-
tract new customers with cards that return increased points or bonuses for spending, which in
turn have higher fees on the merchant that are in excess of the points provided to the buyer. For
now, this strategy has worked well for banks, but large merchants such as Walmart and other ma-
jor players have tremendous bargaining power, and can even create their own cards and possibly
even become a “bank” themselves if credit card fees become too high. For example, in 2018,
Starbucks and Chase released a new Starbucks Visa Card. But for now, firms like JPM continue
to offer cards with attractive rewards as a means to attract customers and increase their revenues
from fees charged to merchants.
The investment banking and securities business in the United States is a $130 billion industry
with profits of $38 billion and growth through 2023 expected around 2.8 percent. Underwriting
services on both debt and equity account for 35 percent of industry revenues. The large invest-
ment banks often serve as middlemen for firms looking to raise capital through both mediums.
Advising fees for direction on mergers, divestitures, restructurings, and other such activities
account for 22 percent of revenues, along with trading related services also accounting for 22
percent of industry revenues. Trading services include fixed income services, futures exchanges,
stock trading, and other activities generally for large volume clients. JPM has a few different com-
petitors in this industry along with Bank of America, Morgan Stanley, Citigroup, and Goldman
Sachs; all are large competitors with market shares between 9 and 11 percent. JPM is the market
leader with a 12 percent market share with Bank of America having a 10 percent market share.
Securities brokering and financial planning are other key industries in the banking industry
accounting for over $200 billion in 2016 revenues. The key competitors are Bank of America
and Wells Fargo.
Increased Consolidation Between 2015 and the middle of 2017, 23 bank mergers in the United States were announced
accounting for $300 billion in assets, with 10 of these deals announced in the first half of 2017.
Banks are not simply buying smaller local banks, but increasingly are looking to purchase online
banks. JPM lost a bidding war with Vantiv to acquire Worldpay for $10 billion. Much of the ac-
quisition activity is expected to be among mid to smaller banks moving forward, as the top four
banks in the United States are near the FDIC deposit limits. This however, will not seriously im-
pact the four largest banks from acquiring other financial players who offer services not directly
tied to deposits.
Regulations Following the 2007 to 2009 financial crisis, in 2010, then president Obama signed the Dodd-
Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act that affects all aspects of the financial
industry. Provisions include: prohibition of proprietary trading, restrictions on who can own
hedge funds, establishing the Financial Stability Oversight Council, elimination of the Office
of Thrift Supervision, and much more. The new regulations are expected to greatly increase the
fees all financial institutions must pay. Provisions of Dodd-Frank aim to avoid situations where
large banks (such as AIG and Citigroup) are bailed out by the government because they are “too
CASE 7 • JPMORGAN & CHASE CO.—2018 449
big to fail.” Dodd-Frank did ease public perception and opinion of the financial crisis and may in
fact apply to middle-sized firms. However, recent research reveals that the largest institutions are
so interconnected worldwide that, should a similar financial situation arise again, world govern-
ments again would be forced to save these behemoths.
There is increased hope today within the banking industry that President Trump will increas-
ingly deregulate the industry in hopes of accelerating growth. As of early 2018, no major dereg-
ulation changes have been enacted, however, Treasury Secretary Mnuchin and Federal Reserve
Chair Janet Yellen support adjustments to many of the current regulations placed on banks.
Key regulators of banks include the Federal Reserve System (Fed), Federal Deposit Insurance
Corp. (FDIC), Office of the Comptroller of the Currency (OCC), Consumer Financial Protection
Bureau (CFPB), and state regulatory agencies.
Annual Stress Test Large banks in the United States are subject to an annual stress test performed by the Federal
Reserve System to ensure banks are able to better handle adverse market conditions, such as the
ones experienced during the recession in 2009. The shakedown includes probing dividend pay-
ments, lending activities, and stock repurchases. In 2016, all 34 banks under the stress test pro-
tocol passed the test, hopefully ensuring they are able to lend and operate even during a global
recession. A side benefit from the recent passing of all 34 banks, the Fed has allowed banks to
increase their dividends and repurchase shares.
Future
As Wells Fargo stumbles, JPM is capitalizing on their rival’s weakness. For Q1 2018, JPM re-
ported net revenue of $28.52 billion, up from $25.754 billion in Q1 2017; JPM’s Q1 2018 net
income was $8.712 billion, up from $6.448 billion in Q1 2017. Also for Q1 2018, JPM reported
that their client investment assets of $276 billion were up 13 percent from the prior quarter,
while the company’s credit card sales volume increased 12 percent and credit card merchant
processing volume increased 15 percent.
A recent Wall Street Journal article (February 28, 2018, p. B14) revealed that JPM plans to open
400 new bank branches over the coming 5 years, while entering 15 to 20 new markets (cities). For
all of 2017, JPM increased its commercial and industrial loan balances by 8 percent, compared to
1 percent growth for all commercial banks. Marianne Lake, JPM’s CFO, says the company will
keep buying back its own stock, even though the stock price increased 31 percent in 2017, com-
pared to a 20 percent increase for all Nasdaq banks.
Both JPM and Bank of America believe that to bring in disgruntled Wells Fargo custom-
ers the companies needs new branch offices. JPM already has branches in 23 states, but lacks
branches in some key areas such as Philadelphia, Boston, and Washington, D.C. Similarly,
Bank of America is opening more than 500 branches between 2018 and 2021, led by substantial
growth in Cincinnati, Cleveland, and Columbus, Ohio. Both JPM and BOA are also closing
branches in some areas, so the net effect of new brick-and-mortar branches will likely stay even
for each company over the next few years.
JPM needs a clear strategic plan to maintain, and hopefully improve, its excellent financial
performance as reported in 2017.
450 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
PPB Group Berhad—2022
www.ppbgroup.com
Headquartered in Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia, PPB Group Berhad (PPB) is a conglomerate with
a wide range of businesses that includes food production, agriculture, waste management, and
movie cinemas. FFM owns and operates the largest flour milling business in Malaysia and has
a total milling capacity of 2,550 megatons daily. Flour and animal feed–milling is PPB’s largest
revenue generating segment and includes FFM Berhad, an 80-percent-owned subsidiary of PPB.
FFM is also a large animal-feed supplier in Malaysia and operates mills in Vietnam, Thailand,
and China.
Another subsidiary of PPB is Golden Screen Cinemas (GSC), the largest cinema chain in
Malaysia and a distributor of Chinese, English, and various foreign-language films to cinemas
and television channels in the region. Another subsidiary still, Chemquest, provides water treat-
ment and waste-management solutions for cities and communities in Malaysia. PPB is also in the
property management and investment business through its subsidiary Hartabina, which owns and
manages the Cheras Leisure Mall and Ceras Plaza in Cheras and the New World Park in Penang.
Through Hartabina, PPB is also involved in developing Puteri Harbour and Iskandar Malaysia.
PPB also owns about 20 percent of Wilmar International, a Singapore-based company that is the
largest palm-oil trader in the world.
Having diversified operations throughout Southeast Asia, PPB needs a clear strategic plan
for the best allocation of its available resources across its numerous endeavors, products, and
regions.
History
PPB was founded in 1968 in the northern Malaysian state of Perlis as Perlis Plantations Berhad
(hence the derivation of its current name) by Robert Kuok, who wanted to cultivate and mill sug-
arcane. A closer precursor to PPB was the rice wholesaler business Robert Kuok and his brother
Phillip opened in Malaysia in 1948, after which they soon began acquiring sugar plantations. The
two brothers then founded Federal Flour Mills (FFM). By the end of the 1960s, the Kuok broth-
ers controlled an estimated 10 percent of the world’s sugar supply, earning them the nickname
“the Sugar Kings.” In 1972, PPB went public and initiated substantial business in Singapore.
PPB divested its sugar business in 2009. Today, PPB is highly diversified, but its main business
is to supply flour to downstream food-producers primarily through FFM. The Kuok family in
Malaysia retains control of the company with a 50.8 percent shareholding.
Vision and Mission
PPB’s vision and mission statements are overly broad and leave the reader with little knowledge
of the firm’s business. The firm may be better off with a clear focus from both the vision and
mission to guide its business operations. The vision and mission statements can be viewed in the
annual report available at the company’s website, in the “Financial Performance” section: www.
ppbgroup.com .
Vision Statement The PPB vision statement, given on the corporate website, describes its goal as becoming a mar-
ket leader in its core businesses by delivering quality products and services.
Mission Statement The PPB mission statement, given on the corporate website, lists three objectives, which are to
be achieved with social and environmental responsibility: reinforcement of its leadership posi-
tion in Malaysia, regional expansion, and investment in activities that facilitate these goals.
CASE 8 • PPB GROuP BERHAD—2022 451
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure PPB appears to function with a centralized organizational design as their 2020 Annual Report
does not list presidents of segments as being top executives. The top executives of PPB are listed
and arrayed in Exhibit 1:
1
2 3 4 5 6 7
1. Lim Soon Huat, Managing Director of PPB Group
2. Jeremy Good Kin Wai, Director and General Manager of FFM
3. Low Eng Hooi, CEO of PPB Properties
4. Yap Choi Foong, CFO of PPB Group
5. Ir Leong Yew Weng, Managing Director of Chemquest Sdn Bhd
6. Koh Mei Lee, CEO of Golden Screen Cinemas, and Head of Corporate Affairs, PPB Group
7. Amanda Oh Sok Tuan, Chief Human Resources Officer, PPB Group
EXHIBIT 1 PPB’s Top Executives
Source: Based on information in PPB’s 2020 Annual Report, pp. 67–70.
Some analysts would content that PPB should revise its organizational structure to become
more decentralized, thereby delegating more effective accountability and responsibility for each
segment to a president of those operations. An alternative design would be divisional-by- region,
but this would likely necessitate too much varied competencies across too many products.
However, a structure based on strategic business units (SBUs) could serve the company well
moving forward.
Finance Exhibit 2 reveals the income statements for PPB (RM stands for ringgit Malaysia; ringgit is the
Malaysian currency). Note a large drop in revenues—blamed mostly on the closure of many the-
ater businesses during 2020—but a large increase in net income during 2020. It is interesting to
note that the revenues provided align closely with the business segments of Grains & Agribusiness,
Consumer Products, Film Exhibition & Distribution, and Environmental Engineering & Utilities
and Property. However, the corresponding net income derived from these segments does not
match the reported net income on the income statements. According to the Annual Report, PPB
has many subsidiaries located in China that focus on Grains & Agribusiness, and it is possible
that the net income from these businesses is reflected in the line item non-recurring events.
However, in the case of PPB, these events can be expected to recur provided the terms of the
subsidiaries remain. These businesses are hinted at in the “Other Business” discussion in the
Segments section.
Exhibit 3 reveals the firm’s balance sheets. Of particular interest is the current ratio of nearly
3.2 and cash totaling more than plant property and equipment. The firm also has relatively low
long-term debt, low goodwill, and even low inventory levels. All can be viewed as attractive de-
pending on aspirations of the firm and the strategic path it is undertaking.
Segments
Grains & Agribusiness: Flour Milling PPB’s Grains and Agribusiness segment operates through FFM Berhad, which is an 80-percent
subsidiary of PPB with four principles businesses: 1) Flour Milling, 2) Animal Feed Milling,
3) Livestock Farming, and 4) Organic Fertilizers. In total, this segment experienced a revenue
452 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 2 PPB’s Income Statements (in thousands of RM)
Source: Based on PPB’s 2020 Annual Report, pp. 90–91.
Income Statement 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Revenues $4,683,776 $4,190,690 –11%
Cost of Goods Sold 4,053,680 3,760,894 –7%
Gross Profit 630,096 429,796 –32%
Operating Expenses 359,308 326,886 –9%
EBIT 270,788 102,910 –62%
Interest Expense 33,814 28,683 –15%
EBT 236,974 74,227 –69%
Tax 72,366 57,511 –21%
Non-Recurring Events 1,034,654 1,346,706 30%
Net Income 1,199,262 1,363,422 14%
EXHIBIT 3 PPB’s Balance Sheets (in thousands of RM)
Source: Based on PPB’s 2020 Annual Report, pp. 92–93.
Balance Sheet 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short Term Investments $1,500,909 $1,420,341 –5%
Accounts Receivable 752,164 768,361 2%
Inventory 802,513 658,626 –18%
Other Current Assets 95,338 147,034 54%
Total Current Assets 3,150,924 2,994,362 –5%
Property Plant & Equipment 1,337,417 1,320,984 –1%
Goodwill 73,704 71,201 –3%
Intangibles 9,202 7,704 –16%
Other Long-Term Assets 19,008,510 20,489,407 8%
Total Assets 23,579,757 24,883,658 6%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 647,363 367,732 –43%
Other Current Liabilities 438,000 565,954 29%
Total Current Liabilities 1,085,363 933,686 –14%
Long-Term Debt 232,072 264,768 14%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 131,531 138,759 5%
Total Liabilities 1,448,966 1,337,213 –8%
Equity
Common Stock 1,429,314 1,429,314 0%
Retained Earnings 17,180,017 18,012,433 5%
Treasury Stock 0 0 NA NA
Paid in Capital & Other 3,521,460 4,104,698 17%
Total Equity 22,130,791 23,546,445 6%
Total Liabilities and Equity 23,579,757 24,883,658 6%
CASE 8 • PPB GROuP BERHAD—2022 453
reduction of less than 1 percent in fiscal 2020, but profits were up 28 percent due to lower raw ma-
terial cost and a higher share of profits from associates. The segment generated 76 percent of fiscal
2020 revenues and 19 percent of profits. For the purposes of this case and to avoid confusion, PPB
will be used throughout, as they are the parent company and the majority owners of FFM Berhad.
The flour-milling business has a Malaysian capacity of over 2,800 metric tons daily, operating
through 5 flour mills strategically located in Malaysia, making it Malaysia’s largest flour miller.
It also has 2 flour mills in Vietnam, 1 in Thailand (with a capacity of 670 metric tons per day)
through a 43 percent stake in Kerry Flour Mills Ltd., and 1 in Indonesia. In addition, PPB controls
a 20 percent stake in 9 associates in China, with a combined capacity of 17,550 metric tons a day,
resulting in a controlling stake in China overall (as opposed to all flour mills in the country) that
exceeds the firm’s production output in its home market of Malaysia. However, it appears data
from China may not be included in the financials of this segment on the Annual Report.
The mills generate many products from the wheat flour, including bread, noodles, biscuits,
and cakes. In addition, several of the flour products are considered specialties, such as whole
meal or semolina, while other flour products are marketed as improvers or premixes for bread
and cakes. By late 2021, PPB expected to double its capacity in the production of flour in
Vietnam.
Grains & Agribusiness: Animal Feed In 1981, PPB entered the animal feed business with a modest capacity of 10,000 metric tons of
feed annually, but today this business has a capacity of over 2,200 metric tons per day across 5
mills in Malaysia, making the firm a major provider of feed in the country. The different types
of feed are marketed under the brand names Friendship and Five Rings and available in three
distinct forms: mash, crumble, and pellet. Products are tailored to meet the individual diets of
the intended animals, which include broilers, poultry, duck, ruminants, quail, and rabbit. PPB is
currently saving costs by including lower-cost feed ingredients in its products.
Grains & Agribusiness: Livestock Farming In 1993, PPB forward integrated into broiler day-old chicks and eggs. Under the brand name
“Swarney Select,” PPB is able to produce over 3 million day-old chicks every month in 2 farms lo-
cated in Malaysia. The farms are both closed-housing facilities, which limits the spread of diseases
commonly associated with raising poultry. The firm’s chicken farms have the capacity to produce
20 million eggs a month and are marketed under the brand names Seri Murni, Seri Murni Fresh
Eggs, and Seri Murni Premium Eggs. Over 2020, this segment explored new markets and sales
channels, including new ways to brand existing products. Historically, Malaysia has one of the
highest poultry and egg consumption populations in the world per capita. However, this business is
a difficult one in Malaysia because of overproduction, cheaper imported frozen chicken, and gov-
ernmental price controls on chicken during holiday seasons. With the rise in government regulations
and as independent farmers join cooperatives, the pressure on raising poultry continues to rise.
Grains & Agribusiness: Organic Fertilizers Composted chicken manure is a byproduct of raising and growing chickens, enabling PPB to
also produce organic fertilizer. Bags are sold under the brand name Organic in 25-kilo quantities,
which suggests untapped potential for smaller-volume customers.
Film Exhibition and Distribution The Film Exhibition and Distribution (FE&D) segment of PPB includes the following activities:
1. Film Exhibition: Golden Screen Cinemas (GSC) has 339 screens at 33 locations in
Malaysia, plus 18 locations and 108 screens in Vietnam.
2. Film Distribution: GSC Movies Sdn Bhd distributes films and TV shows in Malaysia,
Brunei, Vietnam, Myanmar, and Cambodia.
GSC’s 33 theaters and 339 screens in Malaysia make it the leading movie provider in the
country. A 40-percent stake in Vietnam-based Galaxy Studio extends PPB’s movie theater busi-
ness to this key regional market. Financial results associated with this division were likely harmed
by COVID-19 more than any other segment of PPB as box office revenue dropped by 85 percent
in Malaysia (and 71 percent in the global film industry). Golden Screen Cinemas has started
454 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
selling merchandise on Keepsake, an in-house platform for e-commerce, and is even delivering
snacks and movie treats to customers unable to visit the theaters in person. For the long-term,
GSC is optimistic the industry will continue to grow and be profitable. Reducing its dependence
on Hollywood, the firm is forward integrating to co-produce its own movies, made in Malaysia.
The new Happy Food Company concept being rolled out across its theaters provides customers
with new and exciting food and beverages to enjoy while watching the movies. In 2020, MBO,
formerly the third largest cinema in Malaysia, was purchased by GSC, adding 26 cinemas to the
GSC line if they choose to keep all of MBO’s properties in operation.
Environmental Engineering and Utilities Through its subsidiaries, PPB is a leading firm in water and sewage management in Malaysia.
For the long term, PPB is attempting to focus increasingly on cutting costs in the utilities seg-
ment through operational efficiency tactics, improvements in technologies, and working more
closely with project management teams.
The Environmental Engineering and Utilities (EE&U) segment of PPB is led by the
Chemquest Group, in which PPB has a 55-percent equity interest. This segment includes
1) water engineering, 2) solid waste management, 3) sewage treatment, and 4) flood mitigation.
Consumer Products Segment Many consumers in Southeast Asia will recognize brands owned by the Consumer Products
Segment of PPB. Currently, the products sold include bakery items, edible oils, and chilled and
frozen foods, which reach over 42,000 retail locations in Malaysia, served through 13 ware-
houses. Massimo, one of the more notable PPB brands, specializes in bakery items. During 2020,
PPB acquired BRF Foods GmbH, a processed-food manufacturer. PPB is currently seeking to
increase brand awareness and effect a slow shift toward providing more packaged and canned
products, particularly flour and frozen food, as demand for them is projected to grow. Two no-
table products introduced in 2020 are the Massimo Primo Sandwich Bun and Massimo Favorito
Lemon Krunch Cream Roll.
Property Segment PPB’s vision within the Property Segment is to continue to provide customers with trusted
property options that will improve local communities. Many of the properties in develop-
ment are high-rise buildings such as the Cheras Leisure Mall, The Whiteways Arcade, and
the most recent property, the Megah Rise, a condominium with 228 apartments and retail
space. Currently, managers of this division are increasing its online shopping options, and
the long-term plan is to acquire further land to develop both commercial and residential
properties, with a focus on high-rise style buildings to save space. This segment is focused
entirely on Malaysia.
Investments and Other Operations This segment of PPB includes diverse operations under the following headings:
1. Investment Holding & Trading: Chemquest Sdn Bld and Malayan Adhesives and
Chemicals Sdn Bld
2. Investment Holding: Masuma Trading Company, Hexarich Sdn Bdh, Orion Fund Pte Ltd.,
and Orion Fund II Pte Ltd.
3. IT Services: Eat (M) Sdn Bhd, Enterprise Advanced System Intelligence Pte Ltd., and Easi
Ticketing Sdn Bhd
4. Integrated Agribusiness: Wilmar International Limited
Exhibit 4 shows PPB’s revenues and profits by segment. Note that data is not provided for
investment and other operations, and a large percentage of the firm’s income could be derived
from the Investments and Other Operations segment. The two largest and most significant seg-
ments are Grains & Agribusiness and Film Exhibition & Distribution.
Exhibit 5 reveals that Malaysia accounts for 68 percent of PPB’s 2020 revenues, but revenues
were down over most regions in 2020. The Vietnam region enjoyed an increase of 12 percent in
revenues, which also correlates to this region being the fastest-growing country in the region by
some measures.
CASE 8 • PPB GROuP BERHAD—2022 455
EXHIBIT 4 PPB’s By-Segment Revenues and Profits in 2020 (in millions of RM)
Source: Based on information in PPB’s 2020 Annual Report, pp. 2–10 and 15.
Segment Revenue % Change % Profit % Change %
Grains & Agribusiness 3,300.0 76 Down 1 271.7 19.0 Up 28
Consumer Products 628.3 15 Up 1 31.5 02.0 Up 4,900
Film Exhibition & Distribution 114.3 03 Down 80 135.6 09.0 Down 100
Environmental Engineering & Utilities 189.5 04 Down 3 14.4 01.0 Up 28
Property 67.0 01 Up 4 3.9 00.3 Down 72
EXHIBIT 5 PPB’s By-Region Revenues and Profits in 2020 vs. 2019 (in thousands of RM)
Source: Based on information in PPB’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 164.
Region Revenue 2019 Revenue 2020 % Change
Malaysia 3,216,785 2,806,432 Down 12.8
Indonesia 745,712 651,867 Down 12.6
Vietnam 488,916 545,477 Up 11.6
Other ASEAN countries 176,829 126,806 Down 28.3
Other Asian countries 13,032 18,950 Up 45
Others 42,502 41,158 Down 3.1
Total 4,683,776 4,190,690 Down 10.5
Strategy PPB is a leading Grain & Agriculture business in Southeast Asia as well as a leading business
in cinemas. Unfortunately, the firm’s Environmental Engineering & Utilities and Property seg-
ments do not generate significant revenue. PPB’s second largest revenue generating segment is
its Consumer Products. Recall that the firm did not have a clear vision or mission statement and
may be conducting business in areas it should avoid. PPB has aggressively acquired other cinema
retailers and is actively adding capacity in milling and grains. According to the Annual Report,
the firm plans to expand its property business with malls and condos.
External Issues
Southeast Asia Region Snapshot The Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) was established in 1967 to promote eco-
nomic growth and stability in the region. ASEAN has 10 member states, but 6 countries account
for most of the growth and vitality of the organization: Indonesia, Malaysia, the Philippines,
Singapore, Thailand, and Vietnam. The growing macroeconomic climate in most Southeast
Asian countries is spurring a change in eating habits as there are more and more middle-income
and upper-middle-income consumers who seek more Western foods like pasta and baked goods
rather than a traditional diet dominated by rice.
ASEAN Countries Singapore is a republic of 5.7 million people and one of the world’s busiest transportation hubs for
container ports. Singapore’s international airport has over 5,000 weekly flights, and this country is
often ranked as the best in the world for ease of doing business. The people of Singapore are a mix
of Chinese, Malay, Indian, and Eurasian; they are generally highly educated and excellent business-
persons. Singapore’s GDP is forecast to grow annually by 2.3 percent through 2024.
With a population of about 270 million, Indonesia is composed of 17,000 islands, including
Java, Sumatra, Kalimantan, Sulawesi, Papua, Bali Lombok, and Komodo. Indonesia offers an
excellent business environment and a stable political system. About 60 percent of the country’s
456 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
population and economic activity are on the island of Java. The capital of Indonesia is Jakarta,
but there is an ongoing debate in the country about moving the capital from an overcrowded
Jakarta to Borneo, in the eastern part of the country. President Joko Widodo says the new capital
of Borneo will be very modern and green, and the move is likely to come to fruition in the year
2024. Indonesia’s GDP growth is forecast to reach 5.1 percent by 2024, as a steady decline in the
unemployment rate is fueling consumption of products and services. The expansion of special
economic zones (SEZs) is also benefiting the economy and all Indonesians.
Indonesia is spending Rp 466 trillion (about $33 billion) to move all government offices, the
military, police, and parliament to Borneo. However, Jakarta will remain the country’s financial
and commercial centerpiece. Indonesia has about 30 flour-milling companies with a production
capacity of about 15 million tons of flour.
The Philippines offers potential businesses and tourists a population of about 110 million and
a rapidly growing consumer market. Filipino employees are known worldwide for their profi-
ciency in English and their professionalism, work ethic, persistence, determination, and technical
skills. The Philippines’s capital is Manila, but the most populated city is Quezon City, and the
largest island is Luzon, followed by Mindanao. GDP growth in the Philippines is estimated to be
6.2 percent up to 2024 as the country’s labor market conditions are spurring consumption.
With Bangkok as its capital, Thailand is an economically and politically stable country with
about 70 million residents. Tourism accounts for about 20 percent of Thailand’s GDP, which is
estimated to be 3.2 percent up to 2024 as the country continually encourages capital formation
and investment.
With a population of about 100 million people, Vietnam has transformed in the last 10 years
from one of the poorest nations in the world to a rapidly growing place to do business. Unlike
many countries in the region, Vietnam allows 100 percent foreign ownership of businesses in
most sectors. Vietnam is rapidly building highways and seaports and offers relatively low tax
rates and other incentives for firms to initiate or expand operations in the country. Vietnam’s
GDP is forecast be about 6.5 up to 2024 due to a robust investment climate and its excellent
foreign investment strategies.
Malaysia Malaysia is arguably the most technologically advanced country in Southeast Asia. Malaysia
has the fourth largest economy in the region and the 36th largest economy in the world. Its main
industries include electronics, semiconductors, microchips, rubber, oleochemicals, automotives,
optical devices, pharmaceuticals, and medical equipment. With a population of about 32 million
people, the country’s GDP per capita is about $12,000. Malaysian companies export globally, but
especially to China, Singapore, Japan, Bangladesh, Hong Kong, Thailand, India, and the United
States. Malaysia’s GDP growth is forecast to reach 4.4 percent annually by 2024 as the country
continually improves its digital infrastructure.
The Malaysian economy contracted 5.6 percent in 2020, primarily due to constrictions on the
movement of people because of COVID-19, and the company’s cinema business was especially
hard hit. The country’s ease-of-doing-business rank globally was 12th (out of 190 countries) in
2020. Malaysia also has excellent natural resources and is the world’s 11th largest producer of
manganese, the 11th largest producer of tin, the 12th largest producer of bauxite, the 19th largest
producer of lime, and the 2nd largest producer of palm oil behind Indonesia. Malaysia has proven
oil reserves of about 5 billion barrels. Malaysia has an outstanding highway system and rail net-
work and more than 40 paved airports; it also has excellent access to the sea thanks to its location
on the Strait of Malacca, one of the busiest shipping lanes in the world. Malaysia’s Port Klang
and Port of Tanjung Pelepas are the 2nd and 3rd busiest ports in Southeast Asia behind Singapore.
Malaysia offers potential businesses and visitors a well-educated and highly diverse work-
force. The country has an excellent digital infrastructure and is a major regional hub for financial,
information and communications technology, and logistic sectors. Malaysia is a major tourist
destination as well.
Animal Feed The growth of populations and income levels in Southeast Asia presents a large opportunity for
firms engaging in all types of businesses, including agricultural businesses. According to the
United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), the region encompassing Indonesia, Malaysia,
the Philippines, Thailand, and Vietnam are currently importing soybean meal faster than any region
CASE 8 • PPB GROuP BERHAD—2022 457
in the world. In fact, according to the USDA, this region as well as Brunei, Cambodia, Laos,
Myanmar, and Singapore will import more soybean meal than European Union by 2022, making it
the number one importer of soybean meal in the world. Soybean meal is a key component in ani-
mal feed, but the region lacks factories that can crush the soybean into animal feed, which is both a
major opportunity and a threat. As such, soybean meal accounts for a larger percentage of imports
than whole soybeans. The foremost supplier of soybean to Southeast Asia is the United States,
with Brazil coming in second. Cheaper soybean has enabled many companies to produce healthier
livestock meals for animals. Malaysia, for example, is a country that has no soybean production
of its own and must import all soybeans for use. Other nations produce soybeans only marginally.
Similar patterns are present with corn as well, with the region being heavily reliant on imports.
Other grains—such as corn—are also rapidly increasing. Indonesia, Vietnam, and Malaysia
import more corn than any country other in this region. However, before competitors jump at the
opportunity, governments are implementing restrictions on imports. For example, the Philippines
has a tariff quota on corn imports, and Indonesia flat out limits the amount of corn that can be
imported.
Overall growth is strong in the region. The three wealthiest nations, in order, are Singapore,
Brunei, and Malaysia, followed by Thailand, Indonesia, Philippines, and Vietnam. GPD in
Singapore is around $12,000, which is double that of Thailand. Most GDP numbers in the region
are increasing approximately 3.5 percent, but Vietnam is growing at a faster rate of around 4.5
percent. Consumers in Indonesia, Malaysia, and Thailand tend to prefer chicken over pork (pork
is haram in Muslim-majority Malaysia), while many of the other nations listed above prefer pork
over chicken, especially Vietnam (and China). However, seafood is still the most popular meat
in the region.
Animal Feed Consolidation Feed mills globally grew rapidly from 2010 to 2015, from 25,000 to over 32,000, but between
2015 and 2020, they declined by over 12 percent. Feed mills in Asia (including China) peaked at
over 5,700 in 2015 and as of 2020 stands around 2,600. Feed demand has perhaps declined the
most in China over this period as feed and animal disease reduced the numbers of smaller mills.
However, many of the older mills in Southeast Asia did not close, easing productivity in this
region. Nevertheless, feed demand declined by perhaps 6 percent in Malaysia, the Philippines,
Thailand, and Vietnam in 2020.
Southeast Asia Meat Production Exhibit 6 reveals poultry production in five key markets in Southeast Asia. Thailand and
Indonesia are significantly larger markets than Malaysia on poultry production, but Malaysia has
a larger GDP than both nations. A problem for some firms in this region is that competitors based
4.00
3.50
3.00
2.50
2.00
1.50
1.00
0.50
0.00
Malaysia VietnamThailand Indonesia
2010 2015 2020 2025
Philippines
4.50
EXHIBIT 6 Poultry Production in Southeast Asia
Source: Based on the United States Department of Agriculture Economic Research Service, March 2019.
458 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
in nations with lower GPD, such as Thailand, can grow livestock cheaper and even export to
richer nations such as Malaysia, where consumers can purchase at lower prices than the domestic
chicken. Thailand, for example, is a significant player in the poultry export business (only behind
Brazil, the United States, and the European Union), exporting around 0.40 metric tons of poultry
in 2010. This rose to 1 metric ton in 2020 and is expected to rise further to 1.4 metric tons by
2028, according to research by the USDA.
Exhibit 7 reveals pork production in the region. It is interesting to note that even in nations
such as Malaysia, where chicken is more popular (and not haram), pork production actually ex-
ceeds chicken production. This is because of large markets for pork exports like China.
Malaysia VietnamThailand Indonesia
2010 2015 2020 2025
Philippines
5
4
3
2
1
0
6
EXHIBIT 7 Pork Production in Southeast Asia
Source: Based on United States Department of Agriculture Economic Research Service, March 2019.
Competitors
Cinemas in Malaysia Rivals of PPB’s Golden Screen Cinemas—the largest cinema in Malaysia—include TGV
Cinemas and Lotus Five Star. TGV Cinemas, sometimes referred to as TGV Pictures, is the sec-
ond largest movie theater in Malaysia, with 35 multiplexes and 282 screens. Of the 35 screens,
33 are on Peninsular Malaysia and the remaining 2 are located in Sarawak. The firm has plans to
open 4 additional cinemas. TGV is a robust rival offering plush seating and even large seating for
families. Children’s playrooms are also provided in some locations. Lotus Five Star is a relatively
small cinema owned by an Indian firm, operating a total of 13 cinemas in Malaysia.
Animal Feeds and Agribusiness in Malaysia Although headquartered in Mumbai, India, Godrej Agrovet is a huge animal feed and agribusi-
ness in the Southeast Asia region. Similar to PPB Group, Godrej Agrovet is a market leader
in poultry processing, animal feed, and palm-oil production. The company has new automated
manufacturing plants for animal feed and could easily expand its operations from India into
Malaysia.
Bakeries in Malaysia and Beyond Headquartered in Singapore but also servicing Malaysia and the Philippines, Gardenia Foods
operates bakeries throughout the region. In Malaysia, the company is named Gardenia Bakeries
(KL) Sdn Bhd (GBKL) and has bread, snacks, cakes, toasts, and pocket sandwich manufacturing
facilities.
The world’s largest flour-milling production facility is owned and operated by P.T. Bogasari
Flour Mills in Jakarta, Indonesia. This particular manufacturing plant was expanded further in
2020–2021, reflecting the accelerating importance of flour-based products in all of Southeast Asia.
CASE 8 • PPB GROuP BERHAD—2022 459
This single plant produces more than 4 million tons of flour annually. An industry insider recently
said that the demand for flour-based products will continue to grow about 5 percent annually
throughout Southeast Asia. Having about 2,500 workers, Bogasari controls 50 percent market share
of the Indonesian flour milling business, down from a high of 70 percent a decade earlier.
Conclusion
Strategy Considerations Any time a business of any size or type is diversified in its product offerings, effective allocation
of available capital and human resources across products and regions is of paramount importance
and necessitates excellent strategic planning. PPB is a huge, diversified conglomerate in need of
a clear strategic plan to guide decision-making. Should PPB strive to capitalize move effectively
on rapidly developing countries in Southeast Asia such as Vietnam? Could PPB’s traditional
cinema operations survive a renewed pandemic or should the company shift focus to its other
businesses or even new business areas? With regard to flour and animal-feed milling and bread
production, the demand for such products will increase as the population and tourism levels of
various countries increase.
Recall from the case that the firm’s mission and vision are likely too general, and consid-
eration should be taken on how both should be altered. Factors to include are how PPB should
allocate its resources among segments and whether any segments should be sold off. As there
are few mills in the region that can crush soybean, resulting in most soybean being imported as
crushed products, should PPB enter the crushed soybean milling business? Should the firm move
more operations to Vietnam since labor is cheaper? What is the solution for cheaper chicken
from Vietnam underpricing PPB’s chicken in Malaysia?
Develop for Lim Soon Huat, Managing Director of PPB Group, a strategic plan that you
believe will lead the company to prosperity. Recall from the case that consumption patterns in
Southeast Asia in general are moving further away from rice to more flour-based products and
this bodes well for PPB if the company can capitalize on such external opportunities. A compre-
hensive strength-weakness-opportunity-threat (SWOT) analysis and portfolio analysis is needed
to facilitate PPB’s decision-making moving forward. Be sure to include in your analysis what
you feel the firm should be doing, not what they are currently doing or what you think they will
be doing after studying the latest news releases (unless, of course, you agree with these strate-
gies). PPB is in desperate need of a clear strategic plan as they service a rapidly growing regional
market with multiple product lines that differ significantly.
References
1. PPB, Annual Report 2020: Resilience through Agility and Diversity, https://www
. ppbgroup.com/images/pages/investor-relations/annual_report/2020-2017/ppb-annual-
report-2020.pdf.
2. United States Department of Agriculture, Economic Research Service, www.ers.usda.gov.
460 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Nestlé S.A.—2022
www.nestle.com
Nestlé is headquartered in Vevey, Switzerland, has over 273,000 employees, serves 186 coun-
tries, and is the largest food producing company that sells finished, ready-for-consumption food
products. In 2020, Nestlé had four times the revenue of Kraft Heinz Company, the second largest
food-producing firm in the world. Notable product categories that Nestlé offers include baby
food, pet foods, ice cream, chocolate, coffee, frozen goods, water, and weight management prod-
ucts. Top Nestlé brands include Carnation, Coffee Mate, Nescafé, Perrier, DiGiorno, Stouffers,
Lean Cuisine, Nesquik, Milo, Haagen-Dazs, Purina pet foods, Butterfinger, Baby Ruth, and
Nestlé Toll House, with hundreds more besides. For example, Nestlé has over 70 bottled water
brands alone and over 100 chocolate and confectionary brands. Currently, Nestlé is focusing on
its premium water business, divesting its U.S. ice cream business to Forneri, and divesting its
low-priced water business in the United States.
In fiscal 2020, Nestlé launched over 1,200 new products, and 33 million children benefited
from Nestlé’s Healthier Kids program. Nestlé is increasingly focusing on organic products, with
less emphasis on meat and dairy products as discussed throughout the case. In fact, in 2019, 2.8
billion vegetables portions were added to the company’s food and beverages segment, and since
2010, 235 million coffee saplings have been distributed. Nestlé also reports that its emission of
greenhouse gases has been reduced by 37 percent since 2010, 50 percent of its electricity is de-
rived from renewable sources, and 368 factories have achieved zero waste. Nestlé continues to
promote healthy food and a clean environment while charging affordable prices for its customers.
History
Many people instantly associate Nestlé first with chocolate, but Nestlé’s roots are embed-
ded in milk products, in particular baby formula. Nestlé got started in 1866, when the Anglo-
Swiss Condensed Milk Company first opened a milk factory in Cham, Switzerland. Nestlé was
founded one year later when a German pharmacist, Henri Nestlé, saved a neighbor’s child in
Vevey, Switzerland, from starvation through a combination of cow’s milk, wheat flour, and
sugar. Fittingly, Nestlé’s logo always has been that of a mother bird feeding her new hatchlings.
More recently, Nestlé diversified into the pet food business in 2001 with its acquisition of
Ralston Purina. Nestlé purchased the American baby food giant Gerber in 2007 along with
Wyeth Nutrition from Pfizer Nutrition a few years later to strengthen its baby nutrition busi-
ness. In 2014, Nestlé expanded its Nestlé Skin Health S.A. business to capitalize on the grow-
ing trends of global skin care.
In 2014, Nestlé’s then CEO Paul Bulcke diversified the company into skin health, having
spent $5 billion on acquisitions in 2014 to acquire L’Oreal SA’s stake in a joint venture, plus
rights to drugs from Valeant Pharmaceuticals International. Nestlé has since divested these
businesses.
Food companies like Nestlé reported a slump in frozen-food sales in 2016 because of a move
toward “fresh” or “natural” food. Though frozen vegetables are often as wholesome as their fresh
counterparts, frozen meals and snacks are widely considered to be full of sodium and other pre-
servatives. In 2016, Nestlé revamped its frozen-food brands Lean Cuisine and Stouffer’s.
Vision and Mission
Based on Nestlé’s Annual Report , the following will serve as plausible vision and mission
statements.
Vision Statement We strive to produce the healthiest and tastiest food with the aim to improve life for everyone on
earth, now and for future generations.
CASE 9 • NESTLé S.A.—2022 461
Mission Statement Our philosophy at Nestlé is to hire the most talented scientists and most devoted employees as
we strive to provide the most nutritious foods, drinks, and pet foods to our customers. Quality,
healthy, affordable foods should be available to everyone around the world. We are committed
to controlling costs and conducting business in an ethical way that has a neutral impact on the
environment.
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure Nestlé’s organizational structure is based on strategic business units (SBUs) as illustrated at the
company website (www.nestle.com/aboutus/management). Exhibit 1 provides a list of Nestlé’s
top executives along with their titles. Paul Bulcke once served as CEO but is now Chairman
of the board. Note that the three SBUs are by region and headed by Marco Settembri, Laurent
Freixe, and Chris Johnson.
EXHIBIT 1 Nestlé’s Top Executive Team
1. Paul Bulcke, Chairman of the Board
2. Mark Schneider, CEO
3. Magdi Batato, Operations
4. Bernard Meunier, Strategic Business Units, Marketing and Sales
5. Francois-Zavier Roger, Chief Financial Officer
6. Stefan Palzer, Chief Technology Officer
7. Beatrice Guillaume-Grabisch, Head of Group, Human Resources &
Business Services
2 3
12 13 14
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8. Leanne Geale, General Counsel
9. Greg Behar, Nestlé Health Science
10. Sanjay Bahadur, Head of Group Strategy and Business
Development
11. David Rennie, Deputy Executive Vice President and
Head of Nestlé Coffee Brands 12. Marco Settembri, Executive Vice President, and CEO,
Zone Europe, Middle East, North Africa
13. Laurent Freixe, Executive Vice President, and CEO,
Zone Americas
14. Chris Johnson, Executive Vice President, and CEO,
Zone Asia, Oceania, and sub-Africa
1
Source: Based on information in Nestlé’s 2020 Annual Report.
Finance Nestlé’s income statements are provided in Exhibit 2. Note that Nestlé had a difficult year in
2020, with sales down nearly 9 percent. In contrast, rival Hershey reported a sales increase of 2
percent in revenues, General Mills reported a 3 percent increase, and Kraft had a nearly 5 percent
increase. Nestlé attributes the decline to COVID-19, an 8 percent appreciation of the Swiss Franc
to most currencies, and divestures that added a 4.5 percent decline in sales. A plus for Nestlé is
that operating expenses decreased 11 percent, resulting in net income only dropping 4 percent
compared to the 9 percent drop in revenues.
Exhibit 3 shows Nestlé’s 2019 and 2020 fiscal balance sheets. Note the large portion of good-
will and intangible assets. Nestlé has been active in 2021 acquiring new firms, so bear in mind
the new goodwill amount on the 2021 statements and beyond. Is Nestlé overpaying for their
acquisitions?
462 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 2 Nestlé’s Income Statements (in millions CHF)
Source: Based on Nestlé’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 68.
Income Statement 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Revenues 92,865 84,681 –9%
Cost of Goods Sold 46,647 42,971 –8%
Gross Profit 46,218 41,710 –10%
Operating Expenses 30,140 26,914 –11%
EBIT 16,078 14,796 –8%
Interest Expense 1,016 874 –14%
EBT 15,062 13,922 –8%
Tax 3,159 3,365 7%
Non-Recurring Events 1,001 1,815 81%
Net Income 12,904 12,372 –4%
EXHIBIT 3 Nestlé’s Balance Sheets (in millions CHF)
Source: Based on Nestlé’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 70.
Balance Sheet 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments 10,263 8,609 –16%
Accounts Receivable 11,766 10,746 –9%
Inventory 9,343 10,101 8%
Other Current Assets 4,291 4,612 7%
Total Current Assets 35,663 34,068 –4%
Property Plant & Equipment 28,762 25,840 –10%
Goodwill 28,896 27,620 –4%
Intangibles 17,824 20,148 13%
Other Long-Term Assets 16,795 16,352 –3%
Total Assets 127,940 124,028 –3%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 18,803 18,515 –2%
Other Current Liabilities 22,812 21,207 –7%
Total Current Liabilities 41,615 39,722 –5%
Long-Term Debt 23,132 27,928 21%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 10,331 9,864 –5%
Total Liabilities 75,078 77,514 3%
Equity
Common Stock 298 288 –3%
Retained Earnings 83,060 76,812 –8%
Treasury Stock (9,752) (6,643) –32%
Paid in Capital & Other (20,744) (23,943) 15%
Total Equity 52,862 46,514 –12%
Total Liabilities and Equity 127,940 124,028 –3%
CASE 9 • NESTLé S.A.—2022 463
Segments
Nestlé reports segment data both by seven different product classifications and by three different
geographic regions. By product, Nestlé reports that its Powdered and Liquid Beverages segment
contributed CHF 22.2 billion in 2020, followed by PetCare with CHF 14 billion. The remaining
product lines with their 2020 revenues are shown in Exhibit 4.
Powdered and Liquid Beverages Nestlé’s most profitable segment in terms of 2020 revenues, Powdered and Liquid Beverages,
accounts for over CHF 22 billion in sales and represents 26 percent of total sales and a margin of
22.5 percent. Top coffee brands included in this segment are Nescafé, Nespresso, and Starbucks.
Another top coffee brand in this segment is Dolce Gusto, which is commonly delivered in pods
similar to Keurig coffee. Nestlé claims their Dolce Gusto’s New Orleans is the first cold brew
coffee of its type. Nestlé has a partnership arrangement with the coffee giant Starbucks whereby
Nestlé provides expertise with producing quality instant coffee while Starbucks lends its qual-
ity coffee and brand name, creating delicious Starbucks instant coffee in the same manner as
Nescafe coffee. Milo, the most popular malt coffee drink in the world is also a Nestlé product.
Recently, the Milo brand has extended its product line by including Milo Plant, which uses soy
and oats to replace milk as an increasing number of people globally are consuming less meat and
dairy products.
PetCare Nestlé states that as people have better lives when their lives are shared with pets, it is the firm’s
aspiration to ensure these pets receive the healthiest cost-effective food available. This segment
reported sales of CHF 14 billion, with a margin of 22 percent, representing nearly 17 percent of
Nestlé sales. Employing over 500 scientists, veterinarians, and other experts in pet care, Purina
provides affordable nutrition to pets that enables significantly healthier lives. Purina ONE, Pro
Plan, Friskies, and Tidy Cats are all brands owned by Nestlé.
Nestlé is constantly marketing their pet food products heavily to keep pet owners buying.
For example, in their Annual Report, Nestlé claims to be “disrupting the cat treat segment”;
however, reading more about exactly what this disruption entails reveals that Nestlé is simply
making cat treats similar to their candy bars, where the treats can be broken into smaller pieces
easily, allowing the cat to enjoy the treats for a longer time. Another marketing-oriented message
is “providing nature-inspired meals,” where natural ingredients such as tuna are used with toma-
toes and rice, without artificial colors or flavorings. One key omission from Nestlé’s discussion
of pet products is the true extent of how much healthier these products are. The developments in
the PetCare segment read as a rebranding (or marketing tactics) rather than meaningful changes
in nutrition.
Nutrition and Health Science One of the largest brands within this segment is Gerber, but NAN, Illume, and Cerelac are other
blockbuster brands owned by Nestlé. This segment accounts for over CHF 12 billion in sales and
represents over 14 percent of corporate sales. Nestlé’s NAN supplements are designed as a re-
placement or supplement for a mother’s breast milk. Baby formula Belsol was produced in coor-
dination with Alibaba’s innovation center, and Nestlé’s Annual Report claims that the product is
tailored for Chinese babies. BrainXpert is a drink product that, according to Nestlé, is “clinically
proven” to increase brain functioning in people with cognitive difficulties, which research says
affects about 20 percent of all people over 65 around the world. Other products in this segment
focus on food allergies and supporting healthy mitochondria. A common theme across all Nestlé
divisions is a push toward marketing heavily and producing products that can be marketed as
plant-based.
Prepared Dished and Cooking Aids Besides the baby food, chocolate, and coffee the brand is widely associated with, Nestlé also
owns top brands such as Maggi, Stouffer’s, Lean Cuisine, Magic Sarap, Totole cooking sauces,
and even DiGiorno. Unlike coffee, where consumption habits around the world are strikingly
similar, many of the food items offered here are regional in nature.
464 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Nestlé’s Prepared Dished and Cooking Aids segment contributes CHF 11.5 billion in sales
and accounts for just under 14 percent of total sales. Like other divisions, Nestlé is marketing
heavily plant-based options by offering more veggie pizzas, but new products like veggie burgers
and the firm’s Sensational Vuna (a plant-based alternative to tuna) require significant R&D and
tactical and strategic adjustments—these are much more than simply marketing ploys. In 2021,
Nestlé plans to launch a new plant-based Awesome Burger.
Milk Products and Ice Cream The milk-product segment reported 11 billion in CHF sales, accounting for 13 percent of cor-
porate sales in 2020. Keep in mind from the introduction that Nestlé recently divested its U.S.
ice cream business. This segment is an ironic development for Nestlé, as the firm is aggressively
marketing less dairy, less meat, and more plant-based products in their other segments while still
operating a billion-dollar business within the milk product segment. However, in accordance
with the other segments, Nestlé also promotes plant-based alternatives, with notable brands such
as Nesfit, Nido, Coffee-mate, nesQino, Carnation, Moca, and La Lechera.
Many of the brands in this segment are regional, targeting a specific group of customers.
The regions include the United States, Europe, Japan, and China—these are not small markets
by any means. Against a growing number of people worldwide who are lactose intolerant and a
more health-minded public, brands owned by Nestlé such as Ninho, Nesfit Sabor Natural, and
Carnation all launched plant-based products in 2020. Carnation, a thick, fatty, and sweet con-
densed milk product, is now offering a plant-based option that—importantly—tastes good.
Confectionery Nestlé’s confectionery segment may be what many people worldwide picture first when they
think of the company, yet this segment reported sales of CHF 7 billion in 2020, representing only
8 percent of total sales for Nestlé. Many of the products in this segment are regional and even
local brands. One of the reasons is that Nestlé has purchased many successful product lines from
local regions and incorporated them in their portfolio; this acquisition strategy continues today.
Nestlé is also committed in this segment to providing food options based on plants, with a line
of protein bars offering 10 grams of protein derived from plants, mostly from nuts and peas. Of
course, within this segment is chocolate, a product perhaps loved more around the world than
coffee. However, to keep chocolate exciting, Nestlé often offers chocolate in new formats, in-
cluding gift boxes and seasonal items designed for religious and national holidays.
Water The final segment Nestlé divides its portfolio of products into is water. Consumers may argue
about whether S.Pellegrino or Perrier is better, but both are Nestlé products, along with many
other local sparkling water brands. This segment has pledged to be carbon neutral by 2025, with
S.Pellegrino and Acqua Panna pledging to be carbon neutral by 2022. Of course, this carbon
neutrality likely does not include shipping the product to stores, as providing water through a
pipeline is still much more economically friendly, both in terms of transporting and packaging.
Nestlé is aware of these facts and committed to a waste-free future through recyclable or reus-
able packaging, and it currently uses recycled plastic in most of its water bottles. Maintaining the
plant-based theme, Buxton is a new plant-infused water that blends spring water, plant polyphe-
nols, and minerals with fruit flavors. This segment reported 6.4 billion in CHF sales in 2020 and
accounted for 7.6 percent of companywide sales.
By-Region Data Exhibit 4 reveals the top 5 2020 revenue-generating nations for Nestlé in billions of CHF. Note
how large Nestlé’s presence is in the United States and how much growth likely remains possible
in other regions. For example, the United States generates over four times the revenues as the
next largest nation, China. Nestlé’s home nation of Switzerland ranks sixteenth in the world, with
2020 Nestlé revenues of CHF 1.1 billion. Global powers Germany and Japan rank eighth and
tenth respectively, with CHF 2.4 billion and CHF 1.6 billion in sales, respectively. Remember
that Germany, Japan, and Switzerland are included in the “Rest of the World” numbers below.
Nestlé reported 45 percent of its revenues were derived from North, Central, and South America;
29 percent derived from North Africa, Middle East, Europe, and Russia; and 26 percent from
sub-Saharan Africa, Asia, and Oceania.
CASE 9 • NESTLé S.A.—2022 465
Exhibit 5 reveals that only pet-care products reported an increase in revenues in fiscal year
2020. This is concerning for Nestlé because key rival firms had an increase in overall revenues in
the same year against Nestlé’s justifications of COVID-19, the Swiss Franc, and divestures. Recall
from the introduction that Nestlé sold its U.S. ice cream business, so this divestiture does explain a
large portion of the drop in ice cream revenue. Note that revenues for the milk and ice cream seg-
ment dropped over 17 percent from 2019 to 2020 but operating profits jumped 56 percent in 2020,
so it appears on the surface that the divesture of the U.S. ice cream business was a strong strategic
move for Nestlé. Note as well the high profit margin for water; the firm may not generate signifi-
cant income from this division relative to others and sales and operating profits may have decreased
in 2020, yet the segment is an extremely cost-effective business to operate.
EXHIBIT 4 Nestlé’s Sales (in billions of CHF)
Source: Based on Nestlé’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 49.
35.0
30.0
25.0
20.0
15.0
10.0
5.0
0
40.0
45.0
United
States
China France United
Kingdom
Brazil Rest of the
World
6.0 4.0 2.9 2.8
42.6
26.0
EXHIBIT 5 Nestlé’s 2020 Revenue and Trading Operating Profit Breakdown
2019 2020 Percent Change
Powdered and Liquid Beverages
Coffee/Coffee Systems 9,144 8,616 –6%
Other 14,077 13,640 –3%
Total Sales 23,221 22,256 –4%
Trading Operating Profits 4,701 4,824 3%
PetCare
Total Sales 13,622 14,001 3%
Trading Operating Profits 2,741 3,089 13%
Nutrition and Health Science
Total Sales 14,990 12,160 –19%
Trading Operating Profits 3,092 2,490 –19%
Prepared Dishes and Cooking Aids
Frozen and Chilled 6,092 5,694 –7%
Culinary and Other 6,096 5,829 –4%
Total Sales 12,188 11,523 –5%
Trading Operating Profits 1,857 2,147 16%
Milk Products and Ice Cream
Milk Products 10,433 10,087 –3%
Ice Cream 2,835 920 –68%
Total Sales 13,268 11,007 –17%
Trading Operating Profits 1,678 2,615 56%
(continued )
466 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
2019 2020 Percent Change
Confectionery
Chocolate 5,930 5,265 –11%
Sugar Confectionery 722 585 –19%
Snacking and Biscuits 1,236 1,125 –9%
Total Sales 7,888 6,975 –12%
Trading Operating Profits 1,857 2,147 16%
Water
Total Sales 914 639 –30%
Trading Operating Profits 748 522 –30%
Source: Based on Nestlé’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 54.
Strategy
Nestlé is in the process of transforming its image from a food company to a health and wellness
company. While the company has no plans to stop selling the chocolate, coffee, ice cream and other
food products that the firm is world-famous for, it is actively engaged in offering healthier food op-
tions to customers. Nestlé has the largest R&D budget of any food company; the firm aims to offer
healthier and tastier options right from infant formula all the way to products designed for seniors.
Nestlé recently reduced the amount of salt, sugar, and saturated fats in many of its products as a
means of improving nutrition while enhancing other flavors so as not to compromise the taste of
their products. Pay careful attention to the added flavors section later in the case.
Nestlé has a large portfolio of products globally and is active in shifting its resources around
through acquisitions and divesting product lines. In 2020, Nestlé sold its 60 percent ownership in
Herta to Casa Tarradellas. In food, Nestlé purchased the Yinlu peanut milk and canned rice por-
ridge business in 2020. With respect to growth, Nestlé is strongly focused on increasing its global
growth in water due to its extremely high profit margin. However, in 2021, Nestlé sold its Nestlé
Waters North America brands, which included Poland Spring, Deer Park, and Ice Mountain. Most
of these waters came with low margins, unlike the expensive mineral and sparkling waters more
commonly sold in Europe. The deal did not include mega brands such as S.Pellegrino Perrier and
Acqua Panna. In fact, only a month after Nestlé sold the North American water business, it ac-
quired Essential, a U.S.-based water that sells at a premium and likely has a high profit margin.
Nestlé is increasingly focusing on the lucrative water market outside the United States as
well. Nestlé is also expanding the Health Science division through the acquisitions of Zenpep,
Vital Proteins, Aimmune Therapeutics and others. The Aimmune acquisition allowed Nestlé to
control the only “double approved” rug (U.S. Food and Drug Administration and the European
Commission) for the treatment of peanut allergies. In the Spring of 2021, Nestlé acquired Nuun,
a U.S.-based firm producing a tablet and powder to mix with water, similar to Gatorade. In
Spring 2021, Nestlé also acquired The Bountiful Company, which manufactures dietary supple-
ments such as Nature’s Bounty, Solgar, Osteo Bi-Flex, and Puritan’s Pride. The recent history of
divestures and acquisitions suggests that Nestlé is shifting resources away from low-margin to
higher-margin product lines.
To aid with the transition to plant-based protein, in 2020 Nestlé opened a new R&D
Accelerator in Konolfingen, Switzerland, that will enable startups, students, and other partners to
work together using Nestlé’s resources to test projects for up to 6 months. R&D is not limited to
plant-based proteins; at Nestlé, 1.6 billion Swiss Francs are invested in R&D annually, with 23
R&D locations worldwide and 4,000 employees devoted solely to this. In fact, 31 percent of all
sales in 2020 derived from products innovated or renovated over the previous 3 years.
External Issues
Within the food and beverage business, Nestlé competes with global chocolate giants Hershey
and Mars, French-based Danone, European-focused Nomad Foods, U.S.-based Kraft, and many
more. In pet foods, Nestlé competes with—perhaps surprisingly—Mars, which is the world
CASE 9 • NESTLé S.A.—2022 467
leader in pet food in addition to a chocolate company. Del Monte, Procter & Gamble, Kraft, and
General Mills are also in the pet food business.
Frozen-Food Industry The global frozen-food industry is rapidly growing and becoming much more sophisticated,
as customers around the globe have more disposable income and are growing more health-
conscious. In 2019, the global frozen-food market was valued at $290 billion and is projected
to increase by nearly 40 percent to $406 billion by 2027. The large increase should provide
excellent opportunities for firms, also raising the threat of many new entrants into the business,
all looking for a piece of the action. Representing about 30 percent of all frozen-food purchases
globally are ready-to-eat frozen meals that contain everything in one package. By contrast, in the
United States, 45 percent of all frozen foods are considered ready-to-eat entrées.
Globally, the next two largest categories of frozen foods are frozen vegetables followed by
frozen pizza. While the outlook for frozen entrees is expected to continue to grow, the strategist
should be mindful that the relative market share of frozen entrees may fall due to the increased
demand globally for frozen pizza. For all the talk of healthy eating around the world, taste and
convenience still play a significant role in eating habits. Europe is currently the largest market
for frozen foods, but China and India are growing at the fastest pace. Large global players in the
industry include ConAgra, Schwan’s Lamb Weston, and Nestlé. Profit margins in this industry
tend to be less than 5 percent, significantly less than in drinks.
Plant Protein Growth in the United States Plant proteins are growing rapidly in popularity around the world and by some estimates, plant-
based protein will consist of one third of the protein market by 2054. Most of the data is cur-
rently from the U.S., but the plant-based trend is expected to grow globally as well. Growth in
traditional foods hovers around 2 percent but if the prediction of 33 percent of all protein being
derived from plants by 2054 holds, it would represent monumental growth for players in the
plant-based protein industry. But consumers are after the protein, not simply plants, as 25 percent
of Americans feel increased protein is beneficial and up to 50 percent of Americans check the
ingredient list for the source of proteins.
In 2019, plant-based meat sales rose over 20 percent, and according to S&P’s Industry
Surveys, plant-based meat sales outpaced animal meat sales in 2020 partly due to several meat
plants closing down in 2020 from the pandemic. While the research presented above is for
Americans, there is strong evidence that plant-based proteins are extremely popular in other
regions around the world. In fact, over 45 percent of Americans believe plant-based proteins
are healthier than animal-based and 30 percent of Americans enjoy meat-free days in their diet.
However, only 6 percent of Americans are categorized as “true” vegetarian (vegan).
Flavor Enhancers There is a growing awareness of sugar’s harmful effects on people, in particular of high-fructose
corn syrup. Hershey, for example, is replacing high-fructose corn syrup in some of its products
with sugar, in a move away from a sweetener that is widely seen as increasing weight gain and
causing diabetes (the American Medical Association has stated that there is not enough evidence
that it is worse than other sweeteners). A study of perceptions of sweeteners commissioned by
the Corn Refiners Association found that about two-thirds of consumers believe that modera-
tion is a more important factor than which sweetener is used. This was borne out when Hunt’s
ketchup switched from corn syrup to more sugar and then back to corn syrup when there was no
change in the sales. The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has denied requests by some
companies to have their sweetening agent renamed “corn sugar” on nutrition labels. In addition,
in July 2015, the FDA proposed that food companies be forced to add the percentage of daily
allotment of sugar on all nutrition labels, similar to the percentage of daily allotment of salt, fat,
and other ingredients listed. As of 2021, labels in the United States still only refer to the amount
of sugars in grams, not percentages of daily allowance. However, any added sugar can have dra-
matic effects on the body and have been linked to diabetes, tooth decay, heart problems, weight
gain, and many other health problems.
In response to the harmful effects of sugar, there is growing global demand for artificial
sweeteners as a means to reduce calories, maintain blood sugar levels, and just have an overall
468 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
healthier choice. However, research has not been conclusive, and some studies reveal artificial
sweeteners are not dissimilar to raw sugar once ingested. Europe has banned several artificial
sweetener products such as stevia and aspartame, but other nations such as Japan and the United
States have been using the same sweeteners for decades. Nevertheless, there is a growing public
awareness regarding both raw and artificial sugars.
Another common flavor enhancer found in food is salt. Table salt has been linked to water
retention, high blood pressure, stomach cancer, osteoporosis, and killing of beneficial bacterial
in the body. Many medical researchers recommend limiting salt consumption to 6 grams per day;
for comparison, the World Health Organization suggests the average person consumes between 9
and 12 grams of salt daily. Many food companies are attempting to reduce the amount of sodium
in their products as global awareness of the harmful effects of a high-salt diet increases.
Cocoa Prices Consumers in emerging markets worldwide are able to afford increasingly higher-quality choco-
lates that require better and higher percentages of cocoa. Unlike other crops, such as corn or
soybeans, cocoa is more difficult to produce, and cocoa prices are expected to rise 2.2 percent
globally. Demand is also expected to increase globally, and a minimum price was recently in-
troduced to cocoa producers, but cocoa production is highly labor intensive, and even with the
minimum wage paid, a major threat facing the industry is producers switching to produce less
labor-intensive crops.
Potential Taxes and Health-Minded Public Growing awareness among consumers has led many different governments (local, regional, and
national) to increase taxes on or flat out ban unhealthy items. Taxes on products like tobacco are
viewed by governments as a way not only to curb citizens’ consumption but also as an additional
source of revenues. In 2014, New York City banned most sugary drinks in 16 oz (500 ml) and
larger quantities from being served. Former NBA star Yao Ming is campaigning in his home
country of China to promote healthier eating and exercise habits.
Increasing obesity is a major problem among the world’s population. A study in the Journal
of the American Medical Association reported people who get 17 to 21 percent of their calories
from added sugar had over four times the chance of dying from cardiovascular disease than
someone limiting their added sugar intake to 8 percent of total calorie intake. Scientific tests sug-
gest that sugar is basically a food for cancer cells, and people who drink two soft drinks a week
are 87 percent more likely to develop pancreatic cancer. For comparison, a Nestlé Butterfinger
and Baby Ruth contains 29 and 33 grams of sugar, respectively, and a can of cola contains about
39 grams of sugar. Sugar is also believed to be damaging to your skin, looks, and overall mood.
Competitors
Kraft Heinz Headquartered in Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, in the United States, Kraft Heinz is a global food
company with many brands popular around the world, including the iconic Heinz Ketchup. The
firm reports offering 4,392 products as of 2021, including deli meats, sauces, drinks, cheeses,
desserts, snacks, soups, and coffee. Some of the more famous brands owned by the company
include Maxwell House Coffee, Miracle Whip, A.1., Jell-O, and Oscar Mayer. The firm even has
partnerships with firms like Hershey to provide chocolate for select Kraft Heinz products. With
its frozen foods, drinks, sweets, and snacks, Kraft Heinz competes directly with Nestlé in many
markets worldwide. Against products such as Oscar Mayer and Lunchables deli meats, Nestlé
does not currently offer a close rival list of matching products. In fact, Nestlé is attempting to po-
sition itself as a healthier nutrition company while rival Kraft Heinz tends to be more traditional
in its product offerings. In 2010, Kraft sold the DiGiorno pizza brand to Nestlé.
In 2021, Kraft Heinz indicated its plans to increase marketing by 30 percent to help Kraft be-
come the industry leader. The firm indicates it also will become more environmentally friendly
and increase its healthy living marketing and products. The firm is in the process of restructur-
ing from 55 individual categories of products to six broad platforms: taste elevation, easy meals
made better, real food snacking, fast fresh meals, easy indulgent desserts, and flavorful hydra-
tion. Based on this new focus, it appears Kraft is furthering its alignment and competition with
CASE 9 • NESTLé S.A.—2022 469
Nestlé. In 2021, the firm announced that it planned to acquire Assan Foods, a sauce business
based in Istanbul, Turkey. Kraft also announced in 2021 that it is selling its nuts business, in-
cluding Planters, to Hormel Foods, and the firm plans to blend its famous cheese with ice cream
to produce macaroni-and-cheese flavored ice cream. Kraft Heinz reported revenues of $26.2
billion in fiscal 2020, up from $25 billion in 2019.
General Mills Headquartered in Minneapolis, Minnesota, in the United States, General Mills (GM) markets
and manufactures food products worldwide. The firm operates in five segments: North America
Retail, Convenience Stores, Europe & Australia, Asia & Latin America, and Pet. The firm’s rev-
enues increased from $17.6 billion to $18.1 billion from 2019 to 2020. Some of the firm’s most
popular brands include cereals (Cheerios), ice cream (Haagen-Dazs), and yogurt (Yoplait). In
fact, the firm is expanding its cereal business, which may come as a surprise to some, as cereals
are high-carb and high in sugar, and global trends are moving away from such items. However,
as mentioned above, taste and convenience are key, and GM considers cereals an important com-
ponent of the market of those who have less time to cook. Top GM brands include Cheerios,
Cinnamon Toast Crunch, Lucky Charms, Chex, Total, and Wheaties. Top products considered
meals include Helper, Old El Paso, Wanchai Ferry, V.Pearl, and Green Giant. The firm com-
petes in the highly competitive frozen pizza business with brands Annie’s and Totino’s. In 2021,
GM acquired Tyson Food’s pet treat business for $1.2 billion in cash; this acquisition came on
the heels of GM entering the pet food business in 2018 with the $8 billion acquisition of Blue
Buffalo, a premium brand of pet food. Blue Buffalo sales grew at 10 percent over 2020 partly due
to an increase in new pets worldwide; in the United States, 12.6 million households purchased or
adopted a new pet in 2020. GM competes on many of Nestlé’s exact product lines.
Hershey Headquartered in Hershey, Pennsylvania, in the United States, Hershey is the largest chocolate
producer in North America and a confectionary leader worldwide, with over 80 brands, annual
revenues over $8 billion in 2020, about 15,000 employees, and operations in about 80 countries.
Hershey offers chocolates as well as other candies, mints, and chewing gum. Notable products
include Hershey Kisses, Mr. Goodbar, Twizzlers, Jolly Ranchers, Ice Breakers, and Reese’s,
which Hershey is currently expanding globally with strategic emphasis on markets in China and
Mexico. Hershey is focused almost entirely on chocolate, candy, and gum, making it a significant
competitor for Nestlé in this industry.
Danone Danone is a global company based in Paris, France, and reported $24.6 billion in 2020, down
from $25.3 billion in 2019. The firm has three main business categories: Essential Dairy and
Plant-Based, Waters, and Specialized Nutrition. Top global brands in the first segment include
Danone Yogurt, Activia, Oikos, Delight, Danonino, and Silk. Top water brands owned by Danone
include Aqua, Bonafont, evian, Volvic, and Hayat, and the nutrition business focuses mostly on
baby foods. In 2020, Danone sold Vega, a Canadian and U.S.-based plant-based food brand to a
private equity firm in the United States. This is an interesting development as Nestlé is focusing
heavily on plant-based products, and Danone has perhaps chosen to leave this playing field and
focus on its more traditional product lines.
Plant-based Competitors Firms like Beyond Meat and Impossible Foods are early players in the trend toward meatless
products. Beyond Meat, for example, has popular plant-based burgers that many say taste like
and have the same texture as real meat. While there is a huge trend toward plant-based products
as concerns about animal welfare and healthier eating increase, the most important factor in get-
ting customers to switch to plant-based products remains taste, which also includes the texture
of the product. Despite what many cite as the reason for the switch, health is the second most
important reason, followed by animal welfare in third.
Global firms such as Kellogg, Hormel, and Tyson Foods are entering the plant-based mar-
ket as well. Tyson, a large meat-producing company, initiated a new brand named Raised &
Rooted, which offers burgers with a blend of meat and plant-based options. Tyson also offers
470 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
100 percent plant-based chicken nuggets. Hormel Foods, another firm specializing in meats,
introduced a new product line called Happy Little Plants, and Kellogg is offering MorningStar
Farms’s Incogmeato.
Research reveals that people who consume a mostly plant-based diet rarely purchase meat,
but nearly 49 out of the 50 consumers who purchase plant-based meat also purchase animal
meat. The global meat market is over $1 trillion, leaving firms competing in this industry to
jockey for position, hoping many of the meat-consuming consumers will also buy plant-based
meat products. It is important to remember that taste is the number one driver, and some items,
such as a thick-cut beef steak, likely will not be replicated closely enough.
Conclusion
Strategy Considerations From studying the case, you should be aware that Nestlé often divests and acquires new busi-
nesses in addition to spending heavily on its own R&D to bring new products to market. It also
sells off less desirable product lines to competitors. Based on your research, what actions would
you recommend to CEO Bulcke for the next 3 years? Which businesses or product lines, if any,
should be divested? Are there any companies out there that Nestlé should acquire? Should Nestlé
continue to invest heavily in R&D, or would it be more cost-effective to sit back, watch new
firms emerge and risk their own capital, and then simply cherry pick and buy the successful firms
through acquisitions?
Recall that Nestlé receives four times the revenue from the United States than from any other
country. What country or countries would you suggest that the CEO aggressively penetrate fur-
ther? Would it be more profitable for shareholders if Nestlé simply started promoting successful
existing products more heavily in these regions instead of developing new products or acquir-
ing new firms? Recall that when a firm acquires a firm for over book value, the extra amount is
recorded as goodwill on the balance sheet. This is intangible fluff or smoke, generally not con-
sidered an attractive asset by accountants, yet sometimes, as is the case with Nestlé, the decision
is made to accept the goodwill impairment and acquire the desired firm or desired product lines.
As you study and prepare a strategic planning case analysis, be sure to recommend what you
think the future direction of Nestlé should be, not what they are currently doing, and not what
you think they will be doing based on the latest news (unless of course, you agree with these
strategies based on your analysis). Imagine that you have been hired by Nestlé to provide a series
of recommendations for their future direction; this type of analysis and recommendations is in
fact exactly what Nestlé would be paying a consulting firm to deliver for a high fee.
References
1. Nestlé Annual Report 2020, Nestlé Global, https://www.nestle.com/investors/annual-report.
2. S&P NetAdvantage, Industry Surveys.
CASE 10 • DOMINO’S PIZZA, INC.—2018 471
Domino’s Pizza, Inc.—2018
www.dominos.com , DPZ
Headquartered in Ann Arbor, Michigan, Domino’s delivers more than 1 million pizzas a day
worldwide to over 85 different countries, with over half of sales coming from outside the United
States. To many people’s surprise, Domino’s ranks among the top 10 companies with online
transactions, right up there with Amazon and Apple; over 60 percent of Domino’s sales in the
United States are through digital channels. The firm is the second-largest pizza restaurant chain
in the world with over 14,400 locations and is the number-one pizza delivery company in the
United States.
Domino’s is 97 percent franchised with royalties accounting for a large portion of its rev-
enue. Selling food, equipment, and supplies primarily to stores in the United States and Canada
accounts for a large portion of revenue as well. Domino’s has over 260,000 full- and part-time
employees worldwide that generated sales of over $11 billion in 2017. Over 90 percent of all
Domino’s franchisees (owners) started their careers working in some capacity in a Domino’s.
Domino’s Q1 2018 financials released 4-26-18 were fantastic. Domestic same store sales
grew 8.3 percent versus Q1 2017. The company’s international division reported that same store
sales increased 5.0 percent during Q1 2018, marking the 97th consecutive quarter of positive
international same store sales growth for Domino’s, and the 28th consecutive quarter of positive
domestic same store sales growth. The company’s global net store growth for Q1 2018 was up
110 stores, comprised of 79 net new international stores and 31 net new domestic stores. Given
these excellent results, Domino’s repurchased 448,008 shares of its common stock during Q1
2018 for approximately $101.1 million. On April 24, 2018, the Board of Directors declared a
55-cent per share quarterly dividend for shareholders. Domino’s revenues increased $161.2 mil-
lion, or 25.8 percent in Q1 2018, while net income increased $26.4 million, or 42.2 percent. The
company is obviously doing well but literally millions of rival firms are taking aim at Domino’s
in local villages, towns, and cities globally.
Copyright by Fred David Books LLC; written by Forest R. David.
History
Growing up in foster homes most of their childhood, Tom Monaghan and his brother James bor-
rowed $900 in 1960 to purchase a mom-and-pop pizza store named Domi-Nick’s in Ypsilanti,
Michigan. After trading his brother James a Volkswagen Beetle in 1961 for his half of the business,
Tom changed the store name in 1965 from Domi-Nick’s to Domino’s Pizza Inc. The company expe-
rienced steady growth during the 1960s, and by 1978 there were 200 Domino’s stores in the United
States. By 1998, there were over 6,000 Domino’s with 1,500 located outside the United States. Tom
Monaghan retired in 1998 by selling 93 percent of the company, worth $1 billion, to Bain Capital
Inc. In the 6 years following the sale, Domino’s enjoyed great success under Bain Capital and in
2004, Domino’s became a publicly traded company. The initial stock price was $16 per share and
placed a value on the company at over $2 billion (double the price Bain paid).
Domino’s celebrated its 50th anniversary in 2010 and was awarded best pizza chain in 2010
and 2011 by Pizza Today Magazine , marking the first time ever that the same pizza chain had
received the award in consecutive years. Domino’s CEO Patrick Doyle was named the best CEO
of 2011 by CNBC, the same year that Domino’s was ranked number-one in Forbes Magazine’s
“Top 20 Franchises for the Money” list.
Vision/Mission
Domino's vision (paraphrased) is “to be the best place on the planet to prepare, deliver, and con-
sume pizza.” The company’s mission statement (paraphrased) is to “have fun preparing, deliver-
ing, and consuming pizza.” In addition to these statements, Domino’s describes itself in terms
of its employees, united by the common goal of becoming the global leader in pizza delivery.
472 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
The company’s motto in a few words are opportunity, hard work, inspired solutions, winning
together, embracing community, and uncommon honesty. The reason for these special words is
that nearly all Domino’s franchise owners started their careers with the firm as delivery drivers
or in other in-store positions. Thousands of other Domino’s employees, including supervisors,
trainers, quality auditors, international business consultants, marketers, and executives, also be-
gan their careers in the stores. Domino’s core beliefs are to promote internal growth and provide
opportunities for anyone willing to work hard.
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure
Since there is no COO or CAO by title depicted among Domino’s top executives, the firm ap-
pears to operate from a very flat divisional-by-region type design. Since the firm’s structure is
portrayed neither in the firm’s Form 10K nor on the company website, perhaps only insiders
know exactly who reports to who, but apparently every top executive reports to CEO Brandon.
EXHIBIT 1 Domino’s Top Executives and Organizational Chart
1. David Brandon, Chairman
2. J. Patrick Doyle, President and CEO
3. Troy Ellis, EVP Supply Chain
4. Judy Werthauser, EVP Chief People Officer
5. Stanley Gage, EVP Team USA
6. Scott Hinshaw, EVP Franchise Operations and Development
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
7. Jeffrey Lawrence, EVP and CFO
8. Timothy McIntyre, EVP Communications, Legislative Affairs, and Investor Relations
9. Kevin Morris, EVP General Counsel
10. J. Kevin Vasconi, EVP Chief Information Officer
11. Russell Weiner, President Domino’s USA
12. Richard Allison, President Domino’s International
Source: Based on information at the company website.
Current Strategies
Perhaps Domino’s most profitable strategy is their vertically integrated supply chain where they
have backward control, to some extent, over many of their supplies such as dough, veggies, equip-
ment, and uniforms, and direct forward control over about 400 retail stores that are company-owned.
One area where Domino’s could possibly extend their backward integration strategy would be to
purchase trucks to deliver their products. Currently Domino’s leases these vehicles.
Unlike Yum! Brands and other competitors who have diversified into other foods and restau-
rants, Domino’s has maintained their strategy of staying focused on the Domino’s Pizza Brand.
The company still offers little to nothing in terms of healthy food options on the menu other
than three salad options, but offers chicken wings, sandwiches, pasta, and desserts. While this
approach enables Domino’s to focus almost exclusively on pizza, this practice also increases the
firm’s vulnerability to the increasingly health-minded customer and possible government man-
dates for fast food restaurants to stop using certain ingredients and preservatives, and potentially
forcing all restaurants to label all nutrition information on the menu at the point of sale. Such a
law would not be favorable to Domino’s.
Domino’s CEO desires to extend further the company’s domestic and global presence. With
over 14,400 stores and more than half of those international-based, Domino’s enjoys large econo-
mies of scale and brand name recognition enabling the firm to spread costs effectively. With econ-
omies growing in many underdeveloped markets, Domino’s senior management estimates the
company is only serving about 50 percent of the international market they should be serving, thus
suggesting the firm’s plans to add an additional 5,000 internationally based stores in the coming
years. Further expansion globally would increase risks as marketing research costs will be high,
and trademark and patent protection laws are not as sophisticated in developing countries.
CASE 10 • DOMINO’S PIZZA, INC.—2018 473
Domino’s derives most of its income from U.S. and Canadian markets through royalties
and supply-chain operations—including selling equipment, food, and supplies that franchisees
must purchase from Domino’s. In international markets, Domino’s uses the “master franchisees”
model, where the corporation attempts to attract an investor to take on multiple Domino’s and
gives them franchisee rights in that region. Here the master franchisee profits by sub- franchising,
selling ingredients and equipment, and running their own stores.
Domino’s attributes much of its success to an incentive-based system for franchisees where they
actively share in profits through increasing demand for new stores and through purchasing supplies
from the Domino’s Supply Chain. Domino’s individual franchisee stores and the over 400 company-
owned stores also enjoy a simple and effective store layout enabling pizza delivery and carryout or-
ders to be processed and executed efficiently as compared to many competitors. Unlike Domino’s,
many rival pizza firms utilize a dine-in business model which is much more costly. Competitive ad-
vantages such as these make Domino’s an attractive franchisee option in the quick-service restaurant
(QSR) market as overhead and investment is generally cheaper than competing firms.
Sustainability and Ethics
Sustainability refers to the extent that an organization’s operations and actions protect, mend,
and preserve rather than harm or destroy the natural environment. Many firms today develop
an annual sustainability report, similar to an annual report, to reveal to stakeholders their ac-
tions and commitment to sustainability. Domino’s combines several reports into one calling it a
Corporate Stewardship Report. The firm has long prided itself on taking care of its employees as
90 percent of all current owners started out working in a Domino’s. In recent years, Domino’s
has improved its menu with an almost total revamp since 2008.
Today, MSG and artificial food colorings have been eliminated from all Domino’s prod-
ucts in the United States except for where they occur naturally, like in cheese and some meats.
Vegetables are distributed from a supply chain facility in Georgia to many U.S.-based locations.
Having a central supply-chain location improves food safety issues as opposed to letting each
individual store cut and prep its own veggies and meats. To better serve customers in a nutrition-
minded society, Domino’s adds their “Cal-O-Meter” online—as customers build a pizza they
can watch the calorie clock tick up, or tick down if they are willing to forgo an extra tasty
option—such as double meat or cheese. Allergen information is also available online.
Domino’s uses 100 percent sustainable palm oil product for some of their items such as pan
pizza dough, but palm oil is not used in the majority of Domino’s offerings. To ensure the oil
used is from sustainable sources, Domino’s, in 2015, traced 100 percent of oil obtained from
its supplier to environmentally friendly means. Like its palm oil supplier, Domino’s cardboard
suppliers hold certifications with several forestry councils to ensure responsible processing of
trees; most pizza boxes at Domino’s are 40 to 70 percent recycled.
Domino’s is also a good citizen in the communities in which it operates. For over 50 years,
the firm has aggressively supported schools, youth sports teams, and first responders. The
company often provides free pizzas to first responders in times of crisis and donating free food
to various programs for kids. In 2016 alone, the firm donated over $8 million to communities,
raised over $7 million for St. Jude Children’s research hospital, and donated over 14,000 pizzas
as a small sampling of their philanthropic giving back to the community.
Advertising/Sales Force
Up until 2008, Domino’s domestic stores contributed 4 percent of all retail sales to support
national and local advertising campaigns. However, starting in 2009, domestic stores voted to
increase their advertising revenue contribution rate to 5 percent and eventually to 5.5 percent in
2011, and now 6 percent heading into 2018. Domino’s expects this rate to remain unchanged for
the foreseeable future. Much of those monies are devoted to mass mail flyers promoting specials
at the local Domino’s.
Finance
Domino’s income statements and balance sheets are provided in Exhibit 2 and Exhibit 3, respec-
tively. Note the 12.75 percent increase in revenues in 2017 and the 29.45 percent increase in net
income. Note also the 22 percent increase in property, plant, and equipment in 2017.
474 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 2 Domino’s Income Statement (in thousands USD)
Income Statement 1/1/17 12/31/17 Percent Change
Revenues $2,472,628 $2,787,979 12.75%
Cost of Goods Sold 1,704,937 1,921,988 12.73%
Gross Profit 767,691 865,991 12.80%
Operating Expenses 313,649 344,759 9.92%
EBIT 454,042 521,232 14.80%
Interest Expense 109,384 121,079 10.69%
EBT 344,658 400,153 16.10%
Tax 129,980 122,248 -5.95%
Non-Recurring Events 0 0 NA NA
Net Income 214,678 277,905 29.45%
Source: Based on company documents.
EXHIBIT 3 Domino’s Balance Sheets (in thousands US)
Balance Sheet 1/1/17 12/31/17 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short Term Investments $169,311 $227,530 34%
Accounts Receivable 150,369 173,677 16%
Inventory 40,181 39,961 −1%
Other Current Assets 136,012 138,621 2%
Total Current Assets 495,873 579,789 17%
Property Plant & Equipment 138,534 169,586 22%
Goodwill 16,058 15,423 −4%
Intangibles 0 0 NA NA
Other Long-Term Assets 65,830 71,955 9%
Total Assets 716,295 836,753 17%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 111,510 106,894 −4%
Other Current Liabilities 292,188 291,391 0%
Total Current Liabilities 403,698 398,285 −1%
Long-Term Debt 2,148,990 3,121,490 45%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 46,750 52,362 12%
Total Liabilities 2,599,438 3,572,137 37%
Equity
Common Stock 481 429 −11%
Retained Earnings (1,881,520) (2,739,437) −46%
Treasury Stock 0 0 NA NA
Paid in Capital & Other (2,104) 3,624 NA
Total Equity (1,883,143) (2,735,384) −45%
Total Liabilities and Equity 716,295 836,753 17%
Source: Based on company documents.
CASE 10 • DOMINO’S PIZZA, INC.—2018 475
Segment Data
Domino’s provides financial information for four key business segments: 1) Domestic Company-
Owned Stores, 2) Domestic Franchise Stores, 3) Domestic Supply Chain, and 4) International.
Note in Exhibit 4 that the largest revenue-generating segment is the Domestic Supply Chain
with over 60 percent of all revenue. Note also the large revenue numbers for the relatively few
company-owned stores due to each Domino’s Domestic Franchisee owning his/her own store(s)
and reporting their revenues on their own personal financial statements rather than Domino’s.
Domino’s derives revenue from only the royalties and advertising fees they receive from
franchisees. The financial data for the International Supply Chain Centers are included in the
International Division, not under the Domestic Supply Chain Division.
Also note in Exhibit 4 revenue increases across all divisions in 2017 compared to 2016.
Exhibit 4 reveals that even though half of the stores are internationally based, almost all reve-
nues are derived from domestic operations. The numbers are not as abnormal as they first appear
though. Take for example the revenue breakdown between Domestic Franchise and International
Franchise in Exhibit 4—based on both having the same number of stores, the International
Franchise reports 37 percent of revenues between the two divisions, a bit off from an even
50–50, but with the master franchiser system, there is another middleman, so to speak.
Exhibit 5 depicts Domino’s revenues by region. Note domestic is largest, followed by supply
chain.
Domestic Supply Chain
Domino’s domestic supply chain supplies franchisees with dough, vegetables, ovens, uniforms,
and much more, enabling better control, pizza consistency, and timely delivery of products. This
backward integration strategy enables Domino’s to offer pizza at lower prices and allows store
managers to focus on store operations rather than mixing dough on site, prepping vegetables,
and bargaining with independent suppliers for ingredients. Domino’s has 18 regional dough
manufacturing and supply-chain centers and leases a fleet of over 400 trucks to aid in deliver-
ing products to stores twice a week. Domino’s franchisees are, however, not required to pur-
chase supplies from Domino’s, but interestingly, over 99 percent do purchase all their supplies
from the company’s Domestic Supply Chain segment. To ensure this division remains viable,
Domino’s provides profit-sharing incentives to franchisees to buy their products from Domino’s.
In addition to the 18 dough manufacturing supply chains and a few other supply chains for other
EXHIBIT 4 Domino’s Revenues by Source (in millions)
0
200
400 $439
600
800
1,000
1,200
1,400
1,600
1,800
2,000
Domestic
Company-
Owned Stores
Domestic
Franchise
Supply
Chain
International
Franchise
2016 2017
$491
$312 $351
$1,544
$1,739
Revenues by Source
$177 $207
Source: Based on company information.
476 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 5 Domino’s EBIT by Division (in millions)
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
$261
$299
$152 $161
Domestic Stores Supply Chaim International
Stores
2016 2017
$138$134
Domino’s EBIT
Source: Based on company information.
products in the United States, the company owns another five dough manufacturing supply
chains in Canada.
Domestic Stores
The company’s Domestic Stores division includes a network of over 5,195 stores operated
by franchisees and 392 company-owned stores in the United States. Domino’s desires to
have all of their stores owned and operated by franchisees, but if certain stores are under-
performing, Domino’s often will purchase these stores in hopes of turning them around and
refranchising them at a later date. Domino’s also uses company-owned stores as test sites for
new products, promotions, new potential store layout improvements, and for prospective new
franchisees.
Although the typical franchisee of Domino’s operates 4 stores, the 14 largest franchisees
operate over 50 stores, including the largest domestic franchisee that operates 187 stores.
Currently, Domino’s has 789 different domestic franchisees, with the average franchisee be-
ing in Domino’s system for an impressive 14 years. Much of this longevity can be attributed to
Domino’s requiring prospective franchisees to manage a store for one year before entering into
a long-term contract with Domino’s. Domino’s feels this system is unique to the pizza industry
and provides a competitive advantage over rival pizza firms.
Franchise agreements require the franchisee to operate a store in a location for 10 years
with the ability to renew for another 10 years with franchise renewal rates around 99 percent.
Franchisees pay 5.5 percent royalty fee on sales and another 6 percent on national advertising
and marketing.
International Division
Domino’s has operations in over 85 countries with 9,269 internationally based locations. Exhibit
6 provides a breakdown of stores in the top 11 markets; the top 10 international markets account
for over 64 percent of all Domino’s international stores. Note that India has the most Domino’s
of all countries, followed by the UK. Just 5 years earlier, India was only third in total stores
outside the United States behind both the UK and Mexico. As with domestic franchisee stores,
most of the company’s revenue in the International Division comes from royalty payments and
advertising, as well as the sales of food and supplies to certain markets (predominantly Canada,
Alaska, and Hawaii). Domino’s aggressively attracts a master franchiser in international markets
to sub-franchise out to other individuals.
CASE 10 • DOMINO’S PIZZA, INC.—2018 477
Competitors
Pizza delivery and carry-out competition in both the United States and internationally is ex-
tremely intense, with Pizza Hut (owned by Yum! Brands) being the largest competitor in the
industry. Yum! Brands’ revenues are over 128 percent greater than Domino’s. Papa John’s and
Little Caesars are also fierce rivals in the industry. In addition to the three main rivals of Pizza
Hut, Papa Johns, and Little Caesars, Domino’s faces intense competition from thousands of
local mom-and-pop pizza stores, frozen pizzas from the grocery store, as well as hundreds of
non-pizza fast food options.
Exhibit 7 provides a quick comparative analysis of Domino’s with two rival firms. Note that
Yum! Brands is three times the size of Domino’s, but Domino’s is nearly five times the size of
Papa John’s from a market capitalization perspective.
Internationally, Pizza Hut and Domino’s are the main companies in the industry, but most
countries also have thousands of mom-and-pop pizza and Italian restaurants. As with the do-
mestic market, some customers consider local pizza stores to offer better quality products than
large chains and are willing to pay marginally higher prices for this perceived quality. Another
competitor is RAVE Restaurant Group, owner of Pizza Inn, based in The Colony, Texas. RAVE
owns and franchises out more than 300 Pizza Inn and Five Pie Pizza stores in the United States
and Internationally.
Pizza Hut
A division of Yum! Brands, Pizza Hut is based in Plano, Texas, and operates over 16,000 restau-
rants in the United States and internationally in over 100 countries as of the beginning of 2018,
up from 12,800 restaurants just 5 years earlier. In contrast to Domino’s, almost all Pizza Huts
EXHIBIT 6 Domino’s Store Locations at Year-End 2017
Country Number of Stores
USA 5,491
India 1,123
UK 1,002
Mexico 679
Australia 658
Japan 497
Turkey 491
Canada 452
South Korea 442
France 354
Netherlands 230
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Annual Report and other information.
EXHIBIT 7 Financial Comparison of Domino’s with Two Rival Firms
Domino’s Yum! Brands Papa John’s International
$ Market Cap. 9.5B 26.6B 2.0B
# Employees 14,100 60,000 20,700
$ Revenue 2,788M 6,366M 1,713M
% Gross Margin 31 45 21
$ Net Income 278M 1,619M 103M
$ EPS Ratio 5.25 3.77 2.90
$ P/E Ratio 42.35 21.27 19.89
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
478 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
are dine-in restaurants. Pizza Huts serve their Pan Pizza, as well as their Thin n’ Crispy, Stuffed
Crust, Hand-Tossed, and Sicilian. Other menu items include pasta, salads, and sandwiches.
Pizza Huts offer dine-in service at their famous red-roofed restaurants, as well as carryout and
delivery service. About 15 percent of all Pizza Huts are company-operated while the remaining
stores are franchised. The world’s largest fast food company, Yum! Brands also owns and oper-
ates Kentucky Fried Chicken (KFC) and Taco Bell. The firm lost its CEO in 2018 to Chipotle
Mexican Grill.
Papa John’s International, Inc. (PZZA)
Headquartered in Louisville, Kentucky, and founded in 1985, Papa John’s operates 5,097 pizza
restaurants, with 4,456 of these being franchisee-owned and 743 being company-owned stores.
Total restaurants have increased over 30 percent from year-end 2012 through 2017. Papa John’s
has restaurants in all 50 U.S. states and 44 foreign markets. The company currently has 16,500
full-time employees and markets their pizza under the slogan “Better ingredients, better pizza.”
The company reported revenue of over $1.7 billion for year-end 2017 with net income of $102
million. Papa John’s carries $85 million in Goodwill on their balance sheet.
Papa John’s offers several different pizza styles and topping choices, as well as a few spe-
cialty pies such as The Works and The Meats. Papa John’s stores typically offer delivery and car-
ryout service only. The company announced in 2018 that it was reducing its formal partnership
with the NFL over founder and Chairman John Schnatter’s comments on players’ rights to stand
or not stand at games during the playing of the U.S. National Anthem.
RAVE Restaurant Group
RAVE owns Pizza Inn and Pie Five Pizza. The latter two are a relatively small chain of fran-
chised quick-service pizza restaurants, with more than 300 locations in the United States and
the Middle East. Pizza Inns offer pizzas, pastas, and sandwiches, along with salads and desserts.
Most locations offer buffet-style and table service, while other units are strictly delivery and
carryout units. The chain also has limited-menu express carryout units in convenience stores
and airport terminals, and on college campuses. Pizza Inn’s domestic locations are concentrated
in more than 15 Southern states, with about half located in Texas and North Carolina. The firm
has struggled in recent years with flat revenues from fiscal 2015 through 2017, hovering around
only $55 million. Net losses of $1.2 million in 2015 have swollen to over $12 million in 2017.
Little Caesars
Headquartered in Detroit, Michigan, and privately held, Little Caesars is famous for its advertis-
ing slogan, “Pizza! Pizza!” which was introduced in 1979. The phrase refers to two pizzas being
offered for the comparable price of a single pizza by competitors. In November 2010, Little
Caesars introduced Pizza! Pizza! Pantastic, denying that the return of “Pizza! Pizza!” had any
relationship to the recent success of Domino’s. Little Caesars operates under its parent Little
Caesars Enterprises and is estimated to be the third largest pizza chain in the United States,
along with Papa Johns. Little Caesars operates in 30 foreign countries and has over 5,460 loca-
tions that are both franchised and company-owned.
Little Caesars is building a new $150 million, nine-story, 234,000 square foot, world head-
quarters expansion, more than doubling the size of its current campus in Detroit, to accom-
modate the company’s rapid global growth and hiring. Little Caesars claims to be the largest
carryout-only pizza chain in the world with a presence in all 50 states and 20 international
markets. The company recently opened franchises in Dominican Republic, Costa Rica, and
Panama with additional expansion taking place worldwide. Little Caesars attracts and continues
to look for highly capable franchisee candidates for new market opportunities domestically and
throughout the world.
External Issues
Nutrition Concerns
An area of concern for all fast food establishments, including pizza stores, is the growing
health-minded customer, as well as the growing pressure from government agencies to label all
products with nutrition information. There have been battles between the restaurant industry
CASE 10 • DOMINO’S PIZZA, INC.—2018 479
and government agencies for many years, much like the tobacco industry (in respect to labeling
their products). It appears the war is close to being lost for the restaurant industry. Domino’s
itemizes nutrition information on their website. After doing the calculations, one large slice of
hand-tossed pepperoni pizza, for example, has 300 calories and 12 grams of fat, and there are 8
slices in a pizza. To complicate matters for restaurants such as Domino’s, it is difficult to provide
accurate nutrition labels when there can be an almost endless combination of ingredients on a
pizza. For example, someone may order a large sausage pizza with onions and olives whereas
someone else might order extra cheese and tomatoes. Having to print out nutrition labels for all
these combinations would be quite costly, as opposed to a restaurant like McDonald’s where
they can print the nutrition label on the Big Mac as there is uniformity in ingredients and the
label is understood to be for the base item.
To complicate matters for the QSR industry as a whole, many lawmakers want to force nutri-
tion information to be included on the menu at the point of sale, and there is still a debate in the
United States regarding whether each state could/should enact their own nutrition guidelines or
if there will be a national mandate/standard. Further spearheading the government’s position,
there have been several recent lawsuits where plaintiffs sought monetary damages in respect
to advertising to children and obesity in children derived from eating fast food. As the United
States (and world) population becomes more health conscious and more litigious, it seems evi-
table that detailed nutrition and possibly even warning labels similar to those in the tobacco in-
dustry will appear on some products and menus. In addition, lawsuits and governments are also
encouraging the elimination of trans fats (and other harmful products) that are still present in the
cheese on a Domino’s pizza, and many other pizzas.
Chipotle Mexican Grill claims to only use meat and dairy products from free-ranging cattle,
as opposed to cattle injected with growth hormones. Domino’s Pizza markets their pizzas as hav-
ing gluten-free crust. These are attempts to win over health-conscious customers, comply with
government regulations, and make current customers feel a little less guilty about eating pizza.
The tug of war between customers, governments, lawyers, and the restaurant industry on health
issues is likely to continue for some time.
In response to these challenges, many restaurants have opted for healthy menu options.
Wendy’s, for example, has promoted several meal combinations that contain less than 10 grams
of fat. All of these items were originally on its menu, just not marketed in that manner. Wendy’s
has added side salads and fruit to help cut down on calories, fat, and sodium. Subway is also
famous for marketing their products as healthy alternatives to other fast food options. Domino’s,
and many pizza competitors, offer few to no menu options for the health-conscious consumer.
Demographic Issues
Some analysts say there are too many restaurants in the United States to be supported by the
population. Currently, there are around 1 million fast food service locations in the United States,
or 1 for about every 330 people. With people looking for cheaper and healthier options, it is
difficult to determine just how many restaurants are too many. As businesses increasingly use
business analytics to better determine potential restaurant locations, it will be interesting to see if
the net total number of restaurants in the United States increases or declines in the coming years.
Domino’s for example plans to continue to add restaurants, but they target mainly college cam-
puses, shopping malls, and other high-traffic areas of their core customer base, while eliminating
stores in unproductive areas, and also are expanding internationally heavily.
Barriers to Entry
Barriers to entry are relatively low for the restaurant industry, but rivalry (competitiveness)
among firms is exceptionally high. One large contributing factor for the low barriers to entry is
many small entrepreneurs can open mom-and-pop establishments and bypass the franchise fees,
royalties, selection process, etc. of owning a franchised restaurant and lease an existing build-
ing relatively cheap. However, even avoiding high-fixed costs, variable costs are often high, and
small-scale entrepreneurs are not able to compete with larger franchise stores who can better
negotiate pricing on food, packaging, and other supplies. In the QSR industry, the bargaining
power of consumers is quite powerful, availability of restaurant options in most places is abun-
dant, and consequently, there is intense price competitiveness among rival firms. Even if you are
sure you want pizza for lunch or dinner, you likely have many options.
480 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Economic Factors
The current landscape in the Quick Service Restaurant (QSR) business is a bimodal population
distribution with a large population of bargain-minded customers seeking deals on less expen-
sive, fast food options, and another population of more affluent consumers targeting middle- to
higher-end restaurants. Domino’s is well positioned strategically to target the first group of
consumers as there are many more of them; Domino’s often has excellent sales and discounts to
target this group.
Among the subset of customers who are value shoppers, many of these are also shoppers of
quality and are willing to wait in line a little longer or pay a little more for better quality food
products. Domino’s has capitalized on this very well recently with the introduction of their
Artisan pizzas, and new recipes (or higher-quality products) for their crust, sauce, and cheeses.
In addition, Domino’s offers many pick-up specials. While pick-up may be an inconvenience
over delivery, many customers in today’s climate are willing to tolerate a degree of inconve-
nience if they can get a better deal.
Similar to Domino’s, many restaurant owners in the fast food industry have experienced
stronger growth in their international markets than in domestic markets. This trend is expected to
continue, especially in China and other developing nations, as many American fast food options
are still novel, even in Europe.
Global Issues
The fast food restaurant industry has been rapidly expanding overseas for the last 20 years and is
expected to continue to do so in the foreseeable future. Domino’s, for example, has over half of
their store locations overseas and Yum! Brands generated over 60 percent of their revenue from
overseas markets.
Expanding into global markets presents problems such as exchange rate fluctuations, diet of
local consumers, securing permits, possible anti-American association with U.S. brands, collect-
ing royalties from foreign operations, supply and distribution issues, currency valuation issues,
and even language barriers are all potential threats of operating overseas. In addition, securing
fresh food products in a timely manner may be difficult, as most franchises based in the United
States have backward integrated supply chains providing better control over supplies.
Expanding across countries also increases the risk of not being able to protect intellectual
property as well as desired. Trademark protection and registration, patents, dilution, and unfair
competition are all risks associated with developing markets that are not as problematic in more
developed markets. In the United States, most fast food restaurants are aimed at lower income
people who wish for a quick and easy drive-though meal. However, in contrast, in many de-
veloping markets, while still offering virtually the same menu as in the United States, the fast
food industry is geared more to the middle class and a sit down dine-in experience, much like a
Buffalo Wild Wings, Moe’s Southwest Grill, or TGI Fridays would be in the United States. In
general, the overall décor and ambience in international fast food establishments tends to be a bit
nicer than the United States counterparts.
Future
In February 2018, Domino’s launched its oven-baked sandwiches, but only in Australia.
Domino’s CEO of Australia and New Zealand operations says the fillings were chosen to include
“on-trend” ingredients such as avocado and kale-slaw. There are four flavors to choose from and
each sandwich costs $5.95.
Almost as soon as Papa John’s ended its sponsorship agreement with the NFL over differing
beliefs, Pizza Hut was named as the official pizza sponsor of the NFL. The Pizza Hut sponsor-
ship began with the 2018 NFL Draft. Papa John’s is focusing on each of the 22 NFL teams sepa-
rately now, rather than marketing to the league as a whole.
With up to a million or more restaurants selling pizza every day across the world, Domino’s
needs a clear strategic plan moving forward. The company is doing well now, but doing well
today is not a guarantee to do well tomorrow, so diligence is required and needed.
CASE 11 • PETMED ExPRESS, INC.—2018 481
PetMed Express, Inc.—2018
www.1800petmeds.com , PETS
Headquartered in Delray Beach, Florida, PetMed Express is a licensed online pharmacy that
fills prescriptions written by veterinarians. The company has over 9 million satisfied customers
and dispenses drugs only in the United States. The company competes with local veterinarians,
many of whom make money selling drugs for pets. PetMed carries all the medications sold in
veterinarian offices. The company says it employs the largest number of veterinary pharmacists
in the world. The company has a history of legal problems with veterinaries across the country
undercutting their prices and other related concerns. PetMed does not disclose where it obtains
its pet drugs and this fact irritates many veterinarians.
PetMed Express is America’s largest pet pharmacy, delivering prescription and non-
prescription pet medications and other health products for small animals at competitive prices
direct to consumers through its 1-800-PetMeds toll-free number and on the Internet through its
corporate website. The company’s fiscal 2017 year ended March 31, 2017. For the company’s
Q3 2018 that ended December 3, 2017, new order sales increased 15.5 percent, new income
increased 88 percent, and revenues increased 13.7 percent—so PetMed is doing well. In January
2018, the company’s board of directors increased the firm’s dividend by 25 percent from $0.20
to $0.25 per share paid on February 16, 2018.
PetMed markets prescription and non-prescription pet medications, as well as health prod-
ucts and supplies for small animals to retail customers. A sampling of the company’s products
include flea and tick control products, bone and joint care products, vitamins, treats, nutritional
supplements, hygiene products, and supplies; and prescription medications, including heart-
worm preventatives, flea and tick preventatives, arthritis, thyroid, diabetes, pain medications,
antibiotics, and other specialty medications, as well as generic substitutes. PetMed also sells
food, beds, crates, stairs, strollers, and other pet supplies through its website, direct mail, and its
toll-free number. It markets its products through Internet; telephone contact center; and direct
mail/print through 1-800-PetMeds catalogs, brochures, and postcards under various brands.
Coyprighted by Fred David Books, LLC; written by Meredith E. David.
History
PetMed was founded in 1996 by Marc Puleo. The company got off to a rocky start. In 1999, the
company settled charges with the Florida Pharmacy Board for selling drugs that did not have
prescriptions, false advertising, poor record keeping, and not labeling drugs correctly. As part of
the settlement, the company paid a fine but also agreed to send its pharmacists for further educa-
tion, agreed to random inspections, and agreed to provide regular reports to the board.
In 2002, PetMed was fined by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for sell-
ing drugs marked with metric doses—the drugs that were made by Novartis for sale in
Europe and Australia. PetMed is exclusively a U.S. firm and the doses and labeling were not
FDA-approved—Novartis sued PetMed for damages. In 2002, PetMed was charged by the
Florida Pharmacy Board for contracting with veterinarians to write prescriptions for animals
they had never examined, and for selling animals drugs that had not been approved by the FDA.
In the same year, the company settled similar charges in Ohio. Also in 2002, the pharmacy board
in Texas filed a lawsuit charging PetMed Express with dispensing veterinary drugs without
prescriptions. The case was settled in 2006.
Even as late as August 2017, PetMed has legal problems as the Rosen Law Firm filed a class
action lawsuit against the company alleging that PetMed was marketing dangerous and addictive
animal drugs to humans. As a result of this action, Google may halt PetMed’s advertising and
business operations with that firm.
482 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Vision/Mission
PetMed Express appears to not have a vision or mission statement provided at the corporate
website or in the company’s Annual Report.
Internal Issues
Customers and Advertising PetMed says 2.3 million customers purchased from the company in fiscal 2016 and 2017,
and that about 50 percent of those customers reside in California, New York, Pennsylvania,
North Carolina, Virginia, and Georgia. The company dispenses drugs across the United States.
The company obtained 514,000 new customers during fiscal 2017, compared to 489,000 new
customers from the prior year.
As a percent of revenue, the company’s advertising expenses were 7.1 and 9.3 percent, respec-
tively, for fiscal 2017 and 2016. In fiscal 2017, the company eliminated all television advertising.
Employees PetMed has about 190 full-time employees, including 105 in marketing, 43 in pharmacy, 3 in
information technology, 3 in administrative positions, and 5 top managers.
Organizational Structure Based on the titles of their corporate executives, it appears that PetMed operates from a functional
organizational structure with no divisions. The company is quite light on top executives and no
one appears to head up potential segments, such as prescription versus non-prescription, online
versus traditional, or pharmaceutical versus other.
EXHIBIT 1 PetMed’s Top Executives and Organizational Chart
Source: Based on company documents.
1
2
3 4 5 6 7
1. Robert Schweitzer, Director, Chairman of the Board
2. Menderes Akdag, Director, CEO and President
3. Frank Formica, Director and Legal Consultant
4. Ronald Korn Director, President of Ronald Korn Consulting
5. Gian Fulgoni, Director, CEO and Co-Founder of comScore, Inc.
6. Bruce Rosenbloom, CFO and Treasurer
7. Allison Berges, Corporate Secretary and General Counsel
Segment Information PetMed does not provide much segment information beyond what is summarized in Exhibit 2.
Note in Exhibit 2 that Reorder Sales comprise about 83 percent of all sales, and ironically
Internet sales also comprise about 83 percent of all sales.
Finance PetMed’s fiscal year ends March 31. For the company’s Q3 2018 quarter that ended
December 31, 2017, net sales were $60.1 million, compared to $52.9 million for the prior
year same quarter, an increase of 13.7 percent. Net sales for the 9 months ended December
31, 2017, and were $206.5 million, compared to $186.1 million for the 9 months previ-
ous, an increase of 10.9 percent. The increase in sales for the company’s Q3 2018 quarter
CASE 11 • PETMED ExPRESS, INC.—2018 483
were up due to increased new order sales, which increased 15.5 percent, and reorder sales,
which increased 13.4 percent. Net income for the Q3 2018 quarter was $9.1 million, com-
pared to net income of $4.8 million the previous year same quarter, an 88 percent increase.
Net income for the 9 months ended December 31, 2017 was $27.1 million, compared to
net income of $16.3 million, for the 9 months the prior fiscal year, a 66 income increase
to net income. Average order size increased to $86 for the Q3 2018 quarter, compared to
$81 for the same quarter in the prior year. Also for the company’s Q3 2018 quarter, on-
line sales increased 15.0 percent to $50.4 million from $43.8 million for the same period
the prior year, and were approximately 84 percent of all sales, compared to 83 percent for
the same quarter the prior year. The company’s Q3 2018 was the fourth consecutive quarter
of increasing both new order and reorder sales.
In January 2018, the company’s board of directors declared and increased the quarterly divi-
dend by 25 percent from $0.20 to $0.25 per share on the firm’s common stock. The dividend was
paid on February 16, 2018.
PetMed Express beat profit estimates again in its Q4 2018 that ended 3-31-18. For Q4 2018,
the company reported net income of $10.2 million, up from $7.5 million in the year-earlier
period. Sales rose to $67.3 million from $63.0 million. Also for that Q4, the company’s margins
rose to 37 percent from 35.1 percent, boosted by a product mix shift to higher margin items.
Additionally, for Q4 2018, PetMed’s average order value was $89 compared to $86 for the same
quarter the prior year.
PetMed’s income statements and balance sheets are provided in Exhibit 3 and Exhibit 4,
respectively.
EXHIBIT 2 PetMed’s By-Segment Sales Information (in thousands USD)
Segment 2017 % 2016 % % Variance
Reorders 206,299 82.8 195,569 83.3 +5.5
New Orders 42,877 17.2 39,115 16.7 +9.6
Total 249,176 100 234,684 100 +6.2
Internet 205,643 82.5 190,781 81.3 +8.8
Phone 43,533 17.5 43,903 18.7 -0.8
Total 249,176 100 234,684 100 +6.2
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Annual Report.
EXHIBIT 3 PetMed’s Income Statements (in thousands USD)
Income Statement 3/31/16 3/31/17 Percent Change
Revenues $234,684 $249,176 6.18%
Cost of Goods Sold 158,388 169,862 7.24%
Gross Profit 76,296 79,314 3.96%
Operating Expenses 43,908 41,831 -4.73%
EBIT 32,388 37,483 15.73%
Interest Expense (190) (141) -25.79%
EBT 32,578 37,624 15.49%
Tax 12,000 14,105 17.54%
Non-Recurring Events (11) 300 NA
Net Income 20,567 23,819 15.81%
Source: Based on company documents.
484 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 4 PetMed’s Balance Sheets (in thousands USD)
Balance Sheet 3/31/16 3/31/17 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments $37,639 $58,730 56%
Accounts Receivable 1,724 1,808 5%
Inventory 25,586 20,228 -21%
Other Current Assets 2,678 1,019 -62%
Total Current Assets 67,627 81,785 21%
Property Plant & Equipment 20,929 30,164 44%
Goodwill 0 0 NA NA
Intangibles 860 860 0%
Other Long-Term Assets 863 0 -100%
Total Assets 90,279 112,809 25%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 5,004 15,221 204%
Other Current Liabilities 2,080 3,134 51%
Total Current Liabilities 7,084 18,355 159%
Long-Term Debt 0 0 NA NA
Other Long-Term Liabilities 0 1,088 NA NA
Total Liabilities 7,084 19,443 174%
Equity
Common Stock 20 21 5%
Retained Earnings 78,295 86,530 11%
Treasury Stock 0 0 NA NA
Paid in Capital & Other 4,880 6,815 40%
Total Equity 83,195 93,366 12%
Total Liabilities and Equity 90,279 112,809 25%
Competitors
Eight companies in particular generate sales in the billions for animal pharmaceuticals: Zoetis,
Merck Animal Health, Merial, Elanco Animal Health, Bayer Animal Health, Boehringer
Ingelheim Animal Health, Novartis Animal Health, and Virbac. However, arguably two of
PetMed’s major rivals are Kroger and Walmart. Both firms fill animal prescriptions.
Headquartered in Parsippany-Troy Hills, New Jersey, Zoetis develops vaccines, parasiti-
cides, anti-infectives, medicinal feed additives and drugs for pain, sedation, and cancers for pets
and farm animals. The company has annual sales of $5 billion. The company name has its root
in “zo”, familiar in words such as zoo and zoology and derived from zoetic, meaning “pertaining
to life.” About 60 percent of Zoetis sales come from farm animal products and 40 percent from
companion animal products, mainly medicines and vaccines.
Headquartered in Kenilworth, New Jersey, Merck Animal Health manufactures vaccines,
anti-infective and anti-parasitic drugs, fertility management drugs, and other specialty pharma-
ceutical products for companion animals and livestock.
Owned by Eli Lilly and headquartered in Indianapolis, Indiana, Elanco Animal Health
develops and markets products to treat animal health and increase protein production. Products
Source: Based on company documents.
CASE 11 • PETMED ExPRESS, INC.—2018 485
include flea protection for dogs and cats, drugs to combat parasites in poultry, and vaccines and
feed additives for livestock and poultry.
Headquartered in Ingelheim am Rhein, Germany, Boehringer Ingelheim Animal Health
markets biologicals, vaccines, pharmaceuticals, and other care products for use in pets and
livestock. Boehringer owns Merial that develops and markets veterinary products including
anesthetics, antiparasitics, antimicrobials, and gastrointestinal, respiratory, and cardiovascular
medicines. It also produces vaccines for livestock, poultry, and pets.
Headquartered in Leverkusen, Germany, Bayer HealthCare Animal Health manufactures
antimicrobials, parasiticides, sedatives, pain killers, and nutritional supplements and feed
additives for dogs, cats, and horses. Products for food animals include anti-infectives, vaccines,
parasiticides, sedatives, and pain killers.
Headquartered in Basel, Switzerland, Novartis Animal Health develops and markets health
product for companion animals, livestock, and the aquaculture market. Popular products include
treatments for dermatitis, flea protection, pain and heartworm prevention in pets, and antibiotics
and antiparasitics in farm animals. Novartis also developed some of the first vaccines for combating
viral and parasitic infections in fish. Novartis was acquired by Eli Lilly in 2015 for $5.4 billion.
Headquartered in Carros, France, Virbac Group manufactures antibiotics, vaccines, antipara-
sitics, dermatological, and dental products for the treatment and care of pets and food animals.
Although the companies mentioned above are competitors to PetMed, including Kroger
and Walmart, two other companies are major pet pharmacy rivals. They are PetIQ and Heska
Corporation, even though as of right now neither sell drugs direct to consumers; they only sell to
vets or businesses, but that could change anytime.
PetIQ, Inc. (PETQ; www.petiq.com) Founded in 2010 and headquartered in Eagle, Idaho, PetIQ manufactures and distributes pet
medications, including veterinarian-grade prescription and over-the-counter products. The
company develops, manufactures, and sells pet medications, and health and wellness products
for dogs and cats in the United States, Canada, and Europe. PetIQ is quite similar to PetMed
Express in offering pet prescription medications, including products for arthritis, thyroid, and
diabetes and pain treatments, as well as heartworm preventatives, antibiotics, and other specialty
medications; over-the-counter medications and supplies, such as flea and tick control products
in various forms comprising spot-on treatments, chewables, and collars; and health and wellness
products consisting of specialty treats and other pet products, which include dental treats and
nutritional supplements. Various PetIQ trade names include PetAction, Advecta, PetLock, Heart
Shield, TruProfen, Betsy Farms, Minties, Vera, Delightibles, vetGuard, Mimi’s Market, PAWS
IQ, VET + CHOICE, VET WORKS, TEX RANCH, and VetIQ brands.
PetIQ markets over-the-counter and prescription pet medications and pet wellness products
through wholesale distributors and retail stores in mass, club, grocery, pharmacy, and online. In
January 2018, PetIQ acquired Community Veterinary Clinics, LLC d/b/a VIP Petcare (“VIP”), a
leading operator and provider of nationwide veterinary clinics and veterinarian services within
major U.S. retailers. VIP is now a wholly-owned subsidiary of PetIQ. VIP has its national footprint
in the veterinarian services and products industry. As evidenced by this acquisition, PetIQ is rapidly
growing, executing upon its mission (paraphrased) “to enhance pet lives by educating pet parents on
the basics of veterinary care and veterinary-recommended pet products and services.”
VIP Petcare has a nationwide network of community clinics and wellness centers that deliver
high value pet preventive and wellness veterinary services to all pet owners.
Heska Corporation (HSKA; www.heska.com) Headquartered in Loveland, Colorado, Heska sells veterinary diagnostic and other specialty
veterinary products, including allergy testing, blood testing instruments, diagnostic tests, digital
imaging equipment, and supplements. The company develops, manufactures, and markets
advanced veterinary diagnostic and specialty products for the dog and cat healthcare markets in
the United States, Canada, Europe, and internationally.
Heska operates through two segments: 1) Core Companion Animal Health, and 2) Other
Vaccines, Pharmaceuticals and Products. The Core Companion Animal Health segment offers
such products as the Element DC and DRI-CHEM 7000 veterinary chemistry analyzers for
486 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
blood chemistry and electrolyte analysis, as well as the HT5 and HEMATRUE veterinary
hematology analyzers to measure white and red blood cell count, platelet count, and hemoglobin
levels in animals. Other popular products include the Element POC blood gas and electrolyte
analyzers and the Element i immunodiagnostic analyzers, as well as mobile digital radiography
products, point-of-care heartworm diagnostic test products for dogs and cats, TRI-HEART Plus
Chewable Tablets for the preventive treatment of heartworm infection in dogs, and treatment and
control of ascarid and hookworm infections.
Heska’s Other Vaccines, Pharmaceuticals and Products segment offers bovine vaccines,
biological, and pharmaceutical products for other animal-health companies, and various turnkey
services comprising research, licensing, production, labeling, and packaging. This segment also
sells its products to veterinarians through a field organization, a telephone sales force, and inde-
pendent third-party distributors, as well as trade shows, print advertising, and other distribution
relationships.
Exhibit 5 provides a financial comparison of PetMed with PetIQ and Heska Corp. Notice
that PetMed is the largest of the three firms and has the highest profit margin.
EXHIBIT 5 A Financial Comparison of PetMed with PetIQ and Heska Corp.
PetMed PetIQ, Inc. Heska Corp.
$ Market Cap. 873M 475M 445M
% Profit Margin 13 –1.39 10.67
$ Revenue 270M 260M 135M
$ Net Income 35M –3.6M 14.5M
# Shares Outstanding 20.5M 13.2M 7.2M
$ EPS Ratio 1.70 –0.28 1.91
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
External Issues
As the year 2018 begins, worldwide sales of animal vaccines, medicines, and medical devices
exceeds $8 billion annually with an additional $14 billion in sales of vaccines and medicines for
livestock. An industry trade group named Animal Health Institute reports that the global market
for animal medicines is about one-fortieth of that spent on human medicines. The trade group
estimated that today “24 billion chickens, more than 1 billion cattle and sheep, 750 million pigs
and goats, 500 million dogs and 400 million cats” worldwide benefit from innovations in animal
health.
Animal health drugs dispensed in the United States require approval from the Food and Drug
Administration (FDA). According to the Animal Health Institute, the development of a new ani-
mal drug can take up to 10 years and cost up to $100 million prior to approval. A new vaccine
takes 3 to 5 years to develop and averages around $80 million in costs. Animal health product
manufacturers support the FDA approval process through user fees authorized by the Animal
Drug User Fees Act (ADUF) and the Animal Generic Drug User Fee Act.
The American Pet Products Manufacturers Association says pet spending in the United
States increased 10.7 percent to $66.9 billion in 2016. Among that total, pet supplies and medi-
cations comprised 22 percent, or $14.7 billion. PetMed Express says the pet medication market
they target is worth about $4.3 billion in annual sales. According to the company’s 2017 Form
10K, the dog and cat population in the United States is about 184 million, with about 68 percent
of all households having a pet.
There are numerous facts and figures related to pet ownership worldwide, but simply focus-
ing on the United States as PetMed does. Exhibit 6 provides some relevant information for per-
forming an external strategic management assessment.
CASE 11 • PETMED ExPRESS, INC.—2018 487
EXHIBIT 6 Relevant U.S. Facts and Figures for PetMed Express External Audit
• 55 percent of American households have pets
• Dog ownership is growing faster than any other pet category
• Aging boomers are more likely than previous generation to own pets
• Aging boomers prefer large dogs for security reasons
• Dog ownership has increased 29 percent in the past decade
• Multiple-dog ownership households is growing fastest of all categories
• Millennials are today more likely than previous generation to own pets
• Non-Hispanic whites are overrepresented in the population of dog owners
• Half of dog owners live in the 25 largest American cities
• Owners of multiple dogs are more likely to splurge on their pets
• 59 million Americans own cats
• There is little growth in the cat pet population over the past decade
• Women are responsible for most of the cat pet ownership
• Cat ownership among seniors increased 43 percent in the last decade
• Cat ownership among Hispanics is growing rapidly
• 24 percent of owners have overweight cats
• Owners of multiple cats are more likely to by pet products at discount stores
• Birds, fish, and other non-cat-or-dog pets live in 15 million U.S. households
• 23 percent of pet owners have a pet other than a dog or cat
• Population of pets other than dogs and cats reaches 86 million in the United States
• Boomers are less interested in pets other than cats or dogs
• Latinos most likely to own pet birds
• High income households usually are who owns non-dog-or-cat pets
• Children are a major factor in ownership of non dog-or-cat pets
Future
In the first two months of 2018, shares of PedMed stock declined 10 percent, even though the
company’s earnings per share (EPS) were $.44 for Q3 of fiscal 2018, up 83.3 percent from the
year-ago quarter’s $.24. That year-over-year rise in earnings was accompanied by company sales
in Q3 2018 rising 13.7 percent year-over-year to $60.1 million. Also, for Q3 2018, PedMed’s
reorder sales increased 13.4 percent to $50.9 million, while new order sales rose 15.5 percent to
$9.2 million. The company’s average order value was $86 in Q3, compared with $81 in the year-
ago quarter. There is seasonality in the company’s business because of the proportion of flea,
tick, and heartworm medications in the product mix. Spring and summer are considered peak
seasons while fall and winter represent off-seasons. Also, during Q3 2018, PetMed acquired
106,000 new customers, up from 99,000 a year ago. Roughly, 84 percent of all orders was gen-
erated from its website (versus 83% in the prior-year quarter). Finally, for Q3, the company’s
advertising expenses rose 30.2 percent to $4.1 million. Given the excellent Q3 results, PetMed
announced a 25 percent increase in quarterly dividend to $.25 cents per share that was paid to
shareholders in March 2018.
PetMed is performing quite well, but this success gives incentive for manufacturers of pet
medications to forward integrate into PetMed’s business, potentially crushing PetMed. The com-
pany needs a clear strategic plan going forward.
Source: Based on information at https://globenewswire.com/news-release/2017/07/17/1047437/0/en/ United-States-Pet-Population-and-Ownership-Trends-Report-2017-Focus-on-Dogs-Cats-and-Other- Pets.html
488 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
AstraZeneca plc—2022
www.astrazeneca.com
Headquartered in Cambridge, England, AstraZeneca plc is a huge pharmaceutical firm that
focuses on oncology, cardiovascular disease, renal and metabolism disorders, respiratory dis-
orders, immunology, and several other areas. It employs 76,100 persons, up from 70,000 and
64,000 in 2019 and 2018, respectively. In 2021, the company had 171 projects in its pipeline,
with 12 considered as in the late stage.
Global populations are shifting toward older age groups, spurring a greater need for advanced
medical care. People in developing regions have more disposable income and are increasingly
able to pay for advanced medical care. In fact, 34 percent of AstraZeneca’s sales in 2020 were
derived from emerging markets. COVID-19 is still fresh in everyone’s minds. With today’s tech-
nology and advanced data analytics, drugs can be tailored for specific customers. Such trends are
increasing competition among pharmaceutical firms.
History AstraZeneca traces its origins to the 1890s, when a group of pharmacists in Sweden proposed
that pharmaceuticals be produced on an industrial scale as opposed to pharmacists (often called
chemists) producing drugs locally. In 1913, Astra AB was formally incorporated and quickly
became a leading pharmaceutical firm in Sweden. AstraZeneca was founded in 1999 when the
Swedish firm Astra AB merged with the British Zeneca Group.
AstraZeneca reported goodwill of over $11 billion in 2020, indicating a history of paying
more than book value for acquisitions. (Note that whenever a firm pays more than the stock price
times the number of shares outstanding for a rival firm, then the overpaid amount is referred to
as goodwill and is recorded on the acquiring firm’s balance sheet.) Sometimes a company will
pay more than book value to obtain certain patents, trademarks, or technologies. AstraZeneca
acquired Cambridge Antibody Technology in 2006, Medimmune in 2007, Spirogen in 2013,
Definiens in 2014, and Alexion Pharmaceuticals in 2020.
AstraZeneca has a strong history of employing women, as evidenced by over 50 percent of the
company’s workforce being female. The firm also has a strong history with sustainability-related
issues; it is a member of several sustainability indices, including the Dow Jones Sustainability
Index, FTSE4Good, and the Access to Medicine Index. AstraZeneca produced a successful vac-
cine for COVID-19 in late 2020.
Vision/Mission
AstraZeneca does not have a stated vision or mission statement. However, paraphrased from
narrative on the corporate website and the company’s 2020 Annual Report , the following could
function as AstraZeneca’s vision and mission statements.
Vision Statement We are committed to becoming the global leader in providing life-changing medicines through
science and the entrepreneurial spirit of our employees.
Mission Statement At AstraZeneca, we serve people around the world to provide health solutions that increase the
quality of life of all we serve. Focused on producing ethical drugs and financial growth, we
are committed to using the latest technology and hiring the most talented scientists and busi-
ness professionals. Our core areas of service are oncology, cardiovascular, renal and metabolism,
and respiratory diseases. With respect to oncology, we are determined to find a cure for every
cancer known to man. By focusing on sustainability and environmental protection, we are also
committed to operating in a manner that balances business growth with preserving the natural
environment.
CASE 12 • ASTRAZENECA PLC—2022 489
EXHIBIT 1 AstraZeneca’s Income Statements (in millions of USD)
Source: Based on information in the 2020 AstraZeneca Annual Report, p. 176.
Income Statement 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Revenues $24,384 $26,617 9%
Cost of Goods Sold 4,921 5,299 8%
Gross Profit 19,463 21,318 10%
Operating Expenses 16,539 16,156 –2%
EBIT 2,924 5,162 77%
Interest Expense 1,376 1,246 –9%
EBT 1,548 3,916 153%
Tax 321 772 140%
Non-Recurring Events 0 0 NA NA
Net Income 1,227 3,144 156%
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure AstraZeneca is proud to have a workforce that is 50.5 percent female. However, the company’s
senior executive team has only 4 women out of 12 team members, and the board of directors has
5 female members out of 14 members.
The firm’s structure features one major team referred to as the Senior Executive Team (SET)
and two governance bodies that make key decisions related to the business portfolios and pipe-
line. One team is called the Early Stage Portfolio Committee (ESPC), and the other is called the
Late Stage Portfolio Committee. Members of the SET are provided below. It is difficult to figure
out exactly how the firm is structured, but considering consumption habits of drugs are likely
similar across geographic regions, a new organizational structure with presidents of the four key
segments should perhaps be considered.
AstraZeneca’s top executives are listed below:
1. Pascal Soriot, CEO
2. Marc Dunoyer, CFO
3. Katarina Ageborg, Executive Vice President, Sustainability and Chief Compliance Officer
4. Jose Baselga, Executive Vice President, Oncology R&D
5. Pam Cheng, Executive Vice President, Operations & Information Technology
6. Ruud Dobber, Executive Vice President, BioPharmaceuticals Business Unit
7. David Fredrickson, Executive Vice President, Oncology Business Unit
8. Menelas Pangalos, Executive Vice President, Biopharmaceuticals R&D
9. Jeff Pott, General Counsel and Chief Human Resources Officer
10. Iskra Reic, Executive Vice President, Europe and Canada
11. Leon Wang, Executive Vice President, International and China President
12. Fiona Cicconi, Executive Vice President, Human Resources
Financial Data and Statements As indicated in Exhibit 1, AstraZeneca reported revenue growth of 9 percent in fiscal 2020 but
a 156 percent net income growth due in large part to controlling the cost of goods sold expenses
and a slight reduction in operating expenses. In Exhibit 2, note the large amount of goodwill
on the balance sheet from purchasing rival firms in excess of book value and the large intan-
gibles number. Intangibles are common for firms such as AstraZeneca as they indicate patents. In
December 2020, AstraZeneca agreed to acquire Alexion Pharmaceuticals for $39 billion in part
because of the firm’s desire to report revenues of $40 billion by 2023. Note the goodwill on the
2021 balance sheet once the acquisition is finalized; just how much will AstraZeneca overpay for
Alexion? Don’t be misled by large increases in revenues or net income in fiscal 2021, as they will
largely be derived from this merger.
490 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
R&D Information Research and development (R&D) activities and expenditures are the backbone of virtually all
pharmaceutical firms. R&D is a major expense at AstraZeneca. The company markets itself as
focusing on quality rather than quantity with its R&D through its 5R Framework strategy. Over
the period from 2015 to 2020, the 5R Framework aided the firm in advancing the former propor-
tion of pipeline molecules by four times. The basis of the 5R Framework is 1) selecting the right
targets that have a significant correlation with the disease under concern, 2) assuring new drugs
more effectively target the correct tissues, 3) ensuring that safety is high before beginning clini-
cal trials, 4) ensuring the right markets are chosen based on the value propositions of the right-
size target markets, and 5) ensuring that drugs are tailored more closely to individual patients.
Typically, the average success rate for small molecule (virus) research is 6 percent, but through
the 5R Framework, AstraZeneca has been able to advance its Phase III clinical trials from 4 to 19
percent, well above the 6 percent average. For example, implementing just Step 5 above enabled
the launch of 9 companion diagnostics tests over a 5-year period ending in 2016, compared to only
1 companion diagnostics test launched between 2005 and 2010. Notable areas of these diagnostics
included lung cancer, ovarian cancer, and bladder cancer. For the patient, a diagnostic test is much
EXHIBIT 2 AstraZeneca’s Balance Sheets (in millions of USD)
Source: Based on information in the 2020 AstraZeneca Annual Report, p. 177.
Balance Sheet 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short Term Investments $5,369 $7,832 46%
Accounts Receivable 5,761 7,022 22%
Inventory 3,193 4,024 26%
Other Current Assets 1,240 666 –46%
Total Current Assets 15,563 19,544 26%
Property Plan & Equipment 7,688 8,251 7%
Goodwill 11,668 11,845 2%
Intangibles 20,833 20,947 1%
Other Long-Term Assets 5,625 6,142 9%
Total Assets 61,377 66,729 9%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 13,987 15,785 13%
Other Current Liabilities 4,130 4,522 9%
Total Current Liabilities 18,117 20,307 12%
Long-Term Debt 16,217 17,994 11%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 12,447 12,790 3%
Total Liabilities 46,781 51,091 9%
Equity
Common Stock 328 328 0%
Retained Earnings 2,812 5,299 88%
Treasury Stock 0 0 NA NA
Paid in Capital & Other 11,456 10,011 –13%
Total Equity 14,596 15,638 7%
Total Liabilities and Equity 61,377 66,729 9%
CASE 12 • ASTRAZENECA PLC—2022 491
more cost effective, time saving, and less invasive than a traditional biopsy. The test is often pos-
sible with just a simple prick of the finger.
To further benefit from R&D investments, AstraZeneca routinely partners with leading uni-
versities and research laboratories, enabling AstraZeneca scientists to work with the world’s
best researchers and scientists in joint partnerships. This open innovation initiative benefits not
only AstraZeneca but also the world at large. The firm spent $6 billion on R&D in both 2019
and 2020.
The general phases of R&D projects is 5 to 15 years, with a 6-step sequence: 1) identify
medicines that will have a positive impact; 2) initiate preclinical studies; 3) conduct Phase I tri-
als, which includes trials with health volunteers to determine dosage and side effects; 4) Phase II
trials, which expand on Phase I trials, and where the sample size of volunteers are increased and
further data is collected for regulatory approvals; 5) Phase III trials, where larger sample sizes
are used and a branding strategy for the drug is determined; and 6) regulatory submission and
pricing. These R&D phases are followed by a launch phase that could last another 5 to 15 years.
By-Segment Information
AstraZeneca conducts business in four key segments: 1) Oncology, 2) Cardiovascular, Renal
& Metabolism, 3) Respiratory & Immunology, and 4) Other Medicines. Exhibit 3 shows that
Oncology is the largest division, with 42 percent of sales in 2020, and the fastest-growing divi-
sion, with sales up a remarkable 80 percent since 2018. The weakest division is Other Medicines,
representing only 10 percent of total revenue, and with sales down 24 percent since 2018.
2018 2019 2020
$ 6 ,0
2 8
$ 6 ,7
1 0
$ 4 ,9
1 1
$ 3 ,4
0 0
$ 6 ,9
0 6
$ 5 ,3
9 1
$ 1 0 ,8
5 0
$ 7 ,0
9 6
$ 5 ,3
5 7
0
2,000
4,000
6,000
8,000
10,000
12,000
Oncology Cardo, Renal &
Metabolism
Respiratory &
Immunology
Other Medicines
$ 8 ,6
6 7
$ 2 ,6
0 1
$ 2 ,5
8 7
EXHIBIT 3 AstraZeneca’s Sales by Segment (in millions of USD)
Source: Based on AstraZeneca’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 2.
Oncology Exhibit 3 shows that oncology, the branch of medicine that specializes in cancer, is the most prof-
itable and fastest-growing segment at AstraZeneca. The firm claims their mission is to discover
and provide a cure for every type of cancer known to man. This segment has grown 80 percent
since 2018 and represents 42 percent of all sales. Globally, cancer is the second leading cause
of deaths. Lung cancer has the highest mortality rate, taking a life every 18 seconds, and is fol-
lowed by colorectal, stomach, liver, and breast cancer. The two most common types of cancer
worldwide are lung and breast cancer. Prostate and ovarian are other common cancers for which
AstraZeneca specializes in finding cures and medical treatment.
492 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
The market for oncology is over $140 billion annually, and AstraZeneca enjoys $10.8 billion of
this market (less than 8 percent), leaving substantial room for growth. Tagrisso, AstraZeneca’s drug
for lung cancer, has been approved in the United States and in 85 other countries. Sales of this drug
were up 36 percent in 2020, with revenues of $4.3 billion. Lynparza is a drug that can treat ovarian,
breast, pancreatic, and prostate cancers, and it accounted for $2.2 billion in sales, up 24 percent from
2019. This drug is approved in 78 countries for ovarian cancer but only in 55 countries for pancreatic
cancer. This discrepancy calls to attention the heavy regulation in this industry, as many of the same
countries that approve drugs for some cancers do not approve the same drug for other cancers.
Imfinzi, which is used to treat both lung and bladder cancer, experienced an increase in sales
of 39 percent to $2 billion in 2020; it is approved in 67 countries. While AstraZeneca has many
other drugs, these three drugs account for 79 percent of 2020 revenues for the oncology divi-
sion. New regulation, patent expiration, and piracy of any one of these three drugs are all serious
threats for AstraZeneca moving forward. The firm has numerous other products in the pipeline
waiting approval, but careful strategic planning is needed because of expiring patents on the
same drugs that treat these common types of cancers. Recall from earlier that AstraZeneca only
controls 7.7 percent of the oncology market.
Cardiovascular, Renal, & Metabolism The mission of this business segment is to protect people from cardiovascular, renal, and me-
tabolism (CVRM) diseases. The CVRM market is estimated to be over $204 billion worldwide,
with AstraZeneca controlling $7 billion of it, or 3.4 percent. Globally, diabetes represents $100
billion of the $204 billion world market in CVRM, with high blood pressure and blood choles-
terol accounting for $35 and $17 billion, respectively. In total, 463 million people worldwide live
with diabetes, and 18 million people die from heart failure and cardiovascular disease annually.
About 700 million people live with chronic kidney disease. Similar to oncology, a few drugs
comprise most of the revenue for AstraZeneca in this division.
Farxigal is approved in 100 countries and is used to treat both Type 1 and Type 2 diabetes.
The reported revenue for the drug was nearly $2 billion in 2020, up 27 percent from 2019.
Brilinta, which treats coronary artery disease and stroke, is approved in 110 countries and re-
ported revenues of $1.5 billion in 2020, but it was up only 1 percent from 2019. The third and
fourth most profitable drugs in this segment for AstraZeneca both had revenues around $500
million but were down 11 and 18 percent in 2020. With flat sales over 3 years in an important di-
vision, AstraZeneca needs a clear strategic plan to determine what direction this division should
take, as the data indicates that unless something changes, the entire division’s growth predomi-
nately hinges on just Farxigal.
Respiratory & Immunology The annual worldwide market value for this segment is projected to be $72 billion, with asthma
accounting for $22 billion and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD) accounting for
$17 billion. AstraZeneca accounted for $5.3 billion of this $72 billion industry, which forecast-
ers quickly see growing into a $100 billion industry. Globally, 339 million people suffer from
asthma, and 60 percent of the cases are considered uncontrolled. COPD is the third leading cause
of death in the world, with over 384 million people suffering annually. AstraZeneca has three
leading asthma drugs that represent about $4.6 billion of the firm’s $5.3 billion in sales. Overall,
this segment reported a 1 percent decline in revenue in fiscal 2020. The firm has several drugs in
Phase III of the pipeline to hopefully help asthma patients.
Other Medicines The drugs AstraZeneca includes in this segment cover the areas of infection, neuroscience, and
gastroenterology. COVID-19 drugs are included here—AstraZeneca had one of the more popular
coronavirus drugs in the world along with rivals Moderna and Pfizer. This segment accounts for
$2.5 billion in annual sales for AstraZeneca, and the products treat such aliments as influenza,
schizophrenia, bipolar disease, osteoarthritic pain, and opioid-induced constipation. The drug
Nexium, a proton pump inhibitor to treat acid-related diseases, represented nearly 50 percent of
all sales in this segment. The firm divested rights in Europe to Grunenthal in October 2018 but
still enjoys strong sales in other regions of the world. In the 2020 Annual Report, AstraZeneca
derived only $2 million from COVID-19 vaccines, but this data only covered a limited period of
the drug’s availability to the public.
CASE 12 • ASTRAZENECA PLC—2022 493
Regions Served Exhibit 4 shows that emerging markets accounted for the same revenue generation as the United
States in 2020. Europe, with more than double the U.S. population, accounts for significantly less
revenue, due in part to firms not being able to charge higher prices in this region. Infrastructure
problems, governmental incentives, differences in drug approvals, and the preponderance of per-
sons across countries capable of paying for various drugs explain the variation in AstraZeneca’s
sales across regions.
2018 2019 2020
$ 6 ,8
9 1 $
8 ,1
6 5
0
1,000
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
6,000
7,000
8,000
9,000
10,000
Emerging
Markets
United States Europe Established
Rest of World
$ 6 ,8
7 6
$ 7 ,7
4 7
$ 8 ,6
3 8
$ 4 ,4
5 9
$ 4 ,3
5 0
$ 5 ,0
5 9
$ 2
,8 2 3
$ 3 ,3
0 3
$ 3 ,5
1 4
$ 8 ,6
7 9
EXHIBIT 4 AstraZeneca’s Sales by Region (in millions of USD)
Source: Based on AstraZeneca’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 3.
Competitors
The highly competitive pharmaceutical industry is led by Johnson & Johnson, with a market cap
at the time of writing of $430 billion, followed by Roche, Pfizer, Merck, and Novartis, with mar-
ket caps of $288 billion, $214 billion, $195 billion, and $195 billion, respectively. AstraZeneca
checks in at ninth with a market cap of $132 billion. Most of the top pharmaceutical firms are
based in the United States, but Roche and Novartis are based in Switzerland. Interestingly,
Moderna, another notable drug company with a popular COVID-19 vaccine, is not in the top 10
largest firms based on market cap. There are several key players in the generic market, includ-
ing Viatris, Teva Pharmaceuticals, and Sun Pharmaceutical, with India being the largest nation
providing generic drugs globally.
Bristol Myers Squibb Although only the seventh largest firm in the global pharmaceuticals industry, Bristol Myers
Squibb (BMS) controls the second and third most popular oncology drugs in the industry. Recall
that oncology is the top revenue-generating segment for AstraZeneca and the top overall revenue-
generating segment in the industry. The firm specializes in oncology and cardiovascular diseases,
HIV, and other diseases. BMS traces its roots to 1887, and in 1989 it was the second largest
pharmaceutical company in the world, but it lost market share after divesting holdings and mak-
ing poor strategic decisions. BMS has had an aggressive acquisition history recently, with large
acquisitions in 2015, 2017, and 2019, and it recently announced plans to acquire Celgene for $74
billion. Celgene is a leading biopharmaceutical manufacturer in oncology, so this could place
significant pressure on AstraZeneca.
Johnson & Johnson The largest company by market capitalization in the pharmaceutical industry, Johnson & Johnson
(J&J) is a household name around the world partly because the firm is so diversified, and many of
the products are over-the-counter items such as baby powder, skin lotions, and skin oils. With respect
494 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
to pharmaceuticals, J&J’s focus includes immunology, infectious diseases, vaccines, nervous system
disorders, and oncology. J&J also has one of the more popular COVID-19 vaccines; however, batches
of the vaccine had to be recalled.
Pfizer Pfizer is likely the big winner in the COVID-19 vaccine lottery as it is arguably the most popu-
lar one worldwide. Other key drugs of the firm include Lipitor, Norvasc, and Zoloft. Most of
Pfizer’s manufacturing facilities are located in the United States as the country is the largest mar-
ket, but the firm is expanding internationally as patent protection laws are increasingly enforced.
Pfizer’s main businesses include biologics, small molecule medicines, and vaccines. Due to this
profile, Pfizer and AstraZeneca do not compete as directly as some other firms do in the very
competitive cancer research arena.
External Issues
Regions The United States is the world’s largest pharmaceutical market by a wide margin, partly because
pharmaceutical firms can charge higher prices. Healthcare customers in the United States tend to
be more fragmented and private, and there is less regulation on pricing as there is no centralized
national health system like many other countries. As a result, U.S. consumers tend to pay the bill
for citizens from other nations. For instance, in 2020, the U.S. government accelerated develop-
ment of treatments and vaccines for COVID-19, likely saving millions of lives, and perhaps pav-
ing the way for quicker to-the-market products from pharmaceutical firms. However, there are
signs the U.S. windfall for big pharma may be waning as both Democrats and Republicans are
lobbying for affordable drug prices.
In 2021, the U.S. pharmaceutical market was estimated at over $500 billion. The top 6 pharma-
ceutical spending nations in Europe account for $174 billion, with Germany and France being the
largest spenders at $52 and $35 billion, respectively. China spent $95 billion and Japan spent $81
billion on pharmaceuticals in 2020. China’s spending is expected to grow to $165 billion by 2023.
Trends The global demand for healthcare is accelerating, with an aging population in established mar-
kets and a growing income level in developing nations. By 2050, the number of people over the
age of 60 will be 2 billion, and 80 percent of these citizens will be living in developing regions.
Research suggests that as the percentage of older people is growing quicker than the younger
percentage of the population, the reports of non-communicable diseases (NCDs) will increase.
Disabilities caused by NCDs will become a large burden for global disease control and treatment
but presents a large opportunity for pharmaceutical firms. NCDs kill over 41 million people
annually and are responsible for 34 percent of the disease burden in 2019, compared to only
21 percent in 1990. Smoking, poor diet, and lack of exercise have been blamed for many NCD
deaths and health problems.
Historically, R&D investments have focused on treatment options. This has been extremely
profitable for the industry, but with increasing competition, there is a shift industrywide now to
R&D that focuses more on prevention and even early intervention and detection. AstraZeneca’s
research in developing many new diagnostic tests serve as examples here. It was a long-held
belief that focusing on treatment was far more profitable than prevention and early detection, but
some analysts now contend that pharmaceutical firms should focus more on developing cures
rather than treatments.
In 2020, the United States had $514 billion in global pharmaceutical sales, or 48 percent
of the world’s total. Europe totaled $211 billion in sales, and emerging markets totaled $228
billion. The entire world saw around $1.07 trillion in pharmaceutical sales in 2020. Note that
AstraZeneca received 34 percent of its 2020 sales from emerging markets compared to the indus-
try average of 21 percent.
Regulatory Environment Regulations offer a major threat for many players in the industry as the public expects safe and
effective drugs. As a result, governments around the world highly regulate their production and
distribution. This prolonged approval process increases the cost of drugs and the time it takes for
CASE 12 • ASTRAZENECA PLC—2022 495
the drugs to reach desperate patients. Patents are used to protect firms, but piracy is increasing
globally, and there is often a worry that drugs, once approved, may be stripped of patent protec-
tion if they benefit society. One notable example is the question of COVID-19 vaccine patent
protection rights. Fortunately, for the coronavirus and other diseases, government regulators have
started the process of accelerating patient access to drugs that have transformative prospects.
With the exit of the United Kingdom from the European Union and the relocation of the
European Medicines Agency from London to Amsterdam, there may be increased disruption of
the regulatory process, and this could impact AstraZeneca directly. China continues to change re-
quirements on its drug development, and the EU Health Strategy in November 2020 sought to re-
define regulation of the pharmaceutical industry in the European Union. It is the hope of firms like
AstraZeneca that the new EU policy will expediate and reduce the cost of bringing drugs to market.
Pricing of Medicines There is significant downward pressure on what is a fair price for pharmaceutical products—
good for consumers but bad for pharmaceutical companies. Highly regulated governments, in-
surance companies, and other players are keeping costs down in many regions of the world. Drug
prices in China dropped 50 percent for 119 medicines in March 2021, and in Europe, govern-
ments extend stringent price control measures on medicines. President Joe Biden has supported
proposals that significantly reduce the price of drugs in the United States, which was tradition-
ally viewed as a market where drug makers could generate the bulk of their sales—this market
accounted for 48 percent of global pharmaceutical sales in 2020.
Generic Drugs Even when prices remain high and patents are honored, both are finite, and protection does ex-
pire. Generic drugs benefit from not having large R&D and market development expenses and
are available at substantially lower prices. For example, in 2020, in the United States alone, over
85 percent of prescriptions dispensed were for generic drugs. The generic drug market presents
a significant threat for firms that have enormous R&D expenses like AstraZeneca. In addition,
governments are offering incentives (or legal bribes, if you care to think of incentives this way)
to pharmacists to fill prescriptions with generics.
Brexit A year after the United Kingdom exited the European Union (“Brexit”), the UK government and
the European Union were able to come to terms on a trade agreement, but many issues remain.
Free trade and free movement of workers will play an important role; at present, 11 percent of
the workforce of AstraZeneca is based in the United Kingdom and 12 percent in Europe.
Oncology Remains on Top As discussed earlier in the case, AstraZeneca’s leading segment is oncology, and oncology is,
in fact, the largest segment across the industry in terms of revenue as well in spending on drug
research (it is thus a major driver of spending growth). New technology in this area includes
drugs working with the body’s immune system to fight off cancer as opposed to older technology
where the drugs directly targeted the cancer cells themselves. Three of the leading drugs with
this approach are owned by Merck and BMS. While BMS is eighth in terms of market cap, this
firm has the second and third most popular drugs in the field of oncology, making BMS a serious
competitor for AstraZeneca. For reference, AstraZeneca’s Tagrisso is the seventh most popular
oncology drug.
Conclusion
Strategy Considerations AstraZeneca is a global player in the pharmaceutical industry and needs a clear strategic plan
moving forward. Note that the firm has four distinct divisions with one, the cancer research
division, leading sales by a wide margin. What should AstraZeneca do with the other divi-
sions? How should the firm shift its resources around? Your job as a student is to assume you
have been hired by AstraZeneca to produce a three-year strategic plan, so be careful not to
496 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
report what the firm has been doing or what you think they are going to do based on the latest
news releases, unless this matches your own detailed strategic analysis. Instead, report what your
analysis suggests the company should do based on your strategic management knowledge and
research. In fact, this is exactly what AstraZeneca would pay you to do if you were really hired
to develop a three-year strategic plan. Other considerations to take into account are the organi-
zational structure. Would you suggest a change? Does the mission or vision of the firm need to
be reworked? Do you agree with the latest mergers and management’s desire to push revenues
past $40 billion annually? Is growth in this direction the most effective and efficient option, or is
there a better alternative to grow? What drug lines would you consider selling to rival firms? Be
mindful that shareholders expect at least a 5-percent top-line and bottom-line growth annually.
The pharmaceutical industry has a bright future, with an aging population in the United
States, Europe, and Japan and emerging markets that have more disposable income. What prod-
ucts and regions are best served? In AstraZeneca’s Annual Report, the CEO often mentions that
AstraZeneca is out to win. Help CEO Soriot by developing a detailed three-year strategic plan.
References
1. AstraZeneca, “What Science Can Do AstraZeneca Annual Report and Form 20-F
Information 2020,” https://www.astrazeneca.com/investor-relations/annual-reports/annual-
report-2020.html.
2. S&P Net Advantage, Industry Surveys, Pharmaceutical Report.
CASE 13 • SHELL PLC—2022 497
Shell plc—2022
www.shell.com
Headquartered in Haagse Hout, The Hague, Netherlands, Shell is the largest company in Europe.
A British–Dutch oil and gas company that is highly vertically integrated with extensive opera-
tions in over 100 countries, Shell employs experts in the exploration, production, refining and
marketing of oil and natural gas as well as the manufacturing and marketing of chemicals glob-
ally. The company uses advanced technologies to extract and process oil and gas and is also
involved in wind, solar, advanced biofuels, and hydrogen.
At the end of 2020, Shell had 87,000 employees working in over 70 countries, operated 13
refineries, and produced about 3.5 million barrels of oil and 70 million tons of liquefied natural gas
(LNG) per day. Shell globally explores for crude oil and natural gas and extracts these products from
major fields; it also extracts bitumen from oil sands, cools natural gas to produce LNC, and builds
and operates refineries and chemical plants that produce lubricants, petrochemicals, diesel, and avia-
tion fuel. Additionally, Shell invests in wind and solar to reduce global carbon dioxide emissions.
History
The Shell Transport and Trading Company was founded by Marcus Samuel in 1890, and the
Royal Dutch Petroleum Company was founded by Jean Kessler, Henri Deterding, and Hugo
Loudon in 1897. The two rival companies merged in April 1907, primarily for the purpose of
competing more effectively with the U.S.-based Standard Oil. In 1912, the merged company,
Royal Dutch Shell, purchased the Rothschilds’ Russian oil assets.
Shell was battered by the COVID-19 pandemic, with the company in February 2021 report-
ing a loss of $21.7 billion for the year 2020 despite a reduction in operating expenses by $4.5
billion (12 percent). To give you a feel for what Shell does globally today, some of its projects
that are currently operating or under construction are described below.
Appomattox is Shell’s largest floating deep-water oil and gas operation/platform in the Gulf
of Mexico.
LNG Canada is a huge natural gas project under construction off the west coast of British
Columbia, Canada, but 10 years away from completion. Shell owns 40 percent of this project,
followed by PETRONAS (25 percent), PetroChina (15 percent), Mitsubishi Corporation (15 per-
cent), and KOGAS (5 percent). This location offers a relatively short shipping distance to north-
ern Asia, one of the fastest-growing gas markets in the world, avoiding the Panama Canal.
Pennsylvania Petrochemicals Complex is a 100-percent Shell-owned petrochemicals plant
under construction 30 miles northwest of Pittsburgh to process ethane from shale gas. About 70
percent of North American polyethylene customers are within a 700-mile radius of Pittsburgh,
thus offering Shell a competitive advantage over rivals.
Vito is Shell’s 11th deep-water project in the Gulf of Mexico, scheduled to begin producing
about 100,000 barrels of oil per day in 2021. Shell owns 63 percent of the operation and Statoil
USA E&P Inc. owns 37 percent.
Bonga North West is a Shell operation producing 40,000 barrels of oil per day in the Gulf of
Guinea off the coast of Nigeria in an average water depth of 3,300 feet.
Cardamom is a 100-percent Shell-owned oil and gas operation located in the Gulf of Mexico
currently producing about 50,000 barrels of oil per day in 2,600-feet-deep water.
Gumusut-Kakap is Shell’s first deep-water project in Malaysia, producing about 148,000
barrels of oil per day from the Gumusut-Kakap field in 3,900-feet-deep water.
Kaikias is an 80-percent Shell-owned deep-water oil and gas project in the Gulf of Mexico.
MOEX North America LLC owns 20 percent of the project.
Malampaya Phases 2 & 3 is a 45 percent Shell-owned natural gas-to-power project located
off the northwest coast of the Philippines that provides 20 percent of that country’s electric-
ity. Chevron owns 45 percent of the operation, and the Philippine National Oil Corporation-
Exploration Corporation (government) owns 10 percent.
498 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Malikai is a 35-percent Shell-owned floating oil production facility located off Sabah,
Malaysia, that produces about 60,000 barrels of oil per day. ConocoPhilips owns 35 percent and
Petronas Carigali owns 30 percent of this floating platform, which produces and pipes oil about
30 miles to the shallow-water Kebabangan platform for processing.
Nanhai Petrochemicals Complex is located in Guangdong Province, China, and is 50 percent
owned by both Shell and the China National Offshore Oil Company (CNOOC) Petrochemicals
Investment Company Limited. This operation supplies the Chinese market with about 3 million
tons of ethylene and propylene derivative products, used in a wide range of industrial and con-
sumer products, including household appliances, cars, furniture, and computers.
Ormen Lange is a 17.8-percent Shell-owned deep-water oil and gas operation located in the
Norwegian Sea 75 miles northwest of Kristiansund, Norway. It meets 20 percent of the United
Kingdom’s gas needs via one of the world’s longest subsea pipelines. Petoro owns 36.5 percent
of this operation, followed by Statoil at 25.4 percent. The facility produces about 100,000 gallons
of oil per day.
Parque Das Conchas is a 50-percent Shell-owned ultra-deep oil and gas operation located
at Campos Basin, Brazil, that currently produces natural gas. The other owners are ONGC, at 27
percent, and Qatar Petroleum International, at 23 percent.
Vision/Mission
On their corporate website, Shell states their “purpose” as offering more and cleaner energy
solutions that raise standards of living globally in order to drive demand for energy, including
oil and gas, for years to come. It also notes the need to tackle climate change and transition to a
low-carbon energy consumption planet. Also mentioned is a focus on safety and having a “Goal
Zero” philosophy, meaning zero harm to its people or the environment.
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure Shell appears to have an organizational structure based on strategic business units (SBUs).
There are four: 1) Downstream, 2) Upstream, 3) Projects & Technology, and 4) Integrated Gas/
Renewables/Energy. There appears to be no chief operating officer (COO). The Chair of Shell’s
board of directors is Sir Andrew Mackenzie, but the company’s CEO, Ben van Beurden, serves
as a board member, as does the company’s CFO, Jessica Uhl. There are more women than men
on Shell’s board of directors.
Exhibit 1 provides a list of the top Shell executives that comprise the company’s executive
committee, as well as the company’s likely chain of command.
1. Ben van Beurden, CEO
2. Jessica Uhl, CFO
3. Harry Brekelmans, Projects & Technology Director
4. Donny Ching, Legal Director
5. Ronan Cassidy, Chief HRM Director
6. Wael Sawan, Upstream Director
7. Huibert Vigeveno, Downstream Director
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8. Maarten Wetselaaar, Integrated Gas, Renewables, and Energy Solutions Director
1
EXHIBIT 1 A List of Shell’s Top Executives and a Flow Chart
Source: Based on information at www.shell.com.
CASE 13 • SHELL PLC—2022 499
Financial Data and Statements Exhibits 2 and 3 below show the financial statements for Shell. Note that the firm had a disas-
trous year in 2020 as COVID-19 stopped or curtailed travel for both leisure and work. Note that
on the balance sheets cash increased significantly as plant property and equipment were sold off
as mentioned later under the segment data. Accounts receivable dropped 23 percent, lowering
total assets by 6 percent on the year.
EXHIBIT 2 Shell’s Income Statements (in millions of USD)
Source: Based on information in Shell’s 2020 Financial Supplement Excel File.
Income Statement 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Revenues 352,106 183,195 –48%
Cost of Goods Sold 279,421 141,094 –50%
Gross Profit 72,685 42,101 –42%
Operating Expenses 42,510 64,979 53%
EBIT 30,175 (22,878) –176%
Interest Expense 4,690 4,089 –13%
EBT 25,485 (26,967) –206%
Tax 9,053 (5,433) –160%
Non-Recurring Events (2,659) (1,978) –26%
Net Income 13,773 (23,512) –271%
EXHIBIT 3 Shell’s Balance Sheets (in millions of USD)
Balance Sheet 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments 18,055 31,830 76%
Accounts Receivable 43,414 33,625 –23%
Inventory 24,071 19,457 –19%
Other Current Assets 7,149 5,783 –19%
Total Current Assets 92,689 90,695 –2%
Property Plant & Equipment 238,349 210,847 –12%
Goodwill – – NA NA
Intangibles 23,486 22,451 –4%
Other Long-Term Assets 49,812 55,275 11%
Total Assets 404,336 379,268 –6
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 49,208 41,677 –15%
Other Current Liabilities 30,416 32,274 6%
Total Current Liabilities 79,624 73,951 –7%
Long-Term Debt 83,702 93,419 12%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 50,547 53,361 6%
Total Liabilities 213,873 220,731 3%
(continued )
500 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Strategy Being reliant on oil and gas is starting to become a threat for a firm, for electric vehicles are
becoming increasingly popular, overall fuel efficiency is increasing, and new measures are being
created by governments to reduce emissions. Shell is attempting to shift its resources to becom-
ing a net-zero-emissions firm with a deadline of 2050. In 2021, Shell introduced its Powering
Progress initiative to accelerate the transition to a net-zero-emissions business. Shell plans to
achieve this target by reducing emissions generated from the products it sells to customers, cap-
turing residual emissions, or countering them with offsets.
Shell is in the process of shifting its business more toward biofuels, hydrogen-charging for
electric automobiles, and solar and wind technology. However, this is a slow process for Shell as
the firm has a stated goal of increasing biofuels and hydrogen in transportation from 3 percent
to 10 percent by 2030. By then, Shell also aims to provide renewable electricity to 50 million
households and offer 2.5 million electric charging ports for automobiles
Shells’ other aspirations or targets include $100 million spent on nature areas such as forest
and wetlands as well as plans to invest up to $3 billion annually in the renewables and energy
solutions businesses. Shell has tied a portion of pay to 16,500 staff (Shell has not disclosed what
portion this amounts to) to reducing the firm’s carbon footprint by 6 to 8 percent between 2016
and 2023.
By-Segment Information
Shell is organized into four basic segments: 1) Integrated Gas, 2) Renewables & Energy
Solutions, 3) Upstream, 4) Downstream, and 5) Projects & Technology. However, the firm re-
ports segment data by 1) Integrated Gas, 2) Upstream, 3) Oil Products, and 4) Chemicals and
Corporate. Integrated Gas, Upstream, Oil Products, and Chemicals are all within the Projects and
Technology segment. Corporate does not sell anything; it is only reported separate for bookkeep-
ing purposes.
Integrated Gas, Renewables, & Energy Solutions This segment manages the firm’s extensive liquefied natural gas (LNG) operations, including
exploration, extraction, conversion of natural gas into fuels, and all upstream and downstream
activities associated with LNG. This segment includes the old New Energies business and the
new Renewables and Energy Solutions business. In 2020, this segment was able to develop the
first phase of Arrow Energy’s Surat Gas Project, which is located in Australia. Total gas output is
expected at 90 billion cubic feet per year by 2030. In the same year, a new LGN processing unit
in Nigeria was established by Shell and the Blauwwind consortium, and it now generates power.
Integrated Gas, Renewables, & Energy Solutions is the second-largest revenue generating
segment and, at over 20 percent, has the best profit margin of all divisions. Most of the revenue
derived from this segment is from LNG, not the renewables section, but Shell actually com-
bines renewables with LNG for reporting purposes. Shell is building Renewables and Energy
Solutions through both organic (internal) growth and acquisitions (external).
By 2020, Shell was investing about $900 million annually in renewables and had a few nota-
ble accomplishments. In the United Kingdom, 900,000 homes were being supplied with natural
Source: Based on information contained in Shell’s 2020 Financial Supplement Excel File.
Balance Sheet 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Equity
Common Stock 657 651 –1%
Retained Earnings 172,431 142,616 –17%
Treasury Stock (1,063) (709) –33%
Paid in Capital & Other 18,438 15,979 –13%
Total Equity 190,463 158,537 –17%
Total Liabilities and Equity 404,336 379,268 –6%
CASE 13 • SHELL PLC—2022 501
gas and smart-home technology and 80,000 homes in Germany with Shell Energy Retail GmBH.
Shell has contributed to 60,000 solar panel home installations globally and is partly responsible
for 60,000 thousand electric vehicle (EV) charging ports at private homes across the Netherlands,
Germany, France, and the United Kingdom, with another 8,000 for businesses and private drives
in the United States, Canada, and Singapore. Finally, Shell has many onshore and offshore wind
farms across the world, but most of the wind farms are located in the United States.
Upstream This segment manages raw material exploration for and extraction of crude oil, natural gas, and
natural gas liquid. Getting oil (and other products) from oil rigs, deep-water drilling, oil sands,
and other means is considered Upstream. This segment generates the least revenue for Shell but
was quite profitable until 2020, when this segment lost more than all other segments combined.
Shell has over 40 years’ experience extracting oil from deep beneath the ocean, with projects in
the United States, Brazil, Nigeria, and Malaysia. At Shell’s Stones Project in the Gulf of Mexico,
oil is drilled in water 3,000 meters deep and another 6,000 meters through bedrock for a production
of 50,000 barrels of oil a day. In terms of total distance from the surface, Shell owns and operates
the world’s deepest oil drilling operation utilizing a floating production, storage, and offloading
(FPSO) vessel. Today, Shell has 12 such FPSOs in use worldwide. In Malaysia, Shell’s Gumusut-
Kakap platform operates in 1,200-meter-deep water, with peak production in the area of 148,000
barrels per day, but this region is notorious for tropical storms, making safety an issue at times.
Regarding Shell’s value chain, the upstream products are backward integrated. There are
many businesses and profit points along the value chain that strive to secure a slice of the profit
pie. The actual price of oil fluctuates quite a lot; it can double or halve in a matter of months,
whereas the price at the gas station will not move as quickly. Competing in this industry can be
volatile, showcased by the great profit margins in 2019 followed by absolute disaster in 2020.
Shell has sold a 60-percent interest in the Vaca Muerta Basin in Argentina and divested many
businesses in Brazil, Canada, Nigeria, the United States, and Egypt. Shell is in fact rethinking
competing in the upstream market—but one should be careful when analyzing the 2021 profits
and revenues from this segment based on extensive divestiture activity in 2020.
Oil Products This segment generates more revenue than all other segments combined but experienced a huge
drop in 2020 revenues compared to the other segments. The COVID-19 pandemic impacted
much of these results, but the broader lesson is that products sold in this segment are much more
prone to fluctuations from any number of events. Note that while earnings can be quite good,
profit margins are less impressive than in other businesses, meaning there is much less room for
mismanagement from the corporate office and less wiggle room from external events.
This business is part of Shell’s integrated value chain, where the company refines products
and moves them to customers as needed. Products sold in this segment include gasoline, die-
sel, heating oil, aviation fuel, marine fuel, lubricants, bitumen, and sulfur. This segment can be
thought of as “middle stream,” with upstream being finding the products and drilling for them.
This segment refines the products; downstream sells the products to the end customer. Shell has
13 refineries worldwide that can process 2.2 million barrels of crude oil daily, with refining capa-
bilities in Europe & Africa, the Americas, and Asia totaling 46, 33, and 21 percent, respectively.
The fact is, despite all the talk about clean energy, Shell is still overwhelmingly dependent on
traditional aspects of finding, drilling, and refining oil.
Chemicals Shell’s chemical business did well in 2020—it was the only segment to turn a profit. Note, how-
ever, that the segment only generates marginal revenue and limited profits. The industries served
by the chemical business includes automobiles, packaging, and other machinery industries. The
chemicals produced include ethylene, propylene, solvents, detergent alcohols, and ethylene gly-
col. Shell operates chemical plants worldwide and supplied 1,000 industrial customers with over
15 million tons of petrochemicals in 2020. At the time of writing, Shell had plans to integrate
a portion of its chemical business with its refining business, so be careful comparing numbers
between 2020 and future years within chemicals.
Exhibits 4 and 5 summarize Shell’s revenues and profits by segment as discussed above.
502 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
0
50,000
100,000
150,000
200,000
250,000
300,000
Integrated
Gas
Upstream Oil Products Chemicals
2019 2020
4 1 ,3
2 2
3 3 ,2
7 8
9 ,4
8 2
6 ,7
6 7
1 2 8 ,7
1 7
280,460
1 3 ,5
6 8
1 1 ,7
2 1
EXHIBIT 4 Shell’s Revenues by Product (in millions of USD)
Source: Based on information from Shell’s corporate website.
EXHIBIT 5 Total Segment Earnings/Losses (in millions of USD)
215,000
210,000
25,000
0
5,000
10,000
26,278
210,785
2494
Integrated
Gas
Upstream Oil Products Chemicals
808478
6,139
3,855
8,628
2019 2020
Source: Based on Shell’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 26.
External Issues
Deep-Water Drilling Many oil companies feel that, despite cleaner energy alternatives becoming more common,
popular, and in demand by the public, as the world’s population increases, so does the need
for oil. Under the oceans, in water ranging from hundreds to thousands of meters, are vast
amounts of oil and gas, most of which have never been found. Some estimates suggest there
are 270 billion barrels of oil in deep water left to be found. In 1978 the deepest offshore drill-
ing location was in less than 400 meters, but today the deepest drilling can be done in water
over 3,000 meters deep.
CASE 13 • SHELL PLC—2022 503
There are many risks associated with drilling, such as oil spills, which have profound en-
vironmental effects and are dangerous work for employees. In 2010, the Deepwater Horizon
rig, situated in water 1,500 meters deep but drilling through an additional 11,000 meters of
ocean floor to reach the oil, became the largest oil spill in American history. In this accident,
11 people were killed and 720 million liters of oil were spilled into the Gulf of Mexico over
3 months.
As of 2021, the technology exists to drill 20,000 meters past the ocean floor. Equipment
must be able to tolerate 180°C in some locations, where the earth’s mantle is close to the oil.
Deep-water drilling is becoming increasingly popular. Many firms, including Shell, drill in the
Gulf of Mexico. During the first decade of this century, only 15 percent of the U.S. oil produc-
tion in the Gulf of Mexico was derived from ultra-deep drilling; by 2017, this number had
increased to 52 percent, thanks in part to technology allowing deeper drilling. In 2020, a new
record for the Gulf of Mexico was set with 2 million barrels of oil produced in a single day. It
has been accepted in the industry that massive amounts of free cash can be generated from a
bountiful deep-water well.
However, the new technology has not advanced as fast as the dangers and margins of error
of engaging in such risky activities; in fact, research reveals that in deep-water drilling, for every
additional 30 meters drilled, serious accidents grow by a staggering 8 percent.
Other hot spots for deep-water drilling are off the coasts of Malaysia, Brazil, and Nigeria.
Keep in mind that there is a lot of ocean drilling done in places like the North Sea that may not
be considered “deep water” as the term is generally used for drilling in water in excess of 300
meters, and ultra-deep water is drilling in water in excess of 1,500 meters.
Macroeconomic Risks There is a significant and growing trend toward electric cars, and a lot of social stigma is at-
tached to high-polluting vehicles in much of the world. The supply and demand factors of oil
procurement and distribution are also a major risk in this industry, and wild swings in oil and
gas prices are fairly common. In 2020 alone, oil prices ranged from $13 per barrel to $50 per
barrel, down over 30 percent average from 2019. By the middle of 2021, oil prices ranged from
$45 to $75 a barrel. Oil and gas firms cannot set their own prices either, as organizations such
as Brent, West Texas Intermediate, Henry Hub, UK National Balancing Point, Japan Customs,
and OPEC all influence the price of oil. Political instability in much of the world where gas
is located presents risks, and poor weather conditions on offshore drilling can significantly
impact revenues.
Petroleum Refining The global market for petroleum refining is huge, with top players including Marathon Petroleum,
Valero Energy, ExxonMobil, Chevron, BP, Phillips, and Shell. One advantage to competing in
this industry is that the barriers to entry are quite high for several reasons, which include ex-
tremely high competition, high volatility, lower profit margins, and the high capital investments
needed. Nevertheless, revenue growth is to remain high up to 2026, so before oil firms shut tra-
ditional operations down, there is still a significant amount of money to be made in this business.
Increased regulations, however, will likely reduce margins.
A common trend in the oil and gas industry is to upgrade existing facilities rather than build
new ones. A threat for refiners in the United States is West Texas Intermediate prices, which are
expected to increase to match Brent’s in the coming years, adding further downward pressure on
profits for refineries. Exhibit 6 reveals that about half of all oil refined is produced as gasoline
and 22 percent is converted to diesel fuel, indicating the vast majority of the market is based on
the transportation business, and the transportation industry is committed long-term to combus-
tible engines.
Many People Live without Electricity About 1 billion people worldwide currently live without electricity, creating an enormous hu-
manitarian situation and an opportunity for energy providers. The current global population of
over 7 billion people is expected to grow to 9 billion in the next two decades. The middle class
will expand by more than 5 billion by 2030, with Asia accounting for 90 percent of the world’s
new entrants into this demographic.
504 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Competitors
There are not as many rival firms in the oil and gas industry as in many other industries, but the
firms that are competing tend to be extremely large. Shell, Exxon, BP, Chevron, ConocoPhillips,
Eni, Total, and other behemoths dominate the business. Many of these firms compete up and
down the value chain, from exploration and drilling (upstream) all the way to owning their own
gas stations and selling to the public (downstream). Deciding where and how to compete along
this value chain is of extreme importance. Deciding where to drill is also paramount. With so
many firms competing on the same dimensions and selling the same commodity, management
and research become key components to success as margins are low and it is difficult to dis-
tinguish a liter of gas produced by Shell from one by Exxon; customers often simply want the
cheapest they can get.
In addition to large traditional energy players, many smaller firms who specialize in wind
power, solar power, and electric battery production are competing in the green space. A few
notable solar firms include Solar Edge Technologies and SolarPower Corp. Plug Power,
QuantumScape, and even Tesla are producing battery technology for cars. There are too many of
these firms to list and most are small, but many firms could certainly develop into serious rivals.
Exxon Headquartered in Texas, in the United States, Exxon is a large oil and gas corporation that re-
ported revenues of $279 billion, $255 billion, and $178 billion in 2018, 2019, and 2020, respec-
tively; the firm also made $21 billion and $14 billion in 2018 and 2019, respectively, and lost
$22 billion in 2020. Exxon operates in the same businesses as Shell: upstream, downstream, and
chemical.
Exxon’s upstream business produces 4 million oil-equivalent barrels of oil and natural gas
daily and operates in 40 countries. The upstream business has stakes in deep-water drilling, un-
conventional, LNG, heavy oil, and conventional. The firm’s Mobil 1 leads the world in synthetic
motor oil sales and is the single best-selling U.S. retail motor oil.
ExxonMobil is one of the largest petrochemical companies in the world, providing materials
for use in products such as plastic bottles, synthetic rubber, solvents, and countless other goods;
it sells 5 million barrels a day of petroleum products in total. The company is the largest global
manufacturer of paraxylene and benzene. Exxon is also a large producer of ethylene and propyl-
ene; like many of the chemicals Exxon produces, these are considered feedstock, meaning they
are the basic ingredients used to help produce many products we use today in different fuels,
fibers, packaging film, automotive parts, etc.
Exxon is the world leader in capturing CO2. It has captured more than 120 million tons to
date, which amounts to 40 percent of all the anthropogenic CO2 ever captured in the world.
Exxon states that it is committed to transforming itself as green energy becomes increasingly
sought after, affordable, reliable, and powerful.
50%
22%
10%
7%
11%
Gasoline
Diesel
LPG
Jet Fuel
Other
EXHIBIT 6 Breakdown of a Refined Barrel of Oil
Source: Based on information derived from IBISWorld, and Exxon’s 2020 Annual Report.
CASE 13 • SHELL PLC—2022 505
Eni Headquartered in Italy, Eni SpA is a large oil and gas company that operates in many busi-
nesses including 1) Refining & Marketing, which focuses on refining and marketing of petro-
leum products; 2) Trading, which covers group services in commodity trading, shipping, and
derivatives; 3) Petrochemicals, which includes the production and sale of petrochemical prod-
ucts; 4) Engineering & Construction, which includes services for the oil and gas industry; 5)
Exploration & Production, which focuses on exploration for, development of, and production of
oil and natural gas; 6) Gas & Power, which covers the supply, regasification, transport, storage,
distribution and marketing of natural gas, power generation, and electricity sales; and 7) Power
and Renewables. Eni sells oil and gas in over 80 countries and operates numerous subsidiaries.
The firm reported revenues of €44 billion in 2020, down from €70 billion in 2019.
Conclusion
Traditional oil and gas is slowly being phased out and replaced with wind, solar, and battery
power. The automobile industry is on the forefront of this change, and many homes are powered
by solar panels as well. The days of drilling for oil and using oil to power everything are eventu-
ally going to go the way of coal-powered steamboats of the 1800s. People still want the power—
just not from antiquated technology. In the meantime though, oil still generates billions of dollars
in revenues and profits and can serve to help firms in the industry shift their capacity to cleaner
energy alternatives. There are gigantic fixed assets in this industry that firms like Shell must cope
with while trying to produce a profit even as industrywide profit margins decline.
When developing a strategic plan for Shell, be sure to consider where along the value chain
Shell should do business—upstream, in the middle, or downstream? How much capital should
Shell devote to renewable energy and renewable energy technologies? What is the most effec-
tive way to acquire these capabilities? Should Shell spend more on R&D—that is, grow or-
ganically—or should Shell purchase firms like the ones mentioned previously that are already in
these industries—that is, should Shell grow externally?
CEO Beurden has a lot to consider as he moves resources around and charts the future for
Shell. When developing the 3-year strategic plan, be mindful not to simply report exactly what
Shell is currently doing or what you think they are going to do from reading the news releases
(unless you agree with this path based on your analysis). Rather, focus on what direction you
would recommend Shell pursue, as if the company had hired your team as consultants to chart
the future path over the next 3 years. Your task is to design a strategic plan for Shell that will win
tomorrow, but remember that winning today is a prerequisite for that.
References
1. “2020 Annual Report,” ExxonMobil, https://corporate.exxonmobil.com/-/media/Global/
Files/investor-relations/annual-meeting-materials/annual-report-summaries/2020-Annual-
Report.pdf.
2. IBISWorld Reports, https://www.ibisworld.com/
3. “Shell Annual Report 2020,” Shell, https://reports.shell.com/annual-report/2020/.
506 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
The Walt Disney Company—2018
www.disney.com , DIS
Headquartered in Burbank, California, The Walt Disney Company (Disney) is a diversified
entertainment company operating worldwide in four segments that include: Media Networks,
Parks and Resorts, Studio Entertainment, and Consumer Products & Interactive Media (CP&IP).
The word Disney for many people means Mickey Mouse-related products, but the entire
umbrella of Disney also includes ESPN, ABC, Marvel, Pixar, cruise boats, and many other
products and services. Disney reported revenues and net income in 2017 of $55 billion and $9
billion, but both numbers were down slightly from 2016.
For Disney’s Q2 2018 that ended 3-31-18, the company reported a 9 percent increase in reve-
nues, compared to the prior year period, to $14.5 billion, and a 23 percent increase in net income
to $2.9 billion. These excellent results were led by the company’s strong performance from its
(1) Parks and Resorts and (2) Studio Entertainment segments. Within the Studio Entertainment
segment, excellent movies such as Black Panther and Avengers: Infinity War helped lead the
way. Within the Parks and Resorts segment, the company reported nice growth at Disneyland
Paris and Hong Kong Disneyland Resort, and Walt Disney World Resort—but decreases in at-
tendance and revenues at Shanghai Disney Resort.
Mickey and Minnie Mouse need a comprehensive 3-year strategic plan to guide their alloca-
tion of resources across Disney divisions in 2018–2020.
Copyright by Fred David Books LLC; written by Forest R. David and Fred R. David.
History
Mr. Walt Disney and his brother Roy arrived in California in the summer of 1923 to sell his
cartoon called Alice’s Wonderland . A distributor named M. J. Winkler contracted to distribute
the Alice Comedies on October 16, 1923, and the Disney Brothers Cartoon Studio was founded.
Over the years, the company produced many cartoons, from Oswald the Lucky Rabbit (1927) to
Silly Symphonies (1932), Snow White and the Seven Dwarfs (1937), and Pinocchio and Fantasia
(1940). The company name was changed to Walt Disney Studio in 1925. Mickey Mouse emerged
in 1928 with the first cartoon in sound. In 1950, Disney completed its first live-action film,
Treasure Island , and in 1954, the company began television with the Disneyland anthology se-
ries. In 1955, Disney’s most successful series, The Mickey Mouse Club , began. Also in 1955, the
new Disneyland Park in Anaheim, California, opened.
Disney created a series of releases from the 1950s through the 1970s, including The Shaggy
Dog, Zorro, Mary Poppins , and The Love Bug . Mr. Walt Disney died in 1966. In 1969, the
Disney started its educational films and materials. Another important time of Disney’s history
was opening Walt Disney World in Orlando, Florida, in 1971. In 1982, the Epcot Center opened
as part of Walt Disney World. The following year, Tokyo Disneyland opened.
After leaving network television in 1983, Disney introduced its cable network, The Disney
Channel. In 1985, Disney’s Touchstone division began the successful Golden Girls and Disney
Sunday Movie. In 1988, Disney opened the Grand Floridian Beach and Caribbean Beach
Resorts at Walt Disney World along with three new gated attractions: the Disney/MGM Studios
Theme Park, Pleasure Island, and Typhoon Lagoon. Filmmaking soon hit new heights as Disney
for the first time led Hollywood studios in box-office gross.
From 2000 to 2007, Disney created new attractions in its theme parks, produced many
successful films, opened new hotels and built Hong Kong Disneyland. Disney acquired Pixar
in 2006. Shanghai Disney Resort opened in 2015, the same year Disney released Star Wars
Episode VII in 2015.
CASE 14 • THE WALT DISNEY COMPANY—2018 507
Vision/Mission
Disney’s vision (paraphrased) is “to make people feel great.” The mission of Disney
( paraphrased) is “to be one of the leading producers and providers of creative, innovative, and
profitable entertainment and information globally.
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure Disney seemingly operates from a strategic business unit (SBU) type structure with the units aligning
with the four executives with the title Chairman. Perhaps division heads report to these Chairman
persons, such as the head theme park person for each park reporting to Bob Chapek. Although actual
reporting relationships are not made public, an extended SBU type organizational structure would
likely work well for the firm, but it would require changes in the Exhibit 1 depiction.
EXHIBIT 1 Disney’s Top Executives and Organizational Chart
Source: Based on company documents.
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1. Robert Iger, Chairman and CEO
2. Alan Braverman, EVP, General Counsel, and Secretary
3. Ronald Iden, SVP, Global Security
4. Kevin Mayer, EVP and Chief Strategy Officer
5. Christine McCarthy, EVP and CFO
6. Zenia Mucha, EVP and Chief Communications Officer
7. Jayne Parker, EVP and Chief HR Officer
8. Brent Woodford, EVP, Controllership, Financial
Planning, and Tax
9. Andy Bird, Chairman, Walt Disney International
10. Bob Chapek, Chairman, Walt Disney Parks and Resorts
11. Alan Horn, Chairman, The Walt Disney Studios
12. James Pitaro, Chairman, Disney Consumer Products
and Interactive Media
13. Ben Sherwood, Co-Chair, Disney Media Networks,
and President, Disney ABC Television Group
EXHIBIT 2 Disney’s Business Segment Revenues (in millions USD)
Source: Based on Disney’s 2017 Annual Report.
0
$ 2 3 ,6
8 9
$ 2 3 ,5
1 0
$ 1 6 ,9
7 4
$ 1 8 ,4
1 5
$ 9 ,4
4 1
$ 8 ,3
7 9
$ 5 ,5
2 8
$ 4 ,8
3 35,000
10,000
15,000
20,000
25,000
Media Networks
Parks and Resorts
Studio Entertainment
CP & IM
2016 Revenues 2017 Revenues
Business Segment Revenues
Segment Data As given in Exhibit 2 and Exhibit 3, Disney provides segment revenue and operating income
for each of their four SBUs: 1) Media Networks, 2) Parks and Resorts, 3) Studio Entertainment,
and 4) Consumer Products and Interactive Media. Note that only the Parks and Resorts segment
508 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
experienced a rise in revenues and net income. Note also that two segments comprise most of
Disney’s revenues: 1) Media Networks and 2) Parks and Resorts.
Specifically for Q2 2018, Disney reported that its revenues increased 3, 13, 21, and
2 percent, respectively for its four segments: 1) Media Networks, 2) Parks and Resorts,
3) Studio Entertainment, and 4) Consumer Products & Interactive Media. However for Q2, two
of those four segments reported declines in operating income, Media Networks (-6 percent) and
Consumer Products & Interactive Media (-4 percent). Regarding the Media Networks segment,
for Q2 2018, the Cable Networks business grew revenues 5 percent to $4.2 billion but reported
a decline in operating income of 4 percent to $1.7 billion. The other business within Media
Networks is Broadcasting which for Q2 2018 reported steady revenues and operating income of
$1.9 billion and $343 million, respectively.
Media Networks Media Networks is the largest Disney SBU in both revenues and operating income, account-
ing for $23 billion or 43 percent of all revenues in 2017. This percent has been fairly constant
since 2012. Within Media Networks, Disney owns and operates the ABC Television Network
that reaches nearly 100 percent of all U.S. households. This segment also includes ABC-owned
Television Stations Group, ABC Studios, Disney Channels Worldwide, ABC Family, A&E,
History, Lifeline, Disney ABC Domestic Television, Disney Media Distribution, Hyperion,
Radio Disney network and many more. The ABC Television Network operates more than 244
affiliated stations across the United States. Disney Channels Worldwide consists of 94 kids and
family entertainment channels available in 162 countries and 34 languages. ABC Family is a
mixture of series and movies. Disney ABC Domestic Television provides motion pictures and
TV programming to U.S.-based media platforms. Disney Media Distribution is an international
distributor of branded and non-branded content to all platforms. Hyperion publishes fiction and
non-fiction titles for adults. Radio Disney is available in more than 40 U.S. markets, and on sat-
ellite radio, mobile apps, and the web.
Disney owns 80 percent of ESPN with the other 20 percent owned by Hearst Corporation.
The ESPN network operates eight sports channels, with most operating 24 hours a day, reaching
61 nations in English, Spanish, Portuguese, and French. ESPN owns 30 percent stake in CTV
Specialty Television located in Canada; Disney owns a 20 percent stake in Seven TV in Russia.
Revenue growth in the Media Networks segment for 2017 was slightly negative as produc-
tion costs increased primarily because college sports, as well as NFL, MLB, NBA, The Masters,
U.S. Open Tennis, and Wimbledon, were able to negotiate more lucrative contracts over the
last few years. In particular, the NBA’s new TV contract in fiscal 2017 lowered Disney’s rev-
enue. The Disney segment’s operating income in 2017 was down 11 percent. Approximately
54 percent of the segment’s revenues are generated from charging fees to cable, satellite and
EXHIBIT 3 Disney’s Business Segment Operating Income (in millions)
Source: Based on Disney’s 2017 Annual Report.
$ 3 ,7
7 4
Media Networks
Parks and Resorts
Studio Entertainment
CP & IM
2016 Operating Income 2017 Operating Income
Business Segment Operating Income
$ 7 ,7
5 5
$ 3 ,2
9 8
$ 2 ,7
0 3
$ 1 ,9
6 5
$ 2 ,3
5 5
$ 1 ,7
4 4
0
$1,000
$2,000
$3,000
$4,000
$5,000
$6,000
$7,000
$8,000
$9,000
$ 6 ,9
0 2
CASE 14 • THE WALT DISNEY COMPANY—2018 509
communication providers (affiliate fees) and 35 percent of revenues generated from advertising
with the balance being derived from other sources. There are simply fewer television viewers
today, and fewer viewers generally mean less bargaining power for Disney to negotiate prices
with advertisers and cable providers.
Disney is forward integrated by owning eight TV stations in the United States, including the
top 4 markets in New York, Los Angeles, Chicago, and Philadelphia and two more in the top
eight. In a somewhat interesting deal, Hulu LLC, a live streaming service, is each owned 30 per-
cent jointly by Disney and rivals 21st Century Fox, and Comcast Corporation with Time Warner
owning the remaining 10 percent stake in Hulu.
Parks and Resorts When most people think of Disney, Parks and Resorts probably is the first thing that comes to
mind. Parks and Resorts derive revenue from park ticket prices, food, hotels, cruise vacations,
and merchandise. In 2017, 80 percent of the division’s revenues were derived from domestic op-
erations with 20 percent derived from international sales. U.S. Parks and Resorts revenues only
increased 4 percent in 2017 while international revenues increased 32 percent. In fact, the growth
internationally was so robust in 2016, the U.S. Parks and Resorts accounted for 84 percent of
segment revenues. In total, U.S. revenues for this division increased less than $600 million while
International revenues increased nearly $900 million in 2017.
The international growth of this segment is mostly explained through 27 percent higher
volumes but also through 4 percent higher spending per customer on average. Disney has done
an excellent job attracting additional “park” customers but has room to improve on getting them
to spend more once in the park or on the cruise. Exhibits 2 and 3 reveal that Disney domestic
revenues from its Parks and Resorts division increased overall 8.5 percent in 2017 to $18.4 bil-
lion, up from $16.9 billion in 2016 and $12.9 billion in 2012. Operating income increased $550
million or 14.4 percent from 2016 to 2017. This is the only Disney division to increase either
revenues or operating income in 2017, and it successfully increased both.
Disney’s Parks and Resorts segment includes 11 divisions: 1) Disneyland Resorts in
California, 2) Tokyo Disney Resort, 3) Disneyland Resort Paris, 4) Hong Kong Disneyland,
5) Walt Disney World Resort in Florida, 6) Disney Cruise Line, 7) Adventures by Disney,
8) Disney Vacation Club, 9) Walt Disney Imagineering, 10) Aluani, a Disney Resort and Spa
in Hawaii, and 11) Disney Shanghai. Disney does not fully own its international parks. For ex-
ample, Disney controls 77 percent of the Euro Disney in Paris, only earns royalties from Tokyo
Disneyland, and owns 43 percent of Disney in Hong Kong.
Disney’s four cruise ships operate under this segment. The ships are named as follows:
Disney Magic, Disney Wonder, Disney Dream, and Disney Fantasy. The latter two ships are
Disney’s largest and are the same size, both 130,000-ton-vessels, offering 1,250 staterooms and
14 decks.
Studio Entertainment Within this segment, Disney produces live-action and animated motion pictures, direct-to-video
programming, musical recordings, and live stage plays. Disney motion pictures are distributed
under the names: Theatrical Market, Home Entertainment Market, Television Market, Disney
Music Group, and Disney Theatrical Productions. Disney has licensed the rights to produce
and distribute features films such as Spider-Man, The Fantastic Four, and X-Men to third-party
studios. Disney also produces Star Wars. Disney earns a licensing fee on these films whereas
the third-party studio incurs the cost to produce and distribute the films. Currently, Disney has
a diverse business line in the Studio Entertainment SBU consisting of the following: Marvel,
Touchstone, Pixar, Disneynature, Disney Studios Motion Pictures, and more Disney branded
services. Disney’s Studio Entertainment revenues for 2017 decreased 11 percent to $8.4 billion
and operating income decreased 13 percent. This SBU is divided into three areas: theatrical
distribution, home entertainment, and TV/SVOD (Subscription Video on Demand) distribution.
There was no change in TV/SVOD revenues in 2017 and it is the largest revenue generating divi-
sion of this segment, representing 44 percent of the SBU’s revenues. The largest drop in SBU
revenue within this segment came from theatrical distribution, dropping 21 percent with home
entertainment dropping 15 percent in 2017.
510 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Consumer Products & Interactive Media Historically Disney separated these two SBUs but now combines them in their Annual Report.
Disney’s Consumer Products segment partners with licenses, manufacturers, publishers, and retail-
ers worldwide who design, promote, and sell a wide variety of products based on new and existing
Disney characters. Product offerings are 1) character merchandise and publications licensing,
2) books and magazines, and 3) the Disney store. Disney released in mid-2011 a new toy line that
captured the fantasy, action, and adventure of Pirates of the Caribbean: On Stranger Tides. Disney
is perhaps the largest worldwide licensor of character-based merchandise and producer/distributor
of children’s film-related products based on retail sales. Disney’s Interactive Media segment cre-
ates and delivers games and media for smartphones and tablets. Revenues for the SBU dropped
13 percent in 2017, but this SBU is the lowest generating SBU at Disney as revealed in Exhibit 3.
The SBU’s operating income as revealed in Exhibit 3, dropped 11 percent in 2017.
Finance Disney has been struggling financially mostly with its media-related divisions. Overall company
revenues were down slightly in 2017 and net income down 4 percent as revealed in Exhibit 4.
Exhibit 5 reveals that approximately one third of Disney’s assets are in the form of goodwill.
Disney has accumulated tons of goodwill over the years through its purchases of media outlets
and media content. Goodwill is not a good item to have on a balance sheet since it arrives there
only when a firm pays “too much” for another firm.
Competitors
Disney competes directly with NBC, Universal Pictures, Paramount Pictures, Time Warner,
CBS Corp., News Corp., Carnival Corp., and Royal Caribbean—and indirectly with all family
entertainment-oriented businesses globally. In essence, all hotels, restaurants, water parks, and
attractions anywhere near Disney’s 14 theme parks are rival businesses, such as Florida-based Sea
World, Marineland, and Silver Springs. In China, a large, new state-run theme park has opened
right beside the new (2015) Disney theme park in Shanghai, China, serving as a major competitor.
Exhibit 6 provides a financial comparison for Disney and several rival firms. Note that
Comcast is larger than Disney.
Comcast Corporation (CMCSA) The major competitor to Disney World in Orlando is Universal Studios Florida, owned by
Comcast Corporation, headquartered in Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. Comcast is a media and
technology company operating through five segments: Cable Communications, Cable Networks,
Broadcast Television, Filmed Entertainment, and Theme Parks. The Cable Communications
EXHIBIT 4 Disney’s Income Statements (in millions USD)
Source: Based on 2017 Annual Report and other company data.
Income Statement 10/1/16 9/30/17 Percent Change
Revenues $55,632 $55,137 –0.89%
Cost of Goods Sold 29,993 30,306 1.04%
Gross Profit 25,639 24,831 –3.15%
Operating Expenses 10,511 10,658 1.40%
EBIT 15,128 14,173 –6.31%
Interest Expense 260 385 48.08%
EBT 14,868 13,788 –7.26%
Tax 5,078 4,422 –12.92%
Non-Recurring Events (399) (386) 3.26%
Net Income 9,391 8,980 –4.38%
CASE 14 • THE WALT DISNEY COMPANY—2018 511
Source: Based on Disney’s 2017 Annual Report and company data.
EXHIBIT 5 Disney’s Balance Sheets (in millions USD)
Balance Sheet 10/1/16 9/30/17 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short Term Investments $4,610 $4,017 –13%
Accounts Receivable 9,065 8,633 –5%
Inventory 1,390 1,373 –1%
Other Current Assets 1,901 1,866 –2%
Total Current Assets 16,966 15,889 –6%
Property Plant & Equipment 27,349 28,406 4%
Goodwill 27,810 31,426 13%
Intangibles 6,949 6,995 1%
Other Long-Term Assets 12,959 13,073 1%
Total Assets 92,033 95,789 4%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 9,130 8,855 –3%
Other Current Liabilities 7,712 10,740 39%
Total Current Liabilities 16,842 19,595 16%
Long-Term Debt 16,483 19,119 16%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 15,443 14,612 –5%
Total Liabilities 48,768 53,326 9%
Equity
Common Stock 35,859 36,248 1%
Retained Earnings 66,088 72,606 10%
Treasury Stock (54,703) (64,011) 17%
Paid in Capital & Other (3,979) (2,380) –40%
Total Equity 43,265 42,463 –2%
Total Liabilities and Equity 92,033 95,789 4%
EXHIBIT 6 A Disney Competitor Comparison across Some Financials
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
Disney Comcast Viacom
$ Market Cap. 156.8B 180.9B 13.6B
# Employees 199,000 164,000 10,750
$ Revenue 55,137M 84,526M 13,263M
% Gross Margin 45% 70% 44%
$ Net Income 8,980M 22,714M 1,874M
$ EPS Ratio 7.01 4.75 5.01
$ P/E Ratio 14.85 8.20 7.79
512 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
segment offers video, high-speed Internet, and voice, as well as security and automation services
under the XFINITY brand. This segment also provides Ethernet network services, and cellular
backhaul services to mobile network operators. The cable networks segment operates national
cable networks providing entertainment, news and information, and sports content; regional
sports and news networks; international cable networks; and cable television studio production
operations.
Comcast’s Broadcast Television segment operates NBC and Telemundo. NBC broadcasts
many sports including the Olympics, NFL, college football, major golf tournaments, and many
others. The broadcasting arm of the NBC, including sports and other TV shows, did not have a
meaningful change in revenues in 2017 from 2016; like Disney, the difficulty in doing business
in this industry is widespread.
Comcast’s Filmed Entertainment segment produces, acquires, markets, and distributes filmed
entertainment under the Universal Pictures, Illumination, Focus Features, and DreamWorks
Animation names. The company’s theme parks segment operates Universal theme parks in
Orlando, Florida, as well as in Hollywood, California, and Osaka, Japan. Universal parks center
around rides and attractions based on Universal Studios films. A few notable themes at the parks
include The Simpsons and Harry Potter. Revenues from Comcast-owned theme parks doubled
between 2012 and 2017, increasing 8 percent between 2016 and 2017.
CBS Corporation (CBS) Headquartered in New York City, CBS is a large media conglomerate operating through four
segments: Entertainment, Cable Networks, Publishing, and Local Media. The Entertainment seg-
ment produces sports and entertainment programming; acquires and/or distributes programming,
including series, specials, news, and public affairs; operates online content networks for informa-
tion and entertainment; produces, acquires, and distributes theatrical motion pictures; and digital
streaming services. CBS’s Cable Networks segment offers subscription program services, such as
original series, theatrical feature films, documentaries, boxing, and other sports-related program-
ming and special events. This segment also operates CBS Sports Network, a 24-hour cable pro-
gram service that provides college sports and related content; and Smithsonian Networks, which
operates a channel featuring cultural, historical, scientific, and educational programs.
Another CBS segment, Publishing, publishes and distributes adult and children’s consumer
books. This segment also delivers content. The Local Media segment owns 30 broadcast televi-
sion stations and operates local websites, including content from the company’s television sta-
tions, and news and sports radio stations.
Time Warner, Inc. (TWX) Headquartered in New York City, Time Warner is the world’s third-largest media conglomerate
behind Walt Disney and News Corp., with operations spanning television, film, and publishing.
Time Warner owns Turner Broadcasting that runs a portfolio of popular cable TV networks in-
cluding CNN, TBS, and TNT. Time Warner also operates pay-TV channels HBO and Cinemax,
all of which compete with Disney. Time Warner owns Warner Bros. Entertainment that includes
films studios (Warner Bros. Pictures, New Line Cinema), TV production units (Warner Bros.
Television Group), and comic book publisher DC Entertainment. The firm employs 25,000 and
reported nearly $30 billion in 2016 revenue.
Viacom Inc. (VIA) Headquartered in New York City, Viacom is considered the market leader in television broad-
casting owning top brands including: Nickelodeon, Nick Jr., BET, Comedy Central, MTV,
Comedy Central, SPIKE, VH1, TV Land, CMT, Logo, Channel 5, Telefe, Colors, Paramount
Channel, TeenNick, Nicktoons, Nick Music, MTV2, MTV Classic, MTV Live, BET Her, BET
Gospel, and BET Hip Hop. Viacom shows reach over a half billion households in over 180 dif-
ferent countries in 40 languages. Viacom’s strength lies in its programming mix to specifically
target demographics of people that watch a lot of TV. All of the above are part of the company’s
Media Networks segment. Viacom also operates through its Filmed Entertainment segment that
CASE 14 • THE WALT DISNEY COMPANY—2018 513
produces, finances, acquires, and distributes motion pictures, television programming, and other
entertainment content under the Paramount Pictures, Paramount Players, Paramount Animation,
Paramount Television, Nickelodeon Movies, and MTV Films brands. Viacom reported 2017 rev-
enue of $13.2 billion with income of $1.9 billion.
Carnival Corporation (CCL) Headquartered in Miami, Florida, Carnival is the world’s number-one cruise operator, owning
and operating a dozen cruise lines and about 100 ships with a total passenger capacity of more
than 190,000. Carnival operates in North America, primarily through its Princess Cruise Line,
Holland America, and Seabourn luxury cruise brand, as well as its flagship Carnival Cruise
Lines unit. Brands such as AIDA, P&O Cruises, and Costa Cruises offer services to passen-
gers in Europe, and the Cunard Line runs luxury trans-Atlantic liners. Carnival’s cruise ships
compete with Disney’s cruise ships. Another large cruise line company, Royal Caribbean, also
competes with Disney ships. Carnival reported 2017 revenues of $17 billion with profits of $2.6
billion.
External Issues
Cloud Based Society and Cord Cutting Gone are the days of VHS and DVDs as on-demand streaming is here to stay. Customers
today demand instant access to many of their videos and shows on demand. There is also an
increased cord cutting society where customers are increasingly unwilling to pay for massive
cable packages where they may only watch a few channels. Netflix, Amazon, Roku, and Disney
part-owned Hulu, all provide content often called “skinny” packages addressing the video pro-
gramming the customer wants. Internet delivery as opposed to traditional pay-TV is expected to
increase to 18 million households by 2021, up from 11 million in 2017.
International Markets’ Love for American TV shows While many Americans are enjoying and watching shows and movies developed in other
nations, the same can be said of people living outside the United States watching and enjoying
U.S.-based TV shows. As the U.S. market becomes increasingly saturated, firms are increas-
ingly looking for new markets through market penetration strategies of taking existing products
to new markets. Of the nearly $40 billion in 2016 box office sales worldwide, over 70 percent
of the sales were generated outside of the United States and Canada, compared to 64 percent
of total sales being international 10 years earlier. The trend is not just with movies though,
U.S.-based TV shows including sitcoms, reality TV, and many others. All four major U.S.
networks: ABC, CBS, FOX, and NBC, are enjoying exploding opportunities to license their
products in foreign markets. High-speed Internet is growing in developing markets as well,
providing increased content delivery as more programs move to being viewed in this medium.
For example, high-speed Internet in Asia is around 46 percent participation, with the Middle
East and Latin America around 60 percent each, and Europe at 79 percent. North America, by
comparison, enjoys 88 percent high-speed Internet accessibility. One point for strategists to
consider in the above data, for example, is in the Middle East—just how many years are the
40 percent nonusers from adopting high-speed Internet based on economic and demographic
trends in the regions? Nevertheless, the potential for growth in all international markets remains
extremely attractive for the large U.S. networks and, to date, it is estimated around two-thirds of
all young people in developing countries are active Internet users.
Video and Media The video and media business generates over $40 billion in U.S. revenue annually with growth
around 2 percent. Disney is the largest player in the industry with a market share of around 18
percent, followed by NBCUniversial Media and Time Warner Inc. with market shares of 16
percent. 21st Century Fox and Sony Corporation have market shares of around 12 percent each.
In total, there are nearly 10,000 businesses in this industry, but the top five discussed here ac-
count for nearly 80 percent of industry revenue. Over half of industry revenues are derived from
the action and adventure genre with thriller themed programs accounting for 15 percent. Drama
514 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
and comedy account for 12 and 8.2 percent of industry revenues, respectively, with the balance
uncategorized. Growth rates in this industry are affected by movie theaters which have under-
gone consolidation in recent years with various movie theater firms trying new strategies of
offering healthy foods, 3D screens, chair back seats, full service meals, and a variety of other op-
tions to attract customers. Disney is not forward integrated into this arena so it depends heavily
on movie theaters being able to attract viewers. Higher ticket prices and large screens at home
have held total attendance in check, which may eventually result in Disney’s less bargaining
power on prices they charge theater companies to show their video programs. Disney and other
producers such as NBCUniversal could possibly form tighter alliances with Hulu, Roku, Netflix
or similar content delivery providers to show movies upon release or even show them on their
own networks. Currently, there remains a lag between when Disney allows new releases to be
shown in mediums other than theaters.
Theme Parks Theme parks represent one of Disney’s most profitable SBUs, and as a whole, the theme park
industry in the United States accounts for nearly $18 billion in sales. They have enjoyed robust
annual growth of over 5 percent from the bottom of the recession to 2017. Annual growth is ex-
pected at around 2 percent through 2023. Admissions account for nearly 65 percent of revenues
followed by food and beverage and merchandise at around 12 percent each. The balance of rev-
enues are derived from multiple sources. Disney is the top player in the industry, representing a
staggering 50 percent of industry revenues followed by Comcast Corporation’s NBCUniversal
Media, then SeaWorld and Six Flags at 18, 7 and 6 percent, respectively. The remaining 20 per-
cent is derived from over 550 competitors in the industry, many of which are small parks, or a
single large park in one city. The future, however, may be in international markets where Disney
is already growing much more rapidly than they are domestically. Smaller parks likely will find
it increasingly difficult to compete with the likes of Disney and Universal, as huge capital ex-
penses are needed to create rides and as customers increasingly demand new and more modem
attractions, especially if the firm is attempting to get the same customers accustomed to visit
time after time. Advertising to potential international customers is another strategy many theme
park operators are doing to attract new customers to their facilities.
Television Broadcasting The television broadcasting business in the United States generates over $55 billion in annual
revenue, with 900 businesses directly competing in the industry. Viacom is the industry leader,
responsible for 17 percent of revenues followed by NBCUniversal Media, Disney, and Fox. Half
of the industry revenues are derived from firms not included above, indicating a fragmented
industry that could experience consolidation in the future. Dramas account for one-third of
all industry revenue, followed by news programming at 25 percent. Sitcoms account for over
15 percent of industry revenues and have the advantage over dramas in that the viewer can tune
in to a show anytime, without having to have followed previous episodes. On the decline is
reality type shows accounting for 13 percent of revenues, while sports account for 10 percent.
Growth in sports is expected to continue and this should be good news for Disney-owned ABC/
ESPN, as well as rivals NBC, CBS, and Fox.
Future
Disney’s Marvel Studios’ Black Panther movie grossed $201.8 million over its first 3 days in
February 2018, making it one of the top five domestic openings of all time. The film grossed
$242 million over the Presidents’ Day holiday weekend, making it the second highest 4-day
domestic opening of all time. The movie’s international single-day debut grossed $169 million.
Black Panther was just the fifth film in industry history to break the $200 million mark in its
debut, joining Star Wars: The Force Awakens, Star Wars: The Last Jedi, and Marvel’s The
Avengers as Disney’s fourth release to do so. Walt Disney Studios now holds 8 of the top 10
all-time domestic debuts, five of them from Marvel Studios. Internationally, Black Panther
opened with number-one debuts of all time in some countries. In the U.K. and Ireland, the
film set a new February opening weekend record and surpassed the entire runs of Captain
CASE 14 • THE WALT DISNEY COMPANY—2018 515
America: The First Avenger, Thor, Ant-Man, and Iron Man. In Korea, Black Panther was the
fifth biggest Western industry opening of all time and exceeded in a few days the entire runs
of Guardians of the Galaxy and Ant-Man. Disney shareholders are hoping Black Panther
is a sign of great things to come for the company, but external threats abound to derail the
best-laid-plans-of-mice-and-men-and-Mickey.
Two of the largest and most powerful media conglomerates in the United States, 1) Disney
and 2) Time Warner, together produce 50 of the 100 biggest box office hits of all time. Each
company has numerous superheroes, such as Disney owning the Marvel brand and Time
Warner owning DC Entertainment. Both companies also are embroiled in enormous merger
actions. Specifically, Time Warner is considering an $85 million buyout bid from AT&T, while
Disney wants to buy most of 21st Century Fox for $52 billion, but Disney is in a bidding war
with Comcast. Disney needs a clear strategic plan to sucessfully combat both Time Warner and
Comcast.
516 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Adidas AG—2022
www.adidas.com
Headquartered in Herzogenaurach, Germany, adidas AG is a sports apparel and footwear manu-
facturer employing over 62,000 people. It is the parent company of the Adidas Group, which also
includes the Reebok sportswear company. Besides sports footwear, adidas also produces acces-
sories such as bags, shirts, watches, eyewear, and other sports- and clothing-related goods. The
company is the largest sportswear manufacturer in Europe and the second-biggest sportswear
manufacturer in the world, with Nike being the largest.
Across 170 countries, adidas sells sports shoes, apparel, and equipment featuring the com-
pany’s iconic three-stripe logo. Adidas focuses on American football, European football, basket-
ball, running, and training gear and apparel, as well as lifestyle goods such as the SLVR and Y-3
fashion brands. Adidas has three segments: footwear, apparel, and accessories and gear.
History
At the age of 20, Adolf “Adi” Dassler was driven by the goal to produce the most durable and
safest footwear for athletes in different sports. Dassler pursued this vision until his death in
1978. His first shoe back in 1920 was constructed of canvas due to the few materials available
in the post-war period. By the 1930s, Dassler employed around 100 workers and was making 30
different styles of shoes for 11 different sports. After World War II, Dassler found himself once
again making shoes with limited materials, and in 1947, with only 47 workers, he resurrected
shoe manufacturing using canvas and rubber from American fuel tanks. His brother, Rudolf,
founded the rival company Puma, which is also headquartered in Herzogenaurach. Adi Dassler
made the first post-war sports shoes in 1949 and formally registered adidas, which is the first
three letters of his first and last names. To this day, adidas is still referred to as the “Three Stripes
Company.”
Perhaps the earliest and greatest pioneer in sports marketing, Dassler convinced many
famous athletes to endorse his product, including Jessie Owens, Muhammad Ali, and Franz
Beckenbauer. The German football team won the 1954 World Cup wearing adidas shoes with
screw-in studs, spurring the company to develop and promote many new products for major
sporting events.
In January 2006, adidas acquired Reebok International Ltd., furthering the Adidas Group
as one of the top athletic footwear, apparel, and sports hardware producers in the world. In
2008, adidas entered the English cricket market by sponsoring English batting star Kevin
Pietersen. The following year, adidas signed the English player Ian Bell and the Indian
player Ravindra Jadeja. Adidas currently produces and sells cricket bats in the Incurza,
Pellara, and Libro lines; it also manufactures the uniforms worn by both the England and
the Australia cricket teams. Adidas announced in 2020 that it plans to divest Reebok and is
looking for a buyer.
Vision/Mission
Vision Statement On their corporate website, adidas presents the simple goal of being the world’s leading sports
brand. Though described as a “mission,” this fits better as a vision statement.
Mission Statement Adidas has not posted a mission statement on its corporate website, so we propose the following:
At adidas we are committed to hiring a globally diverse workforce to design, promote, and sell
top-of-the-line athletic footwear and apparel. We strive to use the latest e-commerce technology
to provide better shopping experiences for our customers globally.
CASE 15 • ADIDAS AG—2022 517
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure The term “organizational structure” refers to how a firm’s operations are grouped or arranged for
battle against rival firms. Structure is vital for success. An organizational chart reveals the chain
of command, showing who reports to whom, and who is responsible for what products, regions,
and activities. Adidas does not provide an organizational chart or any indication of top executive
reporting relationships on its corporate website or in its 2020 Annual Report. What is available
is a mere list of management executives with titles, some of which are vague. However, adidas
appears to operate utilizing a functional (centralized) organizational structure.
As companies such as adidas grow, acquire, and change, alteration of their structure is generally
needed to maintain or obtain effectiveness. Among the basic types of structure—such as functional,
divisional, and matrix—a strategic business unit (SBU) structure is based on grouping similar divi-
sions together within groups. Some analysts contend that adidas should utilize an SBU structure when
the number, size, and geographic dispersion of segments, divisions, or profit centers in an organization
increases beyond about 10 (depending on the size and geographic dispersion of the segments).
Transitioning to an SBU-type structure can facilitate strategy implementation by improving
coordination between similar divisions and channeling accountability to distinct business units.
Exhibit 5 reveals adidas’ current list of top managers and the firm’s organizational structure.
Note the lack of clear executive titles and the lack of divisional head-persons by region, country,
or continent, or even by product, both points that suggest a need for adidas to reorganize consis-
tent with current organizational structure concepts and practice.
Adidas’ top executives are listed and arrayed in Exhibit 1. Apparently adidas does not have a
chief operating officer (COO), nor does the company have presidents of divisions-by-product or
presidents of divisions-by-region. Some analysts contend that adidas should revamp its organiza-
tional structure and utilize a design based on strategic business units (SBUs), where the units are
continents and under each unit top executive are the presidents of various countries, who would
be responsible for all adidas operations, marketing, and sales in those respective countries.
Fifty-five percent of adidas’s employees throughout the firm are women, and 35 percent
of management positions are held by women. Adidas considers promoting women worldwide
throughout the company as a prerequisite for promoting women to top management positions.
Adidas is committed to maintaining a pipeline that is balanced between women and men mov-
ing forward. Note, however, that currently only one female is listed among the top 7 executives.
Financial Data and Statements Adidas reported a 16 percent revenue decline in fiscal 2020 and a 78 percent net income decline.
These numbers are extremely concerning for adidas, which blamed COVID-19 in their 2020
Annual Report. However, Nike, which reports in May each year (instead of January), reported
1. Thomas Rabe, Chairman of the Board
2. Kasper Rorsted, CEO
3. Roland Auschel, Global Sales
4. Harm Ohlmeyer, CFO
5. Amanda Rajkumar, Global Human Resources
6. Brian Grevy, Global Brands
7. Martin Shankland, Global Operations
3 4 5 6 7
2
1
EXHIBIT 1 Adidas’ Top Executives and Organizational Chart
Source: Based on information in adidas’ 2020 Annual Report.
518 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
only a 4 percent revenue drop in their fiscal 2020 and a 37 percent drop in net income. German
rival Puma reported a 5 percent drop in fiscal 2020 revenues and 70 percent drop in net income
over the same 12-month period as adidas.
EXHIBIT 2 Adidas’ Income Statements (in millions of euros)
Source: Based on information contained in adidas’ 2020 Financial Supplement, p. 4.
Income Statement 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Revenues 23,640 19,844 –16%
Cost of Goods Sold 11,347 9,990 –12%
Gross Profit 12,293 9,854 –20%
Operating Expenses 9,633 9,103 –6%
EBIT 2,660 751 –72%
Interest Expense 102 175 72%
EBT 2,558 576 –77%
Tax 640 146 –77%
Non-Recurring Events 59 13 –78%
Net Income 1,977 443 –78%
Exhibit 3 reports the balance sheet numbers for adidas. Note that long-term debt increased
by €500 million, or 56 percent, and cash increased by €1.5 billion, or 59 percent, while interest
expense on the income statement increased 72 percent. With less revenue coming in and similar
expenses going out, adidas no doubt had a rough fiscal 2020.
EXHIBIT 3 Adidas’ Balance Sheets (in millions of euros)
Balance Sheet 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments 2,512 3,994 59%
Accounts Receivable 2,625 1,952 –26%
Inventory 4,085 4,397 8%
Other Current Assets 1,712 1,811 6%
Total Current Assets 10,934 12,154 11%
Property Plant & Equipment 2,380 2,157 –9%
Goodwill 1,257 1,208 –4%
Intangibles 1,164 1,002 –14%
Other Long-Term Assets 4,945 4,532 –8%
Total Assets 20,680 21,053 2%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 2,703 2,390 –12%
Other Current Liabilities 6,051 6,437 6%
Total Current Liabilities 8,754 8,827 1%
Long-Term Debt 1,595 2,482 56%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 3,273 3,053 –7%
Total Liabilities 13,622 14,362 5%
CASE 15 • ADIDAS AG—2022 519
Strategy Adidas implemented a strategy dubbed “Creating the New” for the 2015 to 2020 period, which
focused on advancing the desirability of adidas’ brand and proved successful. Adidas’ new strat-
egy from 2020 to 2025, called “Own the Game,” is similar to the former strategy in that the
intent is to once again increase brand credibility but also improve the customer experience and
sustainability. Much of the strategy centers around adidas’ commitment to a digital transforma-
tion. This digital transformation was accelerated during 2020 as lockdowns were put in place and
as adidas’ management cut costs, improved operational efficiency, and invested and improved its
digital capabilities.
While adidas actively refers to the above marketing slogans as strategy, what product lines,
where they are sold, and how they are sold better represent the actual strategy of the firm. The
two main brands owned by Adidas Group are adidas and Reebok. The adidas brand accounted
for 91 percent of sales in 2020 while Reebok accounted for only 7 percent. The Group is cur-
rently in the process of divesting Reebok. Within the adidas brand, the firm is focused on provid-
ing premium sportswear to its customers around the world. Adidas sponsors many professional
teams around the world as well as many top college teams in the United States across virtually
all sports. The brand provides footwear, apparel, and accessories and gear as product options.
Notable events sponsored by adidas include the FIFA Women’s World Cup, the Rugby World
Cup, the UEFA Champions League, and both the Boston and the Berlin marathons. A sam-
pling of sports teams sponsored includes the national football teams of Argentina, Germany,
and Spain; top football clubs Juventus, Real Madrid, and Flamengo Rio de Janerio; and the
All Blacks in rugby. Top American universities include the University of Miami, Arizona State
University, and Texas A&M University. Texas A&M, for example, is valued at $541 million, but
there are 11 university sports teams in the United States that are valued higher, with the top brand
being the University of Texas, which is valued at $1.1 billion and sponsored by Nike. Rivals Nike
and Under Armour (UA) have contracts with many American college teams.
As of 2020, Real Madrid and Barcelona are the most valued football teams in the world, both
with a value of $4.7 billion. Keep in mind, however, that the 15th most valuable football team,
Everton, is valued at $658 million, and the 15th most valuable college team in the United States,
Nebraska, is valued at $472 billion. There are over 100 top university teams competing in the top
division in the United States, leaving a huge opportunity for adidas.
Top football athletes who are sponsored by adidas include Lionel Messi, Mohamed Salah,
the retired David Beckham, and Wendie Renard. Top adidas-sponsored basketball players in-
clude Candace Parker, Donovan Mitchell, and James Harden; top American football players in-
clude Aaron Rodgers and Patrick Mahomes; baseball players include Aaron Judge and Carlos
Correa; and tennis stars include Alexander Zverev, Angelique Kerber, and Dominic Thiem. Note
that while Lionel Messi, Candace Parker, and Aaron Rodgers are three of the biggest names
in their respective sports, many of the top superstar athletes in the world are not sponsored by
adidas—this is one area where Nike has always excelled. In total, of the 19 top global endorse-
ment deals in 2020, adidas sponsored 2 and Reebok sponsored 1 while Nike sponsored 9 and
Under Armour sponsored 2.
Balance Sheet 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Equity
Common Stock 196 195 –1%
Retained Earnings 6,555 6,733 3%
Treasury Stock – – NA NA
Paid in Capital & Other 307 (237) –177%
Total Equity 7,058 6,691 –5%
Total Liabilities and Equity 20,680 21,053 2%
Source: Based on information contained in adidas’ 2020 Financial Supplement, pp. 2–3.
520 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Sales by Channel Adidas is in a process of improving its e-commerce presence as a means of increasing direct sales
to consumers. E-commerce has many benefits, including the convenience of shopping from home,
more impulse purchasing, and significantly less cost (as no retail stores are needed). In addition,
selling directly to the consumer provides deep marketing analytic possibilities. In 2020, 41 percent
of adidas’s sales were derived from direct-to-the-consumer methods, with about 21 percent from
e-commerce, and 20 percent from adidas’ own retail stores, which total over 2,500 worldwide.
Wholesale revenues account for 59 percent of sales. Wholesale has the benefit of adidas using
other firms’ fixed assets, advertising, and other expenses to sell its products. Be sure to note that
e-commerce sales represented 33 percent of sales, or $7.9 billion, in 2019, while in 2020, adidas
reported that 41 percent of direct-to-the-consumer sales netted $8.1 billion in sales. COVID-19
may can explain part of the online growth, but adidas appears committed to online sales.
By-Segment Information
Exhibit 4 shows adidas’ 2020 revenues by product lines. Note that footwear accounted for about
56 percent of revenues in both 2019 and 2020, with accessories and gear accounting for about 5
percent. Adidas manufactures both men and women’s shoes for most of the major sports as well
as for leisure activities such as running and walking. In addition, the firm makes shoes designed
for hiking and skateboarding, and even sandals. Adidas also produces apparel such as shorts,
pants, t-shirts, jerseys, jackets, hoodies, socks, and underwear. Accessories include balls, gloves,
hats, even phone cases. Adidas used to own TaylorMade and had a larger presence in golf and
hockey, but the firm has since diverted its resources to other revenue streams.
0
2,000
4,000
6,000
8,000
10,000
12,000
14,000
16,000
Footwear Apparel Accessories &
Gear
2019 2020
13,521
11,128
8,963
7,687
1,156 1,028
EXHIBIT 4 Adidas 2020 Revenues by Product (in millions of euros)
Source: Based on adidas’ 2020 Annual Report, p. 133.
Regions Served Exhibit 5 reveals that adidas has excellent geographic coverage, deriving substantial revenues
from Asia, Europe, and North America. However, adidas trails Nike by quite a margin in the U.S.
market.
External Issues
E-commerce Becoming the New Normal During 2020, e-commerce sales nearly doubled globally, from 16 percent to 29 percent. McKinsey
predicts 2021 and beyond will see huge booms for e-commerce, and 70 percent of executives are
projecting growth of up to 20 percent annually in 2021 and 2022 in their digital outlets. China
is predicted to be the leader in e-commerce gains, followed by Europe and the United States.
CASE 15 • ADIDAS AG—2022 521
Zara, for example, plans to close 1,200 stores from 2021 to early 2023 and reroute $3.2 billion to
its digital transformation. Top adidas rival Nike has also pledged to accelerate its movement to a
digital strategy. Consumers are valuing time and convenience more than ever, and good service
firms that do not compete heavily in e-commerce are at a severe disadvantage. In fact, in 2020,
25 percent of all shoes sold in the United States were derived from online retailers, which is par-
ticularly interesting for a product that many people want to try on before purchase.
Athleisure Clothing & Athletic Footwear In 2015, Athleisure, a term coined for athletic clothing worn in normal day-to-day activities,
started to become popular across the world. Celebrity endorsements and a growing concern for
global wellness has spurred demand for this segment, but many people who are not particu-
larly active or overly concerned with wellness also find this type of clothing more comfortable.
Among footwear categories, sport leisure products outperformed performance footwear sales in
the United States in 2020. Forbes forecasted in 2019 that dressier fashion-type shoes would be
replaced by higher sales of athleisure footwear in 2020.
The global athletic footwear business, which includes running, walking, hiking, and sports
shoes, is estimated to be worth $72 billion in 2020 and expected to grow to over $100 billion by
2027, but some reports project $120 billion by 2027. Running shoes alone are expected to ac-
count for nearly $40 billion by 2027. In 2020, the U.S. market accounted for nearly 27 percent
of the global market with over $19 billion, while China, the world’s second largest economy,
is expected to reach $19 billion by 2026 and grow nearly 8 percent through 2027. By contrast,
Japan is expected to grow 2.7 percent and Germany to grow 3.4 percent over the same period.
Like athleisure clothing, athletic footwear is increasingly being used by people around the
world for casual, day-to-day activities. Developments in new materials and technology have
made this class of shoes extremely comfortable, but it has also increased the costs and compli-
cated development of the shoes. This segment overall is expected to occupy 40 percent of the
entire shoe industry revenue by 2025.
Brand Polygamists There is a growing trend in the industry where customers are showing lower brand loyalty, lead-
ing industry analysts to label them “brand polygamists.” Firms like adidas and Nike have spent
significant capital and resources to promote their brands, and a decrease in loyalty would be a se-
rious problem. This is particularly true for top firms like adidas and Nike, who have much more
to lose. So what motivates customers if not the brand name? Today, many customers are basing
their purchases on product features and price. In fact, in some cases a logo can even detract
from a purchase. Companies like Nike have established the NikeiD program where shoppers can
EXHIBIT 5 Adidas Percent of Net 2020 Sales by Region
33%
30%
24%
6%
5%
2%
Asia-Pacific
Europe
North America
Latin America
Emerging Markets
Other Businesses
Source: Based on adidas’ 2020 Annual Report, p. 134.
522 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
customize their own products. However, policies such as these are expensive, and the products
sold have a smaller margin. Thanks to the trends of less brand loyalty and more e-commerce,
startup firms can compete much more easily now. The global brands may have to start a period of
acquisitions to eliminate the competition, as seen in many other industries.
Competitors
Nike In January 2020, Nike hired John Donahoe as their new CEO to lead the largest sports apparel
company in the world. Nike serves athletic clubs, universities, fitness-minded people, and many
others. According to CEO Donahoe in his letter to the shareholders in 2020, Nike is the number
one favorite brand in all 12 of the key cities identified by it as the most important for business.
The majority of Nike’s products are tailored to specific sports, from shoes to shorts, and of course
equipment. Nike owns the Converse brand, Chuck Taylor, All Star, Star Chevron, and Jack Purcell.
Converse’s financials are, however, reported as a separate division but are still included in Nike’s
overall bottom line.
As mentioned above, Nike excels in hiring famous athletes to market their brands; Michael
Jordan, LeBron James, and Cristiano Ronaldo have currently signed lifetime endorsement deals.
In fact, in 2020, four of the five largest endorsement deals were controlled by Nike, and rival
adidas had the fourth highest deal of the five in Lionel Messi.
Nike operates 338 stores in the United States and 758 stores in 45 countries. Nike’s products
are, of course, sold in retail stores the world over. Nike reported revenues of over $37 billion in
2020. Exhibit 6 below provides data on Nike’s revenue over the same three product lines adidas
offers. It is interesting to note that, if a $1.20 = €1.00 conversion were used, adidas would report
$9.224 billion for their apparel business in 2020 and $1.234 billion for their accessories and gear
business, both quite close to Nike’s performance. Where Nike really crushes adidas is footwear. At
Nike, 41 percent of companywide sales are derived from North America; 26 percent from Europe,
Middle East, and Africa; 19 percent from China; and 14 percent from the rest of the world.
EXHIBIT 6 Nike Revenues by Segment (in millions of USD)
11,550
1,404
10,953
1,280
0
5,000
10,000
15,000
20,000
25,000
30,000
Footwear Apparel Equipment
24,222 23,305
2019 2020
Source: Based on Nike’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 31.
Puma Puma is a German company that traces its roots to a quarrel between the two founding brothers of
adidas over the direction of the company, which ended with one of them leaving adidas and start-
ing Puma. Like other rivals, Puma is devoting much of their strategy to focusing on digital capa-
bilities. Puma is a leader regarding women in management; 43 percent of management positions
CASE 15 • ADIDAS AG—2022 523
are held by women. Pages 25–90 of Puma’s 2020 Annual Report are devoted to environmental
sustainability, demonstrating in great detail what Puma is doing to present itself as a green cor-
porate player. In 2020, Puma signed up football star Neymar da Silva Santos Júnior, basketball
player LaMelo Ball, Dutch football club PSV Eindhoven, and Ukrainian club Shakhtar Donetsk.
Puma also signed up English singer Dua Lipa as a women’s ambassador and Canadian model
Winnie Harlow. J-Cole, a Grammy-winning artist, was also signed on.
Signing celebrities who are not also sports stars is an interesting strategy for Puma. Puma is
in the process of a brand transformation, yet its mission is to become the fastest-growing sports
brand in the world. To help implement this strategy, the firm has six strategic focus points: creat-
ing brand heat, focus on the correct product ranges, comprehensive offers for women, improve-
ment in distribution, increases in speed and efficiency, and strengthening of the firm’s position in
North America with its reentry into basketball.
A key new Puma distribution center in Indianapolis will allow U.S. customers to be served
within 2 days, and a new warehouse in Geiselwind, Germany, opened in 2021 to help serve
the European market. In 2020, Puma reported revenues from footwear, apparel, and accessories
of €2.368 billion, €1.974 billion, and €893 million, respectively. While Puma is significantly
smaller than the top players in the industry, its percent of revenue derived from apparel is much
more than both Nike and adidas. Puma is also fairly balanced on the markets it serves, with 37
percent, 34 percent, and 20 percent of revenue in 2020 being derived from Europe, Middle East
and Africa; the Americas; and Asia, respectively.
Under Armour Headquartered in Baltimore, Maryland, Under Armour (UA) was founded in 1996 by a former
University of Maryland football player who desired a t-shirt that would whisk away perspiration
rather than get soggy. UA today is a top firm in the athletic clothing industry and is worn by
some of the largest American college football and European football teams. The former include
Auburn University and The University of South Carolina; the latter include Tottenham Hotspur,
Aris F.C., and Deportivo Toluca F.C. UA employs superstar athletes such as American football
mega stars Tom Brady and Cam Newton, baseball star Bryce Harper, and the possibly the most
famous Olympic swimmer of all times, Michael Phelps.
Like the other firms disused in the case, UA produces footwear, apparel, and accessories.
UA were once unique in offering three styles: compression, fitted, and loose, for various weather
conditions. Rival firms have since adapted many UA features into their own clothing. However,
UA has trademarked products, such as HEATGEAR, COLDGEAR, and UA HOVR. An interest-
ing difference between UA and its rivals is its continuity since its founding, with the majority of
sales still derived from apparel—64 percent of all 2020 sales were in this category. Footwear and
accessories accounted for 21 and 9 percent of UA’s 2020 revenues, respectively.
Conclusion
Strategy Considerations Adidas competes in an extremely competitive industry and is in desperate need of an effective
strategic plan. During fiscal 2020, adidas by some measures performed poorly compared to Nike,
UA, and Puma, which may signal that other aspects of the company are weak, perhaps even the
company’s organizational structure, as indicated in the case. Top considerations when designing
a proposed strategic plan for adidas will include how to allocate resources across the three divi-
sions of footwear, apparel, and accessories. Recall from the case that adidas was once strong in
golf but has since divested this business. Should adidas double down its efforts in a particular
sport or cater to a wide range of sports? Additionally, should adidas spend more on hiring key
sports stars to endorse their products?
What global markets should adidas shift resources to or invest more in? Nike is killing adidas
in the U.S. market. Recall from the case that athletic wear is becoming increasingly popular attire
even in day-to-day activities. German rival Puma has seized on this opportunity by hiring models
and talented musicians to promote their brands. How should adidas balance its new e-commerce
strategy with the traditional store strategy? Is it too early for adidas to move similarly significant
resources to e-commerce? Should adidas acquire new startup firms as the case mentioned in
524 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
passing? Is it wise for adidas to divest itself of Reebok as planned? What type of organizational
structure would be best for adidas? As indicated in the case, structure matters tremendously for
overall success and effectiveness.
The above ideas and suggestions are not all-inclusive or even all-important. The most im-
portant factors and considerations will be derived from reading the case and doing your own
research. When preparing the 3-year plan for adidas, be sure to provide recommendations based
on what direction you feel the company should pursue moving forward. Be careful not to re-
port what adidas is currently doing or what you think they are going to do based on company
literature, unless of course you agree with this stance based on a comprehensive analysis. The
firm experienced a 78 percent drop in net income in 2020, and shareholders are worried. Know
that in the business world, shareholders in general expect at least a 4 to 5 percent annual growth
in the top line (revenues) and bottom line (net income), and adidas’s failure here could lead to
shareholder abandonment. Adidas needs to avoid disastrous years even during times of distress,
as experienced in 2020. Excuses don’t cut it in business.
CASE 16 • SHOPRITE HOLDINGS LTD.—2022 525
Shoprite Holdings Ltd.—2022
www.shopriteholdings.co.za
Headquartered in Brackenfell, Western Cape, South Africa, Shoprite Holdings Ltd. (Shoprite) is
Africa’s largest retail supermarket, with 17 brands serving 14 countries through 2,387 corporate
stores and 505 franchise outlets. Shoprite Holdings’ brands include Shoprite, Usave (also spelled
USave and U$save), Checkers, LiquorShop, House & Home, Medirite, and MoneyMarket.
Shoprite employs over 140,000 across its total range and is the largest private sector employer in
South Africa. Over 24 million people shop in Shoprite properties every day.
Shoprite differentiates itself based on high volume of sales and a variety of brands and formats.
The company is committed to serving underserved markets, becoming more digital, and having a
lean cost structure. Shoprite offers customers a place to not only buy food but also to purchase fur-
niture, pay bills, pay for funereal services, buy medicine, and much more. Since the firm’s humble
founding in 1979, the firm has stuck to its initial vision and mission to provide quality products
and a quality shopping experience. With its beginnings in South Africa but now expanding over
much of the African continent, Shoprite serves all customer types, from low to high income, with
different store concepts. The firm reported revenues in excess of ZAR 156 billion in 2020.
History
Shoprite was founded in 1979 when an 8-store Western Cape grocery chain, also named Shoprite,
was purchased by PEP Stores. Right away, the upper management declared that the mission of
the new grocery store was to cater to low- to middle-income shoppers and grow through acquisi-
tions. Through much of the 1980s, Shoprite expanded slowly across South Africa before enter-
ing Namibia in 1990. In 1991, Shoprite purchased Checkers, and in 1997 the firm expanded by
acquiring OK Furniture and House & Home.
In the early 2000s, Shoprite began operations in Zimbabwe and Egypt and opened the first
Usave in 2001. In 2008, Shoprite was added to the Johannesburg Top 40 index of blue-chip
stocks, and by 2009, it was South Africa’s largest chain by market value. Over the last 10 years,
Shoprite has expanded further across Africa, opening many new stores and adding many new
product lines to existing stores, earning Shoprite the distinction of South Africa’s largest retailer
in 2019 and a ranking of 89th in Deloitte’s Global Powers of Retailing 2021 report.
Vision/Mission
The following statements can be proposed for the company based on the content at the Shoprite
corporate website.
Vision Statement To improve the quality of life for all we serve.
Mission Statement Shoprite’s mission is to provide our customers across the African continent with the best value in
grocery items, home improvement items, and all other products we sell to our customers, while
maintaining an attractive return for our shareholders. We believe in doing things the right way,
with care, integrity, and a commitment to excellence in all we do. We achieve this by putting our
customers first and providing excellent service while maintaining integrity in all that we do.
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure The term “organizational structure” refers to how a firm’s operations are grouped or arranged
for battle against rival firms. Structure is vital for success in any firm. An organizational chart
reveals the chain of command, showing who reports to whom and who is responsible for what
526 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
products, regions, and activities. Neither its corporate website nor its 2020 Annual Report pro-
vides an organizational chart or any indication of top executive reporting relationships. Based on
a list of management executives with titles, some of which are vague, Shoprite appears to operate
utilizing a functional (centralized) organizational structure, but this would be ineffective for such
a large, geographically dispersed company.
As companies such as Shoprite grow, acquire, and change, alteration of their structure is
generally needed to maintain or obtain effectiveness. Among the basic types of structure—
such as functional, divisional, and matrix—a strategic business unit (SBU) structure is based
on grouping similar divisions together within groups. Some analysts would contend that
Shoprite should be utilizing an SBU structure because this type of design is especially useful
when the number, size, and geographic dispersion of segments, divisions, or profit centers
in a firm is roughly greater than 10 (depending on the size and geographic dispersion of the
segments). Transitioning to an SBU-type structure could facilitate strategy implementation by
improving coordination between similar divisions and channeling accountability to distinct
business units.
Exhibit 1 reveals Shoprite’s current list of top managers and the firm’s organizational struc-
ture. Note the lack of clear executive titles and the lack of divisional head persons, both of which
suggest a need for Shoprite to reorganize based on current organizational structure concepts and
practices.
1
4 5 6 7 8 9
1. Christo Wiese, Chairperson of the Board
2. Pieter Engelbrecht, CEO
3. Joseph Bronn, Deputy CEO
4. Anton de Bruyn, CFO
5. Ram Harisunkerk, Divisional Manager
6. Pieter du Preez, Company Secretary
7. Adele Lambrechts, Head, Investor Relations
8. Sizo Njova, Operations Manager
9. Neil Schreuder, Marketing Director, Checkers
2 3
EXHIBIT 1 Shoprite’s Top Management Team
Source: Based on information in the Shoprite 2020 Annual Report and other documents.
Financial Data and Statements Note in Exhibit 2 that Shoprite experienced a 6 percent increase in revenues in 2020 but a 3 per-
cent drop in net income. This is an ongoing problem for firms currently competing across Africa,
as droughts, pandemics, unemployment, and other factors restrict what can be charged for goods
and services, cutting into profit margins. It is worthy of note that net income/revenues for 2019
were approximately 2.4 percent, but for 2020 the number dropped to 2.2 percent. These numbers
may not seem like much, but the math results in a drop in net profit margin of over 8 percent from
2019 to 2020—this is a negative trend that bears monitoring.
Exhibit 3 provides summarized balance sheets for 2019 and 2020 for Shoprite. Take note of
the large increase in cash in fiscal 2020, which can possibly be partly explained by limited inven-
tory in 2020 and by a reduction in plant, property, and equipment (PP&E), which may indicate
a sale of some existing properties from 2019. In addition, note the zero goodwill on the balance
sheet. Shoprite has a history of acquiring other grocery stores, so this is a positive sign that man-
agement has strong negotiation skills when purchasing rival firms.
CASE 16 • SHOPRITE HOLDINGS LTD.—2022 527
EXHIBIT 2 Shoprite’s Income Statements (in millions of ZAR)
Source: Based on Shoprite’s 2020 Financial Supplement, p. 8.
Income Statement 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Revenues 147,478 156,855 6%
Cost of Goods Sold 113,028 119,323 6%
Gross Profit 34,450 37,532 9%
Operating Expenses 26,583 29,781 12%
EBIT 7,867 7,751 –1%
Interest Expense 2,327 2,505 8%
EBT 5,540 5,246 –5%
Tax 1,715 1,783 4%
Non-Recurring Events (345) (87) –75%
Net Income 3,480 3,376 –3%
EXHIBIT 3 Shoprite’s Balance Sheets (in millions of ZAR)
Source: Based on Shoprite’s 2020 Financial Supplement, p. 9.
Balance Sheet 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments 3,583 10,019 180%
Accounts Receivable 4,156 4,106 –1%
Inventory 20,889 18,845 –10%
Other Current Assets 6,081 6,967 15%
Total Current Assets 34,709 39,937 15%
Property Plant & Equipment 19,196 16,861 –12%
Goodwill – – NA NA
Intangibles 3,077 2,955 –4%
Other Long-Term Assets 21,580 21,465 –1%
Total Assets 78,562 81,218 3%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 19,325 20,157 4%
Other Current Liabilities 10,431 12,416 19%
Total Current Liabilities 29,756 32,573 9%
Long-Term Debt 19,158 20,168 5%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 9,340 9,228 –1%
Total Liabilities 58,254 61,969 6%
Equity
Common Stock 7,516 7,515 0%
Retained Earnings 13,291 12,396 –7%
Treasury Stock (605) (806) 33%
Paid in Capital & Other 106 144 36%
Total Equity 20,308 19,249 –5%
Total Liabilities and Equity 78,562 81,218 3%
528 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Strategy Shoprite describes their strategy as growth focused on optimization of the firm’s retail stores
in existing markets. This choice is quite interesting, as firms have many strategic options, in-
cluding expansion into new geographic areas, expansion of new products in the same areas,
or simply attempting to gain a larger market share in current markets with current products.
Shoprite hopes to execute its strategy by focusing more on existing markets and existing cus-
tomers and by becoming more innovative. Shoprite suggests it will implement this strategy
by focusing on three key areas: 1) a smarter Shoprite, 2) closing the gap in key segments, and
3) winning the long term. Reading more closely, though, Shoprite is clearly more aggressive
than this would imply.
Shoprite plans to execute the “smarter Shoprite” prong by being customer-first, developing
new channels, and improving its precision retailing. Reading the Annual Report, it is clear that
being customer-first means that Shoprite intends to use data provided from customers to target
them more effectively and profitably.
Shoprite is often voted first for lowest prices and Checkers first for best value. In 2020,
Checkers established the Xtra Saving Rewards Programme, and over 5 million customers
joined. Shoprite is focusing on “future fit channels,” which refers to its goal of increasing
omnichannel shopping options for customers, possibly allowing customers to order products
from home for pick-up at the store. In 2019, online sales increased by 386 percent, and Sizty60
was launched in 2020 for home delivery with 87 stores participating by the end of the year.
Precision retailing, similar to the customer-first concept, utilizes data analytics to improve
business decisions; 57 products categories were successfully optimized soon after the start of
this new program.
By closing the gap in key segments, Shoprite seeks to improve its private labels, increase its
market share in premium food and fresh food, and provide stronger franchise offers. In 2019,
1,251 new private label products were offered, and an additional 828 new private labels were
added in 2020. To grow in premium and fresh food, Shoprite relies on its Checkers FreshX
concept stores as well as the addition of fresh products to existing store types. Over 220 fresh
product pipelines were established in the first half of 2021. A less publicized fact is that Shoprite
offers franchises and is currently improving its franchise offerings. In 2021, Shoprite had almost
completed its full supply chain integration; this will likely improve delivery for franchise owners
and allow increased profit for Shoprite corporate.
The third prong of Shoprite’s reported strategy is winning the long term. It plans to do so by
continuously evaluating this position in Africa, refocusing capital allocation, and determining
sources of alternative revenue. As mentioned earlier, Shoprite has not announced plans to expand
beyond Africa. In 2019, Shoprite ventured outside South Africa to open 14 stores in the conti-
nent, and in 2021 it started a program that will tailor business models to conditions in particular
markets within Africa. Shoprite is currently shifting toward smaller stores located closer to their
customers; it opened 23 such Usave stores in 2019 and a huge 105,000-square-meter distribution
center in 2018 while building a different series of distribution centers in 2020. Part of this refo-
cusing of capital allocation is likely to center around Shoprite’s needs in terms of fully integrated
supply chains.
Shoprite plans to unlock alternative revenue streams through data analytics. In 2018, Shoprite
started a program where customers could upload money onto a Shoprite wallet and use the funds
in a Shoprite store. Its new K’nect stores allow customers to purchase cellular products and ac-
cessories. In 2020, Shoprite started a partnership that will provide customers a means of buying
funeral coverage within Shoprite stores.
By-Segment Information
Exhibit 4 shows that approximately 78 percent of 2020 sales were derived from Shoprite markets
in South Africa, which include LiquorShop and K’nect. While Shoprite serves 15 countries in
Africa, the firm is predominantly based in South Africa. The firm says that it employs a cost-
leadership strategy. Shoprite supermarkets hold 32 percent of the formal food retail market in
South Africa.
Exhibit 5 shows that nearly half of the 2,829 total stores owned by Shoprite are supermarkets;
683 of the total of 1,387 supermarkets are Shoprite branded, 425 are Usave, 233 are Checkers,
and 37 are Checkers Hyper. Furniture stores accounted for a total of 442 stores and are split
CASE 16 • SHOPRITE HOLDINGS LTD.—2022 529
Supermarkets
RSA
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
122.4
18.4 18.1
6.2 5.5
Supermarkets Non-
RSA
Furniture Other
2019 2020
112.7
10.810.4
EXHIBIT 4 Shoprite Sales by Segment (in billions of ZAR)
Source: Based on information in the Shoprite 2020 Annual Report, p. 27.
EXHIBIT 5 Shoprite’s 2020 Stores
49%
18%
17%
Supermarkets
LiquorShop
Furniture
OK Franchise
16%
Source: Based on Shoprite’s 2020 Financial Supplement, p. 11.
between OK Furniture, with 397, and House & Home, with 45. OK Franchise and LiquorShop
accounted for 477 and 523, respectively.
Shoprite Shoprite is the largest business of the Shoprite Group portfolio, both in number of stores (503
stores as of 2020) and in revenues. The supermarkets are full-service and offer one-stop shop-
ping for many items, including basics such as food, drinks, and household goods as well as
prescription medicine, funeral arrangements, bills payments, and even government payouts. The
store’s busiest times of the month are the middle and the end of the month, corresponding to most
pay-checks and government social grant pay dates.
Checkers and Checkers Hyper Focused on the more affluent customer, Checkers and Checkers Hyper accounts for 261 super-
markets. Shoprite senior management is making a commitment to this branch of the business as
they feel the firm is underserving consumers looking for more upscale grocery items as well as
customers with the disposable income to shop at such stores. FreshX stores are also considered
premium stores tailored to a specific customer type, in particular the premium consumer seg-
ment that enjoys fresh markets. The main driver of FreshX is healthier options rather than simply
being more upscale.
530 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
USave Shoprite’s small-grocery-store-with-limited-items concept is Usave, often spelled U$ave or even
USave. Similar to Checkers and Checkers Hyper, the USave concept also serves underserved
communities but generally caters to more rural or less-affluent communities. The USave brand
is associated with convenience of location and cheaper prices. The concept has even expanded
to include trucks, often referred to as eKasi truck stores, that are able to travel to regions of need
during times of distress. Fourteen new USave stores, seven eKasi truck stores and six eKasi con-
tainer stores opened in 2020.
Other Stores Shoprite also operates OK franchise and its liquor and furniture stores. The OK concept allows
entrepreneurs across Africa to open their own business with the backing of a trusted brand. In
2020, 17 such stores were opened, and there were plans to open 24 by the end of 2021. There are
currently 500 LiquorShop stores in South Africa, generally found near a Shoprite or Checkers
store. Shoprite plans to expand and grow the Liquor concept in the future. House & Home has
41 South African stores and serves middle- to upper-class customers while OK Furniture, with
314 stores in South Africa and 83 in the rest of Africa, serves mostly middle-income customers.
Customers can purchase beds, appliances, furniture, and many other items at both store concepts.
External Issues
Regions Served Exhibit 6 reveals the South African grocery market’s expected growth up to 2025. Historically,
growth in this segment has been 1–1.5 percent annually, but now, growth in the higher-end
grocery business is expected to be 48 percent into 2025, which is just over 8 percent annually
when taking compounding into account. Note that the middle-priced grocery options are a smaller
market and are expected to grow less than the other two categories. Value-based grocery options
are expected to grow 36 percent through 2025, or about 6.33 percent annually when adjusted for
compounding. Keep in mind, though, that 62 percent of all growth will come from the value-
based grocery concept in South Africa through 2025. Note as well that data on profit margins
are limited, and it would be wise to research which stores—high-quality, middle-quality, or
high-value—have the larger profit margins before deciding how to expand further.
Nature of Customers in the Regions Customers in much of sub-Saharan Africa, including South Africa, tend to have limited incomes
and budgets due to adverse weather conditions, pandemics, governmental challenges, high unem-
ployment, and other reasons. These external issues place a tremendous strain on businesses oper-
ating in these regions; customers simply cannot afford to spend as much as is needed to operate
for the businesses to be profitable. As a result, virtually all businesses serving such communities
EXHIBIT 6 South African Grocery Market Growth Expectations
500
400
300
200
100
0
High Quality Middle Quality High Value
600
20252020
Source: Based on Pick n Pay Annual Report, p. 12.
CASE 16 • SHOPRITE HOLDINGS LTD.—2022 531
have become experts on operational efficiencies. Due to lack of fuel and lack of the means to buy
fuel when it is available, there is a greater need to open smaller grocery shops near the customer;
however, this places a higher financial burden on companies. Nevertheless, convenience is more
important than ever, and many firms are seizing the opportunity to locate smaller stores close to
the consumer. One interesting development that may run counter to the trend of having stores
close to home is customers making less frequent trips to the grocery stores, opting instead to
purchase many items less frequently and expecting stores to offer one-stop shopping and a wide
range of products. Across the regions served by Shoprite, many customers are increasingly valu-
ing online shopping even for grocery items.
Nature of Select Markets The food and grocery market in South Africa was valued at about ZAR 900 billion in 2021, with
a 60/40 ratio of formal-to-informal grocery market. The four largest grocery retailers in South
Africa account for 50 percent of the market share. The informal market, accounting for 40 per-
cent, are small mom-and-pop shops that could be purchased if desired. Alternatively, if a large
firm like Shoprite or Pick n Pay simply placed a smaller grocery store concept in these locations,
it would likely place tremendous pressure on the smaller stores.
Zambia is currently enduring a prolonged drought, which has placed tremendous pressure
on this country, especially because the nation relies on hydroelectric power. The drought has
lowered the prices of copper, one of Zambia’s major products, which in turn has put tremendous
pressure on the employment rate. Zambia’s GDP is projected to grow less than 1 percent in 2021
compared to Zimbabwe’s nearly 4 percent expected growth. However, Zimbabwe is currently
experiencing a weak currency due to hyperinflation. Fuel shortages and a drought, with water
and power shortages like Zambia’s, make business difficult in Zimbabwe. In 2020, for example,
30 Zimbabwe dollars were equal to 1 USD; one year later 115 Zimbabwe dollars equaled 1 USD.
Demand for Healthy Food There is growing demand globally for healthy food options. Generally, consumers consider
foods healthy if they are gluten-free, natural, organic, and without “genetic modification,” but
lower fat and lower sugar is also considered healthy. However, most of all, consumers like food
that is tasty and convenient. Many consumers in the markets served by Shoprite eat at home, so
convenience plays a large factor in what is purchased, which includes salty and sweet snacks
with a long shelf life. Nevertheless, companies such as Shoprite should be mindful of growing
healthy eating trends and consider offering more high-protein, plant-based, dairy-free snacks. In
fact, 31 percent of people in South Africa claim they always try to eat healthy and consider veg-
etables and fruits to be the healthiest options. Despite the growing trends globally of plant-based
diets, over 35 percent of South Africans surveyed indicated they do not know what a plant-based
diet refers to. The good news for residents in South Africa is that over 80 percent feel it is easier
to find healthy food option now compared to 2015, but like many people around the world, about
half of the population do not consider healthy food affordable.
South African Eating Habits A study by Nielsen in 2021 revealed that 84 percent of South Africans eat meat nearly every
day. Meat consumption is higher for consumers who live in urban areas. People in rural areas
also eat meat but include a higher percentage (based on total calories) of grains and vegetables
in their diets. In fact, 41 percent of the typical South African plate consist of starch; 26 percent,
meat; 13 percent, vegetables; 8 percent, dairy; and 12 percent, miscellaneous food categories.
However, for healthy living it is recommended that 12 percent be derived from meat, 33 percent
from vegetables, and 32 percent from starch. Perhaps surprisingly, researchers at the University
of Cambridge recommend that 15 percent of plate composition be derived from dairy.
The most popular meats in South Africa are poultry, red meat, seafood, and pork, consumed
by 92, 83, 53, and 45 percent, respectively. Nearly 98 percent of the population eats some type of
meat, but beans are the most commonly used meat replacement, eaten by 66 percent of the popu-
lation. In starches, bread, rice, and potatoes are the most commonly eaten, at 93, 88, and 80 per-
cent, respectively. Green beans and cauliflower are considered starch replacements and are eaten
by over 30 percent of the population. However, about 50 percent of the population cannot afford
532 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
such vegetables. Tomatoes, onions, cabbages, carrots, spinach, lettuce, peppers, and cucumbers
are commonly consumed in South Africa, with tomatoes, onions, and cabbage consumed by over
80 percent of the population
Competitors
Massmart Massmart is a South Africa–based retailer of consumer goods. Considered the leading retailer
of general merchandise, it also sells liquor, home improvement goods, supplies, and basic food
products. With 423 stores in sub-Saharian Africa across 13 countries, the firm trades on the
Johannesburg Stock Exchange. Notable countries with Massmart stores include South Africa,
Zambia, Namibia, Nigeria, and Ghana. The firm operates under a high-volume, low-expense
model to best serve the majority of its customers.
Massmart is owned 53 percent by U.S. retail giant Walmart. The firm is broken into four divi-
sions. Massdiscounters, focusing on general merchandise and discounted grocery foods, has the
largest number of stores, with ZAR 20 billion of revenues in 2019. Masswarehouse, Massbuild,
and Masscash are the other three divisions. The Masscash includes Cambridge Food and re-
ported sales ZAR 30 billion in 2019.
Pick n Pay Group The Pick n Pay Group is the second largest grocery store chain in South Africa behind Shoprite.
The firm was founded in 1967 and has about 2,000 locations. The firm has locations in 8 coun-
tries in Africa plus a 49 percent stake in a Zimbabwean supermarket business. With 1,831 stores
in South Africa, this market dominates the Pick n Pay portfolio. Zimbabwe is next, with 61 stores,
followed by Namibia, with 36. In March 2021, the first Pick n Pay store opened in Nigeria, a
market that rival Shoprite is looking to exit. A notable exception for Pick n Pay is Egypt, where
the firm has no locations.
Like Shoprite, Pick n Pay stores are both franchise-owned and company-owned. The firm
currently operates 830 company-owned and 761 franchise-owned stores. The firm prides itself
on its three pillars to business success: “consumer sovereignty, doing good is good business,
and maximizing business efficiency.” The Pick n Pay Group has three store formats: Pick n Pay,
Boxer, and TM Supermarkets. Pick n Pay stores sell clothing, liquor, and pharmaceutical prod-
ucts in addition to food. The Boxer concept stores sell liquor and offer Boxer Punch, which are
smaller- footprint grocery stores, and Boxer Build, which are stores that offer home improve-
ment products and food. In addition, Pick n Pay operates a large online grocery platform in
sub-Saharan Africa.
Boxer is South Africa’s fastest growing discount supermarket chain, focusing on the lower
to middle class. Boxer is enjoying double-digit sales growth through its range of 3,000 products,
which include fresh meat and produce offered at unbeatable prices. In 2020, 13 supermarkets
and 5 liquor stores were converted to Boxer stores. The Pick n Pay Group estimates their market
share in South Africa at 16 percent, and the management says the company is underrepresented
in the value-based grocery store chains.
Conclusion
Strategy Considerations Shoprite operates mostly in South Africa but has operations in many other African countries,
including Egypt. The firm derives most of its revenues from the grocery business but has ex-
panded its operations to include financial services, home improvement, funeral services, and
much more. CEO Engelbrecht is in desperate need of a clear strategic plan moving forward.
Currently, the trend in the grocery industry in Africa is to cut costs in every way possible,
though margins are slim. Do you agree with this cost-cutting tactic? In addition, what would
you recommend CEO Engelbrecht do with respect to new stores? Would it be more profitable
to build smaller stores closer to the consumer with fewer options or build larger stores where
the consumer can purchase everything they need, but which would require travel further from
home? Recall that many in South Africa are dependent on checks from the government twice
a month to purchase the products they need. Would this situation lend itself to larger stores in
central locations?
CASE 16 • SHOPRITE HOLDINGS LTD.—2022 533
What markets should Shoprite expand into? Do you agree with the divesture from the
Nigeria market? Recall that rival Pick n Pay is looking to expand into this same market. When
developing a strategic plan for Shoprite, be sure to provide solutions for what you feel is the
best direction for the firm moving forward. These recommendations may not be what Shoprite
is currently doing or what the latest news releases suggest Shoprite plans to do. The firm is in
desperate need of a detailed strategic plan as it competes in a difficult region of the world for
profitable business.
References
1. Pick n Pay, Integrated Annual Report 2020, https://www.picknpayinvestor.co.za/
downloads/annual-report/2020/pick-n-pay-iar.pdf.
2. Shoprite, “Annual Financial Statements 2020,” https://www.shopriteholdings.co.za/content/
dam/MediaPortal/documents/shoprite-holdings/FinancialStatements/Shoprite_Holdings_
AFS_2020.pdf.
534 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Woolworths Group—2022
www.woolworthsgroup.com.au
Headquartered in Bella Vista, New South Wales, Australia, the Woolworths Group has 215,000
employees working in its network of 3,357 stores. The firm reported nearly AU$64 billion in fis-
cal 2020. The company is part of the highly competitive grocery business in Australia, with its
top rival being Coles. Together, they dominate the market, with Woolworths enjoying 37 percent
and Coles taking 28 percent of the market.
Woolworths is structured with several divisions, which include Australia Food, New Zealand
Food, Online Foods, Drinks, and Hotels. In 2019, Woolworths divested a petroleum business.
Australia and New Zealand are markets where customers are quite patriotic and tend to signifi-
cantly favor products that are made in their own countries.
History
Five Australian entrepreneurs—Percy Christmas, Stanley Chatterton, Cecil Scott Waine, George
Creed, and Ernest Williams—founded Woolworths on September 22, 1924. Woolworths opened
its first store in December 1924, then named Woolworths Stupendous Bargain Basement and
located in Sydney’s Imperial Arcade. The company’s first CEO, Percy Christmas, described the
first store opening thus: “Every city needs a Woolworths: Sydney has it now. Every man, woman,
and child needs a handy place where good things are cheap.”
A second Woolworths store opened in 1927. The company solely used newspapers for ad-
vertising up until 1937, when it began radio advertising very effectively with leading radio per-
sonality Jack Davey. It was not until 1957 that the firm opened its first dedicated food store in
Sydney’s Dee Why.
In 1960, Woolworths became Australia’s first nationwide retailer after acquiring Centralian
Traders in Alice Springs. With this acquisition, the company finally achieved its mission of cater-
ing to every state and territory in Australia.
The company’s chain of discount stores, named BIG W, opened in 1976 in Tamworth, New
South Wales. By the end of 1978, the company was operating 13 BIG W discount stores across
five states.
The 1980s were a decade of expansion, including the acquisition of Dick Smith and America
Safeway; by 1985, Woolworths had acquired all 126 of Safeway’s Australian stores.
In 2005, Woolworths acquired Foodland Australia Limited’s (FAL’s) entire New Zealand su-
permarket business as well as their 22 Action stores in Australia. In 2009, Woolworths formed a
joint venture with U.S.-based home improvement retailer Lowe’s and also acquired the Danks
Group of hardware businesses in Australia. In 2011, Woolworths opened its first Masters Home
Improvement stores.
Vision/Mission
A formal vision statement or mission statement could not be located on the Woolworths cor-
porate website or in its 2020 Annual Report , but the following have been proposed as likely
statements.
Vision Statement We strive to dominate the grocery market with both small local stores and larger, more central-
ized stores in Australia and New Zealand.
Mission Statement We are committed to providing customers with a varied shopping experience, from online, with
the best applications available, to traditional in-store shopping, with new concepts regularly in
all our stores. We additionally offer quality hotel rooms at a fair price. We are committed to
CASE 17 • WOOLWORTHS GROuP—2022 535
serving people across Australia and New Zealand in both large and small stores with exception-
ally friendly staff. We strive to be a good corporate citizen and to do business ethically.
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure It appears that Woolworths is organized using a decentralized chain-of-command, but the divi-
sional head person’s responsibilities are not clearly defined. For example, there appears to be no
head person for the BIG W or for Countdown or even for Insurance or Financial Services. Thus,
there is substantial room for improvement in the overall design of the company’s structure for
reporting relationships, although the centralized (functional) head person titles and responsibili-
ties are clear. Allocation of resources across divisions or segments is arguably the most important
strategy decision that firms make annually, so it is vital for the division head-person’s titles and
responsibilities to be clear to all insiders and outsiders.
The term “organizational structure” refers to how a firm’s operations are grouped or arranged
for battle against rival firms. Structure is vital for success in any firm. An organizational chart re-
veals the chain of command, showing who reports to whom and who is responsible for what prod-
ucts, regions, and activities. Neither Woolworths’ corporate website nor its 2020 Annual Report
provides an organizational chart or any indication of top executive reporting relationships. In fact,
beyond a mere list of management executives with titles, no one is sure whether this company tends
to operate by-region or by-product in overall accountability and responsibility of top executives.
Especially because it is such a large firm, Woolworths’ basic organizational structure needs
both clarification and enhancement to improve effectiveness and efficiency. Among the basic types
of structure—such as functional, divisional, and matrix—a strategic business unit (SBU) struc-
ture is based on grouping similar divisions together within groups. Some analysts contend that
Woolworths should be utilizing an SBU structure because this type of design is especially useful
when the number, size, and geographic dispersion of segments, divisions, or profit centers in a
firm is roughly greater than 10 (depending on the size and geographic dispersion of the segments).
Transitioning to an SBU-type structure could facilitate strategy implementation by improving co-
ordination between similar divisions and channeling accountability to distinct business units.
Exhibit 1 provides a list of Woolworths’ top executives and a flow chart of likely report-
ing relationships. As there is no chief operating officer, it appears that all top executives report
EXHIBIT 1 A List of Woolworths’ Top Executives with a Flow Chart
1. Bradford Banducci, CEO
2. Amanda Bardwell, Managing Director, WooliesX (which includes
Woolworths Digital, E-Commerce, Customer Loyalty, and Customer Services).
3. Christain Bennett, Group Head, Reputation, Government Relations,
and Industry Affairs
4. Guy Brent, Managing Director, The Woolworths Food Company and Metro
5. Natalie Davis, Managing Director, Woolworths Supermarkets
6. Paul Graham, Chief Supply Chain Officer and Managing Director of
Primary Connect
7. Stephen Harrison, Chief Financial Officer
8. Andrew Hicks, Chief Marketing Officer
9. Alex Hold, Chief Sustainability Officer
10. John Hunt, Chief Information Officer
11. Von Ingram, Chief Customer Transformation Officer
12. Caryn Katsikogianis, Chief People Officer
13. Rob McCartney, Format & Network Development Director
14. Pejman Okhovat, Managing Director, BIG W
15. Claire Peters, Managing Director, B2B and Everyday Needs
16. Bill Reid, Chief Legal Officer
17. Spencer Sonn, Managing Director, Woolworths New Zealand
18. David Walker, Chief Risk Officer
432 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1
13 14 15 16 17 18
Source: Based on information provided at the Woolworths’ corporate website,www.woolworthsgroup.com.au
536 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
directly to the CEO. Many analysts suggest a need for Woolworths to reorganize based on cur-
rent organizational structure concepts and practice. Transforming into an SBU-type structure
based on products likely would be best for the company. Under this arrangement, regional presi-
dents would likely be below all product-based unit managers.
Financial Data and Statements Exhibit 2 shows recent income statements for Woolworth. Note that revenues increased 6 per-
cent, but there was a 56 percent decrease in net income, due mostly to the AU$1.2 billion in
non-recurring events in 2019, when Woolworths sold its petrol business; the AU$1.2 billion was
after-tax profit from this sale. Note that interest expense increased as well, but this is a result of
a new accounting policy in Australia described in detail in the discussion of the balance sheet.
Since net income and earnings before tax include both the new accounting rule and the one-
time sale of the petroleum business, the EBIT number may be the better number for accessing
profitability in 2020. With a 12 percent increase, it appears that Woolworths overall had a good
year in 2020.
Exhibit 3 provides a 2-year balance sheet summary for Woolworths. On the statements pro-
vided by Woolworths in their Annual Report, the firm combines goodwill with intangibles, but
when reading the notes to the balance sheet, the precise goodwill number can be found; keep this
in mind when doing your research. Treasury stock is referred to as contributed equity on the bal-
ance sheet for Woolworths.
The major change to the balance sheet from 2019 to 2020 resulted from the passing of a new
law by the Australia Accounting Standards Board (AASB) whereby firms must now place leases
that are of significant financial weight on their balance sheet (this was not required previously).
Note that Woolworths’ long-term assets increased 804 percent and long-term debt increased by
the same dollar amount to reflect this accounting change. While this change may not have any
impact on your recommendations moving forward for Woolworths, it is important to understand
what the numbers on the balance sheet represent.
Strategy Woolworths is currently revamping their food offerings to provide customers with a more var-
ied selection of healthy and fresh meals. In fiscal 2020, 131 new Fresh Made Easy products
were offered to customers. In addition, 54 Woolworths stores provided an extra store section for
ethnic foods, providing customers with increased variety in their selection process. A new app
was offered in 2020 and was downloaded over a million times just a few months after launch.
EXHIBIT 2 Woolworths’ Income Statements (in millions of AU$)
Source: Based on information contained in Woolworths’ 2020 Annual Report, p. 76.
Income Statement 6/30/19 6/30/20 Percent Change
Revenues 59,984 63,675 6%
Cost of Goods Sold 42,542 45,105 6%
Gross Profit 17,442 18,570 6%
Operating Expenses 15,091 15,942 6%
EBIT 2,351 2,628 12%
Interest Expense 126 843 569%
EBT 2,225 1,785 –20%
Tax 667 576 –14%
Non-Recurring Events 1,200 – –100%
Net Income 2,758 1,209 –56%
CASE 17 • WOOLWORTHS GROuP—2022 537
The app allows customers to order food online and monitor order tracking; it also makes per-
sonalized offers to customers. Group online sales totaled AU$3.5 billion in 2020, up 42 percent
from 2019. About 5.5 percent of total sales in 2020 were derived from online purchases.
It appears that the firm likes to renew the key drivers of growth every year. For 2021, the
six key drivers of growth are: 1) keeping the business Covid-safe, 2) expanding food options to
customers, 3) separating the Endeavor Group, 4) building adjacencies, 5) advancing e-commerce
options, and 6) working more closely with all stakeholders. While these drivers are important,
most are not strategic in nature, except possibly for the separation of the Endeavour Group,
which trades on the Australian Stock Exchange as a separate firm from Woolworths as of July
2021. An additional strategy the firm is undertaking is building smaller stores closer to customers
rather than having fewer mega-sized stores.
Woolworths’ Segments Woolworths performs operations within four business segments: 1) Australian Food, 2) New
Zealand Food, 3) BIG W, and 4) Endeavour Group (Drinks and Hotels).
EXHIBIT 3 Woolworths’ Balance Sheets (in millions of AU$)
Source: Based on information contained in Woolworths’ 2020 Annual Report, p. 78.
Balance Sheet 6/30/19 6/30/20 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short Term Investments 1,066 2,068 94%
Accounts Receivable 682 740 9%
Inventory 4,280 4,434 4%
Other Current Assets 270 550 104%
Total Current Assets 6,298 7,792 24%
Property Plant & Equipment 8,252 8,742 6%
Goodwill 4,155 4,217 1%
Intangibles 3,638 3,500 –4%
Other Long-Term Assets 1,573 14,221 804%
Total Assets 23,916 38,472 61%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 6,676 7,508 12%
Other Current Liabilities 2,209 5,683 157%
Total Current Liabilities 8,885 13,191 48%
Long-Term Debt – 13,168 NA NA
Other Long-Term Liabilities 4,547 3,081 –32%
Total Liabilities 13,432 29,440 119%
Equity
Common Stock 0 0 NA NA
Retained Earnings 3,783 2,329 –38%
Treasury Stock 5,828 6,022 3%
Paid in Capital & Other 873 681 –22%
Total Equity 10,484 9,032 –14%
Total Liabilities and Equity 23,916 38,472 61%
538 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Australian Food Within Woolworths’ Australian Food segment is Woolworths Supermarkets, Metro Food Stores,
and WooliesX. Sales for Australian Food were up 8.3 percent for 2020, making this segment the
fastest growing and largest, with revenues in excess of AU$42 billion. Metro Food Stores con-
tributed only AU$943 million in sales in 2020, but that number did increase 5 percent from the
previous year. There was a trend during 2020 of customers shopping more locally at smaller stores.
Additionally, the average basket price increased 5.8 percent, but the total number of transactions
declined 1.8 percent. These numbers reflect customers making fewer trips to the grocery store but
purchasing more while there. It can also be inferred from these numbers that customers were eating
out less in 2020, enabling this segment’s 8.3 percent revenue growth for the fiscal year.
Woolworths Supermarkets: The company owns and operates 995 supermarket stores as well as
distribution centers and support offices across Australia. The company is proud of the fact that it
obtains 96 percent of all its fresh fruit and vegetables and 100 percent of all its fresh meat from
Australian farmers and growers, making the company “Australia’s Fresh Food People.”
WooliesX: This is the company’s online operations, reorganized in 2020 into three platforms:
Digital & Medical, eCom & Fulfilment, and Loyalty & FinTech. Digital & Medical include gen-
erating demand and cartology; eCom & Fulfilment include home delivery and pick-up. Loyalty
& FinTech covers Everyday Rewards, gift cards, and insurance for cars, pets, homes, furniture,
roadside assistance, landlords, renter contents, and travel, in addition to life insurance. Grocery
shoppers get a 10 percent discount if the customer has an insurance policy. Additionally, the
company has its own Visa credit cards and sells gift cards.
New Zealand Food This segment of Woolworths consists of Countdown, a chain of 181 supermarkets located all
across New Zealand, as well as 4 dry grocery distribution centers, 3 fresh produce distribu-
tion centers, 2 meat-processing plants, 1 seafood-processing plant, and support offices. Online
sales in this segment grew 44.5 percent in 2020, anchored by a 74.8 percent increase in Q4. The
company’s New Zealand Food’s franchise stores (FreshChoice and SuperValue) added online
capability to 58 stores in 2020. In 2020, CountDown opened an 8,800-square-meter eStore in
Penrose, an industrial suburb in Auckland where 200 employees complete online orders for cus-
tomers at 10 of CountDown’s busiest Auckland supermarkets.
Big W BIG W is a chain of 183 stores located across Australia, Hong Kong, and Bangladesh. The stores
offer a variety of products similar to a small Walmart, providing discounted prices on quality
products. BIG W is doing great, with 2020 revenues up 11.2 percent over the prior year and Q4
of 2020 showing revenues up 30.5 percent. In the same quarter, BIG W’s online sales were up
181 percent as people transition to online business both regionally and globally.
Endeavour Group—Endeavor Drinks This segment of Woolworths includes EndeavourX, which is the company’s investment in digital
and online efforts to spur sales. Online sales in this segment grew 28.6 percent in 2020 while
growth in door-to-door deliveries grew 161 percent. In this segment, during 2020, over 1,500
plexiglass screens and sanitation stations were installed at 1,500 Dan Murphy and BWS liquor
stores. Among alcoholic beverages, Australian-made gin is the fastest growing category of spir-
its, but craft and premium beer remain popular among Australians. Among wines, premium and
super-premium brands sold well at the Dan Murphy’s liquor stores throughout 2020.
Endeavor Group—Hotels Australian government–mandated closures of hotels in 2020 due to COVID-19 devasted this seg-
ment. In mid-2020, 80 Endeavor hotels and 5 managed clubs remained closed in Victoria.
Segment Performance Exhibits 4 and 5 provide a segment-based breakdown of sales. Note that Australia Food is the
main driver of the company and should probably be the main attention of your analysis. What
should be done with the other segments is important, though. Recall that the firm plans to spin
off the Endeavor Drink business, so bear this in mind when researching the case.
CASE 17 • WOOLWORTHS GROuP—2022 539
External Issues Australian Business Considerations Australians take great pride in purchasing products that are labeled “Made in Australia” or
“Grown in Australia,” and as a result, imported products need attractive marketing of their
unique attributes to compete with domestic products. Australians in general value quality over
quantity, so portion sizes are not that important, which presents an excellent opportunity for gro-
cery stores to promote their store brands: cut back on the portion size, market the unique healthy
aspects of the product, and charge a similar price, resulting in a higher margin. There remains a
large demand in Australia for organic and ethnic foods. One major opportunity or threat facing
grocery stores is Australia is the country’s free trade negotiations with the European Union and
the United Kingdom. Once finalized, Australian customers can expect a significant upgrade in
quality of food and options on food.
0
5,000
10,000
15,000
20,000
25,000
30,000
35,000
40,000
45,000
Australian
Food
New Zealand
Food
Big W Endeavour
Drinks
Hotels
39,635 42,151
6 ,2
9 1
6 ,8
2 3
3 ,7
9 7
4 ,1
0 6
9 ,2
7 5
1 ,6
7 1
1 ,3
2 0
20202019
8 ,5
9 0
EXHIBIT 4 Woolworths’ Revenues by Product (in millions of AU$)
Source: Based on Woolworths’ 2020 Annual Report, p. 19.
EXHIBIT 5 Woolworths’ EBIT by Product (millions of AU$)
Source: Based on Woolworths’ 2020 Annual Report, p. 19.
1,827
2500
0
500
1,000
1,500
2,000
2,500
Australian
Food
New Zealand
Food
Big W Endeavour
Drinks
Hotels
277
285
504
261
2,232
39
569
172
20202019
358
540 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Private Label Private label products are growing in popularity in Australia, with Aldi leading the way.
Australians have traditionally not trusted private labels as much as their brand-name counter-
parts, but this is changing, and no-name brands are expected to grow significantly. These store
brands tend to be of similar quality and have much higher margins, benefiting grocery stores.
Generally, a store can make more on, for example, a store cola than on a Pepsi or Coke since the
major brand has spent millions on advertising. Woolworths and Coles, for example, are including
private label brands for up to 40 percent of their store offerings. One of the more common areas
for private label brands is in prepared foods and meats. Interestingly, when most people think of
store brands, they think of soda, chips, or similar items, but gourmet foods and expensive deli
meats, once price-prohibitive, are now consumed much more often and have become extremely
popular no-name brand options.
A Better Shopping Experience The COVID-19 pandemic accelerated the online shopping experience, and most industry ex-
perts agree it is here to stay. Coles and Woolworths have reported that their online sales grew
in excess of 30 percent in 2020. Supply-chain optimization, excellent mobile applications, and
other online platforms are needed to maintain the online shopping demand. One interesting
difference between Coles and Woolworths is that the former is much more centralized, with
distribution centers that are heavily automated and a partnership with British online supermar-
ket Ocado, while the latter mostly avoids having to depend on a partner like Ocado; instead of
a few jumbo centralized centers, it utilizes many micro-fulfillment centers. Metcash also has
entered the online sector of the grocery industry with IGA Shop Online, but the firm remains a
significantly smaller player than Coles and Woolworths in the online arena.
Coles and Woolworths are improving the shopping experience by refurbishing their existing
stores, increasing online options, and gravitating to more market-style formats. Both companies
have learned that a market-style fresh-food section is extremely popular with customers. In addi-
tion, both companies are focusing on expanding through smaller stores in more locations rather
than huge central location stores. With this new strategy, both Coles and Woolworths are compet-
ing with IGA’s and Foodland’s niche.
Healthier Eating The global trend toward more healthy eating is true in Australia too. Traditional snacks such as
cookies and candy are set to grow modestly, but sports nutrition, packaged foods and healthy on-
the-go snacks are booming. Keep in mind that many products marketed as healthy may not be the
healthiest choices. For example, sports nutrition bars, granola bars, and cereals may be loaded
in sugar and processed ingredients. Nevertheless, the trends favor these products over traditional
candy bars and cookies.
More and more customers are choosing to incorporate meat-free days in their diets. The
plant-based diet is extremely popular in many parts of the world and is expanding into Australia
as well. Demand for fish, seafood, and lean chicken is expected to grow more rapidly than other
meat options. Products with natural sweeteners are also seeing a large growth rate as more cus-
tomers avoid sugar-based and artificial sweeteners. People are also consuming less alcohol in
Australia, creating a boom for zero- or low-alcohol beverages. Recall that store brands, as op-
posed to global brands, are increasing in popularity and generally have a higher margin, provid-
ing many creative options for new store brand product creations.
Australia Grocery Shopping Habits The annual grocery market in Australia is over AU$120 billion, with the average home spend-
ing AU$160 weekly on groceries. Men reportedly spend about 10 percent more than women
on average. Woolworths and Coles dominate the market, with a combined 65 percent market
share. Woolworths is the largest grocery store in Australia, with 37 percent market share and
nearly half of Australians shopping at the stores. Women tend to prefer Woolworths, with 10
percent more women shopping there than men, while men prefer Aldi or Metcash (also called
IGA). Gen Z shoppers are Woolworths’ most loyal customer by age, with 54 percent shopping
at the stores.
CASE 17 • WOOLWORTHS GROuP—2022 541
About 75 percent of Australians shop for groceries at least once a week, and 80 percent
of them are a member of a grocery store points program, the two largest of these being Coles’
Flybuys and Woolworths’ Everyday Rewards. Good news for grocery stores is that 62 percent of
customers use their points to get cash back off groceries (7 percent reported they do not use their
points for anything). Having an established reward system is likely important in Australia as a
recent consumer sentiment survey listed the price of groceries as the third most stressful expense
for Aussies, only trailing rents and mortgages and energy expenses for stress levels.
Exhibit 6 reveals the percent revenue breakdown of grocery stores in Australia. Note that
Dry and Packaged Foods generate the most revenue, and Beverages generates the least. Keep
in mind, though, that revenue and profit margins are not the same; note the high revenue that
tobacco generated in the year 2021.
23%
18%
16%
13%
10%
8%
6% 6%
Dry and Packaged Goods
Meat Products
Fresh Produce
Toiletries
Tobacco
Dairy
Bakery/Bread
Beverages
EXHIBIT 6 Product Percent of Revenue in Australia Grocery Market
Source: Based on our reading of various sources.
Competitors
Based on data from Statista in 2021, New South Wales, Victoria, and Queensland are home to
2,790, 2,672, and 1,602 grocery stores, respectively, or about 80 percent of all grocery stores
in Australia. Although Coles is Woolworths’ major rival, in South Australia and Queensland,
Drakes is a large supermarket and another contender. Harris Farm Markets is a major regional
player in New South Wales and Queensland. In addition to Metcash and Aldi, there are many
smaller, local grocery store chains in Australia that compete by trying to provide exceptional
customer service for local patrons.
While Aldi only represents 11 percent of the grocery store market in Australia, it is growing
and offering strong competition, mainly through lower prices but also from the unique goods it
offers. Aldi appears to have finished its expansion, considering it has reached the saturation point
of new stores, and is now attempting to attract new customers to the same stores, keeping exist-
ing customers, and focusing on higher profit margin items.
Grocery store companies always risk placing too much downward pressure on prices.
However, between 2019 and 2020, Coles increased prices 2.4 percent while Woolworths
charged 1.4 percent more. Exhibit 7 provides a breakdown of the market share in Australia.
The good news for grocery stores in Australia is that solid growth is expected through 2026,
and no major competitors appear ready to enter the market with the possible exception of
AmazonFresh. This came as a surprise as major German Grocer Kaufland was investing heav-
ily in real estate in Australia before deciding to forgo its plans and exit the market in 2020.
This unexpected development makes Costco the last major retailer to enter the market, which
it did over a decade ago, in 2009. It is interesting that both Coles and Woolworths are today
shifting from competing on price to competing by offering more products that have a higher
profit margin. Moreover, firms are expanding their loyalty programs and promotions rather
than providing discounts.
542 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Conclusion
Strategy Considerations Woolworths competes in a challenging, low profit-margin business in both Australia and New
Zealand. However, as the old adage goes, “everyone has to eat,” and this fact protects grocery firms
from major downturns in the economy. During rough times, grocery store firms can even experience
an increase in revenues, as Woolworths did in 2020 despite divesting its petroleum business in 2019.
Profit margins are generally low in the grocery business and inventory turnover attention is espe-
cially important. To prosper in this business, it takes exceptional customer service, low prices, varied
product offerings, excellent inventory management, and a well-developed strategic plan. Regarding
the latter, Woolworths must be effective in allocating resources across its segments, particularly in
determining how best to grow its BIG W and New Zealand Foods segments into stronger divisions.
CEO Banducci is shifting Woolworths’ strategy to building more and smaller grocery stores
in more local markets, competing more heavily with Aldi and the myriad other players in these
markets. Perform a comprehensive strategic analysis to determine whether this is a good strat-
egy. Would the future of Woolworths be brighter if it made plans to double its BIG W and New
Zealand operations in 3 years? Be mindful that no firm can do everything that could benefit it;
there is simply not sufficient capital. So tough choices must be made, and that is why strategic
planning is so important.
What would you suggest to CEO Banducci with respect to promotions and rewards versus
flat out promoting the traditional discounts to get people into the store? What mix of products
would you recommend the CEO shift to? How aggressively should firms in the industry switch to
store-brand products over brand-name products? Recall that Exhibit 6 provided data on the most
popular grocery items in Australian grocery stores.
With respect to their Hotel and Endeavor Drinks businesses, should Woolworths divest these
divisions and deploy those funds into other regions or products? As you can see, there are many
strategic considerations for the company regarding how to allocate resources to best satisfy
Woolworths’ shareholders and other stakeholders.
After reading and studying this case and doing your own research regarding the latest trends
in Australia and New Zealand, prepare a strategic plan for the CEO that includes your recom-
mendations for the firm. Be sure not to simply report what the firm is doing or what you think
they are going to do based on the news, unless of course you also feel this is the best option based
on your analyses. Rather, imagine that CEO Banducci and the Woolworths board are paying you
a large fee to develop an exemplary three-year strategic plan for the firm. What should be done
with the WooliesX operations and the company’s hardware stores and hotels? Can Woolworths
remain this diversified and stay successful going forward?
You may need to develop a new vision and mission for Woolworths if your strategy rec-
ommendations are significantly different from what the firm is currently doing in terms of the
products, services, or regions. A new and improved organizational structure is needed to more
clearly identify the accountability and responsibility of top executives, especially in light of your
recommendations for the future.
37%
28%
11%
7%
17%
Wool Worths
Coles Group
Aldi
Metcash
Others
EXHIBIT 7 Percent of Market Share in Australia Grocery Market
Source: Based on information in IBISWorld.
CASE 18 • MICROSOFT CORPORATION—2018 543
Microsoft Corporation—2018
www.microsoft.com , MSFT
Headquartered in Redmond, Washington, Microsoft is the world’s largest software company
developing products for customers in over 190 countries. The company’s products include
Windows Office, Windows 8 operating system for personal computers (PC)s, Windows,
Windows Server operating systems, Windows Azure, Microsoft SQL, Visual Studio, Silverlight,
and the popular Xbox gaming and entertainment console. Many PC makers such as Acer,
Lenovo, Dell, Hewlett-Packard, and Toshiba pre-install Microsoft software on devices. The firm
also offers consulting services, cloud-based services and training certifications as well as online
products such as Bing, MSN, adCenter, and Atlas. Microsoft has strategic alliances with Nokia,
NIIT, and Dominion Enterprises. The company owns Skype, LinkedIn, and offers the popular
Surface tablet computer.
In May 2018, Microsoft announced its offering of AI for Accessibility, a new $25 million,
five-year program aimed at harnessing the power of AI to amplify human capabilities for more
than 1 billion people around the world with disabilities. This program aims to capitalize on smart
devices proliferating in homes and businesses across the globe. Smart devices are today power-
ing advanced ways to see, listen, reason, and predict, without constant connectivity to the cloud.
That is the intelligent edge as Microsoft refers to the movement.
Copyright by Fred David Books LLC; written by Fred R. David.
History
Founded by Bill Gates and Paul Allen in 1975, Microsoft was established to develop and sell
BASIC Interpreters for the Altair 8800. The company rose to dominate the personal computer
operating system market in the mid-1980s with their MS-DOS software, followed by the
Microsoft Windows operating system, which was a graphical extension of MS-DOS. Microsoft
went public in 1986, instantly creating three billionaires and 12,000 millionaires from Microsoft
employees. In 1990, Microsoft introduced its software office suite, Microsoft Office, that bun-
dled MS Word and MS Excel together.
Microsoft acquired Skype Technologies for $8.6 billion in 2011 in its largest ever acquisi-
tion. Following the release of Windows Phone 7, Microsoft underwent a gradual rebranding of
its product range throughout 2011 and 2012. Its logos, products, services, and websites adopted
the principles and concepts of the Metro design language. Microsoft, in early 2012, introduced
Windows 8, an operating system designed to power both personal computers and tablet comput-
ers. Then, in May 2012, introduced its own tablet computer, called the Microsoft Surface. As
the company continued to diversify away from operating systems, it paid $1.2 billion to buy the
social network firm Yammer, and then launched its Windows Phone 8. To cope with the potential
increase in demand for products and services, Microsoft is slowly but surely opening its own
Microsoft Stores across the United States. Bill and Melinda Gates are today one of the richest
couples on the planet, and one of the most giving couples in terms of philanthropy endeavors
through the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation.
In May 2018, DJI, the world’s leader in civilian drones and aerial imaging technology, and
Microsoft began a strategic partnership to bring advanced artificial intelligence (AI) and machine
learning capabilities to DJI drones. The two companies want to help businesses harness the
power of commercial drone technology and edge cloud computing. This partnership entails DJI
releasing its software development kit (SDK) for Windows to extend the power of commercial
drone technology. Additionally, DJI selected Microsoft Azure as its preferred cloud-computing
partner, taking advantage of Azure’s industry-leading AI and machine learning capabilities. The
two firms desire to turn vast quantities of aerial imagery and video data into actionable insights
for thousands of businesses across the globe.
544 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Vision/Mission
On its website, Microsoft describes what could be taken as its vision statement: to empower people
and businesses globally to attain greater success. The company uses the terms vision and mission
interchangeably. Yet, later in the Form 10K when discussing the company’s cloud computing opera-
tions it says (paraphrased): “Our vision is to develop and provide best-in-class platforms and services
for an intelligent cloud infused with artificial intelligence.”
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure Microsoft’s website reveals that the company operates using a strategic business unit (SBU)
type of organizational structure, with three SBUs and various divisions reporting to those Unit
Head Persons. However, as indicated in Exhibit 1, the titles of Microsoft executives do not
align well with those segments. Probably no one but Microsoft insiders know exactly who
reports to who—but what is important for students is to devise a recommended reporting re-
lationship, perhaps deleting some positions and creating others, to more clearly reveal for all
insiders and outsiders the chain of command.
EXHIBIT 1 Microsoft’s Top Executives and Organizational Chart
1
2 3 4 5
15 16
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1413
1. Satya Nadella, CEO
2. Scott Guthrie, EVP Microsoft Cloud and Enterprise Group
3. Terry Myerson, EVP Windows and Devices Group
4. Rajesh Jha, EVP Officer Product Group
5. Judson Althoff, EVP Worldwide Commercial Business
6. Chris Capossela, CMO, EVP Marketing and Consumer Business
7. Jean-Philippe Courtois, EVP and President Microsoft
Global Sales Marketing
8. Kurt DelBene, Chief Digital Officer and EVP Corporate Strategy
9. Kathleen Hogan, EVP HR
10. Amy Hood, EVP and CFO
11. Peggy Johnson, EVP Business Development
12. Kevin Scott, Chief Technology Officer
13. Harry Shum, EVP Artificial Intelligence and
Research Group
14. Brad Smith, President and Chief Legal Officer
15. Phil Spencer, EVP Gaming
16. Jeff Weiner, CEO of LinkedIn
Source: Based on company documents.
R&D In 2017, Microsoft spent $13 billion on research and development, a 9 percent increase over the
previous year. The company develops most of their products and services internally using various
engineering scientists that focus on everything from artificial intelligence to cloud infrastructure.
Distribution and Licensing Microsoft has more than 30 different distribution and licensing agreements with companies,
organizations, municipalities, and individuals to sell their products and services. There are site
license options available, individual licenses, group licenses, with various firms that include
Dell, Fujitsu, Lenovo, Samsung, Toshiba, and Hewlett-Packard. Firms can purchase perpetual
licenses or subscribe to licenses.
Employees As fiscal 2018 began, Microsoft employed 124,000 persons full-time, 73,000 of which were
located in the United States, and 51,000 outside the U.S. Among those persons, 39,000 were
in manufacturing, distribution, and product support, 40,000 were in research and development,
34,000 were in sales or marketing, and 11,000 worked for LinkedIn.
CASE 18 • MICROSOFT CORPORATION—2018 545
Segments
Microsoft operates under three segments: 1) Productivity and Business Processes, 2) Intelligent
Cloud, and 3) More Personal Computing. Microsoft has become the second largest ( behind
Amazon.com) company for businesses renting computing power and storage via cloud
computing. For Q2 2018 that ended December 31, 2017, revenues at the company’s two biggest
cloud-computing businesses, Azure infrastructure services and Office 365 online-productivity,
grew 98 and 41 percent, respectively, following up on the previous quarters 90 and 42 percent
gains. Revenues in Q2 2018 for the company’s Intelligent Cloud segment, which includes Azure,
rose 15 percent to $7.8 billion, while revenues at the company’s Productivity and Business
Processes segment, which includes Office, gained 25 percent to $8.95 billion.
Productivity and Business Processes This segment includes the following four divisions:
1. Office Commercial—includes Office 365 subscriptions and Office licensed on-premises,
comprising Office, Exchange, SharePoint, Skype for Business, and Microsoft Teams, and
related Client Access Licenses (“CALs”).
2. Office Consumer—includes Office 365 subscriptions and Office licensed on-premises, and
Office Consumer Services, including Skype, Outlook.com, and OneDrive.
3. LinkedIn—includes Talent Solutions, Marketing Solutions, and Premium Subscriptions.
4. Dynamics Business Solutions—includes Dynamics ERP on-premises, Dynamics CRM
on-premises, and Dynamics 365, a set of cloud-based applications across ERP and CRM.
Intelligent Cloud This segment includes the following two divisions:
1. Server products and cloud services—includes Microsoft SQL Server, Windows Server,
Visual Studio, System Center, and related CALs, and Azure.
2. Enterprise Services—includes Premier Support Services and Microsoft Consulting
Services.
More Personal Computing This segment includes the following three divisions:
1. Windows—includes Windows equipment, operating system, cloud services, patent licens-
ing, Windows Internet of Things (“IoT”); and MSN display advertising.
2. Devices—includes Microsoft Surface, PC accessories, and other devices.
3. Gaming—includes Xbox hardware and Xbox software and services.
Exhibit 2 provides a revenue and profit breakdown of Microsoft’s three segments for 2017,
2016, and 2015. Note that the company’s “More Personal Computing” segment generates the
most revenue and operating income, but also is the only segment reporting declining revenues
for three years.
EXHIBIT 2 Microsoft’s By-Segment Financial Results (in billions USD)
Revenue per Segment 2017 2016 2015
Productivity and Business Processes 30.4 26.5 26.4
Intelligent Cloud 27.4 25.0 23.7
More Personal Computing 38.8 40.4 43.4
Operating Income per Segment
Productivity and Business Processes 11.9 12.4 13.3
Intelligent Cloud 9.1 9.3 9.8
More Personal Computing 8.3 6.2 5.1
Source: Based on company documents.
546 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 3 Microsoft’s Income Statements (in millions USD)
Income Statement 6/30/16 6/30/17 Percent Change
Revenues $85,320 $89,950 5.43%
Cost of Goods Sold 32,780 34,261 4.52%
Gross Profit 52,540 55,689 5.99%
Operating Expenses 32,789 32,540 – 0.76%
EBIT 19,751 23,149 17.20%
Interest Expense 0 0 NA NA
EBT 19,751 23,149 17.20%
Tax 2,953 1,945 –34.13%
Non-Recurring Events 0 0 NA NA
Net Income 16,798 21,204 26.23%
Source: Based on company documents.
Finance
Microsoft is a very transparent company in that their website provides full segment revenue and
operating profit information, and the firm’s Form 10K is provided on the corporate website as
a .docx file which is unusual. The company’s recent income statements and balance sheets are
provided in Exhibit 3 and Exhibit 4 respectively. The company’s fiscal year ends June 30.
Microsoft’s revenues for Q2 2018 increased 12 percent to $28.92 billion, but profits were
negative $6.3 billion. The prior quarter reported an overall profit of positive $6.27 billion.
Microsoft’s CFO Amy Hood said in February 2018 that she has no plans yet to bring back to the
United States the company’s $142.8 billion in cash in overseas accounts.
Competition
Being so diversified, Microsoft has different competitors in different segments. The company’s
Windows Operating System faces competition from Apple and Google who have their own op-
erating systems. Microsoft’s server products face stiff competition from Hewlett-Packard, IBM,
and Oracle, who all offer preinstalled operating systems on their server hardware. Microsoft’s
cloud-based services compete with Amazon, Google, and Salesforce.com, while Microsoft’s
SQL Azure faces intense competition from IBM, Oracle, and many other firms.
The Microsoft Office package (Word, Excel, Access and other products) faces heavy com-
petition from Adobe, Apple, Cisco Systems, Google, SAP and many other web-based competi-
tors offering word processing, spreadsheets, and databases. The company’s Entertainment and
Devices segment, producer of Xbox360, faces intense competition from heavyweights Nintendo
and Sony. The average life of an entertainment console is surprisingly long at more than 5 years
and game selection is one of the largest factors in deterring the success of a gaming console.
Microsoft’s new Windows smartphone competes with market share leader Apple with their
iPhone, and Google with their Android platform powering Samsung, among other phones. Also,
Research in Motion is revitalizing their once popular Blackberry. Microsoft’s alliance with
Nokia to power Nokia phones with Windows 8 hopes to inch away at market share in the phone
industry.
Exhibit 5 provides a financial comparison of Microsoft’s with three competitors. Note that
Microsoft has the lowest EPS among the firms included, partly due to having by far the most
shares of stock outstanding.
Apple Inc. (APPL) Headquartered in Cupertino, California, Apple produces smartphones, watches, personal com-
puters, digital music players, and other communication media to customers around the world.
Some of their most popular products include the iPhone, iPad, MacBook Pro, and iPod. Apple
CASE 18 • MICROSOFT CORPORATION—2018 547
EXHIBIT 5 A Financial Comparison of Microsoft to Rival Companies
Microsoft Apple Alphabet Oracle
# Employees 124,000 100,000 73,000 138,000
$ Revenue 95B 239B 111B 39B
$ Net Income 9.5B 50.5 12.7B 9.9B
% Profit Margin 10 21 11.4 25.5
$ EPS Ratio 1.23 9.7 18.2 2.33
$ Market Capitalization 703B 829B 754B 204B
# Shares Outstanding 7.7B 5.1B 349M 4.1B
Source: Based on company documents.
EXHIBIT 4 Microsoft’s Balance Sheets (in millions)
Balance Sheet 6/30/16 6/30/17 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short Term Investments $113,240 $132,981 17%
Accounts Receivable 18,277 19,792 8%
Inventory 2,251 2,181 –3%
Other Current Assets 5,892 4,897 –17%
Total Current Assets 139,660 159,851 14%
Property Plant & Equipment 18,356 23,734 29%
Goodwill 17,872 35,122 97%
Intangibles 3,733 10,106 117%
Other Long-Term Assets 13,847 12,273 –11%
Total Assets 193,468 241,086 25%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 13,036 14,024 8%
Other Current Liabilities 46,321 50,503 9%
Total Current Liabilities 59,357 64,527 9%
Long-Term Debt 40,557 76,073 88%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 21,557 28,092 30%
Total Liabilities 121,471 168,692 39%
Equity
Common Stock 68,178 69,315 2%
Retained Earnings 2,282 2,648 16%
Treasury Stock 0 0 NA NA
Paid in Capital & Other 1,537 431 –72%
Total Equity 71,997 72,394 1%
Total Liabilities and Equity 193,468 241,086 25%
Source: Based on company documents.
has their own operating system for all of their products. The iPhone is the world leader in market
share for all mobile phones, but Samsung is the world leader in smartphone unit volume (most
phones sold) because they produce multiple options for customers, rather then a one-size-fits-
all as Apple does with their current iPhone. In addition, Google’s Android platform, which
Samsung and other phone manufacturers use on their phones, powers more phones than Apple’s
operating system, which is only used to power Apple iPhones.
548 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Apple also provides many software products with their operating system such as iLife,
iWork, Final Cut Pro, and Logic Studio. Apple provides their products through online stores, re-
tail stores such as Walmart, Best Buy, Apple Stores, and others. Apple operates about 250 Apple
Stores in the United States, and 140 stores internationally.
Oracle Corporation (ORCL) Headquartered in Redwood City, California, Oracle is a producer of middleware software, ap-
plication software, application server and cloud application, data integration, development tools,
Java, and much more. Oracle also provides consulting services in business and IT, strategy align-
ment, and ongoing product enhancements. Oracle’s revenues and net income have been holding
steady at about $38 billion and $9 billion, respectively.
External
Cloud Computing Cloud computing, supplying computing services via the Internet without having to utilize
hardware or platform support, continues to grow in its use and offerings. Many businesses
employ the technology to save on costs as they can lease data storage and computing capacity
from Web-based providers. Advantages for businesses using cloud technology include reduced
capital investments in equipment and software, while allowing for payments only for the ca-
pacity needed. Traditionally, firms would buy their own in-house capacity and have to forecast
future needs, often resulting in purchasing more capacity than was needed. Google is the lead
company using cloud technology to support many of their offerings. However, there is still some
concern among businesses that cloud computing offers less security and increased dependability
upon a third-party vender, such as Google, to continually provide the service at an appropriate
network speed is questionable. Nevertheless, cloud services are expected to yield revenues of
$100 billion in 2016, up from $40 billion in 2011.
Broadly speaking, there are hundreds of external opportunities and threats that impact
Microsoft related to cybersecurity, intellectual property rights, anti-trust litigation, patent
infringement, privacy issues regarding the collection and use of personal information, laws
and regulation variation across countries, tax issues, rapid technological advancements across
their diversified product line, artificial intelligence, quantum computing, robotics, and changes
in levels of disposable income across countries. These issues are complicated by the fact that
Microsoft has such different competitors across its three basic segments. For example, Facebook
is a huge competitor to LinkedIn, whereas Amazon, Oracle, and Google are huge competitors
in cloud computing. China in particular has firms gaining rapidly in the artificial intelligence,
quantum computing, and robotics industries, so rival firms to Microsoft are not limited to
American businesses.
Future
Microsoft’s plans going forward are to continue making acquisitions and entering into joint ven-
tures and strategic alliances. The company took on substantial goodwill and intangible “dollars”
with its LinkedIn acquisition—and expects to record perhaps a $5 billion impairment charge in
2018 to draw down the high goodwill and intangible amounts shown on its balance sheets. Effort
must be made to acquire firms at market capitialization value or less, not more.
In early 2018, Microsoft formed a partnership with Sunseap Group that marked Microsoft’s
first clean energy deal in Asia and will create the single-largest solar energy portfolio in
Singapore to date. This 60 megawatt-peak (MWp) solar portfolio is to span hundreds of rooftops
across the nation and is the first rooftop solar portfolio in the country focused on serving data-
center energy consumption. Sunseap is a leading solar provider in Singapore. Microsoft began
operations in Singapore in 1990, and now has over 850 employees. Singapore is also home to
Microsoft’s datacenter services that deliver Microsoft Azure, Office 365 and numerous other
cloud services for customers.
Also in early 2018, Xiaomi Corporation and Microsoft signed a Strategic Framework
Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) to deepen the partnership between the two companies.
Founded in 2010, Xiaomi is one of the world’s most innovative technology companies offering
CASE 18 • MICROSOFT CORPORATION—2018 549
smartphones, smart TVs, and a range of smart home products. Microsoft’s cloud computing and
artificial intelligence (AI) technologies will help strengthen Xiaomi’s mobile, smart devices and
services, and contribute to the acceleration of its international expansion. This partnership also
allows Microsoft to reach more users around the world who are using Xiaomi products. Xiaomi
and Microsoft’s cooperation will focus on the following aspects:
1. Cloud support: The two firms will explore utilizing Microsoft Azure cloud platform to
support Xiaomi’s user data storage, bandwidth, computing and other cloud services in inter-
national markets.
2. Laptop-type devices: Xiaomi gains Microsoft support on joint marketing, channel support,
and future product development for Xiaomi’s laptop and laptop-type devices to penetrate
international markets.
3. Microsoft Cortana and Mi AI Speaker: Both companies desire to integrate Cortana with
Mi AI Speaker.
4. AI services collaboration: Xiaomi and Microsoft intend to explore multiple cooperative
projects based on a broad range of Microsoft AI technologies, such as Computer Vision,
Speech, Natural Language Processing, Text Input, Conversational AI, Knowledge Graph
and Search, as well as related Microsoft AI products and services, such as Bing, Edge,
Cortana, XiaoIce, SwiftKey, Translator, Pix, Cognitive Services, and Skype.
Microsoft is looking to form other partnerships similar to the ones with Sunseap Group and
with Xiaomi to extend Microsoft desires to further penetrate world markets with its unique prod-
ucts and services. For example, in the summer 2018, Microsoft began working with Qualcomm
Technologies to create a vision AI developer kit running Azure IoT Edge. This solution makes
available the key hardware and software required to develop camera-based IoT solutions that
can power advanced Azure services, such as machine learning, stream analytics, and cognitive
services.
Microsoft needs a clear strategic plan going forward to manage and grow its worldwide
footprint.
550 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Amazon.com —2018
www.amazon.com , AMZN
Headquartered in Seattle, Washington, the year 2017 was phenomenal for Amazon that over
the last twenty years has grown from being solely an online bookstore to a worldwide pow-
erhouse, selling virtually everything today to everybody. Amazon is the largest online retailer
in the world as measured by both revenue and market capitalization. The second largest
online retailer is Alibaba Group located in China. Led by their CEO, Jeff Bezos, Amazon has
expanded heavily into smart homes and through its Alexa platform, and even into machine
learning. In 2017, the firm shipped over 5 billion items with Prime worldwide with more
paid members joining Prime in 2017 than any previous year, both in North America and
worldwide.
Amazon reported record revenues in 2017, up 31 percent—helped in part by Fire TV Stick
and Echo Dot—that were the bestselling products across all of Amazon’s products sold. Tens
of millions of Echo devices alone were purchased, but a portion of the revenue increase can
be explained through the acquisition of Whole Foods. Amazon hired 130,000 new employees
in 2017, globally, and employs over 17,500 veterans and their spouses in the United States. In
2017, Amazon Prime Video reported over 18 million views from customers in 11 NFL games
across over 200 countries on their smart TVs and other devices. Amazon also now holds the
global TV rights to The Lord of the Rings . The company even launched two furniture brands
in 2017.
Amazon reports in three segments: North America, International, and Amazon Web Services
(AWS). Amazon, in early 2018, launched a new service called “Shipping with Amazon” aimed
at competing with FedEx Corporation and United Parcel Services (UPS). But the Amazon’s
40 planes and 300 warehouses pale in comparison, for example, to FedEx’s 650 planes,
150,000 trucks, 400,000 employees, and 4,800 operating facilities globally to handle about
12 million shipments a day. UPS is even larger than FedEx and handles 20 million packages a
day with service to more than 220 countries through a fleet of more than 500 planes and 100,000
vehicles. At least for now, neither FedEx or UPS is concerned that Amazon wants into the ship-
ping business, but that could change.
Copyright by Fred David Books LLC; written by Forest R. David.
History
Amazon opened for business in July 1995 as an online bookstore and has since grown into the
largest e-commerce firm in the world. The name Amazon was chosen because the Amazon
River region is “exotic and different” and the biggest river system in the world; founder Jeff
Bezos planned to make his bookstore the biggest in the world. Amazon started an associate
program where other websites could post on amazon.com; this led to allowing individuals to
post items for sale. Online shopping became popular with the growth of the Internet in 1995
with the world’s population percentage of using the Internet being 0.4 percent. That was a total
of 16 million people using the Internet in 1995.
After a decade, the world’s population percentage of using the Internet grew to 15.7 percent;
which is a total of 1,018 million people. As of June 2017, the world’s population of using the
Internet was 51.7 percent; which is a total of 3,885 million people. The demand for online shop-
ping also has grown substantially.
Amazon’s number of worldwide customer accounts has grown from 1.5 million customer
accounts in the 1990s to over 500 million in 2018. In 2005, Amazon created the Amazon Prime
membership program where members were eligible for faster 2-day, or even 1-day, shipping on
their orders. The program also allowed members to have access to the Amazon Instant Video
CASE 19 • AMAZON.COM—2018 551
where members could stream videos. About 60 percent of Amazon users in the U.S. are Amazon
Prime subscribers.
In 2007, Amazon began offering its Kindle 3rd-generation-readers, paving the way for
e-books. Today, you do not even need a kindle to read e-books as the free kindle app is suf-
ficient. The firm’s establishment of Prime offering free shipping and select audio and video to
customers for free was a hit with consumers and now Amazon generates more revenues from
Prime customers than from nonprime customers in the United States.
Amazon, in the last few years, is aggressively expanding its Amazon Web Services (AWS)
business which focuses on machine learning, powering smart homes, and other data driven
applications. Many people are familiar with Amazon’s smart speakers, or Alexa, who is ready to
help on many items.
In early 2017, Amazon acquired Whole Foods Market for $13.7 billion in at attempt to both
move into the brick and mortar business, but possibly as a means of delivering groceries in the
future. Whole Foods is a leader in organic foods in North America and has over 477 stores in
North America and the United Kingdom.
Amazon is locating a second headquarters in a city with at least a million people; the city is
to be revealed in mid-2018. The $5 billion second headquarters, starting with 500,000 square
feet and eventually expanding to as much as 8 million square feet, may have as many as 50,000
employees. The company is also building a new downtown Seattle building, expected to be
completed in 2020.
Organizational Culture
Amazon From his first Annual Report in 1996, CEO Jeff Bezos indicated that Amazon puts customers
first, and even today, in the 2017 Annual Report, Amazon describes itself as on a mission to be
the “Earth’s most customer-centric company.” Amazon also has a culture that promotes new
inventions, long-term thinking, and operational excellence (being efficient).
Bezos has routinely reminded his employees and executives it is still Day 1 at Amazon, in
fact, the building Bezos works in is named Day 1 and when they changed buildings, he took
the name with him for the new building. As it would happen, an employee in 2016 finally
summoned the courage to ask Bezos what all other employees for the last 20 years were prob-
ably wondering, when does Day 2 start? In short, Bezos describes Day 2 as “irrelevance, and
an excruciating painful decline followed by death.” And for this reason, it is always Day 1 at
Amazon. To remain in Day 1, Bezos suggests to experiment, accept failures as part of busi-
ness, plant and protect seeds, and maybe most important, ramp it up when you see delighted
customers.
In May 2018, for the third year in a row, customers voted Amazon #1 in corporate
reputation in the Harris Poll, a poll that surveys more than 25,000 people and evalu-
ates public perceptions classified into six dimensions of corporate reputation: Workplace
Environment, Social Responsibility, Emotional Appeal, Financial Performance, Vision &
Leadership, and Products & Services. At about the same time, a poll of 50,000 U.S. consum-
ers ranked Amazon #1 in the American Customer Satisfaction Index for the Internet Retail
category for the eighth year in a row. Additionally, a poll of 10,000 U.K. customers ranked
Amazon.co.uk #1 in customer satisfaction for the fifth consecutive time as reported by
the U.K. Customer Satisfaction Index. Amazon recently received other accolades too, such as
LinkedIn recognizing Amazon as the #1 most desirable workplace in the U.S. based on data
about where job seekers want to work and how long employees stay with companies across
the country.
Whole Foods Market At Whole Foods Market, all employees, managers, and executives know what everyone else’s
pay is at the company, including hourly wages earned, salaries, and bonuses. Headquartered
in Austin, Texas, but now owned by Amazon, Whole Foods keeps its employees as informed
as possible, even when it comes to pay. The open-compensation policy is designed to both
552 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
encourage conversations about salary among staff members and to promote competition within
the company. Whole Foods co-CEO, John Mackey, introduced the policy in 1986, just 6 years
after he co-founded the company; the policy is part of the company’s culture.
Whole Foods believes that when employees understand why some people are paid more
than others, when workers understood what types of performance and achievement earned
certain people more money, folks are more motivated and successful. John Mackey says: “I’m
challenged on salaries all the time. How come you are paying this regional president this much,
and I’m only making this much?’ I have to say, ‘because that person is more valuable. If you
accomplish what this person has accomplished, I’ll pay you that, too.’ ”
Whole Foods’ policy is for all its managers to post their store’s sales data each day
and regional sales data each week. The company believes that a culture of shared informa-
tion helps create a sense of a “shared fate” among employees. Mackey says: “If you’re
trying to create a high-trust organization, an organization where people are all-for-one and
one-for-all, you can’t have secrets.” The bottom line for Whole Foods is that its workforce
has high-level access to the company’s financial data, and therefore a greater stake in the
business, and this culture has resulted in outstanding customer service and a highly moti-
vated workforce.
Internal Issues
Vision/Mission
Amazon’s vision statement (paraphrased) is to be the most customer-oriented company on the
planet, where customers can find virtually anything they wish to purpose online. Amazon’s
mission statement (paraphrased) is to offer customers the lowest possible prices, coupled with the
best selection and the upmost convenience. On its website, Amazon lists its guiding principles:
customer-centric culture, innovation, operational excellence, and long-term strategy.
Organizational Structure Jeff Bezos is President, CEO, and Chairman of the Board of Amazon. The company apparently
has two divisions: Amazon Web Services and Worldwide Consumer, but it is not clear what
these divisions entail. The company’s top executives are listed in Exhibit 1 along with a possible
organizational chart. Amazon does not make its organizational chart public so no one, except
insiders, know who reports to whom.
EXHIBIT 1 Amazon’s Top Executives and Organizational Chart
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Annual Report, other company documents, and a variety of other sources.
1
2 3 4 5 6 7
1. Jeffrey Bezos, President, Chairman of the Board, and CEO
2. Brian Olsavsky, Senior VP and CFO
3. Jeffrey Blackburn, Senior VP Business Development
4. Andrew Jassy, CEO Amazon Web Services
5. Shelley Reynolds, VP, Worldwide Controller and Principal Accounting Officer
6. Jeffrey Wilke, CEO Worldwide Consumer
7. David Zapolsky, Senior VP, General Counsel, and Secretary
CASE 19 • AMAZON.COM—2018 553
Current Strategies There are four key points used to develop Amazon’s strategy: 1) have an obsession with
your customers, 2) resist proxies, 3) embrace external trends, and 4) make rapid decisions.
Bezos says being truly customer focused is a better approach than focusing on competitors,
products, technology, or even your business model. Surprisingly, Bezos’ take on why being
customer focused is the most important is a bit of a negative reason. He contends that custom-
ers are often dissatisfied, and sometimes significantly dissatisfied, yet will still report being
happy all while your business is prospering. What Bezos is getting at here is the same line of
logic Apple’s Steve Jobs mentioned countless times, customers don’t know what they want,
therefore by default become dissatisfied with your products when a better option becomes
available.
Bezos mentions the Prime membership program as one example where customers never
knew they would want or desire such a platform, yet now millions use and love Prime. Steve
Jobs often mentioned virtually no customer knew they would want or need a personal computer,
yet the Apple II was a huge hit in the early 1980s, and the development of the smartphone in
2006 was the same concept.
Avoiding proxies is another trait Bezos believes is important to remaining in Day 1. By
proxy he means using one tool as a substitute for another (generally, the most important). He
uses having a formal process as proxy instead of serving customers first. Really, since Bezos
puts extreme emphasis on serving customers, any area that receives focus in lieu of customers
can be considered a proxy. Areas to avoid with having a detailed process are letting the process
become king and following it to a tee instead of routinely examining business outcomes. Bezos
also cites beta testing and surveys as proxies but they, like having a formal process, should not
be a replacement for heart, intuition, guts, and other variables, yet he still contends it is impor-
tant to have a process.
Embracing external trends is also vitally important to avoiding Day 2. Currently, machine
learning and data analytics are two huge external trends and Amazon is well positioned with its
AWS Division.
Finally, being able to make rapid decisions is important to avoiding Day 2 according to
Bezos. The difference in a Day 1 and Day 2 firm, is not based on good or poor decisions, but
generally when the decisions are made. Day 2 firms make the decision too late, after it is clear
to everyone, thus much of the money or opportunity is gone. Yet decisions should be two-way
doors, there should be a way out if it becomes apparent a different decision should have been
made. To act fast, make the decision with 70 percent information; waiting for 90 percent is what
Day 2 firms do. Learn how to become good at correcting course because here it generally ends
up far less costly to have a go with 70 percent knowledge and be wrong, than wait for 90 percent
and miss the market.
Amazon is aggressively entering the AWS (Amazon Web Services) environment. The firm’s
Alexa program far exceeded 2017 projections and CEO Jeff Bezos expects the company to
“double down” on expanding and funding Alexa. As of early 2018, customers are able to control
with Alexa over 4,000 smart home devices produced by 1,200 different brands.
Amazon used an unrelated diversification strategy to launch Rivet and Stone & Beam, two
new furniture brands with the former focusing on mid-century modern furniture for smaller
rooms, and the later focusing on durable and stylish furniture for larger areas. Possibly a related
diversification strategy was the purchase of Whole Foods in 2017.
In several market development moves, Amazon started a third-party marketplace in Australia
offering customers timely delivery products, many from small businesses. Launching Prime in
the Netherlands, Belgium, and Luxembourg, providing Prime members there with free one- or
two-day delivery and other Prime benefits for the inexpensive introductory price of €3.99 or
around $5.00. Amazon reported negative EBIT in both 2016 and 2017 with EBIT losses over
doubling in 2017. The inexpensive Prime membership in overseas markets may explain part of
the losses; in the United States for comparison, Prime for one month cost $12.99.
Students in the United States may subscribe to Prime for generally half the retail cost.
Prime in Singapore, India, and other locations also come with inexpensive introductory rates.
Amazon is actively expanding third-party marketplaces around the world, not just in Australia,
but in Brazil, India, Europe, and many other places. Amazon Prime in both North America and
554 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
International markets allows customers to pay a monthly or yearly fee for free shipping. In the
United States, the free shipping is promised with a two-day delivery window. In addition cus-
tomers are provided Prime Music and Video as part of their subscription.
Prime members spend over $700 more than non-Prime members—possibly by getting
customers to sign up as they feel they should order more to justify the $99 annual membership
(U.S. price). Or potentially, customers that order more are the majority of the ones that sign up
for Prime potentially reducing Prime’s effectiveness somewhat. Amazon has angered some cus-
tomers who are not Prime members though by taking 7 to 10 days to ship items ordered in the
United States when free shipping is selected for orders over $50.
Amazon has moved from books to retail products, to music, to online data procession, to
the grocery delivery business, and even to package delivery. It seems just 5 years ago, in the
United States, about the only food you could have delivered in most locations outside of a large
city was pizza. Amazon is changing this by offering grocery delivery. The Whole Foods Market
price paid by Amazon was possibly too high, but as Bezos mentioned earlier, he prides himself
on acting quickly, and thought waiting would be more expensive than simply paying the price.
If Whole Foods studied Bezos tendencies, (which they probably did) they knew this tendency
when entering any negotiating. The Whole Foods acquisition, Amazon moved away from strictly
online into the brick and mortar business. However, with the firm’s Echo, Dot, Plus, and other
technologies used in the smart home, it will make ordering from home and having groceries
delivered easier. It is just speculation at this point, what Amazon’s true intentions are with the
Whole Foods acquisition, but gravitating into grocery delivery is certainly a plausible long-term
rationale from the merger.
Finance Amazon reported excellent earnings in 2017, up 31 percent from 2016 with net income up 28
percent. It is important to note, however, in Exhibit 2, that EBIT actually decreased due to op-
erating expenses, representing a larger percent of sales in 2017. The company was spared from
a drop in net income due to a 46 percent drop in their tax rate. Also, the Whole Foods Market
acquisitions can explain a portion of the revenue increases and likely explain a large portion
of the additional goodwill in Exhibit 3. Note in Exhibit 3, the large increase in long-term debt.
Amazon does not pay dividends either, but this is not a real surprise as the firm is ready to invest
its capital in other ventures.
For Q1 2018 that ended 3-31-18, Amazon reported that its sales increased 43 percent
to $51.0 billion, compared with $35.7 billion in Q1 2017. The company’s operating income for
Q1 increased 92 percent to $1.9 billion, while net income increased to $1.6 billion compared
with net income of $724 million the previous year Q1.
EXHIBIT 2 Amazon’s Income Statements (in millions USD)
Income Statement 12/31/16 12/31/17 Percent Change
Revenues $135,987 $177,866 30.80%
Cost of Goods Sold 88,265 111,934 26.82%
Gross Profit 47,722 65,932 38.16%
Operating Expenses 43,536 61,826 42.01%
EBIT 4,186 4,106 -1.91%
Interest Expense 294 300 2.04%
EBT 3,892 3,806 -2.21%
Tax 1,425 769 -46.04%
Non-Recurring Events (96) (4) 95.83%
Net Income 2,371 3,033 27.92%
Source: Based on Amazon’s 2017 Q4 Report and other company data.
CASE 19 • AMAZON.COM—2018 555
Segment Data
Amazon Studios In early 2018, Amazon Studios became partners with Oscar-winning filmmaker Kenneth
Lonergan to direct and write both film and television projects. Lonergan and Amazon Studios
worked together in 2017 on the famous Manchester by the Sea film, which won Lonergan an
Academy Award for Best Original Screenplay and a nomination for Best Director. Manchester
by the Sea is available now for streaming and download on Prime Video. Lonergan’s upcoming
projects include Howards End, a four-part limited series starring Hayley Atwell, and the play
“Lobby Hero” starring Chris Evans, Michael Cera, Bel Powley & Brian Tyree Henry, that pre-
miered on Broadway in 2018 at the Helen Hayes Theater as a Second Stage Production.
Amazon Studios produces series and films from top -ier and up-and-coming creators to
customers in over 200 countries and territories. Original productions include Amy Sherman-
Palladino’s award-winning The Marvelous Mrs. Maisel. In film, Amazon Studios produces
and acquires original movies for theatrical release and early window distribution exclusively
for Amazon Prime members. At the 2017 Academy Awards, Amazon Studios became the first
streaming service to win Oscars for Best Screenplay, Best Actor, and Best Foreign film. A no-
table recent release was The Big Sick.
Amazon’s Prime Video is a premium on-demand entertainment service that offers customers
immense choices of movies, films, and television. Amazon channels provide over 140 channel
EXHIBIT 3 Amazon’s Balance Sheets (in millions USD)
Balance Sheet 12/31/16 12/31/17 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short Term Investments $25,981 $30,986 19%
Accounts Receivable 8,339 13,164 58%
Inventory 11,461 16,047 40%
Other Current Assets 0 0 NA NA
Total Current Assets 45,781 60,197 31%
Property Plant & Equipment 29,114 48,866 68%
Goodwill 3,784 13,350 253%
Intangibles 0 0 NA NA
Other Long-Term Assets 4,723 8,897 88%
Total Assets 83,402 131,310 57%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 25,309 34,616 37%
Other Current Liabilities 18,507 23,267 26%
Total Current Liabilities 43,816 57,883 32%
Long-Term Debt 7,694 24,743 222%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 12,607 20,975 66%
Total Liabilities 64,117 103,601 62%
Equity
Common Stock 5 5 0%
Retained Earnings 4,916 8,636 76%
Treasury Stock (1,837) (1,837) 0%
Paid in Capital & Other 16,201 20,905 29%
Total Equity 19,285 27,709 44%
Total Liabilities and Equity 83,402 131,310 57%
Source: Based on Amazon’s 2017 Q4 Report and company data.
556 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
subscriptions that Prime members can add to their membership, including HBO, Showtime,
STARZ, Cinemax, PBS KIDS, Acorn TV, and more.
Amazon reports in three main segments: Amazon Web Services, North America, and
International—but says very little about its North America and International segments.
Amazon Web Services (AWS) AWS helps clients with their machine learning processes, removing much of the traditional heavy
lifting or need for many experts to start up such programs. Amazon’s EC2 P3 provides perfor-
mance up to six fold better than existing GPU services available in the cloud as of the start of 2018.
In 2017, Walt Disney named AWS its top choice out of all pubic cloud providers. Symantec,
Expedia, Capital One, National Football League, Dow Jones, FICO, Bristol-Myers Squibb, and
countless others all initiated either a new, or increased, presence with AWS. AWS is not limited to
the U.S. market; France was recently provided service through AWS, and Bahrain, Hong Kong,
Sweden, China, and a second GovCloud Region in the United States are all set to be active by
2019. As revealed in Exhibit 4 and Exhibit 5, AWS revenues grew over 43 percent in 2017, and
EBIT grew 39 percent. Both exceeded growth in Amazon’s traditional product offerings in both
North America and International. Also, the profit margins from AWS are significantly higher
than any other division, evidenced by significantly more operating income from this division in
2017 than other divisions, with also astronautically lower sales. Amazon is attempting to expand
AWS across the globe. In fact, on Amazon’s 2017 Q4 report, there was significant discussion on
AWS and hardly any segment discussion on North America or International.
Source: Based on Amazon’s 2017 4Q and other company information.
EXHIBIT 4 Amazon’s Revenues by Segment
2016 2017
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
North America
$79.8
$44.0
$54.3
$12.2 $17.5
$106.1
International
Amazon’s Segment Sales in Billions
AWS
EXHIBIT 5 Amazon’s EBIT by Segment
Source: Based on 2017 4Q and other company information.
Amazon’s Segment EBIT in Billions
2016 2017
–$4.0
$2.8 $3.1
$4.3
–$1.3
–$3.1 –$3.0
–$2.0
–$1.0
$0.0
$1.0
$2.0
$3.0
$4.0
$5.0
North America
International
AWS
$2.4
CASE 19 • AMAZON.COM—2018 557
Competition
Offering a large variety of products and services both in the United States and abroad puts
Amazon in competition with all kinds and sizes of firms from all around the world. A sam-
pling of competitors for Amazon include: similar online sites to purchase goods, traditional
brick-and-mortar stores, firms that provide e-commence services, and firms that provide stream-
ing content. However, some big-time rivals to Amazon include Walmart, Trader Joe’s, Alibaba,
Kroger, Target, Alphabet (owner of Google), and e-Bay.
One of Amazon’s competitive advantages in the industry is fulfillment since the company
places great importance on being able to deliver goods quickly to the consumers. In addition,
price, selection, and convenience are important factors to Amazon’s success. Exhibit 6 provides
a snapshot comparison of Amazon with two rival firms. Note that Walmart has the highest rev-
enue but Amazon has the largest market capitalization and cash reserves.
As per capita disposable income increased during recent years, many consumers have shifted
to premium, organic, all natural brands, helping lift industry revenue. Overall, grocery indus-
try revenue is expected to grow annually by .9 percent to $607.9 billion over the next 5 years.
Consumers also shifted toward limited assortment and fresh format stores like Trader Joe’s
that provide a simpler layout and primarily sell less costly store brand products. As consumers
become more health conscious, measured by the healthy eating index, they tend to purchase
a greater variety of all-natural and organic products. The healthy eating index is expected to
slightly increase from year to year.
Over the past 5 years, limited assortment grocery stores like Trader Joe’s have experienced
the most rapid growth in the grocery industry. Trader Joe’s stores are often located in popu-
lous areas and are much more compact and efficient than traditional grocery stores. Rather
than offering dozens of brands of the same product, these stores sell primarily private label
products, which are both less expensive for consumers and more profitable for the industry
operators. Trader Joe’s, the leading supermarket in sales per square foot, sells more than 80
percent private-label goods, all of which are free of GMOs, artificial coloring, trans fat, and
high fructose corn syrup. While private-label brands are traditionally perceived as inferior,
stores like Trader Joe’s have positioned their store brands as premium products without charg-
ing premium prices.
Low profit margins and a highly competitive market have discouraged many companies
from entering the grocery business—but not Amazon. Over the 5 years leading up to 2017, the
total number of industry enterprises remained flat at about 42,205 companies. In addition to low
profit margins, the steady rise of online grocery services has further deterred new operators from
entering the industry. E-commerce sales are expected to rise at an annualized rate of 7.8 percent,
indicating a continued shift toward virtual shopping. Despite the flat, no growth statistics,
Amazon still “overpaid” for Whole Foods Market.
Walmart, Inc. (WMT) Walmart consists of Sam’s Club, Walmart Supercenter, and the Neighborhood Market. Each
week, over 260 million customers and members visit Walmart’s 11,695 stores under 59 banners
in 28 countries and e-commerce websites in 11 countries. Walmart’s revenue was $485.9 billion
EXHIBIT 6 Amazon versus Two Rivals on Seven Variables
Amazon Walmart Trader Joe’s
$ Market Cap. 748B 26.6B 2.7B
# Employees 566,000 2.3M 16,600
$ Revenue 178B 500B 1,553M
% Profit Margin 1.7 1.97 39
$ Net Income 3B 9.9B 135M
$ EPS Ratio 6.15 3.77 3.69
$ Total cash 31B 6.76B 24.48M
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
558 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
for the fiscal year of 2017. Recently, the company implemented free 2-day shipping on more
than two million items, with no membership required.
Walmart has about 17 percent of the market share in the food and beverage industry. In
spring 2017, the number of individuals who bought most of their groceries in their household at
Walmart Supercenters was 45.15 million and 9.31 from Neighborhood Markets from the United
States alone. Walmart plans to increase their market share and revenues with the convenience
and growth of grocery pickup.
When it comes to shipping, Amazon and Walmart are both trying to outdo each other.
Walmart now offers free shipping to anyone ordering $35 in eligible items. Walmart is trying
to win over consumers by offering free 2-day shipping without having to have a membership
like Amazon. Amazon has Amazon Prime where consumers must pay $119 annually to get free
2-day shipping. However, Amazon’s membership also includes having early access to some
deals, unlimited photo storage, include Sunday delivery in many markets, and the company’s
video streaming and music services. Walmart is often called the king of brick-and-mortar retail
and remains to this day the world’s leader in revenues among retail stores. Walmart acquired
jet.com in 2016 and is now offering same-day shipping to New York City. E-commerce rev-
enues in 2017 were only $12 billion but Walmart looms as a potential 800-pound gorilla for
Amazon in the online business, and certainly is a major threat and rival to Amazon with their
thousands of free-standing mega stores offering groceries, electronics, toys, clothing, and ev-
erything in between.
Trader Joe’s Based in Monrovia, California, Trader Joe’s is owned by a German private equity firm. Trader Joe’s
has about 500 stores in 45 states and Washington, D.C. All stores are compact and sell premium
private-label foods that actually comprise 80 percent of all items sold in each store. This allows cus-
tomers to choose between a select number of high-quality products rather than thousands of brand
names. Millennials are the typical customer for Trader Joe’s as they are health conscious and value
driven. About 42 percent of millennial grocery shoppers find private label foods more innovative
than branded products, and about 70 percent believe that the quality of these store-brand products
has increased in recent years. Trader Joe’s had 1.1 percent of the market share in 2016; the company
is growing quickly from year-to-year. In spring 2017, the number of individuals in the United States
who bought most of their groceries in their household at Trader Joe’s was 4.27 million. You can
shop at Trader Joe’s through Amazon at the website: https://www.amazon.com/Trader-Joe-s/pages/
3045489011
Alphabet Inc. (GOOG) When it comes to the battle of online shoppers, Amazon and Google (owned by Alphabet) are
competitors. Google is in the business of selling ads, whereas Amazon is in the business of
delivering goods, but Google has introduced Google Express. Google Express is a delivery ser-
vice designed to compete with Amazon Prime. However, roughly 33 percent of online shoppers
start directly on Amazon, which is more than twice the number that start on Google. Therefore,
every time someone bypasses Google, Google loses opportunities to show viewer ads. This also
means that more consumers are seeing more advertisements on Amazon than Google.
Google also has their own streaming videos and music services that are competing with
Ama zon’s streaming videos and music services. Google has Google Play, Google Chromecast,
and their own Google Play Store. Whereas, Amazon has the Kindle Fire Tablet, Amazon’s Fire
TV, and their own app store. These two behemoth companies compete more and more with each
other daily as both firms become more and more diversified with overlapping businesses and
interests.
eBay Inc. (EBAY) Headquartered in San Jose, California, eBay Inc. operates commerce platforms that connect
buyers and sellers worldwide. Sellers can organize and offer their inventory for sale; and buyers
can find and purchase it on eBay. ebay.com and the eBay mobile apps and stubhub.com, and the
CASE 19 • AMAZON.COM—2018 559
StubHub mobile apps and online ticket platform connect fans with their favorite sporting events,
shows, and artists. eBay’s classifieds platforms include a collection of brands, such as mobile
.de, Kijiji, Gumtree, Marktplaats, eBay Kleinanzeigen, and others that offer online classi-
fieds to enable people to find almost anything they are looking for in their local communities.
Using eBay websites, people find, buy, sell, and pay for items through various online, mo-
bile, and offline channels that include retailers, distributors, liquidators, import and export
companies, auctioneers, catalog and mail-order companies, classifieds, directories, search
engines, commerce participants, shopping channels, and networks. eBay competes with
Amazon because both companies are gigantic online retail establishments.
External Issues
A total of 16 million people used the Internet in 1995. As of June 2017, the world’s popula-
tion of using the Internet grew to 51.7 percent; which is a total of 3,885 million people. The
demand for online shopping is skyrocketing, and Amazon is the world’s largest online retailer.
The e-commerce market in the United States is huge with revenues over $450 billion with
growth expected through 2023 at 10 percent annually. There are over 135,000 businesses in
the United States doing business through the Internet, ranging from a person selling custom
made fishing lures to the king Amazon, which controls over 20 percent of the e-commerce
market. Possibly surprisingly, the next largest player online is Walmart, yet they only control
around 3 percent of the market. eBay controls less than 1 percent with Apple controlling ap-
proximately 2 percent.
The most common items Amazon sells are selected for inclusion in Exhibit 7,with the bal-
ance of items listed as “Other” making up 42 percent of the market. Of this 42 percent, about
7 percent are derived from both sporting goods and medications, another 10 percent from beauty
products, and the balance from tools, jewelry, and many other items.
The Exhibit 7 categories are so broad, for example, clothing includes footwear and acces-
sories. As of 2017, 17 percent of clothing industry revenues in the United States were from
e-commerce. Electronics is also a broad category, including computer hardware, software,
phones, and even appliances. Like clothing, 17 percent of industry revenues are derived from
electronics. Media and Entertainment includes books, music, and video, once Amazon’s top
selling products. Today, industry-wide, media and entertainment only account for 8 percent of
industry revenues.
EXHIBIT 7 e-Commerce’s Primary Revenue Sources
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
Other
42% Electronics
17%
Home & Office
13% Media
8%
Food
3%
Clothing
17%
e-commerce Revenue Sources
560 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
While many now may think e-Commerce equals or exceeds brick-and-mortar sales, that is
not the case yet. As of 2017, about 10 percent of retail revenues are attributed to online, and the
number is only expected to grow to 15 percent by 2023, so despite public assumptions, the old-
time brick-and-mortar is hanging around, but customers are increasingly gravitating to online
options as it is more convenient and delivery times are improving.
Future
In February 2018, Amazon, Chase, and Whole Foods Market announced that the new Amazon
Rewards Visa Card can now be used to earn even more rewards when shopping at Whole Foods
Market on everything from animal welfare-rated meat to sustainably caught wild and responsi-
bly farmed seafood. In particular, with the announcement, benefits to Prime members increased
to 5 percent back on Whole Foods Market purchases when using the Amazon Prime Rewards
Visa Card, and 5 percent back on all Amazon.com purchases, 2 percent back at restaurants, gas
stations, and drugstores, and 1 percent back on all other purchases.
In May 2018, Amazon and Best Buy announced a multi-year, exclusive collaboration to
bring the next generation of Fire TV Edition smart TVs to customers in the U.S. and Canada.
The two companies are jointly launching more than ten 4K and HD Fire TV Edition models
from Toshiba and Insignia brands, available for purchase in 2018 through Best Buy stores,
BestBuy.com, and Amazon.com.
In Q1 2018, Amazon acquired Ring, a home security company. Ring’s mission is to re-
duce crime in neighborhoods with affordable, effective home security products and services.
Also during the Q1 2018, Amazon introduced FreeTime on Alexa, the first Alexa experience
designed just for kids. These new offerings bring Alexa-specific features and premium content
to Amazon’s FreeTime and FreeTime Unlimited services, all available on Echo, Echo Dot, and
Echo Plus devices. Amazon now offers Echo Dot Kids Edition, the simplest way to get started
with FreeTime and FreeTime Unlimited on Alexa.
Amazon has become one of the most diversified companies in the world, selling almost ev-
erything to everybody. Managing diversified operations has increasingly been a bad strategy for
companies. Led by General Electric, diversified companies between 2017 and 2020 were trying
their best to become more homogeneous. How much longer can Amazon successfully buck this
trend? Amazon’s culture, philosophy, or strategy of being willing to enter almost any business, at
any time, is risky, and lucrative when it works out, but potentially devastating long term.
A clear strategic plan for Amazon would be consistent with Bezos’ guiding principle to
engage in long-term thinking and planning—and would help safeguard against entering too
many bad ventures.
CASE 20 • NIKE, INC.—2018 561
Nike, Inc.—2018
www.nike.com , NKE
Headquartered in Beaverton, Oregon, Nike is a large sports apparel company providing apparel
to athletic clubs, universities, fitness-minded people, and many others. Most products are de-
signed for specific athletic activities, but many people wear the products for casual purposes. In
addition to apparel and shoes, Nike sells sports bags, eyewear, watches, bats, gloves, and many
other types of equipment. The firm also owns the Hurley and Converse brands. Nike has always
been famous for hiring star athletes to market their brands; the company has three athletes,
Michael Jordan, LeBron James, and Cristiano Ronaldo, signed to life-time endorsement deals.
Jordan, from 1993 through 2016, was paid over $475 million from Nike even though Jordan re-
tired from professional sports in 2003.
Nike has over 70,000 full-time employees, operates 384 U.S.-based stores and 758 interna-
tional stores. Nike reported 2017 revenues and net income of about $34 billion and $4 billion,
respectively, both figures increasing nicely from the prior year. However, for Nike’s second
quarter (Q2) of fiscal 2018, revenues for the Converse division of Nike were $408 million, down
4 percent, due to faltering sales in North America. Nike’s net income for Q2 2018 decreased
9 percent to $767 million. For both Q1 and Q2 of fiscal 2018, the company’s footwear sales
declined 5 percent and the company’s equipment sales dropped 8 percent in North America.
Thus, rival companies are eating into Nike’s financial performance in the United States.
However, outside North America, Nike is doing really well, growing both revenues and net
income in double digits.
For fiscal 2018, Nike’s revenues rose 6 percent to $36.4 billion, up 4 percent. For fiscal 2018,
NIKE Brand sales to wholesale customers increased 2 percent while NIKE Direct revenues grew
12 percent to $10.4 billion, due primarily to a 25 percent increase in digital commerce sales, the
addition of new stores, and 4 percent growth in comparable store sales. For fiscal 2018, Nike’s
revenues for Converse were $1.9 billion, down 11 percent, as growth in Asia was more than
offset by declines primarily in North America. For fiscal 2018, the company’s net income de-
creased 54 percent to $1.9 billion.
Nike needs a clear strategic plan going forward, especially to revitalize its businesses in
North America.
Copyright by Fred David Books LLC; written by Forest R. David.
History
Bill Bowerman and Phil Knight founded Nike in 1964 as Blue Ribbon Sports and changed
the name to Nike in 1971. The name comes from the Greek goddess of victory who was
named Nike. Phil Knight was a University of Oregon track athlete and his coach was Bill
Bowerman. Nike went public in 1981. Nike originally manufactured shoes in the United
States but exited the U.S. manufacturing market in 1984. Nike’s trademarks such as “Just Do
It” and the Swoosh logo are well known worldwide. Phil Knights stepped down as chairman
of Nike in 2016.
Over the years, Nike has acquired many companies, including Cole Haan in 1988, Bauer
Hockey in 1994, Hurley International in 2002, Converse in 2003, Umbro in 2008—but then
began divesting companies, including Bauer Hockey in 2008, Umbro in 2012, and Cole Haan in
2013.
Nike still today pays top athletes top dollar in many sports to use, promote, and advertise
their technology, design, trademarks, logo, and products. Nike’s first professional athlete en-
dorser was Romanian tennis player Ilie Nastase, soon followed by track star Steve Prefontaine.
Michael Jordan signed on with Nike in 1984, followed by numerous others such as Spike Lee
and Mars Blackmon.
562 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Vision/Mission
Nike does not appear to have a formal vision statement. Nike’s mission (paraphrased) is “to
inspire and facilitate every athlete in the world to achieve greatness.”
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure Nike does not make its organizational chart public but likely a division-by-product or division-
by-region type structure would work well since the company reports revenues and operating
profits both by product (footwear, apparel, and equipment) and by region (North America,
Western Europe, China, and Japan). The company’s top executives are listed in Exhibit 1 along
with a possible organizational chart. However, the existing executive titles do not match well
with either of these reportable segment scenarios.
EXHIBIT 1 Nike’s Top Executives and Organizational Chart
1
2 3 4 5
11 12
6 7 8 9 10
1. Mark Parker, Chairman, President, and CEO of Nike, Inc.
2. Andy Campion, EVP, CFO
3. Hilary Krane, EVP, Chief Administrative Officer, and General Counsel
4. Monique Matheson, EVP Global HR
5. John Slusher, EVP Global Sports Marketing
6. Eric Sprunk, Chief Operating Officer
7. Ann Miller, VP and Corporate Secretary
8. Nitesh Sharan, VP Investor Relations and Treasurer
9. Chris Abston, VP Corporate Controller
10. Jim Scholefield, Chief Information Officer
11. Michael Spillane, President of Categories and Product
12. Trevor Edwards, President, Nike Brand
Source: Based on company documents.
Current Strategies Nike has built an empire based on product development followed by heavy marketing. Nike
offers products in most major sports played worldwide and hires professional athletes to market
their products, even signing Michael Jordan, LeBron James, and Cristiano Ronaldo to lifetime
endorsement contracts. Nike has paid Jordan over $475 million in endorsements and the deals
with James and Ronaldo are valued as much as $1 billion. The $1 billion number may seem
high, but estimates are Ronaldo’s social media presence alone generated $475 million in value
for Nike in 2016. Another study concluded that Ronaldo generates around $175 million for his
sponsors annually, which is seven times what Stephen Curry, the second top-revenue generating
athlete for sponsors. Based on data in 2016, of the 15 top athlete endorsement deals, Nike
owns 11, with rival Adidas responsible for 3, and Li Nian accounting for one with their relation-
ship with Dwayne Wade. Nike also has deals with many professional teams around the world to
be the sole supplier of their uniforms.
Nike uses social media heavily, especially with the NikePlus membership, which is free. Nike
offers two applications that include Nike Run Club and Nike Training Club used on mobile de-
vices and Apple Watch, whereby users can track their progress through running or cross training
programs. Nike has a partnership with Apple where the Nike logo appears on select Apple
watches. Nike benefits by tracking tons of data on workouts from users across the world. In addi-
tion to using the apps for free, customers earn Nike Fuel points whereby they can purchase items
at discounts on Nike’s website and even purchase products not yet available to the public in stores.
Nike recently introduced the Air Tech Challenge, a strategy whereby the company offers ten-
nis shoes with synthetic leather, stabilizers, and better heel cushioning, all in a lighter shoe. Two
CASE 20 • NIKE, INC.—2018 563
new running shoes developed by Nike are Free Flyknit and Free Hyperfeel. The firm also has a
new pair of self-lacing shoes called the HyperAdapt 1.0.
Manufacturing Nike produces 97 percent of its products through contractors in overseas markets, with Vietnam,
China, and Indonesia accounting for 44, 29, and 21 percent, respectively. In total, 127 footwear
factories in 15 different nations supply Nike, with no single factory responsible for more than
8 percent of total footwear sales. Nike is supplied by over 369 apparel factories in 37 different
countries, with the largest supplier accounting for 13 percent of revenues. Like shoe production,
virtually all Nike apparel is manufactured outside the United States with China, Vietnam, and
Thailand as the three largest suppliers of apparel.
With the Trump administration’s incentives to reshore manufacturing back to the United
States, Nike has announced plans to build additional manufacturing plants in America. Presently,
the company has 8 manufacturing facilities in the United States, accounting for about 8 percent
of the company’s total manufacturing output. Nike is very transparent about its manufacturing of
footwear, apparel, and equipment. Simply click on the website http://manufacturingmap.nikeinc
.com/# to see the company’s manufacturing facilities worldwide by country.
Finance Nike’s fiscal year ends on June 30. Nike had an excellent fiscal 2017 with revenues up 6 per-
cent and net income up nearly 13 percent as indicated in Exhibit 2. However, Nike received a
tax benefit in 2017 or either reduced a tax burden from 2016, helping to partially explain the
larger jump in net income than in revenues. Nike’s overseas revenues and profits are increas-
ing nicely, but its North American financial results revealed in the company’s segment data
are problematic.
Exhibit 3 reveals a strong balance sheet for Nike with relatively little goodwill or intangibles
and a current ratio around 3.0. Despite increasing net income by $500 million in fiscal 2017
to $4.2 billion, notice on Exhibit 3 that Nike’s retained earnings dropped 4 percent in 2017,
explained partly through $1.1 billion in dividend payments, but also by an anomaly called
“deferred compensation” revealed on the company’s cash flow statement. It is very unusual for
any company to have some amount of net income, pay less in dividends than that net income,
and then have its retained earnings to decrease on the balance sheet.
Segment Data Being very transparent, Nike reports revenues in several different categories. The two principle
brands owned by Nike are Nike and Converse; Converse accounts for only 6 percent of rev-
enues. Men account for about 57 percent of Nike revenues, followed by women with 26 percent,
and kids account for 17 percent of revenues. Revenues from all three groups are growing
EXHIBIT 2 Nike’s Income Statements (in millions USD)
Income Statement 5/31/16 5/31/17 Percent Change
Revenues $32,376 $34,350 6.10%
Cost of Goods Sold 17,405 19,038 9.38%
Gross Profit 14,971 15,312 2.28%
Operating Expenses 10,469 10,563 0.90%
EBIT 4,502 4,749 5.49%
Interest Expense 19 59 210.53%
EBT 4,483 4,690 4.62%
Tax 863 646 -25.14%
Non-Recurring Events 140 196 40.00%
Net Income 3,760 4,240 12.77%
Source: Based on 2017 Annual Report and other company data.
564 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 3 Nike’s Balance Sheets (in millions USD)
Balance Sheet 5/31/16 5/31/17 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short Term Investments $5,457 $6,179 13%
Accounts Receivable 3,241 3,677 13%
Inventory 4,838 5,055 4%
Other Current Assets 1,489 1,150 -23%
Total Current Assets 15,025 16,061 7%
Property Plant & Equipment 3,520 3,989 13%
Goodwill 131 139 6%
Intangibles 281 283 1%
Other Long-Term Assets 2,422 2,787 15%
Total Assets 21,379 23,259 9%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 2,191 2,048 -7%
Other Current Liabilities 3,167 3,426 8%
Total Current Liabilities 5,358 5,474 2%
Long-Term Debt 1,993 3,471 74%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 1,770 1,907 8%
Total Liabilities 9,121 10,852 19%
Equity
Common Stock 3 3 0%
Retained Earnings 4,151 3,979 -4%
Treasury Stock 0 0 NA NA
Paid in Capital & Other 8,104 8,425 4%
Total Equity 12,258 12,407 1%
Total Liabilities and Equity 21,379 23,259 9%
Source: Based on 2017 Annual Report and company data.
around 5 percent annually. Three of Nike’s top-revenue generating brands including sports-
wear, running, and the Jordan brand account for 30, 19, and 11 percent of revenue, respectively.
Sportswear enjoyed a 14 percent revenue gain in 2017 and the Jordan brand enjoyed a 13 per-
cent increase in revenues from 2016, both coming off double-digit revenue growth the prior year
as well. The lowest revenue generating brands include Nike Basketball and Women’s Training,
each representing 4 percent of revenues, followed by Action Sports and Golf, each representing
2 percent of revenues. The three lowest revenue-generating brands discussed above all experi-
enced declining revenue in 2017, with golf’s revenues falling 18 percent, and the other three
brands mentioned revenues falling between 6 and 9 percent. Each of the four worse performing
areas suffered revenue drops from 2015 to 2016 as well, with golf reporting another 18 percent
revenue drop during this time period. Moving forward, it will be important for Nike to decide
how to allocate resources across these product lines.
Nike is in the retail business, having forward integrated over the years. Nike operates 384
factory stores in the United States and 758 factory stores outside the U.S. Exhibit 4 reveals rev-
enues and EBIT for Nike (not including Converse) in 2017. Canada accounted for 54 percent of
all revenue in 2017. China generated the most EBIT per dollar of revenue received, followed by
North America. Central & Eastern Europe, followed by Western Europe, generate significantly
lower EBIT for every dollar of revenue, compared to other parts of the world. Both regions in
Europe also suffered from a 16 percent drop in their respective EBIT contribution for 2017.
Exhibit 4 reveals that Nike revenues in all markets in fiscal 2017 experienced a net positive rev-
enue change in 2017 with Japan and China experiencing 17 and 12 percent revenue growths and
North America only growing revenue by 3 percent.
CASE 20 • NIKE, INC.—2018 565
Exhibit 5 reveals Nike’s revenues by product type. Footwear is far and away the largest
revenue-generating segment of Nike, representing 66 percent of 2017 sales. Both footwear and
apparel sales were up 6 percent in 2017, but equipment sales were down 5 percent. Notable 2017
changes in revenue by region and product type are as follows: apparel sales up 15 percent in
Western Europe; footwear and apparel sales each up 13 percent in China and 17 and 21 percent,
respectively in Japan; footwear sales up 11 percent in emerging markets. The largest loser on a
percentage basis was equipment sales in North America, that were down 10 percent in 2017 as
this division across all nations continues to struggle for Nike.
Exhibit 6 reveals Nike (not including Converse) revenues by customer type; wholesale
customers account for 72 percent of 2017 revenues. Wholesale customers include Foot Locker,
Dick Sporting Goods, and other merchants that purchase and sell Nike products, while direct-to-
consumer includes Nike stores and online sales.
Competitors
Nike is the largest seller of athletic footwear, apparel, and equipment in the world, but there are
aggressive rival firms, including Adidas, Under Armour, New Balance, and Puma, along with a
few others in the production of athletic gear. In addition, as a forward integrated company, Nike
competes with retail stores such as Foot Locker and other shoe retailers who ironically also sell
Nike products. Nike represents nearly 50 percent of the whole athletic sportswear industry based
on market capitalization on U.S. stock markets, followed by V.F. Corp at 14 percent. U.S. based
Under Armour only represents 2.5 of the industry.
Exhibit 7 gives a quick glimpse at Nike compared to two rival firms. Note that Nike is far
larger than Under Armour and Adidas combined.
EXHIBIT 4 Nike’s Worldwide Revenues and EBIT (in millions USD)
Geographic Region Revenues EBIT
North America $15,216 $3,875
Western Europe $6,211 $1,203
China $4,237 $1,507
Emerging Markets $3,995 $816
Central & Eastern Europe $1,487 $244
Japan $1,014 $224
Totals $32,160 $7,869
Source: Based on Nike’s 2017 Form 10K.
EXHIBIT 5 Nike’s Revenues by Product Type
Apparel
30%
Equipment
4%
Footwear
66%
Nike Revenues by Product Type
Source: Based on Nike’s 2017 Form 10K.
566 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Adidas (www.adidas-group.com) Headquartered in Herzogenaurach, Germany, Adidas was founded in 1949 and operates over
2,800 stores. Adidas owns Reebok, TaylorMade, and CCM Hockey products. Adidas reported
$54 billion USD in 2016 with net income of 1.3 billion. Adidas is the largest sportswear manu-
facturer in Europe and the second largest in the world, behind Nike. In 2015, professional bas-
ketball player James Harden left Nike for Adidas, reportedly signing a 13-year contract worth
$200 million. Adidas’s strategic plan is very similar to Nike’s; both companies use product
development followed by heavy marketing, signing teams and players across almost all sports to
market and promote their products.
Foot Locker (FL) Headquartered in New York City, Foot Locker’s stock price soared between 2012 and 2017 in-
creasing around 300 percent despite revenues only increasing 15 percent, and operating income
declining 12 percent over the same time period. Founded in 1879, the company operates nearly
3,500 stores and employs 15,000 full time workers across the United States, Europe, Australia,
New Zealand, and Canada. However 80 percent of company sales come from the U.S. Also,
70 percent of Foot Locker’s inventory for sale is Nike merchandise.
Foot Locker uses the store-in-a-store concept used by many retailers where they have 217
House of Hoops shops offering premium basketball products. Foot Locker also offers Lady Foot
Locker, Champs Sports, Footaction, Runners Point, Sidestep, and Kid’s Foot Locker stores. Foot
Locker sells Nike products along with other brands. With Nike’s forward integration strategy
of opening their own retail stores and selling online, they directly compete with Foot Locker
and all other merchants that sell Nike products at the retail level. There are 62 franchised Foot
Locker stores in the Middle East and South Korea, as well as 15 franchised Runners Point stores
in Germany.
EXHIBIT 6 Nike’s Revenues by Customer Type (in millions USD)
Nike Revenues by Customer Type
$0
$5,000
$10,000
$15,000
$20,000
$25,000 $23,078
Wholesale
Customers
Direct to
Consumer
$9.082
Source: Based on Nike’s 2017 Form 10K.
EXHIBIT 7 Nike’s Competitor Comparison
Nike under Armour Adidas
$ Market Cap. 106.5B 5.7B 54.4B
# Employees 74,400 6,500 55,414
$ Revenue 34,350M 4,825M 24,113M
% Gross Margin 70% 46% 49%
$ Net Income 4,240M 257M 1,271M
$ EPS Ratio 2.31 0.32 4.25
$ P/E Ratio 28.34 38.34 32.06
Source: Based on information at a variety of sources.
Note: Numbers for Adidas were converted into USD assuming 1 Euro = $1.25.
CASE 20 • NIKE, INC.—2018 567
Under Armour (UA) Headquartered in Baltimore, Maryland, Under Armour (UA) was founded in 1996 by a former
University of Maryland football player who desired a t-shirt that would whisk away perspiration
rather than get soggy wet. The company has grown to be one of the most sought after brands
among athletes around the world, being worn by some of the largest American college football
and European soccer teams. Colleges such as the Maryland Terrapins, Auburn Tigers, South
Carolina Gamecocks, and many more have contracts with UA to outfit their teams. English
soccer team Tottenham Hotspur, Greek team Aris F.C. and Mexican club Deportivo Toluca F.C.
all are outfitted by UA. Mega stars such as Tom Brady, Cam Newton, Bryce Harper, Michael
Phelps, and many more, all sponsor and market UA products currently or at one time.
Under Armour was one of the pioneers to produce the compression and performance work-
out gear and in 2017 introduced bioceramic materials in their sleepwear line of clothing that is
supposed to reduce inflammation. The firm reported revenues of $4.8 billion in 2016 up from
3.9 billion in 2015. However, the firm’s stock price dropped 75 percent from the high in 2015 to
the low in 2017. Under Armour is well known for its partnership with PGA golfer Jordan Spieth,
who recently launched his own golf shoe, “Spieth One.” The company is also widely known
for its partnership with NBA star Stephen Curry, who is considered to be the “face of Under
Armour’s footwear line.” Just like Nike and Adidas, Under Armour’s strategy is to pursue prod-
uct development and follow up with heavy marketing.
External Issues
Athletic Shoe Stores The athletic shoe store industry in the United States generates over $15 billion in revenue, annually,
with growth around 3 percent expected through 2022. The industry is fragmented with over 3,000
businesses, many small mom-and-pops, with the two top players, Foot Locker and Nike, accounting
for 32 and 18 percent of sales, respectively. Unlike many retail outlets, the industry is healthy and
growing since more and more consumers worldwide are becoming more health conscious. In addi-
tion, a growing trend referred to as athleisure grew over 40 percent between 2009 and 2016, where
consumers are increasingly wearing athletic apparel in every day settings, including at work. Many
work environments are calling workers back to the office and requiring increased levels of dress
code, so it remains to be seen if the athleisure industry can continue to grow at such a rapid pace.
Online athletic shoe merchants are also growing, and, as athletic apparel becomes more
popular, department stores that tend to offer business casual clothing are increasing their athletic
shoe store spaces. In contrast to most clothing categories where women are the primary custom-
ers, men account for nearly 60 percent of athletic shoe sales, with women and children both
around 20 percent. The industry enjoys a fairly even distribution of sales volumes from varying
age groups, but customers under age 55 account for about 75 percent of sales.
The total footwear market in the United States is worth $65 billion, but the fastest growing seg-
ment of this industry is athletic footwear. China supplies over 70 percent of all shoes sold in the U.S.
Athletic and Sporting Goods Athletic and sporting goods industry accounts for over $8 billion in U.S. revenue, annually, but
experienced a negative growth rate around 3 percent between 2010 and 2017. Moving forward,
the growth rate is expected to improve to upwards of 1 percent through 2022. The main driver
of revenue is golf-related equipment, accounting for nearly 50 percent of industry revenues,
followed by playground equipment, and fishing tackle and equipment around 7 percent each.
Other types of sports equipment make up the remaining 36 percent. Football, soccer, basketball
and other products attribute little to overall industry revenues, but this is not totally surprising
considering just how equipment-intensive sports like golf and fishing can be. Apparel and shoes
are not considered in the industry. Nike controls around 9 percent of the industry revenues in the
U.S., with rival firm Calloway Golf owning 5 percent.
Technology In 1996, Under Armour started offering compression apparel that helped to regulate body tem-
perature and keep athletes warm in the cold and cool in the heat. Today, firms are becoming more
advanced by adding computer technology to their products. Many firms are now experimenting
568 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
with t-shirts made of conductive yards that can even transmit heart rate and other data directly to
the user’s doctor. A spinoff of Samsung, IOFIT is a sports-smart shoe where golfers have their
swings and balance analyzed. In 2017, Chinese-based Xiaomi released a smart running shoe
with a chip powered by Intel. Google and Levi have partnered to produce a smart jacket worn by
cyclists. The athletic sportswear industry is getting more technical every day.
Inventory Turnover Problems Inventory turnover ratios have been declining for the past 10 years in the athletic sportswear
industry. In 2006, for example, the inventory turnover ratio for the industry was 4.0, but in 2017
the ratio has steadily dropped to 3.0. Nike is doing better than its peers on this ratio, reporting
an inventory turnover ratio of 3.8 in 2017. Many analysts suggest the drop is simply from firms
overestimating their inventory needs and by weaker customer traffic. Footwear accounts for less
of the drop in inventory turnover than apparel. Retailers are inclined to have enough products
to meet demand as hot ticket items attract people into stores. Thus, a question arises regarding
whether having a high inventory turnover ratio is worth possibly running out of hot ticket items
that firms certainly lose sales on, but also risk losing sales on impulse purchases by customers
coming into the store. Having excess inventory, however, trains customers to wait for the clear-
ance sales, ultimately hurting revenues and profits. Inventory management is a strategic issue
facing all retain firms including Nike.
Brand Polygamist Some experts in the apparel field are dubbing customers today as being “brand polygamist”
referring to customer decrease in brand loyalty over the last decade. Customers are now purchas-
ing increasingly based on price or extra product features rather than simply buying for the status
of a logo or brand name. The trend has cut into gross margins and increased rivalry within the
athletic sportswear industry. It also allows newer start up firms a larger chance as customers are
increasingly willing to look at all options closer. Nike, for example, now has a NikeID program
where they allow shoppers to design their own shoes, apparel, bags, and other items online in an
attempt to attract more customers through personalization. However, schemes such as this are
expensive, and firms like Nike are often not able to charge significantly more to offset the extra
costs of say, producing 100,000 of the same blue shirts. Do not mistake the value of brands such
as Nike, Adidas, Under Armour and others; they remain a powerful force in the industry, but
simply having customers to purchase based on a logo alone is becoming extinct as customers
become more Internet savvy.
Direct-to-Consumer Sales There is increased momentum in the athletic sportswear industry for direct-to-consumer sales
through factory shops, thus using the Internet to bypass traditional retailing merchants. An ad-
vantage to Internet sales other than cutting out a middleman is that firms can design customer
products as Nike does with NikeID. In total, e-commerce sales as a whole, including all indus-
tries, grew 15 percent in 2016 versus the less than 3 percent growth for retail sales over the same
time period.
Using the direct-to-consumer business model, firms are also able to collect accurate data
on customer’s habits who purchase versus don’t purchase and tailor advertising and marketing
strategies to customers based on their likelihood to purchase or not purchase. For example, pro-
files are developed for customers who are not likely to purchase without a coupon versus cus-
tomers who will likely purchase either way; in addition, profiles may be developed to determine
what length of time after a purchase do you need to offer an incentive to attract the customer to
purchasing again. The information garnered from having a robust direct-to-consumer sales me-
dium is arguably priceless.
Future
According to Global Industry Analysts, Inc., the global market for Sports and Fitness Clothing
is projected to reach $231.7 billion by 2024. More and more people are living healthier life
styles and participation in sports and fitness activities is growing. This is great news for Nike.
The research reveals that sportswear is turning into a highly popular style statement and
CASE 20 • NIKE, INC.—2018 569
fashion trend. Additionally, the report points out that the Asia-Pacific region is expected to be
the fastest growing region.
Market research firm Euromonitor International reports that sales of sportswear, which
includes items such as yoga pants and activewear, is growing faster than any other apparel or
footwear category. Specifically, both sports-inspired footwear and apparel is growing at about
10 percent and 6 percent annually. Regarding the growth of sportswear apparel and footwear
across regions, emerging markets such as India and Thailand are growing fastest, but even core
markets such as the United States are also producing significant sports-inspired growth.
A few new firms that Nike is monitoring in the sportswear industry include RYU Apparel,
Inc. (TSX: RYU.V) that produces urban athletic apparel. Founded in 2005, RYU’s financial re-
sults for the 6 months ended June 30, 2017 included revenues in the second quarter of 2017 of
$641,231, 113 percent higher than revenue of $300,773 during the same period in 2016. RYU
continues to show a balanced ratio of apparel sales between men and women at 46 percent and
54 percent, respectively. By reaching an underserved gap in the industry for men, and develop-
ing the Beautiful Tough brand positioning that’s resonating with women, RYU currently derives
17 percent of revenue from e-commerce with a target of reaching 30 percent by the end of 2018.
Nike is also monitoring Lululemon Athletica, Inc. (NASDAQ: LULU), an athletic apparel
company for yoga, running, and training. Lulu creates transformational experiences for people
to live happy, healthy, fun lives. Seemingly new companies arise all across the globe each month,
desiring a piece of Nike’s market share, so Nike needs a clear strategic plan moving forward.
570 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Under Armour, Inc.—2018
www.ua.com , UA
Headquartered in Baltimore, Maryland, Under Armour (UA) apparel is sold and worn world-
wide by athletes at all levels, as well as by customers with active lifestyles. UA products are
used in training, fitness, athletics, and outdoor activities. UA has three different product materi-
als: HeatGear, ColdGear, and AllSeasonGear to be worn when the weather is hot, cold, or mild,
respectively. UA apparel is designed to regulate body temperature and improve performance,
regardless of weather conditions, to increase mobility and comfort.
UA is involved in Connected Fitness, offering digital fitness platform licenses and subscrip-
tions, with MapMyFitness, MyFitnessPal, Endomondo, and UA Record applications. The ma-
jority of UA sales are generated through wholesale channels such as sporting goods chains like
Dick’s Sporting Goods (DKS), department store chains, and other retailers, but UA also sells
through retail channels such as athletic departments, colleges, leagues, and teams. UA also sells
products direct-to-consumers through factory stores globally.
Despite a booming stock market in 2017, UA stock was among the worst performers in the
S&P 500 the past two years, falling 30 percent in 2016 and 50 percent more in 2017; the stock
rebounded some in 2018. A huge problem for UA is that specialty sporting goods retailers such
as Dick’s Sporting Goods and Foot Locker that sell UA products are losing market share to
Amazon and Walmart. Other UA distributors such as The Sports Authority, Gander Mountain,
and Sports Chalet have all gone bankrupt in the past two years.
Especially in North America, UA is struggling to compete with Nike and Adidas that domi-
nate the athletic footwear and apparel industries. In May 2018, UA reported that its revenue in
North America dropped slightly from a year ago. However, outside of North America, UA is
doing well. For example, in Q1 of 2018, UA’s sales in Latin America increased 21 percent from
the prior year period, accompanied by a 23 percent increase in the company’s Europe, the Middle
East and Africa segment, and a 35 percent increase in the company’s Asia operations as compared
to Q1 of 2017 a year earlier. But the company’s strength outside the USA is not sufficient to over-
come trouble in its domestic operations because UA’s sales in North America account for nearly
three-quarters of its revenue. UA’s North America segment lost money in Q1 2018.
Copyright by Fred David Books LLC; written by Forest R. David.
History
Under Armour (UA) was founded in 1996 by a former University of Maryland football player
(CEO Kevin Plank) who desired a t-shirt that would wick away perspiration rather than get
soggy wet. At age 23, Kevin Plank developed a new t-shirt in his grandmother’s basement in
Washington, D.C. after noticing that his compression shorts always stayed dry, but t-shirts had
to be changed frequently as they became sweat-soaked. This observation led Plank to create a
new compression t-shirt that wicked away sweat. After graduating, Plank provided this t-shirt
to his former teammates who were playing in the NFL. After positive reviews, UA had t-shirt
orders totaling $100,000 in 1997. UA’s first big break came when USA Today pictured Oakland
Raiders quarterback Jeff George wearing UA apparel. In late 1997, Georgia Tech asked for 10
shirts, ultimately leading to deals with Georgia Tech, Arizona State, and North Carolina State
universities.
The company has grown to be one of the most sought-after brands among athletes around
the world, being worn by some of the largest American college football and European soccer
teams. Colleges such as the Maryland Terrapins, Auburn Tigers, South Carolina Gamecocks,
and many more have contracts with UA to outfit their teams. English soccer team Tottenham
Hotspur, Greek team Aris, F.C., and Mexican club Deportivo Toluca F.C. all are outfitted by UA.
Megastars such as Tom Brady, Cam Newton, Bryce Harper, Michael Phelps, and many more, all
sponsor and market UA products.
CASE 21 • uNDER ARMOuR, INC.—2018 571
UA designs, develops, markets, and distributes apparel, footwear, and accessories for men,
women, and children worldwide. The company offers apparel in three styles: compression, fitted,
and loose, and is designed to be worn in hot, cold, or normal weather. Footwear products include
cleats for most all sports, running and basketball shoes, and even hunting boots. Accessories
include gloves for football, baseball, golf, socks, and team uniforms. UA’s moisture-wicking fabri-
cations are engineered in many different designs and styles for wear in nearly every climate to pro-
vide a performance alternative to traditional products. Its products are sold worldwide and worn by
athletes at all levels, from youth to professional, on playing fields around the globe. UA’s European
headquarters are in Amsterdam’s Olympic Stadium, with additional offices in Denver, Hong Kong,
Toronto, and Guangzhou, China. With about 76,000 employees, UA distributes their products
through specialty retailers, department stores, outlet stores, and institutional athletic departments.
In the 2000s, UA expanded rapidly after outfitting Warner Brothers with apparel for two films,
and an advertisement placed in ESPN Magazine generated $750,000 in sales. In 2003, UA became
the outfitter of the now defunct XFL football league and launched its first TV advertisement with
the motto “Protect this House.” In 2011, the company purchased 400,000 square feet of office
space for $60.5 million. UA has new contracts with the NFL, NBA, and MLB to produce footwear,
apparel, and accessories. Many European football teams such as Tottenham Hotspur and other
rugby teams are outfitted with UA products. In 2012, UA’s women’s apparel became a major focus
with strong sells reported in the company’s Studio and ArmourBra products.
Vision/Mission
UA’s vision (paraphrased) is “to empower athletes globally by providing innovative products.”
The company mission (paraphrased) is “to enhance athletes’ performance through exemplary
design and relentless pursuit of innovation.” Regarding UA’s vision, CEO Plank recently said
(paraphrased): “Our long-term vision is for our women’s business to one day be larger than our
men’s business, footwear to be larger than apparel, and our international business to be larger
than our U.S. business.” UA also has all employees to agree to “four wills (paraphrased):” I
will act responsibly, I will think like an entrepreneur, I will be innovative, and I will be a great
teammate. “The biggest, baddest brand in the world, bar none” is also how Kevin Plank likes to
describe his vision (paraphrased) for what UA can ultimately become.
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure UA reports its finances under four geographic segments: (1) North America, (2) Europe, the
Middle East and Africa (“EMEA”), (3) Asia, and (4) Latin America. However, based on titles of
executives, it appears UA operates from a divisional-by-region type structure with one person
(Jason LaRose) handling North America and one person (Colin Browne) handling outside-North
America. Exhibit 1 provides a possible depiction of UA’s organizational structure.
EXHIBIT 1 Under Armour’s Top Executives and Organizational Chart
1
2 3 4 5
10 11
6 7 8 9
1. Kevin Plank, Chairman of the Board and CEO
2. David Bergman, CFO
3. Kerry Chandler, Chief HR Officer
4. Paul Fipps, Chief Technology Officer
5. Patrik Frisk, President COO
6. Kip Fulks, Chief Product Officer
7. Michael Lee, Chief Digital Officer
8. Karl-Heinz Maurath, Chief Revenue Officer
9. John Stanton, SVP, General Counsel and
Corporate Secretary
10. Colin Browne, President of Global Sourcing
11. Jason LaRose, President of North America
Source: Based on information at the company website.
572 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
UA’s co-founder Kip Fulks announced in October 2017 he was taking a sabbatical. Also dis-
turbing to investors is that UA’s footwear chief, head of women’s and kids’ apparel, and its chief
marketing officer also announced they were leaving after the company reported weak Q3 2017
results. UA is in some disarray and has hired Patrik Frisk, the former CEO of shoe retailer Aldo,
as president and chief operating officer. Before that hire, Plank also served as president. Analysts
have said the move is a sign that Under Armour realizes it needs some fresh blood to fix its many
problems at home. On a positive note, UA’s leading endorser, Steph Curry of the Golden State
Warriors just led his NBA team to defeat the Cleveland Cavaliers to win the NBA championship.
Note in Exhibit 1 above that all eleven top executives are male.
Current Strategies Similar to Nike, UA’s strategies largely focus on product development followed by heavy
marketing. UA has contracts with many top professional leagues including the NBA and
NFL. UA will become a Connected Fitness partner with major league baseball (MLB) start-
ing in 2020. Connected Fitness offers digital fitness subscriptions to consumers through
MapMyFitness platform and the UA Record platform. UA acquired both Endomondo and
MyFitnessPal platforms which includes MapMyRun and MapMyRide. As of 2017, about
2 percent of revenues were derived from Connected Fitness, but the platform keeps data on
customers, exposes customers to UA, and allows users to be rewarded with discounted UA
gear for using the apps and staying fit.
Marketing UA develops and markets products primarily for use in athletics, fitness, and other outdoor
activities. UA attempts to drive demand through brand equity and increasing consumer aware-
ness of their superior product. UA growth is largely dependent on sales from Dick’s Sporting
Goods (Dick’s) and Foot Locker, with which it has developed store-within-a-store sales chan-
nels. However, UA has been making great strides selling its products directly to consumers,
with 31 percent of revenue in the latest quarter coming from direct sales, up from 25 percent
6 years earlier. Wholesale sales to retail companies such as Dick’s Sporting Goods account for
65 percent of sales, with 4 percent of sales being derived from Connected Fitness and Licensing
in fiscal 2016.
Like Nike, UA pays big money to secure endorsements for their products from high
performing athletes who have significant influence in the NFL, NBA, MLB, and even high
school teams. Sports stars such as Cam Newton and Tom Brady endorse and wear UA prod-
ucts. Many fans become familiar with UA products seeing them worn by high performing
athletes on a year-round basis. In addition to focusing on the large market leagues, UA also
focuses on brand authenticity from a more grassroots level by hosting camps, clinics, and
other activities for young athletes.
UA uses broadcast, print, and social media outlets to promote the firm’s product. UA also
also owns 162 outlet stores and 19 brand house stores in North America. Plank and his team
are excellent marketers; company ads resonate with athletes and those who aspire to become
athletes. UA’s bold logo and brash and edgy marketing campaigns inspire movement and physi-
cal fitness, positioning the company well within the healthier lifestyle megatrend. Plank and his
team relish their underdog image versus big rival firms; they love to operate within and promote
an “us versus them” philosophy. This competitive fire has served UA well and has encapsulated
many athletes and fans.
Seasonality UA generates a large portion of its revenue during the third (Q3) and fourth (Q4) quarters
of each year. In fact, Q3 and Q4 account for 35 percent more revenues than Q1 and Q2, and
account for about 58 percent of yearly revenues. Q3 and Q4 correspond to football season
and the holiday and winter seasons in much of the world. Fall and cooler weather gear also
cost more.
Finance UA reported a 3 percent increase in revenues in 2017, but notice in Exhibit 2 a large drop in
net income from $256 million to negative $48 million, mostly attributed to higher operating
CASE 21 • uNDER ARMOuR, INC.—2018 573
expenses and cost of goods sold. About 50 percent of UA’s cash and equivalents on the balance
sheet are located outside the United States. UA’s balance sheets are provided in Exhibit 3; note
that property plant and equipment increased 10 percent in 2017.
A major concern that analysts have about UA is its fast-rising inventories which reached
$1.148 billion in value by the end of Q1 2018. This problem is evidenced by UA’s high
EXHIBIT 2 Under Armour’s Income Statements (in thousands USD)
Income Statement 12/31/16 12/31/17 Percent Change
Revenues $4,825,335 $4,976,553 3.13%
Cost of Goods Sold 2,584,724 2,737,830 5.92%
Gross Profit 2,240,611 2,238,723 -0.08%
Operating Expenses 1,823,140 2,210,880 21.27%
EBIT 417,471 27,843 -93.33%
Interest Expense 29,189 38,152 30.71%
EBT 388,282 (10,309) -102.66%
Tax 131,303 37,951 -71.10%
Non-Recurring Events 0 0 NA NA
Net Income 256,979 (48,260) -118.78%
Source: Based on 2017 4Q Report and other company data.
EXHIBIT 3 Under Armour’s Balance Sheets (in thousands USD)
Balance Sheet 12/31/16 12/31/17 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments $250,470 $312,483 25%
Accounts Receivable 622,685 609,670 -2%
Inventory 917,491 1,158,548 26%
Other Current Assets 174,507 256,978 47%
Total Current Assets 1,965,153 2,337,679 19%
Property Plant & Equipment 804,211 885,774 10%
Goodwill 563,591 555,674 -1%
Intangibles 64,310 46,995 -27%
Other Long-Term Assets 247,066 180,245 -27%
Total Assets 3,644,331 4,006,367 10%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 409,679 561,108 37%
Other Current Liabilities 276,137 499,267 81%
Total Current Liabilities 685,816 1,060,375 55%
Long-Term Debt 790,388 765,046 -3%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 137,227 162,304 18%
Total Liabilities 1,613,431 1,987,725 23%
Equity
Common Stock 145 146 1%
Retained Earnings 1,259,414 1,184,441 -6%
Treasury Stock 0 0 NA NA
Paid in Capital & Other 771,341 834,055 8%
Total Equity 2,030,900 2,018,642 -1%
Total Liabilities and Equity 3,644,331 4,006,367 10%
Source: Based on 2017 4Q Report and company data.
574 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 4 Under Armour’s Revenues by Product (in thousands USD)
2017 2016 2015
Apparel $3,287,121 $3,229,142 $2,801,062
Footwear $1,037,840 $1,010,693 $677,744
Accessories $445,838 $406,614 $346,885
Other $205,754 $178,886 $137,622
Total $4,976,553 $4,825,335 $3,963,313
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 4Q Report and other data.
days-inventory-outstanding (“DIO”) that stands at 159 days. Historically, Under Armour’s
quarterly DIO only exceeded 150 days in Q2 of the calendar year as the company builds stocks
in preparation for the holiday season. Given that it is not going to be any different this year, we
should be expecting the DIO to climb above 170 days (and potentially above 180 days) in Q2,
something that has not happened since the 2008–2009 recessionary period.
Segment Data
By-Product Exhibit 4 provides a breakdown of UA’s revenues by product. Note that apparel continues to
be the strongest product offered based on net revenues, but accessories such as bags, hats, and
gloves experienced higher percent increases over the most recent fiscal year. License revenues
decreased due partly to fewer orders of hats and bags. About 66 percent of company revenues
are derived from apparel in 2017, down from 80 percent in 2010, as other product lines are
growing at a quicker pace.
UA apparel is specifically engineered to replace traditional non-performance fabrics
and replace them with the most cutting-edge products available. UA’s three products are
marketed under Heatgear, designed for hot weather, Coldgear, designed for cold temperatures,
and AllSeasonGear, designed for between the extremes. In addition to the three temperature
ratings, all products also come in three fit types: compression (tight fit), fitted (athletic fit), and
loose ( relaxed). All UA appeal products are designed to wick water away from the wearer to
keep them as dry and comfortable as possible in any temperature or type of activity.
Designed to cushion and manage moisture, UA makes footwear for virtually all sports,
including running and even hunting boots. Although there was only a 2.7 percent increase in
footwear sales in 2017, there was a nearly 50 percent increase in footwear sales in 2016. Other
UA revenues are derived from licensing and Connected Fitness but only accounted for 4 percent
of sales in 2017.
Geographic Region Exhibits 5 reveals UA’s recent revenues derived from North American versus International mar-
kets. UA reports revenues in four distinct geographic regions: (1) North America, (2) Europe,
the Middle East and Africa (“EMEA”), (3) Asia, and (4) Latin America. Each geographic seg-
ment operates in the same manner, to design, develop, market, and distribute UA products. As
of fiscal 2017, 22 percent of revenues are derived from international markets. UA breaks down
revenues by the four geographic regions and by Connected Fitness.
Exhibit 6 reveals the revenue breakdowns from each of the 3 international regions and
Connected Fitness. UA acknowledges that the trend in performance products is becoming in-
creasingly global. UA’s North American segment accounted for 76 percent of fiscal 2017 sales,
down from 91 percent in 2014, indicating how rapidly the firm is expanding into markets outside
of North America. UA also owns 151 outlet stores and 18 brand house stores located in 34 dif-
ferent states. The company’s largest customer is Dicks’s Sporting Goods accounting for around
10 percent of revenues. In addition to selling to the public, UA earns income from the sale of
uniforms and practice gear to high school, college, and professional teams. Exhibit 6 on the next
page reveals a 95 percent reduction in operating income for UA in 2017. The firm attributes a
CASE 21 • uNDER ARMOuR, INC.—2018 575
EXHIBIT 5 Under Armour’s Revenues by Geographic Region
2017 Percent Sales by Region
International
22%
North America
78%
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
EXHIBIT 6 Under Armour Revenues and Operating Income in North America (in millions $)
Revenues Operating Income
2016 2017 2016 2017
North America $4,005 $3,802 $408 $20
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Form 10K.
$63 million restructuring, lower margins, and decrease in sales as the reasons; however, sales in
North America were only down 5 percent over the same time period.
Exhibit 7 provides the UA revenues and operating income for international segments and
Connected Fitness. Contrary to the domestic revenues, all revenue streams increased with Asia-
Pacific leading the way with a 61 percent revenue increase in 2017.
Exhibit 8 reveals poor operating income in Latin America and Connected Fitness, with
operating income reporting larger losses in 2017. EMEA reported the largest percentage gain at
64 percent, while Asia-Pacific reported the largest total dollar gain at $14 million.
EXHIBIT 7 Under Armour’s Revenues Derived from Its International and Connected Fitness Segments (in millions $)
2016 2017
$0
$50
$100
$150
$200
$250
$300
$350
$400
$450
$500
EMEA Asia-Pacific Latin America Connected Fitness
$331
$470
$142
$181
$434
$269
$80 $89
International and Connected Fitness Revenues
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Form 10K.
576 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
For Q1 2018 that ended 3-31-18, UA’s revenue increased 6 percent to $1.2 billion, but the
company’s net income loss widened to $30.2 million, or 7 cents a share, compared with $2.3
million, or a penny per share, during the same period one year ago. UA’s Q1 2018 sales in North
America fell 0.4 percent, while those in international markets climbed 27 percent. Outside North
America sales now represent 24 percent of UA’s total sales. On a positive note, UA’s men’s training
category helped drive apparel sales up 7 percent during Q1 2018, accompanied by footwear and
accessories sales increasing 1 percent and 3 percent, respectively. UA’s strongest international seg-
ment in Q1 2018 was Asia-Pacific, where sales increased 35 percent.
Competitors
UA faces competition from Adidas, Nike, New Balance, Reebok, and Puma along with a few
others in the production of athletic gear. In addition, being forward integrated, UA competes
with retail stores such as Foot Locker, Dick’ Sporting Goods, Bass Pro Shops, and many other
firms. Competitors such as Nike and Adidas have copied NA’s designs and technology. The
fabrics UA uses are not unique to them, and they do not control any patents on fabrics or pro-
cesses. This has always been a huge problem for UA. Thus, it is all about branding for UA.
UA’s branding strategy has not been perfect because UA’s stock declined as much as 75
percent from 2015 to 2017, while over the same period the S&P 500 increased nearly 50 percent
and Nike increased around 10 percent. Nike and Adidas have much larger resources to draw
upon, thus competing long term may be difficult for UA. Competing for floor space at large
retailers is also becoming more difficult since many stores now have their own store brands, in
addition to private label brands, all competing for floor space.
Exhibit 9 provides some comparative information for UA, and rival firms. Note that Nike
and Adidas are 7 and 5 times larger revenue than UA, respectively, and in teams of market capi-
talization, both rivals are larger than UA.
Nike, Inc. (NKE) Headquartered in Beaverton, Oregon, Nike has over 70,000 full-time employees, operates 384
U.S.-based stores and 758 international stores. Nike reported 2017 revenues and net income of
about $34 billion and $4 billion, respectively, both figures increasing nicely from the prior year.
EXHIBIT 8 Under Armour’s Operating Income Derived from Its International and Connected Fitness Segments (in millions USD)
$11
$68
–$37
$18
$82
–$37
–80
–60
–40
–20
0
20
40
60
80
100
2016 2017
EMEA Asia-Pacific Latin America Connected Fitness
–$34
–$55
International and Connected Fitness Operating Income
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Form 10K.
CASE 21 • uNDER ARMOuR, INC.—2018 577
However, for Nike’s second quarter (Q2) of fiscal 2018, revenues for the Converse division of
Nike were $408 million, down 4 percent, due to faltering sales in North America. Nike’s net
income for Q2 2018 decreased 9 percent to $767 million. For both Q1 and Q2 of fiscal 2018,
the company’s footwear sales declined 5 percent and the company’s equipment sales dropped
8 percent in North America. Thus, rival companies are eating into Nike’s financial performance
in the United States. However, outside North America, Nike is doing really well, growing both
revenues and net income in double digits.
Nike has recently doubled down on designing shoes on an individual basis by building its
new Nike By You Studio in New York City. The studio utilizes augmented reality and projec-
tion systems to custom-design shoes that are then produced and available within an hour for the
customer. The company has a team of 1,000 designers to oversee development and production of
customer Nike shoes, incorporating such designs as Nike’s Pro Hijab for Muslim athletes.
Nike is in the retail business, having forward integrated over the years. Nike operates 384
factory stores in the United States and 758 factory stores outside the United States. Exhibit 10
reveals revenues and EBIT for Nike (not including Converse) in 2017. Canada accounted for 54
percent of all revenue in 2017. China generated the most EBIT per dollar of revenue received,
followed by North America. Central & Eastern Europe, followed by Western Europe, generate
significantly lower EBIT for every dollar of revenue, compared to other parts of the world. Both
regions in Europe also suffered from a 16 percent drop in their respective EBIT contribution
for 2017. Exhibit 10 reveals that Nike revenues in all markets in fiscal 2017 experienced a net
positive revenue change in 2017 with Japan and China experiencing 17 and 12 percent revenue
growths and North America only growing revenue by 3 percent.
Adidas AG – (www.adidas-group.com) Headquartered in Herzogenaurach, Germany, Adidas was founded in 1949 and operates over
2,800 stores. Adidas owns Reebok, TaylorMade, and CCM Hockey products. Adidas reported
$54 billion USD in 2016 with net income of 1.3 billion. Adidas is the largest sportswear
EXHIBIT 9 Competitor Comparison
under Armour Adidas Nike
$ Market Cap. 5.7B 54.4B 106.5B
# Employees 15,200 55,414 74,400
$ Revenue 4,825M 24,113M 34,350M
% Gross Margin 46% 49% 70%
$ Net Income 257M 1,271M 4,240M
$ EPS Ratio 0.32 4.25 2.31
$ P/E Ratio 38.34 32.06 28.34
Numbers for Adidas were converted into USD assuming 1 Euro = 1.25USD Source: Based on a variety of sources.
EXHIBIT 10 Nike’s Worldwide Revenues and EBIT (in millions USD)
Geographic Region Revenues EBIT
North America $15,216 $3,875
Western Europe $6,211 $1,203
China $4,237 $1,507
Emerging Markets $3,995 $816
Central & Eastern Europe $1,487 $244
Japan $1,014 $224
Totals $32,160 $7,869
Source: Based on Nike’s 2017 Form 10K.
578 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
manufacturer in Europe and the second largest in the world, behind Nike. In 2015, professional
basketball player James Harden left Nike for Adidas, reportedly signing a 13-year contract
worth $200 million. Adidas’s strategic plan is very similar to Nike’s; both companies use
product development followed by heavy marketing, signing teams and players across almost all
sports to market and promote their products.
Foot Locker, Inc. (FL) Like many players in the industry, Foot Locker’s stock rose hugely between 2012 and 2017
increasing around 300 percent despite revenues only increasing 15 percent and operating income
declining 12 percent over the same time period. The company operates nearly 3,500 stores and
employs 15,000 full time workers across the United States, Europe, Australia, New Zealand, and
Canada; however, 80 percent of sales derive from the United States. Foot Locker has bought into
the store-in-a-store concept used by many retailers where they have 217 House of Hoops shops
offering premium basketball products. Foot Locker also offers Lady Foot Locker and Kids Foot
Locker stores. Foot Locker sells UA and Nike products along with other brands. UA competes
with Foot Locker and all other merchants that sell UA products at the retail level.
External Issues
Athletic Shoe Stores The athletic shoe store industry in the United States generates over $15 billion in revenue annu-
ally with growth around 3 percent expected through 2022. The industry is fragmented with over
3,000 businesses, many small mom and pops with the two top players Foot Locker and Nike
accounting for 32 and 18 percent of sales, respectively. Unlike many retail outlets, the industry
is healthy as a growing number of consumers in the United States are world wild are becoming
increasingly health conscious. In addition, a growing trend referred to as athleisure grew over
40 percent between 2009 and 2016 where consumers are increasingly wearing athletic apparel
in every day settings including at work. Many work environments are calling workers back to
the office and requiring increased levels of dress code, so it remains to be seen if the athleisure
industry can continue to grow at such a rapid pace. Online merchants are also growing, and
as athletic apparel becomes more popular, department stores that tend to offer business casual
clothing are increasing their athletic shoe store spaces. Unlike most all clothing categories where
women are the primary customers, men account for nearly 60 percent of athletic shoe sales with
women and children both around 20 percent. The industry enjoys a fairly even distribution of
sales volumes from varying age groups but customers under 55 account for 75 percent of sales.
Nike holds nearly 50 percent of the athletic-footwear industry based on market capitalization,
followed by V.F. Corp at 14 percent. UA has only 2.5 percent of the athletic-footwear industry.
Technology Many athletic apparel firms are now experimenting with t-shirts made of conductive yards that
can even transmit heart rate and other data directly to the user’s doctor. A spinoff of Samsung,
IOFIT is a sports-smart shoe where golfers have their swings and balance analyzed. Chinese
based Xiaomi released in 2017 a smart running shoe with a chip powered by Intel. Google and
Levi have partnered to produce a smart jacket worn by cyclists.
Brand Polygamist Some experts in the apparel field are dubbing customers today as brand polygamists in reference
to customers’ decrease in brand loyalty over the last decade. A decrease in brand loyalty is a
serious problem for most firms in the industry as customers are now purchasing increasingly on
price or extra product features rather than simply buying for the status of a logo or brand name.
The trend has cut into gross margins and increased rivalry within the industry. It also allows
newer start-up firms a larger chance as customers are increasingly willing to look at all options
closer. UA has purchased several apps for phones and smart watches and developed their own to
attract customers to the UA product lines. Nike for example now has a NikeID program where
they allow shoppers to design their own shoes, apparel, bags and other items online in an attempt
to attract more customers through personalization. However, schemes such as this are expensive
and firms like Nike are often not able to charge significantly more to offset the extra cost of say,
CASE 21 • uNDER ARMOuR, INC.—2018 579
producing 100,000 of the same blue shirts. Do not mistake the value of brands such as Nike,
Adidas, UA, and others; they remain a powerful force in the industry but simply having custom-
ers to purchase based on a logo alone may be extinct.
Direct-to-Consumer Sales There is increased momentum in the athletic sportswear industry for direct-to-consumer sales
through factory shops, thus using the Internet to bypass traditional retailing merchants. An
advantage to Internet sales other than cutting out a middleman is that firms can design customer
products as Nike does with NikeID. In total, e-commerce sales as a whole, including all indus-
tries, grew 15 percent in 2016 versus the less than 3 percent growth for retail sales over the same
time period.
Using the direct-to-consumer business model, firms are also able to collect accurate data on
customers’ habits who purchase and don’t purchase and tailor advertising and marketing strate-
gies to customers based on their likelihood to purchase or not purchase. For example, profiles
are developed for customers who are not likely to purchase without a coupon versus customers
who will likely purchase either way; in addition, profiles may be developed to determine what
length of time after a purchase do you need to offer an incentive to attract the customer to pur-
chasing again. The information garnered from having a robust direct-to-consumer sales medium
is arguably priceless.
Future
According to Global Industry Analysts, Inc., the global market for Sports and Fitness Clothing
is projected to reach $231.7 billion by 2024. More and more people are living healthier lifestyles
and participation in sports and fitness activities is growing. This is great news for UA. The
research reveals that sportswear is turning into a highly popular style statement and fashion
trend. Additionally, the report points out that the Asia-Pacific region is expected to be fastest
growing region.
Market research firm Euromonitor International reports that sales of sportswear, which
includes items such as yoga pants and activewear, is growing faster than any other apparel or
footwear category. Specifically, both sports-inspired footwear and apparel are growing at about
10 percent and 6 percent annually. Regarding the growth of sportswear apparel and footwear
across regions, emerging markets such as India and Thailand are growing fastest, but even core
markets such as the United States are also producing significant sports-inspired growth.
A few new firms that UA is monitoring in the sportswear industry include RYU Apparel,
Inc. (TSX: RYU.V), that produces urban athletic apparel. Founded in 2005, RYU’s financial
results for the 6 months ended June 30, 2017, included revenues in the second quarter of 2017
of $641,231, 113 percent higher than revenue of $300,773 during the same period in 2016. RYU
continues to show a balanced ratio of apparel sales between men and women at 46 percent and
54 percent, respectively. By reaching an underserved gap in the industry for men, and developing
the Beautiful Tough brand positioning that’s resonating with women, RYU currently derives
17 percent of revenue from e-commerce with a target of reaching 30 percent by the end of 2018.
Some analysts contend that UA has lost its identity in the athletic sportswear space by col-
laborating with rapper A$AP Rocky to become more of a brand for everyday wear rather than a
performance line made famous for its compression tees. UA’s apparel for women definitely lags
niche competitors such as Lululemon, Fabletics, and Gap Inc.’s Athleta which are seen as more
fashionable.
UA is monitoring Lululemon Athletica, Inc. (NASDAQ: LULU), an athletic apparel com-
pany for yoga, running, and training. Lulu creates transformational experiences for people to
live happy, healthy, fun lives. Seemingly new companies arise all across the globe each month
desiring a piece of UA’s market share, so UA needs a clear strategic plan moving forward.
580 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Polaris Industries, Inc.—2018
www.polaris.com , PII
Headquartered in Medina, Minnesota, Polaris operates mainly through four segments: Off-Road
Vehicles (ORV), Snowmobiles, Motorcycles, and Global Adjacent Markets. Polaris is best
known for their snowmobiles, yet that segment only represents 7 percent of total company sales.
Polaris produces power-sports vehicles, including motorcycles, snowmobiles, and All-Terrain
Vehicles (ATV). On May 21, 2018, Polaris announced that for the first time ever the company
was named to the Fortune 500, coming in at a ranking of 496. The Fortune 500 for 64 years has
been offered the premier ranking of U.S. companies by total revenues for their respective fiscal
years.
Polaris has a defense (military) segment. In November 2016, the U.S. Marine Corps signed
a $2.5 million contract with Polaris to deliver 144 MRZR-D ATVs. Called the Utility Task
Vehicle (UTV), the vehicle is designed to be diesel-powered and can run on JP-8 fuel. The
Marines bought the unarmored ATVs because they can fit inside an MV-22 Osprey aircraft,
enabling them to be deployed from long distances, to provide logistics support to ground combat
units, assisting them to travel and transport supplies quicker and easier than previously on foot.
The vehicles can carry four troops and have a small cargo bed capable of carrying 1,500 lb
(680 kg) of payload.
In 2017, Polaris issued nearly a dozen recalls on a number of products, and later that year
recalled over 400,000 of its machines. However, in October 2017, Polaris reported that sales
were up by 25 percent for the quarter, setting a record of $1.48 billion, and almost tripling net
income at $81.9 million. Most companies would experience difficulty recovering from such
catastrophic setbacks, yet Polaris charges ahead doing better than ever as the year 2017 ends at
a record level.
Copyright by Fred David Books LLC; written by Mark L. Frigo.
History
Founded in 1954 in Roseau, Minnesota, Polaris’ legacy actually started back in 1945 with fore-
runners Edgar Hetteen, his brother Alan, and their close friend David Johnson who together
wanted a vehicle to ride on the snow. The three decided to start a never before heard of type
of business—making snowmobiles. Edgar Hetteen would eventually be described in the
Snowmobile Hall of Fame in St. Germain, Wisconsin, as the father of the snowmobile. Edgar
dropped out of school after the eighth grade in 1934. The three guys founded a business and
named it Hetteen Hoist & Derrick. The three guys desired to create a vehicle that could travel
through snow to make hunting locations more accessible. No similar product existed at that time
anywhere in the world.
Producing a version of the snowmobile in 1955, the company earned a monopoly in the
industry by demonstrating its toughness, reliability, and durability. However, in 1960, Edgar
became disgruntled with his brother and their close friend, so Edgar quit working for Polaris
and started his own snowmobile company that today is named Arctic Cat—a large, fierce rival
to Polaris.
Polaris throughout the 1960s produced snowmobiles amidst growing competition world-
wide. In 1964, it released the Comet, in 1965 the Mustang, and in 1985 it released the Trailboss,
and later the Polaris Rocky Mountain King (RMK). Polaris opened a manufacturing plant in
Monterrey, Mexico, in 2010 to go with its sister facility in Osceola, Wisconsin, that still operates
today. In January 2015, Polaris purchased the entire electric motorcycle business from Brammo,
based in Ashland, Oregon. Production of electric motorcycles began at Polaris’ factory in Spirit
Lake, Iowa, during the second half of 2015. Polaris also manufactured Victory and Indian motor-
cycles at the Spirit Lake factory.
CASE 22 • POLARIS INDuSTRIES, INC.—2018 581
In 2016, Polaris opened a new 600,000-square-foot facility in Huntsville, Alabama, that
employs about 1,700 workers. In January 2017, Polaris’ Chairman and CEO Scott Wine
announced they would be shutting down Victory Motorcycles. However, the company will con-
tinue to honor warranties and produce parts for Victory Motorcycles for the next 10 years.
Polaris snowmobiles hold the most number of wins in the “World’s Longest Toughest
Snowmobile Race,” the Iron Dog—a 2,000-mile race across Alaska. Polaris is currently expand-
ing into the clothing and accessory industry.
On May 10, 2018, Polaris announced formation of Club Slingshot, a national owners
group that is designed to embrace and recognize the loyal Slingshot owners across the country.
Slingshot is Polaris’ open air, three-wheeled roadster that delivers “The Ultimate Joyride,” for its
more than 25,000 new and used Slingshot owners who will receive a complimentary one-year
membership, which includes special offers, access to events and rides, as well as a first-edition
Slingshot owners magazine. The Slingshot vehicle was initially offered in late 2014. New
Slingshot vehicles are powered by 2.4L engines that provide 173 horsepower and 166 ft-lbs of
torque. Prices range from $19,999 to $30,999.
Vision/Mission
Polaris’ vision focuses on excellence and innovation in its products and services, with the over-
arching goal of generating excitement and enthusiasm among its customers around the globe.
The vision can be viewed on the company’s website: https://www.polaris.com/. Polaris does not
appear to have a formal mission statement but does have some guiding principles that are a few
words: “best people, best team, safety and ethics always, and customer loyalty.”
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure Based on executives’ titles, Polaris appears to operate from a divisional-by-product type organi-
zational design, but with no COO or CAO. This is a large organization for every top executive
to report to the CEO. Note in Exhibit 1 there is only one female among the top executives, Stacy
Bogart, the firm’s General Counsel.
EXHIBIT 1 Polaris Industries’ Top Executives and Organizational Chart
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1. Scott Wine, Chairman and CEO
2. Kenneth Pucel, EVP Operations, Engineering, and Lean
3. Michael Speetzen, EVP Finance and Chief Financial Officer
4. Stacy Bogart, Senior VP, General Counsel, and Compliance
Officer and Secretary
5. James Williams, Senior VP and Chief HR Officer
6. Bob Mack, Senior VP Corporate Development and Strategy,
President Global Adjacent Markets
7. Matthew Emmerich, VP, Chief Information Officer
8. Stephen Kemp, VP, Chief Technical Officer
9. Craig Scanlon, Chief Retail and Marketing Officer of ORV
10. Christopher Wolf, President Snowmobiles
11. Michael Dougherty, President International
12. Stephen Eastman, President Parts, Garments,
and Accessories
13. Steven Menneto, President Motorcycles
14. Chris Musso, President Off-Road Vehicles
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Annual Report and other documents.
Strategy Polaris aims to become an $8 billion global enterprise by 2020. The company actively engages
in strategic planning. Polaris has a history of successfully acquiring and divesting businesses to
continue on a path of strategic improvement. Yet to their credit, Polaris reports minimal goodwill
on their balance sheet. Some recent notable divestures include exiting the jet-ski market in 2004
after a 12-year stint. Polaris ceased production of its Breeze line of on-road vehicles in 2011, and
582 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
acquired GEM and Goupil to fill this void. Since 2014, Polaris has been striving to achieve the
following strategic objectives (paraphrased):
5–8 percent annual organic growth
7$2 billion from acquisitions & new markets
733 percent of Polaris revenue coming from outside the United States
710 percent net income margin
Polaris purchased Taylor-Dunn Manufacturing Company in 2016. Based in Anaheim,
California, Taylor-Dunn produces industrial vehicles serving a broad range of commercial,
manufacturing, warehouse, and ground-support customers. Also in 2016, Polaris entered into
an arrangement with Transamerican Auto Parts (TAP), “a privately held, vertically integrated
manufacturer, distributor, retailer and installer of off-road Jeep and truck accessories.” Polaris
paid $668 million for TAP and used debt to secure the deal.
In 2011, Polaris purchased the Indian Motorcycle Company. Polaris is committed to
rebranding the product line, and 2017 seems to be a breakout year. For example, the 2017
Slingshot, Victory, and Indian motorcycles offered an inventory of 24 models. The lower end
of the price range will be $9,000 and the higher will be $30,000. Polaris will phase out the
Victory line to continue to develop the Indian engine, the primary reason consumers purchase
the motorcycle.
Polaris purchased the electric energy company Brammo, Inc., in April 2015. Brammo
designs electric vehicles and the two companies have been working together since 2011.
Marketing In 2016, Polaris spent $342.2 million on advertising, promotion, and publicity, up from $316.7
million in 2015 and $314.5 million in 2014. Polaris has a network of about 1,800 independent
dealers in North America, 11 subsidiaries, and 45 distributors in 125 countries outside of North
America. The company’s brands include RZR and Ranger ATVs, Indian and Victory motor-
cycles, and Polaris Rush snowmobiles. Snowmobiles are sold to dealers in the United States and
Canada; many dealers also carry Polaris ORVs. A little more than half of all Polaris dealers in
North America sell snowmobiles.
Finance Polaris’ financial statements are provided in Exhibits 2 and 3. Note the 20.19 percent increase in
revenues in 2017. Note also the 24 percent decline in long-term debt in 2017.
Segment Data Polaris is quite transparent in reporting its revenues and gross profit by product and region.
Exhibit 4 and Exhibit 5 reveal the company’s by-product and by-region financial results,
EXHIBIT 2 Polaris’ Recent Income Statements (000 omitted)
Income Statement 12/31/16 12/31/17 Percent Change
Revenues $4,516,629 $5,428,477 20.19%
Cost of Goods Sold 3,411,006 4,103,826 20.31%
Gross Profit 1,105,623 1,324,651 19.81%
Operating Expenses 755,345 964,994 27.76%
EBIT 350,278 359,657 2.68%
Interest Expense 37,027 40,866 10.37%
EBT 313,251 318,791 1.77%
Tax 100,303 146,299 45.86%
Non-Recurring Events 0 0 NA NA
Net Income 212,948 172,492 -19.00%
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Annual Report and other documents.
CASE 22 • POLARIS INDuSTRIES, INC.—2018 583
respectively. Note in Exhibit 4 that Polaris is still primarily a snowmobile company, and note in
Exhibit 5 that Polaris still primarily does business in the United States.
Information Systems Polaris is expanding its RIDE Command, an onboard rider information system, across its Indian
Motorcycle segment, as well as Polaris GENERAL and RZR product lines. The Ride Command
connects Polaris customers to other riders and friends to plan an event and otherwise coordinate
the entirety of the Polaris experience. Polaris likely generates access to a wide swath of user-data,
preferences, and access to additional marketing opportunities for a strong core of Polaris users.
EXHIBIT 4 Polaris’ Sales and Gross Profit by Product (000 omitted)
2016 2017
Sales Gross Profit Sales Gross Profit
ORV/Snowmobiles $3,283,900 $907,600 $3,570,800 $1,054,600
Motorcycles $699,200 $87,500 $576,000 $16,700
Global Adjacent Markets $341,900 $95,100 $396,800 $94,900
After Market $191,600 $46,300 $884,900 $225,500
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Annual Report and other documents.
EXHIBIT 3 Polaris’ Recent Balance Sheets (000 omitted)
Balance Sheet 12/31/16 12/31/17 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments $127,325 $138,345 9%
Accounts Receivable 174,832 200,144 14%
Inventory 746,534 783,961 5%
Other Current Assets 142,298 131,054 -8%
Total Current Assets 1,190,989 1,253,504 5%
Property Plant & Equipment 727,596 747,189 3%
Goodwill 792,979 780,586 -2%
Intangibles 0 0 NA NA
Other Long-Term Assets 388,033 308,314 -21%
Total Assets 3,099,597 3,089,593 0%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 273,742 317,377 16%
Other Current Liabilities 686,009 812,934 19%
Total Current Liabilities 959,751 1,130,311 18%
Long-Term Debt 1,120,525 846,915 -24%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 152,281 180,708 19%
Total Liabilities 2,232,557 2,157,934 -3%
Equity
Common Stock 631 631 0%
Retained Earnings 300,084 242,763 -19%
Treasury Stock 0 0 NA NA
Paid in Capital & Other 566,325 688,265 22%
Total Equity 867,040 931,659 7%
Total Liabilities and Equity 3,099,597 3,089,593 0%
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Annual Report and other documents.
584 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
This in turn can be used to more effectively target customers, identify customer trends, and
cultivate and maintain a loyal base of Polaris users.
Research and Development Polaris employs 850 personnel in the research and development (R&D) arm of the corporation.
The company’s R&D function is divided into two segments: (1) improving existing products and
(2) designing new offerings. Polaris places a premium on improving engine functionality, striv-
ing to reduce noise levels, increase fuel efficiency, and generate more power. The company also
owns Swissauto Powersports LTD, an engineering firm focusing on engine efficiency and inno-
vative vehicles. In 2016, Polaris spent $185.1 million on R&D, that followed up $166.4 million
and $148.5 million the prior two years, respectively.
Production Activities Polaris assembles its products in 18 facilities in Minnesota, Iowa, Wisconsin, Mexico, and
elsewhere in the world. To save costs and improve component part quality, many of the firm’s
product lines are vertically integrated. Plastic injection molding, welding, clutch assembly, and
painting are all produced in-house. Items such as fuel tank, tires, seats, and instruments are pur-
chased from third-party vendors.
Polaris has an effective inventory management process called the Maximum Velocity
Program (MVP) where ORV orders can be placed at 2-week intervals for high volume dealers.
Smaller dealers can utilize a similar process. The new process helps to keep costs down and keep
inventories at manageable levels. While ORV orders can be placed at any time, snowmobile
orders must be placed in the spring and secured by a deposit. Victory motorcycle orders are cur-
rently under MVP testing.
Operations While Polaris maintains its corporate headquarters in Medina, Minnesota, it sustains a
nationwide presence with facilities in Wyoming, Minnesota; Roseau, Minnesota; Osceola,
Wisconsin; Spirit Lake, Iowa; Milford, Iowa; Huntsville, Alabama; Vermillion, South Dakota;
Spearfish, South Dakota; and Wilmington, Ohio. Internationally, Polaris has a manufacturing
and distribution presence in a number of offices including, but not limited to, Winnipeg, Canada;
Melbourne, Australia; Auckland, New Zealand; Coleshill, England; Askim, Norway; Ostersund,
Sweden; Frankfurt, Germany; and an office near Barcelona, Spain. Exhibit 4 details those loca-
tions. Polaris has about 1,800 dealers in North America and 1,700 dealers overseas through 80
distributors. The company has about 400 dealers for its Victory and Indian motorcycles, and 200
dealers in North America.
Competitors
Polaris’ primary competitors for off-road vehicle (ORV) sales are Bombardier Recreational
Products, Inc., and Yamaha. Arctic Cat is the primary snowmobile competitor. The top four
EXHIBIT 5 Polaris’ Sales by Region as a Percent
U.S.
80%
Canada
7%
Other
13%
2017 Sales by Geographic Region
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Annual Report and other documents.
CASE 22 • POLARIS INDuSTRIES, INC.—2018 585
major players in the ORV market are estimated to hold a combined market share of 57.7 percent.
Concentration levels are much higher in the snowmobile segment, especially with major manu-
facturers Polaris and Arctic Cat commanding the segment.
Honda and Polaris are the two major manufacturers of ATVs in the United States. Polaris
itself accounts for 27.6 percent of total industry revenue. IBISWorld estimates that the level of
industry concentration will gradually increase during the next 5 years. The supply chain of this
market comprises raw material suppliers, component manufacturers, ATV manufacturers, dis-
tributors, and buyers. The market for ORVs is highly consolidated with the presence of global
as well as regional players. Major ORV manufacturers other than Polaris are Honda Motor
Co., Ltd., Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd., BRP Inc., Arctic Cat Inc., Deere & Company (John Deere),
Kubota Corporation, and Kawasaki Motors Corp.
Bombardier Recreational Products, Inc. (BRP) Based in Valcourt, Canada, BRP designs, develops, manufactures, distributes, and markets
power sports vehicles and propulsion systems. The company manufactures and sells all-terrain
vehicles (ATVs), side-by-side vehicles (SSVs) and roadsters, as well as seasonal products
consisting of Lynx snowmobiles and personal watercrafts (PWCs). Bombardier also produces
propulsion products consisting of engines for outboard and jet boats, karts, motorcycles, and
recreational aircraft. Bombardier’s diversified portfolio of brands and products includes Can-Am
ATVs, SSVs and roadsters, Ski-Doo and Lynx snowmobiles, Sea-Doo PWCs, and propulsion
systems consisting of Evinrude outboard boat engines and Rotax engines for jet boats, karts,
motorcycles, and recreational aircraft. In addition, Bombardier operates a parts, accessories, and
clothing (PAC) business. BRP products are sold through a network of dealers, distributors, and
to original equipment manufacturers.
Arctic Cat, Inc. (ACAT) On January 25, 2017, it was announced that Arctic Cat will be acquired by Textron in a $247
million cash transaction. However, Arctic Cat is a North American manufacturer of snowmobiles
and all-terrain vehicles as well as snowmobile suits and accessories. Founded by Polaris
founder, Edgar Hetteen, Arctic Cat was formed in 1960 and was originally based in Thief River
Falls, Minnesota. In 2016, the headquarters was relocated to a more prominent location in down-
town Minneapolis. Also in 2016, most of the ATV/UTV engineering was moved to St. Cloud,
Minnesota, in the same facility that produces the Arctic Cat engines. Arctic Cat continues the
majority of their manufacturing, along with snowmobile engineering, in Thief River Falls,
Minnesota.
Harley-Davidson, Inc. (HOG) Headquartered in Milwaukee, Wisconsin, Harley-Davidson (Harley) is an iconic brand world-
wide and provides a unique customer experience few companies can match. Its ticker symbol
HOG and its Harley Owners Group (H.O.G.) both stem from the nickname for the famous
Harley motorcycle. Harley is America’s largest motorcycle producer with 2017 revenue of $5.6
billion, down from $5.9 billion the prior year.. The company’s net income declined in 2017 to
$521 million from $692 million the prior year. Harley has sales in about 97 countries and ser-
vices over 1,400 independently owned dealers.
Honda Motor Company Ltd. (HMC) Headquartered in Tokyo, Japan, Honda sells motorcycles, but also cars, outboard motors,
generators, and other various power equipment products. For Honda’s last fiscal year ended on
March 2017, revenues in the company’s motorcycle segment decreased 4.95 percent to ¥1,716.1
billion ($15.77 billion). For that fiscal year, Honda’s motorcycle unit sales rose 6.3 percent to
11 thousand motorcycles. Operating profit of the motorcycle segment decreased 6.1 percent to
¥170.5 billion ($1,567 million).
Suzuki Motor Company (SZKMY) Headquartered in Hamamatsu, Japan, Suzuki manufactures, and markets motorcycles, automo-
biles, outboard motors, wheelchairs, and all-terrain vehicles. Suzuki has over 57,000 employees.
Worldwide production decreased by 7.4 percent on 2016 compared to 2015, to 1,370,000 units.
586 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Improving their operating loss from ¥10.2 billion ($93.7 million) in 2015 to an operating loss of
¥0.9 billion ($8.2 million) in 2016.
External Issues
The global off-road vehicles (ORVs) market is projected to reach $11.1 billion in 2022. A
booming global economy and increasing disposable income is spurring recreational and touring
activities, an advancement in the ORV technology, and increasing usage of ORVs in the agricul-
ture and military operations are the major factors proliferating the demand for ORVs globally.
The United States is the largest ORV market due to its large stretches of natural terrain, unpaved
roads, and large ranches and farms across the country.
The global ORVs market is segmented based on vehicle type as ATV and SSV. SSV is likely
to witness higher growth through 2020 due to a significant shift from ATVs to SSVs. SSV offers
advantages over ATVs, such as better riding experience, rollover protection bars, and improved
mobility. These factors significantly reduce the number of accidents and injuries as compared to
ATVs.
Based on region, North America is expected to remain the largest market for ORVs over the
next 5 years. The United States accounted for more than 50 percent of the global ORV sales in
2016. Asia-Pacific is relatively a small market but is likely to report the highest growth through
2020, driven by an increasing demand for powersports in China, Australia, and India.
Future
Polaris’ Indian Motorcycle line is gaining market share against Harley-Davidson, and the
company reported that retail sales were up 16 percent in Q3 of 2017. Polaris is eliminating the
Victory brand in order to focus on Indian and could create a brand to rival Harley-Davidson in
the long term.
Polaris sales for Q4 of 2017 increased 18 percent to $1,431 million, up 17 percent, with the
majority being from organic growth. Q4 2017 sales of $1,431 million were up 18 percent from
$1,218 million for Q4 of 2016. The company’s Q4 2017 net income was $31 million, down from
net income of $63 million the prior year quarter. Motorcycle segment sales totaled $103 million,
a decrease of 2 percent compared to $104 million reported in Q4 of 2016. Gross profit from
Motorcycle segment for Q4 of 2017 was $5 million compared to $1 million in Q4 of 2016.
On May 17, 2018, Polaris announced that the U.S. Army was purchasing 20 of its MRZR
X vehicles for soldier trials. The MRZR X is a robotic vehicle to be used by infantry brigade
combat teams for the next year of trials as part of the Army’s Squad Multipurpose Equipment
Transport (SMET) program. The vehicle can be manned or non-manned so it helps the Army
transition from manned to unmanned vehicles. The new robotic vehicle complements the world-
wide commonality with the MRZRs already in service in the United States and more than 30
allied nations. The new vehicle has the capability for remote control, teleoperation, follow-me,
leader-follower, and full autonomy. Thus the new vehicle can be used as an autonomous resup-
ply vehicle, warfighter-driven squad carrier, logistics support vehicle, rescue mission enabler,
and high-speed casualty evacuation capability. Polaris initially had teamed up in 2017 with
Applied Research Associates Inc. (ARA), and Neya Systems LLC.
Polaris has updated its strategic plan and aims to generate annual sales growth of greater
than 5 percent compounded annually, and net income growth of greater than 15 percent through
2022. The company could use a fresh look at its strategic plan since analysts agree that competi-
tiveness in the industry is growing.
CASE 23 • PT MATAHARI PuTRA PRIMA TBK.—2022 587
PT Matahari Putra Prima Tbk.—2022
hypermart.co.id
Headquartered in Tangerang, Indonesia, PT Matahari Putra Prima Tbk. ( Matahari) is a large
Indonesian chain of retail stores with a product range that includes food, clothes, chairs, dog
beds, cosmetics, tableware, and household appliances. The word “matahari” in Indonesian means
“the sun”; many of the company’s products are handmade outdoors, in the sun, by local artisans
in small villages throughout Indonesia and Southeast Asia. The company’s customers are primar-
ily retail stores (online, catalog, and brick-and-mortar) and interior design firms. Matahari owns
and operates Hypermart, Primo, Foodmart, Hyfresh, Boston Health & Beauty, FMX, and Smart
Club across 200 locations in Jakarta and around Indonesia.
History
Founded in 1986, Matahari has become a trusted retailer in Indonesia. The firm became public
in 1992 on the Jakarta and Surabaya Stock Exchanges and began supermarket operations in
1995. Boston Health & Beauty was launched in 1995 and Hypermart in 2004. In 2012, the firm
divested its non-core businesses. Matahari remodeled many of its locations in 2015 and con-
tinued building new stores. In 2018, it reduced its exposure in the business-to-business (B2B)
market and increased its focus on selling and providing services directly to consumers through
its Hypermart and Foodmart locations before launching Hyfresh in 2019, further concentrating
its efforts on the consumer.
The COVID-19 pandemic severely hurt Matahari and other supermarket retailers, as social dis-
tancing and general travel restrictions in Indonesia were stringent. In response to the pandemic and
the change in consumer behavior buying patterns, Matahari has been trying to become more of an
online company, but so far that transition has been a challenge. The company is at a critical juncture
in its history and needs a clear strategic plan to weather the continual storms it faces.
Vision/Mission
There is no posted vision or mission statement for the company at the corporate website or in the
firm’s most recent Annual Report . A plausible vision statement for Matahari could read something
like this: To become the premier, multi-format, go-to shopping destination throughout Indonesia.
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure Unlike most corporations, Matahari provides an organizational chart in its 2020 Annual Report
to reveal its top executive reporting relationships. As shown in Exhibit 1 , Matahari has no COO
within its executive ranks; nor does it have presidents of divisions. The company does, however,
have a Director of Large Stores Format and a Director of Small Stores Format, implying a decen-
tralized design with two profit centers based on customer size. CFOs across the world are taking
on more and more of the responsibility traditionally held by a COO, and perhaps that is also true
of Matahari. If so, then Herry Senjaya, CFO of Matahari, is a busy person.
Being well organized is vitally important for success in any company, and there are guide-
lines for when various types of structure should be utilized. You can find many of these guide-
lines in Chapter 7 , “Implementing Strategies: Management and Marketing Issues.” Based on
the guidelines and various organizational structure journal articles listed in the References
section of this case, it is clear that extensive improvements are needed in Matahari’s or-
ganizational design. Probably the most effective type of structure for Matahari would be
a divisional-by-product-type design, where the products are the various types of stores the
company operates, such as Hypermart, Primo, Foodmart, Hyfresh, Boston Health & Beauty,
FMX, and SmartClub. There should probably be a president or similar head responsible for
588 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
each of these operations. Vagueness is disastrous both in strategic planning and in organiza-
tional design, and at present there is too much vagueness in Matahari’s structure. In addition,
this company seems sufficiently large to warrant having a COO for all those new presidents
to report to, rather than everyone in the company reporting to the CEO.
Financial Data and Statements
As indicated in Matahari’s recent income statements provided in Exhibit 2, the company had a
rough 2020, with the COVID-19 pandemic discouraging consumers and companies worldwide.
Note that revenues were down 22 percent and the company’s net income was again negative,
albeit a bit less so than the prior year. Matahari’s business apparently suffered in 2020 directly
as pandemic lockdowns prevented people from getting out of their homes and going shopping.
Trends such as this are quite worrisome for Matahari’s shareholders, who expect to see at least
a 5 percent top-line (revenues) and for the bottom line (net income) to increase annually.
As shown in Matahari’s recent balance sheets provided in Exhibit 3, the company’s property,
plant, and equipment declined 15 percent in 2020, while long-term debt increased 396 percent.
Basically, the company is apparently using debt to meet its payroll and pay expenses as profits
have been nonexistent. Matahari needs a clear strategic plan moving forward.
EXHIBIT 1 Matahari’s Top Management Team
1. Elliot Dickson, CEO
2. Herry Senjaya, CFO
3. Kyutae Park, Director, Merchandising & Marketing
4. Anto Suwartono, Director, Large Stores Format
5. Wirawan Winarto, Director, Small Stores Format
6. Iwan Goenadi, Director, Information Technology
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
7. Danny Kojongian, Director, Corporate Secretary
& Public Affairs
8. Lydiawati Kurniawan, Vice President, Human Capital
9. Purwanto, Head of Internal Audit
Source: Based on information in Matahari’s 2020 Annual Report.
EXHIBIT 2 Matahari’s Income Statements (in millions of Rupiah)
Source: Based on information in Matahari’s 2020 Financial Supplement, p. 1.
Income Statement 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Revenues 8,654,646 6,746,594 –22%
Cost of Goods Sold 7,074,249 5,439,936 –23%
Gross Profit 1,580,397 1,306,658 –17%
Operating Expenses 1,776,502 1,446,926 –19%
EBIT (196,105) (140,268) 28%
Interest Expense 118,496 267,419 126%
EBT (314,601) (407,687) –30%
Tax 238,073 (2,380) –101%
Non-Recurring Events – – NA NA
Net Income (552,674) (405,307) 27%
CASE 23 • PT MATAHARI PuTRA PRIMA TBK.—2022 589
Balance Sheet 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short Term Investments 304,295 299,805 –1%
Accounts Receivable 220,079 193,210 –12%
Inventory 1,191,567 964,503 –19%
Other Current Assets 188,106 77,748 –59%
Total Current Assets 1,904,047 1,535,266 –19%
Property Plant & Equipment 926,287 789,871 –15%
Goodwill – – NA NA
Intangibles 4,132 2,315 –44%
Other Long-Term Assets 986,343 2,183,059 121%
Total Assets 3,820,809 4,510,511 18%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 1,022,948 836,691 –18%
Other Current Liabilities 1,595,442 1,926,408 21%
Total Current Liabilities 2,618,390 2,763,099 6%
Long-Term Debt 250,000 1,240,153 396%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 421,738 322,525 –24%
Total Liabilities 3,290,128 4,325,777 31%
Equity
Common Stock 376,457 376,457 0%
Retained Earnings (1,313,905) (1,659,855) –26%
Treasury Stock – – NA NA
Paid in Capital & Other 1,468,129 1,468,132 0%
Total Equity 530,681 184,734 –65%
Total Liabilities and Equity 3,820,809 4,510,511 18%
EXHIBIT 3 Matahari’s Balance Sheets (in millions of Rupiah)
Source: Based on information in Matahari’s 2020 Financial Supplement, pp. 2–3.
Strategy Matahari has vaguely disclosed that the company has two distinct strategies, the first focusing
on consumer retailing and providing quality fresh products and the second on expanding its
omnichannel online business and improving digital payments. The first strategy seems to imply
an increased focus on fresh fruit and vegetables, but a closer reading of what the company calls
“fresh” is much more broad; it also includes more emphasis on consumer goods and many other
types of groceries. In fact, the term “fresh” mostly likely means any product that has a shelf life
of perhaps less than a year.
Regarding the second strategy, Matahari is increasingly shifting toward an omnichannel pres-
ence by forming partnerships with firms to become more virtual. In 2021, the firm expanded its
partnership with Tokopedia, a technology company with the leading marketplace in Indonesia;
Matahari opened 95 virtual stores on Tokopedia’s platform, which boasts more than 100 million
active monthly users who purchase food and household products. While Matahari is by some
estimates the fifth largest grocery store chain in the country, the company claims this agreement
with Tokopeida makes them the largest online grocery platform in Indonesia. This agreement
follows on the heels of the merger of Tokopeida and GoJek, another firm that Matahari works
closely with, which launched 31 stores in 2021 before quickly expanding to 76 virtual stores.
In 2020, Matahari reported that 5 percent of its total sales were derived from online sources,
compared to just 0.1 percent in 2019. Online sales were expected to amount to 10 percent of
Matahari’s total sales in 2021—a rapid increase.
590 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
While the firm calls the two above items strategies, they are perhaps best considered tactics.
The true strategy of Matahari would center more around how to allocate resources around the
large format Hypermart or the smaller format stores such as Foodmart and Primo. Both of what
the firm calls strategies above can be applied to large or smaller format stores. But it is vital to get
the large- versus small-store balance correct because having fresher products on the shelf may
not matter much if you are operating the incorrect size-store balance or have stores in the wrong
locations.
By-Segment Information
Broadly speaking, Matahari has three segments, 1) Large Stores, 2) Small Stores, and 3)
Wholesale, as indicated in Exhibit 4. More specifically, however, the company has seven seg-
ments or store chains, as discussed below.
EXHIBIT 4 Matahari’s Segments by Type Facility
Source: Based on information at Matahari’s corporate website.
Large Format Hypermarket
Small Format Primo Supermarket
Foodmart Supermarket
Hyfresh Supermarket
Boston Health & Beauty (Boston HBC)
FMX
Wholesale SmartClub Trader Wholesale
Hypermart As shown in Exhibit 5, Hypermart accounted for 85 percent of Matahari’s total revenue in 2020.
Matahari is in the process of transforming Hypermarts into smaller, more efficient stores and
increasing store numbers. In addition, much attention is being given to improving the shopping
experience by modernizing existing stores to international standards and consistency. The com-
pany’s Hypermart stores cater to everyone but target middle-income families, offering products
such as groceries, fresh food, electronics, and soft-line products. Hypermart products are tracked
closely to determine profit margins and best practices for distribution networks and centers to
supply stores. Improved tracking has enabled Matahari to offer products with higher margins,
focus more on high-demand products, and drop low-demand products. Hypermarts are shifting
focus increasingly to individual consumers rather than B2B.
EXHIBIT 5 Matahari’s By-Segment Contribution to Total Revenues
Foodmart & Primo
85%
5%
10% Hypermart
Others
Source: Based on Matahari’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 46. (Based on contribution to total sales)
CASE 23 • PT MATAHARI PuTRA PRIMA TBK.—2022 591
Foodmart Foodmart, Matahari’s second largest brand, produces about 10 percent of its total revenues.
Focusing on convenience and providing a modem atmosphere, the brand supplies a wide range of
both local and international products. Customers also can purchase ready-to-eat meals to enjoy
at home. Foodmart tends to focus on higher-quality products, especially fresh foods. Foodmart
Primo is more upscale, focusing on affluent customers, and offers many international products, a
greater variety, and a range of ready-to-eat take away meals. Matahari operates 25 such Foodmart
Primo stores across Indonesia.
Hyfresh The most recent new type of store owned and operated by Matahari is Hyfresh, which was
launched in 2019. Hyfresh’s stores are smaller and focus on middle-class communities where
customers need to shop every day due to smaller living spaces at home or inadequate means of
keeping food fresh. Fresh groceries and attractive prices are part of Hyfresh’s strategy. There are
9 Hyfresh stores as of 2020.
Boston HBC Standing for Boston Health and Beauty, Boston HBC offers Indonesian customers a health and
beauty concept, as the name suggests. Select stores offer health consultations and even a phar-
macy. The brand struggled in 2020, opening no new stores and closing 7 stores permanently, for
a total of 62 stores in operation. The closure of 10 percent of the stores in 2020 is concerning; it
might be explained away by the pandemic, but 9 stores were closed in 2019, before the outbreak.
Extra care should be taken when analyzing this concept’s fit going forward.
FMX FMX is the convenience store arm of Matahari. These stores are located near malls, apartments,
railway stations, and other high-traffic public places in local communities. FMX is different from
other convenience stores in Indonesia in offering more modern layouts, huge ready-to-eat food
and drink sections, and assortments of grocery items focusing on snacks. Customers can even
pay their bills at FMX stores. Matahari is optimistic over FMX’s growth potential and plans to
continue store expansion. However, in 2020, the company closed 2 FMX locations permanently
and now operates 14 such stores.
Supporting Function To service its range of stores, Matahari operates 3 distribution centers. Just over 50 percent of
all sales are derived from merchandise flowing through these centers. Far and away the largest
center is in Balaraja, with a capacity of 43,000 pallets, followed by the center in Porong, with a
capacity of 30,000 pallets. The smallest distribution location is in Cibitung, with a capacity of
4,200 pallets. Radio frequency scanning, voice picking technology, and single-pick technology
allow for paperless fast operations and enhance data collection applications.
Segment-based Performance Data As indicated in Exhibit 6, Matahari’s Hypermarts generate almost all of the company’s revenues,
but moving forward, other segments may be expanded substantially even as the firm downsizes
the average square footage of each Hypermart to the extent possible.
External Issues
Demographics of Indonesia It may come as a surprise to many non-Indonesians that the country is the fourth most populous
nation in the world, with over 270 million people, behind China, India, and the United States.
Nearly 60 percent of the population of Indonesia resides on the island of Java. The country is
spread across hundreds of islands. The largest city, Jakarta, has nearly 10 million residents, fol-
lowed by Surabaya, with nearly 3 million people. The country’s GDP per capita is $3,907 as of
2021. Agricultural imports reached nearly $20 billion in 2020. The Indonesian government has
set agricultural self-sufficiency as its goal.
592 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 6 Numbers of Matahari’s Outlets and Their 2020 Performance
2020 2020
2018 2019 2020 Stores Sales
Opened/ in
Closed Rp billion
Hypermart 117 102 100 0/2 5,698
Foodmart Supermarket 19 17 16 0/1 344
Primo Supermarket 5 9 9 0/0 345
Hyfresh Supermarket 0 8 9 2/1 135
Boston Health & Beauty 74 69 62 0/7 45
FMX 12 16 14 0/2 46
SmartClub 1 1 2 0/0 134
Total 219 222 211 2/13 6,747
Source: Based on Matahari’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 3 and pp. 36 and 46.
About 57 percent of Indonesians live in urban areas, with the main cities being Jakarta,
Surabaya, Medan, and Bandung. The literacy rate in Indonesia is high at 95.7 percent, and the
size of households is also pretty high—41 percent are comprised of 4–5 persons. The average
monthly salary in Indonesia is Rp 12,100,000 ($862); women on average earn 23 percent less
than men in Indonesia. There are several hundred ethic groups in the country, but the most com-
mon are Javanese (42 percent), Sundanese (15 percent), and Malay, Madurese, and Batak (3
percent each). Although Indonesia is a Muslim majority country, alcohol consumption is allowed
nationwide except in the province of Aceh. Nevertheless, there are numerous constraints on ad-
vertising alcoholic beverages.
E-commerce in Indonesia Indonesians are rapidly embracing e-commerce, and the country’s e-commerce market is expected
to grow from $32 billion in 2020 to $83 billion by 2025 (it was $21 billion in 2019). According
to Statista, fashion is the largest category of goods being purchased online in Indonesia. Analysts
report that about 50 percent of Indonesian consumers conduct Google searches and read customer
reviews before making their purchase. The top four social media platforms utilized by Indonesian
internet users are, in order of popularity, YouTube, WhatsApp, Instagram, and Facebook. The top
four e-commerce sites in Indonesia in rank order are Tokopedia, Shopee, Bukalapak, and Lazada;
Tokopedia and Shopee are nearly on par with each other and together garner about 80 percent of all
views and purchases.
Non-urban areas of Indonesia do not have access to regular banking services such as credit
cards or bank transfers, so cash on delivery is commonly used. Any business that services such
areas—like Matahari—should consider having a logistics partner to help facilitate the cash-
on-delivery method of payment. However, the Indonesian government promises to soon have a
standard single-code QR system (QRIS) as part of their Indonesia Payment Systems Blueprint
2025. Go-Jek recently launched digital payment options such as GoPay and PayLater. Similarly,
Shopee offers Shopee Pay. OVO is another popular eWallet payment option. There are even some
“buy-now-pay-later” options in Indonesia, such as PayLater, which is the third most popular
fintech in Indonesia (about 58 percent of the Indonesian population are aware of its offering). At
end of Q1 2020, Matahari launched Chat & Shop by WhatsApp, which is supported by the Park
& Pickup and BELLA (Single National WhatsApp Number) features.
Annual Food Sales in Indonesia Exhibit 7 reveals the dollar amount of various types of food purchased by consumers in Indonesia
in 2020. Notice that rice is number one, but surprisingly soft drinks are number two, followed by
dairy products. Matahari is continually monitoring its own sales of different foods to determine
the most effective mix to provide on the shelves of its various stores.
CASE 23 • PT MATAHARI PuTRA PRIMA TBK.—2022 593
Competitors
The top 5 food retailers in Indonesia are shown in Exhibit 8. Note that Matahari’s largest chain
of stores, Hypermart, comes in a distant fifth based on sales; it is sixth based on store numbers.
In 2020, there were over 4.4 million traditional stores in Indonesia, which equates to about one
for every 60 people. Convenience stores totaled just over 36,000, followed by supermarkets
at 1,457. Forecourt and hypermarkets totaled 730 and 337, respectively. By comparison, there
is one supermarket for every 185,000 people in Indonesia, revealing just how prevalent tradi-
tional stores are.
Regarding the competitive landscape in which Matahari functions, Exhibit 9 reveals the top 5
food retailers in Indonesia by percentage of outlets. Notice that Salim Group’s Indomaret domi-
nates the food retailer industry in the country, followed by Alfamart. These two rival firms hold a
whopping 94 percent of the outlets in the country (among the top five). Matahari (which placed
EXHIBIT 7 Food Sales in Indonesia in 2020 by Type of Food (in millions of USD)
Source: Based on information at Euromonitor, 2020.
Rice
7,000
6,000
5,000
4,000
3,000
2,000
1,000
0
8,000
9,000
10,000
Soft Drinks Dairy Cooking
Ingredients
3,0663,152
4,142
Noodles Baby Food
8,587
7,477
4,244
EXHIBIT 8 The Top 5 Food Retailers in Indonesia by Sales (millions of USD in 2020)
Source: Based on information at Euromonitor, 2020.
Indomaret
(Salim Group)
Alfamart
(Sumber
Alfaria)
Transmart
Carrefour
(Trans Retail
Indonesia)
Alfa Midi
(Sumber
Alfaria)
Hypermart
(Matahari)
5,900
5,256
954 863
414
0
1,000
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
6,000
7,000
594 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
sixth and is not pictured in the exhibit) must be continually mindful of what these two firms are
doing—and where and how they are doing it—to maintain a competitive advantage in a very
low-margin industry and be consistently profitable.
Conclusion
Strategy Considerations Through 2021, the COVID-19 pandemic continued to wreak havoc on hypermarket and super-
market chains in Indonesia, especially those located in malls or shopping centers, which seem
to suffer the most from low to no customer traffic. For example, grocery retailer Hero Group
(operator of the Hero and Giant stores) saw 2020 sales decline by 33 percent to $418 million
compared to 2019, and in mid-2021 it was forced to close all Giant stores (approximately 75
hypermarket and supermarket stores across Indonesia).
Amid the hardship, some retail businesses in Indonesia are nevertheless growing. For exam-
ple, convenience stores have benefited from having smaller locations closer to residential areas.
Retailers such as Supra Boga Lestari (operator of Ranch Market, Farmers Market, the Gourmet
and Day 2 Day) have launched their own online shopping apps to provide instant delivery to cus-
tomers. This strategy enabled Supra Boga Lestari to report a sales revenue increase of 26 percent
year-over-year in 2020 due to store expansion and increased efficiencies. Indonesia’s second
largest convenience store, Alfamart, reported a 2 percent increase in revenues in 2020, reaching
sales of $3.5 billion.
There is hope, therefore, for Matahari to turn its faltering revenues and profits around, likely
through more transitioning to online and to smaller store formats. But the company has seven
segments, as described in the case, and allocating resources effectively across them is now more
important than ever. Prepare a comprehensive strategic plan that includes a portfolio analysis,
SWOT analysis, and QSPM analysis for the CEO of Matahari. Include in your plan a new and
improved organizational chart for the company based on sound management principles. Recall
that the majority of people purchase their food items from roadside stands or small shops. Should
Matahari focus increasingly on smaller shops or are the large shops the way to go? Should the
firm divest all operations from serving businesses and focus entirely on the consumer? What
should the firm do with respect to its one large wholesale property? Being the fifth largest gro-
cery in the country, Matahari is still small enough to really offer a distinctive service. Perhaps the
firm should only focus on middle- to upper-income customers? The possibilities for Matahari are
many and the firm is in desperate need of a strong strategic plan. Develop a set of recommenda-
tions for CEO Dickson that you feel will lead Matahari to success, based on a thorough external
and internal analysis of the competitive climate in Indonesia. With some rival firms closing and
divesting stores and properties, there is opportunity for Matahari to capitalize on turmoil in the
industry. Based on your analyses, what is your recommended course of action for the company
to pursue over the 2021–2025 period?
EXHIBIT 9 The Top 5 Food Retailers in Indonesia by Percent of Outlets
Source: Based on information at Euromonitor, 2020.
Indomaret (Salim Group)
Alfamart (Sumber Alfaria)
Transmart Carrefour (Trans
Retail Indonesia)
Alfa Midi (Sumber Alfaria)
Super Indo (Konink lijke A hold
Delhaize)
42% 52%
5% 1% 0%
CASE 23 • PT MATAHARI PuTRA PRIMA TBK.—2022 595
References
1. David, Forest R., Meredith David, and Fred David. “A New and Improved Organizational
Structure Decision-Making Model,” SAM Advanced Management Journal (forthcoming).
2. Euromonitor, https://www.euromonitor.com/.
3. Katrina B. and Benedict L. “Who Are Indonesia’s Online Shoppers?,” Janio, December 31,
2018, https://janio.asia/id/articles/why-are-indonesians-shopping-online/.
4. Matahari, 2020 Annual Report, http://www.matahari.co.id/en/financial-information/
annual-reports.
5. Matahari, 2020 Financial Supplement, http://www.matahari.co.id/en/financial-information/
annual-reports.
6. Santander, “Reaching the Consumer,” https://santandertrade.com/en/portal/
analyse-markets/indonesia/reaching-the-consumers.
7. Yuningsih, Novi, “Retail Foods,” USDA Foreign Agricultural Service, https://apps.fas.
usda.gov/newgainapi/api/Report/DownloadReportByFileName?fileName=Retail%20
Foods_Jakarta_Indonesia_06-30-2021.pdf.
596 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Emirates Group—2022
theemiratesgroup.com
The name “Emirates Group” includes two entities: 1) the well-known Emirates Airline and
2) the aviation services company Dubai National Air Transport Association (stylized as dnata).
Headquartered in Garhoud, Dubai, near the Dubai International Airport, Emirates Airline (or
simply Emirates) is the state-owned global airline of Dubai. The largest airline in the Middle
East, Emirates provides passenger and freight services to about 100 countries, while dnata pro-
vides ground handling, cargo, catering, and travel services in 35 countries. (Note that Emirates
Airlines and dnata do not form a group according to International Financial Reporting Standards
[IFRS], so much of the Emirates Group’s Annual Report presents separate data for the two enti-
ties, but the name “Emirates Group” refers to the two entities combined.)
More than 20 brands of the Emirates Group are described on its corporate website, including ev-
erything from catering to food services, to travel agencies, to ground handling and cargo services—
this is a diversified, backward- and forward-integrated, well-managed, fast-growing enterprise.
Today, Emirates serves 155 airports in 81 countries from its hub in Dubai. However, the COVID-19
pandemic hit the Emirates Group hard in 2020–2021, and corporate revenue dropped 65.8 percent
to AED 35.586 billion, while the number of employees dropped 30.8 percent to 75,145. All flights
to and from the UAE were suspended from March 25, 2020, to May 25, 2020. All UAE-based
Emirates Group employees in 2020 took a six-month salary cut, and the Government of Dubai
injected AED 11.3 billion into the Emirates Group in 2020 to keep the company solvent.
Emirates’s response to the ban on air travel during the COVID-19 shutdown included modify-
ing 19 Boeing 777-300ER passenger aircraft by removing seats in the cabin to make room for more
cargo and then adding these to their 777-freighter fleet. Revenues from carrying cargo comprised
60 percent of the Group’s revenues in 2020; nevertheless, dnata incurred its first loss ever (AED
1.8 billion) in fiscal 2020. But even during the pandemic, dnata secured new contracts, such as
ground handling in Australia for Qantas Airlines and a 5-year ground handling contract for services
at Canada’s Vancouver International Airport. By March 31, 2021, the pandemic was under greater
control—though by no means disappeared—and Emirates was flying again to 120 destinations.
History
The founder of the Emirates Group was Sheikh Ahmed bin Saeed Al Maktoum, who started the
company under the name dnata in 1959. The name “Emirates” was conceived in March 1985
with backing from Dubai’s royal family; its first flight was from Dubai to Karachi, Pakistan,
in October 1985. The airline grew rapidly and by 2005 had a workforce of 25,000, making it
Dubai’s largest employer. Emirates’s passenger numbers reached 23 million in 2009. At the end
of March 2020, Emirates employed 59,519 persons, including 21,789 cabin crew, 4,313 flight
deck crew, 3,316 in engineering, 12,627 listed as “other,” 5,376 employees at overseas stations,
and 12,098 at subsidiary companies.
In 2020–2021, for the seventh consecutive year, Emirates won the Best Airline award at the
Business Traveler Middle East Awards, and won in the categories Best First Class, Airline with
the Best Cabin Crew, and Best Airport Lounge. In December 2020, Emirates won the Airline
of the Year award at the annual Aviation Business Awards Conference. Emirates is one of the
world’s fastest-growing airlines, but the pandemic still plagues all airlines.
Vision/Mission
If the Emirates Group has a written vision or mission statement, it is not available on either the corpo-
rate website or the 2020 Annual Report . A likely vision and mission could read something like this:
Vision To provide passenger and cargo air flight services wherever people live and work, today and tomorrow.
CASE 24 • EMIRATES GROuP—2022 597
Mission We strive to offer the best award-winning passenger and cargo jet services and on-the-ground
airport services around the world and to set an excellent example of integrity and humility for
all. We strive to hire the best employees and utilize the latest technology to ensure customer and
community safety and happiness as we endeavor to meet and exceed the expectations of our
shareholders and the silent needs of the natural environment.
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure As stated on page 2 in Emirates’ 2020–2021 Annual Report, the Vice President and Prime Minister
of the UAE and the Ruler of Dubai is his Highness Sheikh Mohammed bin Rashid Al Maktoum.
Exhibit 1 provides a list of the Group’s top executives and their titles and a flow chart of their
reporting relationships. There are no women among the Emirates Group top’s management team.
EXHIBIT 1 Emirates Group Top Executives and a Company Structural Flow Chart
1
2 3 4 5 6
7 8
1. H.H. Sheikh Ahmed bin Saeed Al Maktoum, Chairman and CEO
of Emirates Airline & Group
2. Adel Ahmad Al Redha, Chief Operating Officer
3. Adnan Kazim, Chief Commercial Officer for Emirates Airline
4. Abdulaziz Al Ali, Executive Vice President and Human Resources
Officer for Emirates Group
5. Ali Mubarak Al Soori, Executive Vice President & Head of Facilities
& Project Mgt. & Non-Aircraft P&L
6. Nigel Hopkins, Executive Vice President & Head of Service
Departments at Emirates Group
7. Sir Tim Clark, President of Emirates Airline
8. Steve Allen, Executive Vice President of dnata
Source: Based on information in the Emirates Group’s 2020–2021 Annual Report, pp. 16 and 17.
Strategy In 2020–2021, Emirates retired 9 Boeing 777 aircraft and 5 A380 aircraft while adding 3 new
A380 aircraft. The company is committed to maintaining a young fleet of aircraft.
The Emirates Group is very active in three key areas of environmental sustainability: 1) emis-
sions reduction, 2) responsible consumption, and 3) wildlife and habitat conservation. The com-
pany’s 2020–2021 Annual Report (pages 58–64) details many activities the company engages in
to assure its excellence in these areas.
Emirates Group Segments
Emirates Airline Emirates Airline is subdivided into several revenue generating parts:
1. Emirates Skyward
2. Emirates Holidays
3. Emirates SkyCargo
4. Emirates Flight Catering
5. Emirates Aviation University
598 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
6. Emirates Flight Training Academy
7. Emirates Partners Portal
8. Emirates Group Security
However, as indicated in Exhibit 2, Emirates has 7 reporting segments (the two Others are
treated as one; the second Other category in the Exhibit was included to reconcile data provided
on pages 7 and 72). Exhibit 3 provides the financial highlights of Emirates’ 2020–2021 fiscal year.
Note the crushing declines due almost exclusively to COVID-19 bans on and restrictions on travel.
EXHIBIT 2 A Financial Summary of Emirates’ Operations in Recent Years
Source: Based on the Emirates Group’s Annual Report 2020–2021, pp. 7 and 72.
2019–2020 2020–2021 % Change
Revenue (AED m) 91,972 30,927 (66.4)
Passenger 75,587 11,012 (85.4)
Cargo 11,207 17,106 52.6
Excess baggage 478 218 (54.4)
Sale of goods 2,745 1,334 (51.4)
Hotel operations 584 296 (49.3)
Other 394 264 (33.0)
Non-transport 3,723 1,894 (49.1)
Other 977 697
Operating Profit (AED m) 6,408 (15,021) (334.4)
Profit Margin 1.1 (65.6) (66.7) pts
# Passengers Carried 56,162 6,553 (88.3)
Tons of Cargo Carried 2,389 1,873 (21.6)
# of Aircraft 270 259 (11) nos
# of Employees 60,033 40,801 (32.0)
EXHIBIT 3 A Financial Summary of dnata’s Operations in Recent Years
Source: Based on the Emirates Group’s Annual Report 2020–2021, pp. 7 and 83.
2019–2020 2020–2021 % Change
Revenue (AED m) 14,760 5,541 (62.5)
International Airports 3,940 2,263 (42.6)
UAE Airports 3,171 1,671 (47.3)
Inflight catering 3,313 1,046 (68.4)
Travel services 3,537 130 (96.3)
Other services 799 431 (11.8)
Operating Profit (AED m) 507 (1,857) (466.3)
Profit Margin 4.2 (32.9) (37.1) pts
Tons of Cargo Handled 2,929 2,686 (8.3)
# Meals Uplifted 93,492 16,939 (81.9)
# of Employees 48,503 34,344 (29.2)
dnata This services provider is subdivided into several revenue contributing parts:
1. Airport Operations: Due to strong cargo business, this segment reported only an 8 percent
decline in tons of cargo handled in fiscal 2020–2021, to 2.7 million tons.
2. Catering: This segment reported a decline of 82 percent of meals uplifted, down to 16.9
million, due to the ban on and restrictions on air travel.
CASE 24 • EMIRATES GROuP—2022 599
3. Travel: Revenue in 2020–2021 also dropped 96 percent to AED 130 million due to
pandemic restrictions.
4. Airport Handling SpA: Dnata’s subsidiary in Italy now offers full ground and cargo
services at Milan Malpensa Airport (MXP).
In terms of actual segment reporting, however, dnata has five segments as revealed in Exhibit
3, which provides financial highlights of dnata’s 2020–2021 fiscal year. Note the drastic declines
due almost exclusively from COVID-19 bans on and restrictions on travel.
Emirates Group Consolidated Financials As indicated earlier in the case, IFRS do not allow the Emirates Group to combine Emirates
Airlines and dnata financials into the firm’s consolidated financial statements. The consolidated
statements provided in Exhibits 4 and 5 are thus for the Emirates Group, excluding the dnata
operations. Note the drastic declines along almost all rows of the statements.
EXHIBIT 4 Emirates Group Consolidated Income Statements (in millions of AED)
Source: Based on the Emirates Group’s Annual Report 2020–2021, p. 92.
Income Statement 3/31/20 3/31/21 Percent Change
Revenues $91,972 $30,230 –67%
Cost of Goods Sold 0 0 NA NA
Gross Profit 91,972 30,230 –67%
Operating Expenses 85,564 45,251 –47%
EBIT 6,408 (15,021) –334%
Interest Expense 5,154 5,279 2%
EBT 1,254 (20,300) –1719%
Tax 66 10 –85%
Non-Recurring Events (132) 31 –123%
Net Income 1,056 (20,279) –2020%
EXHIBIT 5 Emirates Group Consolidated Balance Sheets (in millions of AED)
Balance Sheet 3/31/20 3/31/21 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments $8,232 $4,945 –40%
Accounts Receivable 4,783 4,763 0%
Inventory 2,670 2,322 –13%
Other Current Assets 12,020 10,861 –10%
Total Current Assets 27,705 22,891 –17%
Property Plant & Equipment 86,084 79,258 –8%
Goodwill 0 0 NA NA
Intangibles 4,373 5,266 20%
Other Long-Term Assets 53,900 44,362 –18%
Total Assets 172,062 151,777 –12%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 12,880 10,199 –21%
Other Current Liabilities 36,012 25,506 –29%
Total Current Liabilities 48,892 35,705 –27%
Long-Term Debt 90,728 89,637 –1%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 8,855 6,288 –29%
Total Liabilities 148,475 131,630 –11%
(continued )
600 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Competitors
Emirates Airlines competes with dozens of airlines globally, but 5 seem to be the company’s
major rivals: 1) Singapore Airlines, 2) Etihad Airways, 3) Air China, 4) Qantas Airways, and 5)
Malaysia Airlines Berhad.
Emirates Airline’s Competitors Singapore Airlines is based out of the Singapore Changi Airport and has been ranked as the
world’s best airline at least four times by UK-based Skytrax and more than 20 times by Travel
& Leisure magazine. As of August 2021, Singapore Airlines operates a fleet of 154 Airbus and
Boeing passenger aircraft and 7 Boeing 747-400 cargo aircraft.
Etihad Airways is headquartered near Abu Dhabi International Airport in the UAE and is the
second-largest airline in the country after Emirates. Etihad operates about 100 Airbus and Boeing
aircraft and flies to about 120 passenger and cargo destinations in the Middle East, Africa,
Europe, Asia, Australia, and North America.
Founded in 1988 and headquartered in Beijing, Air China is one of China’s big three airlines.
As of March 2021, Air China operates 459 Airbus and Boeing aircraft, with another 110 planes
on order. The company flies passengers and cargo virtually everywhere on the globe.
Headquartered in the Sydney suburb of Mascot, New South Wales, Qantas Airways is the
largest airline company in Australia. Qantas owns Jetstar, a low-cost airline based in Australia. In
March 2021, Qantas reported a half-year revenue loss of AU$1.08 billion, a 75-percent decline
from the prior year, and passenger counts dropped 83 percent. All airlines need COVID-19 to go
away, and in August 2021 Australia was basically under lockdown due to the lingering pandemic.
Malaysia Airlines is the flag carrier and largest airline company in Malaysia; it is also a
member of the OneWorld Airline Alliance. With its headquarters at Kuala Lumpur International
Airport, as of January 2021, Malaysia Airlines flies to 59 destinations in Asia, New Zealand, and
Australia.
Dnata’s Competitors The International Air Transport Association (IATA) reports that airlines outsource more than 50
percent of the ground handling that takes place at airports globally. Ground handling includes
everything a plane may need between the time it arrives at a terminal gate and the time it departs
on its next flight. Speed, efficiency, and accuracy are important in ground handling services to
minimize turnaround time, as faster turnarounds yield higher profits.
Dnata competes with dozens of firms globally in providing airport and aviation services,
such as Egypt Air Ground Services, HAVAS Ground Handling Company, Bahrain Airport
Services, Qatar Aviation Services, New Star Aviation Services, Airmach Aviation, MDFS
Philippines, SATS Ltd., and SAL Ground Services. Two of dnata’s rivals are 1) Angkasa Pura
and 2) Shenzhen Airlines.
Angkasa Pura, comprised of Angkasa Pura I and II, are government entities of the
Indonesian Ministry of State Owned Enterprises. Pura I is headquartered in Kamayoran,
Jakarta, while Pura II is at the Soekarno–Hatta International Airport in Tangerang, Banten.
Much like dnata, Pura I provides ground handling services at about 20 airports in central
Balance Sheet 3/31/20 3/31/21 Percent Change
Equity
Common Stock 0 0 NA NA
Retained Earnings 27,878 7,593 –73%
Treasury Stock 0 0 NA NA
Paid in Capital & Other (4,291) 12,554 –393%
Total Equity 23,587 20,147 –15%
Total Liabilities and Equity 172,062 151,777 –12%
Source: Emirates Group’s 2020–2021 Annual Report, p. 93.
CASE 24 • EMIRATES GROuP—2022 601
and eastern Indonesia, while Pura II does the same at about 20 airports in western Indonesia.
Angkasa Pura could easily expand to become a more serious rival for dnata.
Shenzhen Airlines is headquartered at Shenzhen Bao’an International airport in Shenzhen,
Guangdong, China. A large airline and a member of the Star Alliance, Shenzhen Airlines has
about 200 Airbus and Boeing jets currently in service flying throughout Asia, Africa, Middle
East, Australia, and Europe. However, it also handles airport and aviation services at numerous
locations.
External Issues All airlines and airport ground handling service companies sorely need the COVID-19 pan-
demic to terminate because any interruption to passenger travel for any reason seriously re-
duces both revenues and profits. To make money, airlines need to keep their planes flying and
ground handlers need planes to land and depart. Anything that keeps billion-dollar assets such
as passenger planes from operating severely erodes profitability. Two-thirds of the world’s pas-
senger planes in 2020 lay unused on runways or in hangars, and upwards of 18 airlines filed
for bankruptcy during that time. The airline industry posted a loss of about $320 billion in
passenger revenue in 2020.
How Do Airlines Make Money? Airlines receive the bulk of their revenue from tickets but also generate income from fees, food,
credit card usage, frequent-flyer programs, movement of cargo, and—at times—government
bailouts. Emirates uses all these means to make money.
On average, business travelers account for about 12 percent of global airline-ticketed pas-
sengers but 60 to 75 percent of revenues, as business-class tickets can cost upwards of 10
times the price as coach. Corporations are often willing to pay for business-class flights as
well-rested and less-stressed employees are worth the additional cost of business-class travel.
Although the advent of Zoom and other means of video conferencing is curtailing business
travel significantly, video conferencing is nothing new, and business travel has been in demand
for the last 20 years.
Affluent travelers are a significant source of income for airlines as they often purchase
business-class seating, and Zoom is no replacement for a fancy vacation. To take advantage
of business and high-end vacation travelers, airlines are catering more and more to business-
class customers. Even traditionally low-cost firms such as Texas-based Southwest Airlines and
European carrier RyanAir are competing more aggressively for these customers.
Airlines benefit immensely from their frequent flier programs and also from credit cards
linked to these programs. High-income customers tend to purchase more flights with these cards.
Moreover, the use of these cards in day-to-day purchases provides significant data for marketing
and strategy. These frequent flier miles programs can be worth more than the very airlines that
own them; they are so profitable that airlines are able to offer more attractive pricing on tickets
as well as more and better routes. Many of the rewards earned by customers are not redeemed,
further profiting the airlines.
Personalized Websites Customers today demand increased flexibility and options in the products and services they
buy, and this is also true of how they purchase airline tickets. This shift in buying behavior has
challenged airlines to produce increasingly modern websites that are even more user-friendly
and personalized. Exhibit 6 reveals, perhaps surprisingly, that with respect to home pages that
are dynamic and effective in nature, low-cost carriers are performing significantly better than
full-service carriers. Offering customers customizable features, nudging tactics, personalized
widgets, etc. create a meaningful experience and help increase brand loyalty.
Exhibit 7 reveals that airline travel in terms of passengers is increasing around
3.5 percent annually and is expected to continue at this rate once travel restrictions normalize.
The Asia-Pacific region leads the world, with 33 percent of all global travel originating or con-
cluding in this region. However, one of the main drivers of growth in air travel is the doubling
of low-cost carriers’ market share from 2005 to 2020. The global middle class is also rapidly
growing, especially in China, and many countries and cities are actively engaged in airport
infrastructure investment.
602 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Conclusion
As the pandemic wanes, consumer demand for both business and leisure air travel is expected to
return and grow upwards of 5 percent annually even as video conferencing and online meetings
become the new normal. The Emirates Group has achieved a global reputation for excellence and
seems poised to take advantage of the new normal. But Emirates faces many challenges, threats,
and competitors.
But there are opportunities for the Emirates Group too. For example, as mentioned in the
case, the pandemic bankrupted numerous airline companies, and these could be acquired by
Emirates at a good price. Similarly, there are also many airport ground handling service compa-
nies that could be acquired by dnata. Can you identify the best candidates on both fronts for CEO
Sheikh Al Maktoum to consider bringing into the fold?
EXHIBIT 6 Low-Cost vs. Full-Service Airlines; Nature of Their Corporate Website (in percentage)
Source: Based on information from a variety of sources, including McKinsey’s Global Airline Survey, July 2020.
25
30
35
40
45
20
15
10
5
0
No to basic segmentation Moderate personalized
content
Majority of website is
dynamic
Low-Cost Carriers Full-Service Carriers
EXHIBIT 7 Scheduled Ticketed Passengers in Global Airlines Industry (in millions)
Source: Based on information from a variety of sources, including Statistica.
2017 2018 2019 2020 Pre-Covid 2020
4,095
4,543
0
500
1,000
1,500
2,000
2,500
3,000
3,500
4,000
4,500
5,000
4,378
4,723
1,763
CASE 24 • EMIRATES GROuP—2022 603
There are many viable strategic options that could benefit the company moving forward.
Strategic planning is about making tough choices, as no firm can do everything that will benefit
the enterprise; there simply are not enough funds or people, especially in lean times with the
effects of the pandemic still lingering.
The Emirates Group needs a comprehensive strategic plan developed to most effectively al-
locate scarce resources. Can you conduct the research and perform the analyses necessary to
provide this strategic report to the CEO and top management of the company? Make sure that
your report includes a recommended new vision and mission statement for the company as no
such content is currently available.
References
1. Emirates Group, Annual Report 2020–21, https://cdn.ek.aero/downloads/ek/pdfs/report/
annual_report_2020.pdf.
2. Borko, S., Geerts, W., and Wang, H., “The Travel Industry Turned Upside Down,” Skift
Research and McKinsey & Company, https://www.mckinsey.com/~/media/mckinsey/
industries/travel%20logistics%20and%20infrastructure/our%20insights/the%20travel%20
industry%20turned%20upside%20down%20insights%20analysis%20and%20actions%20
for%20travel%20executives/the-travel-industry-turned-upside-down-insights-analysis-and-
actions-for-travel-executives.pdf.
3. Global Airline Survey, McKinsey, July 2020.
604 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
General Electric, Inc.—2018
www.GE.com , GE
Headquartered in Boston, Massachusetts, General Electric (GE) ranked thirteenth among the
Fortune 500 largest companies by gross revenue. In the 2017 letter to shareholders, GE CEO
John Flannery promised to “own up” to the current state at GE with employees and sharehold-
ers. 2017 was a difficult year for GE financially, losing over $5 billion with CEO Flannery call-
ing 2017 “a very tough year.” Most people associate GE with some appliance in their homes or a
light bulb, and GE does make these devices, but the firm also is heavy into building jet engines,
high-tech medical devices, and wind turbines. Every two seconds around the world a plane takes
off powered by a GE jet engine, and GE’s MRI’s (Magnetic Resonance Imaging) cat scans and
other medical devices help doctors save over 3,000 lives daily.
GE employs 313,000 people that live and work in over 180 countries. The company is still
highly diversified. For example, in March 2018, GE’s Marine Solutions division was chosen by
ASMAR Shipyards in Talcahuano, Chile, to provide an integrated marine propulsion system for
the Chilean Navy’s new Antarctic icebreaking Polar Class vessel. The new vessel will anchor
the Chilean navy’s Antarctic expedition for search and rescue missions, scientific research,
logistic support, and resupplying bases in the Chilean Antarctic Territory. The 350-foot long
vessel will have GE’s full marine propulsion system, including diesel-electric propulsion, GE’s
International Maritime Organization’s (IMO) Tier 3-compliant diesel engine, a complete propul-
sion shaft line and propeller, a tunnel thruster, SeaStream Dynamic Positioning (DP), and vessel
automation system. With the GE installed power of 14.5 megawatts, the vessel will be capable of
breaking 1 meter of ice at 3 knots.
On May 23, 2018, GE’s corporate value declined about $10 billion in market capitaliza-
tion that single day, in what amounted to the worst GE trading day percentage-wise loss since
the height of the financial crisis in early 2009. That day GE’s stock price dropped 7.4 percent
as CEO John Flannery spoke at an annual Electrical Products Group conference in Florida. GE
is in financial trouble as it divests assets and faces a dilemma of whether to use those funds to
shore up the firm’s balance sheet or distribute those funds to shareholders. The iconic American
company needs a good strategic plan going forward.
Copyright by Fred David Books LLC; written by Forest R. David.
History
In 1890, Thomas Edison brought his various businesses together under the name Edison General
Electric Company. Upon a merger with then rival, Thomson-Houston Company, General
Electric (GE) was formed. GE was incorporated in 1892 and in 1896 became one of the original
12 companies listed on the newly formed Dow Jones Industrial Average. GE remains today the
only original company listed on the Dow Index. GE has been buying and selling companies for
over a century, becoming one of the most diversified companies on the planet. However, this
diversification eventually led to its demise and today GE is divesting, trying to become more
homogeneous. Under the leadership of Chairman and CEO Jack Welch from 1981 to 2001, GE
became the classic, revered diversified company that many other firms tried to emulate. When
Welch retired from GE in 2001, he received the largest severance payment ever— $417 million.
Welch had joined GE in 1960 as a chemical engineer. From 1973 to 1979, Welch was head of
GE’s strategic planning division. Welch became GE’s youngest CEO in 1981.
In February 2017, GE announced intentions to close its gender gap by hiring 20,000 women
in technical roles by the year 2020. GE is also seeking to have a 50:50 male to female represen-
tation in all entry-level technical programs. In October 2017, GE announced they would be clos-
ing research and development centers in Shanghai, Munich, and Rio de Janeiro. The company
spends about $5 billion on R&D annually.
CASE 25 • GENERAL ELECTRIC, INC.—2018 605
On May 9, 2018, GE Renewable Energy announced its first wind energy project in Chile
with Arroyo Energy Compañía de Energías Renovables Limitada whereby GE will supply six
3.6 MW wind turbines with 137-meter rotors and 110-meters tower. The machines will be in-
stalled at Chile’s El Maitén and El Nogal wind sites in the south of the country, representing a
total of 21,8 MW. Chile already has 1.7 GW of wind power capacity installed and 4.9 GW of re-
newable energy capacity overall. The Chilean government’s “Energía 2050” plan calls for about
60 percent of the country’s energy demands to be met with renewable energy sources by 2035,
and 70 percent by 2050.
GE’s new $200 million new corporate headquarters will be named “GE Innovation Point.”
Completion of the project is scheduled for mid-2019.
Vision/Mission
Although GE does not use the terms vision and mission, the corporate website implies that the
firm’s vision is to become the world’s premier digital industrial company. The corporate website
also implies that GE’s mission is “to be a focused industrial leader of unmatched scale and diver-
sity, committed to shareholder value, with high-value businesses in critical industries, positioned
to lead in a new digital era.”
GE is a customer-oriented company. Instead of solely focusing on the number of gas tur-
bines, wind turbines, jet engines, or CT scanners produced and sold, the firm’s ultimate purpose
is couched as follows (paraphrased): We work to help children in distant villages get access to
electricity for the first time; we work to help travelers who get home safely; we work to help
patients receive better diagnoses and treatments in the moments that matter most; we understand
customer needs and deliver outcomes for them—when we all view business this way, we end up
in a good place for our customers, employees, and owners.
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure CEO John Flannery was appointed CEO of GE in August 2017 and Chairman in October 2017.
He has a 30-year career at GE, most notably on turning around GE’s Healthcare segment that
generates about $20 billion in revenues annually. CFO Jamie Miller is new since November
2017 along with four other new CEOs of divisions. Mr. Flannery is moving quickly in putting
new people in high positions within the firm. In addition, GE’s 23-member board is being re-
duced in 2018. As illustrated in Exhibit 1, GE’s organizational structure is basically divisional,
with numerous CEO’s, but with all 24 top executives reporting to CEO Flannery.
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1. John Flannery, Chairman and CEO of GE
2. Jay Ireland, President and CEO of GE Africa
3. Sue Siegel, Chief Information Officer at GE, and CEO of GE Ventures
4. David Joyce, Vice Chair of GE and President and CEO of GE Aviation
5. Russell Stokes, SVP of GE, and President and CEO of GE Power
6. Jérôme Pécresse, President and CEO of GE Renewable Energy
7. Rafael Santana, President and CEO of GE Transportation
8. Paul McElhinney, SVP of GE, and President and CEO of Power Services
9. Kieran Murphy, President and CEO of GE Healthcare
10. Duncan Berry, CEO of LM Wind Power
11. Lorenzo Simonelli, SVP of GE, and President and CEO of Baker Hughes
12. William Ruh, SVP & Chief Digital Officer, CEO of GE Digital
13. Victor Abate, SVP and Chief Technology Officer
14. Alex Dimitrief, SVP and General Counsel
15. Matthew Cribbons, VP, Investor Communications
16. Jan Hauser, VP, Controller, and Chief Accounting Officer
17. Daniel Janki, SVP, GE Treasurer and Global Operations
18. Raghu Krishnamoorthy, SVP and Chief HR Officer
19. Deirdre Latour, VP, Senior Advisor and Chief Communications Officer
20. Puneet Mahajan, VP, Financial Planning and Analysis
21. Jamie Miller, SVP and CFO
22. Jamey Mock, VP, Audit Staff
23. Alec Burger, VP and President, GE Capital
24. William Ruh, SVP & Chief Digital Officer, and CEO or GE Digital
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Annual Report, other company documents, and a variety of other sources. GE’s most recent list of corporate executives are given at https://www.ge.com/about-us/leadership/executives.
EXHIBIT 1 GE Top Executives and Organizational Chart
606 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Current Strategies GE’s 2017 Annual Report describes the firm’s overall strategy as focusing upon four key areas:
1) Outcomes for customers, 2) GE’s businesses, 3) Cash flow, and 4) Creating a culture of ac-
countability. When discussing creating outcomes for customers, GE is not simply referring to
the total number of jet engines or CAT scanners it manufactures, rather how the firm’s actions
impact the lives of customers in addressing their needs. For example, GE also considers out-
comes to be: providing cleaner energy, better diagnoses of diseases, or simply being there for
customers when nobody else is. One of GE’s largest customers, American Airlines, through their
CEO Robert Isom routinely thanks GE and says “American Airlines depends on a strong GE.”
Using data analytics, GE produces a turboprop engine that has 10 percent more power than rival
products with 20 percent fuel efficiency. This is just one example of many in how GE is working
to improve the lives of its customers while providing measurable outcomes other than simply
raw number of products produced to gauge its success.
GE’s CEO announced in the 2017 Annual Report that the firm is moving forward to focus on
three key business segments: aviation, healthcare, and renewable energy, which account for the
bulk of the firm’s revenues and profits aside from the power division, which is currently struggling;
GE appears to be moving away from devoting resources to power generation. Earnings were down
45 percent for power in 2017, and it appears GE is currently entering a retrenchment strategy with
this division, as their CEO says “resetting and refocusing.” This objective will mainly be executed
through cost-cutting and counting on improved developments in sub-Saharan Africa. To date, there
are 600 million people living in sub-Saharan Africa without electricity.
GE is heavily focused on cash management, which is another way GE is saying it wishes
to cut costs and become more efficient. In 2017, GE cut costs of $1.7 billion and has a target
to cut an additional $2 billion in 2018. GE’s cost-cutting measures currently include reduc-
ing dividends, laying off employees, reducing overhead, reducing inventory, and attempting to
cut costs on all products. In addition, senior executive bonuses are being tied more closely to
performance.
Buying and Selling Divisions Consistent with the company’s long history of buying and selling businesses, in 2015, GE
Capital divested its transportation-finance unit to Canada’s Bank of Montreal. In 2016, Haier
Group acquired GE’s appliance division for $5.4 billion. In 2017, GE received final approval
to combine its GE Oil and Gas segment with Baker Hughes to create a separate publicly traded
company controlled by GE.
GE acquired several firms in 2017 including ServiceMax and LM Wind Power. In total,
the two acquisitions cost GE $2.6 billion, but should improve GE’s cloud technology and wind
turbine production. LM Wind Power was one of the largest wind turbine blade producers in the
world. GE divested its water business for $3.1 billion and has an agreement to sell its Industrial
Solutions business for $2.6 billion to ABB Group based in Zurich, Switzerland. Both the Water
business and Industrial Solutions business were contained within GE Power. GE expects to sell
its non-U.S. lighting business by mid-2018, subject to completing the paperwork and passing
legal compliance with various local and national governments.
Finance The year 2017 was a difficult year for GE financially, with revenues down 1 percent, but net
income down significantly due to increased cost of goods sold and operating expenses. The
firm was forced to cut its quarterly dividend substantially from $0.24 per share to $0.12 cents
per share and lay off thousands of workers, but still paid $12.1 billion in dividends and stock
buybacks. The firm did benefit greatly from tax reform with over a $3 billion tax credit. CEO
Flannery has indicated over $20 billion of industrial assets will be divested moving forward,
including substantially reducing the size of its poorest performing division, GE Capital, which
alone lost over $6 billion in 2017.
GE’s recent income statements and balance sheets are provided in Exhibit 2 and Exhibit 3,
respectively. Note the declines in both revenues and net income. Note also the $13 billion
increase in Goodwill on the 2017 balance sheet, indicating that the company is still paying argu-
ably too much for its acquisitions.
CASE 25 • GENERAL ELECTRIC, INC.—2018 607
EXHIBIT 2 GE’s Income Statements (in millions USD)
Income Statement 12/31/16 12/31/17 Percent Change
Revenues $123,693 $122,092 –1.29%
Cost of Goods Sold 90,280 104,102 15.31%
Gross Profit 33,413 17,990 –46.16%
Operating Expenses 19,358 21,912 13.19%
EBIT 14,055 (3,922) –127.90%
Interest Expense 5,025 4,869 –3.10%
EBT 9,030 (8,791) –197.35%
Tax (464) (3,043) 555.82%
Non-Recurring Events 0 (38) NA NA
Net Income 9,494 (5,786) –160.94%
Source: Based on 2017 Annual Report and other company data.
Balance Sheet 12/31/16 12/31/17 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term
Investments
$92,442 $81,996 –11%
Accounts Receivable 42,263 41,075 –3%
Inventory 22,354 21,923 –2%
Other Current Assets 0 0 NA NA
Total Current Assets 157,059 144,994 –8%
Property Plant & Equipment 52,263 58,117 11%
Goodwill 70,438 83,968 19%
Intangibles 16,436 20,273 23%
Other Long-Term Assets 68,987 70,593 2%
Total Assets 365,183 377,945 3%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 14,435 76,297 429%
Other Current Liabilities 67,145 44,713 –33%
Total Current Liabilities 81,580 121,010 48%
Long-Term Debt 105,080 108,575 3%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 98,008 80,699 –18%
Total Liabilities 284,668 310,284 9%
Equity
Common Stock 702 702 0%
Retained Earnings 139,532 125,682 –10%
Treasury Stock (83,038) (84,902) –2%
Paid in Capital & Other 23,319 26,179 12%
Total Equity 80,515 67,661 –16%
Total Liabilities and Equity 365,183 377,945 3%
EXHIBIT 3 GE’s Balance Sheets (in millions USD)
Source: Based on 2017 Annual Report and company data.
GE Segments
GE operates in eight divisions with Aviation and Healthcare being the leaders in profits, and
Power being the leader in total revenues. Managing segments effectively and efficiently always
has been and remains the key for GE to prosper; the firm is trying to get back on course in this
608 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
regard. CEO Flannery has indicated GE will scale back its Capital Division and Expand Aviation
and Healthcare along with Renewable Energy which is viewed as the future.
GE Power GE Power has a mission to provide affordable, reliable and sustainable energy to custom-
ers around the world. Major products GE produces within this division include: gas & steam
turbines, generators, high voltage equipment, engines, and digital solutions. As revealed in
Exhibits 4 and 5, revenues from the Power segment in 2017 declined slightly, but profits de-
clined significantly in 2017. GE maintains a 50 percent market share in the heavy-duty turbine
market; however this same market is plagued by overcapacity and declining prices and is a de-
clining industry overall. With lower profit margins down 7 percent in 2017 alone, orders down
13 percent, and GE being such a substantial player in the turbine market, resources devoted to
this division may be diverted to faster-growing areas such as renewable energy.
GE Power is further plagued by lower upgrade demand (customers are simply happy with
their current products), supply chain over capacity, and difficulty in customers obtaining financ-
ing. The outlook for this industry looks bleak moving forward with a possible tactic of focusing
on operational efficiencies and slowly moving capital resources to other divisions. The Power
Division at GE can be in some cases considered a Cash Cow on a BCG Matrix as GE is clearly
the market leader, but industry-wide revenues/profits are not attractive. GE’s Power revenues from
the United States totaled $11.3 billion with revenues from international operations totaling 24.7
billion, led by the Middle East and Africa region at $8.0 billion in revenue. In total, worldwide,
about half of the division’s revenue was derived from equipment and half from services.
GE Renewable Energy GE Renewable Energy provides the same mission as its Power Division except with focus on
renewable energy sources. Key products are wind turbines and hydropower solutions. Profit
margins are up 7 percent in 2017 with a backlog increase of 15 percent indicating GE is not ef-
fectively meeting demand. Increased competition resulting in lower prices and improvements
in quality may keep pressure on profit margins in this industry moving forward. Revenues from
the United States totaled $4.8 billion with revenues from international operations totaling $5.4
2016 Revenues 2017 Revenues
$ 3 6 .8
$ 9 .0
Pow er
O il
& G
as
Ren ew
ab le
E ne
rg y
A vi
at io
n
H ea
lth ca
re
Tra ns
po rta
tio n
Lig ht
in g
Cap ita
l
$ 1 2 .9
$ 2 6
.3
$ 1 8 .3
$ 4 .7
$ 4 .8
$ 1 0 .9
$ 3 6 .0
$ 1 0 .3
$ 1 7 .2
$ 2
7 .4
$ 1 9 .1
$ 4 .2
$ 2 .0
$ 9 .1
0.0
5.0
10.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
35.0
40.0
GE’s Segment Revenues
EXHIBIT 4 GE’s Segment Revenues (in billions USD)
Source: Based on the GE 2017 Annual Report and other company information.
CASE 25 • GENERAL ELECTRIC, INC.—2018 609
billion, led by the Americas region with $2.0 billion in revenue. Equipment accounted for 79
percent of the division’s revenues with services accounting for the balance. Onshore wind ac-
counted for 86 percent of the division’s revenues; offshore wind only accounted for 3 percent.
Hydropower accounted for the remaining 11 percent of divisional revenues.
GE Oil and Gas GE Oil and Gas appears to be a relic of the past. GE does not engage in drilling like a large oil
company, instead, GE provides the digital solutions and equipment that help oil firms find and
extract oil and gas products. Key products include: turbo-machinery, equipment, and digital
solutions. The division’s stated mission is to provide these products across the oil and gas value
chain. Interestingly, GE used the term value chain here, as it is probable GE is operating on the
least profitable area of the value chain in this industry, an area with very poor profit margins.
The division’s profit margins declined 1.3 percent in 2017, but studying Exhibits 4 and 5, it is
clear to see substantial revenue with minuscule profits. Orders were up 56 percent in 2017 for
the division, so GE as a whole is actually increasing its commitment to the poorest performing
division from a profit margin perspective other than GE Capital.
GE revenues from the U.S. Oil and Gas segment totaled $4.4 billion with revenues from
international operations totaling $12.8 billion led by the Middle East and Africa region at $4.8
billion in revenue. In total, worldwide, about 40 percent of the division’s revenue was derived
from equipment and half from services.
GE Aviation If constructing a BCG Matrix, GE Aviation likely lands in the Quadrant labeled Stars, certainly
if the BCG focused on the narrow industry GE operates within in both segments. GE’s Aviation
Division in 2017 enjoyed a profit margin increase of 24 percent with orders and a backlog
up 12 and 10 percent, respectively. The division is on a mission to design and manufacture
advanced engines and systems for its customers. The bulk of profits in this division are derived
from both commercial and military engines, but the division also produces aviation systems
and other machinery needed to support flight. The demand for aircraft engines is expected to
2016 Profit 2017 Profit
Pow er
Ren ew
ab le
E ne
rg y
O il
& G
as
A vi
at io
n
H ea
lth ca
re
Tra ns
po rta
tio n
Lig ht
in g
Cap ita
l
GE’s Segment Profits
$ 5 .1
$ 0 .6 $
1 .4
$ 6 .1
$ 3 .2
$ 1 .1
$ 0 .2
– $ 1 .3
$ 2 .8
$ 0 .7
$ 0 .2
$ 6 .6
$ 3 .4
$ 0 .8
$ 0 .0
– $ 6 .8
–$8.0
–$6.0
–$4.0
–$2.0
$0.0
$2.0
$4.0
$6.0
$8.0
EXHIBIT 5 GE’s Segment Profits (in billions USD)
Source: Based on 2017 Annual Report and other company information.
610 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Europe
18%
Asia
18%
Middle East
and Africa
16%
Americas
10%
U.S.
38%
GE’s 2017 Revenues by Region
EXHIBIT 6 GE’s Revenues by Region as a Percent of GE Total Revenues
Source: Based on 2017 Annual Report and other company information.
be robust in the future as millions of people in China and India, and other emerging markets
are increasingly able to afford air travel. Revenues from the United States totaled $10.8 billion
with revenues from international operations totaling $16.6 billion led by the Europe region with
$6.2 billion in revenue. Equipment accounted for 36 percent of the division’s revenues with ser-
vices accounting for the balance. Commercial engines and services accounted for 73 percent of
the division’s revenues with military and systems only accounting for 14 and 13 percent.
GE Healthcare GE Healthcare is a booming business as evidenced by Exhibits 4 and 5. Profit margins were up
18 percent in 2017 with orders and backlogs up 6 and 8 percent, respectively. The division is on
a mission to create precision healthcare through delivering outcomes. Interesting use of the word
“outcomes” in the division’s mission as CEO Flannery suggested the firm will start measuring
itself on outcomes rather than simply how many products were produced or what the quarterly
or yearly income was for a division. Recall that CEO Flannery became CEO of GE after head-
ing up the Healthcare Division. Growth in emerging markets is huge for this division and in
markets such as the United States and Europe; populations are aging everywhere. Revenues
from the United States totaled $8.6 billion with revenues from international operations totaling
$10.6 billion led by the Asia region with $4.9 billion in revenue. Equipment accounted for 62
percent of the division’s revenues with services accounting for the balance.
GE Transportation and Lighting GE Transportation and Lighting only account for about 5 percent of 2017 revenues. GE transpor-
tation supplies the railroad, mining, and marine industry with engines, equipment, locomotives,
and digital solutions. GE Lighting focuses on LED technology and creating smart lighting situ-
ations for homes and businesses. Both transportation and lighting saw profit margins, revenues,
and profits all decline in 2017, however, neither business is a major player in GE’s overall port-
folio of products. Currently, the majority of GE’s non-U.S. lighting business is expected to be
sold in 2018, which accounted for $500 million in sales in 2017 compared to $1.5 billion for U.S.
lighting operations. GE Transportation revenues for the United States were $2.4 billion to $1.8
billion for non-U.S.
GE Capital GE Capital helps to finance customers’ orders, provides product support, and invests in markets
with longer-term hopes of turning a profit. Currently, GE is drastically reducing its exposure to
this division, which lost $6.8 billion in 2017. About $4.4 billion in revenues were derived from
the United States and $4.7 billion derived from outside the United States in 2017.
Exhibit 6 reveals the bulk of GE’s 2017 revenues are derived from outside the United
States. One interesting fact not revealed in Exhibit 6 is revenues in every region increased in
CASE 25 • GENERAL ELECTRIC, INC.—2018 611
2017 except for the U.S. division, where revenues declined enough to create an overall de-
cline of 1 percent companywide. GE did not provide detailed breakdowns on product data in
various regions, but from a close examination of Exhibit 4, it is difficult to attribute any one
division’s sales in the United States as the principal culprit. Further suggesting that across all
product lines, U.S.-based revenues simply lagged international derived revenues.
Competitors
Caterpillar, Siemens, and United Technologies are the largest GE rivals corresponding to the
three main GE divisions (power turbines, diagnostic devices, and jet engines, respectively).
However, Emerson Electric Company (EMS) and Haier Group Corporation (headquartered in
Qingdao, China) are also competitors.
Siemens AG Headquartered in Berlin and Munich, Siemens is very similar to GE. Siemens is the largest
industrial manufacturing company in Europe, but the company has branch offices around the
world. Siemens’ principal segments are 1) Industry, Energy, Healthcare and 2) Infrastructure and
Cities. Siemens is a major producer of medical diagnostics equipment; its medical healthcare
division generates about 12 percent of the company’s total sales and is its second-most profitable
unit after the industrial automation division. Siemens and its subsidiaries employ about 372,000
people worldwide and reported global revenue of around €83 billion in 2017.
Siemens produces gas and steam turbines; generators; compressors; on- and offshore
wind turbines; high-voltage transmission products; power transformers; high-voltage switch-
ing products and systems; alternating and direct current transmission systems; medium-voltage
components and systems; and power automation products. The company also produces all
kinds of lighting products such as incandescent, halogen, compact fluorescent, fluorescent,
high-intensity discharge and Xenon lamps; opto-electronic semiconductor light sources such as
light emitting diodes (LEDs), organic LEDs, high power laser diodes, LED systems and LED
luminaires; electronic equipment including electronic ballasts; lighting control and management
systems; and related precision components.
Siemens produces all kinds of medical products such as clinical information technology
systems; hearing instruments; in-vitro diagnostics equipment; imaging equipment including an-
giography, computed tomography, fluoroscopy, magnetic resonance, mammography, molecular
imaging ultrasound, and x-ray equipment; and radiation oncology and particle therapy equip-
ment. The company also produces transportation and logistics-related products such as equip-
ment and systems for rail transportation including rail vehicles for mass transit, regional and
long-distance transportation, locomotives, equipment and systems for rail electrification, central
control systems, and automated train controls.
Emerson Electric Company (EMS) Headquartered in St. Louis, Missouri, Emerson Electric is a technology and engineering com-
pany that produces parts and products for the industrial, commercial, and residential markets
worldwide. The company’s Automation Solutions segment most closely competes with GE.
Emerson offers software; measurement and analytical instrumentation; valves, actuators, and
regulators; industry services and solutions; process control systems and solutions; and digital
plant solutions. Emerson serves oil and gas, refining, chemicals, power generation, pharmaceu-
ticals, food and beverages, automotive, pulp and paper, metal and mining, and municipal water
supplies markets.
Caterpillar, Inc. (CAT) Headquartered in Deerfield, Illinois, Caterpillar manufactures and sells diesel and natural gas
engines, industrial gas turbines, and diesel-electric locomotives for construction, resource,
and energy and transportation industries. Many of these items compete with GE products.
Caterpillar’s Energy & Transportation segment produces and markets reciprocating engine pow-
ered generator sets; reciprocating engines; integrated systems used in the electric power genera-
tion industry; turbines, centrifugal gas compressors, and related services; integrated systems and
solutions for the marine and oil and gas industries; remanufactured reciprocating engines and
612 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
components; and diesel-electric locomotives and components. Many of these items also compete
directly with GE.
Haier Group Corporation In 2016, GE sold its appliances business to Haier Group Corporation of China for $5.4 billion in
cash. The GE divestiture included the stake of 48.4 percent that GE Appliances owned in Mabe,
a Mexican appliances company. Qingdao Hai'er, a Chinese appliances company, had revenues of
about $33 billion prior to acquiring GE Appliance. GE, however, even through 2018, continues
to use the GE Appliances brand, and the unit’s headquarters remains in Louisville, Kentucky.
Since the divestiture, Haier and GE have engaged in joint collaboration on many fronts, includ-
ing healthcare and advanced manufacturing. In addition, since the acquisition, GE products have
been distributed through Qingdao Hai'er in China. At the time of the acquisition, GE Appliances
had revenue of about $6 billion and employed about 12,000 people.
United Technologies Corporation (UTX) Headquartered in Farmington, Connecticut, United Technologies owns Pratt & Whitney (P&W)
that competes directly with GE. P&W manufactures aircraft engines for commercial, military,
business jet, and general aviation markets, and provides aftermarket maintenance, repair, and
overhaul, as well as fleet management services—just like GE. In addition to P&W, United
Technologies has an Aerospace Systems segment that provides electric power generation, power
management, and distribution systems, as well as numerous air data and aircraft sensing sys-
tems, engine control, intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance systems.
Exhibit 7 provides a comparison of GE, Emerson Electric, and Caterpillar in 2018. Note
that GE is substantially larger than Caterpillar and Emerson, but GE is unprofitable whereas the
rival firms are doing quite well.
External Issues
Medical Devices
The medical devices industry had revenues in 2017 of $340 billion, with growth around
5 percent. One key advantage to doing business in this field is the aging population around
the world and an increasing birthrate in the developing world. GE produces an array of ir-
radiation devices, or diagnostic imaging devices, including CAT scanner, X-rays, beta-rays,
and more. GE is the largest player in the irradiation device market with around 20 percent
market share in the United States, followed by Siemens AG and Phillips Healthcare with
10 and 7 percent market shares. Globally, Siemens has 20 percent more revenues than GE
in diagnostic imaging sales and GE has 15 percent higher sales than Phillips. Globally, GE
ranks eighth based on revenues in all devices under the medical devices umbrella, in which
the industry is estimated to have sales over $340 billion. Estimating sales is difficult though
Caterpillar GE Emerson united Technologies
$ Market Capitalization 90B 130B 45B 102B
# of Employees 98K 313K 77K 204K
$ Revenue 45B 121B 15.9B 60B
% Profit Margin 1.7 –4.8 10.9 7.6
$ EBITDA 8.5B 5.13B 3.4B 12.1
% Operating Margin 6.5 –1.8 17.4 13.2
$ Net Income 745M –5.9B 1.7B 4.6B
% ROA 4.6 –0.37 9.30 5.3
$ EPS 1.26 –0.72 2.48 5.7
EXHIBIT 7 A Comparison of United Technologies, GE, Caterpillar, and Emerson Electric
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
CASE 25 • GENERAL ELECTRIC, INC.—2018 613
because estimates may include hospital beds made by Stryker in some estimates, but other
estimates may categorize hospital beds as something different than medical devices, which
are generally thought of as MRI’s CAT scans, X-rays, and other devices discussed earlier. Of
the various categories of medical devices in the industry, diagnostic imaging or irradiation
devices are third in global sales behind both vitro diagnostics and cardiology. Growth rates
are forecasted around 3.3 percent for diagnostic imaging devices but growth near 6 percent
are forecasted for the two former areas of medical devices. GE is not a major player in either
of these areas.
While the U.S. market is the world’s largest and most profitable on virtually everything
medical, China, India, Latin America, and the Middle East are increasingly providing opportu-
nities. Asia, in particular, has almost an epidemic, according to some medical experts, with an
increasing number of smokers and an increased desire for fast food—accounting for 60 percent
of cardiovascular deaths worldwide.
Engines and Turbines Engines and turbines account for over $50 billion in annual industry sales in the United States,
but growth is expected to continue to be flat moving forward. Most of the big players in this
industry produce giant diesel engines, such as Caterpillar and Cummings, and these engines
account for nearly 30 percent of the sales. Caterpillar and Cummings both operate in turbine
power generation, and the largest portion of revenues, at 32 percent, are generated from turbines
and turbine-related products. GE’s power division is most closely related to this industry, and to
a lesser extent, GE’s renewable division only because renewables currently do not count for a
large portion of either GE’s or the power generating industries revenues. Gas-powered turbines
still dominate the industry with wind-powered turbines contributing practically nothing to over-
all industry revenues. Overall, power production has been a poor revenue-generating industry
with flat growth expected.
Aviation The aviation industry in the United States accounts for over $230 billion in annual revenues, with
half of that revenue going to exports. Growth has been 4 percent but is expected to decline to 1 per-
cent annually, moving from 2018 to 2023. The industry includes both aircraft builders and engine
builders, with GE being the market leader on aircraft engine production. The industry has benefited
from an improving U.S. economy and a growing middle class abroad in emerging markets. In total,
around 60 percent of industry profits are derived from aircraft construction, while the other 40 per-
cent is split evenly between engines and miscellaneous aircraft parts.
GE’s largest aircraft engine competitor is Pratt &Whitney owned by United Technologies
Corporation. Pratt & Whitney produces engines for commercial, military, and business. Rolls-
Royce is also a player in the jet engine business, being about the same size as Pratt & Whitney,
with both firms’ combined revenues from jet engines being about the same as GE’s. Both firms
have larger revenues in the defense industry as a whole than GE. The three firms operate what
some consider an oligopoly in the industry. However, Boeing, Airbus, and other airline custom-
ers do have bargaining power over the engine producers, so much so that engine manufacturers
will even take a loss on the sale of engines to ensure long-term parts, repairs, and maintenance
business.
GE also competes to a lesser extent with Boeing, Lockheed Martin, and many others
on various aviation services—mostly in the defense-related business, where GE only ranks
twenty-fourth globally. Military spending is increasing both domestically and globally with
China, India, and Russia leading the way.
There has been significant and growing demand for passenger airlines over the last
several years. Boeing has routinely had around 5,700 aircraft on backorder, annually, while
over the same timeframe, Airbus has routinely had around 6,700 aircraft on backorder. With
this strong demand, both airline producers are continuing to increase production. This is
great news for firms like GE who produce the engines used on commercial aircraft. Two
aircraft areas that are not performing as well are the jumbo jets and business jets. Engine
suppliers are somewhat dependent on the airline manufacturers meeting demand in a timely
manner. GE can be as efficient as possible on producing jet engines, but if the planes are not
ready, GE suffers.
614 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Global Trade Trends There is an increased concern among corporations and nations over the rise in protectionism
and nationalism. New fears of restrictions in global trade have made some business leaders such
as GE’s CEO uneasy. GE, for example, sells 60 percent of what they make abroad and would
be hampered by new tariffs, reductions to NAFTA and even trade tensions between the United
States and China. The United States recently imposed tariffs on steel and aluminum imports.
According to GE’s Global Innovation Barometer, 55 percent of executives around the world,
ironically, indicate they believe further protectionist policies would be beneficial for their busi-
ness operations. Global trade trends are, however, an issue to be mindful of going forward.
Global Opportunities for GE While the world is significantly more developed than ever before, many people around the world
still lack the basic necessities that many take for granted. Over 600 million people, for example,
in sub-Saharan Africa, lack electricity, and in total, 1.5 billion people across the world, or about
20 percent of the world’s population still lack basic healthcare, electricity, or modern transpor-
tation. Many countries around the world are adding new infrastructure, including the United
States; China, for example estimates that by 2020 it will need 3 million additional hospital beds.
Southeast Asia’s infrastructure spending is increasing by $180 billion each year.
Barriers to Entry A positive factor for GE going forward is that barriers to entry in both its healthcare and jet en-
gine production are abnormally high. Several key reasons are both industries require high R&D
expenditures along with legal and regulatory hurdles to jump. Smaller firms, even if they were
able to produce viable products, would have to compete with the relatively few giant firms that
produce these devices after extensive negotiations with potential customers. Medical devices
also come with heavy patent protection and even if patents have expired, it is difficult to get doc-
tors and hospitals to switch to products produced by a lesser-known firm if the products are not
exceptionally better or less expensive upfront to operate. Product liability insurance for medical
device manufacturers is higher than in other industries. The high barriers to entry in both indus-
tries offer some protection for legacy firms such as GE.
Future
In March 2018, GE Renewable Energy revealed plans to develop the largest, most powerful
offshore wind turbine on the planet: the Haliade-X. This turbine features a 12 MW direct drive
generator and an industry-leading gross capacity factor of 63 percent. The Haliade-X will pro-
duce 45 percent more energy than any other offshore turbine available today. GE is investing
more than $400 million in 2018 to 2022 to develop and deploy the Haliade, which will tower 260
meters over the sea, more than five times the size of the iconic Arc de Triomphe in Paris, France.
The new Haliade-X 12 MW will house a 220-meter rotor designed and manufactured by GE’s
LM Wind Power; the 107-meter-long blades will be the longest offshore blades in the industry.
One Haliade-X 12 MW turbine will generate up to 67 GWh annually, enough clean power for
up to 16,000 households per turbine, and up to 1 million European households in a 750 MW
wind-farm configuration.
Between 2018 and 2020, GE plans to sell its 62.5 percent stake in Baker Hughes to
strengthen its balance sheet and simplify operations. In July 2017, General Electric had acquired
Baker Hughes and merged the affiliate with its oil and gas equipment and services businesses.
However, share prices of both the companies plunged after the acquisition and Baker Hughes
has lost 39.2 percent of its value in the twelve months following the acquisition.
GE needs a clear strategic plan to guide its path forward to reverse negative profitability.
Shareholders, customers, employees, and creditors all expect GE top management to lead the
way to a bright future.
CASE 26 • BARWA GROuP—2022 615
Barwa Group—2022
barwa.com.qa
Headquartered in Doha, Qatar, the Barwa Group (Barwa), provides real-estate develop-
ment, construction, and related financial services throughout the Middle East. With about
200 employees, the company builds residential housing, apartment complexes, condomini-
ums, supermarkets, mosques, shopping centers, and tourist centers. Projects completed since
2012 include properties at Mesaleed, Mesaimeer, Barwa Al Baraha, Madinat Al Mawater, and
Barwa Village.
At year-end 2020, Barwa’s real-estate portfolio consisted of 8,148 residential apartments;
336,552 square meters of shops, showrooms, and office space; 445,779 square meters of warehouses;
and 701 hotel rooms. The average occupancy rate for Barwa properties exceeds 90 percent, so the
company is doing quite well. In fact, 81.5 percent of the company’s revenue is generated from rental
properties, 96.7 percent of the company’s operating profit is generated through recurring rental, and
the company has a low debt-to-equity ratio of 1:2.
A key part of Barwa’s strategic plan for 2021 and beyond is to strengthen its partnership with
the government of Qatar, which successfully bid for the 2022 FIFA World Cup, making it the first
Muslim and Arab country to host the World Cup. This event is spurring real-estate development
in Qatar, which is a further positive for Barwa. Qatar is also set to host the 2030 Asian Games.
Qatar is a country of 3 million people located in the Middle East, on a peninsula in the
Persian Gulf. Qatar is known for its beautiful beaches, the Corniche waterfront promenade, the
capital city of Doha, and ultramodern architecture. Qatar’s neighbor to the south is Saudi Arabia;
the island country of Bahrain is to Qatar’s northeast. A very wealthy country due to its huge oil
reserves, Qatar is basically surrounded by water in the Gulf of Bahrain. The world-renowned Al
Jazeera Media Network is based in this country. The overwhelming majority of the country’s
residents are expatriates, with migrant laborers making up a significant percentage, hence the
Barwa Al Baraha project in the next section.
History
Barwa was founded in 2005 and is today listed on the Qatar Stock Exchange with the ticker sym-
bol BRES. In 2009, the company began building 1,000 residential housing units in Mesaimeer
along with a supermarket, nursery, and mosque. In 2010, the company completed is Barwa Al
Baraha project, a city designed for laborers, in the Al Wakrah area. In 2017, Barwa began build-
ing its Madinat Al Mawater project, designed to include hundreds of apartments as well as used-
car lots, shops, and warehouses. Today, Barwa is Qatar’s largest real-estate development and
managing company.
Vision/Mission
Barwa strives to help implement the Qatar National Vision 2030 sponsored by His Highness
Sheikh Tamim bin Hamad Al Thani, the Emir of Qatar. His family has ruled Qatar for two
centuries.
In Barwa’s vision statement, featured on the corporate website, the focus is on reliability,
values, and sustainability, centered on its stakeholders.
Barwa’s mission statement is a simple proposition of developing superior home, office, and
entertainment spaces with efficiency. The vision and mission statements can be viewed on the
company’s website: www.barwa.com.qa/en .
616 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Internal Issues
Key Projects In their mid-year 2021 report, Barwa reported that work continues on several new projects,
including the following:
1. The third phase of the Mawater City Project, which began in August 2019 on 418,000
square meters of land, includes 118 galleries, a hypermarket, car service centers, a car parts
center, and a showroom for an automobile agency. This phase is an extension of Phases 1
and 2 of the project.
2. The Qatar Schools Project Development Agreement, implemented by Qatar’s Public-
Private Partnership system, is expected to complete in May 2022 and service 6,000
students, with Barwa receiving guaranteed rental income for a period of 25 years.
3. Construction work continues on Madinatna, within the city of Al-Wakra, which is
intended as a residential city for families, and in Baraha Al Janoub, which is a workers’
city. Development work on the two projects is expected to be completed in April 2022.
Madinatna has capacity for accommodate 6,780 residential apartments that can house
a total of 27,000 people. Barahat Al Janoub is to consist of 1,404 apartments and can
accommodate 67,360 workers.
4. In 2020, Barwa started selling residential units of the Dara (A) project in Lusail City,
consisting of 4 five-floor residential buildings that each comprise 271 apartments.
5. The Mukaynis Compound residential city project consists of 3,170 residential villas that
can accommodate more than 100,000 workers.
6. Phase 2 of the Al Khor workers sports complex has 516 apartments, a hypermarket, and a
multi-purpose hall.
Segments
Barwa operates under four broad segment categories: 1) real estate developments in Qatar, 2)
international real estate, 3) business services, and 4) infrastructure services. However, the Barwa
2020 Annual Report discusses the company’s segments in terms of 9 categories: 1) Residential,
2) Mixed Use & Commercial, 3) Industrial, 4) Worker Accommodation, 5) PPP Development
Program, 6) Land Bank, 7) International Real Estate Investments, 8) Independent Subsidiaries,
and 9) International Associate Companies.
The Residential segment includes Madinatna, Dukhan City Project, Alaqaria Tower, and
Alaqaria Projects Mesaieed. The Mixed Use & Commercial segment includes Barwa Village,
Madinat Mawater, and Barwa Al Sadd. The Industrial segment includes Umm Shahrain
Warehouses (38 retail shops, 13 electrical substations, roads, and firefighting systems) and
Al Baraha Workshops & Storage. The Workers Accommodation category includes Workers
Accommodation in Barwa Al Baraha, Mukaynis Compound, Al Khor Workers Sports Complex,
and Barahat al Janoub. “Public–Private Partnership” (PPP) Development includes the Qatar
Schools operations. Land Bank includes Lusail Land and Phase 3 of Barwa Al Baraha, Phase
3 of Barwa City, Phase 2 of the Dara project, and Barwa Al Doha. International Real Estate
Investments include North Row and Cavendish Property in London, Marrakesh Project and
Fez Project in Morocco, Larnaca Land in Cyprus, Bahrain Bay Project in Bahrain, and Riyadh
Land Plot in Riyadh. Independent Subsidiaries include Waseef and Qatar Project Management.
International Associate Companies include Nuzul Holdings in Bahrain and Shaza Hotels
Company in Saudi Arabia, Oman, and the United Arab Emirates.
As indicated in Exhibit 1, Barwa uses neither of the above-mentioned potential segment
breakdowns when providing financial data to the public. Exhibit 1 provides revenue and profit
information for Barwa by segment, but note that the segments are broad categories rather than
specific projects, products, locations, cities, or regions. If the company has more revealing seg-
ment data, and it quite assuredly does, it does not make such information available to the public.
Organizational Structure Barwa has various segments described in nebulous ways on its corporate website and in its 2020
Annual Report, and no organizational chart or clear specification of top executive responsibilities
is given in either place. Based on what is provided, however, the company apparently operates
CASE 26 • BARWA GROuP—2022 617
utilizing a functional (centralized) organizational design, because there are no divisional head
persons listed by title or otherwise, either on the corporate website or in the company’s 2020
Annual Report.
Based on all the segment information provided above, albeit disjointedly in the company’s
disclosures, Barwa is clearly a projects-oriented company, being a construction firm with various
ongoing projects either in the construction phase or completed and managed. Historically, of all
the types of organizational structure, a matrix-type design is generally the most effective and ef-
ficient for this type of firm.
Let us examine how Barwa is currently organized. Exhibit 2 provides a list and array of
Barwa’s top executives. Note that there are no top executives specified for the company’s various
projects, products, regions, or otherwise, thus indicating a very centralized operation. Executive
titles do not align with company segments, which is a problem for the firm.
EXHIBIT 1 Barwa’s Segments’ Revenue and Profits for 2019 versus 2020 (in QR 000)
Source: Based on information in the Barwa 2020 Annual Report, pp. 107–108.
External Parties Real Estate Business Services Other Services
2019 2020 2019 2020 2019 2020
Profit on sale of property 3,344 8,577 – – – –
Rental income 1,179,581 1,334,131 – – – –
Income from consultancy & other services – – 164,304 189,242 191,940 113,575
Finance lease income 20,101 10, 857 – – – –
Net fair value gain on investment properties 1,142,600 786,413 (15,172) – – –
Others – – – – 27,700 128,782
Internal Segment 100,395 118,923 – – – –
Total revenues and gains 2,446,021 2,258,911 249,226 316,201 (219,640) 242,357
Segment profit 1,766,068 1,527,667 20,152 47,118 144,155 273,942
1
2 3 4 5 6
1. Abdullah Bin Jubara Al-Rumaihi, CEO of Barwa Real Estate Group
2. Yousuf Ahmad Al-Binali, Chief of Corporate Operations
3. Mohammed Ibrahim Al-Emadi, Chief Asset Management Officer
4. Ahmed Ibrahim Al Darwish, Chief Development Officer
5. Tamer Elsayed Mohamed, CFO
6. Dana Abdul-Aziz Al-Ansari, Director of Legal and Compliance
EXHIBIT 2 Barwa’s Top Executives Listed and Arrayed
Source: Based on information at www.barwa.com.qa/en/AboutBarwa/BarwaManagement/ ExecutiveManagement as well as the Barwa 2020 Annual Report, pp. 82–85.
Finances In August 2021, Barwa released its financial results for the 6-month period ending June 30,
2021, revealing a net profit of QR 533 million, total assets of QR 35 billion, and total equity of
over QR 20 billion. In the interim report, Barwa presented a 41 percent increase in rental income,
accompanied by a 34 percent decrease in general and administrative expenses.
Barwa’s recent fiscal year-end 2019 and 2020 financial statements are provided in Exhibits 3
and 4. Note the 8 percent drop in revenues and 19 percent drop in net income in 2020; the com-
pany says that COVID-19 was the root cause.
618 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 3 Barwa’s Recent Income Statements (in thousands of QR)
Source: Based on Barwa’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 101.
Income Statement 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Revenues 2,776,265 2,561,443 –8%
Cost of Goods Sold – – NA NA
Gross Profit 2,776,265 2,561,443 –8%
Operating Expenses 947,866 1,019,723 8%
EBIT 1,828,399 1,541,720 –16%
Interest Expense 308,497 299,877 –3%
EBT 1,519,902 1,241,843 –18%
Tax 14,762 27,142 84%
Non-Recurring Events – – NA NA
Net Income 1,505,140 1,214,701 –19%
Balance Sheet 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments 1,254,716 746,157 –41%
Accounts Receivable 529,728 602,122 14%
Inventory – – NA NA
Other Current Assets 30,619 35,792 17%
Total Current Assets 1,815,063 1,384,071 –24%
Property Plant & Equipment 726,420 675,175 –7%
Goodwill – – NA NA
Intangibles 132,411 132,411 0%
Other Long-Term Assets 29,273,756 30,963,387 6%
Total Assets 31,947,650 33,155,044 4%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 1,671,610 1,834,249 10%
Other Current Liabilities 61,014 42,800 –30%
Total Current Liabilities 1,732,624 1,877,049 8%
Long-Term Debt 9,736,129 10,082,855 4%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 417,420 682,589 64%
Total Liabilities 11,886,173 12,642,493 6%
Equity
Common Stock 3,891,246 3,891,246 0%
Retained Earnings 9,781,402 10,186,699 4%
Treasury Stock – – NA NA
Paid in Capital & Other 6,388,829 6,434,606 1%
Total Equity 20,061,477 20,512,551 2%
Total Liabilities and Equity 31,947,650 33,155,044 4%
EXHIBIT 4 Barwa’s Recent Balance Sheets (in thousands of QR)
Source: Based on Barwa’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 100.
CASE 26 • BARWA GROuP—2022 619
2019 2020
USD 6,341,114 5,973,571
EURO 792 1,396
KWD 17,195 17,189
GBP 107,338 100,215
TRY 7,337 6,440
EGP 7,138 6,267
AED 1,995 2,000
SAR 83,490 101,882
At the end of 2020, Barwa has foreign currency risk exposure in 8 instruments, the largest
being the U.S. dollar, as indicated in Exhibit 5. This degree of exposure reveals the company’s
degree of confidence in the respective currencies.
EXHIBIT 5 Barwa’s Foreign Currency Risk Exposure in 2019 versus 2020 (in thousands of QR)
Source: Based on Barwa’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 155.
Strategy Barwa is currently studying the economic feasibility of many development projects put forward
by the Public Works Authority under Qatar’s Public-Private Partnership system. Additionally,
Barwa is studying its available space to determine optimal use, as the company owns large land
holdings spread over various locations, including large plots in Lusail and other strategic sites
in Qatar. Barwa says they strive to meet and exceed the needs of the Qatar real-estate market
consistent with Qatar’s National Vision 2030 and the company’s desire for sustainable growth.
External Issues
Qatar is preparing for the FIFA 2022 World Cup by launching numerous large-scale infrastructure
construction projects, including stadiums and other sporting facilities and significant investments
in the expansion of the country’s road, seaport, airplane, and rail networks. In fact, the Qatari con-
struction market is expected to register a CAGR of 9.6 percent over the period 2019–2024, making
it one of the fastest-growing global construction markets in the world. The Qatar National Vision
2030 is also spurring tremendous growth in the country, and Barwa is well-positioned to capitalize
on this national mandate. In Lusail City, the 80,000-seat Lusail Stadium will host the opening and
closing ceremonies for the 2022 FIFA World Cup. The stadium is nearing completion, and the city is
home to a dozen hotels and more than 200,000 permanent residents. Also nearing completion is the
Hamad International Airport Phase 1 expansion, intended to increase annual capacity to 53 million
passengers by 2022, with Phase 2 increasing that still further to 60 million passengers by 2024.
Qatar Qatar has the third-highest GDP per capita in the world and is classified as a World Bank high-
income economy. Although small, the country has the world’s third-largest natural gas and oil
reserves. The country is an absolute monarchy ruled by the House of Thani, or the Al Thani
family, since 1868; today, Sheikh Tamim bin Hamad al-Thani holds all executive and legislative
power and appoints both the prime minister and cabinet. Some 5-star luxury hotels in Qatar are
allowed to sell alcohol to their non-Muslim customers. Qatar hosts the Al Udeid Air Base, where
the United States and the United Kingdom hold strategic military operations.
Tourism Summertime is the slowest tourist season for Qatar, so the government instituted a “Summer in
Qatar” initiative to increase tourism during the summer, especially between Eid al-Fitr and Eid
al-Adha. The country of Qatar has also introduced policies and laws to boost overall tourism,
such as the introduction of visa-free travel from 80 countries. The demand for hotel rooms is out-
pacing supply in Qatar, which is to Barwa’s advantage. Exhibit 6 provides information regarding
the hotel room supply in Qatar. Exhibit 7 provides information regarding the source of Qatar’s
tourists and visitors.
620 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Source: Based on information at various websites, including www.mordorintelligence.com/industry- reports/qatar-residential-real-estate-market and www.first-qatar.com/PDF/Qatar_Real_Estate_Market_ Q1_2021.aspx.
EXHIBIT 6 Hotel Room Supply in Qatar (in 000 Keys)
26 27
35
41
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 (P)
28
EXHIBIT 7 The Source of Qatar’s Visitors/Tourists by Region
48%
Asia/Oceania
Europe
GCC
Other Arab
Americas
21%
20%
7% 4%
Note: GCC = Gulf Cooperation Council EC = Economic Union, includes Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, and the United Arab Emirates (UAE) Source: Based on information at various websites, including www.mordorintelligence.com/industry- reports/qatar-residential-real-estate-market and www.first-qatar.com/PDF/Qatar_Real_Estate_Market_ Q1_2021.aspx.
Economy Qatar is instituting reforms aimed at spurring economic development nationwide. QR 19.2 billion,
9.3 percent of the government’s total budget, has been allocated to develop the education sector,
which includes QR 6.8 billion for the construction of new schools within 5 years. Another QR
22.7 billion, or 11 percent of the total budget, is devoted to improving the country’s healthcare
sector, which includes the construction of 5 new health centers. Barwa has positioned itself to
take advantage of the government’s focus and expenditures on economic development. The gov-
ernment of Qatar in March 2019 increased the number of freehold zones from 3 to 10 in Lusail,
West Bay, and the Onaiza region. In addition, foreign investors now can hold full ownership in
Qatar’s residential and commercial sectors, opening up new opportunities for Barwa to build
more residential units under a built-to-sell (BTS) model.
CASE 26 • BARWA GROuP—2022 621
The unemployment rate in Qatar is less than 1 percent, and no one lives below the poverty
line. There are no taxes except on tobacco products and some junk foods. Qatar is an affluent
country endowed with huge petroleum reserves and large refineries, all based in Umm Said.
Qatar’s main seaport is Hamad Port, and this area is growing fast, but the country’s Ras Laffan
Port on the northern coast exports more liquid natural gas (LNG) than any other facility in the
world by a significant measure. Qatar Airways is one of the largest airlines in the world, and it
often wins global best Airline of the Year awards. Qatar has the lowest illiteracy rate, about 3
percent for males and 4 percent for females, in the Arab-speaking world; the country also has an
excellent RAND Corporation developed K-12 education system.
Qatar’s residential real-estate market is growing by about 13 percent annually, boosted
no doubt by the many people moving to the country. In 2021 alone, pending relief from
COVID-19, about 8,200 new residential units were expected to become available in Qatar,
especially in Lusail, The Pearl-Qatar, and in West Bay. About 530 new units were added in
the country in Q4 2020, bringing the total residential stock to 303,015. The residential real-
estate market in Qatar includes 1) condominiums, 2) villas, and 3) “other,” with the primary
cities being Doha, Al Wakrah, Al Rayyan, and Umm Salal Muhammad.
The Qatar Free Zones Authority is attracting increasing investments from around the world,
such as France’s Gaussin Advance Mobility Company and Qatar-based Al Attiya Motors, which
recently opened the country’s first assembly plant of electric vehicles at Ras Bu Fontas. Microsoft
is now building a public cloud data center in Qatar, and Google is building a Google Cloud facil-
ity in Doha.
Competitors
Foreign firms are increasingly entering Qatar’s residential real estate market, especially in West
Bay Lagoon and The Pearl, but it has domestic rivals such as United Development Company and
Al Mana Real Estate. However, the four major rivals to Barwa are AREDC, Ezdan, Msheireb,
and Qatari Diar, as indicated below.
Al Asmakh Real Estate Development Company The ISO-accredited Al Asmakh Real Estate Development Company (AREDC) is the top real-es-
tate company in Qatar. AREDC has been on the market for more than 30 years and is involved in
property management, leasing and selling, development and acquisition, consultancy, and asset
management. ARECD manages properties all over Qatar, especially in Doha. AREDC’s diverse
portfolio consists of apartments, high-rise towers, compounds, villas, labor accommodations,
commercial offices, and warehouses. Particularly renowned projects by AREDC include the Les
Maisons Blanches compound in Lusail and the Paramount Residences at the Pearl Qatar, which
consists of 196 luxurious properties.
Ezdan Holding Group Ezdan is one of the largest real estate companies in the wider Persian Gulf region, with more than
29,000 real estate units in Doha, Al Wakrah, and other areas. Headquartered in Doha, Ezdan has
10,000 employees and is headed by CEO Ali Mohammed Al Obaidli. Notable major projects by
Ezdan include The Curve, the Ezdan Palace, Ezdan Mall, and Ezdan Hotels. Ezdan’s reported
rental revenue of QR 1.177 billion in 2020 is down from QR 1.267 billion in 2019, and profits of
QR 1.088 billion in 2020 are down from QR 1.305 billion the prior year. Ezdan develops, con-
structs, owns, rents, leases, and manages both residential and commercial properties, including
apartments, hotels, restaurants, shopping malls, and commercial centers, mainly in Qatar but also
as far away as Ethiopia.
Msheireb Properties Company Established primarily to enable Qatar to achieve the country’s 2030 Vision, Msheireb is a subsid-
iary of the Qatar Foundation. Msheireb has achieved ISO certification from the British Standards
Institution for quality (ISO 9001:2015), environmental performance (ISO 14001:2015), occu-
pational health and safety (BS OHSAS 18001:2007), and Risk Management Standards (ISO
31000:2009). Msheireb Downtown Doha is the company’s prime example project for what it is
doing to spur tourism and development in Qatar through 2030.
622 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Qatari Diar Real Estate Company Established in 2005 by the Qatar Investment Authority, the sovereign wealth fund of the State of
Qatar, Qatari Diar is headquartered in Doha and has projects now spanning the globe, including
in Washington DC, London, Dushanbe, and Tajikistan. The company’s flagship project is Lusail
City, which launched in December 2005 and is still being added onto and modernized, consistent
with the company’s primary mission to help Qatar fulfill its 2030 vision. In mid-2021, Qatari
Diar had a shared capital of $8 billion, 50 investment projects under development in 22 countries,
and a combined investment value of about $35 billion.
Conclusion
As indicated in the case, foreign firms are increasingly entering Qatar’s residential and commer-
cial real-estate market, and domestic rival firms such as United Development Company, Al Mana
Real Estate, AREDC, Ezdan, Msheireb, and Qatari Diar are gaining momentum. Moreover, no
top executives are specified for Barwa’s various projects, products, regions, or otherwise, indi-
cating a very centralized operation. Executive titles do not align with company segments, which
is a problem for the firm. Despite a prosperous country and a growing economy, CEO Abdullah
Bin Jubara Al-Rumaihi needs assistance reorganizing Barwa and developing a clear strategic
plan for the future.
Given your expertise and based on what you have read in this book, prepare a comprehensive
strategic plan for Mr. Al-Rumaihi. The CEO will appreciate your work because both local and
global rivals are gaining market share and confidence. He needs a clear new vision and mission
statement, a new research-based SWOT and BCG analysis, and projected financial statements to
reveal the expected impact of your proposed strategic plan.
Profit margins in every industry become slimmer as competitiveness increases. Barwa’s
shareholders could defect unless some important strategy decisions are made to more effectively
allocate resources across products, services, and regions in the area. Provide a 3-year roadmap to
success for Mr. Al-Rumaihi to share with his top corporate comrades.
References
1. Barwa, Annual Report 2020, https://www.barwa.com.qa/AnnualReports/FINAL_
ANNUAL%20REPORT_2020_ENG.pdf.
2. “Qatar Residential Real Estate Market—Growth, Trends, COVID-19 Impact, and Forecasts
(2022–2027),” Mordor Intelligence, https://www.mordorintelligence.com/industry-reports/
qatar-residential-real-estate-market.
3. “Residential Real Estate Market in Qatar—Growth, Trends,” GlobeNewswire, December
28, 2020, https://www.globenewswire.com/news-release/2020/12/28/2150755/0/en/
Residential-Real-Estate-Market-in-Qatar-Growth-Trends-and-Forecast-2020-2025.html.
4. “Residential Real Estate Market Size 2022 | New Business Opportunities with Covid-19
Effect, Growth Drivers, Latest Trends, Future Demand, Analysis by Top Leading Player
till Forecast 2026,” MarketWatch, January 20, 2022, https://www.marketwatch.com/press-
release/qatar-residential-real-estate-market-outlook-size-forecasts-demand-competitive-
analysis-growth-factors-key-players-2021-08-11?tesla=y.
5. “What Lies Ahead for Qatar’s Real Estate Market in 2021,” KPMG Qatar, February 2,
2021, https://home.kpmg/qa/en/home/media/press-releases/2021/02/what-lies-ahead-for-
qatars-real-estate-market-in-2021.html.
6. “Qatar’s Real Estate Market Shows Signs of Recovery,” Oxford
Business Group, https://oxfordbusinessgroup.com/overview/
foundation-growth-market-shows-signs-recovery-after-several-years-instability.
7. First Qatar Real Estate Development Company, Qatar Real Estate Market: 1st Quarter
2021 Review, http://www.first-qatar.com/PDF/Qatar_Real_Estate_Market_Q1_2021.aspx.
CASE 27 • STARBuCKS CORPORATION—2018 623
Starbucks Corporation—2018
http://www.starbucks.com ; SBUX
Headquartered in Seattle, Washington, and the world’s largest coffee company, Starbucks is a
premier roaster, marketer, and retailer of specialty coffee in the world, with over 24,000 stores in
76 countries. The company provides customers with the “Starbucks Experience”—comprised of
excellent customer service, clean stores, appropriate music, and a comfortable setting. Currently,
Starbucks in the United States segment generates about 69 percent of total revenues. Millions
of people every day meet at Starbucks to talk, do business, and chat with friends. The music
selected to play in the stores enhances the relaxed look and feel of the coffeehouse. Starbucks of-
fers a full coffeehouse experience, complete with premium teas, fine pastries, and other sweets.
The company also sells a variety of coffee and tea products through licensed stores, grocery
stores, and foodservice accounts. Several brands associated with Starbucks are Teavana, Tazo,
Seattle’s Best Coffee, Evolution Fresh, La Boulange, and Ethos.
In February 2018, Starbucks and JP Morgan Chase began offering the Starbucks Rewards
Visa Card, a co-brand credit card integrated directly into the Starbucks Reward loyalty program.
Customers using this Visa card earn Stars with every purchase, both in and out of Starbucks
stores, and can redeem their Stars for food and beverage items at more than 8,000 participating
Starbucks locations. Cardholders also become members of the Starbucks Rewards loyalty pro-
gram comprised of more than 14 million members. Later in 2018, Starbucks and Chase plan to
offer a second co-branded product, the Starbucks Rewards Visa Prepaid Card.
Starbucks’ strategic plan is to add about 600 new stores annually in China during 2018–
2022, adding stores in 100 new cities to reach 230 cities across the country. The company plan is
to more than triple revenue and more than double operating income in China between 2017 and
2022. This plan calls for the company to double the number of Starbucks stores in China from
the end of FY2017 to 6,000.
Starbucks’ fiscal year ends on September 30. For the company’s fiscal Q1 2018 that ended
December 31, 2017, revenues increased 6 percent to a record $6 billion, with comparable store
sales up 2 percent. For that Q1, company’s revenues from stores in China increased 30 percent,
with comparable store sales up 6 percent. Starbucks as a whole is performing really well.
Copyright by Fred David Books LLC; written by Fred R. David.
History
Starbucks was founded in Seattle in 1971 as a roaster and retailer of whole bean and ground
coffee, teas, and spices in a single store in Seattle’s Pike Place Market. The company was named
after the first mate in Herman Melville’s Moby Dick . The Starbuck logo was inspired by the sea
and features a twin-tailed siren from Greek mythology. The company was incorporated in 1985
and went public in 1992.
In November 2017, the company opened its first store in Jamaica and entered its seventy-
sixth market globally. Together with its local business partner, Baristas del Caribe, LLC,
Starbucks opened its first store in Puerto Rico.
In December 2017, Starbucks completed the sale of its Tazo Tea brand to Unilever; Starbucks
desires to focus on a single tea brand, specifically its super premium tea brand, Teavana. Also
that month, Starbucks was named fifth in Fortune ’s World’s Most Admired Companies survey.
Additionally, the company completed its acquisition of the remaining 50 percent share of its East
China business from long-term joint venture partners, Uni-President (UPEC) and President Chain
Store Corporation (PCSC). With this transaction, Starbucks assumed 100 percent ownership of
over 1,400 Starbucks stores in Shanghai and in the Jiangsu and Zhejiang Provinces, bringing
the total number of company-owned stores in China to over 3,100. On this same day, UPEC and
PCSC acquired Starbucks 50 percent interest in President Starbucks Coffee Taiwan Limited and
assumed 100 percent ownership of Starbucks operations in Taiwan.
624 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
On December 5, 2017, Starbucks opened its Reserve Roastery in Shanghai, China, now the
largest Starbucks store in the world. The Roastery features onsite baking by Italian food pur-
veyor Rocco Princi, for the first time ever in China, and features onsite roasting and brewing of
Starbucks Reserve coffees.
In April 2018, Starbucks opened its first store in Uruguay, the city of Montevideo. The new
store offers Starbucks 100 percent Arabica coffees from Latin America and around the world.
International retail and restaurant operator Alsea exclusively owns and operates Starbucks stores
in the country. Starbucks plans to open 10 stores and create 130 new jobs in Uruguay by 2020.
Organizational Structure As indicated in Exhibit 1, Starbucks operates from using a strategic business unit (SBU) type of
organization with numerous regional Presidents reporting to four CEOs and four COOs in the
company. An illustration of the Starbucks organizational structure is depicted in Exhibit 1. Probably
no one but Starbucks insiders know exactly who reports to who—but what is important for students
is to devise a recommended reporting relationship, perhaps deleting some positions and creating
others, to more clearly reveal for all insiders and outsiders the Starbucks chain of command.
Values/Vision/Mission
Starbucks’ vision statement is “To establish Starbucks as the premier purveyor of the finest cof-
fee in the world while maintaining uncompromising principles while we grow.”
Starbucks’ mission statement blends a grand and uplifting goal—nourish the human spirit—
with a message about how it delivers this—by catering to its individual customers and commu-
nities. The vision can be viewed on the company’s website, in the “About Us” section: https://
www.starbucks.com/.
Segments
Starbucks is divided into four major operating segments:
1. Americas, including the United States, Canada, and Latin America
2. China/Asia Pacific (CAP)
3. Europe, Middle East, and Africa (EMEA)
4. Channel Development
1. Howard Schultz, Executive Chairman
2. Kevin Johnson, CEO and President
3. Takafumi Minaguchi, CEO, Starbucks Japan
4. Belinda Wong, CEO, Starbucks China
5. Sumitro Ghosh, CEO, Tata Starbucks, Private Ltd.
6. Rosalind (Roz) Brewer, COO and Group President
7. Brady Brewer, COO, Starbucks Japan
8. Leo Tsoi, COO, Starbucks China
9. Jason Dunlop, COO, Starbucks EMEA
10. Chris Carr, EVP, Chief Procurement Officer
11. Michael Conway, EVP, President Licensed Stores, U.S. & Latin America
12. John Culver, Group President, Int. and Channel Development
13. Lucy Helm, EVP, Chief Partner Officer
14. Gerri Martin-Flickinger, EVP, Chief Technology Officer
15. Tony Matta, President, Global Channel Development
16. Scott Maw, EVP, CFO
17. Hans Melotte, EVP, Global Supply Chain
18. Sharon Rothstein, EVP, Global Chief Product Officer
19. Matthew Ryan, EVP, Global Chief Strategy Officer
20. Vivek Varma, EVP, Public Affairs
21. Mark Ring, President, Starbucks Asia Pacific
22. Rossann Williams, President, Starbucks Canada
23. Bernard Acoca, President of Teavana
24. Kris Engskov, President, U.S. Retail
25. Martin Brok, President, Starbucks EMEA
26. Cliff Burrows, Group President, Siren Retail
3
7 8 25
4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
242221 23 26
1
2
EXHIBIT 1 Starbucks’ Top Executives and Organizational Chart
Source: Based on company information.
CASE 27 • STARBuCKS CORPORATION—2018 625
All segments are comprised of stores, except “Channel Development” that includes all the
Starbucks beverages and other branded products sold throughout the world through “channels”
such as grocery stores, warehouse clubs, specialty retailers, convenience stores, and food-
service accounts. The company has a few non-reportable operating segments, such as Teavana
retail stores and Seattle’s Best Coffee, and Siren Retail that offers taste testing operations. The
non-reporting segments are simply classified as Other Segments in the company’s financial
reports. For fiscal 2017, Starbucks’ revenues by segment as a percentage of total net revenues
were as follows: Americas (70%), CAP (14%), EMEA (5%), Channel Development (9%), and
All Other Segments (2%). Thus, the Americas is by far the dominant segment for Starbucks.
The Americas, CAP, and EMEA segments include both company-operated and licensed stores.
In order to examine what Starbucks is doing currently, Exhibit 2 provides a summary of
Starbucks operations across segments for Q1 2018. Notice that 700 new Starbucks stores were
opened that quarter, but the company’s overall operating income declined 1 percent, primarily due
to the 11 percent drop in operating profits in the EMEA segment. That segment is lagging the others
in overall performance.
Starbucks provides in their financial documents a breakdown of revenue by type of store.
Revenue from company-operated stores accounted for 57 percent of total net revenues during fiscal
2017. Exhibit 3 reveals that there are slightly more licensed stores than company-owned stores be-
cause outside of the Americas, Starbucks prefers to utilize licensed stores rather than owning stores.
EXHIBIT 2 Starbucks’ Operational Results Across Segments for Q1 2018
Q1 2018 Q1 2017 Change
Total Company Data
Net New Stores 700 649 51
Revenues $ 6,074 5,733 +6%
Operating Income $ 1,116 1,132 -1%
Americas Segment Data
Net New Stores 278 271 27
Revenues $ 4,266 3,991 +7%
Operating Income $ 979 956 +2%
CAP Segment Data
Net New Stores 300 303 (3)
Revenues $ 844 771 +9
Operating Income $ 197 163 +20
EMEA Segment Data
Net New Stores 123 95 28
Revenues $ 284 262 +8%
Operating Income $ 39 44 -11%
Channel Development
Revenues $ 560 553 +1%
Operating Income $ 243 243 –
Source: Based on the company’s Q1 2108 quarterly report.
EXHIBIT 3 Starbucks’ Number of Stores Across the World as of October 1, 2017
Americas % CAP % EMEA % All Other % Total
Company-owned 9,413 57% 3,070 41% 502 17% 290 89% 13,275
Licensed 7,146 43% 4,409 59% 2,472 83% 37 11% 14,064
Total 16,559 100% 7,479 100% 2,974 100% 327 100% 27,339
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Annual Report, p. 3.
626 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
For Q2 2018 that ended 3-31-18, Starbucks reported that its same store sales increased
2 percent both globally and in the United States, and were up 4 percent in China. The company’s
revenues in Q2 increased 14 percent to a record $6 billion. Specifically for Q2, Starbucks’ rev-
enues from company-owned stores increased 15.1 percent to $4.828 billion, while revenues from
licensed stores increased 14.4 percent to $625.6 billion. In the company’s Americas and EMEA
segments, the trend is to add licensed stores, but in the China/Asia segment, Starbucks is primar-
ily adding company-owned stores.
Finance
During Q1 of fiscal 2018 that ended December 31, 2017, active membership in Starbucks
Rewards in the United States grew 11 percent versus the prior year to 14.2 million, with mem-
ber spending comprising 37 percent of U.S. company-operated sales, and Mobile Order and
Pay representing another 11 percent of U.S. company-operated transactions. The Starbucks
Card was used for 42 percent of U.S. and Canada company-operated transactions. During Q1
2018, Starbucks opened 700 net new stores globally, bringing total store count to 28,039 across
76 counties. Also, during Q1, the company returned a record $2 billion to shareholders
through a combination of dividends and share repurchases. Specifically, Starbucks repurchased
28.5 million shares of common stock in Q1; approximately 52 million shares remain available
for purchase under current authorizations.
Starbucks income statements and balance sheets for fiscal 2016 and 2017 are provided in
Exhibit 4 and Exhibit 5, respectively. Notice all the green arrows pointing upward signifying that
the company is performing quite well.
Coffee Industry Overview
Coffee is the most commonly consumed beverage worldwide. The coffee market can be seg-
mented into growers, roasters, and retailers. On the coffee-growing level, South America was
ranked as the major coffee-producing region. Brazil produced and exported 43.2 million 60-kg
bags of coffee in 2016. Other major producers are Vietnam and Columbia. Exporting countries
tend to consume less coffee than their importing counterparts.
The United States has the largest market share with 45.8 percent of global retail coffee sales
in 2016, followed by single-cup coffee. Starbucks and Dunkin' Donuts dominate out-of-home
retail market, with a combined market share of over 65 percent. Growth in coffee cup per capita
consumption is recently up 18 percent in China, 13 percent in the United Kingdom, and 3.5
percent in Japan. Consumers drink, on average, 1.64 cups of coffee per day, reporting that they
drink it at home, on the way to work, and at work. People drink coffee to wake up in the morning
or receive a burst of energy throughout the day. People drink more and more coffee as they get
older, with the over-60 age group drinking more coffee than any other group.
EXHIBIT 4 Starbucks’ Income Statements (000 omitted)
Income Statement 10/2/16 10/1/17 Percent Change
Revenues $21,315,900 $22,386,800 5.02%
Cost of Goods Sold 8,511,100 9,038,200 6.19%
Gross Profit 12,804,800 13,348,600 4.25%
Operating Expenses 8,524,900 8,938,600 4.85%
EBIT 4,279,900 4,410,000 3.04%
Interest Expense 81,300 92,500 13.78%
EBT 4,198,600 4,317,500 2.83%
Tax 1,379,700 1,432,600 3.83%
Non-Recurring Events (1,200) (200) -83.33%
Net Income 2,817,700 2,884,700 2.38%
Source: Based on company documents.
CASE 27 • STARBuCKS CORPORATION—2018 627
From 2012 through 2016, coffee retail sales in the United States grew at a compounded
annual growth rate (CAGR) of 4.6 percent. During this period of time, there was, however, a
shift from single-cup coffee brands that made up just 21 percent of dollar sales, to now ac-
counting for 41 percent. This means that all other categories of coffee shrunk during those
5 years. For example, instant coffee and whole beans were both down by 11 percent, while
ground coffee declined 9 percent. However, the single-cup market has matured, and 2017
reveals virtually zero growth. A study by the National Coffee Association (NCA) shows that
household penetration of single-cup brewing machines in the United States has peaked at
around 30 percent, after growing rapidly from just 9 percent in 2011. Fewer consumers today
are shifting from drip coffee makers or from instant coffee to single-cup, resulting in slowing
growth rates.
Prices of single-cup coffee have declined over recent years to a level of what they were
10 years ago. Although retail sales are slowing, out-of-home channel sales of coffee are ac-
celerating. U.S. foodservice coffee sales ended 2016 at around 3.3 percent higher than in
2015. This upward trend in out-of-home purchases of coffee is partly due to low unemploy-
ment and continued economic growth, both of which enable consumers to increase their cof-
fee consumption out-of-home; this trend should continue in 2018–2019. Shifts in household
composition are favoring the steady rise in out-of-home coffee sales. Additionally, more
single households and fewer homes with underage children are reasons why fewer families
EXHIBIT 5 Starbucks’ Balance Sheets (000 omitted)
Balance Sheet 10/2/16 10/1/17 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments $2,263,200 $2,690,900 19%
Accounts Receivable 768,800 870,400 13%
Inventory 1,378,500 1,364,000 -1%
Other Current Assets 347,400 358,100 3%
Total Current Assets 4,757,900 5,283,400 11%
Property Plant & Equipment 4,533,800 4,919,500 9%
Goodwill 1,719,600 1,539,200 -10%
Intangibles 516,300 441,400 -15%
Other Long-Term Assets 2,784,900 2,182,100 -22%
Total Assets 14,312,500 14,365,600 0%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 2,975,700 2,932,200 -1%
Other Current Liabilities 1,571,100 1,288,500 -18%
Total Current Liabilities 4,546,800 4,220,700 -7%
Long-Term Debt 3,185,300 3,932,600 23%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 696,400 762,200 9%
Total Liabilities 8,428,500 8,915,500 6%
Equity
Common Stock 1,500 1,400 -7%
Retained Earnings 5,949,800 5,563,200 -6%
Treasury Stock 0 0 NA NA
Paid in Capital & Other (67,300) (114,500) 70%
Total Equity 5,884,000 5,450,100 -7%
Total Liabilities and Equity 14,312,500 14,365,600 0
Source: Based on company documents.
628 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
have sit-down breakfast meals and choose foodservice alternatives in the morning, when the
majority of coffee sales take place.
Competition
Starbucks’ primary competitors for coffee beverage sales are specialty coffee shops and quick-
service restaurants (QSRs). In almost all markets, there are hundreds of competitors in the spe-
cialty coffee beverage business, but Dunkin' Brands and McDonald’s Corporation are the two
major rivals to Starbucks. Exhibit 6 provides a market share breakdown of coffee market share
across these companies. Note that Starbucks is in the lead, but not by much, and McDonald’s
leads outside the United States.
Dunkin' Brands Group (DNKN) Based in Canton, Massachusetts and founded in 1950, Dunkin' Brands is arguably America’s
favorite all-day, everyday stop for coffee and baked goods—and is Starbucks’ major rival firm.
The Dunkin' Donuts segment of the company is a market leader in the hot regular/decaf/flavored
coffee, iced coffee, donut, bagel, and muffin categories. The company has earned the number-
one ranking for customer loyalty in the coffee, donut, bagel, muffin, and breakfast sandwich
categories by Brand Keys for 9 years running. Dunkin has more than 11,500 restaurants in 40
countries worldwide. The other big segment of the company is Baskin Robbins. Actually the
company operates through four segments: Dunkin' Donuts U.S., Dunkin' Donuts International,
Baskin-Robbins International, and Baskin-Robbins U.S. Its restaurants offer hot and cold coffee,
baked goods, donuts, bagels, muffins, breakfast sandwiches, hard-serve ice cream, soft-serve ice
cream, frozen yogurt, shakes, malts, floats, and cakes.
In February 2018, Dunkin' Brands announced plans to add about 1,000 net new Dunkin'
Donuts locations in the United States in 2018-2020 and says more than 90 percent will be built
outside of the Northeast. In this same press release, Dunkin reaffirmed its intention to eventually
have more than 18,000 Dunkin' Donuts restaurants in the United States. This is a shot over the
bow to Starbucks.
Dunkin is determined to maintain and increase the U.S.-based Dunkin' Donuts share of
the morning before-11 a.m. food and beverage sales, which account for 60 percent of Dunkin’s
system-wide sales—as well as strengthening the company’s afternoon growth opportunities through
menu innovation and national value offers. Dunkin is also doing the following in 2018-2020.
Source: Based on information at a variety of sources.
EXHIBIT 6 Coffee Market Share Across Three Rival Companies
45.0%
40.0%
35.0%
30.0%
25.0%
20.0%
15.0%
10.0%
5.0%
0.0%
Starbucks Dunkin' Donuts McDonald’s
U.S. Global
2016 Market Share
CASE 27 • STARBuCKS CORPORATION—2018 629
1. Continued focus on Cold Brew, Iced Coffee, and Frozen Dunkin' Coffee, which resulted in
its highest quarterly beverage comparable sales of the year in the fourth quarter of 2017.
Extend its premium tea and frozen beverage lines and introduce more espresso products.
2. After a record year for breakfast sandwich sales in 2017, emphasize morning sandwiches,
both new and returning favorites, like the early-2018 reintroduction of the Sweet Black
Pepper Bacon Breakfast Sandwich, and offering additional flavored bacon on sandwiches
throughout the year.
3. Being the largest retailer of donuts in America, heavily promote its annual calendar full
of seasonal donut offerings ready-to-go, leveraging key holidays like Valentine’s Day and
Halloween, while ensuring that its Dunkin' Dozen—the brand’s 12 best-selling donuts—are
available in each restaurant.
4. Eliminate all synthetic dyes from its national food and beverage menu in the United States
by the end of 2018.
5. Launch Dunkin' Deals, a series of value offers that are expected to be available at partici-
pating restaurants throughout the year. The first Dunkin' Deal of 2018 included two Egg
and Cheese Wake-up Wrap® sandwiches for $2 and, to drive afternoon and evening traffic,
a medium hot or iced latte for $2 from 2 p.m. to 6 p.m.
McDonald’s Corporation (MCD) McDonald’s is the world’s leading global food-service retailer with over 36,000 locations in
over 100 countries. Millions of people enjoy going to McDonald’s to get coffee. More than 80
percent of McDonald’s restaurants worldwide are owned and operated by independent local
businessmen and women. For the full year 2017, some financial highlights of McDonald’s are
as follows:
• Global comparable sales increased 5.3 percent, but consolidated revenues decreased
7 percent.
• Consolidated operating income increased 23 percent.
• Diluted earnings per share increased 17% (17% in constant currencies).
• Returned $7.7 billion to shareholders through share repurchases and dividends.
• Beginning in Q4 of 2017, began a 7 percent increase in its quarterly dividend to $1.01, dem-
onstrating management’s continued confidence in the company’s performance.
For 2018, McDonald’s plans to invest about $2.4 billion of capital, the majority of which
will be dedicated to reinvesting in our existing locations through accelerated deployment of
Experience of the Future in the United States. In addition, the company plans to open about
1,000 new McDonald’s restaurants, 75 percent of which will be funded by licensees and affili-
ates around the world. Concurrently, the company plans to invest heavily in technology to mod-
ernize their customer experience and redefine convenience.
Headquartered in Oak Brook, Illinois, McDonald’s operates and franchises restaurants in
the United States, Europe, the Asia/Pacific, the Middle East, Africa, Canada, Latin America, and
internationally. The company’s restaurants offer various food products, soft drinks, coffee, and
other beverages. The company operates close to 40,000 restaurants globally.
Keurig Green Mountain The big news in 2018 in the beverage industry is that Keurig Green Mountain, the maker of
Keurig K-Cup coffee machines, is acquiring Dr Pepper Snapple. Keurig is privately owned by
JAB Holdings, one of Europe’s largest investment firms; JAB also owns Peet’s Coffee, Panera
Bread, and Krispy Kreme doughnuts; JAB is a privately held fund that manages the money of
the Reimann family, one of Germany’s wealthiest families. This acquisition, pending approval in
Q2 2018, is aimed directly at both Coca-Cola and Starbucks Corp. This acquisition puts Keurig
in the global soda business and strengthens its coffee business. Euromonitor reports that sales
of ready-to-drink coffees increased more than 17 percent in 2017. JAB’s partner in Keurig is
Mondelez International, who holds roughly 24 percent of the stock JAB, but that percentage will
drop to about 14 percent when the Dr Pepper acquisition is finalized. Keurig’s revenue for 2017
is estimated to be $4.1 billion, and its market share in the coffee-pod industry has declined from
40 percent in 2013 to 23 percent in 2017.
630 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Future
On February 27, 2018, Starbucks opened (at its Seattle headquarters) its first Reserve store in
the United States, a new store format from the company’s Siren Retail business dedicated to its
premium Reserve brand. Starbucks has announced plans to build 20-30 Roasteries and 1,000
Reserve stores, with 20 percent of the Starbucks store portfolio eventually becoming Starbucks
Reserve bar locations. Starbucks recently opened its first international Reserve roastery in
Shanghai and launched the first Princi location in the United States inside its Seattle Reserve
roastery. The company is bringing stand-alone Princi stores to Seattle, Chicago, and New York
and plans to open roasteries in Milan and New York in late 2018, in addition to Tokyo and
Chicago in 2019.
The new Starbucks Reserve stores offer a new premium retail format with a marketplace-
style environment offering Reserve roasteries, freshly baked artisanal Italian food from Rocco
Princi and Third Place experience. The Reserve roasteries bring to life the theater of coffee
roasting and brewing and packaging for customers. The Siren Retail segment also includes
Starbucks Reserve bar locations and Princi bakeries. Reserve stores offer customers the full
beverage menu available at the Seattle Reserve roastery, but with a few new items including
Nitro Draft Latte and Spiced Ginger Cold Brew on tap, as well as new espresso drinks such as
the Bianco Mocha. The Princi menu continues to offer customer favorites including cornetti,
brioche, Pizza Mozzarella di Bufala, focaccia sandwiches; the space includes a full mixology
bar serving traditional Italian Aperitivo, aromatic Italian cocktails such as Aperol Spritz, Milano
Torino, and Negroni Sbagliato, for afternoon and evening customers.
Starbucks pays above the minimum wage in all states across the country. In April 2018, all
eligible U.S. Starbucks hourly and salaried partners received a second wage increase in addition
to the annual increases they have already received this fiscal year. The company also provided an
additional 2018 stock grant for all eligible full-time, part-time, hourly, and salaried U.S. partners
across their stores, plants, and support centers. In addition, all Starbucks retail partners received
at least a $500 grant, store managers each received a $2,000 grant, and plant and support center
partner (non-retail) grants varied depending on annualized salary or level. Starbucks has also
announced plans to create more than 8,000 new part-time and full-time retail jobs and an addi-
tional 500 manufacturing jobs in its Augusta, Georgia, soluble coffee plant.
For store partners, the company recently expanded their parental leave policy to include all
non-birth parents with up to 6 weeks of paid leave when welcoming a new child. These new hu-
man resource offerings are in addition to the nearly $7 billion of capital that Starbucks will de-
ploy to build and renovate stores, manufacturing plants, and technology platforms in the United
States over the next 5 years. Starbucks remains committed to providing opportunities to tens of
thousands of Americans from disadvantaged backgrounds.
In May 2018, Starbucks announced its formation of a global coffee alliance with Nestlé
S.A. to increase both the at-home and away-from-home coffee and related categories around the
world. As part of the alliance, Nestlé obtains the rights to market, sell, and distribute Starbucks,
Seattle’s Best Coffee, Starbucks Reserve, Teavana, Starbucks VIA, and Torrefazione Italia pack-
aged coffee and tea in all global at-home and away-from-home channels. In return, Nestlé pays
Starbucks $7.15 billion, with Starbucks retaining a significant stake as licensor and supplier
of roast and ground and other products going forward. The agreement also provides for the
Starbucks’ brands to be represented on Nestlé’s single-serve capsule systems.
Dunkin' Brands has announced aggressive new growth initiatives aimed directly at captur-
ing Starbucks’ market share. Starbucks needs a clear strategic plan to effectively and efficiently
manage its worldwide building of more than 1,000 Reserve stores, coupled with converting
existing Starbucks restaurants to the new format, and doubling down on its human resource
benefits offered.
CASE 28 • PEPSICO, INC.—2018 631
PepsiCo, Inc.—2018
www.pepsico.com , PEP
Headquartered in Purchase, New York, PepsiCo is the second-largest carbonated soft-drink
maker in the world, behind Coca-Cola Company. In North America, PepsiCo is the largest food
and beverage company, having soft-drink brands that include Pepsi-Cola, Mountain Dew, and
Diet Pepsi, as well as Tropicana orange juice, Gatorade sports drink, SoBe tea, and Aquafina
bottled water. Unlike Coca-Cola, PepsiCo is diversified, owning Frito-Lay and Quaker Foods.
Frito-Lay is the largest salty snack provider in the United States, having brands that include
Lay’s, Ruffles, Doritos, Cheetos, and Fritos; Quaker Foods offers breakfast cereals (Life,
Quaker Oats), rice (Rice-A-Roni), and side dishes (Near East).
PepsiCo’s products are available in more than 200 countries where the company special-
izes in innovating/changing products to match local tastes and cultures. For example, in Jordan,
Bario, a nonalcoholic malt drink is popular, and Tropicana Pulp Sacs are popular in China.
Fifty percent of company revenue comes from outside the United States and that percentage is
increasing. PepsiCo is the largest food and beverage business in Russia, India, and the Middle
East, is number two in Mexico, and is in the top five in Brazil, Turkey, and many other emerging
markets like Vietnam, the Philippines, Thailand.
PepsiCo is forward integrated, owning its two largest bottlers, Pepsi Bottling Group and
PepsiAmericas. Pepsi products are available worldwide through a variety of systems, including
direct store delivery (DSD), broker-warehouse, food service, and vending machines. Twenty-
two of PepsiCo’s products have generated retail sales of more than $1 billion, including three
brands that recently reached this milestone: Diet Mountain Dew, Brisk, and Starbucks ready-to-
drink beverages.
On December 20, 2017, PepsiCo stock switched to trade on the Nasdaq Global Select
Market rather than the New York Stock Exchange. PepsiCo stock continues to trade under the
symbol PEP. PepsiCo has increased its annual dividend for over 41 consecutive years. PepsiCo
reports its financial results across six segments:
1. FLNA: Frito-Lay North America
2. QFNA: Quaker Foods North America
3. NAB: North America Beverages
4. Latin America
5. ESSA: Europe Sub-Saharan Africa
6. AMENA: Asia, Middle East, and North Africa
Copyright by Fred David Books LLC; written by Meredith David.
History
The secret formula for Pepsi was developed in the 1880s by Caleb Bradham, a pharmacist in
Newbern, North Carolina. Caleb named his product “Pepsi-Cola” in 1898. As his product gained
popularity, he created the Pepsi-Cola Company in 1902 and registered a patent for his recipe
in 1903. Interestingly, the formula for Coca-Cola was developed in 1886 by pharmacist John
Pemberton in Columbus, Georgia. The Coca-Cola formula and brand was bought in 1889 by
Asa Candler who incorporated The Coca-Cola Company in 1892. Pepsi-Cola Company was first
incorporated in Delaware in 1919.
In 1965, the Pepsi-Cola Company merged with Frito-Lay, Inc., to become PepsiCo,
Inc., as the company is known today. Between the late 1970s and the mid-1990s, PepsiCo
expanded via the acquisition of restaurants and other businesses outside of its core focus of
packaged food and beverage brands. This was a big strategic mistake and the company exited
these noncore business lines largely in 1997, selling some and spinning off others into a
new company that is now known as Yum! Brands. A few brands formerly owned by PepsiCo
632 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
include Pizza Hut, Taco Bell, Kentucky Fried Chicken, D’Angelo Sandwich Shops, Wilson
Sporting Goods, North American Van Lines, and Stolichnaya. In December 2005, PepsiCo
surpassed Coca-Cola Company in market value for the first time in 112 years since both
companies began to compete.
PepsiCo purchased Tropicana Products in 1998 and acquired Quaker Oats Company in
2001. In 2010, PepsiCo acquired its two largest bottlers in North America: Pepsi Bottling Group
and PepsiAmericas. In 2011, PepsiCo made its largest international acquisition by purchasing
Wimm-Bill-Dann Foods, a Russian food company that produces milk, yogurt, fruit juices, and
dairy products. This acquisition made PepsiCo the largest food and beverage company in Russia.
This acquisition boosted PepsiCo’s nutrition portfolio. In January 2012, PepsiCo hired its first
female CEO, Indra Nooyi, who remains CEO today.
PepsiCo is having trouble with its Gatorade brand whose sales in the United States declined
0.5 percent to $5.9 billion in 2017. This was the brand’s first decline in annual sales since 2012.
Gatorade accounts for about 20 percent of PepsiCo’s North American drink volume. The company
released Gatorade Organic in August 2016 and made $20 million on that product through the end
of 2017. The sports-drink market is becoming highly competitive; even up-start BodyArmour, a
distant third in market share, is gaining rapidly on PepsiCo in sports drinks, such as Gatorade.
In May 2018, PepsiCo acquired Bare Foods, Inc., which makes Bare Snacks, a line of
healthy fruit and vegetable snacks. Headquartered in San Francisco, California, Bare Foods is
owned and operated by Bob and Diana Carroll. The purchase of Bare fits into PepsiCo’s strat-
egy to diversify further into healthy and nutritious products. Bare began its business in 2001 by
selling baked apple chips at local farmers’ markets and steadily expanded, becoming a leader
in apple, banana, and coconut snacks, and recently adding vegetable chips to its line. All Bare
products are baked, not fried, and are also Non-GMO Project-verified. Bare will continue to
operate independently from San Francisco, with its leadership reporting to PepsiCo’s Frito-Lay
North America Division.
Values, Vision, and Mission
Under the broad umbrella of “acting ethically and responsibly,” PepsiCo describes its values as
the principles of workplace respect, integrity in the marketplace, the golden rule, and responsi-
bility to its shareholders.
A version of PepsiCo’s vision and mission statements can be found at the following company
website: https://www.pepsicoindia.co.in/. Its vision reflects the goals of ensuring superior financial
performance and achieving a positive social and environmental impact. What PepsiCo describes as
its mission reflects a focus on product, with an emphasis on the wide range of its food and bever-
age offerings around the world. It also states PepsiCo’s long-term goal of success through invest-
ments in its employees, the company itself, and the communities of the markets it serves.
Organizational Structure PepsiCo breaks down their business in the Americas by foods versus beverages, but their Latin
America and outside North America business units include beverages, foods, and snacks. Yes,
this is confusing and the company has changed it almost annually. PepsiCo’s top executives are
listed in Exhibit 1 along with an organizational chart. The chart depicted reveals only three lev-
els: the CEO, the functional-level executives, and the line/regional-level executives. Probably no
one but PepsiCo insiders know exactly who reports to who—but what is important for students
is to devise a recommended reporting relationship, perhaps deleting some positions and creat-
ing others, to more clearly reveal for all insiders and outsiders the chain of command. Likely,
PepsiCo would function best with a strategic business unit (SBU) type structure comprised of
two SBU’s—beverages and food—with regional presidents reporting to those two individuals.
PepsiCo’s executive titles should match with the company’s segment titles FLNA, QFNA, NAB,
Latin America, ESSA, and AMENA.
Segments PepsiCo is transparent in its reporting of financial information by segment. PepsiCo monitors
and reports results of their operations in six segments as given below. Note that in Latin
America and outside North America, PepsiCo’s beverages and snacks are combined as segments
(ESSA and AMENA).
CASE 28 • PEPSICO, INC.—2018 633
Inside North America 1. North America Beverages (NAB)—sample products include Pepsi, Gatorade, Mountain
Dew, Aquafina, 7UP (outside the United States), and Tropicana
2. Frito-Lay North America (FLNA)—sample products include Doritos, Cheetos, Tostitos,
Ruffles, Fritos, SunChips, and Santitas
3. Quaker Foods North America (QFNA)—sample products include Quaker oatmeal, Aunt
Jemima mixes and syrups, Quaker Chewy granola bars, Quaker grits, Cap’n Crunch cereal,
Life cereal, and Rice-a-Roni side dishes
4. Latin America—includes many of the Frito-Lay and Quaker products
Outside North America 5. Europe Sub-Saharan Africa (ESSA)—includes many of the beverages and foods listed
inside North America with many modified to match particular country culture and desires
6. Asia, Middle East & North Africa (AMENA)—includes many of the beverages and foods
listed inside North America with many modified to match particular country culture and
desires
Exhibit 2 provides a breakdown of PepsiCo’s revenues by division for 2016 and 2017.
Notice that NAB is the largest revenue contributor but this segment’s revenues decreased
in 2017. Note also that the ESSA segment reported the largest percentage increase in revenues in
2017. Note the 5 percent decrease in AMENA compared to the 8 percent increase in ESSA.
Exhibits 3 and 4 provide a breakdown of PepsiCo’s 2017 operating profit (EBIT) compared
to the prior year. Note the decrease in QFNA and NAB but the near doubling in AMENA. Note
the 29 percent decrease in NAB for 2017 compared to the 173 percent increase in AMENA.
Finance In early 2018, PepsiCo announced a new repurchase program of up to $15 billion of PepsiCo
common stock commencing on July 1, 2018 and expiring on June 30, 2021. This will replace
the $12 billion repurchase program which commenced on July 1, 2015 and expired on June 30,
2018. Also in early 2018, PepsiCo announced a 15 percent increase in its annual dividend per
share to $3.71 from $3.22 per share, such that total dollar of dividends to be paid to shareholders
in 2018 would be about $5 billion, compared to about $2 billion being devoted to buying back
shares of stock.
EXHIBIT 1 PepsiCo’s Top Executives and Organizational Chart
1. Indra Nooyi, Chairman of the Board
2. Ramon Laguarta, CEO
3. Jim Andrew, EVP, Corporate Strategy and Chief Venturing
Officer
4. Jon Banner, EVP, Communications
5. Umran Beba, Senior VP, Chief HR Officer for Human Capital
Management Services and Operations
6. Jody Davids, Senior VP and Chief Information Officer
7. Ruth Fattori, EVP and Chief HR Officer
8. Marie Gallagher, Senior VP and Controller
9. Hugh Johnston, Vice Chairman and CFO
10. Dr. Mehmood Khan, Vice Chairman and Chief Scientific Officer, Global
R&D
11. Eugene Willemsen, EVP, Global Categories and Franchise Management
12. Dave Yawman, EVP of Government Affairs, General Counsel and
Corporate Secretary
13. Brian Newman, EVP, Finance and Operations, Latin America
14. Grace Puma, EVP, Global Operations
15. Albert Carey, CEO, PepsiCo North America
16. Sanjeev Chadha, Chairman, Asia, Middle East, and North Africa
17. Laxman Narasimhan, CEO, Latin America and Europe Sub-Saharan
Africa
18. Mike Spanos, CEO, Asia, Middle East, and North Africa
19. Pedro Padierna, Chairman, PepsiCo Mexico
20. Vivek Sankaran, President and COO, Frito-Lay North America
21. Kirk Tanner, President and COO, North America Beverages
22. Paula Santilli, President, PepsiCo Mexico Foods
23. Silviu Popovici, President, Europe Sub-Saharan Africa
24. Anne Fink, President, Global Foodservice
25. Ram Krishnan, President, Greater China Region
26. Simon Lowden, President, Global Snacks Group
27. Luis Montoya, President, Latin America Beverages
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
2
1
3
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Annual Report and other documents.
634 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 3 PepsiCo’s 2016 and 2017 Operating Profit by Division (in billions)
Division 2016 2017
1. FLNA = Frito-Lay North America $4,659 $4,823
2. QFNA = Quaker Foods North America $653 $642
3. NAB = North America Beverages $2,959 $2,707
4. Latin America $887 $908
5. ESSA = Europe Sub-Saharan Africa $1,108 $1,354
6. AMENA = Asia, Middle East, and North Africa $619 $1,073
Total $10,885 $11,507
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Annual Report and other documents.
EXHIBIT 4 PepsiCo’s 2016 and 2017 Operating Profit by Division (in billions)
2016 2017
$ 1 5 .5
$ 2 .6
$ 2 1 .3
$ 6 .8
$ 1 0 .2
$ 6 .3
$ 1 5 .8
$ 2 .5
$ 2 0 .9
$ 7 .2
$ 1 1 .1
$ 6 .0
0
5
10
15
20
25
FLNA Quaker
Foods NA
NAB Latin
America
ESSA AMENA
PepsiCo’s Revenues by Division
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Annual Report and other documents.
PepsiCo’s recent income statements are provided in Exhibit 5. Note the slight increase in
revenues, but the 23 percent decrease in net income.
PepsiCo’s recent balance sheets are provided in Exhibit 6. Note the substantial and increas-
ing amount of goodwill and long-term debt. Coupled with the decline in Paid-in-Capital the
numbers reveal that PepsiCo prefers debt over equity to raise capital.
EXHIBIT 2 PepsiCo’s 2016 and 2017 Revenues by Division (in billions)
Division 2016 2017
1. FLNA = Frito-Lay North America $15,549 $15,798
2. QFNA = Quaker Foods North America $2,564 $2,503
3. NAB = North America Beverages $21,312 $20,936
4. Latin America $6,820 $7,208
5. ESSA = Europe Sub-Saharan Africa $10,216 $11,050
6. AMENA = Asia, Middle East, and North Africa $6,338 $6,030
Total $19,515 $19,526
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Annual Report and other documents.
CASE 28 • PEPSICO, INC.—2018 635
EXHIBIT 6 PepsiCo’s Balance Sheets (in millions)
Balance Sheet 12/31/16 12/30/17 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments $16,125 $19,510 21%
Accounts Receivable 6,694 7,024 5%
Inventory 2,723 2,947 8%
Other Current Assets 908 1,546 70%
Total Current Assets 26,450 31,027 17%
Property Plant & Equipment 16,591 17,240 4%
Goodwill 14,430 14,744 2%
Intangibles 12,196 12,570 3%
Other Long-Term Assets 3,823 4,223 10%
Total Assets 73,490 79,804 9%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 14,242 15,017 5%
Other Current Liabilities 6,893 5,485 -20%
Total Current Liabilities 21,135 20,502 -3%
Long-Term Debt 30,053 33,796 12%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 11,103 14,525 31%
Total Liabilities 62,291 68,823 10%
Equity
Common Stock 24 24 0%
Retained Earnings 52,518 52,839 1%
Treasury Stock (31,468) (32,757) 4%
Paid in Capital & Other (9,875) (9,125) -8%
Total Equity 11,199 10,981 -2%
Total Liabilities and Equity 73,490 79,804 9%
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Annual Report and other documents.
EXHIBIT 5 PepsiCo’s Income Statements (in millions)
Income Statement 12/31/16 12/30/17 Percent Change
Revenues $62,799 $63,525 1.16%
Cost of Goods Sold 28,209 28,785 2.04%
Gross Profit 34,590 34,740 0.43%
Operating Expenses 24,805 24,231 –2.31%
EBIT 9,785 10,509 7.40%
Interest Expense 1,232 907 -26.38%
EBT 8,553 9,602 12.26%
Tax 2,174 4,694 115.92%
Non-Recurring Events (50) (51) 2.00%
Net Income 6,329 4,857 -23.26%
Source: Based on the company’s 2017 Annual Report and other documents.
Pepsi’s share price has struggled in the first half of 2018, down about 19 percent in the
first five months of the year to just below $100 per share. The key reason why Pepsi’s stock
demise has been that the company’s largest market segment, North American Beverages (NAB),
consistently reports flat revenues and declines in operating profits. The NAB segment makes
up more than 33 percent of the company’s total revenue, and that segment’s operating profit
decreased 23 percent in Q1 of 2018 when compared to Q1 of 2017.
636 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 7 PepsiCo versus Rival Firms on Top Beverage Brands Sold (2016 versus 2015)
Millions of Gallons Share in Total
Brand Firm 2015 2016 Percent Change 2015 2016
1. Coke (all types) Coca-Cola 3,994 3,933 (1.5) 12.6 12.0
2. Pepsi (all types) PepsiCo 1,946 1,859 (4.5) 6.1 5.6
3. Mountain Dew PepsiCo 1,343 1,333 (0.7) 4.2 4.1
4. Dr Pepper (all types) Dr Pepper Snapple 1,160 1,168 0.7 3.6 3.5
5. Nestlé Pure Life Nestlé NAmerica 1,075 1,085 1.0 3.4 3.3
6. Gatorade PepsiCo 1,042 1,082 3.8 3.3 3.3
7. Sprite Coca-Cola 866 897 3.6 2.7 2.7
8. Poland Spring Nestlé NAmerica 758 836 10.3 2.4 2.5
9. Dasani Coca-Cola 707 743 5.0 2.2 2.3
10. Aquafina PepsiCo 546 605 10.9 1.7 1.8
TOP 10 13,437 13,541 0.8 42.2 41.2
Others 18,387 19,364 5.3 57.8 58.8
TOTAL 31,824 32,904 3.4 100.0 100.0
Source: Based on information developed by Beverage Marketing Corporation.
EXHIBIT 8 A Comparison of PepsiCo to Two Big Rivals
COKE DR PEPPER PEPSICO
$ Market Capitalization 197.0B 17.0B 167.0B
# Employees 100,300 20,000 264,000
$ Revenue 41.8B 6.6B 63.5B
% Profit Margin 10.68 11.73 10.97
$ EBITDA 10.9B 1.6B 12.6B
% Operating Margin 24.14 20.73 16.4
$ Net Income 6.5B 770M 47.0B
% ROA 6.23 9.09 8.56
$ EPS 0.95 4.17 4.84
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
Competitors
Coca-Cola Company and Dr Pepper Snapple are Coke’s two primary competitors, but other rival
firms include Nestlé SA, Groupe Danone, Suntory Beverage & Food Limited (“Suntory”), and
Monster Beverage Corporation. Unlike Coke, PepsiCo derives most of its revenues and growth
from its snack food business rather than its beverages. Danone competes to a lesser degree with
Coke. The number-three soft drink producer, Dr Pepper Snapple, produces and markets non-
alcoholic beverages in the United States, Canada, Mexico, and the Caribbean. Exhibit 7 reveals
the top 10 beverages sold in the United States. Note that Coke, inclusive of Coke Zero, Diet
Coke, and other brands, lead among the top 10, but PepsiCo has four brands in the top 10. Down
the percent change column in Exhibit 7, notice that bottled water has the largest growth.
As indicated in Exhibit 8, PepsiCo is 10 times larger than Dr Pepper Snapple and based on
market capitalization (stock price times number of shares outstanding). However, PepsiCo is
much larger than Coke on numerous other variables as given.
Coca-Cola Company (KO) Headquartered in Atlanta, Georgia, Coca-Cola Company (Coke) is the world’s largest producer and
distributor of beverages, marketing over 500 nonalcoholic brands in more than 200 countries. Coke
has 21 billion-dollar brands, 19 of which are available in lower- and no-sugar options. Four of the
CASE 28 • PEPSICO, INC.—2018 637
top five beverages sold globally are Coca-Cola, Diet Coke, Fanta, and Sprite. Other Coke products
include AdeS soy-based beverages, Ayataka green tea, Dasani waters, Del Valle juices and nectars,
Fanta, Georgia coffee, Gold Peak teas and coffees, Honest Tea, Minute Maid juices, Powerade
sports drinks, Simply juices, Glaceau Smartwater, Sprite, and Zico coconut water. However, the
company’s revenues for 2017 declined 15 percent so rumblings are spreading within the firm.
Coke brands sold mostly outside the United States include Ayataka green tea in Japan, I
LOHAS water in Japan, Ice Dew water in China, FUZE TEA outside the United States, Minute
Maid Pulpy in Asia Pacific, Georgia coffee in Japan, and Del Valle in Latin America. Five large
independent bottling companies supply Coke with 39 percent of their bottling needs. The largest
independent bottler is Coca-Cola FEMSA who supplies central Mexico and countries in Latin
and South America.
Company revenues have declined every year for nearly a decade. Coke’s net income also
declined. Since 2005, sales of diet soda, in general, have dropped every year, a combined 34
percent. Although Diet Coke is the weakest link in the company’s whole soda lineup, the brand
is still the third-best selling carbonated drink in the United States.
Even environmentalists are complaining, saying Coke produces 110 million plastic bottles
annually that end up in landfills and oceans. To combat this complaint, the company launched in
2018 its “World Without Waste” initiative. Coke needs a good strategic plan since its customer
base is eroding and its shareholders want sustained 5 percent annual growth in revenues and
profits—not declines every year.
Dr Pepper Snapple Group, Inc. (DPS) Headquartered in Plano, Texas, DPS manufactures nonalcoholic beverages in the United
States, Canada, Caribbean, and Mexico. It also markets ready-to-drink teas, juices, juice
drinks, water, and mixers. The company offers brands such as: 7UP, A&W, Bai, Crush,
Canada Dry, Schweppes, Sunkist, Squirt, Hawaiian Punch, and RC Cola. DPS manufactures
and sells Mott’s applesauce. DPS’s revenues increased slightly from $6.2 billion in 2014
to $6.3 billion in 2015, to $6.4 billion in 2016, to $6.7 in 2017. DPS’s net income also has
increased slightly every year. DPS recently acquired Bai Brands for about $1.7 billion. DPS
currently has about 8.5 percent of the U.S. nonalcoholic beverage market, according to
Euromonitor International.
DPS owns 7 of the top 10 non-cola soft drinks on the market. Third quarter (Q3) 2017
results showed DPS’s carbonated soft drinks decreasing 1 percent while its non-carbonated
beverages increased 6 percent. Q3 showed flat sales in the United States and Canada, but sales
in Mexico and the Caribbean increased 2 percent. Also for Q3, the DPS brand named Clamato
grew 7 percent and Mott’s applesauce sales grew 5 percent, but Snapple sales declined 5 percent.
The big news in 2018 in the beverage industry is that Keurig Green Mountain, the maker of
Keurig K-Cup coffee machines, acquired Dr Pepper Snapple in 2018. Keurig is privately owned
by JAB Holdings, one of Europe’s largest investment firms; JAB also owns Peet’s Coffee, Panera
Bread, and Krispy Kreme doughnuts. JAB is a privately held fund that manages the money of
the Reimann family, one of Germany’s wealthiest families. This acquisition, pending approval
in Q2 2018, is aimed directly at both Coca-Cola and Starbucks Corp. This acquisition puts
Keurig in the global soda business and strengthens its coffee business. Euromonitor reports that
sales of ready-to-drink coffees increased more than 17 percent in 2017. JAB’s partner in Keurig
is Mondelez International that holds roughly 24 percent of the stock JAB, but that percentage
dropped to about 14 percent when the Dr Pepper acquisition was finalized. Keurig’s revenue for
2017 was about $4.1 billion and its market share in the coffee-pod industry has declined from 40
percent in 2013 to approximately 23 percent in 2017.
Groupe Danone Headquartered in Paris, France, Groupe Danone is the number-one producer of yogurt in the
world, the number-two bottled water, and baby nutrition manufacturer, number-one in manu-
facturing fresh dairy products, and the European leader in medical nutrition. Danone’s primary
brand in bottled water is Evian. Danone sells flavored waters and focuses on health-conscious
consumers. One brand is Levite, a big success in Mexico. Danone continues to add new drinks in
different markets, such as Taillefine Fiz in France, which is a zero-calorie soda that has achieved
a number-2 ranking in the French low-calorie segment. Danone is present in over 130 markets
638 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
and generated sales of €21.9 billion in 2016, with more than half of that revenue coming from
emerging countries. Fresh dairy products represent about 50 percent of Danone’s total sales,
early life nutrition 22 percent, water 21 percent, and medical nutrition 7 percent.
Monster Beverage Company (MNST) Headquartered in Corona, California, Monster Beverage develops, markets, sells, and dis-
tributes energy drink beverages, sodas and/or concentrates for energy drink beverages, under
brand names such as Monster Energy, Monster Rehab, Monster Energy Extra Strength Nitrous
Technology, Java Monster, Muscle Monster, Mega Monster Energy, Punch Monster, Juice
Monster, Ubermonster, BU, Mutant Super Soda, Nalu, NOS, Burn, Mother, Ultra, Play and
Power Play, Gladiator, Relentless, Samurai, BPM, and Full Throttle.
Coca-Cola owns 16.7 percent of the Monster Beverage, which it purchased in 2015 for
approximately $2.15 billion. In October 2017, Coca-Cola transferred ownership of all of its
worldwide energy businesses including NOS, Full Throttle, and nine smaller brands to Monster
Beverage Company. At the same time, Monster transferred all of its non-energy drink businesses
to Coca-Cola, including Hansen’s natural sodas, Peace Tea, Hubert’s Lemonade, and Hansen’s
juice products. As shown in Exhibit 10, energy drinks comprise 4.8 percent of all nonalcoholic
beverages sold.
Monster Beverage’s sales for Q3 2017 that ended September 30, 2017 increased 11.5 percent
to $2.6 billion from $2.3 billion versus the prior year. Net income for Q3 was $619.4 million,
compared with $539.7 million the prior year. Net sales for Monster’s Strategic Brands segment,
which includes the various energy drink brands acquired from Coke, increased 6.2 percent to
$76.6 million for that Q3, up from $72.1 million the prior year. Monster’s sales to customers
outside the United States increased 36.3 percent to $260.1 million in that Q3, up from $190.8
million in the prior year period. Net income for Q3 increased 14.1 percent to $218.7 million from
$191.6 million in the prior year period.
The Non-Alcoholic Beverage Industry
Exhibit 9 reveals the annual growth (or decline) in various categories of beverages. Notice
declines in sales of carbonated soft drinks and fruit drinks, but rapid growth in sales of flavored
and enhanced water and ready-to-drink coffee.
Bottled Water In 2016, bottled water surpassed carbonated soft drinks as the largest beverage category in the
United States by volume. Per capita consumption of bottled water reached more than 39.0 gal-
lons annually, compared with around 38.5 gallons for carbonated soft drinks. Within the next
decade, bottled water consumption per capita is expected to surpass 50 gallons. The U.S. bottled
water market showed strong growth in terms of volume and revenues in the past 3 years. Bottled
water sales are booming, up 7.3, 7.9, and 8.6 percent in 2014, 2015, and 2016, respectively. By
comparison, carbonated soft drink volumes declined 2.1, 2.4, and 0.8 percent during those years.
Source: Based on information developed by Beverage Marketing Corporation (BMC).
EXHIBIT 9 Annual Percent Growth/Decline in Sales of Various Beverage Categories 2016 versus 2015 in the United States
Flavored & Enhanced Water +12.3
Ready-To-Drink Coffee +11.0
Bottled Water +8.6
Energy Drinks +4.8
Sports Drinks +3.9
Ready-To-Drink Tea +3.1
Carbonated Soft Drinks – 0.8
Fruit Drinks -1.4
Total +3.4
CASE 28 • PEPSICO, INC.—2018 639
According to BMC, in 2017, bottled water sales are projected to grow 8 to 9 percent, remaining
the top nonalcoholic beverage for years to come—further confirmation of the shift in consumer
preference toward healthier and lower-calorie options.
Sparkling Water Sparkling water is projected to outpace even bottled water in the next decade as consumers search
for tastier but healthier options. In fact, sparkling water sales surged more than 20 percent in 2017.
Flavored sparkling water sales grew by more than 15 percent in 2017 to $2.4 billion. To better
reach this flavored sparkling water market, in early 2018, PepsiCo released its seltzer water brand
called Bubly. Other beverages also growing in sales are flavored and enhanced water, ready-to-
drink coffee, and energy drinks. Specifically, sales of flavored and enhanced water in the United
States increased 12.3 percent in 2016, followed by ready-to-drink coffee up 11.0 percent, and en-
ergy drinks up 4.8 percent.
Given the above positive trends, carbonated soft drinks still account for 83.5 percent of
the beverages industry’s market capitalization as of September 2017. In 2016, soda consump-
tion in the United States fell 0.8 percent, continuing the downward trend. Consequently, in Q2
2017, Coke reported a 16 percent drop in net revenues to $9.7 billion. In that Q2, Coke reported
increased volume for juice, dairy, and plant-based beverages (with 3% growth), tea and coffee
(2%), as well as water, enhanced water, and sports drinks (1%). Coke is shifting its portfolio
toward smaller-sized packages and healthier beverages. In August 2017, Coke replaced its
Coke Zero products with the zero-sugar and zero-calorie brand Coke Zero Sugar. For PepsiCo,
food and snacks volume increased 2 percent in the first half of 2017, while beverages declined
1 percent.
R&D To reverse revenue declines, beverage firms boosted R&D spending at an average annual rate
of nearly 20 percent over the past 5 years. R&D spending is likely to remain high in 2017 and
2018 as beverage companies strive to rejuvenate revenue growth. Developing flavored sparkling
waters is an example.
Outside the United States In 2016, international operations represented 62 percent of total non-bottling revenues at Coke
and 42 percent at PepsiCo. Coke does business in countries using currencies other than the
U.S. dollar, including the euro, the Japanese yen, the Brazilian real, and the Mexican peso.
Coke uses 72 currencies in addition to the U.S. dollar. Unfavorable foreign currency exchange
rates can have a significant effect on reported revenue growth for global beverage manufactur-
ers, especially since the U.S. dollar’s value relative to foreign currencies is on average at a
three-year low.
City, County, State, and Federal Taxes Public health advocates are actively lobbying for soda tax referendums and legislation in more
U.S. cities. Companies such as Coke and PepsiCo Soda spent nearly $70 million from 2009 to
late 2016 lobbying against soda taxes and warning label measures in U.S. cities and states, as
well as an average of about $15 million annually on federal lobbying, according to the consumer
advocacy group Center for Science in the Public Interest (CSPI). For example, beverage compa-
nies spent about $9.4 million between January 2016 and June 2016 to oppose the Philadelphia
City Council’s soda tax proposal, according to CSPI’s estimates. Philadelphia eventually
imposed a soda tax in June 2016, the first major U.S. city (and the second city after Berkeley,
California) to do so. In November 2016, three cities in California (San Francisco, Albany, and
Oakland) passed their own soda tax laws, as did Cook County, Illinois (which includes Chicago)
and Boulder, Colorado. In June 2017, Seattle implemented a tax of $1.75 cents per ounce on
sugary drinks and soda. Chicago’s soda tax began in Fall 2017.
Taxes on sugary beverages came into effect in Mexico on January 1, 2014, in an effort to
combat obesity in the country; higher product costs are likely to dampen demand, and tax rev-
enue could help to fund costs related to preventive actions and medical treatment. Mexico is the
country with the biggest obesity problem in the world, according to the Food and Agriculture
Organization of the United Nations. This will be a game changer for beverage companies
640 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
exporting to Mexico (such as Coke). In 2015, soda sales in Mexico plummeted 12 percent.
Price-sensitive consumers are turning away from buying soda products.
Beverage Caloric Intake in the United States In December 2017, the American Beverage Association reported that the average American
drank 201.2 calories a day in 2016, up slightly from 2015. More than offsetting the decline
in sales of soda and juice in cans or bottles, sales of soda from fountains in restaurants are
increasing. And Americans are drinking more and more sweet tea at restaurants. In terms of
liquid intake, the average beverage calories consumed in the United States per capita, per day
in 2016, was sodas (126.7), juice (42.5), teas (11.2), sports (10.6), and other (10.2)—according
to the Beverage Marketing Corporation. Consumption of diet and low-calorie soda continues
to fall, but consumption of sports and energy drinks continues to rise at a faster rate. Exhibit 10
reveals the soft drink industry breakdown by type of drinks.
Impulse Buying PepsiCo is reinvesting some of the millions of dollars it is saving under the new tax laws in
e-commerce, which today accounts for roughly $1 billion in the company’s annual retail sales.
PepsiCo is also investing savings in training for workers, cash returns for shareholders, and
$100 million in employee bonuses. The rise of online shopping is bad news for Coca-Cola
and PepsiCo because impulse buying makes up roughly 30 percent of overall beverage sales.
Without customers grabbing a Diet Pepsi while checking out at Walmart or a two-liter bottle of
Coke Zero at the grocery store, the beverage companies would be in big trouble. Sales of soft
drinks by volume have dropped for 12 consecutive years in the United States, so companies like
Coca-Cola and PepsiCo need impulse buying, which is being eroded by more online shopping.
Coca-Cola is currently investigating click-and-collect grocery sales, bundled deals (such as meal
kits), and new impulse “triggers” online.
Future
International operations represent about 62 percent of total non-bottling revenues at Coca-Cola
and 42 percent at PepsiCo. PepsiCo obtains approximately 60 percent of its revenues from its
food divisions. Last year, PepsiCo and Coca-Cola invested in craft soda brands trying to reverse
decreasing soda volume sales. After acquiring two craft soda brands from Monster Beverages,
Coca-Cola recently relaunched Blue Sky and Hansen’s. A few days later, PepsiCo launched
the 1893 Original Cola and Ginger Cola lines, which are made with sparkling water, kola nut
extract, and Fair Trade certified sugar.
In August 2016, PepsiCo released a craft carbonated beverage brand called Stubborn, pri-
marily targeting millennials, who prefer healthy beverages. The product uses stevia leaf extract
instead of artificial sweeteners; Stubborn is available in unusual flavors such as black cherry
with tarragon, lemon berry acai, and orange hibiscus. According to PepsiCo, craft sodas are a
growing product line opportunity.
EXHIBIT 10 A Breakdown of the Industry-Wide Soft Drink Market
Sugary carbonated
soft drinks
52%
Diet soft drinks
and mixers
24%
Energy and
sports drinks
24%
Industry-Wide Soft Drink Market
Source: Based on a variety of sources.
CASE 28 • PEPSICO, INC.—2018 641
PepsiCo is having trouble with its Gatorade energy drink brand whose sales in the United
States declined 0.5 percent to $5.9 billion in 2017. This was the brand’s first decline in annual
sales since 2012. Gatorade accounts for about 20 percent of PepsiCo’s North American drink
volume. The company released Gatorade Organic in August 2016 and made $20 million on that
product through the end of 2017. The sports-drink market is becoming highly competitive; even
up-start BodyArmour, a distant third in market share, is gaining rapidly on PepsiCo in sports
drinks, such as Gatorade.
The steady decline in consumption of carbonated beverages necessitates that PepsiCo for-
mulate and implement new strategies going forward. The company needs a full-blown, compre-
hensive strategic plan in order to determine specific actions needed under the following general
categories of strategies:
1. Further global expansion to tap markets not yet saturated
2. Continued product development to introduce new healthy drinks
3. Acquisition of small rival firms to gain growth in revenues
4. Continued market penetration with extensive advertising and promotion to shift consumer
perception away from unhealthiness to treating yourself with a soda
5. Continued shift to smaller cans and package sizes
6. Perhaps diversification into snacks and foods as PepsiCo has successfully done
7. Push aggressively into bottled water to capitalize on rapid growth in that sector
8. Develop natural sweeteners to replace artificial sweeteners
9. Increase lobbying to curtail city, county, and state sugar taxes
642 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
National Audubon Society—2018
http://www.audubon.org/
Headquartered in New York City, the National Audubon Society (NAS) is a non-profit organization
dedicated to conservation with special emphasis on bird protection. It is one of the oldest of such
organizations in the world and uses science, education, and grassroots advocacy to advance its con-
servation mission. The organization is named in honor of John James Audubon, a Franco-American
ornithologist and naturalist who painted, cataloged, and described the birds of North America birds in
his famous book Birds of America published in sections between 1827 and 1838.
At the website www.audubon.org/news/how-birds-would-fare-under-white-house-budget-and-
infrastructure-proposals , the NAS news release on February 14, 2018, named many birds that will
be hurt if the Trump administration’s infrastructure proposals get approved. Such birds mentioned
include the tricolored blackbird common loon, yellow-billed cuckoo, snowy plover, reddish egret,
and roseate spoonbill. NAS claims to be non-political but the flavor of their website reveals a strong
Democratic backing. NAS opposes oil drilling, for example, along the U.S. Pacific and Atlantic
coasts, etc. It might benefit NAS going forward to list on their website both side’s arguments, such as
benefits to communities and citizens versus benefits to birds, so as not to come across as being politi-
cally one-sided on key issues.
Copyright by Fred David Books LLC; written by Meredith E. David and Akin David Oladipo.
History
The year was 1896 and both Harriet Hemenway and her cousin Minna Hall were outraged—
millions of water birds had been slaughtered in order to make plumes for women’s hats. Harriet
and Minna initiated a campaign targeted at convincing Boston society ladies to stop wearing
hats with bird feathers. This campaign led to the establishment of the Massachusetts Audubon
Society the same year. Within 2 years, what started as a series of talks during afternoon tea had
grown and spread across the country. State-level Audubon Societies sprang up in New York,
Washington, D.C., Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Connecticut, New Hampshire, Illinois, Maine,
Wisconsin, Rhode Island, Ohio, Indiana, Tennessee, Minnesota, California, and Texas.
In 1900, Audubon member Frank M. Chapman proposed the first yearly Christmas Bird
Count as an alternative to the Christmas “Side Hunt” tradition, the latter of which was a com-
petition between hunters to kill as many mammals as possible, including birds. The Christmas
Bird Count (CBC), which has become a long-standing tradition, involves volunteers from across
North America counting bird sightings from December 14 to January 5 and creating a census
of bird populations. Every November, tens of thousands of volunteers sign up on Audubon’s
website to participate in the CBC, even in the harshest of weathers. The Christmas Bird Count
is the country’s most lasting community science bird project, and it contributes a great deal to
Audubon’s work. It is funded completely by donations which go toward supporting compilers
and volunteers on count day and maintaining technology infrastructure.
In 1903, the state-level Audubon Societies joined efforts to help establish the National
Wildlife Refuge in Florida. To leverage their size and combined strength, the state-level societies
came together and founded the National Association of Audubon Societies in 1905 with an
agenda which prioritizes the protection of water birds, including gulls, terns, egrets, and herons.
The 1918 signing of the Migratory Bird Treaty Act (MBTA) by President Wilson constituted a
regulatory landmark year in the efforts to protect North American birds. This law places all migra-
tory birds under federal protection and still remains one of the strongest laws enacted to protect birds.
Soon after its passing, the NAS started a system of waterbird sanctuaries in seven eastern states which
initiated scientific conservation endeavors on a large-scale across the country. In 1940, the National
Association of Audubon Societies officially became the National Audubon Society (NAS).
In 2011, NAS developed a strategic plan aimed at creating one Audubon, both in practice
and in writing. This plan helped establish partnerships throughout the United States and fostered
CASE 29 • NATIONAL AuDuBON SOCIETY—2018 643
collaborations among chapters, and resulted in growth in NAS’s annual budget from $73 million
to over $100 million. Audubon’s initiatives broadened focus from single local efforts to a focus
on full-lifecycle conservation of birds across the Americas, including five habitats that birds
need to thrive: Coasts, Working Lands, Water, Climate, and Bird-Friendly Communities.
In early 2018, there are 23 NAS state offices, 41 nature centers, 454 independent local
chapters, and 23 sanctuaries, all of which work together.
Vision/Mission
NAS does not appear to have a formal vision statement. However, the organization’s website
states (paraphrased) that, “Our vision is to create a world in which people and wildlife thrive.”
NAS’s mission is perhaps captured in a statement (paraphrased) saying “we strive to conserve
and restore natural ecosystems, focusing on birds, other wildlife, and their habitats for the ben-
efit of humanity and global biological diversity.” Other wording could reflect upon the mission
of NAS such as to protect birds and the places they need, today and tomorrow, throughout the
Americas using science, advocacy, education, and on-the-ground conservation.
Audubon’s state programs, nature centers, chapters, and partners reach millions of people
each year to inform, inspire, and unite diverse communities in conservation action.
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure In January 2018, NAS hired several new executives who come with extensive experience. For
example, Sarah Rose, CEO of the California League of Conservation Voters, has years of experi-
ence forming important relationships with key public policy officials and politicians.
NAS appears to operate using a divisional organizational structure by flyway, yet the
Atlantic and Pacific flyways are not represented in executive titles. Perhaps no one but NAS in-
siders know exactly who reports to whom among the current executives, but what is important in
this case is for students to recommend an effective organizational structure going forward rather
than trying to decipher the existing structure of the organization. Exhibit 1 provides a list of the
NAS top executives and a possible existing organizational chart for the current organization.
EXHIBIT 1 NAS’s Top Executives and Organizational Chart
Source: Based on company documents.
1. David Yarnold, President and CEO
2. Jose Carbonell, CMO
3. Mary Beth Henson, CFO
4. Susan Lunden, COO
5. Peter Vincent, VP, HR
6. Lorraine Sciarra, VP, General Counsel
7. Sean O’Connor, Chief Development Officer
8. David O’Neill, Chief Conservation Officer
9. David Ringer, Chief Network Officer
10. Matthew Anderson, VP, Climate Change and Strategic Initiatives
11. Deeohn Ferris, VP, Equity, Diversity, and Inclusion
12. Sarah Greenberger, VP, Conservation Policy
13. Lisa Hardaway, VP, Communications
14. Gary Langham, VP, Chief Scientist
15. John Beavers, VP, International Alliances Program
16. Doug Meffert,VP, Gulf Coast and Mississippi Flyway
17. Brian Trusty, VP, Central Flyway
1
2 3 4 5
15 16 17
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Segment NAS’s financial statements given later in this case reveal the organization’s revenues come
from three sources: 1) contributions and grants, 2) bequests, and 3) earned income. However,
each annual report of the organization reveals data by flyway as given in Exhibit 2. Revenue by
644 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
flyway is not made public, but note the decline in the number of chapters from 2016 to 2017,
indicating that NAS grew its number of chapters by nine in fiscal 2017.
Strategic Plan
NAS posts its strategic plan on the organization’s website. Four key pillars are the focus of
NAS’s 2016–2020 strategic plan: Conservation, Network, Science, and Durable Public Will.
Conservation Programs Conservation programs are NAS’s largest expense, constituting 82 percent of total expenses in
2017, or $104.5 million. The conservation programs are categorized as either field conserva-
tion programs or national conservation programs. Field programs are implemented by NAS’s
23 offices across different states and regions. The ultimate goal of field programs is to achieve
complete lifecycle conservation for all bird species within its focus areas. Field programs con-
stitute the majority (~70–75%) of conservation expenses, with national programs constituting
the remaining 25–30 percent. Some of NAS’s national conservation programs include: Climate
Initiative, Network, Science, Policy, Marketing & Engagement, Hemispheric Strategy, and
Diversity & Inclusion.
Network Audubon’s network consists of state offices, nature centers, volunteers, chapters, employees,
donors, and partners. Recognizing the importance of its network, NAS recently added the new
Chief Network Officer position which is held by David Ringer whose focus is on leading growth
and expertise development across the Audubon network. He coordinates activities among NAS
offices, centers, and chapters. Audubon’s network includes its nature centers which receive one
million visitors per year. NAS partners with BirdLife International to implement conservation
programs in the United States. NAS contributes data and scientific research to other organiza-
tions both nationally and internationally, and partners with five countries on implementing
policy changes that are favorable to bird populations.
Science NAS leverages its volunteer-based bird monitoring to collect data which serves as the foundation
for the organization’s development of conservation and bird advocacy programs, while also fos-
tering local engagement and building public interests in bird science. The organization conducts
scientific research to influence strategic goals, and gathers data along flyways on bird habitat, how
bird species are responding to changes in climate, etc. Through events such as the Christmas Bird
Count (CBC) and Great Backyard Bird Count, NAS encourages local participation in data gather-
ing, engages with communities and citizens, and strives to raise awareness in bird issues. Details
gathered from science programs gives NAS a unique data point for its conservation efforts.
Durable Public Will Public will is essential for bird well-being, so NAS works to ensure that public policy and
private enterprises avoid engaging in activities which may be harmful to birds or their future
EXHIBIT 2 National Audubon Society Data by Flyway
Flyways
# State Offices # Nature Centers # Chapters
2017 2016 2017 2016 2017 2016
Pacific 3 3 4 4 92 94
Central 6 6 7 7 91 95
Mississippi 6 6 8 8 115 118
Atlantic 8 8 22 22 156 156
Total 23 23 41 41 454 445
Source: Based on company information.
CASE 29 • NATIONAL AuDuBON SOCIETY—2018 645
environments. For example, in 2018, a jetty was to be constructed at Shallotte Inlet near
Ocean Isle Beach, North Carolina, but a lawsuit by NAS alleging the jetty would harm nesting
bird populations shut down the project to the dismay of many local boaters. NAS is an activist,
continuously engaging with the public to keep bird and conservation-related issues at the top of
citizens’ minds throughout the Americas.
The NAS works to encourage the passage of bird-friendly policies and legislation that
increase the use of renewable energy. Such efforts are bipartisan in nature and take full advan-
tage of NAS’s one million members and allies. NAS has achieved success over the years in
areas such as: 1) restoring large ecosystems such as the Arctic Slope in Alaska, the Everglades
wetlands, and the Mississippi River Delta; 2) protecting nearly 3,000 important bird areas cover-
ing approximately 400 million acres of public and private lands; and, 3) supporting laws like the
Clean Air Act, Clean Water Act, Endangered Species Act, and the Neotropical Migratory Bird
Conservation Act.
To accomplish its “durable public will” goals, engagement with grassroots supporters is key,
but NAS also uses its website, social media platforms, marketing through email, and AUDUBON
magazine, which has a readership of 1.5 million people. Through digital applications, the NAS
has achieved over 1 million downloads of its nature guides.
Strategy
NAS strives to educate schoolchildren, families, and nature lovers of all ages by offering infor-
mative materials and programs at the Audubon centers and sanctuaries, as well as through the
Audubon Magazine. Using its network, NAS develops conservation plans and then works with
lawmakers and other agencies to implement programs to promote bird welfare and petition or
file lawsuits against initiatives that could harm birdlife.
NAS volunteers and bird enthusiasts for more than a hundred years have participated in
annual “citizen science programs” aimed at collecting census-type data of birds throughout the
Americas. Today, this data is used by Audubon, as well as other wildlife agencies, conservation
biologists, etc. to assess the current state of bird populations, identify trends in the evolution and
health of bird species, reveal changes in migratory or flight patterns, and to ultimately guide the
development of necessary conservation initiatives.
NAS’s strategy for bird conservation focuses in five key areas: 1) Coasts, 2) Working Lands,
3) Water, 4) Climate, and 5) Bird-Friendly Communities. These areas aim to cover the full-lifecycle
of bird breeding, wintering, and migration throughout the Americas.
Coasts The NAS’s conservation efforts on coasts are focused on protecting and rehabilitating coastlines
to give shorebirds a better chance of survival. NAS does not like the rise in sea levels due to
climate change and works its network to change policies at the local, state, and national level
to favor birdlife. The NAS partners with organizations with similar interests in Latin America.
Coastal area initiatives and programs represent the greatest cost to NAS, and it allocates $18–
$20 million annually of its budget to conservation efforts in this regard.
Working Lands Nearly half of the land in the lower 48 states are referred to by NAS as “working lands.”
Audubon partners with forest, ranch, and farm landowners, land managers, private industry
organizations, and governmental agencies to enhance the condition of bird habitats, promote
bird-friendly practices, and devise policies for large-scale land management conversation prac-
tices. NAS tries to get landowners to adopt methods that are beneficial to birds, and annually
allocates about $8–10 million to “take care of birds on working lands.”
Water The NAS’s conservation efforts in this area are around getting the public involved on water rights
and improving the quality of water, rehabilitating bird habitats beside the rivers, and leveraging
646 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
other open market initiatives that can help to achieve its goals. NAS allocates $12–15 million of
its budget to these efforts.
Climate NAS scientists have concluded that North American bird species face the possibility of losing at
least half of their habitat by the year 2080 due to rising sea levels. To combat this, NAS spends
between $10–12 million annually of curtailing global warming by working with local, state, and
federal officials to help birds by reversing global warming. Some analysts say NAS is too harsh
on Americans since much of the cause for global warming falls on other countries such as China.
In Bangkok, Thailand, for example, air pollution was so bad in 2018 that residents were encour-
aged to wear masks outside of homes and buildings.
Bird-Friendly Communities NAS allocates $12–14 million of its annual budget to the work of creating bird-friendly com-
munities. The organization especially wants to protect breeding places for birds, especially along
coastal areas.
Finance
NAS’s fiscal year ends on June 30. The organization’s income statements and balance
sheets are provided in Exhibit 3 and Exhibit 4, respectively. NAS generated revenue of
$112.2 million during 2017, up 9.33 percent from the previous year. Most of the revenue
(69 percent) came from contributions and grants from donors and members; 12 percent
came from bequests; 8 percent of the revenue stemmed from earned income; 9 percent
from investment earnings, and the remaining 2 percent of revenue came from royalties.
Total expenses in 2017 were $104.5 million, resulting in $7.7 million in earnings before
tax. Eighty-two percent of expenses were from conservation programs (59 percent field
programs and 23 percent national programs); 14 percent was for fundraising activities
(5 percent for membership development and 9 percent for other development activities), and
4 percent was spent on general management expenses. Endowments for fiscal 2017 grew by
$53.4 million to $185.3 million.
Notice on the balance sheets that NAS is very liquid having a current ratio over 7. Some
select financial ratios are provided in Exhibit 5 and reveal that NAS is quite liquid, has
improving margins, and has reduced its debt situation—so fiscal 2017 was an improvement
from 2016 for the organization. Exhibit 6 provides a further breakdown of NAS’s spending in
2016 and 2017.
EXHIBIT 3 NAS’s Income Statements (000 omitted)
Income Statement 6/30/16 6/30/17 Percent Change
Revenues $102,620 $112,196 9.33%
Cost of Goods Sold 0 0 NA NA
Gross Profit 102,620 112,196 9.33%
Operating Expenses 97,442 104,532 7.28%
EBIT 5,178 7,664 48.01%
Interest Expense 0 0 NA NA
EBT 5,178 7,664 48.01%
Tax 0 0 NA NA
Non-Recurring Events (24,386) 32,668 NA NA
Excess of Unrestricted Support and
Revenues over Expenses
(19,208) 40,332 NA NA
Source: Based on company documents.
CASE 29 • NATIONAL AuDuBON SOCIETY—2018 647
EXHIBIT 4 NAS’s Balance Sheets (000 omitted)
Balance Sheet 6/30/16 6/30/17 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments $34,897 $36,949 6%
Accounts Receivable 18,804 25,169 34%
Inventory 0 0 NA NA
Other Current Assets 2,748 2,927 7%
Total Current Assets 56,449 65,045 15%
Property Plant & Equipment 147,152 147,101 0%
Goodwill 0 0 NA NA
Intangibles 0 0 NA NA
Other Long-Term Assets 252,630 277,606 10%
Total Assets 456,231 489,752 7%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 8,615 8,585 0%
Other Current Liabilities 0 0 NA NA
Total Current Liabilities 8,615 8,585 0%
Long-Term Debt 6,307 6,524 3%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 25,727 18,729 -27%
Total Liabilities 40,649 33,838 -17%
Net Assets
Changes in Net Assets (19,208) 40,332 NA NA
Net Assets Beginning of Year 434,790 415,582 -4%
Net Assets End of Year 415,582 455,914 10%
Total Liabilities and Net Assets 456,231 489,752 7%
Source: Based on company documents.
* Note: Net assets includes Unrestricted, Temporarily Restricted, and Permanently Restricted assets. Nonprofit organizations do not have Retained Earnings per se but they do annually carry Net Assets over from the Income Statement to the Balance Sheet following the same process as for-profit firms.
EXHIBIT 5 NAS’s Current Financial Ratios
Historical Ratios
6/30/2016 6/30/2017
Current Ratio 6.55 7.58
Quick Ratio 6.23 7.24
Total Debt-to-Total-Assets Ratio 0.09 0.07
Total Debt-to-Equity Ratio 0.10 0.07
Total Assets Turnover 0.22 0.23
Accounts Receivable Turnover 5.46 4.46
Average Collection Period 66.88 days 81.88 days
Gross Profit Margin % 100 100
Operating Profit Margin % 5 7
ROA % -4 8
ROE % -5 9
Source: Based on company documents.
648 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
External Issues
In 2018, the White House is moving to expand oil drilling along the U.S. coasts. Audubon
experts vehemently oppose vast oil offshore drilling, arguing that drilling could further stress
an already fragile ecosystem by increasing the risk of oil spoils which could be devastating to
the marine ecosystem as well as the habitats it provides for millions of shorebirds and marine
mammals. NAS is helping communities rally against offshore drilling and working to pass poli-
cies prohibiting expanded offshore drilling.
In May 2018, the Secretary of the Interior, Ryan Zinke, announced a proposal to expand
hunting and fishing opportunities to 30 National Wildlife Refuges, spanning more than 248,000
acres. Of the 30 refuges identified, 20 refuges in 19 states would begin to allow migratory game
EXHIBIT 6 NAS’s Spending Activities in 2016 and 2017 (000 omitted)
OPERATING ACTIVITIES 6/30/2016 6/30/2017 Percent Change
REVENUES, GAINS, AND OTHER
SUPPORT
Contributions and grants $71,156 $77,187 8.48%
Bequests $9,435 $13,361 41.61%
Earned income $10,663 $9,149 -14.19%
Investment earnings on non-pooled funds, net $2,337 $1,774 -24.09%
Investment earnings on pooled funds –
appropriated, net
$8,137 $8,255 1.46%
Royalties, net and other revenue $893 $2,469 176.43%
Net assets released from restrictions – –
Total revenues, gains and other support $102,620 $112,196 9.33%
EXPENSES
Conservation programs:
Field conservation programs $53,564 $61,346 14.53%
National conservation programs $24,780 $23,762 -4.11%
$78,344 $85,108 8.63%
Fundraising:
Membership development $4,861 $5,813 19.58%
Other development $9,479 $9,112 -3.87%
$14,340 $14,925 4.08%
Management and general $4,759 $4,500 -5.43%
Total expenses $97,442 $104,532 7.28%
Changes in net assets from operations $5,178 $7,664 48.01%
NON-OPERATING ACTIVITIES
Sales of property $4 -$14 -501.60%
Investment gain/loss on pooled funds not
appropriated, net -$15,479 $20,999 -235.66%
Charitable trust additions $607 $579 -4.51%
Change in value of charitable trusts -$5,906 $3,291 -155.72%
Changes in net assets before pension and
postretirement related changes -$15,598 $32,519 -308.49%
Pension and postretirement related changes other
than net periodic costs -$3,610 $7,813 -316.41%
Changes in net assets -$19,208 $40,332 -309.97%
Net assets, beginning of year $434,790 $415,582 -4.42%
Net assets, end of year $415,582 $455,914 9.70%
Source: Based on company documents.
CASE 29 • NATIONAL AuDuBON SOCIETY—2018 649
bird hunting opportunities beginning with the 2018–2019 hunting seasons. The White House
would like Americans to have access to quality places to hunt and fish to help preserve our na-
tion’s hunting and fishing heritage. Dale Hall, CEO of Ducks Unlimited, says his organization
“looks forward to working with the Department of the Interior to help identify opportunities to
increase access for sportsmen and women.”
National Wildlife Refuges in the United States currently have more than 53 million visitors
a year. Among these lands, 337 wildlife refuges and 37 wetland management districts are open to
hunting in accordance with state regulations. If the new proposal is approved, 377 refuges would
be open for hunting opportunities. Greg Sheehan, U.S. Fish Wildlife Service (USFWS) principal
deputy director, fully supports the proposal, saying “Hunters and anglers have provided critical
funding for wildlife conservation in America for more than a century.” The National Wildlife
Refuge System is made up of about 750 million acres of water and 100 million acres of land in the
United States. The USFWS is currently seeking public comments to the proposed rule for 30 days.
Philanthropic Giving According to Giving USA 2017: The Annual Report on Philanthropy for the Year 2016, released
on June 12, 2017, total charitable donations in the United States rose 2.7 percent in 2016 to
$390.05 billion. Giving USA is the longest-running and most comprehensive report of its kind
in the United States. The Report is published by Giving USA Foundation, part of The Giving
Institute housed at the Indiana University Lilly Family School of Philanthropy. Details of the
Report reveal that giving by individuals and foundations rose, but giving by bequest or estates
fell sharply. The Report issued in June 2018 showed substantial increases in giving in the United
States as the nation’s economy and stock markets improved substantially. The Lilly School at
Indiana University also publishes The Philanthropy Outlook that currently projects increases in
giving in the United States.
Bird Watching The Department of Interior’s September 7, 2017, report shows that the largest increases in par-
ticipation involve wildlife watching in recent years has come from observing and photographing
wildlife. These activities surged 20 percent from 2011 to 2016, from 71.8 million to 86 million
participants during that time. Expenditures by wildlife watchers rose sharply (28 percent)
between 2011 and 2016, from $59.1 billion to $75.9 billion. Around-the-home wildlife watching
increased 18 percent from 2011, from 68.6 million in 2011 to 81.1 million participants in 2016.
Lower increases were reported for away-from-home wildlife watchers: 5 percent increase from
2011 to 2016, from 22.5 million to 23 million participants.
Competitors
NAS competes indirectly with all wildlife or conservation-oriented nonprofit organizations
that depend on donations to fund operations, including World Wildlife for Nature, Sierra Club,
National Wildlife Federation, Ocean Conservancy, Defenders of Wildlife, Nature Conservancy,
Cornucopia Institute, Friends of the Earth, Duck’s Unlimited, and even 350.org. However, one of
these nonprofit organizations is most similar to NAS in focusing on bird conservation in North
America; the entity is Duck’s Unlimited.
Ducks Unlimited DU is an American nonprofit, volunteer-based 501(c) organization dedicated to the conservation
of wetlands and associated upland habitats for waterfowl, other wildlife, and people. Founded
by Joseph Knapp in 1937, DU has maintained a worldwide presence of about 700,000 members
and 40,000 volunteers. As of January 1, 2017, DU had 620,853 adult members and 45,357 youth
members, whereas DU Mexico had 4,662 members and DU Canada had 130,000 members.
DU looks to partner with a wide range of corporations, governments, communities, land-
owners, and private citizens to restore and manage wetlands that have been degraded and to
prevent further degradation. DU sources of revenue include federal and state habitat reimburse-
ments, conservation easements, sponsors and members, major gifts and donations, and royal-
ties/advertisement. Through its conservation activities, DU benefits biodiversity, water quality,
the environment and the economy in the areas in which it is active.
650 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
DU is the world’s largest private organization devoted to waterfowl habitat conserva-
tion. Although ducks and geese are the primary beneficiaries of DU operations all over North
America, all kinds of wildlife, people, and communities benefit from DU programs and
initiatives.
DU’s fiscal year ends on June 30. The DU FY17 saw the organization’s revenues decline
slightly to $224 million as more than 58,000 DU volunteers hosted over 577,000 attendees at
4,050 events, a slight increase over the prior year’s 3,900 events held. DU’s FY17 also benefited
from 5,000 major donors and 700,000 members contributing over $86 million to the organiza-
tion, an increase of $1.8 million over the prior year. Fully, 83 percent of all DU revenues in
FY17 went to conservation. DU has an important partnership with Bass Pro Shops (BPS); BPS
promotes DU on its BPS Chevrolet at NASCAR’s Coke Zero 400 in Daytona, Florida.
In FY17, DU obtained 39 percent of its revenue from federal and state habitat support
and nongovernmental partnerships while 25 percent was derived from events, sponsorships,
and memberships. About 19 percent of DU’s funding came from donated conservation ease-
ments and public service announcements, while another 12 percent came from major gifts and
endowments. The remaining 5 percent came from royalties, advertising, and other sources. DU’s
goal for its Rescue Our Wetlands campaign is to raise $2 billion for wetlands conversation by
December 2018. DU’s FY17 ended with $1.82 billion raised, so the organization is close to
reaching its $2 billion goal.
Future
Karen Thorne, an ecologist with the U.S. Geological Survey, revealed in early 2018 that as sea
levels rise, waters will inundate all coastal marshes in California and Oregon, and most of those
in Washington by 2110. However, Thorne reports that sea level rise will progress slowly through
2050, then accelerate, giving today’s managers enough time to prepare marshes, and their birds,
for the changes to come. Aududon plans to be at the forefront of initiatives to save birds on the
U.S. west, Gulf, and east coasts.
Some analysts suggest that Audubon should become less political in its approach to saving
birds, being more compassionate to people affected by rising sea levels and other issues and
initiatives. For example, Audubon often files lawsuits to shut down jetties being built in inlets
and staunchly opposes oil drilling off the east coast of the United States, and a multitude of other
initiatives. Analysts suggest that Audubon consult with local residents more genuinely before
filing lawsuits, thus being less—or as some would say—staunch liberals.
Audubon is concerned that philanthropic giving and donations may drop precipitously in
2018–2020 given the new federal tax code that basically takes away philanthropic giving as a tax
deduction. Audubon needs a clear strategic plan going forward as seas are rising and birds and
people are being impacted.
CASE 30 • MTN GROuP LIMITED—2022 651
MTN Group Limited—2022
www.mtn.com
Headquartered in Johannesburg, South Africa, and with nearly 20,000 employees, MTN Group
Limited (MTN) is a large mobile telecommunications company that provides Africa, the Middle
East, and Asia with phone and Internet services. At year-end 2020, MTN reported having 280 million
subscribers, making it the eighth largest mobile network firm in the world, and by far the largest
phone and Internet provider in South Africa. MTN is active in 20 countries, but in Nigeria, the firm
has 35 percent market share, and the country contributes a third of MTN’s total revenues. MTN’s
common stock is listed on the Johannesburg Stock Exchange (JSE) under JSE: MTN.
In August 2020, MTN divested its stakes in various companies in Syria, Afghanistan, and
Yemen and also sold its 49 percent minority holding in Irancell over time. The reason given by
MTN for these actions was that overall the Middle East contributed less than 4 percent to Group
earnings in the first half of 2020.
In February 2021, MTN partnered with Mastercard to facilitate global e-commerce payments
of the MTN customer base in 16 African countries. This business action included a Mastercard
virtual payment platform being linked to MTN MoMo (Mobile Money) wallets.
In March 2021, MTN CEO Ralph Mupita announced that the group was considering spin-
ning off its mobile money activities. The estimated value of the group’s mobile money arm is at
least $5 billion.
History
MTN was founded in 1994 when the South African government assisted a firm named M-Cell
in beginning its operations. In 2009, MTN completed its purchase of Verizon Business South
Africa, which provided network data services to five African countries. In both 2014 and
2015, MTN was named the Most Admired and Most Valuable Brand in Africa. In September
2020, MTN hired a new CEO, Ralph Mupita, to replace Rob Shuter, who had been the CEO
of MTN for 4 years.
In 2020, MTN obtained 504 million licenses in Yemen, 1.19 billion in Ghana, 32 million in
Nigeria, 24 million in Afghanistan, and 1.774 billion in Uganda, in comparison to the prior year’s
31 million in Zambia, 51 million in Benin, 104 million in Ghana, 249 million in Nigeria, and 2 mil-
lion in Uganda. MTN reported a profit after tax for 2020 of R$ 19.6 billion, up from the prior year’s
R$ 10.8 billion. The company paid no dividends to shareholders in 2020.
Mission/Vision Statement
MTN seemingly does not have a written, published vision or mission statement, so proposed
statements are provided below:
Vision Statement To provide everyone in Africa with an affordable, modern, quality, and connected life.
Mission Statement MTN is on a mission to provide leading digital solutions for Africa. We believe everyone in
Africa deserves to have a modern, connected life through digital and financial inclusion. We will
work diligently to fill the gaps and help supply Africa with more comprehensive coverage. We
are working hard on providing 5G to our customers and achieve all we do through excellent and
talented employees.
652 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
Internal Issues
Organizational Structure T. Molefe took over as CFO of MTN in mid-2021. R.A. Shuter resigned from the position of
Group President and CEO in August 2020 and was replaced by R.T. Mupita, who was previously
CFO of MTN. Exhibit 1 provides an organizational chart for the company. Note that numbers
10, 11, and 12 report to number 2, indicating that the company operates from a divisional-by-
region organizational design. However, only 3 of the 14 regional segments that are mentioned
in the MTN Annual Report are clearly represented, so improvements are needed in the struc-
tural alignment of MTN. Four of the 12 top executives—Y. Cuba, Lele Modise, T. Molefe, and
F. Sekha—are female, which is a positive start.
EXHIBIT 1 MTN’s Top Executives Listed and Arrayed
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12
1. R. Mupita, Group President and CEO
2. J. Schulte-Bockum, Group COO
3. T. Molefe, Group CFO
4. P.D. Norman, Group Chief HRM Officer
5. C. Molapisi, Group Chief Technology/Information Officer
6. Lele Modise, Group Chief Legal Counsel
7. F. Sekha, Group Chief Regulatory and Corporate Affairs Officer
8. K. Ndamase, Group Chief M&A and Business Development Officer
9. S. Dioum, Group Chief Digital and Fintech Officer
10. G. Motsa, CEO of MTN South Africa
11. K. Toriola, CEO of MTN Nigeria
12. Y. Cuba, Vice President of SEA
Source: Based on information at www.mtn.com/who-we-are/leadership/executive-committee.
Financial Data and Statements As indicated in Exhibit 2, MTN reported an 18 percent revenue increase in 2020 and an 81 percent
increase in net income versus the prior year, with Network Services accounting for most of the
income. Recall from the chapters that shareholders expect at least a 5 percent top line (revenues)
and bottom line (net income) growth from any firm annually, so MTN is doing very well based
on that criteria.
MTN’s balance sheets provided in Exhibit 3 reveal that the total equity in the firm increased
23 percent in 2020. The firm combines goodwill and intangibles into one line item, so the ab-
sence of intangibles on the reported balance sheet may not be entirely accurate.
Segments
MTN reports segment data annually by both region and product. The regions are 1) South
Africa, 2) Nigeria, 3) South and East Africa and Ghana (SEAGHA), 4) West and Central Africa
(WECA), and Middle East and North Africa (MENA). SEAGHA is now called SEA as Ghana
has been moved to WECA.
Exhibit 4 provides a 2020 segment breakdown of MTN’s revenues across both regions and
products. Note the bulk of revenue is from Network Services, but don’t forget about digital and
fintech (financial technology). Fintech is a popular way to pay for goods and services across Africa
and a key area of growth moving forward. Fintech is also related to and depends on the other divi-
sions, so increases in fintech revenues will also increase revenues from the other segments.
CASE 30 • MTN GROuP LIMITED—2022 653
Source: Based on MTN’s 2020 Annual Report, pp. 22–23.
EXHIBIT 2 MTN’s Income Statement (in millions of ZAR)
Income Statement 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Revenues 151,931 179,361 18%
Cost of Goods Sold 11,929 11,093 –7%
Gross Profit 140,002 168,268 20%
Operating Expenses 108,573 123,673 14%
EBIT 31,429 44,595 42%
Interest Expense 13,692 15,509 13%
EBT 17,737 29,086 64%
Tax 6,908 9,439 37%
Non-Recurring Events – – NA NA
Net Income 10,829 19,647 81%
EXHIBIT 3 MTN’s Balance Sheets (in millions of ZAR)
Source: Based on MTN’s 2020 Annual Report, p. 24.
Balance Sheet 12/31/19 12/31/20 Percent Change
Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments 21,739 30,990 43%
Accounts Receivable 26,047 27,216 4%
Inventory 2,995 1,534 –49%
Other Current Assets 24,663 50,020 103%
Total Current Assets 75,444 109,760 45%
Property Plant & Equipment 98,312 100,576 2%
Goodwill 36,866 39,069 6%
Intangibles – – NA NA
Other Long-Term Assets 91,689 99,537 9%
Total Assets 302,311 348,942 15%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable 36,630 41,880 14%
Other Current Liabilities 47,209 66,419 41%
Total Current Liabilities 83,839 108,299 29%
Long-Term Debt 120,728 122,210 1%
Other Long-Term Liabilities 11,644 12,208 5%
Total Liabilities 216,211 242,717 12%
Equity
Common Stock 36,929 36,929 0%
Retained Earnings 57,863 71,263 23%
Treasury Stock – – NA NA
Paid in Capital & Other (8,692) (1,967) NA NA
Total Equity 86,100 106,225 23%
Total Liabilities and Equity 302,311 348,942 15%
654 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
EXHIBIT 4 MTN’s 2020 Revenues by Region and by Product (in millions of ZAR)
Source: Based on information in the MTN Annual Report 2020, p. 39.
Region Network Services Mobile Devices & Roaming Interconnect Digital & Fintech Other Total
South Africa 29,639 8,449 3,481 2,170 1,331 45,070
Nigeria 49,054 294 5,732 2,341 559 57,980
SEAGHA 23,485 332 1,659 7,777 781 34,034
Ghana 11,648 120 749 4,487 241 17,245
Uganda 5,570 53 437 2,135 125 8,320
Other SEACHA 6,267 159 473 1,155 415 8,469
WECA 20,107 183 2,581 3,921 835 27,627
Cote d’Ivoire 5,697 47 1,101 1,472 459 8,776
Cameroon 5,118 46 459 994 69 6,686
Other WECA 9,292 90 1,021 1,455 307 12,165
MENA 8,568 21 1,228 477 129 10,423
Syria 2,036 1 32 213 13 2,295
Sudan 2,526 11 623 119 27 3,306
Other MENA 4,006 9 573 145 89 4,822
Exhibit 6 reveals MTN’s EBIT and capital expenditures by segment for 2020 versus 2019.
Note that the company has increasing profits everywhere except Syria and increasing capital
expenditures in 9 of 14 regions across Africa.
Analogous to Exhibit 4, Exhibit 5 provides a 2019 segment breakdown of MTN’s revenues
across both regions and products. Note the higher numbers in 2020 especially for Nigeria in all
categories versus some declines in 2020 for South Africa.
EXHIBIT 5 MTN’s 2019 Revenues by Region and by Product (in millions of ZAR)
Source: Based on information in the MTN Annual Report 2020, p. 40.
Region Network Services Mobile Devices & Roaming Interconnect Digital & Fintech Other Total
South Africa 27,926 9,017 4,381 2,066 1,635 45,025
Nigeria 39,545 88 4,995 1,584 484 46,696
SEAGHA 18,333 315 1,757 5,983 681 27,069
Ghana 9,275 90 915 3,326 214 13,820
Uganda 4,463 61 409 1,681 86 6,700
Other SEACHA 4,595 164 433 976 381 6,549
WECA 16,240 171 2,280 2,511 619 21,821
Cote d’Ivoire 4,535 37 899 1,041 405 6.917
Cameroon 4,248 62 457 571 51 5,389
Other WECA 7,457 72 924 899 163 9.515
MENA 7,520 37 1,006 343 71 8.977
Syria 2,745 – 51 167 23 2,986
Sudan 1,335 5 472 69 22 1,903
Other MENA 3,440 32 483 107 26 4,088
Strategy Some of the strategic transactions reported by MTN in 2020 include the following:
1. Dilution of the company’s interest in MTN Zambia by 8 percent
2. Disposal of the company’s 18.9 percent interest in Jumia Technologies AG
3. Disposal of the company’s 49 percent holdings in Uganda Tower InterCo and Ghana Tower
InterCo
CASE 30 • MTN GROuP LIMITED—2022 655
EXHIBIT 6 MTN’s 2020 vs. 2019 EBIT and Capital Expenditures (in millions of ZAR)
Source: Based on information in the MTN Annual Report 2020, pp. 42 and 43.
EBIT Capital Expenditures
2019 2020 2019 2020
South Africa 16,972 17,742 11,295 7,542
Nigeria 25,149 29,506 9,750 12,694
SEAGHA 12,136 16,802 5,554 6,063
Ghana 7,014 9,097 2,850 3.021
Uganda 3,150 4,118 1,147 1,328
Other SEAGHA 1,972 3,587 1,557 1,714
WECA 6,081 8,620 3,231 3,418
Cote d’Ivoire 1,814 3,042 918 1,064
Cameroon 1,635 2,149 573 950
Other WECA 2,632 3,429 1,740 1,404
MENA 2,836 3,352 1,989 1,642
Syria 1,173 574 939 751
Sudan 677 1,428 430 495
Other MENA 986 1,350 620 396
4. Reclassification of the company’s 20 percent interest in Belgacom International Carrier
Services (BICS) to non-current assets held for divestiture
5. Reclassification of the company’s share of MTN Syria to non-current assets held for
divestiture
Of MTN’s revenue in 2020, outgoing voice calls led all income sources, accounting for
over 64 percent more revenue than data, which was the second largest revenue driver. With the
increased use of smartphones in Africa, which are slowly replacing feature phones, data will
close in on voice calls as a revenue generator. At 20 percent, MTN’s Fintech and Mobile Money
(MoMo) is the mobile money arm of the firm. Many people across Africa do not have bank ac-
counts and do not carry money around with them, so MTN’s Fintech provides a secure, safe,
and reliable way to pay for items. MoMo grew by 55 percent in the 2 years from March 2018 to
March 2020, adding 12 million new active subscribers, with another 12 million added by March
2021, bringing the total number of customers using the service to 47 million.
Competitors
MTN has more than 50 competitors around the world, but in South Africa, the company’s pri-
mary competitors are Vodacom, Cell C, and Telkom Mobile.
Vodacom South Africa Headquartered in Johannesburg, South Africa, and founded in 1994, Vodacom is 60.5 percent
owned by Vodafone, one of the world’s largest telecommunications companies. Vodacom serves
296 million people in Africa, especially in South Africa, Tanzania, the Congo, Mozambique,
Lesotho, and Kenya. In July 2021, Vodacom and Nokia announced their successful trial of a
high-speed optical transmission network that will support 5G and high-tech transmissions from
Midrand to Cape Town in Africa.
Vodacom spent R$ 67 million in their fiscal year that ended March 31, 2021, deploying 3G
and 4G Internet services at new sites in deep rural areas in Bethlehem, Fouriesburg, Clocolan,
Fauresmith, Griekwastad, Bothaville, Kroonstad, Portsmaburg, Jagersfontein, Parys, Qwa-Qwa,
Prieska, Kgalagadi, Theunissen, Ubuntu, Joe Morolong, Siyancuma, Tokologo, Mangaung,
Tswaing, Ga-Segonyana, Kagisono-Molopo, Dikgatlong, Matjhabeng, Sol Plaatje, Dihlabeng,
and Naledi. Vodacom’s Rural Coverage Acceleration Program is committed to expanding Internet
coverage for people who live in deep rural areas of South Africa and beyond. This effort is hav-
ing a significant positive societal impact in Africa: It allows tens of thousands of school-going
656 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
children to access the Internet every day; people can now actively look for and apply for jobs
using their smartphones; and people who previously had to travel long distances to avail basic
banking services are now doing this on their smartphones at home.
Cell C Founded in 2001 as a mobile communications company in South Africa, Cell C was appointed in
March 2021 as one of the preferred service providers to the South African government for phone
services from April 2021 to March 2026. One of the requirements for a firm looking to provide
this nationwide phone service was that it had to already have at least 80 percent network cover-
age throughout South Africa.
Cell C reported revenues of R$ 13.8 billion in fiscal 2020, an 8 percent drop from the prior
year, along with a net income loss of R$ 5.5 billion, on the heels of a loss of R$ 4 billion in fiscal
2019. Cell C reports revenue by five types: Prepaid, Contract, Broadband, Mobile, and Other,
which in millions of rand in fiscal 2020 were 6,191, 3,451, 703, 10,345, and 2,644, respectively.
All of these revenue numbers were down on average 11 percent from the prior year. However,
the company’s total subscriber base at the end of the fiscal year 2020 was 12.5 million, up from
11.7 million the prior year.
Telkom Mobile Founded in October 2010 and headquartered in Centurion, South Africa, Telkom is a large mobile
telecommunications company. Telkom provides voice and data products and services using 2G and
3G networks. The company offers both business and residential customers integrated voice, data,
fixed voice, mobile IT, and data center solutions and services. Telkom reported revenues for their
fiscal year that ended March 31, 2021, of R$ 43.2 billion, up from R$ 43.0 billion the prior year.
The company’s profits reported on that date were R$ 2.4 million, up from 540 million the prior year.
The South African Government owns 40.5 percent of Telkom, while 49.6 percent of the company
shares are held by institutional shareholders. Telkom’s active mobile subscriber numbers were
9.7 million in fiscal 2019, 12.0 million in fiscal 2020, and 15.3 million in fiscal 2021, up
27.8 percent over those years, so the company is doing great. Telkom’s broadband subscriber
numbers were 6.4 million in fiscal 2019, 8.2 million in fiscal 2020, and 10.3 million in fiscal 2021,
up 25.6 percent over those years, which is more evidence that this is a major rival to MTN.
External Issues There is a high positive correlation between increased Internet access and economic growth, so
by providing connectivity in rural areas of Africa, MTN and Vodacom are spurring prosperity
on the continent. A World Bank study recently concluded that a 10-percent increase in fixed
broadband penetration could increase gross domestic product (GDP) growth by 1.21 percent in
developed economies and 1.38 percent in developing ones. New Internet services in Africa are
benefiting all segments of society, such as e-health, e-education, and e-commerce.
Though spreading slowly throughout Africa, 5G delivers faster download and upload speeds,
decreases the time it takes devices to communicate with wireless networks, and enables greater
connectivity of devices than 4G or 3G networks; it would allow use of the cloud, big data, AI,
and the Internet of Things (IoT), ultimately improving human lives.
The World Economic Forum (WEF) recently reported that 5G will change the world even
more profoundly than 3G and 4G and that it will be as revolutionary as electricity or the auto-
mobile, benefiting entire economies and entire societies. Specifically, 5G will enable more ef-
ficient manufacturing through predictive intelligence, improve workplace and worker safety, and
enhance operational effectiveness in industries. For example, in the African agriculture sector,
5G enables farmers to monitor the health of crops and livestock. An increase in broadband pen-
etration is closely linked in Africa with job creation, improved education, better service delivery,
and increased rural development.
The eventual rollout of mobile broadband across Africa will spur new businesses and promote
existing ones such as Uber, Facebook, and AirBnB as well as virtual classrooms and remote medi-
cal service deliveries, changing the way people in Africa live. In fact, the WEF forecasts that 5G
technology will create approximately R$ 55 trillion in economic output and 22.3 million jobs by
2035 in South Africa alone. For example, within the energy sector, utilities, towns, cities, and vil-
lages are turning to smart energy solutions such as smart metering and smart-grid communications.
CASE 30 • MTN GROuP LIMITED—2022 657
Investments in 5G networks by firms such as MTN and Vodacom will reach R$ 15 trillion world-
wide by 2025, according to the Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM Association).
Mobile Phone Shipments in Africa Smartphone shipments in Africa in 2018 and 2019 revealed that there were over 40 percent
more feature phones shipped than smartphones. However, in 2020 this number declined to about
26 percent, and this trend is expected to continue, which will likely create increased demand
for 4G and 5G capabilities as more consumers use these services. Major Chinese manufacturer
Transsion leads all market share in Africa with 44 percent of the phone market as of Q1 2021
through its brands Tecno, Itel, and Infinix. Samsung, by comparison, held 23 percent of the mar-
ket share during the same time. Chinese manufacturers Huawei, OPPO, and Xiaomi are all in the
top 5 of market share in Africa. A major reason customers value these brands is that 42 percent
of all smartphones in Africa can be purchased for less than $100.
Another reason for the increase in smartphones among Africans is simply that people gener-
ally do not have a personal bank but are able to use a Mobile Money account to store and trans-
fer funds, with 200 million users in sub-Saharan Africa, the Middle East, and Northern Africa
making over 27 billion transactions in 2020. Exhibit 7 reveals the breakdown of feature phones
versus smartphones in Africa.
EXHIBIT 7 Mobile Phone Shipments in Africa (in millions of ZAR)
Source: Based on information across various Statista articles at www.statistica.com on 5G in Africa.
88 90 87
130 129
110
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
2018 2019 2020
Smart Phone Feature Phone
Mobile Phones Provide Financial Inclusion in Africa Many people in Africa cannot afford to do business with a bank and carrying large amounts of
cash around or even storing large amounts of cash at home is as much of a problem in Africa
as in the rest of the world. In fact, in Nigeria alone, one of the richest nations in Africa, only
2.6 percent of adults own a credit card. Payments requiring even small amounts of cash are
much safer to pay electronically, and much more convenient. The concept of mobile money is
a growing solution to this problem in Africa, allowing millions to store, use, and transfer funds
electronically. In 2020 alone, 200 million people in Africa and the Middle East made 28 billion
transactions and a total of nearly $800 billion in transactions were made in 2020 through this
medium, with $490 billion being exchanged in sub-Saharan Africa.
Nigerian Market Nigeria, home to Africa’s largest population and one of the youngest in the world, has a flourish-
ing digital marketplace. The nation has excellent mobile infrastructure, with nearly 60 percent
of residents having access to the Internet and around 50 percent owning a mobile phone. Nearly
75 percent of Internet access in Nigeria is over mobile devices, and this number is even higher
658 STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
for online purchases. However, much of the problem with the other 50 percent not owning a mo-
bile phone stems from broadband coverage in more rural areas. There is a clear need for further
investment and infrastructure in these areas. Between 2018 and 2019, the online food retail and
personal care markets in Nigeria increased about 50 percent and the online fashion sector in-
creased over 40 percent. In general, Nigerians hold positive feelings about online shopping, with
travel as the most profitable online business.
Cash is still the primary payment method in Nigeria. Out of 137 nations, Nigeria ranked
118th on credit card usage, and just 27 percent of online retail purchases are made with credit
cards. Online payments are extremely popular in Nigeria, with 10 percent of payments coming
from e-wallets such as KongaPay and PayPal. There is a growing trend toward mobile money in
Nigeria and many other African nations. Customers can now easily spend and send money over
their mobile phone. Banks can provide the service, but telecom companies are increasingly the
payment service provider in this scenario.
Conclusion
Strategy Considerations Given the really strong competitors described in the case, MTN’s CEO Mupita needs a quality
strategy plan. MTN operates in one of the fastest-growing regions of the world, but it is also one
where the GDP trails behind that of many other nations. The haves versus have-nots can present
quite a large disparity across Africa and the Middle East. Recall from the segment data that most
of MTN’s revenues are generated from mobile devices, but fintech is an up-and-coming technol-
ogy. Recall as well that mobile devices in South Africa generate significant income, but not so
much in other regions. What nations do you think CEO Mupita should focus on? MTN, like all
companies, has limited resources, and deciding which countries and services to further develop
is paramount for success.
Even attempting to decide which customers to serve is important. Should MTN focus on
wealthy, profitable customers only, or should they continue to push and develop in rural Africa?
Providing Internet services to those who cannot pay is certainly a noble mission, but MTN has to
earn sufficient profits to pay the bills and keep its shareholders happy.
What would you suggest CEO Mupita do with regard to acquiring new technology? Should
new technologies be developed in-house, organically, through increased R&D, or can you iden-
tify organizations that MTN should try to purchase to quickly acquire the necessary technology?
Deciding where to allocate resources, what markets to enter, to what extent to invest in R&D, and
whether to purchase rival firms are only a few of the many major strategic issues facing MTN.
Help CEO Mupita develop a comprehensive 3-year strategic plan. Be sure not to simply re-
port what the firm is doing or what you think the firm will be doing based on the news releases
(unless you also agree with these plans based on your research and analyses). Develop a plan for
what you think the firm needs to do, as if you were hired as a pricy consultant to develop and
submit a roadmap for the future of MTN.
References
1. MTN Group Limited, Annual Report 2020, https://www.mtn.co.za/SiteCollectionDocuments/
Foundation/reports/MTNSAFoundation2020.pdf.
2. www.statistica.com.
Glossary
Acquisition When a large organization purchases (acquires) a smaller firm; a merger.
Actionable responses Meaningful in terms of having strategic implications; suggestive of potential strategies to capitalize on or compensate for.
Activity ratios Inventory turnover and average collection period measure how effectively a firm is using its resources.
Aggressive quadrant In a SPACE matrix analysis, when the firm’s directional vector points in the upper-right quadrant, the firm should pursue aggressive strategies.
Annual objectives Short-term milestones that organizations must achieve to reach long-term objectives.
Attractiveness Scores (AS) In a QSPM, the numerical value (rating) that indicates the relative attractiveness of each strategy given a single internal or external factor.
Auditing The accounting process that firms undertake to have their financial statements reviewed for accuracy in order to assure compliance with the law and IRS code.
Backward integration A strategy seeking ownership or increased control of a firm’s suppliers, such as a manufac- turer acquiring its raw material source firms.
Balanced Scorecard A framework of desired objectives; derives its name from the need of firms to “balance” quantitative (such as financial ratios and percentages) with qualitative (such as for employee morale and business ethics) objectives that are oftentimes used in strategy evaluation.
Bankruptcy A legal document that allows a firm to avoid major debt obligations and void union contracts in order to survive and regroup as a firm. There are five major types: Chapter 7, Chapter 9, Chapter 11, Chapter 12, and Chapter 13.
Benchmarking A management technique associated with value chain analysis, whereby a firm compares itself on a wide vari- ety of performance-related criteria against the best firms in the industry, thus establishing standards of excellence.
Blue ocean strategy Actions that aim to target a new market where competition is not yet present thus creating a “blue ocean” as opposed to a red ocean where many firms are competing often on price and the gains of one firm are often at the expense of another. Blue ocean strategy is similar to being a first mover seeking market space not yet utilized by rivals.
Board of directors A group of individuals above the CEO who have oversight and guidance over management and who care for shareholders’ interests; sometimes called governance.
Bonus system A form of incentive compensation whereby employees and/or managers receive a year-end or period- end reward, usually cash, based on some organizational performance criteria such as sales, profit, production effi- ciency, quality, and safety; used to motivate individuals to support strategy-implementation efforts.
Book value Number of shares outstanding multiplied by stock price.
Boston Consulting Group (BCG) Matrix A four-quadrant, strategic planning analytical tool that places an organiza- tion’s various divisions as circles in a display (similar to the IE Matrix) based on two key dimensions: (1) relative market share position and (2) industry growth rate. The diagram’s four quadrants (Stars, Question Marks, Cash Cows, Question Marks) each have different strategy implications.
Bribe A gift bestowed to influence a recipient’s conduct.
Bribery Offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any item of value to influence the actions of an official or other person in discharge of a public or legal duty.
Business analytics An MIS technique designed to analyze huge volumes of data to help executives make decisions; sometimes called predictive analytics or data mining.
Business ethics Principles of behavior/conduct a firm may insti- tute to minimize wrongdoing among employees/managers.
Business portfolio Autonomous divisions (or profit centers or segments) of an organization as represented by circles in BCG and IE matrices.
Capacity utilization The extent to which a manufacturing plant’s output reaches its potential output; the higher the capacity uti- lization the better, because otherwise equipment may sit idle.
Capital budgeting A basic function of finance; the allocation and reallocation of capital and resources to projects, prod- ucts, assets, and divisions of an organization.
Cash cows A quadrant in the BCG Matrix for divisions that have a high relative market share position but compete in a low-growth industry; they generate cash in excess of their needs, they are often milked, this is the lower-left quadrant.
Champions Individuals most strongly identified with a firm’s new idea/product/service, and whose futures are linked to its success.
Chief Information Officer (CIO) More an external manager compared to a CTO; focuses on the firm’s technical, infor- mation gathering, and social media relationship with diverse external stakeholders.
Chief Technology Officer (CTO) More an internal manager compared to a CIO; focuses on technical issues such as data acquisition, data processing, decision-support systems, and software and hardware acquisition.
Code of business ethics A written document specifying expected employee/manager behavior/conduct in an organization.
Collaborative machines Robots used in manufacturing operations; these robots are flexible, capable of doing a variety of tasks.
Combination strategy The pursuit of a combination of two or more strategies simultaneously.
Competitive advantage Anything a firm does especially well, compared to rival firms. For example, when a firm can do something that rival firms cannot do, or owns something that rival firms desire, that can represent a competitive advantage.
659
660 GLOSSARY
Competitive intelligence (CI) A systematic and ethical process for gathering and analyzing information about the compe- tition’s activities and general business trends to further a business’s own goals (SCIP website).
Competitive position (CP) One of four dimensions/axes of the SPACE Matrix; determines an organization’s competitiveness, using such factors as market share, product quality, product life cycle, customer loyalty, capacity utilization, technological know-how, and control over suppliers and distributors.
Competitive Profile Matrix (CPM) A widely used strategic planning analytical tool designed to identify a firm’s major competitors and its particular strengths and weaknesses in relation to a sample firm’s strategic position.
Competitive quadrant In a SPACE Matrix analysis, when the firm’s directional vector points in the lower-right quadrant it suggests that the firm should pursue competitive strategies such as horizontal integration.
Concern for employees A component of the mission statement; are employees a valuable asset to the firm?
Concern for public image A component of the mission state- ment; is the firm responsive to social, community, and envi- ronmental concerns?
Concern for survival, growth, and profitability A component of the mission statement; does the firm strive to survive, grow, and (if for-profit) be profitable?
Conflict A disagreement between two or more parties on one or more issues.
Conservative quadrant In a SPACE Matrix analysis, when the firm’s directional vector points in the upper-left quadrant it suggests that the firm should pursue conservative strategies such as market penetration.
Contingency plans Alternative plans that can be put into effect if certain key events do not occur as expected.
Controlling A basic function of management; includes all of those activities undertaken to ensure that actual operations conform to planned operations.
Core competence A value chain activity that a firm performs especially well.
Core values statement A document that specifies a firm’s com- mitment to integrity, fairness, discipline, equal employment opportunity, teamwork, accountability, continuous improve- ment, and/or other such exemplary attributes.
Cost leadership One of Michael Porter’s strategy dimensions that involves a firm producing standardized products at a very low per-unit cost for consumers who are price sensitive.
Creed statement Another name for mission statement; a decla- ration of an organization’s “reason for being.” It answers the pivotal question, “What is our business?”
Cultural products Include values, beliefs, rites, rituals, cere- monies, myths, stories, legends, sagas, language, metaphors, symbols, heroes, and heroines. These products are levers that strategists can use to influence and direct strategy for- mulation, implementation, and evaluation activities.
Culture The set of shared values, beliefs, attitudes, customs, norms, personalities, heroes, and heroines that describe a
firm. Strategists should strive to preserve, emphasize, and build on these aspects.
Customer analysis Examination and evaluation of consumer needs, desires, and wants; involves administering customer surveys, analyzing consumer information, evaluating mar- ket positioning strategies, developing customer profiles, and determining optimal market segmentation strategies.
Customers A component of the mission statement; individuals who purchase a firm’s products/services.
Decision stage Stage 3 of the strategy formulation analytical framework that involves development of the Quantitative Strategic Planning Matrix (QSPM). A QSPM uses input infor- mation from Stage 1 to objectively evaluate feasible alternative strategies identified in Stage 2. A QSPM reveals the relative attractiveness of alternative strategies and thus provides objec- tive basis for selecting specific strategies.
Defensive quadrant In a SPACE Matrix analysis, when the firm’s directional vector goes into the lower-left quadrant it suggests that the firm should pursue defensive strategies such as retrenchment.
De-integration Reducing the pursuit of backward integration; instead of owning suppliers, companies negotiate with sev- eral outside suppliers.
Differentiation One of Michael Porter’s strategy dimensions that involves a firm producing products and services consid- ered unique industrywide and directed at consumers who are relatively price insensitive.
Directional vector In a SPACE Matrix analysis, this line begins at the origin and goes into one of four quadrants, revealing the type of strategies recommended for the organization: aggressive, competitive, defensive, or conservative.
Discount If an acquiring firm pays less for another firm than the firm’s stock price multiplied by its number of shares of stock outstanding (book value or market value), then that amount minus the actual purchase price is called a discount.
Distinctive competencies A firm’s strengths that cannot be eas- ily matched or imitated by competitors. One of the nine basic components needed for inclusion in a mission statement.
Distribution The process of getting goods and services to market; includes warehousing, distribution channels, distri- bution coverage, retail site locations, sales territories, inven- tory levels and location, transportation carriers, wholesal- ing, and retailing.
Diversification strategies When a firm enters a new business/ industry, either related and unrelated to its existing business/ industry. Related diversification is when the old versus new business value chains possess competitively valuable cross- business strategic fits; unrelated diversification is when the old versus new business value chains are so dissimilar that no competitively valuable cross-business relationships exist.
Divestiture Selling a division or part of an organization.
Dividend decision A basic function of finance; concerns issues such as the percentage of earnings paid to stockholders, the stability of dividends paid over time, and the repurchase or issuance of stock.
Divisional (decentralized) structure This type of organizational design is based on having various profit centers or segments
GLOSSARY 661
by geographic area, by product or service, by customer, or by process. With a divisional structure, functional activities are performed both centrally and in each separate division.
Dogs A quadrant in the BCG Matrix for divisions that have a low relative market share position and compete in a low- growth industry; this is the lower-right quadrant.
Downstream activities The primary means for gaining and sustaining competitive advantages for most companies are shifting downstream. Recent research by Dawar reveals that in most industries today, upstream activities such as supply chain management, production, and logistics are being com- moditized or outsourced by firms, whereas downstream activ- ities related to consumer behavior are becoming the primary means for gaining and sustaining competitive advantage.
Empirical indicators Refers to three characteristics of resources (rare, hard to imitate, not easily substitutable) that enable a firm to gain and sustain competitive advantage.
Employee stock ownership plans (ESOP) A tax-qualified, defined-contribution, employee-benefit plan whereby employees purchase stock of the company through borrowed money or cash contributions.
Empowerment The act of strengthening employees’ sense of shared ownership by encouraging them to participate in decision making and rewarding them for doing so.
Environment The surroundings in which an organization operates, including air, water, land, natural resources, flora, fauna, humans, and their interrelation.
Environmental management system (EMS) When a firm or munic- ipality operates utilizing “green” policies/practices/procedures as outlined by ISO 14001.
Environmental scanning Process of conducting research and gathering and assimilating external information; also referred to as external audit.
EPS/EBIT analysis A financial technique to determine whether debt, stock, or a combination of debt and stock is the best alternative for raising capital to implement strategies.
External audit Process of identifying and evaluating trends and events beyond the control of a single firm, in areas such as social, cultural, demographic technology, economic, political, and competition; reveals key opportunities and threats confronting an organization, so managers can better formulate strategies.
External Factor Evaluation (EFE) Matrix A widely used stra- tegic planning analytical tool designed to summarize and evaluate economic, social, cultural, demographic, environ- mental, political, governmental, legal, technological, and competitive information.
External forces (1) Economic forces; (2) social, cultural, demographic, and natural environment forces; (3) political, governmental, and legal forces; (4) technological forces; and (5) competitive forces.
External opportunities Economic, social, cultural, demographic, environmental, political, legal, governmental, technological, and competitive trends/events/facts that could significantly benefit an organization in the future.
External threats Economic, social, cultural, demographic, environmental, political, legal, governmental, technological,
and competitive trends/events/facts that could significantly harm an organization in the future.
Feng shui In China, this term refers to the practice of harness- ing natural forces, which can impact how you arrange office furniture.
Financial objectives Include desired results growth in revenues, growth in earnings, higher dividends, larger profit margins, greater return on investment, higher earnings per share, a rising stock price, improved cash flow, and so on.
Financial position (FP) One of four dimensions/axes of the SPACE Matrix that determines an organization’s financial strength, considering such factors as return on investment, leverage, liquidity, working capital, and cash flow.
Financial ratio analysis Quantitative calculations that reveal the financial condition of a firm and exemplify the com- plexity of relationships among the functional areas of business. For example, a declining return on investment or profit margin ratio could be the result of ineffective mar- keting, poor management policies, research and develop- ment errors, or a weak management information system. Ratios are usually compared to industry averages, or to prior time periods, or to rival firms.
Financing decision A basic function of finance; determines the best capital structure for the firm and includes exam- ining various methods by which the firm can raise capital (for example, by issuing stock, increasing debt, selling assets, or using a combination of these approaches).
First-mover advantages The benefits a firm may achieve by entering a new market or developing a new product or service before rival firms.
Focus One of Michael Porter’s strategy dimensions that involves a firm producing products and services that fulfill the needs of small groups of consumers.
Forward integration A strategy that involves gaining owner- ship or increased control over distributors or retailers, such as a manufacturer opening its own chain of stores.
Franchising An effective means of implementing forward integration whereby a franchisee purchases the right to own one or more stores/restaurants of a chain firm.
Friendly merger If the merger/acquisition is desired by both firms.
Functional structure A type of organizational design that groups tasks and activities by business function, such as pro- duction/operations, marketing, finance/accounting, research and development, and management information systems.
Functions of finance/accounting The basic activities performed by finance managers; consists of three decisions: the investment decision, the financing decision, and the dividend decision.
Future shock High anxiety that results when the nature, types, and speed of changes overpower an individual’s or organiza- tion’s ability and capacity to adapt.
Gain sharing A form of incentive compensation whereby employees and/or managers receive bonuses when actual results exceed some pre-determined performance targets.
Generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) A set of procedures or rules used by accountants, particularly in the United States, to develop financial statements.
662 GLOSSARY
Generally accepted auditing standards (GAAS) A set of accounting standards used by independent auditors to evalu- ate an organization’s financial statements.
Generic strategies Michael Porter’s strategy breakdown; consists of three strategies: cost leadership, differentiation, and focus.
Glass ceiling A term used to refer to the artificial barrier that women and minorities face in moving into upper levels of management.
Global strategy Designing, producing, and marketing prod- ucts with global needs in mind, instead of solely considering individual countries.
Globalization A process of doing business worldwide, so stra- tegic decisions are made based on global profitability of the firm rather than just domestic considerations.
Goodwill If a firm acquires another firm and pays more than the book value (market value), then the additional amount paid is called a premium and becomes goodwill, which is a line item on the assets portion of a balance sheet.
Governance The act of oversight and direction, especially in association with the duties of a board of directors.
Grand Strategy Matrix A four-quadrant, two-axis tool for formulating alternative strategies. All organizations can be positioned in one of this matrix’s four strategy quadrants, based on their position on two evaluative dimensions: compet- itive position and market (industry) growth. Strategy sugges- tions ensue depending on which quadrant the firm is located.
Growth ratios Measures such as the percent increase/decrease in revenue or profit from one period to the next are important comparisons.
Guanxi In China, business behavior is based on “personal relations.”
Halo error The human tendency to put too much weight on a single factor.
Horizontal consistency of objectives Objectives need to be com- patible across functions; for example, if marketing wants to sell 10% more, then production must produce 10% more.
Horizontal integration Acquiring a rival firm.
Hostile takeover If the merger/acquisition is not desired by both firms.
Human resource management (HRM) Also called personnel management; a basic function of management; includes activ- ities such as recruiting, interviewing, testing, selecting, ori- enting, training, developing, caring for, evaluating, rewarding, disciplining, promoting, transferring, demoting, and dismiss- ing employees, as well as managing union relations.
Industry analysis Another term for external audit; conducting research to gather and assimilate external information.
Industry growth rate (IGR) The vertical axis in a BCG Matrix; the average percent increase or decrease in sales/revenues this year (versus last year) for a given industry.
Industry position (IP) One of four dimensions/axes of the SPACE Matrix that determines how strong/weak a firm’s industry is, considering such factors as growth potential, profit potential, financial stability, extent leveraged, resource utilization, ease of entry into market, productivity and capacity utilization.
Information technology (IT) The development, maintenance, and use of computer systems, software, and networks for the processing and distribution of data.
Inhwa A South Korean term for activities that involve concern for harmony based on respect of hierarchical relationships, including obedience to authority.
Initial public offering (IPO) When a private firm goes public by selling its shares of stock to the public in order to raise capital.
Input stage Stage 1 of the strategy-formulation analytical frame- work that summarizes the basic input information needed to formulate strategies; consists of an EFEM, CPM, and IFEM.
Integration strategies Includes forward integration, backward integration, and horizontal integration (sometimes collec- tively referred to as vertical integration strategies).
Intensive strategies Includes market development, market pen- etration, and product development.
Internal audit The process of gathering and assimilating information about the firm’s management, marketing, finance/accounting, production/operations, R&D, and MIS operations. The purpose is to identify/evaluate/prioritize a firm’s strengths and weaknesses.
Internal-External (IE) Matrix A nine-quadrant, strategic planning analytical tool that places an organization’s various divisions as circles in a display (similar to the BCG Matrix) based on two key dimensions: (1) the seg- ment’s IFE total weighted scores on the x-axis and (2) the segment’s EFE total weighted scores on the y-axis. The diagram is divided into three major regions that have different strategy implications: (1) grow and build, or (2) hold and maintain, or (3) harvest or divest.
Internal Factor Evaluation (IFE) Matrix A strategy- formulation tool that summarizes and evaluates a firm’s major strengths and weaknesses in the functional areas of a business, and provides a basis for identifying and evaluating relationships among those areas.
Internal strengths An organization’s controllable activities that are performed especially well, such as in areas that include finance, marketing, management, accounting, and MIS, across a firm’s products/regions/stores/facilities.
Internal weaknesses An organization’s controllable activities that are performed especially poorly, such as in areas that include finance, marketing, management, accounting, and MIS, across a firm’s products/regions/stores/facilities.
International financial reporting standards (IFRS) A set of pro- cedures or rules used by accountants, particularly outside the United States, to develop financial statements.
International (or multinational) firms Firms that conduct busi- ness outside their own country.
Intuition Using one’s cognition without evident rational thought or analysis; based on past experience, judgment, and feelings; essential to making good strategic decisions but must not be relied on heavily in lieu of objective analysis.
Investment decision Also called capital budgeting; a basic function of finance; the allocation and reallocation of capital and resources to projects, products, assets, and divisions of an organization.
GLOSSARY 663
ISO 14000 A series of voluntary standards in the environmental field whereby a firm minimizes harmful effects on the envi- ronment caused by its activities and continually monitors and improves its own environmental performance.
ISO 14001 A set of standards adopted by thousands of firms worldwide to certify to their constituencies that they are conducting business in an environmentally friendly man- ner. These standards offer a universal technical standard for environmental compliance that more and more firms are requiring not only of themselves but also of their suppliers and distributors.
Joint venture A strategy that occurs when two or more compa- nies form a temporary partnership/consortium/business for the purpose of capitalizing on some opportunity.
Just-in-time (JIT) A production approach in which parts and materials are delivered to a production site just as they are needed, rather than being stockpiled as a hedge against late deliveries.
Leverage ratios The debt-to-equity ratio and debt-to-total assets ratio measure the extent to which a firm has been financed by debt.
Leveraged buyout (LBO) When the outstanding shares of a corporation are bought by the company’s management and other private investors using borrowed funds.
Liquidation Selling all of a company’s assets, in parts, for their tangible worth.
Liquidity ratios The current ratio and quick ratio measure a firm’s ability to meet short-term cash obligations.
Long-range planning Deciding on future actions/objectives/poli- cies with the aim to optimize for tomorrow the trends of today; less effective and comprehensive than strategic planning.
Long-term objectives Specific results that an organization seeks to achieve (in more than one year) in pursuing its basic vision/mission/strategy.
Management information system (MIS) A system that gathers, assimilates, evaluates, and converts external and internal data (facts/figures/trends) into useful information for decision making.
Market capitalization Number of shares outstanding multi- plied by stock price.
Market development Introducing present products or services into new geographic areas.
Market penetration Increasing market share for present products or services in present markets through greater marketing efforts.
Market segment Areas in a perceptual map where there is a cluster of ideal points indicating an attractive group of potential customers to target.
Market value Number of shares outstanding multiplied by stock price.
Marketing mix variables Product, place, promotion, and price.
Marketing research The systematic gathering, recording, and analyzing of data about problems/practices/issues related to the marketing of goods and services.
Markets A component of the mission statement; geographic locations where a firm competes.
Matching When an organization matches its internal strengths and weaknesses with its external opportunities and threats using, for example, the SWOT, SPACE, BCG, IE, or GRAND Matrices.
Matching stage Stage 2 of the strategy-formulation framework that focuses on generating feasible alternative strategies by aligning internal with external factors by utilizing five matri- ces: BCG, IE, SWOT, GRAND, SPACE.
Matrix structure This type of organizational design places functional activities along the top row and divisional proj- ects/units along the left side to create a rubric where manag- ers have two bosses—both a functional boss and a project boss—thus creating the need for extensive vertical and hori- zontal flows of authority and communication.
Measuring organizational performance Activity #2 in the strategy-evaluation process; includes comparing expected results to actual results, investigating deviations from plans, evaluating individual performance, and examining progress being made toward meeting stated objectives.
Merger When two organizations of about equal size unite to form one enterprise; an acquisition.
Mission statement An enduring statement of purpose that distinguish one business from other similar firms; a state- ment that identifies the scope of a firm’s operations in product and market terms and addresses the question “What is our business?” A declaration of an organization’s “reason for being.”
Mission statement components (1) Customers; (2) products and services; (3) markets; (4) technology; (5) concern for survival, growth, and profitability; (6) philosophy; (7) dis- tinctive competence; (8) concern for public image; and (9) concern for employees.
Motivating A basic function of management; the process of influ- encing and leading people to accomplish specific objectives.
Multidimensional scaling The same as product positioning (perceptual mapping), except encompasses three or more evaluative criteria simultaneously.
Multinational firms Firms that conduct business outside their own country.
Nemaswashio U.S. managers in Japan have to be careful about this phenomenon, whereby Japanese workers expect super- visors to alert them privately of changes rather than inform- ing them in a meeting.
Organic growth A term denoting strategies that aim for a firm to build/growth from within rather than through acquisition.
Organizational culture A pattern of behavior developed by an organization over time as it learns to cope with its problem of external adaptation and internal integration, and that has worked well enough to be considered valid and to be taught to new members as the correct way to perceive, think, and feel in the firm.
Organizing A basic function of management; the process of arranging duties and responsibilities in a coherent manner in order to determine who does what and who reports to whom.
Outsourcing Refers to the practice of firms using/paying other firms to perform certain activities, such as managing payroll, call centers, or even R&D.
664 GLOSSARY
Outstanding shares method A method for determining the cash worth of a firm by multiplying the number of shares outstanding by the market price per share; also called book value, market value, or market capitalization.
Perceptual map Also called product-positioning map; a two- dimensional, four-quadrant marketing tool designed to posi- tion a firm versus its rival firms in a schematic diagram in order to better determine effective marketing strategies.
Philosophy A component of the mission statement; the basic beliefs, values, aspirations, and ethical priorities of the firm.
Planning A basic function of management; the process of deciding ahead of time the strategies to be pursued and actions to be taken in the future.
Policies The means by which annual objectives will be achieved. Policies include guidelines, rules, and procedures established to support efforts to achieve stated objectives. Policies are guides to decision making and address repetitive or recurring situations.
Porter’s Five-Forces Model A theoretical model devised by Michael Porter, who suggests that the nature of competitive- ness in a given industry can be viewed as a composite of five forces: (1) rivalry among competing firms, (2) potential entry of new competitors, (3) potential development of substitute products, (4) bargaining power of suppliers, and (5) bargain- ing power of consumers.
Premium If an acquiring firm pays more for another firm than that firm’s stock price multiplied by its number of shares of stock outstanding (book value or market value), then the overage is called a premium.
Price-earnings ratio method This method involves dividing the market price of the firm’s common stock by the annual earnings per share and multiplying this number by the firm’s average net income for the past 5 years.
Product development Increased sales by improving or modify- ing present products or services.
Product positioning Also called perceptual mapping; a two- dimensional, four-quadrant marketing tool designed to posi- tion a firm versus its rival firms in a schematic diagram in order to better determine effective marketing strategies.
Product and service planning A basic function of marketing; includes activities such as test marketing; product and brand positioning; devising warranties; packaging; determining product options, features, style, and quality; deleting old products; and providing for customer service.
Products or services A component of the mission statement; commodities or benefits provided by a firm.
Profit sharing A form of incentive compensation whereby some of a firm’s earnings are distributed to employees/man- agers based on some predetermined formula; used to motivate individuals to support strategy-implementation efforts.
Profitability ratios The profit margin ratio and return on invest- ment ratio measure the profitability of a firm’s operations.
Projected financial statement A financial technique that enables a firm to forecast the expected financial results of various strategies and approaches; involves developing income statements and balance sheets for future periods of time.
Protectionism When countries impose tariffs, taxes, and regula- tions on firms outside the country to favor their own compa- nies and people.
Quantitative Strategic Planning Matrix (QSPM) An analytical technique designed to determine the relative attractiveness of feasible alternative actions. This technique comprises Stage 3 of the strategy-formulation analytical framework; it objectively indicates which alternative strategies are best.
Question marks A quadrant in the BCG Matrix for divisions that have a low relative market share position but compete in a high-growth industry; this is the upper-right quadrant; firms generally must decide whether to strengthen such divi- sions or sell them (hence a question is at hand).
Reconciliatory With regard to mission statements, the need for the statement to be sufficiently broad to “reconcile” differ- ences effectively among diverse stakeholders; to appeal to a firm’s customers, employees, shareholders, and creditors rather than alienate any group.
Reengineering Reconfiguring or redesigning work, jobs, and processes in a firm, for the purpose of improving cost, qual- ity, service, and speed.
Related diversification When a firm acquires a new business whose value chain possesses competitively valuable cross- business strategic fits.
Relative market share position (RMSP) The horizontal axis in a BCG Matrix, which is the firm’s particular segment’s market share (or revenues or number of stores) divided by the indus- try leader’s analogous number.
Research and development (R&D) Spending money to enhance existing products/services and/or create new and improved products.
Reshoring Refers to U.S. companies working offshore but planning to move some of their manufacturing back to the United States.
Resistance to change A natural human tendency to be wary of new policies/strategies due to potential negative conse- quences; if not managed then this could result in sabotaging production machines, absenteeism, filing unfounded griev- ances, and an unwillingness to cooperate.
Resource allocation A central strategy implementation activity that entails distributing financial, physical, human, and tech- nological assets to allow for strategy execution.
Resource-based view (RBV) An approach that suggests internal resources to be more important for a firm than external fac- tors in achieving and sustaining competitive advantage.
Restructuring Modifying the firm’s chain of command and reporting channels to improve efficiency and effectiveness.
Retreats Formal meetings commonly held off-premises to discuss and update a firm’s strategic plan; done away from the work site to encourage more creativity and candor from participants.
Retrenchment When an organization regroups through cost and asset reduction to reverse declining sales and profits.
Reviewing the underlying bases of an organization’s strategy Activ- ity #1 in the strategy-evaluation process; entails a firm devel- oping a revised EFE Matrix and IFE Matrix to determine if corrective actions are needed.
GLOSSARY 665
Revised EFE Matrix Part of activity #1 in the strategy- evaluation process whereby a firm reassesses its previously determined external opportunities and threats.
Revised IFE Matrix Part of activity #1 in the strategy- evaluation process whereby a firm reassesses its previously determined internal strengths and weaknesses.
Sexual harassment (and discrimination) Unwelcome sexual advances, requests for sexual favors, and other verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature; this activity is illegal, unethical, and detrimental to any organization, and can result in expensive lawsuits, lower morale, and reduced productivity.
SO strategies Strategies that result from matching a firm’s internal strengths with its external opportunities.
Social policy Guidelines and practices a firm may institute to guide its behavior toward employees, consumers, environmen- talists, minorities, communities, shareholders, and other groups.
Social responsibility Actions an organization takes beyond what is legally required to protect or enhance the well-being of living things.
ST strategies Strategies that result from matching a firm’s internal strengths with its external threats.
Stability position (SP) One of four dimensions/axes of the SPACE Matrix that determines how stable/unstable a firm’s industry is, considering such factors as technological changes, rate of inflation, demand of variability, price range of competing products, barriers to entry into market, com- petitive pressure, ease of exit from market, price elasticity of demand, and risk involved in business.
Stakeholders The individuals and groups of individuals who have a special stake or claim on the company, such as a firm’s customers, employees, shareholders, and creditors.
Stars A quadrant in the BCG Matrix for divisions that have a high relative market share position and compete in a high- growth industry; this is the upper-left quadrant.
Strategic business unit (SBU) structure This type of organiza- tional design groups similar divisions together into units; widely used when a firm has many divisions/segments in order to reduce span of control reporting to a COO.
Strategic management The art and science of formulating, implementing, and evaluating cross-functional decisions that enable an organization to achieve its objectives.
Strategic-management model A framework or illustration of the strategic-management process; a clear and practical approach for formulating, implementing, and evaluating strategies.
Strategic-management process The process of formulating, implementing, and evaluating strategies as revealed in the comprehensive model, that begins with vision/mission devel- opment and ends with strategy evaluation and feedback.
Strategic objectives Desired results such as a larger market share, quicker on-time delivery than rivals, shorter design- to-market times than rivals, lower costs than rivals, higher product quality than rivals, wider geographic coverage than rivals, achieving technological leadership, and consistently getting new or improved products to market ahead of rivals.
Strategic planning The process of formulating an organization’s game plan; in a corporate setting, this term may refer to the whole strategic-management process.
Strategic Position and Action Evaluation (SPACE) Matrix Indi- cates whether aggressive, conservative, defensive, or compet- itive strategies are most appropriate for a given organization. The axes of this matrix represent two internal dimensions (financial position [FP] and competitive position [CP]) and two external dimensions (stability position [SP] and industry position [IP]). These four factors are perhaps the most important determinants of an organization’s overall strategic position.
Strategies The means by which long-term objectives will be achieved. Business strategies may include geographic expansion, diversification, acquisition, product develop- ment, market penetration, retrenchment, divestiture, liquida- tion, and joint ventures.
Strategists The person(s) responsible for formulating and implementing a firm’s strategic plan, including the CEO, president, owner of a business, head coach, governor, chan- cellor, and/or the top management team in a firm.
Strategy evaluation Stage 3 in the strategic-management pro- cess. The three fundamental strategy-evaluation activities are (1) review external and internal factors that are the bases for current strategies, (2) measure performance, and (3) take corrective actions; strategies need to be evaluated regularly because external and internal factors constantly change.
Strategy formulation Stage 1 in the strategic-management pro- cess; includes developing a vision/mission, identifying an organization’s external opportunities/threats, determining internal strengths/weaknesses, establishing long-term objec- tives, generating alternative strategies, and choosing particu- lar strategies to pursue.
Strategy-formulation analytical framework A three-stage, nine-matrix array of tools widely used for strategic planning as a guide: (stage 1: input stage; stage 2: matching stage; stage 3: decision stage).
Strategy implementation Stage 2 of the strategic-management process. Activities include establishing annual objectives, devising policies, motivating employees, allocating resources, developing a strategy-supportive culture, creating an effec- tive organizational structure, redirecting marketing efforts, preparing budgets, developing and utilizing information systems, and linking employee compensation to organiza- tional performance.
Strengths-Weaknesses-Opportunities-Threats (SWOT) Matrix The most widely used of all strategic-planning matrices; matches a firm’s internal strengths/weaknesses with its exter- nal opportunities/threats to generate four types of strategies: SO (strengths-opportunities) Strategies, WO (weaknesses- opportunities) Strategies, ST (strengths-threats) Strategies, and WT (weaknesses-threats) Strategies.
Sum Total Attractiveness Scores (STAS) In a QSPM, this is the sum of the Total Attractiveness Scores in each strategy col- umn; value reveals which strategy is most attractive in each set of alternatives.
Sustainability The extent that an organization’s operations and actions protect, mend, and preserve, rather than harm or destroy, the natural environment.
Sustainability report A form of annual report produced by organizations to reveal their progress and activities aimed at helping, rather than harming, the natural environment.
666 GLOSSARY
Sustained competitive advantage Maintaining what a firm does especially well, compared to rival firms—by (1) continually adapting to changes in external trends and events and inter- nal capabilities, competencies, and resources; and (2) effec- tively formulating, implementing, and evaluating strategies that capitalize upon those factors.
Synergy The 1 1 1 = 3 effect; when everyone pulls together as a team, the results can exceed individuals working separately.
Taking corrective actions Activity #3 in the strategy-evaluation process; involves a firm making changes to competitively reposition a firm for the future.
Technology A component of the mission statement; is the firm technologically current?
Test marketing An activity to determine ahead of time whether a certain product or service or selling approach will be cost effective; also used to forecast future sales of new products.
Total Attractiveness Scores (TAS) In a QSPM, the product of multiplying the weights by the Attractiveness Scores in each row. The values indicate the relative attractiveness of each alternative strategy, considering only the impact of the adja- cent external or internal critical success factor.
Treasury stock An item in the equity portion of a balance sheet that reveals the dollar amount of the firm’s common stock owned by the company itself.
Unrelated diversification When a firm acquires a new business whose value chains are so dissimilar that no competitively valuable cross-business relationships exist.
Upstream activities The primary means for gaining and sustaining competitive advantages for most companies are shifting downstream. Recent research by Dawar reveals that in most industries today, upstream activities such as supply chain management, production, and logistics, are being com-
moditized or outsourced by firms, while downstream activi- ties related to consumer behavior are becoming the primary means for gaining and sustaining competitive advantage.
Value chain The business of a firm, where total revenues minus total costs of all activities undertaken to develop, produce, and market a product or service yields value.
Value chain analysis (VCA) The process whereby a firm deter- mines the costs associated with organizational activities from purchasing raw materials to manufacturing product(s) to marketing those products, and compares these costs to rival firms using benchmarking.
Vertical consistency of objectives Compatibility of objectives from the CEO (corporate level) down to the presidents (divi- sional level) on down to the managers (functional level).
Vertical integration A combination of three strategies: backward, forward, and horizontal integration, allowing a firm to gain con- trol over distributors, suppliers, and/or competitors respectively.
Vision statement A one-sentence statement that answers the question, “What do we want to become?”
Wa In Japan, this term stresses group harmony and social cohesion.
Whistle-blowing The act of telling authorities about some unethical or illegal activities occurring within an organiza- tion of which you are aware.
WO strategies Strategies that result from matching a firm’s internal weaknesses with its external opportunities.
Workplace romance An intimate relationship between two truly consenting employees, as opposed to sexual harassment, which the EEOC defines broadly as unwelcome sexual advances, requests for sexual favors, and other verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature.
WT strategies Strategies that result from matching a firm’s internal weaknesses with its external threats.
667
A Abe, Prime Minister Shinzo, 362
Abouk, Rahi, 324
Aeppel, Timothy, 153
Aggarwal, Vikas A., 120
Aguirre, DeAnne, 176
Aime, Federico, 266
Alexander the Great, 47
Allarie, Y., 226
Allen, Michael, 207
Allio, R., 207
Almandoz, Juan, 324
Alvarez, Sharon A., 153
Anderson, Brian S., 90
Ansiti, Marco, 348
Anwar, Nadjadji, 30, 55, 70, 92, 122, 154, 190, 228, 268, 298
Arend, Richard J., 54
Arkadiy, V. Sakhartov, 188
Armanios, Daniel Erian, 374
Arora, Ashish, 152
Arregle, Jean-Luc, 375
Arts, Sam, 296
Asgari, Navid, 226
Ashkenas, Ron, 188
Aversa, Paolo, 226
B Bahl, Mona, 188
Balasubramanian, Natarajan, 188
Ballinger, Gary A., 324
Balthazard, Pierre A., 348
Bansal, Pratima, 54
Banjo, Shelly, 121
Barlas, P., 153
Barney, Jay B., 153, 188
Barr, Pamela S., 297
Barrett, Michael, 266
Bayles, Carter, 325
Beamish, Paul W., 374
Beath, Cynthia M., 55, 226
Bedeian, A. G., 267
Bednar, Michael K., 348
Belenzon, Sharon, 152
Bennett, Victor M., 266
Bensaou, Ben, 324
Berchicci, Luca, 348
Berg, Norman, 210
Bergman, Brian J., Jr., 188
Bernard, Mark, 90
Bettis, Richard A., 374
Bharadwaj, Sundar, 90
Bhattacharya, C. B., 348
Bird, Mike, 375
Birkinshaw, Julian, 374
Blackstone, Brian, 204
Blake, Daniel J., 226
Blettner, Daniela P., 374
Blomquist, Tomas, 90
Bloom, Nicholas, 297
Bok, Derek, 158
Borin, Norm, 266
Bos, Brenda, 266
Bowers, Melissa R., 266
Bowman, Jeremy, 42
Boyd, Eric D., 266
Brahm, Francisco, 324
Brandt, Steven C., 188
Branzei, Oana, 324
Brass, Daniel J., 188
Bregier, Fabrice, 162
Brewer, Ryan, 286
Brigham, Ben, 126
Briscoe, Forrest, 348
Brochett, O. G., 267
Brodbeck, Felix C., 374
Bromiley, Philip, 266
Brook, Tom, 349
Brown, Eliot, 38
Busenbark, John, 324
Byrne, John, 188
C Cahillane, Steven, 97
Calantzopoulos, Andre, 352
Campbell, Robert J., 153
Caner, Turanay, 296
Cannella, Albert, 188, 266
Carlton, Jim, 98
Carnahan, Seth, 266
Carnes, Christina Matz, 324
Carraher, Shawn, 153
Cassiman, Bruno, 296
Castellaneta, Francesco, 296
Cendrowski, Scott, 54
Chandran, Rajan, 313, 314, 325
Chang, Song, 348
Chatain, Oliver, 152
Chatterjee, Joydeep, 226
Chaudhuri, Saabira, 352
Chen, Guoli, 266
Chen, Haipeng (Allan), 153, 297
Chen, Tianxu, 54
Cheng, Philip, 215
Chin, M. K., 120
Christensen, Lisa Jones, 324
Christensen, Roland, 210
Churchhouse, Steve, 55, 324
Cleland, D. I., 79, 91
Clieaf, Mark Van, 55, 297
Cliffe, Sarah, 324
Clinton, Hillary, 230
Coeurderoy, Régis, 152
Cohen, Susan K., 296
Colias, Mike, 121
Name Index
668 NAME INDEx
Collewaert, Veroniek, 153
Combs, James, 324
Conger, Jay, 38
Connelly, Brian L., 324
Conti, Annamaria, 153
Conti, Raffaele, 296
Cook, Tim, 156
Cowen, Amanda P., 324
Coy, Peter, 164
Crilly, Donal, 54
Chrisman, James, 90
Crittenden, Andrew B., 324
Crittenden, Victoria L., 324
Crittenden, William F., 324
Croson, Rachel, 297
Crossland, Craig, 153
Cuddy, Amy, 35
Cui, Geng, 374
Cuypers, Ilya R. P., 296, 324
Cuypers, Youtha, 296
Cyert, Richard, 179
Czaplewshi, Andrew J., 266
D Dai, Li, 374
Dallemule, Leandro, 296
Daspit, Joshua J., 90
Davenport, Thomas H., 296
David, Forest R., 78, 82, 90, 91, 152, 153, 226
David, Fred R., 30, 55, 56, 78, 82, 90, 91, 92, 122, 152,
153, 188, 189, 226
David, Meredith E., 78, 82, 90, 91, 152, 153, 226, 235
David, Parthiban, 297
Davidson, Kenneth, 188
Davis, Bob, 349
Deal, T., 251, 267
Deb, Palash, 297
Decramer, Adelien A., 91
Deming, Edward, 36, 108
Desmidt, Sebastian, 91
Dess, Greg, 226
Detjen, Jodi, 54, 266
Devasagayam, Raj, 91
Devers, Cynthia E., 266
Dickel, K., 198, 200, 226
Dimon, Jamie, 270
Dorobantu, Sinziana, 54, 297
Dotson, Jeffrey P., 188
Dowell, Glen W. S., 120, 348
Doz, Yves, 189
Drucker, Peter, 36, 55, 75, 80, 84, 91, 153, 301, 349
Dumaine, Brian, 91
Durand, Rodolphe, 54, 152
Durant, Will, 37
Dvorak, Phred, 349
E Eden, Lorraine, 374
Edwards, Herm, 39
Eesley, Charles E., 374
Einstein, Albert, 37
Eisenhardt, Kathleen M., 374
Eisner, Alan, 226
Elfenbein, Daniel W., 297
Erez, M., 306, 325
Ertug, Gokhan, 324
Eshima, Yoshihiro, 90
F Faems, Dries, 266
Faleye, Olubunmi, 324
Favaro, Den, 325
Felde, Zum, 348
Feldman, Emilie R., 324
Ferrier, Walter J., 324
Firsirotu, M., 226
Fisch, Jan Hendrik, 374
Fisher, Greg, 55
Fiske, Susan, 35
Fitza, Markus A., 297, 324
Flammer, Caroline, 54, 348
Fleit, Caren, 153
Flore, Bridoux, 152
Floyd, Steven W., 55, 324
Flynn, Nancy, 267
Folta, Timothy B., 266
Foss, Nicolai J., 266
Friedman, Milton, 338
Frigo, Mark L., 329, 349
Fu, Shihe, 266
Fuhrmans, Vanessa, 121, 153
Furr, Nathan, 153
G Galinsky, Adam D., 348
Gallo, Edoardo, 348
Gao, Cheng, 54
Gamble, John, 121, 188
Gans, Joshua, 54
Garcia-Castro, Roberto, 188
Gasparro, Annie, 204
Gates, Bill and Melinda, 328
Gee, Kelsey, 189
Gellerman, Saul, 329, 349
George, G., 153
Gib, Andre, 226
Giglio, Joseph M., 324
Gino, Cattani, 120
Girod, Stephanie J. G., 266
Glick, Peter, 35
Gluck, Frederick, 47, 55
Glueck, W. F., 267
Golsby-Smith, Tony, 297
Gomez, Juan, 296
Goranova, Maria, 324
Gould, Noel, 188
Graham, Billy, 330
Grant, Robert M., 54, 153, 226
Green, David, 192
Greer, Charles R., 297
Greve, Henrich R., 188
Griffith, Erin, 94
NAME INDEx 669
Grigoriou, Konstantinos, 153
Gruber, Marc, 153
Gryta, Thomas, 312
Guinan, Patricia, 257
Guo, Yidi, 121, 324
Gupta, Abhinay, 348
Guth, William, 226
H Haas, M., 153
Haefliger, Stefan, 226
Halas, George, 39
Hall, Reggie J., 266
Hambrick, Donald C., 348
Hamel, Gary, 189
Han, T. J. Smit, 54
Hannah, Sean T., 348
Hansen, F., 188
Harding, David, 55, 297
Harper, Stephen, 55
Harrigan, Kathryn Rudie, 175, 189
Harris, Karen, 55, 297
Harrison, David A., 266
He, Zi-Lin, 374
Helms, Marilyn, 55
Henderson, Bruce, 55
Hershey, Milton, 39
Heston, Charlton, 168
Heyden, Mariano L. M., 324
Hill, Aaron D., 266
Hitt, Michael A., 297, 375
Hoffmann, Jonas, 324
Holcomb, Tim R., 153, 266
Holmes, Michael R., Jr., 266
Homburg, Christian, 91
Horne, James Van, 135, 153
Hoskins, Jake, 121
Hoskisson, Robert E., 121, 324
Hu, Songcui, 374
Huang, Lei, 348
Huang, Zhi, 188
Hufford, Austen, 101
Humphery-Jenner, Mark, 374
Hussey, D., 307, 325
Hutton, Betty, 168
Huy, Quy Nguyen, 121
Hwang, Byoung-Hyoun, 153
I Ibsen, H., 267
Ignatius, Adi, 374
J Jap, Sandy, 188
Jia, Nan, 121
Jiang, Han, 188, 266
Jobs, Steve, 156
Jones, Geoffrey, 54
Julian, Scott D., 266
K Kabureck, Garu, 243
Kacperczyk, Aleksandra, 296
Kalm, Matias, 324
Kanfer, F., 306, 325
Kaplan, Robert, 307
Kapoor, Rahul, 153
Karim, Samina, 266
Karlsson, Per-Ola, 176, 325
Kaul, Aseem, 54
Kavadis, Nikolaos, 324
Keil, Thomas, 188
Kennedy, A., 251, 267
Ketchen, David, Jr., 324
Key, Thomas Martin, 266
Khann, Tarun, 54
Kiel, Fred, 329
Kilduff, Gavin J., 348
Killan, Max, 331
Kim, Eun-Hee, 266
Kim, W. Chan, 174
Kim, Ji Youn (Rose), 226
King, Andrew, 348
King, William, 79, 91, 146, 153
Kiron, David, 348
Kiss, Andreea N., 297
Kistruck, Geoffrey M., 188
Knap, Barry, 165
Knott, Anne Marie, 297
Knotts, Rose, 359, 375
Kowitt, Beth, 230
Krause, Ryan, 324
Kruschwitz, Nina, 348
Kulchina, Elena, 374
Kuusela, Pasi, 188
L Laamanen, Tomi, 121
LaFlamme, Jesse, 340
Lakhani, Karim R., 348
Lamberg, Juha-Antti, 324
Landry, Tom, 39
Langham, M., 307, 325
Lavelle, Louis, 325
Leaf, Clifton, 38
Lee, Gwendolyn K., 266
Lee, Hun, 153
Lee, Joon Mahn, 153
Lee, Sunkee, 266
Lenz, R. T., 226, 325
Lesser, Rich, 225
Levine, Sheen, 90
Levinthal, Daniel A., 266
Li, Chengguang, 374
Li, Haioyang, 348, 374
Li, Jing, 121, 188
Li, Jizhen, 374
Li, Sali, 188
Lieberman, Marvin B., 188, 266
Lim, Jaegoo, 348
Lin, Zhouyu, 188
670 NAME INDEx
Lindsey-Mullikin, Joan, 266
Linneman, Robert, 313, 314, 325
Litman, Joel, 329, 349
Liu, Annie H., 188
Lombardi, Vince, 32, 39, 343
Long, Rebecca G., 90
Lounsbury, Michael, 55
Lount, Robert B., Jr., 188
Love, Geoffrey, 348
Lublin, Joann, 267, 312, 325
Lumpkin, G. T., 226
Lundmark, Leif, 121
Luo, Jiao, 348
Luo, Xueming, 91
Lusch, Robert F., 297
Lustenberger, Lou, 80
Lyngsie, Jacob, 266
Lyons, Elizabeth, 188
M Ma, Wayne, 120
Mackey, Tyson B., 188
Macmillan, Ian, 226
Madhok, Anoop, 188
Madsen, Tammy L., 54, 121
Mahoney, Joseph T., 297
Maltby, Lewis, 267
Mankins, Michael, 55, 297
Marcel, Jeremy J., 324
Maremont, Mark, 312
Marguiles, Robert, 226
Mark, Reuben, 74
Marks, Mitchell Lee, 188
Martin, John, 324
Martin, Roger L., 297
Martin, Xavier, 296
Mason, R., 198, 200, 226
Matthews, Chris, 126
Mattioli, Dana, 296
Mauborgne, Renee, 174
Maula, Markku, 188
Mayer, Kyle J., 121
McCann, Brian T., 188
McCartney, Scott, 361
McConkey, Dale, 44, 106, 121, 267
McIntyre, David P., 55
McKessy, Sean, 331
McMullen, Jeffery S., 121
Mellewigt, Thomas, 188
Menon, Anoop, 55, 153
Meyer, Alexander, 348
Meyrowitz, Carol, 323
Michael, Steven C., 297
Michelman, Paul, 266
Miles, Sandra Jeanquart, 55, 297
Miller, Cameron D., 324
Miller, Danny, 55
Miller, Tuyah, 375
Minaya, Ezequiel, 135
Mindruta, Denisa, 152
Mink, Michael, 32
Mintzberg, Henry, 311, 325
Mirvis, Philip, 188
Mitchell, Will, 188, 226
Moeen, Mahka, 188
Mollo, Janice C., 153
Monteiro, Felipe, 374
Morgan, Neil A., 266
Morris, Shad S., 153
Moschieri, Caterina, 226
Moss, Todd W., 188
Moss, Trefor, 374
Murphy, Megan, 156
Musk, Elon, 124
Muthulingam, Suresh, 120
Mycoskie, Blake, 339
N Nader, Ralph, 338
Napolean, 47
Nagel, Rosemarie, 90
Narayyanan, Vadake, 54
Ndofor, Hermann, 324
Neilson, Gary, 325
Nelson, Kent, 156
Nelson, Ron, 55
Neufeldt,Victoria, 55
Neuman, Qiomy, 324
Neven, Hartmut, 366
Newman, William, 267
Nixon, Judy, 55
Noll, Chuck, 39
Nooyi, Indra, 230
Nortan, David, 307
Noseleit, Florian, 266
Nystrom, Paul C., 324
O O’Brien, Jonathan, 297
Oborn, Eivor, 266
Ocasio, William, 121
Odziemkowska, Kate, 297
Oehmichen, Jana, 121
Oetzel, Jennifer, 374
Ofori-Dankwa, Joseph C., 266
Ogden, John, 349
Oh, Chang Hoon, 374
Olan, Lihong, 54
Oliver, Abbie, 324
Ouyang, Zhe, 297
Ozmel, Umit, 226
P Pain, Guillaume, 348
Palazzo, Guido, 348
Palermo, Alejandra, 55, 324
Palmer, Donald, 330, 331, 343, 349
Panico, Claudio, 188
Paquin, Raymond L., 348
Parise, Salvatore, 257
Parker, Bill, 360
NAME INDEx 671
Parnell, John, 325
Patacconi, Andrea, 152
Paterson, Ted A., 348
Patton, George, 236
Pearce, John, II, 55, 91
Pearson, Allison W., 90
Pennington, M., 207
Pentland, A., 153
Perrett, Wayne, 250
Peterson, Sandi, 243
Peterson, Thomas, 248
Phillips, Bum, 39
Phillips, Robert A., 348
Pil, Frits, 296
Pleck, Joseph, 249
Polman, Paul, 348
Ponzi, Leonard J., 374
Porac, Joseph F., 120
Porter, Michael E., 101–105, 121, 156, 165, 172, 188, 189
Posen, Hart E., 120
Posner, Bruce, 266
Pradham, Bibhudatta, 334
Prahalad, C. K., 189
Priem, Richard L., 324
Pring, Ben, 99
Prinzie, Anita, 91
Puay, Khoon Toh, 324
Puranam, Phanish, 266
Q Qasabi, Majid Al, 302
Quade, Patrick, 329
Quigley, Timothy J., 153
Quinn, James Brian, 226
R Rabier, Maryiane, 188
Radnofsky, Louise, 349
Ragozzino, Roberto, 297
Ramirez, Rafael, 55, 324
Ranucci, Rebecca, 121
Rau, Devaki, 266
Raudsepp, Eugene, 55
Ratnaningsih, Anik, 30, 55, 70, 92, 122, 154, 190, 228, 268, 298
Reade, James J., 348
Reenen, John Van, 297
Reeves, Martin, 348
Reuer, Jeffrey J., 55, 226, 297, 324
Reza, Danielle Giuliana, 226
Rider, Christopher I., 121
Ridge, Jason W., 266
Riley, Shawn M., 297
Riley, Sheila, 267
Rivera, Kristin, 176
Roberts, James A., 235
Rodríguez, Omar, 90
Rosen, Andrew, 179
Ross, Jeanne W., 55, 226
Rothaermel, Frank T., 153
Rowe, H., 198, 200, 226
Rubel, Holger, 348
Rumelt, Richard, 325
Ryall, Michael D., 54
S Saarikko, Ted, 90
Sadun, Raffaella, 297
Salk, George, 100
Salman, Mohammed bin, 302
Salter, Malcolm, 210
Sapienza, Harry, 121
Sautner, Zacharias, 374
Schein, E. H., 267
Schein, Edgar, 153
Schifrin, Matthew, 189
Schmidt, Stephen, 153
Schrader, K., 55
Schrapp, Sebastian, 121
Schrempf-Stirling, Judith, 348
Schrodt, Steven, 251
Schroeder, Roger, 129
Schultz, Peter, 84
Schwenk, G. L., 55
Sebastian, Ina M., 55, 226
Seetharaman, Deepa, 79
Selladurai, Raj, 153
Semadeni, Matthew, 120, 266
Seung-Hwan, Jeong, 266
Shan, Liwei, 266
Sharma, Pramodita, 90
Shenkar, Oded, 374
Shepherd, Dean A., 121
Shi, Wei, 324
Shimelonis, Mark, 162
Shiu, Yung-Ming, 348
Shrivastava, P., 226
Shropshire, Christine, 324
Shumsky, Tatyana, 265
Siemsen, Enno, 324
Silbermann, Ben, 94
Simons, John, 267, 312
Singe, Marcos, 324
Singh, Kulwant, 226
Sinha, Bipul, 311, 312
Sloan, Alfred, Jr., 37, 55
Smith, Adam, 127, 153
Smith, Brett R., 188
Smith, Frederick, 72, 85
Smith, M., 188
Smith, Scott, 153, 192
Sokol, Michael, 267
Soloman, 301
Song, Michael, 54
Sonnerfeld, Jeff, 310
Soofi, Ehsan S., 324
Souder, David, 121
Srinivasan, Arati, 55
Srinivasan, Mandyam M., 266
Srivastava, Mehul, 374
Staley, Ed, 80
Stalin, Joseph, 301
Stan, Mihaela, 266
672 NAME INDEx
Starik, Mark, 334
Stark, Nicholas R., 91
Steensma, Kevin H., 226
Steinbach, Adam L., 266
Steiner, George, 76, 91
Strickland, A., 121, 188, 226
Subin, Im, 54
Suchard, Jo-Ann, 374
Suwignjo, Patdono, 30, 55, 70, 92, 122, 154, 190, 228, 268, 298
T Tan, David, 121
Tarzijan, Jorge, 324
Theeke, Matt, 153
Thomas, Adeline, 188
Thomas, Howard, 120
Thompson, Arthur, Jr., 121, 188
Tihanyi, Laszio, 297, 324
Tilcsik, András, 324
Trahms, Cheryl, 324
Trigeorgis, Lenos, 54, 55, 297
Trump, Donald, 230, 247
Tzu, Sun, 47, 311
U Unruh, Gregory, 348
V Vaara, Eero, 121, 324
Valestin, Laura S., 91
Vanacker, Tom, 153
Verhaal, J. Cameron, 121
Vidal, Elena, 188
Vigna, Paul, 134
Viswanathan, Madhu, 324
W Waldman, David A., 348
Walker, Gordon, 121
Wan, Xiang, 188
Wang, Danni, 348
Wang, Heli, 266
Wassmer, Ulrich, 188
Waterman, Robert, Jr., 55, 153, 316, 325
Waters, J., 325
Webber, Sheila S., 54, 266
Weber, Lauren, 267
Wei, Jiuchang, 297
Wei, Shi, 121
Weihrich, Heinz, 55
Weinberg, Bruce, 257
Weiner, Jeff, 72
Weller, Ingo, 188
Werner, Timothy, 266
Westergren, Ulrika H., 90
Whitler, Kimberly A., 266
Whittington, Richard, 266
Wiedner, Rene, 266
Wieske, Jan, 91
Wiguna, Patu Artama, 30, 55, 70, 92, 122, 154, 190, 228, 268, 298
Withers, Michael C., 324
Wolf, Carola, 324
Wolf, Carolina, 55
Wolff, Michael, 121
Wood, Anthony, 300
Workiewicz, Maciej, 120
Wu, Cheng-Wei, 226
X Xia, Jun, 121, 188, 266
Xiao, Zhixing, 121
Y Yang, Shou-Lin, 348
Yao, Dennis A., 153
Yao, Fiona K., 348
Yavitz, Boris, 267
Yermack, David, 310
Yi, Xiwei, 374
Youm, Yoo No, 266
Z Zaheer, Akbar, 121
Zahra, Shaker A., 153
Zajac, Edward, 121, 188
Zarya, Valentina, 79
Zelner, Bennet, 54
Zhang, Cyndi Man, 188
Zhang, Laurina, 188
Zhang, Yan, 121, 324
Zhang, Yu, 266
Zhao, Eric Yanfei, 55
Zhao, Shan, 266
Zhao, Y. Lisa, 54
Zhou, Yue M., 188, 348
Zhu, Hong (Susan), 188
Ziobro, Paul, 121, 296
Zorn, Michelle, 324
Zukerberg, Mark, 79, 85
Zumbrun, Josh, 121
Zuzul, Tiona, 54
673
A Accounting, 136–140
Acquiring capital, 271–275
Acquisitions, 176–177
Friendly merger, 176
Hostile takeover, 176
Actionable, 95, 197, 379
Activity ratios, 139
Adapting (to Change), 37, 246, 306–307
Advertising, 132
Aggressive Quadrant (in SPACE), 199–202
Africa, 364–365
Allocate resources, 235
Alternative strategies, 42–43, 195–197
Analytical framework, 193
Annual objectives, 42, 231–233
AQCD (Actionable, Quantitative, Comparative, Divisional), 95,
197, 379
Acquiring capital, 271–275
Art of War, 47–48
Art (vs science), 311
Assumptions, making them, 106
Assurance of Learning Exercises
Chapter 1, 31, 65–69
Chapter 2, 71, 86–89
Chapter 3, 93, 115–118
Chapter 4, 123, 149–152
Chapter 5, 155, 183–186
Chapter 6, 191, 221–224
Chapter 7, 229, 261–264
Chapter 8, 269, 292–295
Chapter 9, 299, 319–322
Chapter 10, 327, 346–348
Chapter 11, 351
Part 6, 377
Attractiveness Scores (AS in a QSPM), 210–215
Auditing, 314
B Backward integration, 158, 161–162
Balanced scorecard, 307
Balancing work life and home life, 248–249
Bankruptcy, 167
Bargaining power of consumers, 103
Bargaining power of suppliers, 103
BCG Matrix, 202–206
Benchmarking, 169–171
Benefits (of strategic management), 44–46
Financial benefits, 45
Non–financial benefits, 45
Of a diverse workforce, 249
Bitcoin, 134
Blue ocean strategy, 174
Board of directors, 308–310
Bonds, 286, 288
Book value, 285
Boston Consulting Group (BCG) Matrix, 202–206
Brand positioning, 254–256
Bribery, 332
Build, Borrow, or Buy, 174–177
Business analytics, 140–141
Business Climate Across Countries/Continents, 363–366
Africa, 364–365
China, 365
India, 365
Indonesia, 365
Mexico, 366
Business Culture Across Countries/Continents, 361–363
China, 362–363
India, 363
Japanese Culture, 362
Mexican Culture, 361–362
Business Ethics/Environmental Sustainability/Corporate Social
Responsibility (Chapter 10), 327–349
Bribery, 332
Business ethics, 328
Code of Business Ethics, 330
Corporate social responsibility (CSR), 338–341
Definition, 328
Does it pay to be ethical, 329
Ethics culture, 329–331
Food suppliers and livestock welfare, 339
ISO14000/14001 certification, 336–337
Managing environmental affairs, 334–338
Social responsibility, 338–341
Solar power, 337
Songbirds and coral reefs, 338
Sustainability, 334–338
Unethical actions, 328–329
Whistle blowing, 331–332
Wildlife, 98, 126, 196, 338, 340
Workplace romance, 332–334
Business failure, 167
Business portfolio, 202
Business vision and mission, (Chapter 2), 75–84
Business strategy (vs Military strategy), 46–48
Business worth, 284–286
C Capacity (production/operations function), 129
Capacity utilization, 129
Capital budgeting, 136
Capital structure, 271–275
Case analysis (Part 6), 376–384
Case analysis outline, 380–381
Case method, 378
Guidelines, 378–379
Oral presentation, 381–382
Tips for success, 382–383
Written analysis, 380–381
Cash cows, 204–205
Change (adapting & managing), 37, 246, 306–307
Channel of distribution, 134
Chapter 7 and 11 bankruptcy, 167
Subject Index
674 SuBJECT INDEx
Checklist of questions
Finance and accounting audit checklist of questions, 140
Management audit checklist of questions, 130–131
Marketing audit checklist of questions, 135
Chief Executive Officer, 38–39
Chief Information Officer (CIO), 100
Chief Intelligence Officer (CIO), 100
Chief Strategy Officer (CSO), 38–39
China, 362–363, 365
Coca-Cola Company (Cohesion Case), 56–65
Organizational structure, 60
Competitors, 59, 61–62
Income statements, 57
Balance sheets, 58
Code of business ethics, 330
Cohesion case (on Coca-Cola Company), 33, 56–65
Balance sheets, 58
Competitors, 59, 61–62
Income statements, 57
Organizational structure, 60
Collaborative machines, 129
College football programs ($ worth), 284–286
Common stock financing, 271–275
Comparative (in AQCD), 95, 197, 379
Compensation, 248
Competitive advantage, 33, 38, 101–102, 110–113
Competitive analysis, 311
Competitive forces, 40, 99–100
Competitive intelligence, 99–100
Competitive intelligence (CI) programs, 99–100
Corporate spies, 99–101
Definition, 99–101
Unethical tactics, 99–101
Competitive Position (CP) (in SPACE Matrix), 197–202
Competitive Profile Matrix, 110–113
Competitive quadrant (in SPACE analysis), 199–202
Components of a mission statement, 77–78
Examples, 77–78
Comprehensive written case analysis, 377–384
Conservative Quadrant in SPACE, 199–202
Contingency planning, 313
Controlling, 128
Cooperative strategies, 174–176
Coral reefs, 338
Core competencies, 170–171
Core values statement, 72–73
Corporate ethics, 327–349
Corporate valuation, 284–286
Corporate well-being (wellness) programs, 252
Cost leadership strategies, 172–173
Crafting strategies. See Art (vs science), 311
Creed statement, 75
Critical success factors, 110–113
Cross-selling, 251
Cultural forces, 40, 250–251, 330–331
Cultural pitfalls, 250–251, 330–331
Cultural products, 129–130, 250–251, 330–331
Culture Definition, 129–130, 250–251
Culture, 250–251, 330–331, 358–363
China – Business Culture, 362–363
Mexico – Business Culture, 361–362
Japan – Business Culture, 362
Culture, U.S. vs foreign business cultures, 358–363
Customers, 77
D Data mining, 140
Debt financing, 271–275
Decentralized structure, 238–240
Decision stage, 193–195, 210–215
Defensive quadrant (in SPACE), 199–202
Defensive strategies, 166–169
Divestiture, 167–168
Liquidation, 168–169
Retrenchment, 166–167
De-integration, 162
Demographic forces/variables, 40, 96–97
Differentiation strategies, 172–174
Dilution of ownership, 271–275
Directional vector, 197–202
Discount, 285
Distinctive competence (in mission statements), 77
Distinctive competencies, 170–171
Distribution, 131, 134
Diversification strategies, 165–166
Related, 166
Unrelated, 166
Diversity, 249
Divestiture, 159, 167–168
Dividend decisions, 136
Divisional (in AQCD), 95, 197, 379
Divisional structure, 238–243
Dogs, 204–205
E Economic forces, 40, 96
Educational institutions, 178
Educative change strategy, 37, 246, 306–307
Educational institutions, 178–179
EEOC, 332
Empirical indicators, 125
Employability skills, 48–49
Empowerment, 45
EMS (environmental management systems), 334–338
Entrepreneurship, 178–179
Environment, 40, 96–97
Environmental forces, 40, 96–97
Environmental Sustainability (Chapter 10), 334–338
ISO 14000/14001 Certification, 336–337
Proactive/Reactive, 334–338
Reasons to be green, 334–335
Sustainability reports, 335
EPS/EBIT analysis, 271–275
Equity financing, 271–275
Ethics, 327–349
Ethics Capsules
Chapter 1, What Ethics Variable Is Most Important Among All? 35
Chapter 2, Facebook Changing Their Mission to Enhance Ethics, 79
Chapter 3, Preserve Alaska Wildlife or Boost Alaska Economy? 98
Chapter 4, The Sagebrush Lizard vs. the Big Oil Man, 126
Chapter 5, Are CEOs Less Ethical Today Than in the Past? 176
Chapter 6, Don’t Strategize and Jeopardize Animal Welfare, 196
SuBJECT INDEx 675
Chapter 7, Do Firms Need a Policy Against Phubbing? 235
Chapter 8, Projected Financial Statement Manipulation, 277
Chapter 9, Exemplary Ethics Through Exemplary
Transparency, 312
Chapter 10, TOMS Shoes, Inc. – Shoes Are Magic, 339
Chapter 11, What Two US-Based Airlines Are Worst On Customer
Service? 361
Ethics culture, 129–130
Evaluating mission statements, 81–83
Evaluating the worth of a business, 284–286
Exemplary Strategist Showcased
Chapter 1, Vince Lombardi, Former Coach of the Green Bay
Packers, 32
Chapter 2, Frederick W. Smith, CEO and Founder of FedEx Corp., 72
Chapter 3, Ben Silbermann, CEO and Cofounder of Pinterest, 94
Chapter 4, Elon Musk, CEO and Cofounder of Tesla, Inc., 124
Chapter 5, Tim Cook, CEO of Apple, Inc., 156
Chapter 6, David Green, CEO of Hobby Lobby, 192
Chapter 7, Indra Nooyi, CEO (former) of PepsiCo, 230
Chapter 8, Jamie Dimon, CEO of JPMorgan Chase, 270
Chapter 9, Anthony Wood, CEO and Founder of Roku, Inc., 300
Chapter 10, Bill Gates, CEO (former) and Chairman of
Microsoft, 328
Chapter 11, Andre Calantzopoulos, CEO of Philip Morris
International, 352
External, 40, 93–113
External Assessment (Chapter 3), 93–113
Competitive forces, 95, 99–100
Competitive intelligence (CI) programs, 99–100
Competitive Profile Matrix, 110–113
Economic forces, 95–96
External Factor Evaluation (EFE) Matrix, 106–110
Five-Forces Model, 101–105
Forecasting tools and techniques, 105–106
Industry Analysis: The EFE Matrix, 106–110
Making assumptions, 106
Political, governmental, and legal forces, 95, 97–98
Porter’s Five-Forces Model, 101–104
Process of performing, 112
Social, cultural, demographic and environmental (SCDE)
forces, 95–96
Technological forces, 95, 98–99
Sources of external information, 104–105
External audit. See External assessment (Chapter 3)
External Factor Evaluation (EFE) Matrix, 107–110, 303
External forces, 40, 95
Variables, 40, 95
External opportunities and threats, 40, 95
F Facebook, 79, 328
Failure (business), 167
Feng shui, 360
Finance/Accounting, 136–140
Audit checklist, 140
Functions of finance, 136
Financial ratios, 136–140, 286–287
Financial objectives, 157
Financial Position (FP) in SPACE, 197–202
Financial ratio analysis, 136–140
Financing decision, 136
First mover advantages, 177–178
Five-Forces Model, 101–104
Bargaining power of consumers, 103
Bargaining power of suppliers, 103
Potential development of substitute products, 103
Potential entry of new competitors, 102
Rivalry among competing firms, 102
Football programs ($ worth), 286
Force change strategy, 37, 246, 306–307
Forecasting tools and techniques, 105–106
Forward integration, 158, 160–161
Franchising, 161
Friendly merger, 176
Functional structure, 237–238
Functions of finance, 136
Dividend decision, 136
Financing decision, 136
Investment decision, 136
Functions of management, 126–131
Controlling, 128
Motivating, 127–128
Organizing, 127
Planning, 127
Functions of marketing, 131–136
Place or channel of distribution, 134
Pricing products, 133
Product planning, 132
Promotion, 133
Marketing research and target market analysis, 131
Marketing audit checklist of questions, 135
Future shock, 306
G GAAP, 314
GAAS, 314
Generic Strategies
Cost leadership, 172–173
Differentiation, 172–174
Global Capsules
Chapter 1, Mobike: Global Bicycle Renting, 38
Chapter 2, LinkedIn’s Vision/Mission, 73
Chapter 3, Netflix Growing Fastest Globally, 100
Chapter 4, Bitcoin: The New Global Currency, 134
Chapter 5, How Can a Firm Determine Where To Initiate New
Business? Use Gross Domestic Product (GDP) as a Guide, 164
Chapter 6, India’s Economy Is Booming, 214
Chapter 7, Guidelines for Global Marketing, 254
Chapter 8, The Least/Most Corrupt Countries, 277
Chapter 9, What Country Uses “Vision 2030,” 302
Chapter 10, India Is Turning Garbage Into Cash, 334
Chapter 11, The Strategic Plan of a Country:
China Aims for Superiority in Quantum Computing, 366
Global challenge, 356–358
Global/International Issues (Chapter 11), 351– 368
Advantages and disadvantages, 355–356
Business Climate Across Countries/Continents, 363–366
Africa, 364–365
China, 365
India, 365
Indonesia, 365
Mexico, 366
676 SuBJECT INDEx
Global/International Issues (Chapter 11) (continued)
Business Culture Across Countries/Continents, 361–363
China, 362–363
India, 363
Japan, 362
Mexico, 361–362
Communication differences across countries, 360–361
Corporate tax rates globally, 354–355
Cultural pitfalls, 359
Global challenge, 356–358
Multinational organizations, 353
USA vs foreign business cultures, 358–361
Global competition, 351–368
Advantages and disadvantages, 355–356
Global strategy, 353
Globalization, 351–368
Goals. See Objectives
Goodwill, 281, 284
Governance, 308–310
Governmental forces (variables), 40
Governmental organizations (strategic planning), 178–179
Grand Strategy Matrix, 208–210
Gross domestic product (GDP), 164
Growth ratios, 139
Guanxi, 359
Guidelines for case analysis, 377–384
Guidelines for developing an organizational chart, 242–243
Guidelines for doing strategic planning, 314–316
H Horizontal consistency of objectives, 233
Horizontal integration, 158, 162–163
Hostile takeover, 176
How to analyze a case, 376–384
Human resource concerns when implementing strategies, 247–252
Human resource management, 128, 247–252
I IE Portfolio Matrix, 206–209
IFRS, 314
Implementing Strategies: Management and Marketing Issues
(Chapter 7), 228–267
Implementing Strategies: Finance and Accounting Issues
(Chapter 8), 268–297
India, 214, 334, 363, 365
Indonesia, 365
Industry Analysis: External Factor Evaluation (EFE) Matrix, 94,
106–110
Industry Growth Rate (BCG axis), 204
Industry Position (IP), in SPACE, 197–202
Information technology, 100
Inhwa, 359
Initial Public Offering (IPO), 286–287
Input stage, 193–194
Integration strategies, 158–163
Backward integration, 158, 161–162
Forward integration, 158, 160
Horizontal integration, 158, 162–163
Vertical integration, 160
Internal-External (IE) Matrix, 206–209
Intensive strategies, 163–166
Market development, 158, 163–164
Market penetration, 158, 163
Product development, 158, 164
Internal assessment (Chapter 4), 40–41, 124–146
Business analytics, 140
Cultural products, 129–130
Finance/accounting functions, 136
Financial ratio analysis, 136–137, 139
Integrating strategy and culture, 129–130
Internal factor evaluation matrix (IFEM), 141–145
Internal forces, 125
Management, 126–131
Management Information Systems, 140
Marketing, 131–135
Process of performing an internal audit, 145–146
Production/operations, 129
Resource–Based View (RBV), 125
Internal audit. See Internal assessment
Internal Factor Evaluation (IFE) Matrix, 141–145, 303
Internal forces, 40–41, 124
Internal strengths and weaknesses, 40–41, 124
International firms, 351–368
International Issues (Chapter 11). See Global Issues
International operations, 351–368
Advantages and disadvantages, 355–356
Intuition (vs analysis), 36–37
Inventory, 129
Investment decision, 136
ISO 14000 and 14001 Certifications, 336
J Japanese culture, 362
Joint venture/partnering, 174–176
Joint venture in India, 365
L Labor unions, 354
Leadership, 128
Learning from the partner, 174–176
Legal forces/variables, 40
Level of strategies, 159
Leverage ratios, 139
Leveraged buyout, 139, 176
Liquidation, 159, 168–169
Liquidity ratios, 139
Linking pay-performance, 248
Long-range planning, 34
Long-term objectives, 41, 156–157
M Machine learning, 140
Making assumptions, 106
Management, 126
Controlling, 126, 128
Functions of management, 126
Management audit checklist of questions, 130
Motivating, 126–128
Organizing, 126–127
Planning, 126–127
Management Information Systems (MIS), 140–141
Managing by Crisis, 158
Managing by Extrapolation, 158
Managing by Hope, 158
SuBJECT INDEx 677
Managing by Objectives, 157–158
Managing by Mystery, 158
Managing conflict, 235–236
Managing resistance to change, 37, 246, 306–307
Managing the natural environment. See Natural Environment
Market capitalization, 285
Market development, 158, 163–164
Market penetration, 158, 163
Market segmentation, 252–253
Market value, 285
Marketing, 131–135, 252–257
Distribution, 131, 134
Functions of marketing, 131
Implementation issues, 252–257
Market segmentation, 252–253
Marketing audit checklist of questions, 135
Marketing mix, 132
Marketing research and target market analysis, 131
Perceptual mapping, 254–256
Place or channel of distribution, 134
Pricing, 131–133
Principles of marketing communication, 257
Product planning, 131–132
Product positioning, 254–256
Target market analysis, 131–132, 252–253
Test marketing, 132–133
Marketing audit checklist of questions, 132
Marketing mix, 132
Place, 132
Price, 132
Product, 132
Promotion, 132
Marketing research, 131
Markets, 77
Matching stage, 42–44, 193–194
Matching structure and strategy, 236–237
Matrix structure, 240–241
Measuring organizational performance, 36, 304
Merger/acquisition, 176–177
Benefits of, 177
Friendly merger, 176
Hostile takeover, 176
Why many fail, 177
Mexico, 361–362, 366
Mini-Cases
Chapter 1 on Tesla, Inc., 53–54
Chapter 2 on Ford Motor Company, 79
Chapter 3 on Sam’s Club, 119
Chapter 4 Procter & Gamble, 151
Chapter 5 on Facebook, 187
Chapter 6 on Boston Consulting Group, 225
Chapter 7 on De Beers Group, 264
Chapter 8 on Hasbro, 296
Chapter 9 on TJX, 323
Chapter 10 on Chick-fil-A, 347
Chapter 11 on Lynk & Company, 373
Military strategy (vs business strategy), 46–48
MIS issues, 140–141
Mission, 39–40, 72–84
Mission statements (Chapter 2), 75–84
Characteristics of, 76–77
Components, 77–78
Definition, 75
Evaluating, 81–83
Examples, 82
Importance (Benefits) of, 79–81
Process of developing, 81
Mission vs vision, 72
Writing and evaluating, 81–83
Motivating, 127–128
Multinational corporations, 353
N Natural environment, 334–342
Nemaswashio, 360
Net worth method, 284–285
Nonprofit and governmental organizations, 178–179
Notable Quotes. See www.strategyclub.com website
O Objectives, 41, 156–158
Annual, 42, 156–158
Benefits of, 157
Characteristics of, 156–157
Financial vs strategic objectives, 157
Long-term, 156–158
Not managing by objectives, 158
Organic growth, 174
Operations. See Production/Operations Function
Opportunities, 40
Oral case analysis (presentation), 381–382
Organizational change, 246
Organizational charts, 236–245
Do’s and Don’ts, 242–243
Organizational culture, 129–130, 250–251, 330–331, 358–363
Chinese culture, 362–363
Japanese culture, 362
Indian culture, 363
Mexican culture, 361–362
Ways and means for altering, 250
Organizational structure, 234–245
Advantages/disadvantages of functional, 238
Advantages/disadvantages of divisional, 239
Advantages/disadvantages of matrix, 241
Do’s and Don’ts, 242–245
Types of structure, 237–245
Organizing, 127, 234–245
Outsourcing, 357–358
Outstanding shares method to value a firm, 285
P Partnering and partnerships, 174–176
Part 6 (Strategic Management Case Analysis), 376–384
Pay-Performance linkages, 248
Perceptual mapping, 252–256
Philosophy, 77
Phubbing, 235
Pitfalls in strategic planning, 46
Planning, 33–34
Policies, 44, 233–235
Political, governmental and legal forces/
variables, 40, 97–98
Politics of strategy choice, 216–217
678 SuBJECT INDEx
Porter’s Five-Forces Model, 101–104
Bargaining power of consumers, 103
Bargaining power of suppliers, 103
Potential development of substitute products, 103
Potential entry of new competitors, 102
Rivalry among competing firms, 102
Porter’s two generic strategies, 172–174
Cost leadership (Type 1 and 2), 172–173
Differentiation, (Type 3 and 4), 172–174
Portfolio of businesses, 202–209
Positioning, 252–256
Potential development of substitute products, 103
Potential entry of new competitors, 102–103
Predictive analytics, 140
Premium, 285
Prepare and present a case analysis, 377–384
Preparing a case for class discussion, 378–379
Preparing a written case analysis, 380–381
Price, 133
Price earnings ratio method to value businesses, 285
Pricing, 133
Private-equity acquisitions, 177–178
Process (production/operations function), 129
Process tips, 32
Product, 77, 193
Product planning, 132
Product development, 158, 164–165
Product positioning, 254–256
Production/Operations, 129, 245–247
Functions, 129
Concerns when implementing strategies, 245–247
Profitability ratios, 139
Profit centers, 202
Pro forma (projected) financial statement analysis, 275–284
Promotion, 133
Protectionism, 357
Q Quality (production/operations function), 129
Quantitative (in AQCD), 95, 197, 379
Quantitative Strategic Planning Matrix (QSPM), 210–215
Quantum computing, 366
Question marks, 204–205
R Ratings, 107, 143
Ratio analysis, 136–140, 286–287
Reengineering, 246
Related diversification, 159
Relative market share position (RMSP), 203
Recommendations, 214–215
Reconciliatory, 76
Relative deficiency or superiority, 40–41, 124–126
Research and development, 133
Reshoring, 357–358
Resistance to change, 246, 306–307
Resource allocation, 235
Resource-Based View (RBV), 125
Empirical indicators, 125
Restructuring, 246
Retained earnings table, 284
Retrenchment, 159
Retreats, 35
Review underlying bases, 303
Revised EFE (and IFE) Matrix, 303
Rivalry among competing firms, 102
Robotics, 129
Romance, 332–334
S Sales promotion, 133
Segmentation, 252–253
Selling products/services, 131–135, 252–257
Sexual harassment, 332
Small businesses, 178–179
SO Strategies, 42–43, 54, 195–196
Social, cultural, demographic and environmental (SCDE) forces, 40,
96–97
Variables, 40, 96–97
Social media, 251
Social responsibility (Chapter 10), 328, 338–342
Society of Competitive Intelligence Professionals (SCIP), 99
Software. (see Strategy Club or www.strategyclub.com), 50–51, 54, 276
Songbirds and coral reefs in trouble, 338
Sources of external information, 104–105
SPACE Matrix, 197–202
ST Strategies, 42–43, 54, 195–196
Stability Position (SP), in SPACE, 197–202
Standard & Poor’s Net Advantage Industry Surveys, 105
Stakeholders, 76
Stars, 204–205
Statement of beliefs, 75
Statement of philosophy, 75
Statement of purpose, 75
Stock financing, 271–275
Strategic Business Unit (SBU) structure, 240
Strategic management, 32–36
Art vs Science Issue, 311
Benefits, 44–46
Case analysis, 377–384
Challenges, 310–314
Definition, 32
Guidelines for effective strategic management, 314–316
In nonprofit and governmental organizations, 178–179
In small firms, 178–179
Model, 34
Process, 32–35
Stages, 32, 35–36
Visible vs hidden issue, 311–312
Strategic objectives, 157
Strategic planning, 33–34
Art vs Science Issue, 311
Challenges, 310–314
Pitfalls, 46
Software (see Strategy Club at www.strategyclub.com), 51, 54, 276
Why some firms do no strategic planning, 46
Strategic Position and Action Evaluation (SPACE) Matrix, 197–202
Strategies in Action (Chapter 5), 41
Backward integration, 158, 161–162
Bankruptcy, 167
Defensive, 166–169
Diversification, 165–166
Divestiture, 159
Forward integration, 158, and 160–161
SuBJECT INDEx 679
Franchising, 161
Generic, 172–175
Geographic expansion, 158, 163–164
Horizontal integration, 158, 162–163
In nonprofit and governmental organizations, 178–179
In small firms, 178–179
Levels of strategies, 159
Liquidation, 159, 168–169
Market development, 158, 163–164
Market penetration, 158, 163
Means for achieving, 174–178
Objectives, 156–158
Product development, 158, 164–165
Related diversification, 159, 166
Retrenchment, 159, 166–167
Types of, 158
Unrelated diversification, 159, 166
Vertical integration, 158
Strategos, 47
Strategists, 38
Strategy-supportive culture, 40, 129–130
Strategy and culture, 40, 129–130
Strategy Analysis and Choice, (Chapter 6), 191–227
Analytical framework, 193–194
BCG Matrix, 202–206
Cultural aspects, 216
Decision stage, 194–195
Grand Strategy Matrix, 209–210
IE Matrix, 206–209
Input stage, 194
Matching stage, 194
Politics of, 216–217
QSPM, 210–215
SPACE Matrix, 197–202
SWOT Matrix, 42–43, 54, 195–197
Strategy Club, 50–51, 54, 276
Strategy Evaluation and Governance (Chapter 9), 36, 299–318
Activities, 302–308
Art vs Science Issue, 311
Auditing, 314
Balanced scorecard, 307–308
Board of directors, 308–310
Challenges, 310–314
Characteristics of an effective evaluation system, 314–316
Guidelines for doing strategic planning, 314–316
Contingency planning, 313
Framework, 304
Governance issues, 308–310
Measuring organizational performance, 304
Promote workplace democracy, 312–313
Reviewing bases of strategy, 303–304
Review, evaluation, and control (Chapter 9), 299–318
Taking corrective actions, 306
Visible vs hidden issue, 311–312
Strategy formulation, 35, 192–198
Analytical framework, 193
Cultural aspects, 216
Decision stage, 194–195
Input stage, 194
Matching stage, 194
Politics of, 216–217
vs strategy implementation, 231
Strategy implementation, 36, 228–297
Strategy implementation (Chapter 7) – Management and Marketing
Issues, 228–267
Allocate resources, 235
Annual objectives, 231–233
Balancing work life and home life, 248–249
Benefits of a diverse workforce, 249
Corporate wellness (well-being) programs, 252
Create a strategy-supportive culture, 250–251
Do’s and dont’s in developing organization charts, 242–243
Divisional structure, 238–240
Engage customers in social media, 256–257
Functional structure, 237–238
Human resource issues, 247–252
Linking performance and pay to strategies, 248
Management and operations issues, 245–247
Managing conflict, 235–236
Managing structure, 237–243
Managing resistance to change, 246
Market segmentation, 252–253
Marketing issues, 252–257
Matching structure with strategy, 236–237
Matrix structure, 240–242
Perceptual mapping, 252–254
Policies, 233–235
Principles of marketing communication, 256–257
Product positioning/Perceptual mapping, 252–254
Production/Operations issues, 245–247
Restructuring and reengineering, 245–246
Strategic Business Unit (SBU) structure, 240
Strategy formulation vs. implementation, 231
Use caution in hiring a rival’s employees, 250
Use caution in monitoring employees’ social media, 251
Strategy implementation (Chapter 8) – Finance and Accounting
Issues, 268–297
Acquiring capital, 271–275
Company evaluation, 284–286
Deciding whether to go public, 286–287
EPS-EBIT analysis, 271–275
Finance/Accounting issues, 271
Stratos, 47
Strengths-Weaknesses-Opportunities-Threats (SWOT)
Matrix, 42–43, 54
Strengths, 40–41, 124–126
Sum Total Attractiveness Scores (STAS) (in a QSPM),
210–215
Sustainability, 328–335
Sustainability Report, 335
Sustained competitive advantage, 38
SWOT Matrix/Analysis, 42–43, 195–197
Synergy, 127
T Taking corrective actions, 36, 306
Target market analysis, 132, 252–253
Tax rates, 354–355
Technological forces, 40, 98–99
Technology, 77, 98–99
Template, 50–51, 54, 276
Test marketing, 132–133
Threats, 40
Total Attractiveness Scores (TAS) (in a QSPM), 210–215
680 SuBJECT INDEx
Treasury stock, 271, 288
Triple-bottom-line, 328
Turnaround strategy, 166
U Union membership across Europe, 354
Unrelated diversification, 159
Utility of mission statements, 77
V Value chain analysis (VCA), 169–171
Value of the dollar, 96
Values, 72–73
Vertical consistency of objectives, 233
Vertical integration, 158, 162–163
Visible vs hidden strategies, 311
Vision Statements, 39, 72–81
Analysis, 74
Characteristics, 74
Definition, 39, 73–74
Examples, 75
Importance (Benefits) of, 73, 79–81
Process of developing, 81
W Wa, 359
Weaknesses, 40–41, 124–126
Weights vs ratings, 107, 143, 152
Well-being (wellness) programs, 252
Whistle blowing, 331–332
Wildlife, 98, 126, 196, 338, 340
WO Strategies, 42–43, 54, 195–196
Women, 248–249
Workforce (production/operations function), 129
Workplace democracy, 312–313
Workplace romance, 332–334
Worth of a business, 284–286
WT Strategies, 42–43, 54, 195–196
- Cover
- Half Title
- Title Page
- Copyright
- Brief Contents
- Contents
- Cases
- Preface
- Acknowledgments
- About the Authors
- Part 1: Overview of Strategic Management
- Chapter 1. The Nature of Strategic Management
- What Is Strategic Management?
- Exemplary Strategist Showcased: Coach Vince Lombardi
- Strategic Planning
- The Strategic-Management Model
- Ethics Capsule 1: What Ethics Variable Is Most Important in Doing Business?
- Stages of Strategic Management
- Integrating Analysis and Intuition
- Adapting to Change
- Global Capsule 1: Mobike: Global Bike Renting Takes off Like a Jet Plane
- Key Terms in Strategic Management
- Competitive Advantage
- Strategists
- Vision and Mission Statements
- External Opportunities and Threats
- Internal Strengths and Weaknesses
- Long-Term Objectives
- Strategies
- SWOT Analysis
- Annual Objectives
- Policies
- Benefits of Engaging in Strategic Management
- Financial Benefits
- Nonfinancial Benefits
- Why Some Firms Do No Strategic Planning
- Pitfalls in Strategic Planning
- Comparing Business and Military Strategies
- Developing Employability Skills
- Implications For Strategists
- Implications For Students
- Chapter Summary
- Key Terms and Concepts
- Issues for Review and Discussion
- Mini-Case on Tesla, Inc. (TSLA): What American Company Does The Best Job of Strategic Planning, and How is it Done?
- Web Resources
- Current Readings
- Endnotes
- The Cohesion Case: Coca-Cola Company, 2018
- Assurance-of-Learning Exercises
- Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 1A: Gather Strategy Information for Coca-Cola Company
- Exercise 1B: Enter Coca-Cola Vitals into the Strategic Planning Template
- Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University
- Exercise 1C: Perform SWOT Analysis for My University
- Set 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability
- Exercise 1D: Perform SWOT Analysis on Myself
- Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
- Exercise 1E: How Detrimental Are Various Pitfalls in Strategic Planning?
- Part 2: Strategy Formulation
- Chapter 2. Business Vision and Mission
- Core Values Statements: What Is Our Foundation?
- Exemplary Strategist Showcased: Frederick W. Smith, Founder and CEO of FedEx Corporation
- Global Capsule 2: Linkedin: Clear Core Values, Vision, and Mission Lead to Global Prominence
- Vision Statements: What Do We Want to Become?
- Characteristics of a Vision Statement
- Vision Statement Analysis
- Mission Statements: What Is Our Business?
- Characteristics of a Mission Statement
- Components of a Mission Statement
- Ethics Capsule 2: Facebook: Changing Our Mission to Enhance Our Ethics and Integrity
- The Importance (Benefits) of Vision and Mission Statements
- The Process of Developing Vision and Mission Statements
- Evaluating and Writing Mission Statements
- Implications For Strategists
- Implications For Students
- Chapter Summary
- Key Terms and Concepts
- Issues for Review and Discussion
- Assurance-of-Learning Exercises
- Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 2A: Develop an Improved Coca-Cola Vision Statement
- Exercise 2B: Develop an Improved Coca-Cola Mission Statement
- Exercise 2C: Compare Coca-Cola’s Mission Statement to a Rival Firm’s
- Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University
- Exercise 2D: Compare Your University’s Vision and Mission Statements to Those of a Rival Institution
- Set 3: Strategic Planning for Myself
- Exercise 2E: Develop a Vision and Mission Statement for Yourself
- Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
- Exercise 2F: What Is the Relative Importance of Each of the Nine Components of a Mission Statement?
- Mini-Case On Ford Motor Company (F): Evaluate Ford's Vision for the Future and Mission for the Present
- Web Resources
- Current Readings
- Endnotes
- Chapter 3. The External Assessment
- Exemplary Strategist Showcased: Ben Silbermann, CEO and Cofounder of Pinterest
- The External Assessment Phase of Strategy Formulation
- Key External Forces
- The Actionable-Quantitative-Comparative-Divisional (AQCD) Test
- 10 External Forces that Impact Organizations
- Economic Force
- Social, Cultural, Demographic, and Environment (SCDE) Force
- Political, Governmental, and Legal Forces
- Ethics Capsule 3: Preserve Alaska Wildlife or Boost Alaska Economy?
- Technological Forces
- Competitive Forces
- Global Capsule 3: What Company Is Growing Fastest Globally?
- Porter’s Five-Forces Model
- Rivalry among Competing Firms
- Potential Entry of New Competitors
- Potential Development of Substitute Products
- Bargaining Power of Suppliers
- Bargaining Power of Consumers
- Key Sources of Information for an External Audit
- Forecasting and Making Assumptions
- Making Assumptions
- The External Factor Evaluation Matrix
- Steps to Develop an EFE Matrix
- Step 1: Develop a Full and Narrow List of Key External Factors
- Step 2: Assign Weights to Key External Factors
- Step 3: Assign Ratings to Key External Factors
- Step 4: Obtain Weighted Scores
- Step 5: Obtain Total Weighted Score
- An Example EFE Matrix
- The Competitive Profile Matrix
- Implications For Strategists
- Implications For Students
- Chapter Summary
- Key Terms and Concepts
- Issues for Review and Discussion
- Assurance-of-Learning Exercises
- Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 3A: Develop an EFE Matrix for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 3B: Develop a Competitive Profile Matrix for Coca-Cola
- Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University
- Exercise 3C: Develop an EFE Matrix for Your College or University
- Exercise 3D: Develop a Competitive Profile Matrix for Your College or University
- Set 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability
- Exercise 3E: How Competitive Is Your State among All States for Finding a Job?
- Exercise 3F: Compare and Contrast CareerBuilder, Glassdoor, Monster Jobs, and ZipRecruiter
- Exercise 3G: A Template Competency Test
- Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
- Exercise 3H: What External Forces Are Most Important in Strategic Planning?
- Mini-Case On Sam’s Club: Sam’s Club Is Booming In China
- Web Resources
- Current Readings
- Endnotes
- Chapter 4. The Internal Assessment
- The Internal Assessment Phase of Strategy Formulation
- Exemplary Strategist Showcased: Elon Musk, CEO and Cofounder of Tesla, Inc. and Space Exploration Technologies Corporation (SpaceX)
- Resource-Based View
- Key Internal Forces
- Ethics Capsule 4: The Sagebrush Lizard Versus the Big Oil Man
- Management
- Planning
- Organizing
- Motivating
- Controlling
- Integrating Strategy and Culture
- Management Audit Checklist of Questions
- Marketing
- Marketing Research and Target Market Analysis
- Product Planning
- Pricing
- Promotion
- Global Capsule 4: Bitcoin: The New Global Currency
- Channels of Distribution
- Marketing Audit Checklist of Questions
- Finance and Accounting
- Finance and Accounting
- Financial Ratios
- Finance and Accounting Audit Checklist
- Management Information Systems
- Business Analytics
- The Internal Factor Evaluation (IFE) Matrix
- The Actionable-Quantitative-Comparative-Divisional (AQCD) Test
- Steps in Developing an IFE Matrix
- Step 1: Develop a Full and Narrow List of Key Internal Factors
- Step 2: Assign Weights to Key Internal Factors
- Step 3: Assign Ratings to Key Internal Factors
- Step 4: Obtain Weighted Scores
- Step 5: Obtain Total Weighted Score
- An Example IFE Matrix
- Implications For Strategists
- Implications For Students
- Chapter Summary
- Key Terms and Concepts
- Issues for Review and Discussion
- Assurance-of-Learning Exercises
- Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 4A: Perform a Financial Ratio Analysis for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 4B: Construct an IFE Matrix for Coca-Cola
- Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University
- Exercise 4C: Construct an IFE Matrix for Your College or University
- Set 3: Strategic Planning for Myself
- Exercise 4D: Construct an IFE Matrix for Yourself
- Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
- Exercise 4E: What Internal Functional Areas Are Most Important to Examine in Strategic Planning?
- Mini-Case On Procter & Gamble (P&G) Company: What Company is Best Managed in the United States?
- Web Resources
- Current Readings
- Endnotes
- Chapter 5. Strategies in Action
- Long-Term Objectives
- Characteristics and Benefits of Objectives
- Exemplary Strategist Showcased: Tim Cook, CEO of Apple, Inc.
- Financial versus Strategic Objectives
- Avoid Managing by Crisis, Hope, Extrapolation, and Mystery (CHEM)
- Types of Strategies
- Levels of Strategies
- Integration Strategies
- Forward Integration
- Backward Integration
- Horizontal Integration
- Intensive Strategies
- Market Penetration
- Market Development
- Global Capsule 5: How Can a Firm Determine Where to Initiate New Business? Use Gross Domestic Product (GDP) as a Guide.
- Product Development
- Diversification Strategies
- Related Diversification
- Unrelated Diversification
- Defensive Strategies
- Retrenchment
- Divestiture
- Liquidation
- Value Chain Analysis and Benchmarking
- Benchmarking
- Michael Porter’s Two Generic Strategies
- Cost Leadership
- Differentiation
- Means for Achieving Strategies
- BUILD from Within to Grow
- BORROW from Others to Grow
- BUY Others to Grow
- Ethics Capsule 5: Are CEOs Less Ethical Today Than in the Past?
- First-Mover Advantages
- Strategic Management in Nonprofit and Small Firms
- Educational Institutions
- Governmental Agencies and Departments
- Small Firms
- Implications For Strategists
- Implications For Students
- Chapter Summary
- Key Terms and Concepts
- Issues for Review and Discussion
- Assurance-of-Learning Exercises
- Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 5A: Develop Hypothetical Coca-Cola Company Strategies
- Exercise 5B: Should Coca-Cola Build, Borrow, or Buy in 2020–2021?
- Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University
- Exercise 5C: Develop Alternative Strategies for Your University
- Set 3: Strategic Planning for Myself
- Exercise 5D: The Key to Personal Strategic Planning: Simultaneously Build and Borrow
- Set 4: Individual Versus Group Strategic Planning
- Exercise 5E: What Is the Best Mix of Strategies for Coca-Cola Company?
- Mini-Case on Facebook (FB): Should Facebook Acquire, Cooperate, or Just Stay Fierce Rivals With Linkedin?
- Web Resources
- Current Readings
- Endnotes
- Chapter 6. Strategy Analysis and Choice
- Strategy Analysis and Choice
- Exemplary Strategist Showcased: David Green, CEO of Hobby Lobby
- The Process of Generating and Selecting Strategies
- The Strategy-Formulation Analytical Framework
- Stage 1: The Input Stage
- Stage 2: The Matching Stage
- Stage 3: The Decision Stage
- The SWOT Matrix
- Ethics Capsule 6: As We Strategize We Must Not Jeopardize Animal Welfare
- The Strategic Position and Action Evaluation (SPACE) Matrix
- Steps in Performing SPACE Analysis
- SPACE Matrix Quadrants
- SPACE Matrix
- The Boston Consulting Group (BCG) Matrix
- The Internal-External (IE) Matrix
- The Grand Strategy Matrix
- The Decision Stage: The QSPM
- Positive Features and Limitations of the QSPM
- How to Estimate Costs Associated with Recommendations
- Global Capsule 6: India’S Economy Is Booming
- Cultural Aspects of Strategy Analysis and Choice
- The Politics of Strategy Analysis and Choice
- Implications For Strategists
- Implications For Students
- Chapter Summary
- Key Terms and Concepts
- Issues for Review and Discussion
- Assurance-of-Learning Exercises
- Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 6A: Perform a SWOT Analysis for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 6B: Develop a SPACE Matrix for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 6C: Develop a BCG Matrix for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 6D: Develop a QSPM for Coca-Cola
- Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University
- Exercise 6E: Develop a BCG Matrix for My University
- Set 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability
- Exercise 6F: Perform QSPM Analysis on Myself
- Exercise 6G: A Template Competency Test
- Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
- Exercise 6H: How Severe Are Various Subjective Threats in Strategic Planning?
- Mini-Case on the Boston Consulting Group: What American Firm Helps the Most Companies do Strategic Planning?
- Web Resources
- Current Readings
- Endnotes
- Part 3: Strategy Implementation
- Chapter 7. Implementing Strategies: Management and Marketing Issues
- Exemplary Strategist Showcased: Indra Nooyi, Former CEO of Pepsico
- Transitioning from Formulating to Implementing Strategies
- The Need for Clear Annual Objectives
- Establish Policies
- Ethics Capsule 7: Do Firms Need a Policy Against Workplace Phubbing?
- Allocate Resources and Manage Conflict
- Allocate Resources
- Manage Conflict
- Match Structure with Strategy
- Types of Organizational Structure
- The Functional Structure
- The Divisional Structure
- The Strategic Business Unit Structure
- The Matrix Structure
- Do’s and Don’ts in Developing Organizational Charts
- How to Depict an Organizational Chart
- Strategic Production/Operations Issues
- Restructuring and Reengineering
- Manage Resistance to Change
- Decide Where and How to Produce Goods
- Strategic Human Resource Issues
- Link Performance and Pay to Strategy
- Balance Work Life and Home Life
- Promote Diversity
- Use Caution in Hiring a Rival’s Employees
- Create a Strategy-Supportive Culture
- Use Caution in Monitoring Employees’ Social Media
- Develop a Corporate Well-Being Program
- Strategic Marketing Issues
- Segment and Target Markets Effectively
- Product Positioning
- Perceptual Mapping
- Global Capsule 7: Four Guidelines to Follow in Global Marketing
- Engage Customers in Social Media
- Implications For Strategists
- Implications For Students
- Chapter Summary
- Key Terms and Concepts
- Issues for Review and Discussion
- Assurance-of-Learning Exercises
- Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 7A: Compare and Contrast Coca-Cola’s Marketing Expenses versus Rival Firms
- Exercise 7B: Diagram an Existing and Proposed Organizational Chart for Coca-Cola
- Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University
- Exercise 7C: Develop a Perceptual Map for My University
- Set 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability
- Exercise 7D: Marketing Yourself to Best Achieve Your Career Objectives
- Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
- Exercise 7E: What Are the Most Important Benefits of Having a Diverse Workforce?
- Mini-Case 7 on De Beers Group of Companies: De Beers Shifts its Market Segmentation Strategy
- Web Resources
- Current Readings
- Endnotes
- Chapter 8. Implementing Strategies: Finance and Accounting Issues
- Exemplary Strategist Showcased: Jamie Dimon, CEO Jpmorgan Chase
- Capital Structure
- EPS/EBIT Analysis: Steps to Complete
- EPS/EBIT Analysis: An Example
- EPS/EBIT Analysis: Limitations
- Projected Financial Statements
- The Free Excel Strategic Planning Template at www.strategyclub.com
- Ethics Capsule 8: Projected Financial Statement Manipulation
- Global Capsule 8: The Least (and Most) Corrupt Countries in the World for Doing Business
- Steps to Develop Projected Financial Statements
- Nonprofit Organizations
- P&G’s Actual FinancialStatements
- P&G’s Projected Financial Statements
- P&G’s Retained Earnings Data Table
- Corporate Valuation
- Corporate Valuation Methods
- Manage Financial Ratios, IPOs, and Bonds
- Financial Ratio Analyses
- Go Public with an IPO?
- Issue Bonds to Raise Capital?
- Implications For Strategists
- Implications For Students
- Chapter Summary
- Key Terms and Concepts
- Issues for Review and Discussion
- Assurance-of-Learning Exercises
- Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 8A: Perform an EPS/EBIT Analysis for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 8B: Prepare Projected Financial Statements for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 8C: Determine the Cash Value of Coca-Cola
- Exercise 8D: Prepare Projected Financial Ratios for Coca-Cola
- Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University
- Exercise 8E: Determine the Cash Value of My University
- Set 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability
- Exercise 8F: Developing Personal Financial Statements
- Exercise 8G: A Template Competency Test
- Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
- Exercise 8H: How Severe Are the Seven Limitations to EPS/EBIT Analysis?
- Mini-Case On Hasbro, Inc.: Nerf Wants To Take Over Barbie Doll: The Case of Hasbro, Inc.
- Web Resources
- Current Readings
- Part 4: Strategy Evaluation and Governance
- Chapter 9. Strategy Evaluation and Governance
- The Strategy-Evaluation Process
- Exemplary Strategist Showcased: Anthony Wood, Founder And CEO of Roku, Inc.
- Global Capsule 9: What Country’s New Strategy Is Called “Vision 2030”?
- Three Strategy-Evaluation Activities
- Reviewing Bases of Strategy
- Measuring Organizational Performance
- Taking Corrective Actions
- The Balanced Scorecard
- Boards of Directors: Governance Issues
- Challenges in Strategic Management
- The Art or Science Issue
- The Visible or Hidden Issue
- Ethics Capsule 9: Achieving Exemplary Business Ethics Through Exemplary Transparency
- Promote Workplace Democracy
- Contingency Planning
- Auditing
- Guidelines for Effective Strategic Management
- Implications For Strategists
- Implications For Students
- Chapter Summary
- Key Terms and Concepts
- Issues for Review and Discussion
- Assurance-of-Learning Exercises
- Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 9A: Develop a Balanced Scorecard for Coca-Cola
- Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University
- Exercise 9B: Prepare a Strategy Evaluation Report for My University
- Set 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability
- Exercise 9C: A Balanced Scorecard to Evaluate My Professional versus Personal Objectives
- Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
- Exercise 9D: How Important Are Various Guidelines for Effective Strategic Management?
- Mini-Case On TJX Companies, Inc. (TJX): Secret Strategic Planning Works Great for TJX
- Web Resources
- Current Readings
- Endnotes
- Part 5: Key Strategic-Management Topics
- Chapter 10. Business Ethics, Environmental Sustainability, and Corporate Social Responsibility
- Exemplary Strategist Showcased: Bill Gates, Former CEO and Chairman of Microsoft Corporation
- Why “Good Ethics Is Good Business”
- Does It Pay to Be Ethical?
- How to Establish an Ethics Culture
- Whistle-Blowing, Bribery, and Workplace Romance
- Whistle-Blowing
- Avoid Bribery
- Workplace Romance
- Environmental Sustainability
- Global Capsule 10: India Is Turning Garbage into Cash
- Sustainability Reports and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
- International Standardization Organization (ISO) Certification
- Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR)
- Ethics Capsule 10: Toms Shoes, Inc.: Shoes Are Magic, Put Shoes on Every Child on the Planet
- Food Suppliers and Livestock Welfare
- Wildlife Welfare
- What Firms Are the Best CSR Stewards?
- Implications For Strategists
- Implications For Students
- Chapter Summary
- Key Terms and Concepts
- Issues for Review and Discussion
- Assurance-of-Learning Exercises
- Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 10A: Does Coca-Cola or PepsiCo Win on Sustainability?
- Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University
- Exercise 10B: How Does My University Compare to Others on the Use of Green Power?
- Set 3: Strategic Planning for Myself
- Exercise 10C: What Is My Business Ethics Quotient?
- Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
- Exercise 10D: How Potentially Severe Are the Various Reasons Why Workplace Romance Should Be Discouraged?
- Mini-Case on Chick-Fil-A: What Company has the Most Ethical Business Culture?
- Web Resources
- Current Readings
- Endnotes
- Chapter 11. Global and International Issues
- The Nature of Doing Business Globally
- Exemplary Strategist: Andre Calantzopoulos, CEO of Philip Morris International
- Multinational Firms
- Labor Unions
- Tax Rates
- Advantages and Disadvantages of Doing Business Globally
- The Global Challenge
- Outsourcing and Reshoring
- U.S. versus Foreign Business Culture
- Communication Differences across Countries
- Business Culture across Countries
- Mexico
- Ethics Capsule 11: Which Two U.S.-Based Airlines Are Worst on Customer Service?
- Japan
- China
- India
- Business Climate across Countries
- The African Continent
- China
- Indonesia
- India
- Global Capsule 11: China Aims For Superiority in Quantum Computing
- Mexico
- Implications For Strategists
- Implications For Students
- Chapter Summary
- Key Terms and Concepts
- Issues for Review and Discussion
- Assurance-of-Learning Exercises
- Set 1: Strategic Planning for Coca-Cola
- Exercise 11A: Business Culture Variation across Countries: A Report for Coca-Cola Company
- Exercise 11B: Coca-Cola Wants to Further Penetrate Africa. Can You Help Them?
- Set 2: Strategic Planning for My University
- Exercise 11C: Does My University Recruit in Foreign Countries?
- Set 3: Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability
- Exercise 11D: How Well-Traveled Are You Compared to Your Colleagues?
- Set 4: Individual versus Group Strategic Planning
- Exercise 11E: How Important Are Various Potential Advantages to Initiating, Continuing, or Expanding a Firm’s International Operations?
- Mini-Case on Lynk & Company: You May Drive a Lynk Soon
- Web Resources
- Current Readings
- Endnotes
- Part 6: Strategic-Management Case Analysis
- How to Prepare and Present a Case Analysis
- Guidelines for Preparing to Discuss a Case in Class
- Be Practical
- Be Thorough
- Be Realistic
- Be Specific
- Be Original
- Listen and Contribute
- Developing and Delivering a Written Case Analysis
- Making an Oral Presentation
- Controlling Your Voice
- Managing Body Language
- Speaking from Slides
- Answering Questions
- Presenting a Case Analysis Orally
- Tips for Success in Case Analysis
- Assurance-of-Learning Exercise
- Strategic Planning to Enhance My Employability: How Important Are Various Reasons to Use the Free Excel StrategicPlanning Template at www.strategyclub.com?
- Glossary
- Name Index
- A
- B
- C
- D
- E
- F
- G
- H
- I
- J
- K
- L
- M
- N
- O
- P
- Q
- R
- S
- T
- U
- V
- W
- X
- Y
- Z
- Subject Index
- A
- B
- C
- D
- E
- F
- G
- H
- I
- J
- L
- M
- N
- O
- P
- Q
- R
- S
- T
- U
- V
- W
